10% de réduction sur vos envois d'emailing --> CLIQUEZ ICI
Retour à l'accueil, cliquez ici
Aficio AP410/AP410n
Choose a language from the drop down list.
For users in North America
Description View Download Update File size
PDF 08/28/2006 2,345 KB
PDF 08/28/2006 1,768 KB
PDF 08/28/2006 5,429 KB
Model: AP410
Category:
Subcategory:
AP410 MANUAL AP410
http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/support/manual/
Operating Instructions
Printer Reference
Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future
reference.
For safety, please follow the instructions in this manual.Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To get
maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in
this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Please read the Safety Information before using this machine. It contains important information related
to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.
Notes:
The name of the applications do not appear in the following pages. Confirm which applications you will
be using before reading this manual.
Consumables:
Power Source
120 V, 60 Hz, 10 A or more
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above.
Operator Safety:
This machine is considered a CDRH class 1 laser device, safe for office/ EDP use. The machine contains 10-milliwatt, 760 - 800 nanometer wavelength, GaAIAs laser diode. Direct (or indirect reflected)
eye contact with the laser beam might cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and interlock
mechanisms have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
Laser Safety:
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical unit
in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite
equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser
chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and
laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement or the optical subsystem is required.
Important
Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable
for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating
the machine.
Caution:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Do not attempt any maintenance or troubleshooting other than that mentioned in this manual. This machine
contains a laser beam generator and direct exposure to laser beams can cause permanent eye damage.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.
Ricoh shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts other
than genuine Ricoh parts in your Ricoh office product.
For good copy quality, Ricoh recommends that you use genuine Ricoh toner.
Descriptions in this manual Application
PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR Aficio Manager for Admin
PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT Aficio Manager for Client
Consumables Name
Toner cartridges COLOR TONER Type306 Cyan
COLOR TONER Type306 Magenta
COLOR TONER Type306 Yellow
TONER Type306 Black
Other consumables Waste Toner Bottle Type306
Photo Conductor Unit Type306
Fuser Oil Type306
Charger Unit Type306i
Trademarks
RICOH-SCRIPT2®
is a registered trademark of Ricoh Company.
Microsoft®
, Windows®
and Windows NT®
are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Adobe®
, PostScript®
, Acrobat®
and PageMaker®
are registered trademarks of
Adobe System Incorporated.
Ethernet®
is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
AppleTalk, Apple, Macintosh, TrueType and LaserWriter are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Incorporated.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might
be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights in
those marks.
Notes:
Some illustrations might be slightly different from your machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Notes:
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• Microsoft®
Windows®
95 operating system
• Microsoft®
Windows®
98 operating system
• Microsoft®
Windows®
2000 Professional
• Microsoft®
Windows®
2000 Server
• Microsoft®
Windows NT®
Server operating system Version 4.0
• Microsoft®
Windows NT®
Workstation operating system Version 4.0ii
Safety Information
When using your equipment, the following safety precautions should always be
followed.
Safety During Operation
In this manual, the following important symbols are used:
R WARNING:
R WARNING:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are
not followed, could result in death or serious injury.
R CAUTION:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.
• Connect the power cord directly into a wall outlet and never use an extension cord.
• Confirm that the wall outlet is near the machine and freely accessible,
so that in event of an emergency, it can be unplugged easily.
• Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if the
power cable or plug becomes frayed or damaged.
• To avoid hazardous electric shock or laser radiation exposure, do not
remove any covers or screws other than those specified in this manual.
• Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug,
not the cable) if any of the following conditions exist:
• You spill something into the equipment.
• You suspect that your equipment needs service or repair.
• Your equipment's cover has been damaged.
• Do not incinerate spilled toner or used toner. Toner dust is flammable
and might ignite when exposed to an open flame.
• Disposal should take place at an authorized dealer or appropriate collection site.
• If you dispose of the used toner containers yourself, dispose of them
according to local regulations.iii
R CAUTION:
• Protect the equipment from dampness or wet weather, such as rain, snow,
and so on.
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the equipment.
While moving the equipment, you should take care that the power cord will
not be damaged under the equipment.
• When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the
plug (not the cable).
• Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small metallic objects to fall inside
the equipment.
• Do not eat or swallow toner.
• Keep toner (used or unused) and toner cartridge out of reach of children.
• For environmental reasons, do not dispose of the equipment or expended
supplies at a household waste collection point. Disposal should take place
at an authorized dealer or an appropriate collection site.
• Our products are engineered to meet the highest standards of quality and
functionality. When purchasing expendable supplies, we recommend using
only those specified by an authorized dealer.
• The inside of the machine becomes very hot. Do not touch the parts with a
label indicating a “hot surface”. Touching a “hot surface” could result in a
burn injury.
• If you use this printer in a cold area, leave the printer on. Otherwise, severe
cold might damage sensitive components inside the printer.iv
Energy Star Program
v Low-power mode (Energy Saver mode)
This printer automatically lowers its power consumption 60 minutes after the
last operation has been completed when the Energy Level is set to level 1. To
exit Low-power (Energy Saver) mode, press any key on the operation panel.
To change the setting of the Energy Saver mode, see P.83 “Using the Operation
Panel”.
v Specifications
-Recycled Paper
In accordance with the ENERGY STAR Program, we recommend use of recycled
paper which is environment friendly. Please contact your sales representative
for recommended paper.
As an ENERGY STAR Partner, we have determined that this machine model meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency.
The ENERGY STAR Guidelines intend to establish an international energy-saving system for developing and introducing energy-efficient office equipment to deal with environmental issues, such as global warming.
When a product meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency, the Partner shall place the ENERGY STAR logo onto the machine model.
This product was designed to reduce the environmental impact associated with office
equipment by means of energy-saving features, such as Low-power mode.
Simplex printer Duplex printer
Lower-power
mode
(Energy Saver
mode)
Power Consumption
45 W or less
Default Time 60 minutesv
Manuals for This Printer
There are five manuals that separately describe the procedures for the installation of a printer and for the operation and maintenance of the printer and its optional equipment.
To enhance safe and efficient operation of the printer, all users should read and
follow the instructions contained in the following manuals.
v Quick Installation Guide
Describes the procedures for installing the printer.
v Setup Guide
Describes the procedures and provides necessary information about setting
up the printer and its options.
v Printer Reference
Describes the procedures and provides necessary information about using
the printer and its options. The manual is included as a PDF file on the CDROM (this manual).
v RICOH-SCRIPT2 Operating Instructions
Describes the menus and features you can set using the RICOH-SCRIPT2
printer driver. The manual is provided as a PDF file which is included on the
CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”.
v Network Interface Board Operating Instructions
Describes the procedures and provides necessary information about setting
up and using the printer in a network environment. The manual is provided
as a PDF file which is included on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and
Utilities”.vi
How to Read This Manual
Symbols
In this manual, the following symbols are used:
R WARNING:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions
are not followed, could result in death or serious injury.
R CAUTION:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions
are not followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.
* The statements above are notes for your safety.
Important
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be
damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.
Preparation
This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before operating.
Note
This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after misoperation.
Limitation
This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,
or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.
Reference
This symbol indicates a reference.
[ ]
Keys that appear on the machine's panel display.
Keys and buttons that appear on the computer's display.
{ }
Keys built into the machine's operation panel.
Keys on the computer's keyboard.vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.Uninstalling the Printer Driver and Software
Uninstalling the IPDL-C Printer Driver..................................................... 1
Windows 95/98 - Uninstalling the IPDL-C Printer Driver ............................... 1
Windows 2000 - Uninstalling the IPDL-C Printer Driver ................................ 1
Windows NT 4.0 - Uninstalling the IPDL-C Printer Driver ............................. 2
Uninstalling the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver..................................... 3
Windows 95/98 - Uninstalling the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver............... 3
Windows 2000 - Uninstalling the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver................ 3
Windows NT 4.0 - Uninstalling the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver ............. 4
Macintosh - Uninstalling the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver ....................... 4
2.Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job
IPDL-C Accessing the Printer Properties................................................ 5
Windows 95/98 - Accessing the Printer Properties ....................................... 5
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties ........................................ 6
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties ..................................... 8
RICOH-SCRIPT2 - Setting up for Printing ............................................. 10
Windows 95/98 - Accessing the Printer Properties ..................................... 10
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties ...................................... 11
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................................... 13
Macintosh - Setting up for Printing .............................................................. 15
Canceling a Print Job.............................................................................. 17
Windows 95/98 - Canceling a Print Job ...................................................... 17
Windows 2000 - Canceling a Print Job ....................................................... 17
Windows NT 4.0 - Canceling a Print Job .................................................... 18
Macintosh - Canceling a Print Job .............................................................. 19
3.Paper and Other Media
Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer .............................. 21
Paper Types and Sizes ............................................................................... 21
Paper Recommendations............................................................................ 24
Printable Area ............................................................................................. 29
Loading Paper.......................................................................................... 30
Loading Paper in the Paper Tray ................................................................ 30
Loading Paper in the Bypass Tray .............................................................. 32
Sliding out the Output Tray Extender .......................................................... 35
4.Troubleshooting
Error & Status Messages........................................................................ 37
Printed Error Message ................................................................................ 37
Error & Status Messages on the Operation Panel ...................................... 38
Getting Printer Information over the Network.............................................. 44viii
Printer Does Not Print ............................................................................. 49
Other Printing Problems......................................................................... 53
Removing Misfed Paper.......................................................................... 58
When the Message "Remove Misfeed From Paper Tray" Appears ............ 58
When the Message "Open Front Cover Remove Misfeed" Appears .......... 59
When the Message "Remove Misfeed From Output Tray" Appears ........... 60
When the Message "Remove Misfeed Duplex Base Unit" Appears ........... 63
When the Message "Remove Misfeed From Rear Cover" Appears ........... 64
Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer ....................................................... 65
Cleaning the Friction Pad............................................................................ 65
Cleaning the Charger .................................................................................. 65
Cleaning the Dust-Proofing Glass............................................................... 66
Adjusting the Image Density ....................................................................... 67
Setting the Toner Empty Menu ................................................................... 68
Adjusting the Setting of Registration of the Paper Tray .............................. 69
Replacing Consumables......................................................................... 71
Replacing Toner Cartridge .......................................................................... 71
Replacing the Photoconductor Unit............................................................. 74
Replacing the Fuser Oil Bottle and Ozone Filter ......................................... 76
Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle .............................................................. 78
Replacing the Charger ................................................................................ 80
5.Using the Operation Panel
Setting Menu............................................................................................ 83
Protecting the Menus.............................................................................. 85
Protecting the Menus .................................................................................. 85
Removing Protection................................................................................... 86
Menu Table............................................................................................... 88
Menu Settings.......................................................................................... 90
IPDL-C Menu .............................................................................................. 90
RPS2 Menu................................................................................................. 90
System Menu .............................................................................................. 94
Changing the Printer Language .................................................................. 98
Printing the Configuration Page ............................................................ 99
Interpreting the Configuration Page .................................................... 100
Interpreting the Configuration Page/IPDL-C ............................................. 100
Interpreting Configuration Page/RICOH-SCRIPT2 ................................... 102
Printing the Color Sample .................................................................... 103
Resetting Menus.................................................................................... 104
Administering Printing by User Code.................................................. 106
Viewing the Number of Pages Printed Under Each User Code ................ 107
Reading the Statistics Report.................................................................... 108
Protecting the User Code Record ............................................................. 108
Deleting the User Code Record ................................................................ 109ix
Using the Job Log ................................................................................. 111
Printing the Job Log .................................................................................. 111
Reading the Job Log ................................................................................. 113
6.Appendix
Color Guide............................................................................................ 115
Color Printing Basics................................................................................. 115
Memory Capacity and Paper Size ........................................................ 117
Low Memory.............................................................................................. 118
Moving and Transporting the Printer .................................................. 119
Specifications ........................................................................................ 120
Mainframe ................................................................................................. 120
Options...................................................................................................... 123
Consumables ......................................................................................... 125
INDEX...................................................................................................... 127x1
1. Uninstalling the Printer
Driver and Software
Uninstalling the IPDL-C Printer Driver
This section describes how to uninstall the IPDL-C printer driver. The actual
procedure may differ depending on the operating system.
Follow the appropriate procedure below.
Windows 95/98 - Uninstalling the IPDL-C Printer Driver
A Close all the applications that are currently running.
B Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
C Click the icon of the printer you want to remove.
D On the [File] menu, click [Delete].
A confirmation dialog box appears.
E Click [Yes] to uninstall the printer driver.
Windows 2000 - Uninstalling the IPDL-C Printer Driver
Limitation
r Uninstalling a printer driver requires Manage Printers permission. Members
of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you uninstall a printer driver, log on using an account
that has Manage Printers permission.
A Close all the applications that are currently running.
B Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
C Click the icon of the printer you want to remove.
D On the [File] menu, click [Delete].
A confirmation dialog box appears.
E Click [Yes] to uninstall the printer driver.Uninstalling the Printer Driver and Software
2
1
Windows NT 4.0 - Uninstalling the IPDL-C Printer Driver
Limitation
r Uninstalling the printer driver requires Full Control access Permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you uninstall a
printer driver, log on under Full Control permission.
A Close all the applications that are currently running.
B Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
C Click the icon of the printer you want to remove.
D On the [File] menu, click [Delete].
A confirmation dialog box appears.
E Click [Yes] to uninstall the printer driver.Uninstalling the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver
3
1
Uninstalling the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer
Driver
This section describes how to uninstall the RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer driver. The
actual procedure may differ depending on the operating system.
Follow the appropriate procedure below.
Windows 95/98 - Uninstalling the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are currently running.
B Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
C Click the icon of the printer you want to remove.
D On the [File] menu, click [Delete].
A confirmation dialog box appears.
E Click [Yes] to uninstall the printer driver.
Windows 2000 - Uninstalling the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver
Limitation
r Uninstalling a printer driver requires Manage Printers permission. Members
of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you uninstall a printer driver, log on using an account
that has Manage Printers permission.
A Close all the applications that are currently running.
B Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
C Click the icon of the printer you want to remove.
D On the [File] menu, click [Delete].
A confirmation dialog box appears.
E Click [Yes] to uninstall the printer driver.Uninstalling the Printer Driver and Software
4
1
Windows NT 4.0 - Uninstalling the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver
Limitation
r Uninstalling a printer driver requires Full Control access permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you uninstall a
printer driver, log on under Full Control permission.
A Close all applications that are currently running.
B Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
C Click the icon of the printer you want to remove.
D On the [File] menu, click [Delete].
A confirmation dialog box appears.
E Click [Yes] to uninstall the printer driver.
Macintosh - Uninstalling the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Printer Driver
A Drag the PPD file you want to uninstall inside the following folder to
[Trash].
\System Folder\Extensions\Printer Descriptions\
B Drag the PPD file you want to uninstall inside the following folder to
[Trash].
\System Folder\Preferences\Printing Prefs\Parsed PPD
Folder\5
2. Setting Up the Printer Driver
and Canceling a Print Job
IPDL-C Accessing the Printer Properties
Windows 95/98 - Accessing the Printer Properties
There are two methods you can use to open the Printer Properties.
Making printer default settings
To make the printer default settings, first open the Printer Properties from the
[Printers] window.
Note
r The following tabs are standard Windows tabs. For more information about
these tabs, see the documentation that comes with the Windows operating
system.
• Windows 95:
[General], [Details] and [Sharing]
• Windows 98:
[General], [Details], [Color Management] and [Sharing]
r Profiles set on the [Color Management] tab are not supported.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer whose default settings you want to change.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The Printer Properties appear.
D Set desired settings and click [OK].
Making printer settings from an application
To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Printer Properties from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows 95/98.
Note
r The actual procedures you should follow to open the Printer Properties may
differ depending on the application. For more information about the procedures, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using.Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job
6
2
r When you use some applications, the driver's initial default settings of the applications might be applied over the printer driver's setting.
r Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current
application only.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B From the [Name:] list, select the printer you want to use, and then click [Properties].
The Printer Properties appear.
C Set desired settings and click [OK].
D Click [OK] to start printing.
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties
Making printer default settings - Printer Properties
Limitation
r Changing the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members
of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has
Manage Printers permission.
Note
r The following tabs are standard Windows tabs. For more information about
these tabs, see the documentation that comes with the Windows operating
system.
• [General], [Sharing], [Ports], [Advanced], [Color Management] and [Security]
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer whose default setting you want to change.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The Printer Properties appear.
D Set desired settings and click [OK].
Note
r Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.IPDL-C Accessing the Printer Properties
7
2
Making printer default settings – Printing Preferences Properties
Limitation
r Changing the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members
of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has
Manage Printers permission.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer whose default settings you want to change.
C On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences].
The Printing Preferences Properties appear.
D Set desired settings and click [OK].
Note
r Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Making printer settings from an application
To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Printing Preferences Properties from that application. The following example describes how to
make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows 2000.
Note
r The actual procedures you should follow to open the Printing Preferences
Properties may differ depending on the application. For more information,
see the documentation that comes with the application you are using.
r Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current
application only.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Select Printer] box.
C Set desired settings and click [Apply] to start your printing.Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job
8
2
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties
Making printer default settings - Printer Properties
Limitation
r Changing the printer settings requires Full Control access permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you set up options,
log on under Full Control permission.
Note
r The following tabs are standard Windows tabs. For more information about
these tabs, see the documentation that comes with the Windows operating
system.
• [General], [Ports], [Scheduling], [Sharing] and [Security]
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer whose default setting you want to change.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The Printer Properties appear.
D Set desired settings and click [OK].
Note
r Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Making printer default settings – Default Document Properties
Limitation
r Changing the printer settings requires Full Control access permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you set up options,
log on under Full Control permission.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer whose default settings you want to change.
C On the [File] menu, click [Document Defaults].
The Default Document Properties appear.IPDL-C Accessing the Printer Properties
9
2
D Set desired settings and click [OK].
Note
r Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Making printer settings from an application
To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Document Properties from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows NT 4.0.
Note
r The actual procedures you should follow to open the Document Properties
may differ depending on the application. For more information about the
procedures, see the documentation that comes with the application you are
using.
r Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current
application only.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B From the [Name:] list, select the printer you want to use, and then click [Properties].
The Document Properties appear.
C Set desired settings and click [OK].
D Click [OK] to start printing.Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job
10
2
RICOH-SCRIPT2 - Setting up for Printing
Windows 95/98 - Accessing the Printer Properties
There are two methods you can use to open the Printer Properties dialog box.
Making printer default settings
To make the printer default settings, first open the Printer Properties from the
[Printers] window.
Note
r The following tabs are standard Windows tabs. For more information about
these tabs, see the documentation that comes with the Windows operating
system.
• Windows 95:
[General], [Details] and [Sharing]
• Windows 98:
[General], [Details], [Color Management] and [Sharing]
Note
r Profiles set on the [Color Management] tab are not supported.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer whose default settings you want to change. On
the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The Printer Properties appear.
C Set desired settings and click [OK].
Reference
For more information about making printer default settings, see the “Operating Instructions” for RICOH-SCRIPT2 included as a PDF file on the
CD-ROM.
Making printer settings from an application
To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Printer Properties from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows 95.RICOH-SCRIPT2 - Setting up for Printing
11
2
Note
r The actual procedures you should follow to open the Printer Properties may
differ depending on the application. For more information about the procedures, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using.
r When you use some applications, the driver's initial default settings of the applications might be applied over the printer driver's setting.
r Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current
application only.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print] window appears.
B From the [Name:] box, select the printer you want to use, and then click
[Properties].
The Printer Properties appear.
C Set desired settings and click [OK].
Reference
For more information about each tab, see the “Operating Instruction” for
RICOH-SCRIPT2 included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM.
D Click [OK] to start printing.
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties
Making printer default settings - Printer Properties
Limitation
r Changing the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members
of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has
Manage Printers permission.
Note
r With some applications, the printer driver's settings are not used, and the application's own initial default settings are applied.
r The following tabs are standard Windows tabs. For more information about
these tabs, see the documentation that comes with the Windows operating
system.
• [General], [Sharing], [Ports], [Advanced], [Color Management] and [Security]
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job
12
2
B Click the icon of the printer whose default setting you want to change.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The Printer Properties appear.
D Set desired settings and click [OK].
Reference
For more information about making printer default settings, see the “Operating Instructions” for RICOH-SCRIPT2 included as a PDF file on the
CD-ROM.
Note
r Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Making printer default settings – Printing Preferences Properties
Limitation
r Changing the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members
of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has
Manage Printers permission.
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer whose default settings you want to change.
C On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences].
The Printing Preferences Properties appear.
D Set desired settings and click [OK].
Reference
For more information about making printer default settings, see the “Operating Instructions” for RICOH-SCRIPT2 included as a PDF file on the
CD-ROM.
Note
r Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Making printer settings from an application
To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Printing Preferences Properties from that application. The following example describes how to
make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows 2000.RICOH-SCRIPT2 - Setting up for Printing
13
2
Note
r General users can change the settings in an application's [Print] window.
r The actual procedures you should follow to open the Printing Preferences
Properties may differ depending on the application. For more information,
see the documentation that comes with the application you are using.
r Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current
application only.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print] window appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Select Printer] box.
C Set desired settings and click [Print] to start your printing.
Reference
For more information about each tab, see the “Operating Instruction” for
RICOH-SCRIPT2 included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM.
D Click [OK] to start your printing.
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties
Making printer default settings - Printer Properties
Limitation
r Changing the printer settings requires Full Control access permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you set up options,
log on under Full Control permission.
Note
r With some applications, the printer driver's settings are not used, and the application's own initial default settings are applied.
r The following tabs are standard Windows tabs. For more information about
these tabs, see the documentation that comes with the Windows operating
system.
• [General], [Ports], [Scheduling], [Sharing] and [Security]
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer whose default settings you want to change. On
the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The Printer Properties appear.Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job
14
2
Reference
For more information about making printer default settings, see the “Operating Instructions” for RICOH-SCRIPT2 included as a PDF file on the
CD-ROM.
Note
r Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Making printer default settings - Default Document Properties
A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer whose default settings you want to change. On
the [File] menu, click [Document Defaults].
The Default Document Properties appear.
Reference
For more information about making printer default settings, see the “Operating Instructions” for RICOH-SCRIPT2 included as a PDF file on the
CD-ROM.
Note
r Settings you make here are used as the default settings when printing from
applications.
Making printer settings from an application
To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Document Properties from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows NT 4.0.
Note
r General users can change the settings in an application's [Print] window.
r The actual procedures you should follow to open the Document Properties
may differ depending on the application. For more information about the
procedures, see the documentation that comes with the application you are
using.
r Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current
application only.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print] window appears.
B From the [Name:] box, select the printer you want to use, and then click
[Properties].
The Printer Properties appear.RICOH-SCRIPT2 - Setting up for Printing
15
2
C Set desired settings and click [OK].
Reference
For more information about each tab, see the “Operating Instruction” for
RICOH-SCRIPT2 included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM.
D Click [OK] to start printing.
Macintosh - Setting up for Printing
Making paper settings from an application
A Open the file you want to print.
B On the [File] menu, click [Page Setup].
[LaserWriter 8 Page Setup] appears.
C Confirm that the printer you want to use is shown in the [Format for:] box.
Note
r If the printer is now shown in the [Format for:] box, use the pop-up menu to
display a list of available printers.
Reference
The actual appearance of the Page Setup depends on the application you
are using. For more information, see the documentation that comes with
the Macintosh.
D From the [Paper:] box, select the paper size.
E Set desired settings and click [OK].
-Small Size Print Area
This printer supports printing on print areas such as “A4 Small” and “Letter
Small” when printing from a Macintosh only with specific versions of the driver.
Printing with the LaserWriter 8.4x (or later) driver supports printing on both
standard and small print areas. However, with LaserWriter 8.3x (or earlier), the
small print area options are not displayed.
With LaserWriter 8.3x (or earlier), select A4, for example, and click [Options] in
the [Page Setup] dialog box, then use the [Larger Print Area] option. Checking [Larger Print Area] produces the same printing result as LaserWriter 8.4x (or later) standard A4 print area. Unchecking the [Larger Print Area] produces the same result
as the LaserWriter 8.4x (or later) “A4 Small” print area.Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job
16
2
Setting up for printing from an application
A Open the file you want to print.
B On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The Printer Settings appear.
C Confirm that the printer is selected in the [Printer] box.
D Set desired settings and click [Print].
Reference
For more information about setting up for printing from an application,
see the “Operating Instructions” for RICOH-SCRIPT2 included as a PDF
file on the CD-ROM.Canceling a Print Job
17
2
Canceling a Print Job
Windows 95/98 - Canceling a Print Job
A Double-click the printer icon on the task bar.
This opens a window that shows all the print jobs that are currently queued
for printing. Check the current status of the job you want to cancel.
B Click the name of the job you want to cancel.
C On the [Document] menu, click [Cancel Printing].
Note
r You can also open the print job queue window by double-clicking the
printer icon in the [Printers] window.
D Press {Reset} on the operation panel.
A message appears on the panel display indicating that the print job is being
canceled.
Important
r When the printer is being shared by multiple computers, be careful not to
accidentally cancel someone else's print job.
Note
r You cannot stop printing the data that has already been processed internally by the printer. Because of this, printing might continue for a few pages
after you press {Reset}.
r A print job that contains a large volume of data might take considerable
time to stop.
Windows 2000 - Canceling a Print Job
A Double-click the printer icon on the taskbar.
This opens a window that shows all the print jobs that are currently queued
for printing. Check the current status of the job you want to cancel.
B Select the name of the job you want to cancel.
C On the [Document] menu, click [Cancel].
Note
r You can also open the print job queue window by double-clicking the
printer icon in the [Printers] window.Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job
18
2
D Press {Reset} on the operation panel.
A message appears on the panel display indicating that the print job is being
canceled.
Important
r When the printer is being shared by multiple computers, be careful not to
accidentally cancel someone else's print job.
Note
r You cannot stop printing data that has already been processed internally
by the printer. Because of this, printing might continue for a few pages after you press {Reset}.
r A print job that contains a large volume of data might take considerable
time to stop.
Windows NT 4.0 - Canceling a Print Job
A Double-click the printer icon on the task bar.
This opens a window that shows all the print jobs that are currently queued
for printing. Check the current status of the job you want to cancel.
B Click the name of the job you want to cancel.
C On the [Document] menu, click [Cancel].
Note
r You can also open the print job queue window by double-clicking the
printer icon in the [Printers] window.
D Press {Reset} on the operation panel.
A message appears on the panel display indicating that the print job is being
canceled.
Important
r When the printer is being shared by multiple computers, be careful not to
accidentally cancel someone else's print job.
Note
r You cannot stop printing data that has already been processed internally
by the printer. Because of this, printing might continue for a few pages after you press {Reset}.
r A print job that contains a large volume of data might take considerable
time to stop.Canceling a Print Job
19
2
Macintosh - Canceling a Print Job
A Double-click the printer icon on the desktop.
This opens a window that shows all the print jobs that are currently queued
for printing. Check the current status of the job you want to cancel.
B Click the name of the job you want to cancel.
C Click the pause icon, and then click the trash icon.
D Press {Reset} on the operation panel.
A message appears on the panel display indicating that the print job is being
canceled.
Important
r When the printer is being shared by multiple computers, be careful not to
accidentally cancel someone else's print job.
Note
r You cannot stop printing data that has already been processed internally
by the printer. Because of this, printing might continue for a few pages after you press {Reset}.
r A print job that contains a large volume of data might take considerable
time to stop.Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job
20
221
3. Paper and Other Media
Paper and Other Media Supported by This
Printer
Paper Types and Sizes
This section describes the type, size, feed direction, and maximum amount of paper that can be loaded into each paper tray in this printer.
Important
r If you use damp or curled paper, a misfeed might occur. In such a case, try
turning over the paper stack in the paper tray. If there is no improvement,
change to paper with less curl.
r Be sure to set the paper size dial to match the actual paper size loaded in the
tray. When the actual paper size is not shown on the dial, set the dial to “p”
and selected the paper size using the operation panel.
r For Tray 1, 2, and 3, the dial setting overrides settings selected with the operation panel.
Note
r The following conventions are used to describe paper feed direction:
r When loading paper having the same size in more than one tray, it is recommended that you load paper in the same direction.
r The supported paper sizes may differ depending on the memory capacity of
the printer. ? P.117 “Memory Capacity and Paper Size”
r For more information about the meanings of symbols, see the notes at the bottom of each table.
Reference
For more information about loading each type of paper, see P.25 “Types of paper and other media”.
Symbol in this manual Symbol on the panel
display
Meaning
K mn Short-edge feed direction
L op Long-edge feed directionPaper and Other Media
22
3
v Paper sizes and paper feed directions supported by each paper tray (Metric version)
• I means that the size is supported and needs to select the paper size using
the operation panel. (The bypass tray has no dial on the tray.) ? P.32 “Loading
Paper in the Bypass Tray”
• m means that the size is supported and indicated on the tray dial. Be sure to
set the paper size dial to match the actual paper size loaded in the tray.
• H means that the size is supported but not indicated on the paper size dial.
You should set the paper size dial to “p”, and select the paper size using the
operation panel. The default setting is Foolscap (8.5“×13”). ? P.31 “Selecting
paper size using the operation panel”
• × means that the size is not supported.
Feed direction
Size (mm)
Bypass tray
Standard tray (Tray 1)
PAPER FEED UNIT Type305
(Tray 2/3)
12x18 K 304.8 × 457.2 I × ×
A3 K 297 × 420 I m m
B4 JIS K 257 × 364 I H H
A4 L 297 × 210 I m m
B5 JIS L 257 × 182 I H H
A5 L 210 × 148 I H ×
B6 JIS K 128 × 182 I × ×
A6 K 105 × 148 I × ×
Double Letter K 279 × 432 I m m
Legal K 216 × 356 I m m
Letter L 279 × 216 I m m
Half Letter L 216 × 140 I H ×
Executive L 276 × 184 I m m
Folio K 210 × 330 I H H
Foolscap K 216 × 330 I H H
F/GL K 203 × 330 I H H
Com#10 Env K 105 × 241 I × ×
DL Env K 110 × 220 I × ×
Custom Size — — I × ×Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer
23
3
v Paper sizes and paper feed directions supported by each paper tray (Inch version)
• I means that the size is supported and needs to select the paper size using
the operation panel. (The bypass tray has no dial on the tray.) ? P.32 “Loading
Paper in the Bypass Tray”
• m means that the size is supported and indicated on the tray dial. Be sure to
set the paper size dial to match the actual paper size loaded in the tray.
• H means that the size is supported but not indicated on the paper size dial.
You should set the paper size dial to “p”, and select the paper size using the
operation panel. The default setting is Foolscap (8.5“×13”). ? P.31 “Selecting
paper size using the operation panel”
• × means that the size is not supported.
Feed direction
Size (inch)
Bypass tray
Standard tray (Tray 1)
PAPER FEED UNIT Type305
(Tray 2/3)
12x18 K 12" × 18" I × ×
Double Letter K 11" × 17" I m m
Legal K 8
1
/2" × 14" I m m
Letter L 11" × 8
1
/2" I m m
Half Letter L 8
1
/2" × 5
1
/2" I H ×
Executive L 10
1
/2" × 7
1
/4" I m H
A3 K 11.69" × 16.54" I m m
B4 JIS K 10.12" × 14.33" I H H
A4 L 10.12" × 14.33" I m m
B5 JIS L 10.12" × 7.17" I H H
A5 L 8.27" × 5.83" I H ×
B6 JIS K 5.04” × 7.17” I × ×
A6 K 4.13" × 5.83" I × ×
Folio K 8
1
/4" × 13" I H H
Foolscap K 8
1
/2" × 13" I H H
F/GL K 8" × 13" I H H
Com#10 Env K 4
1
/8" × 9
1
/2" I × ×
DL Env K 4.33" × 8.66" I × ×
Custom Size — — I × ×Paper and Other Media
24
3
v Paper weight and number of sheets to be set
*1
Confirm that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark indicated on the
side guide of the tray.
Paper Recommendations
Note the following suggestions when handling or selecting paper used with this
printer.
Loading paper
Important
r Do not use paper that is meant for an ink-jet printer or it may stick to the fusing unit and cause a paper misfeed.
r When printing on an OHP transparency that has a print side, load it with the
print side down onto the bypass tray. Not taking this precaution may cause it
to stick to the fusing unit and cause a misfeed.
• Use only the recommended paper types. Print quality cannot be guaranteed
if other paper types are used. ? P.28 “Paper not supported by this printer”
• Do not use paper that has already been printed onto by other printers.
Storing paper
Paper should always be stored properly. Improperly stored paper might result
in poor print quality, paper misfeeds, or printer damage.
Recommendations are as follows:
• Avoid storing paper in humid areas.
• Avoid exposing paper to direct sunlight.
• Store on a flat surface.
• Keep open reams of paper in the package in which the paper came.
Supported paper
weights
Maximum number of
sheets (plain paper)
*1
Bypass tray 64 - 160 g/m2
(17 - 43 lb) 50 (80 g/m2
, 20 lb)
Standard tray 64 - 105 g/m2
(17 - 28 lb) 250 (80 g/m2
, 20 lb)
PAPER FEED UNIT Type305
(option)
64 - 105 g/m2
(17 - 28 lb) 500 (80 g/m2
, 20 lb)Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer
25
3
Types of paper and other media
v Plain paper
• The standard tray can hold up to 250 sheets.
*1
• The bypass tray can hold up to 50 sheets.
*1
• PAPER FEED UNIT Type305 (option) can hold up to 500 sheets.
*1
*1
: Based on paper that is 80 g/m2
(20 lb) in weight.
• If you print on paper heavier than 105 g/m2
(28 lb), use the bypass tray.
The bypass tray can hold paper up to 160 g/m2
(43 lb) in weight.
• If paper is curled or bent, straighten it before loading.
• When printing on the reverse side of plain paper that is already printed on,
you should load it onto the bypass tray and select [Plain (Duplex Backside)]
from [Paper Type:] with the printer driver.
v Thick paper
• If you print on paper heavier than 105 g/m2
(28 lb), use the bypass tray.
The bypass tray can hold paper up to 160 g/m2
(43 lb) in weight. The print
quality on paper that is thicker cannot be guaranteed.
• The bypass tray can hold up to 25 sheets.
Note
r The number of sheets to be set may vary depending on the paper thickness and paper type.
• When printing on thick paper, you should select the thick paper mode
with the printer driver.
• When printing on the reverse side of thick paper that is already printed on,
you should load it onto the bypass tray and select [Thick (Duplex Backside)]
from [Paper Type:] with the printer driver.
• Auto duplex printing onto thick paper is not available.
v Adhesive labels
• When printing on adhesive labels, use the bypass tray.
• Load adhesive labels into the tray with the print side face down.
TFWY060EPaper and Other Media
26
3
• Remove any unused adhesive labels from the tray after you are finished
printing. Leaving them in the tray can cause them to curl.
• When printing on adhesive labels, you should select the plain paper mode
with the printer driver.
• The bypass tray can hold up to 40 adhesive labels.
Note
r The number of sheets to be set may vary depending on the paper thickness and paper type.
• In duplex printing, do not use adhesive labels.
v OHP transparencies
• When printing on OHP transparencies, use the bypass tray.
• Load OHP transparencies into the tray with the print side face down or
they may stick to the fusing unit and cause a misfeed.
• Remove any unused OHP transparencies from the tray after you are finished printing. Leaving them in the tray may cause them to stick together.
• When printing on OHP transparencies, you should select the OHP transparency mode with the printer driver.
• The bypass tray can hold up to 50 OHP transparency sheets.
Note
r The number of sheets you can set varies depending on the paper thickness and paper type.
• In duplex printing, do not use OHP transparencies or they may stick to the
fusing unit and cause a misfeed.
• When the “OHP Slip” setting is set to “Off” (? P.83 “Using the Operation
Panel”), be sure to remove each OHP transparency immediately after it is
printed.
Note
r If the direction and size of paper loaded in the paper tray is different
from the direction and size of the OHP transparency, “OHP Slip” will
not work even if it is on. Be sure to remove each OHP transparency immediately after it is printed.
TFWY060EPaper and Other Media Supported by This Printer
27
3
v Envelopes
• When printing on envelopes, use the bypass tray.
Note
r When you print with RICOH-SCRIPT2 on Macintosh, or from Adobe
PageMaker under Windows, load envelopes with the flap on the opposite (left) side to that shown in the illustration.
• You can select the sizes for the envelopes using the operation panel.
? P.83 “Using the Operation Panel”
• Recommended of envelopes is as follows:
• Com#10 Env
• DL Env
• Do not stack envelopes over the limit mark.
• Confirm that print side is facing down when loading onto the bypass tray.
• Confirm that there is no air in the envelopes before loading.
• To get better print quality, it is recommended that you set the right, left,
top, and bottom print margins, to at least 20 mm (0.8") each.
• Do not print on both sides of envelopes.
• Load only one size and type of envelope at a time.
• Before loading envelopes, flatten the leading edges (sides being fed into
the printer) of them by running a pencil or ruler across them.
• Some kinds of envelopes might cause misfeeds, wrinkles or poor printing.
• The print quality on envelopes may be uneven as different parts of an envelope have different thickness. Print one or two envelopes to check the
print quality.
• Avoid using the non-supported envelopes listed on P.28 “Paper not supported by this printer”.
• Auto duplex printing onto envelopes is not available.
TFWY081EPaper and Other Media
28
3
Paper not supported by this printer
Avoid using the following types of paper that are not supported by this printer:
• Paper whose weight is heavier or lighter than the limitation.
• Bent, folded, or creased paper
• Curled or twisted paper
• Torn paper
• Wrinkled paper
• Damp paper
• Paper stuck together
• Paper that is dry enough to emit static electricity
• Paper that has already been printed onto, except a preprinted letterhead
Note
r Ink on paper from an earlier print job, another copier, an ink-jet printer or
other devices could damage the fusing unit of this printer due to different
fusing temperatures.
• Coated paper
• Special paper, such as thermal paper, aluminum foil, carbon paper and conductive paper
• Heavily textured paper
• Glued paper
• OHP transparencies for color printing
• OHP transparencies for ink-jet printers
• Label paper on which glue or base paper is exposed
• Paper with clips or staples
• Paper with tape or ribbons attached
• Paper meant for an ink-jet printer
• Envelopes that are:
• damp
• excessively curled or twisted
• stuck together
• damaged in any way
• with stamps attached
• with windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing
• with metal clasps, string ties, or metal folding bars
• designed to be interlocked
• with nicked edges of bent corners
• with rough, cockle, or laid finishes
• with any exposed adhesive, when the flap is in the sealed or closed positionPaper and Other Media Supported by This Printer
29
3
Printable Area
The following shows the printable area for this printer. Be sure to set the print
margins correctly.
A: printable area
Note
r The printable area may vary depending on paper size, printer language and
printer driver settings.
4.3 mm (1/6") 4.3 mm (1/6")
4.3 mm (1/6")
4.3 mm (1/6")Paper and Other Media
30
3
Loading Paper
Loading Paper in the Paper
Tray
This section describes instructions for
loading paper in the standard paper
tray and the optional paper tray. If
you want to load paper in the bypass
tray, see P.32 “Loading Paper in the Bypass Tray”.
Important
r Confirm that the setting of the paper size dial matches the paper size
and feed direction of the paper in
the tray. If it does not, misfeeds or
unexpected printing results may
occur.
Reference
For more information about the
size and feed direction of paper
that can be loaded in the tray, see
P.21 “Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer”.
A Slide the paper tray out until it
stops. After that, lift it slightly,
then slide i t out of the pr in ter .
Place it on a flat surface.
B Slide the paper guides to adjust
them to the paper width.
Adjust the paper guides until they
click into position.
Important
r Do not touch the friction pad
(A) or paper misfeeds or paper
multi-feeds might occur .
C Load paper into the tray with the
side to be printed onto face up.
Important
r Confirm that the top of the stack
is not higher than the limit mark
(TT) inside the tray.
r Confirm that paper fits under
the rear guide.
r Do not mix different kinds of
paper in the tray.
r To avoid paper multi-feeds,
s h u f f l e s h e e t s b e f o r e s e t t i n g
them in the tray.
TFWY090E
TFWY101E
A
TFWY110ELoading Paper
31
3
D Adjust the paper size dial to
match the size and feed direction
of paper in the paper tray.
Note
r See the following table for the
appropriate paper size dial position.
Important
r When loading B4 JISK, B5 JISL,
A5L, 5
1
/2"×8
1
/2"L, 8"×13”K,
8
1
/4"×13"K or 8
1
/2"×13"K in the
paper tray, set the dial to “p”
and select the paper size using
the operation panel. ? P.31 “Selecting paper size using the operation panel”
E Slide the paper tray into the printer until it stops.
Important
r Be sure to insert the paper tray
completely or paper misfeeds
might occur.
Selecting paper size using the operation
panel
Use the following procedure to select
the paper size loaded in Tray 1, 2 or 3
from the printer's operation panel.
A Press Menu .
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
IPDL-C Menu l
B Press {TT} or {UU} to display “System Menu”, and then press Enter .
j
System Menu l
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
1.Paper Tray l
Paper size Standard
tray
(Tray 1)
Optional
tray
(Tray 2/3)
A3 A3K A3K
A4 A4L A4L
A5 p ?
B4 p p
B5 p p
Double Letter
(11"×17")
11×17 11×17
Legal
(8
1
/2"×14")
8
1
/2×14 8
1
/2×14
Letter
(8
1
/2"×11")
8
1
/2×11 8
1
/2×11
Half Letter
(5
1
/2"×8
1
/2")
p ?
Executive
(7
1
/4"×10
1
/2")
7
1
/4×10
1
/
2
7
1
/4×10
1
/
2
F
(8"×13")
p p
Folio
(8
1
/4"×13")
p p
Foolscap
(8
1
/2"×13")
p p
TFWS020E
Data In
On Line Reset Escape
Menu Media
Power
Enter
ErrorPaper and Other Media
32
3
C Press {T} or {U} to display
“2.Tray Size[*]”, and then press
{Enter}.
j
2.Tray Size[*]l
The currently selected paper size
appears on the panel display.
j
*8.5x13 l
D Press {U} or {T} to select the size
of paper loaded in the paper tray,
and then press {Enter}.
j
8.25x13 l
E Press {On Line}.
The "Ready" message appears on
the panel display.
IPDL-C
Ready
F Press {On Line}.
The On Line indicator turns off
when the printer is offline.
G Press {Reset}.
The printer is reset and the settings
are applied. Confirm that the selected tray and paper size are appears on the panel display.
IPDL-C
Ready
Loading Paper in the Bypass
Tray
In the bypass tray, you can load OHP
transparencies, envelopes and other
non-plain paper in addition to plain
paper.
Reference
? P.21 “Paper Types and Sizes”
? P.24 “Paper Recommendations”
Note
r Do not open the front cover when
loading paper into the bypass tray
or paper in the bypass tray might
fall.
A Open the bypass tray.
B Slide the side guides.
TFWY130E
TFWY140ELoading Paper
33
3
Note
r Slide out the bypass tray extender to support paper sizes
larger than A4L.
C Load paper until it stops with the
print side down.
Important
r Confirm that paper fits under
the side guides.
r The side guides should be set to
the correct paper size to avoid
paper feed problems.
r Do not load paper when printing.
Selecting paper size using the operation
panel
Use the following procedure to select
the paper size from the printer's operation panel after loading paper into
the bypass tray.
A Press {Media}.
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
1.Paper Tray l
B Press {T} or {U} to display “2.Bypass Size”, and then press {Enter}.
j
2.Bypass Size l
The current paper size appears on
the panel display.
j
*A4 l
TFWY150E
TFWY160E
TFWS040E
Data In
On Line Reset Escape
Menu Media
Power
Enter
ErrorPaper and Other Media
34
3
C Select the paper size you have
loaded in the tray.
Standard paper size
A Press {T} or {U} to display the
paper size that is in the tray.
B Press {Enter}.
j
A5 l
The following message appears
on the panel display.
j
2.Bypass Size l
Custom size paper
A Press {T} or {U} to display
“Custom”.
B Press {Enter}.
j
Custom l
The following message appears
on the panel display.
l
jl/# Width 210mm
C Press {T} or {U} to change the
third (leftmost) digit of the paper width, and then press {Enter}.
The po int er (l) move s to th e
right.
l
jl/# Width 110mm
Note
r Press {Escape} to move the
pointer to the left.
r Press {Escape} while the
pointer is located at the leftm o s t d ig i t o f th e w id t h t o
cancel the settings and return
to step D.
D Repeat step C to set the value of
the width.
While the pointer is located at
the first (rightmost) digit of the
width, press {Enter} to advance
to the length setup display.
Note
r Press {Escape} while the
pointer is located at the leftmost digit of the width to ret u r n t o t h e w i d t h s e t u p
display.
E Repeat steps C and D to set the
value of the length.
While the pointer is located at
the first (rightmost) digit of the
length, press {Enter} to return to
“Media”.
j
2.Bypass Size l
F Press {Escape}.
The "Ready" message appears
on the panel display.
IPDL-C
Ready Loading Paper
35
3
Sliding out the Output Tray
Extender
If you load paper larger than A4L or
8
1
/2" × 11"L, slide out the output tray
extender.
Important
r Do not place the rear of the printer
near a wall or touch it with your
hand. Thi s ar ea can be com e extremely hot.
Note
r The above illustration is the simplex printer. The procedure for the
duplex printer is identical.
r After printing, return the output
tray extender to its original position.
ZBGH022EPaper and Other Media
36
337
4. Troubleshooting
Error & Status Messages
There are three types of error and status messages.
• Printed error message
• Error and status messages on the operation panel
• Getting printer information over the network
Printed Error Message
The error message shown below is output by the printer whenever there is not
enough memory to print data.
Error message Required action
There is not enough memory in your
printer to print this page.Change print
quality in the printer driver and try
again.For details, please refer to the troubleshooting section in your manual.
The following are the actions you should
take when you encounter memory shortage problems. If these actions do not solve
the problem individually, try them in
combination with each other. ? P.118
“Low Memory”
A Increase printer memory.
Install the optional memory unit to increase the amount of printer memory.
B Change the color level settings.
• IPDL-C printer driver
Set [Printing Mode] to [Fast].
Set [Resolution:] to [600 dpi / Fast].
• RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer driver
Set [Gradation] to [Fast].Troubleshooting
38
4
Error & Status Messages on the Operation Panel
Important
r If the error message that is not included in the following table appears on the
panel display, turn the printer off and on. If this does not clear the error message, write down the error number and the message, and contact your sales
or service representative.
Note
r The panel display can show only one error message at a time. Printing a configuration page shows all current printer errors. ? P.99 “Printing the Configuration Page”
r For more information about the IPDL-C printer driver, see the printer driver's
Help.
r For more information about the RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer driver, see the “Operating Instructions” for RICOH-SCRIPT2 included as a PDF file on the CDROM.
Message Description Comments
Add Fuser Oil
(on the upper line)
The fuser oil bottle is empty.
Replace the fuser oil bottle.
? P.76 “Replacing the Fuser
Oil Bottle and Ozone Filter”
Add Fuser Oil
(on the lower line)
Fuser oil is low. You can
print about 200 or /more
pages after this message
appears.
Replace the fuser oil bottle.
? P.76 “Replacing the Fuser
Oil Bottle and Ozone Filter”
Add Toner
Please Wait
The toner cartridge is being
prepared for replacement.
Wait for a while.
Add Toner
xxx
The indicated toner runs
out.
Replace the indicated toner
cartridge.
? P.71 “Replacing Toner
Cartridge”
Call Service
SC:xx
There is a malfunction in
the printer.
Turn the printer off and on.
If this does not clear the
problem, contact your sales
or service representative.
Change Fuser It is time to replace the fusing unit.
Contact your sales or service representative.
Change PCU. It is time to replace the photoconductor unit.
If prints are dirty, replace
the photoconductor unit.
? P.74 “Replacing the Photoconductor Unit”Error & Status Messages
39
4
Close
Front Cover
The front cover is open. Close the front cover. ? the
"Setup Guide" that comes
with the printer
Close Left Cover The left cover is open. Close the left cover. ? the
"Setup Guide" that comes
with the printer
Close Paper Exit
Cover
The paper exit cover is
open.
Close the paper exit cover.
? the "Setup Guide" that
comes with the printer
Close Rear Cover
*1 The rear cover is open. Close the rear cover. ? the
"Setup Guide" that comes
with the printer
Energy Saver In the Energy Saver mode. Press the operation key or
send a job from the computer to turn the power on.
Load
(paper size)
There is no paper of the indicated size in the paper
tray being used.
Load the indicated paper
size into the paper tray being used. ? P.30 “Loading
Paper”
There is no paper of the
correct size loaded in the
paper tray.
Load the correct size paper.
Low on: xxx The indicated toner is low. Replace the indicated toner
cartridge. The color of the
toner is shown by the
CMYK color model. The
meaning is following.
• C: cyan
• M: magenta
• Y: yellow
• K: black
? P.71 “Replacing Toner
Cartridge”
Need Charger It is time to replace the
charger.
Replace the charger. ?
P.80 “Replacing the Charger”
Open Front Cover
Remove Misfeed
There is a paper misfeed in
the printer.
Remove the misfed paper.
? P.59 “When the Message
"Open Front Cover Remove
Misfeed" Appears”
Message Description CommentsTroubleshooting
40
4
Paper Size Error There is a difference between the paper size in the
tray and the requested paper size from the computer.
After confirming that the
size, feed direction of paper
and the paper size dial in
the tray are set correctly,
open and close the front
cover. ? P.30 “Loading Paper”
Please Wait The printer is warming up
or processing internally.
Wait until the printer returns to the ready condition or processing
internally.
Power Off/On There is a malfunction in
the printer.
Turn the printer off and on.
If this does not clear the
problem, contact your sales
or service representative.
Remove Misfeed
From Rear Cover
*1
There is a paper misfeed in
the rear cover.
Remove the misfed paper.
? P.64 “When the Message
"Remove Misfeed From Rear
Cover" Appears”
Remove Misfeed
Duplex Base Unit
*1
There is a paper misfeed in
the duplex tray.
Remove the misfed paper.
? P.63 “When the Message
"Remove Misfeed Duplex
Base Unit" Appears”
Remove Misfeed
From Output Tray
There is a paper misfeed in
the printer.
Remove the misfed paper.
? P.60 “When the Message
"Remove Misfeed From Output Tray" Appears”
Remove Misfeed
From Paper Tray
There is a paper misfeed in
the printer.
Remove the misfed paper.
? P.58 “When the Message
"Remove Misfeed From Paper
Tray" Appears”
Reset Charger
Correctly
The charger is not set correctly or the charger cleaner is not in the correct
position.
Set the charger correctly. ?
P.80 “Replacing the Charger”
Reset Fusing
Unit Correctly
The fusing unit is not installed in the printer.
Contact your sales or service representative.
Reset PCU
Correctly
The photoconductor unit is
not installed in the printer.
Install the photoconductor
unit. ? P.74 “Replacing the
Photoconductor Unit”
Reset Toner
Correctly
The toner cartridge is not
installed correctly.
Install the cartridge correctly. ? P.71 “Replacing
Toner Cartridge”
Message Description CommentsError & Status Messages
41
4
Reset Paper Tray
Correctly
The paper tray is not installed correctly.
Install the paper tray correctly.
The tray on the paper feeding path was not set correctly when the printer
received the print job.
Install the paper tray correctly. The printer will restart printing
automatically.
Reset Waste T
Bottle Correctly
The waste toner bottle is
not installed.
Install the waste toner bottle. ? P.78 “Replacing the
Waste Toner Bottle”
Warming Up The printer is preparing for
printing.
Wait until the printer is
warmed up.
The printer adjusts itself
regularly to maintain print
quality. (This message
might appear while printing.)
It is not an error message.
The printer is working
properly. Just wait a while.
Waste T Full
(on the lower line)
The waste toner bottle is
nearly full.
Replace the waste toner
bottle. ? P.78 “Replacing
the Waste Toner Bottle”
Waste Toner is
Full
The waste toner bottle is
full.
Replace the waste toner
bottle. ? P.78 “Replacing
the Waste Toner Bottle”
A3:Error There is too much data for
the I/O buffer to handle.
Check if the interface cable
is inserted into the printer
and the computer securely.
Check if the interface cable
is not damaged or broken.
Increase the size of the I/O
buffer. ? P.83 “Using the
Operation Panel”
A6:Error There is not enough printer
memory to print one or
more of the pages in the
print job.
See P.118 “Low Memory”.
AB:Error The printer is unable to
process the data you are
trying to print.
Install optional memory
unit to increase the amount
of printer memory.
Reduce the amount of data
being sent to the printer.
Message Description CommentsTroubleshooting
42
4
B0:Error An error has occurred in
the optional memory unit.
Turn the printer off and on.
Then, try to print again.
Turn off the printer. Remove and reinstall the
memory unit and turn on
the printer. Then, try to
print again.
Turn off the printer. Remove the memory unit and
turn on the printer. Then,
try to print again.
Note
r If you remove the memory unit, you must reconfigure the printer
driver. ? the "Setup
Guide" that comes with
the printer
r In this case, you might
not be able print complex print jobs.
B1:Error An error has occurred in
the standard parallel interface.
Contact your sales or service representative.
B3:Error The printer setting is
wrong.
Reset the printer using
"Menu Reset" of the "Maintenance" menu. ? P.83
“Using the Operation Panel”
B5:Error An error has occurred in
the RICOH-SCRIPT2 module.
Contact your sales or service representative.
B6:Error An error has occurred in
the optional parallel interface board.
Turn off the printer. Remove and reinstall the optional parallel interface
board and turn on the
printer. Then, try to print
again.
Message Description CommentsError & Status Messages
43
4
*1
This message appears when you use the duplex printer.
Note
r If you cannot solve the problem by taking above actions, turn the printer off
and on. If this does not clear the error message, write down the error number
and the message, and contact your sales or service representative.
B7: Error An error has occurred in
the optional Network Interface Board.
Turn the printer off and on.
Then, try to print again.
Turn off the printer. Remove and reinstall the Network Interface Board and
turn on the printer. Then,
try to print again.
Turn off the printer. Remove the Network Interface Board from the printer
and turn on the printer.
Then, try to print again.
Note
r If you remove the Network Interface Board,
you cannot print via the
network. You can send
the print job to the printer only via a parallel cable connection.
85:Error The printer has run out of
frame memory. There is
not enough memory to render the graphic data.
Reduce the size of the input
buffer, or add optional
memory.
86:Error You may be trying to print
with the wrong printer
driver.
Confirm that you are using
the correct printer driver.
You might not use the correct interface cable.
Confirm that you are using
the correct interface cable.
91:Error An error has occurred in
the printer's standard
memory.
Turn the printer off and on.
Then, try to print again.
94:Error The amount of the memory
is not set correctly.
Specify the correct amount
of memory using the printer driver.
Message Description CommentsTroubleshooting
44
4
Getting Printer Information over the Network
Note
r The optional Network Interface Board is required to acquire printer information over the network.
Printer current status
You can check the printer's current status using the following method.
v telnet
Use the status command.
Reference
For more information about the printer configuration with this method,
see the “Operating Instructions” for the optional Network Interface Board
included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM.
Message Description Comments
Call Service There is a malfunction in
the printer.
Turn the printer off and on.
Charger : Not Set Correctly The charger is not set correctly.
Set the charger correctly. ?
P.80 “Replacing the Charger”
Energy Save Mode The printer is in Energy
Saver mode.
Wait for a while.
Error Power Off/On There is malfunction in the
printer.
Turn the printer off and on.
Front Cover Open The front cover is open. Close the front cover. ? the
"Setup Guide" that comes
with the printer
Fusing Oil is Low Fuser oil is low. You can
print about 200 pages more
after this message appears.
Replace the fuser oil bottle.
? P.76 “Replacing the Fuser
Oil Bottle and Ozone Filter”
Fusing Oil is Empty The fuser oil bottle is empty.
Replace the fuser oil bottle.
? P.76 “Replacing the Fuser
Oil Bottle and Ozone Filter”
Fusing Unit: Not Set Correctly
The fusing unit is not installed in the printer.
Contact your sales or service representative.
Left Cover Open The left cover is open. Close the left cover. ? the
"Setup Guide" that comes
with the printer
Loading Toner The toner cartridge is being
prepared for replacement.
Wait for a while.Error & Status Messages
45
4
Low on xxx Toner The indicated toner is low. Replace the indicated toner
cartridge. The color of the
toner is shown by the
CMYK color model. The
meaning is following.
• C: cyan
• M: magenta
• Y: yellow
• K: black
? P.71 “Replacing Toner
Cartridge”
Misfeed at Base of Duplex
Unit
*1
There is a paper misfeed in
the duplex tray.
Remove the misfed paper.
? P.63 “When the Message
"Remove Misfeed Duplex
Base Unit" Appears”
Misfeed at Rear of Duplex
Unit
*1
There is a paper misfeed in
the rear cover.
Remove the misfed paper.
? P.64 “When the Message
"Remove Misfeed From Rear
Cover" Appears”
No Paper There is no paper in the paper tray.
Load paper into the paper
tray. ? P.30 “Loading Paper”
Paper Exit Cover Open The paper exit cover is
open.
Close the paper exit cover.
? the "Setup Guide" that
comes with the printer
Paper Misfeed at Front
Cover
There is a paper misfeed in
the printer.
Remove the misfed paper.
? P.59 “When the Message
"Open Front Cover Remove
Misfeed" Appears”
Paper Misfeed at Output
Tray
There is a paper misfed in
the printer.
Remove the misfed paper.
? P.60 “When the Message
"Remove Misfeed From Output Tray" Appears”
Paper Misfeed at Tray There is a paper misfed in
the printer.
Remove the misfed paper.
? P.58 “When the Message
"Remove Misfeed From Paper
Tray" Appears”
Paper Size Error There is a difference between the paper size in the
tray and the requested paper size from the computer.
After confirming that the
size, feed direction of paper
and the paper size dial in
the tray are set correctly,
open and close the front
cover. ? P.30 “Loading Paper”
Message Description CommentsTroubleshooting
46
4
*1
This message appears when you use the duplex printer.
Paper Tray : Not Set Correctly
The paper tray is not installed correctly.
Install the paper tray correctly.
The tray on the paper feeding path is not set correctly
when the printer receives
the print job.
Install the paper tray correctly. The printer will restart printing
automatically.
PCU : Not Set Correctly The photoconductor unit is
not installed in the printer.
Install the photoconductor
unit correctly. ? P.74 “Replacing the Photoconductor
Unit”
Ready Printer works properly. —
Rear Cover Open
*1 The rear cover is open. Close the rear cover. ? the
"Setup Guide" that comes
with the printer
Time to Change Charger It is time to replace the
charger.
Replace the charger. ?
P.80 “Replacing the Charger”
Time to Change Fusing
Unit
It is time to replace the fusing unit.
Contact your sales or service representative.
Time to Change PCU It is time to replace the photoconductor unit.
If printed side gets dirty,
replace the photoconductor unit. ? P.74 “Replacing
the Photoconductor Unit”
Toner : Not Set Correctly The toner cartridge is not
installed correctly.
Install the cartridge correctly. ? P.71 “Replacing
Toner Cartridge”
Warming Up The printer is preparing for
printing.
Wait until the printer is
warmed up.
Waste Toner is Full The waste toner bottle is
full.
Replace the waste toner
bottle. ? P.78 “Replacing
the Waste Toner Bottle”
Waste Toner is Nearly Full The waste toner bottle is
nearly full.
Replace the waste toner
bottle. ? P.78 “Replacing
the Waste Toner Bottle”
WasteToner : Not Set Correctly
The waste toner bottle is
not installed correctly.
Install the waste toner bottle correctly. ? P.78 “Replacing the Waste Toner
Bottle”
xxx Toner is Empty The indicated toner is low
or has run out.
Replace the indicated toner
cartridge.
? P.71 “Replacing Toner
Cartridge”
Message Description CommentsError & Status Messages
47
4
Printer configuration
You can check the printer's current status using the following method.
v telnet
Use the info command.
Note
r “*” (asterisk) indicates the current setting.
r Items marked by “*” are explained in the following tables.
v *1 Input Tray: Name
Item Description
Input Tray
No.
Name
PageSize
Status List
ID number of the paper tray
Name of the paper tray
*1
Paper size loaded in the paper tray
*2
Current status of the paper tray
*3
Output Tray
No.
Name
Status
ID number of the output tray
Name of the output tray (Fixed to “Standard”)
Current status of the output tray (Fixed to “Normal”)
Emulation
No.
Name
Version
ID number of the emulation used by the printer
Name of the emulation used in the printer
*4
Version of the emulation
Program
No.
Name
ID number of the program
Name of the program (Fixed to blank.)
Name Description
Tray1 Standard Tray
Tray2 Paper Feed Unit (upper)
Tray3 Paper Feed Unit (lower)
Bypass Tray Bypass TrayTroubleshooting
48
4
v *2 Input Tray: PageSize
v *3 Input Tray: Status
v *4 Emulation: Name
Paper size Description
A3R A3K
A4 A4L
A5 A5L
A6R A6K
B4R B4K
B5 B5L
B6R B6K
DLR 11”×17"K
LGR 8
1
/2”×14"K
LT 8
1
/2"×11”L
HL 5
1
/2"×8
1
/2"L
EX 7
1
/4"×10
1
/2"L
FR 8"×13"K
FLR 8
1
/4"×13"K
F4R 8
1
/2"×13"K
FRE Custom size
** The paper size is not selected
Status Description
Normal ?
NoTray There is no paper tray
PaperEnd There is no paper in the paper tray
Emulation name Description
RWC(IPDL-C) IPDL-C
RPS(RicohScript2) RICOH-SCRIPT2Printer Does Not Print
49
4
Printer Does Not Print
Possible cause Solutions
Is the power on? If not, confirm that the power cord is securely plugged
into the power outlet and the printer.
Turn on the printer. ? the "Setup Guide" that comes with
the printer
Does the On Line indicator stay on?
If not, press {On Line} to make it light up.
Does the Error indicator
stay red?
If so, check the error message on the panel display and
take the required action. ? P.38 “Error & Status Messages
on the Operation Panel”
Is the paper set? Load paper into the paper tray or on the bypass tray. ?
P.30 “Loading Paper”
Is the specified paper size
correct?
Set the specified paper size in any of the input trays.
Is the specified paper type
correct?
Set the specified paper type in any of the input trays.
Is the interface cable between the printer and the
computer connected securely?
Connect the interface cable properly. If there are any connectors or screws, confirm that they are fastened securely.
For more information about the settings, see the "Quick
Installation Guide".
Are you using a correct interface cable?
The type of interface cable you should use depends on the
computer. Be sure to use the correct one.
If the cable is damaged or worn, replace it with a new one.
For more information about the settings, see the "Quick
Installation Guide".
Did you connect the interface cable after turning on
the power switch?
Connect the interface cable before turning on the power
switch.
When you print using the
RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer
driver in a network, data
is received by the printer,
but is not printed.
v Windows 95/98
On the [PostScript] tab of the Printer Properties, click
[Advanced] and then clear both [Send CTRL+D before job]
and [Send CTRL+D after job].
v Windows 2000
On the [Device Settings] tab of the Printer Properties, select [No] for both [Send CTRL-D Before Each Job:] and
[Send CTRL-D After Each Job:].
v Windows NT 4.0
Open the [Advanced] tab of the Printer Properties. From
[PostScript Options], select [No] for both [Send CTRL-D Before Each job:] and [Send CTRL-D After Each job:].Troubleshooting
50
4
If you print using the
RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer
driver, printing does not
start or is interrupted.
The data is cleared when the Job Timeout period is exceeded.
v Windows 95/98
Set a longer [Job timeout:] period with the [PostScript]
tab of the Printer Properties.
v Windows 2000
Set a longer [Job Timeout:] period with the [Device Settings] tab of the Printer Properties.
v Windows NT 4.0
Set a longer [Job Timeout:] period with the [Device Settings] tab of the Printer Properties.
v Macintosh
Set a longer [Job Timeout] period.
A PostScript error might occur if there is not enough
memory in the machine, or there are errors in the print
data sent to the machine.
• Print the configuration page to check the amount of
available memory.
• If the memory size is full, increasing the memory may
solve this problem. If you still cannot clear the problem, contact your sales or service representative.
The print job might be reset. Do the following.
• Confirm that you have selected the correct printer
driver. Try printing again.
• Set a longer Wait Timeout.
v Windows 95/98
Set a longer [Wait timeout:] period with the [PostScript] tab of the Printer Properties.
v Windows 2000
Set a longer [Wait Timeout:] period with the [Device
Settings] tab of the Printer Properties.
v Windows NT 4.0
Set a longer [Wait Timeout:] period with the [Device
Settings] tab of the Printer Properties.
v Macintosh
You can specify a longer "I/O Timeout" period on
the operation panel. ? P.83 “Using the Operation
Panel”
Possible cause SolutionsPrinter Does Not Print
51
4
Is the Data In indicator
blinking or lit after starting the print job?
If the Data In indicator stays off, data is not being sent to
the printer or the printer may be resetting the print job because there was a long delay in receiving the data from
the computer.
v If the printer is using "I/O Timeout"
Increase the value of the "I/O Timeout" setting of the
"IPDL-C Menu" or "RPS2 Menu". Or set the "I/O Timeout" value to "0" (this is the off setting). ? P.83 “Using
the Operation Panel”
v If the printer is connected to the computer using the
parallel cable
Confirm that the printer port settings are correct. For a
parallel port connection, port LPT1 or LPT2 should be
set.
For more information about the printer port settings,
see the notes after this table.
v Network connection
Contact your network administrator.
If the Data In indicator is blinking or lit.
The printer may be resetting the print job. Take the following steps to correct the situation.
• Increase the "Job Timeout" setting of the "IPDL-C
Menu" or "RPS2 Menu".
• Confirm that the printer driver settings are correct.
• Change the "Transfer" setting in the "System Menu".
• Confirm that the "Parallel" setting in "System Menu" is
correct.
Do you print via a network?
Confirm that the "Ethernet" setting is correct from the operation panel. ? P.88 “Menu Table”
The setting governs the data transfer speed used by the
Network Interface Board. Three options are available:
• Auto (default)
• 100 Mbps
• 10 Mbps
Note
r For details about the appropriate setting to use on
your network, contact your network administrator.
Possible cause SolutionsTroubleshooting
52
4
If you cannot solve the problem by taking the above actions, contact your sales
or service representative.
Note
• Windows 95/98
A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Click the icon of the printer. Next, on the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C Click the [Details] tab.
D Check the [Print to the following port:] list to confirm that the correct port
is selected.
• Windows 2000
A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Click the icon of the printer. Next, on the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C Click the [Ports] tab.
D Confirm that the correct port is selected.
• Windows NT 4.0
A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Click the icon of the printer. Next, on the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C Click the [Port] tab.
D Confirm that the correct port is selected.
• Macintosh
A Click [Apple Menu], point to [Control Panel] and then click [Apple Talk].
B In the [connect via.] list box, select [Ethernet].
Can you print a test page
(configuration page) ?
If you cannot print a test page, it probably indicates printer malfunction. You should contact your sales or service
representative.
If you can print a test page but cannot get the printer to
print when you issue a print command from the computer, it probably means there is a problem with the computer.
Also keep it in mind that large, complex data might take
a long time for the printer to process.
Possible cause SolutionsOther Printing Problems
53
4
Other Printing Problems
Note
r For more information about the IPDL-C printer driver, see the printer driver's
Help.
r For more information about the RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer driver, see the “Operating Instructions” for RICOH-SCRIPT2 included as a PDF file on the CDROM.
Status Possible causes, Descriptions, and Solutions
The printer prints a message
indicating insufficient memory.
This message is printed when the printer does not have
enough memory to print a page.
The following are the actions you should take when
you encounter memory shortage problems. If these actions do not solve the problem individually, try them
in combination with each other. ? P.118 “Low Memory”
A Increase printer memory.
Install the optional memory unit to increase the
amount of printer memory.
B Change the color level settings.
• IPDL-C printer driver
Set [Printing Mode] to [Fast].
Set [Resolution:] to [600 dpi / Fast].
• RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer driver
Set [Gradation] to [Fast].
Image is printed on the reverse side of paper.
Paper in the paper tray is upside down.
• Standard Tray (Tray 1)
Load paper with the print side up.
• Bypass Tray
Load paper with the print side down.
• Optional Paper Feed Unit (Tray 2, Tray 3)
Load paper with the print side up.Troubleshooting
54
4
Paper misfeeds occur frequently.
Check the paper size settings. The size specified with
the paper size dial might be different from the actual
paper size. Make the correct dial setting. ? P.30 “Loading Paper”
Check if the paper tray is set correctly. If not, set it correctly. ? P.30 “Loading Paper”
Paper is not loaded correctly in the paper tray. Remove
the paper from the tray and reload it correctly. ? P.30
“Loading Paper”
Check the paper type settings. The type of paper set
with the printer driver might be different from the actual paper or media type. Make the correct paper or
media type setting.
You might be using paper not supported by this printer. Use the appropriate type of paper. ? P.24 “Paper
Recommendations”
Multiple pages are fed
through the printer at once.
Clean the friction pad if it is dirty. ? P.65 “Cleaning the
Friction Pad”
The operation panel error
message stays on after removing the misfed paper.
Open the front cover of the printer and then close it. ?
P.58 “Removing Misfed Paper”
It takes too much time to
start printing.
The data is so large or complex that it takes time to process it. If the Data In indicator is blinking, the data processing is being done. Just wait until it resumes.
The Energy Saver mode might be enabled. In the Energy Saver mode, it takes time for the printer to warm up.
It takes too much time to
complete the print job.
Photographs and other data intensive pages take a
long time for the printer to process, so simply wait
when printing such data.
Changing the following settings may help to speed up
printing.
• IPDL-C printer driver
Set [Printing Mode] to [Fast].
Set [Resolution:] to [600 dpi / Fast].
• RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer driver
Set [Gradation] to [Fast].
The data is so large or complex that it takes time to process it. If the Data In indicator is blinking, the data processing is being done. Just wait until it resumes.
If "Warming Up" appears on the panel display, the
printer is now warming up. Wait for a while.
Status Possible causes, Descriptions, and SolutionsOther Printing Problems
55
4
It takes too much time to perform black and white printing.
[Color] is selected on the printer driver. Change the color mode setting to [Black & White].
Note
r Some applications ignore the color mode setting
made with the printer driver.
The desired tray is not used
for the output.
The printer driver setting is not correct. Change the setting.
The desired paper size is not
used for the output.
The printer driver setting is not correct. Change the setting.
Check the paper size settings. The size specified with
the paper size dial might be different from the actual
paper size. Make the correct dial setting. ? P.30 “Loading Paper”
Specified paper is not loaded correctly in the paper
tray. Remove the paper from the tray and reload the
specified paper correctly. ? P.30 “Loading Paper”
Note
r If you select "Bypass Tray" with the IPDL-C printer
driver, you must select the paper size from both the
printer driver and the operation panel.
r If you select “Bypass Tray” with the RICOHSCRIPT2 printer driver, you can set the paper size
on the operation panel.
The print side of the page is a
hazy gray.
The charger and dust-proofing glass are dirty. Clean
them. ? P.65 “Cleaning the Charger” and P.66 “Cleaning
the Dust-Proofing Glass”
Adjust the image density setting. Extreme settings may
create output that appears dirty. ? P.67 “Adjusting the
Image Density”
If the message "Change PCU" appears on the panel display, replace the photoconductor unit. ? P.74 “Replacing the Photoconductor Unit”
Status Possible causes, Descriptions, and SolutionsTroubleshooting
56
4
Image density is too light. Turning on [Toner Saving] can cause blurring or fine
lines not to be printed. With color printing, toner saving can cause abnormal coloring. Try printing again after turning [Toner Saving] off.
If the message "Low on: xxx" or "Add Toner xxx" is on
the panel display, replace the toner cartridge of the indicated color. ? P.71 “Replacing Toner Cartridge”
You might be using paper not supported by this printer. Use the appropriate type of paper. ? P.21 “Paper
and Other Media Supported by This Printer”
Black or white lines appear
on the printed side.
The charger and dust-proofing glass are dirty. Clean
them. ? P.65 “Cleaning the Charger” and P.66 “Cleaning
the Dust-Proofing Glass”
Smeared toner appears on
the printed side of prints.
The charger is dirty. Clean the charger. ? P.65 “Cleaning the Charger”
Some parts of the print image
are blurred or light.
If the message "Low on: xxx" or "Add Toner xxx" is on
the panel display, replace the toner cartridge for the indicated color. ? P.71 “Replacing Toner Cartridge”
Toner is not fused well when
printing on thick paper or
OHP transparencies.
The printer driver setting is not correct. Select [Thick Paper], [OHP Transparency] or [Thick (Duplex Backside)] in the
paper type setting with the printer driver.
The color of the printout is
different from the color on
the computer's display.
The toner based color system used by the printer is different from the light based color system of the computer screen.
Turning on [Toner Saving] can cause color irregularities.
Check the settings on the [Color Setting] tab and restore
the default settings.
The printout is different
from the image on the computer screen.
Certain applications or image creation methods produce images that cannot be printed exactly as they appear on the computer screen.
With the IPDL-C printer driver, checking the [Print as
Bitmap] item on the [Setup] tab causes the print data to
be converted to image data before it is sent to the printer. This produces a printout closest to that displayed
on the computer screen.
Note
r This setting also causes large-volume print jobs to
take longer to print because of the required conversion process.
Status Possible causes, Descriptions, and SolutionsOther Printing Problems
57
4
Note
r If you cannot solve the problem by taking above actions, contact your sales or
service representative.
Changing the color settings
with the printer driver causes a drastic change in printout color.
With the IPDL-C printer driver, do not make radical
changes to the settings on the [Color Setting] tab.
Also note that the sample shown by the printer driver
is intended to show what processes are being applied,
not exactly what your printout will look like.
Photograph printing looks
rough.
With the IPDL-C printer driver, select [High Quality] on
the [Print Quality] tab.
Printing from some applications results in a loss of resolution.
Color documents are printed
in black and white.
The printer driver is not set up for color printing. Select
[Color] in the color mode setting with the printer driver.
Some applications normally print color text as black
and white.
Fine dot pattern does not
print.
Select [Photographic] in the [Dithering:] setting with the
printer driver.
Solid areas, lines or text are
shiny or glossy when created
as a mixture of cyan, magenta, yellow.
Select [K] in the [Black Text/Graphics:] setting with the
printer driver.
Black gradation is not natural.
Select [CMY + K] in the [Black Text/Graphics:] setting with
the printer driver.
Thin lines are blurred or
light.
With the IPDL-C printer driver, select the [CAD] check
box on the [Print Quality] tab.
When printing on OHP
transparencies, a sheet of paper is not placed between
printed OHP transparencies.
The size and direction of the paper loaded in the paper
tray are different from those of the OHP transparency.
Load paper of the same size and orientation as the
OHP transparencies in the paper tray.
The "OHP Slip" setting is set to "Off” (? P.83). Change
the setting with operation panel.
The page layout has
changed.
The printable area differs from printer to printer. A
document that when printed by another printer fits on
a single page might not fit on one page when printed
by this printer. From the IPDL-C printer driver, check
the [Enlarge Printable Area] on the [MISC.] tab.
Status Possible causes, Descriptions, and SolutionsTroubleshooting
58
4
Removing Misfed Paper
When a paper misfeed occurs, an error message appears on the panel disp l a y . T h e p r o c e d u r e y o u s h o u l d
follow to remove misfed paper depends on the location of the misfeed
indicated on the panel display.
R CAUTION:
Important
r If the printer is equipped with the
optional tray, do not pull out more
than two trays at the same time. If
you do, the printer might tilt forward.
r Check the following points if paper continues to misfeed.
• Confirm that paper is properly
loaded in the paper tray.
• Confirm that the number of
sheets does not exceed the maximum amount of the tray.
• Confirm that you are using only
the appropriate type of paper.
• Confirm that misfed paper is
still not inside the printer when
you resume printing.
• Check the paper type settings.
The type of paper set with the
printer driver might be different
from the actual paper or media
type. Confirm that the paper or
media type setting is correct.
r Confirm that the size of paper
l o a d e d i n t h e p a p e r t r a y i s t h e
same as the size of the OHP transparency.
r If a paper misfeed still occurs, contact your sales or service representative.
r Do not touch the photoconductor
unit when removing misfed paper.
If you do, the photoconductor unit
might be damaged.
r Exposing the photoconductor unit
to light for too long can reduce its
performance. Close the cover as
quickly as possible.
r After removing the misfed paper,
the back sides of the next printout
might get dirty. Print a few pages
to absorb the toner.
When the Message "Remove
Misfeed From Paper Tray"
Appears
Standard tray (Tray 1) or paper feed unit
(Tray 2/3)
A Slide out the paper tray gently so
as not to tear the misfed paper,
and remove the misfed paper.
Confirm that you do not leave any
misfed paper in the printer.
• When removing misfed paper, do not touch the fusing
section because it could be
very hot.
• When accessing the inside of
the machine, do not touch any
sections other than those
specified in this manual. If you
do, it might result in receiving
a burn or injury.
TFWY170ERemoving Misfed Paper
59
4
Note
r If the printer has the optional
paper feed unit installed, check
the all paper trays for misfeeds.
B Slide the paper tray completely
into the printer.
Important
r Be sure to insert the paper tray
completely. If not fully inserted,
mi s f e ed s mig h t o c c u r , o r t h e
front cover might touch the paper tray.
C Open the front cover, and then
close it to reset the misfeed condition.
Bypass tray
A Carefully pull out the misfed paper.
Confirm that you do not leave any
misfed paper in the printer.
BWhen paper is left in the bypass
tray, remove the paper.
C Close the bypass tray, open the
front cover, and then close it to reset the misfeed condition.
D Reload paper into the bypass tray.
When the Message "Open
Front Cover Remove Misfeed"
Appears
R CAUTION:
A Push the front cover release button and open the front cover.
B If the misfed paper is in the front
of the photoconductor unit, carefully pull it out.
Note
r When removing misfed paper,
be careful not to touch the fusing section because it could be
very hot.
TFWY180E
• When removing misfed paper,
do not touch the fusing section
because it could be very hot.
TFWX080E
TFWX210ETroubleshooting
60
4
CWhen the misfed paper is in the
main section of the photoconductor unit, turn the dial downward
then remove it.
Confirm that you do not leave any
misfed paper in the printer.
Note
r If it is difficult to turn the dial,
turn it slightly upward and then
try again.
D Close the front cover.
When the Message "Remove
Misfeed From Output Tray"
Appears
Simplex printer
R CAUTION:
A Open the paper exit cover.
Note
r When opening the paper exit
cover, be careful as it may be
hot.
B Push the front cover release button and open the front cover.
C Turn the dial downward, then rem o v e t h e m i s f e d p a p e r i n t h e
printer.
Note
r When removing misfed paper,
be careful not to touch the fusing section because it could be
very hot.
When you can see the misfed
paper inside the printer
Note
r If it is difficult to turn the dial,
turn it slightly upward and then
try again.
• When removing misfed paper,
do not touch the fusing section
because it could be very hot.
TFWX220E
TFWX230E
TFWX080ERemoving Misfed Paper
61
4
A Remove the misfed paper from
inside of the printer.
While turning the dial, remove
the misfed paper as shown in
the illustration. Be careful not to
leave any misfed paper in the
printer.
Note
r When removing misfed paper, be careful not to touch
the fusing section because it
could be very hot.
When you cannot see the misfed
paper inside the printer
A Remove the misfed paper from
the output tray.
While turning the dial, remove
the misfed paper as shown in
the illustration. Be careful not to
leave any misfed paper in the
printer.
Note
r When removing misfed paper, be careful not to touch
the fusing section because it
could be very hot.
D Close the paper exit cover.
E Close the front cover.
Duplex printer
R CAUTION:
Important
r Symbols R mean a situation that
requires you take care.
r Symbols v mean “Hot surface”.
A Push the paper exit cover release
button and open paper exit cover 1.
Note
r When opening paper exit cover
1, be careful as it may be hot.
TFWX220E
• When removing misfed paper,
do not touch the fusing section
because it could be very hot.
TEWX240E
ZBGY010ETroubleshooting
62
4
B Open paper exit cover 2 inside of
paper exit cover 1.
Note
r When opening paper exit cover
2, be careful not to touch the fusing section because it could be
very hot.
C Push the front cover release button and open the front cover.
DTurn the dial downward, then remove the misfed paper.
Note
r When removing misfed paper,
be careful not to touch the fusing section because it could be
very hot.
When you can see the misfed
paper inside the printer
Note
r If it is difficult to turn the dial,
turn it slightly upward and then
try again.
A Remove the misfed paper from
inside of the printer.
While turning the dial, remove
the misfed paper as shown in
the illustration. Be careful not to
leave any misfed paper in the
printer.
Note
r When removing misfed paper, be careful not to touch
the fusing section because it
could be very hot.
When you cannot see the misfed
paper inside the printer
A Remove the misfed paper from
the output tray.
While turning the dial, remove
the misfed paper as shown in
the illustration. Be careful not to
leave any misfed paper in the
printer.
ZBGY060E
ZBGY011E ZBGY070ERemoving Misfed Paper
63
4
Note
r When removing misfed paper, be careful not to touch
the fusing section because it
could be very hot.
E Close paper exit cover 2 and paper
exit cover 1.
F Close the front cover.
When the Message "Remove
Misfeed Duplex Base Unit"
Appears
R CAUTION:
A Slide out the duplex tray.
B Open the guide in the duplex tray
as shown in the illustration, and
then remove the misfed paper.
CWhile opening the guide in step
B, open the two guides as shown
in the illustration.
D Remove the misfed paper under
the guide while closing towards
you as shown in the illustration.
E Close the guides opened in steps
B and C.
• When removing misfed paper,
do not touch the fusing section
because it could be very hot.
ZBGY080E
ZBGY020E
ZBGY030E
ZBGY031E
ZBGY032ETroubleshooting
64
4
F Open the back guide in the duplex tray as shown in the illustrat i o n , a n d t h e n t h e r e m o v e t h e
misfed paper.
G Open the guide under the back
guide as shown in the illustration,
and then the remove the misfed
paper.
Important
r When removing misfed paper,
handl e the guid e s wi th gr eat
care.
H Close the guides opened in steps
F and G.
I Slide the duplex tray completely
into the printer.
Important
r Be sure to insert the duplex tray
completely. If not fully inserted,
mi s f e ed s mig h t o c c u r , o r t h e
front cover might touch the paper tray.
When the Message "Remove
Misfeed From Rear Cover"
Appears
R CAUTION:
A Open the rear cover, and then remove the misfed paper.
B Close the rear cover.
Push the center of rear cover until
it rocks.
ZBGY040E
ZBGY041E
• When removing misfed paper,
do not touch the fusing section
because it could be very hot.
ZBGY090ECleaning and Adjusting the Printer
65
4
Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer
Cleaning the Friction Pad
If the friction pad becomes dirty, misfeeds or paper multi-feeds might occur. Follow the procedure below to
clean the friction pad.
A Slide the paper tray out until it
stops. After that, lift it slightly,
then slide i t out of the pr in ter .
Then remove paper from the paper tray.
B Clean the friction pad with a soft
damp cloth. After wiping it with a
damp c loth, wipe i t w i th a d ry
cloth to remove the water.
Important
r Do not use chemical cleaners or
organic solvents such as thinner
or benzene.
C Reload paper with the print side
up into the paper tray. While lifting the front side of the tray, ins e r t t h e p a p e r t r a y i n t o t h e
p r i n t e r . T h e n p u s h i n u n t i l i t
stops.
Cleaning the Charger
The charger requires cleaning when
printouts appear dirty.
R CAUTION:
A Push the front cover release button and open the front cover.
Important
r Exposing the photoconductor
unit to light for too long can reduce its performance. Clean the
charger as quickly as possible.
TFWY230E
• When accessing the inside of the
machine, do not touch any sections other than those specified
in this manual. If you do, it might
result in receiving a burn or injury.
TFWX080ETroubleshooting
66
4
B Holding the green inset grips of
the photoconductor unit, pull the
top side of the unit forward.
CMove the light blue charger
cleaner left and right about ten
t ime s , a n d r e t u r n i t to t h e le f t
s i d e . A l i g n t h e a r r o w o n t h e
charger cleaner to the arrow on
the photoconductor unit.
Important
r If the charger cleaner is not on
the left side, an error message or
print problem might occur.
D Holding the green inset grips of
the photoconductor unit, push the
unit back to its original position.
E Close the front cover.
Cleaning the Dust-Proofing
Glass
The dust-proofing glass may require
cleaning if black or white lines appear
on the print side of the document.
R CAUTION:
A Push the front cover release button and open the front cover.
Important
r Exposing the photoconductor
unit to light for too long can reduce its performance. Clean the
dust-proofing glass as quickly
as possible.
B Holding the green inset grips of
the photoconductor unit, pull the
top side of the unit forward.
TFWX250E
TFWX260E
• When accessing the inside of the
machine, do not touch any sections other than those specified
in this manual. If you do, it might
result in receiving a burn or injury.
TFWX080E
TFWX250ECleaning and Adjusting the Printer
67
4
C Remove the cleaning brush from
back of the front cover.
D Insert the cleaning brush into the
back of the light blue guide until
it stops, and then move it left and
right four or five times.
E Return the cleaning brush to its
original position.
F Holding the green inset grips of
the photoconductor unit, push the
unit back to its original position.
G Close the front cover.
Adjusting the Image Density
Changing the image density setting
might cause a deterioration of color
b a l a n c e . We r e c omme n d t h a t y o u
normally leave the image density at
its factory default setting.
The following procedure describes
how to change the magenta image
density. You can use the same procedure to change the image density for
the other toner colors as well.
Important
r Extreme settings may create output that appears dirty.
r Image density settings should be
made from the application or the
printer driver whenever possible.
A Turn on the printer's power
switch.
B Press {Menu}.
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
IPDL-C Menu l
C Press {T} or {U} to display
"Maintenance", and then pr ess
{Enter}.
j
Maintenance l
TFWX270E
TFWX280E
TFWS020E
Data In
On Line Reset Escape
Menu Media
Power
Enter
ErrorTroubleshooting
68
4
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
1.Reinstall l
D Press {T} or {U} to display
"3.Toner Level", and then press
{Enter}.
j
3.Toner Level l
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
Cyan l
E Press {T} or {U} to display "Magenta", and then press {Enter}.
The following message appears on
the panel display.
jl/#
-<-----g----->+
F Press {U} or {T} to adjust the
toner density, and then press {Enter}.
The "Toner Level" menu appears.
Note
r To make the image density
darker, press {UU} to move the g
symbol to the right. To make it
lighter, press {TT} to move the g
symbol to the left.
G Press {On Line}.
The "Ready" message appears on
the panel display.
Setting the Toner Empty Menu
Use this setting to specify whether the
printer stops printing and displays an
error message when toner runs out.
By default it does not, but you can
change this by carrying out the following procedure.
A Turn on the printer's power
switch.
B Press {Menu}.
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
IPDL-C Menu l
C Press {T} or {U} to display
"Maintenance", and then pr ess
{Enter}.
j
Maintenance l
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
1.Reinstall l
D Press {T} or {U} to display
"5.Toner Empty", and then press
{Enter}.
j
5.Toner Empty l
TFWS020E
Data In
On Line Reset Escape
Menu Media
Power
Enter
ErrorCleaning and Adjusting the Printer
69
4
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
Continue l
E Press {T} or {U} to display
"Stop", and then press {Enter}.
j
Stop l
This setting is available and returns to the “Maintenance” menu.
F Press {On Line}.
The "Ready" message appears on
the panel display.
Adjusting the Setting of
Registration of the Paper Tray
Follow the procedure below to bala n c e t h e p r i n t i n g m a r g i n s t o t h a t
printed images are centered correctly
on the page. You should do this after:
• Replacing the photoconductor unit
• Installing the optional paper tray
The following procedure describes
how to adjust the standard tray (Tray
1). You can use the same procedure to
adjust the other tray as well.
Important
r Select the tray with ”Paper Tray”
with the operation panel (? P.83),
and then print the configuration
page (? P.99).
Note
r Use A4 or 8
1
/2”×11” paper to print
the configuration page.
ATurn on the printer's power switch.
B Press {Menu}.
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
IPDL-C Menu l
C Press {T} or {U} to display "List
Print", and then press {Enter}.
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
1.Config.Page l
D After confirming that "1.Config.Page" is displayed, press {Enter}.
E Press {Enter} again.
This prints the configuration page.
Important
r If printing does not start, check
the panel display for any error
messages and take the action required to correct the problem.
? P.38 “Error & Status Messages
on the Operation Panel”
TFWS020E
Data In
On Line Reset Escape
Menu Media
Power
Enter
ErrorTroubleshooting
70
4
F After confirming that "1.Config.Page" is displayed, press {Escape}.
T h e f o l l o wi n g t h e me s s a g e a p -
pears on the panel display.
j
List Print l
GYou can find the crop marks on
the long edge of the configuration
page. Check if the left and right
margins on the long edge of the
configuration page are as shown
in the illustration.
H If the left and right margins are
not the same, press {U} or {T} to
display "Maintenance", and then
press {Enter}.
j
Maintenance l
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
1.Reinstall l
I Press {T} or {U} to display
"4.Registration", and then press
{Enter}.
j
4.Registrationl
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
Byps.:Vert. l
J Press {T} or {U} to display the
name of the tray whose margins
y o u wa n t t o b a l a n c e , a n d t h e n
press {Enter}.
The following message appears on
the panel display.
jl/# 0
K Press {U} or {T} to balance the
margins, and then press {Enter}.
One is equal to 0.2 mm.
Note
r The “Vert.” (vertical) setting
can be changed from -9 to +9,
and the “Horiz.” (horizontal)
setting can be changed from -10
to +10.
L Press {Enter}.
Press # key
This prints the configuration page
with the new setting and returns to
the “Registration” menu.
M Confirm of the registration. If you
change the setting, press {Enter}
and repeat steps K and L. If you
finish, go to step N.
N Press {On Line}.
The "Ready" message appears on
the panel display.Replacing Consumables
71
4
Replacing Consumables
Replacing Toner Cartridge
Replace a toner cartridge whenever
the following messages appear on the
panel display.
IPDL-C
Low on:xxx
Add Toner
xxx
R WARNING:
Note
r Before removing a toner cartridge
from the printer, spread paper or
som e other mat er ial ar ound the
area you are working to keep toner
from making floor dirty.
r In the “Low on:xxx” message,
“xxx” r e f e r s to wh i ch car t r idg e
needs replacing:
• C: cyan
• M: magenta
• Y: yellow
• K: black
r When several toner colors run out
at the same time, a message appears on the operation panel. Replace them in the following order:
A Black
B Yellow
C Cyan
D Magenta
r If you do not have all the required
replacement cartridges, you can
choose which ones you want to replace. ? P.71 “Replacing Toner Cartridge”
A Open the left cover.
B Slide the lock lever up.
C Carefully pull out the toner cartridge.
A Holding the toner cartridge
grip, slide it out until you can
see the green tape.
• Do not incinerate spilled toner
or used toner. Toner dust
might ignite when exposed to
an open flame.
• Disposal can take place at our
authorized dealer or at appropriate collection sites.
• If you dispose of the used toner containers yourself, dispose of them according to
your local regulations. TFWX140E
TFWX150ETroubleshooting
72
4
B With your hand under the
green tape, carefully remove
the toner cartridge as shown in
the illustration.
D Remove the protective sheet from
the new toner cartridge.
E Hold the new toner cartridge and
shake it from side to side about
ten times as shown in the illustration.
Important
r Do not touch the roller (A) or
the print quality might be reduced.
r If the toner cartridge is not
shaken enough, toner might not
be evenly distributed in the cart r idg e . In th i s c a s e , th e p r in t
quality might be reduced.
F Gently slide the new toner cartridge into the printer.
G Return the lock lever to its original position.
H Pull the tape out as shown in the
illustration.
TFWX480E
TFWX490E
TFWX501E
A
TFWX160E
TFWX170E
TFWX510EReplacing Consumables
73
4
Important
r Be sure to pull the tape horizont a l l y . P u l l i n g i t u p w a r d o r
downward causes toner scattering.
r After pulling the tape out of the
cartridge, toner scatters easily.
Do not shake or apply a shock to
the cartridge.
I Close the left cover.
The ”Low on:xxx” or “Add Toner
xxx” message clears from the panel
d i s p l a y a n d t h e p r i n t e r s t a r t s
warming up. It takes a few minutes.
Replacing a specific toner cartridge
When several toner colors run out at
the same time and you do not have all
the required replacement cartridges,
follow these steps before carrying out
the procedure on P.71 “Replacing Toner Cartridge” to specify the cartridge
you want to replace.
The following procedure describes
how to replace the magenta toner cartridge. You can use the same procedure to replace the toner cartridges
for the other toner colors as well.
A Press {Menu}.
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
IPDL-C Menu l
B Press {T} or {U} to display
"Maintenance", and then pr ess
{Enter}.
j
Maintenance l
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
1.Reinstall l
C Press {T} or {U} to display
"2.Toner Select", and then press
{Enter}.
j
2.Toner Selectl
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
Cyan l
D Press {T} or {U} to display "Magenta”, and then press {Enter}.
The printer prepares itself for a
new toner cartridge. Prepare the
new toner cartridge for installation.
Please Wait
When the printer is ready, the following message is displayed.
Add Toner
E Replace the toner cartridge. ?
P.71 “Replacing Toner Cartridge”
TFWS020E
Data In
On Line Reset Escape
Menu Media
Power
Enter
ErrorTroubleshooting
74
4
Replacing the Photoconductor
Unit
The message shown below indicates
that the photoconductor unit is approaching the end of its life.
IPDL-C
Change PCU
You can still continue to use the current photoconductor unit if you are
satisfied with the quality of the output being produced by the printer.
When the printed image starts looking soiled (horizontal lines along the
edges of the page, for example), rep l a c e t h e p h o t o c o n d u c t o r u n i t a s
soon as possible.
R WARNING:
R CAUTION:
Important
r Exposing the photoconductor unit
to light for too long can reduce its
performance. Replace the unit as
quickly as possible.
Note
r Before removing the photoconductor unit from the printer, spread
p a p e r o r s o m e o t h e r m a t e r i a l
around the area you are working
to keep toner from making floor
dirty.
r The “Change PCU” message is
based on a printed page counter
kept internally by the printer. It is
meant as a general guide to photoconductor uni t l if e only. Actual
photoconductor unit life depends
on the printing conditions.
A Remove the new photoconductor
unit from the box.
B Pull the red tab to remove the protective sheet from the new photoconductor unit.
C Turn off the printer's power switch.
D Push the front cover release button and open the front cover.
• Do not incinerate the photoconductor unit. Toner dust
might ignite when exposed to
an open flame.
• Disposal can take place at our
authorized dealer or at appropriate collection sites.
• If you dispose the used photoconductor unit yourself, dispose of it according to your
local regulations.
• When accessing the inside of the
machine, do not touch any sections other than those specified
in this manual. If you do, it might
result in receiving a burn or injury.
TFWX472E
TFWX080EReplacing Consumables
75
4
E Loosen the screws that hold the
photoconductor unit in the printer wi th the screw d r iver in the
new photoconductor unit's box.
The screws cannot be completely
removed from the photoconductor
unit.
F Holding the green inset grips of
the photoconductor unit, pull the
top of the unit forward.
G Holding the green inset grips of
the photoconductor unit, remove
t h e u n i t f r om t h e p r i n t e r , a n d
place it carefully inside the new
photoconductor unit's box.
Important
r To prevent accidental scattering
of toner, do not shake, rotate,
drop or hold the toner cartridge
upside down.
Note
r Do not close the front cover rem o v i n g t h e p h o t o c o n d u c t o r
unit. Otherwise, you cannot replace the photoconductor unit
b e c a u s e t h e p h o t o c o n d u c t o r
unit holder will be closed. If you
do this by mistake, return the
photoconductor unit holder to
its original position before rep l a c i n g t h e p h o t o c o n d u c t o r
unit.
TFWX401E
TFWX250E
TYWX290E
TFWX520E
TFWX300ETroubleshooting
76
4
H Holding the green inset grips of
the new photoconductor unit, insert the unit into the photoconductor unit holder.
When inserting the photoconductor unit, be careful not to damage
the surface of it.
Note
r The white powder on the photoconductor unit is to protect it after installation into the printer.
T h i s w h i t e p o wd e r d o e s n o t
have any adverse effect on the
interior of the printer.
I Holding the green inset grips of
t h e n ew p h o t o c o n d u c t o r u n i t ,
push the unit back to its original
position.
J Fasten the screws using the screw
driver to fix the photoconductor
unit.
K Close the front cover.
Confirm that the front cover closes
properly.
LTurn on the printer’s power switch.
Replacing the Fuser Oil Bottle
and Ozone Filter
Replace the oil bottle and ozone filter
whenever the following messages appear on the panel display.
IPDL-C
Add FuserOil
Add Fuser Oil
There are the fuser oil bottle and the
ozone filter in the Fuser Oil Type306
includes a fuser oil bottle and ozone
filters.
R WARNING:
R CAUTION:
Important
r There are three ozone filters in this
printer. Two of them are set inside
in the front, one of them is set in
the rear. Be careful when replacing
the ozone filters as the front side
filter is a different shape from the
rear side filter.
TFWX305E
• Do not incinerate the oil bottle.
This action could cause a fire
or getting burned.
• Spilt oil is very slippery. If oil
is spilt, wipe it with alkaline
cleaner. Otherwise, the oily
surfaces can create the danger of slipping and personal
injury.
• When accessing the inside of the
machine, do not touch any sections other than those specified
in this manual. If you do, it might
result in receiving a burn or injury.Replacing Consumables
77
4
r Disposal can take place at our authorized dealer or at appropriate
collection sites.
r Dispose of used ozone filters as
general burnable refuse.
ATurn off the printer's power
switch.
B Replace the oil bottle.
A Remove the green cap from the
new oil bottle.
Important
r Hold the clear cap while
turning the green cap. Do not
remove the clear cap.
B Open the fuser oil bottle cover
of the printer.
C Remove the used oil bottle
from the printer carefully.
D Insert the new oil bottle into
the oil bottle case.
E Close the fuser oil bottle cover.
Important
r The fuser oil bottle cover
should be kept closed.
C Replace the ozone filter on the
rear of the printer.
A Remove the ventilator hole
cover.
v Simplex printer
v Duplex printer
TFWX031E
TFWX090E
TFWX100E
ZBGX050E
ZBGX060ETroubleshooting
78
4
B Remove the ozone filter from
inside the ventilator hole cover.
C Install a new ozone filter on
the ventilator hole cover.
D Return the ventilator hole cover its original position.
D Replace the two ozone filters inside the printer.
A Push the front cover release button and open the front cover.
B Grasping the ozone filter by its
tab, remove it from the printer.
C Insert a new ozone filter into
the printer.
Slide the filter into the stopper.
Two small thin plastic tabs of
the top of the filter should click
into place.
D Close the front cover.
C o n f i rm t h a t t h e f r o n t c o v e r
close properly.
E Turn on the printer’s power
switch.
Note
r After replace the fuser oil bottle,
it takes a few minutes until the
message clears.
Replacing the Waste Toner
Bottle
Replace the waste toner bottle whenever the following messages appear
on the panel display.
IPDL-C
Waste T Full
Waste Toner is
Full
TFWX070E
TFWX080E
TFWX310E
TFWX320EReplacing Consumables
79
4
R WARNING:
R CAUTION:
Note
r Before removing the waste toner
bottle from the printer, spread paper or some other material around
the area you are working to keep
toner from making floor dirty.
ATurn off the printer’s power
switch.
B Push the front cover release button and open the front cover.
C Holding the green inset grips of
the photoconductor unit, pull the
top of the unit forward.
D Replace the waste toner bottle.
A Grasping the waste toner bottle by its green tabs, remove it
from the printer.
B Insert a new waste toner bottle
at the rear of the photoconductor unit.
Insert a new waste toner bottle
c omp l e t e l y . Oth e rw i s e , p r in t
problem may occur.
• Do not incinerate spilled toner
or used toner. Toner dust
might ignite when exposed to
an open flame.
• Disposal can take place at our
authorized dealer or at appropriate collection sites.
• If you dispose of the used toner containers yourself, dispose of them according to
your local regulations.
• When accessing the inside of the
machine, do not touch any sections other than those specified
in this manual. If you do, it might
result in receiving a burn or injury.
TFWX080E
TFWX250E
TFWX330E
TFWX340ETroubleshooting
80
4
E Holding the green inset grips of
t h e n ew p h o t o c o n d u c t o r u n i t ,
push the unit back to its original
position.
F Close the front cover.
Confirm that the front cover closes
properly.
GTurn on the printer’s power
switch.
Replacing the Charger
Replace the charger whenever the following message appears on the panel
display.
IPDL-C
Need Chargerr
R WARNING:
R CAUTION:
Note
r Before removing the charger from
the printer, spread paper or some
other material around the area you
are working to keep tone r f rom
making floor dirty.
A Turn off the printer’s power
switch.
B Push the front cover release button and open the front cover.
C Holding the green inset grips of
the photoconductor unit, pull the
top of the unit forward.
• Do not incinerate spilled toner
or used toner. Toner dust
might ignite when exposed to
an open flame.
• Disposal can take place at our
authorized dealer or at appropriate collection sites.
• If you dispose of the used toner containers yourself, dispose of them according to
your local regulations.
• When accessing the inside of the
machine, do not touch any sections other than those specified
in this manual. If you do, it might
result in receiving a burn or injury.
TFWX080E
TFWX250EReplacing Consumables
81
4
D Push the right and left lock levers
of the charger.
The locks release, and the charger
is lifted slightly.
E Remove the charger.
F Install a new charger into the
printer.
Ins e r t th e new charge r into the
p r i n t e r w i t h t h e a r r o w o f t h e
charger cleaner's lever facing toward you. The charger locks automatically.
Note
r Return the charger cleaner to
the left or print problems may
occur.
G Holding the green inset grips of
t h e n ew p h o t o c o n d u c t o r u n i t ,
push the unit back to its original
position.
H Close the front cover.
Confirm that the front cover closes
properly.
I Turn on the printer’s power switch.
J Press {Menu}.
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
IPDL-C Menu l
K Press {T} or {U} to display
“Maintenance”, and then press
{Enter}.
j
Maintenance l
L Confirm that “1.Reinstall” is on
the display, and then press {Enter}.
j
1.Reinstall l
M Press {Enter}.
Charger
N Press {Enter}.
Press # key
The counter is cleared and returns
to the “Maintenance” menu.
O Press {On Line}.
The "Ready" message appears on
the panel display.
TFWX450E
TFWX460E
TFWS020E
Data In
On Line Reset Escape
Menu Media
Power
Enter
ErrorTroubleshooting
82
483
5. Using the Operation Panel
Though the factory default settings of the printer are suitable for most printing
jobs, the printer menu gives you access to a number of settings that control basic
printer operations. The printer menu settings you make are retained even when
you turn off the printer.
This section provides the following printer menu information.
v Setting Menus
Describes the basic procedures for changing the printer menu settings.
v Protecting the Menus
Describes how to protect the “System Menu” settings against accidental
changes.
v Menu Table
A table chart that shows all of the printer menu items.
v Menu Settings
Provides short explanations of each printer menu setting and what it does.
Note
v {Menu} and {Media} setting priorities
Some of the settings accessed by {Menu} can be accessed by {Media}. Settings made by {Menu} take priority over settings by {Media}.
Setting Menu
The following procedure describes how to change the paper size setting when
the paper size dial is set to “p”.
A Press {Menu}.
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
IPDL-C Menu l
TFWS020E
Data In
On Line Reset Escape
Menu Media
Power
Enter
ErrorUsing the Operation Panel
84
5
B Press {T} or {U} to display the screen for the setting you want to change,
and then press {Enter}.
j
System Menu l
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
1.Paper Tray l
C Press {T} or {U} to display the screen for the menu item you want to
change, and then press {Enter}.
j
2.Tray Size[*]l
An asterisk (“*”) is indicated at the left side of the currently selected item.
j
*8.5x13 l
D Press {T} or {U} to display the screen for the setting you want to change,
and then press {Enter}.
j
8.25x13 l
This registers the setting.
E Repeat steps C and D to change other settings.
F Press {On Line}.
The following message appears on the panel display.
Take Offline
Then Press Reset
G Press {On Line}.
The On Line indicator stays off and the printer enters offline.
H Press {Reset}.
This restarts the printer with the new settings.
Note
r You can check the current menu settings by printing a configuration page.
? P.99 “Printing the Configuration Page”Protecting the Menus
85
5
Protecting the Menus
This procedure describes how to protect the System Menu settings against accidental changes. It makes it impossible to change the System Menu settings you
make with the normal procedure unless you perform the required key operation. In a network environment, protecting settings restricts changes to the System Menu settings to network administrators.
Protecting the Menus
A Check if the On Line indicator stays on. If not, press {On Line}.
B Press {Enter}, then {Escape}, and then {Menu}.
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
IPDL-C Menu l
C Press {T} or {U} to display "Maintenance", and then press {Enter}.
j
Maintenance l
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
1.Reinstall l
D Press {T} or {U} to display "7.Menu Protect", and then press {Enter}.
j
7.Menu Protectl
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
Off l
TFWS030E
Data In
On Line Reset Escape
Menu Media
Power
Enter
ErrorUsing the Operation Panel
86
5
E Press {T} or {U} to display "On", and then press {Enter}.
j
On l
This registers the setting and the “Maintenance” menu appears.
F Press {On Line}.
The "Ready" message appears on the panel display.
Removing Protection
A Check if the On Line indicator stays on. If not, press {On Line}.
B Press {Enter}, then {Escape}, and then {Menu}.
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
IPDL-C Menu l
C Press {T} or {U} to display "Maintenance", and then press {Enter}.
j
Maintenance l
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
1.Reinstall l
TFWS030E
Data In
On Line Reset Escape
Menu Media
Power
Enter
ErrorProtecting the Menus
87
5
D Press {T} or {U} to display "7.Menu Protect", and then press {Enter}.
j
7.Menu Protectl
The following message appears on the panel display.M
j
On l
E Press {T} or {U} to display "Off", and then press {Enter}.
j
Off l
This turns off protection and returns to the “Maintenance” menu.
F Press {On Line}.
The "Ready" message appears on the panel display.Using the Operation Panel
88
5
Menu Table
IPDL-C Menu 1. Job Timeout
2. I/O Timeout
RPS2 Menu 1. Color Level
2. Color Mode
3. Color Set
4. ColorProfile
5. Toner Saving
6. Dithering
7. Paper Type
8. Auto Tray SW
9. Duplex Print
*1
A.Duplex Bind
*1
B. Job Timeout
C. I/O Timeout
D. Feed Timeout
E. Print Errors
F. KTalk Mode
*2
G. Parallel IF
H. Parallel IF2
*3
System Menu 1. Paper Tray
2. Tray Size[*]
3. Bypass Use
4. I/O Buffer
5 Energy Saver
6. Energy Level
7. PDL Sensing
8. Transfer
9. Parallel 1
10. Parallel 2
11. Bi-direction
12. OHP SlipMenu Table
89
5
*1
This menu appears when you use the duplex printer.
*2
The setting is not effective.
*3
Available only when the optional parallel interface board is installed in the printer.
*4
This menu appears when {Enter}, {Escape} and {Menu} are pressed while the printer
is online.
*5
If “Log Protect” is set to “On”, this menu will not appear.
*6
Available only when the optional Network Interface Board is installed in the printer.
System Menu 13. PrinterLang.
14. Language
32. IP Address
*6
33. Subnet Mask
*6
34. Gateway Add
*6
35. Access CTL.
*6
36. Access Mask
*6
37. Net Boot
*6
38. Frame NW
*6
39. Active PTL.
*6
Maintenance 1. Reinstall ? P.80 “Replacing the Charger”
2. Toner Select ? P.73 “Replacing a specific toner cartridge”
3. Toner Level ? P.67 “Adjusting the Image Density”
4. Registration ? P.69 “Adjusting the Setting of Registration of
the Paper Tray”
5. Toner Empty ? P.68 “Setting the Toner Empty Menu”
6. Menu Reset ? P.104 “Resetting Menus”
7. Menu Protect
*4
? P.85 “Protecting the Menus”
8. Log Protect
*4
? P.108 “Protecting the User Code Record”
9. Log Clear
*5
? P.109 “Deleting the User Code Record”
10.Ethernet
*4 *6
? P.49 “Printer Does Not Print”
List Print 1. Config.Page ? P.99 “Printing the Configuration Page”
2. Color Sample ? P.103 “Printing the Color Sample”
3. Job Log
4. Statistics
Select PDLUsing the Operation Panel
90
5
Menu Settings
IPDL-C Menu
The following are the settings you can make with “IPDL-C Menu”.
Note
r Italicized settings indicate default settings.
v 1. Job Timeout
You can set how many seconds the printer waits before terminating a print
job when the printer does not receive the end of that print job. “000 Off” is
endless wait. The job is automatically cancelled if time runs out.
• 000 Off
• 1 to 999 seconds by 1
v 2. I/O Timeout
You can set how many seconds the printer waits for more print data before
ending its waiting condition for data and terminating a job. “000 Off” is endless wait. The job is automatically cancelled if no data is received for the selected time.
• 000 Off
• 1 to 999 seconds by 1 (999 seconds)
RPS2 Menu
The following are the settings you can make with “RPS2 Menu”. The settings
made with the printer driver normally take priority, except when a printer driver setting is set to use the printer's settings.
Note
r Italicized settings indicate default settings.
v 1.Color Level
You can select the number of colors used per dot to [1 bit] or [2 bit].
• 1 bit
• 2 bit
v 2.Color Mode
You can select either monochrome or color printing.
• Color
• Black & WhiteMenu Settings
91
5
v 3.Color Set (Color Setting)
You can select the correction method used for converting the RGB data to
CMYK data.
• Off
No modification to the color setting.
• Vivid
Select this setting to perform CMYK conversion with enhanced saturation
and brightness to print vivid colors.
• Super Vivid
Select this setting to perform CMYK conversion. The colors printed with
this setting are more vivid than those printed with the "Vivid" setting. All
of the colors in the image, especially the lighter ones, are emphasized.
• Fine
Select this setting to perform color matching based on the printer's built-in
color rendering dictionaries, and perform CMYK conversion. It makes it
possible to print colors that are close to the displayed colors on the computer screen.
The color rendering dictionaries refer to the contents selected by “ColorProfile”. This setting is useful when the application and printer driver do
not support the color matching features.
Note
r The color rendering dictionary that is selected on “ColorProfile“ is used.
• Super Fine
Like the "Fine" setting, the color rendering dictionary is used, however,
output is more vivid. This setting is enabled to make light colors print
more vivid.
v 4.ColorProfile
You can select the color rendering dictionary (CRD). The CRD is referred to
for color matching, so you should select the appropriate CRD for the document you are printing. The CRD you select is also referred to when “Fine” or
“Super Fine” is selected for “Color Set”.
Note
r When selecting “OHP” as the paper type, the CRD automatically adjusts
to use a color profile specifically for OHP. Even though the color profile
has been optimized for OHP, the adjustments are automatic and are not indicated on any of the dialog boxes. In this case, this setting is not enabled.
• Photograph
Use this setting to enhance the reproduction of photos and graphics that
include midtones.
• Presentation
Use this setting to enhance the reproduction of documents that contain text
and graphics. This CRD is best for printing colored charts, graphs, presentation materials and so on. If you use this CRD for printing photographs,
color gradations might not be reproduced well.Using the Operation Panel
92
5
• Solid Color
Use this setting to print specific colors, logos and so on.
v 5.Toner Saving
You can select whether Toner Saving is available or not.
• Off
• On
Note
r Turning on toner saving can cause the output to become blurred and result
in very thin lines not printing at all. In the case of color printing, toner saving can cause colors to be different from those expected. Because of this,
use toner saving only for proofing and intermediate drafts, and turn it off
for final prints when top quality is important.
v 6.Dithering
You can select the image mode that is best for the type of data you are printing.
• Auto
Select this setting to automatically select a mode that is suitable for printing.
• Photographic
Select this setting to print photographs.
• Text
Select this setting to print text.
v 7.Paper Type
You can select the paper type for printing as: Plain Paper, Thick Paper, or
OHP Transparency.
• Plain Paper
• OHP
• Thick Paper
• Plain (Duplex Backside)
• Thick (Duplex Backside)
Note
r Selecting an OHP Transparency as the paper type automatically adjusts internal settings to use a color profile specifically for OHP. Even though the
color profile has been optimized for OHP, the adjustments are automatic
and are not indicated on any of the dialog boxes. In this case, “ Color Profile” is not enabled.Menu Settings
93
5
v 8.Auto Tray SW (Auto Tray Switch)
You can select whether or not the printer will automatically switch to the other tray if it has the same paper size as the current tray when paper runs out
while printing.
• On
• Off
Note
r To use this feature, the optional tray unit should be installed on the printer,
and paper having the same size and direction should be loaded in both the
standard and optional trays.
v 9.Duplex Print
You can select whether to use the duplex printing or not.
This item can be used only on the duplex printer.
• Off
• On
v A.Duplex Bind
You can select the binding position of duplex prints.
This item can be used only the duplex printer.
• Long Edge
• Short Edge
v B.Job Timeout
You can set how many seconds the printer waits before terminating a print
job when the printer does not receive the end of the current print job. The job
is automatically cancelled if time runs out.
• 000 Off
• 1 to 999 seconds by 1
v C.I/O Timeout
You can set how many seconds the printer waits for more print data before
ending its wait period and terminating a job. The job is automatically cancelled if no data is received for the selected time.
• 000 Off
• 1 to 999 seconds by 1 (300 seconds)
v D.Feed Timeout
You can set how many seconds the printer waits for the correct paper size
loaded, when paper runs out while printing. The job is printed with the paper
currently loaded if the correct size is not loaded within the selected time.
• 000 Off
• 1 to 999 seconds by 1 (60 seconds)Using the Operation Panel
94
5
v E.Print Errors
You can select if an error report should be printed from the current tray when
a PostScript error occurs while printing.
• Off
No error report is printed when an error occurs.
• On
An error report is printed when an error occurs. It uses some of the VM
area to turn this feature on.
v F.KTalk Mode
This setting is not available.
v G.Parallel IF1
You can select the parallel interface timing. When “SystemDefault” is selected, the setting in the “System Menu” is used.
• SystemDefault
• ACK Inside
• ACK Outside
v H.Parallel IF2
You can select the parallel interface timing. When “SystemDefault” is selected, the setting in the “System Menu” is used.
• SystemDefault
• ACK Inside
• ACK Outside
Important
r Do not use the “ACK Outside” setting.
System Menu
The following are the settings you can make with the “System Menu”.
Note
r Italicized settings indicate default settings.
v 1. Paper Tray
You can select the default paper tray that is selected whenever you turn on
the printer.
• Tray1
• Tray2 (option)
• Tray3 (option)
• BypassMenu Settings
95
5
v 2. Tray Size[*]
You can select the size of the paper tray whenever you set the paper size dial
to “p”.
• B4 JIS
• B5 JIS
• 8.5×5.5
• 8x13
• 8.25x13
• 8.5×13
• A5
Note
r The paper size specified here is applied to all paper trays ( Tray 1, 2 and 3
excluding the bypass tray). You cannot select the paper size individually
for each tray.
r A5 and Half Letter are supported only by Tray 1. If you select A5, Tray 2
and 3 ignore the setting, and the default paper size (8.5×13) will be selected
automatically. For more information about loading paper, see P.30 “Loading Paper”.
v 3. Bypass Use
You can select whether or not the printer should be searched the bypass tray
when "Auto Tray Select" is selected in "Paper Tray:" using the printer driver.
Selecting "Manual" is not searched the bypass tray.
The paper size setting selected with the printer driver overrides the one selected with the operation panel.
• Manual
• Auto/Tray
Note
r This item is available when the printer language is set to IPDL-C.
v 4. I/O Buffer
You can select the size of the I/O buffer. Normally it is not necessary to
change this setting.
• 16KB
• 32KB
• 64KB
• 128KB
• 256KB
• 512KBUsing the Operation Panel
96
5
v 5. Energy Saver
You can select after how many minutes the printer should enter the Energy
Saver mode if no operation is performed. The Energy Saver mode reduces
electric power consumption.
• Off
• 5min
• 15min
• 30min
• 45min
• 60min
Important
r After the printer enters Energy Saver mode, it takes some time to warm up
again when print data is received.
v 6. Energy Level
You can select the Energy Saver mode level. “Level 1” is the default setting
and saves more power consumption than ”Level 2”.
• Level 1
• Level 2
Note
r “Level 1” takes about six minutes to return to the ready condition.
r “Level 2” takes about one minute to return to the ready condition.
v 7. PDL Sensing
You can set whether or not the printer will automatically switch the printer
language to the appropriate one for the print jobs.
• Auto
• Manual
v 8. Transfer
You can select the data transfer speed of the parallel interface. If you are having trouble with data transfers, try changing this setting to “Normal”.
• Hi-speed
• Normal
Note
r This setting is effective only for "Parallel 1".
v 9. Parallel 1
You can select the parallel interface timing setting. Normally it is not necessary to change this setting.
• ACK Inside
• ACK Outside
• STB DownMenu Settings
97
5
v 10. Parallel 2
You can select the optional parallel interface timing setting. Normally it is not
necessary to change this setting.
• ACK Inside
• ACK Outside
• STB Down
Note
r Do not use the "ACK Outside" setting.
v 11. Bi-direction
You can select the printer response mode for status fetch requests when the
standard parallel interface is being used. Use the "Standard" setting when you
are experiencing problems while the printer is connected to another manufacturer's print box.
• Original Mode
• Standard
Note
r This setting is effective only for "Parallel 1".
v 12. OHP Slip
OHP Slip is a sheet of paper placed between printed OHP transparencies. You
can turn this function off and on. For more information, see P.83 “Using the
Operation Panel”.
• On
• Off
v 13. PrinterLang.
You can select the printer language that is automatically set when the printer
is turned on.
• IPDL-C
• RPS
v 14. Language
You can select the language of the text that appears on the panel display.
• English
• French
• German
• Italian
• Dutch
• Spanish
• JapaneseUsing the Operation Panel
98
5
v 32. IP Address – 39. Active PTL.
These items appear when the optional Network Interface Board is installed in
the printer.
Reference
? the "Setup Guide" that comes with the printer
Changing the Printer Language
This section describes how to change the printer language on the operation panel. Changing IPDL-C or RICOH-SCRIPT2 (RPS2) is required when you set the
menu for each printer language.
A Press {Menu}.
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
IPDL-C Menu l
B Press {T} or {U} to display "Select PDL", and then press {Enter}.
j
Select PDL l
C Press {T} or {U} to display the printer language you want to use, and then
press {Enter}.
j
Option#1 RPS2 l
D Press {On Line}.
The "Ready" message appears on the panel display.
Confirm that the selected printer language appears on the panel display.
TFWS020E
Data In
On Line Reset Escape
Menu Media
Power
Enter
ErrorPrinting the Configuration Page
99
5
Printing the Configuration Page
Use the following procedure to print the configuration page which shows the
current printer settings.
A Press {Menu}.
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
IPDL-C Menu l
B Press {T} or {U} to display "List Print", and then press {Enter}.
j
List Print l
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
1.Config.Page l
C Confirm that “1.Config.Page” is on the display, and then press {Enter}.
The following message appears on the panel display.
Press # key
D Press {Enter}.
This starts printing the configuration page.
E Press {On Line}.
The "Ready" message appears on the panel display.
TFWS020E
Data In
On Line Reset Escape
Menu Media
Power
Enter
ErrorUsing the Operation Panel
100
5
Interpreting the Configuration Page
Interpreting the Configuration Page/IPDL-C
Reference
v Firmware Version
This shows the printer firmware version.
v Total Installed RAM
This shows the total amount of memory installed in the printer.
v Option Interface
This indicates whether there is an optional parallel interface board or Network Interface Board installed in the printer.
Printer Information
v Tray1, Bypass Tray
This shows the paper sizes specified with the paper size dial and the operation panel for the standard paper tray and the bypass tray.
If you install the paper feed unit, it is described as “Tray2” and/or “Tray3”.
Note
r If "FRE" is indicated for bypass tray, it means "Custom Size" is set for bypass tray. "R" after paper size (A3, for example) means that paper is set in
the short-edge K feed direction.
Paper size Indication on the configuration page
A3K A3R
B4 JISK B4R
A4L A4
B5 JISL B5
A5L A5
B6 JISK B6R
A6K A6R
11"×17"K DLR
8
1
/2"×14"K LGR
8
1
/2"×11"L LTInterpreting the Configuration Page
101
5
v Total Pages
This is the total number of pages printed by the printer to date.
• Color Counter
This is the number of pages printed with full color.
• B/W Counter
This is the number of pages printed with black and white.
v Printer Error
This shows information about the status of consumable items, etc.
Status List
v IPDL-C
This shows current "IPDL-C" settings. ? P.90 “IPDL-C Menu”
v System
This shows current "System Menu" settings. ? P.94 “System Menu”
v Network
These are the settings and status of the optional Network Interface Board.
They appear when an optional Network Interface Board is installed in the
printer.
Error Log
This is a log of printer errors.
5
1
/2"×8
1
/2"L HL
7
1
/4"×10
1
/2"L EX
8"×13"K FR
8
1
/4"×13"K FLR
8
1
/2"×13"K F4R
Custom FRE
Paper size Indication on the configuration pageUsing the Operation Panel
102
5
Interpreting Configuration Page/RICOH-SCRIPT2
v Reference
Shows the printer system version and so on. You can also see the status of the
paper tray.
v Tray Status
Shows the status of the paper trays.
If you install the paper feed unit, it is described as “Tray2” and/or “Tray3”.
If "FRE" is indicated for bypass tray, it means "Custom Size" is set for bypass
tray.
v RPS2 Status
Shows the current settings for the RPS2 mode.
v Memory Status
Shows the amount of printer memory, VM area and so on.
Reference
For more information about printer memory and VM area, see the “Operating Instructions” for RICOH-SCRIPT2 included as a PDF file on the CDROM.
v Font Status
This is not used for this printer.
v Installed Fonts
Shows the fonts installed on the printer.
v Interface Status
Shows that the Network Interface Board is installed.
v Network & TCP/IP Status
Shows the network and TCP/IP items and their settings.
v Netware Status
Shows the NetWare items and their settings.
v NetBEUI Status
Shows the NetBEUI items and their settings.
v AppleTalk Status
Shows the AppleTalk items and their settings.Printing the Color Sample
103
5
Printing the Color Sample
Use the following procedure to print the color sample.
Note
r You should select A4 or 8
1
/2”×11” paper to print the color sample.
A Press {Menu}.
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
IPDL-C Menu l
B Press {T} or {U} to display "List Print", and then press {Enter}.
j
List Print l
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
1.Config.Page l
C Press {T} or {U} to display "2.Color Sample", and then press {Enter}.
j
2.Color Samplel
The following message appears on the panel display.
Press # key
D Press {Enter}.
This starts printing the color sample.
E Press {On Line}.
The "Ready" message appears on the panel display.
TFWS020E
Data In
On Line Reset Escape
Menu Media
Power
Enter
ErrorUsing the Operation Panel
104
5
Resetting Menus
Use the following reset procedure to return the settings of all menus to their initial default settings.
Note
r If menu protection is turned on, you cannot reset menus. Follow the procedure on P.86 “Removing Protection” to turn off menu protection and then follow the procedure below.
Limitation
r The following items do not reset.
• Registration (? P.69)
• Image Density (? P.67)
• Paper Size of the bypass tray (? P.31)
ATurn on the printer’s power switch.
B Press {Menu}.
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
IPDL-C Menu l
C Press {T} or {U} to display "Maintenance", and then press {Enter}.
j
Maintenance l
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
1.Reinstall l
TFWS020E
Data In
On Line Reset Escape
Menu Media
Power
Enter
ErrorResetting Menus
105
5
D Press {T} or {U} to display "6.Menu Reset", and then press {Enter}.
j
6.Menu Reset l
The following message appears on the panel display.
Press # key
E Press {Enter}.
The following message appears on the panel display.
Take Offline
Then Press Reset
This returns to the “Maintenance” menu.
F Press {On Line}.
The "Ready" message appears on the panel display.
G Press {On Line}.
The On Line indicator stays off and the printer enters offline.
H Press {Reset}.
This resets all menus to their initial factory defaults, and returns to the
"Ready" message appears on the panel display.Using the Operation Panel
106
5
Administering Printing by User Code
This printer keeps a record of the number of pages printed under each User
Code set in the printer driver. Using eight digit codes allow you to keep a record
of the number of prints made under each User Code for three types of printing.
There are "Black" (black and white), "Two-color" (two colors or less excluding
black and white) and "Full Color" (three or four colors). By assigning User Codes
to each department or user in the office, for example, you can keep track of the
number of pages printed by each department or user. Up to 100 User Codes are
available.
Important
r If you reinstall the printer driver, reinstall all User Codes.
r With Windows 95/98, you can only change User Codes after reinstalling the
printer driver.
r With Windows 95/98, if the printer name is changed after installing the printer driver, User Codes will be cancelled.
Note
r With Windows 95/98, set User Codes during the IPDL-C printer driver installation.
r With Windows 2000, set User Codes on the [Statistics Code] tab of the Printer
Properties after installing the IPDL-C printer driver.
r With Windows NT 4.0, set User Codes on the [Statistics Code] tab of the Printer
Properties after installing the IPDL-C printer driver.
r With the RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer driver, select whether or not to use fixed
User Code.
r You can view the contents of a statistics report with PRINTER MANAGER
FOR ADMINISTRATOR.
r Using PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR, you can save the report as a CSV file.
Reference
For the name of PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR you use, see
the inside of front cover of this manual.
For more information about PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR,
see PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR Help.Administering Printing by User Code
107
5
Viewing the Number of Pages Printed Under Each User Code
The following procedure describes how to print the list of User Codes and the
number of pages printed under each User Code.
A Press {Menu}.
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
IPDL-C Menu l
B Press {T} or {U} to display "List Print", and then press {Enter}.
j
List Print l
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
1.Config.Page l
C Press {T} or {U} to display "4.Statistics", and then press {Enter}.
j
4.Statistics l
The following message appears on the panel display.
Press # key
D Press {Enter}.
This prints the statistics report.
E Press {On Line}.
The "Ready" message appears on the panel display.
TFWS020E
Data In
On Line Reset Escape
Menu Media
Power
Enter
ErrorUsing the Operation Panel
108
5
Reading the Statistics Report
1. User Code
Shows a list of User Codes. However, if
User Codes have not been configured,
"Other" appears. With RICOH-SCRIPT2,
User Code is fixed to "99999999".
2. Total
Indicates the total number of pages printed in "Black", "Two-color" and "Full Color" for each User Code. "All" indicates the
combined total of printed pages.
3. Black
Indicates the number of pages printed in
black and white.
4. Two-color
Indicates the number of pages printed
with two colors or less (excluding black
and white).
5. Full Color
Indicates the number of pages printed
with three or four colors.
Protecting the User Code Record
This procedure describes how to protect the User Code record against accidental
changes.
A Check if the On Line indicator stays on. If not, press {On Line}.
B Press {Enter}, then {Escape}, and then {Menu}.
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
IPDL-C Menu l
1 2 3 4 5
TFWS030E
Data In
On Line Reset Escape
Menu Media
Power
Enter
ErrorAdministering Printing by User Code
109
5
C Press {T} or {U} to display "Maintenance", and then press {Enter}.
j
Maintenance l
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
1.Reinstall l
D Press {T} or {U} to display "8.Log Protect", and then press {Enter}.
j
8.Log Protect l
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
On l
E Press {T} or {U} to select “On” or “Off”, and then press {Enter}.
j
Off l
This registers the setting and returns to the “Maintenance” menu.
F Press {On Line}.
The "Ready" message appears on the panel display.
Deleting the User Code Record
This procedure describes how to clear the User Code record.
Note
r If “Log Protect" is set to "On", you can not delete the User Code record. Select
"Off" in “Log Protect", and then follow the procedure below. ? P.108 “Protecting the User Code Record”
A Check if the On Line indicator stays on. If not, press {On Line}.Using the Operation Panel
110
5
B Press {Menu}.
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
IPDL-C Menu l
C Press {T} or {U} to display "Maintenance", and then press {Enter}.
j
Maintenance l
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
1.Reinstall l
D Press {T} or {U} to display "9.Log Clear", and then press {Enter}.
j
9.Log Clear l
The following message appears on the panel display.
Press # key
E Press {Enter}.
This clears the User Code record.
F Press {On Line}.
The "Ready" message appears on the panel display.
TFWS020E
Data In
On Line Reset Escape
Menu Media
Power
Enter
ErrorUsing the Job Log
111
5
Using the Job Log
This printer records a job log which shows the time of each print job, the number
of pages, and the current print status of each job. The job log also shows a User
ID for each job, making it easy to find the job in the log.
You can set up a User ID using eight characters or less. It can help you to find
your own jobs among many who share same User Code.
Note
r Set up a User ID with the printer driver when you print.
r You can change the User ID every time you print.
r You can also browse the job log on the computer using PRINTER MANAGER
FOR ADMINISTRATOR/CLIENT.
r Turning off the power or resetting the printer deletes the job log.
Limitation
r Up to 64 User IDs are available at the same time. If the number of IDs exceeds
64, the oldest is deleted.
Reference
For the name of PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR/CLIENT
you use, see the inside of front cover of this manual.
For more information about PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR/CLIENT, see PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR/CLIENT
Help.
Printing the Job Log
The following procedure describes how to print the job log.
A Press {Menu}.
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
IPDL-C Menu l
TFWS020E
Data In
On Line Reset Escape
Menu Media
Power
Enter
ErrorUsing the Operation Panel
112
5
B Press {T} or {U} to display "List Print", and then press {Enter}.
j
List Print l
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
1.Config.Page l
C Press {T} or {U} to display "3.Job Log", and then press {Enter}.
j
3.Job Log l
The following message appears on the panel display.
Press # key
D Press {Enter}.
This prints the job log.
E Press {On Line}.
The "Ready" message appears on the panel display.Using the Job Log
113
5
Reading the Job Log
1. User ID
Shows a list of User IDs. However, if User
IDs have not be en configur ed, " ? " appears. Wiht RICOH-SCRIPT2, User ID is
fixed to “RPS2”.
2. Printer Language
Indi cat e s the pr int e r language , e i the r
IPDL-C or RICOH-SCRIPT2 (RPS2).
3. Request Time
Indicates the time when the job was requested by the printer driver.
Note
r It is not available with RICOHSCRIPT2.
4. Black
Indicates the number of pages printed in
black and white.
5. Two-color
Indicates the number of pages printed
with two colors or less (excluding black
and white).
6. Full Color
Indicates the number of pages printed
with three or four colors.
7. Status
Indicates the current status of each job.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7Using the Operation Panel
114
5115
6. Appendix
Color Guide
Color Printing Basics
Additive (Emitted) and Subtractive (Reflected) Color Models
All light is a mixture of red, green, and blue, which is normally called the RGB
model. When red, green, and blue are of equal intensities, the RGB color model
produces white.
Note
r RGB is also called additive or emitted color. The colors on your computer
screen are produced by varying the intensities of RGB.
Printed color is a mixture of cyan, magenta, and yellow, which is normally called
the CMY color model. When mixed in equal proportions the CMY color model
produces black.
Note
r CMY is also called subtractive or reflective color. The printer uses CMY toner
plus K (black) toner (CMYK color model) to provide full color printing.
red
green blue
yellow
cyan magentaAppendix
116
6
The colors of the RGB color model can be mixed to produce the cyan, magenta,
and yellow of the CMY color model and vice versa. Two colors of one model are
mixed to produce the color of the other model (mixing blue and green produces
cyan, for example). The remaining color is the complement of the color produced (red in this example). Complementary colors are: red and cyan, green and
magenta, blue and yellow.
Printed Color
The printer produces full-color output using four toner colors: cyan, magenta,
yellow, and black. These four colors make up the CMYK color model.
Note
r Mixing CMY in equal proportions should hypothetically produce pure black,
but imperfections in the ink cause an equal measure of these colors to produce
a muddy or dark brown. Black toner is added to the color model in order to
make it possible to produce pure black.
red
cyan
yellow magenta
green blueMemory Capacity and Paper Size
117
6
Memory Capacity and Paper Size
The following table shows the relationship between printable paper sizes and
memory capacity.
s: Printing jobs including large data might not be printed.
I: In the auto duplex printing, printing jobs including large data might not be
printed.
H: In the simplex printing, printing is possible regardless of the data volume.
m: Printing is possible regardless of the data volume.
Resolution 600dpi/Fast 600dpi/Standard
Memory capacity
(MB)
Paper size
32 64 96 128 160 192 256 32 64 96 128 160 192 256
A3 s I m m m m m s s I I I m m
B4 JIS s I m m m m m s s I m m m m
A4 I m m m m m m s I m m m m m
B5 JIS I m m m m m m s I m m m m m
A5 I m m m m m m I m m m m m m
B6 H H H H H H H H H H H H H H
A6 H H H H H H H H H H H H H H
Double Letter s I m m m m m s s I I m m m
Legal s I I m m m m s s m m m m m
Letter I I m m m m m s m m m m m m
Half Letter H H H H H H H H H H H H H H
Executive H H H H H H H s H H H H H H
Folio I I I m m m m s m m m m m m
Foolscap I I I m m m m s m m m m m m
F / GL I I I m m m m s m m m m m m
Com#10 Env H H H H H H H H H H H H H H
DL Env H H H H H H H H H H H H H H
12x18 s H H H H H H s s H H H H H
Custom (Maximum:
297×432 mm)
s H H H H H H s s H H H H HAppendix
118
6
Low Memory
The error message shown below is output by the printer whenever there is not
enough memory to print your data.
The following are the actions you should take when you encounter memory
shortage problems. If these actions do not solve the problem individually, try
them in combination with each other.
A Increase printer memory.
Install the optional memory unit to increase the amount of printer memory .
Reference
For more information about how to install the optional memory unit, see
the "Setup Guide" that comes with the printer.
For more information about kinds of optional memory unit, see P.123 “Options”.
B Change the color level settings.
With the IPDL-C printer driver, the item to be changed differs from depending on the current setting on the [Print Quality] tab.
• If you use [Document Type], change the setting of [Printing Mode] to [Fast].
• If you use [Custom], change the setting of [Resolution:] on the [Quality Setting]
tab to [600 dpi / Fast].
Reference
? The printer driver's Help
With the RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer driver, change the setting of [Gradation] on
the [Device Options] tab.
• If you select [Standard], change the setting to [Fast].
• If you select [Fast], you cannot solve this problem in this setting.
Reference
? "Operating Instructions” for RICOH-SCRIPT2 included as a PDF file
on the CD-ROM
There is not enough memory in your printer to print this page.
Change print quality in the printer driver and try again.
For details, please refer to the troubleshooting section in your manual.Moving and Transporting the Printer
119
6
Moving and Transporting the Printer
R CAUTION:
Important
r Be sure to disconnect all cables from the printer before transporting it.
r The printer is a precision piece of machinery. Take care to avoid damage during shipment.
• It is recommended that at least two persons are used to lift the simplex printer. Otherwise, the printer might fall and cause personal injury.
• It is recommended that at least three persons are used to lift the duplex
printer. Otherwise, the printer might fall and cause personal injury.
• When lifting the machine, use the grips on both sides. The machine could
break or cause an injury if dropped.
• Before moving the machine, unplug the power cord from the outlet. If the
cord is unplugged abruptly, it could become damaged. Damaged plugs or
cords can cause an electrical or fire hazard.
• When you pull out the plug from the socket, grip the plug to avoid damaging
the cord and causing a fire or an electric shock.
• When moving the printer, be sure to keep it level to avoid spilling the fuser
oil. If oil is spilt, wipe it with alkaline cleaner. Otherwise, the oily surfaces
can create the danger of slipping and personal injury.Appendix
120
6
Specifications
Mainframe
v Configuration:
Desktop
v Print process:
Laser beam and dry toner electrical photographic system
v Printing speed:
Simplex Printing
Monochrome: 24 pages per minute
Color: 6 pages per minute
Duplex Printing (only the duplex printer)
Monochrome: 21.7 pages per minute
Color: 5.5 pages per minute
(A4, 8
1
/2"×11")
v Resolution:
600 dpi
v Parallel interface:
Interface
Standard 36-pin printer cable and a parallel port on the host computer
IEEE 1284-B I/F (Compatible, Nibble, ECP)
• Do not use a cable more than 2.5 meters (8.2 feet) long.
v Printer language:
IPDL-C, RICOH-SCRIPT2
v Paper size:
? P.21 “Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer”
v Paper weight:
? P.21 “Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer”
v Power source:
? Inside of the front cover of this manualSpecifications
121
6
v Power consumption:
v Noise emission
*1
v Sound power level
v Sound pressure level
*2
*1
The above measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779 are actual value.
*2
It is measured at the position of the operator.
v Dimensions:
v Simplex printer
Simplex printer Duplex printer
Standby (Maximum) 150 W or less
Printing (Maximum) 1,200 W or less
Printing (Average) 750 W or less
Energy Saver (Maximum) 45 W or less
Simplex printer
Mainframe only
Duplex printer
Mainframe only
During printing 65 dB (A)
Stand-by 43 dB (A)
Simplex printer
Mainframe only
Duplex printer
Mainframe only
During printing 57 dB (A)
Stand-by 33 dB (A)
Width Depth Height
Printer only 660 mm (26") 625 mm (24.6") 475 mm (18.7")
With one optional
paper feed unit
660 mm (26") 625 mm (24.6") 601 mm (23.7")
With two optional
paper feed units
660 mm (26") 625 mm (24.6") 727 mm (28.6")Appendix
122
6
v Duplex printer
Measurement conditions: With the paper tray, bypass tray and output tray
extender opened.
v Weight:
Simplex printer
Approximately 62 kg (136.7 lb) (including consumables)
Duplex printer
Approximately 82 kg (180.8 lb) (including consumables)
v Warm-up time:
Less than 380 seconds (23°C, 73.4°F)
v Paper capacity:
*1
Paper weight: 80 g/m2
, 20 lb
v Paper output capacity:
A4: 250 sheets (80 g/m2
, 20 lb)
A3: 100 sheets (80 g/m2
, 20 lb)
v CPU:
R4310-177 MHz
v Memory:
Simplex printer
Standard 32 MB, up to 256 MB (with the optional SDRAM module)
Duplex printer
Standard 64 MB, up to 256 MB (with the optional SDRAM module)
v Network (an optional Network Interface Board required):
Topology: Ethernet (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
Protocol: TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, AppleTalk
Width Depth Height
Printer only 660 mm (26") 695 mm (27.4") 610 mm (24")
With one optional
paper feed unit
660 mm (26") 695 mm (27.4") 736 mm (29")
With two optional
paper feed units
660 mm (26") 695 mm (27.4") 862 mm (33.9")
Standard paper tray 250 sheets
*1
Bypass tray 50 sheets
*1
Optional paper feed unit × 2 500 sheets × 2
*1 Specifications
123
6
v Optional equipment:
• PAPER FEED UNIT Type305
• Network Interface Board Type306
• IEEE 1284 Parallel Type204
• Printer Feature Expander 185 32MB
• Printer Feature Expander 185 64MB
• Memory Unit TypeA (128MB)
Options
PAPER FEED UNIT Type305
v Paper size:
? P.21 “Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer”
v Paper weight:
? P.21 “Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer”
Network Interface Board Type306
v Topology:
Ethernet (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
v Protocols:
TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, AppleTalk
v Interface connector:
RJ45
v Required cable:
STP (Shielded Twisted-Pair) cable
Category/Type5 or better
*A cable is not enclosed with this option.
IEEE 1284 Parallel Type204
v Mode:
Compatible
v Interface connector:
IEEE 1284–BAppendix
124
6
Printer Feature Expander 185 / Memory Unit TypeA
v Module type:
SO-DIMM (Small Outline Dual-in-line Memory Module)
v Memory type:
SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic RAM)
v Number of pins:
144 pins
v Data width:
64 bitsConsumables
125
6
Consumables
R CAUTION:
v Toner cartridge
*1
For the name of toner cartridges, see the inside of front cover of this manual.
*2
A4 5% test chart, 5 pages/job
Note
r The actual number of printed pages you get from a particular toner cartridge depends on the type and size of paper you are using, the contents of
your print images, and printing environment conditions. The life of a toner
cartridge also shortens as the cartridge becomes older. All this means that
a toner cartridge might require replacement sooner than the normal life described above.
r Toner cartridges that come with the printer are for setup purposes, and
will not provide the number of pages described above. The average number of printable pages that can be expected from the toner cartridges included in the printer are as follows:
• Black toner cartridge : about 6,000 pages
• Cyan, magenta and yellow toner cartridges : about 3,000 pages for each
• Our products are engineered to meet the highest standards of quality and
functionality. When purchasing expendable supplies, we recommend using
only those specified by an authorized dealer.
Toner cartridge
*1
Average printable number of pages per cartridge
*2
Cyan 17,000 pages
Magenta 17,000 pages
Yellow 17,000 pages
Black 17,000 pagesAppendix
126
6
v Other consumables
Note
r Actual life of consumables depends on the type and size of paper you are
using, the contents of your print images, and printing environment conditions. The life of consumables also shortens as the consumables become
older. All that means that consumables might require replacement sooner
than the life indicated.
*1
For the name of consumables, see the inside of front cover of this manual.
*2
A4 5% test chart, 5 pages/job, for monochrome printing
Consumables
*1
Service life
*2
Waste toner bottle 72,000 pages
Photoconductor unit 72,000 pages
Fuser oil 20,000 pages
Charger unit 24,000 pages127
INDEX
A
adhesive labels, 25
AppleTalk Status, 102
Auto Tray SW, 93
B
Bi-direction, 97
Bypass Tray, 100
bypass tray, 32
Bypass Use, 95
C
charger, 65, 80
cleaning, 65
CMY, 115
CMY color model, 115
Color Level, 90
Color Mode, 90
color models, 115
ColorProfile, 91
color sample, 103
Color Set, 91
configuration page, 99, 100
custom size paper, 31
D
Dithering, 92
Duplex Bind, 93
Duplex Print, 93
dust-proofing glass, 66
E
Energy Level, 96
Energy Saver, 96
envelopes, 27
Error Log, 101
error messages, 37
F
Feed Timeout, 93
Firmware Version, 100
Font Status, 102
friction pad, 65
fuser oil bottle, 76
I
IEEE 1284 Parallel Type204, 123
image density, 67
Installed Fonts, 102
Interface Status, 102
I/O Buffer, 95
I/O Timeout, 90, 93
IPDL-C, 101
IPDL-C Menu, 90
IPDL-C printer driver
Windows 2000, uninstall, 1
Windows 95/98, uninstall, 1
Windows NT 4.0, uninstall, 2
J
job log, 111
Job Timeout, 90, 93
K
KTalk Mode, 94
L
Language, 97
M
Macintosh
cancel a print job, 19
RICOH-SCRIPT2, set up, 15
RICOH-SCRIPT2, uninstall, 4
media, 21
memory, 118
memory capacity, 117
Memory Status, 102
Memory Unit TypeA, 124
misfed paper, 58
N
NetBEUI Status, 102
Netware Status, 102
Network, 101
Network Interface Board
Operating Instructions, v
Network Interface Board Type306, 123
Network & TCP/IP Status, 102128
O
OHP Slip, 97
OHP transparencies, 26
Option Interface, 100
output tray extender, 35
ozone filter, 76
P
paper, 21, 30
PAPER FEED UNIT Type305, 123
paper, sizes, types, 21
Paper Tray, 94
paper tray, 30
Paper Type, 92
Parallel 1, 96
Parallel 2, 97
Parallel IF1, 94
Parallel IF2, 94
PDL Sensing, 96
photoconductor unit, 74
plain paper, 25
printable area, 29
Printer Error, 101
Printer Feature Expander 185, 124
Printer Information, 100
PrinterLang., 97
Printer Reference, v
Print Errors, 94
printer settings, 83
Q
Quick Installation Guide, v
R
Reference, 100, 102
Registration, 69
replace, 71
charger, 80
fuser oil bottle, 76
ozone filter, 76
photoconductor unit, 74
toner cartridge, 71
waste toner bottle, 78
RGB, 115
RGB color model, 115
RICOH-SCRIPT2
Operating Instructions, v
RICOH-SCRIPT2 printer driver
Macintosh, uninstall, 4
Windows 2000, uninstall, 3
Windows 95/98, uninstall, 3
Windows NT 4.0, uninstall, 4
RPS2 Menu, 90
RPS2 Status, 102
S
Select PDL, 98
Setup Guide, v
small size print area, 15
statistics report, 108
Status List, 101
status messages, 37
System, 101
System Menu, 94
T
telnet, 44, 47
thick paper, 25
toner cartridge, 71
Toner Empty, 68
TonerSaving, 92
Total Installed RAM, 100
Total Pages, 101
Transfer, 96
Tray 1, 100
Tray Size, 95
Tray Status, 102
U
uninstall
Macintosh, RICOH-SCRIPT2, 4
Windows 2000, IPDL-C, 1
Windows 2000, RICOH-SCRIPT2, 3
Windows 95/98, IPDL-C, 1
Windows 95/98, RICOH-SCRIPT2, 3
Windows NT 4.0, IPDL-C, 2
Windows NT 4.0, RICOH-SCRIPT2, 4
User Code, 106
W
waste toner bottle, 78
Windows 2000
cancel a print job, 17
IPDL-C, properties, 6
IPDL-C, uninstall, 1
RICOH-SCRIPT2, properties, 11
RICOH-SCRIPT2, uninstall, 3129
Windows 95/98
cancel a print job, 17
IPDL-C , properties, 5
IPDL-C, uninstall, 1
RICOH-SCRIPT2, properties, 10
RICOH-SCRIPT2, uninstall, 3
Windows NT 4.0
cancel a print job, 18
IPDL-C, properties, 8
IPDL-C, uninstall, 2
RICOH-SCRIPT2, properties, 13
RICOH-SCRIPT2, uninstall, 4130 UE USA G048Note to users in the United States of America
Notice:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one more of
the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Caution (in case of 100BaseTX environment):
Properly shielded and grounded cables (STP) and connectors must be used for connections to host
computer (and/or peripheral) in order to meet FCC emission limits.
Declaration of Conformity
Product Name: COLOR LASER AP306/AP306D
Model Number: G047-17, G048-17
Responsible party: Ricoh Corporation
Address: 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, NJ 07006
Telephone number: 973-882-2000
This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Properly shielded cables must be used for connections to host computer (and/or peripheral)
in order to meet FCC emission limits.
Network interface cable with ferrite core must be used for RF interference suppression.
Note to users in Canada
Note:
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada
Avertissement:
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
a means POWER ON.
b means POWER OFF.
Copyright © 2000 Ricoh Co., Ltd.RICOH COLOR LASER AP306/AP306D Operating Instructions
RICOH COMPANY, LTD.
15-5, 1 chome, Minami-Aoyama, Minato-ku, Tokyo
Telephone: Tokyo 3479-3111
Overseas Affiliates
U.S.A.
RICOH CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place
West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006
Phone: +1-973-882-2000
The Netherlands
RICOH EUROPE B.V.
Groenelaan 3, 1186 AA, Amstelveen
Phone: +31-(0)20-5474111
United Kingdom
RICOH UK LTD.
Ricoh House,
1 Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham,
Middlesex, TW13 7HG
Phone: +44-(0)181-261-4000
Germany
RICOH DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Mergenthalerallee 38-40,
65760 Eschborn
Phone: +49-(0)6196-9060
France
RICOH FRANCE S.A.
383, Avenue du Général de Gaulle
BP 307-92143 Clamart Cedex
Phone: +33-(0)1-40-94-38-38
Spain
RICOH ESPAÑA S.A.
Avda. Litoral Mar, 12-14,
08005 Barcelona
Phone: +34-(0)93-295-7600
Italy
RICOH ITALIA SpA
Via della Metallurgia 12,
37139 Verona
Phone: +39-045-8181500
Hong Kong
RICOH HONG KONG LTD.
23/F., China Overseas Building,
139, Hennessy Road,
Wan Chai, Hong Kong
Phone: +852-2862-2888
Singapore
RICOH ASIA PACIFIC PTE.LTD.
260 Orchard Road,
#15-01/02 The Heeren,
Singapore 238855
Phone: +65-830-5888
Model number: G047-17, G048-17
UE USA G048-8617
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future
reference.
For safety, please follow the instructions in this manual.RICOH COLOR LASER AP305 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
RICOH COMPANY, LTD.
15-5, 1 chome, Minami-Aoyama, Minato-ku, Tokyo
Telephone: Tokyo 3479-3111
Overseas Affiliates
U.S.A.
RICOH CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place
West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006
Phone: +1-973-882-2000
The Netherlands
RICOH EUROPE B.V.
Groenelaan 3, 1186 AA, Amstelveen
Phone: +31-(0)20-5474111
United Kingdom
RICOH UK LTD.
Ricoh House,
1 Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham,
Middlesex, TW13 7HG
Phone: +44-(0)181-261-4000
Germany
RICOH DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Mergenthalerallee 38-40,
65760 Eschborn
Phone: +49-(0)6196-9060
France
RICOH FRANCE S.A.
383, Avenue du Général de Gaulle
BP 307-92143 Clamart Cedex
Phone: +33-(0)1-40-94-38-38
Spain
RICOH ESPAÑA S.A.
Avda. Litoral Mar, 12-14,
08005 Barcelona
Phone: +34-(0)93-295-7600
Italy
RICOH ITALIA SpA
Via della Metallurgia 12,
37139 Verona
Phone: +39-(0)45-8181500
Hong Kong
RICOH HONG KONG LTD.
23/F., China Overseas Building,
139, Hennessy Road,
Wan Chai, Hong Kong
Phone: +852-2862-2888
Singapore
RICOH ASIA PACIFIC PTE.LTD.
260 Orchard Road,
#15-01/02 The Heeren,
Singapore 238855
Phone: +65-830-5888
Model number: G024–57
Printed in Japan
UE USA G024-8607Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To get
maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in
this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Please read the Safety Information before using this machine. It contains important information related
to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.
Power Source
120 V, 60 Hz, 10 A or more
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above.
Operator Safety:
This machine is considered a CDRH class I laser device, safe for office/ EDP use. The machine contains 10-milliwatt, 760 - 800 nanometer wavelength, GaAIAs laser diode. Direct (or indirect reflected)
eye contact with the laser beam might cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and interlock
mechanisms have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
Laser Safety:
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical unit
in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite
equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser
chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis
and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement or the optical subsystem is required.
Important
Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable
for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating
the machine.
Caution:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Do not attempt any maintenance or troubleshooting other than that mentioned in this manual. This machine contains a laser beam generator and direct exposure to laser beams can cause permanent eye
damage.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the Inch version.
Ricoh shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts other
than genuine Ricoh parts in your Ricoh office product.
For good copy quality, Ricoh recommends that you use genuine Ricoh toner.Note to users in the United States of America
Notice:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Caution (in case of 100BaseTX environment):
Properly shielded and grounded cables (STP) and connectors must be used for connections to host computer (and/
or peripheral) in order to meet FCC emission limits.
Declaration of Conformity
Product Name: Printer
Model Number: G024–57
Responsible party: Ricoh Corporation
Address: 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, NJ 07006
Telephone number: 973-882-2000
This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Properly shielded cables must be used for connections to host computer (and/or peripheral) in order to
meet FCC emission limits.
Network interface cable with ferrite core must be used for RF interference suppression.
Note to users in Canada
Note:
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada
Avertissement:
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
means POWER ON.
means POWER OFF. Copyright © 1999 Ricoh Co., Ltd.Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To get
maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in
this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Please read the Safety Information before using this machine. It contains important information related
to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.
Power Source
120 V, 60 Hz, 10 A or more
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above.
Operator Safety:
This machine is considered a CDRH class I laser device, safe for office/ EDP use. The machine contains 10-milliwatt, 760 - 800 nanometer wavelength, GaAIAs laser diode. Direct (or indirect reflected)
eye contact with the laser beam might cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and interlock
mechanisms have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
Laser Safety:
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical unit
in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite
equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser
chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis
and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement or the optical subsystem is required.
Important
Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable
for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating
the machine.
Caution:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Do not attempt any maintenance or troubleshooting other than that mentioned in this manual. This machine contains a laser beam generator and direct exposure to laser beams can cause permanent eye
damage.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the Inch version.
Savin shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts other
than genuine Savin parts in your Savin office product.
For good copy quality, Savin recommends that you use genuine Savin toner.Note to users in the United States of America
Notice:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Caution (in case of 100BaseTX environment):
Properly shielded and grounded cables (STP) and connectors must be used for connections to host computer (and/
or peripheral) in order to meet FCC emission limits.
Declaration of Conformity
Product Name: Printer
Model Number: G024–57
Responsible party: Ricoh Corporation
Address: 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, NJ 07006
Telephone number: 973-882-2000
This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Properly shielded cables must be used for connections to host computer (and/or peripheral) in order to
meet FCC emission limits.
Network interface cable with ferrite core must be used for RF interference suppression.
Note to users in Canada
Note:
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada
Avertissement:
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
means POWER ON.
means POWER OFF.Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To get
maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in
this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Please read the Safety Information before using this machine. It contains important information related
to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.
Power Source
120 V, 60 Hz, 10 A or more
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above.
Operator Safety:
This machine is considered a CDRH class I laser device, safe for office/ EDP use. The machine contains 10-milliwatt, 760 - 800 nanometer wavelength, GaAIAs laser diode. Direct (or indirect reflected)
eye contact with the laser beam might cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and interlock
mechanisms have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
Laser Safety:
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical unit
in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite
equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser
chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis
and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement or the optical subsystem is required.
Important
Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable
for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating
the machine.
Caution:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Do not attempt any maintenance or troubleshooting other than that mentioned in this manual. This machine contains a laser beam generator and direct exposure to laser beams can cause permanent eye
damage.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the Inch version.
Gestetner shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts
other than genuine Gestetner parts in your Gestetner office product.
For good copy quality, Gestetner recommends that you use genuine Gestetner toner.Note to users in the United States of America
Notice:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Caution (in case of 100BaseTX environment):
Properly shielded and grounded cables (STP) and connectors must be used for connections to host computer (and/
or peripheral) in order to meet FCC emission limits.
Declaration of Conformity
Product Name: Printer
Model Number: G024–57
Responsible party: Ricoh Corporation
Address: 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, NJ 07006
Telephone number: 973-882-2000
This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Properly shielded cables must be used for connections to host computer (and/or peripheral) in order to
meet FCC emission limits.
Network interface cable with ferrite core must be used for RF interference suppression.
Note to users in Canada
Note:
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada
Avertissement:
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
means POWER ON.
means POWER OFF.i
Trademarks
Microsoft®
, Windows®
, Windows NT®
, and MS-DOS®
are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
PostScript®
is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems. Incorporated.
AppleTalk, Apple, and TrueType are registered trademarks of Apple Computer,
Incorporated.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might
be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights in
those marks.
Notes:
Some illustrations might be slightly different from your machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Notes:
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• Microsoft®
Windows®
95 operating system
• Microsoft®
Windows®
98 operating system
• Microsoft®
Windows®
for Workgroups operating system Version 3.11
• Microsoft®
Windows NT®
Server network operating system Version 4.0
• Microsoft®
Windows NT®
Workstation operating system Version 4.0ii
Safety Information
When using your equipment, the following safety precautions should always be
followed.
Safety During Operation
In this manual, the following important symbols are used:
R WARNING:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are
not followed, could result in death or serious injury.
R CAUTION:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.iii
R WARNING:
• Connect the power cord directly into a wall outlet and never use an extension cord.
• Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if the
power cable or plug becomes frayed or otherwise damaged.
• To avoid hazardous electric shock or laser radiation exposure, do not
remove any covers or screws other than those specified in this manual.
• Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the
plug, not the cable) if any of the following conditions exists:
• You spill something into the equipment.
• You suspect that your equipment needs service or repair.
• Your equipment's cover has been damaged.
• Do not incinerate spilled toner or used toner. Toner dust might ignite
when exposed to an open flame.
• Disposal can take place at our authorized dealer or at appropriate collection sites.
• If you dispose of the used toner containers yourself, dispose of them
according to your local regulations.iv
R CAUTION:
• Protect the equipment from dampness or wet weather, such as rain, snow,
and so on.
• Unplug the power cord from the wall socket before you move the equipment. While moving the equipment, you should take care that the power
cord will not be damaged under the equipment.
• When you disconnect the power plug from the wall socket, always pull the
plug (not the cable).
• Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small metallic objects to fall inside the equipment.
• Do not eat or swallow toner.
• Keep toner (used or unused) and toner cartridge out of reach of children.
• For environmental reasons, do not dispose of the equipment or expended
supply's wastes at a household waste a collection point. Disposal can take
place at our authorized dealer or at an appropriate collection site.
• Our products are engineered to meet the highest standards of quality and
functionality. When purchasing expendable supplies, we recommend using
only those specified by an authorized dealer.
• The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts with a
label indicating the “hot surface”. Otherwise, it could cause a personal burn.
• If you use this printer in a cold area, leave the printer on. Otherwise, severe
cold might damage sensitive components inside the printer.v
Energy Star Program
Low-power mode (Energy Saver mode)
This printer automatically lowers its power consumption 60 minutes after the
last operation has been completed when the Energy Level is set to level 1. To
exit Low-power (Energy Saver) mode, press any key on the operation panel.
To change the setting of the Energy Saver mode, see P.95 “Making Printer Settings with the Operation Panel”.
Specifications
Recycled Paper
Please contact your sales or service representative for recommended recycled
paper types that may be used in this machine.
As an ENERGY STAR Partner, we have determined that this machine model meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency.
The ENERGY STAR Guidelines intend to establish an international energy-saving system for developing and introducing energy-efficient office equipment to deal with environmental issues, such as global warming.
When a product meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency, the Partner shall place the ENERGY STAR logo onto the machine model.
This product was designed to reduce the environmental impact associated with office
equipment by means of energy-saving features, such as Low-power mode.
Lower-power mode
(Energy Saver mode)
Power Consumption 45W or less
Default Time 60 minutesvi
Color Guide
Color Printing Basics
Additive (Emitted) and Subtractive (Reflected) Color Models
All light is a mixture of red, green, and blue, which is normally called the RGB
model. When red, green, and blue are of equal intensities, the RGB color model
produces white.
Note
r RGB is also called additive or emitted color. The colors on your computer
screen are produced by varying the intensities of RGB.
Printed color is a mixture of cyan, magenta, and yellow, which is normally called
the CMY color model. When mixed in equal proportions the CMY color model
produces black.
red
green blue
yellow
cyan magentavii
Note
r CMY is also called subtractive or reflective color. Your printer uses CMY toner plus K (black) toner (CMYK color model) to provide full color printing.
The colors of the RGB color model can be mixed to produce the cyan, magenta,
and yellow of the CMY color model and vice versa. Two colors of one model are
mixed to produce the color of the other model (mixing blue and green produces
cyan, for example). The remaining color is the compliment of the color produced
(red in this example). Complimentary colors are: red and cyan, green and magenta, blue and yellow.
red
cyan
yellow magenta
green blueviii
Printed Color
Your printer produces full-color output using four toner colors: cyan, magenta,
yellow, and black. These four colors make up the CMYK color model.
Note
r Mixing CMY in equal proportions should hypothetically produce pure black,
but imperfections in the ink cause an equal measure of these colors to produce
a muddy or dark brown. Black toner is added to the color model in order to
make it possible to produce pure black.
If an image consisted of nothing by cyan, for example, cyan toner would be used
by itself and there would be no problem producing the desired color. Full-color
printing, on the other hand, requires reproduction of tens of thousands of subtle
colors. These can be produced by controlling the relative proportions of the
CMYK toner particles printed within a unit area.
Relatively dense and light shades of the same color also can be reproduced by
controlling the volume of toner in a unit area.ix
Example of Color Adjustments Using the Printer Driver
The following provides a number of examples to show you what happens when
you change the various color settings provided in the printer driver.
Resolution
Resolution is the number of dots the printer can print within one inch. Resolution is expressed in units of dpi, which stands for dots per inch. The higher the
resolution, the better the quality of the printed image.
Note
r Printing at a high resolution takes longer and requires more printer memory.
600 dpi
300 dpix
Edge Smoothing
Edge Smoothing is a technique used for improving the print quality of text and
graphics. Indentations in curved lines are automatically smoothed to produce a
clearer appearance.
Limitation
r Printing photographs or images containing gradations may result in a change
in image quality with Edge Smoothing on.
Auto:
Edge Smoothing is effective. However, this setting is ignored when [2 bit] is selected for the [Color Level] on the [Color Setting] tab.
Off:
Edge Smoothing is not effective.xi
Toner Saving
Turning on Toner Saving reduces the amount of toner used for printing. This setting does not help to improve printout quality, but instead is used when printing
preliminary drafts of a document.
Limitation
r Turning on the Toner Saving can cause output to become blurred and result
in very thin lines not printing at all. It can cause colors to be different than expected when printing color.
Off
Onxii
Image Printing
This setting lets you select the resolution for printing of image data.
Standard
All image data with a resolution greater than 300 dpi is printed at 300 dpi.
Fast
All image data with a resolution greater than 150 dpi is printed at 150 dpi. This
increases printing speed, but can make image data appear rough.
Fine
Prints image data at the resolution set in [Resolution]. If 300 dpi is selected, all image data with a resolution greater than 300 dpi is printed at 300 dpi. If 600 dpi is
selected, all image data with a resolution greater than 600 dpi is printed at 600
dpi. This slows down printing speed, but produces the best quality.xiii
Color Adjustments Using the Printer Driver
The following provides a number of examples to show you what happens when
you change the various color settings provided in the printer driver. The colors
produced by the printer do not exactly match those you see on your monitor.
This is because the computer uses the emitted color model (RGB) while the
printer uses the reflected color model (CMYK). The color settings provide a
number of controls that you can use to bring printed colors closer to what they
look like on your monitor. You can also use these settings to perform color correction, which changes the clarity of the image.
Reference
See the printer driver's online help for details about making this setting.
Color Correction
Use these settings to adjust the color correction pattern.
Off
Vivid
This setting enhances the basic colors for text and graphics. This setting is best
for printing tables, graphs, and presentation materials that contain color.xiv
Photographic
This setting enhances midtone colors similar to those seen in photographs.
Color Level
Use to set the number of colors used per dot. ( [2 bit] uses a greater number of
colors than [1 bit] )
1 bit
2 bitxv
Brightness
This setting controls the overall brightness of the image. Moving the slider to the
plus (+) side increases brightness, while moving it to the minus (-) side decreases
brightness.
Contrast
This setting controls the range between the darkest and lightest shade of an image. Moving the slider to the plus (+) side decreases the range and makes contrast stronger, while moving it to the minus (-) side expands the range.
Saturation
This setting controls the purity of a color. Moving the slider to the plus (+) side
increases saturation and makes colors more vivid, while moving it to the minus
(-) side decreases saturation.xvi
Color Balance
These settings let you control the relative intensity of the individual colors of the
additive color model (red, green, blue).
Note
r The position of the color bar also affects the complementary color relationship. Red, for example, is printed using magenta and yellow toner, so increasing the level of red also decreases the level of cyan.xvii
Manuals for Your Printer
Manuals for Your Printer
There are two manuals that describe the procedures separately for the installation of your printer and for the operation and maintenance of your printer and
its optional equipment.
To enhance safe and efficient operation of your printer, all users should read and
follow the instructions contained in the following manuals.
Quick Installation Guide
Describes the procedures for installing your printer.
Operating Instructions (this manual)
Describes the procedures and necessary information on setting up and using
your printer and its optional equipment.xviii
How to Read this Manual
Symbols
In this manual, the following symbols are used:
R WARNING:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions
are not followed, could result in death or serious injury.
R CAUTION:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions
are not followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.
* The statements above are notes for your safety.
Important
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be
damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.
Preparation
This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before operating.
Note
This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after misoperation.
Limitation
This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,
or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.
Reference
This symbol indicates a reference.
[ ]
Keys that appear on the machine's panel display.
Keys and buttons that appear on the computer's display.
{ }
Keys built into the machine's operation panel.
Keys on the computer's keyboard.xix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.Getting Acquainted
Guide to the Printer ................................................................................... 1
Exterior-Front View ....................................................................................... 1
Exterior-Rear View ........................................................................................ 3
Interior ........................................................................................................... 4
Operation Panel ............................................................................................ 5
Turning the Printer On and Off................................................................. 7
Turning On the Printer................................................................................... 7
Turning Off the Printer................................................................................... 7
2.Installing Options
Available Options .................................................................................... 10
Installing the Memory Unit (SIMM)......................................................... 11
Installing the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Type305................................................ 13
Installing Network Interface Board Type305......................................... 15
Installing the IEEE 1284 Parallel Type305............................................. 17
Installing the Paper Feed Unit Type305................................................. 19
3. Configuring the Printer for the Network with the Operation Panel
Configuring the Printer for the Network with the Operation Panel..... 23
4.Installing the IPDL-C Printer Driver
Before Installing the Printer Driver ........................................................ 29
Installing the Printer Drivers ........................................................................ 30
Windows 95/98 - Installing the IPDL-C Printer Driver .......................... 31
Installing the Printer Driver Using Plug and Play ........................................ 32
Installing the Printer Driver Without Using Plug and Play ........................... 34
Setting Up Options ...................................................................................... 35
Canceling a Print Job .................................................................................. 36
Windows 3.1x - Installing the IPDL-C Printer Driver ............................ 37
Installing the Printer Driver .......................................................................... 37
Setting Up Options ...................................................................................... 38
Canceling a Print Job .................................................................................. 39
Windows NT4.0 - Installing the IPDL-C Printer Driver.......................... 40
Installing the Printer Driver .......................................................................... 40
Setting Up Options ...................................................................................... 41
Canceling a Print Job .................................................................................. 42xx
5.Paper and Other Media
Paper and Other Media Supported by this Printer ............................... 43
Paper Types and Sizes ............................................................................... 43
Precautions for Paper ................................................................................. 45
Printable Area ............................................................................................. 48
Loading Paper.......................................................................................... 49
Loading Paper in the Paper Tray ................................................................ 49
Loading Paper in the Bypass Tray .............................................................. 52
Sliding out the Output Tray Extender .......................................................... 54
6.Troubleshooting
Error & Status Messages........................................................................ 55
Printed Error Message ................................................................................ 55
Error & Status Messages on the Operation Panel ...................................... 56
Getting Printer Information over the Network.............................................. 61
Printer Doesn't Print................................................................................ 67
Other Printing Problems......................................................................... 70
Removing Misfed Paper.......................................................................... 76
When the Message "Remove Misfeed From Tray" Appears....................... 77
When the Message "Open Front Cover Remove Misfeed" Appears .......... 77
When the Message "Remove Misfeed From Output Tray " Appears .......... 78
Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer ....................................................... 80
Cleaning the Friction Pad............................................................................ 80
Cleaning the Charger .................................................................................. 80
Cleaning the Dust-proofing glass ................................................................ 81
Adjusting the Image Density ....................................................................... 82
Adjusting the Setting of “Registration” of the Optional Tray ........................ 83
Replacing Consumables......................................................................... 85
Replacing the Toner Cartridge .................................................................... 85
Replacing the Photoconductor Unit............................................................. 88
Replacing the Fuser Oil Bottle and Ozone Filter ......................................... 90
Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle and Charger ......................................... 92
7.Making Printer Settings with the Operation Panel
Setting Menus.......................................................................................... 96
Protecting the Menus.............................................................................. 98
Protecting the Menus .................................................................................. 98
Changing the Menu Settings without Removing Protect............................. 99
Removing Protect...................................................................................... 100
Menu Table............................................................................................. 102
Menu Settings........................................................................................ 103
IPDL-C Menu ............................................................................................ 103xxi
System Menu ............................................................................................ 103
Printing the Configuration Page .......................................................... 107
Interpreting Configuration Page .......................................................... 108
Reference.................................................................................................. 108
Printer Information..................................................................................... 108
Status List ................................................................................................. 109
Error Log ................................................................................................... 109
Printing the Color Sample .................................................................... 110
Resetting Menus.................................................................................... 111
8.Appendix
Memory Capacity and Paper Size ........................................................ 113
Low Memory.............................................................................................. 114
Moving and Transporting the Printer .................................................. 115
Specifications ........................................................................................ 116
Mainframe ................................................................................................. 116
Options...................................................................................................... 118
Consumables ......................................................................................... 120
Glossaries .............................................................................................. 122
INDEX...................................................................................................... 124xxii1
1. Getting Acquainted
Guide to the Printer
Exterior-Front View
1. Power Switch
Use this switch to turn printer power on
and off.
2. Fuser Oil Bottle Cover
Open this cover when replacing the fuser
oil bottle.
3. Output Tray
Printed pages are stacked here.
4. Output Tray Extender
Pull out this extender when printing on
long paper.
5. Operation Panel
Contains keys for printer operation and a
panel display that shows the printer status.
6. Front Cover Release Button
Use this button to open the front cover.
7. Front Cover
Open this cover when accessing the inside of the printer.
8. Left Cover
Open this cover when replacing the toner
cartridge.
9. Inset Grips
Hold the printer at the location indicated
in the illustration when transporting it.
Note that there are four grips, two on the
left side and two on the right side of the
printer.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
9
10
TFWX020E
11
TFWX030EGetting Acquainted
2
1
10. Bypass tray
Use to print onto thick paper, OHP transparencies, adhesive labels, custom size
paper as well as plain paper. When printing on custom size paper, printer driver
settings are required.
11. Paper Tray
Load paper into this tray for printing. Guide to the Printer
3
1
Exterior-Rear View
1. Paper Exit Cover
Open this cover when removing misfed
paper at the fusing unit.
2. Ozone Filter
This filter reduces the amount of ozone
that is discharged into the air.
3. Ventilator
This hole allow air to circulate, preventing components inside the printer from
overheating.
Important
r Do not leave the ventilator obstructed or blocked. Doing so creates the danger of malfunction due
to overheating.
4. Parallel Interface Connector
Plug the interface cable that connects the
printer to your computer into this connector.
Important
r Rating voltage of the parallel interface connector for the computer;
Max. DC 5V.
5. Back Plates
Remove to install some options.
Important
r Rating voltage of the network interface connector for the network;
Max. DC 5V.
r Rating voltage of the parallel interface connector for the computer;
Max. DC 5V.
6. Ventilator
This hole allow air to circulate, preventing components inside the printer from
overheating.
Important
r Do not leave the ventilator obstructed or blocked. Doing so creates the danger of malfunction due
to overheating.
7. Power Connector
Connect the power cord to this connector.
TFWX040E
2 1
3
4
5 6 7Getting Acquainted
4
1
Interior
1. Toner Cartridge
2. Fuser Oil Bottle
This bottle holds oil used for fusing toner
to the paper.
3. Ozone Filters
These filters reduce the amount of ozone
that is discharged into the air.
4. Charger
5. Waste Toner Bottle
This bottle is a receptacle for waste toner
generated during the printing process.
6. Photoconductor Unit
This contains a photoconductor unit that
is used to compose the image being printed.
Note
r Screws are used to hold the photoconductor unit in place. Be sure to remove
the screws before attempting to remove the unit.
r The condition of the photoconductor
unit belt directly affects output appearance and quality. Always be careful to prevent the green film in this
unit from becoming dirty or damaged.
And do not touch the black belt.
r Do not rotate the gear on the right side
of the printer. Otherwise, the inside
belt gets damaged.
TFWX051E
1 2 3 4 5 6
TFWX060EGuide to the Printer
5
1
Operation Panel
Important
r Never press any operation panel keys while the Data In indicator is flashing
on the operation panel.
1. Panel Display
The display shows the current status of
the printer and error messages.? P.56
“Error & Status Messages on the Operation
Panel”
2. On Line indicator
Tells you whether the printer is on-line or
off-line.
Stays on while the printer is on-line (a
state in which the printer can receive data
from the computer).
Stays off when the printer is off-line (a
state in which printer cannot receive data).
3. On Line key
Press this key to switch the printer between on-line and off-line conditions.
4. Reset key
Pressing this key when the printer is offline resets the printer to its power on default settings.
Pressing this key during the on-line condition cancels the ongoing print job.
5. Escape key
Press this key to return to the previous
condition on the panel display.
6. {UU}}{{TT} keys
Use these keys to increase or decrease
values on the panel display when making
settings.
7. Menu key
Press this key to make and check the
printer settings.
8. Media key
Use this key to select a tray, change the
paper size, and to make other setting for
printing.
9. Enter key
Press this key to execute menu items selected on the panel display.
10. Power indicator
Stays on while the printer power is on.
Stays off when the power is turned off or
while the printer is in the Energy Saver
mode.
Power Error Data In
Menu Media Enter
On Line Reset Escape
1 5 3 4
7 8 9
10 11 12
6
2
TFWS010EGetting Acquainted
6
1
11. Error indicator
Lights up whenever any printer error occurs. A message describing the cause of
the error also appears on the panel display.? P.56 “Error & Status Messages on
the Operation Panel”
12. Data In indicator
Blinks while the printer is receiving data
from a computer.
Stays on if there is data to be printed.Turning the Printer On and Off
7
1
Turning the Printer On and Off
Turning On the Printer
AMake sure that the power cord is
securely plugged into the wall
socket and the printer.
B Set the printer's power switch to
the On position.
After turning on the printer, it
takes about seven minutes to
warm up before being able to
print. The following message appears on the operation panel.
IPDL-C
Warming Up
When the printer is turned on, the
Power indicator will blink repeatedly. Once it stops blinking and remains on, you will be able to send
data from the computer to the
printer. When the following message appears on the operation panel, the printer will be able to begin
printing.
IPDL-C
Ready
Turning Off the Printer
A Confirm that the Data In and the
Error indicators are off.
Note
r The Data In indicator blinks
while receiving data from the
computer and remains lit when
printing. Do not turn off the
printer while it is receiving data
or printing.
r When the Error indicator lights
up, a printer error has occurred.
Use the message that appears
on the operation panel to troubleshoot the problem.
B Set the printer's power switch to
the Off position.
The Power indicator turns off.
Note
r After printing, wait for about
two minutes before turning off
the printer. The printer uses this
time to maintain itself. Turning
off the printer immediately after
printing may, over time, reduce
the print quality.
TFWX130E
TFWX110EGetting Acquainted
8
19
2. Installing Options
R CAUTION:
R CAUTION:
• Make sure to turn off the printer and wait for about 30 minutes before installing options. Not waiting for the printer to cool down can result in a burn.
• It is recommended that at least two persons are used to lift the machine.
Otherwise, the machine might fall and cause personal injury.
• When lifting the machine, use the inset grips on both sides of the machine.
Otherwise, the machine might fall and cause personal injury.
• When you move the machine, unplug the power cord from the wall socket
to avoid a fire or an electric shock.Installing Options
10
2
Available Options
The following options can be installed to your printer.
Reference
For more information on the options, see P.118 “Options”. Do not use options
other than those specified in this manual.
1. Interface Board
• Network Interface Board Type305 ? P.15
• IEEE 1284 Parallel Type305 ? P.17
2. Memory Unit P.11
• Memory Unit Type204 (16MB) (SIMM)
• Memory Unit Type204 (32MB) (SIMM)
3. RICOH-SCRIPT2 Type305 P.13
4. Paper Feed Unit Type305 P.19
Note
r It is impossible to install more than two paper feed units to your printer at a time.
TFWX180E
1
2
3
4Installing the Memory Unit (SIMM)
11
2
Installing the Memory Unit (SIMM)
R CAUTION:
Important
r The memory unit can be damaged
by small amounts of static electricity. Before touching it, touch something metal to discharge static
electricity from you.
ATurn off the printer's power
switch and remove all cables and
cords from the printer.
B Remove screws and remove the
left back plate.
Note
r A coin can be used to remove
the screws.
CMake sure that the notch in the
memory unit is on the bottom
side. Insert the memory unit perpendicular to the slot ( ). Then
tilt it to the left so that it is 30 degrees from perpendicular to the
slot ( ). It should make an audible click as it pops into place.
D Attach the back plate to its original position, and fasten it with
screws that were removed in step
.
Note
r A coin can be used to fasten the
screws.
E Plug the printer's power cord
back into the printer and the wall
socket. Turn on the printer's power switch.
F Print a configuration page to confirm that the memory unit is properly installed.
Reference
? P.107 “Printing the Configuration Page”
• Make sure to turn off the printer
and wait for about 30 minutes
before installing options. Not
waiting for the printer to cool
down can result in a burn.
TFWX185E
TFWX190E
TFWX195EInstalling Options
12
2
Note
r You can check if the memory
unit is installed properly by
checking the “Total Installed
RAM” item of the “Reference”
on the configuration page.
r If the memory unit is not properly installed, repeat steps A to F
again. If you fail again, contact
your sales or service representative.
Important
r To make the printer recognize
the installed option properly,
you must set up the option with
the printer driver. Windows
95/98 ? P.35 “Setting Up Options”, Windows 3.1x ? P.38
“Setting Up Options”, Windows
NT4.0 ? P.41 “Setting Up Options”Installing the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Type305
13
2
Installing the RICOH-SCRIPT2 Type305
R CAUTION:
Important
r The RICOH-SCRIPT2 can be damaged by small amounts of static
electricity. Before touching it,
touch something metal to remove
static electricity from you.
Note
r For this printer, use only RICOHSCRIPT2 Type305.
A Check the contents of the box for
the following items.
• DIMM (Dual Inline Memory
Module)
• Installation Guide
• Operating Instructions
BTurn off the printer's power
switch and remove all cables and
cords from the printer.
C Remove screws and remove the
right back plate.
Note
r A coin can be used to remove
the screws.
DMake sure that the notch in the
module is on the right side. Tilt
the module to 30 degrees from
perpendicular to the slot and
slide it into the slot ( ). Then
push it in until it makes an audible click as it pops into place ( ).
E Attach the back plate to its original position, and fasten it with
screws that were removed in step
.
Note
r A coin can be used to fasten the
screws.
F Plug the printer's power cord
back into the printer and the wall
socket. Turn on the printer's power switch.
• Make sure to turn off the printer
and wait for about 30 minutes
before installing options. Not
waiting for the printer to cool
down can result in a burn.
TFWX197E
TFWX200E
TFWX205EInstalling Options
14
2
G Print a configuration page to confirm that the RICOH-SCRIPT2 is
properly installed.
Reference
? P.107 “Printing the Configuration Page”
Note
r You can check if the module is
installed properly by checking
the “Firmware Version” item of
the “Reference” on the configuration page.
r If the RICOH-SCRIPT2 is not
properly installed, repeat steps
B to G again. If you fail again,
contact your sales or service
representative.Installing Network Interface Board Type305
15
2
Installing Network Interface Board Type305
R CAUTION:
Note
r Use a shielded twisted-pair (STP)
network interface cable.
r The network interface board can
be attached to either the left or the
right side of the back of your printer. This procedure is for attaching
to the left side.
r You cannot install two network interface boards at a time.
A Check the contents of the box for
the following items.
• Network interface board
• Ferrite core
• Installation Guide
BTurn off the printer's power
switch and remove all cables and
cords from the printer.
C Remove screws and remove the
left back plate.
Note
r A coin can be used to remove
the screws.
D Insert the network interface
board into the slot and fasten it
with screws that were removed in
step , as shown in the illustration.
Note
r A coin can be used to fasten the
screws.
E Loop the network interface cable.
The loop should be about 15 cm
(6”) from the end of the cable on
the end closest to the printer.
F Attach the ferrite core to the loop.
• Make sure to turn off the printer
and wait for about 30 minutes
before installing options. Not
waiting for the printer to cool
down can result in a burn.
TFWX185E
TFWP040E
TFWX980EInstalling Options
16
2
G Attach the network interface cable to the network interface connector of the printer.
Important
r Rating voltage of the network
interface connector for the network; Max. DC 5V.
H Connect the other end of the network interface cable to the network.
I Plug the printer's power cord
back into the printer and the wall
socket. Turn on the printer's power switch.
J Print a configuration page to confirm that the network interface
board is properly installed.
Reference
? P.107 “Printing the Configuration Page”
Note
r You can check if the network interface board is installed properly by checking the “Network”
item of the “Status List” on the
configuration page.
r If the network interface board is
not properly installed, repeat
steps B to J again. If you fail
again, contact your sales or service representative.
r After installing the network interface properly, set up the
printer's network environment
using the operation panel. ?
P.23 “Configuring the Printer for
the Network with the Operation
Panel”Installing the IEEE 1284 Parallel Type305
17
2
Installing the IEEE 1284 Parallel Type305
R CAUTION:
Note
r The parallel interface board can be
attached to either the left or the
right side of the back of your printer. This procedure is for attaching
to the left side.
r You cannot install two parallel interface boards at a time.
A Check the contents of the box for
the following items.
• Parallel interface board
• Installation Guide
BTurn off the printer's power
switch and remove all cables and
cords from the printer.
C Remove screws and remove the
left back plate.
Note
r A coin can be used to remove
the screws.
D Insert the IEEE 1284 Parallel
Type305 into the slot and fasten it
with screws that were removed in
step , as shown in the illustration.
Note
r A coin can be used to fasten the
screws.
E Attach the interface cable to the
parallel interface connector of the
printer. Secure the cable with the
metal fittings.
Important
r Rating voltage of the parallel interface connector for the computer; Max. DC 5V.
F Attach the other end of the interface cable to the interface connector of the computer, and secure
the cable.
G Plug the printer's power cord
back into the printer and the wall
socket. Turn on the printer's power switch.
H Print a configuration page to confirm that parallel interface board
is properly installed.
Reference
? P.107 “Printing the Configuration Page”
• Make sure to turn off the printer
and wait for about 30 minutes
before installing options. Not
waiting for the printer to cool
down can result in a burn.
TFWX185E
TFWP080EInstalling Options
18
2
Note
r You can check if the board is installed properly by checking the
“Option Interface” item of the
“Reference” on the configuration page.
r If the board is not properly installed, repeat steps B to H
again. If you fail again, contact
your sales or service representative.Installing the Paper Feed Unit Type305
19
2
Installing the Paper Feed Unit Type305
R CAUTION:
Important
r If your printer is equipped with
the optional tray, do not pull out
more than one tray with paper at a
time. If you do, the printer might
tilt forward.
Note
r It is impossible to install more than
two paper feed units to your printer at a time.
A Check the contents of the box for
the following items.
• Paper feed unit
• Installation Guide
BTurn off the printer's power
switch and remove all cables and
cords from the printer.
CMove the printer to make installing space.
Important
r Be careful to lift the printer as
the right front side of the printer
is significantly heavier than the
left front side.
D Remove the paper feed unit from
the box, and remove the styrofoam packing and the bag from
the side covers.
• It is recommended that at least
two persons are used to lift the
machine. Otherwise, the machine might fall and cause personal injury.
• When lifting the machine, use
the inset grips on both sides of
the machine. Otherwise, the machine might fall and cause personal injury.
•
• When moving the printer, be
sure to keep it level to avoid spilling the fuser oil. If oil is spilt, wipe
it with alkaline cleaner. Otherwise, the oily surfaces can create the danger of slipping and
personal injury.
TFWH100E
TFWP050EInstalling Options
20
2
E Remove both pieces of adhesive
tape.
F Pull out the paper tray, and remove the padding.
G Remove the ring attached to the
red tag.
H If installing two paper feed units,
place one paper feed unit on the
other paper feed unit at first. If installing only one paper feed unit,
go to step .
Align the paper feed unit onto the
4 upright pins on the other paper
feed unit.
I Place the printer on the paper
feed unit.
Align the printer onto the 4 upright pins on the paper feed unit
and then lower it gently.
J Connect all of cables that were removed in step .
K Plug the printer's power cord
back into the printer and the wall
socket. Turn on the printer's power switch.
L Print a configuration page to confirm that the paper feed unit is
properly installed.
Reference
? P.107 “Printing the Configuration Page”
Note
r You can check if the paper feed
unit is installed properly by
checking the “Tray2” and
“Tray3” items of the “Printer Information” on the configuration
page.
r If the paper feed unit does not
work, follow the above instructions to reinstall it. If it still does
not work, contact your sales or
service representative.
TFWP060E
TFWP070E
TFWP061E
TFWP100EInstalling the Paper Feed Unit Type305
21
2
Important
r To make the printer recognize
the installed option properly,
you must set up the option with
the printer driver. Windows
95/98 ? P.35 “Setting Up Options”, Windows 3.1x ? P.38
“Setting Up Options”, Windows
NT4.0 ? P.41 “Setting Up Options”
r After installing the paper feed
unit properly, set up the paper
size. ? P.49 “Loading Paper”Installing Options
22
223
3. Configuring the Printer for the
Network with the Operation Panel
Configuring the Printer for the Network
with the Operation Panel
After installing the optional network
interface board, configure it for the
network using the printer's operation
panel.
Note
r If you want to print from your
Macintosh computer, the optional
RICOH-SCRIPT2 Type305 is required.
The following table shows the operation panel settings and their default
settings. These are included in the
”System Menu”.
A Press Menu .
B Press {UU}}{{TT} until the following
message appears.
j
System Menu l
C Press Enter .
D Select the protocol you want to
use. You can select one of items
on the table below.
• ' means that this protocol is active.
• Blank cell means that this protocol is not active.
• ? means that this protocol is
not supported.
*1
TCP/IP
*2
NetWare
*3
EtherTalk
*4
NetBEUI: NetBEUI appears on the
panel display, but it is not supported.
Items Default
32 IP Address 011.022.033.044
33 Subnet Mask 000.000.000.000
34 Gateway Add
(Gateway Address)
000.000.000.000
35 Access CTL.
(Access Control Address)
000.000.000.000
36 Access Mask
(Access Control Mask)
000.000.000.000
37 Net Boot
(Network Boot)
None
38 Frame NW
(Frame type NetWare)
Auto Select
39 Active PTL.
(Active Protocol)
All Active
Menu item on the
panel display
Active Protocol
TCP
*1
NW*2
ET
*3
NB
*4
All Active
(Default Setting)
' ' ' ?
None ?
TCP/IP Only ' ?
NetWare Only ' ?
TCP & NetWare ' ' ?
EtherTalk Only ' ?
TCP & EtherTalk ' ' ?
NetW & EtherTalk ' ' ?
TCP & NW & EtherTk ' ' ' ?
NetBEUI Only ?
TCP & NetBEUI ' ?
NetW & NetBEUI ' ?
TCP & NW & NB ' ' ?
ETalk & NetBEUI ' ?
TCP & ETK & NB ' ' ?
NW & ETK & NB ' ' ?Configuring the Printer for the Network with the Operation Panel
24
3
Note
r It is recommended that you do
not select protocols that are not
used on your network.
Limitation
r If you want to select EtherTalk,
you should install the optional
RICOH-SCRIPT2 Type305.
A Press {UU}}{{TT} until the following message appears.
j
39.Active PTL. l
B Press Enter .
The current setting appears on
the panel display.
j
*All Active l
C Press {UU}}{{TT} until the protocol you want to use appears.
D Press Enter .
E If you use TCP/IP, you should assign the IP address to your printer.
Note
r To get the IP address for your
printer, contact your network
administrator.
r If you use TCP/IP, you should
assign the IP address to your
printer.
A Press {UU}}{{TT} until the following message appears.
j
32.IP Address l
B Press Enter .
The current IP address appears
on the panel display.
011.022.033.044
j jl/#
C Use {UU}}{{TT} to specify the leftmost digit of the IP address.
111.022.033.044
j jl/#
D Press Enter .
The pointer (U) moves to the
next digit as shown.
111.022.033.044
j jl/#
Note
r You can return the pointer
(U) to the previous (left) digit
by pressing {Escape}.
r If you press {Escape} when
the pointer (U) is on the leftmost position, the specified
IP address is reset.
E Use {UU}}{{TT} to specify the second digit of the IP address.
191.022.033.044
j jl/#
F Press Enter .Configuring the Printer for the Network with the Operation Panel
25
3
G Repeat steps and to specify the rest digit of the IP address.
191.168.015.016
j
Check if the pointer (U) is at the
rightmost digit, press {Enter} to
register the IP address you specified.
j
32.IP Address l
F If you use TCP/IP, you should assign “33.Subnet Mask”, “34. Gateway Add”, “35.Access CTL” and
“36.Access Mask” using the same
procedure for specifying the IP
address. P.26 “Address”
G If you use TCP/IP, you should
make settings for “37.Net Boot”.
You can select how to assign the
printer's address using the computer. Select one of items on the table below.
*1
ARP+PING
*2
RARP+TFTP
*3
BOOTP
*4
DHCP
Note
r You should set up your server,
if you want to use
“RARP+TFTP”, “BOOTP”, or
“DHCP”.
A Press {UU}}{{TT} until the following message appears.
j
37.Net Boot l
B Press Enter .
The current setting appears on
the panel display.
j
*None l
C Press {UU}}{{TT} until the method
you want to use appears.
D Press Enter .
H If you use NetWare, select the
frame type for NetWare.
Select one of items below if necessary.
• Auto Select (Default)
• Ethernet 802.3
• Ethernet 802.2
• Ethernet2
• Ethernet SNAP
Note
r Usually, use the default setting
(“Auto Select”). However if you
select “Auto Select”, the frame
type detected by the printer first
is adopted. If your network can
use more than two frame types,
the printer may fail to select the
correct frame type, if the “Auto
Select” is selected. In this case,
select the appropriate frame
type.
Menu item on
the panel display
Available method
AR
*1
RA
*2
BO
*3
DH
*4
ARP+PING '
ARP & RARP ' '
ARP & BOOTP ' '
APR & RARP & BOOT ' ' '
None (Default Setting)
RARP+TFTP '
BOOTP '
RARP & BOOTP ' '
DHCP 'Configuring the Printer for the Network with the Operation Panel
26
3
A Press {UU}}{{TT} until the following message appears.
j
38.Frame NW l
B Press Enter .
The current setting appears on
the panel display.
j
IPDL-C Menu l
B Use {UU}}{{TT} to display “System
Menu”, and then press Enter .
j
System Menu l
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
1.Paper Tray l
C Use {UU}}{{TT} to display “2.Tray
Size[ ]”, and then press Enter .
j
2.Tray Size[*]l
The currently selected paper size
appears on the panel display.
j
*8.5x13 l
D Use {UU}}{{TT} to select the paper
size you have specified for the paper tray, and then press Enter .
j
8.25x13 l
E Press On Line .
The normal display screen appears.
IPDL-C
Ready
F Press On Line to enter the offline condition.
The On Line indicator turns off.
G Press Reset .
Power Error Data In
Menu Media Enter
On Line Reset Escape
TFWS020EPaper and Other Media
52
5
Loading Paper in the Bypass
Tray
Note
r Do not open the front cover when
loading paper into the bypass tray.
Reference
? P.43 “Paper Types and Sizes”
? P.45 “Precautions for Paper”
Loading paper
A Open the bypass tray.
B Slide the side guides.
Note
r Slide out the bypass tray extender.
C Load paper until it stops with the
print side down.
Important
r Make sure the paper fits under
the side guides.
r The side guides should be set to
the correct paper size to avoid
paper feed problems.
r Do not load paper when printing.
TFWY130E
TFWY140E
TFWY150E
TFWY160ELoading Paper
53
5
Specifying paper size using the
operation panel
Use the following procedure to specify the paper size from the printer's
operation panel after loading paper
into the bypass tray.
A Press Media .
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
1.Paper Tray l
B After confirming that “1.Paper
Tray” is on the display, press Enter .
j
*Tray1/A4 l
C Use {UU}}{{TT} to display “Byps.”,
and then press Enter .
Note
r If there is no paper in the bypass
tray, the Error indicator stays
on.
D Use {UU}}{{TT} to display “2. Paper
Size”, and then press Enter .
The current paper size appears on
the panel display.
j
A3 l
E Select the paper size you have
specified for the paper tray.
Standard Paper Size
A Use {UU}}{{TT} to display the paper size that is in the tray, and
then press Enter .
The following message appears
on the panel display.
j
2.Paper Size l
Custom Size Paper
A Use {UU}}{{TT} to display “Custom”, and then press Enter .
The following message appears
on the panel display.
l
jl/# Width 297mm
B Use {UU}}{{TT} to change the third
(leftmost) digit of the paper
width, and then press Enter .
The pointer (l) moves to the
right.
l
jl/# Width 197mm
Note
r Press {Escape} to move the
pointer to the left.
r Press {Escape} while the
pointer is located at the leftmost digit of the width to
cancel the settings and return
to step D.
Power Error Data In
Menu Media Enter
On Line Reset Escape
TFWS040EPaper and Other Media
54
5
C Repeat step to set the value
of the width.
While the pointer is located at
the first (rightmost) digit of the
width, press {Enter} to advance
to the length setup display.
Note
r Press {Escape} while the
pointer is located at the leftmost digit of the width to return to the width setup
display.
D Repeat steps and to set
the value of the length.
While the pointer is located at
the first (rightmost) digit of the
length, press {Enter} to return to
“Media”.
j
2.Paper Size l
E Press Escape .
The normal display screen appears.
IPDL-C
Ready
Sliding out the Output Tray
Extender
If you load paper of A4L or 8
1
/2
" ×
11"L or larger, slide out the output
tray extender.
Important
r Do not place the rear end of the
printer near a wall or touch it with
barehands. This area can become
extremely hot.
Note
r After printing, return the output
tray extender to its original position.
TFWX440E55
6. Troubleshooting
Error & Status Messages
There are three types of error messages:
• Printed error message
• Displayed error message
• Getting Printer Information over the Network
Printed Error Message
The error message shown below is output by the printer whenever there is not
enough memory to print your data.
Error Message Required Action
There is not enough memory in your
printer to print this page. Change the resolution to 300 dpi in the printer driver and
try again. For details, please refer to the
troubleshooting section in your manual.
The following are the actions you should
take when you encounter memory shortage problems. If these actions do not solve
the problem individually, try them in
combination with each other. ? P.114
“Low Memory”
A Increase printer memory.
Install the optional memory unit to increase printer memory capacity. ?
P.11 “Installing the Memory Unit
(SIMM)”
B Change the Color Level to [1 bit].
Use the printer driver to select [Fast] or
change the Color Level to [1 bit].
? The printer driver online help
? "RICOH-SCRIPT2 Operating Instructions”
C Reduce resolution.
Use the printer driver to set resolution
to 300 dpi.
? The printer driver online help
? "RICOH-SCRIPT2 Operating Instructions”
D Turn on "Image Memory".
Use the printer's "System Menu" to
turn on "Image Memory". ? P.95
“Making Printer Settings with the Operation Panel”Troubleshooting
56
6
Error & Status Messages on the Operation Panel
Note
r The panel display can show only one error message at a time. Printing a configuration page shows all current printer errors under the Printer Error item
of the Printer Information section. ? P.107 “Printing the Configuration Page”
Message Description Comments
Add FuserOil
(on the upper line)
The fuser oil bottle is empty.
Replace the fuser oil bottle.
? P.90 “Replacing the Fuser
Oil Bottle and Ozone Filter”
Add FuserOil
(on the lower line)
Fuser oil is low. You can
print about 200 or /more
pages after this message
appears.
Replace the fuser oil bottle.
? P.90 “Replacing the Fuser
Oil Bottle and Ozone Filter”
Add Toner
xxx
Indicated toner is low or
runs out.
Replace the indicated toner
cartridge. ? P.85 “Replacing the Toner Cartridge”
Change Fuser The fusing unit is at the end
of its service life.
Contact your sales or service representative.
Change PCU The photoconductor unit is
nearly at the end of its life.
If printed side gets dirty,
replace the photoconductor unit. ? P.88 “Replacing
the Photoconductor Unit”
Close Front Cover The front cover is open. Close the front cover. (?
P.1)
Close Left Cover The left cover is open. Close the left cover. (? P.1)
Close Paper Exit
Cover
The paper exit cover is
open.
Close the paper exit cover.
(? P.3)
Load
(paper size)
There is no indicated paper
size in the paper tray being
used.
Load the indicated paper
size into the paper tray being used. ? P.49 “Loading
Paper”
There is no correct paper
size in the paper tray.
Load the correct paper size.
Load (paper size)
Press # key
There is no indicated paper
size in any paper tray.
Load the indicated paper
size into the bypass tray,
and press {Enter} to resume printing.
Open Front Cover
Remove Misfeed
There is a paper misfeed in
the printer.
Remove the misfed paper.
? P.76 “Removing Misfed
Paper”Error & Status Messages
57
6
Paper Size Error There is a difference between the paper size in the
tray and the requested paper size from the computer.
After confirming that the
size, feed direction of paper
and the paper size dial in
the tray are set correctly,
open and close the front
cover. ? P.49 “Loading Paper in the Paper Tray”
Power Off/On
SC:xxx
There is a malfunction in
the printer.
Turn the printer off and on.
If this doesn't clear the
problem, contact your sales
or service representative.
Remove Misfeed
From Output Tray
There is a paper misfeed in
the printer.
Remove the misfed paper.
? P.76 “Removing Misfed
Paper”
Remove Misfeed
From Tray #
There is a paper misfeed in
the printer.
Remove the misfed paper.
? P.76 “Removing Misfed
Paper”
Reset Charger
Correctly
The charger is not set correctly or the charger cleaner is not in the correct
position.
Set the charger correctly. ?
P.92 “Replacing the Waste
Toner Bottle and Charger”
Reset Fusing
Unit Correctly
The fusing unit is not installed in the printer.
Contact your sales or service representative.
Reset PCU
Correctly
The photoconductor unit is
not installed in the printer.
Install the photoconductor
unit. ? P.88 “Replacing the
Photoconductor Unit”
Reset Toner
Correctly
The toner cartridge is not
installed correctly.
Install the cartridge correctly. ? P.85 “Replacing
the Toner Cartridge”
Reset Tray
Correctly
The paper tray is not installed correctly.
Install the paper tray correctly.
The tray on the paper feeding path was not set correctly when the printer
received the print job.
Install the paper tray correctly. The printer will restart printing automatically.
Reset Waste T
Bottle Correctly
The waste toner bottle is
not installed.
Install the waste toner bottle. ? P.92 “Replacing the
Waste Toner Bottle and
Charger”
Message Description CommentsTroubleshooting
58
6
Warming Up The printer is preparing for
printing.
Wait until the printer is
warmed up.
The printer adjusts itself
regularly to maintain print
quality. (This message
might appear while printing.)
It is not an error message.
The printer is working
properly. Just wait a while.
Waste T Full
(on the lower line)
The waste toner bottle is
nearly full.
Replace the waste toner
bottle. ? P.92 “Replacing
the Waste Toner Bottle and
Charger”
Waste Toner is
Full
The waste toner bottle is
full.
Replace the waste toner
bottle. ? P.92 “Replacing
the Waste Toner Bottle and
Charger”
A3:Error Ther is too much data for
the I/O buffer to handle.
Check if the interface cable
is inserted into the printer
and your computer securely.
Check if the interface cable
is not damaged or broken.
Increase the size of I/O
buffer. ? P.103 “System
Menu”
A6:Error There is not enough printer
memory to print one or
more of the pages in the
print job.
See P.114 “Low Memory”.
AB:Error The printer is unable to
process the data you are
trying to print.
Install an optional memory
units (SIMM) to increase
printer memory capacity.
Reduce the amount of data
being sent to the printer.
Message Description CommentsError & Status Messages
59
6
B0:Error An error has occurred in
the optional memory unit.
(SIMM)
Turn the printer's power
switch off and on. Then, try
to print again.
Turn off the printer's power switch. Reinstall the
memory unit and turn on
the printer's power switch.
Then, try to print again.
Turn off the printer's power switch. Remove the
memory unit and turn on
the printer's power switch.
Then, try to print again.
Note
r If you remove the memory unit, you must set
up the option with the
printer driver. Windows 95/98 ? P.35
“Setting Up Options”,
Windows 3.1x ? P.38
“Setting Up Options”,
Windows NT4.0 ? P.41
“Setting Up Options”.
r In this case, you might
not be able print complex print jobs.
B1:Error An error has occurred in
the standard parallel interface.
Contact your sales or service representative.
B3:Error The printer setting is
wrong.
Reset the printer using
"Menu Reset" of the "Maintenance" menu. ? P.95
“Making Printer Settings
with the Operation Panel”
B5:Error An error has occurred in
the optional RICOHSCRIPT2 module.
Remove the RICOHSCRIPT2 module from the
printer and turn off and on
the printer's power switch.
Then, try to print again.
Message Description CommentsTroubleshooting
60
6
B6:Error An error has occurred in
the optional parallel interface board.
Turn off the printer's power switch. Remove and reinstall the optional parallel
interface board and turn on
the printer's power switch.
Then, try to print again.
B7: Error An error has occurred in
the optional network interface board.
Turn the printer's power
switch off and on. Then, try
to print again.
Turn off the printer's power switch. Reinstall the network interface board and
turn on the printer's power
switch. Then, try to print
again.
Turn off the printer's power switch. Remove the network interface board from
the printer and turn on the
printer's power switch.
Then, try to print again.
Note
r If you remove the network interface board,
you cannot perform
your print job over the
network. You can send
your print job to the
printer only via a parallel cable connection.
85:Error An error has occurred in
the printer's standard
memory.
Turn off and on the printer's power switch.
86:Error You may be trying to print
with the wrong printer
driver.
Make sure you are using
the correct printer driver.
You might not use the correct interface cable.
Make sure you are using
the correct interface cable.
91:Error An error has occurred in
the printer's standard
memory.
Turn off and on the printer's power switch.
Message Description CommentsError & Status Messages
61
6
Note
r If you cannot solve the problem by taking above actions, turn the printer
power off and then back on again. If this does not clear the error message,
write down the error number and the message, and contact your sales or service representative.
Getting Printer Information over the Network
Note
r The optional network interface board is required to get the information over
the network
Printer Current Status
You can check the printer's current status using the following method.
UNIX
Use the lpq command or stat parameter of rsh, rcp, or ftp.
mshell
Use status command.
94:Error The amount of the memory
is not set correctly.
Specify the correct memory
capacity using the printer
driver. Windows 95/98 ?
P.35 “Setting Up Options”,
Windows 3.1x ? P.38 “Setting Up Options”, Windows
NT4.0 ? P.41 “Setting Up
Options”
Message Description Comments
Ready Printer works properly. —
Add Fuser Oil The fuser oil bottle is empty.
Replace the fuser oil bottle.
? P.90 “Replacing the Fuser
Oil Bottle and Ozone Filter”
Call Service There is malfunction in the
printer.
Turn the printer off and
then on.
If this doesn't clear the
problem, contact your sales
or service representative.
Change Fusing Unit The fusing unit is at the end
of its life.
Contact your sales or service representative.
Message Description CommentsTroubleshooting
62
6
Change PCU The photoconductor unit is
nearly at the end of its life.
If printed side gets dirty,
replace the photoconductor unit. ? P.88 “Replacing
the Photoconductor Unit”
Close Front Cover The front cover is open. Close the front cover. (?
P.1)
Close Left Cover The left cover is open. Close the left cover. (? P.1)
Close Paper Exit Cover The paper exit cover is
open.
Close the paper exit cover.
(? P.3)
Energy Save Mode The printer is in Energy
Saver mode.
Wait for a while.
Error: Power Off/On There is malfunction in the
printer.
Turn the printer off and on.
Fuser Oil is Low Fuser oil is low. You can
print about 200 pages more
after this message appears.
Replace the fuser oil bottle.
? P.90 “Replacing the Fuser
Oil Bottle and Ozone Filter”
Load Paper There is no paper of the indicated paper size in the
paper tray being used.
Load paper of the indicated
paper size into the paper
tray being used.
Misfeed: Front Cover There is a paper misfeed in
the printer.
Remove the misfed paper.
? P.76 “Removing Misfed
Paper”
Misfeed: Output Tray There is a paper misfed in
the printer.
Remove the misfeed paper.
? P.76 “Removing Misfed
Paper”
Misfeed: Paper Tray There is a paper misfed in
the printer.
Remove the misfeed paper.
? P.76 “Removing Misfed
Paper”
Paper Size Error There is a difference between the paper size in the
tray and the requested paper size from the computer.
After confirming that the
size, feed direction of paper
and the paper size dial in
the tray are set correctly,
open and close the front
cover. ? P.49 “Loading Paper in the Paper Tray”
Please Wait The printer is now preparing for printing.
Wait for a while.
Reset Fusing Unit The fusing unit is not installed in the printer.
Contact your sales or service representative.
Message Description CommentsError & Status Messages
63
6
Reset PCU Correctly The photoconductor unit is
not installed in the printer.
Install the photoconductor
unit correctly. ? P.88 “Replacing the Photoconductor
Unit”
Reset Toner Correctly The toner cartridge is not
installed correctly.
Install the cartridge correctly. ? P.85 “Replacing
the Toner Cartridge”
Reset Tray Correctly The paper tray is not installed correctly.
Install the paper tray correctly.
The tray on the paper feeding path is not set correctly
when the printer receives
the print job.
Install the paper tray correctly. The printer will restart printing automatically.
Reset Waste Toner The waste toner bottle is
not installed correctly.
Install the waste toner bottle correctly. ? P.92 “Replacing the Waste Toner
Bottle and Charger”
Toner is Low: XXX The indicated toner is low
or has run out.
Replace the toner cartridge.
? P.85 “Replacing the Toner
Cartridge”
WarmUp The printer is preparing for
printing.
Wait until the printer is
warmed up.
Waste Toner is Full The waste toner bottle is
full.
Replace the waste toner
bottle. ? P.92 “Replacing
the Waste Toner Bottle and
Charger”
Waste Toner Nearly Full The waste toner bottle is
nearly full.
Replace the waste toner
bottle. ? P.92 “Replacing
the Waste Toner Bottle and
Charger”
Message Description CommentsTroubleshooting
64
6
Printer Configuration
You can check the printer's current status using the following method.
UNIX
Use the lpq command or stat parameter of rsh, rcp, or ftp.
mshell
Use info command.
Note
r “*” (asterisk) is displayed with the current setting.
r Regarding *1–*4, see the attached table.
Item Description
Printer System Version of the printer
Network Board Version of the network board
Input Tray
No.
Name
PageSize
Status
ID number of the paper tray
Name of the paper tray
*1
Paper size loaded in the paper tray
*2
Current status of the paper tray
*3
Output Tray
No.
Name
Status
ID number of the output tray
Name of the output tray (The fixed name
is “Standard”.)
Current status of the output tray (The
fixed name is “Normal”.)
Emulation
No.
Name
Version
ID number of the emulation used by the
printer
Name of the emulation used in the printer
*4
Version of the emulation
Program
No.
Name
ID number of the program
Name of the program (The fixed name is
blank.)Error & Status Messages
65
6
*1 Input Tray: Name
*2 Input Tray: Paper Size
*3 Input Tray: Status
Name Description
Tray1 Standard Tray
Tray2 Paper Feed Unit (upside)
Tray3 Paper Feed Unit (downside)
Bypass Tray Bypass Tray
Paper Size Description
A3R A3K
A4 A4L
A5 A5L
A6R A6K
B4R B4K
B5 B5L
B6R B6K
DLR 11”×17"K
LGR 8
1
/2
”×14"K
LT 8
1
/2
"×11”L
HL 5
1
/2
"×8
1
/2
"L
EX 7
1
/4
"×10
1
/2
"L
FR 8"×13"K
FLR 8
1
/4
"×13"K
F4R 8
1
/2
"×13"K
FRE Custom size
Status Description
Normal ?
NoTray There is no paper tray
PaperEnd There is no paper in the paper trayTroubleshooting
66
6
*4 Emulation: Name
Emulation Name Description
RWC(IPDL-C) IPDL-C
RPS(RicohScript2) R-PS2(option)Printer Doesn't Print
67
6
Printer Doesn't Print
Possible Cause Solutions
Is the power on? Make sure that the power cord is securely plugged into the
wall socket and the printer's power socket.
Turn on the printer's power switch. ? P.7 “Turning the
Printer On and Off”
Is the interface cable
properly connecting the
printer to your computer connected securely?
Connect the interface cable properly. If there are any connectors or screws, make sure they are fastened securely.
See the "Quick Installation Guide" for details about the settings.
Are you using a correct
interface cable?
The type of interface cable you should use depends on your
computer. Be sure to use the correct one.
If the cable is damaged or worn, replace it with a new one.
See the “Quick Installation Guide” for details about the settings.
Does the On Line indicator stay on?
Press {On Line} to light it up.
Is the paper set? Load paper into the paper tray or on the bypass tray. ? P.49
“Loading Paper”
Does the Error indicator
stay red?
Check the error message on the panel display and do the required action. ? P.56 “Error & Status Messages on the Operation Panel”Troubleshooting
68
6
If you cannot solve the problem by taking the above actions, contact your sales
or service representative.
Is the Data In indicator
blinking or lit after starting the print job?
If not, the data is not being sent to the printer. Or the printer
may be resetting the print job because there was a long delay in receiving the data from the computer.
If the printer is using "I/O Timeout"
Increase the value of the "I/O Timeout" setting of the "IPDL-C Menu" or set the "I/O Timeout" value to "0" (this is
the off setting). ? P.103 “IPDL-C Menu”
If your printer is connected to the computer using the interface cable
Confirm that the printer port settings are correct. For a
parallel port connection, port LPT1 or LPT2 should be
set.
For more information on the printer port settings, see the
notes after this table.
Network Connection
Contact your network administrator.
If the Data In indicator is blinking or lit.
The printer may be resetting the print job. Take the following steps to correct the situation.
• Increase the "Job Timeout" setting of the "IPDL-C Menu".
• Make sure your printer driver settings are correct.
• Change the setting of the "Transfer" of the "System
Menu".
• Make sure the "Parallel" of the "System Menu" is correct.
Can you print a test
page (configuration
page)?
If you can't print a test page, it probably indicates a printer
malfunction. You should contact your sales or service representative.
If you can print a test page but cannot get the printer to print
when you issue a print command from your computer, it
probably means there is a problem with your computer.
Also keep in mind that large, complex data might take long
time for the printer process. ? P.107 “Printing the Configuration Page”
Possible Cause SolutionsPrinter Doesn't Print
69
6
Note
• Windows 95/98
A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Select the icon of the printer by clicking it. Next, on the [File] menu, click
[Properties].
C Click [Details] tab.
D Check the [Print to the following port] box to make sure the correct port is
selected.
• Windows 3.1x
A On the [Control Panel], double-click [Printers] icon.
B Confirm that this printer is specified as the default printer.
C Click [Connect].
D Check the [Ports] box to make sure the correct port is selected.
• Windows NT4.0
A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Select the icon of the printer by clicking it. Next, on the [File] menu, click
[Properties].
C Click [Port] tab.
D Check the [Print to the following port] box to make sure the correct port is
selected.Troubleshooting
70
6
Other Printing Problems
Status Possible Causes, Descriptions, and Solutions
The printer prints a message
indicating insufficient memory.
This message is printed when the printer does not have
enough memory to print a page.
The following are the actions you should take when
you encounter memory shortage problems. If these actions do not solve the problem individually, try them
in combination with each other. ? P.114 “Low Memory”
A Increase printer memory.
Install the optional memory unit to increase printer
memory capacity. ? P.11 “Installing the Memory
Unit (SIMM)”
B Change the Color Level to [1 bit].
Use the printer driver to select [Fast] or change the
Color Level to [1 bit].
? The printer driver online help
? "RICOH-SCRIPT2 Operating Instructions”
C Reduce resolution.
Use the printer driver to set resolution to 300 dpi.
? The printer driver online help
? "RICOH-SCRIPT2 Operating Instructions”
D Turn on "Image Memory".
Use the printer's "System Menu" to turn on "Image
Memory". ? P.95 “Making Printer Settings with the
Operation Panel”
Image is printed on the reverse side of the paper.
The paper in the paper tray is upside down.
• Standard Tray (Tray 1)
Load paper with the print side up.
• Bypass Tray
Load paper with the print side down.
• Optional Paper Feed Unit (Tray 2, Tray 3)
Load paper with the print side up.Other Printing Problems
71
6
Paper misfeeds occur frequently.
Check the paper size settings. The size specified with
the paper size dial might be different from the actual
paper size. Make the correct dial setting. ? P.49 “Loading Paper in the Paper Tray”
Check if the paper tray is set correctly. If not, set it correctly. ? P.49 “Loading Paper in the Paper Tray”
Paper is not loaded correctly in the paper tray. Remove
the paper from the tray and reload it correctly. ? P.49
“Loading Paper in the Paper Tray”
Check the paper type settings. The type of paper set
with the printer driver might be different from the actual paper or media type. Make the correct paper or
media type setting.
You might use paper not supported by this printer. Use
the appropriate type of paper. ? P.45 “Precautions for
Paper”
Multiple pages are fed
through the printer at once.
Clean the friction pad, if it is dirty. ? P.80 “Cleaning the
Friction Pad”
Operation panel error message stays on after removing
the misfed paper.
After removing misfed paper, open the front cover of
your printer and then close it. ? P.76 “Removing Misfed
Paper”
It takes too much time to
print the first page.
The data is so large or complex that it takes time to process it. If the Data In indicator is blinking, the data processing is being done. Just wait until it resumes.
The Energy Saver mode might be enabled. In the Energy Saver mode, it takes time for the machine to warm
up.
It takes too much time to
print.
Photographs and other data intensive pages take a
long time for the printer to process, so simply wait
when printing such data.
You can also speed up printing by using the printerdriver to select [Fast] as the print mode, and by setting
the resolution to 300 dpi.
The printer takes more time to print documents that
contain a large volume of data. A blinking or lit Data
In indicator means that data is reaching the printer, so
just wait for the data to be processed and printed.
If "Warming Up" appears on the panel display, the
printer is now warming up. Wait for a while.
Status Possible Causes, Descriptions, and SolutionsTroubleshooting
72
6
It takes too much time to perform black and white printing.
[Color] is selected on the printer driver's [Setup] tab.
Change this setting to [Black & White]. See the printer
driver's online help for details about changing the settings on this tab. Note, however, that some applications ignore the color mode setting made with the
printer driver.
Paper isn't fed from the desired paper tray.
The printer driver setting is not correct. Change the setting. See the printer driver's online help for further details.
Desired paper size isn't used
for the output.
The printer driver setting is not correct. Change the setting.See the printer driver's online help for further details.
Check the paper size settings. The size specified with
the paper size dial might be different from the actual
paper size. Make the correct dial setting. ? P.49 “Loading Paper in the Paper Tray”
Specified paper is not loaded correctly in the paper
tray. Remove the paper from the tray and reload the
specified paper correctly. ? P.49 “Loading Paper in the
Paper Tray”
Printed side gets dirty. The charger and dust-proofing glass are dirty. Clean
the charger and dust-proofing glass. ? P.80 “Cleaning
the Charger” and P.81 “Cleaning the Dust-proofing glass”
Check the image density setting. ? P.82 “Adjusting the
Image Density”
If the message "Change PCU" appears on the panel display, replace the photoconductor unit. ? P.88 “Replacing the Photoconductor Unit”
Image density is too light. If turning on the [Toner Saving] setting on [Quality Setting] tab, it can cause blurring or fine lines might not be
printed. With color printing, toner saving can cause abnormal coloring. Try printing again after turning [Toner
Saving] off. See the printer driver's online help for details about changing the settings on this tab.
If the message "Add Toner XXX" is on the panel display, replace the toner cartridge for the indicated color.
? P.85 “Replacing the Toner Cartridge”
You might be using paper not supported by this printer. Use the appropriate type of paper. ? P.45 “Precautions for Paper”
Status Possible Causes, Descriptions, and SolutionsOther Printing Problems
73
6
Black or white lines appear
on the print side.
The charger and dust-proofing glass are dirty. Clean
the charger and dust-proofing glass. ? P.80 “Cleaning
the Charger” and P.81 “Cleaning the Dust-proofing glass”
Smeared toner appears on
the printed side.
The charger is dirty. Clean the charger. ? P.80 “Cleaning the Charger”
Part of the printout is blurred
or light.
If the message "Add Toner XXX" is on the panel display, replace the toner cartridge for the indicated color.
? P.85 “Replacing the Toner Cartridge”
Toner is not fused well when
printing on thick paper or
OHP transparencies.
The printer is not in "Thick Paper" or "OHP Transparency" mode. Select [Thick Paper] or [OHP Transparency] in
the [Paper Type] box of the printer driver's [Setup] tab.
See the printer driver's online help for details about
changing the settings on this tab.
The color of the printout
does not match the color on
the computer's display.
The toner based color system used by the printer is different from the light based color system of the computer screen. ? P.vi “Color Guide”
Turning on the [Toner Saving] feature of the printer
driver's [Quality Setting] tab can cause color irregularities. See the printer driver's online help for details
about changing the settings on this tab.
Check the settings of the printer driver's [Color Setting]
tab. See the printer driver's online help for details
about changing the settings on this tab.
The printout does not match
the image on the computer
screen.
Certain applications or image creation methods produce images that cannot be printed exactly as they appear on the computer screen.
Checking the [Print as bitmap_] item of the printer driver's [Setup] tab causes the print data to be converted to
image data before it is sent to the printer, which produces a printout that is closest to what appears on your
computer screen. See the printer driver's online help
for details about changing the settings on this tab.
Note
r The setting also causes large-volume print jobs
which take longer to print because of the required
conversion process.
Status Possible Causes, Descriptions, and SolutionsTroubleshooting
74
6
Changing the color settings
with the printer driver causes a drastic change in printout color.
Do not make radical changes in the settings of the [Color Setting] tab.
Also note that the sample shown by the printer driver
is intended to show what processes are being applied,
not exactly what your printout will look like. See the
printer driver's online help for details about changing
the settings on this tab.
Photograph printing looks
rough.
Select [Fine] on the [Print Quality] tab.
Printing from some applications results in a loss of resolution.
Color documents are printed
in black and white.
The printer driver is not set up for color printing. Select
[Color] on the printer driver's [Setup] tab. See the printer
driver's online help for details about changing the settings on this tab.
Some applications normally print color text as black
and white. You can obtain correct color printing with
such applications by checking the [Change data processing] option in the printer driver's [Setup] tab. See the
printer driver's online help for details about changing
the settings on this tab.
Fine dot pattern does not
print.
Select [Text] in the [Dithering] list box of the [Color Setting] tab. See the printer driver's online help for details
about changing the settings on this tab.
Black parts are shiny or
glossy, when created as a
mixture of cyan, magenta,
yellow.
Select [K] on the printer driver's [Graphic Mode] . See the
printer driver's online help for details about changing
the settings on this tab.
Black gradation is not natural.
Select [CMY + K] on the printer driver's [Graphic Mode] .
See the printer driver's online help for details about
changing the settings on this tab.
Thin lines are blurred or
light.
Check [Print thin lines darker] box on the printer driver's
[Print Quality] tab. See the printer driver's online help for
details about changing the settings on this tab.
When printing on OHP
transparencies, a sheet of paper is not placed between
printed OHP transparencies.
The size and direction of the paper loaded in the paper
tray are different from the those of the OHP transparency. Load the same size and direction paper as the
OHP transparency into the paper tray.
The “OHP Slip” setting is set to “Off” (? P.106).
Change the setting with operation panel.
Status Possible Causes, Descriptions, and SolutionsOther Printing Problems
75
6
Note
r If you cannot solve the problem by taking above actions, contact your sales or
service representative.Troubleshooting
76
6
Removing Misfed Paper
When a paper misfeed occurs, an error message appears on the panel display. The procedure you should
follow to remove the misfed paper
depends on its location which is indicated on the panel display.
R CAUTION:
Important
r If your printer is equipped with
the optional tray, do not pull out
more than one tray with paper at a
time. If you do, the printer might
tilt forward.
r Check the following points if paper continues to misfeed.
• Make sure paper is properly
loaded in the paper tray.
• Make sure the number of sheets
do not exceed the maximum capacity of the tray.
• Make sure you are using only
the appropriate type of paper.
• Make sure misfed paper is still
not inside the printer when you
resume printing.
• Check the paper type settings.
The type of paper set with the
printer driver might be different
from the actual paper or media
type. Make the correct paper or
media type setting.
r Make sure the size of the paper
loaded in the paper tray is same as
the size of the OHP transparency.
r If misfeeds persist, contact your
sales or service representative.
r Do not touch the photoconductor
unit when removing misfed paper.
If you do, the photoconductor unit
might be damaged.
r Exposing the photoconductor unit
to light for too long can reduce its
performance. Close the cover as
quickly as possible.
r After removing the misfed paper,
the back sides of the next printout
might get dirty. Print a few pages
to absorb the toner.
• When removing misfed paper, do not touch the fusing
section because it could be
very hot.
• When accessing the inside of
the machine, do not touch any
sections other than those
specified in this manual. If you
do, it might result in receiving
a burn or injury.Removing Misfed Paper
77
6
When the Message "Remove
Misfeed From Tray" Appears
Standard Tray (Tray1) or Paper Feed Unit
(Tray2/3)
A Pull out the paper tray gently, being careful not to tear the misfed
paper, and remove the misfed paper.
Make sure that you do not leave
any misfed paper in the printer.
Note
r If your printer has an optional
paper feed unit installed, check
all paper trays for misfeeds.
B Slide the paper tray completely
into the printer.
Important
r Be sure to insert the paper tray
completely. Otherwise, misfeeds might occur, or the front
cover might touch the paper
tray.
C Open the front cover, and then
close it to reset the misfeed condition.
Bypass tray
A Carefully pull the misfed paper.
Make sure that you do not leave
any misfed paper in the printer.
BWhen paper is left in the bypass
tray, remove the paper.
C Close the bypass tray, open the
front cover, and then close it to reset the misfeed condition.
D Reload paper into the bypass tray.
When the Message "Open
Front Cover Remove Misfeed"
Appears
R CAUTION:
TFWY170E
• When removing misfed paper,
do not touch the fusing section
because it could be very hot.
TFWY180ETroubleshooting
78
6
A Open the front cover by pushing
the front cover release button.
B If the paper is in the front side of
the photoconductor unit, carefully pull it out.
Note
r When removing misfed paper,
be careful not to touch the fusing section because it could be
very hot.
CWhen the misfed paper is in the
main section of the photoconductor unit, turn the dial downward
then remove the misfed paper in
the printer.
Make sure that you do not leave
any misfed paper in the printer.
Note
r If it is difficult to turn the dial,
turn it slightly upward in the
opposite direction, and then try
again.
D Close the front cover.
When the Message "Remove
Misfeed From Output Tray "
Appears
R CAUTION:
A Open the paper exit cover.
Note
r When opening the paper exit
cover, be careful as it may be
hot.
TFWX080E
TFWX210E
• When removing misfed paper,
do not touch the fusing section
because it could be very hot.
TFWX220E
TFWX230ERemoving Misfed Paper
79
6
B Open the front cover by pushing
the front cover release button.
CTurn the dial downward, then remove the misfed paper in the
printer.
Note
r When removing misfed paper,
be careful not to touch the fusing section because it could be
very hot.
When you can see the misfed
paper inside the printer.
Note
r If it is difficult to turn the dial,
turn it slightly upward in the
opposite direction, and then try
again.
A Remove the misfed paper from
inside of the printer.
While turning the dial, remove
the misfed paper as shown in
the illustration. Be careful not to
leave any misfed paper in the
printer.
Note
r When removing misfed paper, be careful not to touch
the fusing section because it
could be very hot.
When you cannot see the misfed
paper inside the printer.
A Remove the misfed paper from
the output tray.
While turning the dial, remove
the misfed paper as shown in
the illustration. Be careful not to
leave any misfed paper in the
printer.
Note
r When removing misfed paper, be careful not to touch
the fusing section because it
could be very hot.
D Close the paper exit cover.
E Close the front cover.
TFWX080E
TFWX220E
TEWX240ETroubleshooting
80
6
Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer
Cleaning the Friction Pad
If the friction pad becomes dirty, misfeeds or multi-feeds of paper might
occur. In this case, clean the pad as
follows:
A Slide the paper tray out until it
stops. After that, lift it slightly,
then pull it out of the printer.
Then remove the paper from the
paper tray.
B Clean the friction pad with a soft
damp cloth. After wiping it with a
damp cloth, wipe it with a dry
cloth to remove the water.
Important
r Do not use chemical cleaners or
organic solvents such as thinner
or benzene.
C Load paper with the print side up
into the paper tray. While lifting
the front side of the tray, insert
the paper tray into the printer.
Then push in until it stops.
Cleaning the Charger
The charger requires cleaning when
your printouts appear dirty.
R CAUTION:
A Open the front cover by pushing
the front cover release button.
Important
r Exposing the photoconductor
unit to light for too long can reduce its performance. Clean the
charger as quickly as possible.
B Hold the inset grips (green part)
of the photoconductor unit, and
pull the top side of the photoconductor unit forward.
TFWY
• When accessing the inside of the
machine, do not touch any sections other than those specified
in this manual. If you do, it might
result in receiving a burn or injury.
TFWX080E
TFWX250ECleaning and Adjusting the Printer
81
6
CMove the charger cleaner (light
blue part) left and right 2 or 3
times, and return it to the left
side. Set the arrow of the charger
cleaner to the arrow of the photoconductor unit.
Important
r If the charger cleaner is not on
the left side, an error message or
print problem might occur.
D Hold the inset grips (green part)
of the photoconductor unit, and
push the photoconductor unit to
its original position.
E Close the front cover.
Cleaning the Dust-proofing
glass
The dust-proofing glass may require
cleaning if black or white lines appear
on the print side of the document.
R CAUTION:
A Open the front cover by pushing
the front cover release button.
Important
r Exposing the photoconductor
unit to light for too long can reduce its performance. Clean the
dust-proofing glass as quickly
as possible.
B Hold the inset grips (green part)
of the photoconductor unit, and
pull the top side of the photoconductor unit forward.
C Remove the cleaning brush from
back of the front cover.
• When accessing the inside of the
machine, do not touch any sections other than those specified
in this manual. If you do, it might
result in receiving a burn or injury.
TFWX260E
TFWX080E
TFWX250E
TFWX270ETroubleshooting
82
6
D Insert the cleaning brush into the
back of the guide (light blue) until it stops, and then move it left
and right 4 or 5 times.
E Return the cleaning brush to its
original position.
F Hold the inset grips (green part)
of the photoconductor unit, and
push the photoconductor unit to
its original position.
G Close the front cover.
Adjusting the Image Density
Changing the image density setting
might cause a deterioration of color
balance. We recommend that you
normally leave the image density at
its factory default setting.
The following procedure describes
how to change the magenta image
density. You can use the same procedure to change the image density for
the other toner colors as well.
Important
r Extreme settings may create output that appears dirty.
r Image density settings should be
made from your application or the
printer driver whenever possible.
ATurn on the printer's power
switch.
B Press Menu .
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
IPDL-C Menu l
C Use {UU}}{{TT} to display "Maintenance", and then press Enter .
j
Maintenance l
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
1.Toner Selectl
D Use {UU}}{{TT} to display "2.Toner
Level", and then press Enter .
j
2.Toner Level l
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
Cyan l
E Use {UU}}{{TT} to display "Magenta", and then press Enter .
The following message appears on
the panel display.
TFWX280E
Power Error Data In
Menu Media Enter
On Line Reset Escape
TFWS020ECleaning and Adjusting the Printer
83
6
jl/#
-<-----g----->+
F Use {UU}}{{TT} to adjust the toner
density, and then press Enter .
The "2.Toner Level" menu appears.
Note
r To make the image density
darker, press {UU} to move the g
to the right. To make lighter,
press {TT} to move the g left.
G Press On Line .
The normal display screen appears.
Adjusting the Setting of
“Registration” of the Optional
Tray
Adjusting the registration refers to
changing the position of the printed
image on paper fed from the optional
tray so it matches that of the standard
tray. Probably you will never need to
perform this procedure.
The following procedure describes
how to adjust the tray 2. You can use
the same procedure to adjust the other tray as well.
Important
r Select the tray with ”Paper Tray”
with the operation panel(? P.103),
and then print the configuration
page (? P.107).
Note
r Use A4 or 8
1
/2
”×11” paper to print
the configuration page.
ATurn on the printer's power
switch.
B Press Menu .
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
IPDL-C Menu l
C Use {UU}}{{TT} to display "List
Print", and then press Enter .
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
Config.Page l
D After confirming that "Config.Page" is on the display, press
Enter .
E Press Enter again.
This prints the configuration page.
Important
r If printing does not start, check
the panel display for any error
messages and take the action required to correct the problem.
? P.55 “Error & Status Messages”
F After confirming that the "Config.Page" on the display, press
Escape .
The following the message appears on the panel display.
Power Error Data In
Menu Media Enter
On Line Reset Escape
TFWS020ETroubleshooting
84
6
j
List Print l
GYou can find the crop marks on
the long edge of the configuration
page. Check if the left and right
margins on the long edge of the
configuration page as shown in
the illustration.
H If the left and right margins are
not the same use {UU}}{{TT} and to
display "Maintenance", and then
press Enter .
j
Maintenance l
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
1.Toner Selectl
I Use {UU}}{{TT} to display "4.Registration", and then press Enter .
j
4.Registrationl
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
Tray2:W l
J Use {UU}}{{TT} to display the tray
name, and then press Enter .
The following message appears on
the panel display.
jl/#
-<-----g----->+
K Use {UU}}{{TT} to adjust the registration.
To move the image to the left side,
press {UU} to move the g to the
right. To move the image to the
right side, press {TT} to move the g
to the left.
L After you are finished, press Enter .
This registers your setting and returns to the “Registration”.
M Press On Line .
The normal display screen appears.Replacing Consumables
85
6
Replacing Consumables
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
You should replace toner cartridges
whenever the message “Add Toner”
appears on the panel display.
Add Toner
xxx
R WARNING:
Note
r Before removing a toner cartridge
from the printer, spread paper or
some other material around the
area you are working to keep toner
from making floor dirty.
r When several toner colors run out
at the same time, a message appears on the operation panel. Replace them in the following order:
A Black
B Yellow
C Cyan
D Magenta
r When there is no all color toner
cartridges that you want to replace, you can specify the replacing toner cartridges. ? P.87
“Specifying the replacing toner cartridge”
A Open the left cover.
B Slide the lock lever up.
C Carefully pull out the toner cartridge.
A Hold the grip of the toner cartridge, and slide it out until
you can see the green tape.
• Do not incinerate spilled toner
or used toner. Toner dust
might ignite when exposed to
an open flame.
• Disposal can take place at our
authorized dealer or at appropriate collection sites.
• If you dispose of the used toner containers yourself, dispose of them according to
your local regulations.
TFWX140E
TFWX150ETroubleshooting
86
6
B With your hand under the
green tape, remove the toner
cartridge carefully as shown in
the illustration.
D Remove the protective sheet from
the new toner cartridge.
E Hold the new toner cartridge and
shake it with a horizontal motion,
about 10 times, as shown in the illustration.
Important
r If the toner cartridge is not
shaken enough, toner might not
be evenly distributed in the cartridge. In this case, the print
quality might be reduced.
F Slide the new toner cartridge into
the printer.
G Return the lock lever to its original position.
H Pull the tape out as shown in the
illustration.
Important
r Be sure to pull the tape horizontally. Pulling it upward or
downward causes toner scattering.
TFWX480E
TFWX490E
TFWX500E
TFWX160E
TFWX170E
TFWX510EReplacing Consumables
87
6
r After pulling the tape out of the
cartridge, toner scatters easily.
Do not shake or give a shock to
the cartridge.
I Close the left cover.
The “Add Toner” message clears
from the panel display and the
printer starts warming up. It takes
a few minutes.
Specifying the replacing toner cartridge
When several toner colors run out at
the same time, you can replace only
the specific toner cartridges. If you
don't have all indicated toners, you
should do this before following P.85
“Replacing the Toner Cartridge”.
The following procedure describes
how to replace the magenta toner cartridge. You can use the same procedure to replace the toner cartridges
for the other toner colors as well.
A Press Menu .
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
IPDL-C Menu l
B Use {UU}}{{TT} to display "Maintenance", and then press Enter .
j
Maintenance l
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
1.Toner Selectl
C After confirming that “1.Toner
Select” is on the display, press
Enter .
The following message appears on
the panel display.
j
Black l
D Use {UU}}{{TT} to display "Magenta”, and then press Enter .
The machine prepares itself for a
new toner cartridge. Prepare the
new toner cartridge for installation.
Please Wait
When the machine is ready, the
following message is displayed.
Add Toner
E Replace the toner cartridge.
P.85 “Replacing the Toner Cartridge”
Power Error Data In
Menu Media Enter
On Line Reset Escape
TFWS020ETroubleshooting
88
6
Replacing the Photoconductor
Unit
The message shown below indicates
that the photoconductor unit is approaching the end of its life.
IPDL-C
Change PCU
You can still continue to use the current photoconductor unit if you are
satisfied with the quality of the output being produced by the printer.
When the printed image starts looking soiled (horizontal lines along the
edges of the page, for example), replace the photoconductor unit as
soon as possible.
R WARNING:
R CAUTION:
Important
r Exposing the photoconductor unit
to light for too long can reduce its
performance. Replace the unit as
quickly as possible.
Note
r Before removing the photoconductor unit from the printer, spread
paper or some other material
around the area you are working
to keep toner from making floor
dirty.
r The “Change PCU” message is
based on a printed page counter
kept internally by the printer. It is
meant as a general guide to photoconductor unit life only. Actual
photoconductor unit life depends
on the printing conditions.
A Remove the new photoconductor
unit from the box.
B Remove the protective sheet by
pulling the red tab from the new
photoconductor unit.
C Turn off the printer's power
switch.
• Do not incinerate the photoconductor unit. Toner dust
might ignite when exposed to
an open flame.
• Disposal can take place at our
authorized dealer or at appropriate collection sites.
• If you dispose the used photoconductor unit yourself, dispose of it according to your
local regulations.
• When accessing the inside of the
machine, do not touch any sections other than those specified
in this manual. If you do, it might
result in receiving a burn or injury.
TFWX471EReplacing Consumables
89
6
D Open the front cover by pushing
the front cover release button.
E Loosen the screws that hold the
photoconductor unit in the printer with the screw driver in the
new photoconductor unit's box.
The screws cannot be completely
removed from the photoconductor
unit.
F Hold the inset grips (green part)
of the photoconductor unit, and
pull the top side of the photoconductor unit forward.
G Hold the inset grips (green part)
of the photoconductor unit, remove the photoconductor unit
from the printer, and place it carefully inside the new photoconductor unit's box.
Important
r To prevent accidental spilling of
toner, do not shake, rotate, drop
or hold the toner cartridge upside down.
TFWX080E
TFWX400E
TFWX250E
TYWX290E
TFWX520ETroubleshooting
90
6
Note
r Do not close the front cover removing the photoconductor
unit. Otherwise, you cannot replace the photoconductor unit
because the photoconductor
unit holder will be closed. If you
do this by mistake, return the
photoconductor unit holder to
its original position before replacing the photoconductor
unit.
H Hold the inset grips (green part)
of the new photoconductor unit,
and insert the photoconductor
unit into the photoconductor unit
holder.
When inserting the photoconductor unit, be careful not to damage
the surface of it.
Note
r The white powder on the photoconductor unit is to protect it after installation into the printer.
This white powder does not
have any adverse effect on the
interior of the printer.
I Hold the inset grips (green part)
of the new photoconductor unit,
and push the photoconductor
unit to its original position.
J Fix the photoconductor unit with
fastening the screws using the
screw driver.
K Close the front cover.
Make sure that the front cover
close properly.
L Turn on the printer’s power
switch.
Replacing the Fuser Oil Bottle
and Ozone Filter
Replace the oil bottle and ozone filter
whenever the message shown below
appears on the panel display.
IPDL-C
Add FuserOil
Add FuserOil
There is the fuser oil bottle and the
ozone filter in the Fuser Oil Type305.
R WARNING:
TFWX300E
TFWX305E
• Do not incinerate the oil bottle.
This action could cause a fire
or getting burned.
• Spilt oil is very slippery. If oil
is spilt, wipe it with alkaline
cleaner. Otherwise, the oily
surfaces can create the danger of slipping and personal
injury.Replacing Consumables
91
6
R CAUTION:
Important
r There are three ozone filters in this
printer. Two of them are set inside
in the front, one of them is set in
the rear. Be careful when replacing
the ozone filters as the front side
filter is a different shape from the
rear side filter.
r Disposal can take place at our authorized dealer or at appropriate
collection sites.
r Dispose of used ozone filters as
general burnable refuse.
ATurn off the printer's power
switch.
B Replace the oil bottle.
A Remove the green cap from the
new oil bottle.
Important
r Hold the clear cap while
turning the green cap. Do not
remove the clear cap.
B Open the fuser oil bottle cover
of the printer.
C Remove the used oil bottle
from the printer carefully.
D Insert the new oil bottle into
the oil bottle case.
E Close the fuser oil bottle cover.
Important
r The fuser oil bottle cover
should be kept closed.
C Replace the ozone filter on the
back side of the printer.
A Remove the ventilator hole
cover.
• When accessing the inside of the
machine, do not touch any sections other than those specified
in this manual. If you do, it might
result in receiving a burn or injury.
TFWX031E
TFWX090E
TFWX100E
TFWX060ETroubleshooting
92
6
B Remove the ozone filter from
inside the ventilator hole cover.
C Install a new ozone filter on
the ventilator hole cover.
D Replace the ventilator hole
cover onto the printer.
D Replace the ozone filters inside
the printer. (There are two filters.)
A Open the front cover by pushing the front cover release button.
B Grasping the ozone filter by its
tab, remove it from the printer.
C Insert a new ozone filter into
the printer.
Slide the filter into the stopper.
Two small thin plastic tabs of
the top of the filter should pop
into place.
D Close the front cover.
Make sure that the front cover
close properly.
E Turn on the printer’s power
switch.
Note
r After replace the fuser oil bottle,
it takes a few minutes until the
message clears.
Replacing the Waste Toner
Bottle and Charger
You should replace waste toner bottle
and charger whenever the following
messages appear on the panel display.
IPDL-C
Waste T Full
Waste Toner is
Full
TFWX070E
TFWX080E
TFWX310E
TFWX320EReplacing Consumables
93
6
R WARNING:
R CAUTION:
Note
r Before removing the waste toner
bottle from the printer, spread paper or some other material around
the area you are working to keep
toner from making floor dirty.
ATurn on the printer’s power
switch.
B Open the front cover by pushing
the front cover release button.
C Hold the inset grips (green part)
of the photoconductor unit, and
pull the top side of the photoconductor unit forward.
D Replace the waste toner bottle .
A Grasping the waste toner bottle by its green tabs, remove it
from the printer.
B Insert a new waste toner bottle
at the rear of the photoconductor unit.
Insert a new waste toner bottle
completely. Otherwise, print
problem may occur.
• Do not incinerate spilled toner
or used toner. Toner dust
might ignite when exposed to
an open flame.
• Disposal can take place at our
authorized dealer or at appropriate collection sites.
• If you dispose of the used toner containers yourself, dispose of them according to
your local regulations.
• When accessing the inside of the
machine, do not touch any sections other than those specified
in this manual. If you do, it might
result in receiving a burn or injury.
TFWX080E
TFWX250E
TFWX330E
TFWX340ETroubleshooting
94
6
E Replace the charger.
A Push the right and left lock levers of the charger.
The locks release, and the charger is lifted slightly.
B Remove the charger.
C Install a new charger into the
printer.
Insert the new charger into the
printer with the arrow of the
charger cleaner's lever facing toward you. The charger locks automatically.
Note
r Return the charger cleaner to
the left side. Otherwise, print
problem may occur.
F Hold the inset grips (green part)
of the new photoconductor unit,
and push the photoconductor
unit to its original position.
G Close the front cover.
Make sure that the front cover
close properly.
H Turn on the printer’s power
switch.
TFWX450E
TFWX460E95
7. Making Printer Settings with
the Operation Panel
Though the factory default settings of the printer are suitable for most printing
jobs, the Printer Menu gives you access to a number of settings that control basic
printer operations. Printer Menu settings you make retained even when you
turn off the printer.
This section provides the following Printer Menu Information.
Setting Menus
Describes the basic procedures for changing Printer Menu settings.
Protecting the Menus
Describes how to protect System Menu settings against accidental changes.
Menu Table
A table chart that shows all of the Printer Menu.
Menu Settings
Provides short explanations of each Printer Menu setting and what it does.
Note
Menu and Media setting priorities
Some of the settings accessed by {Menu} can be accessed by {Media}. Settings made by {Menu} take priority over settings by {Media}.Making Printer Settings with the Operation Panel
96
7
Setting Menus
A Press Menu .
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
IPDL-C Menu l
B Use {UU}}{{TT} to display the screen for the setting you want to change, and
then press Enter .
j
System Menu l
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
1.Paper Tray l
C Use {UU}}{{TT} to display the screen for the menu item you want to change,
and then press Enter .
j
2.Tray Size[*]l
An asterisk “*” is indicated at the left side of the currently selected item.
j
*DL l
Power Error Data In
Menu Media Enter
On Line Reset Escape
TFWS020ESetting Menus
97
7
D Use {UU}}{{TT} to display the screen for the setting you want to change, and
then press Enter .
j
LT l
This registers the setting.
E Repeat steps and to change the settings of other items.
F Press On Line .
The following message appears on the panel display.
Take Offline
Then Press Reset
G Press On Line to enter the off-line condition.
The On Line indicator stays off.
H Press Reset .
This restarts the printer with the new settings.
Note
r You can check the current Menu settings by printing a Configuration Page.
? P.107 “Printing the Configuration Page”Making Printer Settings with the Operation Panel
98
7
Protecting the Menus
This procedure lets you protect System Menu settings against accidental changes. It makes it impossible to change the System Menu settings you make with the
normal procedure unless you perform the required key operation. In a network
environment, protecting settings restricts changes to System Menu settings to
network administrators.
Protecting the Menus
A Check if the On Line indicator stays on. If not, press On Line to enter the
on-line condition.
B Press Enter , then Escape , and then Menu .
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
IPDL-C Menu l
C Use {UU}}{{TT} to display "Maintenance", and then press Enter .
j
Maintenance l
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
1.Toner Selectl
Power Error
Menu Media
On Line Reset
TFWS030E
Enter
Data In
EscapeProtecting the Menus
99
7
D Use {UU}}{{TT} to display "5.Menu Protect", and then press Enter .
j
5.Menu Protectl
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
Off l
E Use {UU}}{{TT} to display "On", and then press Enter .
j
On l
This registers the setting and the “Maintenance” menu appears.
F Press On Line .
The normal display screen appears.
Changing the Menu Settings without Removing Protect
This procedure allows you to change System Menu settings without turning off
menu protection. The changes you make are automatically protected as soon as
you register them.
A Press Menu .
B Use {UU}}{{TT} to display "System Menu", and then press Enter .
A message telling you that System Menu settings are protected appears.
Menu Protect
Press Escape key
Power Error Data In
Menu Media Enter
On Line Reset Escape
TFWS020EMaking Printer Settings with the Operation Panel
100
7
C Press Media .
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
IPDL-C Menu l
D Change the setting following the normal procedure. P.96 “Setting
Menus”
Removing Protect
A Check if the On Line indicator stays on. If not, press On Line to enter the
on-line condition.
B Press Enter , then Escape , and then Menu .
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
IPDL-C Menu l
C Use {UU}}{{TT} to display "Maintenance", and then press Enter .
j
Maintenance l
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
1.Toner Selectl
Power Error
Menu Media
On Line Reset
TFWS030E
Enter
Data In
EscapeProtecting the Menus
101
7
D Use {UU}}{{TT} to display "5.Menu Protect", and then press Enter .
j
5.Menu Protectl
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
On l
E Use {UU}}{{TT} to display "Off", and then press Enter .
j
Off l
This turns off protection and the “Maintenance” menu appears.
F Press On Line .
The normal display screen appears.Making Printer Settings with the Operation Panel
102
7
Menu Table
IPDL-C Menu 1. Job Timeout
2. I/O Timeout
System Menu 1. Paper Tray
2. Tray Size[*]
3. I/O Buffer
4. Energy Saver
5. Energy Level
6. Transfer
7. Image Memory
8. Parallel IF1
9. Parallel IF2
10. Bi-direction
11. OHP Slip
12. PrinterLang. (Printer Language)
13. Language
32. IP Address
33. Subnet Mask
34. Gateway Add
35. Access CTL.
36. Access Mask
37. Net Boot
38. Frame NW
39. Active PTL.
Maintenance 1. Toner Select ? P.87 “Specifying the replacing toner cartridge”
2. Toner Level ? P.82 “Adjusting the Image Density”
3. Menu Reset ? P.111 “Resetting Menus”
4. Registration ? P.83 “Adjusting the Setting of “Registration”
of the Optional Tray”
5. Menu Protect ? P.98 “Protecting the Menus”
List Print 1. Config.Page ? P.107 “Printing the Configuration Page”
2. Color Sample ? P.110 “Printing the Color Sample”Menu Settings
103
7
Menu Settings
IPDL-C Menu
The following are the settings you can make with the “IPDL-C Menu”.
Note
r Italicized settings indicate default settings.
1. Job Timeout
You can specify how long the printer waits before terminating a print job
when the printer doesn't receive the end of that print job.
• 000 second (Off: endless wait)
• 10 to 999 seconds
2. I/O Timeout
You can specify how long the printer waits for more print data before ending
its waiting condition for data and terminating a job.
• 10 to 999 seconds (300 seconds)
• 000 second (Off: endless wait)
System Menu
The following are the settings you can make with the “System Menu”.
Note
r Italicized settings indicate default settings.
1. Paper Tray
You can specify the default paper tray that is selected whenever you turn on
the printer.
• Tray 1
• Tray 2 (option)
• Tray 3 (option)
• Bypass
2. Tray Size[*]
You can specify the size of the paper tray whenever you set the paper size dial
to “p”.
• B4 JIS
• B5 JIS
• 5.5×8.5Making Printer Settings with the Operation Panel
104
7
• 8×13
• 8.25×13
• 8.5×13
• A5
Note
r Paper size specified here is applied to all paper trays (tray1, 2 and 3 excluding bypass tray). You cannot specify paper size individually for each tray.
r A5 is supported only by tray1. If you select A5, tray2 and 3 ignore the setting, and the default paper size (8×13) will be selected automatically. For
more information on loading paper, see P.43 “Paper and Other Media”.
3. I/O Buffer
You can specify the size of the I/O buffer. Normally it is not necessary to
change this setting.
• 16KB
• 32KB
• 64KB
• 128KB
• 256KB
• 512KB
4. Energy Saver
You can specify after how many minutes the printer should enter the Energy
Saver mode if no operation is performed. The Energy Saver mode reduces
electric power consumption.
• Off
• 5 minutes
• 15 minutes
• 30 minutes
• 45 minutes
• 60 minutes
Important
r After the printer enters the Energy Saver mode, it takes some time to warm
up again when print data is received.Menu Settings
105
7
5. Energy Level
You can specify the level of the Energy Saver mode. “Level 1” is the default
mode and save more power consumption than ”Level 2”.
• Level 1
• Level 2
6. Transfer
You can specify the data transfer speed of the parallel interface. If you are
having trouble with data transfers, try changing this setting to “Normal”.
• Hi-speed
• Normal
Note
r This setting is effective only for "Parallel 1".
7. Image Memory
This setting controls what the printer does when the printer memory is not
enough to print a certain page.
• Off
• On
“Off” causes the message shown below to be printed when there is not
enough memory to process.
Selecting “On” reduces the resolution of the image to reduce memory requirements.
8. Parallel 1
You can specify the parallel interface timing setting. Normally it is not necessary to change this setting.
• ACK Inside
• ACK Outside
• STB Down
9. Parallel IF2
You can specify the optional parallel interface timing setting. Normally it is
not necessary to change this setting.
• ACK Inside
• ACK Outside
• STB Down
Note
r Do not use the "ACK Outside" setting.Making Printer Settings with the Operation Panel
106
7
10. Bi-direction
You can specify the printer response mode for status fetch requests when the
standard parallel interface is being used. Use the "Standard" setting when you
are experiencing problems while the printer is connected to another manufacturer's print box.
• Original Mode
• Standard
Note
r This setting is effective only for "Parallel 1".
11. OHP Slip
The OHP Slip is a sheet of paper placed between printed OHP transparencies.
You can set this option off and on. For more information, see ? P.47 “OHP
transparencies”.
• On
• Off
12. PrinterLang.
You can specify the printer language that is automatically set when the printer is turned on.
• IPDL-C
• Option (RPS)
13. Language
You can specify the language of the text that appears on the panel display.
• English
• French
• German
• Italian
• Dutch
• Japanese
32. IP Address – 39. Active PTL.
These items appear when an optional network interface board is installed in
the printer.
Reference
? P.23 “Configuring the Printer for the Network with the Operation Panel”Printing the Configuration Page
107
7
Printing the Configuration Page
Use the following procedure to print the Configuration Page which shows the
current printer settings.
A Press Menu .
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
IPDL-C Menu l
B Use {UU}}{{TT} to display "List Print", and then press Enter .
j
List Print l
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
Config.Page l
C Confirm that “Config.Page” is on the display, press Enter .
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
Press # key l
D Press Enter .
This starts printing the Configuration Page.
E Press On Line .
The normal display screen appears.
Power Error Data In
Menu Media Enter
On Line Reset Escape
TFWS020EMaking Printer Settings with the Operation Panel
108
7
Interpreting Configuration Page
Reference
Firmware Version
This shows the printer firmware version.
Printer ID
This is the serial number assigned to the printer board by its manufacturer.
Reference
This is the total amount of memory installed in the printer.
Option Interface
This indicates whether there is an optional parallel interface board or network
interface board installed in the printer.
Printer Information
Tray 1, Bypass Tray
This shows the paper sizes specified with the paper size dial and the operation panel for the standard paper tray and the bypass tray.
If you install the paper feed unit, it is described as “Tray2” and/or “Tray3”.
Note
r If "FRE" is indicated for bypass tray, it means "Custom Size" is set for bypass tray. "R" after paper size (A3, for example) means that paper is set in
the short-edge K feed direction.
Paper Size Indication on the
Configuration Page
A3K A3R
B4 JISK B4R
A4L A4
B5 JISL B5
A5L A5
B6 JISK B6R
A6K A6R
11"×17"K DLR
8
1
/2
"×14"K LGRInterpreting Configuration Page
109
7
Pages Printed
This is the total number of pages printed by the printer to date.
Printer Error
This shows information about the status of consumable items, etc.
Status List
IPDL-C
This shows current "IPDL-C" settings. ? P.103 “IPDL-C Menu”
System
This shows current "System Menu" settings. ? P.103 “System Menu”
Network
These are the settings and status of the optional network interface board.
They appear when an optional network interface board is installed in the
printer.
Error Log
This is a log of printer errors.
8
1
/2
"×11"L LT
5
1
/2
"×8
1
/2
"L HL
7
1
/4
"×10
1
/2
"L EX
8"×13"K FR
8
1
/4
"×13"K FLR
8
1
/2
"×13"K F4R
Custom FRE
Paper Size Indication on the
Configuration PageMaking Printer Settings with the Operation Panel
110
7
Printing the Color Sample
Use the following procedure to print the Color Sample.
Note
r You should select A4 or 8
1
/2
”×11” paper to print the Color Sample.
A Press Menu .
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
IPDL-C Menu l
B Use {UU}}{{TT} to display "List Print", and then press Enter .
j
List Print l
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
Config.Page l
C Use {UU}}{{TT} to display "Color Sample", and then press Enter .
j
Color Sample l
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
Press # key l
D Press Enter .
This starts printing the Color Sample.
E Press On Line .
The normal display screen appears.Resetting Menus
111
7
Resetting Menus
Use the following reset procedure to return the settings of all menus to their initial default settings.
Limitation
r The following items do not reset.
• Registration (? P.83)
• Image Density (? P.82)
• Paper Size of the bypass tray (? P.53)
ATurn on the printer’s power switch.
B Press Menu .
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
IPDL-C Menu l
C Use {UU}}{{TT} to display "Maintenance", and then press Enter .
j
Maintenance l
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
1.Toner Selectl
D Use {UU}}{{TT} to display "5.Menu Reset", and then press Enter .
j
5.Menu Reset l
The following message appears on the panel display.
j
Press # key l
Power Error Data In
Menu Media Enter
On Line Reset Escape
TFWS020EMaking Printer Settings with the Operation Panel
112
7
E Press Enter .
The following message appears on the panel display.
Take Offline
Then Press Reset
F Press On Line .
The normal display screen appears.
G Press On Line to enter the off-line condition.
The On Line indicator stays off.
H Press Reset .
This resets all menus to their initial factory defaults, and returns to the normal
display screen.113
8. Appendix
Memory Capacity and Paper Size
The following table shows the relationship between printable paper sizes and
memory capacity.
Resolution: 300 dpi
• b: Printing is possible regardless of data volume.
Resolution: 600 dpi
• b: Printing is possible regardless of data volume.
• $: Printing is possible when the Color Level is set [1 bit].
• U: Printing jobs including large data might not be printed.
Paper Size 32MB 48MB 64MB 80MB 96MB
Custom (Maximum:
297×432mm)
b b b b b
A3, 11"×17" b b b b b
B4 JIS, 8
1
/2
"×14" b b b b b
A4, 8
1
/2
"×11", 8"×13", 8
1
/2
"×13",
8
1
/4
"×13"
b b b b b
B5 JIS, 7
1
/4
"×10
1
/2
" b b b b b
A5, B6 JIS, A6, 5
1
/2
"×8
1
/2
" b b b b b
Paper Size 32MB 48MB 64MB 80MB 96MB
Custom (Maximum:
297×432mm)
U U $ $ $
A3, 11"×17" U U $ $ b
B4 JIS, 8
1
/2
"×14" U $ $ b b
A4, 8
1
/2
"×11", 8"×13", 8
1
/2
"×13",
8
1
/4
"×13"
$ $ b b b
B5 JIS, 7
1
/4
"×10
1
/2
" $ b b b b
A5, B6 JIS, A6, 5
1
/2
"×8
1
/2
" b b b b bAppendix
114
8
Low Memory
The error message shown below is output by the printer whenever there is not
enough memory to print your data.
The following are the actions you should take when you encounter memory
shortage problems. If these actions do not solve the problem individually, try
them in combination with each other.
A Increase printer memory.
Install the optional memory unit to increase printer memory capacity. ? P.11
“Installing the Memory Unit (SIMM)”
B Change the Color Level.
Use the printer driver to set the image resolution to [Fast], or change the Color
Level to [1 bit].
? The printer driver online help
? "RICOH-SCRIPT2 Operating Instructions”
• If the setting is [2 bit], change it to [1 bit].
• If the setting is already [1 bit], it cannot be reduced further.
C Reduce resolution.
Use the printer driver to set resolution to 300 dpi.
? The printer driver online help
? "RICOH-SCRIPT2 Operating Instructions”
D Turn on "Image Memory".
Use the printer's "System Menu" to turn on "Image Memory". ? P.95 “Making
Printer Settings with the Operation Panel”Moving and Transporting the Printer
115
8
Moving and Transporting the Printer
R CAUTION:
Important
r Be sure to disconnect all cables from the printer before transporting it.
r The printer is a precision piece of machinery. Take care to avoid damage during shipment.
• It is recommended that at least two persons are used to lift the machine.
Otherwise, the machine might fall and cause personal injury.
• When lifting the machine, use the inset grips on both sides of the machine.
Otherwise, the machine might fall and cause personal injury.
• When you move the machine, unplug the power cord from the wall socket
to avoid a fire or an electric shock.
• When you pull out the plug from the socket, grip the plug to avoid damaging
the cord and causing a fire or an electric shock.
• When moving the printer, be sure to keep it level to avoid spilling the fuser
oil. If oil is spilt, wipe it with alkaline cleaner. Otherwise, the oily surfaces
can create the danger of slipping and personal injury.Appendix
116
8
Specifications
Mainframe
Configuration:
Desktop
Print Process:
Laser beam and dry toner electrical photographic system
Printing Speed:
Monochrome: 17 pages per minute (A4, 8
1
/2
"×11")
Color: 5 pages per minute (A4, 8
1
/2
"×11")
Resolution:
600 dpi/300 dpi
Parallel Interface:
Conforms to the standard centronics
Interface
A standard 36-pin printer cable and a parallel port on the host computer
Mode
Compatible, Nibble
Connector
IEEE P1284-B
• Do not use a cable more than 2.5 meters (8.2 feet) long.
Printer Language:
IPDL-C, RICOH-SCRIPT2
Paper Size:
? P.43 “Paper and Other Media Supported by this Printer”
Paper Weight:
? P.43 “Paper and Other Media Supported by this Printer”
Power Source:
? Inside of the front cover of this manual
Power Consumption:
Standby (Maximum) 150 W or less
Printing (Maximum) 1,200 W or less
Printing (Average) 750 W or less
Energy Saver (Maximum) 45 W or lessSpecifications
117
8
Noise Emission (Sound Power Level):
Note
r The above measurements are made in accordance with ISO7779.
Dimensions:
Measurement conditions: With paper tray, bypass tray and output tray extender closed.
Weight:
Approximately 62 kg (136.7 lb) (including consumables)
Warm-up Time:
Less than 450 seconds (23°C)
Paper Capacity:
*1
Paper weight: 80 g/m2
, 20 lb
Paper Output Capacity:
A4: 250 sheets (80 g/m2
, 20 lb)
A3: 100 sheets (80 g/m2
, 20 lb)
CPU:
R4310-176MHz
Memory:
Standard 32MB, Up to 96MB (with optional memory unit)
Network (optional network interface board required):
Topology: Ethernet (10BaseT/100BaseTX)
Protocol: TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk
Printing Less than 64 db(A)
Stand-by Less than 43 db(A)
Width Depth Height
Printer only 660 mm (26") 625 mm (24.7") 475 mm (18.8")
With one optional
paper feed unit
660 mm (26") 625 mm (24.7") 601 mm (23.7")
With two optional
paper feed units
660 mm (26") 625 mm (24.7") 727 mm (28.7")
Standard paper tray 250 sheets
*1
Bypass tray 50 sheets
*1
Optional paper feed unit 500 or 1,000 sheets
*1 Appendix
118
8
Optional Equipment:
• Paper Feed Unit Type305
• RICOH-SCRIPT2 Type305
• Network Interface Board Type305
• IEEE 1284 Parallel Type305
• Memory Unit Type204 (16MB)
• Memory Unit Type204 (32MB)
Options
PAPER FEED UNIT Type305
Paper Size:
? P.43 “Paper Types and Sizes”
Paper Weight:
? P.43 “Paper Types and Sizes”
RICOH-SCRIPT2 Type305
An interpreter that conforms to PostScript Level 2, developed independently by
Ricoh Company, Ltd..
Network Interface Board Type305
Topology:
Ethernet (10BaseT/100BaseTX)
Protocols:
TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk
Interface Connector:
RJ45
Required Cable:
STP (Shielded Twisted-Pair) cable
Category/Type5 or better
*A cable is not enclosed with this option.Specifications
119
8
IEEE 1284 Parallel Type305
Mode:
Compatible
Interface Connector:
IEEE P1284–B
Memory Unit Type204 (16MB) and Memory Unit Type204 (32MB)
Memory Type:
EDO (Extended Data Output) DRAM
Number of Pins:
72 pins
Access Time:
60 nsAppendix
120
8
Consumables
R CAUTION:
Toner Cartridge
*1
A4 5% test chart
Note
r The actual number of printed pages you get from a particular toner cartridge depends on the type and size of paper you are using, the contents of
your print images, and printing environment conditions. The life of a toner
cartridge also shortens as the cartridge becomes older. All this means that
a toner cartridge might require replacement sooner than the normal life described above.
r Toner cartridges that come with the printer are for setup purposes, and
will not provide the number of pages described above. The average number of printable pages that can be expected from the toner cartridges included in the printer are as follows:
• Black toner cartridge : about 6,000 pages,
• Cyan, magenta and yellow toner cartridges : about 3,000 pages for each
• Our products are engineered to meet the highest standards of quality and
functionality. When purchasing expendable supplies, we recommend using
only those specified by an authorized dealer.
Average printable number of pages per cartridge
*1
COLOR TONER Type305 Cyan 15,000 pages
COLOR TONER Type305 Magenta 15,000 pages
COLOR TONER Type305 Yellow 15,000 pages
TONER Type305 Black 15,000 pagesConsumables
121
8
Other Consumables
Note
r Actual life of consumables depends on the type and size of paper you are
using, the contents of your print images, and printing environment conditions. The life of consumables also shortens as the consumables become
older. All that means that consumables might require replacement sooner
than the life indicated.
*1
A4 5% test chart
*2
For monochrome printing
*3
For full color printing
*4
Waste Toner Bottle Type305 includes a charger.
Service Life
*1
Waste Toner Bottle Type305 20,000 pages
*2
5,000 pages
*3
Photo Conductor Unit Type305 60,000 pages
*2
15,000 pages
*3
Fuser Oil Type305
*4
20,000 pagesAppendix
122
8
Glossaries
Color Correction
This is the process of making adjustments in order to more closely match colors produced by the RGB model of your computer display with those produced by the CMYK model of the printer.
CMYK
Cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (K) toner colors that are combined to produce other colors for color printing.
dpi (dots per inch)
A measure of resolution that indicates the number of dots that can be printed
in one inch (25.4mm). Detail is greater as the dots per inch increase.
Dithering
Creating the illusion of colors and shades by varying the pattern of dots, as
done with newspaper photographs. In printing, dithering is usually called
halftoning, and shades of gray are called halftones.
Ethernet®
A network protocol used by Local Area Networks (LANs). Installing an optional network board in the printer allows it to be connected to a network and
serve as a network printer.
Graphics Command
Command is for printing lines, circles, ellipses, and other graphics.
I/O Buffer
Temporary memory area for receiving data from the computer. Automatically smooths edges of characters and figures.
Page Description Language
A command system for printing data sent from a computer on a page printer.
Generally, computer data is converted to commands that a printer can interpret. The command system that can be interpreted by the printer is called
printer commands, and the command system used by a page printer is called
the page description language.
Plug and Play
A function that automatically specifies the necessary information and allows
immediate use of new peripherals, expansion cards, and other option connected to a computer (Windows 95/98). Peripherals must support Plug and
Play for this capability to be available.
PostScript®
A page description language developed by Adobe Systems Incorporated.Glossaries
123
8
Print Port
Output port of print data from the computer to the printer. With a parallel
connection, for example, your computer outputs data from its LPT1 printer
port. In the case of a network printer, data is output from the port that is configured for printing.
Printer Properties
A screen for specifying print conditions in accordance with printer functions
when printing in Windows 95.
Proportional Fonts
Fonts for which the widths of characters are varied in order to achieve a balanced look in the printed text. MSP Mincho and MSP Gothic, included in
Windows95, are proportional fonts.
RGB
Red (R), green (G), and Blue (B) colored light that are combined to produce
other colors on a computer display screen.
RPS2
An optional interpreter that conforms to PostScript Level 2, developed independently by Ricoh Company, Ltd.
Edge Smoothing
Edge Smoothing is a technique used for improving the print quality of text
and graphics. Indentations in curved lines are automatically smoothed to
produce a clearer appearance.
Toner Saving
A print mode that saves toner.
TrueType Fonts
Windows standard outline fonts that make it possible to print screen fonts as
image data. TrueType fonts make it easier to produce printed output that
closely resembles the image on your computer screen.124
INDEX
A
Access Control Address, 23, 26
Access Control Mask, 23, 26
Active Protocol, 23
Adhesive labels, 46
B
Back Plates, 3
Bi-direction, 106
Brightness, xv
Bypass Tray, 52, 108
Bypass tray, 2
C
Canceling a Print Job, 36, 39, 42
Charger, 4, 80, 92
CMY, vi
CMY color model, vi
Color Balance, xvi
Color Correction, xiii
Color Level, xiv
Color Models, vi
Color Sample, 110
Configuration Page, 107, 108
Contrast, xv
custom size paper, 51
D
Data In indicator, 6
Dust-proofing glass, 81
E
Edge Smoothing, x
Energy Level, 105
Energy Saver, 104
{Enter} key, 5
Error indicator, 6
Error Log, 109
Error & Status Messages, 56
{Escape} key, 5
F
Firmware Version, 108
Frame type NetWare, 23
Friction Pad, 80
Front Cover, 1
Front Cover Release Button, 1
Fuser Oil Bottle, 4, 90
Fuser Oil Bottle Cover, 1
G
Gateway Address, 23, 26
I
IEEE 1284 Parallel Type305, 10, 17
Image Density, 82
Image Memory, 105
Image Printing, xii
Inset Grips, 1
Interface Board, 10
I/O Buffer, 104
I/O Timeout, 103
IP Address, 23
IPDL-C, 109
IPDL-C Menu, 103
IPDL-C Printer Driver, 29
J
Job Timeout, 103
L
Left Cover, 1
M
{Media} key, 5
Memory, 114
Memory Capacity, 113
Memory Unit, 10, 11
{Menu} key, 5
Misfed Paper, 76
N
Network, 109
Network Boot, 23
Network Interface Board Type305, 10, 15
O
OHP Slip, 106
OHP transparencies, 47
On Line indicator, 5125
{On Line} key, 5
Operation Panel, 1
Option Interface, 108
Options, 9, 35, 38, 41
Output Tray, 1
Output Tray Extender, 1, 54
Ozone Filter, 3, 4, 90
P
Pages Printed, 109
Panel Display, 5
Paper, 43, 49
Paper Exit Cover, 3
Paper Feed Unit Type305, 10, 19
Paper Tray, 2, 49, 103
Parallel IF1, 105
Parallel IF2, 105
Parallel Interface Connector, 3
Photoconductor Unit, 4, 88
Plain paper, 45
Plug and Play, 31, 32, 33
Power Connector, 3
Power indicator, 5
Power Switch, 1
Printable Area, 48
Printed Error Message, 55
Printer Error, 109
Printer ID, 108
Printer Information, 108
Printer Lang., 106
Printer Settings, 95
R
Reference, 108
Registration, 83
{Reset} key, 5
Resolution, ix
RGB, vi
RGB color model, vi
RICOH-SCRIPT2 Type305, 10, 13
S
Saturation, xv
Status List, 109
Subnet Mask, 23, 26
System, 109
System Menu, 103
T
Thick Paper, 46
Toner Cartridge, 4, 85
Toner Saving, xi
Total Installed RAM, 108
Transfer, 105
Tray 1, 108
Tray Size, 103
V
Ventilator, 3
W
Waste Toner Bottle, 4, 92
Windows 3.1x, 37
Windows 95/98, 31
Windows NT4.0, 40126 UE USA G024
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Printer Reference
Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future
reference.
For safety, please follow the instructions in this manual.Aficio AP2700 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
RICOH COMPANY, LTD.
15-5, 1 chome, Minami-Aoyama, Minato-ku, Tokyo
Telephone: Tokyo 3479-3111
Overseas Affiliates
U.S.A.
RICOH CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place
West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006
Phone: +1-973-882-2000
The Netherlands
RICOH EUROPE B.V.
Groenelaan 3, 1186 AA, Amstelveen
Phone: +31-(0)20-5474111
United Kingdom
RICOH UK LTD.
Ricoh House,
1 Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham,
Middlesex, TW13 7HG
Phone: +44-(0)181-261-4000
Germany
RICOH DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Mergenthalerallee 38-40,
65760 Eschborn
Phone: +49-(0)6196-9060
France
RICOH FRANCE S.A.
383, Avenue du Général de Gaulle
BP 307-92143 Clamart Cedex
Phone: +33-(0)1-40-94-38-38
Spain
RICOH ESPAÑA S.A.
Avda. Litoral Mar, 12-14,
08005 Barcelona
Phone: +34-(0)93-295-7600
Italy
RICOH ITALIA SpA
Via della Metallurgia 12,
37139 Verona
Phone: +39-(0)45-8181500
Hong Kong
RICOH HONG KONG LTD.
23/F., China Overseas Building,
139, Hennessy Road,
Wan Chai, Hong Kong
Phone: +852-2862-2888
Singapore
RICOH ASIA PACIFIC PTE.LTD.
260 Orchard Road,
#15-01/02 The Heeren,
Singapore 238855
Phone: +65-830-5888
Model number: G038–17
Printed in Japan
UE USA G038-8617Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To get
maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in
this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Please read the Safety Information before using this machine. It contains important information related
to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.
Note
The names of the applications do not appear in the following pages. Confirm which applications you
will be using before reading this manual.
Consumables:
Software Versions Conventions Used in this Manual
• NetWare3.x means NetWare 3.11, 3.12 and 3.2.
• NetWare4.x means NetWare 4.1, 4.11 and IntranetWare.
Power Source
120V, 60Hz, 9.0A or more
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above.
Operator Safety:
This machine is considered a CDRH class I laser device, safe for office/ EDPuse. The machine contains 5-milliwat, 760 - 800 nanometer wavelength, GaAIAs laser diodes. Direct (or indirect reflected)
eye contact with the laser beam might cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and interlock
mechanisms have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
Laser Safety:
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical unit
in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite
equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer.The laser
chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis
and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement or the optical subsystem is required.
Caution:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Important
Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable
for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating
the machine.
Do not attempt any maintenance or troubleshooting other than that mentioned in this manual. This machine contains a laser beam generator and direct exposure to laser beams can cause permanent eye
damage.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.
Ricoh shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts other
than genuine Ricoh parts in your Ricoh office product.
For good copy quality, Ricoh recommends that you use genuine Ricoh toner.
Descriptions in this manual Application
PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR
Aficio Manager for Admin
PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT Aficio Manager for Client
Consumables Name
Toner RICOH Toner Type 2210D Black
Photo Conductor Unit Photo Conductor Unit Type 270
Consumables Components
Maintenance Kit Type 270 Fusing Unit, Transfer Roller, Paper Feed Rollers,
Friction PadsNote to users in the United States of America
Notice:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one more of
the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Caution (in case of 100BaseTX environment):
1. Properly shielded and grounded cables (STP) and connectors must be used for connections to host
computer (and/or peripheral) in order to meet FCC emission limits.
2. STP with ferrite core must be used for RF interference suppression.
Declaration of Conformity
Product Name: Printer
Model Number: RICOH Aficio AP2700
Responsible party: Ricoh Corporation
Address: 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, NJ 07006
Telephone number: 973-882-2000
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note to users in Canada
Note:
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada
Avertissement:
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
a means POWER ON.
b means POWER OFF.
Copyright © 1999 Ricoh Co., Ltd.Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To get
maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in
this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Please read the Safety Information before using this machine. It contains important information related
to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.
Note
The names of the applications do not appear in the following pages. Confirm which applications you
will be using before reading this manual.
Consumables:
Software Versions Conventions Used in this Manual
• NetWare3.x means NetWare 3.11, 3.12 and 3.2.
• NetWare4.x means NetWare 4.1, 4.11 and IntranetWare.
Power Source
120V, 60Hz, 9.0A or more
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above.
Operator Safety:
This machine is considered a CDRH class I laser device, safe for office/ EDPuse. The machine contains 5-milliwat, 760 - 800 nanometer wavelength, GaAIAs laser diodes. Direct (or indirect reflected)
eye contact with the laser beam might cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and interlock
mechanisms have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
Laser Safety:
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical unit in
the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer.The laser chassis
is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement or the optical subsystem is required.
Caution:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Important
Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable
for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating
the machine.
Do not attempt any maintenance or troubleshooting other than that mentioned in this manual. This machine contains a laser beam generator and direct exposure to laser beams can cause permanent eye
damage.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.
Supplier shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts
other than genuine supplier's parts in your supplier's office product.
For good copy quality, supplier recommends that you use genuine supplier's toner.
Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future reference.
For safety, please follow the instructions in this manual.
Descriptions in this manual Application
PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR
Net Virsion for Admin
PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT Net Virsion for Client
Consumables Name
Toner SLP27/P7027 Toner
Photo Conductor Unit Photo Conductor Unit Type 270
Consumables Components
Maintenance Kit Type 270 Fusing Unit, Transfer Roller, Paper Feed Rollers,
Friction PadsNote to users in the United States of America
Notice:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one more of
the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Caution (in case of 100BaseTX environment):
1. Properly shielded and grounded cables (STP) and connectors must be used for connections to host
computer (and/or peripheral) in order to meet FCC emission limits.
2. STP with ferrite core must be used for RF interference suppression.
Declaration of Conformity
Product Name: Printer
Model Number: SAVIN SLP27/P7027
Responsible party: Ricoh Corporation
Address: 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, NJ 07006
Telephone number: 973-882-2000
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note to users in Canada
Note:
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada
Avertissement:
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
a means POWER ON.
b means POWER OFF.i
Trademarks
Microsoft®
, Windows®
, and MS-DOS®
are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
PostScript®
is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL®
is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
AppleTalk, Apple, Macintosh, TrueType, LaserWriter are registered trademarks
of Apple Computer, Incorporated.
Ethernet®
is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might
be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with those marks.
Notes:
Some illustrations might be slightly different from your machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Note
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• Microsoft®
Windows®
95 operating system
• Microsoft®
Windows®
98 operating system
• Microsoft®
Windows®
for Workgroups operating system Version 3.11
• Microsoft®
Windows NT®
Server network operating system Version 4.0
• Microsoft®
Windows NT®
Workstation operating system Version 4.0ii
Safety Information
When using your equipment, the following safety precautions should always be
followed.
Safety During Operation
In this manual, the following important symbols are used:
R WARNING:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions
are not followed, could result in death or serious injury.
R CAUTION:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are
not followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to
property.iii
R WARNING:
• Connect the power cord directly into a wall outlet and never use an extension cord.
• Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if the
power cable or plug becomes frayed or damaged.
• To avoid hazardous electric shock or laser radiation exposure, do not
remove any covers or screws other than those specified in this manual.
• Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the
plug, not the cable) if any of the following conditions exist:
• You spill something into the equipment.
• You suspect that your equipment needs service or repair.
• Your equipment's cover has been damaged.
• Do not incinerate spilled toner or used toner. Toner dust is flammable
and might ignite when exposed to an open flame.
• Disposal should take place at an authorized dealer or appropriate collection site.
• If you dispose of the used toner containers yourself, dispose of them
according to local regulations.iv
R CAUTION:
• Protect the equipment from dampness or wet weather, such as rain, snow,
and so on.
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the equipment.
While moving the equipment, you should take care that the power cord will
not be damaged under the equipment.
• When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the
plug (not the cable).
• Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small metallic objects to fall inside the equipment.
• Do not eat or swallow toner.
• Keep toner (used or unused) and toner cartridge out of reach of children.
• For environmental reasons, do not dispose of the equipment or expended
supplies at a household waste collection point. Disposal sould take place
at an authorized dealer or an appropriate collection site.
• Our products are engineered to meet the highest standards of quality and
functionality. When purchasing expendable supplies, we recommend using
only those specified by an authorized dealer.
• The inside of the machine becomes very hot. Do not touch the parts with a
label indicating a “hot surface”. Touching a “hot surface” could result in a
burn injury. (v: means “hot surface”.)v
ENERGY STAR Program
v Low-power mode (Energy Saver mode)
This printer automatically lowers its power consumption 10 or 15 minutes after the last operation has been completed. To exit Low-power (Energy Saver)
mode, press any key on the operation panel. To change the setting of the Energy Saver mode, see P.89 “Using the Operation Panel”.
v Specifications
As an ENERGY STAR Partner, we have determined that this machine model meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency.
The ENERGY STAR Guidelines intend to establish an international energy-saving system for developing and introducing energy-efficient office equipment to deal with environmental issues, such as global warming.
When a product meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency, the Partner shall place the ENERGY STAR logo onto the machine model.
This product was designed to reduce the environmental impact associated with office
equipment by means of energy-saving features, such as Low-power mode.
The ENERGY STAR Guidelines intend to establish an international energy-saving system for developing and introducing energy-efficient office equipment to deal with environmental issues, such as global warming.
This product was designed to reduce the environmental impact associated with office
equipment by means of energy-saving features, such as Low-power mode.
Energy Saver mode 1 Power Consumption 40W or less
Default Time 10 minutes
Recovery Time 100 seconds or less
Energy Saver mode 2 Power Consumption 25W or less
Default Time 15 minutes
Recovery Time 100 seconds or lessvi
-Recycled Paper
Please contact your sales or service representative for recommended recycled
paper types that may be used in this machine.vii
Manuals for this Printer
Manuals for this Printer
There are three manuals that come with this printer.
To enhance safe and efficient operation of your printer, all users should read and
follow the instructions contained in the following manuals.
v Setup Guide
Describes the procedures for installing your printer.
v Printer Reference
Describes the procedures and necessary information on using your printer
and its options. (This Manual)
v PostScript 3 Operating Instructions Supplement
Describes the menus and features you can set using the PostScript printer
driver. The manual is provided as a PDF file which is included in the CDROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”.
v Network Interface Board Operating Insutructions
Describes the procedures and necessary information on setting up and using
your printer under the network environment. The manual is provided as a
PDF file which is included in the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”.
v PortNavi Operating Instructions Supplement
Describes the procedures for using PortNavi. The manual is provided as a
PDF file which is included in the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”.viii
How to Read this Manual
Symbols
In this manual, the following symbols are used:
R WARNING:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions
are not followed, could result in death or serious injury.
R CAUTION:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions
are not followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.
* The statements above are notes for your safety.
Important
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be
damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.
Preparation
This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before operating.
Note
This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after misoperation.
Limitation
This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,
or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.
Reference
This symbol indicates a reference.
[ ]
Keys that appear on the machine's panel display.
Keys and buttons that appear on the computer's display.
{ }
Keys built into the machine's operation panel.
Keys on the computer's keyboard.ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.Getting Started
Printer Features ......................................................................................... 1
Printer Drivers for Your Printer ...................................................................... 3
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM..................................... 4
Guide to the Printer ................................................................................... 5
Exterior: Front View....................................................................................... 5
Exterior: Rear View ....................................................................................... 6
Interior ........................................................................................................... 7
Operation Panel ............................................................................................ 8
Keys .............................................................................................................. 9
Guides......................................................................................................... 10
2.Uninstalling the Printer Driver and Software
Uninstalling the PCL 6/5e Printer Driver ............................................... 11
Windows 95/98 - Uninstalling the PCL 6/5e Printer Driver.......................... 11
Windows NT 4.0 - Uninstalling the PCL 6/5e Printer Driver ........................ 11
Windows 3.1x - Uninstalling the PCL 6/5e Printer Driver ............................ 12
Uninstalling the PostScript Printer Driver............................................. 13
Windows 95/98 - Uninstalling the PostScript Printer Driver ........................ 13
Windows NT 4.0 - Uninstalling the PostScript Printer Driver ...................... 13
Windows 3.1x - Uninstalling the PostScript Printer Driver .......................... 14
Macintosh - Uninstalling the PostScript Printer Driver ................................ 14
3.Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job
PCL 6/5e - Accessing the Printer Properties ........................................ 15
Windows 95/98 - Accessing the Printer Properties ..................................... 15
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................................... 16
Windows 3.1x - Accessing the Printer Setting Dialog Box .......................... 17
PostScript - Setting Up for Printing....................................................... 19
Windows 95/98 - Accessing the Printer Properties ..................................... 19
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................................... 20
Windows 3.1x - Accessing the Printer Setting Dialog Box .......................... 21
Macintosh - Setting Up for Printing ............................................................. 23
Canceling a Print Job.............................................................................. 24
Windows 95/98 - Canceling a Print Job ...................................................... 24
Windows NT 4.0 - Canceling a Print Job .................................................... 24
Windows 3.1x - Canceling a Print Job ........................................................ 25
Macintosh - Canceling a Print Job .............................................................. 26x
4.Paper and Other Media
Paper and Other Media Supported by Your Printer ............................. 27
Paper Types and Sizes ............................................................................... 27
Paper Recommendations............................................................................ 36
Printable Area ............................................................................................. 40
Loading Paper and Other Media ............................................................ 41
Loading Paper in the Paper Tray ................................................................ 41
Changing Paper Size of the Paper Tray ..................................................... 42
Loading Thick Paper, Envelope or OHP Transparencies ........................... 44
Loading Paper on PS420 (Paper Feed Unit) .............................................. 44
Loading Paper in Bypass Tray Type 270 .................................................... 45
Specifying the Custom Paper Size for the Bypass Tray ............................. 48
5.Troubleshooting
Error & Status Messages on the Operation Panel................................ 51
Getting Printer Information over the Network.............................................. 57
Printer Doesn't Print................................................................................ 62
Other Printing Problems......................................................................... 66
Removing Misfed Paper.......................................................................... 69
When "Misfeed: A" Appears ........................................................................ 69
When "Misfeed: B" Appears ........................................................................ 70
When "Misfeed: C" Appears........................................................................ 70
When "Misfeed: D" Appears........................................................................ 71
When "Remove Misfeed from Mailbox" Appears ........................................ 72
When "Remove Misfeed From Finisher" Appears....................................... 72
When "Misfeed: Y" Appears ........................................................................ 73
When "Remove Misfeed from Duplex Unit" Appears .................................. 74
Adding Staples ........................................................................................ 75
Removing Jammed Staples.................................................................... 77
Replacing the Toner Bottle..................................................................... 78
Replacing the Photo Conductor Unit..................................................... 80
Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller ............................................................. 83
Cleaning the Friction Pad ....................................................................... 85
Cleaning the Pad inside of the tray........................................................ 86
Cleaning the Registration Roller............................................................ 87
6.Using the Operation Panel
Menu Chart............................................................................................... 89
Accessing the Main Menu....................................................................... 91
Making Printer Settings with the Operation Panel ............................... 92xi
Proof Print Menu...................................................................................... 93
Proof Print Parameters................................................................................ 93
Job Control Menu.................................................................................... 94
Job Control Parameters .............................................................................. 94
Network Setup Menu............................................................................. 101
Maintenance Menu ................................................................................ 103
Maintenance Parameters ......................................................................... 103
List Print Menu....................................................................................... 105
List Print Parameters................................................................................. 105
Language Menu ..................................................................................... 106
Printing with the Operation Panel........................................................ 107
Using the Proof Print ................................................................................. 107
7.Appendix
Memory Capacity and Printer Function............................................... 109
Moving and Transporting the Printer .................................................. 110
Specifications ........................................................................................ 111
Mainframe ................................................................................................. 111
Options...................................................................................................... 113
INDEX...................................................................................................... 119xii1
1. Getting Started
Printer Features
This printer is designed especially for office workgroups. It can be used in network environments and allows you to manage documents efficiently.
v High Productivity
As this printer comes with a 27 pages per minute (ppm) engine and offers a
variety of paper handling options, handling documents will be more efficient.
Proof print function *1 is one of the supporting features for making multiple
original print which allows you to confirm that the document prints as expected before printing many.
*1 Optional Printer Hard Disk Type 185 is required.
v Versatile Paper Handling Options
This printer offers both versatile input and output paper handling options. Input capacity can be raised to 3,100 sheets with the optional paper bank
(PS420) and the bypass tray (Type 270) to reduce the inconvenience of reloading paper. For an output device, with the optional mailbox (CS370), you can
specify up to 5 places, including the standard output tray, to prevent from being mixed up with other person's documents. Also, collating *2 and stapling
capability is available with the optional finisher (SR720).
*2 Optional Printer Feature Expander Type 185 (32MB or 64MB) or Printer Hard
Disk Type 185 is required.
v Variety of Paper Media Support
Standard Tray 2 and optional Bypass Tray Type 270 support variety of paper
media such as thick paper *3 , transparency and some envelops *3 .
*3 For more information on the supported paper and other media, see P.27 “Paper
and Other Media”.
v Network Interface Board Standard *4
It comes standard with network-ready Ethernet capability supporting multiple protocols. This feature can be used in a variety of network environments.
*4 For more information on configuring for a network, see “Network Interface Board
Operating Instructions” in the CD-ROM.
v PostScript 3 Standard
In addition to PCL 6 emulation, PostScript 3 is provided as a standard feature.
This feature can be used in Macintosh environments as well. PDF files can be
printed clearly and easily.
v Network Utility
PRINTER MANAGER *5 , software consisting of Administration and Client
versions, is provided. With this software, multiple print devices can be utilized effectively together on a network. This software offers several convenient functions such as parallel printing and recovery printing.
*5 For the name of the PRINTER MANAGER you use, see the “Operating Instructions” for the Network Interface Board which is included in the CD-ROM.Getting Started
2
1
v Major Specifications
Continuous Printing Speed 27ppm (A4 long-edge feed or 8
1
/2
” × 11” longedge feed, simplex)
22ppm (A4 long-edge feed or 8
1
/2
” × 11” longedge feed, duplex)
Engine Resolution 600dpi / 300dpi resolution
Enhanced resolution with edge smoothing
Printer Languages PCL 5e, PCL 6
Adobe PostScript Level 3
Paper Input Capacity 500 sheets × 2 trays
Max. 3,100 sheets with options
Paper Output Capacity 500 sheets
Max. 1,750 sheets with options
Memory 16MB
Max up to 80MB
HDD 1.6GB (option)
Interface 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX × 1
IEEE1284 × 1
Options PS400 (500-sheet paper feed unit)
PS440 (1000-sheet paper feed unit)
PS420 (2000-sheet paper feed unit)
Interchange Unit Type 280
Bypass Tray Type 270
AD370 (duplex unit)
CS370 (4-bin mailbox)
Bridge Unit Type 270
SR720 (1000-sheet finisher)
Printer Feature Expander Type 185 (32MB/64MB)
Printer Hard Disk Type 185 Printer Features
3
1
Printer Drivers for Your Printer
Printing requires installation of a printer driver for your operating system. The
following drivers are included in the CD-ROM that comes with this printer.
*1
Microsoft Windows 95 operating system
*2
Microsoft Windows 98 operating system
*3
Microsoft Windows for Workgroups operating system Version 3.1/3.11
*4
Microsoft Windows NT Server network operating system Version 4.0, Microsoft
Windows NT Workstation operating system Version 4.0 in a computer using a x86
processor.
*5
Requires system 7.1 or later operating system.
*6
Requires Service Pack 3 or later.
*7
The Adobe PostScript printer drivers and PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files
are included in the CD-ROM.
v PCL Printer Drivers
Printer drivers allow the computer to communicate with the printer using a
printer language. Two kinds of PCL printer drivers, PCL 6 and PCL 5e, are
included in the CD-ROM. We recommend PCL 6 as your first choice. However, some of your applications might require installation of the PCL 5e printer
driver. In this case, you might configure to install and print by using PCL 5e
in addition to PCL 6.
Reference
For more information on installing the PCL 6/5e printer driver, see “Installing the Printer Driver and Software” in the “Setup Guide”.
v Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers and PPD Files
The Adobe PostScript printer drivers and the PPD files are included in the
CD-ROM that comes with this printer. The Adobe PostScript printer driver
allows the computer to communicate with the printer using a printer language. The PPD files allow the printer driver to enable printer specific functions.
Reference
For more information on installing the PostScript printer driver, see the
“Setup Guide”.
Printer Language PCL 5e PCL 6 PostScript 3
Operating system
Windows 95
*1
v v v
Windows 98
*2
v v v
Windows 3.1x
*3
v v v
Windows NT 4.0
*4
v v v
*6 *7
Macintosh
*5
v
*7 Getting Started
4
1
Software and Utilities Included on the CDROM
v Agfa Font Manager
Helps you to install new fonts, or organize and manage fonts already installed on your system.
v PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR
A utility for the system administrator to manage printers on the network.
Reference
For the name of the PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR you
use, see the “Operating Instruction” for the Network Interface Board
which is on the CD-ROM.
See the PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR Online Help for
details on using the PRINTER MANAGER FOR ADMINISTRATOR.
v PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT
A utility for users to manage their own print status on the network.
Reference
For the name of the PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT you use, see the
“Operating Instruction” for the Network Interface Board which is included in the CD-ROM.
See the PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT Online Help for details on using the PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT.
v Multidirect Print
A utility for printing on a "Peer-to-Peer" network.
Reference
For more information on Multidirect Print, see the “Operating Instructions” for the Network Interface Board which is included in the CD-ROM.
v PortNavi
A utility that helps you to use network printers effectively. It is useful in environments where two or more network printers are used.
Reference
For more information on PortNavi, see “Supplement” for the Network Interface Board which is included in the CD-ROM.
v Acrobat Reader
A utility that allows you to read PDF (Portable Document Format).
Note
r Documentation on using the printer included on the CD-ROM in PDF format.Guide to the Printer
5
1
Guide to the Printer
Exterior: Front View
1. Parallel Interface Port
Plug the parallel cable into this port.
2. Network Interface Port
Plug the network cable into this port.
3. Ventilator
These holes help to keep components inside the printer from overheating. Do not
lean anything against the printer, and do
not block the ventilator.
4. Output Tray
Printed output is stacked here with the
print side face down.
5. Power Switch
Use this switch to turn the printer power
on and off.
6. Upper Right Cover
Open the upper right cover to remove the
misfed paper. Remove the upper right
cover for installing the optional interchange unit.
7. Operation Panel
Contains keys for printing operation and
a panel display that shows the printer
status.
? P.8 “Operation Panel”
8. Front Cover
Open this cover to replace consumables
or to see the instruction for removing
misfed paper.
9. Paper Tray
Load up to 500 sheets of plain paper
(80g/m2
, 20lb). The second tray from the
top can load OHP transparencies or envelopes.
10. PS440 (Optional Paper Feed
Unit)
Load up to 500 sheets of plain paper in its
two trays. PS440 can hold up to 1000
sheets of plain paper (80g/m2
, 20lb).
PS420 can hold up to 2000 sheets of plain
paper (80g/m2
, 20lb).
1
3
2
4
6
7
8
9
10
5
ZAEH011E Getting Started
6
1
Exterior: Rear View
1. Right Cover
Open this cover to replace the fusing unit
or transfer roller, or to remove the misfed
paper.
2. Lower Right Cover 1
Open this cover to remove the misfed paper.
3. Lower Right Cover 2
Open this cover to remove the misfed paper.
4. Printer Board Cover
Open this cover to install the Printer Feature Expander Type 185, the Printer Hard
Disk Type 185 or both.
5. Power Cord
Plug this cord into a wall outlet.
4
5
2
1
3
ZAEH020E Guide to the Printer
7
1
Interior
1. Fusing Unit
When “Replace Maintenance Kit” appears on the panel display, replace this
unit.
2. Transfer Unit
When “Replace Maintenance Kit” appears on the panel display, replace this
unit.
3. Toner Lock Lever
Lift this lever when replacing the toner.
4. Toner Holder
Slide this out when replacing the toner.
5. Photo Conductor Unit
When “Replace PCU” appears on the
panel display, replace this unit.
6. Right Cover
Open this cover when accessing the inside of the printer.
1
6
2
3 4 5
ZAEH030E Getting Started
8
1
Operation Panel
1. Panel Display
Shows the current status of the printer
and error messages. ? P.51 “Error & Status Messages on the Operation Panel”
2. On Line Indicator
Tells you whether the printer is online or
offline.
S t a y s o n w h i l e t h e p r i n t e r i s o n l i n e
(a state in which the printer can receive
data from the computer).
S t a y s o f f w h e n t h e p r i n t e r i s o f f l i n e
(a state in which the printer can not receive data).
3. Power Indicator
Satys on while the printer power is on.
Stays off when the power is turned off or
while the printer is in the Energy Saver
mode.
4. Error Indicator
Lights up whenever any printer error occurs. A message describing the cause of
the error also appears on the panel display. ? P.51 “Error & Status Messages on
the Operation Panel”
5. Data In Indicator
Blinks while the printer is receiving data
from a computer or there is data to be
printed.
On Line Job Reset
Form Feed Menu
Escape
Enter
Power Error Data In
ZAES010E
1
3 4 5
2Guide to the Printer
9
1
Keys
1. {On Line} key
Press this key to switch the printer online
or offline. When the printer is online, the
printer can receive data from the computer.
2. {Job Reset} key
When the printer is online, press this key
to cancel any ongoing print jobs.
3. {Escape} key
Press this key to escape from the setup
menu, and to return to the upper level
without making any changes.
4. {U}{T} keys
Use these keys to scroll through the selected items and to adjust values on the
panel display when making settings. To
change the value more quickly, hold
these keys down.
5. {Form Feed} key
If the printer is offline, press this key to
print out all the data left in the printer's
input buffer.
6. {Menu} key
Press this key to make and check the current printer settings and to switch the
printer offline. To go back to the Ready
mode, press this key again.
7. {Enter} key
Press this key to choose menu selected on
the panel display, or to go to a lower level.
On Line Job Reset
Form Feed Menu
Escape
Enter
ZAES020E
1 2 3 4
5 6 7Getting Started
10
1
Guides
The guides of the output tray minimize curled printed output. Use these guides
when you print on A3 short-edge feed, 11" × 17" short-edge feed size paper, or
thin paper.
v To print onto A3 short-edge feed or 11" × 17" short-edge feed size paper
Raise the end fence.
The guide prevents pages from falling off of the output tray.
v If either side of the page is curled, or if you print onto thin paper
Raise the left end of the guide until it clicks into place.
The guide prevents printed pages from curling.
Note
r If you use the guides, output capacity is reduced.
ZAEH290E
ZAEH330E 11
2. Uninstalling the Printer
Driver and Software
Uninstalling the PCL 6/5e Printer Driver
This section describes how to uninstall the printer driver. The actual procedure
may differ depending on your operating system.
Follow the appropriate procedure.
Windows 95/98 - Uninstalling the PCL 6/5e Printer Driver
A Close all the applications that are currently running.
B Click [Start] on the task bar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
C Click the icon of the printer you want to remove.
D On the [File] menu, click [Delete].
A confirmation dialog box appears.
E Click [Yes] to uninstall the printer driver.
Windows NT 4.0 - Uninstalling the PCL 6/5e Printer Driver
Limitation
r Uninstalling the printer driver requires Full Control access Permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you uninstall a
printer driver, log on under Full Control permission.
A Close all the applications that are currently running.
B Click [Start] on the task bar, point to [Settings], and click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
C Click the icon of the printer you want to remove.
D On the [File] menu, click [Delete].
A confirmation dialog box appears.
E Click [Yes] to uninstall the printer driver.Uninstalling the Printer Driver and Software
12
2
Windows 3.1x - Uninstalling the PCL 6/5e Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.
C From [Program Manager], select [Run] from the [File] menu.
D In the [Run] window, click [Browse].
E Select the CD-ROM drive in the [Drives:] list.
F Open [PCL5E] or [PCL6].
G Open [WIN31].
H Open the folder of the language you use.
I Open [DISK1].
J Double-click “UNSETUP.EXE”.
K Click [OK].
L Click [OK].
M Follow the instructions on the screen.
N If you are asked if you want to restart Windows, select [Restart Windows Now].
If you are not asked, restart Windows after completing the uninstallation.Uninstalling the PostScript Printer Driver
13
2
Uninstalling the PostScript Printer Driver
This section describes instructions for uninstalling the PostScript printer driver.
The actual procedure may differ depending on your operating system.
Follow the appropriate one of the following procedures below.
Windows 95/98 - Uninstalling the PostScript Printer Driver
A Close all applications that are currently running.
B Click [Start] on the task bar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
C Click the icon of the printer you want to remove.
D On the [File] menu, click [Delete].
A confirmation dialog box appears.
E Click [Yes] to uninstall the printer driver.
Windows NT 4.0 - Uninstalling the PostScript Printer Driver
Limitation
r Uninstalling the printer driver requires Full Control access Permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you uninstall a
printer driver, log on under Full Control permission.
A Close all applications that are currently running.
B Click [Start] on the task bar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
C Click the icon of the printer you want to remove.
D On the [File] menu, click [Delete].
A confirmation dialog box appears.
E Click [Yes] to uninstall the printer driver.Uninstalling the Printer Driver and Software
14
2
Windows 3.1x - Uninstalling the PostScript Printer Driver
A Open [Control Panel].
B Double-click the [Printers] icon.
C Select the printer you want to delete and click [Remove].
A confirmation dialog box appears.
D Click [Yes] to uninstall the printer driver.
E Click [Close] to close the [Printers] dialog box.
Macintosh - Uninstalling the PostScript Printer Driver
A Drag the “AdobePS” file inside the [Extensions] folder in [System Folder] to
[Trash].
B Drag the ”Proof Print“ file inside the [Printer Descriptions] folder in the [Extensions] folder in [System Folder] to [Trash].15
3. Setting Up the Printer Driver
and Canceling a Print Job
PCL 6/5e - Accessing the Printer Properties
Windows 95/98 - Accessing the Printer Properties
There are two methods you can use to open the Printer Properties.
Making Printer Default Settings
To make the printer default settings, first open the Printer Properties from the
[Printers] window.
A Click [Start] on the task bar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer whose default settings you want to change.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The Printer Properties appears.
D Set desired settings and click [OK].
Making Printer Settings From an Application
To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Printer Properties from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows 95/98.
Note
r The actual procedures you should follow to open the Printer Properties may
differ depending on the application. For details, see the documentation that
comes with the application you are using.
r When you use some applications, the driver's initial default settings of the applications might be applied over the printer driver's setting.
r Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current
application only.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Fr om the [N am e :] l i st , sele c t the pr in te r you want to u se, and then cl i ck
[Properties].
The Printer Properties appears.Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job
16
3
C Set desired settings and click [OK].
D Click [OK] to start your printing.
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties
Making Printer Default Settings - Printer Properties
Limitation
r Changing the settings of the printer requires Full Control access permission.
Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you set up
options, log on under Full Control permission.
A Click [Start] on the task bar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer whose default setting you want to change.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The Printer Properties appears.
D Set desired settings and click [OK].
Note
r Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Making Printer Default Settings – Default Document Properties
Limitation
r Changing the settings of the printer requires Full Control access permission.
Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you set up
options, log on under Full Control permission.
A Click [Start] on the task bar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer whose default settings you want to change.
C On the [File] menu, click [Document Defaults].
The Default Document Properties appears.
D Set desired settings and click [OK].
Note
r Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.PCL 6/5e - Accessing the Printer Properties
17
3
Making Printer Settings From an Application
To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Document Properties from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows NT 4.0.
Note
r The actual procedures you should follow to open the Document Properties
may differ depending on the application. For details, see the documentation
that comes with the application you are using.
r Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current
application only.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Fr om the [N am e :] l i st , sele c t the pr in te r you want to u se, and then cl i ck
[Properties].
The Document Properties appears.
C Set desired settings and click [OK].
D Click [OK] to start your printing.
Windows 3.1x - Accessing the Printer Setting Dialog Box
There are two methods you can use to open the Printer Setting dialog box.
Making Printer Default Settings
To make the printer default settings, open the Printer Setting dialog box from
[Control Panel].
A From [Program Manager], open the [Main] group.
B Double-click [Control Panel].
C Double-click the [Printers] icon.
D In the [Installed Printers:] list, click the name of the printer you want to set up.
E Click [Setup].
F Set desired settings and click [OK].
G Click [Close] to close the [Printers] dialog box.Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job
18
3
Making Printer Settings from an Application
To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Printer Setting
dialog box from that application. The following example describes how to make
settings for the Write application that comes with Windows 3.1x.
Note
r The actual procedures you should follow to open the Printer Setting dialog
box may differ depending on the application. For details, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using.
r When you use some applications, the driver's initial default settings of the applications might be applied over the printer driver's setting.
r Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current
application only.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print Setup].
The [Print Setup] dialog box appears.
B From the [Printer] group, select the printer you want to use.
Note
r If the printer you want to use is not specified as the default printer, click
[Specific Printer:], and then find the printer you want to use in the list box.
C Click [Options].
The Printer Setting dialog box appears.
D Set desired settings and click [OK].
E Click [OK] to close the [Print Setup] dialog box.
F Start your printing.PostScript - Setting Up for Printing
19
3
PostScript - Setting Up for Printing
Windows 95/98 - Accessing the Printer Properties
There are two methods you can use to open the Printer Properties.
Making Printer Default Settings
To make the printer default settings, first open the Printer Properties from the
[Printers] window.
A Click [Start] on the task bar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer whose default settings you want to change.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The Printer Properties appears.
D Set desired settings and click [OK].
Making Printer Settings from an Application
To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Printer Properties from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows 95.
Note
r The actual procedures you should follow to open the Printer Properties may
differ depending on the application. For details, see the documentation that
comes with the application you are using.
r When you use some applications, the driver's initial default settings of the applications might be applied over the printer driver's setting.
r Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current
application only.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B From the [Name:] box, select the printer you want to use, and then click
[Properties].
The Printer Properties appears.
C Set desired settings and click [OK].
D Click [OK] to start your printing.Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job
20
3
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties
Making Printer Default Settings - Printer Properties
Limitation
r Changing the settings of the printer requires Full Control access permission.
Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you set up
options, log on under Full Control permission.
A Click [Start] on the task bar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer whose default settings you want to change.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The Printer Properties appears.
D Set desired settings and click [OK].
Note
r Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
Making Printer Default Settings - Default Document Properties
Limitation
r Changing the settings of the printer requires Full Control access permission.
Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you set up
options, log on under Full Control permission.
A Click [Start] on the task bar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer whose default settings you want to change.
C On the [File] menu, click [Document Defaults].
The Default Document Properties appears.
D Set desired settings and click [OK].
Note
r Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.PostScript - Setting Up for Printing
21
3
Making Printer Settings from an Application
To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Document Properties from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows NT 4.0.
Note
r The actual procedures you should follow to open the Document Properties
may differ depending on the application. For details, see the documentation
that comes with the application you are using.
r Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current
application only.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B From the [Name:] box, select the printer you want to use, and then click
[Properties].
The Document Properties appears.
C Set desired settings and click [OK].
D Click [OK] to start your printing.
Windows 3.1x - Accessing the Printer Setting Dialog Box
There are two methods you can use to open the Printer Setting dialog box.
Making Printer Default Settings
To make the printer default settings, open the Printer Setting dialog box from
[Control Panel].
A From [Program Manager], open the [Main] group.
B Double-click [Control Panel].
C Double-click the [Printers] icon.
D In the [Installed Printers:] box, click the name of the printer you want to set
up.
E Click [Setup].
F Set desired settings and click [OK].
G Click [Close] to close the [Printers] dialog box.Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job
22
3
Making Printer Settings from an Application
To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Printer Setting
dialog box from that application. The following example describes how to make
settings for the Write application that comes with Windows 3.1x.
Note
r The actual procedures you should follow to open the Printer Setting dialog
box may differ depending on the application. For details, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using.
r When you use some applications, the driver's initial default settings of the applications might be applied over the printer driver's setting.
r Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current
application only.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print Setup].
The [Print Setup] dialog box appears.
B From the [Printer] group, select the printer you want to use.
Note
r If the printer you want to use is not specified as the default printer, click
[Specific Printer:], and then find the printer you want to use in the list box.
C Click [Options].
The Printer Setting dialog box appears.
D Set desired settings and click [OK].
E Click [OK] to close the [Print Setup] dialog box.
F Start your printing.PostScript - Setting Up for Printing
23
3
Macintosh - Setting Up for Printing
Making Paper Settings from an Application
A Open the file you want to print.
B On the [File] menu, click [Page Setup].
[AdobePS Page Setup] appears.
C Confirm that the printer you want to use is shown in the [Format for:] box.
Note
r If your printer is now shown in the [Format for:] box, use the pop-up menu
to display a list of available printers.
Reference
The actual appearance of the Page Setup depends on the application you
are using. See the documentation that comes with your Macintosh for details.
D From the [Paper:] box, select the paper size.
E Set desired settings and click [OK].
Setting up for Printing from an Application
A Open the file you want to print.
B On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The Printer Settings appears.
C Confirm that your printer is selected in the [Printer:] box.
D Set desired settings and click [Print].Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job
24
3
Canceling a Print Job
Windows 95/98 - Canceling a Print Job
A Double-click the printer icon on the task bar.
This opens a window that shows all the print jobs that are currently queued
for printing. Check the current status of the job you want to cancel.
B Click the name of the job you want to cancel so that it is highlighted.
C On the [Document] menu, click [Cancel Printing].
Note
r You can also open the print job queue window by double-clicking the
printer icon in the [Printers] window.
D Press the printer's {Job Reset} key.
The message appears on the panel display indicating that the print job is being cancelled.
Important
r When your printer is being shared by multiple computers, be careful not
to accidentally cancel someone else's print job.
Note
r You cannot stop printing the data that has already been processed internally by the printer. Because of this, printing might continue for a few pages
after you press {Job Reset}.
r A print job that contains a large volume of data might take considerable
time to stop.
r It takes about 5 minutes to reset the printer job, after 5 minutes the printer
returns to the ready condition.
Windows NT 4.0 - Canceling a Print Job
A Double-click the printer icon on the task bar.
This opens a window that shows all the print jobs that are currently queued
for printing. Check the current status of the job you want to cancel.
B Click the name of the job you want to cancel so that it is highlighted.
C On the [Document] menu, click [Cancel].
Note
r You can also open the print job queue window by double-clicking the
printer icon in the [Printers] window.Canceling a Print Job
25
3
D Press the printer's {Job Reset} key.
The message appears on the panel display indicating that the print job is being cancelled.
Important
r When your printer is being shared by multiple computers, be careful not
to accidentally cancel someone else's print job.
Note
r You cannot stop printing data that has already been processed internally
by the printer. Because of this, printing might continue for a few pages after you press {Job Reset}.
r A print job that contains a large volume of data might take considerable
time to stop.
r It takes about 5 minutes to reset the printer job, after 5 minutes the printer
returns to the ready condition.
Windows 3.1x - Canceling a Print Job
A In the [Main] group, double-click the [Print Manager] icon.
This opens a window that shows all the print jobs that are currently queued
for printing.
B Click the name of the job you want to cancel so it is highlighted.
C On the [Document] menu, click [Delete Document].
D Click [Close] to close the dialog box.
E Press the printer's {Job Reset} key.
The message appears on the panel display indicating that the print job is being cancelled.
Important
r When your printer is being shared by multiple computers, be careful not
to accidentally cancel someone else's print job.
Note
r You cannot stop printing data that has already been processed internally
by the printer. Because of this, printing might continue for a few pages after you press {Job Reset}.
r A print job that contains a large volume of data might take considerable
time to stop.
r It takes about 5 minutes to reset the printer job, after 5 minutes the printer
returns to the ready condition. Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job
26
3
Macintosh - Canceling a Print Job
A Double-click the printer icon on the desk top.
This opens a window that shows all the print jobs that are currently queued
for printing. Check the current status of the job you want to cancel.
B Click the name of the job you want to cancel so that it is highlighted.
C Click the pause icon, and then click the trash icon.
D Press the printer's {Job Reset} key.
The message appears on the panel display indicating that the print job is being cancelled.
Important
r When your printer is being shared by multiple computers, be careful not
to accidentally cancel someone else's print job.
Note
r You cannot stop printing data that has already been processed internally
by the printer. Because of this, printing might continue for a few pages after you press {Job Reset}.
r A print job that contains a large volume of data might take considerable
time to stop.
r It takes about 5 minutes to reset the printer job, after 5 minutes the printer
returns to the ready condition. 27
4. Paper and Other Media
Paper and Other Media Supported by
Your Printer
Paper Types and Sizes
This section describes the type, size, feed direction, and maximum capacity of
paper that can be loaded into each paper tray in this printer.
Important
r If you use damp or curled paper, a misfeed might occur. In such a case, try
turning over the paper stack in the paper tray. If there is no improvement,
change paper with less curl.
r Be sure to set the paper size dial to match the actual paper size loaded in the
tray. When the actual paper size is not shown on the dial, set the dial to “p”
and specify the paper size using the operation panel.
r For Tray 1, 2, 3 and 4, the dial setting overrides the setting made with the operation panel.
Note
r The meaning of the display of the operation panel and paper feed direction is
described below.
r It is recommended that you load paper having the size and direction you frequently use in the tray selected with the “Tray Priority”. For more information on Tray Priority, see P.94 “Job Control Menu”.
r When loading paper having the same size in more than one tray, it is recommended that you load paper in the same direction.
r The supported paper size may differ depending on the memory size of your
printer. ? P.109 “Memory Capacity and Printer Function”
r For more information about the meanings of the abbreviations, see the notes
at the bottom of each table.
Reference
For more information on loading each type of paper, see P.41 “Loading Paper
and Other Media”.
Example on the panel display Paper feed direction
A4 (210 × 297) short-edge feed direction
A4 (297 × 210) long-edge feed directionPaper and Other Media
28
4
v Input Paper Sizes (Metric version)
Size (mm)
Standard Tray (Tray1)
PS400 (500–sheet paper feed unit)
PS440 (1000–sheet paper feed unit)
Standard Tray (Tray2)
PS420 (2000–sheet paper feed unit)
Bypass Tray Type 270
A3 297 × 420 I I X m
B4 JIS 257 × 364 H H X m
A4 210 × 297 I I X m
297 × 210 I I m m
B5 JIS 182 × 257 H H X m
257 × 182 H H X m
A5 148 × 210 H H X m
210 × 148 X H X m
A6 105 × 148 X H X m
Double Letter 279 × 432 I I X m
Legal 216 × 356 I I X m
Letter 216 × 279 I I X m
279 × 216 I I m m
Half Letter 140 × 216 H H X m
Executive 184 × 267 H H X m
267 × 184 H H X m
Folio 210 × 330 H H X m
Foolscap 216 × 330 H H X m
F/GL 203 × 330 H H X m
Com#10 Env 105 × 241 X H X m
C6 Env 114 × 162 X H X m
C5 Env 162 × 229 X H X m
DL Env 110 × 220 X H X mPaper and Other Media Supported by Your Printer
29
4
• m means that the size is supported and should be specify the paper size using
the operation panel. (The bypass tray and PS420 has no dial on the tray.)
• I means that the size is supported and indicated on the tray dial. Be sure to
set the paper size dial to match the actual paper size loaded in the tray.
• H means that the size is supported but not indicated on the tray dial. You
should set the tray dial to “p”, and specify the paper size using the operation
panel.
• m* means that the supported size is approximately 90 – 297mm in width, and
approximately 148 – 432mm in length. The supported size may differ depending on the printer language you use. Use the printer driver to specify the custom size. Set the custom size setting with the operation panel.
• X means that the size is not supported.
Monarch Env 98 × 191 X H X m
Custom Size
(PCL6/PS only)
— X X X m*
8K 267 × 390 H H X m
16K 195 × 267 H H X m
267 × 195 H H X m
Size (mm)
Standard Tray (Tray1)
PS400 (500–sheet paper feed unit)
PS440 (1000–sheet paper feed unit)
Standard Tray (Tray2)
PS420 (2000–sheet paper feed unit)
Bypass Tray Type 270Paper and Other Media
30
4
v Input Paper Sizes (Inch version)
Size (inch)
Standard Tray (Tray1)
PS400 (500–sheet paper feed unit)
PS440 (1000–sheet paper feed unit)
Standard Tray (Tray2)
PS420 (2000–sheet paper feed unit)
Bypass Tray Type 270
Double Letter 11" × 17" I I X m
Legal 8
1
/2
" × 14" I I X m
Letter 8
1
/2
" × 11" I I X m
11" × 8
1
/2
" I I m m
Half Letter 5
1
/2
" × 8
1
/2
" H H X m
Executive 7
1
/4
" × 10
1
/2
" H H X m
10
1
/2
" × 7
1
/4
" H H X m
A3 11.69" × 16.54" I I X m
B4 JIS 10.12" × 14.33" H H X m
A4 8.27" × 11.69" I I X m
11.69" × 8.27" I I m m
B5 JIS 7.17" × 10.12" H H X m
10.12" × 7.17" H H X m
A5 5.83" × 8.27" H H X m
8.27" × 5.83" X H X m
A6 4.13" × 5.83" X H X m
Folio 8
1
/4
" × 13" H H X m
Foolscap 8
1
/2
" × 13" H H X m
F/GL 8" × 13" H H X m
Com#10 Env 4
1
/8
" × 9
1
/2
" X H X m
C6 Env 4.49" × 6.38" X H X mPaper and Other Media Supported by Your Printer
31
4
• m means that the size is supported and should be specify the paper size using
the operation panel. (The bypass tray and PS420 has no dial on the tray.)
• I means that the size is supported and indicated on the tray dial. Be sure to
set the paper size dial to match the actual paper size loaded in the tray.
• H means that the size is supported but not indicated on the tray dial. You
should set the tray dial to “p”, and specify the paper size using the operation
panel.
• m* means that the supported size is approximately 3.88" – 11.69" in width,
and approximately 5.83" – 17.00" in length. The supported size may differ depending on the printer language you use. Use the printer driver to specify the
custom size. Set the custom size setting with the operation panel.
• X means that the size is not supported.
C5 Env 6.38" × 9.02" X H X m
DL Env 4.33" × 8.66" X H X m
Monarch Env 3
7
/8
" × 7
1
/2
" X H X m
Custom Size
(PCL6/PS only)
— X X X m*
8K 10
1
/2
" × 15.35" H H X m
16K 7.68" × 10
1
/2
" H H X m
10
1
/2
" × 7.68" H H X m
Size (inch)
Standard Tray (Tray1)
PS400 (500–sheet paper feed unit)
PS440 (1000–sheet paper feed unit)
Standard Tray (Tray2)
PS420 (2000–sheet paper feed unit)
Bypass Tray Type 270Paper and Other Media
32
4
v Output Paper Sizes (Metric version)
Size (mm)
SR720 (finisher shift tray)
SR720 (finisher staple)
CS370 (mailbox)
AD370 (duplex unit)
A3 297 × 420 m m m m
B4 JIS 257 × 364 m m m m
A4 210 × 297 m m m m
297 × 210 m m m m
B5 JIS 182 × 257 m m m m
257 × 182 m m m m
A5 148 × 210 m X m m
210 × 148 X X X X
A6 105 × 148 X X X X
Double Letter 279 × 432 m m m m
Legal (LG) 216 × 356 m m m m
Letter 216 × 279 m m m m
279 × 216 m m m m
Half Letter 140 × 216 m X X X
Executive (Exec.) 184 × 267 m X m m
267 × 184 m X m m
Folio 210 × 330 m X m m
Foolscap 216 × 330 m X m m
F/GL 203 × 330 m X m m
Com#10 Env 105 × 241 X X X X
C6 Env 114 ×162 X X X X
C5 Env 162 × 229 X X X X
DL Env 110 × 220 X X X X
Monarch Env 98 × 191 X X X XPaper and Other Media Supported by Your Printer
33
4
• m means that the size is supported.
• m* means that the size is supported and depended on the input paper source.
• X means that the size is not supported.
Custom Size
(PCL6/PS only)
— m* X X X
8K 267 × 390 m X m X
16K 195 × 267 m X m X
267 × 195 m X m X
Size (mm)
SR720 (finisher shift tray)
SR720 (finisher staple)
CS370 (mailbox)
AD370 (duplex unit)Paper and Other Media
34
4
v Output Paper Sizes (Inch version)
Size (inch)
SR720 (finisher shift tray)
SR720 (finisher staple)
CS370 (mailbox)
AD370 (duplex unit)
Double Letter 11" × 17" m m m m
Legal (LG) 8
1
/2
" × 14" m m m m
Letter 8
1
/2
" × 11" m m m m
11" × 8
1
/2
" m m m m
Half Letter 5
1
/2
" × 8
1
/2
" m X X X
Executive (Exec.) 7
1
/4
" × 10
1
/2
" m X m m
10
1
/2
" × 7
1
/4
" m X m m
A3 11.69" × 16.54" m m m m
B4 JIS 10.12" × 14.33" m m m m
A4 8.27" × "11.69 m m m m
11.69" × 8.27" m m m m
B5 JIS 7.17" × 10.12" m m m m
10.12" × 7.17" m m m m
A5 5.83" × 8.27" m X m m
8.27" × 5.83" X X X X
A6 4.13" × 5.83" X X X X
Folio 8
1
/4
" × 13" m X m m
Foolscap 8
1
/2
" × 13" m X m m
F/GL 8" × 13" m X m m
Com#10 Env 4
1
/8
" × 9
1
/2
" X X X X
C6 Env 4.49" × 6.38" X X X X
C5 Env 6.38" × 9.02" X X X X
DL Env 4.33" × 8.66" X X X X
Monarch Env 3
7
/8
" × 7
1
/2
" X X X XPaper and Other Media Supported by Your Printer
35
4
• m means that the size is supported.
• m* means that the size is supported and depended on the input paper source.
• X means that the size is not supported.
v Paper Weight and Number of Sheets to be Set
*1
Confirm that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark indicated on the
side guide of the tray.
Custom Size
(PCL6/PS only)
— m* X X X
8K 10
1
/2
" × 15.35" m X m X
16K 7.68" × 10
1
/2
" m X m X
10
1
/2
" × 7.68" m X m X
Supported paper
weight
Maximum number of
sheets (plain paper)
*1
Tray 1, PS400 (option), PS440
(option)
60 - 105g/m2
(16 - 28 lb) 500 (80g/m2
, 20lb)
Tray 2 60 - 157g/m2
(16 - 42 lb) 500 (80g/m2
, 20lb)
PS420 (option) 60 - 105g/m2
(16 - 28 lb) 2,000 (80g/m2
, 20lb)
Bypass Tray Type 270 (option) 60 - 157g/m2
(16 - 42 lb) 100 (80g/m2
, 20lb)
Size (inch)
SR720 (finisher shift tray)
SR720 (finisher staple)
CS370 (mailbox)
AD370 (duplex unit)Paper and Other Media
36
4
Paper Recommendations
Note the following suggestions when handling or selecting paper used with this
printer.
Loading Paper
• Use only the recommended paper types. Print quality cannot be guaranteed
if other paper types are used.
• Do not use paper that is already printed on.
• If you load paper into the paper tray, confirm not to stack over the limit mark.
• If you load paper onto Bypass Tray Type 270, confirm that the paper fits under the side guide.
• If you load paper into the paper tray, confirm that print side is facing up.
• If you load paper onto Bypass Tray Type 270, confirm that print side is facing
down.
Storing Paper
Paper should always be stored properly. Improperly stored paper might result
in poor print quality, paper misfeeds, or printer damage.
Recommendations are as follows:
• Avoid storing paper in humid areas.
• Avoid exposing paper to direct sunlight.
• Store on a flat surface.
• Keep open reams of paper in the package in which the paper came.
Types of Paper and Other Media
v Plain Paper
• If you print on paper heavier than 105g/m2
(28lb), use tray 2 or Bypass
Tray Type 270. The each tray can hold paper up to 157g/m2
(42lb) in
weight.
• If you load paper heavier than 105g/m2
(28lb) onto tray 2, set the printer
to the "Thick paper" mode. ? P.44 “Loading Thick Paper, Envelope or OHP
Transparencies”
• If paper is curled or bent, straighten it before loading.
• If you print on paper for color, load it onto tray 2 and do not stack paper
over the lower limit mark.Paper and Other Media Supported by Your Printer
37
4
v OHP Transparencies
• If you load OHP transparencies onto Bypass Tray Type 270, set the printer
to "Transparency" mode using the printer driver.
• Be careful not to touch the print side of the OHP transparencies. Otherwise, the print side can become dirty or damaged, resulting in poor print
quality.
• If you print on an OHP transparency that has a print side, load it face up
onto tray 2 or load it face down onto Bypass Tray Type 270.
• Do not print on OHP transparencies for color.
v Adhesive Labels
• Load only one adhesive label at a time onto Bypass Tray Type 270.
• Use adhesive labels in which the whole side can be printed on.
• Avoid using adhesive labels having exposed glue.
• If the print side is coated, the print quality might be reduced, as the toner
might not fuse well.
v Envelopes
• When printing on envelopes, use tray 2 or Bypass Tray Type 270.
• You can specify the sizes for the envelopes using the operation panel.
? P.94 “Job Control Parameters”
• Recommended of envelopes is as follows:
• Com#10 Env
• C6 Env
• C5 Env
• DL Env
• Monarch Env
• Do not stack envelopes over the limit mark.
• Confirm that print side is facing up when loading onto the tray 2.
• Confirm that print side is facing down when loading onto Bypass Tray
Type 270.
• Load the envelopes with the flaps aligned to the right side fence. The flaps
should be securely folded down.
• Confirm that there is no air in the envelopes before loading.
• To get better print quality, it is recommended that you set the right, left,
top, and bottom print margins, to at least 15mm (0.6") each.
• Do not print on both sides of envelopes.
• Load only one size and type of envelope at a time.
• Before loading envelopes, flatten the leading edges (side being fed into the
printer) of them by running a pencil or ruler across them.Paper and Other Media
38
4
• There are some kinds of envelopes that might be occurred misfeed, wrinkle or poor printing.
• Before loading envelopes, confirm that they are rectangular in shape. See
the following illustrations.
• Avoid using the non-supported envelopes listed on P.38 “Paper not Supported by This Printer”.
Paper not Supported by This Printer
Avoid using the following types of paper that are not supported by this printer:
• Paper whose weight is heavier or lighter than the limitation. ? P.27 “Paper
Types and Sizes”
• Bent, folded, or creased paper
• Curled or twisted paper
• Torn paper
• Wrinkled paper
• Damp paper
• Paper stuck together
• Paper that is dry enough to emit static electricity
• Paper that has already been printed except a preprinted letterhead
Note
r Ink on paper from an earlier print job, another copier, an inkjet printer or
other devices could damage the fusing unit of this printer due to a different
fusing temperatures.
• Coated paper
• Special paper like thermal paper, aluminum foil, carbon paper and conductive paper
A Good construction for envelopes
B Poor construction for envelopes
A Good construction for envelopes
B Poor construction for envelopes
TS3X020E
2
1
TS3X010E
2
1Paper and Other Media Supported by Your Printer
39
4
• Heavily textured paper
• Glued paper
• OHP transparencies for color.
• OHP transparencies for the ink-jet printer.
• Label paper on which glue or base paper is exposed
• Paper with clips or staples
• Paper with tape or ribbons attached
• Envelopes that are:
• damp
• excessively curled or twisted
• stuck together
• damaged in any way
• with stamps attached
• with windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing
• with metal clasps, string ties, or metal folding bars
• designed to be interlocked
• with nicked edges of bent corners
• with rough, cockle, or laid finishes
• with any exposed adhesive, when the flap is in the sealed or closed positionPaper and Other Media
40
4
Printable Area
The following shows the printable area for this printer. Be sure to set the print
margins correctly.
A : printable area
Note
r The printable area may differ depending on paper size, printer language and
printer driver settings.
2mm (1/12" )
3mm
(1/8")
1
2mm (1/12" )
2mm
(1/12" )
2mm (1/12" ) 2mm (1/12" )Loading Paper and Other Media
41
4
Loading Paper and Other Media
Loading Paper in the Paper
Tray
This section describes instructions for
loading paper whose size and feed direction is already set in the standard
paper tray and the optional PS400 or
PS440. If you want to change the paper size or feed direction, see P.42
“Changing Paper Size of the Paper
Tray”.
If you want to load paper in PS420,
see P.44 “Loading Paper on PS420 (Paper Feed Unit)”. If you want to load paper in Bypass Tray Type 270, see P.45
“Loading Paper in Bypass Tray Type
270”.
Important
r Confirm that the setting of the paper size dial matches the paper size
and feed direction of the paper in
the tray. Otherwise, the paper misfeed or unexpected result might
occur.
Reference
For more information on the size
and feed direction of paper that
can be loaded in the tray, see P.27
“Paper Types and Sizes”.
A Slide the paper tray out until it
stops.
B Align all four sides of the paper
stack, and load it into the tray.
Important
r Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
r When you set custom size or
thick paper in tray 2, do not
stack paper above the lower
limit mark of tray 2.
Note
r Set the paper after shuffling
through the sheets.
r Load paper face up onto the
tray.
C Slide the tray into the printer until it stops.
ZAEY012E
ZAEY030E Paper and Other Media
42
4
Changing Paper Size of the
Paper Tray
Reference
For more information on the size
and feed direction of paper that
can be set in the tray, see P.27 “Paper Types and Sizes”.
A Slide the paper tray out until it
stops.
B Set the paper guide lock to the
“unlocked” position.
Important
r Confirm that the lever of the
side guide was released before
sliding this guide, otherwise it
can be damaged.
C Slide the side paper guide wide
open (B) by pressing the release
lever of the side guide (A).
D Slide the rear guide widely by
pushing the releasing lever of the
rear guide.
E Align all four sides of the paper
stack, and load it into the tray.
Important
r Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
ZAEY012E
ZAEY013E
ZAEY021E
ZAEY034E
ZAEY030E Loading Paper and Other Media
43
4
r When you set thick paper in tray
2, do not stack paper above the
lower limit mark (A) of tray 2.
Note
r Shuffle the paper before setting
in the tray.
r Load paper face up onto the
tray.
F Align the side guide for the loaded paper size (B) by opening the
release lever of the side guide
(A).
G Set paper guide lock to the
“locked” position.
H Align the rear guide for the loaded paper size slightly by pushing
the releasing lever of the rear
guide.
I Adjust the paper size dial for
loaded paper size.
Important
r Confirm that the setting of the
paper size dial matches the paper size and feed direction of
the paper in the tray. Otherwise,
the paper misfeed or unexpected printing result might occur.
r Confirm that the paper size dial
matches the actual paper size
loaded in the tray. If the actual
paper size is not shown on the
dial, set the dial to "p" and
specify the paper size using the
operation panel. For more information on specifying the paper
size, see P.27 “Paper Types and
Sizes”.
J Slide the tray into the printer until it stops.
ZAEY052E
ZAEY031E
ZAEY032E
ZAEY033E
ZAEY050E Paper and Other Media
44
4
Loading Thick Paper,
Envelope or OHP
Transparencies
You can load thick paper, envelope or
OHP transparencies onto the tray 2.
When thick paper or OHP transparencies are loaded, switch the lever inside of the paper tray.
Reference
For more information on loading
paper, see P.27 “Paper and Other
Media”.
Important
r When you set thick paper in tray 2,
do not stack paper above the lower
limit mark (A) of tray 2.
A Change the lever on the paper
size dial of the tray 2 to the "Thick
paper” mode.
Limitation
r If the “Thick paper” mode is selected, the function for using the
tray 2 is not available.
• Duplex print
• Sort, Shift Sort
• Staple
• Limitless paper feed
• Proof Print
The yellow line appears under the
paper size indication on the front
of the paper tray.
Note
r Return the lever to the left side,
after you finished printing on
thick paper.
Loading Paper on PS420
(Paper Feed Unit)
This section describes instructions to
load paper in the optional paper feed
unit PS420. You can load A4 longedge feed (Metric version) or 8
1
/2
" ×
11" long-edge feed (Inch version) size
onto PS420.
Note
r Load the paper that is the same
size on the right and left sides of
the paper feed unit.
A Slide the paper tray out until it
stops.
ZAEY052E
ZAEH260E
ZAEY200E Loading Paper and Other Media
45
4
B Load the paper completely into
the tray.
Important
r Align the paper to the each side
completely.
r Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
r Confirm that the end fence locks
completely after loading the
right side paper.
r If you want to change the paper
size, contact your sales or service representative.
Note
r Shuffle the paper before setting
in the tray.
r Load the paper face up onto the
tray.
C Slide the tray into the printer until it stops.
Loading Paper in Bypass Tray
Type 270
Note
r Paper sizes supported by the bypass tray are approximately 90 -
297mm (Metric version) or 3.54 -
11.69" (Inch version) in width, and
approximately 148 - 432mm (Metric version) or 5.83 - 17.00" (Inch
version) in length. Set the custom
size to specify with the printer
driver or the operation panel. For
more information on using the operation panel, see P.48 “Specifying
the Custom Paper Size for the Bypass
Tray”.
r If you load thick paper, OHP transparencies or envelopes, set the
printer to the “Thick paper” mode
using the printer driver.
Limitation
r The function with using the bypass
tray is not available.
• Duplex print
• Sort, Shift Sort
• Staple
• Limitless paper feed
• Proof Print
A Open the bypass tray.
ZAEY201E
ZAEY040E Paper and Other Media
46
4
B Lift the paper guide lever.
Important
r If the paper guides do not
match the paper size, a skew
image or a paper misfeed might
occur.
Note
r Swing out the extender to support paper sizes longer than A4
short-edge feed (Metric version)
or 8
1
/2
" × 11" short-edge feed
(Inch version).
C Load the paper and adjust the paper guides to the sides of the paper.
Important
r Confirm the print side of the
OHP transparencies. Some
OHP transparencies can be
printed on only the specific
side.
Note
r Do not stack paper over the limit mark. Otherwise a skew image or a paper misfeed might
occur.
r When you set custom size or
thick paper on the bypass tray,
do not stack paper above the
lower limit mark of the bypass
tray.
r Shuffle the paper before setting
in the tray.
r Load the paper face down onto
the tray.
D Push down the paper guide lever.
Note
r If the paper guide lever is not
pushed down, paper misfeed
might occur.
E Configure the paper size for the
loaded paper size.
Important
r The paper size specified with
the printer driver overrides the
one specified here.
Reference
For more information on specifying the bypass tray, see the
printer driver help.
For more information on specifying custom paper, see P.48
“Specifying the Custom Paper Size
for the Bypass Tray”.
ZAEY210E
ZAEY220E
ZAEY250E Loading Paper and Other Media
47
4
A Press {Menu}.
The following message appears
on the panel display.
Main Menu:
Proof Print
B Press {T} or {U} until the following message appears.
Main Menu:
Job Control
C Press {Enter}.
The following message appears
on the panel display.
Job Control:
Paper Input
D Press {Enter}.
The following message appears
on the panel display.
Paper Input:
Tray Priority
E Press {T} or {U} until the following message appears.
Paper Input:
Bypass Size
F Press {Enter}.
The following message appears
on the panel display.
Bypass Size:
Standard Size
G Press {Enter}.
The currently selected paper
size appears on the panel display.
Standard Size:
11 x 8 1/2
H Press {T} or {U} to select the
standard size.
I Press {Enter}.
The following message appears
on the panel display.
Standard Size:
*8 x 13
Note
r “p” shown in front of an
item indicates that the item is
currently selected.
J After the panel display changes, press {Menu}.
The panel display returns to the
ready condition as follows:
Ready
Paper and Other Media
48
4
Specifying the Custom Paper
Size for the Bypass Tray
Important
r The paper size specified with the
printer driver overrides the one
specified here.
r When you set custom size or thick
paper on the bypass tray, do not
stack paper above the lower limit
mark of the bypass tray.
A Press {Menu}.
The following message appears on
the panel display.
Main Menu:
Proof Print
B Press {T} or {U} until the following message appears.
Main Menu:
Job Control
C Press {Enter}.
The following message appears on
the panel display.
Job Control:
Paper Input
D Press {Enter}.
The following message appears on
the panel display.
Paper Input:
Tray Priority
E Press {T} or {U} until the following message appears.
Paper Input:
Bypass Size
F Press {Enter}.
The following message appears on
the panel display.
Bypass Size:
Standard Size
G Press {Enter}.
Standard Size:
*11 x 8 1/2
H Press {T} or {U} until the following message appears.
Standard Size:
Custom Size
I Press {Enter}.
The following message appears on
the panel display.
Bypass Size:
Standard Size
J Press {T} or {U} until the following message appears.
Bypass Size:
Custom Size
K Press {Enter}.
The following message appears on
the panel display.
Custom Size:
Vert.. 8.00 “
Note
r You can change the size unit using the operation panel, see P.94
“Job Control Menu”.
r The vertical size and horizontal
size are described as follows.Loading Paper and Other Media
49
4
1. Horizontal size
2. Vertical size
L Press {U} or {T} to set the vertical value.
M Press {Enter}.
The following message appears on
the panel display.
Custom Size:
Horiz. 11.00 “
N Press {U} or {T} to set the horizontal value.
O Press {Enter}.
P After the panel display changes,
press {Menu}.
The panel display returns to the
ready condition as follows:
Ready
1
2
ZAEY221E Paper and Other Media
50
451
5. Troubleshooting
Error & Status Messages on the Operation
Panel
Messages Description Comments
Add Staples The stapler is empty. Replace the staple refill
with a new one. ? P.75
“Adding Staples”
Add Toner The printer is out of toner. Replace a new toner bottle.
Call Service
Power Off On
The Service Code Number
identifies the failure.
Contact your sales or service representative.
Call Service
SC_###
The Service Code Number
identifies the failure.
Turn the printer power off
and on. If the message appears again, contact your
sales or service representative.
Close Bridge
Unit Cover
The cover of Bridge Unit
Type 270 is open.
Close the cover of Bridge
Unit Type 270.
Close
Finisher Cover
The cover of SR720 (finisher) is open.
Close the cover of SR720
(finisher).
Close
Front Cover
The front cover is open. Close the front cover of the
printer.
Close
Mailbox Cover
The cover of CS370 (4-bin
Mailbox) is open.
Close the cover of CS370 (4-
bin Mailbox) cover.
Close Right
Cover
The right cover of the printer is open.
Close the right cover of the
printer.
Close R-Cover at
Paper Tray
Lower right cover 1 or 2 is
open.
Close lower right cover 1 or
2.
Close Upper
Right Cover
The upper right cover is
open.
Close the upper right cover.
Cls. Interchange
Unit Cover
The Interchange Unit Type
280 cover is open.
Close the interchange unit
cover.
Energy Saver 1 In Energy Save Mode level
1.
Press the operation key or
send a job from the computer to turn the power on.Troubleshooting
52
5
Energy Saver 2 In Energy Save Mode level
2.
Press the operation key or
send a job from the computer to turn the power on.
Error 1 An error with the optional
RAM has occurred.
Turn the printer power off
and on. If the message appears again, contact your
sales or service representative.
Error 2 An error with the parallel
interface board has occurred.
Turn the printer power off
and on. If the message appears again, contact your
sales or service representative.
Error 3 An error with the NV-RAM
has occurred.
Turn the printer power off
and on. If the message appears again, contact your
sales or service representative.
Error 4 An error with the DIMM
has occurred.
Turn the printer power off
and on. If the message appears again, contact your
sales or service representative.
Error 5 An error with the HDD has
occurred.
Install the HDD again. If
the message appears again,
contact your sales or service representative.
Error 6 An error with the Resident
font ROM has occurred.
Turn the printer power off
and on. If the message appears again, contact your
sales or service representative.
Error 7 An error with the ASIC has
occurred.
Turn the printer power off
and on. If the message appears again, contact your
sales or service representative.
Error 30711 AD370 (duplex unit) cannot be used.
Another tray is used to
print. Contact your sales or
service representative.
Error 30721 PS420 (paper feed unit)
cannot be used.
Another tray is used to
print. Contact your sales or
service representative.
Messages Description CommentsError & Status Messages on the Operation Panel
53
5
Error 30722 Tray 1 cannot be used. Another tray is used to
print. Contact your sales or
service representative.
Error 30723 Tray 2 cannot be used. Another tray is used to
print. Contact your sales or
service representative.
Error 30724 Tray 3 cannot be used. Another tray is used to
print. Contact your sales or
service representative.
Error 30725 Tray 4 cannot be used. Another tray is used to
print. Contact your sales or
service representative.
Error 30740 The staple tray of SR720
(finisher) cannot be used.
Another tray is used to
print. Contact your sales or
service representative.
Error 30743 The shift tray cannot be
used.
Another tray is used to
print. Contact your sales or
service representative.
Error 30744 SR720 (finisher) cannot be
used.
Another tray is used to
print. Contact your sales or
service representative.
Error 40711 AD370 (duplex unit) cannot be used.
Press {Job Reset}. Contact
your sales or service representative.
Error 40740 The staple tray of SR720
(finisher) cannot be used.
Press {Job Reset}. Contact
your sales or service representative.
Error 40744 SR720 (finisher) cannot be
used.
Press {Job Reset}. Contact
your sales or service representative.
Form Feeding... Doing form feed. Wait for a while.
Load Bypass xx Bypass Tray is out of paper.
xx : Paper Size
Load paper of the indicated
paper size into the bypass
tray.
Load Tray **
xx
There is out of paper.
** : Number Tray
xx : Paper Size
Load paper of the indicated
paper size into the paper
tray.
Messages Description CommentsTroubleshooting
54
5
Load ***
XX
There is no paper tray of
the indicated.
***: Paper Type
XX: Paper Size
Load paper onto the tray of
the indicated.
Low On Toner The toner bottle is almost
empty.
Prepare a new toner bottle.
If the image density is too
light, replace the old toner
bottle with a new one. ?
P.78 “Replacing the Toner
Bottle”
Misfeed:{location}
Open Front Cover
There is a misfeed in the
printer.
Remove the misfed paper
from {location}. ? P.69 “Removing Misfed Paper”
No Files Exist There is no proof print file. Specify correct proof print
file.? P.108 “Deleting a
Proof Print File”
Offline Printer is offline. The printer cannot accept or print
out data.
If you want to put the printer online, press {On Line}.
Printing... Doing print job. Wait for a while.
Processing... Print data is being processed.
Wait for a while.
Processing...
Please Wait
The user tries to print the
Proof Print data while writing the data to HDD.
Wait until the printer returns to the ready condition.
Ready The printer is ready for
printing.
—
Remove Misfeed
from Duplex Unit
There is a misfeed in
AD370 (duplex unit).
Remove the misfed paper
from AD370 (duplex unit).
? P.69 “Removing Misfed
Paper”
Remove Misfeed
from Finisher
There is a misfeed in SR720
(finisher).
Remove the misfed paper
from SR720 (finisher). ?
P.69 “Removing Misfed Paper”
Remove Misfeed
from Mailbox
There is a misfeed in CS370
(4-bin Mailbox).
Remove the misfed paper
from CS370 (4-bin Mailbox). ? P.69 “Removing
Misfed Paper”
Remove Paper
from Duplex Unit
There is still paper in
AD370 (duplex unit).
Remove paper from AD370
(duplex unit).
Messages Description CommentsError & Status Messages on the Operation Panel
55
5
Remove Paper
from Staple Tray
There is paper in the stack
unit of SR720 (finisher).
Remove paper from the
stack unit of SR720 (finisher).
Important
r Remove the paper from
the output tray before it
becomes full. If you
leave paper in the output tray, it can cause a
paper misfeed.
Remove Paper
Mailbox Tray #
The CS370 (4-bin Mailbox)
tray # is full.
Remove paper from the
CS370 (4-bin Mailbox) tray.
Important
r Remove the paper from
output tray before it becomes full. If you leave
paper in the output tray,
it can cause a paper misfeed.
Remove Paper
Shift Tray
The shift tray of SR720 (finisher) is full.
Remove paper from the
SR720 (finisher) tray.
Important
r Remove the paper from
the output tray before it
becomes full. If you
leave paper in the output tray, it can cause a
paper misfeed.
Replace
Maintenance Kit
It is time to replace parts included in Maintenance Kit.
Replace Maintenance Kit.
After replacing the kit,
clean the registration rollers.
Replace
PCU
It is time to replace Photo
Conductor Unit.
Replace Photo Conductor
Unit.
Remove Paper
Standard Tray
The standard output tray is
full.
Remove paper from the
output tray.
Important
r Remove the paper from
output tray before it becomes full. If you leave
paper in the output tray,
it can cause a paper misfeed.
Messages Description CommentsTroubleshooting
56
5
Note
r If you cannot solve the problem by taking the actions listed in the preceding
table, turn the power off, and then back on again. If this does not clear the error message, take a note of the contents and number of the error message and
contact your sales or service representative.
Reset Duplex
Unit Correctly
AD370 (duplex unit) is not
set correctly.
Set the AD370 (duplex unit)
correctly.
Reset Fusing
Unit Correctly
There is no fusing unit, or
the fusing unit is not installed properly.
Install the fusing unit properly. For more information
on the fusing unit, see the
"Maintenance Kit Type 270
Replacement Guide" that
comes with the maintenance kit.
Resetting Job... Resetting Print job. Wait for while.
Reset PCU
Correctly
There is no Photo Conductor Unit, or Photo Conductor Unit is not installed
properly.
Install Photo Conductor
Unit again. For more information on Photo Conductor Unit, see the "Photo
Conductor Unit Replacement Guide" that comes
with the photo conductor
unit.
Reset Tray 1
Correctly
There is no paper tray, or
Tray 1 is not set correctly.
Note
r This message appears
only for the default tray.
? P.94 “Job Control Parameters”
Set the tray correctly.
Setting Changed
Cannot Print
The paper feed unit setting
has been changed, and the
proof print failed.
Configure the paper feed
unit correctly, and try
again.
Waiting... Printer is waiting for the
next data to print.
Wait for a while.
Warming Up... The printer is now preparing for printing.
Wait until the printer is
warmed up.
Messages Description CommentsError & Status Messages on the Operation Panel
57
5
Getting Printer Information over the Network
Printer Current Status
You can check the printer's current status using "Telnet (mshell)".
v mshell
Use status command.
Reference
For more information, see “Remote Maintenance by Telnet (mshell)” in the
Operating Instructions of the optional network interface board.
Messages Description Resolution
Add Staples The stapler is empty. Replace the staple refill
with new one. ? P.75
“Adding Staples”
Add Toner The printer is out of toner. Replace a new toner bottle.
Call Service Power Off On The Service Code or SC
number identifies the failure.
Contact your sales or service representative.
Call Service SC_XXX The Service Code or SC
number identifies the failure.
Turn the printer power off
and on. If the message appears again, contact your
sales or service representative.
Close Bridge Unit Cover The cover of Bridge Unit
Type 270 is open.
Close the cover of Bridge
Unit Type 270.
Close Finisher Cover The cover of SR720 (finisher) is open.
Close the cover of SR720
(finisher).
Close Front Cover The front cover is open. Close the front cover of the
printer.
Close Mailbox Cover The cover of CS370 (4-bin
Mailbox) is open.
Close the cover of CS370 (4-
bin Mailbox) cover.
Close Right Cover The right cover of the printer is open.
Close the right cover of the
printer.
Close R-Cover at Paper
Tray
Lower right cover 1 or 2 is
open.
Close lower right cover 1 or
2.
Close Upper Right Cover The upper right cover is
open.
Close the upper right cover.
Close Interchange Unit
Cover
The Interchange Unit Type
280 cover is open.
Close the interchange unit
cover.Troubleshooting
58
5
Energy Saver 1 In Energy Save Mode level
1.
Press the operation key or
send a job from the computer to turn the power on.
Energy Saver 2 In Energy Save Mode level
2.
Press the operation key or
send a job from the computer to turn the power on.
Error 30711 AD370 (duplex unit) cannot be used.
Another tray is used to
print. Contact your sales or
service representative.
Error 30721 PS420 (paper feed unit)
cannot be used.
Another tray is used to
print. Contact your sales or
service representative.
Error 30722 Tray 1 cannot be used. Another tray is used to
print. Contact your sales or
service representative.
Error 30723 Tray 2 cannot be used. Another tray is used to
print. Contact your sales or
service representative.
Error 30724 Tray 3 cannot be used. Another tray is used to
print. Contact your sales or
service representative.
Error 30725 Tray 4 cannot be used. Another tray is used to
print. Contact your sales or
service representative.
Error 30740 The staple tray of SR720
(finisher) cannot be used.
Another tray is used to
print. Contact your sales or
service representative.
Error 30743 The shift tray cannot be
used.
Another tray is used to
print. Contact your sales or
service representative.
Error 30744 SR720 (finisher) cannot be
used.
Another tray is used to
print. Contact your sales or
service representative.
Error 40711 AD370 (duplex unit) cannot be used.
Press {Job Reset}. Contact
your sales or service representative.
Error 40740 The staple tray of SR720
(finisher) cannot be used.
Press {Job Reset}. Contact
your sales or service representative.
Messages Description ResolutionError & Status Messages on the Operation Panel
59
5
Error 40744 SR720 (finisher) cannot be
used.
Press {Job Reset}. Contact
your sales or service representative.
Load Bypass xx The bypass tray is out of
paper.
xx : Paper Size
Load paper of the indicated
paper size into the bypass
tray.
Load Tray ** xx There is out of paper.
** : Tray Number
xx : Paper Size
Load paper of the indicated
paper size into the paper
tray.
Load *** xx There is no paper tray of
the indicated.
*** : Paper Type
xx : Paper Size
Load paper onto the tray of
the indicated.
Low On Toner The toner bottle is almost
empty.
Prepare a new toner bottle.
If the image density is too
light, replace the old toner
bottle with a new one. ?
P.78 “Replacing the Toner
Bottle”
Misfeed:{location} Open
Front Cover
There is a misfeed in the
printer.
Remove the misfed paper
from {location}. ? P.69 “Removing Misfed Paper”
Offline The printer is offline. The
printer cannot accept or
print out data.
If you want to put the printer online, press {On Line}.
Ready The printer is ready for
printing.
—
Remove Misfeed from Duplex Unit
There is a misfeed in
AD370 (duplex unit).
Remove the misfed paper
from AD370 (duplex unit).
? P.69 “Removing Misfed
Paper”
Remove Misfeed From
Finisher
There is a misfeed in SR720
(finisher).
Remove the misfed paper
from SR720 (finisher). ?
P.69 “Removing Misfed Paper”
Remove Misfeed from
Mailbox
There is a misfeed in CS370
(4-bin Mailbox).
Remove the misfed paper
from CS370 (4-bin Mailbox). ? P.69 “Removing
Misfed Paper”
Messages Description ResolutionTroubleshooting
60
5
Remove Paper from Duplex Unit
There is still paper in
AD370 (duplex unit).
Remove the paper from
AD370 (duplex unit).
Important
r Remove paper from the
output tray before it becomes full. If you leave
paper in the output tray,
it can cause a paper misfeed.
Remove Paper Shift Tray The shift tray of SR720 (finisher) is full.
Remove paper from the
shift tray of SR720 (finisher).
Important
r Remove paper from the
output tray before it becomes full. If you leave
paper in the tray, it can
cause a paper misfeed.
Remove Paper from Staple
Tray
There is still paper in the
staple tray of SR720 (finisher).
Remove paper from the staple tray of SR720 (finisher).
Important
r Remove paper from the
output tray before it becomes full. If you leave
paper in the output tray,
it can cause a paper misfeed.
Remove Paper Mailbox
Tray #
CS370 (4-bin Mailbox) tray
# is full.
Remove paper from CS370
(4-bin Mailbox) tray.
Important
r Remove paper from the
output tray before it becomes full. If you leave
paper in the output tray,
it can cause a paper misfeed.
Messages Description ResolutionError & Status Messages on the Operation Panel
61
5
Remove Paper Standard
Tray
The standard output tray is
full.
Remove paper from the
standard output tray.
Important
r Remove paper from the
output tray before it becomes full. If you leave
paper in the output tray,
it can cause a paper misfeed.
Replace Maintenance Kit It is time to replace the
parts included in Maintenance Kit.
Replace the parts included
in Maintenance Kit.
After replacing the kit,
clean the registration rollers.
Replace PCU It is time to change Photo
Conductor Unit.
Replace Photo Conductor
Unit.
Reset Duplex Unit Correctly
AD370 (duplex unit) is not
set correctly.
Set AD370 (duplex unit)
correctly.
Reset Fusing Unit Correctly
There is no fusing unit, or
the fusing unit is not installed properly.
Install the fusing unit properly. For more information
on the fusing unit, see
"Maintenance Kit Type 270
Replacement Guide" that
comes with the maintenance kit.
Reset PCU Correctly Photo Conductor Unit is
not installed in the printer.
Set Photo Conductor Unit
correctly.
Reset Tray 1 Correctly There is no paper tray, or
Tray 1 is not set correctly.
Note
r This message appears
only for the default tray.
? P.94 “Job Control Parameters”
Set the tray correctly.
Resetting Job... The job is being reset. Wait for a while.
Warming Up... The printer is now preparing for printing.
Wait until the printer is
warmed up.
Messages Description ResolutionTroubleshooting
62
5
Printer Doesn't Print
Possible Cause Solutions
Is the power on? If not, confirm that the cord is securely plugged into the
power outlet and the printer.
Turn on the printer power.
Does the On Line indicator stay on?
If not, press {On Line} to make it light up.
Does the Error indicator
stay red?
If not, check the error message on the panel display and take
the required action.
Is the paper set? Load paper into the paper tray.
? P.41 “Loading Paper and Other Media”
Is your specified paper
size correct?
Set the specified paper in any of the input trays.
Adjust the paper size dial to match the size and feed direction of the paper in the paper tray.
Is your specified paper
type correct?
Set the specified paper in any of the input trays.
Adjust the paper type to use the operation panel.
Can you print a configuration page?
If you cannot print a configuration page, it probably indicates printer malfunction. You should contact your sales or
service representative.
If you can print a configuration page but cannot get the
printer to print when you issue a print command from your
computer, it probably means there is a problem with your
computer.
Also keep it in mind that large, complex data might take
long time for printer process.
Is the interface cable between the printer and
your computer connected securely?
Connect the interface cable correctly. If there are any connectors or screws, confirm they are fastened securely.
Are you using a correct
interface cable?
The type of interface cable you should use depends on your
computer. Be sure to use the correct one. ? P.111 “Specifications”
If the cable is damaged or worn, replace it with a new one.
Did you connect the interface cable after turning on the main switch?
Confirm of connecting the interface cable before turning on
the power switch.Printer Doesn't Print
63
5
If you print using the
PostScript driver in a
network, data is received by the printer,
but is not printed.
v Windows 95/98
On the [PostScript] tab of the Printer Properties, click [Advanced] and then clear both [Send CTRL+D before job] and
[Send CTRL+D after job].
v Windows NT 4.0
Open the [Advanced] tab of the Printer Properties. From
[PostScript Options], select [No] for both [Send CTRL-D Before Each job:] and [Send CTRL-D After Each job:].
v Windows 3.1x
Click the [PostScript] tab of the Printer Setting dialog box.
From [Protocol Options], select [None].
Possible Cause SolutionsTroubleshooting
64
5
If you print using the
PostScript driver, printing does not start or is
interrupted.
The data is cleared when the Job Timeout period is exceeded.
v Windows 95/98
Set a longer [Job Timeout] period with the [PostScript] tab
of the Printer Properties.
v Windows NT 4.0
Set a longer [Job Timeout] period with the [Device Settings]
tab of the Printer Properties.
v Windows 3.1x
Set a longer [Job Timeout] period with the [PostScript] tab
of the Printer Setting dialog box.
A PostScript error might occur if there is not enough memory in the printer, or there are errors in the print data sent to
the printer.
• Print a configuration page to configure the memory size
and confirm the memory size is max or not.
• If the memory size is not max, increasing the memory
may solve this problem. Install Printer Feature Expander
Type 185. Otherwise you should contact your sales or
service representative. For more information on the
memory, see P.109 “Memory Capacity and Printer Function”.
The print job might be reset. Do the following.
• Confirm that you have selected the correct printer driver. Try printing again.
• Set a longer Wait Timeout.
v Windows 95/98
Set a longer [Wait Timeout] period with the [PostScript]
tab of the Printer Properties.
v Windows NT 4.0
Set a longer [Wait Timeout] period with the [Device Settings] tab of the Printer Properties.
v Windows 3.1x
Set a longer [Wait Timeout] period with the [PostScript]
tab of the Printer Setting dialog box.
v Macintosh
You can specify a longer [I/O Timeout] period on the
printer's operation panel. ? P.89 “Using the Operation
Panel”
Possible Cause SolutionsPrinter Doesn't Print
65
5
Note
r The following procedure describes the printer port settings.
• Windows 95/98
A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Click the icon of the printer. Next, on the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C Click the [Details] tab.
D Check the [Print to the following port:] list to confirm the correct port is selected.
• Windows NT 4.0
A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Click the icon of the printer. Next, on the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C Click the [Port] tab.
D Confirm that the correct port is selected.
• Windows 3.1x
A On [Control Panel], double-click the [Printers] icon.
B Confirm that this printer is specified as the default printer.
C Click [Connect].
D Check the [Ports] list to confirm the correct port is selected.
• Macintosh
A Click [Apple Menu], point to [Control Panels], and then select [Apple Talk].
B Confirm that [Ethernet] is selected in the [connect via:] list.
Is the Data In indicator
blinking or lit after starting the print job, when
using the PCL printer?
If not, the data is not being sent to the printer, or the printer
may be resetting the print job because there was a long delay in receiving the data from the computer.
v If the printer is using "I/O Timeout"
Increase the value of the "I/O Timeout" setting of the
"System" menu of the "Job Control". ? P.89 “Using the
Operation Panel”
v If your printer is connected to the computer using the
parallel cable
Confirm that the printer port settings are correct. For a
parallel port connection, port LPT1 or LPT2 should be
set.
For more information on the printer port settings, see the
Note after this table.
v Network Connection
Contact your network administrator.
Possible Cause SolutionsTroubleshooting
66
5
Other Printing Problems
Status Possible Causes, Descriptions, and Solutions
The area on the page that
should be white or free of
toner is a hazy gray.
Adjust the image density correctly.
? P.89 “Using the Operation Panel”
The edge of the paper is hazy
gray.
If paper is curled, correct it.
Replace the corrected paper.
The back of the printed output is hazy gray.
Check if the size specified with the dial matches that
specified with the operation panel. If not, specify the
correct size that matches the size and feed direction of
the paper loaded in the tray.
If you print something after printing on the paper
whose size is smaller than the actual document size,
the back of the next output might be hazy gray.
? P.41 “Loading Paper and Other Media”
Image quality varies when
printing on thick paper or on
OHP transparencies.
Set to Thick paper mode by switching the lever inside
of the tray 2 or specifying for Bypass Tray Type 270 to
use the printer driver.
? P.89 “Using the Operation Panel”
Print image is too light. Adjust image density to darker.
? P.89 “Using the Operation Panel”
If the Toner Saving mode is specified using the operation panel, the whole image gets lighter. See the driver's online help file.
Print image is too dark. Adjust image density to lighter.
? P.89 “Using the Operation Panel”
Some parts of the print image
are not clear.
Due to a sudden change in temperature, condensation
might appear inside the machine, and reduce the print
quality. If this occurs when you move the printer from
a cold room to a warmer room, don't use the printer
until it gets used to the temperature.
Multiple pages are fed
through the printer at once.
Clean the friction pad, if it is dirty. ? P.85 “Cleaning the
Friction Pad”
Clean the pad inside of the tray, if it is dirty. ? P.86
“Cleaning the Pad inside of the tray”
Image is printed on the reverse side of the paper.
Set the paper upside down.Other Printing Problems
67
5
Paper misfeeds occur frequently.
Check the paper size settings. The size specified with
the paper size dial might be different from the actual
paper size. Make the correct dial setting. ? P.41 “Loading Paper and Other Media”
Use the recommended paper. Avoid using curled,
folded, or wrinkled paper, perforated paper, or glossy
paper. ? P.36 “Paper Recommendations”
Confirm that the side guides and the rear guide of the
paper tray are set in place. ? P.41 “Loading Paper and
Other Media”
Clean the friction pad and the paper feed roller, if it is
dirty. ? P.85 “Cleaning the Friction Pad” ? P.83 “Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller”
The operation panel error
message stays on after removing the misfed paper.
Open the front cover of your printer and then close it.
Be sure to close the lower vertical paper feed cover. ?
P.69 “Removing Misfed Paper”
Desired tray isn't used for the
output.
Check the paper size settings. The size specified with
the paper size dial might be different from the actual
paper size. Make the correct dial setting. ? P.41 “Loading Paper and Other Media”
When you are using a Windows operating system, the
printer driver settings overrides those specified using
the operation panel. Specify the desired output tray using the printer driver. See the driver's online help file.
The printed image is different from the image in the
computer.
When you use some features such as enlargement and
reduction, the layout of the image might be different
from that shown in the computer display. Before printing, use the print preview to see how the page will look
when printed. If necessary, adjust the settings.
It takes too much time to resume printing.
The data is so large or complex that it takes time to process it. If the Data In indicator is blinking, the data processing is being done. Just wait until it resumes.
Energy Saver mode might be enabled. In Energy Saver
mode, it takes time for the machine to warm up. ? P.89
“Using the Operation Panel”
Image is printed in the
wrong orientation.
Specify the correct orientation under the “PCL Menu”
with the operation panel. ? P.89 “Using the Operation
Panel”
Status Possible Causes, Descriptions, and SolutionsTroubleshooting
68
5
Note
r If the problem cannot be solved, contact your sales or service representative.
Part of the image cannot be
printed.
A paper size which is smaller than that specified in the
application is used for printing. Load the correct size of
paper. If you can't select the paper size specified in the
application, make use of the zooming features. See the
driver's online help file.
Network configurations you
have made do not become effective.
Turn the printer power off and on. The network configuration page of the Network Interface Board will be
printed automatically. Check the configuration of the
Network Interface Board with this page.
The output from SR720 is
curled and a paper misfeed
has occurred with SR720.
A paper misfeed may have occurred because of curled
paper in the output tray. If the paper output is curled,
remove the paper from the paper tray and load it again
after turning it over.
Windows 95/98/NT 4.0:
The computer doesn't recognize the installed printer options.
If the connection to the printer is not bi-directional, the
computer does not recognize the installed printer options.
Setting of the options might not be specified correctly.
In this case specify which options you have installed
using the printer driver.
Reference
For more information on setting options for the
printer driver, see “Installing the PCL5e/6 Printer
Driver”, “Installing the PostScript Printer Driver” in
the “Setup Guide”.
Windows 3.1x:
The printer can not be sent.
The memory buffer might be full. Remove the check
mark from the [Use Print Manager] check box, or make
the timeout setting longer.
Status Possible Causes, Descriptions, and SolutionsRemoving Misfed Paper
69
5
Removing Misfed Paper
When a paper misfeed occurs, an error message appears on the panel display. The procedure you should
follow to remove the misfed paper
depends on the location of the misfeed, which is indicated on the panel
display.
R CAUTION:
Important
r More than one misfed area might
be indicated. In this case, check every applicable area. See the following illustrations.
r If paper continues to misfeed,
check the following points.
• Confirm that the setting of the
paper size dial matches the size
and feeding direction of the paper loaded in the paper tray.
• Confirm that the toner bottle is
set correctly.
r If a paper misfeed still occurs, contact your sales or service representative.
r Do not leave any torn paper scraps
within the printer.
When "Misfeed: A" Appears
A Open lower right cover 1.
B Remove the misfed paper from
inside of lower right cover 1.
C Close lower right cover 1.
Note
r Close the cover by pushing the
center area of the cover.
• When removing misfed paper,
do not touch the fusing section
because it becomes very hot.
A
B
D
E
C
Y
Z
R
ZAEY060E
ZAEH040E
ZAEH041E Troubleshooting
70
5
When "Misfeed: B" Appears
A Open the duplex unit by lifting
the catch.
B Open the right cover by lifting the
catch.
C Remove the misfed paper from
inside of the right cover.
D Close the right cover before closing the duplex unit.
E If the misfed paper is inside of
the bypass tray, while lifting the
paper guide lever (A), remove the
misfed paper (B).
When "Misfeed: C" Appears
When the Interchange Unit is not
Installed
A Open the right cover by lifting the
catch.
B Open the upper right cover by
pulling the handle, and remove
the misfed paper.
ZAEP331E
ZAEH050E
ZAEY190E
ZAEY191E
ZAEP140E
ZAEP270E Removing Misfed Paper
71
5
C Close the upper right cover before
closing the right cover.
When the Interchange Unit is Installed
A Open the duplex unit by lifting
the catch.
B Open the right cover by lifting the
catch (A), and open the upper
cover of the interchange unit by
pulling the handle (B).
C Remove the misfed paper.
D Close the covers in the following
order: the upper right cover, the
right cover, and the duplex unit.
When "Misfeed: D" Appears
A Open the duplex unit by lifting
the catch.
B Open the right cover by lifting the
catch (A), and open the upper
cover of the interchange unit by
pulling the handle (B).
C Remove the misfed paper.
ZAEP331E
ZAEH051E
ZAEH060E
ZAEP331E
ZAEH051E
ZAEH060E Troubleshooting
72
5
D If the misfed paper is not removed in step C, open the upper
cover of the bridge unit, and remove the misfed paper.
E Close the cover of the bridge unit.
F If the misfed paper is not removed in step D, open the right
cover of the bridge unit (A), and
remove the misfed paper (B).
When "Remove Misfeed from
Mailbox" Appears
A Open the cover of the mailbox.
B Remove the misfed paper.
C Close the cover of the mailbox.
When "Remove Misfeed From
Finisher" Appears
A Remove the misfed paper inside
of the finisher tray.
ZAEY070E
ZAEY080E
ZAEH090E
ZAEY100E
ZAEY110E Removing Misfed Paper
73
5
B If the misfed paper is not removed in step A, open the right
cover of the finisher.
C Remove the misfed paper.
D Close the right cover of the finisher.
E If the misfed paper is not removed in step C, open the front
cover of the finisher (A), and remove the misfed paper (B).
F Close the front cover of the finisher.
When "Misfeed: Y" Appears
A Open lower right cover 2.
B Remove the misfed paper inside
of the cover.
C Close lower right cover 2.
ZAEH111E
ZAEY120E
ZAEY130E
ZAEH140E
ZAEY150E Troubleshooting
74
5
When "Remove Misfeed from
Duplex Unit" Appears
A Open the duplex unit by lifting
the catch.
BWhile lifting the lever, lift cover
Z1 (A), and remove the misfed
paper (B).
C If the misfed paper is not removed in step B, while lifting the
lever, lift cover Z2 (A), and remove the misfed paper (B).
D Close cover Z2, and then cover Z1.
E Close the duplex unit.
ZAEP331E
Z1
ZAEY160E
Z2
ZAEY170E Adding Staples
75
5
Adding Staples
When “Add Staples” appears on the
panel display, the staples have run
out. Follows these steps to add a new
staple refill.
Note
r After adding the staple refill, staples might not be ejected for the
first few times.
A Open the front cover of the finisher.
B Remove the empty cartridge.
C Remove the empty refill case as
shown in the illustration.
D Align the arrows on the new refill
case and the cartridge, and push
the new refill case in until it
clicks.
Note
r Do not remove the ribbon for
bundling staples, before installing the cartridge.
ZAEH180E
ZAEH181E
ZAEH190E
ZAEH191E Troubleshooting
76
5
E Pull out the ribbon used for bundling staples.
F Reinstall the cartridge. It should
click into place.
G Close the front cover of the finisher.
ZAEH200E
ZAEH192E Removing Jammed Staples
77
5
Removing Jammed Staples
If staples do not eject properly, they
might be jammed.
Note
r Staples might jam because of
curled paper. In this case, try turning the paper over in the tray.
r After removing the jammed staples, staples might not be ejected
for the first few times.
A Open the front cover of the finisher.
B Remove the cartridge.
C Open the face plate of the cartridge.
D Remove the jammed staples.
E Close the face plate of the cartridge.
F Reinstall the cartridge. It should
click into place.
G Close the front cover of the finisher.
ZAEH180E
ZAEH181E
ZAEH210E
ZAEH211E
ZAEH192E Troubleshooting
78
5
Replacing the Toner Bottle
R WARNING:
R CAUTION:
A Open the front cover.
B Lift the green handle.
CWhile pushing the green lever
(A), hold the handle and slide the
toner holder out slightly (B).
• Do not incinerate spilled
toner or used toner. Toner
dust is flammable and
might ignite when exposed
to an open flame.
• Disposal should take place
at an authorized dealer or
an appropriate collection
site.
• If you dispose of the used
toner containers yourself,
dispose of them according
to local regulations.
• The inside of the machine becomes very hot. Do not touch
the parts with a label indicating a "hot surface". Touching
a "hot surface" could result in
a burn injury.
• Do not eat or swallow toner.
• Keep toner (used or unused)
and the toner cartridge out of
reach of children.
• Our products are engineered
to meet the highest standards
of quality and functionality.
When purchasing expendable
supplies, we recommend using only those provided by an
authorized dealer.
ZAET010E
ZAET020E
ZAET021E Replacing the Toner Bottle
79
5
D Release the green lever and gently slide the toner holder out until
it stops.
Important
r If you continue to push the
green lever to slide the toner
holder, the toner holder might
be dropped.
E Press the toner bottle backward
(A) to raise its head (B), then
gently pull out the bottle.
FMove the new toner bottle back
and forth about 5 - 6 times (A),
and remove the black cap of the
new toner bottle by turning it
counterclockwise (B).
Important
r Do not remove the inside cap.
Note
r After removing the black cap
from the bottle, toner can scatter
easily. Do not shake or jar the
bottle.
G Put the toner bottle on the printer
side of the toner holder (A), then
push its head downwards to lock
it in place (B).
H Slide the toner holder into the
printer until it clicks into place,
and push down the green handle.
I Close the front cover.
ZAET041E
ZAET030E
ZAET040E
ZAET022E Troubleshooting
80
5
Replacing the Photo Conductor Unit
Preparation
The photo conductor unit comes
with the supplies required to
maintain the printer.
If “Replace PCU” appears on the
panel display, replace the photo
conductor unit.
R WARNING:
ATurn off the printer.
B If the duplex unit is installed,
open the duplex unit by lifting
the catch.
C Open the right cover of the printer by lifting the catch.
D Open the front cover.
• Do not incinerate the used
photo conductor unit. Toner dust might ignite when
exposed to an open flame.
• Disposal should take place
at an authorized dealer or
an appropriate collection
site.
• If you dispose of the used
parts yourself, dispose of
them according to local regulations.
ZAEH220E
ZAEP330E
ZAEP271E
ZAEM320E Replacing the Photo Conductor Unit
81
5
EWhile pressing the green button,
slide the photo conductor unit out
until it stops.
F Raise the green handle and slide
the photo conductor unit out towards you.
Important
r Do not tilt or drop the removed
photo conductor unit. Moving
the unit abruptly can scatter
toner.
r While the photo conductor unit
is removed, do not change the
toner.
GTake the new photo conductor
unit from the box and remove the
plastic bag, holding the handle.
Important
r Do not drop or change the removed photo conductor unit.
r Do not touch the side of the
photo conductor unit.
H Put the photo conductor unit removed in step F into the plastic
bag emptied in step G, keeping
the unit at the same angle as when
it was installed. Then, zip the
plastic bag.
I Remove the two red sheets from
the photo conductor unit in the
order shown in the illustration.
Important
r Remove the photo conductor
unit keeping the unit parallel to
the ground as shown in the illustration. Otherwise, the toner
in the unit might scatter.
r Do not touch the inside of the
unit or the green parts, after the
black protection sheet is removed.
J Align the new photo conductor
unit onto the rail of the printer.
Slide the unit all the way into the
printer.
ZAEM330E
ZAEM340E
a
b
ZAEM350E
ZAEM360E Troubleshooting
82
5
K Push the unit into the printer unit
it clicks into place.
L Remove the red sheet from the
photo conductor unit and remove
the two pieces of tape.
M Close the right cover of the printer.
Note
r If the right side cover of the
printer cannot be closed, it
means that the photo conductor
unit has not been properly installed. Slide the photo conductor unit out and push it into the
printer again until it clicks into
place.
N Close the front cover.
O If the duplex unit is installed,
close the duplex unit .
P Turn on the printer.
After 1 minute, the display appears.
ZAEM370E
ZAEM410E
ZAEM310E
ZAEM380E
ZAEP270E Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller
83
5
Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller
If the paper feed rollers are dirty by
powdered paper, it might be occurred
that paper is not feed correctly, or
misfeed. In this case, clean the paper
feed rollers. Follow these steps to
clean the paper feed rollers of standard tray 1 and tray 2.
A Slide tray 1 and tray 2 out until
them stop. Raise the front end
slightly and pull the trays forward.
Confirm the position of the paper
feed rollers as shown illustration.
B Raise slightly and pull the green
lever that be attached the paper
feed rollers inside the printer on
the lower right side.
C Pull the paper feed roller towards
you (A), push it in a diagonally
downward direction and remove
it (B).
DWipe the rubber of the paper feed
roller with a dry cloth.
Important
r Do not wipe with a wet cloth, alcohol or cleanser.
ZAEP060E
ZAEM400E
ZAEM090E
ZAEM100E
ZAEM031E Troubleshooting
84
5
E Insert the projection of the paper
feed roller into the hole (A).
While pulling the roller, insert
the roller into the rear shaft (B).
F Check the motion of the paper
feed roller to confirm that it is
properly set.
G Return the green lever to its original position.
H Clean the paper feed rollers of
tray 2, following the steps 2 to 7.
I Hold tray 2 (with a lever on the
paper size dial) with both hands,
and slide it slowly into the second
from the top until it stops.
J Hold tray 1 with both hands, and
slide it slowly until it stops.
K If PS400 or PS440 (paper feed
unit) is installed, clean the paper
feed rollers of tray 3 or tray 4 following steps of tray 1 and tray 2.
ZAEM110E
ZAEM101E
ZAEM091E
ZAEM141E Cleaning the Friction Pad
85
5
Cleaning the Friction Pad
If the friction pads are dirty, it might
be occurred multiple pages or misfeed. In this case, clean the friction
pads of the each tray. Follow these
steps to clean the friction pads standard tray 2.
A Slide tray 2 out until it stops.
BWipe the top of the friction pad
with a dry cloth.
Important
r Do not wipe with a wet cloth, alcohol or cleanser.
C Slide tray 2 slowly until it stops.
D If PS400 or PS440 (paper feed
tray) is installed, clean the friction
pads of tray 3 or tray 4 following
steps of tray 1 and tray 2.
ZAEY012E
ZAEY017E Troubleshooting
86
5
Cleaning the Pad inside of the tray
If the pad inside of the tray is dirty , it
might be occurred multiple pages
when paper is stacked a little. In this
case, clean the pad of inside of the
each tray. Follow these steps to clean
the pad inside of standard tray 2.
A Slide tray 2 out until it stops.
BWhen there is paper in the tray,
remove paper.
CWipe the pad inside of the tray
with a dry cloth.
Important
r Do not wipe with a wet cloth, alcohol or cleanser.
D Load paper and slide tray 2 slowly
until it stops.
E If PS400 or PS440 (paper feed
unit) is installed, clean the friction pads of tray 3 or tray 4 following steps of tray 1 and tray 2.
ZAEY012E
ZAEY035E Cleaning the Registration Roller
87
5
Cleaning the Registration Roller
If you replace the maintenance kit,
clean the registration roller inside of
the printer.
R CAUTION:
ATurn off the printer and wait for
about 60 minutes before starting
the cleaning.
BWhen duplex unit is installed,
open the duplex unit by lifting
the catch.
CWhen duplex unit is installed,
open the duplex unit by lifting
the catch.
DWipe the registration roller by
turning with a dry cloth.
Important
r Do not wipe with a wet cloth, alcohol or cleanser.
E Close the right cover and duplex
unit.
• The inside of the machine becomes very hot. Do not touch the
parts with a label indicating a
"hot surface". Touching a "hot
surface" could result in a burn injury.
ZAEP330E
ZAEP271E
ZAEM281E Troubleshooting
88
589
6. Using the Operation Panel
Menu Chart
This section describes how to change the default settings of your printer and
provides information on the parameters included in each menu.
Category Function Menu
Proof Print
? P.93 “Proof Print
Menu”
Print File
Delete File
Show Error Log
Job Control
? P.94 “Job Control
Menu”
Paper Input Tray Priority
Tray Locking
Tray Paper Size
Bypass Size
Paper Type
Output Tray
Print Quality Edge Smoothing
Resolution
Image Density
Toner Saving
System Print PS Errors
I/O Timeout
Energy Saver 1
Energy Saver 2
I/O Buffer
Unit
PCL Menu Orientation
Form Lines
Font Source
Font Number
Point Size
Font Pitch
Symbol SetUsing the Operation Panel
90
6
Network Setup
? P.101 “Network
Setup Menu”
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
Access Control
Access Mask
Network Boot
Frame Type(NW)
ActiveProtocols
Maintenance
? P.103 “Maintenance Menu”
Restart Printer
Menu Reset
Hex Dump
Registration
List Print
? P.105 “List Print
Menu”
Config. Page
Menu List
PCL Font List
PS Font List
Disk Directory
Language
? P.106 “Language Menu”
Category Function MenuAccessing the Main Menu
91
6
Accessing the Main Menu
Confirm that the printer is offline. If not, take the printer offline.
Press {Menu} to display the “Main Menu” on the panel display.
The “Main Menu” has the following six menus, which can be displayed one by
one using {TT} or {UU}.
• Proof Print
• Job Control
• Network Setup
• Maintenance
• List Print
• Language
Note
r {TT}: Press to go to the next page.
r {UU}: Press to go back to the previous page.
r After making the printer's settings, be sure to return to the previous menu by
pressing {Escape}.
r After making the printer's settings, press {On Line} to return to the ready condition.
r The revised settings are not canceled even if the printer power is turned off.Using the Operation Panel
92
6
Making Printer Settings with the Operation
Panel
A Press {Menu}.
The “Main Menu” appears.
B Search for the desired menu with {T} or {U}.
The desired menu appears.
C Press {Enter}.
D Search for the desired menu with {T} or {U}.
The desired menu or parameter appears.
Note
r “p” shown in front of an item indicates that the item is currently selected.
E Press {Enter}.
The specified item appears.
F If necessary, repeat steps D and E until you complete the desired settings.
Note
r {Escape}: Press to return to the previous menu. If you press this key before
pressing {Enter}, the adjusted data is canceled.Proof Print Menu
93
6
Proof Print Menu
There are 3 menus in the “Proof Print” menu.
• Print File
• Delete File
• Show Error Log
Reference
For more information on “Proof Print”, see P.107 “Using the Proof Print”.
Proof Print Parameters
v Proof Print
Menu Description
Print File Select a proof print file and print it.
Delete File Select a proof print file and delete it.
Show Error Log Show the error log in the proof print job.Using the Operation Panel
94
6
Job Control Menu
There are 5 menus in the “Job Control” Menu.
• Paper Input
• Output Tray
• Print Quality
• System
• PCL Menu
Job Control Parameters
v Paper Input
1
/3
Menu Description
Tray Priority You can specify the default tray. The tray selection specified with the printer driver overrides the one specified here.
In DOS printing, the tray specified here is used, when no
tray is specified for a print job.
Tray1, Tray2, Tray3, Tray4
Note
r Default: Tray1
r Only the installed trays appear on the panel display.
r It is recommended that you load paper having the size
and direction you frequently use in the tray selected
with the "Tray Priority".
Tray Locking If you use several different kinds of paper, you can lock a
tray to prevent printing on wrong paper. If you want to select a locked tray, specify the paper tray using the printer
driver.
None, Tray1, Tray2, Tray3, Tray4
Note
r Default: None
r Only the installed trays appear on the panel display.
r You cannot lock multiple trays at once.
r When a locked tray is specified using the printer driver,
the printer does not search for any other tray.Job Control Menu
95
6
v Paper Input
2
/3
Menu Description
Tray Paper Size You should specify the paper size for those not indicated on
the paper size dials of Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3 and Tray 4.
When you specify the sizes that are not indicated on the paper size dial of Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3 or Tray 4, you should
set the dial to “p” and then specify the paper size here.
v Tray 1
For more information on paper sizes that can be set in
Tray 1, see P.27 “Paper and Other Media”.
v Tray 2
For more information on paper sizes that can be set in
Tray 2, see P.27 “Paper and Other Media”.
v Tray 3 (option)
For more information on paper sizes that can be set in
Tray 3, see P.27 “Paper and Other Media”.
v Tray 4 (option)
For more information on paper sizes that can be set in
Tray 4, see P.27 “Paper and Other Media”.
Note
r Only the installed trays appear on the panel display.
Bypass Size You can specify the paper size for the bypass tray.
Note
r Default: A4 (Metric version) or 8
1
/2
" × 11" (Inch version)
r width:90mm (3.54") to 297mm (11.69")
r length:148mm (5.82") to 432mm (17")Using the Operation Panel
96
6
v Paper Input
3
/3
v Paper Output
Menu Description
Paper Type You can specify the type of the paper in Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray
3, Tray 4 and PS420.
If you want to specify the paper type, do not select "Auto"
in the "Tray Priority" menu. Select the tray you want to use.
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• Special Paper
Note
r Default: Plain Paper
r "Special Paper" refers to a paper type other than plain
paper or recycled paper, such as colored paper.
r Only the installed trays appear on the panel display.
r If you select "Special Paper" for all trays, the paper is fed
from the tray you selected in the "Tray Priority" menu.
r If you select "Auto" in the "Tray Priority" menu, the
printer automatically chooses the tray having plain paper. If no tray has plain paper, the printer chooses the
tray having recycled paper.
Menu Description
Output Tray You can specify the output tray for printing.
The tray selection specified with the printer driver overrides the one specified here.
Standard Tray, Finisher Tray, Mailbox Tray1, Mailbox
Tray2, Mailbox Tray3, Mailbox Tray4
Note
r Default: Standard Tray
r Only the installed trays appear on the panel display.Job Control Menu
97
6
v Print Quality
Menu Description
Edge Smoothing You can specify whether the Edge Smoothing feature is enabled.
• On
• Off
Note
r Default: On
r If "Edge Smoothing" is "On", "Toner Saving" is ignored
even if it is "On".
Resolution You can specify the print resolution in dots per inch.
• 600 dpi (PCL 5e, PCL 6, PS, TIFF)
• 400 dpi (TIFF)
• 300 dpi (PCL 5e, PS, TIFF)
• 200 dpi (TIFF)
Note
r Default: 600 dpi
r The resolution specified with the printer driver overrides the one specified here.
Image Density You can specify the print image density.
Lighter +3, Lighter +2, Lighter +1, Normal, Darker +1,
Darker +2, Darker +3
Note
r Default: Normal
r When you want to have darker image under high volume printing, we highly recommend to select Darker+3
through operation panel to keep better image density.
Toner Saving You can specify whether or not the Toner Saving feature is
enabled.
• Off
• On
Note
r Default: Off
r If "Edge Smoothing" is "On", "Toner Saving" is ignored
even if it is "On".Using the Operation Panel
98
6
v System
1
/2
Menu Description
Print PS Errors You can specify whether the PS error sheet should be printed.
• Off
• On
Note
r Default: Off
I/O Timeout You can specify how many seconds the printer should wait
before ending a print job. If data from other ports often appear in the middle of your print job, you should increase
the timeout value.
15 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 180 seconds, 300 seconds
Note
r Default: 30 seconds
Energy Saver 1 You can specify the length of time the printer should wait
before switching to Energy Saver mode level 1. This Energy
Saver mode reduces electric power consumption.
Off, 1 minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes
Note
r Default: 10 minutes
r If there is an error in your printer, the printer will not
switch to Energy Saver mode level 1. Power Consumption is reduced by about 40% compared to the stand by
mode.
r When the printer switches to Energy Saver mode level 1,
the Power indicator turns off, the On Line indicator
stays on, and "Energy Saver 1" is displayed on the panel
display.
Energy Saver 2 You can specify the time the printer should wait before
switching to Energy Saver mode level 2. This Energy Saver
mode reduces electric power consumption.
Off, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours
Note
r Default: 15 minutes
r If there is an error in your printer, the printer will not
switch to Energy Saver mode level 2. Power Consumption is reduced by about 60% compared to the stand by
mode.
r When the printer switches to Energy Saver mode level 2,
the Power indicator turns off, the On Line indicator
stays on, and "Energy Saver 1" is displayed on the panel
display.Job Control Menu
99
6
v System
2
/2
v PCL Menu
1
/2
Menu Description
I/O Buffer You can specify the size of the I/O Buffer. Normally it is not
necessary to change this setting.
16KB, 32KB, 64KB, 128KB, 256KB, 512KB,
Note
r Default: 32KB
Unit You can specify the unit.
mm, inch
Note
r Default: Default depends on Metric or Inch version.
Menu Description
Orientation You can specify the page orientation.
The tray selection specified with the printer driver overrides the one specified here.
• Portrait
• Landscape
Note
r Default: Portrait
Form Lines You can specify the number of lines per page.
5-128
Note
r Default: 64 (Metric version), 60 (Inch version)
Font Source You can specify the location of the default font.
• Internal
• Download
Note
r Default: Internal
r When you select “Download”, you can select only
downloaded fonts on the RAM.
Font Number You can specify the ID for the default font you want to use.
• 0 to 52 (for Internal)
• 1 to N (for Download source)
Note
r Default: 0
r “N” depends on how many fonts you have downloaded.Using the Operation Panel
100
6
v PCL Menu
2
/2
Menu Description
Point Size You can specify the value for the point size you want to use
for the selected font.
4.00 to 999.75 by 0.25
Note
r Default: 12.00
r This setting is effective only for a variable-space font.
Font Pitch You can specify the number of characters per inch you want
to use for the selected font.
0.44 to 99.99 by 0.01
Note
r Default: 10.00
r This setting is effective only for a fixed-space font.
Symbol Set You can specify the set of print characters for the selected
font. The available options are as follows.
Roman-8, Win L1, Win L2, Win L5, Win 3.0, Legal, ISO L1,
ISO L2, ISO L5, ISO 4, ISO 6, ISO 11, ISO 15, ISO 17, ISO 21,
ISO 60, ISO 69, PC-8, PC-850, PC-852, PC-8 D/N, PC8-TK,
VN Math, VN US, VN Intl, MS Publ, Pifont, Desktop, Math-
8, PS Text, PS Math
Note
r Default: Roman-8Network Setup Menu
101
6
Network Setup Menu
Reference
For more information on “Network Setup”, see “Configuring the Printer for
the Network with the Operation Panel” in the “Setup Guide”.
v Network Setup
1
/2
Menu Description
IP Address You can specify the IP Address.
Note
r Default: 011.022.033.044
Subnet Mask You can specify the Subnet Mask.
Note
r Default: All zero
Gateway Address You can specify the Gateway Address.
Note
r Default: All zero
Access Control You can specify the Access Control Address.
Note
r Default: All zero
Access Mask You can specify the Access Control Mask.
Note
r Default: All zero
Network Boot You can specify the Network Boot of TCP/IP.
None, RARP + TFTP, BOOTP, RARP & BOOTP, DHCP,
ARP + PING, ARP & RARP, ARP & BOOTP,
ARP&RARP&BOOTP
Note
r Default: NoneUsing the Operation Panel
102
6
v Network Setup
2
/2
Menu Description
Frame Type(NW) You can specify the Frame Type of Netware.
Auto select, Ethernet II, Ethernet 802.3, Ethernet 802.2,
Ethernet SNAP
Note
r Default: Auto select
ActiveProtocols You can specify the Active Protocols.
All Active, None, TCP/IP Only, NetWare Only, TCP/IP &
NetW, ATalk Only, TCP/IP & ATalk,NetWare & ATalk ,
NetBEUI & ATalk, TCP & NW & ATK, NetBEUI only,
TCP/IP & NB, NetBEUI & NetW, TCP & NB & NW, NetBEUI & ATalk, TCP & NB & ATK, NB & NW & ATalk
Note
r Default: All ActiveMaintenance Menu
103
6
Maintenance Menu
There are 4 menus in the “Maintenance” Menu.
• Restart Printer
• Menu Reset
• Hex Dump
• Registration
Maintenance Parameters
v Restart Printer
v Menu Reset
v Hex Dump
Menu Description
Restart Printer You can restart the printer.
Menu Description
Menu Reset You can reset the menu settings to the factory default except "Registration", "I/O Buffer", "Image Density" and
"Network Setup" settings.
Menu Description
Hex Dump You can choose to print the Hex Dump or not. With this feature "On", all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal character representation.
• On
• Off
Note
r Default: OffUsing the Operation Panel
104
6
v Registration
Menu Description
Vertical You can change the position of the printed image on the
vertical tray so that it can match that of the standard paper
tray.
All Trays, Bypass Tray, Duplex Unit
from –9.0 to 9.0
Note
r Default: 0
Horizontal You can change the horizontal position of the printed image on the fed paper so that it matches that of the standard
paper tray.
Tray 3, Tray 4, Bypass Tray, Duplex Unit
from –9.0 to 9.0
Note
r Default: 0List Print Menu
105
6
List Print Menu
There are 5 menus in the “List Print” Menu.
• Config. Page
• Menu List
• PCL Font List
• PS Font List
• Disk Directory
List Print Parameters
v List Print
Menu Description
Config. Page You can print the current configuration of the printer.
? "Printing a configuration page" in the "Setup Guide"
Menu List You can print the Menu List which shows the function
menu of this printer.
PCL Font List You can print a list of the installed PCL font.
PS Font List You can print a list of the installed PS font.
Disk Directory You can print a list of the HDD directory.Using the Operation Panel
106
6
Language Menu
You can select the language you use. Available languages are as follows:
English, German, French, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, Norwegian, Danish, Spanish,
Finnish, Portuguese, Czech, Polish, Hungarian
Note
r Default: EnglishPrinting with the Operation Panel
107
6
Printing with the Operation Panel
Using the Proof Print
Use this function to print only one
printing of a multiple print job. The
other printings are saved in the printer. The saved job can be printed from
the printer's operation panel.
Limitation
r To use this function, the optional
Printer Hard Disk Type 185 must
be installed on your printer.
Note
r If the application has a collate option, confirm that it is not selected
before sending a print job. By default, proof print jobs are automatically collated by the printer
driver. If the collate option is selected from the application print
dialog box, more copy printings
than intended may be printed.
r You can identify the file you want
to print by the User IDs and the
time when the job was stored.
r The actual number of pages the
printer can save depends on the
contents of the print images. As an
example, the printer can save up to
30 jobs or 2,000 pages. It depends
on the data volume.
r If the first printing of the proof
print file is not what you expected
and you do not want to print the
remaining printings, delete the
proof print file using the operation
panel. If you print the remaining
printings of the proof print file, the
job in the printer is deleted automatically.
Printing a Proof Print File
A Press {Menu}.
The following message appears on
the panel display.
Main Menu:
Proof Print
B After confirming that “Proof
Print” is displayed, press {Enter}.
C After confirming that “Print File”
is displayed, press {Enter}.
Proof Print:
Print File
D Press {T} or {U} to display a file
you want to print, and then press
{Enter}.
Print File:
08:56 ABCD1234
The following message appears on
the panel display.
Q'ty(1-999): 1
Press Enter (#)
E Press {U} or {T} to set the number of copy printings.
Note
r You can set the number of copy
printings up to 999.
Q'ty(1-999): 6
Press Enter (#)
F Press {Enter}.Using the Operation Panel
108
6
Deleting a Proof Print File
If the printed document is not what
you expected, you can delete the
proof print file. You can then revise it
and print again until the settings become OK.
A Press {Menu}.
B After confirming that “Proof Print”
is on the display, press {Enter}.
Main Menu:
Proof Print
C P r e s s {T} o r {U} u n t i l “D e l e t e
F i l e ” a p p e a r s , a n d t h e n p r e s s
{E n t e r}.
Proof Print:
Delete File
D Press {T} or {U} to display the
file you want delete, and then
press {Enter}.
Delete File:
22:07 EFGH5678
The following message appears on
the panel display.
22:07 EFGH5678:
Delete? Yes=#
E Press {Enter}.
This starts deleting a proof print
file after the following message appears on the panel display.
Deleted
Checking the Error Log
A Press {Menu}.
B After confirming that “Proof Print”
is on the display, press {Enter}.
Main Menu:
Proof Print
C Press {T} or {U} until “Show Error Log” appears, and then press
{Enter}.
Proof Print:
Show Error Log
The following message appears on
the panel display.
Show Error Log:
12:46 IJKL9012
Note
r You can check the other error
logs by using {TT} or {UU}.
r Press {Escape} to return to the
previous menu.109
7. Appendix
Memory Capacity and Printer Function
The following table shows the typical memory requirements for each printer
function.
Note
r Memory requirements depend on the complexly of the print data and the
printing environment.
Functions Required Options
Collating Printer Feature Expander Type 185 or Printer Hard Disk
Type 185
Stapling SR720 (finisher)
Duplex Printing Printer Feature Expander Type 185, AD370 (duplex unit)
Proof Printing Printer Hard Disk Type 185Appendix
110
7
Moving and Transporting the Printer
R CAUTION:
When transporting paper, repack it with its original packing materials.
Important
r Be sure to disconnect all cables from the printer before transporting it.
r The printer is a precision piece of machinery. Take care to avoid damage during shipment.
• When lifting the machine, use the grips on both sides of the machine. If you
drop the machine, it could break or cause an injury.
• When you move the machine, remember to unplug the power cord from the
outlet. When you pull the plug out of the socket, hold it by the plug. If the
cord is pulled out of the socket abruptly, it could become damaged. Damaged plugs or cords can cause an electrical or fire hazard.Specifications
111
7
Specifications
Mainframe
v Configuration:
Desktop
v Print Process:
Laser beam scanning & Electrophotographic printing
Dual component development
v Printing Speed:
Maximum 27 pages per minute (A4 long-edge feed or 8
1
/2
" × 11" long-edge
feed, simplex)
Maximum 22 pages per minute (A4 long-edge feed or 8
1
/2
" × 11" long-edge
feed, duplex)
v Parallel Interface:
Interface
Standard 36–pin printer cable and a parallel port on the host computer
IEEE 1284 I/F(Compatible, ECP, Nibble)
v Network Cable:
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX shielded twisted-pair (STP) cable and category/
Type5 cable
v Network:
Topology
Ethernet 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Protocol
TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, AppleTalk
v Resolution:
600 × 600 dpi (PCL 5e, PCL 6, PostScript 3)
300 × 300 dpi (PCL 5e, PostScript 3)
v Printer Language:
PCL 5e Emulation, PCL 6 Emulation, Adobe PostScript Level 3, Auto Sense
v Fonts:
PCL 5e, PCL 6
35 Intellifonts, 10 TrueType fonts, and 1 Bitmap font
PostScript
136 fonts (Type 2:24, Type 14:112)
v Paper Size:
? P.27 “Paper and Other Media Supported by Your Printer”Appendix
112
7
v Paper Weight:
? P.27 “Paper and Other Media Supported by Your Printer”
v Power Source:
? inside of the front cover of this manual
v Power Consumption:
v Noise Emission
*1
:
Sound Power Level
Sound Pressure Level
*2
*1
The above measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779 are actual value.
*2
It is measured at the position of the bystander.
*3
The Complete System consists of Mainframe, Finisher and Paper Feed Unit
(PS440).
v Dimensions:
v Weight:
Approximately 40kg (88lb)
v Warm-up Time:
Less than 45 seconds (68°F or 20°C)
Maximum (full options) 900W or less
Printing 550W or less
Energy Saver mode 1 40W or less
Energy Saver mode 2 25W or less
Mainframe only
During printing 69dB (A) with all options
Stand-by 40dB (A) with all options
Mainframe only Complete System
*3
During printing 49dB (A) 56dB (A)
Width Depth Height
Printer only (tray
not extended)
550mm (21.7") 520mm (20.5") 516mm (20.3")
With full options 950mm (37.5") 520mm (20.5") 1140mm (44.9")Specifications
113
7
v Paper Input Capacity:
*1
Paper weight: 80g/m2
, 20lb
v Paper Output Capacity:
Max. 1750 sheets (80g/m2
, 20lb)
If the paper is curled or if you use the guides, the output capacity is reduced.
v Memory:
Standard 16MB, up to 80MB (with optional Printer Feature Expander Type
185.)
v Options Equipment:
• PS400 (500-sheet paper feed unit)
• PS440 (1000-sheet paper feed unit)
• PS420 (2000-sheet paper feed unit)
• Bypass Tray Type 270
• Interchange Unit Type 280
• AD370 (duplex unit)
• CS370 (4-bin mailbox)
• Bridge Unit Type 270
• SR720 (1000-sheet finisher)
• Printer Feature Expander Type 185 (32MB or 64MB)
• Printer Hard Disk Type 185
Options
PS400 (500–sheet Paper Feed Unit)
v Paper Size:
? P.27 “Paper and Other Media”
v Paper Weight:
60 – 105g/m2
(16 – 28lb)
v Paper Capacity:
500 sheets × 1 tray
Standard paper tray 500 sheets × 2
*1
Optional bypass tray 100 sheets
*1
Optional paper feed unit PS440 500 sheets × 2
*1
Optional paper feed unit PS420 2000 sheets
*1
Optional paper feed unit PS400 500 sheets
*1 Appendix
114
7
v Power Consumption:
13W or less (Average)
v Dimensions (W × D × H):
550 × 520 × 134mm (21.7" × 20.5" × 5.3")
v Weight:
10.5kg (23.3lb)
PS440 (1000–sheet Paper Feed Unit)
v Paper Size:
? P.27 “Paper and Other Media”
v Paper Weight:
60 – 105g/m2
(16 – 28lb)
v Paper Capacity:
500 sheets × 2 trays
v Power Consumption:
17W or less (Average)
v Dimensions (W × D × H):
550 × 520 × 271mm (21.7" × 20.5" × 10.7")
v Weight:
22kg (48.9lb)
PS420 (2000–sheet Paper Feed Unit)
v Paper Size:
? P.27 “Paper and Other Media”
v Paper Weight:
60 – 105g/m2
(16 – 28lb)
v Paper Capacity:
2000 sheets
v Power Consumption:
14W or less (Average)
v Dimensions (W × D × H):
550 × 520 × 271mm (21.7" × 20.5" × 10.7")
v Weight:
23kg (51.1lb)Specifications
115
7
Bypass Tray Type 270
v Paper Size:
? P.27 “Paper and Other Media”
v Paper Weight:
60 – 157g/m2
(16 – 42lb)
v Power Consumption:
10W or less (Average)
v Dimensions (W × D × H):
125 × 495 × 163mm (4.9" × 19.5" × 6.4")
v Weight:
2.5kg (5.6lb)
Interchange Unit
v Paper Size:
? P.27 “Paper and Other Media”
v Paper Weight:
60 – 105g/m2
(16 – 28lb)
v Power Consumption:
10W or less (Average)
v Dimensions (W × D × H):
514 × 137 × 114mm (20.2" × 5.4" × 4.5")
v Weight:
2kg (4.4lb)
AD370 (Duplex Unit)
v Paper Size:
? P.27 “Paper and Other Media”
v Paper Weight:
60 – 105g/m2
(16 – 28lb)
v Printing Speed:
22 ppm (A4 long-edge feed, 8
1
/2
" × 11" long-edge feed)
v Power Consumption:
10W or less (Average)Appendix
116
7
v Dimensions (W × D × H):
495 × 445 × 90mm (19.5" × 17.5" × 3.5")
v Weight:
6.3kg (14lb)
CS370 (4–bin Mailbox)
v Paper Size:
? P.27 “Paper and Other Media”
v Paper Weight:
60 – 105g/m2
(16 – 28lb)
v Stack Capacity:
125 sheets (A4 long-edge feed, 8
1
/2
" × 11" long-edge feed: 80g/m2
, 22lb)/each
bin
v Power Consumption:
17W or less (Average)
v Dimensions (W × D × H):
440 × 520 × 370mm (17.3" × 20.5" × 14.6")
v Weight:
7kg (15.6lb)
Bridge Unit Type 270
v Paper Size (Proof Tray):
? P.27 “Paper and Other Media”
v Paper Size (Bridge to the finisher):
? P.27 “Paper and Other Media”
v Paper Weight (Proof Tray):
60 – 157g/m2
(16 – 42lb)
v Paper Weight (Bridge to the finisher):
60 – 105g/m2
(16 – 28lb)
v Output Capacity (Proof Tray):
250 sheets (Smaller than A4, 8
1
/2
" × 11" : 80g/m2
, 20lb)
125 sheets (Larger than B4, 8
1
/2
" × 14" : 80g/m2
, 20lb)
v Power Consumption:
10W or less (Average)Specifications
117
7
v Dimensions (W × D × H):
500 × 425 × 148mm (19.7" × 16.7" × 5.8")
v Weight:
4.2kg (9.3lb)
v Other:
Full stack detection is available.
SR720 (1000–sheet Finisher)
v Paper Size:
? P.27 “Paper and Other Media”
v Paper Weight:
52 – 157g/m2
(14 – 42lb)
*1
*1
When SR720 is used, paper weight is going to be as follows. 60 – 105b/m2
(16 –
28lb)
v Stack Capacity:
1000 sheets (A4 long-edge feed, 8
1
/2
" × 11" or smaller : 80g/m2
, 20lb)
500 sheets (A4 short-edge feed, 11" × 17", 8
1
/2
" × 14", 8
1
/2
" × 11" short-edge
feed)
v Staple Capacity:
30 sheets (A4, 8
1
/2
" × 11" or smaller : 80g/m2
, 22lb)
20 sheets (A3, B4 long-edge feed, 8
1
/2
" × 14" long-edge feed or larger)
v Staple Paper Size:
? P.27 “Paper and Other Media”
v Staple Position:
1 position (upper left)
v Shift Tray:
Standard
v Power Consumption:
48W
v Dimensions (W × D × H):
568 × 520 × 625mm (22.4" × 20.5" × 24.6")
v Weight:
21kg (46.7lb)Appendix
118
7
Printer Feature Expander Type 185
v Memory:
32MB/64MB
Printer Hard Disk Type 185
v Storage Capacity (Formatted):
Approx. 1.6GB 119
INDEX
A
AD370, 115
Adhesive Labels, 37
Agfa Font Manager, 4
B
Bridge Unit Type 270, 116
Bypass Tray Type 270, 45, 115
C
cable, 111
Caution, ii
Config. Page, 105
CS370, 116
Custom Paper, 48
D
data in indicator, 8
Delete File, 93
Disk Directory, 105
E
Energy Star, v
Enter key, 9
Envelope, 44
Envelopes, 37
error, 51
Error indicator, 62
error indicator, 8
Escape key, 9, 91
F
fonts, 111
Form Feed key, 9
friction pad, 85
front cover, 5
fusing unit, 7
H
Hex Dump, 103
J
Job Control, 94
Job Reset key, 9
L
Language, 106
List Print, 105
lower right cover 1, 6
lower right cover 2, 6
M
Macintosh, 23, 26
plugin File, uninstalling, 14
Maintenance, 103
media, 27
memory, 109, 113
menu, 91
menu chart, 89
Menu key, 9, 91, 92
Menu List, 105
Menu Reset, 103
messages, 51
misfeed, 69
Multidirect Print, 4
N
network, 111
Network Interface Board
Operating Insutructions, vii
network interface port, 5
Network Setup, 101
O
OHP Transparencies, 37, 44
On Line indicator, 62
on line indicator, 8
On Line key, 9, 62, 91
operation panel, 5, 89, 92
options, 113
Output Tray, 94
output tray, 5
P
panel display, 8
panel display, messages, 51
paper, 27
paper feed roller, 83
paper feed unit, 5
Paper Input, 94
paper, loading, 41120 UE USA G038
Paper Size, 48
paper, sizes, types, 27
paper tray, 5
parallel interface port, 5
PCL 5e, 3, 15
Windows 3.1x, uninstalling, 12
Windows 95/98, uninstalling, 11
Windows NT 4.0, uninstalling, 11
PCL 6, 3, 15
Windows 3.1x, uninstalling, 12
Windows 95/98, uninstalling, 11
Windows NT 4.0, uninstalling, 11
PCL Font List, 105
PCL Menu, 94
photo conductor unit, 7, 80
Plain Paper, 36
PortNavi, 4
PortNavi Operating
Instructions Supplement, vii
PostScript, 3, 19
Windows 95/98, uninstalling, 13
Windows NT 4.0, uninstalling, 13
PostScript 3 Operating
Instructions Supplement, vii
PostScript Printer Driver
Macintosh, uninstalling, 14
Windows 3.1x - Uninstall, 14
power cord, 6
power indicator, 8
power switch, 5
PPD, 3
printer board cover, 6
printer driver, 3
Printer Feature Expander Type 185, 118
Printer Hard Disk Type 185, 118
PRINTER MANAGER FOR
ADMINISTRATOR, 4
PRINTER MANAGER FOR CLIENT, 4
Printer Reference, vii
Print File, 93
Print Quality, 94
Proof Print, 93, 107
PS400, 113
PS420, 44, 114
PS440, 5, 114
PS Font List, 105
R
Registration, 103
registration roller, 87
right cover, 6, 7
S
Setup Guide, vii
Show Error Log, 93
specifications, 111
SR720, 117
staple, 75, 77
System, 94
System Reset, 103
T
Thick Paper, 44
toner bottle, 78
toner holder, 7
toner lock lever, 7
transfer unit, 7
troubleshooting, 51
U
upper right cover, 5
V
ventilator, 5
W
Warning, ii
Windows 3.1x, 17, 21, 25
PCL 5e, uninstalling, 12
PCL 6, uninstalling, 12
Windows 95/98, 15, 19, 24
PCL 5e, uninstalling, 11
PCL 6, uninstalling, 11
PostScript, uninstalling, 13
Windows NT 4.0, 16, 20, 24
PCL 5e, uninstalling, 11
PCL 6, uninstalling, 11
PostScript, uninstalling, 13
Search
Your search
Model: Aficio 2003 (XJ80E)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 2003 (XJ80E)
Model: Aficio 2103 (XJ80E)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 2103 (XJ80E)
Model: Aficio 2203 (XJ80E)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 2203 (XJ80E)
Model: Aficio 3006 (E-300)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 3006 (E-300)
Model: Aficio 3131(E-750)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 3131(E-750)
Model: Aficio 4506 (RC-210)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 4506 (RC-210)
Model: Aficio CL3500N
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio CL3500N MANUAL Aficio CL3500N
Model: Aficio CL7100
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Bring Color High Volume Printing Into Your Office. MANUAL Aficio CL7100
Model: Aficio CL7100
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Bring Color High Volume Printing Into Your Office. MANUAL Aficio CL7100
Model: AP1600
Category:
Subcategory:
AP1600
Model: AP2000
Category:
Subcategory:
AP2000
Model: AP2100
Category:
Subcategory:
AP2100
Model: AP2700
Category:
Subcategory:
AP2700 MANUAL AP2700
Model: AP305
Category:
Subcategory:
AP305 MANUAL AP305
Model: AP306
Category:
Subcategory:
AP306 MANUAL AP306
Model: AP306D
Category:
Subcategory:
AP306D MANUAL AP306D
Model: AP3800C
Category:
Subcategory:
AP3800C MANUAL AP3800C
Model: AP410
Category:
Subcategory:
AP410 MANUAL AP410
Model: AP410N
Category:
Subcategory:
AP410N MANUAL AP410N
Model: AP4400N
Category:
Subcategory:
AP4400N
Model: AP4500
Category:
Subcategory:
AP4500
Model: AP505
Category:
Subcategory:
AP505
Model: 3815
Category: Facsimile
Subcategory: Low Volume
A Versatile Desktop MFP System for the Small Business and Executive Suite
Model: 500SE
Category:
Subcategory:
500SE
Model: AC104
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
The smart, all-in one desktop document solution MANUAL AC104
Model: AC204
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Multifunctional productivity in a single compact system MANUAL AC204
Model: AC205L
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Make every work day productive MANUAL AC205L
Model: AC205
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Make every work day productive MANUAL AC205
Model: Aficio 3506 (E-310 v1.1)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 3506 (E-310 v1.1)
Model: Aficio 5106 (BP100)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 5106 (BP100)
Model: Aficio 5106 (ZX3200/3300)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 5106 (ZX3200/3300)
Model: Aficio 5206 (BP100)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 5206 (BP100)
Model: Aficio 5206 (ZX3200/3300)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 5206 (ZX3200/3300)
Model: Aficio 6010 (E-800A)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 6010 (E-800A)
Model: Aficio 1013F
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Easy-to-Use, Expandable, Affordable. Designed for Your Small Workgroup MANUAL Aficio 1013F
Model: Aficio 1013
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Easy-to-Use, Expandable, Affordable. Designed for Your Small Workgroup MANUAL Aficio 1013
Model: Aficio 1015
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Dependable, Affordable, Expandable. Simply Designed for Your Small Workgroup. MANUAL Aficio 1015
Model: Aficio 1018D
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Dependable, Affordable, Expandable. Simply Designed for Your Small Workgroup. MANUAL Aficio 1018D
Model: Aficio 1018
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Dependable, Affordable, Expandable. Simply Designed for Your Small Workgroup. MANUAL Aficio 1018
Model: Aficio 1022
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Engineered for Today's Technology Driven Workplace MANUAL Aficio 1022
Model: Aficio 1027
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
The "Copier of the Future Technology" is Available Today MANUAL Aficio 1027
Model: Aficio 1032
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 1032
Model: Aficio 1035
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Complete Networkable Office Solution MANUAL Aficio 1035
Model: Aficio 1035P
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Complete Networkable Office Solution
Model: Aficio 1045
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Tomorrow's Solution for Today's Office MANUAL Aficio 1045
Model: Aficio 1045P
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Tomorrow's Solution for Today's Office
Model: Aficio 1050
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 1050 MANUAL Aficio 1050
Model: Aficio 1055
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
The Digital Copy/Print System for Maximum Performance MANUAL Aficio 1055
Model: Aficio 1060
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Versatile Document Management... Copy Print System MANUAL Aficio 1060
Model: Aficio 1075
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Versatile Document Management... Copy Print System MANUAL Aficio 1075
Model: Aficio 1085
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
A Networked High Performance and Productive On-Demand Print Solution from Ricoh MANUAL Aficio 1085
Model: Aficio 1105
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Production Quality Imaging, Powerful High-Speed, High-Output, Printing & On-Line Finishing For Production Environments MANUAL Aficio 1105
Model: Aficio 1113
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Dependable and Affordable. Designed for your workgroup
Model: Aficio 120
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 120 MANUAL Aficio 120
Model: Aficio 1224C
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Centralize Document Production and Distribution to Create a More Productive Workgroup
Model: Aficio 1224C
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Centralize Document Production and Distribution to Create a More Productive Workgroup
Model: Aficio 1232C
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Centralize Document Production and Distribution to Create a More Productive Workgroup
Model: Aficio 1232C
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Centralize Document Production and Distribution to Create a More Productive Workgroup
Model: Aficio 1232CSP
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Centralize Document Production and Distribution to Create a More Productive Workgroup
Model: Aficio 1232CSP
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Centralize Document Production and Distribution to Create a More Productive Workgroup
Model: Aficio 150
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
MULTI-FUNCTION MANUAL Aficio 150
Model: Aficio 1515F
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 1515F
Model: Aficio 1515MF
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 1515MF
Model: Aficio 1515
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Desktop design, easy connectivity, affordable MANUAL Aficio 1515
Model: Aficio 180
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 180 MANUAL Aficio 180
Model: Aficio 200
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
MULTI-FUNCTION MANUAL Aficio 200
Model: Aficio 2015
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Big-Business Productivity ...Budget-Friendly Functionality
Model: Aficio 2016
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Connect your office and work smarter MANUAL Aficio 2016
Model: Aficio 2018D
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Big-Business Productivity ...Connectivity You Can Afford
Model: Aficio 2018
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Big-business productivity and connectivity you can afford
Model: Aficio 2020D
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Connect your office and work smarter MANUAL Aficio 2020D
Model: Aficio 2020
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Connect your office and work smarter MANUAL Aficio 2020
Model: Aficio 2022
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Versatile, Affordale Multifunctionality For Your Growing Business. MANUAL Aficio 2022
Model: Aficio 2022SP
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Affordable Multifunctionality For Your Growing Business
Model: Aficio 2027
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Affordable Multifunctionality For Your Growing Business MANUAL Aficio 2027
Model: Aficio 2032
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 2032
Model: Aficio 2035e
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Streamlining document management, optimizing productivity MANUAL Aficio 2035e
Model: Aficio 2035
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Complete Document Production and Distribution MANUAL Aficio 2035
Model: Aficio 2035SP
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Complete Document Production and Distribution
Model: Aficio 2045e
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 2045e MANUAL Aficio 2045e
Model: Aficio 2045
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Tomorrow's Solution for Today's Office MANUAL Aficio 2045
Model: Aficio 2045SP
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Tomorrow's Solution for Today's Office
Model: Aficio 2051
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
The New Ricoh Aficio 2051- High-End Performance Meets Rock-Solid Security! MANUAL Aficio 2051
Model: Aficio 2060
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
The New Ricoh Aficio 2060- High-End Performance Meets Rock-Solid Security! MANUAL Aficio 2060
Model: Aficio 2075
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
The New Ricoh Aficio 2075- High-End Performance Meets Rock-Solid Security! MANUAL Aficio 2075
Model: Aficio 2090 (EB-105EX)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 2090 (EB-105EX)
Model: Aficio 2090 (EB105EX)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 2090 (EB105EX)
Model: Aficio 2090
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
High Performance Capabilities To Meet Your Business Requirements
Model: Aficio 2090
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
High Performance Capabilities To Meet Your Business Requirements
Model: Aficio 2105 (EB-105EX)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 2105 (EB-105EX)
Model: Aficio 2105 (EB105EX)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 2105 (EB105EX)
Model: Aficio 2105
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
High Performance Capabilities to Meet Your Business Requirements
Model: Aficio 2105
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
High Performance Capabilities to Meet Your Business Requirements
Model: Aficio 220
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 220 MANUAL Aficio 220
Model: Aficio 220
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
MULTI-FUNCTION MANUAL Aficio 220
Model: Aficio 2228C
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Performance, Versatility, Value, Color
Model: Aficio 2228C
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Performance, Versatility, Value, Color
Model: Aficio 2232C
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 2232C MANUAL Aficio 2232C
Model: Aficio 2232C
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Black & White When You Need It… Color When You Want It MANUAL Aficio 2232C
Model: Aficio 2232C
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Black & White When You Need It… Color When You Want It MANUAL Aficio 2232C
Model: Aficio 2238C
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Black & White When You Need It… Color When You Want It MANUAL Aficio 2238C
Model: Aficio 2238C
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: Professional
Black & White When You Need It… Color When You Want It MANUAL Aficio 2238C
Model: Aficio 250
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
MULTI-FUNCTION
Model: Aficio 270
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Built To Handle The Diverse Applications Of The Workgroup Environment MANUAL Aficio 270
Model: Aficio 3006 (RC-200)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 3006 (RC-200)
Model: Aficio 3006
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
A brilliant move for today's office MANUAL Aficio 3006
Model: Aficio 3025
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
The power to perform MANUAL Aficio 3025
Model: Aficio 3030
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Affordable multifunctionality for your growing business MANUAL Aficio 3030
Model: Aficio 3035
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
MFP for the value-driven office MANUAL Aficio 3035
Model: Aficio 3045
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
MFP for the value-driven office MANUAL Aficio 3045
Model: Aficio 3224C
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 3224C MANUAL Aficio 3224C
Model: Aficio 3228C
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 3228C MANUAL Aficio 3228C
Model: Aficio 3232C
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 3232C MANUAL Aficio 3232C
Model: Aficio 3235C
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 3235C MANUAL Aficio 3235C
Model: Aficio 3245C
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Best-in-class, full-color MFP with unrivaled speed, image quality and cost efficiency MANUAL Aficio 3245C
Model: Aficio 3260C(E-7000)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 3260C(E-7000)
Model: Aficio 3260C
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Replace many printers with one powerful system MANUAL Aficio 3260C
Model: Aficio 3260C
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
Replace many printers with one powerful system MANUAL Aficio 3260C
Model: Aficio 340
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 340
Model: Aficio 350
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 350
Model: Aficio 3506 (E-310 v1.0)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 3506 (E-310 v1.0)
Model: Aficio 3506
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Accelerate Business Productivity With Top Quality Black & White and Color Imaging MANUAL Aficio 3506
Model: Aficio 350e
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 350e MANUAL Aficio 350e
Model: Aficio 355
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 355
Model: Aficio 355e
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 355e
Model: Aficio 4006 (E-300)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 4006 (E-300)
Model: Aficio 4006 (RC-200)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 4006 (RC-200)
Model: Aficio 4006
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
PRECISION REPRODUCTION... LIKE YOU'VE ALWAYS ENVISIONED IT
Model: Aficio 401
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Multifunctional MANUAL Aficio 401
Model: Aficio 4106 (E-300)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 4106 (E-300)
Model: Aficio 4106 (RC-200)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 4106 (RC-200)
Model: Aficio 4106
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
PRECISION REPRODUCTION... LIKE YOU'VE ALWAYS ENVISIONED IT MANUAL Aficio 4106
Model: Aficio 450
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 450
Model: Aficio 4506 (E-310 v1.0)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 4506 (E-310 v1.0)
Model: Aficio 4506 (E-310 v1.1)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 4506 (E-310 v1.1)
Model: Aficio 4506
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
BUSINESS PRODUCTIVITY SOARS WITH RICOH'S TRUE ALL-IN-ONE OFFICE SOLUTION MANUAL Aficio 4506
Model: Aficio 450e
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 450e MANUAL Aficio 450e
Model: Aficio 455
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 455
Model: Aficio 455e
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 455e
Model: Aficio 480W
Category: Wide Format
Subcategory: All Wide Format
New technology for a new era of wide-format documentation MANUAL Aficio 480W
Model: Aficio 550
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
MULTI-FUNCTION
Model: Aficio 551 (EB70)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 551 (EB70)
Model: Aficio 551
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Merging Digital Performance and Connectivity Into One Powerful Solution MANUAL Aficio 551
Model: Aficio 5560
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: Professional
Breakthrough color for production-level applications MANUAL Aficio 5560
Model: Aficio 5560
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
Breakthrough color for production-level applications MANUAL Aficio 5560
Model: Aficio 6010 (E-650)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 6010 (E-650)
Model: Aficio 6110 (E-800A)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 6110 (E-800A)
Model: Aficio 6110 (E-650)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 6110 (E-650)
Model: Aficio 6110
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: Professional
Aficio Color ™ BOLD, BRILLIANT, CREATIVE, POWERFUL MANUAL Aficio 6110
Model: Aficio 615C
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Step up to all-in-one color copier MANUAL Aficio 615C
Model: Aficio 650
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
MULTI-FUNCTION
Model: Aficio 6510 (E-700)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 6510 (E-700)
Model: Aficio 6513 (E-710)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 6513 (E-710)
Model: Aficio 6513 (E-810)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 6513 (E-810)
Model: Aficio 6513 (E-820)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 6513 (E-820)
Model: Aficio 6513
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: Professional
A Complete Color Digital Imaging System that is versatile and cost-effective MANUAL Aficio 6513
Model: Aficio 700 (EB70)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 700 (EB70)
Model: Aficio 700
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
MULTI-FUNCTION MANUAL Aficio 700
Model: Aficio 850 (EB105)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 850 (EB105)
Model: Aficio 850 (EB105e)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio 850 (EB105e)
Model: Aficio 850
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
MULTI-FUNCTION MANUAL Aficio 850
Model: Aficio AP2600N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
High Speed, High Volume Network Performance you can really work with. MANUAL Aficio AP2600N
Model: Aficio AP2600
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
High Speed, High Volume Network Performance you can really work with. MANUAL Aficio AP2600
Model: Aficio AP2610N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
PRINTER
Model: Aficio AP2610
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
High Speed, High Volume Network Performance you can really work with. MANUAL Aficio AP2610
Model: Aficio AP2610
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
High Speed, High Volume Network Performance you can really work with. MANUAL Aficio AP2610
Model: Aficio AP3850C(Fiery 3850C)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio AP3850C(Fiery 3850C)
Model: Aficio AP610N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Powerful performance, professional results MANUAL Aficio AP610N
Model: Aficio AP610N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
Powerful performance, professional results MANUAL Aficio AP610N
Model: Aficio CL2000N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
High-Speed and High-Efficiency in an Amazingly Affordable, Compact Color Laser Printer.
Model: Aficio CL2000N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
High-Speed and High-Efficiency in an Amazingly Affordable, Compact Color Laser Printer.
Model: Aficio CL2000
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Get The Power Choice: Color or Black and White MANUAL Aficio CL2000
Model: Aficio CL2000
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Get The Power Choice: Color or Black and White MANUAL Aficio CL2000
Model: Aficio CL3000
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
The Color Printer You Can't Afford not to Have MANUAL Aficio CL3000
Model: Aficio CL3000
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
The Color Printer You Can't Afford not to Have MANUAL Aficio CL3000
Model: Aficio CL3000e
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
High Quality Color and Speed For Demanding Business Graphic Workgroups. MANUAL Aficio CL3000e
Model: Aficio CL3000e
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
High Quality Color and Speed For Demanding Business Graphic Workgroups. MANUAL Aficio CL3000e
Model: Aficio CL4000DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Small, Sturdy, and Packed with Big Performance MANUAL Aficio CL4000DN
Model: Aficio CL4000DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Small, Sturdy, and Packed with Big Performance MANUAL Aficio CL4000DN
Model: Aficio CL5000
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Reliable Color Document Printing with Excellent Quality and Low Running Costs MANUAL Aficio CL5000
Model: Aficio CL5000
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Reliable Color Document Printing with Excellent Quality and Low Running Costs MANUAL Aficio CL5000
Model: Aficio CL7000
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
The Color Laser Printer For The Most Demanding Business In The World... Yours MANUAL Aficio CL7000
Model: Aficio CL7200
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Take print speed and productivity to a whole new level MANUAL Aficio CL7200
Model: Aficio CL7200
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Take print speed and productivity to a whole new level MANUAL Aficio CL7200
Model: Aficio Color 2003 (XJ80e)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio Color 2003 (XJ80e)
Model: Aficio Color 2103 (XJ80e)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio Color 2103 (XJ80e)
Model: Aficio Color 2203 (XJ80e)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio Color 2203 (XJ80e)
Model: Aficio Color 3006 (E-300)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio Color 3006 (E-300)
Model: Aficio Color 3131 (E-750)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio Color 3131 (E-750)
Model: Aficio Color 3506 (E-310 v1.0)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio Color 3506 (E-310 v1.0)
Model: Aficio Color 3506 (E-310 v1.1)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio Color 3506 (E-310 v1.1)
Model: Aficio Color 4006 (E-300)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio Color 4006 (E-300)
Model: Aficio Color 4506 (E-310 v1.0)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio Color 4506 (E-310 v1.0)
Model: Aficio Color 4506 (E-310 v1.1)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio Color 4506 (E-310 v1.1)
Model: Aficio Color 5106 (XJ Series)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio Color 5106 (XJ Series)
Model: Aficio Color 5106(BP100)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio Color 5106(BP100)
Model: Aficio Color 5106(ZX3200/3300)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio Color 5106(ZX3200/3300)
Model: Aficio Color 5206 (XJ Series)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio Color 5206 (XJ Series)
Model: Aficio Color 5206(BP100)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio Color 5206(BP100)
Model: Aficio Color 5206(ZX3200/3300)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio Color 5206(ZX3200/3300)
Model: Aficio Color 5560 (E-7000)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio Color 5560 (E-7000)
Model: Aficio Color 6010 (E-650)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio Color 6010 (E-650)
Model: Aficio Color 6010 (E-800A)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio Color 6010 (E-800A)
Model: Aficio Color 6110 (E-650)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio Color 6110 (E-650)
Model: Aficio Color 6110 (E-800A)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio Color 6110 (E-800A)
Model: Aficio Color 6510 (E-700)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio Color 6510 (E-700)
Model: Aficio Color 6513 (E-710)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio Color 6513 (E-710)
Model: Aficio Color 6513 (E-810)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio Color 6513 (E-810)
Model: Aficio Color 6513 (E-820)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio Color 6513 (E-820)
Model: Aficio FX10
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
MULTI-FUNCTION
Model: Aficio G500
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio G500
Model: Aficio G500
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
The Ricoh Aficio G500 printer is designed for business users
Model: Aficio G500
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
The Ricoh Aficio G500 printer is designed for business users
Model: Aficio G700
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio G700
Model: Aficio G700
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
The Ricoh Aficio G700 printer is designed for business users
Model: Aficio G700
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
The Ricoh Aficio G700 printer is designed for business users
Model: Aficio GX e3300N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Make an environmentally sound decision: High quality, two-sided inkjet printing on plain paper. MANUAL Aficio GX e3300N
Model: Aficio GX e3300N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
Make an environmentally sound decision: High quality, two-sided inkjet printing on plain paper. MANUAL Aficio GX e3300N
Model: Aficio GX e3350N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Make an environmentally sound decision: High quality, two-sided inkjet printing on plain paper. MANUAL Aficio GX e3350N
Model: Aficio GX e3350N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
Make an environmentally sound decision: High quality, two-sided inkjet printing on plain paper. MANUAL Aficio GX e3350N
Model: Aficio GX e5550N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
GelSprinter technology combines the affordability and convenience of inkjet color with the speed and durability of a laser printer. MANUAL Aficio GX e5550N
Model: Aficio GX e5550N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
GelSprinter technology combines the affordability and convenience of inkjet color with the speed and durability of a laser printer. MANUAL Aficio GX e5550N
Model: Aficio GX e7700N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
Powerful performance for productive color printing MANUAL Aficio GX e7700N
Model: Aficio GX2500
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
High quality, brilliant color with amazing speed for business users MANUAL Aficio GX2500
Model: Aficio GX2500
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
High quality, brilliant color with amazing speed for business users MANUAL Aficio GX2500
Model: Aficio GX3000
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
High-quality, brilliant color with amazing speed for business users MANUAL Aficio GX3000
Model: Aficio GX3000
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
High-quality, brilliant color with amazing speed for business users MANUAL Aficio GX3000
Model: Aficio GX3000sf
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
High-quality, brilliant color with amazing speed for business users MANUAL Aficio GX3000sf
Model: Aficio GX3000sf
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
High-quality, brilliant color with amazing speed for business users MANUAL Aficio GX3000sf
Model: Aficio GX3000sf
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
High-quality, brilliant color with amazing speed for business users MANUAL Aficio GX3000sf
Model: Aficio GX3000s
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
High-quality, brilliant color with amazing speed for business users MANUAL Aficio GX3000s
Model: Aficio GX3000s
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
High-quality, brilliant color with amazing speed for business users MANUAL Aficio GX3000s
Model: Aficio GX3000s
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
High-quality, brilliant color with amazing speed for business users MANUAL Aficio GX3000s
Model: Aficio GX3050N
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio GX3050N MANUAL Aficio GX3050N
Model: Aficio GX5050N
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio GX5050N MANUAL Aficio GX5050N
Model: Aficio MP 1100 (Prev)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio MP 1100 (Prev)
Model: Aficio MP 1100(EB-135)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio MP 1100(EB-135)
Model: Aficio MP 1350 (Prev)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio MP 1350 (Prev)
Model: Aficio MP 1350(EB-135)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio MP 1350(EB-135)
Model: Aficio MP 1350
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Making speed work MANUAL Aficio MP 1350
Model: Aficio MP 1350
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
Making speed work MANUAL Aficio MP 1350
Model: Aficio MP 1600L
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Functional. Affordable. And built for today’s business.
Model: Aficio MP 1600
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Set a new, more productive pace MANUAL Aficio MP 1600
Model: Aficio MP 1600SPF
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Set a New, More Productive Pace MANUAL Aficio MP 1600SPF
Model: Aficio MP 161F
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio MP 161F MANUAL Aficio MP 161F
Model: Aficio MP 161
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Small system, big savings MANUAL Aficio MP 161
Model: Aficio MP 161SPF
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
The all-in-one system with the compact design MANUAL Aficio MP 161SPF
Model: Aficio MP 171F
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Handle anything with a system that does everything. MANUAL Aficio MP 171F
Model: Aficio MP 171
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Handle anything with a system that does everything. MANUAL Aficio MP 171
Model: Aficio MP 171SPF
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Handle anything with a system that does everything. MANUAL Aficio MP 171SPF
Model: Aficio MP 2000L
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Functional. Affordable. And built for today’s business.
Model: Aficio MP 2000
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Set a new, more productive pace MANUAL Aficio MP 2000
Model: Aficio MP 2000SPF
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Set a New, More Productive Pace MANUAL Aficio MP 2000SPF
Model: Aficio MP 201F
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Make fast work of all your document-related tasks. MANUAL Aficio MP 201F
Model: Aficio MP 201SPF
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Make fast work of all your document-related tasks. MANUAL Aficio MP 201SPF
Model: Aficio MP 2352 SP
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Your choice for more efficient workflow MANUAL Aficio MP 2352 SP
Model: Aficio MP 2352
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Your choice for more efficient workflow MANUAL Aficio MP 2352
Model: Aficio MP 2500 DDST
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio MP 2500 DDST MANUAL Aficio MP 2500 DDST
Model: Aficio MP 2500
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
More productivity. Less expensive. MANUAL Aficio MP 2500
Model: Aficio MP 2500SPF
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
More productivity. Less expensive. MANUAL Aficio MP 2500SPF
Model: Aficio MP 2510
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
High-performance digital office system that combines power and functionality MANUAL Aficio MP 2510
Model: Aficio MP 2550B
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
High-performance digital office system that combines power and functionality MANUAL Aficio MP 2550B
Model: Aficio MP 2550
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
MANUAL Aficio MP 2550
Model: Aficio MP 2851
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
A versatile digital office system where reliability meets innovation. MANUAL Aficio MP 2851
Model: Aficio MP 2852 SP
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Your choice for more efficient workflow MANUAL Aficio MP 2852 SP
Model: Aficio MP 2852
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Your choice for more efficient workflow MANUAL Aficio MP 2852
Model: Aficio MP 3010
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
High-performance digital office system that combines power and functionality MANUAL Aficio MP 3010
Model: Aficio MP 301SPF
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Make fast work of all your document-related tasks. MANUAL Aficio MP 301SPF
Model: Aficio MP 3350
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio MP 3350 MANUAL Aficio MP 3350
Model: Aficio MP 3350B
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
High-performance digital office system that combines power and functionality MANUAL Aficio MP 3350B
Model: Aficio MP 3351
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
A versatile digital office system where reliability meets innovation. MANUAL Aficio MP 3351
Model: Aficio MP 3352 SP
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Your choice for more efficient workflow MANUAL Aficio MP 3352 SP
Model: Aficio MP 3352
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Your choice for more efficient workflow MANUAL Aficio MP 3352
Model: Aficio MP 3500
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
MFP for the value-driven office MANUAL Aficio MP 3500
Model: Aficio MP 3500P
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
MFP for the Value-driven Office MANUAL Aficio MP 3500P
Model: Aficio MP 3500SP
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
MFP for the Value-driven Office MANUAL Aficio MP 3500SP
Model: Aficio MP 4000B
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Exceptional Speed, Optimal Efficiency, and Worry-Free Security. MANUAL Aficio MP 4000B
Model: Aficio MP 4000
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Exceptional MFP for the value-driven office MANUAL Aficio MP 4000
Model: Aficio MP 4000SPF
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Exceptional Speed, Optimal Efficiency, and Worry-Free Security.
Model: Aficio MP 4001
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Exceptional MFP for the value-driven office MANUAL Aficio MP 4001
Model: Aficio MP 4002
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Customize workflow to maximize productivity MANUAL Aficio MP 4002
Model: Aficio MP 4002SP
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Customize workflow to maximize productivity MANUAL Aficio MP 4002SP
Model: Aficio MP 4500
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
MFP for the value-driven office MANUAL Aficio MP 4500
Model: Aficio MP 5000B
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Exceptional Speed, Optimal Efficiency, and Worry-Free Security. MANUAL Aficio MP 5000B
Model: Aficio MP 5000
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Exceptional MFP for the value-driven office MANUAL Aficio MP 5000
Model: Aficio MP 5001
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Exceptional MFP for the value-driven office MANUAL Aficio MP 5001
Model: Aficio MP 5002
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Customize workflow to maximize productivity MANUAL Aficio MP 5002
Model: Aficio MP 5002SP
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Customize workflow to maximize productivity MANUAL Aficio MP 5002SP
Model: Aficio MP 5500 S/P
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Exceptionally fast, sophisticated systems that are all business. MANUAL Aficio MP 5500 S/P
Model: Aficio MP 5500
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Exceptionally fast, sophisticated systems that are all business MANUAL Aficio MP 5500
Model: Aficio MP 6000 S/P
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Exceptionally fast, sophisticated systems that are all business. MANUAL Aficio MP 6000 S/P
Model: Aficio MP 6000
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Exceptionally fast, sophisticated systems that are all business MANUAL Aficio MP 6000
Model: Aficio MP 6001 SP
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Powerful system offers superior speed and unsurpassed performance with professional results MANUAL Aficio MP 6001 SP
Model: Aficio MP 6001
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Powerful system offers superior speed and unsurpassed performance with professional results MANUAL Aficio MP 6001
Model: Aficio MP 6500 S/P
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Exceptionally fast, sophisticated systems that are all business. MANUAL Aficio MP 6500 S/P
Model: Aficio MP 6500
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Exceptionally fast, sophisticated systems that are all business MANUAL Aficio MP 6500
Model: Aficio MP 7000 S/P
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
MANUAL Aficio MP 7000 S/P
Model: Aficio MP 7000
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Exceptionally fast, sophisticated systems that are all business MANUAL Aficio MP 7000
Model: Aficio MP 7001 SP
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Powerful system offers superior speed and unsurpassed performance with professional results MANUAL Aficio MP 7001 SP
Model: Aficio MP 7001
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Powerful system offers superior speed and unsurpassed performance with professional results MANUAL Aficio MP 7001
Model: Aficio MP 7500 S/P
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Exceptionally fast, sophisticated systems that are all business. MANUAL Aficio MP 7500 S/P
Model: Aficio MP 7500
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Exceptionally fast, sophisticated systems that are all business MANUAL Aficio MP 7500
Model: Aficio MP 8000 S/P
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
MANUAL Aficio MP 8000 S/P
Model: Aficio MP 8000
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Exceptionally fast, sophisticated systems that are all business MANUAL Aficio MP 8000
Model: Aficio MP 8001 SP
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Powerful system offers superior speed and unsurpassed performance with professional results MANUAL Aficio MP 8001 SP
Model: Aficio MP 8001
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Powerful system offers superior speed and unsurpassed performance with professional results MANUAL Aficio MP 8001
Model: Aficio MP 9000 (EB-135)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio MP 9000 (EB-135)
Model: Aficio MP 9000 (Prev)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio MP 9000 (Prev)
Model: Aficio MP 9000
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Making speed work MANUAL Aficio MP 9000
Model: Aficio MP 9000
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
Making speed work MANUAL Aficio MP 9000
Model: Aficio MP 9001 SP
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Powerful system offers superior speed and unsurpassed performance with professional results MANUAL Aficio MP 9001 SP
Model: Aficio MP 9001
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Powerful system offers superior speed and unsurpassed performance with professional results MANUAL Aficio MP 9001
Model: Aficio MP C2000
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Any job. Any time. Any place. MANUAL Aficio MP C2000
Model: Aficio MP C2030
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Get outstanding productivity and lower total cost of ownership. MANUAL Aficio MP C2030
Model: Aficio MP C2050
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Everything You Need in a Single System MANUAL Aficio MP C2050
Model: Aficio MP C2050SPF
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Everything You Need in a Single System MANUAL Aficio MP C2050SPF
Model: Aficio MP C2051
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Attention-grabbing color and efficient black-and-white in one compact system MANUAL Aficio MP C2051
Model: Aficio MP C2500 (E-3000)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio MP C2500 (E-3000)
Model: Aficio MP C2500 EFI
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Digital Copier that Handles Color and Black & White
Model: Aficio MP C2500 EFI
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: Professional
Digital Copier that Handles Color and Black & White
Model: Aficio MP C2500
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Digital Copier that Handles Color and Black & White MANUAL Aficio MP C2500
Model: Aficio MP C2550
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Everything You Need in a Single System MANUAL Aficio MP C2550
Model: Aficio MP C2550SPF
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Everything You Need in a Single System MANUAL Aficio MP C2550SPF
Model: Aficio MP C2551
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Attention-grabbing color and efficient black-and-white in one compact system MANUAL Aficio MP C2551
Model: Aficio MP C2800 (E-3100)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio MP C2800 (E-3100)
Model: Aficio MP C2800
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Enhance productivity for color and black & white. MANUAL Aficio MP C2800
Model: Aficio MP C2800SPF
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Enhance productivity for color and black & white. MANUAL Aficio MP C2800SPF
Model: Aficio MP C3000 (E-3000)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio MP C3000 (E-3000)
Model: Aficio MP C3000 EFI
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Color Copier with Fiery Print Controller
Model: Aficio MP C3000 EFI
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: Professional
Color Copier with Fiery Print Controller
Model: Aficio MP C3000
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Color Copier that is Versatile and Productive MANUAL Aficio MP C3000
Model: Aficio MP C3000SPF
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Versatile, Productive, Reliable Color and Black and White MANUAL Aficio MP C3000SPF
Model: Aficio MP C3001
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Versatile color in a secure, eco-friendly design. MANUAL Aficio MP C3001
Model: Aficio MP C3002/C3502/(E-3300) Fiery Controller
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Model: Aficio MP C3002
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Busy has never looked so easy MANUAL Aficio MP C3002
Model: Aficio MP C300
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Achieve a faster, smoother, smarter document workflow. MANUAL Aficio MP C300
Model: Aficio MP C300SR
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Achieve a faster, smoother, smarter document workflow. MANUAL Aficio MP C300SR
Model: Aficio MP C305
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Make fast work of all your document-related tasks. MANUAL Aficio MP C305
Model: Aficio MP C3300 (E-3100)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio MP C3300 (E-3100)
Model: Aficio MP C3300
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Enhance productivity for color and black & white. MANUAL Aficio MP C3300
Model: Aficio MP C3300SPF
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Enhance productivity for color and black & white. MANUAL Aficio MP C3300SPF
Model: Aficio MP C3500 (E-5000)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio MP C3500 (E-5000)
Model: Aficio MP C3500 EFI
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Multifunction Printer with Fiery Print Controller
Model: Aficio MP C3500 EFI
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: Professional
Multifunction Printer with Fiery Print Controller
Model: Aficio MP C3500 SPF
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Any job, any time, any place MANUAL Aficio MP C3500 SPF
Model: Aficio MP C3500
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Multifunction Printer that is Fast and Productive MANUAL Aficio MP C3500
Model: Aficio MP C3501
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Versatile color in a secure, eco-friendly design. MANUAL Aficio MP C3501
Model: Aficio MP C3502
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Busy has never looked so easy MANUAL Aficio MP C3502
Model: Aficio MP C4000 (E-5100)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio MP C4000 (E-5100)
Model: Aficio MP C4000
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Outstanding color with exceptional versatility. MANUAL Aficio MP C4000
Model: Aficio MP C4000SPF
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Outstanding color with exceptional versatility. MANUAL Aficio MP C4000SPF
Model: Aficio MP C400
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Achieve a faster, smoother, smarter document workflow. MANUAL Aficio MP C400
Model: Aficio MP C400SR
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Achieve a faster, smoother, smarter document workflow. MANUAL Aficio MP C400SR
Model: Aficio MP C4500 (E-5000)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio MP C4500 (E-5000)
Model: Aficio MP C4500 EFI
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Multifunction Printer with Fiery Print Controller
Model: Aficio MP C4500 EFI
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: Professional
Multifunction Printer with Fiery Print Controller
Model: Aficio MP C4500 SPF
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Versatile, Productive, Reliable Color and Black and White MANUAL Aficio MP C4500 SPF
Model: Aficio MP C4500
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Multifunction Printer that is Fast and Productive MANUAL Aficio MP C4500
Model: Aficio MP C4501
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Versatile color in a secure, eco-friendly design. MANUAL Aficio MP C4501
Model: Aficio MP C4502/C4502A/C5502/C5502A/(E-5300) Fiery Controller
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Model: Aficio MP C4502
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Versatile color in a secure, eco-friendly design. MANUAL Aficio MP C4502
Model: Aficio MP C5000 (E-5100)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio MP C5000 (E-5100)
Model: Aficio MP C5000
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Outstanding color with exceptional versatility. MANUAL Aficio MP C5000
Model: Aficio MP C5000SPF
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Outstanding color with exceptional versatility. MANUAL Aficio MP C5000SPF
Model: Aficio MP C5501
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Versatile color in a secure, eco-friendly design. MANUAL Aficio MP C5501
Model: Aficio MP C5502
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Versatile color in a secure, eco-friendly design. MANUAL Aficio MP C5502
Model: Aficio MP C6000 (E-7100 v1.1)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio MP C6000 (E-7100 v1.1)
Model: Aficio MP C6000 (E-7100)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio MP C6000 (E-7100)
Model: Aficio MP C6000
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Color Copier with Simple to Use Operation MANUAL Aficio MP C6000
Model: Aficio MP C6000
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: Professional
Color Copier with Simple to Use Operation MANUAL Aficio MP C6000
Model: Aficio MP C6000
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
Color Copier with Simple to Use Operation MANUAL Aficio MP C6000
Model: Aficio MP C6501SP (E-7200)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio MP C6501SP (E-7200)
Model: Aficio MP C6501SP
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Color Copier with Simple to Use Operation MANUAL Aficio MP C6501SP
Model: Aficio MP C7500 (E-7100 v1.1)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio MP C7500 (E-7100 v1.1)
Model: Aficio MP C7500 (E-7100)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio MP C7500 (E-7100)
Model: Aficio MP C7500
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Color Copier With Fast Print Speed MANUAL Aficio MP C7500
Model: Aficio MP C7500
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: Professional
Color Copier With Fast Print Speed MANUAL Aficio MP C7500
Model: Aficio MP C7500
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
Color Copier With Fast Print Speed MANUAL Aficio MP C7500
Model: Aficio MP C7501SP (E-7200)
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio MP C7501SP (E-7200)
Model: Aficio MP C7501SP
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Color Copier With Fast Print Speed MANUAL Aficio MP C7501SP
Model: Aficio MP W2400
Category: Planeras
Subcategory: Todas las Planeras
Productividad Multifuncional En Una Compacta Unidad MANUAL Aficio MP W2400
Model: Aficio MP W3600
Category: Wide Format
Subcategory: All Wide Format
Multifunctional productivity in a single footprint MANUAL Aficio MP W3600
Model: Aficio MP W3601
Category: Wide Format
Subcategory: All Wide Format
Wide Format Digital Imaging System MANUAL Aficio MP W3601
Model: Aficio MP W5100
Category: Wide Format
Subcategory: All Wide Format
High productivity. Color scanning. Fast output. MANUAL Aficio MP W5100
Model: Aficio MP W7140
Category: Wide Format
Subcategory: All Wide Format
High productivity. Color scanning. Fast output. MANUAL Aficio MP W7140
Model: Aficio MP1100
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Making speed work MANUAL Aficio MP1100
Model: Aficio MP1100
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
Making speed work MANUAL Aficio MP1100
Model: Aficio SG 3110DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
Full-color printing for any budget or environment MANUAL Aficio SG 3110DN
Model: Aficio SG 3110DNw
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
Full-color printing for any budget or environment MANUAL Aficio SG 3110DNw
Model: Aficio SP 1000SF
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
The Aficio SP1000SF offers excellent flexibility for its class with time-saving functions normally found on higher-volume devices. MANUAL Aficio SP 1000SF
Model: Aficio SP 1200SF
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
User-friendly multifunctionality for more efficient workflow. MANUAL Aficio SP 1200SF
Model: Aficio SP 1210N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
Creating Space for Affordable, Productive Printing MANUAL Aficio SP 1210N
Model: Aficio SP 3200SF
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Equipped to deliver high productivity in small offices MANUAL Aficio SP 3200SF
Model: Aficio SP 3300D
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Compact Size, Big Value, Highly Productive Performance MANUAL Aficio SP 3300D
Model: Aficio SP 3300D
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
Compact Size, Big Value, Highly Productive Performance MANUAL Aficio SP 3300D
Model: Aficio SP 3400N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Designed for Your Desktop and Your Budget MANUAL Aficio SP 3400N
Model: Aficio SP 3400N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
Designed for Your Desktop and Your Budget MANUAL Aficio SP 3400N
Model: Aficio SP 3400SF
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Designed to deliver exactly what you need. MANUAL Aficio SP 3400SF
Model: Aficio SP 3410DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Designed for Your Desktop and Your Budget MANUAL Aficio SP 3410DN
Model: Aficio SP 3410DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
Designed for Your Desktop and Your Budget MANUAL Aficio SP 3410DN
Model: Aficio SP 3410SF
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Designed to deliver exactly what you need. MANUAL Aficio SP 3410SF
Model: Aficio SP 3500SF
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Aficio SP 3500SF MANUAL Aficio SP 3500SF
Model: Aficio SP 3510DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
Discover the convenience of affordable network laser printing MANUAL Aficio SP 3510DN
Model: Aficio SP 3510SF
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
An affordable, compact multifunction product engineered for peak performance. MANUAL Aficio SP 3510SF
Model: Aficio SP 4100N KP
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Empower Every User With Secure Mobile Printing
Model: Aficio SP 4100N KP
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
Empower Every User With Secure Mobile Printing
Model: Aficio SP 4100NL
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
Impressive Performance, Excellent Value MANUAL Aficio SP 4100NL
Model: Aficio SP 4100N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Fast, convenient desktop printing MANUAL Aficio SP 4100N
Model: Aficio SP 4100N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
Fast, convenient desktop printing MANUAL Aficio SP 4100N
Model: Aficio SP 4110N-KP
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Empower Every User With Secure Mobile Printing
Model: Aficio SP 4110N-KP
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
Empower Every User With Secure Mobile Printing
Model: Aficio SP 4110N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Fast, convenient desktop printing MANUAL Aficio SP 4110N
Model: Aficio SP 4110N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
Fast, convenient desktop printing MANUAL Aficio SP 4110N
Model: Aficio SP 4210N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
High Productivity in a Compact Design MANUAL Aficio SP 4210N
Model: Aficio SP 4310N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
A scalable business printer solution. MANUAL Aficio SP 4310N
Model: Aficio SP 4410SF
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Multifunction performance for everyday workflows. MANUAL Aficio SP 4410SF
Model: Aficio SP 5100N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Fast, convenient desktop printing MANUAL Aficio SP 5100N
Model: Aficio SP 5100N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
Fast, convenient desktop printing MANUAL Aficio SP 5100N
Model: Aficio SP 5200DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
The value of maximum productivity MANUAL Aficio SP 5200DN
Model: Aficio SP 5200S
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Versatile, powerful performance with ease MANUAL Aficio SP 5200S
Model: Aficio SP 5210DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
The value of maximum productivity MANUAL Aficio SP 5210DN
Model: Aficio SP 5210SF
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
Versatile, powerful performance MANUAL Aficio SP 5210SF
Model: Aficio SP 5210SR
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
Versatile, powerful performance MANUAL Aficio SP 5210SR
Model: Aficio SP 6330N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Think BIG. Get 11" x 17" capabilities in a desktop solution. MANUAL Aficio SP 6330N
Model: Aficio SP 6330N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
Think BIG. Get 11" x 17" capabilities in a desktop solution. MANUAL Aficio SP 6330N
Model: Aficio SP 8100DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
The fast and flexible answer for the connected office MANUAL Aficio SP 8100DN
Model: Aficio SP 8100DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
The fast and flexible answer for the connected office MANUAL Aficio SP 8100DN
Model: Aficio SP 8200DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
High-performance printing for demanding workloads. MANUAL Aficio SP 8200DN
Model: Aficio SP 9100DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
The fast and flexible answer for connected offices MANUAL Aficio SP 9100DN
Model: Aficio SP 9100DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
The fast and flexible answer for connected offices MANUAL Aficio SP 9100DN
Model: Aficio SP C210
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
High-speed black & white printer with convenient color at an affordable price MANUAL Aficio SP C210
Model: Aficio SP C210
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
High-speed black & white printer with convenient color at an affordable price MANUAL Aficio SP C210
Model: Aficio SP C210SF
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Superior performance, modest price MANUAL Aficio SP C210SF
Model: Aficio SP C220N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Cost-Effective Color Designed for Your Workflow. MANUAL Aficio SP C220N
Model: Aficio SP C220N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Cost-Effective Color Designed for Your Workflow. MANUAL Aficio SP C220N
Model: Aficio SP C220S
Category: Color Multifunction
Subcategory: General Office
Drive Productivity With A Single, Versatile System.
Model: Aficio SP C221N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Cost-Effective Color Designed for Your Workflow. MANUAL Aficio SP C221N
Model: Aficio SP C221N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Cost-Effective Color Designed for Your Workflow. MANUAL Aficio SP C221N
Model: Aficio SP C221SF
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Multifunction Printer that Offers Powerful Capabilities MANUAL Aficio SP C221SF
Model: Aficio SP C222DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Cost-Effective Color Designed for Your Workflow. MANUAL Aficio SP C222DN
Model: Aficio SP C222DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Cost-Effective Color Designed for Your Workflow. MANUAL Aficio SP C222DN
Model: Aficio SP C222SF
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Multifunction Printer that Drives Producttivity MANUAL Aficio SP C222SF
Model: Aficio SP C231N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Small In Size, Large In Value MANUAL Aficio SP C231N
Model: Aficio SP C231N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Small In Size, Large In Value MANUAL Aficio SP C231N
Model: Aficio SP C231SF
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Multitasking Made Easy MANUAL Aficio SP C231SF
Model: Aficio SP C232DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Small In Size, Large In Value MANUAL Aficio SP C232DN
Model: Aficio SP C232DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Small In Size, Large In Value MANUAL Aficio SP C232DN
Model: Aficio SP C232SF
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Multitasking Made Easy MANUAL Aficio SP C232SF
Model: Aficio SP C240SF
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Versatile performance in vivid color MANUAL Aficio SP C240SF
Model: Aficio SP C242DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Add color, reduce expenses MANUAL Aficio SP C242DN
Model: Aficio SP C242SF
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Manage more jobs more efficiently. MANUAL Aficio SP C242SF
Model: Aficio SP C311N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Energize documents, reduce expenses. MANUAL Aficio SP C311N
Model: Aficio SP C312DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Energize documents, reduce expenses. MANUAL Aficio SP C312DN
Model: Aficio SP C320DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Robust capabilities, impressive results. MANUAL Aficio SP C320DN
Model: Aficio SP C400DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
High-Quality Color with Exceptional Value MANUAL Aficio SP C400DN
Model: Aficio SP C400DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
High-Quality Color with Exceptional Value MANUAL Aficio SP C400DN
Model: Aficio SP C410DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
The affordable color printer solution MANUAL Aficio SP C410DN
Model: Aficio SP C410DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
The affordable color printer solution MANUAL Aficio SP C410DN
Model: Aficio SP C411DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
The affordable color printer solution MANUAL Aficio SP C411DN
Model: Aficio SP C411DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
The affordable color printer solution MANUAL Aficio SP C411DN
Model: Aficio SP C420DN-KP
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
A Secure Mobile Printing Solution That Allows Anyone to Print From Anywhere At Anytime.
Model: Aficio SP C420DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
The affordable color printer solution MANUAL Aficio SP C420DN
Model: Aficio SP C420DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
The affordable color printer solution MANUAL Aficio SP C420DN
Model: Aficio SP C430DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Make ordinary documents look brilliant. MANUAL Aficio SP C430DN
Model: Aficio SP C430DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Make ordinary documents look brilliant. MANUAL Aficio SP C430DN
Model: Aficio SP C431DN-HS
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Ricoh Puts the Power of Mobile Printing in the Hands of Every User. MANUAL Aficio SP C431DN-HS
Model: Aficio SP C431DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Make ordinary documents look brilliant. MANUAL Aficio SP C431DN
Model: Aficio SP C431DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Make ordinary documents look brilliant. MANUAL Aficio SP C431DN
Model: Aficio SP C811DN-DL
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Different departments. Different needs. One universal printing solution. MANUAL Aficio SP C811DN-DL
Model: Aficio SP C811DN-DL
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Different departments. Different needs. One universal printing solution. MANUAL Aficio SP C811DN-DL
Model: Aficio SP C811DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Different departments. Different needs. One universal printing solution. MANUAL Aficio SP C811DN
Model: Aficio SP C811DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Different departments. Different needs. One universal printing solution. MANUAL Aficio SP C811DN
Model: Aficio SP C811DN-T1
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Different departments. Different needs. One universal printing solution. MANUAL Aficio SP C811DN-T1
Model: Aficio SP C811DN-T1
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Different departments. Different needs. One universal printing solution. MANUAL Aficio SP C811DN-T1
Model: Aficio SP C811DN-T2
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Different departments. Different needs. One universal printing solution. MANUAL Aficio SP C811DN-T2
Model: Aficio SP C811DN-T2
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Different departments. Different needs. One universal printing solution. MANUAL Aficio SP C811DN-T2
Model: Aficio SP C811DN-T3
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Different departments. Different needs. One universal printing solution. MANUAL Aficio SP C811DN-T3
Model: Aficio SP C811DN-T3
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Different departments. Different needs. One universal printing solution. MANUAL Aficio SP C811DN-T3
Model: Aficio SP C820DNLC
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Take Control Of Your Documents MANUAL Aficio SP C820DNLC
Model: Aficio SP C820DNLC
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Take Control Of Your Documents MANUAL Aficio SP C820DNLC
Model: Aficio SP C820DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Take Control Of Your Documents MANUAL Aficio SP C820DN
Model: Aficio SP C820DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Take Control Of Your Documents MANUAL Aficio SP C820DN
Model: Aficio SP C820DNT1
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Take Control Of Your Documents MANUAL Aficio SP C820DNT1
Model: Aficio SP C820DNT1
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Take Control Of Your Documents MANUAL Aficio SP C820DNT1
Model: Aficio SP C820DNT2
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Take Control Of Your Documents MANUAL Aficio SP C820DNT2
Model: Aficio SP C820DNT2
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Take Control Of Your Documents MANUAL Aficio SP C820DNT2
Model: Aficio SP C821DNLC
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Unleash Your In-house Capabilities MANUAL Aficio SP C821DNLC
Model: Aficio SP C821DNLC
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Unleash Your In-house Capabilities MANUAL Aficio SP C821DNLC
Model: Aficio SP C821DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Unleash Your In-house Capabilities MANUAL Aficio SP C821DN
Model: Aficio SP C821DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Unleash Your In-house Capabilities MANUAL Aficio SP C821DN
Model: Aficio SP C821DNT1
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Unleash Your In-house Capabilities MANUAL Aficio SP C821DNT1
Model: Aficio SP C821DNT1
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Unleash Your In-house Capabilities MANUAL Aficio SP C821DNT1
Model: Aficio SP C821DNX
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Unleash Your In-house Capabilities MANUAL Aficio SP C821DNX
Model: Aficio SP C821DNX
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Unleash Your In-house Capabilities MANUAL Aficio SP C821DNX
Model: Aficio SP W2470
Category: Wide Format
Subcategory: All Wide Format
State-of-the-art capabilities in a compact, economical printer MANUAL Aficio SP W2470
Model: Aficio SP3500N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
Model: Aficio SPC231D
Category:
Subcategory:
Aficio SPC231D
Model: AP1400
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
PRINTERS MANUAL AP1400
Model: AP206
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
The World of Color Printing just got better.
Model: AP3200
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Enhance Workgroup Productivity with Superior Speed, Print Performance & Versatility
Model: AP3200
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
Enhance Workgroup Productivity with Superior Speed, Print Performance & Versatility
Model: AP3800CMF
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
The Multi-functional Solution for Document Distribution and Delivery with uncompromising performance
Model: AP3800C
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
Ricoh Aficio AP3800C Series Color Printers Unprecedented Speed and Complete On-Line Document Finishing at an Incredible Value
Model: AP3850C
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Uncompromising High Speed Document Production for the Workgroup.
Model: AP3850C
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Uncompromising High Speed Document Production for the Workgroup.
Model: AP400
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Affordable High-Performance Monochrome Laser Printers MANUAL AP400
Model: AP400
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Affordable High-Performance Monochrome Laser Printers MANUAL AP400
Model: AP400
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
Affordable High-Performance Monochrome Laser Printers MANUAL AP400
Model: AP4510
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Enhanced Power And Productivity In One Versatile Workgroup Solution
Model: AP4510
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
Enhanced Power And Productivity In One Versatile Workgroup Solution
Model: AP505 (Fiery 500)
Category:
Subcategory:
AP505 (Fiery 500)
Model: AP600N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Exceptional Performance with Uncompromising Image Quality
Model: AP600N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
Exceptional Performance with Uncompromising Image Quality
Model: AP900
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Fast, Right to the Finish MANUAL AP900
Model: AP900
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
Fast, Right to the Finish MANUAL AP900
Model: Bizworks 406DF
Category:
Subcategory:
Bizworks 406DF
Model: Bizworks 406eDF
Category:
Subcategory:
Bizworks 406eDF
Model: Bizworks 706
Category:
Subcategory:
Bizworks 706
Model: BP20n
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
Top-of-the line laser printing performance. Bottom-line affordability. MANUAL BP20n
Model: BP20
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
Top-of-the-line laser printing performance. Bottom-line affordability. MANUAL BP20
Model: CL7000CMF
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: Professional
Print, Scan, Copy, E-mail, Fax. How Can You Manage It All? One System, One Answer
Model: CL7000CMF
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Print, Scan, Copy, E-mail, Fax. How Can You Manage It All? One System, One Answer
Model: CL7000CMF
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
Print, Scan, Copy, E-mail, Fax. How Can You Manage It All? One System, One Answer
Model: CL7000MF
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
PRINTER
Model: Color Controller E-80
Category:
Subcategory:
Color Controller E-80
Model: Color Controller E-80 for Software v2.0
Category:
Subcategory:
Color Controller E-80 for Software v2.0
Model: Color Controller E-8100 for v1.1
Category:
Subcategory:
Color Controller E-8100 for v1.1
Model: DS5330
Category:
Subcategory:
DS5330
Model: E-8000 Fiery User Software
Category:
Subcategory:
E-8000 Fiery User Software
Model: Epson Stylus Pro 7700
Category: Wide Format
Subcategory: All Wide Format
Redefining the Future of Printing MANUAL Epson Stylus Pro 7700
Model: Epson Stylus Pro 9700
Category: Wide Format
Subcategory: All Wide Format
Redefining the Future of Printing MANUAL Epson Stylus Pro 9700
Model: Fax 1170L
Category:
Subcategory:
Fax 1170L MANUAL Fax 1170L
Model: FAX 1190L
Category: Facsimile
Subcategory: Low Volume
Designed for All-In-One Productivity MANUAL FAX 1190L
Model: Fax 2400L
Category:
Subcategory:
Fax 2400L MANUAL Fax 2400L
Model: Fax 2700L
Category:
Subcategory:
Fax 2700L MANUAL Fax 2700L
Model: Fax 3310Le
Category:
Subcategory:
Fax 3310Le MANUAL Fax 3310Le
Model: Fax 3700L
Category:
Subcategory:
Fax 3700L MANUAL Fax 3700L
Model: Fax 3800L
Category:
Subcategory:
Fax 3800L MANUAL Fax 3800L
Model: Fax 3900NF
Category:
Subcategory:
Fax 3900NF MANUAL Fax 3900NF
Model: FAX 4410L
Category: Facsimile
Subcategory: Mid Volume
Shift Your Office Communications into High Gear MANUAL FAX 4410L
Model: FAX 4410NF
Category: Facsimile
Subcategory: Mid Volume
Integrate Sophisticated Faxing Performance with Network Cost Efficiency MANUAL FAX 4410NF
Model: Fax 4420L
Category:
Subcategory:
Fax 4420L
Model: Fax 4420NF
Category:
Subcategory:
Fax 4420NF
Model: Fax 4700L
Category:
Subcategory:
Fax 4700L MANUAL Fax 4700L
Model: FAX1160L
Category: Facsimile
Subcategory: Low Volume
The Perfect and Affordable Fit for Your Small Office or Workgroup
Model: FAX1180L
Category: Facsimile
Subcategory: Low Volume
A versatile desktop multifunction system for small businesses and executive suites MANUAL FAX1180L
Model: FAX1900L
Category: Facsimile
Subcategory: Mid Volume
Cost-effective and versatile partner to meet the needs of the small business or workgroup
Model: FAX2000L
Category: Facsimile
Subcategory: Mid Volume
FAX MANUAL FAX2000L
Model: FAX2050L
Category: Facsimile
Subcategory: Mid Volume
Super Fast . . . Super Efficient . . . High Performance Fax System
Model: FAX2210L
Category: Facsimile
Subcategory: Mid Volume
Efficient, simple, versatile...made for the work you do MANUAL FAX2210L
Model: FAX3310L
Category: Facsimile
Subcategory: Mid Volume
Efficient, Simple, Versatile...Made for the Work you do MANUAL FAX3310L
Model: FAX3320L
Category: Facsimile
Subcategory: Mid Volume
Streamline workflow and increase efficiency with this powerful facsimile system MANUAL FAX3320L
Model: FAX3900L
Category: Facsimile
Subcategory: Mid Volume
Advanced Communication System to meet your office environment
Model: FAX3900NF
Category: Facsimile
Subcategory: Mid Volume
Sophisticated Internet Faxing and Network Communications
Model: FAX4430L
Category: Facsimile
Subcategory: Mid Volume
Advanced document communication tools for superior workflow MANUAL FAX4430L
Model: FAX4430NF
Category: Facsimile
Subcategory: Mid Volume
High-performance faxing for workgroups MANUAL FAX4430NF
Model: FAX4800L
Category: Facsimile
Subcategory: Mid Volume
FAX
Model: FAX5000L
Category: Facsimile
Subcategory: High Volume
Providing Fax Productivity Through Network Connectivity MANUAL FAX5000L
Model: FAX5510L
Category: Facsimile
Subcategory: High Volume
Designed for today's demanding document communications needs MANUAL FAX5510L
Model: FAX5510NF
Category: Facsimile
Subcategory: High Volume
Advanced communications for the next generation MANUAL FAX5510NF
Model: FS2 Color
Category:
Subcategory:
FS2 Color
Model: FT7960
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
COPIERS
Model: FT7970
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
COPIERS
Model: FW770
Category: Wide Format
Subcategory: All Wide Format
Wide-format analog copiers for companies that think big MANUAL FW770
Model: FW780
Category: Wide Format
Subcategory: All Wide Format
Wide-format analog copiers for companies MANUAL FW780
Model: G7500
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
Affordable color prints
Model: G7500
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
Affordable color prints
Model: GX3050N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
High quality, brilliant color with amazing speed for business users
Model: GX3050N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
High quality, brilliant color with amazing speed for business users
Model: GX3050SFN
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Color Printer with Amazing Speed for Business Users
Model: GX5050N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
High quality, brilliant color with amazing speed for business users
Model: GX5050N
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
High quality, brilliant color with amazing speed for business users
Model: i700 - Mac 10.2
Category:
Subcategory:
i700 - Mac 10.2 MANUAL i700 - Mac 10.2
Model: i700 - Mac OS 7.6
Category:
Subcategory:
i700 - Mac OS 7.6 MANUAL i700 - Mac OS 7.6
Model: i700 - Mac OS 8x-9x
Category:
Subcategory:
i700 - Mac OS 8x-9x MANUAL i700 - Mac OS 8x-9x
Model: i700 - Mac OS X
Category:
Subcategory:
i700 - Mac OS X MANUAL i700 - Mac OS X
Model: i700 - Win 2000
Category:
Subcategory:
i700 - Win 2000 MANUAL i700 - Win 2000
Model: i700 - Win 95
Category:
Subcategory:
i700 - Win 95 MANUAL i700 - Win 95
Model: i700 - Win 98
Category:
Subcategory:
i700 - Win 98 MANUAL i700 - Win 98
Model: i700 - Win ME
Category:
Subcategory:
i700 - Win ME MANUAL i700 - Win ME
Model: i700 - Win NT
Category:
Subcategory:
i700 - Win NT MANUAL i700 - Win NT
Model: i700 - Win XP
Category:
Subcategory:
i700 - Win XP MANUAL i700 - Win XP
Model: InfoPrint® Color 1866 MFP
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: General Office
Enhance Workgroup Productivity
Model: IS01
Category:
Subcategory:
IS01 MANUAL IS01
Model: IS100e
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printer Options
Document scanning and copying at your fingertips.
Model: IS200e
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printer Options
A versatile multifunctional scan station for the connected office MANUAL IS200e
Model: IS200e
Category: Scanners
Subcategory: Low-Mid Volume
A versatile multifunctional scan station for the connected office MANUAL IS200e
Model: IS300e
Category: Scanners
Subcategory: Mid Volume
Document scanning and copying at your fingertips MANUAL IS300e
Model: IS330DC
Category: Scanners
Subcategory: Low-Mid Volume
Full Color Scanning With Duplex Capabilities MANUAL IS330DC
Model: IS410
Category:
Subcategory:
IS410
Model: IS420
Category:
Subcategory:
IS420
Model: IS430
Category:
Subcategory:
IS430 MANUAL IS430
Model: IS450
Category:
Subcategory:
IS450 MANUAL IS450
Model: IS50
Category:
Subcategory:
IS50
Model: IS510
Category:
Subcategory:
IS510
Model: IS520
Category:
Subcategory:
IS520
Model: IS60
Category:
Subcategory:
IS60
Model: IS760D
Category: Scanners
Subcategory: High Volume
Performance reliability and flawless paper handling of mixed originals are second to none.
Model: IS760
Category: Scanners
Subcategory: High Volume
Performance reliability and flawless paper handling of mixed originals are second to none MANUAL IS760
Model: IS800C
Category:
Subcategory:
IS800C
Model: JP1030
Category:
Subcategory:
JP1030 MANUAL JP1030
Model: LP-M20
Category:
Subcategory:
LP-M20
Model: LP-M32
Category:
Subcategory:
LP-M32
Model: LP-M38
Category:
Subcategory:
LP-M38
Model: LS3000R
Category: Digital Duplicators
Subcategory: Duplicator Options
Increase your capacity for production
Model: MP7040A
Category:
Subcategory:
MP7040A
Model: MP7040S
Category:
Subcategory:
MP7040S
Model: MP7040SE
Category:
Subcategory:
MP7040SE
Model: MP7060A
Category:
Subcategory:
MP7060A
Model: MP7060S
Category:
Subcategory:
MP7060S
Model: MP7060SE
Category:
Subcategory:
MP7060SE
Model: MP7080A
Category:
Subcategory:
MP7080A
Model: MP7083A
Category:
Subcategory:
MP7083A
Model: MP7120A
Category:
Subcategory:
MP7120A
Model: MP8040SE
Category:
Subcategory:
MP8040SE
Model: MP9060A
Category:
Subcategory:
MP9060A
Model: MP9120A
Category:
Subcategory:
MP9120A
Model:
Category: Multifunction B & W
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
Model:
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
MANUAL
Model:
Category: Multifunction Color
Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
MANUAL
Model: MV106
Category:
Subcategory:
MV106 MANUAL MV106
Model: MV310
Category:
Subcategory:
MV310 MANUAL MV310
Model: MV310E
Category:
Subcategory:
MV310E MANUAL MV310E
Model: MV715
Category:
Subcategory:
MV715
Model: MV74
Category:
Subcategory:
MV74
Model: NC 5006
Category:
Subcategory:
NC 5006
Model: NC 5006 (150i)
Category:
Subcategory:
NC 5006 (150i)
Model: NC 5006 (200i)
Category:
Subcategory:
NC 5006 (200i)
Model: NC5006 (XJ Series)
Category:
Subcategory:
NC5006 (XJ Series)
Model: PJ WX3131
Category: Projectors
Subcategory: Mobile
The clear choice for a high-performance digital projector MANUAL PJ WX3131
Model: PJ WX3231N
Category: Projectors
Subcategory: Mobile
The clear choice for a high-performance digital projector MANUAL PJ WX3231N
Model: PJ WX4130N
Category: Projectors
Subcategory: Ultra Short Throw
Short-throw projection with far-reaching results. MANUAL PJ WX4130N
Model: PJ WX4130
Category: Projectors
Subcategory: Ultra Short Throw
Short-throw projection with far-reaching results. MANUAL PJ WX4130
Model: PJ X3131
Category: Projectors
Subcategory: Mobile
The clear choice for a high-performance digital projector MANUAL PJ X3131
Model: PJ X3241N
Category: Projectors
Subcategory: Mobile
The clear choice for a high-performance digital projector MANUAL PJ X3241N
Model: Printer Controller EB-1357
Category:
Subcategory:
Printer Controller EB-1357
Model:
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
MANUAL
Model: Priport DD 4450
Category: Digital Duplicators
Subcategory: Mid Volume
Speed, Quality And Value In A Mid-Volume Digital Duplicator MANUAL Priport DD 4450
Model: Priport DX 3340
Category: Digital Duplicators
Subcategory: Low Volume
The digital duplicating advantage for professional educators and administrators MANUAL Priport DX 3340
Model: Priport DX 3343
Category: Digital Duplicators
Subcategory: Low Volume
The digital duplicating advantage for professional educators and administrators MANUAL Priport DX 3343
Model: Priport DX 4542
Category: Digital Duplicators
Subcategory: Mid Volume
Superior performance and low cost of ownership for unparalleled value MANUAL Priport DX 4542
Model: Priport DX 4545
Category: Digital Duplicators
Subcategory: Mid Volume
Speed, Quality And Value In A Mid-Volume Digital Duplicator MANUAL Priport DX 4545
Model: Priport DX 4640PD
Category: Digital Duplicators
Subcategory: High Volume
High-volume duplication with duplexing MANUAL Priport DX 4640PD
Model: Priport HQ7000
Category: Digital Duplicators
Subcategory: High Volume
An economical and reliable solution to production printing MANUAL Priport HQ7000
Model: Priport HQ9000
Category: Digital Duplicators
Subcategory: High Volume
An economical and reliable solution for production printing MANUAL Priport HQ9000
Model: PriPort JP5000
Category: Digital Duplicators
Subcategory: Mid Volume
DUPLICATOR MANUAL PriPort JP5000
Model: Priport JP730
Category: Digital Duplicators
Subcategory: Low Volume
Aenean ornare egestas dolor. Integer tellus odio, mollis vitae, pretium ultrices, malesuada ac, enim
Model: Priport VT6000
Category: Digital Duplicators
Subcategory: High Volume
The Digital Duplicator with Outstanding 600 dpi Resolution
Model: Pro 1106EX (EB-135)
Category:
Subcategory:
Pro 1106EX (EB-135)
Model: Pro 1356EX (EB-135)
Category:
Subcategory:
Pro 1356EX (EB-135)
Model: Pro 906EX (EB-135)
Category:
Subcategory:
Pro 906EX (EB-135)
Model: RCP40
Category:
Subcategory:
RCP40 MANUAL RCP40
Model: RCP80
Category:
Subcategory:
RCP80
Model: RDC-5000 - Mac 10.2
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-5000 - Mac 10.2 MANUAL RDC-5000 - Mac 10.2
Model: RDC-5000 - Mac OS X
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-5000 - Mac OS X MANUAL RDC-5000 - Mac OS X
Model: RDC-5000 Win 2000
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-5000 Win 2000 MANUAL RDC-5000 Win 2000
Model: RDC-5000 Win 95
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-5000 Win 95 MANUAL RDC-5000 Win 95
Model: RDC-5000 Win 98
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-5000 Win 98 MANUAL RDC-5000 Win 98
Model: RDC-5000 Win ME
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-5000 Win ME MANUAL RDC-5000 Win ME
Model: RDC-5000 Win NT
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-5000 Win NT MANUAL RDC-5000 Win NT
Model: RDC-5000 Win XP
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-5000 Win XP MANUAL RDC-5000 Win XP
Model: RDC-5300 - Mac 10.2
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-5300 - Mac 10.2 MANUAL RDC-5300 - Mac 10.2
Model: RDC-5300 - Mac OS X
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-5300 - Mac OS X MANUAL RDC-5300 - Mac OS X
Model: RDC-5300 Win 2000
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-5300 Win 2000 MANUAL RDC-5300 Win 2000
Model: RDC-5300 Win 95
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-5300 Win 95 MANUAL RDC-5300 Win 95
Model: RDC-5300 Win 98
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-5300 Win 98 MANUAL RDC-5300 Win 98
Model: RDC-5300 Win ME
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-5300 Win ME MANUAL RDC-5300 Win ME
Model: RDC-5300 Win NT
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-5300 Win NT MANUAL RDC-5300 Win NT
Model: RDC-5300 Win XP
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-5300 Win XP MANUAL RDC-5300 Win XP
Model: RDC-6000 - Mac OS X
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-6000 - Mac OS X MANUAL RDC-6000 - Mac OS X
Model: RDC-6000 - Mac10.2
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-6000 - Mac10.2 MANUAL RDC-6000 - Mac10.2
Model: RDC-6000 Win 2000
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-6000 Win 2000 MANUAL RDC-6000 Win 2000
Model: RDC-6000 Win 95
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-6000 Win 95 MANUAL RDC-6000 Win 95
Model: RDC-6000 Win 98
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-6000 Win 98 MANUAL RDC-6000 Win 98
Model: RDC-6000 Win ME
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-6000 Win ME MANUAL RDC-6000 Win ME
Model: RDC-6000 Win NT
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-6000 Win NT MANUAL RDC-6000 Win NT
Model: RDC-6000 Win XP
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-6000 Win XP MANUAL RDC-6000 Win XP
Model: RDC-7 - Mac 10.2
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-7 - Mac 10.2 MANUAL RDC-7 - Mac 10.2
Model: RDC-7 - Mac OS 7.6
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-7 - Mac OS 7.6 MANUAL RDC-7 - Mac OS 7.6
Model: RDC-7 - Mac OS X
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-7 - Mac OS X MANUAL RDC-7 - Mac OS X
Model: RDC-7 Win 2000
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-7 Win 2000 MANUAL RDC-7 Win 2000
Model: RDC-7 Win 95
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-7 Win 95 MANUAL RDC-7 Win 95
Model: RDC-7 Win 98
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-7 Win 98 MANUAL RDC-7 Win 98
Model: RDC-7 Win ME
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-7 Win ME MANUAL RDC-7 Win ME
Model: RDC-7 Win NT
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-7 Win NT MANUAL RDC-7 Win NT
Model: RDC-7 Win XP
Category:
Subcategory:
RDC-7 Win XP MANUAL RDC-7 Win XP
Model: RDC-7
Category: Solutions
Subcategory: Printing Solutions
need text MANUAL RDC-7
Model: RDC-i700
Category: Solutions
Subcategory: Printing Solutions
need text MANUAL RDC-i700
Model: Ricoh BB-HPL10A-R
Category: Network Accessories
Subcategory: Ethernet Adaptors
High Definition Power Line Communications Ethernet Adaptor
Model: Ricoh DDP 184
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
Industrial Strength Printer for Production Environments
Model: Ricoh DDP 70e
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
Industrial-strength printer for production environments
Model: Ricoh DDP 92
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
Industrial-strength printer for production environments
Model: Ricoh EMP 156
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
Dependable, high-volume printing
Model: Ricoh GX7000
Category: Printers
Subcategory: All Printers
The Next Generation in High-Quality, High-Value Color Printing MANUAL Ricoh GX7000
Model: Ricoh GX7000
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
The Next Generation in High-Quality, High-Value Color Printing MANUAL Ricoh GX7000
Model: Ricoh Pro 1106EX
Category:
Subcategory:
Ricoh Pro 1106EX MANUAL Ricoh Pro 1106EX
Model: RICOH Pro 1107EX
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
Exceptional uptime and flexibility for production workflow. MANUAL RICOH Pro 1107EX
Model: RICOH Pro 1107
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
Nonstop printing for mission-critical documents. MANUAL RICOH Pro 1107
Model: Ricoh Pro 1356EX
Category:
Subcategory:
Ricoh Pro 1356EX MANUAL Ricoh Pro 1356EX
Model: RICOH Pro 1357EX
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
Exceptional uptime and flexibility for production workflow. MANUAL RICOH Pro 1357EX
Model: RICOH Pro 1357
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
Nonstop printing for mission-critical documents. MANUAL RICOH Pro 1357
Model: Ricoh Pro 906EX
Category:
Subcategory:
Ricoh Pro 906EX MANUAL Ricoh Pro 906EX
Model: RICOH Pro 907EX
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
Exceptional uptime and flexibility for production workflow. MANUAL RICOH Pro 907EX
Model: RICOH Pro 907
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
Nonstop printing for mission-critical documents. MANUAL RICOH Pro 907
Model: Ricoh Pro C550EX v1.1
Category:
Subcategory:
Ricoh Pro C550EX v1.1
Model: RICOH Pro C550EX
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
Build your business with high-speed color. MANUAL RICOH Pro C550EX
Model: RICOH Pro C651EX
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
Exceptional speed, quality and value for high-volume workflow MANUAL RICOH Pro C651EX
Model: Ricoh Pro C700EX v1.1
Category:
Subcategory:
Ricoh Pro C700EX v1.1
Model: RICOH Pro C700EX
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
Build your business with high-speed color. MANUAL RICOH Pro C700EX
Model: RICOH Pro C720
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
Capable, cost-effective color production. MANUAL RICOH Pro C720
Model: RICOH Pro C720s
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
Capable, cost-effective color production. MANUAL RICOH Pro C720s
Model: RICOH Pro C751EX
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
Exceptional speed, quality and value for high-volume workflow MANUAL RICOH Pro C751EX
Model: RICOH Pro C900
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
Improve Capacity and Build Your Business MANUAL RICOH Pro C900
Model: Ricoh Pro C900s
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
Extreme Flexibility for High-Volume Printing Plus Scanning, Copying and Finishing MANUAL Ricoh Pro C900s
Model: Ricoh Pro C901
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
Graphic Arts Edition MANUAL Ricoh Pro C901
Model: Ricoh Pro C901s
Category: Production Printing
Subcategory: High Volume
Graphic Arts Edition MANUAL Ricoh Pro C901s
Model: RR1 - Mac 10.2
Category:
Subcategory:
RR1 - Mac 10.2 MANUAL RR1 - Mac 10.2
Model: RR1 - Mac OS 7.6
Category:
Subcategory:
RR1 - Mac OS 7.6 MANUAL RR1 - Mac OS 7.6
Model: RR1 - Mac OS 8x-9x
Category:
Subcategory:
RR1 - Mac OS 8x-9x MANUAL RR1 - Mac OS 8x-9x
Model: RR1 - Mac OS X
Category:
Subcategory:
RR1 - Mac OS X MANUAL RR1 - Mac OS X
Model: RR1 - Win 2000
Category:
Subcategory:
RR1 - Win 2000 MANUAL RR1 - Win 2000
Model: RR1 - Win 95
Category:
Subcategory:
RR1 - Win 95 MANUAL RR1 - Win 95
Model: RR1 - Win 98
Category:
Subcategory:
RR1 - Win 98 MANUAL RR1 - Win 98
Model: RR1 - Win ME
Category:
Subcategory:
RR1 - Win ME MANUAL RR1 - Win ME
Model: RR1 - Win NT
Category:
Subcategory:
RR1 - Win NT MANUAL RR1 - Win NT
Model: RR1 - Win XP
Category:
Subcategory:
RR1 - Win XP MANUAL RR1 - Win XP
Model: RR30 - Mac 10.2
Category:
Subcategory:
RR30 - Mac 10.2 MANUAL RR30 - Mac 10.2
Model: RR30 - Mac OS 7.6
Category:
Subcategory:
RR30 - Mac OS 7.6 MANUAL RR30 - Mac OS 7.6
Model: RR30 - Mac OS 8x-9x
Category:
Subcategory:
RR30 - Mac OS 8x-9x MANUAL RR30 - Mac OS 8x-9x
Model: RR30 - Mac OS X
Category:
Subcategory:
RR30 - Mac OS X MANUAL RR30 - Mac OS X
Model: RR30 - Win 2000
Category:
Subcategory:
RR30 - Win 2000 MANUAL RR30 - Win 2000
Model: RR30 - Win 95
Category:
Subcategory:
RR30 - Win 95 MANUAL RR30 - Win 95
Model: RR30 - Win 98
Category:
Subcategory:
RR30 - Win 98 MANUAL RR30 - Win 98
Model: RR30 - Win ME
Category:
Subcategory:
RR30 - Win ME MANUAL RR30 - Win ME
Model: RR30 - Win NT
Category:
Subcategory:
RR30 - Win NT MANUAL RR30 - Win NT
Model: RR30 - Win XP
Category:
Subcategory:
RR30 - Win XP MANUAL
Model:
Category: Scanners
Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
MANUAL
Model: SFX2000M
Category: SecureFax
Subcategory: All SecureFax
Compact and powerful SecureFax solution
Model: SFX2000TE
Category: SecureFax
Subcategory: All SecureFax
TEMPEST security, mobility and flexibility
Model: SFX5510MSD
Category: SecureFax
Subcategory: All SecureFax
Digital high-performance facsimile
Model: SP 3300DN
Category: Printers
Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
Compact Size, Big Value, Highly Productive Performance MANUAL SP 3300DN
Model: TC-IIR
Category: Digital Duplicators
Subcategory: Duplicator Options
Add fast, two-color printing to your Priport
Model: VC-20
Category:
Subcategory:
VC-20
Model: VT1730
Category:
Subcategory:
VT1730 MANUAL VT1730
Model: VT1800
Category:
Subcategory:
VT1800
Model: VT2105
Category:
Subcategory:
VT2105
Model: VT2200
Category:
Subcategory:
VT2200
Model: VT2250
Category:
Subcategory:
VT2250 MANUAL VT2250
Model: VT3600
Category:
Subcategory:
VT3600 MANUAL VT3600
Model: VT3800
Category:
Subcategory:
VT3800 MANUAL VT3800
Model: Wide Format Color Scanner
Category: Wide Format
Subcategory: All Wide Format
Simply put, the Ricoh Wide Format Color Scanner gives you more time to focus on your work.
OBJECTIF GR
MACRO A12 50mm F2.5
Mode d’emploi
Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’objectif.
Contenu de l’emballage
Avant d’utiliser votre objectif Ricoh, vérifiez dans l’emballage qu’il ne
manque aucun des éléments listés ci-dessous.
Unité appareil photo
Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’appareil.
Capuchon de l’objectif
Est fixé à l’unité appareil photo.
?Mode d’emploi
(le présentmanuel)
? Garantie
Capuchon du connecteur
Est fixé à l’unité appareil photo.
Étui souple
Introduction
Pour utiliser cet objectif, vous devez l’installer sur un boîtier d’appareil photo
compatible.
Reportez-vous au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo pour plus de détails
concernant l’utilisation des fonctions de prise de vue et de lecture et la modification
des réglages et pour prendre connaissance des consignes d’utilisation importantes. Le
présent mode d’emploi désigne l’objectif sous le nom d’unité appareil photo et détaille
les fonctions et procédures de fonctionnement uniquement disponibles lorsque l’unité
appareil photo est utilisée avec un boîtier d’appareil photo compatible. Reportez-vous
également au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo GXR.
Pour utiliser les fonctions du produit de manière optimale, lisez attentivement le
présent manuel avant utilisation. Veuillez conserver le présent manuel à portée de
main pour pouvoir vous y référer facilement.
Ricoh Co., Ltd.
Mesures de sécurité Lisez attentivement toutes les mesures de sécurité pour garantir
une utilisation sans danger.
Essais de prise de vue Faites des essais de prise de vue pour vérifier le fonctionnement correct
de l’appareil avant de prendre des photos d’événements importants.
Copyright La reproduction ou la modification de documents, de magazines
et d’autres sources sujettes aux droits d’auteur, autrement que
pour des raisons personnelles, domestiques ou limitées similaires,
est interdite sans le consentement du propriétaire des droits.
Exonération de
responsabilité
Ricoh Co., Ltd. décline toute responsabilité en cas de défaillance
de l’enregistrement ou de l’affichage des photos résultant d’un
dysfonctionnement de l’appareil.
Garantie La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans
le pays d’achat. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à
la réparation du produit dans d’autres pays ou à la prise en charge
de toute dépense associée.
Interférences radio L’utilisation de cet appareil dans le voisinage d’un autre
équipement électronique peut affecter défavorablement à
la fois l’appareil photo et l’autre dispositif. Des interférences
sont notamment probables si l’appareil est utilisé à proximité
d’une radio ou d’un téléviseur. Ce problème peut être résolu en
déplaçant l’appareil aussi loin que possible de l’autre dispositif, en
réorientant l’antenne de la radio ou du téléviseur, ou encore en
branchant la radio ou le téléviseur sur une prise secteur différente.
© 2009 RICOH CO., LTD. Tous droits réservés. Cette publication ne peut être reproduite en tout ou en partie sans
l’autorisation expresse et écrite de Ricoh. Ricoh se réserve le droit de modifier le contenu de ce document à tout
moment et sans avis préalable.
Tous les efforts ont été faits pour garantir l’exactitude des informations contenues dans ce document. Dans le cas
où vous rencontreriez néanmoins une erreur ou une omission, nous vous serions reconnaissants de bien vouloir
nous en avertir à l’adresse indiquée en quatrième de couverture de ce manuel.
Mesures de sécurité
Symboles d’avertissement
Divers symboles sont utilisés tout au long de ce manuel et sur le produit
lui-même pour prévenir tout risque de blessure ou de dommage aux biens.
Ces symboles et leur signification sont détaillés ci-dessous.
Danger
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner
rapidement la mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les
instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies.
Avertissement
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner la
mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les instructions
correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies.
Attention
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner des
blessures corporelles ou des dommages aux biens si les
instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies.
Exemples de signalisation d’avertissement
Le symbole vous signale des actions qui doivent être effectuées.
Le symbole vous signale des actions interdites.
Le symbole peut être combiné avec d’autres pour indiquer qu’une action
spécifique est interdite.
Exemples
= Ne pas toucher = Ne pas démonter
Prenez les précautions indiquées ci-dessous pour utiliser ce matériel en
toute sécurité.
Danger
Ne tentez pas de démonter, de réparer ou de modifier vous-même l’appareil. Les
circuits à haute tension de l’appareil vous font courir un risque de choc électrique.
Avertissement
Conservez l’appareil hors de portée des enfants.
Si le mécanisme interne de l’appareil est exposé suite à un choc ou autre type de
dommage, ne touchez aucun composant interne. Les circuits à haute tension de
l’appareil peuvent causer des chocs électriques. Retirez la batterie dès que possible,
en prenant soin d’éviter tout choc électrique ou brûlure. Apportez l’appareil au
revendeur ou au service après-vente le plus proche s’il est endommagé.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans un endroit humide car vous risqueriez de provoquer un
incendie ou de subir une décharge électrique.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil à proximité de gaz inflammables, d’essence, de benzène,
de solvant ou de substances du même type pour éviter tout risque d’explosion,
d’incendie ou de brûlure.
• N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans des lieux où son usage est limité ou interdit afin
d’éviter tout risque de catastrophe ou d’accident.
Attention
Ne laissez pas l’équipement prendre l’eau ou se mouiller. Ne l’utilisez pas non plus
avec les mains mouillées. Dans les deux cas, vous risquez de subir une décharge
électrique.
Consignes de
sécurité relatives aux
accessoires
Avant d’utiliser un produit optionnel, lisez attentivement les
instructions fournies avec ce produit.10
Contenu de l’emballage ..................................................................................................... 2
Introduction............................................................................................................................ 3
Mesures de sécurité............................................................................................................. 6
Nomenclature de l’objectif...............................................................................12
Prise de vue..........................................................................................................13
Mode P : Changement de programme.......................................................................13
Mode M : Exposition manuelle ......................................................................................15
Réglages...............................................................................................................16
Réglage [Qualité image/Taille] (menu prise de vue)..............................................16
Photos...........................................................................................................................17
Vidéos............................................................................................................................18
Réglage [Sensibilité ISO] (menu prise de vue) .........................................................19
[Enr. Mes Réglages] (Options personnalisées)..........................................................20
Table des matières11
Réglage [Image zoom numérique] (Configuration)...............................................20
Réglages bague mise au point (Configuration).......................................................21
Caractéristiques..................................................................................................22
Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire................................................................28
Précautions d’emploi.........................................................................................................30
Entretien et stockage de l’équipement.......................................................................31
Garantie et réparation.......................................................................................................321
Nomenclature de l’objectif
1 2
4
3
1 Connecteur
2 Bague de mise au point
3 Objectif
4 Pare-soleil intégré1
Prise de vue
Mode P : Changement de programme
Les plages approximatives disponibles pour les combinaisons d’ouverture
et de vitesse d’obturation sont indiquées ci-dessous. Les valeurs réelles
peuvent variées selon la valeur d’exposition (EV).
Dans ces exemples, le mode Flash est défini sur [Flash Non] et la sensibilité
ISO est définie sur [ISO200].1
Ev5
Ev6
Ev7
Ev4
Ev3
Ev2
Ev1
Ev0
Ev-1
Ev-2
Ev-3
F16
F22
F11
F8.0
F5.6
F4.0
F2.8
F2.0
F1.4
F1.0
2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000
Ev8 Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19 Ev20
F22.0
F2.51
Mode M : Exposition manuelle
Si [Auto] ou [Auto-Hi] est sélectionné pour Sensibilité ISO, la sensibilité ISO
sera fixée à 200 lorsque l’appareil photo est en mode exposition manuelle. 1
Réglages
Réglage [Qualité image/Taille] (menu prise de vue)
Les options de qualité de l’image, de taille de l’image et de rapport
d’affichage suivantes sont disponibles pour le réglage [Qualité image/Taille]
du menu de prise de vue.
La taille du fichier des photos dépend de l’association qualité de l’image/
taille de l’image utilisée. Lors de l’enregistrement de vidéos, vous pouvez
sélectionner la taille de la vidéo.1
Photos
Paramètre Rapport
d’affichage
Compression Taille de l’image
(pixels)
RAW 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4288×2416
4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
3776×2832
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4288×2848
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
2848×2848
L (Large) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 4288×2416
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3776×2832
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 4288×2848
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2848×2848
M (Middle) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 3456×1944
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3072×2304
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 3456×2304
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2304×23041
Paramètre Rapport
d’affichage
Compression Taille de l’image
(pixels)
5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944
3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536
1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960
VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480
*1 Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit du réglage utilisé pour la copie JPEG.
*2 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent en haut
et en bas de l’affichage de la photo.
*3 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent sur le
côté droit et sur le côté gauche de l’affichage de la photo.
Vidéos
Paramètre Taille vidéo
HD1280 1280×720
VGA640 640×480
QVGA320 320×2401
Réglage [Sensibilité ISO] (menu prise de vue)
• Lorsque l’option [Auto] est sélectionnée et que le flash est utilisé, la
sensibilité utilisée devient équivalente à la sensibilité ISO800.
• Lorsque l’option [Auto] est sélectionnée et que le flash n’est pas utilisé, la
plage de sensibilité utilisée est la suivante.
Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Défaut Minimum Maximum
RAW 200 200 400
L 200 200 400
M 200 200 400
5M 200 200 400
3M 200 200 400
1M 200 200 400
VGA 200 200 4000
[Enr. Mes Réglages] (Options personnalisées)
Sous [Enr. Mes Réglages], vous pouvez aussi définir les options de [Réglages
bague mise au point] de l’onglet de configuration. Pour les autres options
disponibles, reportez-vous au « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil
photo ».
Réglage [Image zoom numérique] (Configuration)
La taille de l’image enregistrée varie en fonction du zoom de
redimensionnement automatique, de la manière suivante.
Rapport de zoom Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Rapport de zoom Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Environ 1,0× L Environ 1,8× 3M
Environ 1,2× M Environ 3,0× 1M
Environ 1,5× 5M Environ 5,9× VGA1
Réglages bague mise au point (Configuration)
Sous [Réglages bague mise au point], vous pouvez sélectionner un mode
qui active les fonctions pour la mise au point automatique et la mise au
point manuelle ou un mode qui active uniquement les fonctions pour la
mise au point manuelle.
Lorsque l’option [AF+MF] est sélectionnée, une fois le déclencheur enfoncé
à mi-course pour régler la mise au point, la mise au point peut être réglée
de manière plus précise en tournant la bague de mise au point.
Paramètre
AF+MF MF uniquement
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Si vous appuyez de nouveau sur le déclencheur après le réglage fin, la mise
au point automatique est activée et le réglage est annulé.
Caractéristiques
Les caractéristiques correspondent à l’unité appareil photo installée sur un
boîtier GXR.
Pixels réels Environ 12,3 millions
Capteur d’image 23,6 mm×15,7 mm CMOS (nombre total de pixels : environ
12,9 millions)
Objectif Distance focale 33mm (format 35 mm équivalent : 50mm)
Ouverture
(nombre f)
f/2,5– f/22
(filtre à densité neutre utilisé pour les ouvertures f/22 en mode
prise de vue automatique)
Plage mise
au point (de
l’objectif)
Environ 30cm–8
Environ 7cm (zoom optique 0,5×) en mode macro
Construction 9 éléments en 8 groupes (1 objectifs asphériques avec 2
surfaces)
Diamètre du
filtre
40,5 mm
Zoom 4,0× zoom numérique (photos), zoom numérique
3,6×(vidéos) ; environ 5,9× zoom de redimensionnement
automatique (VGA)
Mode mise au point AF multi et AF spot basé sur Contraste AF ; MF ; snap ; 8
(verrouillage de mise au point et assistance AF)
Vitesse
d’obturation
Photos 1/3200–180s (les limites inférieures et supérieures varient en
fonction du mode prise de vue et flash)
Vidéos 1/30–1/2000s
Contrôle
exposition
Mesure Mesure TTL-CCD en modes multi (256 segments), central
pondéré, et spot avec verrouillage de l’exposition automatique
Mode Programme AE, priorité à l’ouverture AE, exposition manuelle,
priorité à l’obturation AE, fonction de décalage de la cible
Correction de
l’exposition
Manuelle (+4,0 à -4,0EV par incrément de 1/3EV ou 1/2EV),
cadrage automatique (-2EV à +2EV par incrément de 1/3EV
ou 1/2EV)
Sensibilité ISO
(sensibilité sortie standard)
Auto, Auto-Hi, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200
Balance des blancs Auto, Multi-P AUTO, En extérieur, Nuageux, Lampe
incandescente, Lampe fluorescente, Réglage manuel, Détail ;
cadrage auto balance des blancs
Flash Portée
(flash intégré)
Environ 20cm–3,0m (ISO auto)
Mode prise de vue Auto, changement de programme, priorité à l’ouverture,
priorité à l’obturation, manuel, scène (vidéo, portrait, sports,
paysage, nuit, correction biais), « Mes Réglages »
Mode
continu
Nombre de
photos prises
à l’aide de
l’option Continu
(Taille d’image :
RAW)
Réduction du bruit désactivée ou activée (faible) : 4 photos,
Réduction du bruit activée (forte) : 3 photos
Nombre de
photos prises à
l’aide de l’option
Cont.M + (un
ensemble)
Rap (1280 × 856) : 30 photos (24 images/s)
Len (4288 × 2848) : 15 photos (3 images/s)
Compression*1
FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2
Taille de
l’image
(pixels)
Photos 4288×2416, 3776×2832, 4288×2848, 2848×2848,
3456×1944, 3072×2304, 3456×2304, 2304×2304,
2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480
Vidéos 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240
Taille fichier
(approximative)
RAW 16:9 NORMAL : 17 800Ko/image, FINE : 19 515Ko/image,
VGA : 15 587Ko/image
4:3 NORMAL : 18 387Ko/image, FINE : 20 157Ko/image,
VGA : 16 124Ko/image
3:2 NORMAL : 20 946Ko/image, FINE : 22 967Ko/image,
VGA : 18 337Ko/image
1:1 NORMAL : 13 991Ko/image, FINE : 15 333Ko/image,
VGA : 12 273Ko/image
Taille fichier
(approximative)
L 16:9 NORMAL : 2 222Ko/image, FINE : 3 816Ko/image
4:3 NORMAL : 2 315Ko/image, FINE : 3 960Ko/image
3:2 NORMAL : 2 615Ko/image, FINE : 4 493Ko/image
1:1 NORMAL : 1 761Ko/image, FINE : 3 009Ko/image
M 16:9 NORMAL : 1 475Ko/image, FINE : 2 509Ko/image
4:3 NORMAL : 1 574Ko/image, FINE : 2 662Ko/image
3:2 NORMAL : 1 744Ko/image, FINE : 2 968Ko/image
1:1 NORMAL : 1 186Ko/image, FINE : 2 003Ko/image
5M 4:3 FINE : 2 287Ko/image
3M 4:3 FINE : 1 474Ko/image
1M 4:3 FINE : 812Ko/image
VGA 4:3 FINE : 197Ko/image
Longévité batterie
(basée sur norme CIPA)
DB-90 : environ 320 prises de vue*3
Dimensions (L×H×P) Unité appareil photo uniquement :
68,7mm×57,9mm×71,3mm (fût d’objectif inclus, connecteur
exclus)
Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo :
113,9mm×70,2mm×77,1mm (fût d’objectif inclus)
Poids (approximatif) Unité appareil photo uniquement : 263 g (capuchon de
l’objectif et capuchon du connecteur non inclus)
Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo : 423 g
(batterie, carte mémoire, courroie d’encolure, capuchon du
connecteur et capuchon de l’objectif non inclus)
Température fonctionnement 0°C à 40°C
Humidité fonctionnement 85 % ou moins
Température stockage –20°C à 60°C
*1 Les options disponibles varient selon la taille d’image.
*2 Un fichier JPEG est également enregistré (le fichier JPEG peut être d’une qualité FINE
ou NORMAL avec les mêmes dimensions que le fichier RAW ou VGA pour une taille de
640×480 pixels). Les fichiers RAW utilisent le format standard DNG promu par Adobe
Systems, Inc.
*3 Pour référence uniquement ; le nombre réel de prises de vue varie énormément selon
l’utilisation de l’appareil. Nous vous recommandons d’emporter des batteries de rechange
lors d’une utilisation pendant une période prolongée.
Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire
Les valeurs suivantes sont données à titre de référence de la capacité de stockage
de la mémoire interne et de cartes mémoire de différentes tailles, en fonction de la
qualité d’image et de la taille d’image, lors de l’utilisation de la qualité d’image FINE.
Photos
Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go
RAW*
FINE
4288×2416 4 49 100 197 404 810 1625
3776×2832 4 47 97 191 391 784 1573
4288×2848 3 42 85 168 343 688 1380
2848×2848 5 63 128 251 513 1029 2065
L
FINE
4288×2416 21 235 476 935 1912 3830 7684
3776×2832 20 227 462 907 1854 3715 7453
4288×2848 18 200 407 799 1633 3272 6565
2848×2848 27 299 608 1195 2442 4893 9815
M
FINE
3456×1944 32 357 724 1419 2902 5814 11662
3072×2304 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014
3456×2304 27 302 614 1206 2466 4941 9913
2304×2304 41 447 903 1774 3627 7267 14578
Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go
5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238
3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063
1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181
VGA/FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581
* Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit de la compression utilisée pour la copie
JPEG.
Vidéos
Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Mémoire
interne
1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go
1280×720
24 images/seconde
21s 3min
49s
7min
46s
15min
58s
31min
10s
62min
26s
125min
15s
640×480
24 images/seconde
1min 11min
2s
22min
27s
46min
10s
90min
7s
180min
32s
362min
9s
320×240
24 images/seconde
2min
25s
26min
24s
53min
43s
110min
27s
215min
35s
431min
52s
866min
19s 0
Précautions d’emploi
• La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans le pays d’achat.
• Dans le cas d’une panne ou d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil à l’étranger, le
fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit localement
ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée.
• Ne faites pas tomber l’équipement et évitez-lui les chocs physiques.
• Lors du transport de l’équipement, faites attention de ne pas le cogner dans d’autres
objets. Faites particulièrement attention à protéger l’objectif.
• Des changements brutaux de température peuvent provoquer de la condensation
visible dans l’objectif ou des dysfonctionnements de l’équipement. Cela peut être
évité en plaçant l’équipement dans un sac plastique pour ralentir le changement
de température, puis en le retirant une fois que l’air dans le sac a atteint la même
température que l’environnement.
• Conservez l’équipement sec et évitez de le manipuler avec les mains mouillées.
Le non-respect de cette consigne peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements de
l’équipement ou un choc électrique.
• Gardez le connecteur propre.
Conseil : pour éviter la condensation---------------------------------------------
La condensation se produit généralement lorsque vous vous rendez dans
un endroit avec une brusque différence de température, si l’humidité
est élevée, dans une pièce froide après que le chauffage ait été mis en
marche, ou lorsque l’appareil est exposé à de l’air froid en provenance d’un
climatiseur ou d’un autre dispositif.1
Entretien et stockage de l’équipement
Entretien de l’équipement
• Les photos peuvent être altérées par des empreintes ou d’autres matières
étrangères sur l’objectif. Évitez de toucher l’objectif avec les doigts. Éliminez la
poussière ou les peluches avec un soufflant disponible dans le commerce, ou
nettoyez doucement l’objectif avec un chiffon doux et sec.
• Nettoyez soigneusement l’équipement après l’avoir utilisé à la plage ou après
avoir manipulé des produits cosmétiques. N’exposez pas l’équipement à des
substances volatiles comme du diluant, du benzène ou des pesticides. Le nonrespect de cette consigne peut endommager l’équipement ou sa finition.
• Dans l’éventualité d’un dysfonctionnement, consultez un centre de réparation
Ricoh.
• Cet équipement est un dispositif de haute précision. Ne le démontez pas.
Stockage
Ne stockez pas l’appareil photo dans un endroit sujet à : chaleur ou humidité
extrême ; grands changements de température ou d’humidité ; poussière, saleté
ou sable ; fortes vibrations ; contact prolongé avec des produits chimiques,
notamment des boules de naphtaline ou d’autres produits insecticides, ou
des produits en vinyle ou en caoutchouc ; champs magnétiques puissants (par
exemple à proximité d’un moniteur, d’un transformateur ou d’un aimant).
Garantie et réparation
1. Ce produit bénéficie d’une garantie limitée. Pendant la période de garantie
indiquée sur la carte de garantie fournie avec votre équipement, toute pièce
défectueuse sera réparée gratuitement. Dans le cas d’un dysfonctionnement
de l’équipement, contactez le distributeur qui vous a vendu l’équipement ou
votre centre de réparation Ricoh le plus proche. Veuillez noter que vous ne
serez pas remboursé des frais de transport pour livrer votre équipement au
centre de réparation Ricoh.
2. Cette garantie ne couvre aucun dommage résultant de :
1 non-respect des instructions du mode d’emploi ;
2 réparation, modification ou révision non réalisée par un centre de service
agréé, listé dans le mode d’emploi ;
3 incendie, sinistre, catastrophe naturelle, foudre, tension anormale, etc. ;
4 stockage inapproprié (indiqué dans le « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de
l’appareil photo »), fuite de batterie et autres fluides, moisissure ou tout
autre défaut d’entretien de l’équipement.
5 immersion dans l’eau (inondation), exposition à l’alcool ou à d’autres
boissons, infiltration de sable ou de boue, choc physique, chute ou pression
exercée sur l’équipement et autres causes non naturelles.
3. Après l’expiration de la période de garantie, tous les frais de réparation seront
à votre charge, y compris ceux d’un centre de service agréé.
4. Tous les frais de réparation seront à votre charge, même au cours de la période
de garantie, si la carte de garantie n’est pas jointe ou si le nom du distributeur
ou la date d’achat n’est pas indiqué ou a été modifié sur la carte.
5. Les frais de révision et d’inspection complète, sur demande du client, seront à
sa charge complète que la période de garantie ait expiré ou non.
6. Tout dommage consécutif à une défaillance de l’équipement, comme les frais
de prise de vue ou la perte d’un profit attendu, ne sera pas remboursé que la
période de garantie ait expiré ou non.
7. La garantie est valable uniquement dans le pays où l’équipement a été acheté.
* Les dispositions ci-dessus se réfèrent aux réparations gratuites et ne limitent
vos droits légaux.
* L’objectif des dispositions ci-dessus est également décrit sur la carte de
garantie fournie avec l’équipement.
8. Les pièces essentielles à la réparation de l’équipement (c’est-à-dire les
composants nécessaires au fonctionnement et à la qualité de l’équipement)
seront disponibles pendant une période de cinq années après l’arrêt de la
production de l’équipement.
9. Veuillez noter que si l’équipement est sérieusement endommagé par une
inondation, une immersion, une infiltration de sable ou de boue, des chocs
violents ou une chute, il peut être impossible de le réparer et la restauration de
son état originel peut être impossible.
Remarques------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Avant d’envoyer l’appareil en réparation, vérifiez le boîtier de l’appareil
photo et relisez le mode d’emploi pour garantir un fonctionnement correct.
• Certaines réparations nécessitent un certain temps d’exécution.
• Lors de l’envoi de l’équipement à un centre de réparation, veuillez inclure
une note décrivant la pièce défectueuse et le problème rencontré, aussi
précisément que possible.
• Démontez tous les accessoires non associés au problème avant d’envoyer
l’appareil au centre de réparation.En cas de problème
Bureaux Ricoh
RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V.
(EPMMC)
Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY
(innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438
(außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438
http://www.ricohpmmc.com/
RICOH FRANCE S.A.S. (PMMC FRANCE)
(à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70
(en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94
Ricoh Company, Ltd.
Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo
104-8222, Japan
2009 Décembre
FR F-FR
Imprimé en Chine
*L450 3972A*
GR LENS
A12 50mm F2.5 MACRO
Instruction Manual
The serial number may be found on the bottom of the lens.
Package Contents
Before using your Ricoh lens, confirm that the package contains the items
listed below.
Camera unit
The serial number may be found on the bottom.
Lens cap
Comes attached to the camera unit.
? Instructionmanual
(thismanual)
? Warranty
Connector cap
Comes attached to the camera unit.
Soft case
Introduction
To use this lens, you need to attach it to a compatible camera body.
Refer to the Camera Body User Guide for details about how to operate shooting and
playback functions and change settings and to read important precautions for use. This
instruction manual will refer to this lens as the “camera unit” and will explain functions
and operating procedures that are available only when this camera unit is used with a
compatible camera body. See also the GXR Camera Body User Guide.
To make the best use of this product’s functions, read this manual thoroughly before
use. Please keep this manual handy for ease of reference.
Ricoh Co., Ltd.
Safety precautions Read all safety precautions thoroughly to ensure safe use.
Test shots Take test shots to ensure that the camera is working properly
before taking photos on important occasions.
Copyright Reproduction or alteration of copyrighted documents, magazines,
and other materials, other than for personal, home, or other
similarly limited purposes, without the consent of the copyright
holder, is prohibited.
Exemption from liability Ricoh Co., Ltd. assumes no liability for failure to record or display
images as a result of product malfunction.
Warranty The warranty supplied with this product is only valid within the
country of purchase. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility
for servicing the product in other countries or bearing any
expense thereby incurred.
Radio interference Operating this product in the vicinity of other electronic
equipment may adversely affect both the camera and the other
device. Interference is particularly likely if the camera is used
in close proximity to a radio or television. This can be resolved
by moving the camera as far as possible from the other device,
reorienting the radio or television antenna, or plugging the radio
or television into a different outlet.
© 2009 RICOH CO., LTD. All rights reserved. This publication may not be reproduced in whole or in part without
Ricoh’s express written permission. Ricoh reserves the right to change the contents of this document at any time
without prior notice.
Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information in this document. Should you nevertheless
notice any errors or omissions, we would be grateful if you would notify us at the address listed on the back cover
of this booklet.
Safety Precautions
Warning Symbols
Various symbols are used throughout this instruction manual and on the
product to prevent physical harm to you or other people and damage to
property. The symbols and their meanings are explained below.
Danger
This symbol indicates matters that may lead to imminent risk of
death or serious injury if ignored or incorrectly handled.
Warning
This symbol indicates matters that may lead to death or serious
injury if ignored or incorrectly handled.
Caution
This symbol indicates matters that may lead to injury or physical
damage if ignored or incorrectly handled.
Sample Warnings
The symbol alerts you to actions that must be performed.
The symbol alerts you to prohibited actions.
The symbol may be combined with other symbols to indicate that a specific action
is prohibited.
Examples
= Do not touch = Do not disassemble
Observe the following precautions to ensure safe use of this unit.
Danger
Do not attempt to disassemble, repair or alter the equipment yourself. The highvoltage circuitry in the equipment poses significant electrical hazard.
Warning
Keep the equipment out of the reach of children.
Do not touch the internal components of the equipment if they become exposed as
a result of being dropped or damaged. The high-voltage circuitry in the equipment
could lead to an electric shock. Remove the battery as soon as possible, being careful
to avoid electric shocks or burns. Take the equipment to your nearest dealer or service
center if it is damaged.
Do not use the equipment in wet areas as this could result in fire or electric shock.
Do not use the equipment near flammable gases, gasoline, benzene, thinner or
similar substances to avoid the risk of explosion, fire or burns.
• Do not use the equipment in locations where usage is restricted or prohibited as
this may lead to disasters or accidents.
Caution
Do not allow the equipment to get wet. In addition, do not operate it with wet hands.
Both pose the risk of electric shock.
Safety Precautions
for Accessories
When using optional products, carefully read the instructions
provided with the product before using that product.10
Package Contents................................................................................................................. 2
Introduction............................................................................................................................ 3
Safety Precautions................................................................................................................ 6
Parts of the Lens .................................................................................................12
Shooting...............................................................................................................13
Mode P: Program Shift......................................................................................................13
Mode M: Manual Exposure..............................................................................................15
Settings ................................................................................................................16
[Picture Quality/Size] Setting (Shooting Menu) ......................................................16
Photographs...............................................................................................................17
Movies...........................................................................................................................18
[ISO Setting] Setting (Shooting Menu).......................................................................19
[Reg. My Settings] (Key Custom Options)..................................................................20
Table of Contents11
[Digital Zoom Image] Setting (Setup).........................................................................20
Focus Ring Settings (Setup)............................................................................................21
Specifications ......................................................................................................22
Internal Memory/Memory Card Capacity..................................................................28
Precautions for Use ............................................................................................................30
Equipment Care and Storage.........................................................................................31
Warranty and Servicing....................................................................................................321
Parts of the Lens
1 2
4
3
1 Connector
2 Focus ring
3 Lens
4 Built-in hood1
Shooting
Mode P: Program Shift
The following shows the approximate ranges available for shutter speed
and aperture combinations. The actual values may vary depending on EV
(exposure value).
In these examples, the flash mode is set to [Flash Off], and the ISO setting is
set to [ISO200].1
Ev5
Ev6
Ev7
Ev4
Ev3
Ev2
Ev1
Ev0
Ev-1
Ev-2
Ev-3
F16
F22
F11
F8.0
F5.6
F4.0
F2.8
F2.0
F1.4
F1.0
2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000
Ev8 Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19 Ev20
F22.0
F2.51
Mode M: Manual Exposure
If [Auto] or [Auto-Hi] is selected for ISO Setting, ISO will be fixed at 200
while the camera is in manual exposure mode. 1
Settings
[Picture Quality/Size] Setting (Shooting Menu)
The following picture quality, image size and aspect ratio options are
available for the [Picture Quality/Size] setting in the shooting menu.
A photograph‘s file size will depend on the combination of picture quality
and image size used. When recording movies, you can select the movie size.1
Photographs
Item Aspect ratio Compression Image size (pixels)
RAW 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4288×2416
4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
3776×2832
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4288×2848
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
2848×2848
L (Large) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 4288×2416
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3776×2832
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 4288×2848
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2848×2848
M (Middle) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 3456×1944
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3072×2304
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 3456×2304
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2304×23041
Item Aspect ratio Compression Image size (pixels)
5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944
3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536
1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960
VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480
*1 When [RAW] is selected, this is the setting used for the JPEG copy.
*2 Depending on the area photographed, black bands may appear on the top and bottom
of the picture display.
*3 Depending on the area photographed, black bands may appear at the right and left sides
of the picture display.
Movies
Item Movie size
HD1280 1280×720
VGA640 640×480
QVGA320 320×2401
[ISO Setting] Setting (Shooting Menu)
• When [Auto] is selected and the flash is used, the sensitivity used will
gain up to ISO800 equivalent.
• When [Auto] is selected and the flash is not used, the range of the
sensitivity used will be as follows.
Picture size (pixels) Default Minimum Maximum
RAW 200 200 400
L 200 200 400
M 200 200 400
5M 200 200 400
3M 200 200 400
1M 200 200 400
VGA 200 200 4000
[Reg. My Settings] (Key Custom Options)
In [Reg. My Settings], you can also set [Focus Ring Settings] options in
the setup tab. For other options available, refer to the “Camera Body User
Guide”.
[Digital Zoom Image] Setting (Setup)
The size of the recorded image varies depending on the auto resize zoom,
as follows.
Zoom ratio Image size (pixels) Zoom ratio Image size (pixels)
Approx. 1.0× L Approx. 1.8× 3M
Approx. 1.2× M Approx. 3.0× 1M
Approx. 1.5× 5M Approx. 5.9× VGA1
Focus Ring Settings (Setup)
In [Focus Ring Settings], you can set either a mode that enables functions
for both autofocus and manual focus or a mode that enables functions for
manual focus only.
When [AF + MF] is selected, after the shutter button is pressed down
halfway to set the focus, the focus can be fine tuned by turning the focus
ring.
Item
AF + MF MF Only
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
If the shutter button is re-pressed after fine tuning, autofocus will activate
and fine adjustment will be cancelled.
Specifications
Specifications are given for the camera unit mounted on a GXR body.
Effective pixels Approximately 12.3 million
Image sensor 23.6 mm × 15.7 mm CMOS (total pixels: approx. 12.9 million)
Lens Focal length 33mm (35-mm format equivalent: 50mm)
Aperture
(f-number)
f/2.5– f/22
(ND filter used for apertures of f/22 in auto shooting mode)
Focus range
(from lens)
Approx. 30cm–8
Approx. 7cm (0.5× optical zoom) in macro mode
Construction 9 elements in 8 groups (1 aspherical lens elements with 2
surfaces)
Filter diameter 40.5 mm
Zoom 4.0× digital zoom (photographs), 3.6 × digital zoom (movies);
approx. 5.9× auto resize zoom (VGA)
Focus mode Contrast AF-based multi and spot AF; MF; Snap; 8 (focus lock
and AF-assist)
Shutter
speed
Photographs 1/3200–180s (upper and lower limits vary according to
shooting and flash mode)
Movies 1/30–1/2000s
Exposure
control
Metering TTL-CCD metering in multi (256-segment), center-weighted,
and spot modes with autoexposure lock
Mode Program AE, aperture priority AE, manual exposure, shutter
priority AE, move target function
Exposure
compensation
Manual (+4.0 to -4.0EV in increments 1/3EV or 1/2EV), auto
bracketing (-2EV to +2EV in increments 1/3EV or 1/2EV)
ISO sensitivity
(Standard Output Sensitivity)
Auto, Auto-Hi, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200
White balance Auto, Multi-P AUTO, Outdoors, Cloudy, Incandescent Lamp,
Fluorescent Lamp, Manual Settings, Detail; white balance
bracketing
Flash Range
(built-in flash)
Approx. 20cm–3.0m (ISO auto)
Shooting mode Auto, program shift, aperture priority, shutter priority, manual,
scene (movie, portrait, sports, landscape, nightscape, skew
correction), “My Settings”
Continuous
mode
Number of
pictures shot
in Continuous
(Picture Size:
RAW)
Noise Reduction off or on (Weak): 4 pictures,
Noise Reduction on (Strong): 3 pictures
Number of
pictures shot
in M-Cont Plus
(1 set)
HI (1280×856) : 30 pictures (24 Frames/Sec),
LO (4228×2848) : 15 pictures (3 Frames/Sec)
Compression*1
FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2
Image size
(pixels)
Photographs 4288 × 2416, 3776 × 2832, 4288 × 2848, 2848 × 2848,
3456 × 1944, 3072 × 2304, 3456 × 2304, 2304 × 2304,
2592 × 1944, 2048 × 1536, 1280 × 960, 640 × 480
Movies 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240
File size
(approx.)
RAW 16:9 NORMAL: 17,800KB/frame, FINE: 19,515KB/frame,
VGA: 15,587 KB/frame
4:3 NORMAL: 18,387KB/frame, FINE: 20,157KB/frame,
VGA: 16,124 KB/frame
3:2 NORMAL: 20,946KB/frame, FINE: 22,967KB/frame,
VGA: 18,337KB/frame
1:1 NORMAL: 13,991KB/frame, FINE: 15,333KB/frame,
VGA: 12,273KB/frame
File size
(approx.)
L 16:9 NORMAL: 2,222KB/frame, FINE: 3,816KB/frame
4:3 NORMAL: 2,315KB/frame, FINE: 3,960KB/frame
3:2 NORMAL: 2,615KB/frame, FINE: 4,493KB/frame
1:1 NORMAL: 1,761KB/frame, FINE: 3,009KB/frame
M 16:9 NORMAL: 1,475KB/frame, FINE: 2,509KB/frame
4:3 NORMAL: 1,574KB/frame, FINE: 2,662KB/frame
3:2 NORMAL: 1,744KB/frame, FINE: 2,968KB/frame
1:1 NORMAL: 1,186KB/frame, FINE: 2,003KB/frame
5M 4:3 FINE: 2,287KB/frame
3M 4:3 FINE: 1,474KB/frame
1M 4:3 FINE: 812KB/frame
VGA 4:3 FINE: 197KB/frame
Battery life
(based on CIPA standard)
DB-90: approx. 320shots *3
Dimensions (W×H×D) Camera unit only:
68.7mm×57.9mm×71.3mm (including the lens barrel;
excluding the connector)
When mounted on the camera body:
113.9mm×70.2mm×77.1mm (including the lens barrel)
Weight (approx.) Camera unit only: 263g (not including the lens cap or
connector cap)
When mounted on the camera body: 423g (not including the
battery, memory card, neck strap, connector cap, or lens cap)
Operating temperature 0°C to 40°C
Operating humidity 85% or less
Storage temperature –20°C to 60°C
*1 The options available vary with image size.
*2 A JPEG file is also recorded (the JPEG file may be a FINE- or NORMAL-quality file with
the dimensions as the RAW file or a VGA file 640×480 pixels in size). RAW files use the
standard DNG format promoted by Adobe Systems, Inc.
*3 For reference only; actual number of shots varies greatly according to how camera is
used. We recommend that you carry spare batteries when in use for extended periods.
Internal Memory/Memory Card Capacity
The following values are given as a reference of the storage capacity of the
internal memory and memory cards of various sizes, by picture quality and
image size, when using the FINE picture quality.
Photographs
Compression Image size
(pixels)
Internal
memory
1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
RAW*
FINE
4288×2416 4 49 100 197 404 810 1625
3776×2832 4 47 97 191 391 784 1573
4288×2848 3 42 85 168 343 688 1380
2848×2848 5 63 128 251 513 1029 2065
L
FINE
4288×2416 21 235 476 935 1912 3830 7684
3776×2832 20 227 462 907 1854 3715 7453
4288×2848 18 200 407 799 1633 3272 6565
2848×2848 27 299 608 1195 2442 4893 9815
Compression Image size
(pixels)
Internal
memory
1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
M
FINE
3456×1944 32 357 724 1419 2902 5814 11662
3072×2304 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014
3456×2304 27 302 614 1206 2466 4941 9913
2304×2304 41 447 903 1774 3627 7267 14578
5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238
3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063
1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181
VGA/FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581
* When [RAW] is selected, this is the compression used for the JPEG copy.
Movies
Image size (pixels) Internal memory 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
1280×720
24 frames/second
21sec. 3min.
49sec.
7min.
46sec.
15min.
58sec.
31min.
10sec.
62min.
26sec.
125min.
15sec.
640×480
24 frames/second
1min. 11min.
2sec.
22min.
27sec.
46min.
10sec.
90min.
7sec.
180min.
32sec.
362min.
9sec.
320×240
24 frames/second
2min.
25sec.
26min.
24sec.
53min.
43sec.
110min.
27sec.
215min.
35sec.
431min.
52sec.
866min.
19sec. 0
Precautions for Use
• The warranty supplied with this product is only valid within the country of purchase.
• Should the product fail or malfunction while out of the country, the manufacturer
assumes no responsibility for servicing the product locally or bearing any
expenditure incurred thereby.
• Do not drop the equipment or subject it to physical shocks.
• When carrying the equipment, be careful that it does not strike other objects.
Particular care is required to protect the lens.
• Abrupt changes in temperature may cause condensation, resulting in visible
condensation inside the lens or malfunction of the equipment. This can be avoided
by placing the equipment in a plastic bag to slow the temperature change, and
removing it only after the air in the bag has reached the same temperature its
surroundings.
• Keep the equipment dry and avoid handling it with wet hands. Failure to observe
these precautions could result in malfunction of the equipment or electric shock.
• Keep the connector clean.
Tip: Avoiding Condensation --------------------------------------------------------
Condensation is particularly likely to occur if you move to an area with a
sharply different temperature, if humidity is high, in a cold room after the
heater has come on, or where the camera is exposed to cold air from an air
conditioner or other device.1
Equipment Care and Storage
Caring for the Equipment
• Photographs can be affected by fingerprints and other foreign matter on the
lens. Avoid touching the lens with your fingers. Remove dust or lint with a
blower from a camera supply store, or gently clean the lens with a soft, dry
cloth.
• Clean the equipment thoroughly after using it at the beach or handling
cosmetics. Do not expose the equipment to volatile substances such as
thinner, benzene, or pesticides. Failure to observe this precaution could result
in damage to the equipment or its finish.
• In the unlikely event of malfunction, visit a Ricoh Repair Center.
• This equipment is a high precision device. Do not disassemble.
Storage
Do not store the camera where it will be exposed to: extreme heat or humidity;
large changes in temperature or humidity; dust, dirt, or sand; severe vibration;
prolonged contact with chemicals, including mothballs and other insect
repellent, or with vinyl or rubber products; strong magnetic fields (for example,
in the vicinity of a monitor, transformer, or magnet).
Warranty and Servicing
1. This product is backed by a limited warranty. During the warranty period
mentioned in the Warranty supplied with your equipment, any defective
parts will be repaired free of charge. In the event of equipment malfunction,
contact the dealer from which you purchased the equipment or your nearest
Ricoh Repair Center. Please note that you will not be reimbursed for the cost of
bringing the equipment to the Ricoh Repair Center.
2. This warranty does not cover any damage resulting from:
1 failure to follow the instructions in the instruction manual;
2 repair, modification or overhaul not conducted by an authorized service
center listed in the instruction manual;
3 fire, natural disaster, act of God, lightning, abnormal voltage, etc.;
4 improper storage (noted in the “Camera Body User Guide”), leaking
of battery and other fluids, mold, or otherwise insufficient care of the
equipment.
5 submergence in water (flooding), exposure to alcohol or other beverages,
infiltration of sand or mud, physical shock, dropping of the equipment, or
pressure on the equipment, and other unnatural causes.
3. After the warranty period has passed, you will be liable for all repair fees,
including those incurred at an authorized service center.
4. You will be liable for all repair fees, even within the warranty period, if the
warranty card is not attached or if the distributor’s name or the purchase date
have been changed or are not indicated on the card.
5. Expenses for overhaul and thorough inspection by special request of the
customer will be charged to the customer, whether or not they are incurred
during the warranty period.
6. Any consequential damages arising from failure of the equipment, such as
expenses incurred in taking pictures or loss of expected profit, will not be
reimbursed whether they occur during the warranty period or not.
7. The warranty is only valid in the country in which the equipment was
purchased.
* The above provisions refer to repairs offered free of charge, and do not limit
your legal rights.
* The intention of the above provisions is also described in the warranty card
provided with this equipment.
8. Parts essential to the servicing of the equipment (that is, components required
to maintain the functions and quality of the equipment) will be available for a
period of five years after the equipment is discontinued.
9. Please note that if the equipment is seriously damaged by flooding,
submergence, infiltration of sand or mud, violent shocks or dropping, it may
not be repairable, and restoration to its original condition may be impossible.
Notes-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Before sending the camera in for repair, check the camera body and read
the instruction manual again to ensure proper operation.
• Some repairs require a significant amount of time to complete.
• When sending the equipment to a service center, please include a note
which describes the defective part and the problem as precisely as
possible.
• Remove all accessories not related to the problem before sending the
camera to the service center.If You Encounter a Problem with This Product
Ricoh offices
RICOH COMPANY, LTD.
3-2-3, Shin-Yokohama Kouhoku-ku, Yokohama City, Kanagawa 222-8530,
Japan
http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc
RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006, U.S.A.
1–800–22RICOH
http://www.ricoh-usa.com/
RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC)
Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY
(innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438
(außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438
http://www.ricohpmmc.com/
RICOH UK LTD. (PMMC UK)
(from within the UK) 02073 656 580
(from outside of the UK) +44 2073 656 580
RICOH FRANCE S.A.S. (PMMC FRANCE)
(à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70
(en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94
RICOH ESPANA, S.A. (PMMC SPAIN)
(desde España) 91 406 9148
(desde fuera de España) +34 91 406 9148
RICOH ITALIA S.p.A. (PMMC ITALY)
(dall’Italia) 02 696 33 451
(dall’estero) +39 02 696 33 451*L450 2971A*
Ricoh offices
RICOH ASIA PACIFIC OPERATIONS
LIMITED
21/F, One Kowloon, 1 Wang Yuen Street, Kowloon Bay, Hong Kong
Ricoh Company, Ltd.
Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo
104-8222, Japan
2009 December
EN USA GB GB AE AE
Printed in China
OBIETTIVO GR
A12 50mm F2.5 MACRO
Manuale d’istruzioni
Il numero di serie è riportato sul lato inferiore dell’obiettivo.
Contenuto della confezione
Prima di usare l’obiettivo Ricoh, verificare che la confezione contenga i
seguenti articoli.
Unità fotocamera
Il numero di serie è riportato sul lato inferiore.
Tappo copriobiettivo
Attaccato all’unità fotocamera.
?Manuale d’istruzioni
(questomanuale)
? Garanzia
Copriconnettore
Attaccato all’unità fotocamera.
Custodia morbida
Introduzione
Questo obiettivo deve essere collegato a una fotocamera compatibile.
Consultare il manuale d’istruzioni della fotocamera per i dettagli su come utilizzare le
funzioni di ripresa e riproduzione delle immagini, su come modificare le impostazioni
e sulle importanti precauzioni d’uso. In questo manuale d’istruzioni, l’obiettivo è detto
“unità fotocamera”. Vengono spiegate le funzioni e le procedure operative consentite
solo se si utilizza questa unità fotocamera con un corpo macchina compatibile. Vedere
anche il manuale d’istruzioni della fotocamera GXR.
Per sfruttare al meglio le funzionalità di questo prodotto, leggere attentamente
questo manuale prima dell’uso. Tenerlo sempre a portata di mano per consultarlo, se
necessario.
Ricoh Co., Ltd.
Precauzioni di sicurezza Leggere attentamente le precauzioni di sicurezza per garantire
un uso sicuro.
Scatti di prova Eseguire degli scatti di prova per assicurare che la fotocamera
funzioni correttamente, prima di fare foto durante occasioni
importanti.
Copyright È vietata la riproduzione o modifica di documenti, riviste e altro
materiale soggetto a copyright, per propositi diversi dall’uso
personale, casalingo o di natura simile limitata, senza previo
consenso del titolare del copyright.
Esonero da responsabilità Ricoh Co., Ltd. declina ogni responsabilità per la mancata
registrazione o visualizzazione di immagini da ascrivere a un
guasto del prodotto.
Garanzia La garanzia fornita è valida solo nel paese in cui è stato acquistato
questo prodotto. Il produttore declina ogni responsabilità per
l’assistenza sul prodotto in altri paesi o per le spese sostenute al
riguardo.
Interferenze radio L’utilizzo del prodotto nelle vicinanze di altri dispositivi elettronici
può influire negativamente sul funzionamento della fotocamera
e di tali apparecchiature. Le interferenze sono probabili in
particolar modo se la fotocamera viene usata vicino a una radio o
televisione. Per risolvere il problema spostare la fotocamera il più
lontano possibile dalle apparecchiature, orientare nuovamente
l’antenna della radio o televisione o collegare la radio o televisione
a una presa elettrica differente.
© 2009 RICOH CO., LTD. Tutti i diritti riservati. È vietata la riproduzione di questo manuale in parte o per intero,
senza previo consenso scritto da parte di Ricoh. Ricoh si riserva il diritto di cambiare i contenuti del presente in
qualsiasi momento e senza preavviso.
Ricoh ha fatto quanto possibile per assicurare l’accuratezza delle informazioni contenute in questo manuale. Se,
tuttavia, si dovessero notare errori od omissioni, si prega di comunicarceli all’indirizzo indicato sul retrocopertina.
Precauzioni di sicurezza
Simboli di allarme
In tutto il presente manuale di istruzione e sul prodotto sono utilizzati
vari simboli al fine di prevenire danni fisici a voi o a terzi e alla proprietà. I
simboli e il loro significato sono illustrati qui sotto.
Pericolo
Questo simbolo indica un possibile pericolo mortale
imminente o una grave lesione se ignorato o affrontato in
modo errato.
Allarme
Questo simbolo indica che se le istruzioni vengono ignorate o
eseguite in modo non corretto, ciò può provocare la morte o
lesioni gravi.
Attenzione
Questo simbolo indica che se le istruzioni vengono ignorate
o eseguite in modo non corretto, ciò può provocare lesioni o
danni fisici.
Esempi di allarme
Il simbolo indica azioni che occorre eseguire.
Il simbolo indica azioni proibite.
Il simbolo può comparire assieme ad altri simboli per indicare che una
determinata azione è vietata.
Esempi
= Non toccare = Non smontare
Osservare le seguenti norme per un utilizzo sicuro dell’apparecchio.
Pericolo
Non cercare di smontare, riparare o alterare l’apparecchio da soli. La circuiteria ad alta
tensione dell’apparecchio rappresenta un grave pericolo di natura elettrica.
Allarme
Tenere questo apparecchio fuori dalla portata dei bambini.
Non toccare i componenti interni dell’apparecchio se fuoriescono in seguito a cadute
o danneggiamenti. La circuiteria ad alta tensione dell’apparecchio può provocare una
scossa elettrica. Estrarre la batteria il prima possibile, stando attenti ad evitare scosse
elettriche o ustioni. Portare l’apparecchio al rivenditore o centro assistenza più vicino,
se è difettoso.
Non utilizzare l’apparecchio in luoghi dove possa venire a contatto con acqua, perché
ciò potrebbe provocare incendi o scosse elettriche.
Non utilizzare l’apparecchio vicino a gas infiammabili, benzine, diluenti o sostanze
simili per evitare esplosioni, incendi o ustioni.
• Non utilizzare l’apparecchio in luoghi in cui il suo utilizzo sia limitato o proibito
perché può provocare disastri o incidenti.
Attenzione
Non lasciare che l’apparecchio si bagni. Inoltre, non utilizzarlo con le mani bagnate. In
entrambi i casi si corre il rischio di scosse elettriche.
Avvertenze di
sicurezza per gli
accessori
Prima di utilizzare i prodotti opzionali, leggere attentamente le
istruzioni fornite insieme ad essi.10
Contenuto della confezione ............................................................................................. 2
Introduzione........................................................................................................................... 3
Precauzioni di sicurezza ..................................................................................................... 6
Componenti dell’obiettivo................................................................................12
Ripresa..................................................................................................................13
Modo P: modifica programma.......................................................................................13
Modo M: esposizione manuale......................................................................................15
Impostazioni........................................................................................................16
Impostazione [Qualità/Dimensione immagine] (Menu di ripresa)...................16
Fotografie.....................................................................................................................17
Filmati............................................................................................................................18
Impostazione [Sensibilità ISO] (Menu di ripresa)....................................................19
[Reg. Impost] (Opzioni personalizzate chiave).........................................................20
Sommario11
Impostazione [Immagine Zoom Digitale] (Impostazioni)....................................20
Imp. ghiera di messa a fuoco (Impostazioni)............................................................21
Caratteristiche tecniche ....................................................................................22
Capacità nella memoria interna/scheda di memoria ............................................28
Precauzioni per l’uso .........................................................................................................30
Cura e conservazione dell’apparecchio......................................................................31
Servizio postvendita..........................................................................................................321
Componenti dell’obiettivo
1 2
4
3
1 Connettore
2 Ghiera di messa a fuoco
3 Obiettivo
4 Paraluce incorporato1
Ripresa
Modo P: modifica programma
Di seguito vengono mostrati gli intervalli approssimativi per le
combinazioni di tempo di posa e aperture. Il valore effettivo potrebbe
variare a seconda dell’EV (valore di esposizione).
In questi esempi, la modalità flash è impostata su [Flash No] e la sensibilità
ISO su [ISO200].1
Ev5
Ev6
Ev7
Ev4
Ev3
Ev2
Ev1
Ev0
Ev-1
Ev-2
Ev-3
F16
F22
F11
F8.0
F5.6
F4.0
F2.8
F2.0
F1.4
F1.0
2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000
Ev8 Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19 Ev20
F22.0
F2.51
Modo M: esposizione manuale
Se si seleziona [Auto] o [Alta-Auto] per Sensibilità ISO, mentre la fotocamera
è in modo di esposizione manuale l’ISO sarà fissata su 200.1
Impostazioni
Impostazione [Qualità/Dimensione immagine] (Menu di ripresa)
Per l’impostazione [Qualità/Dimensione immagine] del Menu di ripresa
sono disponibili le seguenti opzioni per qualità, dimensioni e formato delle
immagini.
La dimensione di un file fotografico dipende dai valori utilizzati per qualità
e dimensione delle immagini. Quando si registrano i filmati, è possibile
selezionarne la dimensione.1
Fotografie
Voce Formato Compressione Dimensione
immagine (pixel)
RAW 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4288×2416
4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
3776×2832
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4288×2848
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
2848×2848
L (Large) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 4288×2416
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3776×2832
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 4288×2848
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2848×2848
M (Middle) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 3456×1944
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3072×2304
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 3456×2304
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2304×23041
Voce Formato Compressione Dimensione
immagine (pixel)
5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944
3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536
1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960
VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480
*1 Se si seleziona [RAW], questa sarà l’impostazione utilizzata per la copia in formato JPEG.
*2 A seconda dell’area fotografata, potrebbero comparire delle fasce nere nella parte
superiore e inferiore del display.
*3 A seconda dell’area fotografata, potrebbero comparire delle fasce nere nella parte destra
e sinistra del display.
Filmati
Voce Dimensione filmato
HD1280 1280×720
VGA640 640×480
QVGA320 320×2401
Impostazione [Sensibilità ISO] (Menu di ripresa)
• Se si seleziona [Auto] è si utilizza il flash, la sensibilità aumenta fino a un
valore equivalente a ISO800.
• Se si seleziona [Auto] è non si utilizza il flash, la gamma di sensibilità sarà
la seguente.
Dimensione
immagine (pixel)
Predefinito Minimo Massimo
RAW 200 200 400
L 200 200 400
M 200 200 400
5M 200 200 400
3M 200 200 400
1M 200 200 400
VGA 200 200 4000
[Reg. Impost] (Opzioni personalizzate chiave)
In [Reg. Impost] è anche possibile impostare l’opzione [Imp. ghiera di
messa a fuoco] della scheda Impostazioni. Per le altre opzioni disponibili,
consultare il “Manuale d’istruzioni della fotocamera”.
Impostazione [Immagine Zoom Digitale] (Impostazioni)
La dimensione dell’immagine registrata dipende dallo zoom con
ridimensionamento automatico, come descritto di seguito.
Rapporto di zoom
Dimensione
immagine (pixel)
Rapporto di zoom
Dimensione
immagine (pixel)
Circa 1,0× L Circa 1,8× 1M
Circa 1,2× M Circa 3,0× 3M
Circa 1,5× 5M Circa 5,9× VGA1
Imp. ghiera di messa a fuoco (Impostazioni)
In [Imp. ghiera di messa a fuoco] è possibile impostare una modalità che
attiva le funzioni per messa a fuoco sia automatica che manuale oppure
una modalità che attiva le funzioni solo per messa a fuoco manuale.
Se si seleziona [AF + MF], dopo aver premuto il tasto di scatto a metà corsa
per impostare la messa a fuoco, è possibile regolarla ulteriormente con la
ghiera.
Voce
AF + MF Solo MF
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Se si preme di nuovo il tasto di messa a fuoco dopo l’ulteriore regolazione,
verrà attivato l’autofocus e la regolazione fine sarà annullata.
Caratteristiche tecniche
Le caratteristiche tecniche si riferiscono a un’unità fotocamera collegata a
una fotocamera GXR.
Pixel effettivi Circa 12,3 milioni
Sensore immagini 23,6 mm×15,7 mm CMOS (pixel totali: circa 12,9 milioni)
Obiettivo Lunghezza
focale
33mm (equivalente al formato da 35 mm: 50mm)
Apertura
(cifra f)
f/2.5– f/22
(filtro ND usato per le aperture di f/22 in modo di ripresa auto)
Raggio
del fuoco
(dall’obiettivo)
Circa 30cm–8
Circa 7cm (zoom ottico 0,5×) in modo Macro
Fabbricazione 9 elementi in 8 gruppi (1 lente asferica con 2 superfici)
Diametro filtro 40,5 mm
Zoom Zoom digitale 4.0× (foto), zoom digitale 3.6× (video); funzione
di riduzione automatica zoom circa 5,9× (VGA)
Modo di messa a fuoco AF multi e spot basato su Contrasto AF; MF; Snap; 8 (blocco
della messa a fuoco e assistenza AF)
Tempo di
posa
Fotografie 1/3200–180s (i limiti superiore e inferiore variano a seconda
dei modi di ripresa e dei modi flash)
Filmati 1/30–1/2000s
Controllo
dell’esposizione
Misurazione Modi fotometria TTL-CCD in multi (256 segmenti), media
pesata al centro e spot con blocco AE.
Modo AE programmato, AE con priorità di apertura diaframma,
esposizione manuale, AE con priorità scatto, funzione Sposta
puntat.
Compensazione
esposizione
Manuale (da +4,0 a -4,0EV con incrementi di 1/3EV o 1/2EV),
bracketing automatico (da -2EV a +2EV con incrementi di
1/3EV o 1/2EV)
Sensibilità ISO
(Standard Output Sensitivity -
Sensibilità di uscita standard)
Auto, Alta-Auto, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200
Bil.Bianco Auto, Multi-P AUTO, Esterni, Nuvoloso, Lamp. Incandescente,
Lamp. Fluorescente, Imp. Manuali, Partic.; bracketing del
bilanciamento del bianco
Flash Portata
(flash
incorporato)
Circa 20cm–3,0m (ISO auto)
Modo di ripresa Auto, Modifica programma, Priorità apertura, Priorità scatto,
Manuale, Scena (Filmato, Ritratto, Sport, Paesaggio, Notturna,
Correzione Obliquità), “Impost.”
Modo
Continuo
Numero di
foto scattate in
modo Continuo
(Formato
immagine: RAW)
Riduzione Disturbi disattivata o attivata (Leggera): 4 foto,
Riduzione Disturbi attivata (Intensa): 3 foto
Numero di
foto scattate in
modo M-Cont
+ (1 set)
HI (1280×856): 30 foto (24 Fotogrammi/Sec),
LO (4288×2848): 15 foto (3 Fotogrammi/Sec)
Compressione*1
FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2
Dimensione
immagine
(pixel)
Fotografie 4288×2416, 3776×2832, 4288×2848, 2848×2848,
3456×1944, 3072×2304, 3456×2304, 2304×2304,
2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480
Filmati 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240
Formato file
(circa)
RAW 16:9 NORMAL: 17.800KB/fotogramma, FINE: 19.515KB/fotogramma,
VGA: 15.587KB/fotogramma
4:3 NORMAL: 18.387KB/fotogramma, FINE: 20.157KB/fotogramma,
VGA: 16.124KB/fotogramma
3:2 NORMAL: 20.946KB/fotogramma, FINE: 22.967KB/fotogramma,
VGA: 18.337KB/fotogramma
1:1 NORMAL: 13.991KB/fotogramma, FINE: 15.333KB/fotogramma,
VGA: 12.273KB/fotogramma
Formato file
(circa)
L 16:9 NORMAL: 2.222KB/fotogramma, FINE: 3.816KB/fotogramma
4:3 NORMAL: 2.315KB/fotogramma, FINE: 3.960KB/fotogramma
3:2 NORMAL: 2.615KB/fotogramma, FINE: 4.493KB/fotogramma
1:1 NORMAL: 1.761KB/fotogramma, FINE: 3.009KB/fotogramma
M 16:9 NORMAL: 1.475KB/fotogramma, FINE: 2.509KB/fotogramma
4:3 NORMAL: 1.574KB/fotogramma, FINE: 2.662KB/fotogramma
3:2 NORMAL: 1.744KB/fotogramma, FINE: 2.968KB/fotogramma
1:1 NORMAL: 1.186KB/fotogramma, FINE: 2.003KB/fotogramma
5M 4:3 FINE: 2.287KB/fotogramma
3M 4:3 FINE: 1.474KB/fotogramma
1M 4:3 FINE: 812KB/fotogramma
VGA 4:3 FINE: 197KB/fotogramma
Durata della batteria
(basata sullo standard CIPA)
DB-90: circa 320 scatti *3
Dimensioni (L×A×P) Solo unità fotocamera:
68,7mm×57,9mm×71,3mm (incluso il cilindro dell’obiettivo;
escluso il connettore)
Unità montata sulla fotocamera:
113,9mm×70,2mm×77,1mm (Incluso il cilindro dell’obiettivo)
Peso (appross.) Solo unità fotocamera: 263 g (escluso il tappo copriobiettivo o
il copriconnettore)
Unità montata sulla fotocamera: 423 g (senza batteria, scheda
di memoria, tracolla, copriconnettore o tappo copriobiettivo)
Temperatura operativa 0°C a 40°C
Umidità operativa Massimo 85%
Temperatura di
immagazzinamento
–20°C a 60°C
*1 Le opzioni disponibili variano a seconda delle dimensioni dell’immagine.
*2 Viene anche registrato un file JPEG (di qualità FINE o NORMAL dalle dimensioni del file
RAW o un file VGA da 640×480 pixel). I file RAW usano il formato DNG standard promosso
da Adobe Systems, Inc.
*3 Cifra puramente indicativa. Il numero effettivo di foto varia significativamente a seconda
dell’uso della fotocamera. Si consiglia di avere a portata di mano batterie di riserva
quando si usa la fotocamera per periodi prolungati.
Capacità nella memoria interna/scheda di memoria
I valori riportati di seguito sono indicativi della capacità di memorizzazione
della memoria interna e delle schede di memoria di varie dimensioni, in base
alla qualità e alla dimensione delle immagini, quando si usa la qualità FINE.
Fotografie
Compressione Dimensione
immagine (pixel)
Memoria interna 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
RAW*
FINE
4288×2416 4 49 100 197 404 810 1625
3776×2832 4 47 97 191 391 784 1573
4288×2848 3 42 85 168 343 688 1380
2848×2848 5 63 128 251 513 1029 2065
L
FINE
4288×2416 21 235 476 935 1912 3830 7684
3776×2832 20 227 462 907 1854 3715 7453
4288×2848 18 200 407 799 1633 3272 6565
2848×2848 27 299 608 1195 2442 4893 9815
M
FINE
3456×1944 32 357 724 1419 2902 5814 11662
3072×2304 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014
3456×2304 27 302 614 1206 2466 4941 9913
2304×2304 41 447 903 1774 3627 7267 14578
Compressione Dimensione
immagine (pixel)
Memoria interna 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238
3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063
1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181
VGA/FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581
* Se si seleziona [RAW], questa sarà la compressione utilizzata per la copia in formato JPEG.
Filmati
Dimensione
immagine (pixel)
Memoria interna 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
1280×720
24 fotogrammi/
secondo
21sec. 3min.
49sec.
7min.
46sec.
15min.
58sec.
31min.
10sec.
62min.
26sec.
125min.
15sec.
640×480
24 fotogrammi/
secondo
1min. 11min.
2sec.
22min.
27sec.
46min.
10sec.
90min.
7sec.
180min.
32sec.
362min.
9sec.
320×240
24 fotogrammi/
secondo
2min.
25sec.
26min.
24sec.
53min.
43sec.
110min.
27sec.
215min.
35sec.
431min.
52sec.
866min.
19sec. 0
Precauzioni per l’uso
• La garanzia fornita è valida solo nel paese in cui è stato acquistato questo prodotto.
• In caso di guasto mentre si è all’estero, il produttore declina ogni responsabilità per
l’assistenza sul prodotto in altri paesi o per le spese sostenute al riguardo.
• Non far cadere l’apparecchio o sottoporlo a urti fisici.
• Quando si trasporta l’apparecchio, fare attenzione che non urti altri oggetti. Fare
particolare attenzione a proteggere l’obiettivo.
• Variazioni improvvise di temperatura possono causare condensa, cosa che
determina condensa visibile all’interno dell’obiettivo o guasto dell’apparecchio. Per
evitare questo problema infilare l’apparecchio in una busta di plastica per rallentare
la variazione di temperatura e toglierlo dalla busta solo dopo che l’aria contenuta
nella suddetta ha raggiunto la stessa temperatura dell’ambiente circostante.
• Tenere l’apparecchio asciutto ed evitare di toccarlo con le mani bagnate. La mancata
osservanza di queste precauzioni può dar luogo a guasti dell’apparecchio o scosse
elettriche.
• Tenere pulito il connettore.
Suggerimento: evitare la formazione di condensa----------------------------
La condensa ha particolare probabilità di formarsi se ci si sposta in una zona
dalla temperatura nettamente differente, in caso di umidità elevata, in una
stanza fredda dopo l’accensione del riscaldamento, o quando la fotocamera
è esposta all’aria fredda di un condizionatore o altro apparecchio.1
Cura e conservazione dell’apparecchio
Cura dell’apparecchio
• Le fotografie possono essere influenzate dalla presenta di impronte o altri
corpi estranei presenti sull’obiettivo. Evitare di toccare l’obiettivo con le dita.
Togliere la polvere o la lanugine con un compressore acquistato in un negozio
di articoli fotografici, o pulire l’obiettivo con un panno morbido e asciutto.
• Pulire accuratamente l’apparecchio dopo averlo usato in spiaggia o aver
maneggiato dei cosmetici. Non esporre l’apparecchio a sostanze volatili,
come solventi, benzine o pesticidi. Il mancato rispetto di questa precauzione
potrebbe causare danni all’apparecchio o alle sue finiture.
• Nel caso improbabile di un guasto, recarsi presso un Centro di assistenza
Ricoh.
• Questo è un apparecchio di alta precisione. Non smontarlo.
Conservazione
Non conservare la fotocamera in luoghi esposti a: calore o umidità elevati; variazioni
significative di temperatura o umidità; polvere, sporco o sabbia; vibrazioni elevate;
contatto prolungato con sostanze chimiche, tra cui palline di naftalina e altri
repellenti per insetti, o contenenti prodotti in vinile o gomma; campi magnetici forti
(ad esempio, nelle vicinanze di un monitor, trasformatore o calamita).
Servizio postvendita
1. Questo prodotto è coperto da garanzia limitata. Durante il periodo di garanzia
menzionato nella Garanzia fornita assieme all’apparecchio, i componenti
difettosi saranno sostituiti gratuitamente. In caso di guasto, contattare il
rivenditore presso cui è stato acquistato l’apparecchio o il Centro di assistenza
Ricoh più vicino. Si prega di notare che non si verrà rimborsati per il trasporto
dell’apparecchio al Centro di assistenza Ricoh.
2. Questa garanzia non copre danni da ascrivere a:
1 mancato rispetto delle istruzioni del manuale;
2 riparazioni, modiche o revisioni non condotte da un centro di assistenza
autorizzato indicato nel manuale di istruzioni;
3 incendi, calamità naturali, casi di forza maggiore, fulmini, tensione
anormale, ecc.;
4 conservazione errata (indicato nel “Manuale d’istruzioni della
fotocamera”), perdite della batteria e altri liquidi, muffa o cura insufficiente
dell’apparecchio.
5 immersione nell’acqua (allagamento), esposizione ad alcol o altre bevande,
infiltrazione di sabbia e fango, urti fisici, caduta dell’apparecchio, pressione
esercitata sull’apparecchio e altre cause non naturali.
3. Una volta scaduta la garanzia il proprietario sarà responsabile dei costi
di riparazione, compresi quelli sostenuti presso un centro di assistenza
autorizzato.
4. Il proprietario sarà responsabile di tutti i costi di riparazione, anche durante il
periodo di validità della garanzia, se il tagliandino della suddetta non è accluso
o se il nome del distributore o la data di acquisto sono stati modificati o non
sono indicati sul tagliandino.
5. Le spese di revisione e ispezione accurata appositamente richieste dal
proprietario saranno sostenute dallo stesso, anche durante il periodo di
validità della garanzia.
6. I danni consequenziali da ascrivere a guasto dell’apparecchio, come le
spese sostenute per l’esecuzione di foto o le perdite di profitti non saranno
rimborsati, anche se si riferiscono al periodo di validità della garanzia.
7. La garanzia è valida esclusivamente nel paese di acquisto dell’apparecchio.
* Le disposizioni di cui sopra si riferiscono alle riparazioni gratuite e non
costituiscono un limite per i diritti legali dei clienti.
* Il loro proposito è illustrato anche nel tagliandino di garanzia fornito con
l’apparecchio.
8. I componenti essenziali per le procedure di assistenza dell’apparecchio
(vale a dire, i componenti necessari per mantenere le funzioni e la
qualità dell’apparecchio) saranno disponibili per cinque anni a partire
dall’interruzione della produzione dell’apparecchio.
9. Si prega di notare che in caso di danni gravi da ascrivere ad allagamenti,
immersioni, infiltrazioni di sabbia o fango, urti violenti o cadute, potrebbe non
essere possibile riparare l’apparecchio e ripristinarne le condizioni originali.
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Prima di inviare la fotocamera per la riparazione, controllarne il corpo
e leggere nuovamente il manuale delle istruzioni per verificare il
funzionamento corretto.
• Alcune riparazioni necessitano di tempi prolungati.
• Quando si invia l’apparecchio a un centro di assistenza, accludere una
nota in cui si descrive il più precisamente possibile il componente
difettoso e il problema.
• Togliere tutti gli accessori non correlati al problema prima di inviare la
fotocamera a un centro di assistenza.*L450 3974A*
All’insorgere di problemi
Sedi Ricoh
RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V.
(EPMMC)
Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY
(innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438
(außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438
http://www.ricohpmmc.com/
RICOH ITALIA S.p.A.
(PMMC ITALY)
(dall’Italia) 02 696 33 451
(dall’estero) +39 02 696 33 451
Ricoh Company, Ltd.
Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo
104-8222, Japan
2009 Dicembre
IT I
Stampato in Cina
OBJECTIF RICOH
S10 24-72mm F2.5-4.4 VC
Mode d’emploi
Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’objectif.
Contenu de l’emballage
Avant d’utiliser votre objectif Ricoh, vérifiez dans l’emballage qu’il ne
manque aucun des éléments listés ci-dessous.
Unité appareil photo
Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’appareil.
Capuchon de l’objectif
Est fixé à l’unité appareil photo.
?Mode d’emploi
(le présentmanuel)
? Garantie
Capuchon du connecteur
Est fixé à l’unité appareil photo.
Étui souple
Introduction
Pour utiliser cet objectif, vous devez l’installer sur un boîtier d’appareil photo
compatible.
Reportez-vous au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo pour plus de détails
concernant l’utilisation des fonctions de prise de vue et de lecture et la modification
des réglages et pour prendre connaissance des consignes d’utilisation importantes. Le
présent mode d’emploi désigne l’objectif sous le nom d’unité appareil photo et détaille
les fonctions et procédures de fonctionnement uniquement disponibles lorsque l’unité
appareil photo est utilisée avec un boîtier d’appareil photo compatible. Reportez-vous
également au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo GXR.
Pour utiliser les fonctions du produit de manière optimale, lisez attentivement le
présent manuel avant utilisation. Veuillez conserver le présent manuel à portée de
main pour pouvoir vous y référer facilement.
Ricoh Co., Ltd.
Mesures de sécurité Lisez attentivement toutes les mesures de sécurité pour garantir
une utilisation sans danger.
Essais de prise de vue Faites des essais de prise de vue pour vérifier le fonctionnement correct
de l’appareil avant de prendre des photos d’événements importants.
Copyright La reproduction ou la modification de documents, de magazines
et d’autres sources sujettes aux droits d’auteur, autrement que
pour des raisons personnelles, domestiques ou limitées similaires,
est interdite sans le consentement du propriétaire des droits.
Exonération de
responsabilité
Ricoh Co., Ltd. décline toute responsabilité en cas de défaillance
de l’enregistrement ou de l’affichage des photos résultant d’un
dysfonctionnement de l’appareil.
Garantie La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans
le pays d’achat. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à
la réparation du produit dans d’autres pays ou à la prise en charge
de toute dépense associée.
Interférences radio L’utilisation de cet appareil dans le voisinage d’un autre
équipement électronique peut affecter défavorablement à
la fois l’appareil photo et l’autre dispositif. Des interférences
sont notamment probables si l’appareil est utilisé à proximité
d’une radio ou d’un téléviseur. Ce problème peut être résolu en
déplaçant l’appareil aussi loin que possible de l’autre dispositif, en
réorientant l’antenne de la radio ou du téléviseur, ou encore en
branchant la radio ou le téléviseur sur une prise secteur différente.
© 2009 RICOH CO., LTD. Tous droits réservés. Cette publication ne peut être reproduite en tout ou en partie sans
l’autorisation expresse et écrite de Ricoh. Ricoh se réserve le droit de modifier le contenu de ce document à tout
moment et sans avis préalable.
Tous les efforts ont été faits pour garantir l’exactitude des informations contenues dans ce document. Dans le cas
où vous rencontreriez néanmoins une erreur ou une omission, nous vous serions reconnaissants de bien vouloir
nous en avertir à l’adresse indiquée en quatrième de couverture de ce manuel.
Mesures de sécurité
Symboles d’avertissement
Divers symboles sont utilisés tout au long de ce manuel et sur le produit
lui-même pour prévenir tout risque de blessure ou de dommage aux biens.
Ces symboles et leur signification sont détaillés ci-dessous.
Danger
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner
rapidement la mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les
instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies.
Avertissement
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner la
mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les instructions
correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies.
Attention
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner des
blessures corporelles ou des dommages aux biens si les
instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies.
Exemples de signalisation d’avertissement
Le symbole vous signale des actions qui doivent être effectuées.
Le symbole vous signale des actions interdites.
Le symbole peut être combiné avec d’autres pour indiquer qu’une action
spécifique est interdite.
Exemples
= Ne pas toucher = Ne pas démonter
Prenez les précautions indiquées ci-dessous pour utiliser ce matériel en
toute sécurité.
Danger
Ne tentez pas de démonter, de réparer ou de modifier vous-même l’appareil. Les
circuits à haute tension de l’appareil vous font courir un risque de choc électrique.
Avertissement
Conservez l’appareil hors de portée des enfants.
Si le mécanisme interne de l’appareil est exposé suite à un choc ou autre type de
dommage, ne touchez aucun composant interne. Les circuits à haute tension de
l’appareil peuvent causer des chocs électriques. Retirez la batterie dès que possible,
en prenant soin d’éviter tout choc électrique ou brûlure. Apportez l’appareil au
revendeur ou au service après-vente le plus proche s’il est endommagé.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans un endroit humide car vous risqueriez de provoquer un
incendie ou de subir une décharge électrique.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil à proximité de gaz inflammables, d’essence, de benzène,
de solvant ou de substances du même type pour éviter tout risque d’explosion,
d’incendie ou de brûlure.
• N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans des lieux où son usage est limité ou interdit afin
d’éviter tout risque de catastrophe ou d’accident.
Attention
Ne laissez pas l’équipement prendre l’eau ou se mouiller. Ne l’utilisez pas non plus
avec les mains mouillées. Dans les deux cas, vous risquez de subir une décharge
électrique.
Consignes de
sécurité relatives aux
accessoires
Avant d’utiliser un produit optionnel, lisez attentivement les
instructions fournies avec ce produit.10
Contenu de l’emballage ..................................................................................................... 2
Introduction............................................................................................................................ 3
Mesures de sécurité............................................................................................................. 6
Nomenclature de l’objectif...............................................................................12
Prise de vue..........................................................................................................13
Mode P : Changement de programme.......................................................................13
Mode M : Exposition manuelle ......................................................................................15
Mode scène macro zoom ................................................................................................15
Réglages...............................................................................................................17
Réglages du menu de prise de vue en mode [Macro zoom]..............................17
Réglage [Qualité image/Taille] (menu prise de vue)..............................................19
Photos...........................................................................................................................20
Vidéos............................................................................................................................21
Table des matières11
Réglage [Sensibilité ISO] (menu prise de vue) .........................................................22
Réglage [Correction du bougé] (menu prise de vue)............................................23
[Enr. Mes Réglages] (Options personnalisées)..........................................................23
[Rég. touche Fn1]/[Rég. touche Fn2] (Options personnalisées).........................24
Réglage [Image zoom numérique] (Configuration)...............................................24
Réglage [Zoom par paliers] (Configuration) .............................................................25
Réglage [Objectif de conversion] (Configuration)..................................................26
Caractéristiques..................................................................................................29
Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire................................................................34
Annexes................................................................................................................36
Accessoires en option.......................................................................................................36
Précautions d’emploi.........................................................................................................39
Entretien et stockage de l’équipement.......................................................................40
Garantie et réparation.......................................................................................................411
Nomenclature de l’objectif
1
4 3
2
1 Connecteur
2 Bague d’objectif
3 Objectif
4 Touche de dépose de la bague d’objectif1
Prise de vue
Mode P : Changement de programme
Les plages approximatives disponibles pour les combinaisons d’ouverture
et de vitesse d’obturation sont indiquées ci-dessous. Les valeurs réelles
peuvent variées selon la valeur d’exposition (EV).
Dans ces exemples, le mode Flash est défini sur [Flash Non] et la sensibilité
ISO est définie sur [ISO100].1
Ev6
Ev5
Ev4
Ev3
Ev2
Ev1
Ev0
Ev-1
Ev-2
F16
F11
F15.8
F9.1
F2.5
F8.0
F5.6
F4.0
F2.8
F2.0
F1.4
F1.0
8 4 2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000
Ev7 Ev8 Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19 Ev20
: Grand angle
: Téléobjectif1
Mode M : Exposition manuelle
Si [Auto] ou [Auto-Hi] est sélectionné pour Sensibilité ISO, la sensibilité ISO
sera fixée à 100 lorsque l’appareil photo est en mode exposition manuelle.
Mode scène macro zoom
Lorsque le sélecteur de mode est placé sur SCENE, la sélection du mode
[Macro zoom] optimise automatiquement la position du zoom. Vous
pouvez ainsi prendre un sujet de plus grande taille qu’avec la prise de vue
macro normale. Le zoom optique ne peut pas être utilisé en mode macro
zoom. Pour les méthodes de prise de vue zoom, reportez-vous au « Mode
d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo ».1
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Vous pouvez prendre des vues rapprochées à l’aide du mode macro zoom
conformément aux distances suivantes.
Environ 1cm
(depuis la partie avant de
l’objectif)
Plage de prise de vue : environ 17×13mm
(lorsque le zoom numérique n’est pas utilisé)
Plage de prise de vue : environ 4,4×3,3mm
(lorsque le zoom numérique 4,0×est utilisé)
• Lorsque le paramètre [Qualité image/Taille] est réglé sur 4:3 pour [L], vous
pouvez également régler le paramètre [Image zoom numérique] sur [Taille
auto], le zoom avec changement de taille automatique est alors activé
(GP. 24).1
Réglages
Réglages du menu de prise de vue en mode [Macro zoom]
Lorsque le paramètre [Macro zoom] est sélectionné, les rubriques du menu
de prise de vue qui peuvent être définies et les valeurs par défaut sont les
suivantes.
Paramètre Réglage par défaut
Qualité image/Taille L 4:3 NORMAL
Mise au point AF
Pré AF Non
Mesure exposition Multi
Réglages image Standard
Mode continu Non
Cadrage auto Non
Correction exposition flash 0.01
Paramètre Réglage par défaut
Niveau de flash manuel 1/2
Réglage synchro du flash 1er rideau
Réduction bruit Non
Réduction bruit ISO > à ISO 401
Correction distorsion Non
Retardateur personnalisé 2 img, 5 secondes
Horodatage Non
Correction de l’exposition 0.0
Balance blancs Multi-P AUTO
Sensibilité ISO Auto
Correction du bougé Oui1
Réglage [Qualité image/Taille] (menu prise de vue)
Les options de qualité de l’image, de taille de l’image et de rapport
d’affichage suivantes sont disponibles pour le réglage [Qualité image/Taille]
du menu de prise de vue.
La taille du fichier des photos dépend de l’association qualité de l’image/
taille de l’image utilisée. Lors de l’enregistrement de vidéos, vous pouvez
sélectionner la taille de la vidéo.0
Photos
Paramètre Rapport
d’affichage
Compression Taille de l’image
(pixels)
RAW 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
3648×2048
4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
3648×2736
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
3648×2432
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
2736×2736
L (Large) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 3648×2048
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3648×2736
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 3648×2432
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2736×2736
M (Middle) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 3264×1840
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3264×2448
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 3264×2176
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2448×24481
Paramètre Rapport
d’affichage
Compression Taille de l’image
(pixels)
5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944
3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536
1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960
VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480
*1 Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit du réglage utilisé pour la copie JPEG.
*2 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent en haut
et en bas de l’affichage de la photo.
*3 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent sur le
côté droit et sur le côté gauche de l’affichage de la photo.
Vidéos
Paramètre Taille vidéo
VGA640 640×480
QVGA320 320×240
Réglage [Sensibilité ISO] (menu prise de vue)
• Lorsque l’option [Auto] est sélectionnée et que le flash est utilisé, la
sensibilité utilisée devient équivalente à la sensibilité ISO400.
• Lorsque l’option [Auto] est sélectionnée et que le flash n’est pas utilisé, la
plage de sensibilité utilisée est la suivante.
Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Défaut Minimum Maximum
RAW 100 100 200
L 100 100 200
M 100 100 200
5M 100 100 200
3M 100 100 200
1M 100 100 238
VGA 100 100 283
Réglage [Correction du bougé] (menu prise de vue)
L’activation de la fonction [Correction du bougé] limite les effets de flous
occasionnés par le mouvement de l’appareil photo.
Lorsque la correction du bougé de l’appareil est activée, le symbole E
apparaît à l’écran.
[Enr. Mes Réglages] (Options personnalisées)
Sous [Enr. Mes Réglages], vous pouvez aussi définir les options de [Zoom/
paliers] de l’onglet de configuration. Pour les autres options disponibles,
reportez-vous au « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo ».
[Rég. touche Fn1]/[Rég. touche Fn2]
(Options personnalisées)
• [Zoom par paliers] peut être assigné aux touches Fn1/Fn2.
• [AF/Snap], [Correction WB] et [Zoom par paliers] ne sont pas disponibles
en appuyant sur les touches Fn1/Fn2 si le mode scène est réglé sur
[Macro zoom].
Réglage [Image zoom numérique] (Configuration)
La taille de l’image enregistrée varie en fonction du zoom de
redimensionnement automatique, de la manière suivante.
Rapport de zoom
Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Rapport de zoom
Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Environ 1× L Environ 1,8× 3M
Environ 1,1× M Environ 2,9× 1M
Environ 1,4× 5M Environ 5,7× VGA
Réglage [Zoom par paliers] (Configuration)
Si l’option [Zoom par paliers] est activée, il existe cinq niveaux de distance
focale pour le zoom (équivalents à 24 mm, 28 mm, 35 mm, 50 mm et
72 mm*). * Équivalents aux distances d’un appareil photo 35 mm.
Remarques------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Les distances focales du zoom lorsqu’un objectif à grande conversion est
installé sur l’appareil photo sont équivalentes à 19 mm, 22 mm, 27 mm,
39 mm et 57 mm.
• Les distances focales du zoom lorsqu’un objectif de téléconversion est
installé sur l’appareil photo sont équivalentes à 45 mm, 53 mm, 65 mm,
93 mm et 135 mm. Cependant, si le zoom est effectué à une distance
focale autre que 135 mm (côté téléobjectif), il est possible qu’un
phénomène de dégradé mécanique (les coins de l’image sont sombres)
apparaisse en périphérie de l’image.
Réglage [Objectif de conversion] (Configuration)
Avec les réglages [Objectif de conversion], vous pouvez indiquer si l’objectif
à grande conversion (DW-6) ou l’objectif de téléconversion (TC-1) en option
doit être utilisé.
Réglages disponibles Description
Non Même si un objectif de conversion est installé sur
l’appareil photo, ce dernier ne le reconnaît pas
comme tel.
WIDE [DW-6] L’objectif de conversion est reconnu comme
objectif à grande conversion (DW-6) lorsqu’il est
installé sur l’appareil photo.
TELE [TC-1] L’objectif de conversion est reconnu comme
objectif de téléconversion (TC-1) lorsqu’il est
installé sur l’appareil photo.
Réglages disponibles Description
Obj. installé
*Réglage par défaut
L’écran de sélection du type d’objectif de
conversion s’affiche lors des événements
suivants. Cela vous sera particulièrement utile
si vous utilisez souvent les objectifs DW-6 et TC-1.
• Quand l’appareil est mis sous tension alors qu’un
objectif de conversion est installé
• Lorsque l’objectif de conversion est installé sur
l’appareil photo
Lorsque [WIDE[DW-6]] ou [TELE[TC-1]] est sélectionné :
Lors de la mise sous tension alors qu’un objectif de conversion est
installé sur l’appareil, ou lors de l’installation d’un objectif de conversion,
un symbole indiquant le type de l’objectif de conversion s’affiche
momentanément au centre de l’écran d’affichage des photos. Un symbole
plus petit apparaît ensuite en bas à droite de l’écran.
Lorsque [Obj. installé] est sélectionné :
Lors de la mise sous tension alors qu’un objectif de conversion est installé
sur l’appareil, ou lors de l’installation d’un objectif de conversion, l’écran
de sélection du type d’objectif de conversion s’affiche. Appuyez sur les
touches Fn1/Fn2 pour sélectionner le réglage souhaité, puis appuyez sur la
touche MENU/OK. Un symbole indiquant le type de l’objectif de conversion
s’affiche momentanément au centre de l’écran d’affichage des photos. Un
symbole plus petit apparaît ensuite en bas à droite de l’écran.
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Lorsque [Objectif de conversion] est réglé sur [TELE[TC-1]], l’appareil
photo reconnaît l’objectif installé comme un objectif de téléconversion
(TC-1) même si l’objectif installé est en réalité un objectif à grande
conversion (DW-6). La réciproque est également vraie.
• Si vous utilisez un objectif dont le réglage [Objectif de conversion]
est différent de ce qu’il devrait être, les fonctions de prise de vue ne
fonctionnent pas correctement.
Caractéristiques
Les caractéristiques correspondent à l’unité appareil photo installée sur un
boîtier GXR.
Pixels réels Environ 10,0 millions
Capteur d’image 1/1,7" CCD (nombre total de pixels : environ 10,4 millions)
Objectif Distance focale De 5,1mm à 15,3mm (format 35mm équivalent : de 24mm
à 72mm)
Ouverture
(nombre f)
f/2,5– f/4,4
Plage mise
au point (de
l’objectif)
Prise de vue normale : environ 30cm à 8 (grand angle/
téléobjectif)
Prise de vue macro : environ 1cm à 8 (grand angle/macro
zoom) ; environ 4cm à 8 (téléobjectif)
Construction 11 éléments en 7 groupes (4 objectifs asphériques avec 4
surfaces)
Zoom 3,0× zoom optique ; 4,0× zoom numérique ; environ 5,7×
zoom de redimensionnement automatique (VGA)0
Mode mise au point AF multi et AF spot basé sur CCD ; MF ; snap ; 8 (verrouillage
de mise au point et assistance AF)
Vitesse
d’obturation
Photos 1/2000–180s (les limites inférieures et supérieures varient en
fonction du mode prise de vue et flash)
Vidéos 1/30–1/2000s
Contrôle
exposition
Mesure Mesure TTL-CCD en modes multi (256 segments), central
pondéré, et spot avec verrouillage de l’exposition automatique
Mode Programme AE, priorité à l’ouverture AE, exposition manuelle,
priorité à l’obturation AE, fonction de décalage de la cible
Correction de
l’exposition
Manuelle (+4,0 à -4,0EV par incrément de 1/3EV ou 1/2EV),
cadrage automatique (-2EV à +2EV par incrément de 1/3EV
ou 1/2EV)
Sensibilité ISO
(sensibilité sortie standard)
Auto, Auto-Hi, ISO 100, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600,
ISO 3200
Balance des blancs Auto, Multi-P AUTO, En extérieur, Nuageux, Lampe
incandescente, Lampe fluorescente, Réglage manuel, Détail ;
cadrage auto balance des blancs
Flash Portée
(flash intégré)
Environ 20cm–4,5m (grand angle),
Environ 15cm–2,7m (téléobjectif) 1
Mode prise de vue Auto, changement de programme, priorité à l’ouverture,
priorité à l’obturation, manuel, scène (vidéo, portrait, sports,
paysage, nuit, correction biais, macro zoom), « Mes Réglages »
Mode
continu
Nombre de
photos prises
à l’aide de
l’option Continu
(Taille d’image :
RAW)
Réduction du bruit désactivée : 5 photos,
Réduction du bruit désactivée : 4 photos, (sensibilité ISO:
ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200)
Réduction du bruit activée (faible ou forte) : 4 photos
Nombre de
photos prises à
l’aide de l’option
Cont.M + (un
ensemble)
Rap (640×480) : 30 photos (30 images/s),
Len (3648×2736) : 15 photos (1,6 images/s)
Compression*1
FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2
Taille de
l’image
(pixels)
Photos 3648×2048, 3648×2736, 3648×2432, 2736×2736,
3264×1840, 3264×2448, 3264×2176, 2448×2448,
2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480
Vidéos 640×480, 320×240
Taille fichier
(approximative)
RAW 16:9 NORMAL : 12 923Ko/image, FINE : 14 160Ko/image,
VGA : 11 347Ko/image
4:3 NORMAL : 17 202Ko/image, FINE : 18 854Ko/image,
VGA : 15 096Ko/image
3:2 NORMAL : 15 311Ko/image, FINE : 16 779Ko/image,
VGA : 13 439Ko/image
1:1 NORMAL : 12 956Ko/image, FINE : 14 195Ko/image,
VGA : 11 377Ko/image
Taille fichier
(approximative)
L 16:9 NORMAL : 1 630Ko/image, FINE : 2 779Ko/image
4:3 NORMAL : 2 169Ko/image, FINE : 3 704Ko/image
3:2 NORMAL : 1 930Ko/image, FINE : 3 295Ko/image
1:1 NORMAL : 1 633Ko/image, FINE : 2 784Ko/image
M 16:9 NORMAL : 1 329Ko/image, FINE : 2 253Ko/image
4:3 NORMAL : 1 761Ko/image, FINE : 2 990Ko/image
3:2 NORMAL : 1 567Ko/image, FINE : 2 660Ko/image
1:1 NORMAL : 1 327Ko/image, FINE : 2 248Ko/image
5M 4:3 FINE : 2 287Ko/image
3M 4:3 FINE : 1 474Ko/image
1M 4:3 FINE : 812Ko/image
VGA 4:3 FINE : 197Ko/image
Longévité batterie
(basée sur norme CIPA)
DB-90 : environ 410 prises de vue*3
Dimensions (L×H×P) Unité appareil photo uniquement :
68,7mm×57,9mm×38,6mm (protubérances exclues)
Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo :
113,9mm×70,2mm×44,4mm (protubérances exclues)
Poids (approximatif) Unité appareil photo uniquement : 161 g (capuchon de
l’objectif et capuchon du connecteur non inclus)
Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo : 325 g
(batterie, carte mémoire, courroie d’encolure, capuchon du
connecteur et capuchon de l’objectif non inclus)
Température fonctionnement 0°C à 40°C
Humidité fonctionnement 85 % ou moins
Température stockage –20°C à 60°C
*1 Les options disponibles varient selon la taille d’image.
*2 Un fichier JPEG est également enregistré (le fichier JPEG peut être d’une qualité FINE ou
NORMAL avec les mêmes dimensions que le fichier RAW ou VGA pour une taille de 640×480
pixels). Les fichiers RAW utilisent le format standard DNG promu par Adobe Systems, Inc.
*3 Pour référence uniquement : le nombre réel de prises de vue varie énormément selon
l’utilisation de l’appareil. Nous vous recommandons d’emporter des batteries de rechange
lors d’une utilisation pendant une période prolongée.
Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire
Les valeurs suivantes sont données à titre de référence de la capacité de
stockage de la mémoire interne et de cartes mémoire de différentes tailles,
en fonction de la qualité d’image et de la taille d’image, lors de l’utilisation
de la qualité d’image FINE.
Photos
Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go
RAW*
FINE
3648×2048 6 68 138 272 556 1115 2237
3648×2736 4 51 104 204 418 837 1680
3648×2432 5 57 117 229 469 941 1888
2736×2736 6 68 138 271 555 1113 2232
L
FINE
3648×2048 29 323 653 1284 2624 5257 10546
3648×2736 22 242 497 965 1973 3953 7930
3648×2432 24 272 553 1087 2222 4452 8930
2736×2736 29 323 653 1284 2624 5257 10546
Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go
M
FINE
3264×1840 36 397 808 1588 3245 6502 13043
3264×2448 27 300 608 1195 2442 4893 9815
3264×2176 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014
2448×2448 36 400 808 1588 3245 6502 13043
5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238
3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063
1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181
VGA/FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581
* Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit de la compression utilisée pour la copie
JPEG.
Vidéos
Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Mémoire
interne
1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go
640×480
30 images/seconde
49s 8min
55s
18min
8s
37min
18s
72min
50s
145min
54s
292min
41s
320×240
30 images/seconde
1min
59s
21min
39s
44min
2s
90min
33s
176min
44s
354min
3s
710min
13s
Annexes
Accessoires en option
L’objectif RICOH peut être utilisé avec les éléments suivants (vendus
séparément).
Capuchon d’objectif (LC-2)
Capuchon adaptateur (HA-3)
Inclut un capuchon pour protéger l’objectif de la lumière
solaire et un adaptateur pour les filtres de f43 mm d’usage
général. Ceux-ci peuvent être utilisés pour améliorer la qualité
de prise de vue lorsque le sujet est rétroéclairé.
Objectif à grande conversion (DW-6)
Un objectif à grande conversion qui permet la prise de
vue en grand angle avec un agrandissement d’objectif
de 0,79× (équivalent à un objectif grand angle de 19 mm
sur un appareil photo 35 mm). À utiliser avec le capuchon
adaptateur (étui inclus).
Objectif de téléconversion (TC-1)
Un objectif de téléconversion qui permet la prise de vue télé
avec un agrandissement d’objectif de 1,88× (équivalent à
un téléobjectif de 135 mm sur un appareil photo 35 mm). À
utiliser avec le capuchon adaptateur (étui inclus).
Avant d’utiliser un accessoire optionnel, consultez la documentation fournie
avec le produit.
Le flash intégré du boîtier de l’appareil photo ne peut pas être utilisé avec des
objectifs à grande conversion ou des capuchons d’objectif.
Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les accessoires optionnels, visitez
le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricohpmmc.com/).
•
•
•
Montage et démontage de la bague d’objectif---------------------------------
Enlevez la bague d’objectif lors de l’utilisation de l’objectif à grande
conversion, de l’objectif de téléconversion, du capuchon d’objectif à fixation
ou du capuchon adaptateur.
Démontage de la bague d’objectif
Appuyez sur la touche de dépose de la
bague d’objectif, faites tourner la bague
d’objectif dans le sens inverse des aiguilles
d’une montre avec l’appareil photo hors
tension et retirez la bague du boîtier de
l’appareil photo.
Montage de la bague d’objectif
Une fois l’appareil hors tension, alignez
le repère sur la bague d’objectif (2) avec
le repère du boîtier de l’appareil (1) et tournez la bague d’objectif dans le
sens des aiguilles d’une montre jusqu’à ce qu’un déclic soit émis.
2 1
Précautions d’emploi
• La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans le pays d’achat.
• Dans le cas d’une panne ou d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil à l’étranger, le
fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit localement
ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée.
• Ne faites pas tomber l’équipement et évitez-lui les chocs physiques.
• Lors du transport de l’équipement, faites attention de ne pas le cogner dans d’autres
objets. Faites particulièrement attention à protéger l’objectif.
• Des changements brutaux de température peuvent provoquer de la condensation
visible dans l’objectif ou des dysfonctionnements de l’équipement. Cela peut être
évité en plaçant l’équipement dans un sac plastique pour ralentir le changement
de température, puis en le retirant une fois que l’air dans le sac a atteint la même
température que l’environnement.
• Conservez l’équipement sec et évitez de le manipuler avec les mains mouillées.
Le non-respect de cette consigne peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements de
l’équipement ou un choc électrique.
• Gardez le connecteur propre.
Conseil : pour éviter la condensation---------------------------------------------
La condensation se produit généralement lorsque vous vous rendez dans
un endroit avec une brusque différence de température, si l’humidité
est élevée, dans une pièce froide après que le chauffage ait été mis en
marche, ou lorsque l’appareil est exposé à de l’air froid en provenance d’un
climatiseur ou d’un autre dispositif.0
Entretien et stockage de l’équipement
Entretien de l’équipement
• Les photos peuvent être altérées par des empreintes ou d’autres matières
étrangères sur l’objectif. Évitez de toucher l’objectif avec les doigts. Éliminez la
poussière ou les peluches avec un soufflant disponible dans le commerce, ou
nettoyez doucement l’objectif avec un chiffon doux et sec.
• Nettoyez soigneusement l’équipement après l’avoir utilisé à la plage ou après
avoir manipulé des produits cosmétiques. N’exposez pas l’équipement à des
substances volatiles comme du diluant, du benzène ou des pesticides. Le nonrespect de cette consigne peut endommager l’équipement ou sa finition.
• Dans l’éventualité d’un dysfonctionnement, consultez un centre de réparation
Ricoh.
• Cet équipement est un dispositif de haute précision. Ne le démontez pas.1
Stockage
Ne stockez pas l’appareil photo dans un endroit sujet à : chaleur ou humidité
extrême ; grands changements de température ou d’humidité ; poussière, saleté
ou sable ; fortes vibrations ; contact prolongé avec des produits chimiques,
notamment des boules de naphtaline ou d’autres produits insecticides, ou
des produits en vinyle ou en caoutchouc ; champs magnétiques puissants (par
exemple à proximité d’un moniteur, d’un transformateur ou d’un aimant).
Garantie et réparation
1. Ce produit bénéficie d’une garantie limitée. Pendant la période de garantie
indiquée sur la carte de garantie fournie avec votre équipement, toute pièce
défectueuse sera réparée gratuitement. Dans le cas d’un dysfonctionnement
de l’équipement, contactez le distributeur qui vous a vendu l’équipement ou
votre centre de réparation Ricoh le plus proche. Veuillez noter que vous ne
serez pas remboursé des frais de transport pour livrer votre équipement au
centre de réparation Ricoh.
2. Cette garantie ne couvre aucun dommage résultant de :
1 non-respect des instructions du mode d’emploi ;
2 réparation, modification ou révision non réalisée par un centre de service
agréé, listé dans le mode d’emploi ;
3 incendie, sinistre, catastrophe naturelle, foudre, tension anormale, etc. ;
4 stockage inapproprié (indiqué dans le « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de
l’appareil photo »), fuite de batterie et autres fluides, moisissure ou tout
autre défaut d’entretien de l’équipement.
5 immersion dans l’eau (inondation), exposition à l’alcool ou à d’autres
boissons, infiltration de sable ou de boue, choc physique, chute ou pression
exercée sur l’équipement et autres causes non naturelles.
3. Après l’expiration de la période de garantie, tous les frais de réparation seront
à votre charge, y compris ceux d’un centre de service agréé.
4. Tous les frais de réparation seront à votre charge, même au cours de la période
de garantie, si la carte de garantie n’est pas jointe ou si le nom du distributeur
ou la date d’achat n’est pas indiqué ou a été modifié sur la carte.
5. Les frais de révision et d’inspection complète, sur demande du client, seront à
sa charge complète que la période de garantie ait expiré ou non.
6. Tout dommage consécutif à une défaillance de l’équipement, comme les frais
de prise de vue ou la perte d’un profit attendu, ne sera pas remboursé que la
période de garantie ait expiré ou non.
7. La garantie est valable uniquement dans le pays où l’équipement a été acheté.
* Les dispositions ci-dessus se réfèrent aux réparations gratuites et ne limitent
vos droits légaux.
* L’objectif des dispositions ci-dessus est également décrit sur la carte de
garantie fournie avec l’équipement.
8. Les pièces essentielles à la réparation de l’équipement (c’est-à-dire les
composants nécessaires au fonctionnement et à la qualité de l’équipement)
seront disponibles pendant une période de cinq années après l’arrêt de la
production de l’équipement.
9. Veuillez noter que si l’équipement est sérieusement endommagé par une
inondation, une immersion, une infiltration de sable ou de boue, des chocs
violents ou une chute, il peut être impossible de le réparer et la restauration de
son état originel peut être impossible.
Remarques------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Avant d’envoyer l’appareil en réparation, vérifiez le boîtier de l’appareil
photo et relisez le mode d’emploi pour garantir un fonctionnement correct.
• Certaines réparations nécessitent un certain temps d’exécution.
• Lors de l’envoi de l’équipement à un centre de réparation, veuillez inclure
une note décrivant la pièce défectueuse et le problème rencontré, aussi
précisément que possible.
• Démontez tous les accessoires non associés au problème avant d’envoyer
l’appareil au centre de réparation.*L451 3972A*
En cas de problème
Bureaux Ricoh
RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V.
(EPMMC)
Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY
(innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438
(außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438
http://www.ricohpmmc.com/
RICOH FRANCE S.A.S. (PMMC FRANCE)
(à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70
(en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94
Ricoh Company, Ltd.
Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo
104-8222, Japan
2009 Décembre
FR F-FR
Imprimé en Chine
RICOH LENS
S10 24-72mm F2.5-4.4 VC
Instruction Manual
The serial number may be found on the bottom of the lens.
Package Contents
Before using your Ricoh lens, confirm that the package contains the items
listed below.
Camera unit
The serial number may be found on the bottom.
Lens cap
Comes attached to the camera unit.
? Instruction manual
(this manual)
? Warranty
Connector cap
Comes attached to the camera unit.
Soft case
Introduction
To use this lens, you need to attach it to a compatible camera body.
Refer to the Camera Body User Guide for details about how to operate shooting and
playback functions and change settings and to read important precautions for use. This
instruction manual will refer to this lens as the “camera unit” and will explain functions
and operating procedures that are available only when this camera unit is used with a
compatible camera body. See also the GXR Camera Body User Guide.
To make the best use of this product’s functions, read this manual thoroughly before
use. Please keep this manual handy for ease of reference.
Ricoh Co., Ltd.
Safety precautions Read all safety precautions thoroughly to ensure safe use.
Test shots Take test shots to ensure that the camera is working properly
before taking photos on important occasions.
Copyright Reproduction or alteration of copyrighted documents, magazines,
and other materials, other than for personal, home, or other
similarly limited purposes, without the consent of the copyright
holder, is prohibited.
Exemption from liability Ricoh Co., Ltd. assumes no liability for failure to record or display
images as a result of product malfunction.
Warranty The warranty supplied with this product is only valid within the
country of purchase. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility
for servicing the product in other countries or bearing any
expense thereby incurred.
Radio interference Operating this product in the vicinity of other electronic
equipment may adversely affect both the camera and the other
device. Interference is particularly likely if the camera is used
in close proximity to a radio or television. This can be resolved
by moving the camera as far as possible from the other device,
reorienting the radio or television antenna, or plugging the radio
or television into a different outlet.
© 2009 RICOH CO., LTD. All rights reserved. This publication may not be reproduced in whole or in part without
Ricoh’s express written permission. Ricoh reserves the right to change the contents of this document at any time
without prior notice.
Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information in this document. Should you nevertheless
notice any errors or omissions, we would be grateful if you would notify us at the address listed on the back cover
of this booklet.
Safety Precautions
Warning Symbols
Various symbols are used throughout this instruction manual and on the
product to prevent physical harm to you or other people and damage to
property. The symbols and their meanings are explained below.
Danger
This symbol indicates matters that may lead to imminent risk of
death or serious injury if ignored or incorrectly handled.
Warning
This symbol indicates matters that may lead to death or serious
injury if ignored or incorrectly handled.
Caution
This symbol indicates matters that may lead to injury or physical
damage if ignored or incorrectly handled.
Sample Warnings
The symbol alerts you to actions that must be performed.
The symbol alerts you to prohibited actions.
The symbol may be combined with other symbols to indicate that a specific action
is prohibited.
Examples
= Do not touch = Do not disassemble
Observe the following precautions to ensure safe use of this unit.
Danger
Do not attempt to disassemble, repair or alter the equipment yourself. The highvoltage circuitry in the equipment poses significant electrical hazard.
Warning
Keep the equipment out of the reach of children.
Do not touch the internal components of the equipment if they become exposed as
a result of being dropped or damaged. The high-voltage circuitry in the equipment
could lead to an electric shock. Remove the battery as soon as possible, being careful
to avoid electric shocks or burns. Take the equipment to your nearest dealer or service
center if it is damaged.
Do not use the equipment in wet areas as this could result in fire or electric shock.
Do not use the equipment near flammable gases, gasoline, benzene, thinner or
similar substances to avoid the risk of explosion, fire or burns.
• Do not use the equipment in locations where usage is restricted or prohibited as
this may lead to disasters or accidents.
Caution
Do not allow the equipment to get wet. In addition, do not operate it with wet hands.
Both pose the risk of electric shock.
Safety Precautions
for Accessories
When using optional products, carefully read the instructions
provided with the product before using that product.10
Package Contents................................................................................................................. 2
Introduction............................................................................................................................ 3
Safety Precautions................................................................................................................ 6
Parts of the Lens .................................................................................................12
Shooting...............................................................................................................13
Mode P: Program Shift......................................................................................................13
Mode M: Manual Exposure..............................................................................................15
The Zoom Macro Scene Mode.......................................................................................15
Settings ................................................................................................................17
Shooting Menu Settings in [Zoom Macro] Mode ...................................................17
[Picture Quality/Size] Setting (Shooting Menu) ......................................................19
Photographs...............................................................................................................20
Movies...........................................................................................................................21
Table of Contents11
[ISO Setting] Setting (Shooting Menu).......................................................................22
[Camera Shake Correction] Setting (Shooting Menu)...........................................23
[Reg. My Settings] (Key Custom Options)..................................................................23
[Set Fn1 Button]/[Set Fn2 Button] (Key Custom Options)....................................24
[Digital Zoom Image] Setting (Setup).........................................................................24
[Step Zoom] Setting (Setup)...........................................................................................25
[Conversion Lens] Setting (Setup)................................................................................26
Specifications ......................................................................................................29
Internal Memory/Memory Card Capacity..................................................................35
Appendices..........................................................................................................37
Optional Accessories.........................................................................................................37
Precautions for Use ............................................................................................................40
Equipment Care and Storage.........................................................................................41
Warranty and Servicing....................................................................................................421
Parts of the Lens
1
4 3
2
1 Connector
2 Ring cap
3 Lens
4 Ring cap removal button1
Shooting
Mode P: Program Shift
The following shows the approximate ranges available for shutter speed
and aperture combinations. The actual values may vary depending on EV
(exposure value).
In these examples, the flash mode is set to [Flash Off], and the ISO setting is
set to [ISO100].1
Ev6
Ev5
Ev4
Ev3
Ev2
Ev1
Ev0
Ev-1
Ev-2
F16
F11
F15.8
F9.1
F2.5
F8.0
F5.6
F4.0
F2.8
F2.0
F1.4
F1.0
8 4 2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000
Ev7 Ev8 Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19 Ev20
: Wide
: Tele1
Mode M: Manual Exposure
If [Auto] or [Auto-Hi] is selected for ISO Setting, ISO will be fixed at 100
while the camera is in manual exposure mode.
The Zoom Macro Scene Mode
When the mode dial is set to SCENE, selecting the [Zoom Macro] mode
will automatically optimize the zoom position, allowing you to shoot the
subject at a larger size than with normal macro shooting. In zoom macro
mode, the optical zoom cannot be used. For zoom shooting methods, refer
to the “Camera Body User Guide”.1
Caution ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• You can shoot close-ups using the zoom macro within the following
distances.
Approx. 1cm
(from the front of the lens)
Shooting range: Approx. 17×13mm
(when digital zoom is not used)
Shooting range: Approx. 4.4×3.3mm
(when 4.0× digital zoom is used)
• When [Picture Quality/Size] is set to 4:3 for [L], you can also set [Digital
Zoom Image] to [Auto Resize], and auto resize zoom will be activated.
(GP. 24)1
Settings
Shooting Menu Settings in [Zoom Macro] Mode
When [Zoom Macro] is selected, items from the shooting menu that can be
set and default values are as follows.
Item Default setting
Picture Quality/Size L 4:3 NORMAL
Focus AF
Pre-AF Off
Exposure Metering Multi
Image Settings Standard
Continuous Mode Off
Auto Bracket Off
Flash Exposure Compensation 0.01
Item Default setting
Manual Flash Amount 1/2
Flash Synchro Settings 1st Curtain
Noise Reduction Off
Noise Reduction ISO Over ISO 401
Distortion Correction Off
Custom Self-Timer 2 Pics, 5 seconds
Date Imprint Off
Exposure Compensation 0.0
White Balance Multi-P AUTO
ISO Setting Auto
Camera Shake Correction On1
[Picture Quality/Size] Setting (Shooting Menu)
The following picture quality, image size and aspect ratio options are
available for the [Picture Quality/Size] setting in the shooting menu.
A photograph‘s file size will depend on the combination of picture quality
and image size used. When recording movies, you can select the movie size.0
Photographs
Item Aspect ratio Compression Image size (pixels)
RAW 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
3648×2048
4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
3648×2736
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
3648×2432
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
2736×2736
L (Large) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 3648×2048
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3648×2736
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 3648×2432
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2736×2736
M (Middle) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 3264×1840
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3264×2448
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 3264×2176
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2448×24481
Item Aspect ratio Compression Image size (pixels)
5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944
3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536
1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960
VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480
*1 When [RAW] is selected, this is the setting used for the JPEG copy.
*2 Depending on the area photographed, black bands may appear on the top and bottom
of the picture display.
*3 Depending on the area photographed, black bands may appear at the right and left sides
of the picture display.
Movies
Item Movie size
VGA640 640×480
QVGA320 320×240
[ISO Setting] Setting (Shooting Menu)
• When [Auto] is selected and the flash is used, the sensitivity used will
gain up to ISO400 equivalent.
• When [Auto] is selected and the flash is not used, the range of the
sensitivity used will be as follows.
Picture size (pixels) Default Minimum Maximum
RAW 100 100 200
L 100 100 200
M 100 100 200
5M 100 100 200
3M 100 100 200
1M 100 100 238
VGA 100 100 283
[Camera Shake Correction] Setting (Shooting Menu)
Turning ON [Camera Shake Correction] minimizes blurring due to camera
shake.
When camera shake correction is activated, the E symbol appears on the
screen.
[Reg. My Settings] (Key Custom Options)
In [Reg. My Settings], you can also set [Step Zoom] options in the setup tab.
For other options available, refer to the “Camera Body User Guide”.
[Set Fn1 Button]/[Set Fn2 Button] (Key Custom Options)
• [Step Zoom] can be assigned to the Fn1/Fn2 buttons.
• [AF/Snap], [WB Correction], and [Step Zoom] is not available by pressing
the Fn1/Fn2 buttons if the scene mode is set to [Zoom Macro].
[Digital Zoom Image] Setting (Setup)
The size of the recorded image varies depending on the auto resize zoom,
as follows.
Zoom ratio Image size (pixels) Zoom ratio Image size (pixels)
Approx. 1.0× L Approx. 1.8× 3M
Approx. 1.1× M Approx. 2.9× 1M
Approx. 1.4× 5M Approx. 5.7× VGA
[Step Zoom] Setting (Setup)
If [Step Zoom] is set to ON, the focal length for zoom is fixed at five steps
(equivalent to 24 mm, 28 mm, 35 mm, 50 mm, and 72 mm*). * Equivalent to
that on a 35-mm camera.
Notes-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Zoom focal lengths for when a wide conversion lens is attached to the
camera are equivalent to 19 mm, 22 mm, 27 mm, 39 mm, and 57 mm.
• Zoom focal lengths for when a tele conversion lens is attached to the
camera are equivalent to 45 mm, 53 mm, 65 mm, 93 mm, and 135 mm.
However, if zooming is performed at a focal length other than 135 mm
(telephoto side), mechanical vignetting (a phenomenon in which the
four corners of an image become dark) may occur in the periphery of the
image.
[Conversion Lens] Setting (Setup)
In [Conversion Lens] settings, you can set whether to use either of an
optional wide conversion lens (DW-6) or tele conversion lens (TC-1).
Available Settings Description
Off Even when a conversion lens is attached to the
camera, the camera will not be recognize it as an
attached conversion lens.
WIDE [DW-6] When a conversion lens is attached to the
camera, it will be recognized as a wide
conversion lens (DW-6).
TELE [TC-1] When a conversion lens is attached to the
camera, it will be recognized as a tele conversion
lens (TC-1).
Available Settings Description
Lens Attached
*Default setting
The conversion lens type selection screen always
appears at the following times. This is useful
when frequently using both the DW-6 and TC-1
lenses.
• When the camera is turned on with a conversion
lens attached
• When the conversion lens is attached to the
camera
When [WIDE[DW-6]] or [TELE[TC-1]] is selected:
When the power is turned on with a conversion lens attached, or when a
conversion lens is attached, a symbol indicating the conversion lens type
is displayed momentarily at the center of the picture display, and then a
smaller symbol is displayed at the lower right of the picture display.
When [Lens Attached] is selected:
When the power is turned on with a conversion lens attached, or when a
conversion lens is attached, the conversion lens type selection screen will
display. Press the Fn1/Fn2 buttons to select the desired setting and then
press the MENU/OK button. A symbol indicating the conversion lens type
is displayed momentarily at the center of the picture display, and then a
smaller symbol is displayed at the lower right of the picture display.
Caution ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• When [Conversion Lens] is set to [TELE[TC-1]], even if the wide conversion
lens (DW-6) is attached, the camera will recognize the attached lens as
the tele conversion lens (TC-1). In addition, the opposite will be the same.
• When a lens with a different [Conversion Lens] setting is attached,
shooting functions will not operate properly.
Specifications
Specifications are given for the camera unit mounted on a GXR body.
Effective pixels Approximately 10.0 million
Image sensor 1/1.7" CCD (total pixels: approx. 10.4 million)
Lens Focal length 5.1mm to 15.3mm (35-mm format equivalent: 24mm to
72mm)
Aperture
(f-number)
f/2.5– f/4.4
Focus range
(from lens)
Normal shooting: Approx. 30cm to 8 (wide angle/telephoto
end)
Macro shooting: Approx. 1cm to 8 (wide angle/zoom macro);
approx. 4cm to 8 (telephoto end)
Construction 11 elements in 7 groups (4 aspherical lens elements with 4
surfaces)
Zoom 3.0× optical zoom; 4.0× digital zoom; approx. 5.7× auto resize
zoom (VGA)0
Focus mode CCD-based multi and spot AF; MF; Snap; 8 (focus lock and
AF-assist)
Shutter
speed
Photographs 1/2000–180s (upper and lower limits vary according to
shooting and flash mode)
Movies 1/30–1/2000s
Exposure
control
Metering TTL-CCD metering in multi (256-segment), center-weighted,
and spot modes with autoexposure lock
Mode Program AE, aperture priority AE, manual exposure, shutter
priority AE, move target function
Exposure
compensation
Manual (+4.0 to -4.0EV in increments 1/3EV or 1/2EV), auto
bracketing (-2EV to +2EV in increments 1/3EV or 1/2EV)
ISO sensitivity
(Standard Output Sensitivity)
Auto, Auto-Hi, ISO 100, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600,
ISO 3200
White balance Auto, Multi-P AUTO, Outdoors, Cloudy, Incandescent Lamp,
Fluorescent Lamp, Manual Settings, Detail; white balance
bracketing
Flash Range
(built-in flash)
Approx. 20cm–4.5m (wide-angle),
Approx. 15cm–2.7m (telephoto)1
Shooting mode Auto, program shift, aperture priority, shutter priority, manual,
scene (movie, portrait, sports, landscape, nightscape, skew
correction, zoom macro), “My Settings”
Continuous
mode
Number of
pictures shot
in Continuous
(Picture Size:
RAW)
Noise Reduction off: 5 pictures,
Noise Reduction off: 4 pictures, (ISO sensitivity: ISO 800, ISO
1600, ISO 3200)
Noise Reduction on (Weak or Strong): 4 pictures
Number of
pictures shot
in M-Cont Plus
(1 set)
HI (640×480) : 30 pictures (30 Frames/Sec),
LO (3648×2736) : 15 pictures (1.6 Frames/Sec)
Compression*1
FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2
Image size
(pixels)
Photographs 3648×2048, 3648×2736, 3648×2432, 2736×2736,
3264×1840, 3264×2448, 3264×2176, 2448×2448,
2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480
Movies 640×480, 320×240
File size
(approx.)
RAW 16:9 NORMAL: 12,923KB/frame, FINE: 14,160KB/frame,
VGA: 11,347KB/frame
4:3 NORMAL: 17,202KB/frame, FINE: 18,854KB/frame,
VGA: 15,096KB/frame
3:2 NORMAL: 15,311KB/frame, FINE: 16,779KB/frame,
VGA: 13,439KB/frame
1:1 NORMAL: 12,956KB/frame, FINE: 14,195KB/frame,
VGA: 11,377KB/frame
File size
(approx.)
L 16:9 NORMAL: 1,630KB/frame, FINE: 2,779KB/frame
4:3 NORMAL: 2,169KB/frame, FINE: 3,704KB/frame
3:2 NORMAL: 1,930KB/frame, FINE: 3,295KB/frame
1:1 NORMAL: 1,633KB/frame, FINE: 2,784KB/frame
M 16:9 NORMAL: 1,329KB/frame, FINE: 2,253KB/frame
4:3 NORMAL: 1,761KB/frame, FINE: 2,990KB/frame
3:2 NORMAL: 1,567KB/frame, FINE: 2,660KB/frame
1:1 NORMAL: 1,327KB/frame, FINE: 2,248KB/frame
5M 4:3 FINE: 2,287KB/frame
3M 4:3 FINE: 1,474KB/frame
1M 4:3 FINE: 812KB/frame
VGA 4:3 FINE: 197KB/frame
Battery life
(based on CIPA standard)
DB-90: approx. 410 shots *3
Dimensions (W×H×D) Camera unit only:
68.7mm×57.9mm×38.6mm (excluding projections)
When mounted on the camera body:
113.9mm×70.2mm×44.4mm (excluding projections)
Weight (approx.) Camera unit only: 161g (not including the lens cap or
connector cap)
When mounted on the camera body: 325g (not including the
battery, memory card, neck strap, connector cap, or lens cap)
Operating temperature 0°C to 40°C
Operating humidity 85% or less
Storage temperature –20°C to 60°C
*1 The options available vary with image size.
*2 A JPEG file is also recorded (the JPEG file may be a FINE- or NORMAL-quality file with
the dimensions as the RAW file or a VGA file 640×480 pixels in size). RAW files use the
standard DNG format promoted by Adobe Systems, Inc.
*3 For reference only; actual number of shots varies greatly according to how camera is
used. We recommend that you carry spare batteries when in use for extended periods.
Internal Memory/Memory Card Capacity
The following values are given as a reference of the storage capacity of the
internal memory and memory cards of various sizes, by picture quality and
image size, when using the FINE picture quality.
Photographs
Compression
Image size
(pixels)
Internal
memory
1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
RAW*
FINE
3648×2048 6 68 138 272 556 1115 2237
3648×2736 4 51 104 204 418 837 1680
3648×2432 5 57 117 229 469 941 1888
2736×2736 6 68 138 271 555 1113 2232
L
FINE
3648×2048 29 323 653 1284 2624 5257 10546
3648×2736 22 242 497 965 1973 3953 7930
3648×2432 24 272 553 1087 2222 4452 8930
2736×2736 29 323 653 1284 2624 5257 10546
Compression
Image size
(pixels)
Internal
memory
1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
M
FINE
3264×1840 36 397 808 1588 3245 6502 13043
3264×2448 27 300 608 1195 2442 4893 9815
3264×2176 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014
2448×2448 36 400 808 1588 3245 6502 13043
5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238
3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063
1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181
VGA/FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581
* When [RAW] is selected, this is the compression used for the JPEG copy.
Movies
Image size (pixels) Internal memory 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
640×480
30 frames/second
49sec. 8min.
55sec.
18min.
8sec.
37min.
18sec.
72min.
50sec.
145min.
54sec.
292min.
41sec.
320×240
30 frames/second
1min.
59sec.
21min.
39sec.
44min.
2sec.
90min.
33sec.
176min.
44sec.
354min.
3sec.
710min.
13sec.
Appendices
Optional Accessories
The RICOH LENS can be used with the items (sold separately) listed below.
Lens Cap (LC-2)
Hood & Adapter (HA-3)
Includes a hood to protect the lens from sunlight and an
adapter for f43-mm general-use filters. These can be used to
enhance the shooting quality when the subject is backlit.
Wide Conversion Lens (DW-6)
A wide conversion lens that enables wide-angle shooting
at a lens magnification of 0.79× (equivalent to a 19-mm
wide-angle lens on a 35-mm camera). Use with the hood and
adapter (case included).
Tele Conversion Lens (TC-1)
A tele conversion lens that enables telephoto shooting
at a lens magnification of 1.88× (equivalent to a 135-mm
telephoto lens on a 35-mm camera). Use with the hood and
adapter (case included).
Before using an optional accessory, see the documentation that came with the
product.
The built-in flash of the camera body can not be used with wide conversion
lenses or lens hoods.
For the latest information on optional accessories, visit the Ricoh website
(http://www.ricohpmmc.com/).
•
•
•
Removing/attaching the ring cap -------------------------------------------------
Remove the ring cap when using the wide conversion lens, tele conversion
lens, self retaining lens cap or hood & adapter.
Removing the ring cap
With the ring cap removal button pressed,
turn the ring cap counterclockwise while
the camera is turned off and remove from
the camera body.
Attaching the ring cap
With the camera turned off, align the
marking on the ring cap (2) with the
marking on the camera body (1) and turn
the ring cap clockwise until it clicks.
2 10
Precautions for Use
• The warranty supplied with this product is only valid within the country of purchase.
• Should the product fail or malfunction while out of the country, the manufacturer
assumes no responsibility for servicing the product locally or bearing any
expenditure incurred thereby.
• Do not drop the equipment or subject it to physical shocks.
• When carrying the equipment, be careful that it does not strike other objects.
Particular care is required to protect the lens.
• Abrupt changes in temperature may cause condensation, resulting in visible
condensation inside the lens or malfunction of the equipment. This can be avoided
by placing the equipment in a plastic bag to slow the temperature change, and
removing it only after the air in the bag has reached the same temperature its
surroundings.
• Keep the equipment dry and avoid handling it with wet hands. Failure to observe
these precautions could result in malfunction of the equipment or electric shock.
• Keep the connector clean.
Tip: Avoiding Condensation --------------------------------------------------------
Condensation is particularly likely to occur if you move to an area with a
sharply different temperature, if humidity is high, in a cold room after the
heater has come on, or where the camera is exposed to cold air from an air
conditioner or other device.1
Equipment Care and Storage
Caring for the Equipment
• Photographs can be affected by fingerprints and other foreign matter on the
lens. Avoid touching the lens with your fingers. Remove dust or lint with a
blower from a camera supply store, or gently clean the lens with a soft, dry
cloth.
• Clean the equipment thoroughly after using it at the beach or handling
cosmetics. Do not expose the equipment to volatile substances such as
thinner, benzene, or pesticides. Failure to observe this precaution could result
in damage to the equipment or its finish.
• In the unlikely event of malfunction, visit a Ricoh Repair Center.
• This equipment is a high precision device. Do not disassemble.
Storage
Do not store the camera where it will be exposed to: extreme heat or humidity;
large changes in temperature or humidity; dust, dirt, or sand; severe vibration;
prolonged contact with chemicals, including mothballs and other insect
repellent, or with vinyl or rubber products; strong magnetic fields (for example,
in the vicinity of a monitor, transformer, or magnet).
Warranty and Servicing
1. This product is backed by a limited warranty. During the warranty period
mentioned in the Warranty supplied with your equipment, any defective
parts will be repaired free of charge. In the event of equipment malfunction,
contact the dealer from which you purchased the equipment or your nearest
Ricoh Repair Center. Please note that you will not be reimbursed for the cost of
bringing the equipment to the Ricoh Repair Center.
2. This warranty does not cover any damage resulting from:
1 failure to follow the instructions in the instruction manual;
2 repair, modification or overhaul not conducted by an authorized service
center listed in the instruction manual;
3 fire, natural disaster, act of God, lightning, abnormal voltage, etc.;
4 improper storage (noted in the “Camera Body User Guide”), leaking
of battery and other fluids, mold, or otherwise insufficient care of the
equipment.
5 submergence in water (flooding), exposure to alcohol or other beverages,
infiltration of sand or mud, physical shock, dropping of the equipment, or
pressure on the equipment, and other unnatural causes.
3. After the warranty period has passed, you will be liable for all repair fees,
including those incurred at an authorized service center.
4. You will be liable for all repair fees, even within the warranty period, if the
warranty card is not attached or if the distributor’s name or the purchase date
have been changed or are not indicated on the card.
5. Expenses for overhaul and thorough inspection by special request of the
customer will be charged to the customer, whether or not they are incurred
during the warranty period.
6. Any consequential damages arising from failure of the equipment, such as
expenses incurred in taking pictures or loss of expected profit, will not be
reimbursed whether they occur during the warranty period or not.
7. The warranty is only valid in the country in which the equipment was
purchased.
* The above provisions refer to repairs offered free of charge, and do not limit
your legal rights.
* The intention of the above provisions is also described in the warranty card
provided with this equipment.
8. Parts essential to the servicing of the equipment (that is, components required
to maintain the functions and quality of the equipment) will be available for a
period of five years after the equipment is discontinued.
9. Please note that if the equipment is seriously damaged by flooding,
submergence, infiltration of sand or mud, violent shocks or dropping, it may
not be repairable, and restoration to its original condition may be impossible.
Notes-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Before sending the camera in for repair, check the camera body and read
the instruction manual again to ensure proper operation.
• Some repairs require a significant amount of time to complete.
• When sending the equipment to a service center, please include a note
which describes the defective part and the problem as precisely as
possible.
• Remove all accessories not related to the problem before sending the
camera to the service center.If You Encounter a Problem with This Product
Ricoh offices
RICOH COMPANY, LTD.
3-2-3, Shin-Yokohama Kouhoku-ku, Yokohama City, Kanagawa 222-8530,
Japan
http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc
RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006, U.S.A.
1–800–22RICOH
http://www.ricoh-usa.com/
RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC)
Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY
(innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438
(außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438
http://www.ricohpmmc.com/
RICOH UK LTD. (PMMC UK)
(from within the UK) 02073 656 580
(from outside of the UK) +44 2073 656 580
RICOH FRANCE S.A.S. (PMMC FRANCE)
(à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70
(en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94
RICOH ESPANA, S.A. (PMMC SPAIN)
(desde España) 91 406 9148
(desde fuera de España) +34 91 406 9148
RICOH ITALIA S.p.A. (PMMC ITALY)
(dall’Italia) 02 696 33 451
(dall’estero) +39 02 696 33 451*L451 2971A*
Ricoh offices
RICOH ASIA PACIFIC OPERATIONS
LIMITED
21/F, One Kowloon, 1 Wang Yuen Street, Kowloon Bay, Hong Kong
Ricoh Company, Ltd.
Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo
104-8222, Japan
2009 December
EN USA GB GB AE AE
Printed in China
OBJECTIF RICOH
P10 28-300mm F3.5-5.6 VC*
Mode d’emploi
Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’objectif.
* VC signifie que cet objectif est doté de la technologie authentique Ricoh de
stabilisation d’image de correction des vibrations.
Contenu de l’emballage
Avant d’utiliser votre objectif Ricoh, vérifiez dans l’emballage qu’il ne
manque aucun des éléments listés ci-dessous.
Unité appareil photo
Le numéro de série est gravé sousl’appareil.
Capuchon de l’objectif
Est fixé à l’unité appareil photo.
? Mode d’emploi
(le présent manuel)
? Garantie
Capuchon du connecteur
Est fixé à l’unité appareil photo.
Étui souple
Introduction
Pour utiliser cet objectif, vous devez l’installer sur un boîtier d’appareil photo
compatible.
Reportez-vous au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo pour plus de détails
concernant l’utilisation des fonctions de prise de vue et de lecture et la modification
des réglages et pour prendre connaissance des consignes d’utilisation importantes. Le
présent mode d’emploi désigne l’objectif sous le nom d’unité appareil photo et détaille
les fonctions et procédures de fonctionnement uniquement disponibles lorsque l’unité
appareil photo est utilisée avec un boîtier d’appareil photo compatible. Reportez-vous
également au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo GXR.
Pour utiliser les fonctions du produit de manière optimale, lisez attentivement le
présent manuel avant utilisation. Veuillez conserver le présent manuel à portée de
main pour pouvoir vous y référer facilement.
Ricoh Co., Ltd.
Mesures de sécurité Lisez attentivement toutes les mesures de sécurité pour garantir
une utilisation sans danger.
Essais de prise de vue Faites des essais de prise de vue pour vérifier le fonctionnement correct
de l’appareil avant de prendre des photos d’événements importants.
Copyright La reproduction ou la modification de documents, de magazines
et d’autres sources sujettes aux droits d’auteur, autrement que
pour des raisons personnelles, domestiques ou limitées similaires,
est interdite sans le consentement du propriétaire des droits.
Exonération de
responsabilité
Ricoh Co., Ltd. décline toute responsabilité en cas de défaillance
de l’enregistrement ou de l’affichage des photos résultant d’un
dysfonctionnement de l’appareil.
Garantie La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans le pays
d’achat. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du
produit dans d’autres pays ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée.
Interférences radio L’utilisation de cet appareil dans le voisinage d’un autre équipement
électronique peut affecter défavorablement à la fois l’appareil photo et
l’autre dispositif. Des interférences sont notamment probables si l’appareil
est utilisé à proximité d’une radio ou d’un téléviseur. Ce problème peut
être résolu en déplaçant l’appareil aussi loin que possible de l’autre
dispositif, en réorientant l’antenne de la radio ou du téléviseur, ou encore
en branchant la radio ou le téléviseur sur une prise secteur différente.
© 2010 RICOH CO., LTD. Tous droits réservés. Cette publication ne peut être reproduite en tout ou en partie sans
l’autorisation expresse et écrite de Ricoh. Ricoh se réserve le droit de modifier le contenu de ce document à tout
moment et sans avis préalable.
Tous les efforts ont été faits pour garantir l’exactitude des informations contenues dans ce document. Dans le cas
où vous rencontreriez néanmoins une erreur ou une omission, nous vous serions reconnaissants de bien vouloir
nous en avertir à l’adresse indiquée en quatrième de couverture de ce manuel.
Mesures de sécurité
Symboles d’avertissement
Divers symboles sont utilisés tout au long de ce manuel et sur le produit
lui-même pour prévenir tout risque de blessure ou de dommage aux biens.
Ces symboles et leur signification sont détaillés ci-dessous.
Danger
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner
rapidement la mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses
si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal
suivies.
Avertissement
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner la
mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les instructions
correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies.
Attention
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner
des blessures corporelles ou des dommages aux biens si
les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal
suivies.
Exemples de signalisation d’avertissement
Le symbole vous signale des actions qui doivent être effectuées.
Le symbole vous signale des actions interdites.
Le symbole peut être combiné avec d’autres pour indiquer qu’une action
spécifique est interdite.
Exemples
= Ne pas toucher = Ne pas démonter
Prenez les précautions indiquées ci-dessous pour utiliser ce matériel en
toute sécurité.
Danger
Ne tentez pas de démonter, de réparer ou de modifier vous-même l’appareil. Les
circuits à haute tension de l’appareil vous font courir un risque de choc électrique.
Avertissement
Conservez l’appareil hors de portée des enfants.
Si le mécanisme interne de l’appareil est exposé suite à un choc ou autre type de
dommage, ne touchez aucun composant interne. Les circuits à haute tension de
l’appareil peuvent causer des chocs électriques. Retirez la batterie dès que possible,
en prenant soin d’éviter tout choc électrique ou brûlure. Apportez l’appareil au
revendeur ou au service après-vente le plus proche s’il est endommagé.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans un endroit humide car vous risqueriez de provoquer un
incendie ou de subir une décharge électrique.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil à proximité de gaz inflammables, d’essence, de benzène,
de solvant ou de substances du même type pour éviter tout risque d’explosion,
d’incendie ou de brûlure.
• N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans des lieux où son usage est limité ou interdit afin
d’éviter tout risque de catastrophe ou d’accident.
Attention
Ne laissez pas l’équipement prendre l’eau ou se mouiller. Ne l’utilisez pas non plus
avec les mains mouillées. Dans les deux cas, vous risquez de subir une décharge
électrique.
Consignes de
sécurité relatives aux
accessoires
Avant d’utiliser un produit optionnel, lisez attentivement les
instructions fournies avec ce produit.10
Contenu de l’emballage ...................................................................................... 2
Introduction .......................................................................................................... 3
Mesures de sécurité ............................................................................................. 6
Nomenclature de l’objectif...............................................................................13
Mise à jour du produit.......................................................................................14
Mise à jour du micrologiciel de l’appareil photo.....................................................14
Sélecteur plus-moins .........................................................................................17
Fonction supplémentaire du sélecteur plus-moins...............................................17
Prise de vue..........................................................................................................18
Mode P : Changement de programme.......................................................................18
A : Mode Priorité ouverture.............................................................................................20
S : Mode Priorité à l’obturation ......................................................................................20
Mode M : Exposition manuelle ......................................................................................21
Mode scène macro zoom ................................................................................................22
Table des matières11
Mode Vue double avec plage dynamique.................................................................23
Cibles multiples AF.............................................................................................................27
Cont.M + (lente) ..................................................................................................................29
Cont.M + (rapide)................................................................................................................31
Vites. cont (lente)/Vites. cont (rapide).........................................................................32
Cadrage de la mise au point...........................................................................................33
Réglage [Réduction bruit] ...............................................................................................36
Réglage de la balance des blancs.................................................................................37
Lecture..................................................................................................................38
Écran d’informations de l’unité appareil photo.......................................................38
Réglages...............................................................................................................39
Réglages du menu de prise de vue en mode [Macro zoom]..............................39
Réglages du menu de prise de vue en mode [Gamme dynamique]...............41
Réglage [Qualité image/Taille] (menu prise de vue)..............................................42
Réglage [Sensibilité ISO] (menu prise de vue) .........................................................45
Réglage [Correction du bougé] (menu prise de vue)............................................461
[Enr. Mes Réglages] (onglet des options personnalisées)....................................46
[Rég. touche Fn1]/[Rég. touche Fn2] (onglet des options personnalisées)...47
[Manette ADJ Réglage] (onglet des options personnalisées) ............................47
Réglage [Contrôle ISO direct de ADJ.]
(onglet des options personnalisées).......................................................................48
Réglage [Image zoom numérique] (onglet de configuration)...........................49
Réglage [Zoom par paliers] (onglet de configuration) .........................................49
Caractéristiques..................................................................................................50
Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire................................................................56
Annexes................................................................................................................60
Accessoires en option.......................................................................................................60
Précautions d’emploi.........................................................................................................62
Entretien et stockage de l’équipement.......................................................................63
Garantie et réparation.......................................................................................................641
Nomenclature de l’objectif
1
3
2
1 Connecteur
2 Bague d’objectif
3 Objectif1
Mise à jour du produit
Mise à jour du micrologiciel de l’appareil photo
Lorsque vous fixez pour la première fois l’unité appareil photo au boîtier de
l’appareil, la fonction de mise à jour de version démarre automatiquement
si le micrologiciel du boîtier de l’appareil doit être mis à jour. Dans ce cas,
mettez à jour le micrologiciel du boîtier de l’appareil comme suit.
Si la version du micrologiciel est déjà à jour, la fonction de mise à jour de
version ne démarre pas et vous pouvez utiliser l’objectif immédiatement.
1 Vérifiez que l’appareil photo est hors tension et fixez l’unité
appareil photo au boîtier de l’appareil.
• Pour en savoir plus sur la fixation de l’unité appareil photo, reportez-vous
au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo.1
2 Mettez l’appareil photo sous tension.
• Un message de confirmation relatif à la mise à jour du micrologiciel
s’affiche.
3 Appuyez sur les touches Fn1/Fn2 pour sélectionner [Oui], puis
appuyez sur la touche MENU/OK.
• La mise à jour du micrologiciel démarre et les messages suivants
s’affichent sur l’écran d’affichage des photos.
[Vérification du fichier de réécriture]
L’appareil photo est automatiquement mis hors tension puis sous
tension. Après le redémarrage de l’appareil photo, l’écran de version du
micrologiciel s’affiche et la mise à jour est terminée.1
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Pour confirmer la version du micrologiciel, sélectionnez [Version du
micrologiciel] dans le menu de configuration. Vous pouvez également,
avec l’appareil photo hors tension, maintenir la touche6(Lecture)
enfoncée pendant plus d’une seconde tout en maintenant la touche
– enfoncée. La version du micrologiciel s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des
photos pendant 20 secondes environ.
• Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les mises à jour du
micrologiciel, visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc).
Vous pouvez télécharger les dernières mises à jour du micrologiciel pour
mettre à jour votre équipement.1
Sélecteur plus-moins
Fonction supplémentaire du sélecteur plus-moins
Lors de la sélection du mode flash, vous pouvez aussi utiliser le sélecteur
plus-moins pour sélectionner le mode.
Lorsque le mode retardateur est sélectionné, vous pouvez aussi utiliser le
sélecteur plus-moins pour sélectionner les réglages.1
Prise de vue
Mode P : Changement de programme
Configurer le sélecteur de mode sur P (mode Changement de programme)
vous permet de sélectionner une combinaison d’ouverture de l’objectif et
de vitesse d’obturation. Si la sensibilité ISO est réglée sur [Auto] ou [AutoHi], l’appareil procède automatiquement au réglage de la sensibilité ISO
afin d’obtenir l’exposition optimale.
Le diagramme de la page suivante propose une estimation approximative
de la plage de changement pour diverses combinaisons de valeurs
d’ouverture et de vitesses d’obturation. La plage de changement varie en
fonction de la valeur d’exposition (EV). Dans cet exemple, le mode Flash est
défini sur [Flash Non] et la sensibilité ISO est définie sur [ISO100]. Pour la
plus grande valeur d’ouverture de l’objectif, l’ouverture est utilisée avec le
filtre à densité neutre.
Dans ce cas, le degré de flou de l’arrière-plan reste le même. Le degré de
flou est exprimé comme valeur d’ouverture (valeur F) même lorsqu’un filtre
à densité neutre est utilisé.1
F16
F11
F15.4
F7.0
F5.6
F3.5
F8
F5.6
F4
F2.8
F2
F1.4
F1
Ev8
Ev7
Ev6
Ev5
Ev4
Ev3
Ev2
Ev1
Ev0
2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000
Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19
: Grand angle
: Téléobjectif0
A : Mode Priorité ouverture
Configurer le sélecteur de mode sur A (mode Priorité ouverture) vous
permet de définir manuellement l’ouverture de l’objectif. Pour la plus
grande valeur d’ouverture de l’objectif, l’ouverture est utilisée avec le filtre à
densité neutre. Lorsqu’un filtre à densité neutre est utilisé, le degré de flou
de l’arrière-plan reste le même.
Le nombre d’arrêts d’ouverture possibles varie en fonction de la position
du zoom (2 arrêts à grand angle, 3 arrêts à téléobjectif). Si la sensibilité ISO
est réglée sur [Auto] ou [Auto-Hi], l’appareil procède automatiquement au
réglage de la sensibilité ISO afin d’obtenir l’exposition optimale.
S : Mode Priorité à l’obturation
Configurer le sélecteur de mode sur S (mode Priorité à l’obturation) vous
permet de définir manuellement la vitesse d’obturation. L’appareil photo
procède au réglage de la sensibilité dans la plage ISO 100 à ISO 3200 afin
d’obtenir l’exposition optimale, quels que soient les réglages de sensibilité
ISO. Pour la plus grande valeur d’ouverture de l’objectif, l’ouverture est
utilisée avec le filtre à densité neutre. Lorsqu’un filtre à densité neutre est
utilisé, le degré de flou de l’arrière-plan reste le même.1
Si le réglage [Décalage vitesse obt. auto] du menu de prise de vue est réglé
sur [Oui], l’appareil procède automatiquement au réglage de la vitesse
d’obturation afin d’obtenir la meilleure exposition lorsque celle-ci ne peut
pas être obtenue avec la vitesse d’obturation définie manuellement.
Le réglage [Décalage vitesse obt. auto] n’apparaît pas si le sélecteur de
mode est réglé sur un mode autre que S.
Mode M : Exposition manuelle
Configurer le sélecteur de mode sur M (mode Exposition manuelle) vous
permet de définir manuellement l’ouverture de l’objectif et la vitesse
d’obturation séparément.
Pour la plus grande valeur d’ouverture de l’objectif, l’ouverture est utilisée
avec le filtre à densité neutre. Lorsqu’un filtre à densité neutre est utilisé, le
degré de flou de l’arrière-plan reste le même.
Si [Auto] ou [Auto-Hi] est sélectionné pour Sensibilité ISO, la sensibilité ISO
sera fixée à 100 lorsque l’appareil photo est en mode exposition manuelle.
Si la vitesse d’obturation est définie sur 1 seconde ou plus, la sensibilité ISO
maximale possible est ISO400. La vitesse d’obturation maximale possible
est de 30 secondes.
Mode scène macro zoom
Lorsque le sélecteur de mode est placé sur SCENE, la sélection du mode
[Macro zoom] optimise automatiquement la position du zoom. Vous
pouvez ainsi prendre un sujet de plus grande taille qu’avec la prise de vue
macro normale. Le zoom optique ne peut pas être utilisé en mode macro
zoom. Pour les méthodes de prise de vue zoom, reportez-vous au « Mode
d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo ».
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Vous pouvez prendre des vues rapprochées à l’aide du mode macro zoom
conformément aux distances suivantes.
Environ 1cm
(depuis la partie avant de
l’objectif)
Plage de prise de vue : environ 19×14mm
(lorsque le zoom numérique n’est pas utilisé)
Plage de prise de vue : environ 4,8×3,6mm
(lorsque le zoom numérique 4,0× est utilisé)
• Lorsque le paramètre [Qualité image/Taille] est réglé sur 4:3 pour [L], vous
pouvez également régler le paramètre [Image zoom numérique] sur [Taille
auto], le zoom avec changement de taille automatique est alors activé.
(GP. 47)
Mode Vue double avec plage dynamique
La « plage dynamique » d’un appareil photo numérique représente la
gamme de luminosités pouvant être traitée par l’appareil.
Lorsque vous sélectionnez le mode scène [Gamme dynamique] et que
vous prenez une photo, la scène est reproduite selon une transition plus
lisse entre les zones claires et les zones sombres, vous permettant ainsi de
prendre une image plus réaliste.
Avec le mode Vue double avec
plage dynamique, deux photos
consécutives sont prises avec
des expositions différentes
et les zones avec l’exposition
appropriée sont combinées.
La durée de prise de vue de
ce mode est supérieure aux
autres modes, veillez donc à ne
pas bouger l’appareil lors de la
prise de vue. Le symboleJ
s’affiche lorsque vous appuyez
sur le déclencheur jusqu’à
mi-course.
Deux photos
consécutives
Combinées et
enregistrées
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Même si l’appareil photo est fixé à un trépied, il peut bouger lorsque vous
appuyez sur le déclencheur. Pour une stabilité maximale, il est recommandé
d’utiliser le retardateur ou un déclencheur distant à câble CA-1 (vendu
séparément).
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Cette fonction n’est pas disponible si [Qualité image/Taille] est réglé sur le
mode RAW.
• Le zoom numérique est désactivé avec cette fonction.
• Le flash est réglé sur Flash Non avec cette fonction.
• Le mode Vue double avec plage dynamique peut ne pas fonctionner si les
conditions de prise de vue sont trop claires ou trop sombres.
• La mesure [Multi] est recommandée.
• Lorsque vous prenez un sujet se déplaçant rapidement, le sujet peut être
déformé sur l’image enregistrée.
• Le clignotement des lampes fluorescentes peut apparaître sous forme
de bandes horizontales. Une lampe fluorescente peut aussi affecter les
couleurs et la luminosité.
Effet d’extension de plage dynamique
L’option [Extension de plage dynamique] dans le menu Prise de vue
propose cinq niveaux d’extension de plage dynamique : [AUTO], [Très
faible], [Faible], [Moyenne] ou [Forte]. Plus l’effet d’extension est fort, plus la
plage de luminosité pouvant être traitée par l’appareil est étendue.
Pour modifier le réglage, sélectionnez le mode scène [Gamme dynamique]
et modifiez le réglage [Extension de plage dynamique] dans le menu de
prise de vue. Après la sélection d’un réglage autre que [Auto], appuyez sur
la touche Fn2 pour afficher les [Options d’extension de plage dynamique]
à l’écran. Choisissez la plage de tonalités ayant la priorité pour la plage
dynamique étendue parmi [Lumières], [Ombres] et [Non].
Extension de plage dynamique + Prise de vue normale
Si [Oui] est sélectionné pour [+ Prise de vue normale] dans le menu Prise
de vue, l’appareil enregistre deux copies de chaque photo : une avec une
plage dynamique étendue et une autre avec une exposition normale. Les
deux copies s’affichent sur l’écran d’affichage des photos après la prise de
vue, avec la copie originale à droite et la copie avec la plage dynamique
étendue à gauche.
Pour modifier le réglage, sélectionnez le mode scène [Gamme dynamique]
et modifiez le réglage [+ Prise de vue normale] dans le menu de prise de
vue.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Les histogrammes des images s’affichent après la prise de vue. Lorsque
[Délai de validation LCD] de l’onglet de configuration est réglé sur [Garder],
l’écran de confirmation reste affiché pour que vous puissiez vérifier les
histogrammes et comparer facilement les images.
Cibles multiples AF
Lorsque vous appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course, l’appareil
photo détermine automatiquement plusieurs positions de mise au point.
Lorsque vous appuyez ensuite complètement sur le déclencheur, l’appareil
effectue un décalage entre les différentes positions de mise au point en
prenant 5 photos consécutives. Les 5 photos prises sont regroupées dans
un ensemble et enregistrées dans un même fichier MP. Cette fonction est
tout particulièrement utile pour une prise de vue en mode Téléobjectif et
en mode Macro.
Une icôneVverte s’affiche si l’appareil est capable d’effectuer la mise
au point. Si l’appareil est incapable d’effectuer la mise au point, l’icôneV
rouge clignote. Les positions de mise au point sélectionnées par l’appareil
s’affichent uniquement pendant la lecture.
* MP est un format de fichier pour l’enregistrement d’un ensemble de
photos.
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Le flash ne peut pas être utilisé.
• La fonction de correction du bougé de l’appareil ne peut pas être utilisée.
Si [Cib. multi AF] est réglé alors que la fonction de correction du bougé de
l’appareil est activée,Echange pourF.
• Cette fonction n’est pas disponible si [Qualité image/Taille] est réglé sur
[RAW].
• Si [Mode Continu] est réglé sur un réglage autre que [Non], vous pouvez
sélectionner les réglages Cibles multiples AF mais la fonction ne sera pas
utilisée.
• La prise de vue à intervalles n’est pas disponible lorsque Cibles multiples
AF est défini.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Si cette fonction est activée lorsque vous utilisez le zoom numérique,
ce dernier est désactivé et la prise de vue est effectuée selon
l’agrandissement maximum du zoom optique (10,7×).
• [Balance blancs] fonctionne selon le réglage [Auto] même si celui-ci est
réglé sur [Multi-P AUTO].
Cont.M + (lente)
Dans ce mode, l’appareil prend des photos tant que le déclencheur reste
enfoncé mais seules les 15 dernières photos (ce qui correspond environ aux
trois dernières secondes de la prise de vue) sont enregistrées pour créer un
seul fichier multi-image (MP).
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
La durée nécessaire pour enregistrer 15 photos peut augmenter si
l’éclairage est faible.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2L’appareil photo enregistre les 15 images prises pendant les 3 dernières secondes de prise de vue.
1Lorsque vous relâchez le déclencheur…0
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• La taille d’image est réglée sur 3648×2736 NORMAL.
• La date et le sens de chaque prise de vue de la séquence sont enregistrés
séparément.1
Cont.M + (rapide)
Dans ce mode, l’appareil prend des photos tant que le déclencheur reste enfoncé mais
seules les 26 dernières images (ce qui correspond environ aux 0,9 dernières secondes
de la prise de vue) sont enregistrées pour créer un seul fichier multi-image (MP).
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Lorsque vous prenez un sujet se déplaçant rapidement, le sujet peut être
déformé sur l’image enregistrée.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
2L’appareil photo enregistre les 26 images prises pendant les 0,9 dernières secondes de prise de vue.
1Lorsque vous relâchez le déclencheur…
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• La taille d’image est réglée sur 1728×1296 NORMAL.
• La date et le sens de la dernière photo de la séquence sont aussi utilisés
pour les photos restantes.
Vites. cont (lente)/Vites. cont (rapide)
120 images consécutives sont enregistrées en une seconde (Vites. cont
(rapide)) ou en deux secondes (Vites. cont (lente)).
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Lorsque vous prenez un sujet se déplaçant rapidement, le sujet peut être
déformé sur l’image enregistrée.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• La taille d’image est réglée sur 640×480 VGA.
• La date et le sens de la dernière photo de la séquence sont aussi utilisés
pour les photos restantes.
Cadrage de la mise au point
Le cadrage de la mise au point est l’une des fonctions possibles
avec le cadrage automatique. Le cadrage de la mise au point prend
automatiquement 5 vues consécutives tout en modifiant progressivement
la position de la mise au point. Vous pouvez régler l’intervalle utilisé pour
modifier la position de la mise au point.
1 Sélectionnez [Cadrage auto] dans le menu de prise de vue et
appuyez sur la touche Fn2.
2 Appuyez sur la touche +/– pour sélectionner [CADR MIS AU PT] et
appuyez sur la touche Fn2.
3 Appuyez sur les touches Fn1/Fn2 pour sélectionner l’intervalle de la
position de la mise au point et appuyez sur la touche MENU/OK.
• Le réglage est enregistré et l’affichage revient au menu de prise de vue.
4 Appuyez sur la touche MENU/OK, ou appuyez sur la touche Fn1 et
ensuite sur la touche MENU/OK.
• Le symbole s’affiche à l’écran.
5 Enfoncez le déclencheur à mi-course.
• L’appareil effectue la mise au point en fonction du réglage [Mise au point].
6 Enfoncez le déclencheur jusqu’en fin de course.
• L’appareil prend 5 photos consécutives en fonction de la position de mise
au point à l’étape 5.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Lorsque [Mise au point] est réglé sur [MF], la première photo est prise à la
position de mise au point définie sans être mesurée.
• [Balance blancs] fonctionne selon le réglage [Auto] même si celui-ci est
réglé sur [Multi-P AUTO].
• Les photos sont prises et enregistrées dans l’ordre suivant :
Position de mise
au point
Avant Centre (*) ? Arrière
Ordre de prise
de vue
2 3 1 4 5
Ordre
d’enregistrement
1 2 3 4 5
* Effectuez la mise au point à la position définie pour le réglage [Mise au
point] dans le menu de prise de vue.
• Le flash est désactivé avec cette fonction.
• Si [Mise au point] est réglé sur [Cib. multi AF], vous pouvez modifier les
réglages de cadrage de la mise au point mais la fonction ne sera pas
utilisée.
• Si [Qualité image/Taille] est réglé sur [RAW], vous pouvez modifier le
réglage de réduction du bruit mais la fonction n’est pas utilisée.
• Si [Mode Continu] est réglé sur un réglage autre que [Non], vous pouvez
modifier les réglages de cadrage de la mise au point mais la fonction ne
sera pas utilisée.
Réglage [Réduction bruit]
Cette option sélectionne la réduction de bruit lors de la prise de vue.
Choisissez entre [Non], [Auto], [Faible], [Forte] ou [MAX]. La durée
nécessaire pour enregistrer les images varie selon l’option sélectionnée.
Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonction pour prendre des photographies
lorsque le mode scène est réglé sur un mode autre que [Portrait], [Sports]
ou [Correction biais].
Réglage de la balance des blancs
Cet objectif vous permet de définir la balance des blancs sur [Incandescent
1] ou [Incandescent 2].
Utilisez le réglage [Incandescent 1] ou [Incandescent 2] lorsque vous prenez
des photos sous une lumière incandescente. Le réglage [Incandescent 2],
par rapport à [Incandescent 1], donne une teinte légèrement rougeâtre.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Avec [Incandescent 2], vous pouvez obtenir les mêmes densités de couleur
qu’avec le réglage [Incandescent] décrit dans le Mode d’emploi du boîtier
de l’appareil photo.
Lecture
Écran d’informations de l’unité appareil photo
L’information [A12], [S10] ou [P10] correspondante à chaque unité appareil
photo s’affiche sur l’écran d’informations détaillées et dans le fichier Exif.
Réglages
Réglages du menu de prise de vue en mode [Macro zoom]
Lorsque le paramètre [Macro zoom] est sélectionné, les rubriques du menu de
prise de vue qui peuvent être définies et les valeurs par défaut sont les suivantes.
Paramètre Réglage par défaut
Qualité image/Taille L 4:3 NORMAL
Mise au point AF
Pré AF Non
Mesure exposition Multi
Réglages image Standard
Mode continu Non
Cadrage auto Non
Correction exposition flash 0.00
Paramètre Réglage par défaut
Niveau de flash manuel 1/2
Réglage synchro du flash 1er rideau
Réduction bruit Non
Réduction bruit ISO > à ISO 401
Correction distorsion Non
Retardateur personnalisé 2 img, 5 secondes
Horodatage Non
Correction de l’exposition 0.0
Balance blancs Multi-P AUTO
Sensibilité ISO Auto
Correction du bougé Oui1
Réglages du menu de prise de vue en mode [Gamme dynamique]
Lorsque le paramètre [Gamme dynamique] est sélectionné, les éléments du menu
de prise de vue qui peuvent être définis et les valeurs par défaut sont les suivants.
Paramètre Réglage par défaut
Qualité image/Taille L 4:3 NORMAL
Mise au point AF Multi
Dist. mise au pt snap 2,5m
Instantané par pression Oui
Pré AF Non
Mesure exposition Multi
Réglages image Standard
Réduction bruit Non
Réduction bruit ISO > à ISO 401
Correction distorsion Non
Retardateur personnalisé 2 img, 5 secondes
Horodatage Non
Paramètre Réglage par défaut
Correction de l’exposition 0.0
Balance blancs Multi-P AUTO
Compensation balance blancs A:0, G:0
Sensibilité ISO Auto
Correction du bougé Oui
Extension de plage dynamique Auto
+ Prise de vue normale Non
Réglage [Qualité image/Taille] (menu prise de vue)
Les options de qualité de l’image, de taille de l’image et de rapport
d’affichage suivantes sont disponibles pour le réglage [Qualité image/Taille]
du menu de prise de vue.
La taille du fichier des photos dépend de l’association qualité de l’image/
taille de l’image utilisée. Lors de l’enregistrement de vidéos, vous pouvez
sélectionner la taille de la vidéo.
Photos
Paramètre Rapport d’affichage Compression Taille de l’image (pixels)
RAW 16:9*
2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*
1
3648×2048
4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*
1
3648×2736
3:2*
2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*
1
3648×2432
1:1*
3
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*
1
2736×2736
L (Large) 16:9*
2
FINE/NORMAL 3648×2048
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3648×2736
3:2*
2
FINE/NORMAL 3648×2432
1:1*
3
FINE/NORMAL 2736×2736
M (Middle) 16:9*
2
FINE/NORMAL 3264×1840
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3264×2448
3:2*
2
FINE/NORMAL 3264×2176
1:1*
3
FINE/NORMAL 2448×2448
Paramètre Rapport d’affichage Compression Taille de l’image (pixels)
5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944
3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536
1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960
VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480
*1 Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit du réglage utilisé pour la copie JPEG.
*2 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent en haut
et en bas de l’affichage de la photo.
*3 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent sur le
côté droit et sur le côté gauche de l’affichage de la photo.
Vidéos
Paramètre Taille vidéo
HD1280 1280×720
VGA640 640×480
QVGA320 320×240
Réglage [Sensibilité ISO] (menu prise de vue)
Lorsque l’option [Auto] est sélectionnée et que le flash n’est pas utilisé, la
plage de sensibilité utilisée est la suivante.
Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Défaut Minimum Maximum
RAW 100 100 200
L 100 100 200
M 100 100 200
5M 100 100 200
3M 100 100 200
1M 100 100 238
VGA 100 100 283
• Lorsque l’option [Auto] est sélectionnée et que le flash est utilisé, la
sensibilité utilisée devient équivalente à la sensibilité ISO400.
Réglage [Correction du bougé] (menu prise de vue)
Si [Correction du bougé] est réglé sur [Oui], les effets de flous dus au
mouvement de l’appareil photo sont limités.
Lorsque la correction du bougé de l’appareil est activée, le symboleE
apparaît à l’écran.
[Enr. Mes Réglages] (onglet des options personnalisées)
Sous [Enr. Mes Réglages], vous pouvez aussi définir les options de [Zoom
par paliers] et [Position du zoom] de l’onglet de configuration. Pour les
autres options disponibles, reportez-vous au « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de
l’appareil photo ».
[Rég. touche Fn1]/[Rég. touche Fn2]
(onglet des options personnalisées)
• Les options [Zoom par paliers] et [AF/Cib.mult.AF] peuvent être
assignées aux touches Fn1/Fn2.
• [AF/Snap], [Correction WB], [Zoom par paliers] et [AF/Cib.mult.AF] ne sont pas
disponibles en appuyant sur les touches Fn1/Fn2 si le mode scène est réglé sur
[Macro zoom].
• Lorsque le mode scène est réglé sur [Gamme dynamique], les fonctions
suivantes ne sont pas disponibles même si vous appuyez sur la touche
Fn1 ou Fn2 : [JPEGBRAW], [Mode Continu], [Cadrage auto], [Correct.
flash.], [Niveau flash], [Zoom par paliers] et [AF/Cib.mult.AF].
[Manette ADJ Réglage] (onglet des options personnalisées)
Lorsque le mode scène est réglé sur [Gamme dynamique], les réglages
enregistrés sous [Manette ADJ Réglage] sont [Correction de l’exposition] et
[Balance blancs]. Les réglages disponibles ne peuvent pas être modifiés.
Réglage [Contrôle ISO direct de ADJ.]
(onglet des options personnalisées)
Si l’option [Contrôle ISO direct de ADJ.] dans l’onglet des options
personnalisées est réglée sur [Oui], vous pouvez écarter latéralement le
levier ADJ. lorsque la prise de vue permet de modifier la sensibilité ISO.
L’appareil est réglé par défaut sur [Non] lors de l’achat.
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• La manette ADJ. peut être utilisée pour ajuster la sensibilité lorsque
le déclencheur est enfoncé à mi-course en modes Changement de
programme et Priorité ouverture (en mode Changement de programme,
la sensibilité peut être ajustée, même après avoir relâché le déclencheur,
tant que l’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation s’affichent). Notez qu’une
fois la sensibilité ajustée de cette manière, [Auto] et [Auto-Hi] ne peuvent
pas être sélectionnés de nouveau.
• En mode de priorité à l’obturation ou d’exposition manuelle, vous ne
pouvez pas utiliser le levier ADJ. pour modifier la sensibilité ISO.
Réglage [Image zoom numérique] (onglet de configuration)
La taille de l’image enregistrée varie en fonction du zoom de
redimensionnement automatique, de la manière suivante.
Rapport de zoom
Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Rapport de zoom
Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Environ 1,0× L Environ 1,8× 3M
Environ 1,1× M Environ 2,9× 1M
Environ 1,4× 5M Environ 5,7× VGA
Réglage [Zoom par paliers] (onglet de configuration)
Si l’option [Zoom par paliers] est réglée sur [Oui], il existe huit niveaux de
distance focale pour le zoom (équivalents à 28 mm, 35 mm, 50 mm, 85 mm,
105 mm, 135 mm, 200 mm et 300 mm*). * Équivalents aux distances d’un
appareil photo 35 mm.0
Caractéristiques
Les caractéristiques correspondent à l’unité appareil photo installée sur un boîtier GXR.
Pixels réels Environ 10,0 millions
Capteur d’image Capteur CMOS 1/2,3" (nombre total de pixels : environ 10,6
millions)
Objectif Distance focale De 4,9mm à 52,5mm (format 35 mm équivalent : de 28mm
à 300mm)
Ouverture
(nombre f)
f/3,5– f/5,6
Plage mise au
point
(de l’objectif)
Prise de vue normale : environ 30cm à 8 (grand angle) ;
environ 150 cm à 8 (téléobjectif)
Prise de vue macro : environ 1cm à 8 (grand angle/macro zoom) ;
environ 27cm à 8 (téléobjectif)
Construction 10 éléments en 7 groupes (4 objectifs asphériques avec 5 surfaces)
Zoom 10,7× zoom optique; zoom numérique 4,0× (2,8×
pour les vidéos, images haute définition) ; zoom de
redimensionnement automatique environ 5,7× (VGA)1
Mode mise au point AF Multi ; AF Spot ; MF : Snap ; 8 ; Cib. multi AF (lumière AF
auxiliaire et cadrage de la mise au point disponibles)
Vitesse
d’obturation
Photos 1/2000–30s (les limites inférieures et supérieures varient en
fonction du mode prise de vue et flash)
Vidéos 1/30–1/2000s
Contrôle
exposition
Mesure Mesure multiple (256 segments), mesure centrale pondérée,
mesure spot (mesure TTL avec verrouillage AE)
Mode Programme AE, priorité à l’ouverture AE, exposition manuelle,
priorité à l’obturation AE, fonction de décalage de la cible
Correction de
l’exposition
Manuelle (+4,0 à –4,0EV par incrément de 1/3EV ou 1/2EV), cadrage
automatique (–2EV à +2EV par incrément de 1/3EV ou 1/2EV)
Portée du lien d’exposition
(mode prise de vue
automatique, mesure
centrale pondérée de la
lumière)
Arrêt à grand angle : 3,2 EV à 16,2 EV ; arrêt à téléobjectifs :
4,6 EV à 18,4 EV (portée du lien pour une sensibilité ISO
automatique convertie en fonction de la valeur EV pour
ISO100)
• Lors de la prise de vue avec des valeurs proches de 6,0 EV
ou inférieures, pour chaque réduction de la portée du lien
d’exposition de 1,0 EV, l’appareil photo modifie le réglage
de 0,25 EV vers une luminosité plus faible. Le changement
maximum possible est de 1,0 EV.
Sensibilité ISO (sensibilité
sortie standard)
Auto, Auto-Hi, ISO 100, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600,
ISO 3200
Balance des blancs Auto, Multi-P AUTO, En extérieur, Nuageux, Incandescente1,
Incandescente2, Lampe fluorescente, Réglage manuel, Détail ;
cadrage auto balance des blancs
Flash Portée (flash
intégré)
Environ 0,2m - 4,0m (grand angle),
Environ 0,27m - 2,5m (téléobjectif)
Mode prise de vue Auto, changement de programme, priorité à l’ouverture,
priorité à l’obturation, manuel, scène (vidéo, portrait, sports,
paysage, nuit, correction biais, double prise de vue à gamme
dynamique, macro zoom), « Mes Réglages »
Mode
continu
Nombre de
photos prises à
l’aide de l’option
Continu (Taille
d’image : RAW)
Réduction du bruit désactivée : 5 photos,
Réduction du bruit activée (Faible, Forte ou MAX) : 4 photos
Nombre de
photos prises
à l’aide de
l’option Cont.M
+ (un ensemble)
Len (3648×2736) : 15 photos (5 images/s),
Rap (1728×1296) : 26 photos (30 images/s)
Mode
continu
Nombre de
photos prises à
l’aide de l’option
Vites. Cont (un
ensemble)
Len (640×480) : 120 photos (60 images/s),
Rap (640×480) : 120 photos (120 images/s)
Compression*1
FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2
Taille de
l’image
(pixels)
Photos 3648×2048, 3648×2736, 3648×2432, 2736×2736,
3264×1840, 3264×2448, 3264×2176, 2448×2448,
2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480
Vidéos 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240
Taille fichier
(approximative)
RAW 16:9 NORMAL : 13.053Ko/image, FINE : 14.289Ko/image,
VGA : 11.477 Ko/image
4:3 NORMAL : 17.332Ko/image, FINE : 18.984Ko/image,
VGA : 15.226 Ko/image
3:2 NORMAL : 15.440Ko/image, FINE : 16.909Ko/image,
VGA : 13.568 Ko/image
1:1 NORMAL : 13.053Ko/image, FINE : 14.292Ko/image,
VGA : 11.474 Ko/image
Taille fichier
(approximative)
L 16:9 NORMAL : 1 630Ko/image, FINE : 2 779Ko/image
4:3 NORMAL : 2 169Ko/image, FINE : 3 705Ko/image
3:2 NORMAL : 1 931Ko/image, FINE : 3 295Ko/image
1:1 NORMAL : 1 633Ko/image, FINE : 2 785Ko/image
M 16:9 NORMAL : 1 330Ko/image, FINE : 2 254Ko/image
4:3 NORMAL : 1 761Ko/image, FINE : 2 990Ko/image
3:2 NORMAL : 1 568Ko/image, FINE : 2 660Ko/image
1:1 NORMAL : 1 327Ko/image, FINE : 2 249Ko/image
5M 4:3 FINE : 2 288Ko/image
3M 4:3 FINE : 1 474Ko/image
1M 4:3 FINE : 813Ko/image
VGA 4:3 FINE : 197Ko/image
Longévité batterie DB-90 : environ 440 prises de vue*3
(basée sur norme CIPA)
Dimensions (L×H×P) Unité appareil photo uniquement :
68,7mm×57,9mm×44mm (Basé sur la directive CIPA)
Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo :
113,9mm×70,2mm×49,8mm (Basé sur la directive CIPA)
Poids (approximatif) Unité appareil photo uniquement : 160g (capuchon de
l’objectif et capuchon du connecteur non inclus)
Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo : 367g
(capuchon de l’objectif, batterie et carte mémoire SD inclus)
Température fonctionnement 0°C à 40°C
Humidité fonctionnement 85% ou moins
Température stockage –20°C à 60°C
*1 Les options disponibles varient selon la taille d’image.
*2 Un fichier JPEG est également enregistré (le fichier JPEG peut être d’une qualité FINE ou
NORMAL avec les mêmes dimensions que le fichier RAW ou VGA pour une taille de 640×480
pixels). Les fichiers RAW utilisent le format standard DNG promu par Adobe Systems, Inc.
*3 Pour référence uniquement : le nombre réel de prises de vue varie énormément selon
l’utilisation de l’appareil. Nous vous recommandons d’emporter des batteries de rechange
lors d’une utilisation pendant une période prolongée.
Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire
Les valeurs suivantes sont données à titre de référence de la capacité de stockage
de la mémoire interne et de cartes mémoire de différentes tailles, en fonction de la
qualité d’image et de la taille d’image, lors de l’utilisation de la qualité d’image FINE.
Photos
Compression Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Mémoire
interne
1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go
RAW*
FINE
3648×2048 6 67 137 270 551 1105 2217
3648×2736 4 50 103 203 415 831 1688
3648×2432 5 57 116 228 466 934 1874
2736×2736 6 67 137 270 551 1105 2217
L
FINE
3648×2048 29 323 653 1284 2624 5257 10546
3648×2736 22 242 491 965 1973 3953 7930
3648×2432 24 272 553 1087 2222 4452 8930
2736×2736 29 323 653 1284 2624 5257 10546
M
FINE
3264×1840 36 397 808 1588 3245 6502 13043
3264×2448 27 300 608 1195 2442 4893 9815
3264×2176 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014
2448×2448 36 400 808 1588 3245 6502 13043
Compression Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Mémoire
interne
1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go
5M FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238
3M FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063
1M FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181
VGA FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581
* Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit du réglage utilisé pour la copie JPEG.
Mode continu
Mode continu Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Mémoire
interne
1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go
Cont.M + (lente) 3648×2736 38 414 842 1653 3379 6769 13579
Cont.M + (rapide) 1728×1296 131 1438 2926 5746 11745 23530 47202
Vites. Cont 640×480 692 7553 15359 30159 61643 123489 247716
Vidéos
Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Mémoire
interne
1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go
1280×720
30 images/seconde
16 Sec. 3 min.
3 Sec.
6 min.
14 Sec.
12 min.
14 Sec.
25 min.
1 Sec.
50 min.
7 Sec.
100 min.
33 Sec.
640×480
30 images/seconde
49 Sec. 8 min.
55 Sec.
18 min.
8 Sec.
35 min.
38 Sec.
72 min.
50 Sec.
145 min.
54 Sec.
292 min.
41 Sec.
320×240
30 images/seconde
1 min.
59 Sec.
21 min.
39 Sec.
44 min.
2 Sec.
86 min.
28 Sec.
176 min.
44 Sec.
354 min.
3 Sec.
710 min.
13 Sec.
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
La taille d’enregistrement sans interruption maximale pour une vidéo est de
4 Go. La durée maximale d’enregistrement est de 12 minutes environ pour
une taille de 1280 × 720, de 37 minutes environ pour une taille de 640 × 480
et de 90 minutes environ pour une taille de 320 × 240.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Lorsque la taille est définie sur 1280 × 720, l’utilisation de cartes mémoire
SD/SDHC de classe 6 est recommandée.0
Annexes
Accessoires en option
L’objectif RICOH peut être utilisé avec les éléments suivants (vendus séparément).
Capuchon d’objectif (LC-2)
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Les objectifs de conversion, pare-soleil et autres adaptateurs vendus
séparément ne peuvent pas être fixés à cet objectif.
• Avant d’utiliser un accessoire optionnel, consultez la documentation
fournie avec le produit.
• Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les accessoires optionnels,
visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricohpmmc.com/).1
Montage et démontage de la bague d’objectif---------------------------------
Enlevez la bague d’objectif lors de l’utilisation de la bague d’objectif en
option (LC-2).
Démontage de la bague d’objectif
Faites tourner la bague d’objectif dans le
sens inverse des aiguilles d’une montre
avec l’appareil photo hors tension, puis
retirez la bague de l’unité appareil photo.
Montage de la bague d’objectif
Une fois l’appareil hors tension, alignez
le repère sur la bague d’objectif (2) avec
le repère de l’unité appareil photo (1) et
tournez la bague d’objectif dans le sens
des aiguilles d’une montre jusqu’à ce qu’un déclic soit émis.
2 1
Précautions d’emploi
• La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans le pays d’achat.
• Dans le cas d’une panne ou d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil à l’étranger, le
fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit localement
ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée.
• Ne faites pas tomber l’équipement et évitez-lui les chocs physiques.
• Lors du transport de l’équipement, faites attention de ne pas le cogner dans d’autres
objets. Faites particulièrement attention à protéger l’objectif.
• Des changements brutaux de température peuvent provoquer de la condensation visible
dans l’objectif ou des dysfonctionnements de l’équipement. Cela peut être évité en plaçant
l’équipement dans un sac plastique pour ralentir le changement de température, puis en le
retirant une fois que l’air dans le sac a atteint la même température que l’environnement.
• Conservez l’équipement sec et évitez de le manipuler avec les mains mouillées. Le non-respect de
cette consigne peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements de l’équipement ou un choc électrique.
• Gardez le connecteur propre.
Conseil : pour éviter la condensation---------------------------------------------
La condensation se produit généralement lorsque vous vous rendez dans
un endroit avec une brusque différence de température, si l’humidité
est élevée, dans une pièce froide après que le chauffage ait été mis en
marche, ou lorsque l’appareil est exposé à de l’air froid en provenance d’un
climatiseur ou d’un autre dispositif.
Entretien et stockage de l’équipement
Entretien de l’équipement
• Les photos peuvent être altérées par des empreintes ou d’autres matières
étrangères sur l’objectif. Évitez de toucher l’objectif avec les doigts. Éliminez la
poussière ou les peluches avec un soufflant disponible dans le commerce, ou
nettoyez doucement l’objectif avec un chiffon doux et sec.
• Nettoyez soigneusement l’équipement après l’avoir utilisé à la plage ou après
avoir manipulé des produits cosmétiques. N’exposez pas l’équipement à des
substances volatiles comme du diluant, du benzène ou des pesticides. Le nonrespect de cette consigne peut endommager l’équipement ou sa finition.
• Dans l’éventualité d’un dysfonctionnement, consultez un centre de réparation
Ricoh.
• Cet équipement est un dispositif de haute précision. Ne le démontez pas.
Stockage
Ne stockez pas l’appareil photo dans un endroit sujet à : chaleur ou humidité extrême ; grands
changements de température ou d’humidité ; poussière, saleté ou sable ; fortes vibrations ;
contact prolongé avec des produits chimiques, notamment des boules de naphtaline ou d’autres
produits insecticides, ou des produits en vinyle ou en caoutchouc ; champs magnétiques
puissants (par exemple à proximité d’un moniteur, d’un transformateur ou d’un aimant).
Garantie et réparation
1. Ce produit bénéficie d’une garantie limitée. Pendant la période de garantie indiquée
sur la carte de garantie fournie avec votre équipement, toute pièce défectueuse
sera réparée gratuitement. Dans le cas d’un dysfonctionnement de l’équipement,
contactez le distributeur qui vous a vendu l’équipement ou votre centre de
réparation Ricoh le plus proche. Veuillez noter que vous ne serez pas remboursé des
frais de transport pour livrer votre équipement au centre de réparation Ricoh.
2. Cette garantie ne couvre aucun dommage résultant de :
1 non-respect des instructions du mode d’emploi ;
2 réparation, modification ou révision non réalisée par un centre de service
agréé, listé dans le mode d’emploi ;
3 incendie, sinistre, catastrophe naturelle, foudre, tension anormale, etc. ;
4 stockage inapproprié (indiqué dans le « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de
l’appareil photo »), fuite de batterie et autres fluides, moisissure ou tout
autre défaut d’entretien de l’équipement.
5 immersion dans l’eau (inondation), exposition à l’alcool ou à d’autres
boissons, infiltration de sable ou de boue, choc physique, chute ou pression
exercée sur l’équipement et autres causes non naturelles.
3. Après l’expiration de la période de garantie, tous les frais de réparation seront
à votre charge, y compris ceux d’un centre de service agréé.
4. Tous les frais de réparation seront à votre charge, même au cours de la période
de garantie, si la carte de garantie n’est pas jointe ou si le nom du distributeur
ou la date d’achat n’est pas indiqué ou a été modifié sur la carte.
5. Les frais de révision et d’inspection complète, sur demande du client, seront à
sa charge complète que la période de garantie ait expiré ou non.
6. Tout dommage consécutif à une défaillance de l’équipement, comme les frais
de prise de vue ou la perte d’un profit attendu, ne sera pas remboursé que la
période de garantie ait expiré ou non.
7. La garantie est valable uniquement dans le pays où l’équipement a été acheté.
* Les dispositions ci-dessus se réfèrent aux réparations gratuites et ne limitent
vos droits légaux.
* L’objectif des dispositions ci-dessus est également décrit sur la carte de
garantie fournie avec l’équipement.
8. Les pièces essentielles à la réparation de l’équipement (c’est-à-dire les
composants nécessaires au fonctionnement et à la qualité de l’équipement)
seront disponibles pendant une période de cinq années après l’arrêt de la
production de l’équipement.
9. Veuillez noter que si l’équipement est sérieusement endommagé par une
inondation, une immersion, une infiltration de sable ou de boue, des chocs
violents ou une chute, il peut être impossible de le réparer et la restauration de
son état originel peut être impossible.
Remarques------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Avant d’envoyer l’appareil en réparation, vérifiez le boîtier de l’appareil
photo et relisez le mode d’emploi pour garantir un fonctionnement correct.
• Certaines réparations nécessitent un certain temps d’exécution.
• Lors de l’envoi de l’équipement à un centre de réparation, veuillez inclure une note
décrivant la pièce défectueuse et le problème rencontré, aussi précisément que possible.
• Démontez tous les accessoires non associés au problème avant d’envoyer
l’appareil au centre de réparation.*L452 3972A*
En cas de problème
Bureaux Ricoh
RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V.
(EPMMC)
Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY
(innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438
(außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438
http://www.ricohpmmc.com/
RICOH FRANCE S.A.S. (PMMC FRANCE)
(à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70
(en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94
Ricoh Company, Ltd.
Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo
104-8222, Japan
2010 juillet
FR F-FR
Imprimé en Chine
RICOH-OBJEKTIV
P10 28-300mm F3.5-5.6 VC*
Bedienungsanleitung
Die Seriennummer befindet sich auf der Unterseite des Objektivs.
* VC weist darauf hin, dass diese Einheit mit der Vibrationskorrekturtechnologie
zur Bildstabilisierung versehen ist.
Packungsinhalt
Vergewissern Sie sich vor Gebrauch Ihres Ricoh-Objektivs, dass die Packung
die unten aufgeführten Teile enthält.
Kameraeinheit
Die Seriennummer befindetsich auf der Unterseite.
Objektivdeckel
Lst bei Lieferung an der Kameraeinheit befestigt.
?Bedienungsanleitung
(diese Anleitung)
? Garantie
Anschlussabdeckung
Lst bei Lieferung an der Kameraeinheit befestigt.
Beutel
Einführung
Das Objektiv ist für den Gebrauch auf ein kompatibles Kameragehäuse zu setzen.
Hinweise zu den Aufnahme- und Wiedergabefunktionen und zu Änderungen
von Einstellungen finden Sie in der Bedienungsanleitung des Kameragehäuses.
Lesen Sie bitte auch die wichtigen Vorsichtshinweise zum Gebrauch. In dieser
Bedienungsanleitung wird dieses Objektiv als die„Kameraeinheit“ bezeichnet,
und es werden Funktionen und Verfahren erläutert, die nur bei Gebrauch dieser
Kameraeinheit in Verbindung mit dem Kameragehäuse zur Verfügung stehen. Weitere
Hinweise finden Sie im GXR-Kamera-Benutzerhandbuch.
Um die Funktionen dieses Objektivs optimal nutzen zu können, lesen Sie diese
Bedienungsanleitung vor dem Gebrauch aufmerksam durch. Bewahren Sie sie dann
jederzeit griffbereit auf.
Ricoh Co., Ltd.
Sicherheitsmaßnahmen Lesen Sie alle Sicherheitsmaßnahmen sorgfältig durch, um einen
sicheren Gebrauch zu gewährleisten.
Probeaufnahmen Machen Sie Probeaufnahmen, bevor Sie bei wichtigen Anlässen fotografieren,
um sicherzugehen, dass die Kamera ordnungsgemäß funktioniert.
Copyright Die Wiedergabe oder Veränderung von urheberrechtlich
geschützten Dokumenten, Zeitschriften und anderem Material
ohne die Zustimmung des Urheberrechtsinhabers ist ausschließlich
für den privaten, Heim- oder ähnlichen Gebrauch zugelassen.
Haftungsausschluss Ricoh Co., Ltd. übernimmt keine Haftung für Fehler bei der Aufnahme
oder Wiedergabe von Bildern aufgrund einer Fehlfunktion des Produkts.
Garantie Die mitgelieferte Garantie ist nur im jeweiligen Kaufland gültig.
Der Hersteller übernimmt keine Verantwortung für die Wartung
des Produkts in anderen Ländern oder für die Übernahme von
hierdurch entstandenen Kosten.
Funkstörung Der Betrieb dieses Produkts in der Nähe von anderen elektronischen
Geräten kann sowohl die Kamera also auch das andere Gerät nachteilig
beeinflussen. Störungen sind besonders wahrscheinlich, wenn die Kamera
in der Nähe eines Radios oder Fernsehers verwendet wird. Dies kann
behoben werden, indem Sie die Kamera so weit wie möglich vom anderen
Gerät entfernen, die Radio- oder Fernsehantenne anders ausrichten oder
das Radio oder den Fernseher an einer anderen Steckdose anschließen.
© 2010 RICOH CO., LTD. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Diese Herausgabe darf nicht, vollständig oder teilweise, ohne
ausdrückliche schriftliche Genehmigung von Ricoh vervielfältigt werden. Ricoh behält sich das Recht vor, den
Inhalt dieses Dokuments jederzeit und ohne vorherige Ankündigung zu verändern.
Es wurde höchste Sorgfalt auf die Genauigkeit der Informationen in diesem Dokument gelegt. Sollten Sie
dennoch Fehler oder Auslassungen feststellen, wären wir Ihnen sehr dankbar, wenn Sie uns unter der Adresse auf
der Rückseite dieses Buchs benachrichtigen würden.
Sicherheitsmaßnahmen
Warnsymbole
Verschiedene Symbole werden in dieser Bedienungsanleitung und auf
dem Produkt verwendet, die Sie auf die Gefahr von Verletzungen des
Benutzers und anderer Personen und die Gefahr von Sachbeschädigung
hinweisen sollen. Die Symbole und ihre Bedeutung werden im Folgenden
beschrieben.
Gefahr
Dieses Symbol kennzeichnet Punkte, die bei Missachtung oder
falscher Handhabung unmittelbar zu schweren Verletzungen oder
Tod führen können.
Warnung
Dieses Symbol kennzeichnet Punkte, die bei Missachtung oder
falscher Handhabung zu schweren Verletzungen oder Tod führen
können.
Wichtig
Dieses Symbol kennzeichnet Punkte, die bei Missachtung oder
falscher Handhabung zu Verletzungen oder Sachbeschädigung
führen können.
Warnhinweise
Das Symbol kennzeichnet Aktionen, die unbedingt ausgeführt werden müssen.
Das Symbol kennzeichnet verbotene Aktionen.
Das Symbol kann mit anderen Symbolen kombiniert werden, um darauf
hinzuweisen, dass bestimmte Handlungen verboten sind.
Beispiele
= Nicht berühren = Nicht zerlegen
Beachten Sie die folgenden Vorsichtsmaßregeln, um einen sicheren
Gebrauch dieses Gerätes zu gewährleisten.
Gefahr
Versuchen Sie nicht, das Gerät selbst zu zerlegen, zu reparieren oder zu verändern.
Die Hochspannungs-Schaltkreise im Inneren des Gerätes können einen elektrischen
Schlag verursachen.
Warnung
Bewahren Sie das Gerät außer Reichweite von Kindern auf.
Berühren Sie keine Innenteile des Gerätes, falls sie durch Fallenlassen oder
Beschädigung freigelegt werden. Die Hochspannungs-Schaltkreise im Inneren
des Gerätes können einen elektrischen Schlag verursachen. Nehmen Sie den
Akku unverzüglich heraus, und lassen Sie dabei Vorsicht walten, um elektrische
Schläge oder Verbrennungen zu vermeiden. Bringen Sie das Gerät im Falle einer
Beschädigung zu Ihrem Fachhändler oder zur nächsten Kundendienststelle.
Benutzen Sie das Gerät nicht in einer feuchten Umgebung, weil dies zu einem Brand
oder elektrischen Schlag führen könnte.
Benutzen Sie das Gerät nicht in der Nähe von brennbaren Gasen, Benzin, Benzol,
Verdünner oder ähnlichen Substanzen, weil sonst die Gefahr von Explosionen, Brand
oder Verbrennungen besteht.
• Benutzen Sie das Gerät nicht an Orten, wo der Gebrauch eingeschränkt oder
verboten ist, weil dies zu Katastrophen oder Unfällen führen kann.
Wichtig
Lassen Sie die Kameraeinheit nicht nass werden. Bedienen Sie sie auch nicht mit
nassen Händen. In beiden Fällen besteht Stromschlaggefahr.
Sicherheitswarnungen
für Sonderzubehör
Bevor Sie ein optionales Zubehör verwenden, lesen Sie sich die
mitgelieferte Dokumentation durch.10
Packungsinhalt ..................................................................................................... 2
Einführung............................................................................................................. 3
Sicherheitsmaßnahmen...................................................................................... 6
Teile des Objektivs..............................................................................................13
Aufrüsten des Produkts.....................................................................................14
Aktualisierung der Kamera-Firmware .........................................................................14
Auf/Ab-Einstellrad..............................................................................................17
Aufnahme ............................................................................................................18
Modus P: Programmschaltmodus................................................................................18
A: Blendenprioritätsmodus.............................................................................................20
S: Verschlussprioritätsmodus.........................................................................................20
Modus M: Manuelle Belichtung.....................................................................................21
Das Motivprogramm Zoom-Makro..............................................................................22
Doppelaufnahmemodus mit dynamischem Bereich ............................................23
Inhaltsverzeichnis11
Multi-Messfeld-AF ..............................................................................................................27
M-Serie Plus (Langs)...........................................................................................................29
M-Serie Plus (Schn.)............................................................................................................31
Geschw.-Serie (Langs)/Geschw.-Serie (Schn.)...........................................................32
Fokus-Reihe ..........................................................................................................................33
Einstellung [Rauschreduzierung]..................................................................................36
Weißabgleichseinstellung...............................................................................................37
Wiedergabe .........................................................................................................38
Kameraeinheit-Informationsanzeige...........................................................................38
Einstellungen ......................................................................................................39
Aufnahmemenüeinstellungen im [Zoom-Makro]-Modus...................................39
Einstellung des Aufnahme-Menüs im Modus [Dynamikbereich].....................41
[Bildqualität/Größe]-Einstellung (Aufnahme-Menü).............................................42
[Einst. ISO-Empfindlichkeit]-Einstellung (Aufnahme-Menü) ..............................45
[Verwacklungskorrektur]-Einstellung (Aufnahme-Menü)...................................46
[Meine Einst. Reg.] (Registerkarte Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen)..............461
[Fn1-Taste einst.]/[Fn2-Taste einst.] (Registerkarte Wichtigste eigene
Einstellungen).................................................................................................................47
[ADJ-Schalter Einstellung]
(Registerkarte Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen)...............................................47
[ADJ. Direkte ISO-Steuerung]-Einstellung (Registerkarte Wichtigste eigene
Einstellungen).................................................................................................................48
[Digitalzoombild]-Einstellung (Registerkarte Setup).............................................49
[Stufenzoom]-Einstellung (Registerkarte Setup) ....................................................49
Technische Daten ...............................................................................................50
Kapazität Interner Speicher/Speicherkarte...............................................................56
Anhang.................................................................................................................60
Separates Zubehör.............................................................................................................60
Vorsichtsmaßnahmen.......................................................................................................62
Wartung und Lagerung der Ausrüstung....................................................................63
Garantie und Kundendienst ...........................................................................................641
Teile des Objektivs
1
3
2
1 Anschluss
2 Ring
3 Objektiv1
Aufrüsten des Produkts
Aktualisierung der Kamera-Firmware
Beim ersten Anschluss der Kameraeinheit an das Kameragehäuse wird
automatisch die Aktualisierungsfunktion gestartet, wenn die Firmware des
Kameragehäuses veraltet ist. Aktualisieren Sie in diesem Fall die Firmware
des Kameragehäuses auf folgende Weise.
Ist die Firmware-Version auf dem aktuellen Stand, wird die
Aktualisierungsfunktion nicht gestartet und Sie können das Objektiv sofort
verwenden.
1 Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Kamera abgeschaltet ist, und schließen
Sie die Kameraeinheit am Kameragehäuse an.
• Weitere Hinweise zum Anschluss der Kameraeinheit finden Sie im
Benutzerhandbuch des Kameragehäuses.1
2 Schalten Sie die Kamera ein.
• Es wird eine Bestätigungsmeldung zur Aktualisierung der Firmware
angezeigt.
3 Drücken Sie die Fn1/Fn2-Tasten, um [Ja] zu wählen. Drücken Sie
anschließend die MENU/OK-Taste.
• Daraufhin beginnt der Aktualisierungsvorgang der Firmware, und die
folgenden Meldungen werden auf der Bildanzeige angezeigt:
[Überschreibungsdatei wird geprüft]
[Überschreibungsprogramm]
Die Kamera schaltet sich automatisch aus und dann wieder an. Nach dem
Kamera-Neustart wird die Firmware-Version auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt
und das Update wird damit abgeschlossen.1
Hinweis ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Wählen Sie zur Abfrage der Firmware-Version [Firmware-Version]
im Setup-Menü. Halten Sie alternativ die Taste6(Wiedergabe) bei
ausgeschalteter Kamera für mehr als eine Sekunde gedrückt, während
Sie gleichzeitig die Taste – gedrückt halten. Daraufhin wird die FirmwareVersion ca. 20 Sekunden lang auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt.
• Aktuelle Informationen zu Firmware-Updates finden Sie auf der RicohWebsite (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc). Dort können Sie die neuesten
Firmware-Updates herunterladen, um Ihre Ausrüstung zu aktualisieren.1
Auf/Ab-Einstellrad
Zusätzliche Funktion für das Aufwärts/Abwärts-Einstellrad
Bei der Auswahl des Blitz-Modus können Sie das Aufwärts/AbwärtsEinstellrad verwenden.
Bei der Auswahl der Selbstauslöser-Einstellungen können Sie ebenfalls das
Aufwärts/Abwärts-Einstellrad verwenden.1
Aufnahme
Modus P: Programmschaltmodus
Wenn Sie den Moduswahlschalter auf P (Programmschaltmodus) stellen,
können Sie zwischen verschiedenen Kombinationen aus Blende und
Verschlusszeit wählen. Ist die ISO-Empfindlichkeit auf [Auto] oder [Auto
hoch] eingestellt, passt die Kamera automatisch die ISO-Empfindlichkeit an,
um eine optimale Belichtung zu erzielen.
Im Diagramm auf der folgenden Seite werden Schätzungen des
Versatzbereichs für verschiedene Kombinationen aus Blendenwerten und
Verschlusszeiten angezeigt. Der Versatzbereich hängt vom Belichtungswert
(EV) ab. In diesen Beispielen ist der Blitzmodus auf [Blitz aus] und die ISOEmpfindlichkeit auf [ISO100] eingestellt. Für den größten Blendenwert wird
diese zusammen mit dem ND-Filter verwendet.
In diesem Fall ändert sich das Bokeh des Hintergrunds nicht. Selbst
bei Gebrauch eines ND-Filters wird der Grad des Bokehs durch den
Blendenwert (F-Wert) ausgedrückt.1
F16
F11
F15.4
F7.0
F5.6
F3.5
F8
F5.6
F4
F2.8
F2
F1.4
F1
Ev8
Ev7
Ev6
Ev5
Ev4
Ev3
Ev2
Ev1
Ev0
2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000
Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19
: Weitwinkel
: Tele0
A: Blendenprioritätsmodus
Wenn Sie den Moduswahlschalter auf A (Blendenprioritätsmodus) stellen,
können Sie die Blende manuell einstellen. Für den größten Blendenwert
wird diese zusammen mit dem ND-Filter verwendet. Bei Gebrauch eines
ND-Filters ändert sich das Bokeh des Hintergrunds nicht.
Die Anzahl der verfügbaren Blendenstufen ist von der Position des Zoom
abhängig (2 Stufen am Weitwinkel-Ende, 3 Stufen am Tele-Ende). Ist
die ISO-Empfindlichkeit auf [Auto] oder [Auto hoch] eingestellt, passt
die Kamera automatisch die ISO-Empfindlichkeit an, um eine optimale
Belichtung zu erzielen.
S: Verschlussprioritätsmodus
Wenn Sie den Moduswahlschalter auf S (Verschlussprioritätsmodus)
stellen, können Sie die Verschlusszeit manuell einstellen. Unabhängig von
der gewählten ISO-Empfindlichkeit wählt die Kamera für eine optimale
Belichtung eine ISO-Empfindlichkeit zwischen 100 und 3200. Für den
größten Blendenwert wird diese zusammen mit dem ND-Filter verwendet.
Bei Gebrauch eines ND-Filters ändert sich das Bokeh des Hintergrunds
nicht.
Wenn im Aufnahme-Menü die Einstellung [Verschlusszeit-Versatz] auf [Ein]
eingestellt ist, passt die Kamera automatisch die Verschlusszeit an, um eine1
optimale Belichtung zu erzielen, wenn diese nicht anhand der manuell
eingestellten Verschlusszeit erreicht werden kann.
Die Einstellung [Verschlusszeit-Versatz] wird nur angezeigt, wenn der
Moduswahlschalter auf S eingestellt ist.
Modus M: Manuelle Belichtung
Wenn Sie den Moduswahlschalter auf M (Manueller Belichtungsmodus)
stellen, können Sie die Blende und die Verschlusszeit einzeln einstellen.
Für den größten Blendenwert wird diese zusammen mit dem ND-Filter
verwendet. Bei Gebrauch eines ND-Filters ändert sich das Bokeh des
Hintergrunds nicht.
Wenn [Auto] oder [Auto hoch] als Einstellung für die ISO-Empfindlichkeit
gewählt wurde und sich die Kamera im manuellen Belichtungsmodus
befindet, wird der ISO-Wert auf 100 festgesetzt.
Bei einer Belichtungszeit von einer Sekunde oder länger ist die maximal
verfügbare ISO-Empfindlichkeit ISO400. Die längste zur Auswahl stehende
Belichtungszeit ist 30 Sekunden.
Das Motivprogramm Zoom-Makro
Wenn der Moduswahlschalter auf SCENE gestellt wurde, wird durch
Auswahl des [Zoom-Makro]-Modus automatisch die Zoomposition
optimiert. Dies ermöglicht, das Motiv größer als bei der normalen
Makroaufnahme aufzunehmen. Im Zoom-Makro-Modus kann das optische
Zoom nicht verwendet werden. Entnehmen Sie weitere Informationen zu
den verschiedenen Zoommethoden dem„Kamera-Benutzerhandbuch“.
Vorsicht----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Sie können Nahaufnahmen mittels der Zoom-Makro-Funktion von den
folgenden Entfernungen aus aufnehmen:
Ca. 1cm
(von der Vorderkante des
Objektivs)
Aufnahmebereich: Ca. 19×14mm
(wenn das Digitalzoom nicht
verwendet wird)
Aufnahmebereich: Ca. 4,8×3,6mm
(wenn das 4,0× Digitalzoom
verwendet wird)
• Wenn die Option [Bildqualität/Größe] auf 4:3 für [L] eingestellt wurde, kann
für [Digitalzoombild] die Option [Autoskalieren] ausgewählt und damit das
Digitalzoom mit automatischer Skalierung aktiviert werden. (GS. 47)
Doppelaufnahmemodus mit dynamischem Bereich
Der„dynamische Bereich“ einer Digitalkamera ist der Helligkeitsbereich, der
von der Kamera verarbeitet werden kann.
Wenn Sie das Motivprogramm [Dynamikbereich] wählen und dann die Aufnahme
erstellen, wird die Aufnahme mit einem fließenderen Übergang von den hellen zu
den dunklen Bereichen wiedergegeben, wodurch Sie ein natürlicheres Bild erhalten.
Bei der Doppelaufnahme mit
dynamischem Bereich werden
zwei Bilder nacheinander mit
unterschiedlicher Belichtung
aufgenommen. Anschließend
werden die Bereiche mit den
passenden Belichtungen miteinander
kombiniert. Da bei diesem Modus
eine längere Aufnahmezeit als bei
anderen Modi verwendet wird,
sollten Sie beim Aufnehmen von
Bildern Verwacklungen vermeiden.
Das SymbolJwird angezeigt,
während Sie den Auslöser halb nach
unten drücken.
Zwei nacheinander
aufgenommene
Bilder
Kombiniert und
gespeichert
Hinweis ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Selbst wenn die Kamera auf einem Stativ befestigt ist, kann sie sich
beim Drücken des Auslösers bewegen. Um eine maximale Stabilität zu
gewährleisten, empfiehlt sich die Verwendung des Selbstauslösers oder des
Kabel-Fernauslösers (CA-1) (separat erhältlich).
Wichtig ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Die Funktion ist nicht verfügbar, wenn [Bildqualität/Größe] auf den RAWModus gestellt ist.
• Bei Verwendung dieser Funktion ist der Digital-Zoom abgeschaltet.
• Bei Verwendung dieser Funktion ist der Blitz auf [Blitz aus] eingestellt.
• Die Doppelaufnahme mit dynamischem Bereich ist evtl. nicht wirksam,
wenn die Aufnahmeumgebung zu hell oder zu dunkel ist.
• [Multi]-Messung wird empfohlen.
• Wenn Sie ein sich schnell bewegendes Motiv fotografieren, kann das
Motiv auf dem aufgenommenen Bild verzerrt erscheinen.
• Flimmern von Neonlicht kann als horizontale Streifen erscheinen.
Neonlicht kann außerdem Farben und Helligkeit beeinträchtigen.
Dynamisch. Bereich erweitern
Von der Option [Dynamisch. Bereich erweitern] im Aufnahme-Menü
werden fünf Stufen zum Erweitern des dynamischen Bereichs angeboten:
[Auto], [Sehr schwach], [Schwach], [Mittel] und [Stark]. Je höher der
Erweiterungseffekt, desto größer ist die Auswahl an Helligkeitsstufen, die
mit der Kamera bearbeitet werden können.
Um die Einstellung zu ändern, wählen Sie im Aufnahme-Menü das
Motivprogramm [Dynamikbereich] und ändern Sie die Einstellung
[Dynamisch. Bereich erweitern]. Wählen Sie eine beliebige Einstellung
(außer [Auto]), und drücken Sie dann die Taste Fn2, um die [Optionen für
Dynamisch. Bereich erweitern] anzuzeigen. Wählen Sie unter [Lichter],
[Schatten] und [Aus] den Tonwert, der für den erweiterten dynamischen
Bereich bevorzugt wird.
Dynamisch. Bereich erweitern Plus Normalaufnahme
Wenn im Aufnahme-Menü [Ein] für [Plus Normalaufnahme] ausgewählt
ist, nimmt die Kamera zwei Kopien von jedem Foto auf: eine mit einem
erweiterten dynamischen Bereich und die andere mit normaler Belichtung.
Die beiden Kopien werden nach der Aufnahme auf der Bildanzeige
angezeigt. Dabei erscheint die unveränderte Kopie rechts und die Kopie
mit einem erweiterten dynamischen Bereich links.
Um die Einstellung zu ändern, wählen Sie im Aufnahme-Menü das
Motivprogramm [Dynamikbereich] und ändern Sie die Einstellung [Plus
Normalaufnahme].
Hinweis ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nach der Aufnahme werden Histogramme der Bilder angezeigt. Wenn die
Option [LCD-Bestätigung] in der Registerkarte Setup auf [Halten] eingestellt
ist, bleibt der Bildschirm zur Bestätigung angezeigt, so dass Sie die
Histogramme prüfen und die Bilder bequem vergleichen können.
Multi-Messfeld-AF
Wenn Sie den Auslöser halb nach unten drücken, bestimmt die Kamera
automatisch mehrere Fokuspositionen. Wenn Sie den Auslöser dann ganz
nach unten drücken, wechselt die Kamera zwischen den verschiedenen
Fokuspositionen und nimmt fünf aufeinanderfolgende Bilder auf. Die
fünf Standbilder werden dabei als Bildgruppe zusammengefasst und
als MP-Datei gespeichert. Diese Funktion ist insbesondere nützlich für
Teleaufnahmen und für Aufnahmen mit dem Makromodus.
Das SymbolVerscheint in grün, wenn die Kamera scharfstellen kann.
Wenn die Kamera nicht scharfstellen kann, blinkt das SymbolVin rot.
Die von der Kamera gewählten Fokuspositionen werden nur während der
Wiedergabe angezeigt.
* MP ist ein Dateiformat zur Aufnahme einer Reihe von Standbildern.
Wichtig ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Der Blitz kann nicht verwendet werden.
• Die Verwacklungskorrekturfunktion kann nicht verwendet werden. Wenn
[Mt-Messfeld AF] bei eingeschalteter Verwacklungskorrekturfunktion
eingestellt wird, wechseltEaufF.
• Diese Funktion ist nicht verfügbar, wenn [Bildqualität/Größe] auf [RAW]
eingestellt ist.
• Wurde der [Serien-Modus] auf eine beliebige Einstellung außer [Aus]
eingestellt, können Sie die Multi-Messfeld-AF-Einstellungen auswählen;
die Funktion wird allerdings nicht verwendet.
• Bei der Verwendung der Option Multi-Messfeld-AF steht die
Intervallaufnahme nicht zur Auswahl.
Hinweis ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Wenn diese Funktion bei Verwendung des Digital-Zooms eingeschaltet
wird, wird das Digital-Zoom deaktiviert und die Aufnahme bei maximaler
Vergrößerung des optischen Zooms (10,7-fach) durchgeführt.
• Für den [Weißabgleich] gilt die Einstellung [Auto] auch dann, wenn [MltWA AUTO] gewählt wurde.
M-Serie Plus (Langs)
In diesem Modus nimmt die Kamera auf, während der Auslöser gedrückt
wird, aber nur die letzten 15 Bilder (etwa die letzten drei Sekunden der
Aufnahme) werden gespeichert und zu einer einzelnen Multibild (MP)-
Datei zusammengestellt.
Wichtig ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Die zum Speichern von 15 Bildern benötigte Zeit erhöht sich
möglicherweise bei schlechter Beleuchtung.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2Speichert die Kamera die in den letzten 3 s aufgenommenen 15 Bilder.
1Wenn Sie den Finger vom Auslöser nehmen, …0
Hinweis ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Die Bildgröße steht fest auf 3648×2736 NORMAL.
• Datum und Ausrichtung jedes Bildes in der Folge werden separat
gespeichert.1
M-Serie Plus (Schn.)
In diesem Modus nimmt die Kamera auf, während der Auslöser gedrückt
wird, aber nur die letzten 26 Bilder (etwa die letzten 0,9 Sekunden der
Aufnahme) werden gespeichert und zu einer einzelnen Multibild (MP)-
Datei zusammengestellt.
Wichtig ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wenn Sie ein sich schnell bewegendes Motiv fotografieren, kann das Motiv
auf dem aufgenommenen Bild verzerrt erscheinen.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
2Speichert die Kamera die in den letzten 26 s aufgenommenen 0,9 Bilder.
1Wenn Sie den Finger vom Auslöser nehmen, …
Hinweis ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Die Bildgröße steht fest auf 1728×1296 NORMAL.
• Datum und Ausrichtung des letzten Bildes in der Folge werden auch für
die restlichen Bilder verwendet.
Geschw.-Serie (Langs)/Geschw.-Serie (Schn.)
In einer Sekunde (Geschw.-Serie (Schn.)) oder zwei Sekunden (Geschw.-
Serie (Langs)) werden 120 Bilder in Folge gespeichert.
Wichtig ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wenn Sie ein sich schnell bewegendes Motiv fotografieren, kann das Motiv
auf dem aufgenommenen Bild verzerrt erscheinen.
Hinweis ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Die Bildgröße steht fest auf 640×480 VGA.
• Datum und Ausrichtung des letzten Bildes in der Folge werden auch für
die restlichen Bilder verwendet.
Fokus-Reihe
Die Funktion„Fokus-Reihe“ ist bei der Verwendung der Funktion
„Automatische Belichtungsreihe“ verfügbar. Bei der Funktion„FokusReihe“ werden automatisch 5 aufeinanderfolgende Aufnahmen gemacht,
während gleichzeitig die Position des Fokus allmählich geändert wird. Das
Intervall zwischen den einzelnen Fokuspositionsänderungen ist einstellbar.
1 Wählen Sie im Aufnahme-Menü [Auto Belichtungs-Reihe], und
drücken Sie die Taste Fn2.
2 Drücken Sie die Taste +/–, um [FOKUS-REIHE] zu wählen, und
drücken Sie die Taste Fn2.
3 Drücken Sie die Tasten Fn1/Fn2, um die Zeitspanne zwischen
den Fokuspositionsänderungen auszuwählen, und drücken Sie
anschließend die MENU/OK-Taste.
• Die Einstellung wird gespeichert und der Bildschirm kehrt wieder zum
Aufnahme-Menü zurück.
4 Drücken Sie die MENU/OK-Taste bzw. drücken Sie die Taste Fn1 und
dann die MENU/OK-Taste.
• Das Symbol wird auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt.
5 Drücken Sie den Auslöser halb nach unten.
• Die Kamera stellt anhand der Einstellung für den [Fokus] scharf.
6 Drücken Sie den Auslöser ganz nach unten.
• Die Kamera nimmt anhand der Fokusposition in Schritt 5 fünf
aufeinanderfolgende Bilder auf.
Hinweis ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Wenn [Fokus] auf [MF] eingestellt ist, wird das erste Bild ohne Messung
mit der eingestellten Fokusposition aufgenommen.
• Für den [Weißabgleich] gilt die Einstellung [Auto] auch dann, wenn [MltWA AUTO] gewählt wurde.
• Fotos werden in der folgenden Reihenfolge aufgenommen und
gespeichert:
Fokusposition Vorne Mitte (*) ? Hinten
Aufnahmereihenfolge 2 3 1 4 5
Speicherreihenfolge 1 2 3 4 5
* Fixieren Sie den Fokus an der Position, die im Aufnahme-Menü in der
Einstellung [Fokus] eingestellt wurde.
• Bei Verwendung dieser Funktion ist der Blitz deaktiviert.
• Wenn der [Fokus] auf [Mt-Messfeld AF] eingestellt ist, können Sie die
Einstellung der Fokus-Reihe ändern. Die Funktion wird allerdings nicht
verwendet.
• Wenn [Bildqualität/Größe] auf [RAW] eingestellt ist, kann die
Rauschreduzierungsfunktion angepasst werden; die Funktion wird jedoch
nicht verwendet.
• Wurde der [Serien-Modus] auf eine beliebige Einstellung außer [Aus]
eingestellt, können Sie die Rauschreduzierungseinstellungen ändern. Die
Funktion wird allerdings nicht verwendet.
Einstellung [Rauschreduzierung]
Aufnahme von Bildern unter Einsatz der Rauschreduzierung. Wählen
Sie unter [Aus], [Auto], [Schwach], [Stark] und [MAX]. Die Aufnahmezeit
der Bilder ist je nach gewählter Option unterschiedlich. Diese Funktion
kann nicht für die Aufnahme von Fotos verwendet werden, wenn das
Motivprogramm [Porträt], [Sport] oder [Schräg-Korrektur] eingestellt ist.
Weißabgleichseinstellung
Mit diesem Objektiv können Sie den Weißabgleich auf [Glühlampe1] oder
[Glühlampe2] einstellen.
Verwenden Sie die Einstellung [Glühlampe1] oder [Glühlampe2], wenn Sie
unter Glühlampenlicht Fotos aufnehmen. Mit der Einstellung [Glühlampe2]
erhalten die Fotos im Vergleich zur Einstellung [Glühlampe1] ein leichten
Rotton.
Hinweis ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Mit der Einstellung [Glühlampe2] können Sie mit den gleichen
Farbtönen Aufnahmen machen, wie mit der im Benutzerhandbuch des
Kameragehäuses beschriebenen Einstellung [Glühlampe].
Wiedergabe
Kameraeinheit-Informationsanzeige
Die Informationen [A12], [S10] oder [P10] für jede Kameraeinheit
erscheinen in der detaillierten Informationsanzeige und der Exif-Datei.
Einstellungen
Aufnahmemenüeinstellungen im [Zoom-Makro]-Modus
Wurde der [Zoom-Makro]-Modus ausgewählt, können die folgenden Einstellpunkte
des Aufnahmemenüs betätigt werden. Die Standardwerte sind ebenfalls aufgelistet:
Option Standardeinstellung
Bildqualität/Größe L 4:3 NORMAL
Fokus AF
Vor-AF Aus
Lichtmessung Multi
Bildeinstellungen Standard
Serien-Modus Aus
Automatische Belichtungsreihe Aus
Blitzbelichtungs-Korrektur 0.00
Option Standardeinstellung
Manuelle Blitzstärke 1/2
Einst. Blitzsynchronisierung 1. Vorhang
Rauschreduzierung Aus
Rauschreduzierung ISO ISO 401+
Verzerrungskorrektur Aus
Individueller Selbstauslöser 2 Bilder, 5 Sekunden
Datumsaufdruck Aus
Belichtungs-Korrektur 0.0
Weißabgleich Mlt-WA AUTO
Einst. ISO-Empfindlichkeit Auto
Verwacklungskorrektur Ein1
Einstellung des Aufnahme-Menüs im Modus [Dynamikbereich]
Wurde der [Dynamikbereich]-Modus ausgewählt, können die folgenden Optionen im
Aufnahme-Menü eingestellt werden. Die Standardwerte sind ebenfalls aufgelistet:
Option Standardeinstellung
Bildqualität/Größe L 4:3 NORMAL
Fokus Multi AF
Fixfokus-Entfernung 2,5m
Bild bei ganzem Durchdrücken Ein
Vor-AF Aus
Lichtmessung Multi
Bildeinstellungen Standard
Rauschreduzierung Aus
Rauschreduzierung ISO ISO 401+
Verzerrungskorrektur Aus
Individueller Selbstauslöser 2 Bilder, 5 Sekunden
Datumsaufdruck Aus
Option Standardeinstellung
Belichtungs-Korrektur 0.0
Weißabgleich Mlt-WA AUTO
Weißabgleichskorrektur A:0, G:0
Einst. ISO-Empfindlichkeit Auto
Verwacklungskorrektur Ein
Dynamisch. Bereich erweitern Auto
Plus Normalaufnahme Aus
[Bildqualität/Größe]-Einstellung (Aufnahme-Menü)
Die folgenden Optionen im Hinblick auf Bildqualität, Bildgröße und Bildseitenverhältnis
stehen im Aufnahme-Menü für die [Bildqualität/Größe]-Einstellung zur Verfügung.
Die Dateigröße eines Fotos ist sowohl von der Bildqualität als auch der Bildgröße
abhängig. Bei der Aufnahme von Filmen können Sie die Filmgröße auswählen.
Fotos
Option Bildseitenverhältnis Komprimierung Bildgröße (Pixel)
RAW 16:9*
2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*
1
3648×2048
4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*
1
3648×2736
3:2*
2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*
1
3648×2432
1:1*
3
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*
1
2736×2736
L (Groß) 16:9*
2
FINE/NORMAL 3648×2048
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3648×2736
3:2*
2
FINE/NORMAL 3648×2432
1:1*
3
FINE/NORMAL 2736×2736
M (Medium) 16:9*
2
FINE/NORMAL 3264×1840
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3264×2448
3:2*
2
FINE/NORMAL 3264×2176
1:1*
3
FINE/NORMAL 2448×2448
Option Bildseitenverhältnis Komprimierung Bildgröße (Pixel)
5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944
3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536
1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960
VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480
*1 Wenn die Option [RAW] ausgewählt wird, wird diese Einstellung für die JPEG-Kopie verwendet.
*2 Je nach dem fotografierten Bereich können schwarze Balken am oberen und unteren
Rand der Bildanzeige erscheinen.
*3 Je nach dem fotografierten Bereich können schwarze Balken am rechten und linken Rand
der Bildanzeige erscheinen.
Filme
Option Filmgröße
HD1280 1280×720
VGA640 640×480
QVGA320 320×240
[Einst. ISO-Empfindlichkeit]-Einstellung (Aufnahme-Menü)
Wenn die Option [Auto] ausgewählt ist und der Blitz nicht verwendet wird,
wird eine der folgenden Lichtempfindlichkeitsspannen verwendet.
Bildgröße (Pixel) Standard Minimum Maximum
RAW 100 100 200
L 100 100 200
M 100 100 200
5M 100 100 200
3M 100 100 200
1M 100 100 238
VGA 100 100 283
• Wenn die Option [Auto] ausgewählt ist und der Blitz verwendet wird, erhöht
sich die verwendete Lichtempfindlichkeit auf einen Wert der ISO400 entspricht.
[Verwacklungskorrektur]-Einstellung (Aufnahme-Menü)
Wenn die [Verwacklungskorrektur] auf [Ein] gestellt wurde, werden
Bildverwacklungen minimiert.
Wenn die Kamera-Verwacklungskorrektur aktiviert ist, erscheint das Symbol
Eauf dem Bildschirm.
[Meine Einst. Reg.] (Registerkarte Wichtigste eigene
Einstellungen)
In der Registerkarte Setup können Sie auch den [Stufenzoom] bzw. die
[Zoomposition] der Option [Meine Einst. Reg.] zuweisen. Entnehmen
Sie weitere Informationen zu verfügbaren Optionen dem„KameraBenutzerhandbuch“.
[Fn1-Taste einst.]/[Fn2-Taste einst.]
(Registerkarte Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen)
• Die Optionen [Stufenzoom] und [AF/Mlt-Feld AF] können den Fn1/Fn2-
Tasten zugewiesen werden.
• Wenn [Zoom-Makro] als Motivprogramm gewählt wurde, können die
Optionen [AF/Fixfokus], [Weißabgl-Korr.] [Stufenzoom], und [AF/Mlt-Feld
AF] nicht durch Drücken der Fn1/Fn2-Tasten aufgerufen werden.
• Wenn das Motivprogramm auf [Dynamikbereich] eingestellt ist, sind die
folgenden Funktionen nicht verfügbar, auch wenn Sie die Tasten Fn1
oder Fn2 drücken: [JPEGBRAW], [Serien-Modus], [Auto BelichtungsReihe], [Blitzkorrektur], [Blitzstärke], [Stufenzoom] und [AF/Mlt-Feld AF].
[ADJ-Schalter Einstellung]
(Registerkarte Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen)
Wenn das Motivprogramm auf [Dynamikbereich] eingestellt ist, lauten
die unter [ADJ-Schalter Einstellung] registrierten Einstellung [BelichtungsKorrektur] und [Weißabgleich]. Die verfügbaren Einstellungen können
nicht geändert werden.
[ADJ. Direkte ISO-Steuerung]-Einstellung
(Registerkarte Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen)
Wenn in der Registerkarte„Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen“ [ADJ. Direkte
ISO-Steuerung] auf [Ein] eingestellt ist, können Sie den ADJ.-Schalter
zur Seite schieben, wenn eine Aufnahme möglich ist, um die ISOEmpfindlichkeit zu ändern. Die Standardeinstellung ab Werk ist [Aus].
Wichtig ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Der ADJ.-Schalter kann zur Anpassung der Empfindlichkeit
verwendet werden, wenn der Auslöser im Programmschaltmodus
und im Blendenprioritätsmodus halb durchgedrückt wird (im
Programmschaltmodus kann die Empfindlichkeit auch nach dem
Loslassen des Auslösers eingestellt werden, solange Verschlusszeit und
Blende angezeigt werden). Beachten Sie, dass [Auto] und [Auto hoch]
nicht erneut gewählt werden können, nachdem die Empfindlichkeit auf
diese Weise eingestellt wurde.
• Im Verschlussprioritätsmodus und manuellen Belichtungsmodus können
Sie den ADJ.-Schalter nicht zur Änderung der ISO-Empfindlichkeit
verwenden.
[Digitalzoombild]-Einstellung (Registerkarte Setup)
Je nach gewähltem Vergrößerungs-Wert des Zooms mit automatischer
Skalierung ändert sich die Bildaufnahmegröße.
Zoomfaktor Bildgröße (Pixel) Zoomfaktor Bildgröße (Pixel)
Ca. 1,0× L Ca. 1,8× 3M
Ca. 1,1× M Ca. 2,9× 1M
Ca. 1,4× 5M Ca. 5,7× VGA
[Stufenzoom]-Einstellung (Registerkarte Setup)
Wenn die Option [Stufenzoom] auf [Ein] gestellt ist, wird die Brennweite
des Zooms auf acht Schritte begrenzt (entspricht 28 mm, 35 mm, 50 mm,
85 mm, 105 mm, 135 mm, 200 mm und 300 mm*). * Entsprechend einer
35-mm-Kleinbildkamera.0
Technische Daten
Die technischen Daten beziehen sich auf die auf ein GXR-Kameragehäuse
gesetzte Kameraeinheit.
Effektive Pixel Ca.10,0 Millionen
Bildsensor 1/2,3 Zoll CMOS-Sensor (Gesamtanzahl der Pixel: ca. 10,6
Millionen)
Objektiv Brennweite 4,9mm bis 52,5mm (35-mm-Format entspricht: 28mm bis
300mm)
Blende (f-Zahl) f/3,5–f/5,6
FokusReichweite
(vom Objektiv)
Normalaufnahme: Ca. 30cm bis unendlich 8 (Weitwinkel);
ca. 150 cm bis unendlich 8 (max. Telezoom)
Makroaufnahme: Ca. 1cm bis unendlich 8 (Weitwinkel/
Makrozoom); ca. 27cm bis unendlich 8 (max. Telezoom)
Objektivaufbau 10 Elemente in 7 Gruppen (4 asphärische Linsenelemente mit
5 Oberflächen)
Zoom 10,7× optischer Zoom; 4,0× Digital-Zoom (2,8× für Filme, HDBild); ca. 5,7× Zoom mit automatischer Skalierung (VGA)1
Fokus-Modus Multi AF; Spot AF; MF: Fixfokus; 8 ; Mt-Messfeld AF (AFHilfslicht und Fokus-Reihe verfügbar)
Verschlusszeit Fotos 1/2000–30Sek. (obere und untere Begrenzungswerte
variieren je nach Aufnahme- und Blitzmodus)
Filme 1/30–1/2000 Sek.
Belichtungssteuerung Messung Multi-Belichtungsmessung (256 Segmente), mittenbetonte
Belichtungsmessung, Spot-Belichtungsmessung (TTLMessung, AE-Sperre verfügbar)
Modus Programm AE, Blendenprioritätsmodus AE, manuelle Belichtung,
Verschlussprioritätsmodus AE, Messfeld wechseln-Funktion
BelichtungsKorrektur
Manuell (+4,0 bis –4,0EV in Schritten von 1/3EV oder 1/2EV),
Automatische Belichtungsreihe (–2EV bis +2EV in Schritten
von 1/3EV oder 1/2EV)
Belichtungskombinationsbereich
(Automatik-Aufnahmemodus,
Mittenbetonte Belichtungsmessung)
Weitwinkel: 3,2 bis 16,2 EV; Tele: 4,6 bis 18,4 EV
(Kombinationsbereich für konvertierte ISO-Werte basierend
auf EV für ISO100)
• Werden Fotos mit einem Belichtungskorrekturwert von 6,0
EV oder weniger aufgenommen, verschiebt die Kamera die
Einstellungen um 0,25 EV Richtung Unterbelichtung für jede
1,0 EV, um die sich der Belichtungskombinationsbereich
verringert. Die Einstellung kann maximal um 1,0 EV
verschoben werden.
ISO-Empfindlichkeit(StandardAusgabeempfindlichkeit)
Auto, Auto hoch, ISO 100, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600,
ISO 3200
Weißabgleich Auto, Mlt-WA AUTO, Im Freien, Wolkig, Glühlampe1, Glühlampe2,
Neonlicht, Man. Einst., Detail; automatische Weißabgleichreihe
Blitz Reichweite
(eingebauter Blitz)
Ca. 0,2m - 4,0m (Weitwinkel) ,
Ca. 0,27m - 2,5m (Tele)
Aufnahmemodus Auto, Programmschaltmodus, Blendenpriorität, Verschlusspriorität,
manuell, Motivprogramm (Film, Porträt, Sport, Landschaft,
Nachtmodus, Schräg-Korrektur, Dynamikbereich Doppelaufnahme,
Makrozoom),„Meine Einstellungen“
SerienModus
Anzahl der
Aufnahmen im
Serienmodus
(Bildgröße: RAW)
Bei deaktivierter Rauschreduzierung: 5 Bilder,
Bei aktivierter Rauschreduzierung (schwach, stark oder
maximal): 4 Bilder
Anzahl der
Aufnahmen im
Modus M-Serie
Plus (1 Set)
Langsam (3648×2736) : 15 Aufnahmen (5 Bilder/Sek.),
Schnell (1728×1296) : 26 Aufnahmen (30 Bilder/Sek.)
SerienModus
Anzahl der
Aufnahmen
bei einer
GeschwindigkeitsSerie (1 Set)
Langsam (640×480) : 120 Aufnahmen (60 Bilder/Sek.),
Schnell (640×480) : 120 Aufnahmen (120 Bilder/Sek.)
Komprimierung*1
FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2
Bildgröße
(Pixel)
Fotos 3648×2048, 3648×2736, 3648×2432, 2736×2736,
3264×1840, 3264×2448, 3264×2176, 2448×2448,
2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480
Filme 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240
Dateigröße
(ca.)
RAW 16:9 NORMAL: 13.053KB/Bild, FINE: 14.289KB/Bild,
VGA: 11.477 KB/Bild
4:3 NORMAL: 17.332KB/Bild, FINE: 18.984KB/Bild,
VGA: 15.226 KB/Bild
3:2 NORMAL: 15.440KB/Bild, FINE: 16.909KB/Bild,
VGA: 13.568 KB/Bild
1:1 NORMAL: 13.053KB/Bild, FINE: 14.292KB/Bild,
VGA: 11.474 KB/Bild
Dateigröße
(ca.)
L 16:9 NORMAL: 1.630KB/Bild, FINE: 2.779KB/Bild
4:3 NORMAL: 2.169KB/Bild, FINE: 3.705KB/Bild
3:2 NORMAL: 1.931KB/Bild, FINE: 3.295KB/Bild
1:1 NORMAL: 1.633KB/Bild, FINE: 2.785KB/Bild
M 16:9 NORMAL: 1.330KB/Bild, FINE: 2.254KB/Bild
4:3 NORMAL: 1.761KB/Bild, FINE: 2.990KB/Bild
3:2 NORMAL: 1.568KB/Bild, FINE: 2.660KB/Bild
1:1 NORMAL: 1.327KB/Bild, FINE: 2.249KB/Bild
5M 4:3 FINE: 2.288KB/Bild
3M 4:3 FINE: 1.474KB/Bild
1M 4:3 FINE: 813KB/Bild
VGA 4:3 FINE: 197KB/Bild
Lebensdauer der Batterie DB-90: ca. 440 Aufnahmen*3
(basierend auf CIPA-Standard)
Maße (B×H×T) Nur Kameraeinheit:
68,7mm×57,9mm×44mm (Gemäß CIPA-Richtlinie)
Auf Kameragehäuse aufgesetzt:
113,9mm×70,2mm×49,8mm (Gemäß CIPA-Richtlinie)
Gewicht (ca.) Nur Kameraeinheit: 160 g (ausschließlich Objektivdeckel und
Anschlussabdeckung)
Auf Kameragehäuse aufgesetzt: 367 g (Einschließlich
Objektivdeckel, Akku und SD-Speicherkarte)
Temperatur bei Betrieb 0°C bis 40°C
Luftfeuchtigkeit bei Betrieb 85% oder weniger
Temperatur bei Lagerung –20°C bis 60°C
*1 Die verfügbaren Optionen variieren je nach Bildgröße.
*2 Gleichzeitig wird auch eine JPEG-Datei aufgezeichnet. (Die JPEG-Datei ist möglicherweise
eine Datei mit der Bildqualität FINE oder NORMAL und hat dieselben Maße wie die RAW- oder
VGA-Datei oder eine Datei mit der Bildqualität NORMAL und einer Bildgröße von 640×480
Pixeln.) RAW-Dateien verwenden das Standard DNG-Dateiformat von Adobe Systems, Inc.
*3 Dient nur zur Orientierung. Die tatsächliche Anzahl von Aufnahmen hängt stark davon ab, wie die Kamera
verwendet wird. Wie empfehlen Ihnen, bei einer längeren Einsatzdauer Ersatzakkus bereit zu halten.
Kapazität Interner Speicher/Speicherkarte
Die folgenden Werte dienen als Leitfaden für die Speicherkapazität des
internen Speichers und von Speicherkarten von verschiedener Größe, je
nach Bildqualität und Bildgröße, bei Verwendung der Bildqualität FINE.
Fotos
Komprimierung Bildgröße
(Pixel)
Interner
Speicher
1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
RAW*
FINE
3648×2048 6 67 137 270 551 1105 2217
3648×2736 4 50 103 203 415 831 1688
3648×2432 5 57 116 228 466 934 1874
2736×2736 6 67 137 270 551 1105 2217
L
FINE
3648×2048 29 323 653 1284 2624 5257 10546
3648×2736 22 242 491 965 1973 3953 7930
3648×2432 24 272 553 1087 2222 4452 8930
2736×2736 29 323 653 1284 2624 5257 10546
M
FINE
3264×1840 36 397 808 1588 3245 6502 13043
3264×2448 27 300 608 1195 2442 4893 9815
3264×2176 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014
2448×2448 36 400 808 1588 3245 6502 13043
Komprimierung Bildgröße
(Pixel)
Interner
Speicher
1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
5M FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238
3M FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063
1M FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181
VGA FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581
* Wenn die Option [RAW] ausgewählt wird, wird diese Einstellung für die JPEG-Kopie
verwendet.
Serien-Modus
Serien-Modus Bildgröße
(Pixel)
Interner
Speicher
1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
M-Serie Plus
(Langs)
3648×2736 38 414 842 1653 3379 6769 13579
M-Serie Plus
(Schn.)
1728×1296 131 1438 2926 5746 11745 23530 47202
Geschw.-Serie 640×480 692 7553 15359 30159 61643 123489 247716
Filme
Bildgröße (Pixel) Interner
Speicher
1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
1280×720
30 Bilder/Sekunde
16 Sek. 3 Min.
3 Sek.
6 Min.
14 Sek.
12 Min.
14 Sek.
25 Min.
1 Sek.
50 Min.
7 Sek.
100 Min.
33 Sek.
640×480
30 Bilder/Sekunde
49 Sek. 8 Min.
55 Sek.
18 Min.
8 Sek.
35 Min.
38 Sek.
72 Min.
50 Sek.
145 Min.
54 Sek.
292 Min.
41 Sek.
320×240
30 Bilder/Sekunde
1 Min.
59 Sek.
21 Min.
39 Sek.
44 Min.
2 Sek.
86 Min.
28 Sek.
176 Min.
44 Sek.
354 Min.
3 Sek.
710 Min.
13 Sek.
Wichtig ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Die maximale Aufnahmegröße eines ununterbrochenen Films beträgt 4 GB.
Die maximale Aufnahmezeit beträgt ca. 12 Minuten bei einer Auflösung von
1280 × 720, ca. 37 Minuten bei 640 × 480 und ca. 90 Minuten bei 320 × 240.
Hinweis ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bei einer Auflösung von 1280 × 720 wird die Verwendung einer SD/SDHCSpeicherkarte der Geschwindigkeitsklasse 6 oder mehr empfohlen. 0
Anhang
Separates Zubehör
Die RICOH LENS kann mit dem unten aufgeführten (separat erhältlichen)
Zubehör betrieben werden.
Objektivdeckel (LC-2)
Hinweis ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Separat erhältliche Vorsatzlinsen, Gegenlichtblenden und andere Adapter können
nicht an diesem Objektiv befestigt werden.
• Bevor Sie ein optionales Zubehör verwenden, lesen Sie sich die mitgelieferte Dokumentation durch.
• Aktuelle Informationen zu optionalem Zubehör finden Sie auf der Ricoh-Website
(http://www.ricohpmmc.com/).1
Ring entfernen/anbringen ----------------------------------------------------------
Entfernen Sie bei Verwendung des optionalen Rings (LC-2) den schon
angebrachten Ring.
Entfernen des Rings
Drehen Sie den Ring bei ausgeschalteter
Kamera gegen den Uhrzeigersinn und
entfernen Sie ihn von der Kameraeinheit.
Anbringen des Rings
Richten Sie bei ausgeschalteter Kamera
die Markierung auf dem Ring (2) an der
Markierung auf der Kameraeinheit (1) aus,
und drehen Sie den Ring im Uhrzeigersinn,
bis er einrastet.
2 1
Vorsichtsmaßnahmen
• Die mitgelieferte Garantie ist nur im jeweiligen Kaufland gültig.
• Sollte das Gerät außerhalb des Kauflandes ausfallen oder nicht richtig funktionieren,
übernimmt der Hersteller keine Verantwortung für die Reparatur des Gerätes vor Ort
oder für die Übernahme von hierdurch entstandenen Kosten.
• Lassen Sie die Ausrüstung nicht fallen und setzen Sie sie keinen heftigen Stößen aus.
• Wenn Sie die Ausrüstung tragen, achten Sie darauf, dass sie nicht an andere
Gegenstände stößt. Besondere Vorsicht ist erforderlich, um das Objektiv zu schützen.
• Abrupte Temperaturveränderungen können Kondensierung hervorrufen, was zu
sichtbarem Beschlagen im Objektiv oder zu Fehlfunktionen der Ausrüstung führen
kann. Dies kann vermieden werden, indem Sie die Ausrüstung in eine Plastiktüte
stecken, um die Temperaturveränderung zu verlangsamen. Nehmen Sie sie erst
heraus, wenn die Luft in der Tüte dieselbe Temperatur erreicht hat wie die Umgebung.
• Halten Sie die Ausrüstung trocken und vermeiden Sie die Bedienung mit nassen Händen. Die Nichtbeachtung
dieser Vorsichtsmaßnahmen kann zur Fehlfunktion der Ausrüstung oder zu Stromschlägen führen.
• Halten Sie den Anschluss sauber.
Tipp: Vermeiden von Kondensierung ---------------------------------------------
Kondensierung kann besonders leicht auftreten, wenn Sie in einen Raum mit
einem drastischen Temperaturunterschied gehen, bei hoher Luftfeuchtigkeit,
in einem kalten Raum, nachdem die Heizung angestellt wurde, oder wenn die
Kamera kalter Luft aus Klimaanlagen oder anderen Geräten ausgesetzt ist.
Wartung und Lagerung der Ausrüstung
Wartung der Ausrüstung
• Fotos können durch Fingerabdrücke oder andere Fremdkörper auf dem
Objektiv beeinträchtigt werden. Vermeiden Sie es, das Objektiv mit den
Fingern zu berühren. Entfernen Sie Staub oder Fussel mit einem Blasebalg aus
dem Kamera-Fachhandel oder reinigen Sie das Objektiv vorsichtig mit einem
weichen, trockenen Tuch.
• Reinigen Sie die Ausrüstung gründlich, nachdem Sie sie am Strand benutzt
haben oder während des Gebrauchs von Kosmetik. Setzen Sie die Ausrüstung
keinen flüchtigen Substanzen wie etwa Verdünnungsmittel, Benzol oder
Pestiziden aus. Die Nichtbeachtung dieser Vorsichtsmaßnahmen kann zu
Schäden der Ausrüstung oder ihrer Oberfläche führen.
• Im seltenen Falle einer Fehlfunktion wenden Sie sich bitte an ein Ricoh.
• Die Ausrüstung ist ein Hochpräzisionsgerät. Nehmen Sie sie nicht auseinander.
Aufbewahrung
Bewahren Sie die Kamera nicht auf, wo sie Folgendem ausgesetzt ist: extreme Hitze
oder Feuchtigkeit; große Temperatur- oder Feuchtigkeitsveränderungen; Staub,
Schmutz oder Sand; starke Vibrationen; längerer Kontakt mit Chemikalien inkl.
Mottenkugeln und andere Insektenschutzmittel, oder mit Vinyl- oder Gummiprodukten;
starke Magnetfelder (z. B. in der Nähe eines Monitors, Transformators oder Magnets).
Garantie und Kundendienst
1. Dieses Produkt hat eine eingeschränkte Garantie. Während der Garantiezeit, die in der
mitgelieferten Garantie angegeben ist, werden fehlerhafte Teile kostenlos repariert.
Im Falle einer Fehlfunktion der Ausrüstung wenden Sie sich an den Händler, bei dem
Sie die Ausrüstung gekauft haben, oder an das nächste Ricoh Reparaturzentrum.
Bitte beachten Sie, dass Kosten, die entstehen, wenn Sie die Ausrüstung zum Ricoh
Reparaturzentrum bringen, nicht übernommen werden können.
2. Diese Garantie umfasst keine Schäden, die durch Folgendes entstanden sind:
1 Nichtbeachtung der Anweisungen im Benutzerhandbuch;
2 Reparaturen, Veränderungen oder Überholungen, die nicht durch ein
autorisiertes, im Handbuch aufgelistetes Servicezentrum durchgeführt wurden;
3 Brand, Naturkatastrophen, höhere Gewalt, Blitz, abweichende Spannung etc.;
4 Unsachgemäße Aufbewahrung (siehe„Kamera-Benutzerhandbuch“),
Auslaufen von Batterien und anderen Flüssigkeiten, Schimmel oder sonstige
mangelhafte Wartung der Ausrüstung;
5 Eintauchen in Wasser (Überschwemmen), Kontakt mit Alkohol oder anderen
Getränken, Eindringen von Sand oder Schmutz, heftige Stöße, Fallenlassen
der Ausrüstung oder Druckausübung auf die Ausrüstung oder andere
unnatürliche Ursachen.
3. Nach Ablauf der Garantie haften Sie für alle Reparaturkosten, auch solche, die
in einem autorisierten Servicezentrum durchgeführt werden.
4. Sie haften für alle Reparaturkosten, auch innerhalb der Garantiezeit, wenn
die Garantiekarte nicht beigefügt ist, oder wenn der Händlername oder das
Kaufdatum geändert wurden oder nicht auf der Karte angegeben sind.
5. Kosten für Überholung und umfassende Inspektion auf speziellen Wunsch des
Kunden hin wird dem Kunden in Rechnung gestellt, unabhängig davon, ob sie
innerhalb der Garantiezeit stattfanden oder nicht.
6. Folgeschäden, die durch Fehlfunktion der Ausrüstung entstehen, wie etwa
Fotografiekosten oder Ausbleiben von erwartetem Gewinn, werden nicht
erstattet, unabhängig davon, ob sie innerhalb der Garantiezeit stattfanden
oder nicht.
7. Die Garantie ist nur in dem Land gültig, in dem die Ausrüstung gekauft wurde.
* Die obengenannten Bedingungen beziehen sich auf kostenlose
Reparaturen und schränken Ihre Rechte nicht ein.
* Der Zweck der obengenannten Bedingungen wird auch auf der mit dieser
Ausrüstung gelieferten Garantiekarte beschrieben.
8. Ersatzteile, die wesentlich für das Funktionieren der Ausrüstung sind (d. h. erforderliche
Teile, die die Funktionen und Qualität der Ausrüstung ermöglichen), werden für einen
Zeitraum von fünf Jahren nach Produktionsende des Objektivs zur Verfügung stehen.
9. Bitte beachten Sie, dass bei starker Beschädigung der Ausrüstung durch
Überschwemmung, Untertauchen, Eindringen von Sand oder Schmutz,
heftige Stöße oder Fallenlassen das Gerät möglicherweise nicht zu reparieren
ist und die Wiederherstellung des ursprünglichen Zustandes unmöglich ist.
Hinweise---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Bevor Sie die Kamera zur Reparatur einschicken, überprüfen Sie die Batterien und lesen Sie
die Bedienungsanleitung erneut, um eine ordnungsgemäße Bedienung sicherzustellen.
• Einige Reparaturen benötigen einen erheblichen Zeitraum zur Fertigstellung.
• Wenn Sie die Ausrüstung an ein Servicezentrum schicken, legen Sie bitte
ein Schreiben bei, auf dem Sie die defekten Teile und das Problem so
genau wie möglich beschreiben.
• Entfernen Sie alle Zubehörteile, die nichts mit dem Problem zu tun
haben, bevor Sie die Kamera an das Servicezentrum schicken.*L452 3971A*
Bei Problemen
Ricoh-Niederlassungen
RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC)
Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, Deutschland
(innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438
(außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438
http://www.ricohpmmc.com/
Ricoh Company, Ltd.
Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo
104-8222, Japan
2010 Juli
GR D
In China gedruckt
RICOH LENS
P10 28-300mm F3.5-5.6 VC*
Instruction Manual
The serial number may be found on the bottom of the lens.
* VC indicates that this unit features Ricoh’s original Vibration Correction image
stabilization technology.
Package Contents
Before using your Ricoh lens, confirm that the package contains the items
listed below.
Camera unit
The serial number may be found on the bottom.
Lens cap
Comes attached to the camera unit.
? Instruction manual
(this manual)
? Warranty
Connector cap
Comes attached to the camera unit.
Soft case
Introduction
To use this lens, you need to attach it to a compatible camera body.
Refer to the Camera Body User Guide for details about how to operate shooting and
playback functions and change settings and to read important precautions for use. This
instruction manual will refer to this lens as the “camera unit” and will explain functions
and operating procedures that are available only when this camera unit is used with a
compatible camera body. See also the GXR Camera Body User Guide.
To make the best use of this product’s functions, read this manual thoroughly before
use. Please keep this manual handy for ease of reference.
Ricoh Co., Ltd.
Safety precautions Read all safety precautions thoroughly to ensure safe use.
Test shots Take test shots to ensure that the camera is working properly
before taking photos on important occasions.
Copyright Reproduction or alteration of copyrighted documents, magazines,
and other materials, other than for personal, home, or other
similarly limited purposes, without the consent of the copyright
holder, is prohibited.
Exemption from liability Ricoh Co., Ltd. assumes no liability for failure to record or display
images as a result of product malfunction.
Warranty The warranty supplied with this product is only valid within the
country of purchase. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility
for servicing the product in other countries or bearing any
expense thereby incurred.
Radio interference Operating this product in the vicinity of other electronic
equipment may adversely affect both the camera and the other
device. Interference is particularly likely if the camera is used
in close proximity to a radio or television. This can be resolved
by moving the camera as far as possible from the other device,
reorienting the radio or television antenna, or plugging the radio
or television into a different outlet.
© 2010 RICOH CO., LTD. All rights reserved. This publication may not be reproduced in whole or in part without
Ricoh’s express written permission. Ricoh reserves the right to change the contents of this document at any time
without prior notice.
Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information in this document. Should you nevertheless
notice any errors or omissions, we would be grateful if you would notify us at the address listed on the back cover
of this booklet.
Safety Precautions
Warning Symbols
Various symbols are used throughout this instruction manual and on the
product to prevent physical harm to you or other people and damage to
property. The symbols and their meanings are explained below.
Danger
This symbol indicates matters that may lead to imminent risk of
death or serious injury if ignored or incorrectly handled.
Warning
This symbol indicates matters that may lead to death or serious
injury if ignored or incorrectly handled.
Caution
This symbol indicates matters that may lead to injury or physical
damage if ignored or incorrectly handled.
Sample Warnings
The symbol alerts you to actions that must be performed.
The symbol alerts you to prohibited actions.
The symbol may be combined with other symbols to indicate that a specific action
is prohibited.
Examples
= Do not touch = Do not disassemble
Observe the following precautions to ensure safe use of this unit.
Danger
Do not attempt to disassemble, repair or alter the equipment yourself. The highvoltage circuitry in the equipment poses significant electrical hazard.
Warning
Keep the equipment out of the reach of children.
Do not touch the internal components of the equipment if they become exposed as
a result of being dropped or damaged. The high-voltage circuitry in the equipment
could lead to an electric shock. Remove the battery as soon as possible, being careful
to avoid electric shocks or burns. Take the equipment to your nearest dealer or service
center if it is damaged.
Do not use the equipment in wet areas as this could result in fire or electric shock.
Do not use the equipment near flammable gases, gasoline, benzene, thinner or
similar substances to avoid the risk of explosion, fire or burns.
• Do not use the equipment in locations where usage is restricted or prohibited as
this may lead to disasters or accidents.
Caution
Do not allow the equipment to get wet. In addition, do not operate it with wet hands.
Both pose the risk of electric shock.
Safety Precautions
for Accessories
When using optional products, carefully read the instructions
provided with the product before using that product.10
Package Contents................................................................................................. 2
Introduction .......................................................................................................... 3
Safety Precautions................................................................................................ 6
Parts of the Lens .................................................................................................13
Upgrading the Product .....................................................................................14
Updating the camera’s firmware...................................................................................14
Up-down dial.......................................................................................................17
Additional Function for Up-down Dial .......................................................................17
Shooting...............................................................................................................18
Mode P: Program Shift......................................................................................................18
A: Aperture Priority Mode................................................................................................20
S: Shutter Priority Mode ...................................................................................................20
Mode M: Manual Exposure..............................................................................................21
Table of Contents11
The Zoom Macro Scene Mode.......................................................................................22
Dynamic Range Double Shot Mode ............................................................................23
Multi-Target AF ....................................................................................................................27
M-Cont Plus (Low) ..............................................................................................................29
M-Cont Plus (Hi) ..................................................................................................................31
Speed Cont (Low)/Speed Cont (High).........................................................................32
Focus bracketing.................................................................................................................33
[Noise Reduction] Setting................................................................................................36
White balance setting.......................................................................................................37
Playback ...............................................................................................................38
Camera Unit Information Display .................................................................................38
Settings ................................................................................................................39
Shooting Menu Settings in [Zoom Macro] Mode ...................................................39
Shooting Menu Settings in [Dynamic Range] Mode .............................................41
[Picture Quality/Size] Setting (Shooting Menu) ......................................................421
[ISO Setting] Setting (Shooting Menu).......................................................................45
[Camera Shake Correction] Setting (Shooting Menu)...........................................46
[Reg. My Settings] (Key Custom Setting Tab)............................................................46
[Set Fn1 Button]/[Set Fn2 Button] (Key Custom Setting Tab).............................47
[ADJ Lever Setting] (Key Custom Settings Tab)........................................................47
[ADJ. Direct ISO Control] Setting (Key Custom Setting Tab) ...............................48
[Digital Zoom Image] Setting (Setup Tab).................................................................49
[Step Zoom] Setting (Setup Tab)...................................................................................49
Specifications ......................................................................................................50
Internal Memory/Memory Card Capacity..................................................................56
Appendices..........................................................................................................59
Optional Accessories.........................................................................................................59
Precautions for Use ............................................................................................................61
Equipment Care and Storage.........................................................................................62
Warranty and Servicing....................................................................................................631
Parts of the Lens
1
3
2
1 Connector
2 Ring cap
3 Lens1
Upgrading the Product
Updating the camera’s firmware
When you first attach the camera unit to the camera body, the version
update function will start automatically if the firmware of the camera’s
body need to be updated. In such case, update the firmware of the camera’s
body using the following procedure.
If the firmware’s version is already up to date, the version update function
will not start and you can use the lens right away.
1 Check that the camera is turned off and attach the camera unit to the
camera body.
• For details about how to attach the camera unit, refer to the Camera Body
User Guide.1
2 Turn on the camera.
• A confirmation message about updating the firmware appears.
3 Press the Fn1/Fn2 buttons to select [Yes] and then press the MENU/
OK button.
• The firmware’s update begins and the following messages appear on the
picture display.
[Checking rewrite file]
[Rewriting program]
The camera will automatically turn off and then back on. After the camera
restarts, the firmware’s version screen will be displayed and the update will
be completed.1
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• To confirm the firmware’s version, select [Firmware Version] in the setup
menu. Alternatively, with the camera off, keep the6(Play) button
pressed for more than 1 second while holding the – button pressed
down. The firmware’s version will appear on the picture display for about
20 seconds.
• For the latest information on firmware updates, see the Ricoh Web site
(http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/). You can download the latest firmware
updates to upgrade your equipment.1
Up-down dial
Additional Function for Up-down Dial
When selecting the Flash mode, you can also use the Up-down Dial.
When selecting the Self-Timer settings, you can also use the Up-down Dial.1
Shooting
Mode P: Program Shift
Setting the mode dial to P (program shift mode) allows you to select a
combination of aperture value and shutter speed. When the ISO setting
is set to [Auto] or [Auto-Hi], the camera will adjust the ISO sensitivity
automatically to obtain the optimal exposure.
The diagram in the following page gives an approximated estimate of
the shift range for various combinations of aperture values and shutter
speeds. The shift range changes depending on the exposure value (EV). In
this example, the flash mode is set to [Flash Off], and the ISO setting is set
to [ISO100]. For the largest aperture value, it is used together with the ND
filter. In this case, the degree to which the background is blurred does not
change. The degree of blurring is expressed as the aperture value (F value)
even when an ND filter is used.1
F16
F11
F15.4
F7.0
F5.6
F3.5
F8
F5.6
F4
F2.8
F2
F1.4
F1
Ev8
Ev7
Ev6
Ev5
Ev4
Ev3
Ev2
Ev1
Ev0
2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000
Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19
: Wide
: Tele0
A: Aperture Priority Mode
Setting the mode dial to A (aperture priority mode) allows you to manually
set the aperture value. For the largest aperture value, it is used together
with the ND filter. When an ND filter is used, the degree to which the
background is blurred does not change.
The number of available aperture stops varies depending on the position
of the zoom (2 stops at wide-angle end, 3 stops at telephoto end). When
the ISO setting is set to [Auto] or [Auto-Hi], the camera will adjust the ISO
sensitivity automatically to obtain the optimal exposure.
S: Shutter Priority Mode
Setting the mode dial to S (shutter priority mode) allows you to manually
set the shutter speed. The camera will adjust the sensitivity in the range of
ISO 100 to ISO 3200 to obtain the optimal exposure, regardless of the ISO
sensitivity settings. For the largest aperture value, it is used together with
the ND filter.
When the [Shutter Speed Auto Shift] setting in the shooting menu is set to
[On], the camera will automatically adjust the shutter speed to obtain the1
best exposure when it cannot be obtained using the shutter speed that was
set manually.
The [Shutter Speed Auto Shift] setting will not appear when the mode dial
is set to a mode other than S.
Mode M: Manual Exposure
Setting the mode dial to M (manual exposure mode) allows you to
manually set the aperture value and shutter speed separately. For the
largest aperture value, it is used together with the ND filter. When an ND
filter is used, the degree to which the background is blurred does not
change.
If [Auto] or [Auto-Hi] is selected for ISO Setting, ISO will be fixed at 100
while the camera is in manual exposure mode. If the shutter speed is set to
1 second or longer, the maximum ISO available is ISO400. The maximum
shutter speed available is 30 seconds.
The Zoom Macro Scene Mode
When the mode dial is set to SCENE, selecting the [Zoom Macro] mode
will automatically optimize the zoom position, allowing you to shoot the
subject at a larger size than with normal macro shooting. In zoom macro
mode, the optical zoom cannot be used. For zoom shooting methods, refer
to the “Camera Body User Guide”.
Caution ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• You can shoot close-ups using the zoom macro within the following
distances.
Approx. 1cm
(from the front of the lens)
Shooting range: Approx. 19×14mm
(when digital zoom is not used)
Shooting range: Approx. 4.8×3.6mm
(when 4.0× digital zoom is used)
• When [Picture Quality/Size] is set to 4:3 for [L], you can also set [Digital
Zoom Image] to [Auto Resize], and auto resize zoom will be activated.
(GP. 47)
Dynamic Range Double Shot Mode
The “dynamic range”of a digital camera refers to the range of brightness
that can be processed by the camera.
When you select the [Dynamic Range] scene mode and shoot, the scene
is reproduced with a smooth transition from the bright areas to the dark
areas, allowing you to capture a more natural-looking image.
With dynamic range double
shot, two consecutive pictures
are taken with different
exposures and then the areas
with the appropriate exposure
are combined together. This
mode uses a longer shooting
time than other modes, so be
careful of camera shake when
taking pictures. TheJsymbol
is displayed while you half-press
the shutter release button.
Two consecutive
shots
Combined and
saved
Two consecutive
shots
Combined and
saved
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Even when the camera is attached to a tripod, it may move when you press
the shutter release button. For maximum stability it is recommended to use
the self timer or the CA-1 cable switch (sold separately).
Caution ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• This function is not available when [Picture Quality/Size] is set to RAW
mode.
• When using this function, digital zoom will be turned off.
• When using this function, the flash will be set to Flash Off.
• Dynamic range double shot may not be effective if the shooting location
is overly bright or dark.
• [Multi] metering is recommended.
• When shooting a fast-moving subject, the subject may be distorted in the
recorded image.
• Flicker from fluorescent lights may appear as horizontal bands.
Fluorescent lighting may also affect colors and brightness.
Dynamic Range Expansion Effect
The [Dynamic Range Expansion] option in the shooting menu offers five
levels of dynamic range expansion: [Auto], [Very Weak], [Weak], [Medium],
and [Strong]. The stronger the expansion effect, the wider the range of
brightnesses processed by the camera.
To change the setting, select the [Dynamic Range] scene mode and change
the [Dynamic Range Expansion] setting in the shooting menu. After
selecting any setting except [Auto], press the Fn2 button to display the
[Dynamic Range Expansion Options] on the screen. Choose the tone range
given priority for expanded dynamic range from [Highlights], [Shadows],
and [Off].
Dynamic Range Expansion Plus Normal Shooting
When [On] is selected for [Plus Normal Shooting] in the shooting menu,
the camera will record two copies of each photo: one with an expanded
dynamic range and the other with normal exposure. The two copies are
displayed in the picture display after shooting, with the unmodified copy
on the right and the copy with an expanded dynamic range of the left.
To change the setting, select the [Dynamic Range] scene mode and change
the [Plus Normal Shooting] setting in the shooting menu.
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Histograms of the images are displayed after shooting. When [LCD
Confirmation Time] in the Setup tab is set to [Hold], the confirmation screen
remains displayed so you can confirm the histograms and easily compare
the images.
Multi-Target AF
When you half-press the shutter release button, the camera automatically
determines multiple focus positions. When you then press the shutter
release button all the way down, the camera shifts among the different
focus positions, taking five consecutive pictures. The five still images are
grouped together as a set and are recorded as an MP file. This function is
especially useful for telephoto shooting and shooting with macro mode.
A greenVicon will be displayed if the camera is able to focus. If the
camera is unable to focus, the redVicon will blink. The focus positions
selected by the camera are only displayed during playback.
* MP is a file format for recording a set of still images.
Caution ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• The flash cannot be used.
• The camera shake correction function cannot be used. If [Multi-trgt AF] is
set while the camera shake correction function is turned on,Echanges
toF.
• This function is not available when [Picture Quality/Size] is set to [RAW].
• When [Continuous Mode] is set to any setting except [Off], you can
change the Multi-target AF settings, but the function will not be used.
• Interval shooting is not available when Multi-target AF is set.
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• If this function is turned on when using the digital zoom, the digital zoom
is disabled and shooting is performed at the maximum magnification for
the optical zoom (10.7×).
• [White Balance] functions according to the [Auto] setting even if it is set
to [Multi-P AUTO].
M-Cont Plus (Low)
In this mode, the camera shoots while the shutter-release button is pressed,
but only the last 15 frames (about the last three seconds of shooting) are
recorded to create a single multi-picture (MP) file.
Caution ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The time needed to record 15 frames may increase if lighting is poor.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2The camera records the 15 frames taken in the last 3s of shooting.
1When you remove your finger from the shutter release button...
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2The camera records the 15 frames taken in the last 3s of shooting.
1When you remove your finger from the shutter release button...0
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• The image size is fixed at 3648×2736 NORMAL.
• The date and orientation of each shot in the sequence are recorded
separately.1
M-Cont Plus (Hi)
In this mode, the camera shoots while the shutter-release button is pressed,
but only the last 26 frames (about the last 0.9 seconds of shooting) are
recorded to create a single multi-picture (MP) file.
Caution ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
When shooting a fast-moving subject, the subject may be distorted in the
recorded image.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
2The camera records the 26 frames taken in the last 0.9 seconds of shooting.
1When you remove your finger from the shutter release button...
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
2The camera records the 26 frames taken in the last 0.9 seconds of shooting.
1When you remove your finger from the shutter release button...
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• The image size is fixed at 1728×1296 NORMAL.
• The date and orientation of the last shot in the sequence are also used for
the remaining frames.
Speed Cont (Low)/Speed Cont (High)
120 consecutive images are recorded in one second (Speed Cont (High)) or
two seconds (Speed Cont (Low)).
Caution ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
When shooting a fast-moving subject, the subject may be distorted in the
recorded image.
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• The image size is fixed at 640×480 VGA.
• The date and orientation of the last shot in the sequence are also used for
the remaining frames.
Focus bracketing
Focus bracketing is one of the functions available when using auto
bracketing. Focus bracketing automatically shoots 5 consecutive shots
while gradually changing the position of the focus. You can adjust the
interval used to change the focus position.
1 Select [Auto Bracket] in the shooting menu and press the Fn2 button.
2 Press the +/- button to select [FOCUS-BKT] and press the Fn2 button.
3 Press the Fn1/Fn2 buttons to select the focus position interval and
press the MENU/OK button.
• The setting is saved, and the display returns to the shooting menu.
4 Press the MENU/OK button, or press the Fn1 button and then the
MENU/OK button.
• The symbol appears on the screen.
5 Half-press the shutter release button.
• The camera focuses according to the [Focus] setting.
6 Press the shutter release button all the way down.
• The camera takes five consecutive pictures based on the focus position in
Step 5.
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• When [Focus] is set to [MF], the first picture is taken at the set focus
position without being measured.
• [White Balance] functions according to the [Auto] setting even if it is set
to [Multi-P AUTO].
• Photographs are taken and recorded in the following order:
Focus position Fore Center (*) ? Back
Shooting order 2 3 1 4 5
Recording order 1 2 3 4 5
* Focus at the position set for the [Focus] setting in the shooting menu.
• When using this function, the flash will be set to off.
• When [Focus] is set to [Multi-trgt AF], you can change the focus
bracketing settings but the function will not be used.
• When [Picture Quality/Size] is set to [RAW], you can change the noise
reduction setting but the function will not be used.
• When [Continuous Mode] is set to any setting except [Off], you can
change the focus bracketing settings, but the function will not be used.
[Noise Reduction] Setting
Perform noise reduction when taking photographs. Choose from [Off],
[Auto], [Weak], [Strong], or [MAX]. The time required to record images varies
with the option selected. You can use this function to shoot photographs
when the scene mode is set to a mode other than [Portrait], [Sports] or
[Skew Correct Mode].
White balance setting
Using this lens you can set the white balance to [Incandescent 1] or
[Incandescent 2].
Use the [Incandescent 1] or [Incandescent 2] setting when shooting under
incandescent bulb light. Using [Incandescent 2] will leave a slightly redder
tint, compared to [Incandescent 1].
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
When using [Incandescent 2] you can shoot with the same color shades as
with the [Incandescent] setting described in the Camera Body User Guide.
Playback
Camera Unit Information Display
Information of [A12], [S10] or [P10] for each camera unit is displayed on the
Detailed Information Display and the Exif file.
Settings
Shooting Menu Settings in [Zoom Macro] Mode
When [Zoom Macro] is selected, items from the shooting menu that can be
set and default values are as follows.
Item Default setting
Picture Quality/Size L 4:3 NORMAL
Focus AF
Pre-AF Off
Exposure Metering Multi
Image Settings Standard
Continuous Mode Off
Auto Bracket Off
Flash Exposure Compensation 0.00
Item Default setting
Manual Flash Amount 1/2
Flash Synchro Settings 1st Curtain
Noise Reduction Off
Noise Reduction ISO Over ISO 401
Distortion Correction Off
Custom Self-Timer 2 Pics, 5 seconds
Date Imprint Off
Exposure Compensation 0.0
White Balance Multi-P AUTO
ISO Setting Auto
Camera Shake Correction On1
Shooting Menu Settings in [Dynamic Range] Mode
When [Dynamic Range] is selected, items from the shooting menu that can
be set and default values are as follows.
Item Default setting
Picture Quality/Size L 4:3 NORMAL
Focus Multi AF
Snap Focus Distance 2.5m
Full Press Snap On
Pre-AF Off
Exposure Metering Multi
Image Settings Standard
Noise Reduction Off
Noise Reduction ISO Over ISO 401
Distortion Correction Off
Custom Self-Timer 2 Pics, 5 seconds
Date Imprint Off
Item Default setting
Exposure Compensation 0.0
White Balance Multi-P AUTO
White Balance Compensation A:0, G:0
ISO Setting Auto
Camera Shake Correction On
Dynamic Range Expansion Auto
Plus Normal Shooting Off
[Picture Quality/Size] Setting (Shooting Menu)
The following picture quality, image size and aspect ratio options are
available for the [Picture Quality/Size] setting in the shooting menu.
A photograph‘s file size will depend on the combination of picture quality
and image size used. When recording movies, you can select the movie size.
Photographs
Item Aspect ratio Compression Image size (pixels)
RAW 16:9*
2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*
1
3648×2048
4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*
1
3648×2736
3:2*
2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*
1
3648×2432
1:1*
3
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*
1
2736×2736
L (Large) 16:9*
2
FINE/NORMAL 3648×2048
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3648×2736
3:2*
2
FINE/NORMAL 3648×2432
1:1*
3
FINE/NORMAL 2736×2736
M (Middle) 16:9*
2
FINE/NORMAL 3264×1840
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3264×2448
3:2*
2
FINE/NORMAL 3264×2176
1:1*
3
FINE/NORMAL 2448×2448
Item Aspect ratio Compression Image size (pixels)
5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944
3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536
1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960
VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480
*1 When [RAW] is selected, this is the setting used for the JPEG copy.
*2 Depending on the area photographed, black bands may appear on the top and bottom
of the picture display.
*3 Depending on the area photographed, black bands may appear at the right and left sides
of the picture display.
Movies
Item Movie size
HD1280 1280×720
VGA640 640×480
QVGA320 320×240
[ISO Setting] Setting (Shooting Menu)
When [Auto] is selected and the flash is not used, the range of the
sensitivity used will be as follows.
Picture size (pixels) Default Minimum Maximum
RAW 100 100 200
L 100 100 200
M 100 100 200
5M 100 100 200
3M 100 100 200
1M 100 100 238
VGA 100 100 283
• When [Auto] is selected and the flash is used, the sensitivity used will
gain up to ISO400 equivalent.
[Camera Shake Correction] Setting (Shooting Menu)
When [Camera Shake Correction] is set to [On], the camera shake blurring
is minimized.
When camera shake correction is activated, theEsymbol appears on the
screen.
[Reg. My Settings] (Key Custom Setting Tab)
In [Reg. My Settings], you can also set [Step Zoom] and [Zoom Position]
options in the setup tab. For other options available, refer to the “Camera
Body User Guide”.
[Set Fn1 Button]/[Set Fn2 Button]
(Key Custom Setting Tab)
• [Step Zoom] and [AF/M-trgt AF] can be assigned to the Fn1/Fn2 buttons.
• [AF/Snap], [WB Correction], [Step Zoom], and [AF/M-trgt AF] is not
available by pressing the Fn1/Fn2 buttons if the scene mode is set to
[Zoom Macro].
• When the scene mode is set to [Dynamic Range], the following functions
will not be available even if you press the Fn1 or Fn2 button: [JPEGB
RAW], [Continuous Mode], [Auto Bracket], [Flash Comp.], [Flash Amount],
[Step Zoom] and [AF/M-trgt AF].
[ADJ Lever Setting] (Key Custom Settings Tab)
When the scene mode is set to [Dynamic Range], the settings registered
under [ADJ Lever Setting] are [Exposure Compensation] and [White
Balance]. The available settings cannot be changed.
[ADJ. Direct ISO Control] Setting (Key Custom Setting Tab)
When [ADJ. Direct ISO Control] in the Key Custom Settings tab is set to [On],
you can push the ADJ. lever sideways when shooting is possible to change
the ISO setting. The default setting at the time of purchase is [Off].
Caution ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• The ADJ. lever can be used to adjust sensitivity while the shutter button
is pressed halfway in program shift and aperture priority modes (in
program shift mode, sensitivity can be adjusted even after the shutter
button is released, as long as shutter speed and aperture are displayed).
Note that once sensitivity has been adjusted in this manner, [Auto] and
[Auto-Hi] can not be re-selected.
• In shutter speed priority mode and manual exposure mode, you cannot
use the ADJ. lever to change the ISO setting.
[Digital Zoom Image] Setting (Setup Tab)
The size of the recorded image varies depending on the auto resize zoom,
as follows.
Zoom ratio Image size (pixels) Zoom ratio Image size (pixels)
Approx. 1.0× L Approx. 1.8× 3M
Approx. 1.1× M Approx. 2.9× 1M
Approx. 1.4× 5M Approx. 5.7× VGA
[Step Zoom] Setting (Setup Tab)
If [Step Zoom] is set to [On], the focal length for zoom is fixed at eight steps
(equivalent to 28 mm, 35 mm, 50 mm, 85 mm, 105 mm, 135 mm, 200 mm,
and 300 mm*). * Equivalent to that on a 35-mm camera.0
Specifications
Specifications are given for the camera unit mounted on a GXR body.
Effective pixels Approximately 10.0 million
Image sensor 1/2.3" CMOS sensor (total pixels: approx. 10.6 million)
Lens Focal length 4.9mm to 52.5mm (35-mm format equivalent: 28mm to
300mm)
Aperture
(f-number)
f/3.5– f/5.6
Focus range
(from lens)
Normal shooting: Approx. 30cm to 8 (wide angle);
approx. 150cm to 8 (telephoto end)
Macro shooting: Approx. 1cm to 8 (wide angle/zoom macro);
approx. 27cm to 8 (telephoto end)
Construction 10 elements in 7 groups (4 aspherical lens elements with 5
surfaces)
Zoom 10.7× optical zoom; 4.0× digital zoom (2.8× for movies, HD
image); approx. 5.7× auto resize zoom (VGA)
Focus mode Multi AF; Spot AF; MF: Snap; 8 ; Multi-trgt AF (AF auxiliary light
and focus bracketing available)1
Shutter
speed
Photographs 1/2000–30s (upper and lower limits vary according to
shooting and flash mode)
Movies 1/30–1/2000s
Exposure
control
Metering Multi metering (256-segment), center-weighted metering,
spot metering (TTL metering, with AE lock)
Mode Program AE, aperture priority AE, manual exposure, shutter
priority AE, move target function
Exposure
compensation
Manual (+4.0 to -4.0EV in increments 1/3EV or 1/2EV), auto
bracketing (-2EV to +2EV in increments 1/3EV or 1/2EV)
Exposure link range (Auto
shooting mode, Centerweighted light metering)
Wide-angle end: 3.2 EV to 16.2 EV; Telephoto end: 4.6 EV to
18.4 EV (link range for automatic ISO converted based on the
EV for ISO100)
• When shooting in surroundings with 6.0 EV or lower,
for every 1.0 EV that the exposure link range decreases,
the camera will shift the setting 0.25 EV toward the low
brightness side. The maximum shift amount is 1.0 EV.
ISO sensitivity
(Standard Output Sensitivity)
Auto, Auto-Hi, ISO 100, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600,
ISO 3200
White balance Auto, Multi-P AUTO, Outdoors, Cloudy, Incandescent 1,
Incandescent 2, Fluorescent Lamp, Manual Settings, Detail;
white balance bracketing
Flash Range
(built-in flash)
Approx. 0.2m–4.0m (wide-angle),
Approx. 0.27m–2.5m (telephoto)
Shooting mode Auto, program shift, aperture priority, shutter priority, manual,
scene (movie, portrait, sports, landscape, nightscape, skew
correction, dynamic range double shot, zoom macro),“My
Settings”
Continuous
mode
Number of
pictures shot
in Continuous
(Picture Size:
RAW)
Noise Reduction off: 5 pictures,
Noise Reduction on (Weak, Strong or MAX): 4 pictures
Number of
pictures shot
in M-Cont Plus
(1 set)
Low (3648×2736) : 15 pictures (5 Frames/Sec),
Hi (1728×1296) : 26 pictures (30 Frames/Sec)
Continuous
mode
Number of
pictures shot
in Speed Cont
(1 set)
Low (640×480) : 120 pictures (60 Frames/Sec),
Hi (640×480) : 120 pictures (120 Frames/Sec)
Compression*1
FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2
Image size
(pixels)
Photographs 3648×2048, 3648×2736, 3648×2432, 2736×2736,
3264×1840, 3264×2448, 3264×2176, 2448×2448,
2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480
Movies 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240
File size
(approx.)
RAW 16:9 NORMAL: 13,053KB/frame, FINE: 14,289KB/frame,
VGA: 11,477KB/frame
4:3 NORMAL: 17,332KB/frame, FINE: 18,984KB/frame,
VGA: 15,226KB/frame
3:2 NORMAL: 15,440KB/frame, FINE: 16,909KB/frame,
VGA: 13,568KB/frame
1:1 NORMAL: 13,053KB/frame, FINE: 14,292KB/frame,
VGA: 11,474KB/frame
File size
(approx.)
L 16:9 NORMAL: 1,630KB/frame, FINE: 2,779KB/frame
4:3 NORMAL: 2,169KB/frame, FINE: 3,705KB/frame
3:2 NORMAL: 1,931KB/frame, FINE: 3,295KB/frame
1:1 NORMAL: 1,633KB/frame, FINE: 2,785KB/frame
M 16:9 NORMAL: 1,330KB/frame, FINE: 2,254KB/frame
4:3 NORMAL: 1,761KB/frame, FINE: 2,990KB/frame
3:2 NORMAL: 1,568KB/frame, FINE: 2,660KB/frame
1:1 NORMAL: 1,327KB/frame, FINE: 2,249KB/frame
5M 4:3 FINE: 2,288KB/frame
3M 4:3 FINE: 1,474KB/frame
1M 4:3 FINE: 813KB/frame
VGA 4:3 FINE: 197KB/frame
Battery life DB-90: approx. 440 shots *3
(based on CIPA standard)
Dimensions (W×H×D) Camera unit only:
68.7mm×57.9mm×44mm (Based on CIPA guide line)
When mounted on the camera body:
113.9mm×70.2mm×49.8mm (Based on CIPA guide line)
Weight (approx.) Camera unit only: 160g (not including the lens cap or
connector cap)
When mounted on the camera body: 367g (including the lens
cap, battery, and SD memory card)
Operating temperature 0°C to 40°C
Operating humidity 85% or less
Storage temperature –20°C to 60°C
*1 The options available vary with image size.
*2 A JPEG file is also recorded (the JPEG file may be a FINE- or NORMAL-quality file with
the dimensions as the RAW file or a VGA file 640×480 pixels in size). RAW files use the
standard DNG format promoted by Adobe Systems, Inc.
*3 For reference only; actual number of shots varies greatly according to how camera is
used. We recommend that you carry spare batteries when in use for extended periods.
Internal Memory/Memory Card Capacity
The following values are given as a reference of the storage capacity of the
internal memory and memory cards of various sizes, by picture quality and
image size, when using the FINE picture quality.
Photographs
Compression Image size
(pixels)
Internal
memory
1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
RAW*
FINE
3648×2048 6 67 137 270 551 1105 2217
3648×2736 4 50 103 203 415 831 1688
3648×2432 5 57 116 228 466 934 1874
2736×2736 6 67 137 270 551 1105 2217
L
FINE
3648×2048 29 323 653 1284 2624 5257 10546
3648×2736 22 242 491 965 1973 3953 7930
3648×2432 24 272 553 1087 2222 4452 8930
2736×2736 29 323 653 1284 2624 5257 10546
M
FINE
3264×1840 36 397 808 1588 3245 6502 13043
3264×2448 27 300 608 1195 2442 4893 9815
3264×2176 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014
2448×2448 36 400 808 1588 3245 6502 13043
Compression Image size
(pixels)
Internal
memory
1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
5M FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238
3M FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063
1M FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181
VGA FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581
* When [RAW] is selected, this is the setting used for the JPEG copy.
Continuous Mode
Continuous
Mode
Image size
(pixels)
Internal
memory
1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
M-Cont Plus
(Low)
3648×2736 38 414 842 1653 3379 6769 13579
M-Cont Plus
(High)
1728×1296 131 1438 2926 5746 11745 23530 47202
Speed Cont 640×480 692 7553 15359 30159 61643 123489 247716
Movies
Image size (pixels) Internal
memory
1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
1280×720
30 frames/second
16 sec. 3 min.
3 sec.
6 min.
14 sec.
12 min.
14 sec.
25 min.
1 sec.
50 min.
7 sec.
100 min.
33 sec.
640×480
30 frames/second
49 sec. 8 min.
55 sec.
18 min.
8 sec.
35 min.
38 sec.
72 min.
50 sec.
145 min.
54 sec.
292 min.
41 sec.
320×240
30 frames/second
1 min.
59 sec.
21 min.
39 sec.
44 min.
2 sec.
86 min.
28 sec.
176 min.
44 sec.
354 min.
3 sec.
710 min.
13 sec.
Caution ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The maximum uninterrupted recording size for a single movie is 4 GB. The
maximum recording time is around 12 minutes at 1280×720 size, around 37
minutes at 640×480 size, and around 90 minutes at 320×240 size.
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
When 1280 x 720 size is set, using SD/SDHC memory cards with a speed
class of 6 or more is recommended.
Appendices
Optional Accessories
The RICOH LENS can be used with the items (sold separately) listed below.
Lens Cap (LC-2)
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Conversion lenses, hoods and other adapters sold separately cannot be
attached to this lens.
• Before using an optional accessory, see the documentation that came
with the product.
• For the latest information on optional accessories, visit the Ricoh website
(http://www.ricohpmmc.com/).0
Removing/attaching the ring cap -------------------------------------------------
Remove the ring cap when using the optional ring cap (LC-2).
Removing the ring cap
Turn the ring cap counterclockwise while
the camera is turned off and remove from
the camera unit.
Attaching the ring cap
With the camera turned off, align the
marking on the ring cap (2) with the
marking on the camera unit (1) and turn
the ring cap clockwise until it clicks. 2 11
Precautions for Use
• The warranty supplied with this product is only valid within the country of purchase.
• Should the product fail or malfunction while out of the country, the manufacturer
assumes no responsibility for servicing the product locally or bearing any
expenditure incurred thereby.
• Do not drop the equipment or subject it to physical shocks.
• When carrying the equipment, be careful that it does not strike other objects.
Particular care is required to protect the lens.
• Abrupt changes in temperature may cause condensation, resulting in visible
condensation inside the lens or malfunction of the equipment. This can be avoided
by placing the equipment in a plastic bag to slow the temperature change, and
removing it only after the air in the bag has reached the same temperature its
surroundings.
• Keep the equipment dry and avoid handling it with wet hands. Failure to observe
these precautions could result in malfunction of the equipment or electric shock.
• Keep the connector clean.
Tip: Avoiding Condensation --------------------------------------------------------
Condensation is particularly likely to occur if you move to an area with a
sharply different temperature, if humidity is high, in a cold room after the
heater has come on, or where the camera is exposed to cold air from an air
conditioner or other device.
Equipment Care and Storage
Caring for the Equipment
• Photographs can be affected by fingerprints and other foreign matter on the
lens. Avoid touching the lens with your fingers. Remove dust or lint with a
blower from a camera supply store, or gently clean the lens with a soft, dry
cloth.
• Clean the equipment thoroughly after using it at the beach or handling
cosmetics. Do not expose the equipment to volatile substances such as
thinner, benzene, or pesticides. Failure to observe this precaution could result
in damage to the equipment or its finish.
• In the unlikely event of malfunction, visit a Ricoh Repair Center.
• This equipment is a high precision device. Do not disassemble.
Storage
Do not store the camera where it will be exposed to: extreme heat or humidity;
large changes in temperature or humidity; dust, dirt, or sand; severe vibration;
prolonged contact with chemicals, including mothballs and other insect
repellent, or with vinyl or rubber products; strong magnetic fields (for example,
in the vicinity of a monitor, transformer, or magnet).
Warranty and Servicing
1. This product is backed by a limited warranty. During the warranty period
mentioned in the Warranty supplied with your equipment, any defective
parts will be repaired free of charge. In the event of equipment malfunction,
contact the dealer from which you purchased the equipment or your nearest
Ricoh Repair Center. Please note that you will not be reimbursed for the cost of
bringing the equipment to the Ricoh Repair Center.
2. This warranty does not cover any damage resulting from:
1 failure to follow the instructions in the instruction manual;
2 repair, modification or overhaul not conducted by an authorized service
center listed in the instruction manual;
3 fire, natural disaster, act of God, lightning, abnormal voltage, etc.;
4 improper storage (noted in the “Camera Body User Guide”), leaking
of battery and other fluids, mold, or otherwise insufficient care of the
equipment;
5 submergence in water (flooding), exposure to alcohol or other beverages,
infiltration of sand or mud, physical shock, dropping of the equipment, or
pressure on the equipment, and other unnatural causes.
3. After the warranty period has passed, you will be liable for all repair fees,
including those incurred at an authorized service center.
4. You will be liable for all repair fees, even within the warranty period, if the
warranty card is not attached or if the distributor’s name or the purchase date
have been changed or are not indicated on the card.
5. Expenses for overhaul and thorough inspection by special request of the
customer will be charged to the customer, whether or not they are incurred
during the warranty period.
6. Any consequential damages arising from failure of the equipment, such as
expenses incurred in taking pictures or loss of expected profit, will not be
reimbursed whether they occur during the warranty period or not.
7. The warranty is only valid in the country in which the equipment was
purchased.
* The above provisions refer to repairs offered free of charge, and do not limit
your legal rights.
* The intention of the above provisions is also described in the warranty card
provided with this equipment.
8. Parts essential to the servicing of the equipment (that is, components required
to maintain the functions and quality of the equipment) will be available for a
period of five years after the equipment is discontinued.
9. Please note that if the equipment is seriously damaged by flooding,
submergence, infiltration of sand or mud, violent shocks or dropping, it may
not be repairable, and restoration to its original condition may be impossible.
Notes-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Before sending the camera in for repair, check the camera body and read
the instruction manual again to ensure proper operation.
• Some repairs require a significant amount of time to complete.
• When sending the equipment to a service center, please include a note
which describes the defective part and the problem as precisely as
possible.
• Remove all accessories not related to the problem before sending the
camera to the service center.If You Encounter a Problem with This Product
Ricoh offices
RICOH COMPANY, LTD.
3-2-3, Shin-Yokohama Kouhoku-ku, Yokohama City, Kanagawa 222-8530,
Japan
http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc
RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006, U.S.A.
1–800–22RICOH
http://www.ricoh-usa.com/
RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC)
Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY
(innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438
(außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438
http://www.ricohpmmc.com/
RICOH UK LTD. (PMMC UK)
(from within the UK) 02073 656 580
(from outside of the UK) +44 2073 656 580
RICOH FRANCE S.A.S. (PMMC FRANCE)
(à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70
(en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94
RICOH ESPANA, S.A. (PMMC SPAIN)
(desde España) 91 406 9148
(desde fuera de España) +34 91 406 9148
RICOH ITALIA S.p.A. (PMMC ITALY)
(dall’Italia) 02 696 33 451
(dall’estero) +39 02 696 33 451*L452 2971A*
Ricoh offices
RICOH ASIA PACIFIC OPERATIONS
LIMITED
21/F, One Kowloon, 1 Wang Yuen Street, Kowloon Bay, Hong Kong
Ricoh Company, Ltd.
Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo
104-8222, Japan
2010 July
EN USA GB GB AE AE
Printed in China
OBJETIVO RICOH
P10 F3.5-5.6 VC de 28-300mm*
Manual de instrucciones
El número de serie se encuentra en la parte inferior del objetivo.
* VC indica que esta unidad incluye la tecnología de estabilización de imagen
Vibration Correction original de Ricoh.
Contenido del paquete
Antes de utilizar su objetivo Ricoh, compruebe que el paquete contenga los
siguientes elementos.
Unidad cámara
El número de serie se encuentra en la parte inferior.
Tapa del objetivo
Viene colocada en la unidad cámara.
? Manual de
instrucciones
(este manual)
? Garantía
Tapa del conector
Viene colocada en la unidad cámara.
Funda blanda
Introducción
Para utilizar este objetivo, es necesario colocarlo en un cuerpo de cámara compatible.
Consulte la Guía del usuario del cuerpo de la cámara para saber cómo ejecutar
las funciones de disparo y reproducción y cambiar ajustes, así como para leer
precauciones importantes de uso. En este manual de instrucciones se hace referencia a
este objetivo como“unidad de cámara” y se explican las funciones y los procedimientos
de manejo que sólo están disponibles al utilizar esta unidad de cámara con un cuerpo
de cámara compatible. Véase también la Guía del usuario del cuerpo de la cámara
GXR.
Para sacar el mejor provecho de las funciones de este producto, lea atentamente este
manual antes del uso. Conserve este manual a mano para poder consultarlo fácilmente.
Ricoh Co., Ltd.
Precauciones de seguridad Lea atentamente todas las precauciones de seguridad para
garantizar un uso seguro.
Fotografías de prueba Haga fotografías de prueba para asegurarse de que la cámara funcione
adecuadamente antes de hacer fotografías en ocasiones importantes.
Derechos de autor Queda prohibida la reproducción o alteración de documentos,
revistas y otros materiales con derechos de autor, con una finalidad
diferente a la personal, doméstica o de otro tipo igualmente limitado,
sin el consentimiento del propietario de los derechos de autor.
Exención de
responsabilidad
Ricoh Co., Ltd. no asume ninguna responsabilidad por no poder
grabar o reproducir imágenes como resultado de un fallo de
funcionamiento del producto.
Garantía La garantía proporcionada con este producto sólo es válida dentro
del país de compra. El fabricante no asume ninguna responsabilidad
relacionada con el mantenimiento o la reparación del producto en
otros países ni los gastos incurridos por este servicio.
Interferencias
radioeléctricas
La utilización de este producto en las inmediaciones de otros
equipos electrónicos puede afectar negativamente tanto
a la cámara como al otro dispositivo. Las interferencias son
particularmente probables si la cámara se utiliza muy cerca de una
radio o un televisor. Esto puede resolverse alejando la cámara del
otro dispositivo, reorientando la antena de radio o televisión, o
conectando la radio o el televisor a otra toma de corriente.
© 2010 RICOH CO., LTD. Todos los derechos reservados. Queda prohibida la reproducción total o parcial de esta
publicación sin la autorización expresa por escrito de Ricoh. Ricoh se reserva el derecho a cambiar el contenido
de este documento en cualquier momento y sin previo aviso.
Se ha hecho todo lo posible por garantizar la precisión de la información de este documento. Si, a pesar de
ello, detecta algún error u omisión, le agradeceríamos que nos lo notificara en la dirección que aparece en la
contraportada de este manual.
Precauciones de seguridad
Símbolos de aviso
En este manual de instrucciones y en el producto aparecen diversos
símbolos de aviso que se deben tener en cuenta para evitarle lesiones a
usted o a terceros, así como también daños materiales. A continuación se
explican los símbolos y sus significados.
Peligro
Este símbolo indica que hay peligro inminente de muerte o
de lesiones de gravedad debido a negligencia u operación
incorrecta.
Advertencia
Este símbolo indica riesgos de muerte o lesiones de gravedad
debido a negligencia u operación errónea.
Precaución
Este símbolo indica riesgos de lesiones o daños materiales
debido a negligencia u operación errónea.
Ejemplos de aviso
El símbolo le indica las acciones que debe realizar.
El símbolo le indica las acciones que no debe realizar.
El símbolo puede estar combinado con otros símbolos para indicarle las acciones
concretas que no debe realizar.
Ejemplos
= No tocar = No desmontar
Para garantizar la seguridad en el uso de esta unidad, observe las siguientes
precauciones.
Peligro
No intente desarmar, reparar o alterar el equipo por su cuenta. El circuito de alta
tensión del interior del equipo representa un gran peligro eléctrico.
Advertencia
Guarde el equipo fuera del alcance de los niños.
No toque los componentes internos del equipo en caso de que quedaran al
descubierto debido a daños o una caída. El circuito de alta tensión del equipo podría
provocar descargas eléctricas. Extraiga la batería lo más pronto posible, teniendo
cuidado de evitar descargas eléctricas o quemaduras. Lleve el equipo dañado a su
distribuidor o centro de asistencia técnica más cercano.
No use el equipo en el baño o una ducha pues podría producirse incendio o descarga
eléctrica.
No use el equipo cerca de gases inflamables, gasolina, bencina, diluyente o sustancias
similares, para evitar riesgos de explosión, incendio o quemaduras.
• No use el equipo en un avión u otros lugares donde su uso esté restringido o
prohibido, pues podría resultar en desastres o accidentes.
Precaución
No permita que el equipo se moje. Tampoco opere la cámara con las manos húmedas.
Ambas acciones implican el riesgo de descargas eléctricas.
Advertencias de
seguridad para los
accesorios
Si utiliza productos opcionales, lea atentamente las instrucciones
suministradas con el producto antes de usarlo.10
Contenido del paquete........................................................................................ 2
Introducción.......................................................................................................... 3
Precauciones de seguridad ................................................................................ 6
Componentes del objetivo...............................................................................13
Actualización del producto ..............................................................................14
Actualización del firmware de la cámara ...................................................................14
Dial hacia arriba/abajo ......................................................................................17
Función adicional del dial hacia arriba/hacia abajo...............................................17
Toma......................................................................................................................18
Modo P: Cambio de programas.....................................................................................18
A: Modo de prioridad de apertura................................................................................20
S: Modo de prioridad de obturación ...........................................................................20
Modo M: Exposición manual ..........................................................................................21
Modo Escena Macro Zoom .............................................................................................22
Índice11
Modo de doble disparo de rango dinámico.............................................................23
AF multiobjetivo .................................................................................................................27
M-Cont + (Baja)....................................................................................................................29
M-Cont + (Alta)....................................................................................................................31
Veloc. Cont (Baja)/Veloc. Cont (Alto)............................................................................32
Enfoque de la exposición automática.........................................................................33
Ajuste [Reducción ruido]..................................................................................................36
Ajuste del balance de blancos.......................................................................................37
Reproducción......................................................................................................38
Visualización de información de la unidad cámara................................................38
Ajustes ..................................................................................................................39
Ajustes del menú de disparo en modo [Macro Zoom] .........................................39
Ajustes del menú de disparo en modo [Rango dinámico]..................................41
Ajuste [Resolución/Tamaño de imagen] (menú de disparo) ..............................42
Ajuste [Ajuste ISO] (Menú de disparo) ........................................................................45
Ajuste [Corre. Vibrac. de la cámara] (Menú de disparo)........................................461
[Reg. Mi Config.] (Pestaña de ajustes personalizados)..........................................46
[Ajuste del botón de función 1]/[Ajuste del botón de función 2] (Pestaña de
ajustes personalizados) ...............................................................................................47
[Configuración Palanca ADJ ] (Pestaña de ajustes personalizados) .................47
Ajuste [Control ISO directo de ADJ.] (Pestaña de ajustes personalizados) ....48
Ajuste [Imagen Zoom Digital] (Pestaña de Configuración).................................49
Ajuste [Zoom Por Pasos] (Pestaña de Configuración) ...........................................49
Especificaciones..................................................................................................50
Capacidad de la memoria interna/tarjeta de memoria ........................................56
Apéndices ............................................................................................................60
Accesorios opcionales.......................................................................................................60
Precauciones de uso..........................................................................................................62
Cuidado del equipo y almacenamiento.....................................................................63
Garantía y servicio..............................................................................................................641
Componentes del objetivo
1
3
2
1 Conector
2 Tapa del anillo
3 Objetivo1
Actualización del producto
Actualización del firmware de la cámara
Cuando acopla por primera vez la unidad cámara al cuerpo de la cámara,
la función de actualización de la versión se iniciará automáticamente si
el firmware del cuerpo de la cámara tiene que actualizarse. En este caso,
actualice el firmware del cuerpo de la cámara utilizando el siguiente
procedimiento.
Si la versión del firmware ya está actualizada, la función de actualización de
la versión no se iniciará y podrá utilizar el objetivo inmediatamente.
1 Compruebe que la cámara esté apagada y acople la unidad cámara
al cuerpo de la cámara.
• Para obtener más información acerca de cómo acoplar la unidad cámara,
consulte la Guía del usuario del cuerpo de la cámara.1
2 Encienda la cámara.
• Aparecerá un mensaje de confirmación sobre la actualización del firmware.
3 Pulse los botones Fn1/Fn2 para seleccionar [Sí] y, a continuación,
pulse el botón MENU/OK.
• La actualización del firmware se inicia y los siguientes mensajes
aparecerán en la pantalla:
[Verif. escribir sobre archivo]
[Escribir sobre programa]
La cámara se desactivará automáticamente y, a continuación, la volverá a
encender. Cuando la cámara encienda de nuevo, aparecerá la pantalla de la
versión del firmware y la actualización habrá finalizado.1
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Para comprobar la versión del firmware seleccione [Versión del firmware]
en el menú de configuración. Otra posibilidad es que, con la cámara
apagada, mantenga el botón6(Reproducir) pulsado durante más de 1
segundo mientras mantiene pulsado el botón –. La versión del firmware
aparecerá en la pantalla durante unos 20 segundos.
• Para obtener la información más reciente sobre las actualizaciones del
firmware, visite la página web de Ricoh (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc).
Puede descargar las actualizaciones de firmware más recientes para
actualizar el equipo.1
Dial hacia arriba/abajo
Función adicional del dial hacia arriba/hacia abajo
Puede usar el dial hacia arriba/abajo para seleccionar el modo de flash.
También puede usar el dial hacia arriba/abajo para seleccionar los ajustes
del autodisparador.1
Toma
Modo P: Cambio de programas
Si coloca el dial de modo en P (modo de cambio de programas), podrá
ajustar una combinación de valor de apertura y la velocidad de obturación.
Cuando el ajuste ISO está en [Auto] o [Alt Autom.], la cámara ajustará
automáticamente la sensibilidad ISO para obtener una exposición óptima.
El diagrama de la siguiente página ofrece una estimación aproximada del
rango de cambios para varias combinaciones de los valores de apertura
y las velocidades de obturación. El rango de cambios se modifica en
función del valor de exposición (EV). En este ejemplo, el modo de flash está
ajustado a [Flash No] y el ajuste ISO está en [ISO100]. Para los números f
más grandes, la apertura se utiliza junto con el filtro ND.
En este caso, no cambia el nivel de borrosidad del fondo. El nivel de
borrosidad viene dado por valor de apertura (valor F), incluso si se utiliza el
filtro ND.1
F16
F11
F15.4
F7.0
F5.6
F3.5
F8
F5.6
F4
F2.8
F2
F1.4
F1
Ev8
Ev7
Ev6
Ev5
Ev4
Ev3
Ev2
Ev1
Ev0
2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000
Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19
: Gran angular
: Teleobjetivo0
A: Modo de prioridad de apertura
Si coloca el dial de modo en A (modo de prioridad de apertura), podrá
ajustar manualmente el valor de apertura. Para los números f más grandes,
la apertura se utiliza junto con el filtro ND. Cuando se usa un filtro ND, no
cambia el nivel de borrosidad del fondo.
El número de detenciones de aperturas disponibles varía en función de
la posición del zoom (2 detenciones en el extremo de gran angular, 3
detenciones en el teleobjetivo). Cuando el ajuste ISO está en [Auto] o [Alt
Autom.], la cámara ajustará automáticamente la sensibilidad ISO para
obtener una exposición óptima.
S: Modo de prioridad de obturación
Si coloca el dial de modo en S (modo de prioridad de obturación), podrá
ajustar manualmente la velocidad de obturación. La cámara ajustará
automáticamente la sensibilidad en el intervalo de ISO 100 a ISO 3200 con
el fin de obtener la mejor exposición independientemente de los ajustes
de sensibilidad ISO. Para los números f más grandes, la apertura se utiliza1
junto con el filtro ND. Cuando se usa un filtro ND, no cambia el nivel de
borrosidad del fondo.
Cuando el ajuste [Amp. autom. veloc. obturac.] en el menú de disparo
se ajuste en [On], la cámara ajustará automáticamente la velocidad de
apertura para obtener la exposición óptima en caso de que no se pueda
obtener utilizando la velocidad de apertura que se ajustó manualmente.
El ajuste [Amp. autom. veloc. obturac.] no aparecerá cuando el dial de
modo se ha ajustado en un modo distinto a S.
Modo M: Exposición manual
Si coloca el dial de modo en M (modo de exposición manual), podrá ajustar
manualmente el valor de apertura y la velocidad de obturación. Para los
números f más grandes, la apertura se utiliza junto con el filtro ND. Cuando
se usa un filtro ND, no cambia el nivel de borrosidad del fondo.
Si se selecciona [Auto] o [Alt Autom.] en Ajuste ISO, ISO se fijará a 100
mientras la cámara esté en modo de exposición manual. Si se ha ajustado la
velocidad de obturador en 1 segundo o más, el máximo ISO disponible es
ISO400. La máxima velocidad de obturador disponible es de 30 segundos.
Modo Escena Macro Zoom
Cuando el dial de modo esté en SCENE, la posición del zoom se optimizará
automáticamente al seleccionar el modo [Macro Zoom], de esta manera
el sujeto fotografiado será de mayor tamaño que en una fotografía macro
normal. En el modo macro zoom no puede usarse el zoom óptico. Para más
información sobre métodos de disparo, consulte la “Guía del usuario del
cuerpo de la cámara”.
Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Se pueden tomar primeros planos manteniendo las distancias que se
detallan a continuación:
1cm aprox.
(desde la parte delantera del
objetivo)
Campo de la toma: 19×14mm aprox.
(cuando no se usa el zoom digital)
Campo de la toma: 4,8×3,6mm aprox.
(cuando se usa el zoom digital de 4,0×)
• Si [Resolución/Tamaño de imagen] es 4:3 en [L], también se puede
establecer [Imagen Zoom Digital] en [Rec Área] para activar el zoom con
cambio de tamaño automático. (GP. 47)
Modo de doble disparo de rango dinámico
El“rango dinámico”de una cámara digital se refiere al área de brillo que
puede procesarse con la cámara.
Al seleccionar el modo de escena [Rango dinámico] y hace la fotografía, la
escena se reproduce con una buena transición desde las zonas brillantes a
las oscuras, lo que permite capturar una imagen de aspecto más natural.
Con la función de doble disparo
de rango dinámico, se hacen
dos fotografías consecutivas
con exposiciones diferentes,
y luego se combinan entre sí
las zonas con la exposición
apropiada. Este modo utiliza
un mayor tiempo de toma que
otros modos, así que tenga
cuidado con la vibración de la
cámara al hacer las fotografías.
El símboloJaparece cuando
pulsa el disparador hasta la
mitad.
Dos fotografías
consecutivas
Combinadas y
guardadas
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Incluso cuando la cámara está acoplada a un trípode, puede que se mueva
al pulsar el disparador. Para conseguir una mayor estabilidad, se recomienda
utilizar el autodisparador o el interruptor del cable CA-1 (se vende por
separado).
Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Esta función no está disponible cuando [Resolución/Tamaño de imagen]
está en modo RAW.
• Al utilizar esta función, el zoom digital se desactivará.
• Al utilizar esta función, el flash se ajustará en Flash No.
• La función de doble disparo de rango dinámico podría no ser efectiva si la
ubicación de la fotografía es excesivamente brillante u oscura.
• Se recomienda la medición [Multi].
• Si se fotografía a un sujeto que se esté moviendo rápidamente, podría
salir distorsionado en la imagen grabada.
• El parpadeo de luces fluorescentes puede aparecer como bandas
horizontales.
Las luces fluorescentes también pueden afectar a los colores y al brillo.
Efecto de expansión de rango dinámico
La opción [Expansión de rango dinámico] del menú de toma ofrece cinco
niveles de expansión de rango dinámico: [Auto], [Muy bajo], [Bajo], [Medio]
y [Alto]. Cuanto mayor sea el efecto de expansión, mayor será el rango de
brillo procesado por la cámara.
Para cambiar el ajuste, seleccione el modo de escena [Rango dinámico] y
cambie el ajuste [Expansión de rango dinámico] en el menú de disparo.
Tras seleccionar cualquier ajuste excepto [Auto], pulse el botón Fn2
para mostrar [Opciones de expansión de rango dinámico] en la pantalla.
Seleccione el rango de tonos de la prioridad dada para el rango dinámico
ampliado de [Luz intens], [Sombras] y [Off].
Expansión de rango dinámico + fotografía normal
Si se ha seleccionado [On] en [+ fotografía normal] en el menú de toma, la
cámara grabará dos copias de cada foto: una con rango dinámico ampliado
y otra con exposición normal. Las dos copias se muestran en la pantalla
después de haberlas tomado, con la copia sin modificar a la derecha y la
copia con rango dinámico ampliado a la izquierda.
Para cambiar el ajuste, seleccione el modo de escena [Rango dinámico] y
cambie el ajuste [+ fotografía normal] en el menú de disparo.
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Después del disparo se muestran los histogramas de las imágenes. Cuando
[Tiempo de Confirmación LCD] de la pestaña de Configuración está ajustado
en [Mantener], la pantalla de confirmación sigue mostrándose para que
pueda confirmar los histogramas y comparar fácilmente las imágenes.
AF multiobjetivo
Cuando pulsa a medias el disparador, la cámara determina
automáticamente varias posiciones de enfoque. Cuando pulsa luego el
disparador hasta el fondo, la cámara se va desplazando entre las distintas
posiciones de enfoque, y toma 5 fotografías consecutivas. Las 5 fotografías
consecutivas se agrupan formando un conjunto y se graban como un
archivo MP. Esta función es especialmente útil para fotografía telefoto y
fotografía en modo macro.
Si la cámara puede enfocar, se mostrará un iconoVverde. Si la cámara
no puede enfocar, el iconoVrojo parpadeará. Las posiciones de enfoque
seleccionadas por la cámara sólo se muestran durante la reproducción.
* MP es un formato de archivo para grabar un conjunto de fotografías.
Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• No se puede usar el flash.
• No se puede usar la función de corrección de la vibración de la cámara. Si
se ajusta [Multiobjet. AF] mientras está activada la función de corrección
de la vibración de la cámara,Ecambia aF.
• Esta función no está disponible cuando [Resolución/Tamaño de imagen]
se ha ajustado en [RAW].
• Cuando [Modo Continuo] está ajustado en cualquier opción excepto en
[Off], podrá seleccionar los ajustes AF multiobjetivo, pero no se utilizará la
función.
• El intervalo de disparo no está disponible cuando está ajustado el AF
multiobjetivo.
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Si esta función está encendida al utilizar el zoom digital, éste se desactiva
y la fotografía se realiza con la máxima ampliación para el zoom óptico
(10,7 aumentos).
• [Balance Blancos] depende del ajuste de [Auto] aunque esté ajustado a
[Multi-P AUTO].
M-Cont + (Baja)
En este modo, la cámara dispara mientras se pulsa el disparador, pero
únicamente se graban los 15 últimos fotogramas (aproximadamente los
tres últimos segundos del disparo) para crear un único archivo con varias
imágenes (MP).
Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------
El tiempo necesario para grabar 15 fotogramas puede aumentar si hay poca
iluminación.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2La cámara graba los 15 fotogramas tomados en los últimos 3 s del disparo.
1Cuando retira el dedo del disparador...0
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• El tamaño de imagen está fijado en 3648×2736 NORMAL.
• La fecha y orientación de cada toma de la secuencia de graban por
separado.1
M-Cont + (Alta)
En este modo, la cámara dispara mientras se pulsa el disparador, pero
únicamente se graban los 26 últimos fotogramas (aproximadamente los
últimos 0,9 segundos del disparo) para crear un único archivo con varias
imágenes (MP).
Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Si se fotografía a un sujeto que se esté moviendo rápidamente, podría salir
distorsionado en la imagen grabada.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
2La cámara graba los 26 fotogramas tomados en los últimos 0,9 s del disparo.
1Cuando retira el dedo del disparador...
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• El tamaño de imagen está fijado en 1728×1296 NORMAL.
• La fecha y orientación de la última toma de la secuencia también se
utilizan para los fotogramas restantes.
Veloc. Cont (Baja)/Veloc. Cont (Alto)
Se graban 120 imágenes consecutivas en un segundo (Veloc. Cont (Alta)) o
dos segundos (Veloc Cont (Baja)).
Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Si se fotografía a un sujeto que se esté moviendo rápidamente, podría salir
distorsionado en la imagen grabada.
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• El tamaño de imagen está fijado en 640×480 VGA.
• La fecha y orientación de la última toma de la secuencia también se
utilizan para los fotogramas restantes.
Enfoque de la exposición automática
El enfoque de la exposición automática es una de las funciones disponibles
cuando se utiliza el ajuste de exposición automática. El enfoque de la
exposición automática dispara 5 disparos consecutivos automáticamente
mientras se cambia gradualmente la posición del enfoque. Puede ajustar el
intervalo utilizado para cambiar la posición del enfoque.
1 Seleccione [Ajst.Exp.Autom.] en el menú de disparo y pulse el
botón Fn2.
2 Pulse el botón +/– para seleccionar [ENF. EXP AUTO] y pulse el
botón Fn2.
3 Pulse los botones Fn1/Fn2 para seleccionar el intervalo de posición
de enfoque y pulse el botón MENU/OK.
• El ajuste se guarda y la pantalla vuelve al menú de disparo.
4 Pulse el botón MENU/OK, o bien pulse el botón Fn1 y luego el botón
MENU/OK.
• Aparece el símbolo en la pantalla.
5 Pulse el disparador hasta la mitad.
• La cámara enfoca según el ajuste de la opción [Enfoque].
6 Pulse el disparador hasta el fondo.
• La cámara toma 5 fotografías consecutivas basándose en la posición del
enfoque del paso 5.
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Cuando [Enfoque] está ajustado a [MF], la primera fotografía se toma en
la posición de enfoque ajustada sin ser medida.
• [Balance Blancos] depende del ajuste de [Auto] aunque esté ajustado a
[Multi-P AUTO].
• Las fotografías se toman y se graban en el siguiente orden:
Posición de
enfoque
Parte
delantera
Centro (*) ? Parte
trasera
Orden de toma 2 3 1 4 5
Orden de grabación 1 2 3 4 5
* Enfoque en la posición establecida para el ajuste [Enfoque] en el menú
de disparo.
• Al utilizar esta función, el flash se ajustará en apagado.
• Cuando [Enfoque] está ajustado en [Multiobjet. AF], podrá cambiar el
ajuste del enfoque, pero no se utilizará la función.
• Cuando la [Resolución/Tamaño de imagen] está ajustada en [RAW],
puede cambiar el ajuste de reducción de ruido pero dicha función no se
utilizará.
• Cuando [Modo Continuo] está ajustado en cualquier opción excepto
en [Off], podrá cambiar los ajustes del enfoque, pero no se utilizará la
función.
Ajuste [Reducción ruido]
Active la reducción de ruido cuando haga fotografías. Elija entre [Off],
[Auto], [Bajo], [Alto] o [MAX]. El tiempo necesario para grabar imágenes
varía según la opción seleccionada. Puede utilizar esta función para
disparar fotografías cuando el modo de escena esté en un modo distinto de
[Retrato], [Deportes] o [M. Cor. Trap.].
Ajuste del balance de blancos
Cuando utilice este objetivo podrá ajustar el balance de blancos en
[Incand.1] o [Incand. 2].
Utilice el ajuste [Incand. 1] o [Incand. 2] cuando dispare con bombilla
incandescente. Al utilizar [Incand. 2] dejará un tinte un poco más rojo,
comparado con [Incand. 1].
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Cuando utilice [Incand. 2] podrá disparar con los mismos sombreados del
color como con el ajuste [Incand.] descrito en la Guía del usuario del cuerpo
de la cámara.
Reproducción
Visualización de información de la unidad cámara
La información de [A12], [S10] y [P10] para cada unidad cámara pueden
visualizarse en Visualización de info detallada y en el archivo Exif.
Ajustes
Ajustes del menú de disparo en modo [Macro Zoom]
Cuando está seleccionado [Macro Zoom], los elementos del menú de disparo
que se pueden seleccionar y los valores predeterminados son los siguientes:
Opción Ajuste predeterminado
Resolución/Tamaño de imagen L 4:3 NORMAL
Enfoque AF
Pre-AF Off
Medición Exposición Multi
Ajustes de Imagen Estándar
Modo Continuo Off
Ajst.Exp.Autom. Off
Compensación expo. flash 0.00
Opción Ajuste predeterminado
Luz Flash Manual 1/2
Ajuste sincronizado de flash 1ª cortina
Reducción de ruido Off
Reducción de ruido ISO > ISO 401
Corrección de distorsión Off
Autodisparador Personalizado 2 imágenes, 5 segundos
Imprimir Fecha Off
Compensación Exposición 0.0
Balance Blancos Multi-P AUTO
Ajuste ISO Auto
Corre. Vibrac. de la cámara On1
Ajustes del menú de disparo en modo [Rango dinámico]
Cuando está seleccionado [Rango dinámico], los elementos del menú de disparo
que se pueden seleccionar y los valores predeterminados son los siguientes:
Opción Ajuste predeterminado
Resolución/Tamaño de imagen L 4:3 NORMAL
Enfoque Multi AF
Distancia de enfoque inst. 2,5m
Instantánea pulsación compl. On
Pre-AF Off
Medición Exposición Multi
Ajustes de Imagen Estándar
Reducción de ruido Off
Reducción de ruido ISO > ISO 401
Corrección de distorsión Off
Temporizador Personalizado 2 imágenes, 5 segundos
Imprimir Fecha Off
Opción Ajuste predeterminado
Compensación Exposición 0.0
Balance Blancos Multi-P AUTO
Compensación Balance Blancos A:0, G:0
Ajuste ISO Auto
Corre. Vibrac. de la cámara On
Expansión de rango dinámico Auto
+ fotografía normal Off
Ajuste [Resolución/Tamaño de imagen] (menú de disparo)
Hay disponibles las siguientes opciones de calidad de imagen, tamaño
de imagen y relación de aspecto para el ajuste [Resolución/Tamaño de
imagen] en el menú de disparo.
El tamaño de archivo de una fotografía dependerá de la combinación
de calidad y tamaño de imagen que se utilice. Al grabar vídeos se puede
seleccionar el formato de vídeo.
Fotografías
Opción Relación de
aspecto
Compresión Tamaño de la
imagen (píxeles)
RAW 16:9*
2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*
1
3648×2048
4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*
1
3648×2736
3:2*
2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*
1
3648×2432
1:1*
3
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*
1
2736×2736
L (grande) 16:9*
2
FINE/NORMAL 3648×2048
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3648×2736
3:2*
2
FINE/NORMAL 3648×2432
1:1*
3
FINE/NORMAL 2736×2736
M (mediano) 16:9*
2
FINE/NORMAL 3264×1840
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3264×2448
3:2*
2
FINE/NORMAL 3264×2176
1:1*
3
FINE/NORMAL 2448×2448
Opción Relación de
aspecto
Compresión Tamaño de la
imagen (píxeles)
5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944
3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536
1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960
VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480
*1 Si se selecciona [RAW], éste será el ajuste empleado para la copia en JPEG.
*2 Según el área fotografiada, pueden aparecer bandas negras en la parte superior e inferior
de la imagen visualizada.
*3 Según el área fotografiada, pueden aparecer bandas negras en los lados derecho e
izquierdo de la imagen visualizada.
Vídeos
Opción Formato de vídeo
HD1280 1280×720
VGA640 640×480
QVGA320 320×240
Ajuste [Ajuste ISO] (Menú de disparo)
Si se selecciona [Auto] y no se utiliza el flash, el rango de sensibilidad
empleado será el siguiente.
Tamaño de la
imagen (píxeles)
Valor
predeterminado
Mínimo Máximo
RAW 100 100 200
L 100 100 200
M 100 100 200
5M 100 100 200
3M 100 100 200
1M 100 100 238
VGA 100 100 283
• Si se selecciona [Auto] y se utiliza el flash, la sensibilidad empleada
aumentará hasta un nivel equivalente a ISO400.
Ajuste [Corre. Vibrac. de la cámara] (Menú de disparo)
Cuando [Corre. Vibrac. de la cámara] está ajustado en [On] se minimiza la
borrosidad debida a la vibración de la cámara.
Si se activa la corrección de la vibración de la cámara, aparece en la pantalla
el símboloE.
[Reg. Mi Config.] (Pestaña de ajustes personalizados)
En [Reg. Mi Config.], también se pueden elegir las opciones [Zoom Por
Pasos] y [Posición del zoom] en el configuración. Para más información
sobre las demás opciones disponibles, consulte la “Guía del usuario del
cuerpo de la cámara”.
[Ajuste del botón de función 1]/[Ajuste del botón de función 2]
(Pestaña de ajustes personalizados)
• [Zoom Por Pasos] y [AF/Multiob. AF] puede asignarse a los botones
Fn1/Fn2.
• [AF/Snap], [Compen. BB], [Zoom Por Pasos] y [AF/Multiob. AF] no son
accesibles pulsando los botones Fn1/Fn2 si el modo de escena es [Macro
Zoom].
• Cuando el modo de escena se ha ajustado en [Rango dinámico], las
siguientes funciones no estarán disponibles incluso si pulsa el botón Fn1
o Fn2: [JPEGBRAW], [Modo Continuo], [Ajst.Exp.Autom.], [Comp. flash],
[Luz Flash], [Zoom Por Pasos] y [AF/Multiob. AF].
[Configuración Palanca ADJ ] (Pestaña de ajustes personalizados)
Cuando el modo de escena se ajuste en [Rango dinámico], los ajustes
registrados en [Configuración Palanca ADJ] son [Compensación Exposición]
y [Balance Blancos]. Los ajustes disponibles no se pueden cambiar.
Ajuste [Control ISO directo de ADJ.] (Pestaña de ajustes personalizados)
Cuando el ajuste [Control ISO directo de ADJ.] en la pestaña de ajustes
personalizados se ajusta en [On], puede empujar la palanca ADJ. hacia un
lado cuando dispare para cambiar el ajuste ISO. El ajuste predeterminado
es [Off].
Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Puede usarse la palanca ADJ. para ajustar la sensibilidad cuando el
disparador esté pulsado hasta la mitad de su recorrido en los modos de
cambio de programas y prioridad de apertura (en el modo de cambio
de programas, puede ajustarse la sensibilidad incluso después de soltar
el disparador, siempre que se visualicen la velocidad de obturación y
apertura). Tenga en cuenta que una vez que ajuste la sensibilidad de esta
manera, no podrá volver a seleccionar [Auto] ni [Alt Autom].
• En el modo de prioridad de velocidad de obturación y de exposición
manual no podrá utilizar la palanca ADJ. para cambiar el ajuste ISO.
Ajuste [Imagen Zoom Digital] (Pestaña de Configuración)
El tamaño de la imagen grabada varía según el zoom con cambio de
tamaño automático, tal como se indica a continuación.
Índice de zoom
Tamaño de la
imagen (píxeles)
Índice de zoom
Tamaño de la
imagen (píxeles)
Aprox. 1,0× L Aprox. 1,8× 3M
Aprox. 1,1× M Aprox. 2,9× 1M
Aprox. 1,4× 5M Aprox. 5,7× VGA
Ajuste [Zoom Por Pasos] (Pestaña de Configuración)
Si está activado [On] el [Zoom Por Pasos], la distancia focal para el zoom
queda fijada en ocho pasos (que equivalen a 28 mm, 35 mm, 50 mm, 85
mm, 105 mm, 135 mm, 200 mm y 300 mm*). * Equivalente a la de una
cámara de 35 mm.0
Especificaciones
La especificaciones corresponden a la unidad cámara montada en un cuerpo GXR.
Píxeles efectivos Aproximadamente 10,0 millones
Sensor de imagen Sensor 1/2,3" CMOS (píxeles totales: 10,6 millones aprox.)
Objetivo Distancia focal De 4,9mm a 52,5mm (formato equivalente a 35 mm: de
28mm a 300mm)
Apertura
(número f)
f/3,5– f/5,6
Rango de
enfoque
(desde el
objetivo)
Disparo normal: De 30cm aprox. a 8 (gran angular) y de
150 cm aprox. a 8 (teleobjetivo)
Fotografía macro: De 1cm aprox. a 8 (gran angular/macro
zoom) y de 27cm aprox. a 8 (teleobjetivo)
Construcción 10 elementos en 7 grupos (4 elementos asféricos con 5
superficies)
Zoom Zoom óptico de 10,7×; zoom digital de 4,0× (2,8× para vídeos,
imagen HD); zoom con cambio de tamaño automático de 5,7×
aprox. (VGA)1
Modo de enfoque Multi AF; Spot AF; MF: Snap; 8 ; Multiobjet. AF (luz auxiliar AF y
ajustes del enfoque disponibles)
Velocidad
de
obturación
Fotografías 1/2000–30s (los límites superior e inferior varían según el
modo de toma y flash)
Vídeos 1/30–1/2000s
Control
de la
exposición
Medición Medición múltiple (256 segmentos), medición con ponderación
central, medición puntual (medición TTL con Bloq. AE)
Modo Programa AE, prioridad de apertura AE, exposición manual,
prioridad de obturación AE, función Cambiar objeto
Compensación
de exposición
Manual (+4,0 a –4,0EV en incrementos de 1/3EV o 1/2EV),
horquillado automático (–2EV a +2EV en incrementos de
1/3EV o 1/2EV)
Rango de vínculo de
exposición (modo de disparo
automático, medición con
ponderación central)
Extremo gran angular: de 3,2 EV a 16,2 EV; extremo
teleobjetivo: de 4,6 EV a 18,4 EV (rango de vínculo para ISO
convertido automático según el EV de ISO100)
• Al tomar fotografías en entornos con EV de 6,0 o menos,
por cada 1,0 EV que el rango del vínculo de exposición
disminuye, la cámara cambiará el ajuste 0,25 EV hacia el
lado de bajo brillo. La cantidad máxima de cambio es 1,0 EV.
Sensibilidad ISO (sensibilidad
de salida estándar)
Auto, Alt Autom., ISO 100, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600,
ISO 3200
Balance de blancos Auto, Multi-P AUTO, Exterior, Nublado, Luz Incand.1,
Luz Incand.2, Luz Fluorescente, Ajuste Manual, Detalle;
horquillado de balance de blancos
Flash Alcance (flash
incorporado)
0,2m - 4,0m aprox. (gran angular),
0,27m - 2,5m aprox. (teleobjetivo)
Modo de disparo Auto, cambio de programas, prioridad de apertura, prioridad
de obturación, manual, escena (vídeo, retrato, deportes,
paisaje, paisaje noche, corrección trap., doble disparo con
rango dinámico, macro zoom),“Mi Config.”
Modo
Continuo
Número de
imágenes
tomadas en
modo Continuo
(tamaño de
imagen: RAW)
Reducción de ruido desactivada: 5 imágenes,
Reducción de ruido activada (Baja, Alta o MAX): 4 imágenes
Número de
fotografías
tomadas en
M-Cont +
(1 grupo)
Bajo (3648×2736) : 15 fotografías (5 fotogramas/seg),
Alto (1728×1296) : 26 fotografías (30 fotogramas/seg)
Modo
Continuo
Número de
fotografías
tomadas en
Veloc. Cont
(1 grupo)
Bajo (640×480) : 120 fotografías (60 fotogramas/seg),
Alto (640×480) : 120 fotografías (120 fotogramas/seg)
Compresión*1
FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2
Tamaño de
la imagen
(píxeles)
Fotografías 3648×2048, 3648×2736, 3648×2432, 2736×2736,
3264×1840, 3264×2448, 3264×2176, 2448×2448,
2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480
Vídeos 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240
Tamaño
de archivo
(aprox.)
RAW 16:9 NORMAL: 13.053KB/fotograma, FINE: 14.289KB/fotograma,
VGA: 11.477 KB/fotograma
4:3 NORMAL: 17.332KB/fotograma, FINE: 18.984KB/fotograma,
VGA: 15.226 KB/fotograma
3:2 NORMAL: 15.440KB/fotograma, FINE: 16.909KB/fotograma,
VGA: 13.568 KB/fotograma
1:1 NORMAL: 13.053KB/fotograma, FINE: 14.292KB/fotograma,
VGA: 11.474 KB/fotograma
Tamaño
de archivo
(aprox.)
L 16:9 NORMAL: 1.630KB/fotograma, FINE: 2.779KB/fotograma
4:3 NORMAL: 2.169KB/fotograma, FINE: 3.705KB/fotograma
3:2 NORMAL: 1.931KB/fotograma, FINE: 3.295KB/fotograma
1:1 NORMAL: 1.633KB/fotograma, FINE: 2.785KB/fotograma
M 16:9 NORMAL: 1.330KB/fotograma, FINE: 2.254KB/fotograma
4:3 NORMAL: 1.761KB/fotograma, FINE: 2.990KB/fotograma
3:2 NORMAL: 1.568KB/fotograma, FINE: 2.660KB/fotograma
1:1 NORMAL: 1.327KB/fotograma, FINE: 2.249KB/fotograma
5M 4:3 FINE: 2.288KB/fotograma
3M 4:3 FINE: 1.474KB/fotograma
1M 4:3 FINE: 813KB/fotograma
VGA 4:3 FINE: 197KB/fotograma
Vida de la batería DB-90: aprox. 440 disparos *3
(basada en el estándar CIPA)
Dimensiones (an.×al.×pr.) Sólo unidad cámara:
68,7mm×57,9mm×44mm (Basando en la pauta de CIPA)
Al estar montada en el cuerpo de la cámara:
113,9mm×70,2mm×49,8mm (Basando en la pauta de CIPA)
Peso (aprox.) Sólo unidad cámara: 160g (sin incluir la tapa del objetivo ni la
tapa del conector)
Al estar montada en el cuerpo de la cámara: 367g (incluida la
tapa del objetivo, la batería y la tarjeta de memoria SD)
Temperatura de funcionamiento 0°C a 40°C
Humedad de funcionamiento 85% como máximo
Temperatura de almacenamiento –20°C a 60°C
*1 Las opciones disponibles pueden variar según el tamaño de la imagen.
*2 También se graba un archivo JPEG (el archivo JPEG puede ser un archivo de calidad FINE
o NORMAL con las dimensiones del archivo RAW o un archivo VGA con un tamaño de
640×480 píxeles). Los archivos RAW utilizan el formato DNG estándar promocionado por
Adobe Systems, Inc.
*3 Sólo para referencia, el número real de tomas varía considerablemente según el uso que
se le dé a la cámara. Se recomienda llevar alguna batería de repuesto si se va a usar la
cámara durante un largo período de tiempo.
Capacidad de la memoria interna/tarjeta de memoria
Los siguientes valores se presentan como referencia de la capacidad de
almacenamiento de la memoria interna y las tarjetas de memoria de
distintos tamaños, por calidad de imagen y tamaño de imagen, utilizando
una calidad de imagen FINE.
Fotografías
Compresión Tamaño de la
imagen (píxeles)
Memoria
interna
1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
RAW*
FINE
3648×2048 6 67 137 270 551 1105 2217
3648×2736 4 50 103 203 415 831 1688
3648×2432 5 57 116 228 466 934 1874
2736×2736 6 67 137 270 551 1105 2217
L
FINE
3648×2048 29 323 653 1284 2624 5257 10546
3648×2736 22 242 491 965 1973 3953 7930
3648×2432 24 272 553 1087 2222 4452 8930
2736×2736 29 323 653 1284 2624 5257 10546
M
FINE
3264×1840 36 397 808 1588 3245 6502 13043
3264×2448 27 300 608 1195 2442 4893 9815
3264×2176 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014
2448×2448 36 400 808 1588 3245 6502 13043
Compresión Tamaño de la
imagen (píxeles)
Memoria
interna
1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
5M FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238
3M FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063
1M FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181
VGA FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581
* Si se selecciona [RAW], éste será el ajuste empleado para la copia en JPEG.
Modo Continuo
Modo Continuo Tamaño de la
imagen (píxeles)
Memoria
interna
1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
M-Cont + (Baja) 3648×2736 38 414 842 1653 3379 6769 13579
M-Cont + (Alta) 1728×1296 131 1438 2926 5746 11745 23530 47202
Veloc. Cont 640×480 692 7553 15359 30159 61643 123489 247716
Vídeos
Tamaño de la
imagen (píxeles)
Memoria
interna
1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
1280×720
30 fotogramas/
segundo
16 seg. 3 min.
3 seg.
6 min.
14 seg.
12 min.
14 seg.
25 min.
1 seg.
50 min.
7 seg.
100 min.
33 seg.
640×480
30 fotogramas/
segundo
49 seg. 8 min.
55 seg.
18 min.
8 seg.
35 min.
38 seg.
72 min.
50 seg.
145 min.
54 seg.
292 min.
41 seg.
320×240
30 fotogramas/
segundo
1 min.
59 seg.
21 min.
39 seg.
44 min.
2 seg.
86 min.
28 seg.
176 min.
44 seg.
354 min.
3 seg.
710 min.
13 seg.
Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------
El tamaño máximo para una grabación ininterrumpida de un solo vídeo es
de 4 GB. El tiempo máximo de grabación es de unos 12 minutos en tamaño
1280 × 720, de unos 37 mintuos en tamaño 640 × 480 y de unos 90 minutos
si se graba a 320 × 240.
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Si se selecciona el tamaño 1280 × 720, se recomienda usar tarjetas de
memoria SD/SDHC de Class 6 o mayor velocidad de transmisión mínima.0
Apéndices
Accesorios opcionales
La RICOH LENS puede usarse con los artículos (se venden por separado)
que se relacionan a continuación.
Tapa del objetivo (LC-2)
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Los objetivos de conversión, las capuchas u otros adaptadores que se
venden por separado no se pueden acoplar a este objetivo.
• Antes de usar un accesorio opcional, véase la documentación que viene
con el producto.
• Para ver lo último en accesorios opcionales, visite el sitio web de Ricoh
(http://www.ricohpmmc.com/).1
Desmontaje y montaje de la tapa del anillo ------------------------------------
Retire la tapa del anillo cuando esté usando la tapa de anillo opcional (LC-2).
Desmontaje de la tapa del anillo
Gire la tapa del anillo en sentido contrario
a las agujas del reloj mientras la cámara
está apagada y retírela de la unidad
cámara.
Montaje de la tapa del anillo
Con la cámara apagada, alinee la marca de
la tapa del anillo (2) con la marca de la
unidad cámara (1) y gire la tapa del anillo
en sentido horario hasta que haga clic.
2 1
Precauciones de uso
• La garantía proporcionada con este producto sólo es válida dentro del país de compra.
• En caso de que el producto presente un defecto o fallo de funcionamiento mientras
está fuera del país, el fabricante no asumirá ninguna responsabilidad en cuanto a la
reparación del producto localmente ni a los gastos incurridos por esta.
• No deje caer el equipo ni lo someta a fuertes golpes.
• Cuando transporte el equipo, procure que no golpee otros objetos. Se requiere
especial atención para proteger el objetivo.
• Los cambios bruscos de temperatura podrían causar condensación, dando lugar a
condensación visible dentro del objetivo o fallos de funcionamiento en el equipo.
Esto puede evitarse colocando el equipo en una bolsa de plástico para atenuar el
cambio de temperatura, y retirándolo sólo después de que el aire de la bolsa alcance
la misma temperatura que el entorno.
• Mantenga seco el equipo y evite sujetarlo con las manos húmedas. La no
observancia de estas precauciones podría causar un fallo de funcionamiento del
equipo o una descarga eléctrica.
• Mantenga limpio el conector.
Consejo: evitar la condensación---------------------------------------------------
Es particularmente probable que se produzca condensación si se desplaza a una
zona con una brusca diferencia de temperatura, si la humedad es alta, en una
habitación fría después de haber encendido el calefactor o cuando la cámara
está expuesta al aire frío de un aparato de aire acondicionado u otro dispositivo.
Cuidado del equipo y almacenamiento
Cuidado del equipo
• Las fotografías pueden verse afectadas por huellas y otras materias extrañas
en el objetivo. Evite tocar el objetivo con los dedos. Retire el polvo o pelusa
con un soplador, que puede adquirir en una tienda de suministro de cámaras,
o limpie suavemente el objetivo con un paño seco y suave.
• Limpie el equipo a fondo después de utilizarlo en la playa o manejar
cosméticos. No exponga el equipo a sustancias volátiles como disolvente,
benceno o pesticidas. La no observancia de esta precaución podría causar
daños en el equipo o en su acabado.
• En el caso improbable de fallo de funcionamiento, visite un centro de
reparaciones Ricoh.
• Este equipo es un dispositivo de alta precisión. No lo desmonte.
Almacenamiento
No guarde la cámara donde pueda estar expuesta a: calor o humedad excesivos;
grandes cambios de temperatura o humedad; polvo, suciedad o arena; fuertes
vibraciones; contacto prolongado con productos químicos, incluyendo bolas
de alcanfor y otros repelentes de insectos, o con productos de vinilo o caucho;
fuertes campos magnéticos (por ejemplo, en las proximidades de un monitor,
transformador o imán).
Garantía y servicio
1. Este producto está cubierto por una garantía limitada. Durante el periodo
de garantía mencionado en la Garantía suministrada con el equipo,
cualquier pieza defectuosa se reparará gratuitamente. En caso de fallo de
funcionamiento del equipo, póngase en contacto con el distribuidor al que
compró el equipo o con su centro de reparaciones Ricoh más cercano. Tenga
en cuenta que no se le reembolsará el coste de llevar el equipo al centro de
reparaciones Ricoh.
2. Esta garantía no cubre ningún daño resultante de:
1 no seguimiento de las instrucciones del manual de instrucciones;
2 reparación, modificación o revisión del producto no realizadas por uno de
los centros de servicio autorizados incluidos en el manual de instrucciones;
3 incendio, desastre natural, fuerza mayor, relámpago, tensión anómala, etc.;
4 almacenamiento inadecuado (indicado en la “Guía del usuario del cuerpo de
la cámara”), fuga de batería y otros líquidos, moho o cualquier otro cuidado
insuficiente del equipo.
5 inmersión en agua (inundación), exposición a alcohol u otras bebidas,
infiltración de arena o barro, choque físico, caída del equipo o presión sobre
el equipo y otras causas no naturales.
3. Cuando finalice el periodo de garantía, usted será responsable de los gastos
de reparación, incluyendo los incurridos en un centro de servicio autorizado.
4. Será responsable de todos los gastos de reparación, incluso dentro del
periodo de garantía, si no se presenta la tarjeta de garantía o si el nombre del
distribuidor o la fecha de compra se han modificado o no están indicados en la
tarjeta.
5. Los gastos de revisión e inspección completa por petición especial del cliente
se cargarán al cliente, tanto si se producen durante el periodo de garantía
como si no.
6. Cualquier daño consecuente derivado de un fallo del equipo, como gastos
incurridos al tomar fotografías o pérdida de ganancias esperadas, no será
reembolsado, independientemente de si ocurre dentro o fuera del periodo de
garantía.
7. La garantía sólo es válida en el país en el que se compró el equipo.
* Las disposiciones anteriores se refieren a reparaciones ofrecidas sin cargos y
no limitan sus derechos legales.
* La intención de las disposiciones anteriores también se describe en la
tarjeta de garantía proporcionada con este equipo.
8. Las piezas esenciales para el mantenimiento del equipo (es decir,
componentes necesarios para mantener las funciones y calidad de la
cámara) estarán disponibles durante un periodo de cinco años a partir de la
descontinuación del equipo.
9. Tenga en cuenta que si el equipo se daña seriamente por inundación,
inmersión, infiltración de arena o barro, choques violentos o caída, es posible
que no pueda repararse ni restaurarse a su estado original.
Notas-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Antes de enviar la cámara para repararla, compruebe el cuerpo de la
cámara y vuelva a leer el manual de instrucciones para garantizar un
funcionamiento correcto.
• Algunas reparaciones requieren mucho tiempo.
• Cuando envíe el equipo a un centro de servicio, incluya una nota
describiendo la pieza defectuosa y el problema con la mayor precisión
posible.
• Retire todos los accesorios no relacionados con el problema antes de
enviar la cámara al centro de servicio.*L452 3973A*
Si surge un problema
Oficinas de Ricoh
RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V.
(EPMMC)
Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY
(innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438
(außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438
http://www.ricohpmmc.com/
RICOH ESPANA, S.A. (PMMC SPAIN)
(desde España) 91 406 9148
(desde fuera de España) +34 91 406 9148
Ricoh Company, Ltd.
Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo
104-8222, Japan
2010 julio
SP E
Impreso en China
GR LENS A12 28mm F2.5
Mode d’emploi
Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’objectif.
Contenu de l’emballage
Avant d’utiliser votre objectif Ricoh, vérifiez dans l’emballage qu’il ne
manque aucun des éléments listés ci-dessous.
Unité appareil photo
Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’appareil.
Capuchon de l’objectif
Est fixé à l’unité appareil photo.
?Mode d’emploi
(le présentmanuel)
? Garantie
Capuchon du connecteur
Est fixé à l’unité appareil photo.
Étui souple
Introduction
Pour utiliser cet objectif, vous devez l’installer sur un boîtier d’appareil photo
compatible.
Reportez-vous au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo pour plus de détails
concernant l’utilisation des fonctions de prise de vue et de lecture et la modification
des réglages et pour prendre connaissance des consignes d’utilisation importantes.
Ce mode d’emploi décrit les fonctions et les consignes d’utilisation qui ne sont valides
que lorsque cette unité appareil photo est utilisée avec un boîtier d’appareil photo
compatible. Reportez-vous également au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil
photo GXR.
Pour utiliser les fonctions du produit de manière optimale, lisez attentivement le
présent manuel avant utilisation. Veuillez conserver le présent manuel à portée de
main pour pouvoir vous y référer facilement.
Ricoh Co., Ltd.
Mesures de sécurité Lisez attentivement toutes les mesures de sécurité pour garantir
une utilisation sans danger.
Essais de prise de vue Faites des essais de prise de vue pour vérifier le fonctionnement correct
de l’appareil avant de prendre des photos d’événements importants.
Copyright La reproduction ou la modification de documents, de magazines
et d’autres sources sujettes aux droits d’auteur, autrement que
pour des raisons personnelles, domestiques ou limitées similaires,
est interdite sans le consentement du propriétaire des droits.
Exonération de
responsabilité
Ricoh Co., Ltd. décline toute responsabilité en cas de défaillance
de l’enregistrement ou de l’affichage des photos résultant d’un
dysfonctionnement de l’appareil.
Garantie La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans
le pays d’achat. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à
la réparation du produit dans d’autres pays ou à la prise en charge
de toute dépense associée.
Interférences radio L’utilisation de cet appareil dans le voisinage d’un autre
équipement électronique peut affecter défavorablement à
la fois l’appareil photo et l’autre dispositif. Des interférences
sont notamment probables si l’appareil est utilisé à proximité
d’une radio ou d’un téléviseur. Ce problème peut être résolu en
déplaçant l’appareil aussi loin que possible de l’autre dispositif, en
réorientant l’antenne de la radio ou du téléviseur, ou encore en
branchant la radio ou le téléviseur sur une prise secteur différente.
© 2010 RICOH CO., LTD. Tous droits réservés. Cette publication ne peut être reproduite en tout ou en partie sans
l’autorisation expresse et écrite de Ricoh. Ricoh se réserve le droit de modifier le contenu de ce document à tout
moment et sans avis préalable.
Tous les efforts ont été faits pour garantir l’exactitude des informations contenues dans ce document. Dans le cas
où vous rencontreriez néanmoins une erreur ou une omission, nous vous serions reconnaissants de bien vouloir
nous en avertir à l’adresse indiquée en quatrième de couverture de ce manuel.
Mesures de sécurité
Symboles d’avertissement
Divers symboles sont utilisés tout au long de ce manuel et sur le produit
lui-même pour prévenir tout risque de blessure ou de dommage aux biens.
Ces symboles et leur signification sont détaillés ci-dessous.
Danger
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner
rapidement la mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les
instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies.
Avertissement
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner la
mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les instructions
correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies.
Attention
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner des
blessures corporelles ou des dommages aux biens si les
instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies.
Exemples de signalisation d’avertissement
Le symbole vous signale des actions qui doivent être effectuées.
Le symbole vous signale des actions interdites.
Le symbole peut être combiné avec d’autres pour indiquer qu’une action
spécifique est interdite.
Exemples
= Ne pas toucher = Ne pas démonter
Prenez les précautions indiquées ci-dessous pour utiliser ce matériel en
toute sécurité.
Danger
Ne tentez pas de démonter, de réparer ou de modifier vous-même l’appareil. Les
circuits à haute tension de l’appareil vous font courir un risque de choc électrique.
Avertissement
Conservez l’appareil hors de portée des enfants.
Si le mécanisme interne de l’appareil est exposé suite à un choc ou autre type de
dommage, ne touchez aucun composant interne. Les circuits à haute tension de
l’appareil peuvent causer des chocs électriques. Retirez la batterie dès que possible,
en prenant soin d’éviter tout choc électrique ou brûlure. Apportez l’appareil au
revendeur ou au service après-vente le plus proche s’il est endommagé.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans un endroit humide car vous risqueriez de provoquer un
incendie ou de subir une décharge électrique.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil à proximité de gaz inflammables, d’essence, de benzène,
de solvant ou de substances du même type pour éviter tout risque d’explosion,
d’incendie ou de brûlure.
• N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans des lieux où son usage est limité ou interdit afin
d’éviter tout risque de catastrophe ou d’accident.
Attention
Ne laissez pas l’équipement prendre l’eau ou se mouiller. Ne l’utilisez pas non plus
avec les mains mouillées. Dans les deux cas, vous risquez de subir une décharge
électrique.
Consignes de
sécurité relatives aux
accessoires
Avant d’utiliser un produit optionnel, lisez attentivement les
instructions fournies avec ce produit.10
Contenu de l’emballage ..................................................................................................... 2
Introduction............................................................................................................................ 3
Mesures de sécurité............................................................................................................. 6
Nomenclature de l’objectif...............................................................................13
Mise à jour du produit.......................................................................................14
Mise à jour du micrologiciel de l’appareil photo.....................................................14
Prise de vue..........................................................................................................17
Fonctions de prise de vue macro..................................................................................17
Mode P : Changement de programme.......................................................................18
Mode M : Exposition manuelle ......................................................................................20
Lecture..................................................................................................................21
Affichage des informations sur l’unité appareil photo .........................................21
Table des matières11
Réglages...............................................................................................................22
Réglage [Qualité image/Taille] (Menu prise de vue)..............................................22
Photos...........................................................................................................................23
Vidéos............................................................................................................................24
Réglage [Réduction bruit] (Menu de prise de vue) ................................................25
Réglage [Sensibilité ISO] (Menu prise de vue) .........................................................26
[Agrand. affich] (Menu de prise de vue).....................................................................27
[Enr. Mes Réglages] (Options personnalisées)..........................................................28
[Confirmation du déclencheur] (Menu onglet des options personnalisées)...28
Réglages de la manette ADJ. (Menu onglet des options personnalisées).....29
Réglages des touches Fn1/Fn2 (Menu onglet des options personnalisées)....29
[Supprimer Mes Réglages] (Menu onglet des options personnalisées).........30
[Rétablir valeurs par défaut] (Menu onglet des options personnalisées)......30
Réglage [Image zoom numérique] (Onglet de configuration) ..........................31
[Réglages bague mise au point] (Onglet de configuration)................................321
[Réglage Zone AF Spot] (Menu onglet de configuration)....................................33
Caractéristiques..................................................................................................34
Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire................................................................40
Annexes................................................................................................................43
Accessoires en option.......................................................................................................43
Précautions d’emploi.........................................................................................................44
Entretien et stockage de l’équipement.......................................................................46
Garantie et réparation.......................................................................................................481
Nomenclature de l’objectif
1 2 3
1 Connecteur
2 Bague de mise au point
3 Objectif1
Mise à jour du produit
Mise à jour du micrologiciel de l’appareil photo
Lorsque vous fixez pour la première fois l’unité appareil photo au boîtier de
l’appareil, la fonction de mise à jour de version démarre automatiquement
si le micrologiciel du boîtier de l’appareil doit être mis à jour. Dans ce cas,
mettez à jour le micrologiciel du boîtier de l’appareil comme suit.
Si la version du micrologiciel est déjà à jour, la fonction de mise à jour de
version ne démarre pas et vous pouvez utiliser l’objectif immédiatement.
1 Vérifiez que l’appareil photo est hors tension et fixez l’unité
appareil photo au boîtier de l’appareil.
• Pour en savoir plus sur la fixation de l’unité appareil photo, reportez-vous
au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo.1
2 Mettez l’appareil photo sous tension.
• Un message de confirmation relatif à la mise à jour du micrologiciel
s’affiche.
3 Appuyez sur les touches Fn1/Fn2 pour sélectionner [Oui], puis
appuyez sur la touche MENU/OK.
• La mise à jour du micrologiciel démarre et les messages suivants
s’affichent sur l’écran d’affichage des photos.
[Vérification du fichier de réécriture]
L’appareil photo est automatiquement mis hors tension puis sous
tension. Après le redémarrage de l’appareil photo, l’écran de version du
micrologiciel s’affiche et la mise à jour est terminée.1
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Pour confirmer la version du micrologiciel, sélectionnez [Version du
micrologiciel] dans le menu de configuration. Vous pouvez également,
avec l’appareil photo hors tension, maintenir la touche 6 (Lecture)
enfoncée pendant plus d’une seconde tout en maintenant la touche
– enfoncée. La version du micrologiciel s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des
photos pendant 20 secondes environ.
• Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les mises à jour du
micrologiciel, visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc).
Vous pouvez télécharger les dernières mises à jour du micrologiciel pour
mettre à jour votre équipement.1
Prise de vue
Fonctions de prise de vue macro
Les fonctions Macrophotographie, Cible Macro, Macro Auto et Affichage de
la distance de prise de vue minimale au cours des fonctions de prise de vue
macro ne sont pas disponibles avec l’objectif A12 28 mm F2.5.1
Mode P : Changement de programme
Le schéma à la page suivante fournit une estimation de la plage de
décalage des différentes combinaisons de valeurs d’ouverture et de
vitesses d’obturation. Les valeurs réelles peuvent variées selon la valeur
d’exposition (EV).
Dans ces exemples, le mode Flash est défini sur [Flash Non] et la sensibilité
ISO est définie sur [ISO200].1
Ev5
Ev6
Ev7
Ev4
Ev3
Ev2
Ev1
Ev0
Ev-1
Ev-2
Ev-3
F16
F22
F11
F8.0
F5.6
F4.0
F2.8
F2.0
F1.4
F1.0
2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000
Ev8 Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19 Ev20
F22.0
F2.50
Mode M : Exposition manuelle
Si [Auto] ou [Auto-Hi] est sélectionné pour Sensibilité ISO, la sensibilité ISO
sera fixée à 200 lorsque l’appareil photo est en mode exposition manuelle. 1
Lecture
Affichage des informations sur l’unité appareil photo
L’informations sur [A12 28mm] de l’unité appareil photo est affichent sur
l’écran des informations détaillées.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
L’informations sur [A12 28mm] de l’unité appareil photo est affichent
également dans le fichier Exif.
Réglages
Réglage [Qualité image/Taille] (Menu prise de vue)
Les options de qualité de l’image, de taille de l’image et de rapport
d’affichage suivantes sont disponibles pour le réglage [Qualité image/Taille]
du menu de prise de vue.
La taille du fichier des photos dépend de l’association qualité de l’image/
taille de l’image utilisée. Lors de l’enregistrement de vidéos, vous pouvez
sélectionner la taille de la vidéo.
Photos
Paramètre Rapport
d’affichage
Compression Taille de l’image
(pixels)
RAW 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4288×2416
4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
3776×2832
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4288×2848
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
2848×2848
L (Large) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 4288×2416
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3776×2832
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 4288×2848
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2848×2848
M (Middle) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 3456×1944
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3072×2304
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 3456×2304
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2304×2304
Paramètre Rapport
d’affichage
Compression Taille de l’image
(pixels)
5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944
3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536
1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960
VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480
*1 Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit du réglage utilisé pour la copie JPEG.
*2 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent en haut
et en bas de l’affichage de la photo.
*3 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent sur le
côté droit et sur le côté gauche de l’affichage de la photo.
Vidéos
Paramètre Taille vidéo
HD1280 1280×720
VGA640 640×480
QVGA320 320×240
Réglage [Réduction bruit] (Menu de prise de vue)
Réduisez le bruit lorsque vous prenez des photos. Choisissez parmi [Non],
[Auto], [Faible], [Forte] ou [MAX]. Le temps nécessaire à l’enregistrement
des images varie en fonction de l’option sélectionnée. Vous ne pouvez pas
utiliser cette fonction lorsque [Portrait], [Sport] ou [Correction biais] est
sélectionné pour le mode scène.
Réglage [Sensibilité ISO] (Menu prise de vue)
• Lorsque l’option [Auto] est sélectionnée et que le flash est utilisé, la
sensibilité utilisée devient équivalente à la sensibilité ISO800.
• Lorsque [Auto] est sélectionné et que le flash n’est pas utilisé, les valeurs
minimales et maximales respectives pour la sensibilité ISO seront 200 et
400, quelle que soit la taille de pixel (pixels).
[Agrand. affich] (Menu de prise de vue)
Si vous déplacez la cible avec les touches de direction (+/-/Fn1/Fn2) et
appuyez de manière prolongée sur la touche MENU/OK, la position de la
cible sera agrandie, ce qui vous permettra de vérifier la mise au point. En
appuyant de nouveau de manière prolongée sur la touche MENU/OK, vous
pouvez revenir à la vue standard depuis la vue agrandie.
En appuyant de manière prolongée sur la touche t (retardateur) ou en
sélectionnant [Agrandissement] dans le menu des réglages, vous pouvez
régler l’agrandissement de l’affichage. Sélectionnez [2 ×], [4 ×] ou [8 ×] à
l’aide de la touche +/-, puis appuyez sur la touche MENU/OK.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Vous pouvez définir la fonction [Agrand. affich] dans [Réglages touches
Fn1/Fn2] de l’onglet des options personnalisées.
[Enr. Mes Réglages] (Options personnalisées)
Dans [Enr. Mes réglages], vous pouvez également définir les options
[Réglages bague mise au point] et [Réglage Zone AF Spot] dans le menu
Config. Pour les autres options disponibles, reportez-vous au « Mode
d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo ».
[Confirmation du déclencheur] (Menu onglet des options
personnalisées)
Lorsque [Confirmation du déclencheur] est défini sur [ADJ./DIRECT]
dans l’onglet des options personnalisées, une pression à mi-course sur
le déclencheur finalise les réglages en mode ADJ. et sur l’écran DIRECT,
et vous pouvez alors prendre des photos. Lorsque [ADJ.] est défini, les
réglages du mode ADJ. sont finalisés, ce qui vous permet de prendre des
photos. Lorsque [DIRECT] est défini, les réglages de l’écran DIRECT sont
finalisés, ce qui vous permet de prendre des photos. Une fois la prise de vue
terminée, le système revient à l’écran de contrôle.
Réglages de la manette ADJ. (Menu onglet des options
personnalisées)
Vous pouvez définir la fonction [Rapport d’affichage] dans [Réglage 1 de la manette
ADJ.] à [Réglage 4 de la manette ADJ.] dans l’onglet des options personnalisées.
Si vous définissez la fonction Rapport d’affichage et appuyez sur la touche de la
manette ADJ., s’affiche, ce qui vous permet de définir le rapport d’affichage.
Pour les autres options disponibles, reportez-vous au « Mode d’emploi du
boîtier de l’appareil photo ».
Réglages des touches Fn1/Fn2 (Menu onglet des options
personnalisées)
Vous pouvez définir les fonctions [Agrand. affich] et [Rapport d’affichage]
dans [Réglages de la touche Fn1] ou [Réglages de la touche Fn2] dans
l’onglet des options personnalisées.
Si vous définissez la fonction Rapport d’affichage et appuyez sur la touche
Fn1 ou Fn2, vous pourrez définir le rapport d’affichage.
Pour les autres options disponibles, reportez-vous au « Mode d’emploi du
boîtier de l’appareil photo ».0
[Supprimer Mes Réglages] (Menu onglet des options
personnalisées)
En sélectionnant [Supprimer Mes Réglages] dans l’onglet des options
personnalisées, vous pouvez annuler les réglages définis dans [Enr. Mes
Réglages] pour [Boîte Mes Réglages] et pour [MY1], [MY2] et [MY3] sur le
sélecteur de mode.
[Rétablir valeurs par défaut] (Menu onglet des options
personnalisées)
Si [Rétablir valeurs par défaut] est sélectionné dans l’onglet des options
personnalisées, les réglages personnalisés seront restaurés.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Les réglages définis dans [Enr. Mes Réglages] ne seront pas restaurés.1
Réglage [Image zoom numérique] (Onglet de
configuration)
La taille de l’image enregistrée varie en fonction du zoom de
redimensionnement automatique, de la manière suivante.
Rapport de zoom Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Rapport de zoom Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Environ 1,0× L Environ 1,8× 3M
Environ 1,2× M Environ 3,0× 1M
Environ 1,5× 5M Environ 5,9× VGA
[Réglages bague mise au point] (Onglet de configuration)
Sous [Réglages bague mise au point], vous pouvez sélectionner un mode
qui active les fonctions pour la mise au point automatique et la mise au
point manuelle ou un mode qui active uniquement les fonctions pour la
mise au point manuelle.
Lorsque l’option [AF+MF] est sélectionnée, une fois le déclencheur enfoncé
à mi-course pour régler la mise au point, la mise au point peut être réglée
de manière plus précise en tournant la bague de mise au point.
Paramètre
AF+MF MF uniquement
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Si vous appuyez de nouveau sur le déclencheur après le réglage fin, la mise
au point automatique est activée et le réglage est annulé.
[Réglage Zone AF Spot] (Menu onglet de configuration)
Vous pouvez sélectionner [Normal] ou [Repérer] pour la zone AF dans
[Réglage Zone AF Spot] du menu de configuration. Lorsque [AF Spot] est
sélectionné dans [Mise au point] du menu de prise de vue, la mise au point
est définie sur le mode de zone AF sélectionné dans [Réglage Zone AF
Spot].
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Lorsque [Repérer] est sélectionné, la vue de la zone AF est plus petite qu’en
mode [Normal].
Caractéristiques
Les caractéristiques correspondent à l’unité appareil photo installée sur un
boîtier GXR.
Pixels réels Environ 12,3 millions
Capteur d’image 23,6 mm×15,7 mm CMOS (nombre total de pixels : environ
12,9 millions)
Objectif Distance focale 18,3mm (format 35 mm équivalent : 28mm)
Ouverture
(nombre f)
f/2,5– f/22
(filtre à densité neutre utilisé pour les ouvertures f/22 en mode
prise de vue automatique)
Plage mise au
point (de l’objectif)
Environ 20cm–8 (téléobjectif)
Construction 9 éléments en 6 groupes (2 objectifs asphériques avec 2 surfaces)
Diamètre du filtre 40,5 mm
Zoom 4,0× zoom numérique (photos), zoom numérique
3,6×(vidéos) ; environ 5,9× zoom de redimensionnement
automatique (VGA)
Mode mise au point AF multi et AF spot basé sur Contraste AF ; MF ; snap ; 8
(verrouillage de mise au point et assistance AF)
Vitesse
d’obturation
Photos 1/3200–180s (les limites inférieures et supérieures varient en
fonction du mode prise de vue et flash)
Vidéos 1/2000–1/30s
Contrôle
exposition
Mesure Mesure TTL-CCD en modes multi (256 segments), central
pondéré, et spot avec verrouillage de l’exposition automatique
Mode Programme AE, priorité à l’ouverture AE, exposition manuelle,
priorité à l’obturation AE, fonction de décalage de la cible
Correction de
l’exposition
Manuelle (+4,0 à -4,0EV par incrément de 1/3EV ou 1/2EV),
cadrage automatique (-2EV à +2EV par incrément de 1/3EV
ou 1/2EV)
Portée du lien d’exposition
(mode prise de vue
automatique, mesure
centrale pondérée de la
lumière)
2,2 EV–19,3 EV (portée du lien pour une sensibilité ISO
automatique convertie en fonction de la valeur EV pour
ISO100)
• Lors de la prise de vue avec des valeurs proches de 6,0 EV
ou inférieures, pour chaque réduction de la portée du lien
d’exposition de 1,0 EV, l’appareil photo modifie le réglage
de 0,25 EV vers une luminosité plus faible. Le changement
maximum possible est de 1,0 EV.
Sensibilité ISO
(sensibilité sortie standard)
Auto, Auto-Hi, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200
Balance des blancs Auto, Multi-P AUTO, En extérieur, Nuageux, Incandescente1,
Incandescente2, Lampe fluorescente, Réglage manuel, Détail ;
cadrage auto balance des blancs
Flash Portée
(flash intégré)
Environ 20cm–3,0m (ISO auto) (téléobjectif)
Mode prise de vue Auto, changement de programme, priorité à l’ouverture,
priorité à l’obturation, manuel, scène (vidéo, portrait, sports,
paysage, nuit, correction biais), « Mes Réglages »
Mode
continu
Nombre de
photos prises
à l’aide de
l’option Continu
(Taille d’image :
RAW)
Réduction du bruit désactivée ou activée (faible) : 4 photos,
Réduction du bruit activée (forte) : 3 photos
Réduction du bruit activée MAX : 3 photos
Nombre de
photos prises à
l’aide de l’option
Cont.M + (un
ensemble)
Rap (1280 × 856) : 30 photos (24 images/s)
Len (4288 × 2848) : 15 photos (3 images/s)
Compression*1
FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2
Taille de
l’image
(pixels)
Photos 4288×2416, 3776×2832, 4288×2848, 2848×2848,
3456×1944, 3072×2304, 3456×2304, 2304×2304,
2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480
Vidéos 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240
Taille fichier
(approximative)
RAW 16:9 NORMAL : 17 800Ko/image, FINE : 19 515Ko/image,
VGA : 15 587Ko/image
4:3 NORMAL : 18 387Ko/image, FINE : 20 157Ko/image,
VGA : 16 124Ko/image
3:2 NORMAL : 20 946Ko/image, FINE : 22 967Ko/image,
VGA : 18 337Ko/image
1:1 NORMAL : 13 991Ko/image, FINE : 15 333Ko/image,
VGA : 12 273Ko/image
Taille fichier
(approximative)
L 16:9 NORMAL : 2 222Ko/image, FINE : 3 816Ko/image
4:3 NORMAL : 2 315Ko/image, FINE : 3 960Ko/image
3:2 NORMAL : 2 615Ko/image, FINE : 4 493Ko/image
1:1 NORMAL : 1 761Ko/image, FINE : 3 009Ko/image
M 16:9 NORMAL : 1 475Ko/image, FINE : 2 509Ko/image
4:3 NORMAL : 1 574Ko/image, FINE : 2 662Ko/image
3:2 NORMAL : 1 744Ko/image, FINE : 2 968Ko/image
1:1 NORMAL : 1 186Ko/image, FINE : 2 003Ko/image
5M 4:3 FINE : 2 287Ko/image
3M 4:3 FINE : 1 474Ko/image
1M 4:3 FINE : 812Ko/image
VGA 4:3 FINE : 197Ko/image
Longévité batterie
(basée sur norme CIPA)
DB-90 : environ 320 prises de vue*3
Dimensions (L×H×P) Unité appareil photo uniquement :
68,7mm×57,9mm×50,4mm (Basé sur la directive CIPA)
Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo :
113,9mm×70,2mm×55,6mm (Basé sur la directive CIPA)
Poids (approximatif) Unité appareil photo uniquement : 210 g
Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo : 410 g (y
compris la batterie et la carte mémoire SD)
Température fonctionnement 0°C à 40°C
Humidité fonctionnement 90% ou moins
Température stockage –20°C à 60°C
*1 Les options disponibles varient selon la taille d’image.
*2 Un fichier JPEG est également enregistré (le fichier JPEG peut être d’une qualité FINE
ou NORMAL avec les mêmes dimensions que le fichier RAW ou VGA pour une taille de
640×480 pixels). Les fichiers RAW utilisent le format standard DNG promu par Adobe
Systems, Inc.
*3 Pour référence uniquement ; le nombre réel de prises de vue varie énormément selon
l’utilisation de l’appareil. Nous vous recommandons d’emporter des batteries de rechange
lors d’une utilisation pendant une période prolongée.0
Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire
Les valeurs suivantes sont données à titre de référence de la capacité de stockage
de la mémoire interne et de cartes mémoire de différentes tailles, en fonction de la
qualité d’image et de la taille d’image, lors de l’utilisation de la qualité d’image FINE.
Photos
Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go
RAW*
FINE
4288×2416 4 49 100 197 404 810 1625
3776×2832 4 47 97 191 391 784 1573
4288×2848 3 42 85 168 343 688 1380
2848×2848 5 63 128 251 513 1029 2065
L
FINE
4288×2416 21 235 476 935 1912 3830 7684
3776×2832 20 227 462 907 1854 3715 7453
4288×2848 18 200 407 799 1633 3272 6565
2848×2848 27 299 608 1195 2442 4893 98151
Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go
M
FINE
3456×1944 32 357 724 1419 2902 5814 11662
3072×2304 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014
3456×2304 27 302 614 1206 2466 4941 9913
2304×2304 41 447 903 1774 3627 7267 14578
5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238
3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063
1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181
VGA/FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581
* Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit de la compression utilisée pour la copie
JPEG.
Vidéos
Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Mémoire
interne
1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go
1280×720
24 images/seconde
21s 3min
49s
7min
46s
15min
58s
31min
10s
62min
26s
125min
15s
640×480
24 images/seconde
1min 11min
2s
22min
27s
46min
10s
90min
7s
180min
32s
362min
9s
320×240
24 images/seconde
2min
25s
26min
24s
53min
43s
110min
27s
215min
35s
431min
52s
866min
19s
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
La taille d’enregistrement sans interruption maximale pour une vidéo est de
4 Go. La durée maximale d’enregistrement est de 15 minutes environ pour
une taille de 1280 × 720, de 46 minutes environ pour une taille de 640 × 480
et de 90 minutes environ pour une taille de 320 × 240.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Lors de l’enregistrement de vidéos avec la taille de vidéo définie sur 1280 ×
720, l’utilisation de cartes mémoire SD/SDHC de classe 6 est recommandée.
Annexes
Accessoires en option
L’objectif RICOH peut être utilisé avec les éléments suivants (vendus séparément).
Paresoleil d´objectif (LH-1)
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Avant d’utiliser un accessoire optionnel, consultez la documentation
fournie avec le produit.
• Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les accessoires optionnels,
visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricohpmmc.com/).
Précautions d’emploi
• La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans le pays d’achat.
• Dans le cas d’une panne ou d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil à l’étranger, le
fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit localement
ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée.
• Ne faites pas tomber l’équipement et évitez-lui les chocs physiques.
• Lors du transport de l’équipement, faites attention de ne pas le cogner dans d’autres
objets. Faites particulièrement attention à protéger l’objectif.
• Lors de la fixation d’un filtre ou d’un pare-soleil, veillez à ne pas exercer une pression
excessive.
• Des changements brutaux de température peuvent provoquer de la condensation
visible dans l’objectif ou des dysfonctionnements de l’équipement. Cela peut être
évité en plaçant l’équipement dans un sac plastique pour ralentir le changement
de température, puis en le retirant une fois que l’air dans le sac a atteint la même
température que l’environnement.
• Conservez l’équipement sec et évitez de le manipuler avec les mains mouillées.
Le non-respect de cette consigne peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements de
l’équipement ou un choc électrique.
• Gardez le connecteur propre.
Conseil : pour éviter la condensation---------------------------------------------
La condensation se produit généralement lorsque vous vous rendez dans
un endroit avec une brusque différence de température, si l’humidité
est élevée, dans une pièce froide après que le chauffage ait été mis en
marche, ou lorsque l’appareil est exposé à de l’air froid en provenance d’un
climatiseur ou d’un autre dispositif.
Entretien et stockage de l’équipement
Entretien de l’équipement
• Les photos peuvent être altérées par des empreintes ou d’autres matières
étrangères sur l’objectif. Évitez de toucher l’objectif avec les doigts. Éliminez
la poussière ou les peluches avec un soufflant disponible dans le commerce,
ou nettoyez doucement l’objectif avec un chiffon doux et sec. Faites
particulièrement attention au voletcache objectif.
• Nettoyez soigneusement l’équipement après l’avoir utilisé à la plage ou après
avoir manipulé des produits cosmétiques. N’exposez pas l’équipement à des
substances volatiles comme du diluant, du benzène ou des pesticides. Le nonrespect de cette consigne peut endommager l’équipement ou sa finition.
• Dans l’éventualité d’un dysfonctionnement, consultez un centre de réparation
Ricoh.
• Cet équipement est un dispositif de haute précision. Ne le démontez pas.
Stockage
• Ne stockez pas l’appareil photo dans un endroit sujet à : chaleur ou
humidité extrême ; grands changements de température ou d’humidité ;
poussière, saleté ou sable ; fortes vibrations ; contact prolongé avec des
produits chimiques, notamment des boules de naphtaline ou d’autres
produits insecticides, ou des produits en vinyle ou en caoutchouc ; champs
magnétiques puissants (par exemple à proximité d’un moniteur, d’un
transformateur ou d’un aimant).
• Lorsque vous rangez votre appareil photo, veillez à l’installer dans un étui, etc.,
dans lequel la poussière ou les peluches ne pénètrent pas afin d’empêcher la
saleté ou la poussière de se déposer sur l’appareil photo.
De plus, lorsque vous transportez l’appareil photo, ne le mettez pas
directement dans une poche, etc., afin d’empêcher la saleté ou la poussière de
se déposer sur l’appareil photo.
Garantie et réparation
1. Ce produit bénéficie d’une garantie limitée. Pendant la période de garantie
indiquée sur la carte de garantie fournie avec votre équipement, toute pièce
défectueuse sera réparée gratuitement. Dans le cas d’un dysfonctionnement
de l’équipement, contactez le distributeur qui vous a vendu l’équipement ou
votre centre de réparation Ricoh le plus proche. Veuillez noter que vous ne
serez pas remboursé des frais de transport pour livrer votre équipement au
centre de réparation Ricoh.
2. Cette garantie ne couvre aucun dommage résultant de :
1 non-respect des instructions du mode d’emploi ;
2 réparation, modification ou révision non réalisée par un centre de service
agréé, listé dans le mode d’emploi ;
3 incendie, sinistre, catastrophe naturelle, foudre, tension anormale, etc. ;
4 stockage inapproprié (indiqué dans le « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de
l’appareil photo »), fuite de batterie et autres fluides, moisissure ou tout
autre défaut d’entretien de l’équipement.
5 immersion dans l’eau (inondation), exposition à l’alcool ou à d’autres
boissons, infiltration de sable ou de boue, choc physique, chute ou pression
exercée sur l’équipement et autres causes non naturelles.
3. Après l’expiration de la période de garantie, tous les frais de réparation seront
à votre charge, y compris ceux d’un centre de service agréé.
4. Tous les frais de réparation seront à votre charge, même au cours de la période
de garantie, si la carte de garantie n’est pas jointe ou si le nom du distributeur
ou la date d’achat n’est pas indiqué ou a été modifié sur la carte.
5. Les frais de révision et d’inspection complète, sur demande du client, seront à
sa charge complète que la période de garantie ait expiré ou non.
6. Tout dommage consécutif à une défaillance de l’équipement, comme les frais
de prise de vue ou la perte d’un profit attendu, ne sera pas remboursé que la
période de garantie ait expiré ou non.
7. La garantie est valable uniquement dans le pays où l’équipement a été acheté.
* Les dispositions ci-dessus se réfèrent aux réparations gratuites et ne limitent
vos droits légaux.
* L’objectif des dispositions ci-dessus est également décrit sur la carte de
garantie fournie avec l’équipement.0
8. Les pièces essentielles à la réparation de l’équipement (c’est-à-dire les
composants nécessaires au fonctionnement et à la qualité de l’équipement)
seront disponibles pendant une période de cinq années après l’arrêt de la
production de l’équipement.
9. Veuillez noter que si l’équipement est sérieusement endommagé par une
inondation, une immersion, une infiltration de sable ou de boue, des chocs
violents ou une chute, il peut être impossible de le réparer et la restauration de
son état originel peut être impossible.
Remarques------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Avant d’envoyer l’appareil en réparation, vérifiez le boîtier de l’appareil
photo et relisez le mode d’emploi pour garantir un fonctionnement correct.
• Certaines réparations nécessitent un certain temps d’exécution.
• Lors de l’envoi de l’équipement à un centre de réparation, veuillez inclure
une note décrivant la pièce défectueuse et le problème rencontré, aussi
précisément que possible.
• Démontez tous les accessoires non associés au problème avant d’envoyer
l’appareil au centre de réparation.En cas de problème
Bureaux Ricoh
RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V.
(EPMMC)
Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY
(innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438
(außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438
http://www.ricohpmmc.com/
RICOH FRANCE S.A.S. (PMMC FRANCE)
(à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70
(en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94
Ricoh Company, Ltd.
Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo
104-8222, Japan
2010 octobre
FR F-FR
Imprimé en Chine
*L453 3972*
GR LENS A12 28mm F2.5
Instruction Manual
The serial number may be found on the bottom of the lens.
Package Contents
Before using your Ricoh lens, confirm that the package contains the items
listed below.
Camera unit
The serial number may be found on the bottom.
Lens cap
Comes attached to the camera unit.
? Instructionmanual
(thismanual)
? Warranty
Connector cap
Comes attached to the camera unit.
Soft case
Introduction
To use this lens, you need to attach it to a compatible camera body.
Refer to the Camera Body User Guide for details about how to operate shooting and
playback functions and change settings and to read important precautions for use. This
instruction manual will explain functions and operating procedures that are available
only when this camera unit is used with a compatible camera body. See also the GXR
Camera Body User Guide.
To make the best use of this product’s functions, read this manual thoroughly before
use. Please keep this manual handy for ease of reference.
Ricoh Co., Ltd.
Safety precautions Read all safety precautions thoroughly to ensure safe use.
Test shots Take test shots to ensure that the camera is working properly
before taking photos on important occasions.
Copyright Reproduction or alteration of copyrighted documents, magazines,
and other materials, other than for personal, home, or other
similarly limited purposes, without the consent of the copyright
holder, is prohibited.
Exemption from liability Ricoh Co., Ltd. assumes no liability for failure to record or display
images as a result of product malfunction.
Warranty The warranty supplied with this product is only valid within the
country of purchase. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility
for servicing the product in other countries or bearing any
expense thereby incurred.
Radio interference Operating this product in the vicinity of other electronic
equipment may adversely affect both the camera and the other
device. Interference is particularly likely if the camera is used
in close proximity to a radio or television. This can be resolved
by moving the camera as far as possible from the other device,
reorienting the radio or television antenna, or plugging the radio
or television into a different outlet.
© 2010 RICOH CO., LTD. All rights reserved. This publication may not be reproduced in whole or in part without
Ricoh’s express written permission. Ricoh reserves the right to change the contents of this document at any time
without prior notice.
Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information in this document. Should you nevertheless
notice any errors or omissions, we would be grateful if you would notify us at the address listed on the back cover
of this booklet.
Safety Precautions
Warning Symbols
Various symbols are used throughout this instruction manual and on the
product to prevent physical harm to you or other people and damage to
property. The symbols and their meanings are explained below.
Danger
This symbol indicates matters that may lead to imminent risk of
death or serious injury if ignored or incorrectly handled.
Warning
This symbol indicates matters that may lead to death or serious
injury if ignored or incorrectly handled.
Caution
This symbol indicates matters that may lead to injury or physical
damage if ignored or incorrectly handled.
Sample Warnings
The symbol alerts you to actions that must be performed.
The symbol alerts you to prohibited actions.
The symbol may be combined with other symbols to indicate that a specific action
is prohibited.
Examples
= Do not touch = Do not disassemble
Observe the following precautions to ensure safe use of this unit.
Danger
Do not attempt to disassemble, repair or alter the equipment yourself. The highvoltage circuitry in the equipment poses significant electrical hazard.
Warning
Keep the equipment out of the reach of children.
Do not touch the internal components of the equipment if they become exposed as
a result of being dropped or damaged. The high-voltage circuitry in the equipment
could lead to an electric shock. Remove the battery as soon as possible, being careful
to avoid electric shocks or burns. Take the equipment to your nearest dealer or service
center if it is damaged.
Do not use the equipment in wet areas as this could result in fire or electric shock.
Do not use the equipment near flammable gases, gasoline, benzene, thinner or
similar substances to avoid the risk of explosion, fire or burns.
• Do not use the equipment in locations where usage is restricted or prohibited as
this may lead to disasters or accidents.
Caution
Do not allow the equipment to get wet. In addition, do not operate it with wet hands.
Both pose the risk of electric shock.
Safety Precautions
for Accessories
When using optional products, carefully read the instructions
provided with the product before using that product.10
Package Contents................................................................................................................. 2
Introduction............................................................................................................................ 3
Safety Precautions................................................................................................................ 6
Parts of the Lens .................................................................................................13
Upgrading the Product .....................................................................................14
Updating the camera’s firmware...................................................................................14
Shooting...............................................................................................................17
Macro Functions..................................................................................................................17
Mode P: Program Shift......................................................................................................18
Mode M: Manual Exposure..............................................................................................20
Playback ...............................................................................................................21
Camera Unit Information Display .................................................................................21
Table of Contents11
Settings ................................................................................................................22
[Picture Quality/Size] Setting (Shooting Menu) ......................................................22
Photographs...............................................................................................................23
Movies...........................................................................................................................24
[Noise Reduction] Setting (Shooting Menu).............................................................25
[ISO Setting] Setting (Shooting Menu).......................................................................26
[Enlrg Display] (Shooting Menu)...................................................................................27
[Reg. My Settings] (Key Custom Options)..................................................................28
[Shutter Button Confirmation] (Key Custom Settings Tab Menu).....................28
ADJ. Lever Settings (Key Custom Settings Tab Menu)...........................................29
Fn1/Fn2 Buttons Settings (Key Custom Settings Tab Menu) ..............................29
[Delete My Settings] (Key Custom Settings Tab Menu) ........................................30
[Restore Defaults] (Key Custom Settings Tab Menu) .............................................30
[Digital Zoom Image] Setting (Setup Tab).................................................................31
[Focus Ring Settings] (Setup Tab) .................................................................................321
[Spot AF Area Setting] (Setup Tab Menu) ..................................................................33
Specifications ......................................................................................................34
Internal Memory/Memory Card Capacity..................................................................40
Appendices..........................................................................................................43
Optional Accessories.........................................................................................................43
Precautions for Use ............................................................................................................44
Equipment Care and Storage.........................................................................................46
Warranty and Servicing....................................................................................................481
Parts of the Lens
1 2 3
1 Connector
2 Focus ring
3 Lens1
Upgrading the Product
Updating the camera’s firmware
When you first attach the camera unit to the camera body, the version
update function will start automatically if the firmware of the camera’s
body need to be updated. In such case, update the firmware of the camera’s
body using the following procedure.
If the firmware’s version is already up to date, the version update function
will not start and you can use the lens right away.
1 Check that the camera is turned off and attach the camera unit to the
camera body.
• For details about how to attach the camera unit, refer to the Camera Body
User Guide.1
2 Turn on the camera.
• A confirmation message about updating the firmware appears.
3 Press the Fn1/Fn2 buttons to select [Yes] and then press the MENU/
OK button.
• The firmware’s update begins and the following messages appear on the
picture display.
[Checking rewrite file]
[Rewriting program]
The camera will automatically turn off and then back on. After the camera
restarts, the firmware’s version screen will be displayed and the update will
be completed.1
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• To confirm the firmware’s version, select [Firmware Version] in the setup
menu. Alternatively, with the camera off, keep the 6 (Play) button
pressed for more than 1 second while holding the – button pressed
down. The firmware’s version will appear on the picture display for about
20 seconds.
• For the latest information on firmware updates, see the Ricoh Web site
(http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/). You can download the latest firmware
updates to upgrade your equipment.1
Shooting
Macro Functions
The Macro Shooting, Macro Target, Auto Macro, and Minimum Shooting
Distance Display during Macro Shooting functions are not available with
the A12 28mm F2.5 lens.1
Mode P: Program Shift
The diagram on the following page gives estimates of the shift range for
various combinations of aperture values and shutter speeds. The actual
values may vary depending on EV (exposure value).
In these examples, the flash mode is set to [Flash Off], and the ISO setting is
set to [ISO200].1
Ev5
Ev6
Ev7
Ev4
Ev3
Ev2
Ev1
Ev0
Ev-1
Ev-2
Ev-3
F16
F22
F11
F8.0
F5.6
F4.0
F2.8
F2.0
F1.4
F1.0
2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000
Ev8 Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19 Ev20
F22.0
F2.50
Mode M: Manual Exposure
If [Auto] or [Auto-Hi] is selected for ISO Setting, ISO will be fixed at 200
while the camera is in manual exposure mode. 1
Playback
Camera Unit Information Display
Information of [A12 28mm] for the camera unit is displayed on the Detailed
Information Display.
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Information of [A12 28mm] for the camera unit is also displayed in the Exif
file.
Settings
[Picture Quality/Size] Setting (Shooting Menu)
The following picture quality, image size and aspect ratio options are
available for the [Picture Quality/Size] setting in the shooting menu.
A photograph‘s file size will depend on the combination of picture quality
and image size used. When recording movies, you can select the movie size.
Photographs
Item Aspect ratio Compression Image size (pixels)
RAW 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4288×2416
4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
3776×2832
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4288×2848
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
2848×2848
L (Large) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 4288×2416
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3776×2832
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 4288×2848
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2848×2848
M (Middle) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 3456×1944
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3072×2304
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 3456×2304
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2304×2304
Item Aspect ratio Compression Image size (pixels)
5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944
3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536
1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960
VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480
*1 When [RAW] is selected, this is the setting used for the JPEG copy.
*2 Depending on the area photographed, black bands may appear on the top and bottom
of the picture display.
*3 Depending on the area photographed, black bands may appear at the right and left sides
of the picture display.
Movies
Item Movie size
HD1280 1280×720
VGA640 640×480
QVGA320 320×240
[Noise Reduction] Setting (Shooting Menu)
Perform noise reduction when taking photographs. Choose from [Off],
[Auto], [Weak], [Strong], or [MAX]. The time required to record images varies
with the option selected. You cannot use this function when [Portrait],
[Sports], or [Skew Correct Mode] is selected for the scene mode.
[ISO Setting] Setting (Shooting Menu)
• When [Auto] is selected and the flash is used, the sensitivity used will
gain up to ISO800 equivalent.
• When [Auto] is selected and the flash is not used, the minimum and
maximum values for the ISO sensitivity will be 200 and 400, respectively,
regardless of the pixel size (pixels).
[Enlrg Display] (Shooting Menu)
If you move the target with the direction keys (+/-/Fn1/Fn2) and press and
hold down the MENU/OK button, the target position will be magnified,
allowing you to check the focus. By pressing and holding down the MENU/
OK button again, you can return to the standard view from the enlarged
view.
By pressing and holding down the t (self-timer) button, or by selecting
[Display Magnification Ratio] from the Settings Menu, you can set the
display magnification. Select from [2×], [4×], or [8×] with the +/- button,
and then press the MENU/OK button.
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
You can set the [Enlrg Display] function in [Fn1/Fn2 Button Settings] on the
Key Custom Settings tab.
[Reg. My Settings] (Key Custom Options)
In [Reg. My Settings], you can also set [Focus Ring Settings] and [Spot AF
Area Setting] options in the setup menu. For other options available, refer
to the “Camera Body User Guide”.
[Shutter Button Confirmation] (Key Custom Settings Tab
Menu)
When [Shutter Button Confirmation] is set for [ADJ./DIRECT] on the Key
Custom Settings tab, pressing the shutter release button halfway down will
finalize settings in ADJ. mode and on the DIRECT screen, and you will be
able to shoot pictures. When set for [ADJ.], the ADJ. mode settings will be
finalized, enabling you to shoot pictures. When set for [DIRECT], the DIRECT
screen settings will be finalized, enabling you to shoot pictures. After you
finish shooting pictures, the system will return to the Monitoring screen.
ADJ. Lever Settings (Key Custom Settings Tab Menu)
You can set the [Aspect Ratio] function in [ADJ. Lever Setting 1] to [ADJ.
Lever Setting 4] on the Key Custom Settings tab.
If you set the Aspect Ratio function, and press the ADJ. Lever button,
will appear, allowing you to set the aspect ratio.
For other available options, refer to the “Camera Body User Guide”.
Fn1/Fn2 Buttons Settings (Key Custom Settings Tab Menu)
You can set the [Enlrg Display] and [Aspect Ratio] functions in [Fn1 Button
Settings] or [Fn2 Button Settings] on the Key Custom Settings tab.
If you set the Aspect Ratio function and press the Fn1 or Fn2 button, you
will be able to set the aspect ratio.
For other available options, refer to the “Camera Body User Guide”.0
[Delete My Settings] (Key Custom Settings Tab Menu)
By selecting [Delete My Settings] on the Key Custom Settings tab, you can
cancel the settings set in [Reg. My Settings] for [My Settings Box] and for
[MY1], [MY2], and [MY3] on the mode dial.
[Restore Defaults] (Key Custom Settings Tab Menu)
If [Restore Defaults] is selected on the Key Custom Settings tab, the key
custom settings will be reset.
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Settings set in [Reg. My Settings] will not be reset.1
[Digital Zoom Image] Setting (Setup Tab)
The size of the recorded image varies depending on the auto resize zoom,
as follows.
Zoom ratio Image size (pixels) Zoom ratio Image size (pixels)
Approx. 1.0× L Approx. 1.8× 3M
Approx. 1.2× M Approx. 3.0× 1M
Approx. 1.5× 5M Approx. 5.9× VGA
[Focus Ring Settings] (Setup Tab)
In [Focus Ring Settings], you can set either a mode that enables functions
for both autofocus and manual focus or a mode that enables functions for
manual focus only.
When [AF + MF] is selected, after the shutter button is pressed down
halfway to set the focus, the focus can be fine tuned by turning the focus
ring.
Item
AF + MF MF Only
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
If the shutter button is re-pressed after fine tuning, autofocus will activate
and fine adjustment will be cancelled.
[Spot AF Area Setting] (Setup Tab Menu)
You can select either [Normal] or [Pinpoint] for the AF area in the [Spot AF
Area Setting] in the setup menu. When [Spot AF] is selected in [Focus] in
the Shooting Menu, the focus will be set to the AF area mode selected in
the [Spot AF Area Setting].
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
When [Pinpoint] is selected, the AF Area frame will be smaller than that in
[Normal] mode.
Specifications
Specifications are given for the camera unit mounted on a GXR body.
Effective pixels Approximately 12.3 million
Image sensor 23.6 mm × 15.7 mm CMOS (total pixels: approx. 12.9 million)
Lens Focal length 18.3mm (35-mm format equivalent: 28mm)
Aperture
(f-number)
f/2.5– f/22
(ND filter used for apertures of f/22 in auto shooting mode)
Focus range
(from lens)
Approx. 20cm–8 (telephoto end)
Construction 9 elements in 6 groups (2 aspherical lens elements with 2
surfaces)
Filter diameter 40.5 mm
Zoom 4.0× digital zoom (photographs), 3.6 × digital zoom (movies);
approx. 5.9× auto resize zoom (VGA)
Focus mode Contrast AF-based multi and spot AF; MF; Snap; 8 (focus lock
and AF-assist)
Shutter
speed
Photographs 1/3200–180s (upper and lower limits vary according to
shooting and flash mode)
Movies 1/2000–1/30s
Exposure
control
Metering TTL-CCD metering in multi (256-segment), center-weighted,
and spot modes with autoexposure lock
Mode Program AE, aperture priority AE, manual exposure, shutter
priority AE, move target function
Exposure
compensation
Manual (+4.0 to -4.0EV in increments 1/3EV or 1/2EV), auto
bracketing (-2EV to +2EV in increments 1/3EV or 1/2EV)
Exposure link range (Auto
shooting mode, Centerweighted light metering)
2.2 EV to 19.3 EV (link range for automatic ISO converted
based on the EV for ISO100)
• When shooting in surroundings with 6.0 EV or lower,
for every 1.0 EV that the exposure link range decreases,
the camera will shift the setting 0.25 EV toward the low
brightness side. The maximum shift amount is 1.0 EV.
ISO sensitivity
(Standard Output Sensitivity)
Auto, Auto-Hi, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200
White balance Auto, Multi-P AUTO, Outdoors, Cloudy, Incandescent Lamp1,
Incandescent Lamp2, Fluorescent Lamp, Manual Settings,
Detail; white balance bracketing
Flash Range
(built-in flash)
Approx. 20cm–3.0m (ISO auto) (telephoto end)
Shooting mode Auto, program shift, aperture priority, shutter priority, manual,
scene (movie, portrait, sports, landscape, nightscape, skew
correction), “My Settings”
Continuous
mode
Number of
pictures shot
in Continuous
(Picture Size:
RAW)
Noise Reduction off or on (Weak): 4 pictures
Noise Reduction on (Strong): 3 pictures
Noise Reduction on MAX: 3 pictures
Number of
pictures shot
in M-Cont Plus
(1 set)
HI (1280×856) : 30 pictures (24 Frames/Sec)
LO (4228×2848) : 15 pictures (3 Frames/Sec)
Compression*1
FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2
Image size
(pixels)
Photographs 4288 × 2416, 3776 × 2832, 4288 × 2848, 2848 × 2848,
3456 × 1944, 3072 × 2304, 3456 × 2304, 2304 × 2304,
2592 × 1944, 2048 × 1536, 1280 × 960, 640 × 480
Movies 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240
File size
(approx.)
RAW 16:9 NORMAL: 17,800KB/frame, FINE: 19,515KB/frame,
VGA: 15,587 KB/frame
4:3 NORMAL: 18,387KB/frame, FINE: 20,157KB/frame,
VGA: 16,124 KB/frame
3:2 NORMAL: 20,946KB/frame, FINE: 22,967KB/frame,
VGA: 18,337KB/frame
1:1 NORMAL: 13,991KB/frame, FINE: 15,333KB/frame,
VGA: 12,273KB/frame
File size
(approx.)
L 16:9 NORMAL: 2,222KB/frame, FINE: 3,816KB/frame
4:3 NORMAL: 2,315KB/frame, FINE: 3,960KB/frame
3:2 NORMAL: 2,615KB/frame, FINE: 4,493KB/frame
1:1 NORMAL: 1,761KB/frame, FINE: 3,009KB/frame
M 16:9 NORMAL: 1,475KB/frame, FINE: 2,509KB/frame
4:3 NORMAL: 1,574KB/frame, FINE: 2,662KB/frame
3:2 NORMAL: 1,744KB/frame, FINE: 2,968KB/frame
1:1 NORMAL: 1,186KB/frame, FINE: 2,003KB/frame
5M 4:3 FINE: 2,287KB/frame
3M 4:3 FINE: 1,474KB/frame
1M 4:3 FINE: 812KB/frame
VGA 4:3 FINE: 197KB/frame
Battery life
(based on CIPA standard)
DB-90: approx. 320shots *3
Dimensions (W×H×D) Camera unit only:
68.7mm×57.9mm×50.4mm (Based on CIPA guide line)
When mounted on the camera body:
113.9mm×70.2mm×55.6mm (Based on CIPA guide line)
Weight (approx.) Camera unit only: 210g
When mounted on the camera body: 410g (Including the
battery and SD memory card)
Operating temperature 0°C to 40°C
Operating humidity 90% or less
Storage temperature –20°C to 60°C
*1 The options available vary with image size.
*2 A JPEG file is also recorded (the JPEG file may be a FINE- or NORMAL-quality file with
the dimensions as the RAW file or a VGA file 640×480 pixels in size). RAW files use the
standard DNG format promoted by Adobe Systems, Inc.
*3 For reference only; actual number of shots varies greatly according to how camera is
used. We recommend that you carry spare batteries when in use for extended periods.0
Internal Memory/Memory Card Capacity
The following values are given as a reference of the storage capacity of the
internal memory and memory cards of various sizes, by picture quality and
image size, when using the FINE picture quality.
Photographs
Compression Image size
(pixels)
Internal
memory
1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
RAW*
FINE
4288×2416 4 49 100 197 404 810 1625
3776×2832 4 47 97 191 391 784 1573
4288×2848 3 42 85 168 343 688 1380
2848×2848 5 63 128 251 513 1029 2065
L
FINE
4288×2416 21 235 476 935 1912 3830 7684
3776×2832 20 227 462 907 1854 3715 7453
4288×2848 18 200 407 799 1633 3272 6565
2848×2848 27 299 608 1195 2442 4893 98151
Compression Image size
(pixels)
Internal
memory
1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
M
FINE
3456×1944 32 357 724 1419 2902 5814 11662
3072×2304 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014
3456×2304 27 302 614 1206 2466 4941 9913
2304×2304 41 447 903 1774 3627 7267 14578
5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238
3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063
1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181
VGA/FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581
* When [RAW] is selected, this is the compression used for the JPEG copy.
Movies
Image size (pixels) Internal memory 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
1280×720
24 frames/second
21sec. 3min.
49sec.
7min.
46sec.
15min.
58sec.
31min.
10sec.
62min.
26sec.
125min.
15sec.
640×480
24 frames/second
1min. 11min.
2sec.
22min.
27sec.
46min.
10sec.
90min.
7sec.
180min.
32sec.
362min.
9sec.
320×240
24 frames/second
2min.
25sec.
26min.
24sec.
53min.
43sec.
110min.
27sec.
215min.
35sec.
431min.
52sec.
866min.
19sec.
Caution ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The maximum uninterrupted recording size for a single movie is 4 GB. The
maximum recording time is around 15 minutes at 1280×720 size, around 46
minutes at 640×480 size, and around 90 minutes at 320×240 size.
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
When recording movies with the movie size set to 1280×720, using SD/
SDHC memory cards with a speed class of 6 or more is recommended.
Appendices
Optional Accessories
The RICOH LENS can be used with the items (sold separately) listed below.
Lens Hood (LH-1)
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Before using an optional accessory, see the documentation that came
with the product.
• For the latest information on optional accessories, visit the Ricoh website
(http://www.ricohpmmc.com/).
Precautions for Use
• The warranty supplied with this product is only valid within the country of purchase.
• Should the product fail or malfunction while out of the country, the manufacturer
assumes no responsibility for servicing the product locally or bearing any
expenditure incurred thereby.
• Do not drop the equipment or subject it to physical shocks.
• When carrying the equipment, be careful that it does not strike other objects.
Particular care is required to protect the lens.
• When attaching a filter or lens hood, be careful not to apply excessive force.
• Abrupt changes in temperature may cause condensation, resulting in visible
condensation inside the lens or malfunction of the equipment. This can be avoided
by placing the equipment in a plastic bag to slow the temperature change, and
removing it only after the air in the bag has reached the same temperature its
surroundings.
• Keep the equipment dry and avoid handling it with wet hands. Failure to observe
these precautions could result in malfunction of the equipment or electric shock.
• Keep the connector clean.
Tip: Avoiding Condensation --------------------------------------------------------
Condensation is particularly likely to occur if you move to an area with a
sharply different temperature, if humidity is high, in a cold room after the
heater has come on, or where the camera is exposed to cold air from an air
conditioner or other device.
Equipment Care and Storage
Caring for the Equipment
• Photographs can be affected by fingerprints and other foreign matter on the
lens. Avoid touching the lens with your fingers. Remove dust or lint with a
blower from a camera supply store, or gently clean the lens with a soft, dry
cloth. Be especially careful around the barrel.
• Clean the equipment thoroughly after using it at the beach or handling
cosmetics. Do not expose the equipment to volatile substances such as
thinner, benzene, or pesticides. Failure to observe this precaution could result
in damage to the equipment or its finish.
• In the unlikely event of malfunction, visit a Ricoh Repair Center.
• This equipment is a high precision device. Do not disassemble.
Storage
• Do not store the camera where it will be exposed to: extreme heat or
humidity; large changes in temperature or humidity; dust, dirt, or sand; severe
vibration; prolonged contact with chemicals, including mothballs and other
insect repellent, or with vinyl or rubber products; strong magnetic fields (for
example, in the vicinity of a monitor, transformer, or magnet).
• When storing, place the product in a camera case, etc. that does not collect
dirt or fluff to prevent dirt or dust from attaching itself to the camera.
In addition, when carrying the camera, do not place the camera directly into a
pocket, etc., in order to prevent dirt and dust from getting on the camera.
Warranty and Servicing
1. This product is backed by a limited warranty. During the warranty period
mentioned in the Warranty supplied with your equipment, any defective
parts will be repaired free of charge. In the event of equipment malfunction,
contact the dealer from which you purchased the equipment or your nearest
Ricoh Repair Center. Please note that you will not be reimbursed for the cost of
bringing the equipment to the Ricoh Repair Center.
2. This warranty does not cover any damage resulting from:
1 failure to follow the instructions in the instruction manual;
2 repair, modification or overhaul not conducted by an authorized service
center listed in the instruction manual;
3 fire, natural disaster, act of God, lightning, abnormal voltage, etc.;
4 improper storage (noted in the “Camera Body User Guide”), leaking
of battery and other fluids, mold, or otherwise insufficient care of the
equipment.
5 submergence in water (flooding), exposure to alcohol or other beverages,
infiltration of sand or mud, physical shock, dropping of the equipment, or
pressure on the equipment, and other unnatural causes.
3. After the warranty period has passed, you will be liable for all repair fees,
including those incurred at an authorized service center.
4. You will be liable for all repair fees, even within the warranty period, if the
warranty card is not attached or if the distributor’s name or the purchase date
have been changed or are not indicated on the card.
5. Expenses for overhaul and thorough inspection by special request of the
customer will be charged to the customer, whether or not they are incurred
during the warranty period.
6. Any consequential damages arising from failure of the equipment, such as
expenses incurred in taking pictures or loss of expected profit, will not be
reimbursed whether they occur during the warranty period or not.
7. The warranty is only valid in the country in which the equipment was
purchased.
* The above provisions refer to repairs offered free of charge, and do not limit
your legal rights.
* The intention of the above provisions is also described in the warranty card
provided with this equipment.0
8. Parts essential to the servicing of the equipment (that is, components required
to maintain the functions and quality of the equipment) will be available for a
period of five years after the equipment is discontinued.
9. Please note that if the equipment is seriously damaged by flooding,
submergence, infiltration of sand or mud, violent shocks or dropping, it may
not be repairable, and restoration to its original condition may be impossible.
Notes-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Before sending the camera in for repair, check the camera body and read
the instruction manual again to ensure proper operation.
• Some repairs require a significant amount of time to complete.
• When sending the equipment to a service center, please include a note
which describes the defective part and the problem as precisely as
possible.
• Remove all accessories not related to the problem before sending the
camera to the service center.1
If You Encounter a Problem with This Product
Ricoh offices
RICOH COMPANY, LTD.
3-2-3, Shin-Yokohama Kouhoku-ku, Yokohama City, Kanagawa 222-8530,
Japan
http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc
RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006, U.S.A.
1–800–22RICOH
http://www.ricoh-usa.com/
RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC)
Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY
(innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438
(außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438
http://www.ricohpmmc.com/
RICOH UK LTD. (PMMC UK)
(from within the UK) 02073 656 580
(from outside of the UK) +44 2073 656 580
RICOH FRANCE S.A.S. (PMMC FRANCE)
(à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70
(en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94
RICOH ESPANA, S.A. (PMMC SPAIN)
(desde España) 91 406 9148
(desde fuera de España) +34 91 406 9148
RICOH ITALIA S.p.A. (PMMC ITALY)
(dall’Italia) 02 696 33 451
(dall’estero) +39 02 696 33 451*L453 2971*
Ricoh offices
RICOH ASIA PACIFIC OPERATIONS
LIMITED
21/F, One Kowloon, 1 Wang Yuen Street, Kowloon Bay, Hong Kong
Ricoh Company, Ltd.
Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo
104-8222, Japan
2010 October
EN USA GB GB AE AE
Printed in China
GR LENS A12 28mm F2.5
Bedienungsanleitung
Die Seriennummer befindet sich auf der Unterseite des Objektivs.
Packungsinhalt
Vergewissern Sie sich vor Gebrauch Ihres Ricoh-Objektivs, dass die Packung
die unten aufgeführten Teile enthält.
Kameraeinheit
Die Seriennummer befindet sich auf der
Unterseite.
Objektivdeckel
Ist bei Lieferung an der Kameraeinheit
befestigt.
?Bedienungsanleitung
(diese Anleitung)
? Garantie
Anschlussabdeckung
Ist bei Lieferung an der Kameraeinheit befestigt.
Beutel
Einführung
Das Objektiv ist für den Gebrauch auf ein kompatibles Kameragehäuse zu setzen.
Hinweise zu den Aufnahme- und Wiedergabefunktionen und zu Änderungen
von Einstellungen finden Sie in der Bedienungsanleitung des Kameragehäuses.
Lesen Sie bitte auch die wichtigen Vorsichtshinweise zum Gebrauch. In dieser
Bedienungsanleitung werden Funktionen und Verfahren erläutert, die nur
bei Gebrauch dieser Kameraeinheit in Verbindung mit einem kompatiblen
Kameragehäuse zur Verfügung stehen. Weitere Hinweise finden Sie im GXR-KameraBenutzerhandbuch.
Um die Funktionen dieses Objektivs optimal nutzen zu können, lesen Sie diese
Bedienungsanleitung vor dem Gebrauch aufmerksam durch. Bewahren Sie sie dann
jederzeit griffbereit auf.
Ricoh Co., Ltd.
Sicherheitsmaßnahmen Lesen Sie alle Sicherheitsmaßnahmen sorgfältig durch, um einen
sicheren Gebrauch zu gewährleisten.
Probeaufnahmen Machen Sie Probeaufnahmen, bevor Sie bei wichtigen
Anlässen fotografieren, um sicherzugehen, dass die Kamera
ordnungsgemäß funktioniert.
Copyright Die Wiedergabe oder Veränderung von urheberrechtlich
geschützten Dokumenten, Zeitschriften und anderem Material
ohne die Zustimmung des Urheberrechtsinhabers ist ausschließlich
für den privaten, Heim- oder ähnlichen Gebrauch zugelassen.
Haftungsausschluss Ricoh Co., Ltd. übernimmt keine Haftung für Fehler bei der
Aufnahme oder Wiedergabe von Bildern aufgrund einer
Fehlfunktion des Produkts.
Garantie Die mitgelieferte Garantie ist nur im jeweiligen Kaufland gültig.
Der Hersteller übernimmt keine Verantwortung für die Wartung
des Produkts in anderen Ländern oder für die Übernahme von
hierdurch entstandenen Kosten.
Funkstörung Der Betrieb dieses Produkts in der Nähe von anderen
elektronischen Geräten kann sowohl die Kamera also auch das
andere Gerät nachteilig beeinflussen. Störungen sind besonders
wahrscheinlich, wenn die Kamera in der Nähe eines Radios oder
Fernsehers verwendet wird. Dies kann behoben werden, indem
Sie die Kamera so weit wie möglich vom anderen Gerät entfernen,
die Radio- oder Fernsehantenne anders ausrichten oder das Radio
oder den Fernseher an einer anderen Steckdose anschließen.
© 2010 RICOH CO., LTD. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Diese Herausgabe darf nicht, vollständig oder teilweise, ohne
ausdrückliche schriftliche Genehmigung von Ricoh vervielfältigt werden. Ricoh behält sich das Recht vor, den
Inhalt dieses Dokuments jederzeit und ohne vorherige Ankündigung zu verändern.
Es wurde höchste Sorgfalt auf die Genauigkeit der Informationen in diesem Dokument gelegt. Sollten Sie
dennoch Fehler oder Auslassungen feststellen, wären wir Ihnen sehr dankbar, wenn Sie uns unter der Adresse auf
der Rückseite dieses Buchs benachrichtigen würden.
Sicherheitsmaßnahmen
Warnsymbole
Verschiedene Symbole werden in dieser Bedienungsanleitung und auf
dem Produkt verwendet, die Sie auf die Gefahr von Verletzungen des
Benutzers und anderer Personen und die Gefahr von Sachbeschädigung
hinweisen sollen. Die Symbole und ihre Bedeutung werden im Folgenden
beschrieben.
Gefahr
Dieses Symbol kennzeichnet Punkte, die bei Missachtung oder
falscher Handhabung unmittelbar zu schweren Verletzungen oder
Tod führen können.
Warnung
Dieses Symbol kennzeichnet Punkte, die bei Missachtung oder
falscher Handhabung zu schweren Verletzungen oder Tod führen
können.
Wichtig
Dieses Symbol kennzeichnet Punkte, die bei Missachtung oder
falscher Handhabung zu Verletzungen oder Sachbeschädigung
führen können.
Warnhinweise
Das Symbol kennzeichnet Aktionen, die unbedingt ausgeführt werden müssen.
Das Symbol kennzeichnet verbotene Aktionen.
Das Symbol kann mit anderen Symbolen kombiniert werden, um darauf
hinzuweisen, dass bestimmte Handlungen verboten sind.
Beispiele
= Nicht berühren = Nicht zerlegen
Beachten Sie die folgenden Vorsichtsmaßregeln, um einen sicheren
Gebrauch dieses Gerätes zu gewährleisten.
Gefahr
Versuchen Sie nicht, das Gerät selbst zu zerlegen, zu reparieren oder zu verändern.
Die Hochspannungs-Schaltkreise im Inneren des Gerätes können einen elektrischen
Schlag verursachen.
Warnung
Bewahren Sie das Gerät außer Reichweite von Kindern auf.
Berühren Sie keine Innenteile des Gerätes, falls sie durch Fallenlassen oder
Beschädigung freigelegt werden. Die Hochspannungs-Schaltkreise im Inneren
des Gerätes können einen elektrischen Schlag verursachen. Nehmen Sie den
Akku unverzüglich heraus, und lassen Sie dabei Vorsicht walten, um elektrische
Schläge oder Verbrennungen zu vermeiden. Bringen Sie das Gerät im Falle einer
Beschädigung zu Ihrem Fachhändler oder zur nächsten Kundendienststelle.
Benutzen Sie das Gerät nicht in einer feuchten Umgebung, weil dies zu einem Brand
oder elektrischen Schlag führen könnte.
Benutzen Sie das Gerät nicht in der Nähe von brennbaren Gasen, Benzin, Benzol,
Verdünner oder ähnlichen Substanzen, weil sonst die Gefahr von Explosionen, Brand
oder Verbrennungen besteht.
• Benutzen Sie das Gerät nicht an Orten, wo der Gebrauch eingeschränkt oder
verboten ist, weil dies zu Katastrophen oder Unfällen führen kann.
Wichtig
Lassen Sie die Kameraeinheit nicht nass werden. Bedienen Sie sie auch nicht mit
nassen Händen. In beiden Fällen besteht Stromschlaggefahr.
Sicherheitswarnungen
für Sonderzubehör
Bevor Sie ein optionales Zubehör verwenden, lesen Sie sich die
mitgelieferte Dokumentation durch.10
Packungsinhalt...................................................................................................................... 2
Einführung .............................................................................................................................. 3
Sicherheitsmaßnahmen..................................................................................................... 6
Teile des Objektivs..............................................................................................13
Aufrüsten des Produkts.....................................................................................14
Aktualisierung der Kamera-Firmware .........................................................................14
Aufnahme ............................................................................................................17
Makro-Funktionen..............................................................................................................17
Modus P: Programmschaltmodus................................................................................18
Modus M: Manuelle Belichtung.....................................................................................20
Wiedergabe .........................................................................................................21
Anzeige der Informationen zur Kameraeinheit.......................................................21
Inhaltsverzeichnis11
Einstellungen ......................................................................................................22
[Bildqualität/Größe]-Einstellung (Aufnahme-Menü).............................................22
Fotos..............................................................................................................................23
Filme ..............................................................................................................................24
[Rauschreduzierung]-Einstellung (Aufnahme-Menü)...........................................25
[Einst. ISO-Empfindlichkeit]-Einstellung (Aufnahme-Menü) ..............................26
[Display vergr.] (Aufnahme-Menü)...............................................................................27
[Meine Einst. Reg.] (Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen)..........................................28
[Bestätigung mit Auslöser] (Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen
Registerkartenmenü)....................................................................................................28
ADJ.-Schaltereinstellungen (Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen
Registerkartenmenü)....................................................................................................29
Fn1/Fn2-Tasteneinstellungen (Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen
Registerkartenmenü)....................................................................................................29
[Meine Einstellungen löschen] (Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen
Registerkartenmenü)....................................................................................................301
[Standardwerte wiederherst.] (Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen
Registerkartenmenü)....................................................................................................30
[Digitalzoombild]-Einstellung (Setup-Registerkarte)............................................31
[Fokusring-Einstellungen] (Setup-Registerkarte) ...................................................32
[Spot-AF-Bereichs-Einstellung] (Setup-Registerkartenmenü) ...........................33
Technische Daten ...............................................................................................34
Kapazität Interner Speicher/Speicherkarte...............................................................40
Anhang.................................................................................................................43
Separates Zubehör.............................................................................................................43
Vorsichtsmaßnahmen.......................................................................................................44
Wartung und Lagerung der Ausrüstung....................................................................46
Garantie und Kundendienst ...........................................................................................481
Teile des Objektivs
1 2 3
1 Anschluss
2 Fokusring
3 Objektiv1
Aufrüsten des Produkts
Aktualisierung der Kamera-Firmware
Beim ersten Anschluss der Kameraeinheit an das Kameragehäuse wird
automatisch die Aktualisierungsfunktion gestartet, wenn die Firmware des
Kameragehäuses veraltet ist. Aktualisieren Sie in diesem Fall die Firmware
des Kameragehäuses auf folgende Weise.
Ist die Firmware-Version auf dem aktuellen Stand, wird die
Aktualisierungsfunktion nicht gestartet und Sie können das Objektiv sofort
verwenden.
1 Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Kamera abgeschaltet ist, und schließen
Sie die Kameraeinheit am Kameragehäuse an.
• Weitere Hinweise zum Anschluss der Kameraeinheit finden Sie im
Benutzerhandbuch des Kameragehäuses.1
2 Schalten Sie die Kamera ein.
• Es wird eine Bestätigungsmeldung zur Aktualisierung der Firmware
angezeigt.
3 Drücken Sie die Fn1/Fn2-Tasten, um [Ja] zu wählen. Drücken Sie
anschließend die MENU/OK-Taste.
• Daraufhin beginnt der Aktualisierungsvorgang der Firmware, und die
folgenden Meldungen werden auf der Bildanzeige angezeigt:
[Überschreibungsdatei wird geprüft]
[Überschreibungsprogramm]
Die Kamera schaltet sich automatisch aus und dann wieder an. Nach dem
Kamera-Neustart wird die Firmware-Version auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt
und das Update wird damit abgeschlossen.1
Hinweis ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Wählen Sie zur Abfrage der Firmware-Version [Firmware-Version]
im Setup-Menü. Halten Sie alternativ die Taste 6 (Wiedergabe) bei
ausgeschalteter Kamera für mehr als eine Sekunde gedrückt, während
Sie gleichzeitig die Taste – gedrückt halten. Daraufhin wird die FirmwareVersion ca. 20 Sekunden lang auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt.
• Aktuelle Informationen zu Firmware-Updates finden Sie auf der RicohWebsite (http://ricoh.com/r_dc/de). Dort können Sie die neuesten
Firmware-Updates herunterladen, um Ihre Ausrüstung zu aktualisieren.1
Aufnahme
Makro-Funktionen
Die folgenden Funktion können nicht mit dem Objektiv A12 28mm
F2.5 verwendet werden: Makroaufnahme, Makroziel, Auto-Makro und
Mindestentfernungsanzeige während der Makroaufnahme.1
Modus P: Programmschaltmodus
Das Diagramm auf der folgenden Seite gibt einen Überblick über
verschiedene Versatzkombinationen von Verschlusszeit und Blende. Die
tatsächlichen Werte hängen vom Belichtungswert (EV) ab.
In diesen Beispielen ist der Blitzmodus auf [Blitz aus] und die ISOEinstellung auf [ISO200] eingestellt.1
Ev5
Ev6
Ev7
Ev4
Ev3
Ev2
Ev1
Ev0
Ev-1
Ev-2
Ev-3
F16
F22
F11
F8.0
F5.6
F4.0
F2.8
F2.0
F1.4
F1.0
2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000
Ev8 Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19 Ev20
F22.0
F2.50
Modus M: Manuelle Belichtung
Wenn [Auto] oder [Auto hoch] als Einstellung für die ISO-Empfindlichkeit
gewählt wurde und sich die Kamera im manuellen Belichtungsmodus
befindet, wird der ISO-Wert auf 200 festgesetzt. 1
Wiedergabe
Anzeige der Informationen zur Kameraeinheit
In der Detailanzeige werden Informationen bezüglich des Objektivs
[A12 28mm] für die Kameraeinheit angezeigt.
Hinweis ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
In der Exif-Datei werden ebenfalls Informationen bezüglich des Objektivs
[A12 28mm] für die Kameraeinheit angezeigt.
Einstellungen
[Bildqualität/Größe]-Einstellung (Aufnahme-Menü)
Die folgenden Optionen im Hinblick auf Bildqualität, Bildgröße und
Bildseitenverhältnis stehen im Aufnahme-Menü für die [Bildqualität/
Größe]-Einstellung zur Verfügung.
Die Dateigröße eines Fotos ist sowohl von der Bildqualität als auch
der Bildgröße abhängig. Bei der Aufnahme von Filmen können Sie die
Filmgröße auswählen.
Fotos
Option Bildseitenverhältnis Komprimierung Bildgröße (Pixel)
RAW 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4288×2416
4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
3776×2832
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4288×2848
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
2848×2848
L (Groß) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 4288×2416
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3776×2832
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 4288×2848
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2848×2848
M (Medium) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 3456×1944
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3072×2304
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 3456×2304
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2304×2304
Option Bildseitenverhältnis Komprimierung Bildgröße (Pixel)
5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944
3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536
1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960
VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480
*1 Wenn die Option [RAW] ausgewählt wird, wird diese Einstellung für die JPEG-Kopie
verwendet.
*2 Je nach dem fotografierten Bereich können schwarze Balken am oberen und unteren
Rand der Bildanzeige erscheinen.
*3 Je nach dem fotografierten Bereich können schwarze Balken am rechten und linken Rand
der Bildanzeige erscheinen.
Filme
Option Filmgröße
HD1280 1280×720
VGA640 640×480
QVGA320 320×240
[Rauschreduzierung]-Einstellung (Aufnahme-Menü)
Die Rauschreduzierung wird während der Aufnahme von Fotos ausgeführt.
Wählen Sie aus den Einstellungen [Aus], [Auto], [Schwach], [Stark] oder
[MAX]. Je nach gewählter Option variiert die zum Speichern des Fotos
benötigte Zeit. Diese Funktion kann nicht verwendet werden, wenn die
Option [Porträt], [Sport] oder [Schräg-Korrektur] als Motivprogramm
gewählt wurde.
[Einst. ISO-Empfindlichkeit]-Einstellung
(Aufnahme-Menü)
• Wenn die Option [Auto] ausgewählt ist und der Blitz verwendet wird,
entspricht die verwendete Lichtempfindlichkeit bis zu ISO800.
• Wenn die Option [Auto] ausgewählt ist und der Blitz nicht verwendet
wird, ändern sich die Mindest- und Höchstwerte der ISO-Empfindlichkeit
zu 200 und 400, unabhängig von der Pixelgröße (Pixel).
[Display vergr.] (Aufnahme-Menü)
Wenn das Motiv mit den Richtungstasten (+/-/Fn1/Fn2) verschoben
wird und Sie die MENU/OK-Taste drücken und gedrückt halten, wird das
Motiv vergrößert angezeigt. Dies ist hilfreich, um die Scharfstellung zu
überprüfen. Durch erneutes Drücken und Gedrückthalten der MENU/OKTaste wird von der vergrößerten wieder in die Standardansicht gewechselt.
Die Anzeigevergrößerung kann durch Drücken und Gedrückthalten
der Taste t (Selbstauslöser) oder durch Auswahl der Option
[Vergrößerungsverhältnis] eingestellt werden. Wählen Sie mit der Taste
+/- zwischen [2 ×], [4 ×] oder [8 ×], und drücken Sie dann auf die MENU/OKTaste.
Hinweis ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Die Funktion [Display vergr.] kann in der Registerkarte „Wichtigste eigene
Einstellungen“ im Menü [Fn1/Fn2 Button Settings] eingestellt werden.
[Meine Einst. Reg.] (Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen)
Im Setup-Menü können Sie auch die Funktionen [Fokusring-Einstellungen]
und [Spot-AF-Bereichs-Einstellung] der Option [Meine Einst. Reg.]
zuweisen. Entnehmen Sie weitere Informationen zu verfügbaren Optionen
dem „Kamera-Benutzerhandbuch“.
[Bestätigung mit Auslöser] (Wichtigste eigene
Einstellungen Registerkartenmenü)
Wenn in der Registerkarte „Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen“ für [ADJ./DIRECT]
die Option [Bestätigung mit Auslöser] gewählt wurde, werden durch das
Andrücken des Auslösers die Einstellungen im ADJ.-Modus und im DIRECTBildschirm bestätigt, und Sie können Fotos aufnehmen. Wenn diese Option für
[ADJ.] festgelegt wurde, können die ADJ.-Moduseinstellungen bestätigt werden,
und Sie können Fotos aufnehmen. Wenn diese Option für [DIRECT] festgelegt
wurde, können die Einstellungen auf dem DIRECT-Bildschirm bestätigt werden,
und Sie können Fotos aufnehmen. Nach Aufnahmebeendigung kehrt das
System wieder zum Monitorbildschirm zurück.
ADJ.-Schaltereinstellungen (Wichtigste eigene
Einstellungen Registerkartenmenü)
In der Registerkarte „Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen“ kann die Option
[Bildseitenverhältnis] den Einstellungen [ADJ.-Schalter Einstellung 1] bis
[ADJ.-Schalter Einstellung 4] zugewiesen werden.
Wenn die Funktion Bildseitenverhältnis aktiviert wurde, und der
ADJ.-Schalter betätigt wird, erscheint das Symbol und die
Bildseitenverhältnis-Einstellungen können vorgenommen werden.
Entnehmen Sie weitere Informationen zu verfügbaren Optionen dem
„Kamera-Benutzerhandbuch“.
Fn1/Fn2-Tasteneinstellungen (Wichtigste eigene
Einstellungen Registerkartenmenü)
Die Funktionen [Display vergr.] und [Bildseitenverhältnis] können in der
Registerkarte „Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen“ im Menü [Fn1 Button
Settings] oder [Fn2 Button Settings] eingestellt werden.
Wenn die Bildseitenverhältnis-Funktion aktiviert wurde, und die Fn1- oder Fn2-Taste
betätigt wird, können die Bildseitenverhältnis-Einstellungen vorgenommen werden.
Entnehmen Sie weitere Informationen zu verfügbaren Optionen dem
„Kamera-Benutzerhandbuch“.0
[Meine Einstellungen löschen] (Wichtigste eigene
Einstellungen Registerkartenmenü)
Durch die Auswahl von [Meine Einstellungen löschen] in der Registerkarte
„Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen“ werden die unter [Meine Einst.
Reg.] gespeicherten Werte für [Feld Meine Einstellungen] und die im
Moduswahlschalter gespeicherten Werte für [MY1], [MY2] und [MY3]
gelöscht.
[Standardwerte wiederherst.] (Wichtigste eigene
Einstellungen Registerkartenmenü)
Wenn die Option [Standardwerte wiederherst.] in der Registerkarte
„Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen“ gewählt wurde, werden die wichtigsten
benutzerdefinierten Einstellungen auf ihre Standardwerte zurückgesetzt.
Hinweis ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Die unter [Meine Einst. Reg.] vorgenommenen Einstellungen werden nicht
zurückgesetzt.1
[Digitalzoombild]-Einstellung (Setup-Registerkarte)
Je nach gewähltem Vergrößerungs-Wert des Zooms mit automatischer
Skalierung ändert sich die Bildaufnahmegröße.
Zoomfaktor Bildgröße (Pixel) Zoomfaktor Bildgröße (Pixel)
Ca. 1,0× L Ca. 1,8× 3M
Ca. 1,2× M Ca. 3,0× 1M
Ca. 1,5× 5M Ca. 5,9× VGA
[Fokusring-Einstellungen] (Setup-Registerkarte)
In [Fokusring-Einstellungen] können Sie festlegen, ob dieser Modus mit
dem Autofokus und manuellem Fokus verwendet werden soll oder nur mit
dem manuellen Fokus.
Wenn [AF + MF] ausgewählt ist, kann der Fokus nach dem Antippen des
Auslösers durch Drehen des Fokusrings feineingestellt werden.
Option
AF + MF Nur MF
Hinweis ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wird der Auslöser nach der Feineinstellung des Fokus noch einmal
angedrückt, wird der Autofokus aktiviert und die Feinanpassung
aufgehoben.
[Spot-AF-Bereichs-Einstellung]
(Setup-Registerkartenmenü)
Im Setup-Menü kann für den AF-Bereich unter [Spot-AF-BereichsEinstellung] entweder die Option [Normal] oder [Pinpoint] gewählt werden.
Wenn im Aufnahme-Menü unter [Focus] die Option [Spot AF] gewählt
wurde, wird für den AF-Bereichsmodus die unter [Spot-AF-BereichsEinstellung] festgelegte Einstellung angewandt.
Hinweis ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bei Auswahl von [Pinpoint] ist der AF-Bereichrahmen kleiner als bei Auswahl
von [Normal].
Technische Daten
Die technischen Daten beziehen sich auf die auf ein GXR-Kameragehäuse
gesetzte Kameraeinheit.
Effektive Pixel Ca.12,3 Millionen
Bildsensor 23,6 mm×15,7 mm CMOS (Gesamtanzahl der Pixel:
ca. 12,9 Millionen)
Objektiv Brennweite 18,3mm (35-mm Format entspricht: 28mm)
Blende (f-Zahl) f/2,5– f/22
(Verwendung von ND-Filter für Blenden von f/22 im
Automatik-Aufnahmemodus)
Fokus-Reichweite
(vom Objektiv)
Ca. 20cm–8 (Tele)
Objektivaufbau 9 Elemente in 6 Gruppen (2 asphärische Linsenelemente
mit 2 Oberflächen)
Filterdurchmesser 40,5 mm
Zoom Digitalzoom (Bilder)×4,0; Digitalzoom (Filme)×3,6;
ca. 5,9× Zoom mit automatischer Skalierung (VGA)
Fokus-Modus Kontrast-AF-basierter Multi und Spot AF; MF; Fixfokus; 8
(Fokussperre und AF-Hilfe)
Verschlusszeit Fotos 1/3200–180s (obere und untere Begrenzungswerte
variieren je nach Aufnahme- und Blitzmodus)
Filme 1/2000–1/30s
Belichtungssteuerung Messung TTL-CCD-Messung in Multi- (256 Segmente), Mehrfeld und
Spot-Belichtungsmessung mit AE-Sperre
Modus Programm AE, Blendenprioritätsmodus AE, manuelle
Belichtung, Verschlussprioritätsmodus AE, Messfeld
wechseln-Funktion
BelichtungsKorrektur
Manuell (+4,0 bis -4,0EV in Schritten von 1/3EV oder
1/2EV), Automatische Belichtungsreihe (-2EV bis +2EV in
Schritten von 1/3EV oder 1/2EV)
Belichtungskombinationsbereich
(Automatik-Aufnahmemodus,
Mittenbetonte
Belichtungsmessung)
2,2 EV–19,3 EV (Kombinationsbereich für konvertierte
ISO-Werte basierend auf EV für ISO100)
• Werden Fotos mit einem Belichtungskorrekturwert
von 6,0 EV oder weniger aufgenommen, verschiebt
die Kamera die Einstellungen um 0,25 EV Richtung
Unterbelichtung für jede 1,0 EV, um die sich der
Belichtungskombinationsbereich verringert. Die
Einstellung kann maximal um 1,0 EV verschoben werden.
ISO-Empfindlichkeit
(StandardAusgabeempfindlichkeit)
Auto, Auto hoch, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600,
ISO 3200
Weißabgleich Auto, Mlt-WA AUTO, Im Freien, Wolkig, Gluhlampenlicht1,
Gluhlampenlicht2, Neonlicht, Man. Einst., Detail;
automatische Weißabgleichreihe
Blitz Reichweite
(eingebauter
Blitz)
Ca. 20cm–3,0m (ISO Auto) (Tele)
Aufnahmemodus Auto, Programmschaltmodus, Blendenpriorität,
Verschlusspriorität, manuell, Motivprogramm (Film,
Porträt, Sport, Landschaft, Nachtmodus, SchrägKorrektur), „Meine Einstellungen“
Serien-Modus Anzahl der
Aufnahmen im
Serienmodus
(Bildgröße:
RAW)
Bei deaktivierter oder aktivierter Rauschreduzierung
(schwach): 4 Bilder,
Bei aktivierter Rauschreduzierung (stark): 3 Bilder
Bei aktivierter Rauschreduzierung MAX: 3 Bilder
Anzahl der
Aufnahmen im
Modus M-Serie
Plus (1 Set)
Schnell (1280×856) : 30 Aufnahmen (24 Bilder/s),
Langsam (4288×2848) : 15 Aufnahmen (3 Bilder/s)
Komprimierung*1
FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2
Bildgröße (Pixel) Fotos 4288 × 2416, 3776 × 2832, 4288 × 2848, 2848 × 2848,
3456 × 1944, 3072 × 2304, 3456 × 2304, 2304 × 2304,
2592 × 1944, 2048 × 1536, 1280 × 960, 640 × 480
Filme 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240
Dateigröße (ca.) RAW 16:9 NORMAL: 17.800KB/Bild, FINE: 19.515KB/Bild,
VGA: 15.587KB/Bild
4:3 NORMAL: 18.387KB/Bild, FINE: 20.157KB/Bild,
VGA: 16.124KB/Bild
3:2 NORMAL: 20.946KB/Bild, FINE: 22.967KB/Bild,
VGA: 18.337KB/Bild
1:1 NORMAL: 13.991KB/Bild, FINE: 15.333KB/Bild,
VGA: 12.273KB/Bild
Dateigröße (ca.) L 16:9 NORMAL: 2.222KB/Bild, FINE: 3.816KB/Bild
4:3 NORMAL: 2.315KB/Bild, FINE: 3.960KB/Bild
3:2 NORMAL: 2.615KB/Bild, FINE: 4.493KB/Bild
1:1 NORMAL: 1.761KB/Bild, FINE: 3.009KB/Bild
M 16:9 NORMAL: 1.475KB/Bild, FINE: 2.509KB/Bild
4:3 NORMAL: 1.574KB/Bild, FINE: 2.662KB/Bild
3:2 NORMAL: 1.744KB/Bild, FINE: 2.968KB/Bild
1:1 NORMAL: 1.186KB/Bild, FINE: 2.003KB/Bild
5M 4:3 FINE: 2.287KB/Bild
3M 4:3 FINE: 1.474KB/Bild
1M 4:3 FINE: 812KB/Bild
VGA 4:3 FINE: 197KB/Bild
Aufnahmekapazität (Akku)
(basierend auf CIPA-Standard)
DB-90: ca. 320 Aufnahmen*3
Maße (B×H×T) Nur Kameraeinheit:
68,7mm×57,9mm×50,4mm (Gemäß CIPA-Richtlinie)
Auf Kameragehäuse aufgesetzt:
113,9mm×70,2mm×55,6mm (Gemäß CIPA-Richtlinie)
Gewicht (ca.) Nur Kameraeinheit: 210g
Auf Kameragehäuse aufgesetzt: 410g (Einschließlich des
Akkus und der SD-Speicherkarte)
Temperatur bei Betrieb 0°C bis 40°C
Luftfeuchtigkeit bei Betrieb 90% oder weniger
Temperatur bei Lagerung –20°C bis 60°C
*1 Die verfügbaren Optionen variieren je nach Bildgröße.
*2 Gleichzeitig wird auch eine JPEG-Datei aufgezeichnet. (Die JPEG-Datei ist möglicherweise
eine Datei mit der Bildqualität FINE oder NORMAL und hat dieselben Maße wie die RAW-
oder VGA-Datei oder eine Datei mit der Bildqualität NORMAL und einer Bildgröße von
640×480 Pixeln.) RAW-Dateien verwenden das Standard DNG-Dateiformat von Adobe
Systems, Inc.
*3 Dient nur zur Orientierung. Die tatsächliche Anzahl von Aufnahmen hängt stark davon ab,
wie die Kamera verwendet wird. Wie empfehlen Ihnen, bei einer längeren Einsatzdauer
Ersatzakkus bereit zu halten.0
Kapazität Interner Speicher/Speicherkarte
Die folgenden Werte dienen als Leitfaden für die Speicherkapazität des
internen Speichers und von Speicherkarten von verschiedener Größe, je
nach Bildqualität und Bildgröße, bei Verwendung der Bildqualität FINE.
Fotos
Komprimierung Bildgröße (Pixel) Interner Speicher 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
RAW*
FINE
4288×2416 4 49 100 197 404 810 1625
3776×2832 4 47 97 191 391 784 1573
4288×2848 3 42 85 168 343 688 1380
2848×2848 5 63 128 251 513 1029 2065
L
FINE
4288×2416 21 235 476 935 1912 3830 7684
3776×2832 20 227 462 907 1854 3715 7453
4288×2848 18 200 407 799 1633 3272 6565
2848×2848 27 299 608 1195 2442 4893 98151
Komprimierung Bildgröße (Pixel) Interner Speicher 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
M
FINE
3456×1944 32 357 724 1419 2902 5814 11662
3072×2304 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014
3456×2304 27 302 614 1206 2466 4941 9913
2304×2304 41 447 903 1774 3627 7267 14578
5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238
3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063
1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181
VGA/FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581
* Wenn die Option [RAW] ausgewählt wird, wird dieser Wert für die Komprimierung der JPEGKopie verwendet.
Filme
Bildgröße (Pixel) Interner Speicher 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
1280×720
24 Bilder/Sekunde
21s 3Min.
49s
7Min.
46s
15Min.
58s
31Min.
10s
62Min.
26s
125Min.
15 s
640×480
24 Bilder/Sekunde
1Min. 11Min.
2s
22Min.
27s
46Min.
10s
90Min.
7s
180Min.
32 s
362Min.
9 s
320×240
24 Bilder/Sekunde
2Min.
25s
26Min.
24s
53Min.
43s
110Min.
27 s
215Min.
35 s
431Min.
52s
866Min.
19 s
Wichtig ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Die maximale Aufnahmegröße eines ununterbrochenen Films beträgt 4 GB.
Die maximale Aufnahmezeit beträgt ca. 15 Minuten bei einer Auflösung von
1280 × 720, ca. 46 Minuten bei 640 × 480 und ca. 90 Minuten bei 320 × 240.
Hinweis ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bei einer Auflösung von 1280 × 720 wird die Verwendung einer SD/SDHCSpeicherkarte der Geschwindigkeitsklasse 6 oder mehr empfohlen.
Anhang
Separates Zubehör
Das RICOH Objektiv kann mit dem unten aufgeführten (separat
erhältlichen) Zubehör betrieben werden.
Gegenlichtblende (LH-1)
Hinweis ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Bevor Sie ein optionales Zubehör verwenden, lesen Sie sich die mitgelieferte Dokumentation durch.
• Aktuelle Informationen zu optionalem Zubehör finden Sie auf der Ricoh-Website
(http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/de).
Vorsichtsmaßnahmen
• Die mitgelieferte Garantie ist nur im jeweiligen Kaufland gültig.
• Sollte das Gerät außerhalb des Kauflandes ausfallen oder nicht richtig funktionieren,
übernimmt der Hersteller keine Verantwortung für die Reparatur des Gerätes vor Ort
oder für die Übernahme von hierdurch entstandenen Kosten.
• Lassen Sie die Ausrüstung nicht fallen und setzen Sie sie keinen heftigen Stößen aus.
• Wenn Sie die Ausrüstung tragen, achten Sie darauf, dass sie nicht an andere
Gegenstände stößt. Besondere Vorsicht ist erforderlich, um das Objektiv zu schützen.
• Wenden Sie beim Anbringen des Filters oder der Gegenlichtblende keine
übermäßige Kraft an.
• Abrupte Temperaturveränderungen können Kondensierung hervorrufen, was
zu sichtbarem Beschlagen im Objektiv oder zu Fehlfunktionen der Ausrüstung
führen kann. Dies kann vermieden werden, indem Sie die Ausrüstung in eine
Plastiktüte stecken, um die Temperaturveränderung zu verlangsamen. Nehmen Sie
sie erst heraus, wenn die Luft in der Tüte dieselbe Temperatur erreicht hat wie die
Umgebung.
• Halten Sie die Ausrüstung trocken und vermeiden Sie die Bedienung mit nassen
Händen. Die Nichtbeachtung dieser Vorsichtsmaßnahmen kann zur Fehlfunktion der
Ausrüstung oder zu Stromschlägen führen.
• Halten Sie den Anschluss sauber.
Tipp: Vermeiden von Kondensierung ---------------------------------------------
Kondensierung kann besonders leicht auftreten, wenn Sie in einen
Raum mit einem drastischen Temperaturunterschied gehen, bei hoher
Luftfeuchtigkeit, in einem kalten Raum, nachdem die Heizung angestellt
wurde, oder wenn die Kamera kalter Luft aus Klimaanlagen oder anderen
Geräten ausgesetzt ist.
Wartung und Lagerung der Ausrüstung
Wartung der Ausrüstung
• Fotos können durch Fingerabdrücke oder andere Fremdkörper auf dem
Objektiv beeinträchtigt werden. Vermeiden Sie es, das Objektiv mit den
Fingern zu berühren. Entfernen Sie Staub oder Fussel mit einem Blasebalg aus
dem Kamera-Fachhandel oder reinigen Sie das Objektiv vorsichtig mit einem
weichen, trockenen Tuch. Besonders um das Gewinde muss mit Sorgfalt
vorgegangen werden.
• Reinigen Sie die Ausrüstung gründlich, nachdem Sie sie am Strand benutzt
haben oder während des Gebrauchs von Kosmetik. Setzen Sie die Ausrüstung
keinen flüchtigen Substanzen wie etwa Verdünnungsmittel, Benzol oder
Pestiziden aus. Die Nichtbeachtung dieser Vorsichtsmaßnahmen kann zu
Schäden der Ausrüstung oder ihrer Oberfläche führen.
• Im seltenen Falle einer Fehlfunktion wenden Sie sich bitte an ein Ricoh.
• Die Ausrüstung ist ein Hochpräzisionsgerät. Nehmen Sie sie nicht auseinander.
Aufbewahrung
• Bewahren Sie das Objektiv nicht auf, wo es Folgendem ausgesetzt ist: extreme
Hitze oder Feuchtigkeit; große Temperatur- oder Feuchtigkeitsveränderungen;
Staub, Schmutz oder Sand; starke Vibrationen; längerer Kontakt mit
Chemikalien inkl. Mottenkugeln und andere Insektenschutzmittel, oder mit
Vinyl- oder Gummiprodukten; starke Magnetfelder (z. B. in der Nähe eines
Monitors, Transformators oder Magnets).
• Um zu verhindern, dass sich auf dem Objektiv Schmutz Schmutz oder Fusseln
ablagern, bewahren Sie das Produkt in Objektivtasche o.Ä. auf, in der sich kein
Schmutz oder Fusseln ansammeln können.
Zusätzlich sollte das Objektiv beim Transport nicht direkt in eine Tasche usw.
gesteckt werden, um zu verhindern, dass sich Schmutz oder Staub auf ihr
ablagert.
Garantie und Kundendienst
1. Dieses Produkt hat eine eingeschränkte Garantie. Während der Garantiezeit,
die in der mitgelieferten Garantie angegeben ist, werden fehlerhafte Teile
kostenlos repariert. Im Falle einer Fehlfunktion der Ausrüstung wenden Sie
sich an den Händler, bei dem Sie die Ausrüstung gekauft haben, oder an
das nächste Ricoh Reparaturzentrum. Bitte beachten Sie, dass Kosten, die
entstehen, wenn Sie die Ausrüstung zum Ricoh Reparaturzentrum bringen,
nicht übernommen werden können.
2. Diese Garantie umfasst keine Schäden, die durch Folgendes entstanden sind:
1 Nichtbeachtung der Anweisungen im Benutzerhandbuch;
2 Reparaturen, Veränderungen oder Überholungen, die nicht durch ein
autorisiertes, im Handbuch aufgelistetes Servicezentrum durchgeführt wurden;
3 Brand, Naturkatastrophen, höhere Gewalt, Blitz, abweichende Spannung etc.;
4 Unsachgemäße Aufbewahrung (siehe „Kamera-Benutzerhandbuch“),
Auslaufen von Batterien und anderen Flüssigkeiten, Schimmel oder sonstige
mangelhafte Wartung der Ausrüstung;
5 Eintauchen in Wasser (Überschwemmen), Kontakt mit Alkohol oder anderen
Getränken, Eindringen von Sand oder Schmutz, heftige Stöße, Fallenlassen
der Ausrüstung oder Druckausübung auf die Ausrüstung oder andere
unnatürliche Ursachen.
3. Nach Ablauf der Garantie haften Sie für alle Reparaturkosten, auch solche, die
in einem autorisierten Servicezentrum durchgeführt werden.
4. Sie haften für alle Reparaturkosten, auch innerhalb der Garantiezeit, wenn
die Garantiekarte nicht beigefügt ist, oder wenn der Händlername oder das
Kaufdatum geändert wurden oder nicht auf der Karte angegeben sind.
5. Kosten für Überholung und umfassende Inspektion auf speziellen Wunsch des
Kunden hin wird dem Kunden in Rechnung gestellt, unabhängig davon, ob sie
innerhalb der Garantiezeit stattfanden oder nicht.
6. Folgeschäden, die durch Fehlfunktion der Ausrüstung entstehen, wie etwa
Fotografiekosten oder Ausbleiben von erwartetem Gewinn, werden nicht
erstattet, unabhängig davon, ob sie innerhalb der Garantiezeit stattfanden
oder nicht.
7. Die Garantie ist nur in dem Land gültig, in dem die Ausrüstung gekauft wurde.
* Die obengenannten Bedingungen beziehen sich auf kostenlose
Reparaturen und schränken Ihre Rechte nicht ein.
* Der Zweck der obengenannten Bedingungen wird auch auf der mit dieser
Ausrüstung gelieferten Garantiekarte beschrieben.0
8. Ersatzteile, die wesentlich für das Funktionieren der Ausrüstung sind
(d. h. erforderliche Teile, die die Funktionen und Qualität der Ausrüstung
ermöglichen), werden für einen Zeitraum von fünf Jahren nach
Produktionsende des Objektivs zur Verfügung stehen.
9. Bitte beachten Sie, dass bei starker Beschädigung der Ausrüstung durch
Überschwemmung, Untertauchen, Eindringen von Sand oder Schmutz,
heftige Stöße oder Fallenlassen das Gerät möglicherweise nicht zu reparieren
ist und die Wiederherstellung des ursprünglichen Zustandes unmöglich ist.
Hinweise---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Bevor Sie das Objektiv zur Reparatur einschicken, überprüfen Sie die
Batterien und lesen Sie die Bedienungsanleitung erneut, um eine
ordnungsgemäße Bedienung sicherzustellen.
• Einige Reparaturen benötigen einen erheblichen Zeitraum zur Fertigstellung.
• Wenn Sie die Ausrüstung an ein Servicezentrum schicken, legen Sie bitte
ein Schreiben bei, auf dem Sie die defekten Teile und das Problem so
genau wie möglich beschreiben.
• Entfernen Sie alle Zubehörteile, die nichts mit dem Problem zu tun
haben, bevor Sie das Objektiv an das Servicezentrum schicken.Bei Problemen
Ricoh-Niederlassungen
RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC)
Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY
(innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438
(außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438
http://www.ricohpmmc.com/
Ricoh Company, Ltd.
Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo
104-8222, Japan
2010 Oktober
GR D
In China gedruckt
*L453 3971*
GR LENS A12 28mm F2.5
Manual de instrucciones
El número de serie se encuentra en la parte inferior del objetivo.
Contenido del paquete
Antes de utilizar su objetivo Ricoh, compruebe que el paquete contenga los
siguientes elementos.
Unidad cámara
El número de serie se encuentra en la parte inferior.
Tapa del objetivo
Viene colocada en la unidad cámara.
? Manual de
instrucciones
(estemanual)
? Garantía
Tapa del conector
Viene colocada en la unidad cámara.
Funda blanda
Introducción
Para utilizar este objetivo, es necesario colocarlo en un cuerpo de cámara compatible.
Consulte la Guía del usuario del cuerpo de la cámara para saber cómo ejecutar
las funciones de disparo y reproducción y cambiar ajustes, así como para leer
precauciones importantes de uso. En este manual de instrucciones se explican las
funciones y los modos de uso disponibles qué solo están disponibles al utilizar esta
unidad de cámara con un cuerpo de cámara compatible. Véase también la Guía del
usuario del cuerpo de la cámara GXR.
Para sacar el mejor provecho de las funciones de este producto, lea atentamente este
manual antes del uso. Conserve este manual a mano para poder consultarlo fácilmente.
Ricoh Co., Ltd.
Precauciones de seguridad Lea atentamente todas las precauciones de seguridad para
garantizar un uso seguro.
Fotografías de prueba Haga fotografías de prueba para asegurarse de que la cámara
funcione adecuadamente antes de hacer fotografías en ocasiones
importantes.
Derechos de autor Queda prohibida la reproducción o alteración de documentos,
revistas y otros materiales con derechos de autor, con una finalidad
diferente a la personal, doméstica o de otro tipo igualmente limitado,
sin el consentimiento del propietario de los derechos de autor.
Exención de
responsabilidad
Ricoh Co., Ltd. no asume ninguna responsabilidad por no poder
grabar o reproducir imágenes como resultado de un fallo de
funcionamiento del producto.
Garantía La garantía proporcionada con este producto sólo es válida dentro
del país de compra. El fabricante no asume ninguna responsabilidad
relacionada con el mantenimiento o la reparación del producto en
otros países ni los gastos incurridos por este servicio.
Interferencias
radioeléctricas
La utilización de este producto en las inmediaciones de otros
equipos electrónicos puede afectar negativamente tanto
a la cámara como al otro dispositivo. Las interferencias son
particularmente probables si la cámara se utiliza muy cerca de una
radio o un televisor. Esto puede resolverse alejando la cámara del
otro dispositivo, reorientando la antena de radio o televisión, o
conectando la radio o el televisor a otra toma de corriente.
© 2010 RICOH CO., LTD. Todos los derechos reservados. Queda prohibida la reproducción total o parcial de esta
publicación sin la autorización expresa por escrito de Ricoh. Ricoh se reserva el derecho a cambiar el contenido
de este documento en cualquier momento y sin previo aviso.
Se ha hecho todo lo posible por garantizar la precisión de la información de este documento. Si, a pesar de
ello, detecta algún error u omisión, le agradeceríamos que nos lo notificara en la dirección que aparece en la
contraportada de este manual.
Precauciones de seguridad
Símbolos de aviso
En este manual de instrucciones y en el producto aparecen diversos
símbolos de aviso que se deben tener en cuenta para evitarle lesiones a
usted o a terceros, así como también daños materiales. A continuación se
explican los símbolos y sus significados.
Peligro
Este símbolo indica que hay peligro inminente de muerte o
de lesiones de gravedad debido a negligencia u operación
incorrecta.
Advertencia
Este símbolo indica riesgos de muerte o lesiones de gravedad
debido a negligencia u operación errónea.
Precaución
Este símbolo indica riesgos de lesiones o daños materiales
debido a negligencia u operación errónea.
Ejemplos de aviso
El símbolo le indica las acciones que debe realizar.
El símbolo le indica las acciones que no debe realizar.
El símbolo puede estar combinado con otros símbolos para indicarle las acciones
concretas que no debe realizar.
Ejemplos
= No tocar = No desmontar
Para garantizar la seguridad en el uso de esta unidad, observe las siguientes
precauciones.
Peligro
No intente desarmar, reparar o alterar el equipo por su cuenta. El circuito de alta
tensión del interior del equipo representa un gran peligro eléctrico.
Advertencia
Guarde el equipo fuera del alcance de los niños.
No toque los componentes internos del equipo en caso de que quedaran al
descubierto debido a daños o una caída. El circuito de alta tensión del equipo podría
provocar descargas eléctricas. Extraiga la batería lo más pronto posible, teniendo
cuidado de evitar descargas eléctricas o quemaduras. Lleve el equipo dañado a su
distribuidor o centro de asistencia técnica más cercano.
No use el equipo en el baño o una ducha pues podría producirse incendio o descarga
eléctrica.
No use el equipo cerca de gases inflamables, gasolina, bencina, diluyente o sustancias
similares, para evitar riesgos de explosión, incendio o quemaduras.
• No use el equipo en un avión u otros lugares donde su uso esté restringido o
prohibido, pues podría resultar en desastres o accidentes.
Precaución
No permita que el equipo se moje. Tampoco opere la cámara con las manos húmedas.
Ambas acciones implican el riesgo de descargas eléctricas.
Advertencias de
seguridad para los
accesorios
Si utiliza productos opcionales, lea atentamente las instrucciones
suministradas con el producto antes de usarlo.10
Contenido del paquete ...................................................................................................... 2
Introducción........................................................................................................................... 3
Precauciones de seguridad............................................................................................... 6
Componentes del objetivo...............................................................................13
Actualización del producto ..............................................................................14
Actualización del firmware de la cámara ...................................................................14
Toma......................................................................................................................17
Funciones de macro...........................................................................................................17
Modo P: Cambio de programas.....................................................................................18
Modo M: Exposición manual ..........................................................................................20
Reproducción......................................................................................................21
Pantalla de información de la unidad de cámara ...................................................21
Índice11
Ajustes ..................................................................................................................22
Ajuste [Resolución/Tamaño de imagen] (menú de disparo) ..............................22
Fotografías...................................................................................................................23
Vídeos............................................................................................................................24
Ajuste de [Reducción ruido] (menú de disparo)......................................................25
Ajuste [Ajuste ISO] (menú de disparo)........................................................................26
[Ampliar pant.] (menú de disparo)...............................................................................27
[Reg. Mi Config.] (Opciones personalizados)............................................................28
[Confirmación disparador] (menú de la pestaña de Ajustes
personalizados) ..............................................................................................................28
Configuración de palanca ADJ. (menú de la pestaña de Ajustes
personalizados) ..............................................................................................................29
Configuración de botones Fn1/Fn2 (menú de la pestaña de Ajustes
personalizados) ..............................................................................................................29
[Borrar Mi Config.] (menú de la pestaña de Ajustes personalizados)..............30
[Ajuste Original] (menú de la pestaña de Ajustes personalizados)..................301
Ajuste [Imagen Zoom Digital] (Pestaña de configuración) .................................31
[Ajustes de anillo de enfoque] (Pestaña de configuración).................................32
[Configuración área Spot AF] (menú de la pestaña de Configuración) ..........33
Especificaciones..................................................................................................34
Capacidad de la memoria interna/tarjeta de memoria ........................................40
Apéndices ............................................................................................................43
Accesorios opcionales.......................................................................................................43
Precauciones de uso..........................................................................................................44
Cuidado del equipo y almacenamiento.....................................................................46
Garantía y servicio..............................................................................................................481
Componentes del objetivo
1 2 3
1 Conector
2 Anillo de enfoque
3 Objetivo1
Actualización del producto
Actualización del firmware de la cámara
Cuando acopla por primera vez la unidad cámara al cuerpo de la cámara,
la función de actualización de la versión se iniciará automáticamente si
el firmware del cuerpo de la cámara tiene que actualizarse. En este caso,
actualice el firmware del cuerpo de la cámara utilizando el siguiente
procedimiento.
Si la versión del firmware ya está actualizada, la función de actualización de
la versión no se iniciará y podrá utilizar el objetivo inmediatamente.
1 Compruebe que la cámara esté apagada y acople la unidad cámara
al cuerpo de la cámara.
• Para obtener más información acerca de cómo acoplar la unidad cámara,
consulte la Guía del usuario del cuerpo de la cámara.1
2 Encienda la cámara.
• Aparecerá un mensaje de confirmación sobre la actualización del firmware.
3 Pulse los botones Fn1/Fn2 para seleccionar [Sí] y, a continuación,
pulse el botón MENU/OK.
• La actualización del firmware se inicia y los siguientes mensajes
aparecerán en la pantalla:
[Verif. escribir sobre archivo]
[Escribir sobre programa]
La cámara se desactivará automáticamente y, a continuación, la volverá a
encender. Cuando la cámara encienda de nuevo, aparecerá la pantalla de la
versión del firmware y la actualización habrá finalizado.1
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Para comprobar la versión del firmware seleccione [Versión del firmware]
en el menú de configuración. Otra posibilidad es que, con la cámara
apagada, mantenga el botón 6 (Reproducir) pulsado durante más de 1
segundo mientras mantiene pulsado el botón –. La versión del firmware
aparecerá en la pantalla durante unos 20 segundos.
• Para obtener la información más reciente sobre las actualizaciones del
firmware, visite la página web de Ricoh (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc).
Puede descargar las actualizaciones de firmware más recientes para
actualizar el equipo.1
Toma
Funciones de macro
Las funciones Disparo macro, Objetivo macro, Macro automático y
Visualización de la distancia mínima de disparo durante disparo macro no
están disponibles con el objetivo A12 F2.5 de 28 mm.1
Modo P: Cambio de programas
En el diagrama de la página siguiente se muestran las combinaciones
posibles de intervalos para velocidad de obturación y apertura. Los valores
reales pueden variar dependiendo del EV (valor de exposición).
En estos ejemplos, el modo de flash está ajustado a [Flash No] y el ajuste
ISO está en [ISO 200].1
Ev5
Ev6
Ev7
Ev4
Ev3
Ev2
Ev1
Ev0
Ev-1
Ev-2
Ev-3
F16
F22
F11
F8.0
F5.6
F4.0
F2.8
F2.0
F1.4
F1.0
2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000
Ev8 Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19 Ev20
F22.0
F2.50
Modo M: Exposición manual
Si se selecciona [Auto] o [Alt Autom.] en Ajuste ISO, ISO se fijará a 200
mientras la cámara esté en modo de exposición manual. 1
Reproducción
Pantalla de información de la unidad de cámara
Los detalles de [A12 28mm] para la unidad de cámara se muestran en la
pantalla de información detallada.
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Los detalles de [A12 28mm] para la unidad de cámara también se muestran
en el archivo Exif.
Ajustes
Ajuste [Resolución/Tamaño de imagen] (menú de disparo)
Hay disponibles las siguientes opciones de calidad de imagen, tamaño
de imagen y relación de aspecto para el ajuste [Resolución/Tamaño de
imagen] en el menú de disparo.
El tamaño de archivo de una fotografía dependerá de la combinación
de calidad y tamaño de imagen que se utilice. Al grabar vídeos se puede
seleccionar el formato de vídeo.
Fotografías
Opción Relación de
aspecto
Compresión Tamaño de la
imagen (píxeles)
RAW 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4288×2416
4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
3776×2832
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4288×2848
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
2848×2848
L (grande) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 4288×2416
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3776×2832
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 4288×2848
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2848×2848
M (mediano) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 3456×1944
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3072×2304
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 3456×2304
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2304×2304
Opción Relación de
aspecto
Compresión Tamaño de la
imagen (píxeles)
5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944
3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536
1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960
VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480
*1 Si se selecciona [RAW], éste será el ajuste empleado para la copia en JPEG.
*2 Según el área fotografiada, pueden aparecer bandas negras en la parte superior e inferior
de la imagen visualizada.
*3 Según el área fotografiada, pueden aparecer bandas negras en los lados derecho e
izquierdo de la imagen visualizada.
Vídeos
Opción Formato de vídeo
HD1280 1280×720
VGA640 640×480
QVGA320 320×240
Ajuste de [Reducción ruido] (menú de disparo)
Reduce el ruido de la fotografía al tomarla. Elija entre [Off], [Auto],
[Bajo], [Alto] o [MAX]. El tiempo necesario para grabar imágenes varía
dependiendo de la opción seleccionada. No puede usar esta función si
están seleccionados [Retrato], [Deporte] o [M. Cor. Trap.] como modo de
escena.
Ajuste [Ajuste ISO] (menú de disparo)
• Si se selecciona [Auto] y se utiliza el flash, la sensibilidad empleada
aumentará hasta un nivel equivalente a ISO800.
• Si está seleccionado [Auto] y no se está usando el flash, los valores
máximos y mínimos para la sensibilidad ISO serán 200 y 400
respectivamente, independientemente del tamaño del píxel (píxeles).
[Ampliar pant.] (menú de disparo)
Si mueve el objeto con las teclas de dirección (+/-/Fn1/Fn2) y mantiene
pulsado el botón MENU/OK, se magnificará la posición del objeto,
permitiéndole ver con detalle el enfoque. Si mantiene pulsado de nuevo
el botón MENU/OK, puede volver a la vista estándar desde la vista
aumentada.
Para ajustar el aumento, mantenga pulsado el botón t (contador
automático) o seleccione [Relación de aumento] en el menú de ajustes.
Seleccione de entre [2×], [4×] o [8×] con el botón +/- y, a continuación
pulse el botón MENU/OK.
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Puede ajustar la función [Ampliar pant.] con [Configuración de botones
Fn1/Fn2] en la pestaña de Ajustes personalizados.
[Reg. Mi Config.] (Opciones personalizados)
Desde [Reg. Mi Config.], también puede ajustar las opciones de [Ajustes
de anillo de enfoque] y [Configuración área Spot AF] en el menú de
configuración. Para más información sobre las demás opciones disponibles,
consulte la “Guía del usuario del cuerpo de la cámara”.
[Confirmación disparador] (menú de la pestaña de
Ajustes personalizados)
Si se ha ajustado [Confirmación disparador] en [ADJ./DIRECT] en la
pestaña de ajustes personalizados, pulse el botón del obturador hasta la
mitad si desea terminar de configurar el modo ADJ. y la pantalla DIRECT.
A continuación, podrá comenzar a hacer fotografías. Si se ha ajustado en
[ADJ.], terminará la configuración del modo ADJ. y podrá comenzar a hacer
fotografías. Si se ha ajustado en [DIRECT], terminará la configuración de la
pantalla DIRECT y podrá comenzar a hacer fotografías. Una vez que haya
hecho las fotografías, el sistema volverá a la pantalla de monitorización.
Configuración de palanca ADJ. (menú de la pestaña de
Ajustes personalizados)
Puede establecer la función [Formato] de [Configuración de palanca ADJ. 1]
en [Configuración de palanca ADJ. 4] en la pestaña de Ajustes personalizados.
Si pulsa el botón de palanca ADJ. después de configurar la función de Formato,
aparecerá el siguiente icono, que indica que puede ajustar el formato.
Si desea información sobre otras funciones disponibles, consulte la Guía de
usuario del cuerpo de cámara.
Configuración de botones Fn1/Fn2 (menú de la pestaña
de Ajustes personalizados)
Puede ajustar las funciones [Ampliar pant.] y [Formato] desde
[Configuración del botón Fn1] o [Configuración del botón Fn2] en la
pestaña de Ajustes personalizados.
Una vez que haya configurado la función de Formato, podrá ajustar el
formato pulsando el botón Fn1 o Fn2.
Si desea información sobre otras funciones disponibles, consulte la Guía de
usuario del cuerpo de cámara.0
[Borrar Mi Config.] (menú de la pestaña de Ajustes
personalizados)
Si selecciona [Borrar Mi Config.] en la pestaña de Ajustes personalizados,
podrá cancelar la configuración que ajustó en [Reg. Mi Config.] para
[Cuadro Mi Config.] y para [MY1], [MY2] y [MY3] del dial de modo.
[Ajuste Original] (menú de la pestaña de Ajustes
personalizados)
Si se ha seleccionado [Ajuste Original] en la pestaña de Ajustes
personalizados, se reiniciará la configuración personalizada.
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Los ajustes realizados en [Cuadro Mi Config] no se reiniciarán.1
Ajuste [Imagen Zoom Digital] (Pestaña de configuración)
El tamaño de la imagen grabada varía según el zoom con cambio de
tamaño automático, tal como se indica a continuación.
Índice de zoom
Tamaño de la
imagen (píxeles)
Índice de zoom
Tamaño de la
imagen (píxeles)
Aprox. 1,0× L Aprox. 1,8× 3M
Aprox. 1,2× M Aprox. 3,0× 1M
Aprox. 1,5× 5M Aprox. 5,9× VGA
[Ajustes de anillo de enfoque] (Pestaña de configuración)
En [Ajustes de anillo de enfoque], puede seleccionar un modo que permita
seleccionar funciones de enfoque tanto automático como manual o un
modo que solo contenga funciones para el enfoque manual.
Si está seleccionado [AF + MF] y se pulsa el disparador hasta la mitad para
enfocar, podrá efectuar ajustes finos para el enfoque girando el anillo de
enfoque.
Opción
AF + MF Sólo MF
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Si se vuelve a pulsar el disparador después de realizar un enfoque fino, se
activará el enfoque automático y se cancelará el ajuste fino.
[Configuración área Spot AF] (menú de la pestaña de
Configuración)
Puede seleccionar [Normal] o [Exacto] para el área AF de [Configuración
área Spot AF] en el menú de configuración. Si se selecciona [Spot AF] en
[Foco] desde el menú de disparo, se enfocará según el modo de área AF
seleccionado en [Configuración área Spot AF].
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Cuando está seleccionado [Exacto], el marco del área AF es más pequeño
que en el modo [Normal].
Especificaciones
La especificaciones corresponden a la unidad cámara montada en un
cuerpo GXR.
Píxeles efectivos Aproximadamente 12,3 millones
Sensor de imagen 23,6 mm×15,7 mm CMOS (píxeles totales: 12,9 millones aprox.)
Objetivo Distancia focal 18,3mm (formato equivalente a 35 mm: 28mm)
Apertura
(número f)
f/2,5– f/22
(filtro ND utilizado para aperturas de f/22 en modo de disparo
automático)
Rango de
enfoque (desde
el objetivo)
Aprox. 20cm–8 (fin de telefoto)
Construcción 9 elementos en 6 grupos (2 elementos asféricos con 2 superficies)
Diámetro del
filtro
40,5 mm
Zoom Zoom digital de 4,0× (fotografías), zoom digital de 3,6× (vídeos);
aprox. 5,9× zoom con cambio de tamaño automático (VGA)
Modo de enfoque Multi y Spot AF basado en Contrast AF; MF; Snap; 8 (bloqueo
de enfoque y ayuda AF)
Velocidad
de
obturación
Fotografías 1/3200–180s (los límites superior e inferior varían según el
modo de toma y flash)
Vídeos 1/2000–1/30s
Control
de la
exposición
Medición Medición TTL-CCD en modos multi (256 segmentos), ponderada
central y foco con bloqueo de exposición automática
Modo Programa AE, prioridad de apertura AE, exposición manual,
prioridad de obturación AE, función Cambiar objeto
Compensación
de exposición
Manual (+4,0 a -4,0EV en incrementos de 1/3EV o 1/2EV),
horquillado automático (-2EV a +2EV en incrementos de 1/3EV
o 1/2EV)
Rango de vínculo de
exposición (modo de
disparo automático,
medición con ponderación
central)
2,2 EV–19,3 EV (rango de vínculo para ISO convertido
automático según el EV de ISO100)
• Al tomar fotografías en entornos con EV de 6,0 o menos,
por cada 1,0 EV que el rango del vínculo de exposición
disminuye, la cámara cambiará el ajuste 0,25 EV hacia el lado
de bajo brillo. La cantidad máxima de cambio es 1,0 EV.
Sensibilidad ISO
(sensibilidad de salida estándar)
Auto, Alt Autom., ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200
Balance de blancos Auto, Multi-P AUTO, Exterior, Nublado, Luz Incand.1, Luz
Incand.2, Luz Fluorescente, Ajuste Manual, Detalle; horquillado
de balance de blancos
Flash Alcance
(flash
incorporado)
Aprox. 20cm–3,0m (ISO auto) (fin de telefoto)
Modo de disparo Auto, cambio de programas, prioridad de apertura, prioridad
de obturación, manual, escena (vídeo, retrato, deportes, paisaje,
paisaje noche, corrección trap.), “Mi Config.”
Modo
Continuo
Número de
imágenes
tomadas en
modo Continuo
(tamaño de
imagen: RAW)
Reducción de ruido desactivada o activada (Baja): 4 imágenes,
Reducción de ruido activada (Alta): 3 imágenes
Reducción de ruido activada MAX: 3 imágenes
Número de
fotografías
tomadas en
modo M-Cont
+ (1 grupo)
A (1280×856): 30 fotografías (24 fotogramas/seg),
B (4288×2848): 15 fotografías (3 fotogramas/seg)
Compresión*1
FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2
Tamaño de
la imagen
(píxeles)
Fotografías 4288×2416, 3776×2832, 4288×2848, 2848×2848,
3456×1944, 3072×2304, 3456×2304, 2304×2304,
2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480
Vídeos 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240
Tamaño
de archivo
(aprox.)
RAW 16:9 NORMAL: 17.800KB/fotograma, FINE: 19.515KB/fotograma,
VGA: 15.587KB/fotograma
4:3 NORMAL: 18.387KB/fotograma, FINE: 20.157KB/fotograma,
VGA: 16.124KB/fotograma
3:2 NORMAL: 20.946KB/fotograma, FINE: 22.967KB/fotograma,
VGA: 18.337KB/fotograma
1:1 NORMAL: 13.991KB/fotograma, FINE: 15.333KB/fotograma,
VGA: 12.273KB/fotograma
Tamaño
de archivo
(aprox.)
L 16:9 NORMAL: 2.222KB/fotograma, FINE: 3.816KB/fotograma
4:3 NORMAL: 2.315KB/fotograma, FINE: 3.960KB/fotograma
3:2 NORMAL: 2.615KB/fotograma, FINE: 4.493KB/fotograma
1:1 NORMAL: 1.761KB/fotograma, FINE: 3.009KB/fotograma
M 16:9 NORMAL: 1.475KB/fotograma, FINE: 2.509KB/fotograma
4:3 NORMAL: 1.574KB/fotograma, FINE: 2.662KB/fotograma
3:2 NORMAL: 1.744KB/fotograma, FINE: 2.968KB/fotograma
1:1 NORMAL: 1.186KB/fotograma, FINE: 2.003KB/fotograma
5M 4:3 FINE: 2.287KB/fotograma
3M 4:3 FINE: 1.474KB/fotograma
1M 4:3 FINE: 812KB/fotograma
VGA 4:3 FINE: 197KB/fotograma
Vida de la batería
(basada en el estándar CIPA)
DB-90: aprox. 320 disparos *3
Dimensiones (an.×al.×pr.) Sólo unidad cámara:
68,7mm×57,9mm×50,4mm (Basando en la pauta de CIPA)
Al estar montada en el cuerpo de la cámara:
113,9mm×70,2mm×55,6mm (Basando en la pauta de CIPA)
Peso (aprox.) Sólo unidad cámara: 210 g
Al estar montada en el cuerpo de la cámara: 410 g (Incluyendo
la batería y la tarjeta de memoria SD)
Temperatura de
funcionamiento
0°C a 40°C
Humedad de
funcionamiento
90% como máximo
Temperatura de
almacenamiento
–20°C a 60°C
*1 Las opciones disponibles pueden variar según el tamaño de la imagen.
*2 También se graba un archivo JPEG (el archivo JPEG puede ser un archivo de calidad FINE
o NORMAL con las dimensiones del archivo RAW o un archivo VGA con un tamaño de
640×480 píxeles). Los archivos RAW utilizan el formato DNG estándar promocionado por
Adobe Systems, Inc.
*3 Sólo para referencia, el número real de tomas varía considerablemente según el uso que
se le dé a la cámara. Se recomienda llevar alguna batería de repuesto si se va a usar la
cámara durante un largo período de tiempo.0
Capacidad de la memoria interna/tarjeta de memoria
Los siguientes valores se presentan como referencia de la capacidad de
almacenamiento de la memoria interna y las tarjetas de memoria de distintos tamaños,
por calidad de imagen y tamaño de imagen, utilizando una calidad de imagen FINE.
Fotografías
Compresión Tamaño de la
imagen (píxeles)
Memoria interna 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
RAW*
FINE
4288×2416 4 49 100 197 404 810 1625
3776×2832 4 47 97 191 391 784 1573
4288×2848 3 42 85 168 343 688 1380
2848×2848 5 63 128 251 513 1029 2065
L
FINE
4288×2416 21 235 476 935 1912 3830 7684
3776×2832 20 227 462 907 1854 3715 7453
4288×2848 18 200 407 799 1633 3272 6565
2848×2848 27 299 608 1195 2442 4893 98151
Compresión Tamaño de la
imagen (píxeles)
Memoria interna 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
M
FINE
3456×1944 32 357 724 1419 2902 5814 11662
3072×2304 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014
3456×2304 27 302 614 1206 2466 4941 9913
2304×2304 41 447 903 1774 3627 7267 14578
5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238
3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063
1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181
VGA/FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581
* Si se selecciona [RAW], ésta será la compresión empleada para la copia en JPEG.
Vídeos
Tamaño de la
imagen (píxeles)
Memoria interna 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
1280×720
24 fotogramas/
segundo
21seg. 3min.
49seg.
7min.
46seg.
15min.
58seg.
31min.
10seg.
62min.
26seg.
125min.
15seg.
640×480
24 fotogramas/
segundo
1min. 11min.
2seg.
22min.
27seg.
46min.
10seg.
90min.
7seg.
180min.
32seg.
362min.
9seg.
320×240
24 fotogramas/
segundo
2min.
25seg.
26min.
24seg.
53min.
43seg.
110min.
27seg.
215min.
35seg.
431min.
52seg.
866min.
19seg.
Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------
El tamaño máximo para una grabación ininterrumpida de un solo vídeo es
de 4 GB. El tiempo máximo de grabación es de unos 15 minutos en tamaño
1280 × 720, de unos 46 mintuos en tamaño 640 × 480 y de unos 90 minutos
si se graba a 320 × 240.
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Al grabar vídeos con tamaño de 1280 × 720, se recomienda usar tarjetas de
memoria SD/SDHC de Class 6 o mayor velocidad de transmisión mínima.
Apéndices
Accesorios opcionales
La RICOH LENS puede usarse con los artículos (se venden por separado)
que se relacionan a continuación.
Capucha para objetivo (LH-1)
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Antes de usar un accesorio opcional, véase la documentación que viene
con el producto.
• Para ver lo último en accesorios opcionales, visite el sitio web de Ricoh
(http://www.ricohpmmc.com/).
Precauciones de uso
• La garantía proporcionada con este producto sólo es válida dentro del país de compra.
• En caso de que el producto presente un defecto o fallo de funcionamiento mientras
está fuera del país, el fabricante no asumirá ninguna responsabilidad en cuanto a la
reparación del producto localmente ni a los gastos incurridos por esta.
• No deje caer el equipo ni lo someta a fuertes golpes.
• Cuando transporte el equipo, procure que no golpee otros objetos. Se requiere
especial atención para proteger el objetivo.
• Tenga cuidado de no ejercer demasiada fuerza al incorporar un filtro o una capucha
para objetivo.
• Los cambios bruscos de temperatura podrían causar condensación, dando lugar a
condensación visible dentro del objetivo o fallos de funcionamiento en el equipo.
Esto puede evitarse colocando el equipo en una bolsa de plástico para atenuar el
cambio de temperatura, y retirándolo sólo después de que el aire de la bolsa alcance
la misma temperatura que el entorno.
• Mantenga seco el equipo y evite sujetarlo con las manos húmedas. La no
observancia de estas precauciones podría causar un fallo de funcionamiento del
equipo o una descarga eléctrica.
• Mantenga limpio el conector.
Consejo: evitar la condensación---------------------------------------------------
Es particularmente probable que se produzca condensación si se desplaza a una
zona con una brusca diferencia de temperatura, si la humedad es alta, en una
habitación fría después de haber encendido el calefactor o cuando la cámara
está expuesta al aire frío de un aparato de aire acondicionado u otro dispositivo.
Cuidado del equipo y almacenamiento
Cuidado del equipo
• Las fotografías pueden verse afectadas por huellas y otras materias extrañas
en el objetivo. Evite tocar el objetivo con los dedos. Retire el polvo o pelusa
con un soplador, que puede adquirir en una tienda de suministro de cámaras,
o limpie suavemente el objetivo con un paño seco y suave. Tenga especial
cuidado al manipular la zona del tubo del objetivo.
• Limpie el equipo a fondo después de utilizarlo en la playa o manejar
cosméticos. No exponga el equipo a sustancias volátiles como disolvente,
benceno o pesticidas. La no observancia de esta precaución podría causar
daños en el equipo o en su acabado.
• En el caso improbable de fallo de funcionamiento, visite un centro de
reparaciones Ricoh.
• Este equipo es un dispositivo de alta precisión. No lo desmonte.
Almacenamiento
• No guarde la cámara donde pueda estar expuesta a: calor o humedad
excesivos; grandes cambios de temperatura o humedad; polvo, suciedad o
arena; fuertes vibraciones; contacto prolongado con productos químicos,
incluyendo bolas de alcanfor y otros repelentes de insectos, o con productos
de vinilo o caucho; fuertes campos magnéticos (por ejemplo, en las
proximidades de un monitor, transformador o imán).
• Cuando guarde el producto, colóquelo dentro de una caja de cámara, etc.,
que esté limpia y donde no entren las pelusas para evitar que la suciedad o el
polvo se adhieran a la cámara.
Además, cuando lIeve la cámara, no la meta directamente en el bolsillo, etc.,
para evitar que se ensucie o le entre polvo.
Garantía y servicio
1. Este producto está cubierto por una garantía limitada. Durante el periodo
de garantía mencionado en la Garantía suministrada con el equipo,
cualquier pieza defectuosa se reparará gratuitamente. En caso de fallo de
funcionamiento del equipo, póngase en contacto con el distribuidor al que
compró el equipo o con su centro de reparaciones Ricoh más cercano. Tenga
en cuenta que no se le reembolsará el coste de llevar el equipo al centro de
reparaciones Ricoh.
2. Esta garantía no cubre ningún daño resultante de:
1 no seguimiento de las instrucciones del manual de instrucciones;
2 reparación, modificación o revisión del producto no realizadas por uno de
los centros de servicio autorizados incluidos en el manual de instrucciones;
3 incendio, desastre natural, fuerza mayor, relámpago, tensión anómala, etc.;
4 almacenamiento inadecuado (indicado en la “Guía del usuario del cuerpo de
la cámara”), fuga de batería y otros líquidos, moho o cualquier otro cuidado
insuficiente del equipo.
5 inmersión en agua (inundación), exposición a alcohol u otras bebidas,
infiltración de arena o barro, choque físico, caída del equipo o presión sobre
el equipo y otras causas no naturales.
3. Cuando finalice el periodo de garantía, usted será responsable de los gastos
de reparación, incluyendo los incurridos en un centro de servicio autorizado.
4. Será responsable de todos los gastos de reparación, incluso dentro del
periodo de garantía, si no se presenta la tarjeta de garantía o si el nombre del
distribuidor o la fecha de compra se han modificado o no están indicados en la
tarjeta.
5. Los gastos de revisión e inspección completa por petición especial del cliente
se cargarán al cliente, tanto si se producen durante el periodo de garantía
como si no.
6. Cualquier daño consecuente derivado de un fallo del equipo, como gastos
incurridos al tomar fotografías o pérdida de ganancias esperadas, no será
reembolsado, independientemente de si ocurre dentro o fuera del periodo de
garantía.
7. La garantía sólo es válida en el país en el que se compró el equipo.
* Las disposiciones anteriores se refieren a reparaciones ofrecidas sin cargos y
no limitan sus derechos legales.
* La intención de las disposiciones anteriores también se describe en la
tarjeta de garantía proporcionada con este equipo.0
8. Las piezas esenciales para el mantenimiento del equipo (es decir,
componentes necesarios para mantener las funciones y calidad de la
cámara) estarán disponibles durante un periodo de cinco años a partir de la
descontinuación del equipo.
9. Tenga en cuenta que si el equipo se daña seriamente por inundación,
inmersión, infiltración de arena o barro, choques violentos o caída, es posible
que no pueda repararse ni restaurarse a su estado original.
Notas-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Antes de enviar la cámara para repararla, compruebe el cuerpo de la
cámara y vuelva a leer el manual de instrucciones para garantizar un
funcionamiento correcto.
• Algunas reparaciones requieren mucho tiempo.
• Cuando envíe el equipo a un centro de servicio, incluya una nota describiendo
la pieza defectuosa y el problema con la mayor precisión posible.
• Retire todos los accesorios no relacionados con el problema antes de
enviar la cámara al centro de servicio.*L453 3973*
Si surge un problema
Oficinas de Ricoh
RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V.
(EPMMC)
Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY
(innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438
(außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438
http://www.ricohpmmc.com/
RICOH ESPANA, S.A. (PMMC SPAIN)
(desde España) 91 406 9148
(desde fuera de España) +34 91 406 9148
Ricoh Company, Ltd.
Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo
104-8222, Japan
2010 octubre
SP E
Impreso en China
GXR MOUNT A12
Mode d’emploi
Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’objectif.
Contenu de l’emballage
Avant d’utiliser votre objectif Ricoh, vérifiez dans l’emballage qu’il ne
manque aucun des éléments listés ci-dessous.
Unité de montage d’objectif
Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’appareil.
Bague de montage
Est fixée à l’unité de montage d’objectif.
Capuchon du connecteur
Est fixé à l’unité appareil photo.
Dispositif de contrôle
d’objectif
Étui souple ? Mode d’emploi
(le présentmanuel)
? Garantie
Introduction
Pour utiliser cette unité de montage d’objectif, vous devez fixer l’objectif à montage M
Leica ou autre à un boîtier d’appareil photo GXR.
Reportez-vous au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo pour plus de détails
concernant l’utilisation des fonctions de prise de vue et de lecture et la modification
des réglages et pour prendre connaissance des consignes d’utilisation importantes. Ce
mode d’emploi décrit les fonctions et les consignes d’utilisation qui ne sont valides que
lorsque cette unité de montage d’objectif est utilisée avec un boîtier d’appareil photo
compatible. Reportez-vous également au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil
photo GXR.
Pour utiliser les fonctions du produit de manière optimale, lisez attentivement le
présent manuel avant utilisation. Veuillez conserver le présent manuel à portée de
main pour pouvoir vous y référer facilement.
Ricoh Co., Ltd.
Mesures de sécurité Lisez attentivement toutes les mesures de sécurité pour garantir
une utilisation sans danger.
Essais de prise de vue Faites des essais de prise de vue pour vérifier le fonctionnement correct
de l’appareil avant de prendre des photos d’événements importants.
Copyright La reproduction ou la modification de documents, de magazines
et d’autres sources sujettes aux droits d’auteur, autrement que
pour des raisons personnelles, domestiques ou limitées similaires,
est interdite sans le consentement du propriétaire des droits.
Exonération de
responsabilité
Ricoh Co., Ltd. décline toute responsabilité en cas de défaillance
de l’enregistrement ou de l’affichage des photos résultant d’un
dysfonctionnement de l’appareil.
Garantie La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans
le pays d’achat. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à
la réparation du produit dans d’autres pays ou à la prise en charge
de toute dépense associée.
Interférences radio L’utilisation de cet appareil dans le voisinage d’un autre
équipement électronique peut affecter défavorablement à
la fois l’appareil photo et l’autre dispositif. Des interférences
sont notamment probables si l’appareil est utilisé à proximité
d’une radio ou d’un téléviseur. Ce problème peut être résolu en
déplaçant l’appareil aussi loin que possible de l’autre dispositif, en
réorientant l’antenne de la radio ou du téléviseur, ou encore en
branchant la radio ou le téléviseur sur une prise secteur différente.
© 2011 RICOH CO., LTD. Tous droits réservés. Cette publication ne peut être reproduite en tout ou en partie sans
l’autorisation expresse et écrite de Ricoh. Ricoh se réserve le droit de modifier le contenu de ce document à tout
moment et sans avis préalable.
Tous les efforts ont été faits pour garantir l’exactitude des informations contenues dans ce document. Dans le cas
où vous rencontreriez néanmoins une erreur ou une omission, nous vous serions reconnaissants de bien vouloir
nous en avertir à l’adresse indiquée en quatrième de couverture de ce manuel.
Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les objectifs, contactez un revendeur d’objectifs.
Mesures de sécurité
Symboles d’avertissement
Divers symboles sont utilisés tout au long de ce manuel et sur le produit
lui-même pour prévenir tout risque de blessure ou de dommage aux biens.
Ces symboles et leur signification sont détaillés ci-dessous.
Danger
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner
rapidement la mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les
instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies.
Avertissement
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner la
mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les instructions
correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies.
Attention
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner des
blessures corporelles ou des dommages aux biens si les
instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies.
Exemples de signalisation d’avertissement
Le symbole vous signale des actions qui doivent être effectuées.
Le symbole vous signale des actions interdites.
Le symbole peut être combiné avec d’autres pour indiquer qu’une action
spécifique est interdite.
Exemples
= Ne pas toucher = Ne pas démonter
Prenez les précautions indiquées ci-dessous pour utiliser ce matériel en
toute sécurité.
Danger
Ne tentez pas de démonter, de réparer ou de modifier vous-même l’appareil. Les
circuits à haute tension de l’appareil vous font courir un risque de choc électrique.
Avertissement
Conservez l’appareil hors de portée des enfants.
Si le mécanisme interne de l’appareil est exposé suite à un choc ou autre type de
dommage, ne touchez aucun composant interne. Les circuits à haute tension de
l’appareil peuvent causer des chocs électriques. Retirez la batterie dès que possible,
en prenant soin d’éviter tout choc électrique ou brûlure. Apportez l’appareil au
revendeur ou au service après-vente le plus proche s’il est endommagé.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans un endroit humide car vous risqueriez de provoquer un
incendie ou de subir une décharge électrique.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil à proximité de gaz inflammables, d’essence, de benzène,
de solvant ou de substances du même type pour éviter tout risque d’explosion,
d’incendie ou de brûlure.
• N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans des lieux où son usage est limité ou interdit afin
d’éviter tout risque de catastrophe ou d’accident.10
Attention
Ne laissez pas l’équipement prendre l’eau ou se mouiller. Ne l’utilisez pas non plus
avec les mains mouillées. Dans les deux cas, vous risquez de subir une décharge
électrique.
Consignes de
sécurité relatives aux
accessoires
Avant d’utiliser un produit optionnel, lisez attentivement les
instructions fournies avec ce produit.11
Contenu de l’emballage ..................................................................................................... 2
Introduction............................................................................................................................ 4
Mesures de sécurité............................................................................................................. 7
Nomenclature .....................................................................................................15
Nomenclature .....................................................................................................16
Mise à jour du micrologiciel............................................................................................16
Fixation de l’objectif...........................................................................................19
Détermination lorsqu’un objectif peut être utilisé avec l’unité de montage
d’objectif ...........................................................................................................................19
Fixation de l’objectif...........................................................................................................22
Retrait de l’objectif .............................................................................................................22
Nettoyage du capteur........................................................................................23
Prise de vue..........................................................................................................24
Mise au point........................................................................................................................24
Table des matières1
P : Mode Changement de programme / A : Mode Priorité ouverture..................................... 24
S : Mode Priorité à la vitesse d’obturation..................................................................25
M : Mode Exposition manuelle ......................................................................................25
Ajout de modes Scène......................................................................................................26
Agrandissement de photos.............................................................................................27
Enregistrement de fonctions sur le sélecteur plus-moins...................................28
Ajout de tailles prises en charge pour le zoom de redimensionnement
automatique....................................................................................................................28
Réglages...............................................................................................................29
Réglage [Qualité image/Taille] (Menu prise de vue)..............................................29
Photos...........................................................................................................................30
Vidéos............................................................................................................................31
[Réduction bruit].................................................................................................................32
[Balance blancs]...................................................................................................................33
[Sensibilité ISO]....................................................................................................................34
[Assist. mise au pt]..............................................................................................................35
[Illum. périphérique]..........................................................................................................351
[Correction distorsion]......................................................................................................36
[Correction du dégradé de couleurs] ..........................................................................36
[Lim vitess obt flash]..........................................................................................................37
Menu onglet des options personnalisées......................................................38
[Enr. Mes Réglages]............................................................................................................38
[Éditer Mes Réglages]........................................................................................................38
[Confirmation du déclencheur].....................................................................................39
Manette ADJ. Réglage.......................................................................................................39
[Contrôle ISO direct de ADJ.]..........................................................................................40
[Rég. touche Fn1]/[Rég. touche Fn2] ...........................................................................40
[Supprimer Mes Réglages] ..............................................................................................40
[Rétablir valeurs par défaut] ...........................................................................................41
[Touche Zoom] ....................................................................................................................41
Menu Config. .......................................................................................................42
[Sensibilité ISO auto-hi]....................................................................................................42
Réglage [Image zoom numérique] (Onglet de configuration) ..........................42
[Lecture zoom cible]..........................................................................................................431
Modification de [Sons touches].....................................................................................43
[Annul. affich. zoom]..........................................................................................................44
[Sélect. aide m. au point] .................................................................................................44
Caractéristiques..................................................................................................45
Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire................................................................50
Annexes................................................................................................................53
Accessoires en option.......................................................................................................53
Précautions d’emploi.........................................................................................................54
Entretien et stockage de l’équipement.......................................................................56
Garantie et réparation.......................................................................................................581
Nomenclature
1 2 3
1 Connecteur
2 Touche de libération de l'objectif
3 Monture latérale du boîtier1
Nomenclature
Mise à jour du micrologiciel
Lorsque vous fixez pour la première fois l’unité de montage d’objectif au
boîtier de l’appareil photo, la fonction de mise à jour de version démarre
automatiquement si le micrologiciel du boîtier de l’appareil photo doit être
mis à jour. Dans ce cas, mettez à jour le micrologiciel du boîtier de l’appareil
comme suit.
Si la version du micrologiciel est déjà à jour, la fonction de mise à jour de
version ne démarre pas et vous pouvez utiliser l’objectif immédiatement.
1 Vérifiez que l’appareil photo est hors tension et fixez l’unité
appareil photo au boîtier de l’appareil.
• Pour en savoir plus sur la fixation de l’unité appareil photo, reportez-vous
au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo.1
2 Mettez le boîtier de l'appareil photo sous tension.
• Un message de confirmation relatif à la mise à jour du micrologiciel
s’affiche.
3 Appuyez sur les touches Fn1/Fn2 pour sélectionner [Oui], puis
appuyez sur la touche MENU/OK.
• La mise à jour du micrologiciel démarre et les messages suivants
s’affichent sur l’écran d’affichage des photos.
[Vérification du fichier de réécriture]
[Programme de réécriture]
L’appareil photo redémarre, la version du micrologiciel s’affiche, puis la
mise à jour est terminée.1
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Il n’est pas nécessaire que l’objectif soit installé lors de la mise à jour du
micrologiciel.
• Pour confirmer la version du micrologiciel, sélectionnez [Version du
micrologiciel] dans le menu de configuration. Vous pouvez également,
avec l’appareil photo hors tension, maintenir la touche 6 (Lecture)
enfoncée pendant plus d’une seconde tout en maintenant la touche
– enfoncée. La version du micrologiciel s’affiche pendant 20 secondes
environ.
• Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les mises à jour du
micrologiciel, visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/).1
Fixation de l’objectif
Détermination lorsqu’un objectif peut être utilisé avec
l’unité de montage d’objectif
Vérifiez pour savoir si votre objectif peut être fixé à l’unité de montage d’objectif.
1 Alignez les orifices du dispositif de contrôle
d’objectif avec les taquets du montage d’objectif,
puis faites-glisser le dispositif de contrôle
d’objectif bien droit sur l’objectif.
• Faites-le glisser de sorte qu’il repose légèrement sur
l’objectif.0
2 Placez l’objectif sur une surface plane, et vérifiez-le latéralement (du
côté du bord).
• Assurez-vous que le dispositif de contrôle d'objectif et la monture
d'objectif sont fixés fermement sans aucun espacement.
L‘objectif ne peut pas être fixé dans les cas suivants :
L’objectif dépasse de la partie supérieure du dispositif de contrôle
d’objectif.
Un espacement existe entre le dispositif de contrôle d’objectif et le
montage d’objectif.
L’objectif peut être utilisé
avec l’unité.
L’objectif ne peut pas être
utilisé avec l’unité.
L’objectif ne peut pas être
utilisé avec l’unité.1
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Forcez l’installation de l’unité de montage d’objectif sur un objectif qui ne
peut pas être utilisé risque d’endommager ou de rayer l’objectif ou l’unité
de montage d’objectif.
• Ne tentez pas de pousser le dispositif de contrôle d’objectif sur le
montage d’objectif avec la force. Manipulez avec précaution afin de ne
pas rayer ou endommager l’objectif lorsque vous le fixez.
• Si vous utilisez un objectif rétractable, vérifiez que l’objectif est bien
rétracté.
• Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les objectifs compatibles
avec l’unité de montage d’objectif, visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.
ricoh.com/r_dc/).
Veuillez noter que certains objectifs peuvent ne pas être compatibles en
fonction de leurs conditions. Veuillez vérifier au préalable si l’objectif peut
être fixé à l’aide du dispositif de contrôle.
Fixation de l’objectif
1 Alignez le repère sur l’objectif avec la marque rouge sur l’unité de
montage d’objectif, puis fixez l’objectif bien droit sur l’unité de
montage d’objectif.
2 Tournez l'objectif vers la droite jusqu'à ce que les encoches de
verrouillage de l’objectif s’alignent avec la rainure de verrouillage de
celui-ci.
Retrait de l’objectif
1 Tournez l’objectif vers la gauche tout en appuyant sur la touche de
retrait d’objectif jusqu’à ce que la marque sur l’objectif soit alignée
avec la marque rouge sur l’unité de montage d’objectif.
2 Tirez l’objectif bien droit pour le retirer.
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Pour plus d’informations sur l’objectif, reportez-vous au mode d’emploi de
l’objectif et aux autres documents connexes.
Nettoyage du capteur
Procédez comme suit pour nettoyer le capteur.
1 Mettez sous tension.
2 Faites-glisser la touche Marche/Arrêt vers OFF tout en appuyant sur
la touche N.
• Mettez hors tension avec l’obturateur ouvert.
3 Nettoyez l’unité à l’aide d’un soufflant disponible dans le commerce.
4 Une fois le nettoyage terminé, mettez sous tension, puis hors tension
de nouveau.
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Ne touchez pas le capteur ou l’obturateur.
• La couleur peut être pâle si le capteur est soumis à une lumière intense
pendant une période prolongée. Ne posez pas l’appareil photo avec
l’obturateur ouvert.
• Lorsque l’option [Sél. init. déclench.] du menu de configuration est définie
sur [OUVRIR], l’obturateur reste ouvert lorsque l’appareil est mis hors tension.
• N’utilisez pas un pulvérisateur avec cet appareil.
• N’insérez pas les bords du soufflant à l’intérieur du montage.
• Les dommages occasionnés pendant le nettoyage ne sont pas pris en
charge par la garantie.
Prise de vue
Mise au point
L’unique mode de mise au point disponible est MF (Manual Focus, mise au
point manuelle). Réglez la mise au point manuellement à l’aide de l’objectif.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
L’utilisation de l’option [Agrand. affich] (GP. 27) ou de l’option [Assist. mise
au pt] (GP. 35) du menu de prise de vue simplifie la vérification de la mise
au point.
P : Mode Changement de programme / A : Mode Priorité ouverture
P : Mode Changement de programme et A : Mode Priorité ouverture
fonctionne comme c: Mode Prise de vue automatique.
S : Mode Priorité à la vitesse d’obturation
Si [Auto] ou [Auto-Hi] est sélectionné pour Sensibilité ISO, l’exposition sera
réglée correctement dans la plage ISO lorsque l’appareil photo est en mode
de priorité à la vitesse d’obturation.
M : Mode Exposition manuelle
Si [Auto] ou [Auto-Hi] est sélectionné pour Sensibilité ISO, la sensibilité ISO
sera fixée à 200 lorsque l’appareil photo est en mode exposition manuelle.
Vous avez le choix entre B (Bulb, ampoule) et T (Time, heure) pour la vitesse
d’obturation.
Avec le réglage B, l'image est exposée lorsque vous appuyez sur le
déclencheur et l’exposition se termine lorsque le déclencheur est relâché.
Avec le réglage T, l’exposition commence lorsque vous appuyez sur
le déclencheur et se termine lorsque vous appuyez à nouveau sur le
déclencheur. Dans ces deux modes, l’appareil photo cesse la prise de vue
au bout de 180 secondes.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Les réglages B et T peuvent être utilisés à l’aide du déclencheur à câble
optionnel (CA-1).
Ajout de modes Scène
[Miniatures], [Contraste élevé N et B], [Flou artistique], [Traitement croisé],
[Toy Camera] et [Déclencheur électronique] ont été ajoutés au mode Scène.
[Déclencheur électronique] vous permet de prendre des photos sans vous
soucier du son ou des vibrations du déclencheur. Vous pouvez sélectionner
une vitesse d’obturation comprise entre 1/8000 sec. et 1 sec.
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Veillez à remédier au bougé de l’appareil lorsque vous utilisez le mode
[Déclencheur électronique] car un bougé de l’appareil est possible en
raison de durées d’exposition différentes entre les parties supérieure et
inférieure de l’écran. Ce mode n’est pas approprié si les sujets sont en
mouvement.
• Vous ne pouvez pas régler la sensibilité ISO sur 200 lorsque vous utilisez
[Déclencheur électronique].
Agrandissement de photos
Appuyez de manière prolongée sur la touche MENU/OK pour agrandir et
afficher le centre de l’écran. Appuyez de nouveau de manière prolongée sur
la touche MENU/OK pour agrandir le centre de l’écran et afficher la partie
agrandie en plein écran. Appuyez de nouveau de manière prolongée sur la
touche MENU/OK pour revenir à l’affichage normal.
Vous pouvez définir l’agrandissement de l’écran en appuyant de
manière prolongée sur la touche t (Retardateur) ou en sélectionnant
[Agrandissement] dans le menu de prise de vue. Sélectionnez [2×], [4×] ou
[8×] à l’aide des touches +/-, puis appuyez sur la touche MENU/OK.
Vous pouvez déplacer la zone d’affichage agrandie à l’aide des touches de
direction (+/-/Fn1/Fn2).
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• L’écran revient à l’affichage normal une fois la compensation d’exposition
exécutée ou à l’aide de la touche Direct en mode Vue agrandie.
• Si l’option Verr. AE est activée avant l’agrandissement de l’image entière,
la fonction AE est exécutée en mode Vue agrandie et les photos sont
prises avec les paramètres AE verrouillés.
• Vous pouvez définir [Agrandir part.] et [Agrandir tout] sur [Rég. touche
Fn1/Rég. touche Fn2] dans le menu des options personnalisées.
Enregistrement de fonctions sur le sélecteur plus-moins
Vous pouvez basculer entre les modes à l’aide du sélecteur plus-moins
lorsque le mode Flash et le retardateur sont activés.
Ajout de tailles prises en charge pour le zoom de
redimensionnement automatique
Le zoom de redimensionnement automatique prend en charge tous les
rapports d’affichage.
Réglages
Réglage [Qualité image/Taille] (Menu prise de vue)
Les options de qualité de l’image, de taille de l’image et de rapport
d’affichage suivantes sont disponibles pour le réglage [Qualité image/
Taille].
La taille du fichier des photos dépend de l’association qualité de l’image/
taille de l’image utilisée. Lors de l’enregistrement de vidéos, vous pouvez
sélectionner la [Taille video].0
Photos
Paramètre Rapport
d’affichage
Compression Taille de l’image
(pixels)
RAW 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4288×2416
4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
3776×2832
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4288×2848
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
2848×2848
L (Large) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 4288×2416
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3776×2832
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 4288×2848
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2848×2848
M (Middle) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 3456×1944
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3072×2304
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 3456×2304
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2304×23041
Paramètre Rapport
d’affichage
Compression Taille de l’image
(pixels)
5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944
3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536
1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960
VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480
*1 Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit du réglage utilisé pour la copie JPEG.
*2 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent en haut
et en bas de l’affichage de la photo.
*3 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent sur le
côté droit et sur le côté gauche de l’affichage de la photo.
Vidéos
Paramètre Taille vidéo
HD1280 1280×720
VGA640 640×480
QVGA320 320×240
[Réduction bruit]
Choisissez une réduction du bruit entre [Non], [Auto], [Faible], [Forte] ou
[MAX]. Le temps nécessaire à l’enregistrement des images varie en fonction
de l’option sélectionnée.
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction lorsque [Portrait], [Sports],
[Miniatures], [Contraste élevé N et B], [Flou artistique], [Traitement croisé],
[Toy Camera] ou [Correction biais] est sélectionné dans les modes Scène.
[Balance blancs]
Vous pouvez sélectionner [Lampe incandescente1] ou [Lampe
incandescente2] dans les réglages [Balance blancs]. Utilisez cette option
avec une lampe incandescente.
Le réglage [Lampe incandescente2], par rapport à [Lampe incandescente1],
donne une teinte légèrement rougeâtre.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Avec [Lampe incandescente2], vous pouvez obtenir les mêmes densités
de couleur qu’avec le réglage [Incandescent] décrit dans le Mode
d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo.
• Si le flash est déclenché avec DISP. dans [Manuel], la balance des blancs
est définie sur les résultats de mesure calculés lors du déclenchement du
flash.
[Sensibilité ISO]
[ISO-LO], [ISO 250], [ISO 320], [ISO 500], [ISO 640], [ISO 1000], [ISO 1250],
[ISO 2000] et [ISO 2500] ont été ajoutés.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• [ISO-LO] équivaut à ISO 100 ([Déclencheur électronique] du mode scène
équivaut à ISO 125). Toutefois, la plage dynamique est réduite et des
niveaux de luminosité supérieurs sont possibles.
• Lorsque l’option [Auto] est sélectionnée et que le flash est utilisé, la
sensibilité utilisée atteindra une sensibilité équivalente à ISO 800.
• Lorsque l’option [Auto] est sélectionnée et que le flash n’est pas utilisé, les
valeurs minimales et maximales respectives pour la sensibilité ISO seront
ISO 200 et ISO 400.
([Déclencheur électronique] en mode scène est ISO 250.)
[Assist. mise au pt]
Les contours et le contraste des images affichées sur l’écran sont intensifiés,
facilitant le réglage de la mise au point.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Vous pouvez sélectionner la méthode d’affichage de l’option Assist. mise au
pt dans [Sélect. aide m. au point] dans le menu de configuration. (GP. 44)
[Illum. périphérique]
Vous pouvez corriger l’intensité de lumière d’arrière-plan dans la plage
comprise entre -3 et +3.
[Correction distorsion]
Vous pouvez corriger la distorsion dans une image en sélectionnant
[Barillet] ou [Coussinet], puis en sélectionnant [Forte], [Moyenne] ou
[Faible].
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Vous ne pouvez pas apporter des corrections à des images affichées sur
l’écran d’affichage des photos ou à des images RAW.
[Correction du dégradé de couleurs]
Vous pouvez corriger les nuances de couleurs aux quatre coins de l’image.
Vous pouvez corriger dans une plage comprise entre -4 et +4 pour R
(rouge) et B (bleu).
[Lim vitess obt flash]
Utilisez cette option pour limiter la vitesse d’obturation à des vitesses
inférieures lorsque le flash est utilisé pour empêcher un bougé de l’appareil
photo. Sélectionnez entre [Auto], [1/2], [1/4], [1/8], [1/15], [1/30], [1/60] ou
[1/125]. La vitesse d’obturation ne sera pas inférieure à la vitesse définie
lorsque le flash est utilisé.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Le réglage de vitesse d’obturation maximale qui fonctionne avec le
flash est de 1/180 sec. Le flash ne peut pas être utilisé avec des vitesses
d’obturation supérieures à ce réglage. La vitesse d’obturation ne sera
pas supérieure à 1/180 sec. lorsque le flash est utilisé. Ceci s’applique
également à un flash externe.
• Ce réglage n’est pas valide lors de l’utilisation du flash avec
synchronisation lente.
Menu onglet des options personnalisées
[Enr. Mes Réglages]
Vous pouvez sélectionner entre l’une des options Mes réglages Boîte [1] à
[6] et Carte [1] à [6] pour l’emplacement d’enregistrement.
[Éditer Mes Réglages]
Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres [Nom objectif], [Long. focale] et
[Ouverture F] des fichiers Exif dans [Saisie info objectif] dans [Éditer Mes
Réglages].
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ces informations n’affectent pas les réglages de prise de vue.
[Confirmation du déclencheur]
Lorsque l’option [ADJ./DIRECT] est définie, appuyez sur le déclencheur
jusqu’à mi-course pour finaliser les réglages en mode ADJ. et sur l’écran
DIRECT. Vous pouvez alors prendre des photos. Lorsque l’option [ADJ.] est
définie, les réglages du mode ADJ. sont finalisés, ce qui vous permet de
prendre des photos. Lorsque l’option [DIRECT] est définie, les réglages de
l’écran DIRECT sont finalisés, ce qui vous permet de prendre des photos.
Une fois la prise de vue terminée, le système revient à l’écran de contrôle.
Manette ADJ. Réglage
Vous pouvez définir la fonction [Format] dans [Manette ADJ. Réglage 1] à
[Manette ADJ. Réglage 4].
Si vous définissez la fonction Format et que vous appuyez sur la touche
Manette ADJ. , s’affiche, vous permettant ainsi de définir le format.0
[Contrôle ISO direct de ADJ.]
Lorsque l’option [Contrôle ISO direct de ADJ.] est réglée sur [Oui], vous
pouvez pousser la manette ADJ. latéralement lorsque la prise de vue est
possible pour modifier la sensibilité ISO. Le réglage par défaut est [Non].
[Rég. touche Fn1]/[Rég. touche Fn2]
Les fonctions [Agrand. affich], [Assist. mise au pt] et [Format] ont été
ajoutées.
[Supprimer Mes Réglages]
Les réglages enregistrés pour [Boîte Mes Réglages] dans [Enr. Mes
Réglages], pour [Carte] et pour [MY1], [MY2] et [MY3] sur le sélecteur de
mode sont ramenés à leur valeur par défaut.1
[Rétablir valeurs par défaut]
Les options personnalisées seront réinitialisées.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Les réglages définis dans [Enr. Mes Réglages] ne seront pas restaurés.
[Touche Zoom]
Vous pouvez sélectionner [Non], [Zoom numérique], [Correction de
l’exposition] ou [Balance blancs] pour les fonctions assignées aux touches
8/9.
Menu Config.
[Sensibilité ISO auto-hi]
Vous pouvez définir les limites supérieures de la sensibilité ISO et de la
vitesse d’obturation afin de modifier la [Sensibilité ISO] lorsqu’elle est
définie sur [Auto-Hi].
Réglage [Image zoom numérique] (Onglet de configuration)
La taille de l’image enregistrée varie en fonction du zoom de
redimensionnement automatique, de la manière suivante.
Rapport de zoom Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Rapport de zoom Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Environ 1,0× L Environ 1,8× 3M
Environ 1,2× M Environ 3,0× 1M
Environ 1,5× 5M Environ 5,9× VGA
[Lecture zoom cible]
Avec l’option Vue agrandie en mode de lecture, vous pouvez effectuer un
zoom avant sur l’image centrée à la position à laquelle l’appareil photo a
été placé par la cible pendant la prise de vue.
Modification de [Sons touches]
[Sons déclench.] est désactivé en mode [Cont.M + (rapide)]. Les sons du
déclencheur ne sont pas désactivés lorsqu’un déclencheur mécanique
ou lorsque l’option [Déclencheur électronique] dans le mode Scène est
utilisé. Les sons de mise au point sont désactivés lorsque l’exposition est
verrouillée lorsque vous appuyez jusqu’à mi-course sur le déclencheur.
[Annul. affich. zoom]
Vous pouvez choisir de conserver ou d’annuler la vue agrandie après la
prise de photos en mode Vue agrandie. Sélectionnez [Non] pour conserver
le mode Vue agrandie et [Oui] pour l’annuler une fois les photos prises.
[Sélect. aide m. au point]
Lorsque l'option [Aide m. au p.] est définie sur [Oui] dans le menu de prise
de vue, vous pouvez sélectionner [MODE 1] ou [MODE 2].
MODE 1 : Les contours des sujets/objets mis au point sont améliorés.
MODE 2 : L'écran d’affichage des photos passe en noir et blanc et la zone de
mise au point brille en blanc.
Caractéristiques
Les caractéristiques correspondent à l’unité appareil photo installée sur un
boîtier GXR.
Pixels réels Environ 12,3 millions
Capteur d’image 23,6 mm×15,7 mm CMOS (nombre total de pixels : environ
12,9 millions)
Zoom 4,0× zoom numérique (photos), zoom numérique
3,6×(vidéos) ; environ 5,9× zoom de redimensionnement
automatique (VGA)
Mode mise au point MF
Vitesse
d’obturation
Photos 1/4000–180s, B (Bulb, ampoule), T (Time, heure) (les limites inférieures
et supérieures varient en fonction du mode prise de vue et flash)
Vitesse d’obturation maximale de synchronisation Flash : 1/180 s
Vidéos 1/2000–1/30s
Contrôle
exposition
Mesure Mesure TTL-CCD en modes multi (256 segments), central
pondéré, et spot avec verrouillage de l’exposition automatique
Mode Priorité à l’ouverture AE, exposition manuelle, fonction de
décalage de la cible
Correction de
l’exposition
Manuelle (+4,0 à -4,0EV par incrément de 1/3EV ou 1/2EV), cadrage
automatique (-2EV à +2EV par incrément de 1/3EV ou 1/2EV)
Portée du lien d’exposition
(mode prise de vue
automatique, mesure
centrale pondérée de la
lumière)
Pour l’utilisation d’un objectif standard (F2,5) : 1,2 EV à 13,2 EV
(portée du lien pour une sensibilité ISO automatique convertie
en fonction de la valeur EV pour ISO100)
Sensibilité ISO
(sensibilité sortie standard)
Auto, Auto-Hi, ISO-LO, ISO 200, ISO 250, ISO 320, ISO 400, ISO
500, ISO 640, ISO 800, ISO 1000, ISO 1250, ISO 1600, ISO 2000,
ISO 2500, ISO 3200
Balance des blancs Auto, Multi-P AUTO, En extérieur, Nuageux, Incandescente1,
Incandescente2, Lampe fluorescente, Réglage manuel, Détail ;
cadrage auto balance des blancs
Flash Réglage de
puissance du
flash
Flash TTL, flash manuel, lumière ambiante auto (fonction
disponible uniquement avec le flash externe GF-1)
Numéro de guide 9,6 (équivalent : ISO 200)
6,8 (équivalent : ISO 100)
Angle d’exposition à partir de 24 mm (équivalent : 35 mm)
Synchronisation Synchronisation premier/deuxième rideau
Autre Compatible avec le flash externe GF-1
Mode prise de vue Auto, changement de programme, priorité à l’ouverture,
priorité à l’obturation, manuel, scène (vidéo, portrait, sports,
paysage, nuit, correction biais, Miniatures, Contraste élevé N et
B, Flou artistique, Traitement croisé, Toy Camera, Déclencheur
électronique), Mes Réglages
Mode
continu
Nombre de
photos prises
à l’aide de
l’option Continu
(Taille d’image :
RAW)
Réduction du bruit désactivée ou activée (faible) : 4 photos,
Réduction du bruit activée (forte) : 3 photos
Réduction du bruit activée MAX : 3 photos
Nombre de
photos prises à
l’aide de l’option
Cont.M + (un
ensemble)
Rap (1280 × 856) : 30 photos (24 images/s)
Len (4288 × 2848) : 15 photos (3 images/s)
Compression*1
FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2
Taille de
l’image
(pixels)
Photos 4288×2416, 3776×2832, 4288×2848, 2848×2848,
3456×1944, 3072×2304, 3456×2304, 2304×2304,
2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480
Vidéos 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240
Taille fichier
(approximative)
RAW 16:9 NORMAL : 17 800Ko/image, FINE : 19 515Ko/image,
VGA : 15 587Ko/image
4:3 NORMAL : 18 387Ko/image, FINE : 20 157Ko/image,
VGA : 16 124Ko/image
3:2 NORMAL : 20 946Ko/image, FINE : 22 967Ko/image,
VGA : 18 337Ko/image
1:1 NORMAL : 13 991Ko/image, FINE : 15 333Ko/image,
VGA : 12 273Ko/image
L 16:9 NORMAL : 2 222Ko/image, FINE : 3 816Ko/image
4:3 NORMAL : 2 315Ko/image, FINE : 3 960Ko/image
3:2 NORMAL : 2 615Ko/image, FINE : 4 493Ko/image
1:1 NORMAL : 1 761Ko/image, FINE : 3 009Ko/image
M 16:9 NORMAL : 1 475Ko/image, FINE : 2 509Ko/image
4:3 NORMAL : 1 574Ko/image, FINE : 2 662Ko/image
3:2 NORMAL : 1 744Ko/image, FINE : 2 968Ko/image
1:1 NORMAL : 1 186Ko/image, FINE : 2 003Ko/image
5M 4:3 FINE : 2 287Ko/image
3M 4:3 FINE : 1 474Ko/image
Taille fichier
(approximative)
1M 4:3 FINE : 812Ko/image
VGA 4:3 FINE : 197Ko/image
Longévité batterie
(basée sur norme CIPA)
DB-90 : environ 330 prises de vue*3
(Basé sur la directive CIPA)
Dimensions (L×H×P) Unité de montage d’objectif uniquement :
79,1mm×60,9mm×40,5mm (Basé sur la directive CIPA)
Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo :
120mm×70,2mm×45,7mm (Basé sur la directive CIPA)
Tirage mécanique : 27,8mm
Poids (approximatif) Unité de montage d’objectif uniquement : 170 g
Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo : 370 g
(y compris la batterie et la carte mémoire SD)
Température fonctionnement 0°C à 40°C
Humidité fonctionnement 90% ou moins
Température stockage –20°C à 60°C0
*1 Les options disponibles varient selon la taille d’image.
*2 Un fichier JPEG est également enregistré (le fichier JPEG peut être d’une qualité FINE
ou NORMAL avec les mêmes dimensions que le fichier RAW ou VGA pour une taille de
640×480 pixels). Les fichiers RAW utilisent le format standard DNG promu par Adobe
Systems, Inc.
*3 Pour référence uniquement ; le nombre réel de prises de vue varie énormément selon
l’utilisation de l’appareil. Nous vous recommandons d’emporter des batteries de rechange
lors d’une utilisation pendant une période prolongée.
Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire
Les valeurs suivantes sont données à titre de référence de la capacité de stockage
de la mémoire interne et de cartes mémoire de différentes tailles, en fonction de la
qualité d’image et de la taille d’image, lors de l’utilisation de la qualité d’image FINE.
Photos
Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go
RAW*
FINE
4288×2416 4 49 100 197 404 810 1625
3776×2832 4 47 97 191 391 784 1573
4288×2848 3 42 85 168 343 688 1380
2848×2848 5 63 128 251 513 1029 20651
Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go
L
FINE
4288×2416 21 235 476 935 1912 3830 7684
3776×2832 20 227 462 907 1854 3715 7453
4288×2848 18 200 407 799 1633 3272 6565
2848×2848 27 299 608 1195 2442 4893 9815
M
FINE
3456×1944 32 357 724 1419 2902 5814 11662
3072×2304 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014
3456×2304 27 302 614 1206 2466 4941 9913
2304×2304 41 447 903 1774 3627 7267 14578
5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238
3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063
1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181
VGA/FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581
* Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit de la compression utilisée pour la copie
JPEG.
Vidéos
Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Mémoire
interne
1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go
1280×720
24 images/seconde
21s 3min
49s
7min
46s
15min
58s
31min
10s
62min
26s
125min
15s
640×480
24 images/seconde
1min 11min
2s
22min
27s
46min
10s
90min
7s
180min
32s
362min
9s
320×240
24 images/seconde
2min
25s
26min
24s
53min
43s
110min
27s
215min
35s
431min
52s
866min
19s
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
La taille d’enregistrement sans interruption maximale pour une vidéo est de
4 Go. La durée maximale d’enregistrement est de 15 minutes environ pour
une taille de 1280 × 720, de 46 minutes environ pour une taille de 640 × 480
et de 90 minutes environ pour une taille de 320 × 240.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Lors de l’enregistrement de vidéos avec la taille de vidéo définie sur 1280 ×
720, l’utilisation de cartes mémoire SD/SDHC de classe 6 est recommandée.
Annexes
Accessoires en option
L’objectif RICOH peut être utilisé avec les éléments suivants (vendus séparément).
Étui de boîtier
+ courroie d’encolure
(SC-75B)
Étui d’unité appareil photo
(SC-75T)
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Avant d’utiliser un accessoire optionnel, consultez la documentation
fournie avec le produit.
• Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les accessoires optionnels,
visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricohpmmc.com/).
Précautions d’emploi
• La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans le pays d’achat.
• Dans le cas d’une panne ou d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil à l’étranger, le
fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit localement
ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée.
• Ne faites pas tomber l’équipement et évitez-lui les chocs physiques.
• Lors du transport de l’équipement, faites attention de ne pas le cogner dans d’autres
objets. Faites particulièrement attention à protéger l’objectif.
• Lors de la fixation d’un filtre ou d’un pare-soleil, veillez à ne pas exercer une pression
excessive.
• Des changements brutaux de température peuvent provoquer de la condensation
visible dans l’objectif ou des dysfonctionnements de l’équipement. Cela peut être
évité en plaçant l’équipement dans un sac plastique pour ralentir le changement
de température, puis en le retirant une fois que l’air dans le sac a atteint la même
température que l’environnement.
• Ne touchez pas le capteur d’image.
• Conservez l’équipement sec et évitez de le manipuler avec les mains mouillées.
Le non-respect de cette consigne peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements de
l’équipement ou un choc électrique.
• Gardez le connecteur propre.
Conseil : pour éviter la condensation---------------------------------------------
La condensation se produit généralement lorsque vous vous rendez dans
un endroit avec une brusque différence de température, si l’humidité
est élevée, dans une pièce froide après que le chauffage ait été mis en
marche, ou lorsque l’appareil est exposé à de l’air froid en provenance d’un
climatiseur ou d’un autre dispositif.
Entretien et stockage de l’équipement
Entretien de l’équipement
• Les photos peuvent être altérées par des empreintes ou d’autres matières
étrangères sur l’objectif. Évitez de toucher l’objectif avec les doigts. Éliminez
la poussière ou les peluches avec un soufflant disponible dans le commerce,
ou nettoyez doucement l’objectif avec un chiffon doux et sec. Faites
particulièrement attention au voletcache objectif.
• Nettoyez soigneusement l’équipement après l’avoir utilisé à la plage ou après
avoir manipulé des produits cosmétiques. N’exposez pas l’équipement à des
substances volatiles comme du diluant, du benzène ou des pesticides. Le nonrespect de cette consigne peut endommager l’équipement ou sa finition.
• Dans l’éventualité d’un dysfonctionnement, consultez un centre de réparation
Ricoh.
• Cet équipement est un dispositif de haute précision. Ne le démontez pas.
Stockage
• Ne stockez pas l’appareil photo dans un endroit sujet à : chaleur ou
humidité extrême ; grands changements de température ou d’humidité ;
poussière, saleté ou sable ; fortes vibrations ; contact prolongé avec des
produits chimiques, notamment des boules de naphtaline ou d’autres
produits insecticides, ou des produits en vinyle ou en caoutchouc ; champs
magnétiques puissants (par exemple à proximité d’un moniteur, d’un
transformateur ou d’un aimant).
• Lorsque vous rangez votre appareil photo, veillez à l’installer dans un étui, etc.,
dans lequel la poussière ou les peluches ne pénètrent pas afin d’empêcher la
saleté ou la poussière de se déposer sur l’appareil photo.
De plus, lorsque vous transportez l’appareil photo, ne le mettez pas
directement dans une poche, etc., afin d’empêcher la saleté ou la poussière de
se déposer sur l’appareil photo.
Garantie et réparation
1. Ce produit bénéficie d’une garantie limitée. Pendant la période de garantie
indiquée sur la carte de garantie fournie avec votre équipement, toute pièce
défectueuse sera réparée gratuitement. Dans le cas d’un dysfonctionnement
de l’équipement, contactez le distributeur qui vous a vendu l’équipement ou
votre centre de réparation Ricoh le plus proche. Veuillez noter que vous ne
serez pas remboursé des frais de transport pour livrer votre équipement au
centre de réparation Ricoh.
2. Cette garantie ne couvre aucun dommage résultant de :
1 non-respect des instructions du mode d’emploi ;
2 réparation, modification ou révision non réalisée par un centre de service
agréé, listé dans le mode d’emploi ;
3 incendie, sinistre, catastrophe naturelle, foudre, tension anormale, etc. ;
4 stockage inapproprié (indiqué dans le « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de
l’appareil photo »), fuite de batterie et autres fluides, moisissure ou tout
autre défaut d’entretien de l’équipement.
5 immersion dans l’eau (inondation), exposition à l’alcool ou à d’autres
boissons, infiltration de sable ou de boue, choc physique, chute ou pression
exercée sur l’équipement et autres causes non naturelles.
3. Après l’expiration de la période de garantie, tous les frais de réparation seront
à votre charge, y compris ceux d’un centre de service agréé.
4. Tous les frais de réparation seront à votre charge, même au cours de la période
de garantie, si la carte de garantie n’est pas jointe ou si le nom du distributeur
ou la date d’achat n’est pas indiqué ou a été modifié sur la carte.
5. Les frais de révision et d’inspection complète, sur demande du client, seront à
sa charge complète que la période de garantie ait expiré ou non.
6. Tout dommage consécutif à une défaillance de l’équipement, comme les frais
de prise de vue ou la perte d’un profit attendu, ne sera pas remboursé que la
période de garantie ait expiré ou non.
7. La garantie est valable uniquement dans le pays où l’équipement a été acheté.
* Les dispositions ci-dessus se réfèrent aux réparations gratuites et ne limitent
vos droits légaux.
* L’objectif des dispositions ci-dessus est également décrit sur la carte de
garantie fournie avec l’équipement.0
8. Les pièces essentielles à la réparation de l’équipement (c’est-à-dire les
composants nécessaires au fonctionnement et à la qualité de l’équipement)
seront disponibles pendant une période de cinq années après l’arrêt de la
production de l’équipement.
9. Veuillez noter que si l’équipement est sérieusement endommagé par une
inondation, une immersion, une infiltration de sable ou de boue, des chocs
violents ou une chute, il peut être impossible de le réparer et la restauration de
son état originel peut être impossible.
Remarques------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Avant d’envoyer l’appareil en réparation, vérifiez le boîtier de l’appareil
photo et relisez le mode d’emploi pour garantir un fonctionnement correct.
• Certaines réparations nécessitent un certain temps d’exécution.
• Lors de l’envoi de l’équipement à un centre de réparation, veuillez inclure
une note décrivant la pièce défectueuse et le problème rencontré, aussi
précisément que possible.
• Démontez tous les accessoires non associés au problème avant d’envoyer
l’appareil au centre de réparation.1
En cas de problème
Bureaux Ricoh
RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V.
(EPMMC)
Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY
(innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438
(außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438
http://www.ricohpmmc.com/
RICOH FRANCE S.A.S. (PMMC FRANCE)
(à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70
(en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94Ricoh Company, Ltd.
Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo
104-8222, Japan
2011 août
FR F-FR
Imprimé en Chine
*L454 3972*
GXR MOUNT A12
Instruction Manual
The serial number may be found on the bottom of the lens.
Package Contents
Before using your Ricoh lens, confirm that the package contains the items
listed below.
Lens mount unit
The serial number may be found on the bottom.
Mount cap
Comes attached to the lens mount unit.
Connector cap
Comes attached to the lens mount unit.
Lens checker
Soft case ? Instructionmanual
(thismanual)
? Warranty
Introduction
To use this lens mount unit, you need to attach Leica M Mount Lens etc. to GXR camera
body.
Refer to the Camera Body User Guide for details about how to operate shooting and
playback functions and change settings and to read important precautions for use. This
instruction manual will explain functions and operating procedures that are available
only when this lens mount unit is used with a compatible camera body. See also the
GXR Camera Body User Guide.
To make the best use of this product’s functions, read this manual thoroughly before
use. Please keep this manual handy for ease of reference.
Ricoh Co., Ltd.
Safety precautions Read all safety precautions thoroughly to ensure safe use.
Test shots Take test shots to ensure that the camera is working properly
before taking photos on important occasions.
Copyright Reproduction or alteration of copyrighted documents, magazines,
and other materials, other than for personal, home, or other
similarly limited purposes, without the consent of the copyright
holder, is prohibited.
Exemption from liability Ricoh Co., Ltd. assumes no liability for failure to record or display
images as a result of product malfunction.
Warranty The warranty supplied with this product is only valid within the
country of purchase. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility
for servicing the product in other countries or bearing any
expense thereby incurred.
Radio interference Operating this product in the vicinity of other electronic
equipment may adversely affect both the camera and the other
device. Interference is particularly likely if the camera is used
in close proximity to a radio or television. This can be resolved
by moving the camera as far as possible from the other device,
reorienting the radio or television antenna, or plugging the radio
or television into a different outlet.
© 2011 RICOH CO., LTD. All rights reserved. This publication may not be reproduced in whole or in part without
Ricoh’s express written permission. Ricoh reserves the right to change the contents of this document at any time
without prior notice.
Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information in this document. Should you nevertheless
notice any errors or omissions, we would be grateful if you would notify us at the address listed on the back cover
of this booklet.
For the latest lens information, contact the lens retailer.
Safety Precautions
Warning Symbols
Various symbols are used throughout this instruction manual and on the
product to prevent physical harm to you or other people and damage to
property. The symbols and their meanings are explained below.
Danger
This symbol indicates matters that may lead to imminent risk of
death or serious injury if ignored or incorrectly handled.
Warning
This symbol indicates matters that may lead to death or serious
injury if ignored or incorrectly handled.
Caution
This symbol indicates matters that may lead to injury or physical
damage if ignored or incorrectly handled.
Sample Warnings
The symbol alerts you to actions that must be performed.
The symbol alerts you to prohibited actions.
The symbol may be combined with other symbols to indicate that a specific action
is prohibited.
Examples
= Do not touch = Do not disassemble
Observe the following precautions to ensure safe use of this unit.
Danger
Do not attempt to disassemble, repair or alter the equipment yourself. The highvoltage circuitry in the equipment poses significant electrical hazard.
Warning
Keep the equipment out of the reach of children.
Do not touch the internal components of the equipment if they become exposed as
a result of being dropped or damaged. The high-voltage circuitry in the equipment
could lead to an electric shock. Remove the battery as soon as possible, being careful
to avoid electric shocks or burns. Take the equipment to your nearest dealer or service
center if it is damaged.
Do not use the equipment in wet areas as this could result in fire or electric shock.
Do not use the equipment near flammable gases, gasoline, benzene, thinner or
similar substances to avoid the risk of explosion, fire or burns.
• Do not use the equipment in locations where usage is restricted or prohibited as
this may lead to disasters or accidents.10
Caution
Do not allow the equipment to get wet. In addition, do not operate it with wet hands.
Both pose the risk of electric shock.
Safety Precautions
for Accessories
When using optional products, carefully read the instructions
provided with the product before using that product.11
Package Contents................................................................................................................. 2
Introduction............................................................................................................................ 4
Safety Precautions................................................................................................................ 7
Names of Parts ....................................................................................................15
Upgrading the Product .....................................................................................16
Updating the firmware .....................................................................................................16
Attaching the Lens .............................................................................................19
Determining whether a lens can be used with the lens mount unit...............19
Attaching the Lens.............................................................................................................22
Removing the Lens............................................................................................................22
Cleaning the sensor unit...................................................................................23
Shooting...............................................................................................................24
Table of Contents1
Focus.......................................................................................................................................24
P: Program Shift Mode/A: Aperture Priority Mode.................................................24
S: Shutter Speed Priority Mode......................................................................................25
M: Manual Exposure Mode..............................................................................................25
Addition of Scene Modes.................................................................................................26
Enlarging pictures [Enlrg Display] ................................................................................27
Registering Functions to the Up-down Dial .............................................................28
Addition of Supported Sizes for Auto Resize Zoom...............................................28
Settings ................................................................................................................29
[Picture Quality/Size].........................................................................................................29
Photographs...............................................................................................................30
Movies...........................................................................................................................31
[Noise Reduction]...............................................................................................................32
[White Balance] ...................................................................................................................33
[ISO Setting]..........................................................................................................................341
[Focus Assist]........................................................................................................................35
[Peripheral illum.]................................................................................................................35
[Distortion Correction]......................................................................................................36
[Color shading correction]...............................................................................................36
[Flash Shut Spd Lim]..........................................................................................................37
Key Custom Settings Tab Menu .......................................................................38
[Reg. My Settings]...............................................................................................................38
[Edit My Settings]................................................................................................................38
[Shutter Button Confirmation].......................................................................................39
ADJ. Lever Settings.............................................................................................................39
[ADJ. Direct ISO Control] ..................................................................................................40
[Set Fn1/Fn2 Buttons]........................................................................................................40
[Delete My Settings] ..........................................................................................................40
[Restore Defaults] ...............................................................................................................41
[Zoom Button] .....................................................................................................................411
Setup Menu .........................................................................................................42
[ISO Auto-High Settings]..................................................................................................42
[Digital Zoom Image] Setting.........................................................................................42
[Target Zoom Play].............................................................................................................43
Changing [Operation Sounds].......................................................................................43
[Zoom Display Release]....................................................................................................44
[Focus assist selection]......................................................................................................44
Specifications ......................................................................................................45
Internal Memory/Memory Card Capacity..................................................................50
Appendices..........................................................................................................53
Optional Accessories.........................................................................................................53
Precautions for Use ............................................................................................................54
Equipment Care and Storage.........................................................................................56
Warranty and Servicing....................................................................................................581
Names of Parts
1 2 3
1 Connector
2 Lens release button
3 Body-side mount1
Upgrading the Product
Updating the firmware
When you first attach the lens mount unit to the camera body, the version
update function will start automatically if the firmware of the camera body
need to be updated. In such case, update the firmware of the camera body
using the following procedure.
If the firmware version is already up to date, the version update function
will not start and you can use the lens right away.
1 Check that the camera is turned off and attach the lens mount unit to
the camera body.
• For details about how to attach the lens mount unit, refer to the Camera
Body User Guide.1
2 Turn on the camera body.
• A confirmation message about updating the firmware appears.
3 Press the Fn1/Fn2 buttons to select [Yes] and then press the MENU/
OK button.
• The firmware update begins and the following messages appear on the
picture display.
[Checking rewrite file]
[Rewriting program]
The camera restarts and the firmware version will be displayed, and then
the update will be completed.1
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• The lens does not have to be attached when updating the firmware.
• To confirm the firmware version, select [Firmware Version] in the setup
menu. Alternatively, with the camera off, keep the 6 (Play) button
pressed for more than 1 second while holding the – button pressed
down. The firmware version will appear for about 20 seconds.
• For the latest information on firmware updates, see the Ricoh Web site
(http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/). 1
Attaching the Lens
Determining whether a lens can be used with the lens
mount unit
Check to see if your lens can be attached to the lens mount unit.
1 Line up the holes on the lens checker with the
tabs on the lens mount, and slide the lens checker
straight onto the lens.
• Slide it on so that it lightly rests on the lens.0
2 Place the lens on a flat surface, and check it from the side, edge-on.
• Check to make sure that the lens checker and the lens mount side are
firmly attached to each other with no gaps.
The lens cannot be attached in the following cases:
The lens is sticking out of the top of the lens checker.
There are gaps between the lens checker and the lens mount.
The lens can be used
with the unit
The lens cannot be used
with the unit
The lens cannot be used
with the unit1
Caution ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Forcibly attaching the lens mount unit to a lens that cannot be attached
may cause the lens or lens mount unit to be scratched or damaged.
• Do not attempt to forcibly push the lens checker onto the lens mount.
Handle with care so as not to scratch or otherwise damage the lens when
attaching it.
• With retractable lenses, check the lens with it retracted.
• For the latest information on lenses that can be attached to the lens
mount unit, refer to the Ricoh website (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/).
Please note, however, that a lens may not be available for attachment
depending on its condition. Make sure to confirm in advance whether it
can be attached using the checker.
Attaching the Lens
1 Line up the mark on the lens with the red mark on the lens mount
unit, and attach the lens straight onto the lens mount unit.
2 Turn the lens to the right until the lens lock pin lines up with the lens
lock groove.
Removing the Lens
1 Turn the lens to the left while pressing the lens release button until
the mark on the lens lines up with the red mark on the lens mount
unit.
2 Pull the lens straight out to remove it.
Caution ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
For more information on the lens, refer to the lens instruction manual and
other related documents.
Cleaning the sensor unit
Follow the steps outlined below to clean the sensor.
1 Turn on the power.
2 Slide the POWER switch to OFF while pushing the N button.
• Turn off power with the shutter left open.
3 Clean the unit using a blower from a camera supply store.
4 Once done cleaning, turn the power on and then off again.
Caution ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Do not touch the sensor or shutter.
• The color may fade if the sensor is subjected to intense light for long
periods of time. Do not let the camera sit with the shutter open.
• When the [Shutter Initial Sel.] in the setup menu is set to [OPEN], the
shutter remains open when the power is turned off.
• Do not use a spray blower with this device.
• Do not insert the nozzle of the blower inside past the mount.
• Damages during cleaning will not be covered by warranty.
Be careful not to damage the device while cleaning it.
Shooting
Focus
The only focus mode available is MF (Manual Focus). Adjust the focus
manually using the lens.
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Using [Enlrg Display] (GP. 27) or [Focus Assist] (GP. 35) from the
shooting menu will make it easier to check the focus.
P: Program Shift Mode/A: Aperture Priority Mode
P: Program Shift Mode and A: Aperture Priority Mode operate in the same
way as c: Auto Shooting Mode.
S: Shutter Speed Priority Mode
If [Auto] or [Auto-Hi] is selected for the ISO setting, the exposure will be
adjusted to the proper exposure within the ISO range while the camera is in
shutter speed priority mode.
M: Manual Exposure Mode
If [Auto] or [Auto-Hi] is selected for ISO Setting, ISO will be fixed at 200
while the camera is in manual exposure mode.
You can select between B (Bulb) and T (Time) for the shutter speed.
With B, the image is exposed while the shutter release button is pressed
and exposure ends when the button is released. With T, exposure starts
when the shutter release button is pressed and ends when it is pressed
again. In either mode, the camera stops shooting compulsorily once 180
sec. has elapsed.
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
B and T can both be operated using the optional cable switch (CA-1).
Addition of Scene Modes
[Miniaturize], [High Contrast B&W], [Soft Focus], [Cross Process], [Toy
Camera], and [Electronic Shutter] have been added to Scene Mode.
[Electronic Shutter] allows you to take pictures without worrying about the
shutter release sound or vibrations. You can select a shutter speed between
1/8000 sec. and 1 sec.
Caution ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Take precautions for dealing with camera shake when using [Electronic
Shutter] as camera shake may occur due to differences in exposure times
between the top and bottom halves of the screen. It is not suitable for use
with moving subjects.
• You cannot set the ISO to 200 when using the [Electronic Shutter].
Enlarging pictures
Pressing and holding down the MENU/OK button enlarges and displays the
center. Pressing and holding down the MENU/OK button again enlarges the
center and displays the enlarged part over the entire screen. Pressing and
holding the MENU/OK button again returns to normal display.
You can set the display magnification by pressing and holding down the t
(Self-timer) button or by selecting [Magnification Ratio] from the shooting
menu. Select from [2×], [4×], or [8×] using the +/- buttons, and then press
the MENU/OK button.
You can move the enlarged view area using the direction keys (+/-/Fn1/
Fn2).
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• The display returns to the normal display when exposure compensation is
executed, or with the Direct button, in Enlarged View mode.
• If AE Lock is turned on before the entire image is enlarged, AE will
continue to run during Enlarged View, and pictures will be captured at
the locked AE settings.
• You can register [Enlrg Part] and [Enlrg All] to the [Set Fn1/Fn2 Button] in
the Key Custom Settings menu.
Registering Functions to the Up-down Dial
You can switch between modes using the Up-down dial when Flash mode
and Self-timer are set to on.
Addition of Supported Sizes for Auto Resize Zoom
Auto resize zoom supports all aspect ratios.
Settings
[Picture Quality/Size]
The following picture quality, image size and aspect ratio options are
available for the [Picture Quality/Size] setting.
A photograph‘s file size will depend on the combination of picture quality
and image size used. When recording movies, you can select the [Movie
Size].0
Photographs
Item Aspect ratio Compression Image size (pixels)
RAW 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4288×2416
4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
3776×2832
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4288×2848
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
2848×2848
L (Large) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 4288×2416
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3776×2832
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 4288×2848
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2848×2848
M (Middle) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 3456×1944
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3072×2304
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 3456×2304
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2304×23041
Item Aspect ratio Compression Image size (pixels)
5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944
3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536
1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960
VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480
*1 When [RAW] is selected, this is the setting used for the JPEG copy.
*2 Depending on the area photographed, black bands may appear on the top and bottom
of the picture display.
*3 Depending on the area photographed, black bands may appear at the right and left sides
of the picture display.
Movies
Item Movie size
HD1280 1280×720
VGA640 640×480
QVGA320 320×240
[Noise Reduction]
Perform noise reduction from [Off], [Auto], [Weak], [Strong], or [MAX]. The
time required to record images varies with the option selected.
Caution ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
You cannot use this function when [Portrait], [Sports], [Miniaturize], [High
Contrast B&W], [Soft Focus], [Cross Process], [Toy Camera], or [Skew Correct
Mode] is selected in the scene modes.
[White Balance]
You can select [Incandescent Lamp1] or [Incandescent Lamp2] in the
[White Balance] settings. Use with incandescent lighting.
Using [Incandescent Lamp2] will leave a slightly redder tint compared to
[Incandescent Lamp1].
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• When [Incandescent Lamp2] is selected, images will be shot with the
same color shades as with the [Incandescent] setting described in the
Camera Body User Guide.
• If the flash is fired using DISP. in [Manual], the white balance will be set to
the metering results calculated when the flash went off.
[ISO Setting]
[ISO-LO], [ISO 250], [ISO320], [ISO 500], [ISO640], [ISO 1000], [ISO1250], [ISO
2000], and [ISO 2500] can be selected.
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• [ISO-LO] is equivalent to ISO 100 ([Electronic Shutter] of Scene Mode is
equivalent to ISO 125). However, the dynamic range gets narrower and
the higher brightness levels make whiteout more likely to occur.
• When [Auto] is selected and the flash is used, the sensitivity used will gain
up to ISO 800 equivalent.
• When [Auto] is selected and the flash is not used, the minimum and
maximum values for the ISO sensitivity will be ISO 200 and ISO 400.
([Electronic shutter] in scene mode is ISO 250.)
[Focus Assist]
The shape outlines and contrast of the images shown on the picture display
are intensified, making it easier to adjust the focus.
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
You can select the display method for Focus Assist from [Focus assist
selection] in the setup menu. (GP. 44)
[Peripheral illum.]
You can correct the background light intensity in the range of -3 to +3.
[Distortion Correction]
You can correct distortion in an image by selecting [Barrel] or [Pincushion]
and then selecting [Strong], [Medium], or [Weak].
Caution ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
You cannot make corrections to images displayed on the picture display or
to RAW images.
[Color shading correction]
You can correct the color tones in the four corners of the image. You can
correct in a range between -4 and +4 for both R and B.
[Flash Shut Spd Lim]
Use to limit the shutter speed to lower speeds while the flash is being used
in order to prevent camera shake. Select from [Auto], [1/2], [1/4], [1/8],
[1/15], [1/30], [1/60], or [1/125]. The shutter speed will not drop below the
set speed while the flash is being used.
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• The maximum shutter speed setting that works with the flash is 1/180
sec. The flash cannot be used with shutter speeds faster than this setting.
The shutter speed will not be faster than 1/180 sec. while the flash is
being used. This applies to external flashes, as well.
• This setting is invalid when using slow-sync flash.
Key Custom Settings Tab Menu
[Reg. My Settings]
You can select from any of My Settings Box [1] to [6] and Card [1] to [6] for
the save location.
[Edit My Settings]
You can edit the [Lens Name], [Focal Length], and [F-aperture] for Exif files
in [Lens Info. Input] from [Edit My Settings].
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
This information does not affect the shooting settings.
[Shutter Button Confirmation]
When [ADJ./DIRECT] is set, pressing the shutter release button halfway
down will finalize settings in ADJ. mode and on the DIRECT screen, and you
will be able to shoot pictures. When [ADJ.] is set, the ADJ. mode settings
will be finalized, enabling you to shoot pictures. When [DIRECT] is set, the
DIRECT screen settings will be finalized, enabling you to shoot pictures.
After you finish shooting pictures, the system will return to the Monitoring
screen.
ADJ. Lever Settings
You can set the [Aspect Ratio] function in [ADJ. Lever Setting 1] to [ADJ.
Lever Setting 4].
If you set the Aspect Ratio function, and press the ADJ. Lever button,
will appear, allowing you to set the aspect ratio.0
[ADJ. Direct ISO Control]
When [ADJ. Direct ISO Control] is set to [On], you can push the ADJ. lever
sideways when shooting is possible to change the ISO setting. The default
setting is [Off].
[Set Fn1/Fn2 Buttons]
[Enlrg Display], [Focus Assist] and [Aspect Ratio] functions are added.
[Delete My Settings]
The settings registered to [My Settings Box] in [Reg. My Settings], to [Card],
and to [MY1], [MY2], and [MY3] on the Mode dial return to their defaults.1
[Restore Defaults]
The key custom settings will be reset.
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Settings set in [Reg. My Settings] will not be reset.
[Zoom Button]
You can select from [Off], [Digital Zoom], [Exposure Compensation], or
[White Balance] for the functions assigned to the 8/9 buttons.
Setup Menu
[ISO Auto-High Settings]
You can set the upper limits for the ISO setting and the shutter speed for
switching the ISO setting when [ISO Setting] is set to [Auto-Hi].
[Digital Zoom Image] Setting
The size of the recorded image varies depending on the auto resize zoom,
as follows.
Zoom ratio Image size (pixels) Zoom ratio Image size (pixels)
Approx. 1.0× L Approx. 1.8× 3M
Approx. 1.2× M Approx. 3.0× 1M
Approx. 1.5× 5M Approx. 5.9× VGA
[Target Zoom Play]
With Enlarged Display in playback mode, you can zoom in on the image
centered at the position to which the camera was shifted by target shift
during shooting.
Changing [Operation Sounds]
[Shutter Sounds] goes off in [M-Cont Plus (High)]. The shutter sound does
not go off when a mechanical shutter or [Electronic shutter] in the Scene
mode is used. The focus sound goes off when the exposure is locked when
the shutter release button is pressed halfway down.
[Zoom Display Release]
You can select whether to maintain or cancel the enlarged view after
shooting pictures in Enlarged View mode. Selecting [Off] maintains
Enlarged View mode and [On] cancels it after pictures are shot.
[Focus assist selection]
When [Focus Assist] is set to [On] in the shooting menu, you can select
[MODE1] or [MODE2].
MODE1: Shape outlines for subjects/objects in focus are enhanced.
MODE2: The picture display switches to black and white, and the area in
focus glows in white.
Specifications
Specifications are given for the lens mount unit mounted on a GXR body.
Effective pixels Approximately 12.3 million
Image sensor 23.6 mm × 15.7 mm CMOS (total pixels: approx. 12.9 million)
Zoom 4.0× digital zoom (photographs), 3.6 × digital zoom (movies);
approx. 5.9× auto resize zoom (VGA)
Focus mode MF
Shutter
speed
Photographs 1/4000–180s, B (Bulb), T (Time) (upper and lower limits vary
according to shooting and flash mode)
Flash synchronized maximum shutter speed : 1/180s
Movies 1/2000–1/30s
Exposure
control
Metering TTL-CCD metering in multi (256-segment), center-weighted,
and spot modes with autoexposure lock
Mode Aperture priority AE, manual exposure, move target function
Exposure
compensation
Manual (+4.0 to -4.0EV in increments 1/3EV or 1/2EV), auto
bracketing (-2EV to +2EV in increments 1/3EV or 1/2EV)
Exposure link range (Auto
shooting mode, Centerweighted light metering)
With use of a standard lens (F2.5): 1.2 EV to 13.2 EV
(link range for automatic ISO converted based on the EV for
ISO 100)
ISO sensitivity
(Standard Output Sensitivity)
Auto, Auto-Hi, ISO-LO, ISO 200, ISO 250, ISO 320, ISO 400, ISO
500, ISO 640, ISO 800, ISO 1000, ISO 1250, ISO 1600, ISO 2000,
ISO2500, ISO 3200
White balance mode Auto, Multi-P AUTO, Outdoors, Cloudy, Incandescent Lamp1,
Incandescent Lamp2, Fluorescent Lamp, Manual, Detail; white
balance bracketing
Flash Flash output
adjustment
TTL flash, manual flash, ambient light automatic (function
available only with the external flash GF-1)
Guide number 9.6 (equivalent: ISO 200)
6.8 (equivalent: ISO 100)
Exposure angle from 24mm (equivalent: 35mm)
Timing Front/rear curtain sync
Other Compatible with the external flash GF-1
Shooting mode Auto, program shift, aperture priority, shutter priority, manual,
scene (movie, portrait, sports, landscape, nightscape, skew
correction, Miniaturize, High Contrast B&W, Soft Focus, Cross
Process, Toy Camera, Electronic shutter), My Settings
Continuous
mode
Number of
pictures shot
in Continuous
(Picture Size:
RAW)
Noise Reduction off or on (Weak): 4 pictures
Noise Reduction on (Strong): 3 pictures
Noise Reduction on MAX: 3 pictures
Number of
pictures shot
in M-Cont Plus
(1 set)
HI (1280×856) : 30 pictures (24 Frames/Sec)
LO (4288×2848) : 15 pictures (3 Frames/Sec)
Compression*1
FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2
Image size
(pixels)
Photographs 4288 × 2416, 3776 × 2832, 4288 × 2848, 2848 × 2848,
3456 × 1944, 3072 × 2304, 3456 × 2304, 2304 × 2304,
2592 × 1944, 2048 × 1536, 1280 × 960, 640 × 480
Movies 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240
File size
(approx.)
RAW 16:9 NORMAL: 17,800KB/frame, FINE: 19,515KB/frame,
VGA: 15,587 KB/frame
4:3 NORMAL: 18,387KB/frame, FINE: 20,157KB/frame,
VGA: 16,124 KB/frame
3:2 NORMAL: 20,946KB/frame, FINE: 22,967KB/frame,
VGA: 18,337KB/frame
1:1 NORMAL: 13,991KB/frame, FINE: 15,333KB/frame,
VGA: 12,273KB/frame
L 16:9 NORMAL: 2,222KB/frame, FINE: 3,816KB/frame
4:3 NORMAL: 2,315KB/frame, FINE: 3,960KB/frame
3:2 NORMAL: 2,615KB/frame, FINE: 4,493KB/frame
1:1 NORMAL: 1,761KB/frame, FINE: 3,009KB/frame
M 16:9 NORMAL: 1,475KB/frame, FINE: 2,509KB/frame
4:3 NORMAL: 1,574KB/frame, FINE: 2,662KB/frame
3:2 NORMAL: 1,744KB/frame, FINE: 2,968KB/frame
1:1 NORMAL: 1,186KB/frame, FINE: 2,003KB/frame
5M 4:3 FINE: 2,287KB/frame
3M 4:3 FINE: 1,474KB/frame
File size
(approx.)
1M 4:3 FINE: 812KB/frame
VGA 4:3 FINE: 197KB/frame
Battery life
(based on CIPA standard)
DB-90: approx. 330shots *3
(Based on CIPA guide line)
Dimensions (W×H×D) Lens mount unit only:
79.1mm(w)×60.9mm(h)×40.5mm(d) (Based on CIPA guide
line)
When mounted on the camera body:
120mm(w)×70.2mm(h)×45.7mm(d) (Based on CIPA guide
line)
Flange back: 27.8mm
Weight (approx.) Lens mount unit only: 170g
When mounted on the camera body: 370g (Including the
battery and SD memory card)
Operating temperature 0°C to 40°C
Operating humidity 90% or less
Storage temperature –20°C to 60°C0
*1 The options available vary with image size.
*2 A JPEG file is also recorded (the JPEG file may be a FINE- or NORMAL-quality file with
the dimensions as the RAW file or a VGA file 640×480 pixels in size). RAW files use the
standard DNG format promoted by Adobe Systems, Inc.
*3 For reference only; actual number of shots varies greatly according to how camera is
used. We recommend that you carry spare batteries when in use for extended periods.
Internal Memory/Memory Card Capacity
The following values are given as a reference of the storage capacity of the
internal memory and memory cards of various sizes, by picture quality and
image size, when using the FINE picture quality.
Photographs
Compression Image size
(pixels)
Internal
memory
1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
RAW*
FINE
4288×2416 4 49 100 197 404 810 1625
3776×2832 4 47 97 191 391 784 1573
4288×2848 3 42 85 168 343 688 1380
2848×2848 5 63 128 251 513 1029 20651
Compression Image size
(pixels)
Internal
memory
1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
L
FINE
4288×2416 21 235 476 935 1912 3830 7684
3776×2832 20 227 462 907 1854 3715 7453
4288×2848 18 200 407 799 1633 3272 6565
2848×2848 27 299 608 1195 2442 4893 9815
M
FINE
3456×1944 32 357 724 1419 2902 5814 11662
3072×2304 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014
3456×2304 27 302 614 1206 2466 4941 9913
2304×2304 41 447 903 1774 3627 7267 14578
5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238
3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063
1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181
VGA/FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581
* When [RAW] is selected, this is the compression used for the JPEG copy.
Movies
Image size (pixels) Internal memory 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
1280×720
24 frames/second
21sec. 3min.
49sec.
7min.
46sec.
15min.
58sec.
31min.
10sec.
62min.
26sec.
125min.
15sec.
640×480
24 frames/second
1min. 11min.
2sec.
22min.
27sec.
46min.
10sec.
90min.
7sec.
180min.
32sec.
362min.
9sec.
320×240
24 frames/second
2min.
25sec.
26min.
24sec.
53min.
43sec.
110min.
27sec.
215min.
35sec.
431min.
52sec.
866min.
19sec.
Caution ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The maximum uninterrupted recording size for a single movie is 4 GB. The
maximum recording time is around 15 minutes at 1280×720 size, around 46
minutes at 640×480 size, and around 90 minutes at 320×240 size.
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
When recording movies with the movie size set to 1280×720, using SD/
SDHC memory cards with a speed class of 6 or more is recommended.
Appendices
Optional Accessories
The Lens mount unit can be used with the items (sold separately) listed
below.
Body cover
+ neck strap
(SC-75B)
Unit cover
(SC-75T)
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Before using an optional accessory, see the documentation that came
with the product.
• For the latest information on optional accessories, visit the Ricoh website
(http://www.ricohpmmc.com/).
Precautions for Use
• The warranty supplied with this product is only valid within the country of purchase.
• Should the product fail or malfunction while out of the country, the manufacturer
assumes no responsibility for servicing the product locally or bearing any
expenditure incurred thereby.
• Do not drop the equipment or subject it to physical shocks.
• When carrying the equipment, be careful that it does not strike other objects.
Particular care is required to protect the lens.
• When attaching a filter or lens hood, be careful not to apply excessive force.
• Abrupt changes in temperature may cause condensation, resulting in visible
condensation inside the lens or malfunction of the equipment. This can be avoided
by placing the equipment in a plastic bag to slow the temperature change, and
removing it only after the air in the bag has reached the same temperature its
surroundings.
• Do not touch the image sensor.
• Keep the equipment dry and avoid handling it with wet hands. Failure to observe
these precautions could result in malfunction of the equipment or electric shock.
• Keep the connector clean.
Tip: Avoiding Condensation --------------------------------------------------------
Condensation is particularly likely to occur if you move to an area with a
sharply different temperature, if humidity is high, in a cold room after the
heater has come on, or where the camera is exposed to cold air from an air
conditioner or other device.
Equipment Care and Storage
Caring for the Equipment
• Photographs can be affected by fingerprints and other foreign matter on the
lens. Avoid touching the lens with your fingers. Remove dust or lint with a
blower from a camera supply store, or gently clean the lens with a soft, dry
cloth. Be especially careful around the barrel.
• Clean the equipment thoroughly after using it at the beach or handling
cosmetics. Do not expose the equipment to volatile substances such as
thinner, benzene, or pesticides. Failure to observe this precaution could result
in damage to the equipment or its finish.
• In the unlikely event of malfunction, visit a Ricoh Repair Center.
• This equipment is a high precision device. Do not disassemble.
Storage
• Do not store the camera where it will be exposed to: extreme heat or
humidity; large changes in temperature or humidity; dust, dirt, or sand; severe
vibration; prolonged contact with chemicals, including mothballs and other
insect repellent, or with vinyl or rubber products; strong magnetic fields (for
example, in the vicinity of a monitor, transformer, or magnet).
• When storing, place the product in a camera case, etc. that does not collect
dirt or fluff to prevent dirt or dust from attaching itself to the camera.
In addition, when carrying the camera, do not place the camera directly into a
pocket, etc., in order to prevent dirt and dust from getting on the camera.
Warranty and Servicing
1. This product is backed by a limited warranty. During the warranty period
mentioned in the Warranty supplied with your equipment, any defective
parts will be repaired free of charge. In the event of equipment malfunction,
contact the dealer from which you purchased the equipment or your nearest
Ricoh Repair Center. Please note that you will not be reimbursed for the cost of
bringing the equipment to the Ricoh Repair Center.
2. This warranty does not cover any damage resulting from:
1 failure to follow the instructions in the instruction manual;
2 repair, modification or overhaul not conducted by an authorized service
center listed in the instruction manual;
3 fire, natural disaster, act of God, lightning, abnormal voltage, etc.;
4 improper storage (noted in the “Camera Body User Guide”), leaking
of battery and other fluids, mold, or otherwise insufficient care of the
equipment.
5 submergence in water (flooding), exposure to alcohol or other beverages,
infiltration of sand or mud, physical shock, dropping of the equipment, or
pressure on the equipment, and other unnatural causes.
3. After the warranty period has passed, you will be liable for all repair fees,
including those incurred at an authorized service center.
4. You will be liable for all repair fees, even within the warranty period, if the
warranty card is not attached or if the distributor’s name or the purchase date
have been changed or are not indicated on the card.
5. Expenses for overhaul and thorough inspection by special request of the
customer will be charged to the customer, whether or not they are incurred
during the warranty period.
6. Any consequential damages arising from failure of the equipment, such as
expenses incurred in taking pictures or loss of expected profit, will not be
reimbursed whether they occur during the warranty period or not.
7. The warranty is only valid in the country in which the equipment was
purchased.
* The above provisions refer to repairs offered free of charge, and do not limit
your legal rights.
* The intention of the above provisions is also described in the warranty card
provided with this equipment.0
8. Parts essential to the servicing of the equipment (that is, components required
to maintain the functions and quality of the equipment) will be available for a
period of five years after the equipment is discontinued.
9. Please note that if the equipment is seriously damaged by flooding,
submergence, infiltration of sand or mud, violent shocks or dropping, it may
not be repairable, and restoration to its original condition may be impossible.
Notes-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Before sending the camera in for repair, check the camera body and read
the instruction manual again to ensure proper operation.
• Some repairs require a significant amount of time to complete.
• When sending the equipment to a service center, please include a note
which describes the defective part and the problem as precisely as
possible.
• Remove all accessories not related to the problem before sending the
camera to the service center.1
If You Encounter a Problem with This Product
Ricoh offices
RICOH COMPANY, LTD.
3-2-3, Shin-Yokohama Kouhoku-ku, Yokohama City, Kanagawa 222-8530,
Japan
http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc
RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006, U.S.A.
1–800–22RICOH
http://www.ricoh-usa.com/
RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC)
Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY
(innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438
(außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438
http://www.ricohpmmc.com/
RICOH UK LTD. (PMMC UK)
(from within the UK) 02073 656 580
(from outside of the UK) +44 2073 656 580
RICOH FRANCE S.A.S. (PMMC FRANCE)
(à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70
(en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94
RICOH ESPANA, S.A. (PMMC SPAIN)
(desde España) 91 406 9148
(desde fuera de España) +34 91 406 9148
RICOH ITALIA S.p.A. (PMMC ITALY)
(dall’Italia) 02 696 33 451
(dall’estero) +39 02 696 33 451*L454 2971*
Ricoh offices
RICOH ASIA PACIFIC OPERATIONS
LIMITED
21/F, One Kowloon, 1 Wang Yuen Street, Kowloon Bay, Hong Kong
Ricoh Company, Ltd.
Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo
104-8222, Japan
2011 August
EN USA GB GB AE AE
Printed in China
GXR MOUNT A12
Manual de instrucciones
El número de serie se encuentra en la parte inferior del objetivo.
Contenido del paquete
Antes de utilizar su objetivo Ricoh, compruebe que el paquete contenga los
siguientes elementos.
Montura del objetivo
El número de serie se encuentra en la parte inferior
Tapa de montura
Viene colocada en la montura del objetivo.
Tapa del conector
Viene colocada en la Montura del objetivo.
Medidor de objetivo
Funda blanda ? Manual de instrucciones
(estemanual)
? Garantía
Introducción
Para utilizar esta montura de objetivo, es necesario colocar Leica M Mount Lens o
similares en un cuerpo de cámara GXR.
Consulte la Guía del usuario del cuerpo de la cámara para saber cómo ejecutar
las funciones de disparo y reproducción y cambiar ajustes, así como para leer
precauciones importantes de uso. En este manual de instrucciones se explican
funciones y procedimientos de manejo que sólo están disponibles cuando esta
montura de objetivo se usa con un cuerpo de cámara compatible. Véase también la
Guía del usuario del cuerpo de la cámara GXR.
Para sacar el mejor provecho de las funciones de este producto, lea atentamente este
manual antes del uso. Conserve este manual a mano para poder consultarlo fácilmente.
Ricoh Co., Ltd.
Precauciones de seguridad Lea atentamente todas las precauciones de seguridad para
garantizar un uso seguro.
Fotografías de prueba Haga fotografías de prueba para asegurarse de que la cámara
funcione adecuadamente antes de hacer fotografías en ocasiones
importantes.
Derechos de autor Queda prohibida la reproducción o alteración de documentos,
revistas y otros materiales con derechos de autor, con una finalidad
diferente a la personal, doméstica o de otro tipo igualmente limitado,
sin el consentimiento del propietario de los derechos de autor.
Exención de
responsabilidad
Ricoh Co., Ltd. no asume ninguna responsabilidad por no poder
grabar o reproducir imágenes como resultado de un fallo de
funcionamiento del producto.
Garantía La garantía proporcionada con este producto sólo es válida dentro
del país de compra. El fabricante no asume ninguna responsabilidad
relacionada con el mantenimiento o la reparación del producto en
otros países ni los gastos incurridos por este servicio.
Interferencias
radioeléctricas
La utilización de este producto en las inmediaciones de otros
equipos electrónicos puede afectar negativamente tanto
a la cámara como al otro dispositivo. Las interferencias son
particularmente probables si la cámara se utiliza muy cerca de una
radio o un televisor. Esto puede resolverse alejando la cámara del
otro dispositivo, reorientando la antena de radio o televisión, o
conectando la radio o el televisor a otra toma de corriente.
© 2011 RICOH CO., LTD. Todos los derechos reservados. Queda prohibida la reproducción total o parcial de esta
publicación sin la autorización expresa por escrito de Ricoh. Ricoh se reserva el derecho a cambiar el contenido
de este documento en cualquier momento y sin previo aviso.
Se ha hecho todo lo posible por garantizar la precisión de la información de este documento. Si, a pesar de
ello, detecta algún error u omisión, le agradeceríamos que nos lo notificara en la dirección que aparece en la
contraportada de este manual.
Para la última información sobre los objetivos, póngase en contacto con su punto de venta.
Precauciones de seguridad
Símbolos de aviso
En este manual de instrucciones y en el producto aparecen diversos
símbolos de aviso que se deben tener en cuenta para evitarle lesiones a
usted o a terceros, así como también daños materiales. A continuación se
explican los símbolos y sus significados.
Peligro
Este símbolo indica que hay peligro inminente de muerte o
de lesiones de gravedad debido a negligencia u operación
incorrecta.
Advertencia
Este símbolo indica riesgos de muerte o lesiones de gravedad
debido a negligencia u operación errónea.
Precaución
Este símbolo indica riesgos de lesiones o daños materiales
debido a negligencia u operación errónea.
Ejemplos de aviso
El símbolo le indica las acciones que debe realizar.
El símbolo le indica las acciones que no debe realizar.
El símbolo puede estar combinado con otros símbolos para indicarle las acciones
concretas que no debe realizar.
Ejemplos
= No tocar = No desmontar
Para garantizar la seguridad en el uso de esta unidad, observe las siguientes
precauciones.
Peligro
No intente desarmar, reparar o alterar el equipo por su cuenta. El circuito de alta
tensión del interior del equipo representa un gran peligro eléctrico.
Advertencia
Guarde el equipo fuera del alcance de los niños.
No toque los componentes internos del equipo en caso de que quedaran al
descubierto debido a daños o una caída. El circuito de alta tensión del equipo podría
provocar descargas eléctricas. Extraiga la batería lo más pronto posible, teniendo
cuidado de evitar descargas eléctricas o quemaduras. Lleve el equipo dañado a su
distribuidor o centro de asistencia técnica más cercano.
No use el equipo en el baño o una ducha pues podría producirse incendio o descarga
eléctrica.
No use el equipo cerca de gases inflamables, gasolina, bencina, diluyente o sustancias
similares, para evitar riesgos de explosión, incendio o quemaduras.
• No use el equipo en un avión u otros lugares donde su uso esté restringido o
prohibido, pues podría resultar en desastres o accidentes.10
Precaución
No permita que el equipo se moje. Tampoco opere la cámara con las manos húmedas.
Ambas acciones implican el riesgo de descargas eléctricas.
Advertencias de
seguridad para los
accesorios
Si utiliza productos opcionales, lea atentamente las instrucciones
suministradas con el producto antes de usarlo.11
Contenido del paquete ...................................................................................................... 2
Introducción........................................................................................................................... 4
Precauciones de seguridad............................................................................................... 7
Nombres de las partes.......................................................................................15
Actualización del producto ..............................................................................16
Actualización del firmware..............................................................................................16
Acoplamiento del objetivo...............................................................................19
Comprobar si un objetivo puede usarse con la unidad de montaje del
objetivo .............................................................................................................................19
Acoplamiento del objetivo..............................................................................................22
Extracción del objetivo.....................................................................................................22
Limpieza de la unidad de sensor.....................................................................23
Toma......................................................................................................................24
Índice1
Enfoque..................................................................................................................................24
P: Modo de cambio de programas/A: Modo de prioridad de apertura ..........24
S: Modo de prioridad de velocidad de obturación.................................................25
M: Modo de exposición manual....................................................................................25
Añadir modos de escena .................................................................................................26
Ampliar imágenes..............................................................................................................27
Registro de funciones en el dial hacia arriba/abajo...............................................28
Añadir tamaños compatibles para el zoom con cambio de tamaño
automático.......................................................................................................................28
Ajustes ..................................................................................................................29
Ajuste [Resolución/Tamaño de imagen] (menú de disparo) ..............................29
Fotografías...................................................................................................................30
Vídeos............................................................................................................................31
[Reducción ruido]...............................................................................................................32
[Balance Blancos]................................................................................................................33
[Ajuste ISO]............................................................................................................................341
[Ayuda al enfoque].............................................................................................................35
[Luz periférica] .....................................................................................................................35
[Corrección de distorsión] ...............................................................................................36
[Corrección de sombreado de colores].......................................................................36
[Lím. vel.obtur.flash] ..........................................................................................................37
Menú de la pestaña de ajustes personalizados............................................38
[Reg. Mi Config.]..................................................................................................................38
[Editar Mi Config.]...............................................................................................................38
[Confirmación disparador] ..............................................................................................39
Conf. Pal. ADJ........................................................................................................................39
[Control ISO directo de ADJ.]..........................................................................................40
[Aj. Botón Fn1/Fn2] ............................................................................................................40
[Borrar Mi Config.] ..............................................................................................................40
[Ajuste Original]...................................................................................................................41
[Bot. Zoom] ...........................................................................................................................411
Menú de configuración .....................................................................................42
[Ajustes ISO Altos Automático]......................................................................................42
Ajuste [Imagen Zoom Digital] (Pestaña de configuración) .................................42
[Repr. zoom objeto] ...........................................................................................................43
Cambio de [Sonidos funcion.]........................................................................................43
[Anular visual. zoom].........................................................................................................44
[Sel. enfoque asistido].......................................................................................................44
Especificaciones..................................................................................................45
Capacidad de la memoria interna/tarjeta de memoria ........................................50
Apéndices ............................................................................................................53
Accesorios opcionales.......................................................................................................53
Precauciones de uso..........................................................................................................54
Cuidado del equipo y almacenamiento.....................................................................56
Garantía y servicio..............................................................................................................581
Nombres de las partes
1 2 3
1 Conector
2 Botón de expulsión del objetivo
3 Montura del lado del cuerpo1
Actualización del producto
Actualización del firmware
La primera vez que acople la montura del objetivo al cuerpo de la cámara,
la actualización de la versión comenzará automáticamente si el firmware
del cuerpo de la cámara requiere actualización. En este caso, actualice el
firmware del cuerpo de la cámara utilizando el siguiente procedimiento.
Si la versión del firmware ya está actualizada, la función de actualización de
la versión no se iniciará y podrá utilizar el objetivo inmediatamente.
1 Compruebe que la cámara esté apagada y acople la unidad cámara
al cuerpo de la cámara.
• Para obtener más información acerca de cómo acoplar la unidad cámara,
consulte la Guía del usuario del cuerpo de la cámara.1
2 Encienda el cuerpo de la cámara.
• Aparecerá un mensaje de confirmación sobre la actualización del firmware.
3 Pulse los botones Fn1/Fn2 para seleccionar [Sí] y, a continuación,
pulse el botón MENU/OK.
• La actualización del firmware se inicia y los siguientes mensajes
aparecerán en la pantalla:
[Verif. escribir sobre archivo]
[Escribir sobre programa]
La cámara se reinicia mostrando en la pantalla la versión del firmware, la
actualización queda entonces finalizada.1
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• El objetivo no debe estar acoplado cuando se actualiza el firmware.
• Para comprobar la versión del firmware seleccione [Versión del firmware]
en el menú de configuración. Otra posibilidad es que, con la cámara
apagada, mantenga el botón 6 (Reproducir) pulsado durante más de 1
segundo mientras mantiene pulsado el botón –. La versión del firmware
aparece unos 20 segundos.
• Para obtener la información más reciente sobre las actualizaciones del
firmware, visite la página web de Ricoh (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc).1
Acoplamiento del objetivo
Comprobar si un objetivo puede usarse con la unidad de
montaje del objetivo
Compruebe si su objetivo puede acoplarse a la unidad de montaje.
1 Alinee los agujeros del comprobador de objetivo
con las lengüetas en la montura del objetivo y
deslice el medidor de objetivo directamente en el
objetivo.
• Deslícelo hasta que se apoye ligeramente en el
objetivo.0
2 Coloque el objetivo en una superficie plana y compruébelo por el
lado mirándolo de canto.
• Compruebe que el medidor de objetivo y la montura del objetivo están
firmemente encajadas sin dejar ningún hueco.
El objetivo no se puede acoplar en los siguientes casos:
Si el objetivo sobresale por la parte superior del medidor de objetivo.
Si queda algún hueco entre el medidor de objetivo y la montura del
objetivo.
El objetivo se puede
utilizar con la unidad
El objetivo no se puede
utilizar con la unidad
El objetivo no se puede
utilizar con la unidad1
Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Si se fuerza la montura del objetivo al intentar acoplarlo a un objetivo que
no se puede acoplar, se puede rayar o dañar el objetivo o la montura.
• No presione el medidor de objetivo a la fuerza para encajarlo en la
montura. Manipúlelos con cuidado de de no rayarlos ni dañar el objetivo
a la hora de acoplarlos.
• Con objetivos retráctiles, mida el objetivo cuando esté retraído.
• Para obtener la información más reciente sobre los objetivos que encajan
con las unidades de montaje, visite la página web de Ricoh (http://www.
ricoh.com/r_dc/).
Sin embargo, recuerde que algunos objetivos no se pueden acoplar
según las condiciones en las que estén. Compruebe de antemano si se
puede acoplar utilizando el medidor.
Acoplamiento del objetivo
1 Alinee la marca que hay en el objetivo con la marca roja de la
montura del objetivo y acople el objetivo directamente en la
montura.
2 Gire el objetivo hacia la derecha hasta que la clavija de fijación del
objetivo encaje en la ranura de fijación del mismo.
Extracción del objetivo
1 Gire el objetivo hacia la izquierda manteniendo pulsado el botón
de extracción hasta que la marca del objetivo quede en línea con la
marca roja de la montura.
2 Tire del objetivo en línea recta para extraerlo.
Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Si desea más información sobre el objetivo, consulte el manual de
instrucciones del mismo y los documentos relacionados.
Limpieza de la unidad de sensor
Siga los pasos que se indican a continuación para limpiar el sensor:
1 Encienda la cámara.
2 Deslice el interruptor POWER a la posición OFF mientras pulsa el
botón N.
• Apague la cámara con el obturador abierto.
3 Limpie la unidad con la ayuda de un soplador, que puede adquirir en
una tienda de suministro de cámaras.
4 Cuando termine la limpieza, vuelva a encender y a apagar la cámara.
Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• No toque el sensor ni el obturador.
• Los colores pueden perderse si el sensor se expone a una luz intensa
durante un tiempo prolongado. No deje la cámara apoyada con el
obturador abierto.
• Si [Sel. inicial obtur.] en el menú de configuración está ajustado en
[ABRIR], el obturador seguirá abierto al apagar la cámara.
• No use un soplador de aerosol con este dispositivo.
• No introduzca los bordes del soplador más allá de la montura.
• La garantía no cubre los daños que se produzcan durante la limpieza.
Procure no dañar el dispositivo durante la limpieza.
Toma
Enfoque
El único modo de enfoque disponible es MF (enfoque manual). Ajuste el
enfoque manualmente con el objetivo.
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Para comprobar el enfoque con mayor facilidad, use [Ampliar pant.]
(GP. 27) o [Ayuda al enfoque] (GP. 35) en el menú de disparo.
P: Modo de cambio de programas/A: Modo de prioridad de apertura
P: Modo de cambio de programas y A: El modo de prioridad de apertura
funciona de la misma forma que c: Modo de disparo automático.
S: Modo de prioridad de velocidad de obturación
Si está seleccionado [Auto] o [Alt Autom.] para el ajuste ISO, la exposición se
ajustará a la exposición adecuada dentro del rango ISO mientras la cámara
se encuentre en el modo de prioridad de velocidad de obturación.
M: Modo de exposición manual
Si se selecciona [Auto] o [Alt Autom.] para los ajustes ISO, ISO se fijará en
200 mientras que la cámara está en modo de exposición manual.
Puede seleccionar B (Bulb) o T (Time) para la velocidad del obturador.
Con B, la imagen queda expuesta mientras se mantenga pulsado el
disparador. La exposición finaliza al soltar el disparador. Con T, el disparador
se pulsa para empezar y terminar la exposición. En ambos modos la cámara
se detiene automáticamente al transcurrir 180 segundos.
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
B y T pueden usarse con el interruptor con cable opcional (CA-1).
Añadir modos de escena
Al modo de escena se han añadido [Miniaturizar], [Alto contraste B y N],
[Enfoque suave], [Proceso cruzado], [Cámara de juguete] y [Obturación
electrónica].
[Obturación electrónica] permite tomar fotografías sin necesidad de
preocuparse del sonido del disparador o de las vibraciones. Puede
seleccionar una velocidad de obturación de entre 1/8000 s. y 1 s.
Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Tenga cuidado a la hora de usar [Obturación electrónica] para las
vibraciones de la cámara, ya que éstas pueden ocurrir debido a las
diferencias de tiempos de exposición entre la mitad superior y la mitad
inferior de la pantalla. No puede usarse para fotografiar sujetos en
movimiento.
• No se puede ajustar el ISO a 200 cuando se utiliza [Obturación
electrónica].
Ampliar imágenes
Al mantener pulsado el botón MENU/OK se amplía y se muestra el centro.
Al mantener pulsado el botón MENU/OK de nuevo se amplía el centro y se
muestra la parte ampliada ocupando toda la pantalla. Si mantiene pulsado
el botón MENU/OK otra vez, se vuelve a la vista normal.
Para ajustar la magnificación de la pantalla mantenga pulsado el botón
t (autodisparador) o seleccione [Relación de aumento] en el menú
de disparo. Use los botones +/- para seleccionar [2×], [4×] o [8×] y, a
continuación, pulse el botón MENU/OK.
Puede mover la zona de vista aumentada con las teclas de dirección (+/-
/Fn1/Fn2).
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• La pantalla vuelve al modo normal cuando se realiza la compensación de
exposición o pulsando el botón DIRECT en el modo de Vista ampliada.
• Si se activa Bloq. AE antes de que se haya ampliado toda la imagen, el
bloqueo AE seguirá ejecutándose durante la Vista ampliada, captando las
imágenes con los ajustes AE.
• Puede guardar [Aumentar parte] y [Aumentar todo] en [Aj. Botón Fn1/
Fn2] en el menú de ajustes personalizados.
Registro de funciones en el dial hacia arriba/abajo
Puede cambiar el modo con el dial hacia arriba/abajo cuando están
activados los modos Flash y Autodisparador.
Añadir tamaños compatibles para el zoom con cambio de
tamaño automático
El zoom con cambio de tamaño automático es compatible con todos los
tamaños.
Ajustes
Ajuste [Resolución/Tamaño de imagen] (menú de disparo)
Hay disponibles las siguientes opciones de calidad de imagen, tamaño
de imagen y relación de aspecto para el ajuste [Resolución/Tamaño de
imagen].
El tamaño de archivo de una fotografía dependerá de la combinación
de calidad y tamaño de imagen que se utilice. Al grabar vídeos se puede
seleccionar el formato de vídeo.0
Fotografías
Opción Relación de
aspecto
Compresión Tamaño de la
imagen (píxeles)
RAW 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4288×2416
4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
3776×2832
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4288×2848
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
2848×2848
L (grande) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 4288×2416
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3776×2832
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 4288×2848
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2848×2848
M (mediano) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 3456×1944
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3072×2304
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 3456×2304
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2304×23041
Opción Relación de
aspecto
Compresión Tamaño de la
imagen (píxeles)
5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944
3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536
1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960
VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480
*1 Si se selecciona [RAW], éste será el ajuste empleado para la copia en JPEG.
*2 Según el área fotografiada, pueden aparecer bandas negras en la parte superior e inferior
de la imagen visualizada.
*3 Según el área fotografiada, pueden aparecer bandas negras en los lados derecho e
izquierdo de la imagen visualizada.
Vídeos
Opción Formato de vídeo
HD1280 1280×720
VGA640 640×480
QVGA320 320×240
[Reducción ruido]
Reducción de ruido en [Off], [Auto], [Bajo], [Alto] o [MAX]. El tiempo
necesario para guardar imágenes varía en función de la opción
seleccionada.
Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Esta función no puede usarse si se ha seleccionado una de estas opciones
en los modos de escena: [Retrato], [Deportes], [Miniaturizar], [Alto contraste
B y N], [Enfoque suave], [Proceso cruzado], [Cámara de juguete] o [M. Cor.
Trap].
[Balance Blancos]
Puede seleccionar [Luz Incandescente1] o [Luz Incandescente2] en la
configuración de [Balance Blancos]. Utilice con iluminación incandescente.
[Luz Incandescente2] dejará un ligero tinte rojo en comparación con [Luz
Incandescente1].
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Cuando está seleccionada [Luz Incandescente2], los sombreados de color
de las imágenes serán los mismos que con el ajuste [Incandescente]
descrito en la Guía del usuario del cuerpo de la cámara.
• Si se dispara el flash con el botón DISP. en [Manual], el balance de blancos
se ajustará a los resultados de la medición calculada cuando se apaga el
flash.
[Ajuste ISO]
Se han añadido [ISO-LO], [ISO 250], [ISO 320], [ISO 500], [ISO 640],
[ISO 1000], [ISO 1250], [ISO 2000] y [ISO 2500].
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• [ISO-LO] es equivalente a ISO 100 ([Obturación electrónica] del modo
de escena es equivalente a ISO 125). Sin embargo, el rango dinámico se
reduce y, al aumentar los niveles de brillos es más probable que la imagen
se quede en blanco.
• Si se selecciona [Auto] y se utiliza el flash, la sensibilidad empleada
aumentará hasta ser equivalente a ISO 800.
• Si está seleccionado [Auto] y no se usa el flash, los valores mínimos y
máximos para la sensibilidad ISO serán de ISO 200 y ISO 400.
([Obturación electrónica] en modo de escena es ISO 250.)
[Ayuda al enfoque]
Las líneas de las formas y el contraste de las imágenes que se visualizan en
la pantalla se intensifican, lo que hace más fácil ajustar el enfoque.
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Puede seleccionar el método de visualización de la Ayuda al enfoque con la
opción [Sel. enfoque asistido] del menú de configuración. (GP. 44)
[Luz periférica]
Se puede corregir la intensidad de la luz de fondo en un intervalo de -3 a
+3.
[Corrección de distorsión]
Se puede corregir la distorsión de una imagen seleccionando [Barril] o
[Almohadón] y, a continuación, seleccionando [Alto], [Medio] o [Bajo].
Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No se pueden corregir imágenes mostradas en la pantalla ni imágenes RAW.
[Corrección de sombreado de colores]
Se pueden corregir los tonos de color en las cuatro esquinas de la imagen.
El intervalo de corrección puede ser de -4 a +4 tanto para R como para B.
[Lím. vel.obtur.flash]
Utilice esta opción para limitar la velocidad del obturador a niveles más
bajos cuando se esté usando el flash para prevenir las vibraciones de la
cámara. Están disponibles [Auto], [1/2], [1/4], [1/8], [1/15], [1/30], [1/60] y
[1/125]. La velocidad del obturador no caerá por debajo de la velocidad
ajustada cuando se esté usando el flash.
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• La velocidad de obturación máxima que funciona con el flash es de
1/180 s. Con velocidades mayores, el flash no puede usarse. La velocidad
de obturación nunca subirá de 1/180 s. si se usa el flash. Esto se aplica
también a flashes externos.
• Este ajuste no es válido si se utiliza un flash de sincronización baja.
Menú de la pestaña de ajustes personalizados
[Reg. Mi Config.]
Se puede seleccionar cualquier opción dentro de Cuadro Mi Config. [1] a [6]
y Tarjeta [1] a [6] para la ubicación de las imágenes guardadas.
[Editar Mi Config.]
Desde [Entrada Info. Objet.] en el menú [Editar Mi Config.] se pueden editar
[Nombre objet.], [Longitud focal] y [Apertura F] para los archivos Exif.
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Esta información no afecta a los ajustes de disparo.
[Confirmación disparador]
Cuando está activado [ADJ./DIRECT], si se pulsa el disparador hasta la mitad
se cerrará la configuración de ajustes en el modo ADJ. y en la pantalla
DIRECT pudiendo hacer fotografías. Cuando está activado [ADJ.] los ajustes
del modo ADJ. se cerrarán y se podrán tomar fotografías. Cuando está
activado [DIRECT] los ajustes de la pantalla DIRECT se cerrarán y se podrán
tomar fotografías. Después de haber tomado las fotografías, el sistema
vuelve a la pantalla de Monitorización.
Conf. Pal. ADJ.
Se puede ajustar la función de [Relación asp.] de [Configuración Palanca
ADJ 1] a [Configuración Palanca ADJ 4].
Si se activa la función Relación asp. y se pulsa el botón de la Palanca ADJ.,
aparecerá para poder ajustar el tamaño.0
[Control ISO directo de ADJ.]
Si [Control ISO directo de ADJ.] está ajustado en [On], se puede mover la
palanca ADJ. hacia el lado cuando sea posible disparar para cambiar el ISO.
El ajuste por defecto es [Off].
[Aj. Botón Fn1/Fn2]
Se han añadido las funciones [Ampliar pant.], [Ayuda al enfoque] y
[Relación asp.].
[Borrar Mi Config.]
Los ajustes registrados en [Cuadro Mi Config.] de [Reg. Mi Config.], en
[Tarjeta] y en [MY1], [MY2] y [MY3] en el Dial de modo vuelven a su
configuración predeterminada.1
[Ajuste Original]
Se reestablecerán los ajustes personalizados.
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Los ajustes realizados en [Cuadro Mi Config] no se reiniciarán.
[Bot. Zoom]
Puede seleccionar entre [Off], [Zoom Digital], [Compensación Exposición] o
[Balance de blancos] para las funciones asignadas a los botones 8/9.
Menú de configuración
[Ajustes ISO Altos Automático]
Puede establecer los límites para el ajuste ISO y la velocidad de obturación
a la hora de cambiar el [Ajuste ISO] cuando ésta esté ajustada en [Alt
Autom.].
Ajuste [Imagen Zoom Digital] (Pestaña de configuración)
El tamaño de la imagen grabada varía según el zoom con cambio de
tamaño automático, tal como se indica a continuación.
Índice de zoom
Tamaño de la
imagen (píxeles)
Índice de zoom
Tamaño de la
imagen (píxeles)
Aprox. 1,0× L Aprox. 1,8× 3M
Aprox. 1,2× M Aprox. 3,0× 1M
Aprox. 1,5× 5M Aprox. 5,9× VGA
[Repr. zoom objeto]
Con Ampliar pantalla en el modo de reproducción, es posible ampliar la
imagen centrada en la posición a la que se movió la cámara cuando se usó
la función de desplazamiento de objeto durante el disparo.
Cambio de [Sonidos funcion.]
[Sonidos disp.] se desactiva en [M-Cont + (Alta)]. El sonido del disparador
no se apaga cuando se usa un disparador mecánico o la opción [Obturación
electrónica] en el modo de escena. El sonido del enfoque se desactiva
cuando se bloquea la exposición al pulsar el disparador hasta la mitad.
[Anular visual. zoom]
Puede elegir mantener o cancelar la vista aumentada después de
fotografiar en el modo de Vista ampliada. Seleccione [Off] para mantener
el modo de Vista ampliada y [On] para cancelarlo sólo cuando se hayan
tomado las fotografías.
[Sel. enfoque asistido]
Seleccione [MODO 1] o [MODO 2] cuando [Enfoque asist.] esté ajustado en
[On] en el menú de disparo.
MODO 1: Se mejora el contorno de los sujetos/objetos enfocados.
MODO 2: La pantalla cambia a blanco y negro y la zona enfocada brilla en
blanco.
Especificaciones
La especificaciones corresponden a la unidad cámara montada en un cuerpo GXR.
Píxeles efectivos Aproximadamente 12,3 millones
Sensor de imagen 23,6 mm×15,7 mm CMOS (píxeles totales: 12,9 millones aprox.)
Zoom Zoom digital de 4,0× (fotografías), zoom digital de 3,6× (vídeos);
aprox. 5,9× zoom con cambio de tamaño automático (VGA)
Modo de enfoque MF
Velocidad
de
obturación
Fotografías 1/4000–180s, B (Bulb), T (Time) (los límites superior e inferior
varían según el modo de toma y flash)
Velocidad máxima del obturador sincronizada con el flash: 1/180 s
Vídeos 1/2000–1/30s
Control
de la
exposición
Medición Medición TTL-CCD en modos multi (256 segmentos), ponderada
central y foco con bloqueo de exposición automática
Modo Prioridad de apertura AE, exposición manual, función Cambiar
objeto
Compensación
de exposición
Manual (+4,0 a -4,0EV en incrementos de 1/3EV o 1/2EV),
horquillado automático (-2EV a +2EV en incrementos de 1/3EV
o 1/2EV)
Rango de vínculo de
exposición (modo de
disparo automático,
medición con ponderación
central)
Con el uso de un objetivo estándar (F2.5): 1,2 EV a 13,2 EV
(rango de vínculo para ISO convertido automático según el EV
de ISO100)
Sensibilidad ISO
(sensibilidad de salida estándar)
Auto, Alt Autom., ISO-LO, ISO 200, ISO 250, ISO 320, ISO 400, ISO
500, ISO 640, ISO 800, ISO 1000, ISO 1250, ISO 1600, ISO 2000,
ISO 2500, ISO 3200
Balance de blancos Auto, Multi-P AUTO, Exterior, Nublado, Luz Incand.1, Luz
Incand.2, Luz Fluorescente, Ajuste Manual, Detalle; horquillado
de balance de blancos
Flash Ajuste de salida
de flash
Flash TTL, flash manual, modo automático de luz ambiente (la
función sólo está disponible con el flash externo GF-1)
Número de
guía
9,6 (equivalente a ISO 200)
6,8 (equivalente a ISO 100)
Ángulo de
exposición
desde 24 mm (equivalente a 35 mm)
Temporización Sincronización de cortina frontal/trasera
Otro Compatible con el flash externo GF-1
Modo de disparo Auto, cambio de programas, prioridad de apertura, prioridad
de obturación, manual, escena (vídeo, retrato, deportes, paisaje,
paisaje noche, corrección trap, Miniaturizar, Alto contraste
B y N, Enfoque suave, Proceso cruzado, Cámara de juguete,
Obturación electrónica), Mi Config.
Modo
Continuo
Número de
imágenes
tomadas en
modo Continuo
(tamaño de
imagen: RAW)
Reducción de ruido desactivada o activada (Baja): 4 imágenes,
Reducción de ruido activada (Alta): 3 imágenes
Reducción de ruido activada MAX: 3 imágenes
Número de
fotografías
tomadas en
modo M-Cont
+ (1 grupo)
A (1280×856): 30 fotografías (24 fotogramas/seg),
B (4288×2848): 15 fotografías (3 fotogramas/seg)
Compresión*1
FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2
Tamaño de
la imagen
(píxeles)
Fotografías 4288×2416, 3776×2832, 4288×2848, 2848×2848,
3456×1944, 3072×2304, 3456×2304, 2304×2304,
2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480
Vídeos 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240
Tamaño
de archivo
(aprox.)
RAW 16:9 NORMAL: 17.800KB/fotograma, FINE: 19.515KB/fotograma,
VGA: 15.587KB/fotograma
4:3 NORMAL: 18.387KB/fotograma, FINE: 20.157KB/fotograma,
VGA: 16.124KB/fotograma
3:2 NORMAL: 20.946KB/fotograma, FINE: 22.967KB/fotograma,
VGA: 18.337KB/fotograma
1:1 NORMAL: 13.991KB/fotograma, FINE: 15.333KB/fotograma,
VGA: 12.273KB/fotograma
Tamaño
de archivo
(aprox.)
L 16:9 NORMAL: 2.222KB/fotograma, FINE: 3.816KB/fotograma
4:3 NORMAL: 2.315KB/fotograma, FINE: 3.960KB/fotograma
3:2 NORMAL: 2.615KB/fotograma, FINE: 4.493KB/fotograma
1:1 NORMAL: 1.761KB/fotograma, FINE: 3.009KB/fotograma
M 16:9 NORMAL: 1.475KB/fotograma, FINE: 2.509KB/fotograma
4:3 NORMAL: 1.574KB/fotograma, FINE: 2.662KB/fotograma
3:2 NORMAL: 1.744KB/fotograma, FINE: 2.968KB/fotograma
1:1 NORMAL: 1.186KB/fotograma, FINE: 2.003KB/fotograma
5M 4:3 FINE: 2.287KB/fotograma
3M 4:3 FINE: 1.474KB/fotograma
Tamaño
de archivo
(aprox.)
1M 4:3 FINE: 812KB/fotograma
VGA 4:3 FINE: 197KB/fotograma
Vida de la batería
(basada en el estándar CIPA)
DB-90: aprox. 330 disparos *3
(Basando en la pauta de CIPA)
Dimensiones (an.×al.×pr.) Sólo montura del objetivo:
79,1mm×60,9mm×40,5mm (Basando en la pauta de CIPA)
Al estar montada en el cuerpo de la cámara:
120,0mm×70,2mm×45,7mm (Basando en la pauta de CIPA)
Distancia entre montura y punto focal: 27,8mm
Peso (aprox.) Sólo montura del objetivo: 170 g
Al estar montada en el cuerpo de la cámara: 370 g (Incluyendo
la batería y la tarjeta de memoria SD)
Temperatura de
funcionamiento
0°C a 40°C
Humedad de
funcionamiento
90% como máximo
Temperatura de
almacenamiento
–20°C a 60°C0
*1 Las opciones disponibles pueden variar según el tamaño de la imagen.
*2 También se graba un archivo JPEG (el archivo JPEG puede ser un archivo de calidad FINE
o NORMAL con las dimensiones del archivo RAW o un archivo VGA con un tamaño de
640×480 píxeles). Los archivos RAW utilizan el formato DNG estándar promocionado por
Adobe Systems, Inc.
*3 Sólo para referencia, el número real de tomas varía considerablemente según el uso que
se le dé a la cámara. Se recomienda llevar alguna batería de repuesto si se va a usar la
cámara durante un largo período de tiempo.
Capacidad de la memoria interna/tarjeta de memoria
Los siguientes valores se presentan como referencia de la capacidad de
almacenamiento de la memoria interna y las tarjetas de memoria de distintos tamaños,
por calidad de imagen y tamaño de imagen, utilizando una calidad de imagen FINE.
Fotografías
Compresión Tamaño de la
imagen (píxeles)
Memoria interna 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
RAW*
FINE
4288×2416 4 49 100 197 404 810 1625
3776×2832 4 47 97 191 391 784 1573
4288×2848 3 42 85 168 343 688 1380
2848×2848 5 63 128 251 513 1029 20651
Compresión Tamaño de la
imagen (píxeles)
Memoria interna 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
L
FINE
4288×2416 21 235 476 935 1912 3830 7684
3776×2832 20 227 462 907 1854 3715 7453
4288×2848 18 200 407 799 1633 3272 6565
2848×2848 27 299 608 1195 2442 4893 9815
M
FINE
3456×1944 32 357 724 1419 2902 5814 11662
3072×2304 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014
3456×2304 27 302 614 1206 2466 4941 9913
2304×2304 41 447 903 1774 3627 7267 14578
5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238
3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063
1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181
VGA/FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581
* Si se selecciona [RAW], ésta será la compresión empleada para la copia en JPEG.
Vídeos
Tamaño de la
imagen (píxeles)
Memoria interna 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
1280×720
24 fotogramas/
segundo
21seg. 3min.
49seg.
7min.
46seg.
15min.
58seg.
31min.
10seg.
62min.
26seg.
125min.
15seg.
640×480
24 fotogramas/
segundo
1min. 11min.
2seg.
22min.
27seg.
46min.
10seg.
90min.
7seg.
180min.
32seg.
362min.
9seg.
320×240
24 fotogramas/
segundo
2min.
25seg.
26min.
24seg.
53min.
43seg.
110min.
27seg.
215min.
35seg.
431min.
52seg.
866min.
19seg.
Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------
El tamaño máximo para una grabación ininterrumpida de un solo vídeo es
de 4 GB. El tiempo máximo de grabación es de unos 15 minutos en tamaño
1280 × 720, de unos 46 mintuos en tamaño 640 × 480 y de unos 90 minutos
si se graba a 320 × 240.
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Al grabar vídeos con tamaño de 1280 × 720, se recomienda usar tarjetas de
memoria SD/SDHC de Class 6 o mayor velocidad de transmisión mínima.
Apéndices
Accesorios opcionales
La Montura del objetivo puede usarse con los artículos (se venden por
separado) que se relacionan a continuación.
Tapa del cuerpo
+ correa para el cuello
(SC-75B)
Tapa de la unidad
(SC-75T)
Nota --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Antes de usar un accesorio opcional, véase la documentación que viene
con el producto.
• Para ver lo último en accesorios opcionales, visite el sitio web de Ricoh
(http://www.ricohpmmc.com/).
Precauciones de uso
• La garantía proporcionada con este producto sólo es válida dentro del país de compra.
• En caso de que el producto presente un defecto o fallo de funcionamiento mientras
está fuera del país, el fabricante no asumirá ninguna responsabilidad en cuanto a la
reparación del producto localmente ni a los gastos incurridos por esta.
• No deje caer el equipo ni lo someta a fuertes golpes.
• Cuando transporte el equipo, procure que no golpee otros objetos. Se requiere
especial atención para proteger el objetivo.
• Tenga cuidado de no ejercer demasiada fuerza al incorporar un filtro o una capucha
para objetivo.
• Los cambios bruscos de temperatura podrían causar condensación, dando lugar a
condensación visible dentro del objetivo o fallos de funcionamiento en el equipo.
Esto puede evitarse colocando el equipo en una bolsa de plástico para atenuar el
cambio de temperatura, y retirándolo sólo después de que el aire de la bolsa alcance
la misma temperatura que el entorno.
• No toque el sensor de imagen.
• Mantenga seco el equipo y evite sujetarlo con las manos húmedas. La no
observancia de estas precauciones podría causar un fallo de funcionamiento del
equipo o una descarga eléctrica.
• Mantenga limpio el conector.
Consejo: evitar la condensación---------------------------------------------------
Es particularmente probable que se produzca condensación si se desplaza
a una zona con una brusca diferencia de temperatura, si la humedad es alta,
en una habitación fría después de haber encendido el calefactor o cuando
la cámara está expuesta al aire frío de un aparato de aire acondicionado u
otro dispositivo.
Cuidado del equipo y almacenamiento
Cuidado del equipo
• Las fotografías pueden verse afectadas por huellas y otras materias extrañas
en el objetivo. Evite tocar el objetivo con los dedos. Retire el polvo o pelusa
con un soplador, que puede adquirir en una tienda de suministro de cámaras,
o limpie suavemente el objetivo con un paño seco y suave. Tenga especial
cuidado al manipular la zona del tubo del objetivo.
• Limpie el equipo a fondo después de utilizarlo en la playa o manejar
cosméticos. No exponga el equipo a sustancias volátiles como disolvente,
benceno o pesticidas. La no observancia de esta precaución podría causar
daños en el equipo o en su acabado.
• En el caso improbable de fallo de funcionamiento, visite un centro de
reparaciones Ricoh.
• Este equipo es un dispositivo de alta precisión. No lo desmonte.
Almacenamiento
• No guarde la cámara donde pueda estar expuesta a: calor o humedad
excesivos; grandes cambios de temperatura o humedad; polvo, suciedad o
arena; fuertes vibraciones; contacto prolongado con productos químicos,
incluyendo bolas de alcanfor y otros repelentes de insectos, o con productos
de vinilo o caucho; fuertes campos magnéticos (por ejemplo, en las
proximidades de un monitor, transformador o imán).
• Cuando guarde el producto, colóquelo dentro de una caja de cámara, etc.,
que esté limpia y donde no entren las pelusas para evitar que la suciedad o el
polvo se adhieran a la cámara.
Además, cuando lIeve la cámara, no la meta directamente en el bolsillo, etc.,
para evitar que se ensucie o le entre polvo.
Garantía y servicio
1. Este producto está cubierto por una garantía limitada. Durante el periodo
de garantía mencionado en la Garantía suministrada con el equipo,
cualquier pieza defectuosa se reparará gratuitamente. En caso de fallo de
funcionamiento del equipo, póngase en contacto con el distribuidor al que
compró el equipo o con su centro de reparaciones Ricoh más cercano. Tenga
en cuenta que no se le reembolsará el coste de llevar el equipo al centro de
reparaciones Ricoh.
2. Esta garantía no cubre ningún daño resultante de:
1 no seguimiento de las instrucciones del manual de instrucciones;
2 reparación, modificación o revisión del producto no realizadas por uno de
los centros de servicio autorizados incluidos en el manual de instrucciones;
3 incendio, desastre natural, fuerza mayor, relámpago, tensión anómala, etc.;
4 almacenamiento inadecuado (indicado en la “Guía del usuario del cuerpo de
la cámara”), fuga de batería y otros líquidos, moho o cualquier otro cuidado
insuficiente del equipo.
5 inmersión en agua (inundación), exposición a alcohol u otras bebidas,
infiltración de arena o barro, choque físico, caída del equipo o presión sobre
el equipo y otras causas no naturales.
3. Cuando finalice el periodo de garantía, usted será responsable de los gastos
de reparación, incluyendo los incurridos en un centro de servicio autorizado.
4. Será responsable de todos los gastos de reparación, incluso dentro del
periodo de garantía, si no se presenta la tarjeta de garantía o si el nombre del
distribuidor o la fecha de compra se han modificado o no están indicados en la
tarjeta.
5. Los gastos de revisión e inspección completa por petición especial del cliente
se cargarán al cliente, tanto si se producen durante el periodo de garantía
como si no.
6. Cualquier daño consecuente derivado de un fallo del equipo, como gastos
incurridos al tomar fotografías o pérdida de ganancias esperadas, no será
reembolsado, independientemente de si ocurre dentro o fuera del periodo de
garantía.
7. La garantía sólo es válida en el país en el que se compró el equipo.
* Las disposiciones anteriores se refieren a reparaciones ofrecidas sin cargos y
no limitan sus derechos legales.
* La intención de las disposiciones anteriores también se describe en la
tarjeta de garantía proporcionada con este equipo.0
8. Las piezas esenciales para el mantenimiento del equipo (es decir,
componentes necesarios para mantener las funciones y calidad de la
cámara) estarán disponibles durante un periodo de cinco años a partir de la
descontinuación del equipo.
9. Tenga en cuenta que si el equipo se daña seriamente por inundación,
inmersión, infiltración de arena o barro, choques violentos o caída, es posible
que no pueda repararse ni restaurarse a su estado original.
Notas-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Antes de enviar la cámara para repararla, compruebe el cuerpo de la
cámara y vuelva a leer el manual de instrucciones para garantizar un
funcionamiento correcto.
• Algunas reparaciones requieren mucho tiempo.
• Cuando envíe el equipo a un centro de servicio, incluya una nota describiendo
la pieza defectuosa y el problema con la mayor precisión posible.
• Retire todos los accesorios no relacionados con el problema antes de
enviar la cámara al centro de servicio.1
Si surge un problema
Oficinas de Ricoh
RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V.
(EPMMC)
Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY
(innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438
(außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438
http://www.ricohpmmc.com/
RICOH ESPANA, S.A. (PMMC SPAIN)
(desde España) 91 406 9148
(desde fuera de España) +34 91 406 9148Ricoh Company, Ltd.
Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo
104-8222, Japan
2011 agosto
SP E
Impreso en China
*L454 3973*
RICOH LENS
A16 24-85mm F3.5-5.5
Mode d’emploi
Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’objectif.
Contenu de l’emballage
Avant d’utiliser votre objectif Ricoh, vérifiez dans l’emballage qu’il ne
manque aucun des éléments listés ci-dessous.
Unité appareil photo
Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’appareil.
Capuchon de l’objectif
Est fixé à l’unité appareil photo.
? Mode d’emploi
(le présent
manuel)
? Garantie
Capuchon du connecteur
Est fixé à l’unité appareil photo.
Étui souple
Introduction
Pour utiliser cet objectif, vous devez l’installer sur un boîtier d’appareil photo
compatible.
Reportez-vous au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo pour plus de détails
concernant l’utilisation des fonctions de prise de vue et de lecture et la modification
des réglages et pour prendre connaissance des consignes d’utilisation importantes.
Ce mode d’emploi décrit les fonctions et les consignes d’utilisation qui ne sont valides
que lorsque cette unité appareil photo est utilisée avec un boîtier d’appareil photo
compatible. Reportez-vous également au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil
photo GXR.
Pour utiliser les fonctions du produit de manière optimale, lisez attentivement le
présent manuel avant utilisation. Veuillez conserver le présent manuel à portée de
main pour pouvoir vous y référer facilement.
Ricoh Co., Ltd.
Mesures de sécurité Lisez attentivement toutes les mesures de sécurité pour garantir
une utilisation sans danger.
Essais de prise de vue Faites des essais de prise de vue pour vérifier le fonctionnement
correct de l’appareil avant de prendre des photos d’événements
importants.
Copyright La reproduction ou la modification de documents, de magazines
et d’autres sources sujettes aux droits d’auteur, autrement que
pour des raisons personnelles, domestiques ou limitées similaires,
est interdite sans le consentement du propriétaire des droits.
Exonération de
responsabilité
Ricoh Co., Ltd. décline toute responsabilité en cas de défaillance
de l’enregistrement ou de l’affichage des photos résultant d’un
dysfonctionnement de l’appareil.
Garantie La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans
le pays d’achat. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à
la réparation du produit dans d’autres pays ou à la prise en charge
de toute dépense associée.
Interférences radio L’utilisation de cet appareil dans le voisinage d’un autre
équipement électronique peut affecter défavorablement à
la fois l’appareil photo et l’autre dispositif. Des interférences
sont notamment probables si l’appareil est utilisé à proximité
d’une radio ou d’un téléviseur. Ce problème peut être résolu en
déplaçant l’appareil aussi loin que possible de l’autre dispositif, en
réorientant l’antenne de la radio ou du téléviseur, ou encore en
branchant la radio ou le téléviseur sur une prise secteur différente.
© 2011 RICOH CO., LTD. Tous droits réservés. Cette publication ne peut être reproduite en tout ou en partie sans
l’autorisation expresse et écrite de Ricoh. Ricoh se réserve le droit de modifier le contenu de ce document à tout
moment et sans avis préalable.
Tous les efforts ont été faits pour garantir l’exactitude des informations contenues dans ce document. Dans le cas
où vous rencontreriez néanmoins une erreur ou une omission, nous vous serions reconnaissants de bien vouloir
nous en avertir à l’adresse indiquée en quatrième de couverture de ce manuel.
Mesures de sécurité
Symboles d’avertissement
Divers symboles sont utilisés tout au long de ce manuel et sur le produit
lui-même pour prévenir tout risque de blessure ou de dommage aux biens.
Ces symboles et leur signification sont détaillés ci-dessous.
Danger
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner
rapidement la mort ou des blessures corporelles
sérieuses si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas
ou sont mal suivies.
Avertissement
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner
la mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les
instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal
suivies.
Attention
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner
des blessures corporelles ou des dommages aux biens
si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont
mal suivies.
Exemples de signalisation d’avertissement
Le symbole vous signale des actions qui doivent être effectuées.
Le symbole vous signale des actions interdites.
Le symbole peut être combiné avec d’autres pour indiquer qu’une action
spécifique est interdite.
Exemples
= Ne pas toucher = Ne pas démonter
Prenez les précautions indiquées ci-dessous pour utiliser ce matériel en
toute sécurité.
Danger
Ne tentez pas de démonter, de réparer ou de modifier vous-même l’appareil. Les
circuits à haute tension de l’appareil vous font courir un risque de choc électrique.
Avertissement
Conservez l’appareil hors de portée des enfants.
Si le mécanisme interne de l’appareil est exposé suite à un choc ou autre type de
dommage, ne touchez aucun composant interne. Les circuits à haute tension de
l’appareil peuvent causer des chocs électriques. Retirez la batterie dès que possible,
en prenant soin d’éviter tout choc électrique ou brûlure. Apportez l’appareil au
revendeur ou au service après-vente le plus proche s’il est endommagé.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans un endroit humide car vous risqueriez de provoquer un
incendie ou de subir une décharge électrique.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil à proximité de gaz inflammables, d’essence, de benzène,
de solvant ou de substances du même type pour éviter tout risque d’explosion,
d’incendie ou de brûlure.
• N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans des lieux où son usage est limité ou interdit afin
d’éviter tout risque de catastrophe ou d’accident.
Attention
Ne laissez pas l’équipement prendre l’eau ou se mouiller. Ne l’utilisez pas non plus
avec les mains mouillées. Dans les deux cas, vous risquez de subir une décharge
électrique.
Consignes de sécurité
relatives aux accessoires
Avant d’utiliser un produit optionnel, lisez attentivement les
instructions fournies avec ce produit.10
Contenu de l’emballage ..................................................................................................... 2
Introduction............................................................................................................................ 3
Mesures de sécurité............................................................................................................. 6
Nomenclature .....................................................................................................15
Mise à jour du produit.......................................................................................16
Mise à jour du micrologiciel............................................................................................16
Prise de vue..........................................................................................................18
Indicateur de niveau..........................................................................................................18
Fonctions de prise de vue macro..................................................................................18
Flash intégré.........................................................................................................................18
Mode P : changement de programme........................................................................19
M : mode Exposition manuelle......................................................................................21
Ajout de modes Scène......................................................................................................21
Table des matières11
Agrandissement de photos.............................................................................................22
Ajout d’une nouvelle fonction de décalage de cible.............................................23
Enregistrement de fonctions sur le sélecteur plus-moins...................................24
Ajout de tailles prises en charge pour le zoom de redimensionnement
automatique....................................................................................................................24
Mode lecture .......................................................................................................24
Affichage des informations sur l’unité appareil photo .........................................24
Réglages...............................................................................................................25
[Qualité image/Taille]........................................................................................................25
Photos...........................................................................................................................26
Vidéos............................................................................................................................27
[Cadrage auto].....................................................................................................................28
[Prise de vue à intervalles]...............................................................................................28
[Réduction bruit].................................................................................................................29
[Balance blancs]...................................................................................................................291
[Sensibilité ISO]....................................................................................................................30
[Assist. mise au pt]..............................................................................................................31
[Correction plage dynamique].......................................................................................32
[Décalage vitesse obt. auto] ...........................................................................................33
Menu onglet des options personnalisées......................................................34
[Enr. Mes Réglages]............................................................................................................34
[Manette ADJ Réglages]...................................................................................................34
[Confirmation du déclencheur].....................................................................................35
[Rég. touche Fn1]/[Rég. touche Fn2] ...........................................................................35
[Contrôle ISO direct de ADJ.]..........................................................................................36
[Supprimer Mes Réglages] ..............................................................................................37
[Initialiser]..............................................................................................................................371
Menu Config. .......................................................................................................38
[Régl. sens. ISO par paliers]..............................................................................................38
[Sensibilité ISO auto-hi]....................................................................................................38
[Mode veille] [Extinction auto].......................................................................................38
[Réglage niveau] .................................................................................................................39
[Calibrage niveau (inclin.)]...............................................................................................39
Réglage [Image zoom numérique] ..............................................................................39
[Lecture zoom cible]..........................................................................................................40
[Réglage Zone AF Spot]....................................................................................................40
[Annul. affich. zoom]..........................................................................................................40
[Sélect. aide m. au point] .................................................................................................41
[Conserv conditions prise vue]......................................................................................41
[Aff. saturation des blancs]..............................................................................................42
[Copyright]............................................................................................................................42
[Version du micrologiciel]................................................................................................421
Caractéristiques..................................................................................................43
Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire................................................................49
Annexes................................................................................................................52
Accessoires en option.......................................................................................................52
Précautions d’emploi.........................................................................................................54
Entretien et stockage de l’équipement.......................................................................56
Garantie et réparation.......................................................................................................581
Nomenclature
1 2 3
1 Connecteur
2 Bague d’objectif
3 Objectif1
Mise à jour du produit
Mise à jour du micrologiciel
Lorsque vous fixez pour la première fois l’unité appareil photo au boîtier de
l’appareil, la fonction de mise à jour de version démarre automatiquement
si le micrologiciel du boîtier de l’appareil doit être mis à jour. Dans ce cas,
mettez à jour le micrologiciel du boîtier de l’appareil comme suit.
Si la version du micrologiciel est déjà à jour, la fonction de mise à jour de
version ne démarre pas et vous pouvez utiliser l’objectif immédiatement.
1 Vérifiez que l’appareil photo est hors tension et fixez l’unité de
montage d’objectif au boîtier de l’appareil.
• Pour en savoir plus sur la fixation de l’unité appareil photo, reportez-vous
au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo.1
2 Mettez le boîtier de l’appareil photo sous tension.
• Un message de confirmation relatif à la mise à jour du micrologiciel
s’affiche.
3 Appuyez sur les touches Fn1/Fn2 pour sélectionner [Oui], puis
appuyez sur la touche MENU/OK.
• La mise à jour du micrologiciel démarre et les messages suivants
s’affichent sur l’écran d’affichage des photos.
[Vérification du fichier de réécriture]
[Programme de réécriture]
L’appareil photo redémarre, la version du micrologiciel s’affiche, puis la
mise à jour est terminée.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Pour vérifier la version du micrologiciel, avec l’appareil photo hors
tension, maintenez la touche 6 (Lecture) enfoncée pendant plus
d’une seconde tout en maintenant la touche – enfoncée. La version du
micrologiciel s’affiche pendant 20 secondes environ.
• Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les mises à jour du
micrologiciel, visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/). 1
Prise de vue
Indicateur de niveau
Outre la direction horizontale, l’inclinaison (avant/arrière) peut également
être vérifiée.
Fonctions de prise de vue macro
Les fonctions Macrophotographie, Cible Macro, Macro Auto et Affichage de
la distance de prise de vue minimale au cours des fonctions de prise de vue
macro ne sont pas disponibles.
Flash intégré
Si le flash intégré est utilisé, un dégradé se produit dans la partie inférieure
de l’image. Utilisez le flash externe (GF-1) pour la photographie au flash.1
Mode P : changement de programme
Le schéma à la page suivante fournit une estimation de la plage de
décalage des différentes combinaisons de valeurs d’ouverture et de vitesses
d’obturation. Les valeurs réelles peuvent variées selon la valeur d’exposition
(EV).
Dans ces exemples, le mode Flash est défini sur [Flash Non] et la sensibilité
ISO est définie sur [ISO 200].0
: Grand angle
: Téléobjectif
Ev5
Ev6
Ev4
Ev3
Ev2
Ev1
Ev0
Ev-1
Ev-2
8
9
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
F16
F22
F11
F8.0
F5.6
F4.0
F2.8
F2.0
F1.4
F1.0
-1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
2
-2
4
-3
8 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000
Ev7 Ev8 Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19
F22.0
F3.5 1
M : mode Exposition manuelle
Vous avez le choix entre B (Bulb, ampoule) et T (Time, heure) pour la vitesse
d’obturation.
Avec le réglage B, l’image est exposée lorsque vous appuyez sur le
déclencheur et l’exposition se termine lorsque le déclencheur est relâché.
Avec le réglage T, l’exposition commence lorsque vous appuyez sur
le déclencheur et se termine lorsque vous appuyez à nouveau sur le
déclencheur. Dans ces deux modes, l’appareil photo cesse la prise de vue
au bout de 180 secondes.
Les options [Auto] et [Auto-Hi] du réglage ISO peuvent également être
utilisées.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Les réglages B et T peuvent être utilisés à l’aide du déclencheur à câble
optionnel (CA-1).
Ajout de modes Scène
[Miniatures], [Contraste élevé N et B], [Flou artistique], [Traitement croisé] et
[Toy Camera] ont été ajoutés au mode Scène.
Un dégradé peut être défini dans [Traitement croisé] et [Toy Camera].
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Selon la version du micrologiciel utilisée, le réglage par défaut du dégradé
peut être rétabli lors de la mise à jour de la version du micrologiciel.
Agrandissement de photos
Appuyez de manière prolongée sur la touche MENU/OK pour agrandir et
afficher le centre de l’écran. Appuyez de nouveau de manière prolongée
sur la touche MENU/OK pour agrandir le centre de l’écran et afficher la
partie agrandie en plein écran. Appuyez de nouveau de manière prolongée
sur la touche MENU/OK pour revenir à l’affichage normal. Lors d’une mise
au point manuelle, enfoncez le déclencheur à mi-course pour revenir à
l’affichage normal.
Vous pouvez définir l’agrandissement de l’écran en appuyant de
manière prolongée sur la touche t (Retardateur) ou en sélectionnant
[Agrandissement] dans le menu de prise de vue. Sélectionnez [2×], [4×] ou
[8×] à l’aide des touches +/-, puis appuyez sur la touche MENU/OK.
Lors du déplacement de la cible ou de la mise au point manuelle, appuyez
sur les touches de direction (+/-/Fn1/Fn2) pour déplacer la zone agrandie.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• L’écran revient à l’affichage normal lorsque les actions suivantes sont
effectuées en mode Vue agrandie :
• la compensation d’exposition est exécutée,
• la touche Direct est actionnée.
• Si l’option Verr. AE est activée avant l’agrandissement de l’image entière,
la fonction AE est exécutée en mode Vue agrandie et les photos sont
prises avec les paramètres AE verrouillés.
• Vous pouvez définir [Agrandir part.] et [Agrandir tout] sur [Rég. touche
Fn1/Rég. touche Fn2] dans le menu des options personnalisées.
Ajout d’une nouvelle fonction de décalage de cible
Une pression sur la manette ADJ. permet d’afficher le décalage de cible et
de sélectionner la cible du suivi.
Une pression sur la touche d pendant le décalage de cible permet de
ramener la cible au centre de l’image. Une nouvelle pression sur la touche
d permet d’annuler le décalage de cible.
Enregistrement de fonctions sur le sélecteur plus-moins
Vous pouvez basculer entre les modes à l’aide du sélecteur plus-moins
lorsque le mode Flash et le retardateur sont activés.
Ajout de tailles prises en charge pour le zoom de
redimensionnement automatique
Le zoom de redimensionnement automatique prend en charge tous les
rapports d’affichage.
Mode lecture
Affichage des informations sur l’unité appareil photo
Vous pouvez changer de page en appuyant sur les touches ! et ". Les
informations sur l’unité appareil photo et de copyright s’affichent sur la
seconde page.
Réglages
[Qualité image/Taille]
L’option [RAW seulement] a été ajoutée. Cette option ne permet pas
d’enregistrer simultanément une copie JPEG.
Les options de qualité de l’image, de taille de l’image et de rapport
d’affichage suivantes sont disponibles pour le réglage [Qualité image/
Taille].
La taille du fichier des photos dépend de l’association qualité de l’image/
taille de l’image utilisée. Lors de l’enregistrement de vidéos, vous pouvez
sélectionner [Taille vidéo].
Photos
Paramètre Rapport
d’affichage
Compression Taille de l’image
(pixels)
RAW 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4928×2768
4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4352×3264
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4928×3264
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
3264×3264
L (Large) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 4928×2768
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 4352×3264
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 4928×3264
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 3264×3264
M (Middle) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 3456×1944
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3072×2304
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 3456×2304
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2304×2304
Paramètre Rapport
d’affichage
Compression Taille de l’image
(pixels)
5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944
3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536
1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960
VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480
*1 Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit du réglage utilisé pour la copie JPEG.
*2 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent en haut
et en bas de l’affichage de la photo.
*3 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent sur le
côté droit et sur le côté gauche de l’affichage de la photo.
Vidéos
Paramètre Taille vidéo
HD1280 1280×720
VGA640 640×480
QVGA320 320×240
[Cadrage auto]
L’option [ISO-BKT] peut être sélectionnée. Avec la valeur standard de
sensibilité ISO définie dans le menu de prise de vue, 3 images peuvent
être prises avec des sensibilités ISO différentes ; une à -1/3EV de la valeur
standard (définie), une à la valeur standard (définie) et une à +1/3EV de la
valeur standard (définie).
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
La prise de vue étant réalisée dans la plage de sensibilité ISO pouvant être
définie, la plage de cadrage ne peut pas être de 1/3EV ou une image peut
être prise avec les mêmes réglages en fonction de l’option [Sensibilité ISO].
[Prise de vue à intervalles]
Le nombre de photos à prendre peut être défini. Lorsque celui-ci est défini,
le « nombre de prises de vues restantes » s’affiche pendant la prise de vue.
La prise de vue à intervalles peut être définie sur un minimum de
2 secondes, et le nombre de prises de vues à prendre peut être défini sur un
maximum de 99 prises.
[Réduction bruit]
Choisissez une réduction du bruit entre [Non], [Auto], [Faible], [Forte] ou
[MAX]. Le temps nécessaire à l’enregistrement des images varie en fonction
de l’option sélectionnée.
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction lorsque [Portrait], [Sports],
[Miniatures], [Contraste élevé N et B], [Flou artistique], [Traitement croisé],
[Toy Camera] ou [Correction biais] est sélectionné dans les modes Scène.
[Balance blancs]
Vous pouvez sélectionner [Lampe incandescente1] ou [Lampe incandescente2].
Le réglage [Lampe incandescente2], par rapport à [Lampe incandescente1],
donne une teinte légèrement rougeâtre.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Avec [Lampe incandescente2], vous pouvez obtenir les mêmes densités
de couleur qu’avec le réglage [Incandescent] décrit dans le Mode
d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo. 0
• Si le flash (GF-1) est déclenché avec DISP. dans [Manuel], la balance
des blancs est définie sur les résultats de mesure calculés lors du
déclenchement du flash.
[Sensibilité ISO]
Les options [Auto], [Auto-Hi], [ISO-LO] ou [ISO 200] à [ISO 3200] peuvent
être sélectionnées.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• [ISO-LO] est équivalent à ISO 100. Toutefois, la plage dynamique est
réduite et des niveaux de luminosité supérieurs sont possibles.
• Lorsque l’option [Auto] est sélectionnée et que le flash est utilisé, la
sensibilité utilisée atteindra une sensibilité équivalente à ISO 800.
• Le réglage de palier de la sensibilité ISO peut être sélectionné dans [Régl.
sens. ISO par paliers] (GP. 38) dans le menu de configuration.
• Lorsque l’option [Auto] est sélectionnée et que le flash n’est pas utilisé, les
valeurs minimales et maximales respectives pour la sensibilité ISO seront
ISO 200 et ISO 400.1
[Assist. mise au pt]
Les contours et le contraste des images affichées sur l’écran sont intensifiés,
facilitant le réglage de la mise au point.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Lors d’une mise au point manuelle, l’intensification du contour ou du
contraste de la forme est annulée en appuyant sur le déclencheur à micourse.
• Vous pouvez sélectionner la méthode d’affichage de l’option Assist. mise
au pt dans [Sélect. aide m. au point] dans le menu de configuration.
(GP. 41)
[Correction plage dynamique]
L’appareil photo capture une large gamme de tonalités du foncé au clair.
L’intensité peut être sélectionnée entre [Non], [Faible], [Moyenne] ou [Forte].
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Les réglages ISO disponibles sont limités en mode de correction de
gamme dynamique.
Régl. sens. ISO par paliers
1/3EV
Régl. sens. ISO par paliers
1EV
Faible ISO 400 à ISO 2000 ISO 400 à ISO 1600
Moyenne ISO 500 à ISO 1600 ISO 800 à ISO 1600
Forte ISO 640 à ISO 1250 ISO 800
• Si l’option [Forte] est sélectionnée, une quantité supérieure de bruit peut
se produire dans les images.
• La correction de gamme dynamique reste sans effet si vous utilisez le
zoom numérique.
• L’effet souhaité peut ne pas être obtenu si la scène est trop claire ou trop
sombre.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Le réglage [Multi] pour Mesure exposition est recommandé lorsque vous
utilisez la fonction de correction de gamme dynamique.
• La correction de gamme dynamique peut être appliquée à une image RAW.
[Décalage vitesse obt. auto]
Si le réglage [Décalage vitesse obt. auto] du menu de prise de vue est réglé
sur [Oui] et que le sélecteur de mode est réglé sur « S », l’appareil procède
automatiquement au réglage de la vitesse d’obturation afin d’obtenir la
meilleure exposition lorsque celle-ci ne peut pas être obtenue avec la
vitesse d’obturation définie manuellement.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Le réglage [Décalage vitesse obt. auto] n’apparaît pas si le sélecteur de
mode est réglé sur un mode autre que « S ».
Menu onglet des options personnalisées
[Enr. Mes Réglages]
Vous pouvez sélectionner entre l’une des options Mes réglages Boîte [1] à
[6] et Carte [1] à [6] pour l’emplacement d’enregistrement.
[Réglage Zone AF Spot] dans le menu de configuration et la position du
zoom peuvent également être enregistrés. Lorsque l’option [Position du
zoom] est sélectionnée dans [Éditer Mes Réglages], les réglages peuvent
être modifiés.
[Manette ADJ Réglages]
Vous pouvez définir la fonction [Format] dans [Manette ADJ Réglage 1] à
[Manette ADJ Réglage 4].
Si vous définissez la fonction Format et que vous appuyez sur la touche
Manette ADJ. , s’affiche, vous permettant ainsi de définir le format.
[Confirmation du déclencheur]
Lorsque l’option [ADJ./DIRECT] est définie, appuyez sur le déclencheur à
mi-course pour finaliser les réglages en mode ADJ. et sur l’écran DIRECT.
Vous pouvez alors prendre des photos. Lorsque l’option [ADJ.] est définie,
les réglages du mode ADJ. sont finalisés, ce qui vous permet de prendre des
photos. Lorsque l’option [DIRECT] est définie, les réglages de l’écran DIRECT
sont finalisés, ce qui vous permet de prendre des photos. Une fois la prise
de vue terminée, le système revient à l’écran de contrôle.
[Rég. touche Fn1]/[Rég. touche Fn2]
Les fonctions [Agrand. affich], [Assist. mise au pt], [Format] et [Correction
plage dynamique] ont été ajoutées.
[Contrôle ISO direct de ADJ.]
Lorsque l’option [Contrôle ISO direct de ADJ.] est réglée sur [Oui], vous
pouvez pousser la manette ADJ. latéralement lorsque la prise de vue est
possible pour modifier la sensibilité ISO. Le réglage par défaut est [Non].
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• La manette ADJ. peut être utilisée pour ajuster la sensibilité lorsque
le déclencheur est enfoncé à mi-course en modes Changement de
programme et Priorité ouverture (en mode Changement de programme,
la sensibilité peut être ajustée, même après avoir relâché le déclencheur,
tant que l’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation s’affichent). Notez qu’une
fois la sensibilité ajustée de cette manière, [Auto] et [Auto-Hi] ne peuvent
pas être sélectionnés de nouveau.
• En mode d’exposition manuelle, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser la manette
ADJ. pour modifier la sensibilité ISO.
[Supprimer Mes Réglages]
Les réglages enregistrés pour [Boîte Mes Réglages] dans [Enr. Mes
Réglages], pour [Carte] et pour [MY1], [MY2] et [MY3] sur le sélecteur de
mode sont ramenés à leur valeur par défaut.
[Initialiser]
Les options personnalisées seront réinitialisées.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Les réglages définis dans [Enr. Mes Réglages] ne seront pas restaurés.
Menu Config.
[Régl. sens. ISO par paliers]
La [Sensibilité ISO] dans les réglages de prise de vue peut être réglée par
intervalles de [1EV] ou [1/3EV].
[Sensibilité ISO auto-hi]
Vous pouvez définir les limites supérieures de la sensibilité ISO et de la
vitesse d’obturation afin de modifier la [Sensibilité ISO] lorsqu’elle est
définie sur [Auto-Hi].
[Mode veille] [Extinction auto]
Vous pouvez définir la durée qui doit s’écouler avant que l’appareil photo
ne passe en [Mode veille] ou n’active l’option [Extinction auto] dans une
plage comprise entre 1 et 30 minutes.
[Réglage niveau]
Les options [Non], [Niv. + inclin.], [Niveau], [Niveau + Son] et [Son] peuvent
etre selectionnees.
[Calibrage niveau (inclin.)]
Enregistrez la perspective actuelle comme perspective standard.
Réglage [Image zoom numérique]
La taille de l’image enregistrée varie en fonction du zoom de
redimensionnement automatique, de la manière suivante.
Rapport de zoom
Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Rapport de zoom
Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Environ 1× L Environ 2,1× 3M
Environ 1,4× M Environ 3,4× 1M
Environ 1,7× 5M Environ 6,8× VGA0
[Lecture zoom cible]
Avec l’option Vue agrandie en mode de lecture, vous pouvez effectuer un
zoom avant sur l’image centrée à la position à laquelle l’appareil photo a
été placé par la cible pendant la prise de vue.
[Réglage Zone AF Spot]
Vous pouvez sélectionner la zone AF lorsque l’option [Mise au point] dans
le menu des réglages de prise de vue est définie sur [AF Spot]. L’option
[Normal] ou [Précis] peut être sélectionnée. La zone AF de l’option [Précis]
est plus petite que celle de l’option [Normal].
[Annul. affich. zoom]
Vous pouvez choisir de conserver ou d’annuler la vue agrandie après la
prise de photos en mode Vue agrandie. Sélectionnez [Non] pour conserver
le mode Vue agrandie et [Oui] pour l’annuler une fois les photos prises.1
[Sélect. aide m. au point]
Lorsque l’option [Aide m. au p.] est définie sur [Oui] dans le menu de prise
de vue, vous pouvez sélectionner [MODE 1] ou [MODE 2].
MODE 1 : Les contours des sujets/objets mis au point sont améliorés.
MODE 2 : L’écran d’affichage des photos passe en noir et blanc et la zone
de mise au point brille en blanc.
[Conserv conditions prise vue]
Lorsque cette option est définie sur [Oui] et si vous continuez à appuyer
sur le déclencheur à mi-course après la prise de vue sans le relâcher,
les réglages de mise au point, d’ouverture, de vitesse d’obturation, de
sensibilité ISO et de balance des blancs sont conservés.
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Les conditions de prise de vue ne sont pas conservées dans les cas suivants.
• [Vidéo] et [Correction biais] en mode scène
• Prise de vue à intervalles
• Mode continu
• Retardateur
• Lorsque cette option est définie sur [Oui], l’option [Multi-P AUTO] de
[Balance blancs] est identique à l’option [Auto] et [Correction plage
dynamique] ne s’applique pas.
[Aff. saturation des blancs]
Lorsque cette option est définie sur [Oui], les zones de saturation des
blancs de l’image clignotent lorsqu’elles sont affichées en mode de lecture
de saturation des blancs.
[Copyright]
Entrez les informations de copyright afin que celles-ci s’affichent dans les
données Exif de l’image.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Les informations de copyright enregistrées peuvent être consultées dans
l’écran de détails + histogramme de l’écran de lecture.
[Version du micrologiciel]
La version du micrologiciel de l’appareil photo s’affiche. Si un fichier de
mise à jour du micrologiciel est enregistré sur une carte mémoire, le
micrologiciel peut être mis à jour.
Caractéristiques
Les caractéristiques correspondent à l’unité appareil photo installée sur un
boîtier GXR.
Pixels réels Environ 16,2 millions
Capteur d’image CMOS 23,6 × 15,7 mm (nombre total de pixels : environ
16,5 millions)
Objectif Distance focale 15,7 à 55,5 mm (format 35 mm équivalent : de 24 à 85 mm)
Ouverture
(nombre f)
f/3,5 – f/5,5
Plage de mise
au point (de
l’objectif)
Environ 25 cm à 8 (téléobjectif)
Construction 11 éléments en 9 groupes (3 objectifs asphériques avec 6 surfaces)
Diamètre du filtre 55 mm
Zoom 4,0× zoom numérique (photos), 3,6 × zoom numérique (vidéos) ;
environ 6,8× zoom de redimensionnement automatique (VGA)
Mode mise au point Contraste AF multi et AF spot ; MF ; snap ; 8 (verrouillage de
mise au point et assistance AF)
Vitesse
d’obturation
Photos 1/3200–180s, B (Bulb), T (Time) (les limites inférieures et
supérieures varient en fonction du mode prise de vue et flash)
Vidéos 1/2000–1/30s
Contrôle
exposition
Mesure Mesure TTL-CCD en modes multi (256 segments), central
pondéré, et spot avec verrouillage de l’exposition automatique
Mode Programme AE, priorité à l’ouverture AE, exposition manuelle,
priorité à l’obturation AE, fonction de décalage de la cible
Correction de
l’exposition
Manuelle (-4,0 à +4,0EV par incrément de 1/3EV ou 1/2EV),
cadrage automatique (-2,0 à +2,0EV par incrément de 1/3EV
ou 1/2EV)
Portée du lien
d’exposition
(mode prise
de vue
automatique,
mesure centrale
pondérée de la
lumière)
Grand angle : 3,2–16,8EV
Téléobjectif : 3,6–18,1EV
(Plage d’exposition pour la sensibilité ISO automatique
calculée avec des valeurs pour 100 ISO.)
Remarque : À 6,0EV ou inférieur, chaque baisse de 1,0EV
correspond à une baisse de 0,25EV en termes de luminosité.
La luminosité baisse de -1,0EV maximum.
Sensibilité ISO
(sensibilité sortie standard)
Auto, Auto-Hi, ISO-LO, ISO 200, ISO 250, ISO 320, ISO 400, ISO
500, ISO 640, ISO 800, ISO 1000, ISO 1250, ISO 1600, ISO 2000,
ISO 2500, ISO 3200
Mode de balance des blancs Auto, Multi-P AUTO, En extérieur, Nuageux, Lampe
incandescente1, Lampe incandescente2, Lampe fluorescente,
Manuel, Détail ; cadrage auto balance des blancs
Flash
(avec GF-1)
Réglage de
puissance du
flash
Flash TTL, flash manuel, lumière ambiante auto
Mode flash Réduction des yeux rouges, activé, synchronisation lente,
manuel
Synchronisation Synchronisation premier/deuxième rideau
Mode prise de vue Mode prise de vue auto, Mode changement programme,
Mode priorité ouverture, Priorité Vitesse obt., Mode exposition
manuelle, Scène (Vidéo, Portrait, Sports, Paysage, Nuit,
Correction biais, Miniatures, Contraste élevé N et B, Flou
artistique, Traitement croisé, Toy Camera, Mes Réglages
Mode
continu
Nombre de
photos prises à
l’aide de l’option
Continu (Taille
d’image : RAW)
Réduction du bruit Non : 3 photos
Réduction du bruit Oui : 2 photos
Nombre de
photos prises
à l’aide de
l’option Cont.M
+ (un ensemble)
HI (1280×856) : 30 photos (30 images/s),
LO (4928×3264) : 14 photos (2,5 images/s)
Compression*1
FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2
Taille de
l’image
(pixels)
Photos 4928×2768, 4352×3264, 4928×3264, 3264×3264,
3456×1944, 3072×2304, 3456×2304, 2304×2304,
2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480
Vidéos 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240
Taille de
fichier
(approximative)
RAW 16:9 NORMAL : 23 445Ko/image, FINE : 25 703Ko/image,
VGA : 20 508 Ko/image, RAW seulement : 20 332Ko/image
4:3 NORMAL : 24 443Ko/image, FINE : 26 795Ko/image,
VGA : 21 405 Ko/image , RAW seulement : 21 181Ko/image
3:2 NORMAL : 27 603Ko/image, FINE : 30 265Ko/image,
VGA : 24 139Ko/image , RAW seulement : 23 937Ko/image
1:1 NORMAL : 18 383Ko/image, FINE : 20 147Ko/image,
VGA : 16 105Ko/image , RAW seulement : 15 929Ko/image
L 16:9 NORMAL : 2 901Ko/image, FINE : 4 999Ko/image
4:3 NORMAL : 3 041Ko/image, FINE : 5 226Ko/image
3:2 NORMAL : 3 415Ko/image, FINE : 5 889Ko/image
1:1 NORMAL : 2 288Ko/image, FINE : 3 927Ko/image
Taille de
fichier
(approximative)
M 16:9 NORMAL : 1 481Ko/image, FINE : 2 514Ko/image
4:3 NORMAL : 1 579Ko/image, FINE : 2 668Ko/image
3:2 NORMAL : 1 749Ko/image, FINE : 2 974Ko/image
1:1 NORMAL : 1 192Ko/image, FINE : 2 008Ko/image
5M 4:3 FINE : 2 293Ko/image
3M 4:3 FINE : 1 479Ko/image
Taille de
fichier
(approximative)
1M 4:3 FINE : 818Ko/image
VGA 4:3 FINE : 202Ko/image
Longévité batterie
(basée sur norme CIPA)
DB-90 : environ 400prises de vue*3
(basé sur la norme CIPA)
Dimensions (l×h×p) Unité appareil photo uniquement :
71,4mm(l)×70,5mm(h)×93,3mm(p) (basé sur la norme CIPA)
Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo :
113,9mm(l)×74,7mm(h)×98,5mm(p) (basé sur la norme
CIPA)
Poids (approximatif) Unité appareil photo uniquement : 350g
Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo : 550g (y
compris la batterie et la carte mémoire SD)
Température fonctionnement 0°C à 40°C
Humidité fonctionnement 90% ou inférieure
Température stockage –20°C à 60°C
*1 Les options disponibles varient selon la taille d’image.
*2 Un fichier JPEG est également enregistré (le fichier JPEG peut être d’une qualité FINE ou
NORMAL avec les mêmes dimensions que le fichier RAW, ou qu’un fichier VGA d’une taille
de 640×480 pixels). Les fichiers RAW utilisent le format standard DNG promu par Adobe
Systems, Inc.
*3 Pour référence uniquement ; le nombre réel de prises de vue varie énormément selon
l’utilisation de l’appareil. Nous vous recommandons d’emporter des batteries de rechange
lors d’une utilisation pendant une période prolongée.
Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire
Les valeurs suivantes sont données à titre de référence de la capacité de
stockage de la mémoire interne et de cartes mémoire de différentes tailles,
en fonction de la qualité d’image et de la taille d’image, lors de l’utilisation
de la qualité d’image FINE.
Photos
Compression Taille de
l’image
(pixels)
Mémoire
interne
1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go
RAW*
FINE
4928×2768 3 37 76 150 306 614 1233
4352×3264 3 36 73 144 294 589 1182
4928×3264 2 31 64 127 260 522 1047
3264×3264 4 47 97 191 391 784 1573
L
FINE
4928×2768 16 179 365 718 1468 2941 5900
4352×3264 15 172 349 685 1401 2807 5632
4928×3264 14 152 310 609 1245 2495 5006
3264×3264 21 228 465 914 1868 3743 75100
Compression Taille de
l’image
(pixels)
Mémoire
interne
1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go
M
FINE
3456×1944 32 357 723 1419 2902 5814 11662
3072×2304 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014
3456×2304 27 302 614 1206 2466 4941 9913
2304×2304 41 447 903 1774 3627 7267 14578
5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238
3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063
1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181
VGA/FINE 640×480 368 4028 7681 15082 30828 61759 123888
* Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit de la compression utilisée pour la copie
JPEG. 1
Vidéos
Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Mémoire
interne
1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go
1280×720
30 images/seconde
16 sec. 3 min.
3 sec.
6 min.
14 sec.
12 min.
14 sec.
25 min.
1 sec.
50 min.
7 sec.
100 min.
33 sec.
640×480
30 images/seconde
49 sec. 8 min.
55 sec.
18 min.
8 sec.
35 min.
38 sec.
72 min.
50 sec.
145 min.
54 sec.
292 min.
41 sec.
320×240
30 images/seconde
1 min.
59 sec.
21 min.
39 sec.
44 min.
2 sec.
86 min.
28 sec.
176 min.
44 sec.
354 min.
3 sec.
710 min.
13 sec.
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
La taille d’enregistrement sans interruption maximale pour une vidéo est de
4 Go. La durée maximale d’enregistrement est de 15 minutes environ pour
une taille de 1280×720, de 46 minutes environ pour une taille de 640×480
et de 90 minutes environ pour une taille de 320×240.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Lors de l’enregistrement de vidéos avec la taille vidéo définie sur 1280×720,
l’utilisation de cartes mémoire SD/SDHC avec une classe de vitesse 6 est
recommandée.
Annexes
Accessoires en option
L’unité appareil photo peut être utilisée avec les éléments suivants (vendus
séparément).
Capuchon d’objectif (LC-3) Pare-soleil d’objectif (LH-2)
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Avant d’utiliser un accessoire optionnel, consultez la documentation
fournie avec le produit.
• Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les accessoires optionnels,
visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/).
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Le capuchon d’objectif (LC-3) et le pare-soleil d’objectif (LH-2) ne peuvent
pas être utilisés ensemble.
Si le pare-soleil d’objectif (LH-2) est fixé alors que le capuchon d’objectif (LC-
3) l’est déjà, le capuchon d’objectif peut casser.
Montage et démontage de la bague d’objectif---------------------------------
Enlevez la bague d’objectif lors de l’utilisation de la bague d’objectif en
option (LC-3).
Démontage de la bague d’objectif
Faites tourner la bague d’objectif dans le
sens inverse des aiguilles d’une montre avec
l’appareil photo hors tension, puis retirez la
bague de l’unité appareil photo.
Montage de la bague d’objectif
Une fois l’appareil hors tension, alignez
le repère sur la bague d’objectif (2) avec
le repère de l’unité appareil photo (1) et
tournez la bague d’objectif dans le sens
des aiguilles d’une montre jusqu’à ce qu’un
déclic soit émis.
1
22
Précautions d’emploi
• La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans le pays d’achat.
• En cas de panne ou de dysfonctionnement de l’appareil à l’étranger, le fabricant
décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit localement ou à la
prise en charge de toute dépense associée.
• Ne faites pas tomber l’équipement et évitez-lui les chocs physiques.
• Lors du transport de l’équipement, faites attention de ne pas le cogner dans d’autres
objets. Faites particulièrement attention à protéger l’objectif.
• Lors de la fixation d’un filtre ou d’un pare-soleil, veillez à ne pas exercer une pression
excessive.
• Des changements brutaux de température peuvent provoquer de la condensation
visible ou des dysfonctionnements de l’équipement. Cela peut être évité en plaçant
l’équipement dans un sac plastique pour ralentir le changement de température,
puis en le retirant une fois que l’air dans le sac a atteint la même température que
l’environnement.
• Conservez l’équipement sec et évitez de le manipuler avec les mains mouillées.
Le non-respect de cette consigne peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements de
l’équipement ou un choc électrique.
• Gardez le connecteur propre.
Conseil : pour éviter la condensation---------------------------------------------
La condensation se produit généralement lorsque vous vous rendez dans
un endroit avec une brusque différence de température, si l’humidité
est élevée, dans une pièce froide après que le chauffage ait été mis en
marche, ou lorsque l’appareil est exposé à de l’air froid en provenance d’un
climatiseur ou d’un autre dispositif.
Entretien et stockage de l’équipement
Entretien de l’équipement
• Les photos peuvent être altérées par des empreintes ou d’autres matières
étrangères sur l’objectif. Évitez de toucher l’objectif avec les doigts. Éliminez
la poussière ou les peluches avec un soufflant disponible dans le commerce,
ou nettoyez doucement l’objectif avec un chiffon doux et sec. Faites
particulièrement attention autour du fût d’objectif.
• Nettoyez soigneusement l’équipement après l’avoir utilisé à la plage ou après
avoir manipulé des produits cosmétiques. N’exposez pas l’équipement à des
substances volatiles comme du diluant, du benzène ou des pesticides. Le nonrespect de cette consigne peut endommager l’équipement ou sa finition.
• Dans l’éventualité d’un dysfonctionnement, consultez un centre de réparation
Ricoh.
• Cet équipement est un dispositif de haute précision. Ne le démontez pas.
Stockage
• Ne stockez pas l’appareil photo dans un endroit sujet à : chaleur ou
humidité extrême ; grands changements de température ou d’humidité ;
poussière, saleté ou sable ; fortes vibrations ; contact prolongé avec des
produits chimiques, notamment des boules de naphtaline ou d’autres
produits insecticides, ou des produits en vinyle ou en caoutchouc ; champs
magnétiques puissants (par exemple à proximité d’un moniteur, d’un
transformateur ou d’un aimant).
• Lorsque vous rangez votre appareil photo, veillez à l’installer dans un étui, etc.,
dans lequel la poussière ou les peluches ne pénètrent pas afin d’empêcher la
saleté ou la poussière de se déposer sur l’appareil photo.
De plus, lorsque vous transportez l’appareil photo, ne le mettez pas
directement dans une poche, etc., afin d’empêcher la saleté ou la poussière de
se déposer sur l’appareil photo.
Garantie et réparation
1. Ce produit bénéficie d’une garantie limitée. Pendant la période de garantie
indiquée sur la carte de garantie fournie avec votre équipement, toute pièce
défectueuse sera réparée gratuitement. Dans le cas d’un dysfonctionnement
de l’équipement, contactez le distributeur qui vous a vendu l’équipement ou
votre centre de réparation Ricoh le plus proche. Veuillez noter que vous ne
serez pas remboursé des frais de transport pour livrer votre équipement au
centre de réparation Ricoh.
2. Cette garantie ne couvre aucun dommage résultant de :
1 non-respect des instructions du mode d’emploi ;
2 réparation, modification ou révision non réalisée par un centre de service
agréé, listé dans le mode d’emploi ;
3 incendie, sinistre, catastrophe naturelle, foudre, tension anormale, etc. ;
4 stockage inapproprié (indiqué dans le « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de
l’appareil photo »), fuite de batterie et autres fluides, moisissure ou tout
autre défaut d’entretien de l’équipement ;
5 immersion dans l’eau (inondation), exposition à l’alcool ou à d’autres
boissons, infiltration de sable ou de boue, choc physique, chute ou pression
exercée sur l’équipement et autres causes non naturelles.
3. Après l’expiration de la période de garantie, tous les frais de réparation seront
à votre charge, y compris ceux d’un centre de service agréé.
4. Tous les frais de réparation seront à votre charge, même pendant la période de
garantie, si la carte de garantie n’est pas jointe ou si le nom du distributeur ou
la date d’achat n’est pas indiqué ou a été modifié sur la carte.
5. Les frais de révision et d’inspection complète, sur demande du client, seront à
sa charge complète que la période de garantie ait expiré ou non.
6. Tout dommage consécutif à une défaillance de l’équipement, comme les frais
de prise de vue ou la perte d’un profit attendu, ne sera pas remboursé que la
période de garantie ait expiré ou non.
7. La garantie est valable uniquement dans le pays où l’équipement a été acheté.
* Les dispositions ci-dessus se réfèrent aux réparations gratuites et ne limitent
vos droits légaux.
* L’objectif des dispositions ci-dessus est également décrit sur la carte de
garantie fournie avec l’équipement.0
8. Les pièces essentielles à la réparation de l’équipement (c’est-à-dire les
composants nécessaires au fonctionnement et à la qualité de l’équipement)
seront disponibles pendant une période de cinq années après l’arrêt de la
production de l’équipement.
9. Veuillez noter que si l’équipement est sérieusement endommagé par une
inondation, une immersion, une infiltration de sable ou de boue, des chocs
violents ou une chute, il peut être impossible de le réparer et la restauration de
son état originel peut être impossible.
Remarques------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Avant d’envoyer l’appareil en réparation, vérifiez le boîtier de l’appareil
photo et relisez le mode d’emploi pour garantir un fonctionnement
correct.
• Certaines réparations nécessitent un certain temps d’exécution.
• Lors de l’envoi de l’équipement à un centre de réparation, veuillez inclure
une note décrivant la pièce défectueuse et le problème rencontré, aussi
précisément que possible.
• Démontez tous les accessoires non associés au problème avant d’envoyer
l’appareil au centre de réparation.1
Numéros de téléphone des centres d’aide en Europe
UK (from within the UK) 0203 026 2290
(from outside the UK) +44 203 026 2290
Deutschland (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438
(außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438
France (à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70
(en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94
Italia (dall'Italia) 02 4032 6427
(dall'estero) +39 02 4032 6427
España (desde España) 911 230396
(desde fuera de España) +34 911 230396
Belgique (en dehors de la Belgique) +32 2 8088300 (Français)
(van buiten België) +32 505 51082 (Vlaams)
Nederland (van buiten Nederland) +31 208081108
http://www.service.ricohpmmc.com/
Site web PHOTO STYLE pour
les utilisateurs des appareils photos numériques Ricoh
PHOTO STYLE offre de précieuses informations aux utilisateurs des appareils photos
numériques Ricoh pour les faire goûter aux plaisirs de la photographie.
Connaissances générales
Explications faciles des mécanismes et fonctions des appareils photos numériques
Technique photo
Techniques de photographie utiles présentées par sujet
Galerie de photographes
Photos prises par des photographes professionnels
Concours photo
Une collection de superbes photos des quatre coins du monde
Accédez à l’URL suivante :
http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/photostyle/*L455 3972A*
En cas de problème
Bureaux Ricoh
RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V.
(EPMMC)
Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY
(innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438
(außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438
http://www.ricohpmmc.com/
Ricoh Company, Ltd.
Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo
104-8222, Japon
Décembre 2011
FR F-FR
Imprimé en Chine
RICOH LENS
A16 24-85mm F3.5-5.5
Instruction Manual
The serial number may be found on the bottom of the lens.
Package Contents
Before using your Ricoh lens, confirm that the package contains the items
listed below.
Camera unit
The serial number may be found on the bottom.
Lens cap
Comes attached to the camera unit.
? Instructionmanual
(thismanual)
? Warranty
Connector cap
Comes attached to the camera unit.
Soft case
Introduction
To use this lens, you need to attach it to a compatible camera body.
Refer to the Camera Body User Guide for details about how to operate shooting and
playback functions and change settings and to read important precautions for use.
This instruction manual will explain functions and operating procedures that are
available only when this camera unit is used with a compatible camera body. See also
the GXR Camera Body User Guide.
To make the best use of this product’s functions, read this manual thoroughly before
use. Please keep this manual handy for ease of reference.
Ricoh Co., Ltd.
Safety precautions Read all safety precautions thoroughly to ensure safe use.
Test shots Take test shots to ensure that the camera is working properly
before taking photos on important occasions.
Copyright Reproduction or alteration of copyrighted documents, magazines,
and other materials, other than for personal, home, or other
similarly limited purposes, without the consent of the copyright
holder, is prohibited.
Exemption from liability Ricoh Co., Ltd. assumes no liability for failure to record or display
images as a result of product malfunction.
Warranty The warranty supplied with this product is only valid within the
country of purchase. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility
for servicing the product in other countries or bearing any
expense thereby incurred.
Radio interference Operating this product in the vicinity of other electronic
equipment may adversely affect both the camera and the other
device. Interference is particularly likely if the camera is used
in close proximity to a radio or television. This can be resolved
by moving the camera as far as possible from the other device,
reorienting the radio or television antenna, or plugging the radio
or television into a different outlet.
© 2011 RICOH CO., LTD. All rights reserved. This publication may not be reproduced in whole or in part without
Ricoh’s express written permission. Ricoh reserves the right to change the contents of this document at any time
without prior notice.
Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information in this document. Should you nevertheless
notice any errors or omissions, we would be grateful if you would notify us at the address listed on the back cover
of this booklet.
Safety Precautions
Warning Symbols
Various symbols are used throughout this instruction manual and on the
product to prevent physical harm to you or other people and damage to
property. The symbols and their meanings are explained below.
Danger
This symbol indicates matters that may lead to imminent risk of
death or serious injury if ignored or incorrectly handled.
Warning
This symbol indicates matters that may lead to death or serious
injury if ignored or incorrectly handled.
Caution
This symbol indicates matters that may lead to injury or physical
damage if ignored or incorrectly handled.
Sample Warnings
The symbol alerts you to actions that must be performed.
The symbol alerts you to prohibited actions.
The symbol may be combined with other symbols to indicate that a specific action
is prohibited.
Examples
= Do not touch = Do not disassemble
Observe the following precautions to ensure safe use of this unit.
Danger
Do not attempt to disassemble, repair or alter the equipment yourself. The highvoltage circuitry in the equipment poses significant electrical hazard.
Warning
Keep the equipment out of the reach of children.
Do not touch the internal components of the equipment if they become exposed as
a result of being dropped or damaged. The high-voltage circuitry in the equipment
could lead to an electric shock. Remove the battery as soon as possible, being careful
to avoid electric shocks or burns. Take the equipment to your nearest dealer or service
center if it is damaged.
Do not use the equipment in wet areas as this could result in fire or electric shock.
Do not use the equipment near flammable gases, gasoline, benzene, thinner or
similar substances to avoid the risk of explosion, fire or burns.
• Do not use the equipment in locations where usage is restricted or prohibited as
this may lead to disasters or accidents.
Caution
Do not allow the equipment to get wet. In addition, do not operate it with wet hands.
Both pose the risk of electric shock.
Safety Precautions
for Accessories
When using optional products, carefully read the instructions
provided with the product before using that product.10
Package Contents................................................................................................................. 2
Introduction............................................................................................................................ 3
Safety Precautions................................................................................................................ 6
Names of Parts ....................................................................................................15
Upgrading the Product .....................................................................................16
Updating the firmware .....................................................................................................16
Shooting...............................................................................................................18
Level Indicator .....................................................................................................................18
Macro Functions..................................................................................................................18
Built-in Flash.........................................................................................................................18
Mode P: Program Shift......................................................................................................19
M: Manual Exposure Mode..............................................................................................21
Addition of Scene Modes.................................................................................................21
Table of Contents11
Enlarging pictures..............................................................................................................22
Addition of new target shift function..........................................................................23
Registering Functions to the Up-down Dial .............................................................24
Addition of Supported Sizes for Auto Resize Zoom...............................................24
Playback Mode....................................................................................................24
Camera Unit Information Display .................................................................................24
Settings ................................................................................................................25
[Picture Quality/Size].........................................................................................................25
Photographs...............................................................................................................26
Movies...........................................................................................................................27
[Auto Bracket] ......................................................................................................................28
[Interval Shooting] .............................................................................................................28
[Noise Reduction]...............................................................................................................29
[White Balance] ...................................................................................................................29
[ISO Setting]..........................................................................................................................301
[Focus Assist]........................................................................................................................31
[Dynamic Range Compensation]..................................................................................32
[Shutter Speed Auto Shift] ..............................................................................................33
Key Custom Settings Tab Menu .......................................................................34
[Reg. My Settings]...............................................................................................................34
[ADJ. Lever Settings]..........................................................................................................34
[Shutter Button Confirmation].......................................................................................35
[Set Fn1/Fn2 Buttons]........................................................................................................35
[ADJ. Direct ISO Control] ..................................................................................................36
[Delete My Settings] ..........................................................................................................37
[Restore Defaults] ...............................................................................................................371
Setup Menu .........................................................................................................38
[ISO Step Setting]................................................................................................................38
[ISO Auto-High Settings]..................................................................................................38
[Sleep Mode] [Auto Power Off] .....................................................................................38
[Level Setting]......................................................................................................................39
[Level (Tilt) Calibration] ....................................................................................................39
[Digital Zoom Image] Setting.........................................................................................39
[Target Zoom Play].............................................................................................................40
[Spot AF Area Setting].......................................................................................................40
[Zoom Display Release]....................................................................................................40
[Focus assist selection]......................................................................................................41
[Keep shooting conditions].............................................................................................41
[White Saturation Display] ..............................................................................................42
[Copyright notice] ..............................................................................................................42
[Firmware Version]..............................................................................................................421
Specifications ......................................................................................................43
Internal Memory/Memory Card Capacity..................................................................49
Appendices..........................................................................................................52
Optional Accessories.........................................................................................................52
Precautions for Use ............................................................................................................54
Equipment Care and Storage.........................................................................................56
Warranty and Servicing....................................................................................................581
Names of Parts
1 2 3
1 Connector
2 Ring cap
3 Lens1
Upgrading the Product
Updating the firmware
When you first attach the camera unit to the camera body, the version
update function will start automatically if the firmware of the camera body
need to be updated. In such case, update the firmware of the camera body
using the following procedure.
If the firmware version is already up to date, the version update function
will not start and you can use the lens right away.
1 Check that the camera is turned off and attach the lens mount unit to
the camera body.
• For details about how to attach the camera unit, refer to the Camera Body
User Guide.1
2 Turn on the camera body.
• A confirmation message about updating the firmware appears.
3 Press the Fn1/Fn2 buttons to select [Yes] and then press the MENU/
OK button.
• The firmware update begins and the following messages appear on the
picture display.
[Checking rewrite file]
[Rewriting program]
The camera restarts and the firmware version will be displayed, and then
the update will be completed.
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• To confirm the firmware version, with the camera off, keep the 6 (Play)
button pressed for more than 1 second while holding the – button
pressed down. The firmware version will appear for about 20 seconds.
• For the latest information on firmware updates, see the Ricoh Web site
(http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/). 1
Shooting
Level Indicator
In addition to the horizontal direction, tilt (front-back direction) can also be
checked.
Macro Functions
The Macro Shooting, Macro Target, Auto Macro, and Minimum Shooting
Distance Display during Macro Shooting functions are not available.
Built-in Flash
If the built-in flash is used, vignetting will occur in the bottom portion of
the image. Use the external flash (GF-1) for flash photography.1
Mode P: Program Shift
The diagram on the following page gives estimates of the shift range for
various combinations of aperture values and shutter speeds. The actual
values may vary depending on EV (exposure value).
In these examples, the flash mode is set to [Flash Off], and the ISO setting is
set to [ISO 200].0
: Wide
: Tele
Ev5
Ev6
Ev4
Ev3
Ev2
Ev1
Ev0
Ev-1
Ev-2
8
9
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
F16
F22
F11
F8.0
F5.6
F4.0
F2.8
F2.0
F1.4
F1.0
-1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
2
-2
4
-3
8 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000
Ev7 Ev8 Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19
F22.0
F3.5 1
M: Manual Exposure Mode
You can select between B (Bulb) and T (Time) for the shutter speed.
With B, the image is exposed while the shutter release button is pressed
and exposure ends when the button is released. With T, exposure starts
when the shutter release button is pressed and ends when it is pressed
again. In either mode, the camera stops shooting compulsorily once 180
sec. has elapsed.
[Auto] and [Auto-Hi] of the ISO setting can also be used.
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
B and T can both be operated using the optional cable switch (CA-1).
Addition of Scene Modes
[Miniaturize], [High Contrast B&W], [Soft Focus], [Cross Process], and [Toy
Camera] have been added to Scene Mode.
Vignetting can be set in [Cross Process] and [Toy Camera].
Caution ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Depending on the firmware version that was being used, the setting
for vignetting may be reset to the default when the firmware version is
updated.
Enlarging pictures
Pressing and holding down the MENU/OK button enlarges and displays the
center. Pressing and holding down the MENU/OK button again enlarges
the center and displays the enlarged part over the entire screen. Pressing
and holding the MENU/OK button again returns to normal display. When
focusing manually, press the shutter button halfway to return to normal
display.
You can set the display magnification by pressing and holding down the t
(Self-timer) button or by selecting [Magnification Ratio] from the shooting
menu. Select from [2×], [4×], or [8×] using the +/- buttons, and then press
the MENU/OK button.
When moving the target or focusing manually, press the direction keys (+/-
/Fn1/Fn2) to move the magnified area.
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• The display returns to the normal display when the following is operated
in Enlarged View mode:
• exposure compensation is executed
• the Direct button is operated
• If AE Lock is turned on before the entire image is enlarged, AE will
continue to run during Enlarged View, and pictures will be captured at
the locked AE settings.
• You can register [Enlrg Part] and [Enlrg All] to the [Set Fn1/Fn2 Button] in
the Key Custom Settings menu.
Addition of new target shift function
Pressing the ADJ. lever displays target shift and enables selecting the
tracking target.
Pressing the d button during target shift returns the target to the center of
the image. Pressing the d button again cancels target shift.
Registering Functions to the Up-down Dial
You can switch between modes using the Up-down dial when Flash mode
and Self-timer are set to on.
Addition of Supported Sizes for Auto Resize Zoom
Auto resize zoom supports all aspect ratios.
Playback Mode
Camera Unit Information Display
You can switch the page by pressing the ! and " buttons. Camera unit
information and copyright information are displayed on the second page.
Settings
[Picture Quality/Size]
The [RAW only] option has been added. This option does not
simultaneously save a JPEG copy.
The following picture quality, image size and aspect ratio options are
available for the [Picture Quality/Size] setting.
A photograph‘s file size will depend on the combination of picture quality
and image size used. When recording movies, you can select the [Movie
Size].
Photographs
Item Aspect ratio Compression Image size (pixels)
RAW 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4928×2768
4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4352×3264
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4928×3264
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
3264×3264
L (Large) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 4928×2768
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 4352×3264
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 4928×3264
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 3264×3264
M (Middle) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 3456×1944
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3072×2304
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 3456×2304
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2304×2304
Item Aspect ratio Compression Image size (pixels)
5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944
3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536
1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960
VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480
*1 When [RAW] is selected, this is the setting used for the JPEG copy.
*2 Depending on the area photographed, black bands may appear on the top and bottom
of the picture display.
*3 Depending on the area photographed, black bands may appear at the right and left sides
of the picture display.
Movies
Item Movie size
HD1280 1280×720
VGA640 640×480
QVGA320 320×240
[Auto Bracket]
[ISO-BKT] can be selected. With the value set for the ISO sensitivity setting
in the shooting menu as the standard, 3 images can be shot with differing
ISO settings; one at -1/3EV of the standard (set) value, one at the standard
(set) value, and one at +1/3EV of the standard (set) value.
Caution ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Since shooting is performed within the ISO sensitivity range that can be set,
the bracketing range may not be 1/3EV or an image may be shot with the
same settings, depending on the [ISO Setting].
[Interval Shooting]
The number of shots to be taken can be set. When this is set, the “remaining
number of shots” is displayed during shooting.
The shooting interval can be set to a minimum of 2 seconds, and the
number of shots to be taken can be set to a maximum of 99 shots.
[Noise Reduction]
Perform noise reduction from [Off], [Auto], [Weak], [Strong], or [MAX]. The
time required to record images varies with the option selected.
Caution ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
You cannot use this function when [Portrait], [Sports], [Miniaturize], [High
Contrast B&W], [Soft Focus], [Cross Process], [Toy Camera], or [Skew Correct
Mode] is selected in the scene modes.
[White Balance]
You can select [Incandescent Lamp1] or [Incandescent Lamp2].
Using [Incandescent Lamp2] will leave a slightly redder tint compared to
[Incandescent Lamp1].
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• When [Incandescent Lamp2] is selected, images will be shot with the
same color shades as with the [Incandescent] setting described in the
Camera Body User Guide. 0
• If the flash (GF-1) is fired using DISP. in [Manual], the white balance will be
set to the metering results calculated when the flash went off.
[ISO Setting]
[Auto], [Auto-Hi], [ISO-LO], [ISO 200] to [ISO 3200] can be selected.
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• [ISO-LO] is equivalent to ISO 100. However, the dynamic range gets
narrower and the higher brightness levels make whiteout more likely to
occur.
• When [Auto] is selected and the flash is used, the sensitivity used will gain
up to ISO 800 equivalent.
• The step setting for ISO can be selected in [ISO Step Setting] (GP. 38) in
the setup menu.
• When [Auto] is selected and the flash is not used, the minimum and
maximum values for the ISO sensitivity will be ISO 200 and ISO 400.1
[Focus Assist]
The shape outlines and contrast of the images shown on the picture display
are intensified, making it easier to adjust the focus.
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• When focusing manually, the intensification of the shape outline or
contrast will be released by pressing the shutter button halfway.
• You can select the display method for Focus Assist from [Focus assist
selection] in the setup menu. (GP. 41)
[Dynamic Range Compensation]
The camera captures a wide range of tones from dark to bright. The
intensity can be selected from [Off], [Weak], [Medium], or [Strong].
Caution ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Available ISO settings are limited in dynamic range compensation mode.
ISO Step Setting
1/3EV
ISO Step Setting
1EV
Weak ISO 400 to ISO 2000 ISO 400 to ISO 1600
Medium ISO 500 to ISO 1600 ISO 800 to ISO 1600
Strong ISO 640 to ISO 1250 ISO 800
• If [Strong] is selected, more noise are likely to occur in images.
• If using the digital zoom, Dynamic Range Compensation has no effect.
• The desired effect may not be achieved if the scene is too bright or too
dark.
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Setting [Multi] for Exposure Metering is recommended when using the
dynamic range compensation function.
• Dynamic range compensation can be applied to a RAW image.
[Shutter Speed Auto Shift]
When the [Shutter Speed Auto Shift] setting in the shooting menu is set to
[On] while the mode dial is set to “S”, the camera will automatically adjust
the shutter speed to obtain the best exposure when it cannot be obtained
using the shutter speed that was set manually.
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The [Shutter Speed Auto Shift] setting will not appear when the mode dial is
set to a mode other than “S”.
Key Custom Settings Tab Menu
[Reg. My Settings]
You can select from any of My Settings Box [1] to [6] and Card [1] to [6] for
the save location.
[Spot AF Area Setting] in the setup menu and the zoom position can also
be registered. When [Zoom Position] in [Edit My Settings] is selected,
settings can be edited.
[ADJ. Lever Settings]
You can set the [Aspect Ratio] function in [ADJ. Lever Setting 1] to [ADJ.
Lever Setting 4].
If you set the Aspect Ratio function, and press the ADJ. Lever button,
will appear, allowing you to set the aspect ratio.
[Shutter Button Confirmation]
When [ADJ./DIRECT] is set, pressing the shutter release button halfway
down will finalize settings in ADJ. mode and on the DIRECT screen, and you
will be able to shoot pictures. When [ADJ.] is set, the ADJ. mode settings
will be finalized, enabling you to shoot pictures. When [DIRECT] is set, the
DIRECT screen settings will be finalized, enabling you to shoot pictures.
After you finish shooting pictures, the system will return to the Monitoring
screen.
[Set Fn1/Fn2 Buttons]
[Enlrg Display], [Focus Assist], [Aspect Ratio], and [Dynamic Range
Compensation] functions are added.
[ADJ. Direct ISO Control]
When [ADJ. Direct ISO Control] is set to [On], you can push the ADJ. lever
sideways when shooting is possible to change the ISO setting. The default
setting is [Off].
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• The ADJ. lever can be used to adjust sensitivity while the shutter button
is pressed halfway in program shift and aperture priority modes (in
program shift mode, sensitivity can be adjusted even after the shutter
button is released, as long as shutter speed and aperture are displayed).
Note that once sensitivity has been adjusted in this manner, [Auto] and
[Auto-Hi] can not be re-selected.
• In manual exposure mode, you cannot use the ADJ. lever to change the
ISO setting.
[Delete My Settings]
The settings registered to [My Settings Box] in [Reg. My Settings], to [Card],
and to [MY1], [MY2], and [MY3] on the Mode dial return to their defaults.
[Restore Defaults]
The key custom settings will be reset.
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Settings set in [Reg. My Settings] will not be reset.
Setup Menu
[ISO Step Setting]
The [ISO Setting] in the shooting settings menu can be set in intervals of
[1EV] or [1/3EV].
[ISO Auto-High Settings]
You can set the upper limits for the ISO setting and the shutter speed for
switching the ISO setting when [ISO Setting] is set to [Auto-Hi].
[Sleep Mode] [Auto Power Off]
You can set the time allowed to elapse before the camera enters [Sleep
Mode] or activates [Auto Power Off] from a range of 1 minute to 30
minutes.
[Level Setting]
[Off], [Level + Tilt], [Level], [Level + Sound], and [Sound] can be selected.
[Level (Tilt) Calibration]
Register the current perspective as the standard.
[Digital Zoom Image] Setting
The size of the recorded image varies depending on the auto resize zoom,
as follows.
Zoom ratio Image size (pixels) Zoom ratio Image size (pixels)
Approx. 1.0× L Approx. 2.1× 3M
Approx. 1.4× M Approx. 3.4× 1M
Approx. 1.7× 5M Approx. 6.8× VGA0
[Target Zoom Play]
With Enlarged Display in playback mode, you can zoom in on the image
centered at the position to which the camera was shifted by target shift
during shooting.
[Spot AF Area Setting]
You can select the AF area for when [Focus] in the shooting settings menu
is set to [Spot AF]. [Normal] or [Pinpoint] can be selected. The AF area for
[Pinpoint] is smaller than the AF area for [Normal].
[Zoom Display Release]
You can select whether to maintain or cancel the enlarged view after
shooting pictures in Enlarged View mode. Selecting [Off] maintains
Enlarged View mode and [On] cancels it after pictures are shot.1
[Focus assist selection]
When [Focus Assist] is set to [On] in the shooting menu, you can select
[MODE1] or [MODE2].
MODE1: Shape outlines for subjects/objects in focus are enhanced.
MODE2: The picture display switches to black and white, and the area in
focus glows in white.
[Keep shooting conditions]
When this is set to [On], if you continue to press the shutter release button
halfway after shooting without releasing the shutter, the focus, aperture,
shutter speed, ISO, and white balance settings are retained.
Caution ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• The shooting conditions are not retained in the following cases.
• [Movie] and [Skew Correct Mode] of scene mode
• Interval shooting
• Continuous mode
• Self-timer
• When set to [On], [Multi-P AUTO] of [White Balance] operates as [Auto]
and [Dynamic Range Compensation] is invalid.
[White Saturation Display]
When set to [On], the white saturation areas of the image flash when
displayed in White Saturation of playback mode.
[Copyright notice]
Enter the copyright information to write this information into the Exif data
of the image.
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The recorded copyright information can be checked in the details +
histogram display of the playback screen.
[Firmware Version]
The firmware version of the camera is displayed. If a firmware update file is
saved on a memory card, the firmware can be updated.
Specifications
Specifications are given for the camera unit mounted on a GXR body.
Effective pixels Approximately 16.2 million
Image sensor 23.6 mm × 15.7 mm CMOS (total pixels: approx. 16.5 million)
Lens Focal length 15.7 mm to 55.5 mm (35-mm format equivalent: 24 mm to
85 mm)
Aperture
(f-number)
f/3.5 – f/5.5
Focus range
(from lens)
Approx. 25 cm – 8 (telephoto end)
Construction 11 elements in 9 groups (3 aspherical lens elements with 6
surfaces)
Filter diameter 55 mm
Zoom 4.0× digital zoom (photographs), 3.6 × digital zoom (movies);
approx. 6.8× auto resize zoom (VGA)
Focus mode Contrast AF-based multi and spot AF; MF; Snap; 8 (focus lock
and AF-assist)
Shutter
speed
Photographs 1/3200–180s, B (Bulb), T (Time) (upper and lower limits vary
according to shooting and flash mode)
Movies 1/2000–1/30s
Exposure
control
Metering TTL-CCD metering in multi (256-segment), center-weighted,
and spot modes with autoexposure lock
Mode Program AE, aperture priority AE, manual exposure, shutter
priority AE, move target function
Exposure
compensation
Manual (-4.0 to +4.0EV in increments 1/3EV or 1/2EV), auto
bracketing (-2.0 to +2.0EV in increments 1/3EV or 1/2EV)
Exposure link
range (Auto
shooting
mode, Centerweighted light
metering)
Wide angle: 3.2–16.8EV
Telephoto: 3.6–18.1EV
(Exposure range for auto ISO calculated using values for
ISO 100.)
Note: At 6.0EV or lower, each drop of 1.0EV is associated with
a 0.25EV drop in brightness. Brightness drops by no more
than -1.0EV.
ISO sensitivity
(Standard Output Sensitivity)
Auto, Auto-Hi, ISO-LO, ISO 200, ISO 250, ISO 320, ISO 400, ISO
500, ISO 640, ISO 800, ISO 1000, ISO 1250, ISO 1600, ISO 2000,
ISO 2500, ISO 3200
White balance mode Auto, Multi-P AUTO, Outdoors, Cloudy, Incandescent Lamp1,
Incandescent Lamp2, Fluorescent Lamp, Manual, Detail; white
balance bracketing
Flash
(with GF-1)
Flash output
adjustment
TTL flash, manual flash, ambient light automatic
Flash Mode Red-eye reduction, Flash On, Slow sync, Manual
Timing Front/rear curtain sync
Shooting mode Auto Shooting Mode, Program Shift Mode, Aperture Priority
Mode, Shutter Speed Priority, Manual Exposure Mode, scene
mode (Movie, Portrait, Sports, Landscape, Nightscape, Skew
Correct Mode, Miniaturize, High Contrast B&W, Soft Focus,
Cross Process, Toy Camera), My Settings
Continuous
mode
Number of
pictures shot
in Continuous
(Picture Size:
RAW)
Noise Reduction off: 3 pictures
Noise Reduction on: 2 pictures
Number of
pictures shot
in M-Cont Plus
(1 set)
HI (1280×856) : 30 pictures (30 Frames/Sec)
LO (4928×3264) : 14 pictures (2.5 Frames/Sec)
Compression*1
FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2
Image size
(pixels)
Photographs 4928×2768, 4352×3264, 4928×3264, 3264×3264,
3456×1944, 3072×2304, 3456×2304, 2304×2304,
2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480
Movies 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240
File size
(approx.)
RAW 16:9 NORMAL: 23,445KB/frame, FINE: 25,703KB/frame,
VGA: 20,508 KB/frame, RAW only: 20,332KB/frame
4:3 NORMAL: 24,443KB/frame, FINE: 26,795KB/frame,
VGA: 21,405 KB/frame, RAW only: 21,181KB/frame
3:2 NORMAL: 27,603KB/frame, FINE: 30,265KB/frame,
VGA: 24,139KB/frame, RAW only: 23,937KB/frame
1:1 NORMAL: 18,383KB/frame, FINE: 20,147KB/frame,
VGA: 16,105KB/frame, RAW only: 15,929KB/frame
L 16:9 NORMAL: 2,901KB/frame, FINE: 4,999KB/frame
4:3 NORMAL: 3,041KB/frame, FINE: 5,226KB/frame
3:2 NORMAL: 3,415KB/frame, FINE: 5,889KB/frame
1:1 NORMAL: 2,288KB/frame, FINE: 3,927KB/frame
File size
(approx.)
M 16:9 NORMAL: 1,481KB/frame, FINE: 2,514KB/frame
4:3 NORMAL: 1,579KB/frame, FINE: 2,668KB/frame
3:2 NORMAL: 1,749KB/frame, FINE: 2,974KB/frame
1:1 NORMAL: 1,192KB/frame, FINE: 2,008KB/frame
5M 4:3 FINE: 2,293KB/frame
3M 4:3 FINE: 1,479KB/frame
File size
(approx.)
1M 4:3 FINE: 818KB/frame
VGA 4:3 FINE: 202KB/frame
Battery life
(based on CIPA standard)
DB-90: approx. 400shots *3
(Based on CIPA guide line)
Dimensions (W×H×D) Camera unit only:
71.4mm(w)×70.5mm(h)×93.3mm(d) (Based on CIPA guide
line)
When mounted on the camera body:
113.9mm(w)×74.7mm(h)×98.5mm(d) (Based on CIPA guide
line)
Weight (approx.) Camera unit only: 350g
When mounted on the camera body: 550g (Including the
battery and SD memory card)
Operating temperature 0°C to 40°C
Operating humidity 90% or less
Storage temperature –20°C to 60°C
*1 The options available vary with image size.
*2 A JPEG file is also recorded (the JPEG file may be a FINE- or NORMAL-quality file with
the dimensions as the RAW file or a VGA file 640×480 pixels in size). RAW files use the
standard DNG format promoted by Adobe Systems, Inc.
*3 For reference only; actual number of shots varies greatly according to how camera is
used. We recommend that you carry spare batteries when in use for extended periods.
Internal Memory/Memory Card Capacity
The following values are given as a reference of the storage capacity of the
internal memory and memory cards of various sizes, by picture quality and
image size, when using the FINE picture quality.
Photographs
Compression Image size
(pixels)
Internal
memory
1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
RAW*
FINE
4928×2768 3 37 76 150 306 614 1233
4352×3264 3 36 73 144 294 589 1182
4928×3264 2 31 64 127 260 522 1047
3264×3264 4 47 97 191 391 784 1573
L
FINE
4928×2768 16 179 365 718 1468 2941 5900
4352×3264 15 172 349 685 1401 2807 5632
4928×3264 14 152 310 609 1245 2495 5006
3264×3264 21 228 465 914 1868 3743 75100
Compression Image size
(pixels)
Internal
memory
1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
M
FINE
3456×1944 32 357 723 1419 2902 5814 11662
3072×2304 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014
3456×2304 27 302 614 1206 2466 4941 9913
2304×2304 41 447 903 1774 3627 7267 14578
5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238
3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063
1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181
VGA/FINE 640×480 368 4028 7681 15082 30828 61759 123888
* When [RAW] is selected, this is the compression used for the JPEG copy. 1
Movies
Image size (pixels) Internal memory 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
1280×720
30 frames/second
16sec. 3min.
3sec.
6min.
14sec.
12min.
14sec.
25min.
1sec.
50min.
7sec.
100min.
33sec.
640×480
30 frames/second
49sec. 8min.
55sec.
18min.
8sec.
35min.
38sec.
72min.
50sec.
145min.
54sec.
292min.
41sec.
320×240
30 frames/second
1min.
59sec.
21min.
39sec.
44min.
2sec.
86min.
28sec.
176min.
44sec.
354min.
3sec.
710min.
13sec.
Caution ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The maximum uninterrupted recording size for a single movie is 4 GB. The
maximum recording time is around 15 minutes at 1280×720 size, around 46
minutes at 640×480 size, and around 90 minutes at 320×240 size.
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
When recording movies with the movie size set to 1280×720, using SD/
SDHC memory cards with a speed class of 6 or more is recommended.
Appendices
Optional Accessories
The camera unit can be used with the items (sold separately) listed below.
Les cap (LC-3) Lens hood (LH-2)
Note --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Before using an optional accessory, see the documentation that came
with the product.
• For the latest information on optional accessories, visit the Ricoh website
(http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/).
Caution ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The lens cap (LC-3) and lens hood (LH-2) cannot be used together.
If the lens hood (LH-2) is attached when the lens cap (LC-3) is already
attached, the lens cap may break.
Removing/attaching the ring cap -------------------------------------------------
Remove the ring cap when using the optional ring cap (LC-3).
Removing the ring cap
Turn the ring cap counterclockwise while the
camera is turned off and remove from the
camera unit.
Attaching the ring cap
With the camera turned off, align the
marking on the ring cap (2) with the
marking on the camera unit (1) and turn
the ring cap clockwise until it clicks. 1
22
Precautions for Use
• The warranty supplied with this product is only valid within the country of purchase.
• Should the product fail or malfunction while out of the country, the manufacturer
assumes no responsibility for servicing the product locally or bearing any
expenditure incurred thereby.
• Do not drop the equipment or subject it to physical shocks.
• When carrying the equipment, be careful that it does not strike other objects.
Particular care is required to protect the lens.
• When attaching a filter or lens hood, be careful not to apply excessive force.
• Abrupt changes in temperature may cause condensation, resulting in visible
condensation inside which can lead to the malfunction of the equipment. This
can be avoided by placing the equipment in a plastic bag to slow the temperature
change, and removing it only after the air in the bag has reached the same
temperature its surroundings.
• Keep the equipment dry and avoid handling it with wet hands. Failure to observe
these precautions could result in malfunction of the equipment or electric shock.
• Keep the connector clean.
Tip: Avoiding Condensation --------------------------------------------------------
Condensation is particularly likely to occur if you move to an area with a
sharply different temperature, if humidity is high, in a cold room after the
heater has come on, or where the camera is exposed to cold air from an air
conditioner or other device.
Equipment Care and Storage
Caring for the Equipment
• Photographs can be affected by fingerprints and other foreign matter on the
lens. Avoid touching the lens with your fingers. Remove dust or lint with a
blower from a camera supply store, or gently clean the lens with a soft, dry
cloth. Be especially careful around the barrel.
• Clean the equipment thoroughly after using it at the beach or handling
cosmetics. Do not expose the equipment to volatile substances such as
thinner, benzene, or pesticides. Failure to observe this precaution could result
in damage to the equipment or its finish.
• In the unlikely event of malfunction, visit a Ricoh Repair Center.
• This equipment is a high precision device. Do not disassemble.
Storage
• Do not store the camera where it will be exposed to: extreme heat or
humidity; large changes in temperature or humidity; dust, dirt, or sand; severe
vibration; prolonged contact with chemicals, including mothballs and other
insect repellent, or with vinyl or rubber products; strong magnetic fields (for
example, in the vicinity of a monitor, transformer, or magnet).
• When storing, place the product in a camera case, etc. that does not collect
dirt or fluff to prevent dirt or dust from attaching itself to the camera.
In addition, when carrying the camera, do not place the camera directly into a
pocket, etc., in order to prevent dirt and dust from getting on the camera.
Warranty and Servicing
1. This product is backed by a limited warranty. During the warranty period
mentioned in the Warranty supplied with your equipment, any defective
parts will be repaired free of charge. In the event of equipment malfunction,
contact the dealer from which you purchased the equipment or your nearest
Ricoh Repair Center. Please note that you will not be reimbursed for the cost of
bringing the equipment to the Ricoh Repair Center.
2. This warranty does not cover any damage resulting from:
1 failure to follow the instructions in the instruction manual;
2 repair, modification or overhaul not conducted by an authorized service
center listed in the instruction manual;
3 fire, natural disaster, act of God, lightning, abnormal voltage, etc.;
4 improper storage (noted in the “Camera Body User Guide”), leaking
of battery and other fluids, mold, or otherwise insufficient care of the
equipment.
5 submergence in water (flooding), exposure to alcohol or other beverages,
infiltration of sand or mud, physical shock, dropping of the equipment, or
pressure on the equipment, and other unnatural causes.
3. After the warranty period has passed, you will be liable for all repair fees,
including those incurred at an authorized service center.
4. You will be liable for all repair fees, even within the warranty period, if the
warranty card is not attached or if the distributor’s name or the purchase date
have been changed or are not indicated on the card.
5. Expenses for overhaul and thorough inspection by special request of the
customer will be charged to the customer, whether or not they are incurred
during the warranty period.
6. Any consequential damages arising from failure of the equipment, such as
expenses incurred in taking pictures or loss of expected profit, will not be
reimbursed whether they occur during the warranty period or not.
7. The warranty is only valid in the country in which the equipment was
purchased.
* The above provisions refer to repairs offered free of charge, and do not limit
your legal rights.
* The intention of the above provisions is also described in the warranty card
provided with this equipment.0
8. Parts essential to the servicing of the equipment (that is, components required
to maintain the functions and quality of the equipment) will be available for a
period of five years after the equipment is discontinued.
9. Please note that if the equipment is seriously damaged by flooding,
submergence, infiltration of sand or mud, violent shocks or dropping, it may
not be repairable, and restoration to its original condition may be impossible.
Notes-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Before sending the camera in for repair, check the camera body and read
the instruction manual again to ensure proper operation.
• Some repairs require a significant amount of time to complete.
• When sending the equipment to a service center, please include a note
which describes the defective part and the problem as precisely as
possible.
• Remove all accessories not related to the problem before sending the
camera to the service center.1
Telephone Support Numbers in Europe
UK (from within the UK) 0203 026 2290
(from outside the UK) +44 203 026 2290
Deutschland (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438
(außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438
France (à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70
(en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94
Italia (dall'Italia) 02 4032 6427
(dall'estero) +39 02 4032 6427
España (desde España) 911 230396
(desde fuera de España) +34 911 230396
Belgique (en dehors de la Belgique) +32 2 8088300 (Français)
(van buiten België) +32 505 51082 (Vlaams)
Nederland (van buiten Nederland) +31 208081108
http://www.service.ricohpmmc.com/
PHOTO STYLE Website for Ricoh Digital Camera Users
PHOTO STYLE offers useful information to make photos and photography
more enjoyable for Ricoh digital camera users.
Basic Knowledge
Easy explanations on the mechanisms and functions of digital cameras
Photo-technique
Useful photography techniques organized by subject
Photographers Gallery
Photos taken by professional photographers
Photo contest
A collection of brilliant photos gathered from around the world
Access the following URL:
http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/photostyle/*L455 2971A*
If You Encounter a Problem with This Product
Ricoh offices
RICOH COMPANY, LTD.
3-2-3, Shin-Yokohama Kouhoku-ku, Yokohama City, Kanagawa 222-8530,
Japan
http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc
RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006, U.S.A.
1–800–22RICOH
http://www.ricoh-usa.com/
RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC)
Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY
(innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438
(außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438
http://www.ricohpmmc.com/
RICOH ASIA PACIFIC OPERATIONS
LIMITED
21/F, One Kowloon, 1 Wang Yuen Street, Kowloon Bay, Hong Kong
Ricoh Company, Ltd.
Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo
104-8222, Japan
2011 December
EN USA GB GB AE AE
Printed in China
Avant de commencer
Avant d’utiliser votre boîtier d’appareil photo, prenez le temps
de vous familiariser avec les commandes et les écrans d’affichage
(pages 1–10). Reportez-vous à cette section pour référence pendant votre
lecture du reste du manuel.
Photographie et lecture de base
Lisez d’abord cette section avant d’utiliser l’appareil photo pour la première fois.
Elle détaille les étapes à suivre pour préparer l’appareil, prendre des
photos et les lire (pages 11–44).
Référence
Lisez cette section pour en savoir plus sur les sujets non traités dans la section
« Photographie et lecture de base ». Elle détaille la prise de vue avancée,
les options de lecture, ainsi que la manière d’imprimer des photos,
de configurer les réglages de l’appareil et de copier des photos sur
un ordinateur (pages 45–187).
La batterie rechargeable doit être chargée avant usage. La
batterie n’est pas chargée au moment de l’achat.
BOÎTIER DE L’APPAREIL PHOTO
NUMÉRIQUE GXR
Mode d’emploi du boîtier de
l’appareil photo
Le numéro de série du produit est gravé sous le boîtier de
l’appareil photo.ii
Contenu de l’emballage
Vérifiez dans l’emballage qu’il ne manque aucun des
éléments listés ci-dessous.
* L’aspect des éléments inclus peut être différent.
Boîtier de l’appareil
photo GXR
Le numéro de série
est gravé sous le
boîtier de l’appareil
photo.
Câble USB avec
connecteur mini-B
Il permet de
raccorder le
boîtier de
l’appareil photo à
un téléviseur.
Câble A/V
Il permet de
boîtier de
l’appareil photo à
un téléviseur.
Capuchon du
connecteur
Ce capuchon
est installé
sur le boîtier
de l’appareil
photo.
Protège-griffe
alimentée
Cette protection
est installée sur la
griffe alimentée du
boîtier de l’appareil.
Batterie
rechargeable DB-90
Chargeur de batterie BJ-9
• CD : il contient le logiciel et un Mode d’emploi du
logiciel.
• Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo (le présent manuel)
• Courroie d’encolure
• Garantie
Conseil : fixation dela courroie d’encolure
Passez les extrémités de la courroie
d’encolure dans les oeillets de la
courroie, de chaque côté du boîtier
de l’appareil photo, et insérez
les extrémités dans les attaches,
comme indiqué sur l’illustration.iii
Avis
• Mesures de sécurité : Lisez attentivement toutes les mesures de sécurité
pour garantir une utilisation sans danger.
• Essais de prise de vue : Faites des essais de prise de vue pour vérifier le
fonctionnement correct de l’appareil avant de prendre des photos
d’événements importants.
• Copyright : La reproduction ou la modification de documents, de
magazines et d’autres sources sujettes aux droits d’auteur, autrement
que pour des raisons personnelles, domestiques ou limitées similaires,
est interdite sans le consentement du propriétaire des droits.
• Exonération de responsabilité : Ricoh Co., Ltd. décline toute responsabilité
en cas de défaillance de l’enregistrement ou de l’affichage des photos
résultant d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil.
• Garantie : cet appareil est fabriqué en fonction des caractéristiques
locales et la garantie est valable uniquement dans le pays d’achat.
Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du
produit dans d’autres pays ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense
associée.
• Interférences radio : L’utilisation de cet appareil dans le voisinage d’un
autre équipement électronique peut affecter défavorablement à
la fois l’appareil photo et l’autre dispositif. Des interférences sont
notamment probables si l’appareil est utilisé à proximité d’une
radio ou d’un téléviseur. Ce problème peut être résolu en déplaçant
l’appareil aussi loin que possible de l’autre dispositif, en réorientant
l’antenne de la radio ou du téléviseur, ou encore en branchant la
radio ou le téléviseur sur une prise secteur différente.
© 2009 RICOH CO., LTD. Tous droits réservés. Cette publication ne peut
être reproduite en tout ou en partie sans l’autorisation expresse et
écrite de Ricoh. Ricoh se réserve le droit de modifier le contenu de ce
document à tout moment et sans avis préalable.
Tous les efforts ont été faits pour garantir l’exactitude des informations
contenues dans ce document. Dans le cas où vous rencontreriez néanmoins
une erreur ou une omission, nous vous serions reconnaissants de bien vouloir
nous en avertir à l’adresse indiquée en quatrième de couverture de ce manuel.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista et Internet Explorer sont des marques
déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays.
Macintosh et Mac OS sont des marques déposées d’Apple Inc. aux ÉtatsUnis et dans d’autres pays. Adobe, le logo Adobe et Adobe Reader sont
des marques commerciales d’Adobe Systems Incorporated.
HDMI, le logo et High-Definition Multimedia Interface sont des
marques commerciales ou des marques déposées de HDMI Licensing LLC.
Tous les autres noms de marque mentionnés dans ce document sont la
propriété de leurs propriétaires respectifs.iv
Consignes de sécurité
Symboles d’avertissement
Divers symboles sont utilisés tout au long de ce manuel et sur le produit
lui-même pour prévenir tout risque de blessure ou de dommage aux
biens. Ces symboles et leur signification sont détaillés ci-dessous.
Danger
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent
entraîner rapidement la mort ou des blessures
corporelles sérieuses si les instructions
correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies.
Avertissement
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent
entraîner la mort ou des blessures corporelles
sérieuses si les instructions correspondantes ne
sont pas ou sont mal suivies.
Attention
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent
entraîner des blessures corporelles ou des
dommages aux biens si les instructions
correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies.
Exemples designalisation d’avertissement
Le symbole vous signale des actions qui doivent être
effectuées.
Le symbole vous signale des actions interdites.
Le symbole peut être combiné avec d’autres pour indiquer
qu’une action spécifique est interdite.
Exemples
Ne pas toucher Ne pas démonter
Prenez les précautions indiquées ci-dessous pour utiliser ce matériel
en toute sécurité.
Danger
Ne tentez pas de démonter, de réparer ou de modifier vousmême l’appareil. Les circuits à haute tension de l’appareil vous
font courir un risque de choc électrique.
Ne tentez pas de démonter, de modifier ou de souder vousmême la batterie.v
Ne jetez pas la batterie au feu, ne la chauffez pas, ne la stockez
pas dans des endroits où la température est élevée (par
exemple près d’un feu ou à l’intérieur d’une voiture), et ne la
jetez pas n’importe où. Veillez également à ne pas mouiller la
batterie, à ne pas la jeter dans l’eau ou dans la mer.
N’essayez pas de percer la batterie ou de la compresser. Veillez
à ne pas faire tomber la batterie ni à lui faire subir de choc
important.
N’utilisez pas de batterie visiblement endommagée ou
déformée.
Avertissement
En cas d’anomalies telles que de la fumée ou des odeurs
inhabituelles, mettez l’appareil immédiatement hors tension.
Retirez la batterie dès que possible, en prenant soin d’éviter
tout choc électrique ou brûlure. Si vous alimentez l’appareil
via le secteur, veillez à débrancher le cordon d’alimentation de
la prise secteur pour éviter tout incendie ou choc électrique.
Arrêtez d’utiliser l’appareil dès qu’il présente de tels signes de
dysfonctionnement. Contactez le centre de service après-vente
dès que possible.
Mettez l’appareil immédiatement hors tension s’il entre en
contact avec un objet métallique, de l’eau, du liquide ou si
tout autre objet pénètre à l’intérieur du boîtier de l’appareil.
Retirez la batterie et la carte mémoire dès que possible en
prenant soin d’éviter tout choc électrique ou brûlure. Si vous
alimentez l’appareil via le secteur, veillez à débrancher le cordon
d’alimentation de la prise secteur pour éviter tout incendie ou
choc électrique. Arrêtez d’utiliser l’appareil dès qu’il présente
de tels signes de dysfonctionnement. Contactez le centre de
service après-vente dès que possible.vi
Si l’écran d’affichage des photos est endommagé, évitez tout
contact avec les cristaux liquides qu’il contient. Suivez les
mesures d’urgence suivantes si besoin :
• PEAU : Si des cristaux liquides entrent en contact avec la peau,
essuyez et rincez la zone affectée à grande eau, puis lavez-la
au savon.
• YEUX : Si des cristaux liquides pénètrent dans les yeux, lavezles à l’eau propre pendant au moins 15 minutes et consultez
immédiatement un médecin.
• INGESTION : Si des cristaux liquides sont ingérés, rincez la
bouche à grande eau. Il faut ensuite boire de l’eau en grande
quantité et se faire vomir. Consultez immédiatement un
médecin.
Pour empêcher toute fuite, surchauffe, ignition ou explosion de
la batterie, prenez les précautions suivantes :
• Utilisez uniquement la batterie recommandée pour cet
appareil.
• Ne transportez pas ou ne stockez pas la batterie avec des
objets métalliques, par exemple des stylos à bille métalliques,
des colliers, des pièces de monnaie, des broches, etc.
• Ne placez pas la batterie dans un four à micro-ondes ou un
conteneur à haute pression.
• Si vous constatez une fuite de liquide de batterie ou une
odeur inhabituelle, un changement de couleur, etc. en cours
d’utilisation ou pendant la charge, retirez immédiatement
la batterie du boîtier de l’appareil photo ou du chargeur et
rangez-la dans un endroit à l’abri de toute source de flammes.
Pour empêcher toute ignition, électrocution ou explosion de la
batterie pendant la charge, prenez les précautions suivantes :
• N’alimentez l’appareil qu’à la tension indiquée. Évitez
également d’utiliser des adaptateurs multi-supports et des
cordons prolongateurs.
• Faites attention de ne pas endommager ni d’entortiller les
cordons d’alimentation. Ne placez pas d’objet lourd sur les
cordons d’alimentation, ne le tirez pas et ne le pliez pas de
façon excessive.
• Ne branchez ou ne débranchez pas le cordon d’alimentation
avec les mains mouillées. Pour débrancher un cordon
d’alimentation, attrapez-le toujours par sa fiche.
• Ne couvrez pas l’appareil pendant la charge.vii
Ne laissez pas la batterie et la carte mémoire SD utilisées dans
cet appareil à portée des enfants, afin d’éviter tout risque
d’ingestion accidentelle. L’ingestion des fluides de batterie
est extrêmement dangereuse pour l’être humain. En cas
d’ingestion, recherchez immédiatement une aide médicale.
Conservez l’appareil hors de portée des enfants.
Si le mécanisme interne de l’appareil est exposé suite à un choc
ou autre type de dommage, ne touchez aucun composant
interne. Les circuits à haute tension de l’appareil peuvent causer
des chocs électriques. Retirez la batterie dès que possible, en
prenant soin d’éviter tout choc électrique ou brûlure. Apportez
l’appareil au revendeur ou au service après-vente le plus proche
s’il est endommagé.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans un endroit humide car vous
risqueriez de provoquer un incendie ou de subir une décharge
électrique.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil à proximité de gaz inflammables,
d’essence, de benzène, de solvant ou de substances du même
type pour éviter tout risque d’explosion, d’incendie ou de
brûlure.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans des lieux où son usage est limité
ou interdit afin d’éviter tout risque de catastrophe ou d’accident.
Essuyez la poussière qui s’accumule sur la prise d’alimentation
électrique de l’appareil afin d’éviter tout risque d’incendie.
Pour éviter les risques d’incendie, de choc électrique ou
de blessure, n’utilisez pas le chargeur de batterie avec les
transformateurs électroniques disponibles dans le commerce
lorsque vous voyagez à l’étranger.viii
Prenez les précautions indiquées ci-dessous pour utiliser ce matériel
en toute sécurité.
Attention
Tout contact avec du liquide s’échappant d’une batterie peut
entraîner des brûlures. Si une partie du corps entre en contact
avec une batterie endommagée, lavez immédiatement la zone à
grande eau. (N’utilisez pas de savon.)
Si une batterie commence à fuir, retirez-la immédiatement de
l’appareil et essuyez soigneusement le logement de la batterie
avant d’en installer une autre.
Branchez les cordons d’alimentation fermement dans la prise
secteur. Un cordon mal branché peut causer un incendie.
Ne laissez pas le boîtier de l’appareil photo prendre l’eau ou se
mouiller. Ne l’utilisez pas non plus avec les mains mouillées.
Dans les deux cas, vous risquez de subir une décharge
électrique.
Ne dirigez pas le flash vers le conducteur d’un véhicule, car
cela risquerait de lui faire perdre le contrôle de son véhicule et
pourrait entraîner un accident.
Consignes
de sécurité
relatives aux
accessoires
Avant d’utiliser un produit optionnel, lisez
attentivement les instructions fournies avec ce
produit.ix
Manuels du produit
Les manuels suivants sont livrés avec le boîtier de l’appareil photo
GXR :
Mode d’emploi du boîtier del’appareil photo (le présent livret)
Ce manuel décrit l’utilisation de votre appareil et l’installation
du logiciel fourni.
* Lisez le présent manuel, ainsi que la documentation fournie
avec l’unité appareil photo.
Mode d’emploi du logiciel (fichier PDF)
Le Mode d’emploi du logiciel décrit la procédure pour copier
des photos de votre appareil vers un ordinateur, afin de les
visualiser et de les retoucher. Ce manuel est disponible en
plusieurs langues et chaque version est disponible dans son
propre dossier, lui-même situé dans le dossier « DC Manual »
du CD fourni.
Pour vous y référer plus
facilement, copiez le fichier PDF
du CD sur le disque dur de votre
ordinateur.
Le logiciel de visualisation et de retouche photo « Irodio Photo
& Video Studio » est également fourni avec le produit. Pour en
savoir plus sur l’utilisation de ce logiciel, consultez le menu Aide
dans le logiciel Irodio Photo & Video Studio, ou téléphonez à l’un
des centres d’assistance client suivants :
• Amérique du Nord (U.?S.?A.): +1–800–458–4029 (appel gratuit)
• Royaume- Uni, Allemagne, France et
Espagne :
+800–1532–4865 (appel gratuit)
• Autres pays européens : +44–1489–564–764
• Chine : +86–21–5385–3786
• Autres pays d’Asie : +63–2–438–0090
Heures d’ouverture : de 9h00 à 17h00x
Table des matières
Contenu de l’emballage......................................................................................... ii
Avis..................................................................................................................................... iii
Consignes de sécurité............................................................................................iv
Manuels du produit.................................................................................................ix
Avant de commencer 1
Lisez d’abord cette section avant d’utiliser votre appareil photo pour la première fois.
Introduction ....................................................................................2
Nomenclature de l’appareil photo..................................................................2
Photographie et lecture de base 11
Lisez d’abord cette section avant d’utiliser votre appareil photo pour la première fois.
Premiers pas ..................................................................................12
Chargement de la batterie................................................................................12
Insertion de la batterie.........................................................................................14
Insertion des cartes mémoire .........................................................................15
Installation de l’unité appareil photo sur le boîtier de l’appareil
photo..............................................................................................................................17
Mise sous et hors tension ..................................................................................18
Configuration de base.........................................................................................20
Prise de vue photographique ....................................................21
Tenue de l’appareil photo..................................................................................21
Prise de vue.................................................................................................................22
Zoom..............................................................................................................................26
Prise de vue rapprochée (mode macro)...................................................27
Photographie au flash..........................................................................................28
Retardateur.................................................................................................................31
Indicateur de niveau.............................................................................................32
Visualisation et suppression de photos ...................................34
Visualisation de photos.......................................................................................34
Suppression de photos.......................................................................................39
Touche O (DISP.) .................................................................................................42xi
Référence 45
Lisez cette section pour en savoir plus sur les fonctions de l’appareil photo.
Plus sur la photographie.............................................................46
Mode P : changement de programme .....................................................46
Mode A : priorité à l’ouverture ........................................................................48
Mode S : priorité à l’obturation.......................................................................49
Mode M : exposition manuelle.......................................................................50
Mode 4: Réglages pour diverses scènes....................................52
Modes « MY » : utilisation des réglages personnalisés.....................57
Menu prise de vue..................................................................................................58
Fonctions de lecture ....................................................................94
Visualisation de vidéos.........................................................................................94
Affichage de fichiers MP.....................................................................................95
Menu des réglages de la lecture..............................................101
Menu lecture........................................................................................................... 101
Visualisation des photos sur un téléviseur........................................... 118
Impression de photos................................................................120
Raccordement du boîtier de l’appareil photo ................................... 120
Impression................................................................................................................ 122
Réglages de l’appareil ...............................................................126
Options personnalisées.................................................................................... 129
Configuration ......................................................................................................... 139
Copie des photos sur un ordinateur.......................................151
Windows.................................................................................................................... 151
Macintosh................................................................................................................. 162
Remarques techniques..............................................................167
Résolution des problèmes.............................................................................. 167
Caractéristiques..................................................................................................... 175
Éléments vendus séparément..................................................................... 178
Utilisation du produit à l’étranger.............................................................. 183
Précautions d’emploi ......................................................................................... 183
Entretien et stockage......................................................................................... 185
Garantie et réparation....................................................................................... 186
NOTICES..................................................................................................................... 187
Index .............................................................................................188xii
UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Avant de commencer
Lisez d’abord cette section avant d’utiliser
votre appareil photo pour la première fois.
Introduction .............................................................. 2UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
2
Introduction
Ce manuel décrit comment prendre des photos et les
lire ensuite. Pour vous assurer de tirer le meilleur parti
de ce produit, lisez attentivement ce manuel avant
utilisation et conservez-le à portée de main pendant
l’utilisation de l’appareil.
Nomenclature de l’appareil photo
Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la page dont le
numéro est indiqué à droite de chaque élément.
Vue deface
3 4 5 6 7
12 11
13
8 9 10
14
1 2
1 Sélecteurplus-moins.....................5
2 Touchededéverrouillagedu
sélecteurde mode.........................4
3 Sélecteurde mode........................4
4 Déclencheur ..........................21,23
5 Interrupteur MARCHE/ARRÊT...18,21
6 Lumière AFauxiliaire...........31,140
7 Griffealimentée........................181
8 Couvercledu flash .......................29
9 Microphone..................................–
10 Pointd’attachedeladragonne......ii
11 Repèred’alignementpour fixer
l’unitéappareilphoto..................17
12 Connecteur..................................17
13 Levierdedéverrouillagedel’unité
appareilphoto.............................17
14 Flash............................................28UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Vue de dos
4
1
2
3
17 16
13
14
15
12
9
22 21 20 19
5
6
23
7 8
10
18
11
1 Touche DIRECT..............................5
2 Touche OPEN/f (flash)...............29
3 Touche VF/LCD ............................42
4 Écran d’affichagedesphotos.........8
5 Témoin de miseaupoint
automatique/flash ...18,22,29,141
6 Connecteurducâble USB
..........................120,159,160,162
7 Connecteurducâble A/V ...........118
8 Connecteurducâble mini HDMI...119
9 Manette ADJ. ........................5,134
10 Touche6(lecture)
................................19,34,94,101
11 ToucheN(macro)......................27
12 Touche8(téléobjectif)/
z(vueagrandie).................26,36
13 Touche9(grandangle)/
Z(affichage mosaïque)......26,36
14 Pavédirectionnel.........................37
+ (!).....................................137
– (%).....................................137
Fn1(fonction 1) (#)...............136
Fn2(fonction 2) ($)...............136
15 ToucheC/D
....................................58,101,126
16 ToucheO(DISP.)....................42
17 Touchet(retardateur)/
d(supprimer) .....................31,39
18 Visde fixation dutrépied...........176
19 Couvercledulogementdela
batterie/carte........................14,15
20 Levierdedéverrouillage........14,15
21 Haut-parleur ................................–
22 Pointd’attachedeladragonne......ii
23 Couvercleduconnecteur ...118,121UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Sélecteur de mode
Avant une prise de vue,
appuyez sur la touche de
déverrouillage du sélecteur
de mode (1) et faites
tourner le sélecteur pour
choisir un mode de prise de
vue (2).
1
2
5 (automatique) :
l’appareil définit
l’ouverture et la vitesse
d’obturation pour
obtenir une exposition
optimale (page 21).
M (exposition manuelle) :
vous choisissez
l’ouverture et la vitesse
d’obturation (page 50).
MY, MY2, MY («mes réglages») :
vous sélectionnez l’un des réglages enregistrés
via Enr. Mes réglages (pages 57, 129).
A (priorité à l’ouverture) :
vous choisissez
l’ouverture et vous
laissez l’appareil régler la
vitesse d’obturation pour
obtenir une exposition
optimale (page 48).
4 (scène) :
l’appareil optimise les
réglages pour le sujet,
la scène ou la vidéo
actuelle (page 52).
S(priorité à l’obturation) :
vous choisissez la
vitesse d’obturation et
vous laissez l’appareil
régler l’ouverture pour
obtenir une exposition
optimale (page 49).
P (changement de
programme) :
vous choisissez entre
des combinaisons
d’ouverture et de
vitesse d’obturation qui
produisent la même
exposition (page 46).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Sélecteur plus-moins et manette ADJ.
Lors de la visualisation des photos
ou pendant la navigation dans
les menus, vous pouvez utiliser
le sélecteur plus-moins à la place
des touches + et –, ainsi que
la manette ADJ. à la place des
touches Fn et Fn2. La manette
ADJ. et le sélecteur plus-moins
peuvent également être utilisés
pour sélectionner l’ouverture et
la vitesse d’obturation dans les
modes P, A, S et M.
Sélecteur plus-moins
Manette ADJ.
Vous pouvez assigner à la manette ADJ. des rubriques
fréquemment utilisées du menu prise de vue, pour en
faciliter l’accès (page 134). Pour afficher une rubrique
du menu prise de vue, centrez la manette ADJ. et
enfoncez-la ; vous pouvez alors utiliser la manette et le
sélecteur plus-moins pour sélectionner une option.
Remarque
Les rubriques Options sélecteur de mode M et Options
du sélecteur de mode lecture de l’onglet des options
personnalisées peuvent être utilisées pour modifier les fonctions
assignées au sélecteur plus-moins et à la manette ADJ. (page 138).
Touche DIRECT
Appuyez sur la touche DIRECT en
mode prise de vue pour afficher
les réglages actuels de prise de
vue.
DIRECTUtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Écran DIRECT
Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la page dont le
numéro est indiqué à droite de chaque élément.
1 2 3 8 4 5
12
16
13
18
10
9
11 15 14 17
6
7
1 Modeprisedevue.........................4
2 Ouverture........................46,48,50
3 Vitessed’obturation.........46,49,50
4 Mode flash ..................................28
5 Niveaudecompensation du flash/
niveaude flash manuel .........78,79
6 Correction del’exposition ............85
7 ISO...............................................90
8 Balancedesblancs ......................86
9 Mode miseaupoint.....................64
10 Mesureexposition.......................70
11 Réglages image...........................71
12 Qualitéimage/taille/taillevidéo...61
13 Cadrage.......................................75
14 Continu........................................73
15 Zoned’information........................7
16 Mode macro................................27
17 Verrouill. AE...............................136
18 Retardateur.................................31
Modification des réglages de prise de vue au niveau de l’écran DIRECT
Sur l’écran DIRECT, déplacez le curseur à l’aide de la
touche +, –, Fn ou Fn2 ou de la manette ADJ. (gauche et
droite) pour sélectionner une rubrique, puis modifiez
directement le réglage à l’aide du sélecteur plus-moins.
Il est possible d’ajuster la correction de l’exposition à
l’aide des touches + et – (à la place du sélecteur
plus-moins).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Affichage des options pour les réglages de prise de vue
Si vous appuyez sur la manette ADJ. lorsqu’une rubrique
est sélectionnée au niveau de l’écran DIRECT, les options
de la rubrique de réglage s’affichent. Sélectionnez
l’option souhaitée à l’aide des touches + et – ou du
sélecteur plus-moins, puis appuyez sur la manette ADJ.
ou sur la touche C/D pour définir l’option.
Attention
Il n’est pas possible de modifier les réglages du mode prise de
vue, du mode macro, du mode retardateur et du mode flash du
flash intégré en sélectionnant la rubrique au niveau de l’écran
DIRECT. Modifiez les réglages à l’aide du sélecteur de mode ou
des touches situées sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo.
Remarques
• Appuyez sur la touche DISP. pour modifier le réglage de l’image
d’arrière-plan (page 140).
• Appuyez sur C/D au niveau de l’écran DIRECT pour
afficher le menu prise de vue (page 59).
• Une fois la correction de l’exposition réglée, appuyez sur Fn, Fn2
ou la manette ADJ. (vers la gauche ou la droite) pour placer le
curseur sur d’autres rubriques.
• En mode exposition manuelle, l’indicateur d’exposition
permettant d’obtenir l’exposition optique s’affiche à la place du
curseur de correction d’exposition.
• En mode changement de programme, la vitesse d’obturation
et l’ouverture sont modifiées en même temps de manière à
produire la même exposition.
• Le nom de la rubrique du menu prise de vue correspondant à la
rubrique sélectionnée au niveau de l’écran DIRECT s’affiche dans
la zone d’information.
Affichage de la page suivante ou précédente
Si les rubriques affichées à l’écran s’étendent sur plusieurs
pages, vous pouvez afficher la page suivante ou précédente en
appuyant sur la touche + ou – ou en faisant tourner le sélecteur
plus-moins tout en maintenant la touche DIRECT enfoncée.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Écran d’affichage des photos
Les indicateurs suivants peuvent s’afficher pendant la
prise de vue et la lecture.
Prise de vue (photo) Prise de vue (vidéo)
4:3 N
F 2.5
25cm-
1/50 200
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
15
18
31
19
27 28 29 30
26
32
20
25
24
22
23
21
37 38
F 2.5 1/50 200
34
33
35
36
1 Mode flash ............28
2 Niveaudecompensation
du flash /de flash
manuel..............78,79
3 Modescène...........52
Continu..................73
4 Modeprisedevue
................................4
5 Nombred’expositions
restantes
?*
............177
6 Destination............15
7 Dist. miseaupt snap
.........................64,68
8 Qualitéimage/taille
..............................61
9 Mode miseaupoint/
instantanépar
pression............64,69
10 Balancedesblancs /
compensation dela
balancedesblancs
..........................86,89
11 Mesureexposition...70
12 Réglages image.....71
13 Cadrage.................75
14 Histogramme........44
15 Correction dela
déformation ..........81
16 Réduction debruit...80
17 Correction dubougé...92
18 Horodatage...........84
19 Niveaudebatterie...10
20 Verrouillage
d’exposition
automatique.......136
21 Retardateur...........31
22 Mode macro..........27
23 Distance min deprise
devue.................144
24 Rapportdezoom
numérique............26
25 Barredezoom.......26
26 Prisedevueà
intervalles .............83
27 Indicateurd’exposition
..............................50
28 Ouverture...46,48,50UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
9
29 Vitessed’obturation
...................46,49,50
30 Correction de
l’exposition............85
31 ISO.........................90
32 Indicateurde niveau...32
33 Avertissement
d’exposition...........86
34 Avertissementde flou
.........................24,93
35 Profondeurdechamp
..............................64
36 Barrede miseaupoint
..............................64
37 Longueurdevidéo
.......................63,177
38 Tempsdisponible
?*
..............................55
* Approximation uniquement ; la capacité réelle varie selon les conditions
de prise de vue et la fabrication de la carte mémoire. L’écran affiche
« 9999 » lorsqu’il reste suffisamment de mémoire pour plus de 9 999
photos.
Remarque
Il est possible d’afficher les réglages de prise de vue en appuyant
sur la touche DIRECT (page 5).
Lecture (photos) Lecture (vidéos)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14
4:3 N
2010/0101 00:20
F 2.5
ISO 200
1/50
EV+0.7
2010/01/01 00:20
16
15
17 18
1 Numérode fichier....–
2 Imageactuelle........–
3 Images totales.........–
4 Indicateurde mode
lecture.....................–
5 Imageprotégée...112
6 Indicateurdetirage
DPOF...................115
7 Source...................15
8 Qualitéimage/taille
..............................61
9 Dated’enregistrement
.......................20,149
10 Ouverture...46,48,50
11 ISO.........................90
12 Correction de
l’exposition............85
13 Vitessed’obturation
...................46,49,50
14 Niveaudebatterie...10
15 Longueur/
tempsécoulé............–
16 Indicateurde
progression...............–
17 Balancedesblancs...86
18 Compensation dela
balancedesblancs...89UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
0
Remarques
• L’écran d’affichage des photos peut également afficher des
avertissements et des messages.
• Des informations supplémentaires
peuvent être affichées en appuyant
sur la touche DISP. (page 42).
4:3 N
2.5 200
Indicateur du niveau de batterie
Le niveau de batterie est illustré par l’icône située dans
l’angle inférieur droit de l’écran d’affichage des photos.
Icône Description
(vert)
Batterie pleine.
(vert)
Batterie partiellement déchargée.
(orange)
Batterie pratiquement vide. Rechargez-la ou remplacez-la
dès que possible.
UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Premiers pas............................................................ 2
Prise de vue photographique.................................... 2
Visualisation et suppression de photos......................
Photographie et lecture
de base
Lisez d’abord cette section avant d’utiliser
votre appareil photo pour la première fois.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
2
Premiers pas
Préparez l’appareil photo avant son utilisation.
Chargement de la batterie
La batterie rechargeable (DB-90) fournie avec le boîtier
de l’appareil photo n’est pas chargée au moment de
l’achat. Avant utilisation, chargez la batterie avec le
chargeur de batterie BJ-9 fourni.
1
Insérez la batterie dans le chargeur.
Placez la batterie avec l’étiquette vers le haut,
les repères « + » et « – » faisant face aux repères
équivalents du chargeur.
Attention
Assurez-vous que la batterie est correctement orientée.
2 Connectez le cordon d’alimentation au chargeur,
puis procédez au branchement.
Le témoin du chargeur s’allume pendant la charge
de la batterie. Une batterie vide se rechargera en
cinq heures environ, à 25°C.
Remarque
Si le témoin du chargeur clignote, c’est que la batterie ou le
chargeur est défaillant. Débranchez le cordon d’alimentation
et retirez la batterie du chargeur.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
3
Retirez la batterie.
Le chargement est terminé lorsque le témoin
du chargeur s’éteint. Débranchez le cordon
d’alimentation et retirez la batterie du chargeur.
Attention
• Batterie rechargeable Li-ion : utilisez uniquement une batterie
DB-90 d’origine. N’utilisez pas de batterie non conçue par Ricoh
pour ce boîtier d’appareil photo.
• La batterie peut être chaude immédiatement après usage.
Avant de retirer la batterie, mettez l’appareil hors tension et
patientez le temps qu’elle refroidisse.
• Retirez la batterie si l’appareil ne doit pas être utilisé pendant
une période prolongée.
Conseil :capacité dela batterie
Le nombre de prises de vue possibles avec une batterie DB-90
complètement chargée varie en fonction de l’unité appareil
photo. Les tests sont effectués en conformité avec les normes
CIPA, dans les conditions suivantes : à une température de 23 °C,
écran d’affichage des photos allumé, prise de vue toutes les 30
secondes avec flash déclenché une fois sur deux. L’appareil photo
est mis hors tension, puis sous tension toutes les 10 prises de vue.
Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo
pour en savoir plus.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Insertion de la batterie
Assurez-vous d’abord que l’appareil photo est hors
tension avant d’insérer ou de retirer la batterie.
1 Ouvrez le couvercle du logement de la batterie/
carte.
Déverrouillez (1) et
ouvrez (2) le couvercle.
2
Insérez la batterie.
En utilisant la batterie
pour appuyer sur
le loquet, insérez-la
jusqu’au fond. Le loquet
se verrouillera lorsque
la batterie sera
complètement enfoncée.
1
2
3
Fermez le couvercle du logement de la batterie/
carte.
Fermez (1) et verrouillez
(2) le couvercle.
Attention
Assurez-vous que le
couvercle est verrouillé. 1
2
Retrait dela batterie
Déverrouillez et ouvrez le couvercle du logement de la
batterie/carte, enfoncez le loquet pour le relâcher, puis
retirez la batterie. Veillez à ne pas faire tomber la batterie.
Attention
Si l’appareil ne doit pas être utilisé pendant une période prolongée,
retirez la batterie et stockez-la dans un endroit froid et sec.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Insertion des cartes mémoire
Les photos peuvent être stockées dans la mémoire
interne du boîtier de l’appareil photo (86Mo) ou bien
sur des cartes mémoire SD et SDHC optionnelles.
La mémoire interne est utilisée si aucune carte n’est
insérée ; dans le cas contraire, c’est la carte qui sera
utilisée plutôt que la mémoire interne.
Assurez-vous d’abord que l’appareil photo est hors
tension avant d’insérer ou de retirer une carte mémoire.
1 Ouvrez le couvercle du logement de la batterie/
carte.
Déverrouillez (1) et ouvrez
(2) le couvercle. 1
2
2
Insérez la carte.
En tenant la carte comme
indiqué sur l’illustration,
glissez-la dans la fente
jusqu’à ce qu’elle soit
verrouillée.
3
Fermez le couvercle du logement de la batterie/
carte.
Fermez (1) et verrouillez
(2) le couvercle.
1
2UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Retrait descartesmémoire
Déverrouillez et ouvrez le couvercle du logement de la
batterie/carte, puis appuyez sur la carte mémoire pour
l’éjecter. La carte peut alors être retirée.
Attention
• Les photos ne seront pas enregistrées dans la mémoire interne
lorsqu’une carte mémoire est insérée, même si celle-ci est
pleine.
• Conservez propres les contacts de la carte mémoire.
Conseil : protection contrel’écriture
Basculez le curseur de protection
contre l’écriture situé sur la carte
mémoire en position « LOCK » pour
empêcher l’écrasement ou la
suppression des données de la carte et
le formatage de la carte.
Il est impossible de prendre des photos lorsque la carte est
protégée ; utilisez la protection de la carte uniquement pour
empêcher une perte accidentelle des données et assurez-vous
de libérer la carte avant la prise de vue.
Remarques
• Formatez les cartes mémoire avant leur première utilisation ou
après les avoir utilisées dans un ordinateur ou un autre dispositif
(page 139). Assurez-vous de sauvegarder toutes les données
importantes avant le formatage.
• Consultez la page 177 pour en savoir plus sur la capacité des
cartes mémoire.
• Il est possible de copier les photos de la mémoire interne sur
des cartes mémoire (page 115).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Installation de l’unité appareil photo sur le boîtier de
l’appareil photo
Veillez à ce que l’appareil photo soit hors tension avant
d’installer ou de retirer l’unité appareil photo sur le/du
boîtier de l’appareil photo.
Retirez les capuchons de
connecteur du boîtier et de
l’unité appareil photo. Alignez
le côté gauche de l’unité
appareil photo sur le repère
d’alignement situé sur le boîtier
de l’appareil photo, puis faites
glisser l’unité appareil photo
vers la gauche jusqu’à ce qu’un
déclic soit émis.
Repère d’alignement pour
l’installation de l’unité
appareil photo
Retrait de l’unité appareil photo du boîtier de l’appareil photo
Faites glisser le levier de
déverrouillage de l’unité
appareil photo vers la
droite et retirez l’unité
appareil photo.
Veillez à ne pas faire
tomber le boîtier de
l’appareil photo et l’unité
appareil photo lors du
retrait de l’unité appareil
photo.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Mise sous et hors tension
Mode prise de vue
Placez l’interrupteur MARCHE/
ARRÊT sur MARCHE pour mettre
l’appareil photo sous tension.
L’appareil photo émet le son de
démarrage. Le témoin de mise au
point automatique/flash clignote
plusieurs secondes pendant le
démarrage de l’appareil.
Pour mettre l’appareil photo hors
tension, placez l’interrupteur
MARCHE/ARRÊT sur ARRÊT. Le
nombre de photos prises ce
jour s’affiche avant la mise hors
tension. (L’appareil affiche zéro si
l’horloge n’a pas été configurée. Si vous mettez l’appareil
hors tension après avoir modifié l’horloge (page 20),
l’appareil affiche le nombre de photos prises depuis la
modification du réglage de l’horloge.)
Attention
Les modifications des réglages continu (page 73), intervalle (page
83) et retardateur (page 31) sont perdues lors de la mise hors
tension de l’appareil. La mise hors tension de l’appareil restaure
les réglages des modes MY avec les valeurs enregistrées dans Enr.
Mes Réglages. Les autres réglages ne sont pas affectés.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
9
Mode lecture
Lorsque l’appareil photo est hors
tension, maintenez la touche
6 enfoncée pendant environ
une seconde pour activer le
mode lecture de l’appareil photo.
Appuyez de nouveau sur la
touche 6 pour mettre l’appareil
photo hors tension.
Conseil :mode deveilleetmise horstension automatique
L’appareil photo éteint l’écran ou se met automatiquement
hors tension pour économiser l’argent si aucune opération n’est
effectuée au cours de la durée indiquée sous Mode veille (page
141) et Extinction auto (page 141).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
20
Configuration de base
Une boîte de dialogue de sélection de la langue s’affiche
lors de la première mise sous tension de l’appareil.
Procédez comme suit pour choisir une langue et
configurer la date et l’heure. Pour quitter une fois la
configuration terminée, appuyez sur la touche DISP.. Vous
pouvez à tout moment modifier la langue, l’heure et la
date dans le menu de configuration (page 149).
1
Sélectionnez une langue.
Appuyez sur +, –, Fn ou Fn2
pour sélectionner une langue
et appuyez sur C/D.
2 Configurez l’horloge.
Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour
sélectionner l’année, le mois,
le jour, l’heure, les minutes
ou le format de date, puis
appuyez sur + ou – pour
modifier. Après avoir vérifié
que la date est correcte,
appuyez sur C/D.
Une boîte de dialogue de
confirmation s’affiche ;
appuyez sur C/D pour
valider votre choix.
Remarques
• Si vous laissez la batterie dans le boîtier de l’appareil pendant au
moins deux heures, les réglages de l’horloge et de la langue sont
conservés pendant environ une semaine une fois la batterie retirée.
• La date et l’heure d’enregistrement peuvent être inscrites sur les
photos (page 84).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
2
Prise de vue photographique
Après avoir configuré l’appareil
photo comme indiqué dans
« Premiers pas » (page 12), vous
êtes prêt à prendre des photos.
Placez l’interrupteur MARCHE/
ARRET sur MARCHE pour mettre
l’appareil sous tension et tournez
le sélecteur de mode sur 5.
Tenue de l’appareil photo
1
Tenez l’appareil à deux mains.
Tenez l’appareil à deux mains
avec les coudes légèrement
collés au corps.
Attention
Assurez-vous que l’objectif ou
le flash n’est pas obstrué par vos
doigts, vos cheveux ou la courroie
d’encolure.
2
Préparez-vous à prendre la photo.
Posez le doigt sur le
déclencheur.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
22
Prise de vue
1
Effectuez la mise au point.
Cadrez votre sujet au centre de l’écran d’affichage
des photos et appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à
mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point et définir
l’exposition.
4:3 N
Si l’appareil peut effectuer la mise
au point, les cadres de mise
au point des objets mis au
point s’affichent en vert (neuf
cadres maximum).
Si l’appareil photo est incapable
d’effectuer la mise au point, le
cadre de mise au point au
centre clignote en rouge et
le témoin de mise au point
automatique/flash clignote
en vert.
Témoin de mise au point
automatique/flash
Cadre de mise
au point
2
Prenez une photo.
Appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au
bout pour prendre la photo. L’image s’affiche
pendant quelques secondes juste après la prise de
vue (page 142) et est enregistrée dans la mémoire
interne ou sur la carte mémoire.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
2
Conseil : le déclencheur
L’appareil photo dispose d’un déclencheur à deux étapes.
Pour effectuer la mise au point, appuyez légèrement sur le
déclencheur jusqu’à ce que vous sentiez une résistance. Cette
action est dénommée « appuyer sur le déclencheur jusqu’à micourse ». Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre
la photo.
Conseil :mise au point
Le témoin de mise au point automatique/flash et le cadre de
mise au point indiquent si le sujet est mis au point.
État de la mise au point Cadre de mise au point
Témoin de mise au point
automatique/flash
Avant la mise au point Blanc Éteint
Sujet mis au point Vert Allumé (vert)
Mise au point impossible Rouge (clignotant) Clignotant (vert)
L’appareil peut être dans l’incapacité d’effectuer la mise au point
dans les cas suivants :
• Objets manquant de contraste comme le ciel, un mur d’une
seule couleur ou le capot d’une voiture
• Objets plats contenant uniquement des lignes horizontales
• Objets se déplaçant rapidement
• Objets faiblement éclairés
• Objets avec des reflets brillants ou en contre-jour
• Objets clignotant comme des lampes fluorescentes
• Sources lumineuses pointées comme des ampoules, des
projecteurs ou des LED
Notez qu’un ou plusieurs cadres de mise au point peuvent être
affichés en vert, même si l’appareil est incapable d’effectuer la
mise au point sur les objets ci-dessus ; vérifiez la mise au point sur
l’écran d’affichage des photos avant la prise de vue. Si l’appareil est
incapable d’effectuer la mise au point, verrouillez la mise au point
sur un autre objet situé à la même distance de l’appareil que votre
sujet, puis recomposez l’ensemble et prenez la photo (page 25).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
2
Conseil : pouréviterles photos floues
Pour empêcher les effets de flou provoqués par un déplacement
de l’appareil au moment du déclenchement (« bougé de
l’appareil »), appuyez sur le déclencheur doucement et sans à-
coups. Des effets de flou sont notamment probables si :
• Le flash est désactivé et l’éclairage est faible
• Le zoom numérique est utilisé (page 26)
Dans les cas où des effets de flou seraient particulièrement
susceptibles de se produire à cause d’un bougé de l’appareil,
l’icône J s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. Tenez
fermement l’appareil et effectuez de nouveau la mise au point,
ou essayez l’une des solutions suivantes :
• Activez le flash ( ) ou utilisez le flash automatique ( ; voir
page 28)
• Choisissez une sensibilité ISO supérieure (page 90)
• Utilisez le retardateur (page 31)
• Utilisez la fonction de correction du bougé de l’appareil
(page 92)
Remarques
• Si le flash doit se déclencher lors de la prise de vue, un pré-flash
sera émis pour faciliter la mise au point et le réglage de
l’exposition.
• L’icône s’affiche en cas de surexposition ou de sousexposition.
• Vous pouvez choisir la durée d’affichage des photos sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos après les prises de vue. Si vous le
souhaitez, les photos peuvent rester affichées jusqu’à ce que le
déclencheur soit enfoncé jusqu’à mi-course (page 142).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
2
Verrouillage de la mise au point
Utilisez le verrouillage de la mise au point pour
composer des photos dans lesquelles le sujet n’est
pas au centre du cadre. Le verrouillage de la mise au
point peut être également utilisé si l’appareil photo est
incapable d’effectuer la mise au point.
1
Effectuez la mise au point.
Positionnez votre sujet au centre de l’écran
d’affichage des photos et appuyez sur le déclencheur
jusqu’à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point.
4:3 N
2
Recomposez la photo.
Tout en maintenant le déclencheur enfoncé
jusqu’à mi-course pour verrouiller la mise au point,
recomposez la photo.
Composition finale
Sujet principal
3
Prenez une photo.
Appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au
bout pour prendre la photo.
Attention
Si la distance entre l’appareil et le sujet change alors que le
verrouillage de la mise au point est activé, effectuez de nouveau
la mise au point en fonction de la nouvelle distance.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
2
Zoom
La touche 8 (téléobjectif) permet d’effectuer un zoom
avant et la touche 9 (grand angle), un zoom arrière.
4:3 N
9 8
4:3 N
Zoom
arrière
Zoom
avant
1 Cadrez la photo en utilisant les touches 8 et 9.
2
Effectuez la mise au point.
Appuyez sur le déclencheur
jusqu’à mi-course.
3
Prenez une photo.
Appuyez doucement sur le
déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour
prendre la photo.
Remarques
• Si vous utilisez l’unité appareil photo sans zoom optique, le
zoom numérique fonctionne à la place.
• Lors de l’utilisation d’une unité appareil photo équipée d’un
zoom optique et d’un zoom numérique, pour passer du zoom
optique au zoom numérique, relâchez la touche 8 une fois le
taux maximum d’agrandissement atteint par le zoom optique,
puis appuyez de nouveau sur la touche 8. Pour passer du zoom
numérique au zoom optique, maintenez la touche 9 enfoncée.
• Vous pouvez consulter le taux de zoom optique dans la barre
de zoom de l’écran d’affichage des photos. Lors de l’utilisation
du zoom numérique, le taux de zoom est affiché dans l’écran
d’affichage des photos.
• Le zoom numérique ne peut être utilisé lorsque l’option RAW est
sélectionnée pour le paramètre Qualité image/Taille (page 61).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
2
Prise de vue rapprochée (mode macro)
Utilisez le mode macro pour la prise de vue rapprochée
de petits objets.
1Appuyez sur la touche N.
L’icône N s’affiche
brièvement au centre de
l’écran d’affichage des
photos. N s’affiche ensuite
dans la partie supérieure
gauche de l’écran.
2
Effectuez la mise au point.
Cadrez le sujet sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos et
appuyez sur le déclencheur
jusqu’à mi-course.
3
Prenez une photo.
4:3 N
Appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au
bout pour prendre la photo.
Pour quitter le mode macro, appuyez de nouveau sur
la touche N.
Remarque
L’option AF Spot est utilisée en mode macro même si l’option AF
Multi, Snap ou 8 est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mise au
point (page 64).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
2
Photographie au flash
Le flash se déclenche uniquement s’il est ouvert.
Appuyez sur la touche OPEN/f pour ouvrir le flash et
appuyez de nouveau sur la touche pour choisir l’un des
modes flash suivants :
Mode Description
Flash Non Le flash est éteint.
Auto Le flash se déclenche automatiquement si nécessaire.
Flash
yeux
roug.
Ce mode réduit l’effet « yeux rouges » des portraits pris
au flash.
Flash Oui Le flash se déclenche à chaque prise de vue.
Synchro.
Flash
Ce mode combine le flash avec des vitesses d’obturation
lentes. Utilisez-le pour prendre des portraits incluant des
détails de l’arrière-plan ou de la vue de nuit. L’utilisation
d’un trépied est recommandée pour éviter les effets de
flou.
Flash
manuel
Le flash se déclenche à chaque prise de vue. Le niveau
de flash peut être défini sous Niveau de flash manuel
(page 79).
Remarque
La plage d’efficacité du flash varie en fonction de l’unité appareil
photo. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil
photo pour en savoir plus.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
29
Utilisation du flash intégré
1 Ouvrez le flash.
Appuyez sur la touche OPEN/f.
OPEN
2
Sélectionnez un mode flash.
Appuyez sur la touche OPEN/f pour sélectionner un
mode flash. L’icône du mode flash s’affiche dans le
coin supérieur gauche de l’écran.
Remarques
• Le mode flash sélectionné reste actif jusqu’à ce qu’un
nouveau mode soit choisi.
• Le témoin de mise au point automatique/flash clignote
lorsque le flash se charge. La prise de vue devient possible
dès que le témoin cesse de clignoter.
3
Effectuez la mise au point et prenez la photo.
Si le flash doit se déclencher lors de la prise de vue,
un pré-flash sera émis pour faciliter la mise au point
et le réglage de l’exposition.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
0
Remarques
• Pour refermer le flash lorsqu’il n’est pas utilisé, appuyez
doucement au centre du couvercle du flash jusqu’à ce qu’il soit
verrouillé.
• Le flash s’éteint automatiquement dans les modes vidéo,
continu et cadrage.
• N’utilisez pas le flash intégré lorsqu’un flash optionnel est
branché. Le non-respect de cette consigne peut endommager
l’appareil.
Attention
N’utilisez pas le flash trop près des yeux de votre sujet. La plus
grande prudence est recommandée pour photographier des
enfants. Ne pointez pas le flash vers le conducteur d’un véhicule
à moteur.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Retardateur
Faites votre choix parmi le retardateur de dix secondes,
le retardateur de deux secondes et le retardateur
personnalisé. Utilisez le retardateur de deux secondes
pour éviter le flou occasionné par le bougé de l’appareil
lorsque le déclencheur est enfoncé. Avec le réglage
personnalisé, un nombre donné de photos peuvent être
prises à un intervalle défini. Définissez l’intervalle de prise
de vue et le nombre de photos à l’aide du Retardateur
personnalisé dans le menu prise de vue (page 82).
1 Choisissez un mode retardateur.
Appuyez sur la touche t
une fois pour sélectionner le
retardateur de dix secondes,
deux fois pour sélectionner le
retardateur de deux secondes
et trois fois pour sélectionner
le retardateur personnalisé.
Appuyez une quatrième fois sur la touche pour
désactiver le retardateur.
La sélection actuelle s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage
des photos.
Remarque
Le mode retardateur sélectionné reste actif jusqu’à ce qu’un
nouveau mode soit choisi.
2Démarrez le retardateur.
Appuyez sur le déclencheur pour verrouiller la mise au
point et démarrer le retardateur. Si vous sélectionnez
le retardateur de dix secondes ou le retardateur
personnalisé, le flash auxiliaire AF se déclenche.
Remarque
Appuyez sur C/D pour annuler le retardateur
personnalisé pendant la prise de vue.
4:3 N UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
2
Indicateur de niveau
Utilisez l’indicateur de niveau pour niveler l’appareil
photo pour photographier des bâtiments ou des
paysages. C’est particulièrement utile pour les
compositions dans lesquelles l’horizon est visible.
1Affichez les options.
Appuyez et tenez enfoncée la
touche O (DISP.) jusqu’à ce
que les options de réglage de
niveau s’affichent.
2
Sélectionnez une option.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une option
et appuyez sur C/D pour confirmer l’option
sélectionnée.
Options Description
Non Indicateur de niveau non affiché.
Affichage
L’indicateur de niveau s’affiche au niveau de l’écran
d’affichage des photos. Le niveau et le sens d’inclinaison
peuvent être vérifiés au niveau de l’indicateur de niveau.
L’indicateur s’affiche en vert lorsque l’appareil photo
est de niveau, en orange si l’appareil photo est incliné
et en rouge si le niveau d’inclinaison est supérieur au
niveau maximal pouvant être affiché par l’indicateur.
L’indicateur de niveau ne s’affiche pas si l’écran est éteint,
si les indicateurs sont cachés ou si la grille de cadrage est
affichée (page 42).
Aff. + son
Identique à l’option Affichage, sauf qu’un signal sonore
est régulièrement émis lorsque l’appareil est de niveau.
Son
Un signal sonore est régulièrement émis lorsque l’appareil
est de niveau. L’indicateur de niveau ne s’affiche pas sur
l’écran d’affichage des photos.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Fonctionnement del’indicateur de niveau
4:3 N
Vert
4:3 N
Orange
Niveau de l’appareil L’appareil est incliné vers la
gauche
4:3 N
Rouge
4:3 N
Appareil photo penché trop
loin vers la droite L’appareil est incliné à 90 ° vers
la gauche
Remarque
L’indicateur de niveau peut être également paramétré dans le
menu configuration (pages 144).
Attention
• L’indicateur de niveau ne s’affiche pas si l’appareil est à l’envers,
si une vidéo est en cours d’enregistrement ou si la prise de vue à
intervalles est activée.
• Le signal sonore n’est pas émis si le volume de l’appareil photo
est désactivé (page 142).
• L’indicateur de niveau est destiné uniquement à servir de
guide et il ne doit pas être utilisé comme un niveau à bulle ou
dans d’autres applications ou un degré élevé de précision est
requis. Sa précision chute lorsque l’appareil est en mouvement
ou si vous photographiez un véhicule ou une plate-forme en
déplacement.
UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Visualisation et suppression de photos
Les photos peuvent être visualisées sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos.
Visualisation de photos
Appuyez sur la touche 6 en
mode prise de vue pour afficher
la dernière photo visualisée.
Appuyez de nouveau sur la
touche 6 pour quitter le mode
prise de vue.
Conseil :si l’appareil photo est horstension
Lorsque l’appareil photo est hors tension, maintenez la touche
6 enfoncée pendant environ une seconde pour activer le mode
lecture de l’appareil photo.
Appuyez sur Fn2 pour visualiser les photos dans l’ordre
d’enregistrement et sur Fn pour les visualiser dans
l’ordre inverse. Appuyez sur – pour avancer de dix
images et sur + pour reculer de dix images.
UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Une photo en
arrière
2010
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
200
F 2.5
2010 200
F 2.5 F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
4:3 N
4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
Dix photos en arrière
+
2010
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
200
F 2.5
2010 200
F 2.5 F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
4:3 N
4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
Fn
2010
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
200
F 2.5
2010 200
F 2.5 F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
4:3 N
4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
Fn2
2010
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
200
F 2.5
2010 200
F 2.5 F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
4:3 N
4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
– Une photo en avant
Dix photos en avant
2010
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
200
F 2.5
2010 200
F 2.5 F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
4:3 N
4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
Attention
L’appareil photo enregistre des copies JPEG des images RAW pour
les afficher sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. Lorsqu’une image
RAW est sélectionnée pour lecture, l’appareil affiche la copie JPEG
et un indicateur RAW s’affiche. Si la copie JPEG a été supprimée
via un ordinateur ou un autre dispositif, l’appareil affichera un
petit aperçu de l’image RAW et vous ne serez pas en mesure d’en
visualiser des agrandissements. Consultez les pages 62 et 63 pour
en savoir plus sur l’enregistrement des images RAW.
Conseil :visualisation des photosenmode prise devue
Les photos sont affichées sur l’écran d’affichage des photos
immédiatement après les prises de vue. Vous pouvez choisir la
durée d’affichage des photos avec Délai de validation LCD de
l’onglet de configuration (page 142).
UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Conseil :visualisation des photos delamémoireinterne
Si une carte mémoire est insérée, les photos sur la carte sont
affichées mais les photos de la mémoire interne ne peuvent pas
être visualisées, même si la carte mémoire est vide. Les photos
de la mémoire interne ne s’affichent que si aucune carte n’est
insérée dans le boîtier de l’appareil.
Conseil :rotation automatique
Si l’option Oui est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Rotation
auto de l’onglet de configuration (page 143), les photos sont
automatiquement affichées dans le sens correct sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos.
Visualisation de plusieurs photos
Appuyez sur la touche z ou Z
pour sélectionner le nombre de
photos à afficher (une, 20 ou 81)
ou pour classer les photos en
fonction de la date à laquelle elles
ont été prises.
1 image 20 images
4:3 N
2010
F 2.5
200
4:3 N
2010 F 2.5
Trier par date 81 images
UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Des vues multi-images peuvent être utilisées pour
sélectionner des photos à afficher ou à supprimer.
Dans les vues multi-images, utilisez le pavé directionnel
pour sélectionner des photos.
Conseil : pavé directionnel
Il est possible de déplacer le curseur en oblique en appuyant sur
les sections diagonales du pavé directionnel.
Remarques
• Pour afficher une photo en plein écran, appuyez sur la manette
ADJ. dans une vue multi-images.
• Pour afficher les photos de la page précédente ou suivante dans
une vue multi-images :
• Dans une vue 20 et 81 images, appuyez sur la touche +, –, Fn,
Fn2 ou sur la manette ADJ. (gauche ou droite) ou faites tourner
le sélecteur plus-moins tout en maintenant la touche DIRECT
enfoncée.
• Dans la vue classée par date, si vous appuyez sur la touche
+ ou –, ou si vous faites tourner le sélecteur plus-moins tout
en maintenant la touche DIRECT enfoncée, la page suivante
ou précédente s’affiche. Appuyez sur la touche Fn, Fn2 ou
sur la manette ADJ. (gauche ou droite) tout en maintenant la
touche DIRECT enfoncée pour afficher les photos prises le jour
suivant ou précédent. Si vous appuyez sur la touche Fn2 ou sur
la manette ADJ. vers la droite sur la dernière photo, les photos
prises la date suivante sont affichées.
UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Zoom en lecture
Appuyez sur la touche z ou faites tourner le sélecteur plusmoins vers la droite pour effectuer un zoom avant sur la photo
actuellement affichée en plein écran. Appuyez sur la manette ADJ.
pour effectuer un zoom avant selon le taux d’agrandissement
sélectionné sous Zoom par 1 seule pression (page 143).
Les opérations suivantes peuvent être réalisées :
Commande Action
z Zoom avant.
Sélecteur
plus-moins
Zoom avant en le tournant à droite et zoom en arrière en
le tournant à gauche.
C/D
Lorsqu’une image est agrandie, appuyez pour afficher l’image
au taux d’agrandissement sélectionné pour Zoom par 1 seule
pression. Si une image s’affiche au taux d’agrandissement
sélectionné pour Zoom par 1 seule pression, appuyez sur la
touche C/D pour annuler le zoom.
pavé directionnel Déplacement des zones à afficher.
Manette ADJ.
Affichage d’autres photos au même rapport de zoom en
appuyant dessus vers la droite ou la gauche.
Z Zoom arrière.
Remarques
• L’agrandissement maximum varie selon la taille de l’image :
Taille d’image Agrandissement maximum
L, M, 5M, 3M 16×
1M 6,7×
VGA 3,4×
• Le zoom en lecture n’est pas disponible avec les vidéos ou les
photos enregistrées/prises à l’aide de Cont.M +.
• Si l’option Réglage 2 est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Options
du sélecteur de mode lecture dans l’onglet des options
personnalisées (page 138), la manette ADJ. et le sélecteur plus-moins
peuvent être utilisés pour visualiser d’autres zones de l’image.9
UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Suppression de photos
Procédez comme suit pour supprimer des photos.
Suppression de photos individuelles
1Affichez une photo.
Affichez la photo à supprimer dans une vue une
image (page 34).
2Appuyez sur la touche d.
Les options sont affichées
(vous pouvez modifier la
photo en appuyant sur Fn
ou Fn2).
3
Sélectionnez Effacer un.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner Effacer un,
puis appuyez sur C/D.
Un message s’affiche pendant la suppression.
Répétez les étapes 2 et 3 pour supprimer d’autres
Cphotos ou sélectionnez Annuler et appuyez sur
/D pour quitter.
Suppression de tous les fichiers
Pour supprimer tous les fichiers,
appuyez sur la touche d
pour afficher les options de
suppression, comme indiqué
ci-dessus, et sélectionnez Suppr.
tout. Une boîte de dialogue de
confirmation s’affiche ; appuyez
sur Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner
Oui, puis appuyez sur C/D.0
UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Suppression de plusieurs fichiers
Procédez comme suit pour supprimer plusieurs fichiers.
1Appuyez sur la touche d.
Dans une vue multi-images,
passez à l’étape 2. Dans une
vue une image, les options
illustrées à droite s’affichent.
Sélectionnez Suppr. multi et
appuyez sur C/D.
2
Sélectionnez Sél. indiv. ou Sél. série.
Pour sélectionner les images
une par une, sélectionnez
CSél. indiv., appuyez sur
/D et passez à
l’étape 3. Pour sélectionner
les images en définissant des
séries, sélectionnez Sél. série, appuyez sur C/
D et passez à l’étape 3.1. Appuyez sur la touche
DISP. pour quitter sans supprimer les fichiers.
3
Sélectionnez une photo.
Utilisez le pavé directionnel
(page 37) pour sélectionner
des photos, puis appuyez
sur C/D. L’image
sélectionnée est marquée
d’une icône d. Pour
désélectionner une photo, sélectionnez-la et
appuyez de nouveau sur C/D.
4:3 N 4:3 N
UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Conseil :sélection deséries
Pour basculer entre les paramètres Sél. indiv. et Sél. série,
appuyez sur la manette ADJ. et procédez comme suit :
3.1 Utilisez le pavé directionnel
pour sélectionner la première
image d’une série, puis
appuyez sur C/D
pour confirmer. L’image
sélectionnée est marquée
d’une icône d. Pour
désélectionner l’image,
appuyez sur la touche DISP..
4:3 N
3.2 Utilisez le pavé directionnel
pour sélectionner la dernière
Cimage, puis appuyez sur
/D pour confirmer.
Les images sélectionnées sont
marquées d’une icône d.
4:3 N
Répétez les étapes 3.1-3.2 pour sélectionner des séries
supplémentaires ou appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour
revenir à l’étape 3 et sélectionner ou désélectionner des
photos individuelles.
4Appuyez sur la touche d.
Une boîte de dialogue de
confirmation s’affiche.
5
Sélectionnez Oui.
Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2
pour sélectionner Oui, puis
appuyez sur C/D.2
UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Touche O (DISP.)
Appuyez sur la touche O (DISP.) pour afficher les
informations sur l’écran d’affichage des photos en mode
prise de vue et en mode lecture.
Activation/Désactivation DeL’écran D’affichage Des Photos
Si vous appuyez sur la touche VF/LCD lorsque l’écran d’affichage
des photos est allumé, l’écran s’éteint. Certaines opérations
de l’appareil photo ne sont pas disponibles lorsque l’écran
d’affichage des photos est éteint. Appuyez de nouveau sur la
touche VF/LCD pour allumer l’écran d’affichage des photos.
Si un viseur LCD est installé, appuyez sur la touche VF/LCD pour
commuter entre le viseur LCD et l’écran d’affichage des photos.
Mode prise de vue
Appuyez sur la touche O (DISP.) pour faire défiler les
affichages suivants :
Indicateurs
affichés
4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N
Indicateurs+
histogramme
Pas
d’indicateurs
4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N
Grille de
cadrage (pas
d’indicateurs)
Conseil : la grille decadrage
Reportez-vous à la page 144 pour la sélection d’un type de grille
de cadrage.
UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Remarque
Si l’option Affichage ou Aff. + son est sélectionnée pour le
paramètre Réglage niveau (page 32), un indicateur de niveau
apparaît lorsque les indicateurs sont affichés.
Mode lecture
Appuyez sur la touche O (DISP.) pour faire défiler les
affichages suivants :
Indicateurs
affichés
4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
2.5 200
4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
2.5 200
Détails+
histogramme
Pas
d’indicateurs
4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
2.5 200
4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
2.5 200
Surbrillance
Conseil :Surbrillance
Les parties clignotantes de l’affichage Surbrillance indiquent
les zones « lessivées », dans lesquelles des détails peuvent avoir
été perdus à cause de la surexposition. Vérifiez les images avec
l’affichage Surbrillance après une prise de vue en plein soleil ou
dans d’autres conditions où des parties de l’image pourraient
avoir été surexposées. S’il s’avère que des détails importants
peuvent avoir été perdus, choisissez une valeur de correction
d’exposition plus faible et prenez une nouvelle photo (page 85).
Notez que l’affichage est destiné uniquement à servir de guide et
qu’il ne peut être totalement fiable.
UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Conseil : l’histogramme
L’histogramme est un graphique illustrant la distribution
des pixels selon la luminosité de l’image. La luminosité est
représentée par l’axe horizontal, avec les zones sombres à gauche
et les zones claires à droite. Le nombre de pixels est représenté
par l’axe vertical. L’histogramme peut être utilisé pour évaluer
l’exposition et vérifier la perte des détails dans les zones claires et
sombres, sans que la luminosité de votre environnement n’affecte
votre jugement. Un histogramme dans lequel les pixels sont
regroupés sur la droite indique que l’image peut être surexposée,
tandis qu’un histogramme dans lequel les pixels sont regroupés à
gauche indique que l’image peut être sous-exposée.
Surexposé Sous-exposé
Si l’exposition de l’image s’avère incorrecte, vous pouvez utiliser
la correction d’exposition pour corriger l’exposition des photos
suivantes du même sujet (page 85 ; notez que la correction
d’exposition peut se révéler insuffisante dans certains cas pour
obtenir une exposition correcte). L’histogramme peut être
également utilisé comme un guide pour le réglage du contraste
des photos après les prises de vue (page 107).
L’histogramme est destiné uniquement à servir de guide et peut
ne pas être totalement fiable, notamment dans les cas où le flash
serait utilisé ou l’éclairage ambiant serait faible.PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Plus sur la photographie...........................................
Fonctions de lecture................................................. 9
Menu des réglages de la lecture...............................0
Impression de photos..............................................20
Réglages de l’appareil .............................................2
Copie des photos sur un ordinateur..........................
Remarques techniques............................................
Référence
Lisez cette section pour en savoir plus sur les
fonctions de l’appareil photo.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Plus sur la photographie
Cette section détaille les modes P, A, S, M, 4 et MY,
ainsi que l’utilisation des options du menu prise de vue.
Mode P : changement de programme
Lorsque le sélecteur de mode
est réglé sur P (changement de
programme), vous pouvez utiliser
le sélecteur plus-moins pour choisir
parmi les différentes combinaisons
d’ouverture et de vitesse
d’obturation, produisant toutes la même exposition.
1 Choisissez le mode P.
Placez le sélecteur de mode
sur P. Le mode prise de vue
est indiqué par une icône sur
l’écran d’affichage des photos.
4:3 N
2Mesurez l’exposition.
Appuyez sur le déclencheur
jusqu’à mi-course pour
mesurer l’exposition.
L’ouverture et la vitesse
d’obturation actuelles
s’affichent sur le moniteur. 2.5 200
3 Choisissez l’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation.
Relâchez le déclencheur et
faites tourner le sélecteur
plus-moins pour sélectionner
une combinaison d’ouverture
et de vitesse d’obturation.
4:3 N
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Remarque
L’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation peuvent être
configurées pendant dix secondes après avoir relâché le
déclencheur.
4
Prenez une photo.
Appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au
bout pour prendre la photo.
Remarque
Les combinaisons d’ouverture et de vitesse d’obturation
disponibles pour chaque valeur d’exposition varient en fonction
de l’unité appareil photo. Consultez la documentation fournie
avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Mode A : priorité à l’ouverture
En mode A (priorité à l’ouverture),
vous choisissez l’ouverture et
l’appareil photo sélectionne la
vitesse d’obturation. Choisissez de
grandes ouvertures (petits nombres
f) pour mettre en valeur le sujet principal en rendant flou
l’arrière-plan et les détails de l’avant-plan. Choisissez de
petites ouvertures (grands nombres f) pour effectuer la
mise au point sur l’arrière-plan et le sujet principal.
1 Choisissez le mode A.
Placez le sélecteur de mode
sur A. L’ouverture actuelle
s’affiche en orange.
2 Choisissez une ouverture.
Faites tourner le sélecteur
plus-moins pour sélectionner
une ouverture. Votre sélection prend effet uniquement
lorsque la photo est prise ; il est impossible de
prévisualiser son effet sur l’écran d’affichage des photos.
3Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course.
Appuyez sur le déclencheur
jusqu’à mi-course pour définir la
mise au point et l’exposition. La
vitesse d’obturation sélectionnée
par l’appareil s’affiche sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos.
4:3 N
4
Prenez une photo.
Appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au
bout pour prendre la photo.
Remarque
Si l’option Décalage ouverture auto est activée (page 92), l’appareil
réglera l’ouverture pour obtenir une exposition optimale.
4:3 N 9
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Mode S : priorité à l’obturation
En mode S (priorité à l’obturation),
vous choisissez la vitesse d’obturation
et l’appareil photo sélectionne
l’ouverture. Choisissez des vitesses
d’obturation rapides pour « geler »
le mouvement et des vitesses
d’obturation lentes pour souligner le mouvement en rendant
flous les objets en déplacement.
1 Choisissez le mode S.
Placez le sélecteur de mode
sur S. La vitesse d’obturation
actuelle s’affiche en orange.
2 Choisissez une vitesse
d’obturation.
Faites tourner le sélecteur
plus-moins pour sélectionner une vitesse
d’obturation.
3Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course.
Appuyez sur le déclencheur
jusqu’à mi-course pour
définir la mise au point et
l’exposition. L’ouverture
sélectionnée par l’appareil
s’affiche sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos.
2.5 200
4
Prenez une photo.
Appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au
bout pour prendre la photo.
Remarque
L’ouverture maximum (c.-à-d. le nombre f le plus bas possible)
peut ne pas être sélectionnée à des vitesses d’obturation lentes,
même lorsque le sujet est faiblement éclairé.
4:3 N 0
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Mode M: exposition manuelle
En mode M (exposition manuelle),
vous utilisez le sélecteur plusmoins pour choisir l’ouverture et
la manette ADJ. pour sélectionner
la vitesse d’obturation.
1 Choisissez le mode M.
Placez le sélecteur de mode
sur M. Le mode prise de vue,
l’indicateur d’exposition,
ainsi que l’ouverture et la
vitesse d’obturation actuelles,
s’affichent à l’écran.
4:3 N
2 Choisissez une ouverture et une vitesse d’obturation.
Faites tourner le sélecteur
plus-moins pour choisir une
ouverture, puis appuyez
sur la manette ADJ. vers la
gauche ou vers la droite
pour sélectionner une vitesse d’obturation (le cas
échéant, les rôles des deux commandes peuvent
être inversés, voir page 138). Les effets peuvent être
prévisualisés sur l’écran d’affichage des photos et
sont reflétés par l’indicateur d’exposition (si l’image
doit être sous-exposée ou surexposée de plus de
2EV, il est impossible d’en prévisualiser les effets et
l’indicateur devient orange).
3
Prenez une photo.
Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course pour
effectuer la mise au point, puis appuyez doucement
sur le déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre la
photo.
–2–2 EVEV +2+2 EVEV
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Remarques
• Les vitesses d’obturation disponibles varient en fonction de
l’unité appareil photo et du réglage de l’ouverture. Consultez la
documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus.
• Si l’option Auto ou Auto-Hi est sélectionnée pour le paramètre
Sensibilité ISO (page 90), la sensibilité ISO sera fixée en mode
exposition manuelle. La sensibilité ISO fixée varie en fonction de
l’unité appareil photo. Consultez la documentation fournie avec
l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus.
• Choisissez des vitesses d’obturation lentes pour des durées
d’exposition prolongées. Pour réduire les effets de flou provoqués
par un bougé de l’appareil, tenez-le fermement à deux mains
ou utilisez un trépied. L’écran d’affichage des photos s’éteint
lorsque l’obturateur est ouvert. À de faibles vitesses d’obturation,
l’appareil traite automatiquement les photos pour supprimer le
bruit, en augmentant le délai nécessaire à l’enregistrement des
images à environ deux fois la vitesse d’obturation.
• Le verrouillage de l’exposition automatique (AE) n’est pas
disponible en mode exposition manuelle. Si l’option Verrouill.
AE est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Rég. touche Fn ou Rég.
touche Fn2 dans l’onglet des options personnalisées, un appui
sur la touche affectée en mode exposition manuelle définira
l’ouverture ou la vitesse d’obturation sur une valeur proche
de celle nécessaire pour obtenir une exposition optimale.
De même, si l’option Comp. expo. est sélectionnée pour
le paramètre Réglages bouton +/– (page 137) dans l’onglet
des options personnalisées, un appui sur les touches + et
– n’affichera pas les options de correction d’exposition en
mode exposition manuelle, mais définira plutôt l’ouverture ou
la vitesse d’obturation sur une valeur proche de celle nécessaire
pour obtenir une exposition optimale. C’est particulièrement
utile lorsque vous souhaitez utiliser une exposition optimale
comme point de départ pour modifier l’exposition. L’option
Mode M par 1 seule pression (page 138) dans l’onglet des
options personnalisées détermine si l’ouverture ou la vitesse
d’obturation est modifiée pour obtenir une exposition optimale. 2
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Mode 4: Réglages pour diverses scènes
pour enregistrer des vidéos ou
Sélectionnez le mode 4
choisir une des options adaptées
à des scènes spécifiques. Les
réglages de l’appareil photo
sont automatiquement optimisés pour le type de sujet
sélectionné.
Les options suivantes font partie des options disponibles
en mode 4.
Option Description
Vidéo
Cette option permet d’enregistrer des vidéos avec le
son (page 54).
Portrait À utiliser lors de la prise de portraits.
Sports
À utiliser lors de la prise de vue d’objets en
mouvement.
Paysage
À utiliser lors de la prise de paysages avec beaucoup
de verdure ou un ciel bleu.
Nuit
À utiliser lors de la prise de scènes de nuit.
En mode nuit, le flash se déclenche lorsque toutes les
conditions suivantes sont réunies :
• Le flash est réglé sur Auto.
• Le flash est indispensable parce qu’il fait noir.
• Il y a une personne ou un objet à proximité.
Correction
biais
Cette option réduit les effets de perspective lors de
la prise de vue d’objets rectangulaires, comme des
panneaux d’affichage ou des cartes de visite (page
56).
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Pour sélectionner une option du mode scène :
1
Placez le sélecteur de mode sur 4.
L’option actuellement
4sélectionnée pour le mode
s’affiche sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos.
2Appuyez sur C/D.
Le menu du mode scène
s’affiche.
3
Sélectionnez une option.
Appuyez sur +, –, Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner une
option et appuyez sur C/D pour revenir
au mode prise de vue, avec l’option sélectionnée
affichée en haut de l’écran d’affichage des photos.
4
Prenez une photo.
• Mode vidéo : voir page 54.
• Mode Correction biais : voir page 56.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Conseil : utilisation desmenus
Pour accéder aux menus prise de
vue, options personnalisées et
configuration en mode 4,
appuyez sur la touche C/D
pour afficher le menu du mode scène,
puis appuyez sur Fn pour sélectionner
l’onglet mode. Appuyez sur + ou
– pour sélectionner l’onglet du menu
prise de vue (page 58), l’onglet des
options personnalisées (page 127) ou
l’onglet de configuration (page 128),
puis appuyez sur Fn2 pour placer le
curseur dans le menu sélectionné.
Consultez la page 59 pour en savoir
plus sur les options du menu prise de
vue disponibles dans chaque mode.
1
2
3
4
1Onglet mode
2Onglet du menu
prise de vue
3Onglet des options
personnalisées
4Onglet de
configuration
Enregistrement de vidéos
Enregistrez des vidéos avec le son. Les vidéos sont
stockées sous la forme de fichier AVI.
1
Sélectionnez 3 en mode 4.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner 3 (vidéo),
puis appuyez sur C/D.
Le mode est indiqué par une
icône sur l’écran d’affichage
des photos.
2
Enregistrez la vidéo.
Appuyez sur le déclencheur pour démarrer
l’enregistrement ; appuyez de nouveau
pour l’arrêter. L’enregistrement se termine
automatiquement lorsque la mémoire est pleine.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Attention
• L’icône clignote ; la durée d’enregistrement et la durée
restante disponible s’affichent pendant l’enregistrement.
• Les bruits émis par l’appareil photo peuvent être enregistrés sur
la vidéo.
• Les vidéos peuvent avoir une durée de 90 minutes ou une
taille de 4Go. En fonction du type de carte mémoire utilisée,
l’enregistrement vidéo peut se terminer avant que cette durée
ou cette taille soit atteinte. La durée totale maximale de tous
les fichiers vidéo qui peuvent être stockés dans la mémoire
interne ou sur une carte mémoire varie en fonction des options
sélectionnées pour Taille vidéo (page 61).
Remarques
• Le flash ne peut être utilisé en mode vidéo.
• L’appareil effectue la mise au point lorsque vous appuyez sur le
déclencheur pour démarrer l’enregistrement.
• La durée restante est calculée en fonction de la quantité de
mémoire disponible et ne peut pas diminuer de façon régulière.
• Les options du menu prise de vue sont différentes de celles
disponibles dans les autres modes (page 60).
• Chargez la batterie avant la prise de vue. Pour les
enregistrements de longue durée, choisissez des cartes
mémoire avec une vitesse d’écriture rapide et vérifiez la quantité
de mémoire disponible avant l’enregistrement vidéo.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Mode 4: correction biais
Pour prendre des photos en mode Correction biais,
cadrez le sujet afin qu’il occupe le cadre entier et
appuyez sur le déclencheur pour prendre la photo.
Si l’appareil détecte un objet dont la perspective
peut être corrigée, l’objet est entouré par un cadre
orange. L’appareil peut détecter jusqu’à cinq objets ;
pour sélectionner un objet différent, appuyez sur Fn2,
pour enregistrer la photo sans aucune correction de
perspective, appuyez sur +. Si l’appareil est incapable
de détecter un sujet approprié, un message d’erreur
s’affiche et la photo sera enregistrée sans modification.
Attention
L’appareil enregistre deux images : la photo non modifiée et
une copie qui a été traitée pour corriger la perspective. Aucune
photo ne sera prise si la mémoire est insuffisante pour enregistrer
deux images. L’appareil peut être dans l’incapacité de corriger la
perspective dans les cas suivants :
• Le sujet n’est pas mis au point.
• Les quatre bords du sujet ne sont pas clairement visibles.
• Il existe peu de contraste entre le sujet et l’arrière-plan.
• L’arrière-plan contient de nombreux détails fins.
Conseil :correction biais
L’option Correction biais du menu lecture peut être utilisée pour
corriger la perspective des photos enregistrées (page 110).
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Modes «MY »: utilisation des réglages personnalisés
Pour prendre des photos à l’aide
des réglages enregistrés sous
l’option MY1 avec Enr. Mes
Réglages de l’onglet des options
personnalisées (page 129), placez
le sélecteur de mode sur MY. Sélectionnez MY2 pour
prendre des photos en utilisant les réglages enregistrés
avec MY2 et MY pour prendre des photos en utilisant les
réglages enregistrés avec MY3.
1
Placez le sélecteur de mode sur MY, MY2 ou MY.
Le mode prise de vue
enregistré avec Enr. Mes
Réglages s’affiche sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos.
4:3 N
Remarque
Les réglages peuvent être configurés dans les modes MY. Les
réglages enregistrés avec Enr. Mes Réglages sont restaurés
lorsqu’un autre mode est sélectionné ou si l’appareil photo
est mis hors tension.
Conseil :choisir unmode prise devue
Pour choisir un mode prise de vue en mode MY sans
modifier d’autres réglages, utilisez l’option Changement
de mode prise de vue dans le menu prise de vue (page
92). L’option Changement de mode prise de vue n’est pas
disponible pour les modes MY auquel un mode scène est
attribué.
2
Prenez une photo.
Consultez la section sur le mode prise de vue
sélectionné pour en savoir plus.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Menu prise de vue
Les touches +, –, Fn, Fn2 et C/D vous permettent
de naviguer dans les menus.
Attention
Le menu prise de vue ne s’affiche pas lorsque l’unité appareil
photo n’est pas installée sur le boîtier.
1Affichez le menu prise de vue.
Dans les modes autres que
le mode 4, si vous
appuyez sur C/D en
mode prise de vue, le menu
prise de vue s’affiche.
CEn mode
Conseil4:mode4, un appui sur
/D affiche le menu
mode ; appuyez sur Fn pour
sélectionner l’onglet mode, sur
– pour afficher le menu prise
de vue et sur Fn2 pour placer le
curseur dans le menu.
La barre de défilement
indique la position dans
le menu
2
Sélectionnez une rubrique de menu.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour
sélectionner une rubrique
du menu et appuyez sur Fn2
pour afficher les options de la
rubrique sélectionnée.
Remarque
Les éléments de la page suivante
peuvent être affichés en appuyant
sur – et sur le touche DIRECT
simultanément.9
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
3
Sélectionnez une option.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une option.
Appuyez sur C/D pour sélectionner et
passer au mode prise de vue ou sur Fn pour
sélectionner et revenir au menu prise de vue.
Les rubriques disponibles dans le menu prise de vue
varient avec le mode prise de vue.
Modes5, P, A,S,M,MY,MY2 etMY
Option Défaut Page
Qualité image/Taille L4:3 N 61
Mise au point AF Multi 64
Dist. mise au pt snap 2.5?m 68
Instantané par pression Oui 69
Pré AF Non 70
Mesure exposition Multi 70
Réglages image Standard 71
Mode continu Non 73
Cadrage auto Non 75
Correction exposition flash 0.0 78
Niveau de flash manuel 1/2 79
Réglage synchro du flash 1er rideau 79
Réduction bruit Non 80
Réduction bruit ISO > àISO 401 80
Correction distorsion Non 81
Option Défaut Page
Macro auto Non 81
Retardateur
personnalisé
2img,5s 82
Prise de vue à intervalles — 83
Horodatage Non 84
Correction de l’exposition*
1
0.0 85
Balance blancs Multi-P AUTO 86
Compensation balance
blancs
A :0, G :0 89
Sensibilité ISO Auto 90
Initialiser *
2
— 91
Décalage ouverture auto *
3
Non 92
Changement de mode
prise de vue *
4
— 92
Correction du bougé *
5
Oui 920
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Mode4:vidéo
Option Défaut Page
Taille vidéo VGA640 61
Mise au point AF Multi 64
Dist. mise au pt snap 2.5?m 68
Pré AF Non 70
Option Défaut Page
Balance blancs Auto 86
Compensation balance
blancs
A :0, G :0 89
Mode4: Portrait/Sports/Nuit
Option Défaut Page
Qualité image/Taille L4:3 N 61
Mise au point AF Multi 64
Dist. mise au pt snap 2.5?m 68
Instantané par pression Oui 69
Pré AF Non 70
Correction exposition
flash
0.0 78
Réglage synchro du flash 1er rideau 79
Option Défaut Page
Correction distorsion Non 81
Retardateur personnalisé 2img,5s 82
Horodatage Non 84
Correction de l’exposition 0.0 85
Balance blancs Multi-P AUTO 86
Correction du bougé*
5
Oui 92
Mode4: Paysage
Option Défaut Page
Qualité image/Taille L4:3 N 61
Correction distorsion Non 81
Retardateur
personnalisé
2img,5s 82
Horodatage Non 84
Correction de
l’exposition
0.0 85
Option Défaut Page
Balance blancs Multi-P AUTO 86
Correction du bougé*
5
Oui 92
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Mode4:correction biais
Option Défaut Page
Qualité image/Taille 1M 4:3F 61
Mise au point AF Multi 64
Dist. mise au pt snap 2.5?m 68
Instantané par pression Oui 69
Pré AF Non 70
Mesure exposition Multi 70
Réglages image Standard 71
Correction exposition
flash
0.0 78
Option Défaut Page
Réglage synchro du flash 1er rideau 79
Correction distorsion Non 81
Horodatage Non 84
Correction de l’exposition 0.0 85
Balance blancs Multi-P AUTO 86
Sensibilité ISO Auto 90
Correction du bougé*
5
Oui 92
*
1
Non disponibleen mode M.
*
2
Mode5uniquement.
*
3
Mode A uniquement.
*
4
Mode MY, MY2 ou MY uniquement.
*
5
Ilestpossiblequecettefonction nesoitpas
disponibleselon letyped’unitéappareilphoto.
Qualité image/Taille/Taille vidéo
La taille des images détermine le nombre de photos et
de vidéos qui peuvent être stockées dans la mémoire
interne ou sur une carte mémoire.
Pour les photos, le rapport d’affichage et la qualité de
l’image peuvent être sélectionnés pour chaque option.
La taille de l’image varie en fonction de l’association de
l’option sélectionnée, du rapport d’affichage et de la
qualité.
Pour les vidéos, sélectionnez l’option souhaitée.2
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Pourles photos
Option
Rapport
d’affichage
Taux de compression Description
RAW 16:9*
2
, 4:3,
3:2
*2
, 1:1*
3
FINE/NORMAL/
VGA*
1
• Adapté dans le cadre
du traitement ou de la
retouche de l’image sur un
ordinateur.
L 16:9*
2
, 4:3,
3:2*
2
, 1:1*
3
FINE/NORMAL • Adapté dans le cadre de
l’impression grand format
ou du rognage de l’image
sur un ordinateur.
M 16:9*
2
, 4:3,
3:2*
2
, 1:1*
3
FINE/NORMAL
5M 4:3 FINE • Adapté dans le cadre de
l’impression.
3M 4:3 FINE
1M*
4
4:3 FINE • Adapté dans le cadre de la
prise d’un grand nombre
de photos.
VGA*
4
4:3 FINE • Adapté dans le cadre de la
prise d’un grand nombre
de photos, de l’ajout
d’images à des courriers
électroniques ou de la
publication d’images sur le
Web.
*
1
Le réglage s’applique à la copie JPEG.
*
2
Les parties supérieure et inférieure de l’écran sont noircies.
*
3
Les côtés gauche et droit de l’écran sont noircis.
*
4
1M et VGA sont disponibles en mode Correction biais.
Remarques
• Reportez-vous à la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil
photo pour plus de détails concernant la taille d’image de
chaque option.
• Les options du paramètre Qualité image/Taille peuvent être
affichées en appuyant sur la manette ADJ. (page 134).
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Conseil : qualité d’image
L’appareil photo prend en charge les qualités d’image suivantes :
• Normal : la compression JPEG est utilisée pour réduire la taille du
fichier.
• Fine : faible taux de compression pour obtenir des images de
haute qualité. La taille des fichiers est plus importante que lors
de l’utilisation de la qualité Normal.
• RAW : les données d’image RAW sont enregistrées au format
DNG ; des copies JPEG sont également créées. L’appareil affiche
uniquement la copie JPEG ; les fichiers DNG peuvent être visualisés
et retouchés sur un ordinateur en utilisant le logiciel fourni Irodio
Photo & Video Studio (Windows uniquement) ou une application
de retouche photo existante prenant en charge le format DNG.
Contrairement aux images de qualité normale et fine, les images
RAW ne sont pas compressées. Cela augmente la taille de fichier
mais évite la perte de qualité associée à la compression JPEG.
Notez ce qui suit lors de la prise de vue d’images RAW :
• Certaines fonctions du menu prise de vue ne sont pas
disponibles pour la prise d’images RAW. Reportez-vous à la
description de chaque réglage pour plus de détails. Les options
Réglages image et Horodatage s’appliquent uniquement aux
copies JPEG et n’ont aucun effet sur les fichiers DNG.
• Le nombre de photos RAW qui peuvent être prises en une seule
rafale en mode continu varie en fonction de l’unité appareil
photo et des réglages du menu prise de vue.
Pourlesvidéos
Option Taille d’image
VGA640 640×480
QVGA320 320×240
Remarques
• Les options disponibles pour les vidéos varient en fonction de
l’unité appareil photo. Consultez la documentation fournie avec
l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus.
• Les vidéos peuvent avoir une durée de 90 minutes ou une taille
de 4 Go.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Mise au point
Choisissez la méthode utilisée pour la mise au point. L’appareil
photo utilise par défaut la mise au point automatique.
Option Description
AF Multi*
L’appareil sélectionne la zone de mise au point sur
le sujet le plus proche, ce qui évite des prises de vue
sans mise au point en empêchant une mise au point
sur l’arrière-plan.
AF Spot*
L’appareil effectue la mise au point sur le sujet au
centre du cadre.
MF (miseau
point manuelle)
La mise au point est effectuée manuellement (page
65).
Snap
La mise au point s’effectue à la distance sélectionnée
sous Dist. mise au pt snap (page 68) pour un
déclenchement rapide.
8 (infini)
La distance de mise au point est définie sur l’infini
lors de la prise de vue de scènes à distance.
* L’icône s’affiche uniquement sur l’écran DIRECT.
Lorsque l’option MF, Snap ou 8
est sélectionnée, la sélection est
indiquée par une icône au niveau
de l’écran d’affichage des photos.
4:3 N
Conseil : Profondeur dechamp
Profondeur de champ est la partie de l’image (plage de distance) qui
apparaît nette. Les petites ouvertures (grands nombres f) augmentent
la profondeur de champ, élargissant la scène mise au point ; les
grandes ouvertures (petits nombres f) diminuent la profondeur de
champ, mettant en valeur le sujet principal en rendant flou l’avantplan et l’arrière-plan. Avec les réglages MF, Snap et 8, la barre de
mise au point indique la profondeur de
champ dans les modes prise de vue M, A
et P (en mode P, la profondeur de champ
est uniquement indiquée lorsque le
déclencheur est enfoncé à mi-course et
que les valeurs d’ouverture sont affichées).
Profondeur de
champ (vert)
Barre de mise au
point (les distances
sont approximatives)
Profondeur de
champ (vert)
Barre de mise au
point (les distances
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Remarques
• Fn et Fn2 peuvent être utilisées pour basculer entre la mise au
point automatique, manuelle ou snap (page 136).
• Pour effectuer un zoom avant sur le
sujet au centre de l’écran d’affichage
des photos et vérifier la mise au
point, maintenez C/D
enfoncée. Maintenez de nouveau
la touche enfoncé pour revenir à
l’affichage normal de la prise de vue.
4:3 N
2.5 30
Mise au point :MF(mise au pointmanuelle)
La mise au point manuelle peut être utilisée pour verrouiller la
mise au point ou pour effectuer la mise au point lorsque l’appareil
photo est incapable d’utiliser la mise au point automatique.
1
Sélectionnez MF (mise au point manuelle) dans le
menu Mise au point.
Le mode mise au point et la
barre de mise au point sont
affichés sur l’écran d’affichage
des photos.
4:3 N
2.5 30
2 Choisissez la distance de mise au point.
Tout en maintenant la touche N enfoncée, faites tourner
le sélecteur plus-moins pour effectuer la mise au point.
Lors de l’utilisation de l’unité appareil photo équipée d’une
bague de mise au point, réglez la mise au point à l’aide de
la bague.
3
Prenez une photo.
Consultez la section sur le mode prise de vue
sélectionné pour en savoir plus.
Remarque
En mode mise au point manuelle, l’appareil photo peut effectuer
la mise au point sur le sujet à courte distance (macro) même si le
mode macro n’est pas activé.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Choix delamise au pointetcible demesure
La sélection de cible peut être utilisée pour définir la
mise au point et l’exposition pour les sujets excentrés,
sans déplacer l’appareil photo, et cette fonction facilite
l’utilisation d’un trépied.
1Activez la sélection de cible.
Appuyez sur la manette ADJ.
dans les modes mise au point
autres que MF, puis appuyez
sur la manette vers la gauche
ou la droite pour sélectionner
P. Appuyez sur + ou – pour
sélectionner l’une des options
suivantes et appuyez sur C/D pour confirmer.
Option Description
AE/AF
Mesure Spot et mise au point automatique Spot ; choisissez
la cible de mise au point et d’exposition.
AF
Mise au point automatique Spot ; choisissez la cible de
mise au point. L’exposition est mesurée à l’aide de l’option
sélectionnée pour Mesure exposition (page 70).
AE
Mesure Spot ; choisissez la cible de mesure. La mise au
point est définie par l’option sélectionnée pour Mise au
point (page 64).
Non La sélection de cible est désactivée.
2
Positionnez la cible.
À l’aide du pavé directionnel
(page 37), placez le réticule
Csur le sujet, puis appuyez sur
/D.
Pour retourner au menu de
sélection de cible, appuyez
sur la touche DISP..
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
3
Prenez une photo.
Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course pour
définir la mise au point et/ou l’exposition pour le
sujet sélectionné, puis appuyez doucement sur le
déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre la photo.
Remarques
• La sélection de cible n’est pas disponible en mode mise au
point manuelle (page 65).
• La cible sélectionnée reste active jusqu’à ce qu’une nouvelle
cible soit choisie. Notez que la cible sera réinitialisée si vous
choisissez une nouvelle option dans le menu sélection de cible,
ou si vous sélectionnez la mise au point manuelle.
• Lorsque le mode macro est activé en mode 4, la cible
de mise au point du mode macro peut être sélectionnée en
appuyant sur la manette ADJ., en sélectionnant U et en utilisant
le pavé directionnel pour placer le réticule comme indiqué à la
page 68.
• Les touches Fn peuvent être utilisées pour la sélection de la cible
de mise au point en mode macro (page 68). Notez que, si les
touches Fn ont été utilisées pour sélectionner la cible de mise au
point, la manette ADJ. ne peut pas être utilisée pour la sélection
de cible jusqu’à ce que la cible soit réinitialisée.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Sélection deciblemacro
Si l’option Cible macro est attribuée à
la touche Fn ou Fn2 (page 136), vous
pouvez sélectionner le mode macro
en appuyant sur la touche affectée
en mode prise de vue. Le réticule
illustré à droite s’affiche ; utilisez le
pavé directionnel (page 37) pour
placer le réticule sur le sujet, puis appuyez sur C/D (pour
quitter sans définir la cible, appuyez sur la touche DISP.). Appuyez
sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au
point sur la cible sélectionnée, puis appuyez doucement sur le
déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre la photo.
Si vous avez utilisé la manette ADJ. pour sélectionner une cible
de mise au point (page 66), vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner le
mode cible macro à l’aide des touches Fn et Fn2 avant que la
cible soit annulée.
Dist. mise au pt snap
Sélectionnez la distance à laquelle l’appareil photo
effectue la mise au point lorsque l’option Snap est
sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mise au point (page 64)
ou lorsque l’option Instantané par pression est activée
(page 69). Sélectionnez 1m, 1,5m, 2m, 2,5m, 3m, 3,5 m,
5m ou 8 (infini).
Remarque
Lorsque l’option Snap est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mise
au point ou lorsque l’option Instantané par pression est
activée, la distance de mise au point snap peut être également
sélectionnée en tournant le sélecteur plus-moins tout en
appuyant sur la touche N.9
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Instantané par pression
Prenez des photos sans pause pour la mise au point
lorsque l’option AF Multi ou AF Spot est sélectionnée
pour le paramètre Mise au point (page 64).
Option Description
Non La fonction est désactivée.
Oui
Si le déclencheur est enfoncé jusqu’au bout en une seule
fois, l’appareil prendra la photo à la distance de mise au
point sélectionnée sous Dist. mise au pt snap. Choisissez
cette option lorsqu’un déclenchement rapide est requis.
Hi ISO auto.
Comme pour l’option Oui, sauf que la sensibilité ISO est
automatiquement réglée sur Auto-Hi (page 90).
Remarque
Il est possible de modifier la distance de mise au point snap en
tournant le sélecteur plus-moins tout en appuyant sur la touche
N.
Conseil :mise au point automatique
L’appareil effectue la mise au point normalement si vous appuyez
sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course.
Attention
• L’option Instantané par pression n’est pas disponible en mode
macro ou lorsque l’option MF, Snap ou 8 est sélectionnée pour
le paramètre Mise au point (page 64).
• Faites attention aux effets de flou provoqués par un bougé de
l’appareil.0
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Pré AF
Si l’option Oui est sélectionnée lorsque l’option AF Multi
ou AF Spot est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mise au
point (page 64), l’appareil photo continuera à effectuer
la mise au point, même lorsque le déclencheur n’est
pas enfoncé à mi-course (la plage de mise au point est
plus étroite qu’avec la mise au point normale). Cela
peut diminuer le délai nécessaire à la mise au point,
améliorant potentiellement la réponse du déclencheur.
Attention
• Pré AF n’est pas disponible lorsque l’option MF, Snap ou 8 est
sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mise au point (page 64).
• L’utilisation de l’option Pré AF augmente la décharge de la
batterie.
Mesure exposition
Choisissez la méthode utilisée par l’appareil photo pour
mesurer la lumière pour l’exposition.
Option Description
Multi* L’appareil photo mesure la lumière sur 256 zones du cadre.
Centre
L’appareil mesure la lumière du cadre entier mais attribue
le plus de poids au centre. Utilisez ce réglage lorsque le
sujet au centre du cadre est plus clair ou plus sombre que
l’arrière-plan.
Spot
L’appareil mesure la lumière avec le sujet au centre du
cadre, en garantissant qu’il est exposé de manière optimale,
même s’il est sensiblement plus clair ou plus sombre que
l’arrière-plan.
* L’icône s’affiche uniquement sur l’écran DIRECT.
Lorsque l’option Centre ou Sport
est sélectionnée, la sélection est
indiquée par une icône au niveau
de l’écran d’affichage des photos.
4:3 N
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Réglages image
Ajustez le contraste, la netteté et l’éclat (intensité) ou
prenez des photos monochromes.
Option Description
Vif
Prenez des photos éclatantes avec un contraste,
une netteté et un éclat renforcés.
Standard* Contraste, netteté et éclat normaux.
Naturel
Cette option permet de créer une image plus douce
avec un contraste, une netteté et un éclat réduits.
Noir et Blanc
Cette option permet de prendre des photos en noir
et blanc. Le contraste et la netteté peuvent être
ajustés manuellement.
N et B (TE)
(Effetdetons)
Cette option permet de créer des photos
monochromes avec une teinte sépia, rouge, verte,
bleue ou pourpre. L’éclat, le contraste et la netteté
peuvent être ajustés manuellement.
Réglage 1
Réglage 2
Cette option permet d’effectuer des ajustements manuels
de l’éclat, du contraste, de la netteté, des couleurs et
de la teinte pour créer des réglages personnalisés, qui
peuvent ensuite être rappelés à votre convenance.
* L’icône s’affiche uniquement sur l’écran DIRECT.
Pour les réglages différents de
Standard, la sélection actuelle est
indiquée par une icône sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos.
4:3 N
Pour configurer individuellement les réglages Noir et
Blanc, N et B(TE), Réglage1 ou Réglage2, sélectionnez
l’option souhaitée et appuyez sur Fn2.2
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
1Ajustez les réglages personnalisés de
reproduction des couleurs.
• Noir et Blanc : appuyez sur +
et – pour sélectionner une
option, puis appuyez sur Fn1
et Fn2 pour la modifier.
• N et B(TE) : réglez l’éclat,
le contraste et la netteté
comme indiqué ci-dessus.
Pour choisir une teinte,
sélectionnez Effet de tons
et appuyez sur Fn2. Appuyez
sur + et – pour sélectionner
une option, puis appuyez
sur Fn pour confirmer.
• Réglage 1/Réglage 2 : réglez l’éclat,
le contraste et la netteté comme
indiqué ci-dessus. Pour ajuster
des couleurs individuelles,
sélectionnez Réglages
individuels des couleurs et
appuyez sur Fn2. appuyez sur +
et – pour sélectionner une option, puis appuyez sur Fn
et Fn2 pour la modifier. Appuyez sur C/D pour
quitter lorsque les réglages sont terminés.
Pour activer les réglages enregistrés, sélectionnez
Rappeler réglages et appuyez sur Fn2. Appuyez
sur la touche + ou – pour sélectionner une option,
puis sur C/D.
2
Retournez au menu Réglages image.
Appuyez sur C/D une fois les réglages terminés.
3
Revenez au mode prise de vue.
Appuyez sur C/D ou appuyez sur Fn1, puis
appuyez sur C/D.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
L’option actuellement
sélectionnée pour Réglages
image s’affiche sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos.
4:3 N
Remarque
Les options du paramètre Réglages image peuvent être
affichées en appuyant sur la manette ADJ. (page 134).
Mode continu
Prenez des photos en continu.
• Continu : l’appareil prend des
photos tant que le déclencheur
est enfoncé.
Toutes les photos prises dans ce
mode sont enregistrées en tant
qu’images individuelles.
• Cont.M + (mémoireinversecontinueplus) : l’appareil prend
des photos tant que le déclencheur est enfoncé. Les
photos consécutives prises avant que le déclencheur
soit relâché sont enregistrées dans un fichier MP (page
95).
Cont.M + peut être défini sur une des options
suivantes : Cont.M + (rap) et Cont.M + (len).
Lorsque vous relâchez le
déclencheur…
…l’appareil enregistre des photos consécutives.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Remarque
Pour les options Cont.M + (rap) et Cont.M + (len), la taille des
images et le nombre d’images enregistrées dans un même fichier
MP varient en fonction de l’unité appareil photo. Consultez la
documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir
plus.
Pour les réglages différents de
Non, la sélection actuelle est
indiquée par une icône sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos.
4:3 N
Attention
Le zoom numérique est disponible avec les réglages Cont.M +,
même si l’option Taille auto est sélectionnée pour le paramètre
Image zoom numérique.
Remarques
• Pour les réglages différents de Non, le flash est
automatiquement désactivé, la mise au point et l’exposition
sont définies lors de la première prise de vue de la série et
la balance des blancs Auto est utilisée à la place de l’option
Multi-P AUTO (page 86).
• Si vous relâchez le déclencheur avant que le nombre d’images
à enregistrer dans un fichier MP soit atteint, les photos prises
lorsque la touche était enfoncée sont enregistrées dans un
fichier MP.
Conseil : fichierMP
MP est un format de fichier qui permet d’enregistrer un ensemble
de photos.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Cadrage auto
L’appareil photo enregistre deux ou trois copies d’une
image avec différentes expositions, balances des blancs
ou couleurs.
Option Description
Non*
La fonction de cadrage automatique est désactivée.
AE-BKT
L’appareil photo enregistre trois copies d’une photo dans la
plage de valeurs d’exposition indiquée.
WB-BKT
L’appareil enregistre trois copies
de chaque photo : une avec une
dominante rougeâtre « chaude »,
une deuxième avec la balance des
blancs actuellement sélectionnée
dans le menu prise de vue (page
86) et une troisième avec une
dominante bleuâtre « froide ».
Cette option vous permet de faire
un choix lorsque vous rencontrez
Affichage après la prise
de vue
CL-BKT
Cette option enregistre des photos en noir et blanc et en
couleur, ou bien en noir et blanc, en couleur et en monochrome
teinté (page 77).
* L’icône s’affiche uniquement sur l’écran DIRECT.
La sélection actuelle est indiquée
par une icône sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos.
4:3 N
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Remarques
• Le cadrage n’est pas disponible lorsqu’une option autre que
Non est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mode Continu. Le
cadrage balance des blancs n’est pas disponible lors des prises
de vue monochromes.
• Le cadrage balance des blancs et le cadrage couleur ne sont
pas disponibles lorsque l’option RAW est sélectionnée pour le
paramètre Qualité image/Taille (page 61).
• Le flash est automatiquement désactivé lorsque le cadrage est
activé.
• Le balance des blancs Auto est utilisée à la place de l’option
Multi-P AUTO lorsque l’option AE-BKT est sélectionnée.
AE-BKT:Cadrageexposition
Pour définir des variations de la valeur d’exposition :
1
Sélectionnez AE-BKT.
Sélectionnez AE-BKT et appuyez sur Fn2.
2
Spécifiez la valeur de compensation de
l’exposition.
Déplacez le curseur à l’aide
de Fn ou Fn2, appuyez sur +
ou – pour spécifier la valeur
de compensation, puis
appuyez sur C/D.
3
Revenez au mode prise de vue.
Appuyez sur C/D ou sur Fn, puis sur C/
D.
Remarques
• Si la même valeur de correction d’exposition est définie, seule
une image est affichée pour la valeur.
• La valeur des pas de correction peut être définie sous Pas de
corr. expo/flash dans l’onglet de configuration (page 140).
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
CL-BKT:cadragecouleur
Le nombre et le type de photos enregistrées lorsque
l’option CL-BKT est sélectionnée pour le paramètre
Cadrage auto dépend de l’option choisie pour CL-BKT
Noir et Blanc (TE) dans l’onglet de configuration (page
146) :
• Non : l’appareil photo enregistre
deux copies de chaque photo,
l’une en noir et blanc et la
seconde en couleur.
• Oui : l’appareil enregistre trois
copies de chaque photo, l’une
en noir et blanc, la deuxième en
couleur et la troisième utilisant
une teinte sélectionnée pour N
et B(TE) dans le menu Réglages
image (page 71). Copie N et B(TE)
Conseil :contraste, nettetéet intensité
Le contraste, la netteté et l’éclat des images de la séquence
cadrage sont déterminés par les options sélectionnées dans le
menu Réglages image (page 71). La copie en noir et blanc est
enregistrée avec les réglages les plus récemment utilisés pour
Noir et Blanc, la copie en monochrome teinté avec les réglages
les plus récemment utilisés pour N et B (TE), et la copie couleur
avec le réglage actuellement utilisé pour Réglages image (si
Noir et Blanc ou N et B (TE) est sélectionné, la copie couleur
sera enregistrée avec le réglage Standard).
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Correction exposition flash
Réglez le niveau de flash sur une
valeur comprise entre –2,0 et +2,0,
par pas de 1/2 ou 1/3 EV. La sélection
de Correction exposition flash
dans le menu prise de vue affiche
le curseur illustré à droite ;
appuyez sur + ou – pour choisir une valeur de correction
d’exposition du flash et appuyez sur C/D.
La correction d’exposition
du flash s’affiche sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos, sauf si le
flash est désactivé.
4:3 N
Remarques
• Consultez la page 28 pour en savoir plus sur l’utilisation du flash.
• La valeur des pas de correction peut être définie sous Pas de
corr. expo/flash dans l’onglet de configuration (page 140).
Attention
Il se peut que la correction d’exposition du flash ne fonctionne
pas en dehors de la portée du flash. Consultez la documentation
fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus sur la
portée du flash.9
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Niveau de flash manuel
Choisissez la quantité de lumière produite par le flash
en mode flash manuel (page 28). Le niveau de flash est
exprimé sous la forme d’une fraction de la puissance
totale (toutes les valeurs sont approximatives) :
Max 1/1.4 1/2 1/2.8 1/4 1/5.6 1/8 1/11 1/16 1/22 1/32 1/64
Le niveau de flash s’affiche sur
l’écran d’affichage des photos en
mode flash manuel.
4:3 N
Remarque
La correction d’exposition du flash n’est pas disponible en mode
flash manuel.
Attention
Ne pointez pas le flash vers le conducteur d’un véhicule à moteur
et n’utilisez pas le flash à proximité des yeux du sujet. La plus
grande prudence est recommandée pour photographier des
enfants.
Réglage synchro du flash
Choisissez le type de synchronisation avec l’obturateur.
• 1er rideau : le flash se déclenche au début de
l’exposition. Cette option est recommandée pour la
plupart des situations.
• 2e rideau : le flash se déclenche à la fin de l’exposition.
Cette option produit des traînées de lumière derrière
les sources d’éclairage en mouvement.0
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Réduction bruit
Choisissez Faible ou Forte pour réduire le « bruit »
(variations aléatoires de la luminosité et de la couleur)
dans les photos prises avec des sensibilités ISO élevées.
La sensibilité ISO minimum, à laquelle s’applique la
réduction du bruit, peut être sélectionnée en utilisant
l’option Réduction bruit ISO.
s’affiche lorsque la réduction
du bruit est activée.
4:3 N
Remarques
• Lorsque l’option RAW est sélectionnée pour le paramètre
Qualité image/Taille (page 61), la réduction du bruit s’applique
uniquement à la copie JPEG et pas au fichier DNG.
• La durée nécessaire pour enregistrer les photos varie selon
l’option sélectionnée pour Réduction bruit.
Réduction bruit ISO
Sélectionnez la sensibilité ISO minimum à laquelle
s’applique la réduction du bruit lorsque l’option Faible
ou Forte est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Réduction
bruit. Sélectionnez Tous (la réduction du bruit
s’applique à toutes les sensibilités ISO), > à ISO 201, > à
ISO 401, > à ISO 801, ISO 1601 ou ISO3200.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Correction distorsion
Réglez l’option Correction distorsion sur Oui pour
corriger automatiquement la déformation de l’image
lors de la prise de vue.
s’affiche lorsque la correction
de la déformation est activée.
4:3 N
Attention
• Il est possible que la correction ne soit pas appliquée selon le
type d’unité appareil photo ou si cela n’est pas nécessaire en
raison de la position du zoom, même si l’option Correction
distorsion est réglée sur Oui. Le symbole de correction de
la déformation s’affiche cependant en mode lecture pour les
images auxquelles la correction n’est pas appliquée.
• La fonction de correction de la déformation n’est pas disponible
pour les fichiers DNG, les copies JPEG de données brutes, les
fichiers MP et les vidéos.
• Lorsque l’option Correction distorsion est réglée sur Oui,
l’angle de vue change.
• L’image corrigée ne s’affiche pas sur l’écran d’affichage des
photos, même si l’option Correction distorsion est réglée sur
Oui.
Macro auto
Lorsque l’option Macro auto est réglée sur Oui, l’appareil
photo active automatiquement le mode macro lors de la
mise au point sur un sujet proche de l’objectif si le mode
macro n’est pas activé.
N s’affiche lorsque l’appareil photo passe en mode
macro.2
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Retardateur personnalisé
Pour définir le nombre de photos à prendre et l’intervalle
de prise de vue pour le réglage personnalisé de l’option
retardateur, sélectionnez Retardateur personnalisé
dans le menu prise de vue et procédez comme suit :
1
Sélectionnez le nombre de photos à prendre et
l’intervalle de prise de vue.
Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner les
Cnombres, appuyez sur + ou – pour modifier.
/D pour revenir au mode prise de vue.
2Démarrez la prise de vue.
Appuyez sur le déclencheur. Le nombre de photos
indiqué est automatiquement pris à l’intervalle
sélectionné.
Appuyez sur C/D pour annuler le
retardateur avant que le nombre de photos indiqué
soit pris.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Prise de vue à intervalles
Pour prendre automatiquement des photos à
des intervalles entre cinq secondes et une heure,
sélectionnez Prise de vue à intervalles dans le menu
prise de vue et procédez comme suit :
1 Choisissez un intervalle.
Appuyez sur Fn et Fn2 pour
sélectionner les heures, les
minutes ou les secondes,
puis appuyez sur + et – pour
Cmodifier. Appuyez sur
/D pour revenir au
mode prise de vue.
Intervalle s’affiche sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos.
4:3 N
2Démarrez la prise de vue.
Appuyez sur le déclencheur. Ensuite, l’appareil
prend automatiquement les photos à l’intervalle
sélectionné.
3Arrêtez la prise de vue.
Appuyez sur C/D pour terminer la prise de vue.
Attention
• Le retardateur n’est pas disponible en mode 4.
• L’intervalle est réinitialisé à zéro lorsque l’appareil est mis hors
tension.
• Si le délai nécessaire pour enregistrer les photos est supérieur à
l’intervalle sélectionné, la prochaine photo n’est pas prise tant
que l’enregistrement n’est pas terminé.
• Le flash externe ne se déclenche pas en mode prise de vue à
intervalles. Utilisez le flash intégré.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Remarques
• Utilisez une batterie pleine et assurez-vous qu’il y a
suffisamment d’espace dans la mémoire interne ou sur la carte
mémoire. La prise de vue à intervalles prend automatiquement
fin lorsque la mémoire interne ou la carte mémoire est pleine.
• Les photos peuvent être prises à tout moment en appuyant sur
le déclencheur.
• Si l’option Continu ou Cont.M + est sélectionnée pour le
paramètre Mode Continu, la prise de vue en continu est
automatiquement désactivée.
Horodatage
L’appareil photo incruste la date de la prise de vue sur la
photo. Sélectionnez Date (AA/MM/JJ) ou Date et Heure
(AA/MM/JJ hh:mm).
DATE s’affiche lorsque
l’horodatage est activé.
4:3 N
Remarques
• L’horodatage n’est pas disponible lorsque l’horloge n’est pas
configurée. Configurez l’horloge (page 20, 149) avant d’utiliser
l’horodatage.
• La date ne peut pas être incrustée sur les vidéos.
• Lorsque l’option RAW est sélectionnée pour le paramètre
Qualité image/Taille, la date est incrustée uniquement sur la
copie JPEG et pas dans le fichier DNG.
• La date est incrustée définitivement sur l’image et ne peut plus
être effacée.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Correction de l’exposition
La correction de l’exposition peut être requise dans les
situations suivantes :
• Contre-jour très lumineux : le sujet qui subit un contre-jour
puissant peut être sous-exposé. Essayez d’augmenter
la correction de l’exposition.
• Le cadre est dominé par des objets très lumineux : le sujet peut
être sous-exposé. Essayez d’augmenter la correction de
l’exposition.
• Le cadre est pratiquement sombre (par exemple, un sujet
sous un projecteur dans une scène sombre) : le sujet
peut être surexposé. Essayez de réduire la correction
d’exposition.
1Affichez le curseur de correction d’exposition.
Sélectionnez Correction de
l’exposition dans le menu
prise de vue et appuyez sur
Fn2 pour afficher le curseur
illustré sur la droite.
2
Réglez la correction d’exposition.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour régler la valeur de
correction de l’exposition. Appuyez sur le
déclencheur pour prendre une photo ou appuyez
sur C/D pour revenir au mode prise de vue.
Pour les réglages différents de
0.0, la correction de l’exposition
s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage
des photos.
4:3 N
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Attention
La correction de l’exposition n’est pas disponible en mode M.
Remarque
La valeur des pas de correction peut être définie sous l’option Pas
de corr. expo/flash dans l’onglet de configuration (page 140).
Balance blancs
Avec le réglage Multi-P AUTO par défaut, l’appareil
photo règle automatiquement la balance des blancs afin
qu’un sujet blanc apparaisse blanc, quelle que soit la
couleur de la source lumineuse. Il peut être cependant
nécessaire d’adapter la balance des blancs à la source
lumineuse, dans les cas d’un éclairage mixte ou de la
prise de vue d’un sujet avec une couleur unie.
Option Description
Auto* L’appareil règle automatiquement la balance des blancs.
Multi-P AUTO
L’appareil règle la balance des blancs en tenant
compte des différences d’éclairage dans les différentes
zones du cadre (en mode continu, cette option est
équivalente à l’option Auto).
En extérieur
Utilisez cette option lors des prises de vue en lumière
du jour sous un ciel clair.
Nuageux
Utilisez cette option lors des prises de vue en lumière
du jour sous un ciel nuageux.
Lampe
incandescente
Utilisez cette option avec une lampe incandescente.
Lampe
fluorescente
Utilisez cette option avec une lampe fluorescente.
Réglage
manuel
Cette option permet de mesurer manuellement la
balance des blancs (page 88).
Détail
Cette option permet d’affiner le réglage de la balance
des blancs (page 88).
* L’icône s’affiche uniquement sur l’écran DIRECT.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Pour les réglages différents de
Auto, la sélection actuelle est
indiquée par une icône sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos.
4:3 N
Attention
• La balance des blancs automatique peut ne pas produire les
résultats souhaités en cas d’absence d’objets blancs dans la
scène. Pour y remédier, il suffit d’ajouter un objet blanc dans la
scène avant la prise de vue.
• Les options différentes de Auto peuvent ne pas produire les
résultats souhaités si le flash est utilisé. Sélectionnez Auto lors
de l’utilisation du flash
1Affichez les options de la balance des blancs.
Sélectionnez Balance blancs dans le menu prise de
vue et appuyez sur Fn2 pour afficher les options.
2
Sélectionnez une option.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une option.
Appuyez sur le déclencheur pour prendre une
photo ou appuyez sur la manette ADJ. ou sur C/
D pour revenir au mode prise de vue.
Remarque
Les options Balance blancs peuvent être affichées en appuyant
sur la manette ADJ. (page 134).
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Manuel :mesure dela balance des blancs
Pour mesurer une valeur de la balance des blancs :
1
Sélectionnez Réglage manuel.
Sélectionnez Réglage
manuel dans le menu
balance des blancs.
2Mesurez la balance des
blancs.
Cadrez une feuille de papier
blanc ou un autre objet blanc, afin de remplir tout
le cadre, et appuyez sur la touche DISP.. Répétez les
étapes 1 et 2 jusqu’à ce que l’effet souhaité soit
obtenu.
3
Revenez au mode prise de vue.
Appuyez sur C/D pour retourner au mode
prise de vue.
Remarque
La sélection d’une option différente de Réglage manuel
réinitialise la balance des blancs manuelle.
Détail :réglage fin dela balance des blancs
Pour affiner le réglage de la balance des blancs :
1
Sélectionnez Détail.
Sélectionnez Détail dans le
menu balance des blancs et
appuyez sur la touche DISP..9
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
2 Choisissez une valeur.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour
choisir une balance des
Cblancs. Appuyez sur
/D lorsque les
réglages sont terminés.
3
Revenez au mode prise de vue.
Appuyez sur C/D pour retourner au mode
prise de vue.
Remarque
La sélection d’une option différente de Détail réinitialise la
balance des blancs détaillée.
Compensation balance blancs
Compensez les dominantes couleurs en modifiant
la balance des blancs sur les axes vert-magenta ou
bleu-ambre. Les modifications s’appliquent à l’option
actuellement sélectionnée pour la balance des blancs
et à toutes les options sélectionnées tant que les
modifications sont en cours.
La sélection de l’option Compensation
balance blancs dans le menu prise de
vue (page 58) affiche les commandes
illustrées à droite. Sélectionnez la
compensation de la balance des blancs
à l’aide du pavé directionnel (page
37). Appuyez sur la touche DISP. pour
rétablir une valeur de compensation
de la balance des blancs neutre.
Appuyez sur C/D pour
enregistrer les modifications et quitter
ou appuyez deux fois sur la touche DISP.
pour annuler.
SFlb
Bleu
Vert
Magenta
Ambre
Quantité90
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
La compensation de la balance
des blancs s’affiche sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos.
4:3 N
Remarques
• La compensation de la balance
des blancs peut être assignée à
la manette ADJ. (page 134). Pour
réinitialiser, sélectionnez Réinitial. et
appuyez sur C/D.
• La compensation de la balance des
blancs peut également être assignée
aux touches Fn (page 136).
• Si le sélecteur de mode est placé sur 4, la compensation de
la balance des blancs est uniquement disponible en mode vidéo.
• L’option Compensation balance blancs du menu lecture (page
109) n’utilise pas les mêmes valeurs que celles du menu prise de
vue.
Sensibilité ISO
Réglez la sensibilité de l’appareil photo par rapport à la
lumière. Des valeurs élevées peuvent être utilisées pour
obtenir des vitesses d’obturation plus rapides, lorsque le
sujet est faiblement éclairé, et éviter ainsi les effets de flou.
• Auto : l’appareil règle automatiquement la sensibilité
en fonction de la luminosité, de la distance du sujet,
des options sélectionnées pour le mode macro, ainsi
que pour la taille et la qualité d’image.
• Auto-Hi (haute sensibilité automatique) : l’appareil
photo ajuste automatiquement la sensibilité
en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. En
comparaison du réglage Auto, il est possible de
sélectionner des sensibilités plus élevées pour les
sujets mal éclairés. La sensibilité maximum peut être
sélectionnée à l’aide de Sensibilité ISO auto-hi dans
l’onglet de configuration (page 140).9
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
• ISO (valeur) : l’appareil photo effectue la prise de vue
à l’aide de la valeur ISO sélectionnée. Les valeurs ISO
disponibles varient en fonction de l’unité appareil
photo. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité
appareil photo pour en savoir plus.
La sensibilité actuelle est indiquée
sur l’écran d’affichage des photos
(si l’option Auto ou Auto-Hi
est sélectionnée, la sensibilité
sélectionnée par l’appareil est
indiquée lorsque le déclencheur
est enfoncé à mi-course).
2.5 ISO 200
1
Sélectionnez une option de sensibilité ISO.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une option.
2
Prenez une photo ou retournez au mode prise de vue.
Appuyez sur le déclencheur pour prendre une
photo ou appuyez sur C/D pour revenir au
mode prise de vue.
Remarques
• Les options du paramètre Sensibilité ISO peuvent être
affichées en appuyant sur la manette ADJ. (page 134).
• La sensibilité lors de l’utilisation du flash et la plage de sensibilités
disponibles varient en fonction de l’unité appareil photo. Consultez
la documentation de l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus.
• Du « bruit » (variations de la luminosité et de la couleur) peut
apparaître dans les photos prises avec des sensibilités élevées.
Initialiser
Pour restaurer les réglages par défaut du menu prise
de vue (page 59), placez le sélecteur de mode sur 5 et
sélectionnez Initialiser dans le menu prise de vue. Une
boîte de dialogue de confirmation s’affiche ; sélectionnez
Oui et appuyez sur C/D pour restaurer les valeurs
par défaut et quitter le mode prise de vue.92
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Décalage ouverture auto
Lorsque l’option Oui est sélectionnée, l’appareil photo
règle automatiquement l’ouverture pour éviter la
surexposition en mode priorité à l’ouverture.
Remarque
Le décalage de l’ouverture automatique est uniquement
disponbible en mode priorité à l’ouverture.
Changement de mode prise de vue
Lorsque le sélecteur de mode est
placé sur un mode MY (page 57),
vous pouvez utiliser cette option
pour basculer entre les modes
5, P, A, S et M sans tourner
le sélecteur de mode sur une
nouvelle valeur. Cette option est uniquement disponible
en mode MY. Elle n’est cependant pas disponible si un
mode scène est attribué au mode MY.
Correction du bougé
Réglez l’option Correction du bougé sur Oui pour éviter
les effets de flou dus à un bougé de l’appareil.
E s’affiche lorsque la correction du bougé est activée.9
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Attention
• Il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible selon
l’unité appareil photo.
• La fonction de correction du bougé n’est pas disponible en
mode vidéo, en mode continu et lorsque la vitesse d’obturation
est réglée sur une seconde ou plus en mode exposition
manuelle. Si la fonction est activée en mode continu ou lorsque
la vitesse d’obturation est réglée sur une seconde ou plus en
mode exposition manuelle, E devient F, et en mode
vidéo, E disparaît.
• La fonction de correction du bougé ne peut empêcher le flou
occasionné par les mouvements du sujet (à cause du vent, etc.).
• Les effets de la fonction de correction du bougé varient en
fonction de l’environnement.
Remarque
J apparaît sur l’écran d’affichage des photos lorsque des
effets de bougé sont susceptibles de se produire.Fonctions de lectUre
9
Fonctions de lecture
Cette section décrit comment visualiser des vidéos et
des fichiers MP.
Visualisation de vidéos
Procédez comme suit pour visualiser des vidéos.
1Appuyez sur la touche 6.
Appuyez sur la touche 6 pour afficher les photos
au niveau de l’écran d’affichage des photos.
2Affichez la vidéo.
Appuyez sur +, –, Fn et Fn2
(page 34) pour faire défiler les
images jusqu’à la première
image de la vidéo à afficher.
Les vidéos sont marquées par
une icône 3.
3Démarrez la lecture.
Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour démarrer la lecture.
La progression est indiquée sur l’écran de lecture.
Les opérations suivantes peuvent être réalisées :
Action Commande Description
Avance/
Rembobinage
z/Z
Maintenez la touche z enfoncée pour l’avance
rapide, maintenez la touche Z enfoncée pour
le rembobinage. Si la vidéo est en pause,
appuyez sur la touche z ou Z pour avancer
ou rembobiner d’une image à la fois ; tenez
la touche enfoncée pour une avance ou un
rembobinage lent.
Pause/
Reprise
ADJ.
Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour mettre en
pause ; appuyez de nouveau pour reprendre
la lecture.
Réglage
du volume
+/–
Appuyez sur + pour augmenter le volume et
sur – pour le diminuer.
2010Fonctions de lectUre
9
Affichage de fichiers MP
Lorsque vous prenez des photos à l’aide de la fonction
Cont.M +, les photos sont enregistrées dans un fichier
MP. Procédez comme suit pour visualiser des fichiers MP.
Remarque
Les photos prises en mode continu normal peuvent être lues de
la meme maniere que les images normales.
1Appuyez sur la touche 6.
2Affichez le fichier MP.
Le fichier MP s’affiche avec le symbole S.
L’affichage change de la manière suivante.
2010/03/01 14:09 ISO 200
F 3.3
EV +1.0
1/55
Affichage de l’étape 2
• Appuyez sur la touche DISP. pour commuter
entre l’affichage normal et l’absence
d’affichage.
• Il est impossible d’agrandir les photos,
même en appuyant sur la touche z.
Les images sont affichées sous forme de
mosaïque.
• Les autres opérations sont identiques à
celles effectuées pour les photos normales.
z
Manette ADJ.
Z
2010/03/01 14:09 F 3.3
6/6
1 55
Vue mosaïque
• Les images des fichiers MP sont affichées
sous forme de mosaïque.
• Utilisez le pavé directionnel (page 37) pour
sélectionner une image.
• La touche DISP. est désactivée.
z
Manette ADJ.
Z
100-0001 6 6
2010/01/01 02:33 ISO 200 EV +1.0
F 3.3 1/55
Vue une image
• Une image sélectionnée dans la vue
mosaïque est affichée.
• Appuyez sur z pour agrandir l’image.
Manette ADJ.Fonctions de lectUre
9
2010/01/01 02:33 ISO 200 EV +1.0
F 3.3 1/55
100-0001 2 6
Diaporama
• Les photos sont automatiquement
affichées dans l’ordre où elles ont été prises,
en commençant par l’image affichée.
Les opérations disponibles pendant le diaporama
sont indiquées ci-dessous.
Pause/lecture Appuyez sur la manette ADJ..
Avance rapide Maintenez la touche z enfoncée pendant la lecture.
Retour Maintenez la touche Z enfoncée pendant la lecture.
Ralenti Maintenez la touche z enfoncée pendant la pause.
Rembobinage lent Maintenez la touche Z enfoncée pendant la pause.
Image suivante Appuyez sur la touche z pendant la pause.
Image précédente Appuyez sur la touche Z pendant la pause.
Première image
Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. vers la gauche
pendant la pause.
Dernière image
Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. vers la droite
pendant la pause.
Attention
• Les fonctions DPOF, Découper, Changer de taille, Correction
biais (mode lecture), Compensation de niveau et Compensation
balance blancs ne sont pas disponibles pour les fichiers MP.
• Les fonctions Réglage fonction indicateur et Protéger ne
peuvent être définies pour les images individuelles d’un fichier MP.
Si la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur ou Protéger est définie
lors de l’affichage de la vue mosaïque ou de la vue une image, le
réglage est appliqué au fichier MP et non à l’image individuelle.
• Les images individuelles des fichiers MP ne peuvent être supprimées.Fonctions de lectUre
9
Exportation de fichiers MP
Procédez comme suit pour extraire des images d’un
fichier MP et les enregistrer individuellement.
Remarques
• Les images extraites sont enregistrées sous la même taille que
l’image d’origine.
• Les fichiers originaux sont conservés après extraction.
1Appuyez sur la touche 6.
2Appuyez sur le fichier MP que vous souhaitez
exporter.
Le fichier MP s’affiche avec le
symbole S.
Pour exporter plusieurs
images, vous pouvez
également appuyer sur la
touche z de manière à
afficher la vue mosaïque, puis
passer à l’étape 3.
2010/03/01 14:09 ISO 200
F 3.3
EV +1.0
1/55
3Appuyez sur C/D.
Le menu des réglages de la lecture apparaît.
4Appuyez sur + ou – pour
sélectionner Exporter
photos, puis appuyez sur
Fn2.Fonctions de lectUre
9
Sélection d’uneimage
5Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner 1 image.
Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour
sélectionner l’image.
6Appuyez sur C/D.
Sélection de plusieursimages distinctes
5Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner Sél. mult,
puis appuyez sur C/D.
Si la vue mosaïque a été
affichée à l’étape 2 de la page
97, passez à l’étape 5.
6Appuyez sur + ou – pour
sélectionner Sél. indiv., puis
appuyez sur C/D.
7
Sélectionnez l’image et appuyez sur C/D.
Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour afficher l’écran
permettant de définir une plage d’images.
Reportez-vous à l’étape 7 et aux étapes suivantes, à
la page 99.
8
Répétez l’étape 7 pour sélectionner toutes les
images.
Pour désélectionner une image, sélectionnez-la et
appuyez sur C/D.
9Appuyez sur la touche N.
10
Sélectionnez Oui et appuyez sur C/D.Fonctions de lectUre
99
Sélection d’une plage de plusieursimages
5Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner Sél. mult,
puis appuyez sur C/D.
Si la vue mosaïque a été
affichée à l’étape 2 de la page
97, passez à l’étape 5.
6Appuyez sur + ou – pour
sélectionner Sél. série, puis
appuyez sur C/D.
7
Sélectionnez le point de départ de la plage
d’images que vous souhaitez définir et appuyez
sur C/D.
En cas d’erreur lors de la sélection du point de
départ de la plage d’images, appuyez sur la touche
DISP. pour retourner à l’écran de sélection du point
de départ.
Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour afficher l’écran
permettant de définir des images distinctes.
Reportez-vous à l’étape 7 et aux étapes suivantes, à
la page 98.
8
Sélectionnez le point final
de la plage d’images que
vous souhaitez définir et
appuyez sur C/D.
Exporter photos
Démarrage Exécuter
9
Répétez les étapes 7 et 8 pour définir l’ensemble
des plages.
10Appuyez sur la touche N.
11
Sélectionnez Oui et appuyez sur C/D.Fonctions de lectUre
00
Sélection detouteslesimages
5Appuyez sur + ou – pour
sélectionner Toutes vues,
puis appuyez sur C/
D.
6
Sélectionnez Oui, puis
appuyez sur C/D.0
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
Menu des réglages de la lecture
Cette section détaille les options du menu lecture et
décrit comment visualiser les photos sur un téléviseur.
Menu lecture
Appuyez sur la touche 6 en mode prise de vue et
procédez comme suit.
1Affichez le menu lecture.
Appuyez sur C/D.
2
Sélectionnez une rubrique de menu.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour faire défiler le menu et
appuyez sur Fn2 pour afficher les options de la
rubrique sélectionnée.
Remarque
Les éléments de la page suivante peuvent être affichés en
appuyant sur – et sur le bouton DIRECT simultanément.
Le menu lecture contient les options suivantes :
Option Page
Réglage fonction indicateur 102
Affichage photos marquées 103
Changer de taille 104
Découper 105
Compensation de niveau 106
Compensation balance blancs 109
Correction biais 110
Option Page
Diaporama 111
Protéger 112
Copier sur carte depuis mémoire
interne
115
DPOF 115
Exporter photos 97
Restaurer fichier 11702
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
Remarque
Les menus de configuration de l’appareil photo sont accessibles à
partir du menu lecture (page 126).
Réglage fonction indicateur
Enregistrez les fichiers d’images fréquemment visualisés
sous Réglage fonction indicateur (20 fichiers maximum)
de manière à pouvoir les rappeler facilement par la suite
à l’aide de la fonction Affichage photos marquées.
Définition/annulation d’un fichier à la fois
Pour définir ou annuler un fichier à la fois, affichez l’image et
appuyez sur C/D. Sélectionnez Réglage fonction
indicateur dans le menu lecture et appuyez sur la touche Fn2.
Sélectionnez Régler ou Annuler et appuyez sur C/D.
Remarques
• Lorsqu’un fichier est sélectionné, le symbole s’affiche à l’écran.
• Il n’est plus possible de définir de fichier lorsque 20 fichiers
sont sélectionnés. Annulez la sélection de certains fichiers et
sélectionnez les fichiers souhaités.
Définition/annulation de plusieurs fichiers à la fois
Procédez comme suit pour définir ou annuler plusieurs
fichiers à la fois.
1Affichez la vue mosaïque.
Appuyez sur z en mode lecture.
2
Sélectionnez une photo.
Sélectionnez une photo et appuyez sur C/D.
3
Sélectionnez Réglage fonction indicateur et
appuyez sur Fn2.
Les photos sélectionnées sont marquées d’une icône .0
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
4
Sélectionnez des photos supplémentaires.
Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner des photos
supplémentaires et appuyez sur C/D.
Répétez cette procédure pour définir ou annuler
l’ensemble des fichiers souhaités. Pour annuler la
sélection des photos, appuyez sur C/D une
fois le fichier sélectionné.
Attention
• Si le nom du fichier indiqué sous Réglage fonction indicateur
est modifié à l’aide d’un ordinateur, la fonction Réglage
fonction indicateur est annulée pour le fichier.
• Lorsque le contenu de la mémoire interne est copié sur une
carte mémoire SD, la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur
définie pour les fichiers de la mémoire interne est annulée.
• Si la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur est activée pour un
fichier de carte mémoire SD, le dossier [CLIPINFO] et le fichier
CLIP.CLI sont créés sur la carte mémoire SD. S’ils sont supprimés,
la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur est annulée pour les
fichiers correspondants.
• Si le nom d’un fichier est modifié à l’aide d’un ordinateur, il
est possible que la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur ne
puisse être activée pour le fichier.
• La fonction Réglage fonction indicateur peut uniquement
être sélectionnée pour les photos prises à l’aide de cet appareil.
Affichage photos marquées
Pour afficher les photos pour lesquelles la fonction
Réglage fonction indicateur est activée, sélectionnez
Affichage photos marquées dans le menu lecture.
Remarques
• Le fichier pour lequel la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur
est activée qui dispose du plus petit numéro de fichier est
affiché.0
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
• Appuyez sur le déclencheur ou sur la touche 6 pour activer le
mode prise de vue.
• Si la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur n’est sélectionnée
pour aucun fichier, un message s’affiche et le menu lecture
réapparaît.
• Si la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur est activée pour
plusieurs fichiers, appuyez sur la touche N pour afficher le
fichier avec le plus petit numéro de fichier.
• Lorsqu’un fichier pour lequel la fonction Réglage fonction
indicateur est activée est affiché en plein écran, appuyez sur
les touches +, –, Fn ou Fn2 pour passer à l’image précédente ou
suivante.
Changer de taille
Pour créer une petite copie d’une photo, sélectionnez
Changer de taille dans le menu lecture (page 101) et
choisissez une taille. Les photos prises au format L, M,
M ou M (page 61) peuvent être copiées au format M
ou VGA et les photos prises au format M peuvent être
copiées au format VGA. Il est impossible de changer la
taille des vidéos et des photos de qualité RAW.
Remarques
• Les images sont copiées selon un rapport d’affichage de 4 : 3.
Si le rapport d’affichage de la photo originale est de 16 : 9, 3 : 2,
ou 1 : 1, les côtés gauche et droit ou les parties supérieure et
inférieure des images sont rognés et affichés avec une bordure
noire à l’écran.
• Consultez la page 61 pour en savoir plus sur le choix de la taille
des photos pendant la prise de vue.0
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
Découper
Procédez comme suit pour découper une photo et
l’enregistrer dans un fichier distinct.
1Affichez une photo.
Affichez la photo à copier en mode lecture et
appuyez sur C/D.
2
Sélectionner Découper.
Appuyez sur C/D pour afficher le menu
lecture, sélectionnez Découper, puis appuyez sur Fn2.
Pour annuler le rognage, appuyez sur la touche DISP..
3Découpez la photo.
Définissez la taille du cadre de découpage avec
la touche z ou Z et la position du cadre de
découpage avec le pavé directionnel (page 37), puis
appuyez sur C/D.
Attention
• Seules les photos prises avec cet appareil peuvent être rognées.
• Les vidéos et les fichiers MP ne peuvent être rognés.
• Pour les images RAW (page 61), la fonction de rognage
s’applique uniquement à la copie JPEG.
• Les photos peuvent être rognées à plusieurs reprises. La qualité
de l’image se dégrade cependant à chaque recompression.
Remarques
• Lors du rognage d’une image, le taux de compression devient
Fin. Pour les images d’autres tailles, le taux de compression est
identique à l’image d’origine.
• Les réglages disponibles pour la taille du cadre de découpage
varient en fonction de la taille de l’image d’origine. À chaque
fois que vous appuyez sur la touche z, la taille du cadre de
découpage diminue d’un niveau (13 niveaux maximum).0
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
• La taille de l’image découpée varie en fonction de la taille
d’origine de l’image et du niveau de rognage (taille du cadre de
découpage).
Compensation de niveau
Cette option crée des copies traitées pour régler la
luminosité et le contraste. Corrigez automatiquement
la luminosité et le contraste ou procédez à des
ajustements manuels à l’aide d’un histogramme.
Auto :correction de niveau automatique
1Affichez une photo.
Affichez la photo à copier en mode lecture.
2
Sélectionnez Compensation de niveau.
Appuyez sur C/D
pour afficher le menu lecture,
sélectionnez Compensation
de niveau et appuyez sur Fn2.
3
Sélectionner Auto.
Sélectionnez Auto et
appuyez sur Fn2. Si l’appareil
photo est capable de créer
une copie, un aperçu s’affiche
avec l’image originale
affichée dans l’angle
supérieur gauche et la copie corrigée à droite. Si
l’appareil n’est pas capable de créer une copie, un
message d’erreur s’affiche et l’appareil quitte le
menu lecture.0
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
4 Copiez l’image.
Appuyez sur C/D. Pour quitter sans créer
de copie, appuyez sur la touche DISP.. Un message
s’affiche pendant que l’appareil copie la photo.
Manuel :correction de niveaumanuelle
Affichez la photo à copier et sélectionnez l’option
Manuel pour le paramètre Compensation de niveau
dans le menu lecture pour afficher un aperçu comme
indiqué à la page précédente, puis procédez comme suit.
1
Sélectionnez le point noir, le point blanc ou le
point médian.
L’aperçu manuel contient
un histogramme montrant
comment les pixels sont
distribués sur l’image en
fonction de la luminosité,
avec les pixels sombres sur
la gauche et les pixels clairs
sur la droite. Appuyez sur la
manette ADJ. pour faire défiler
le point noir, le point médian et le point blanc,
puis appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour placer le point
sélectionné avec une luminosité et un contraste
améliorés, comme décrit à la page suivante. Pour
obtenir de l’aide, appuyez sur la touche N ; appuyez
de nouveau sur cette touche pour revenir à l’aperçu.
2 Copiez l’image.
Appuyez sur C/D. Pour quitter sans créer
de copie, appuyez sur la touche DISP.. Un message
s’affiche pendant que l’appareil copie la photo.
De gauche à
droite : point noir,
point médian,
point blanc
De gauche à
droite : point noir,
point médian,
point blanc0
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
Conseil :choix du point noir, du point blancet du pointmédian
• Réglage de la luminosité : pour éclaircir
l’image, déplacez le point médian
vers la gauche. Pour assombrir
l’image, déplacez le point médian
vers la droite.
• Correction de l’exposition : si l’image
est surexposée, déplacez le point
noir vers la droite jusqu’à ce qu’il soit
aligné avec le pixel le plus sombre
de l’histogramme (voir à droite). Si
l’image est sous-exposée, déplacez
le point blanc vers la gauche jusqu’à
ce qu’il soit aligné avec le pixel le
plus clair. Vous pouvez alors déplacer
le point médian vers la droite ou la
gauche pour ajuster la luminosité.
Correction de la
surexposition
• Augmentation du contraste : pour
augmenter le contraste, alignez le
point noir sur le pixel le plus sombre
et le point blanc sur le pixel le plus
clair, comme illustré à droite. Vous
pouvez alors déplacer le point
médian vers la droite ou la gauche
pour ajuster la luminosité.
Attention
• La compensation de niveau est disponible uniquement pour les
photos prises avec cet appareil. Elle n’est pas disponible avec les
vidéos ou les photos enregistrées/prises à l’aide de Cont.M +.
Le résultat souhaité peut ne pas être obtenu avec des photos
monochromes.
• La compensation de niveau peut être appliquée à plusieurs
reprises. La qualité de l’image se dégrade cependant à chaque
recompression.09
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
Compensation balance blancs
Cette option crée des copies dont la balance des blancs
a été modifiée.
1Affichez une photo.
Affichez la photo à copier en mode lecture.
2
Sélectionnez Compensation balance blancs.
Appuyez sur C/D
pour afficher le menu lecture,
sélectionnez Compensation
balance blancs et appuyez
sur Fn2.
3
Réglez la balance des blancs.
Sélectionnez la
compensation de la balance
des blancs à l’aide du pavé
directionnel (page 37).
Appuyez sur la touche DISP.
pour rétablir une valeur de
compensation de la balance
des blancs neutre.
4Appuyez sur C/D.
Appuyez sur C/D pour copier l’image (pour
quitter sans créer de copie, appuyez deux fois sur
DISP.). Un message s’affiche pendant que l’appareil
copie la photo.0
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
Attention
• La compensation de la balance des blancs est disponible
uniquement pour les photos prises avec cet appareil. Elle n’est
pas disponible avec les vidéos ou les photos enregistrées/prises
à l’aide de Cont.M +. Le résultat souhaité peut ne pas être
obtenu avec des photos monochromes.
• La compensation de la balance des blancs peut être appliquée
à plusieurs reprises. La qualité de l’image se dégrade cependant
à chaque recompression.
Correction biais
Cette option permet de créer des copies traitées
pour réduire les effets de perspective des objets
rectangulaires, comme des tableaux d’affichage ou des
cartes de visite.
1Affichez une photo.
Affichez la photo à copier en mode lecture.
2
Sélectionnez Correction biais.
Appuyez sur C/D
pour afficher le menu lecture,
sélectionnez Correction
biais et appuyez sur Fn2. Si
l’appareil photo est capable
de détecter un objet auquel
la correction de perspective peut être appliquée,
un message s’affiche et l’objet concerné est marqué
d’un cadre jaune. L’appareil peut détecter jusqu’à
cinq objets ; pour sélectionner un objet différent,
appuyez sur Fn2, pour quitter sans aucune correction
de perspective, appuyez sur +. Si l’appareil est
incapable de détecter un objet approprié, un
message d’erreur s’affiche.
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
3Appuyez sur C/D.
Un message s’affiche pendant que l’appareil copie
la photo. La copie prend de 2 à 46 secondes, en
fonction de la taille d’image.
Attention
La correction des biais est disponible uniquement pour les
photos prises avec cet appareil. Elle n’est pas disponible avec les
vidéos ou les photos enregistrées/prises à l’aide de Cont.M +.
Pour les images RAW (page 61), la correction des biais s’applique
uniquement à la copie JPEG.
Remarques
• La copie est de la même taille que l’original. Plus la taille des images
est importante, plus la création de la copie prend du temps :
Taille
Durée
(approximative)
Taille
Durée
(approximative)
L 24s 3M 8s
M 18s 1M 5s
5M 12s VGA 2s
Pour réduire la durée de traitement nécessaire, créez une petite
copie de l’original en utilisant Changer de taille (page 104) et
exécutez la correction des biais sur la copie.
• La durée nécessaire pour la correction des biais varie en
fonction de l’unité appareil photo.
• La correction des biais peut être également appliquée pendant
la prise de vue (page 56).
Diaporama
Cette option permet de démarrer un diaporama
automatique. Les photos s’affichent dans l’ordre
d’enregistrement avec un intervalle de trois secondes.
Lors de la visualisation d’une vidéo, la lecture démarre
automatiquement.
Le diaporama se répète en boucle ; appuyez sur
n’importe quelle touche pour l’arrêter.2
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
Protéger
Cette option protège les
photos contre une suppression
accidentelle. Les fichiers protégés
sont marqués d’une icône
illustrée à droite.
4:3 N
Attention
Le formatage efface tous les fichiers, y compris les fichiers
protégés.
Protection des photosindividuelles
Pour protéger ou supprimer
la protection des fichiers
individuels, affichez la photo,
sélectionnez Protéger dans le
menu lecture, et appuyez sur Fn2
pour afficher les options illustrées
à droite (si l’image affichée n’est
pas la bonne, appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour afficher les
Cautres photos). Sélectionnez 1 fichier et appuyez sur
/D.
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
Modification del’état de protection de plusieurs fichiers
Procédez comme suit pour modifier l’état de protection
de plusieurs fichiers sélectionnés.
1
Sélectionnez Protéger dans le menu lecture, puis
appuyez sur Fn2.
Dans une vue multi-images,
passez à l’étape 2. Dans une
vue une image, les options
illustrées à droite s’affichent.
Sélectionnez Sél mult et
appuyez sur C/D.
2
Sélectionnez Sél. indiv. ou Sél. série.
Sélectionnez Protéger dans
le menu lecture, et appuyez
sur Fn2 pour afficher les
options illustrées à droite.
Pour sélectionner les images
une par une, sélectionnez Sél.
indiv., appuyez sur C/D et passez à l’étape
3. Pour sélectionner les images en définissant des
plages, sélectionnez Sel. série, appuyez sur C/
D et passez à l’étape 3.1.
3
Sélectionnez une photo.
Utilisez le pavé directionnel
(page 37) pour sélectionner
des photos, puis appuyez
sur C/D. Les photos
protégées sont marquées par
une icône . Pour supprimer
la protection d’une photo, sélectionnez-la et
appuyez de nouveau sur C/D.
4:3 N 4:3 N
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
Conseil :sélection deséries
Pour basculer entre les paramètres Sél. indiv. et Sél. série,
appuyez sur la manette ADJ. et procédez comme suit :
3.1 Utilisez le pavé directionnel
pour sélectionner la première
image de la série, puis
appuyez sur C/D pour
confirmer. L’image sélectionnée
est marquée par une icône.
Pour désélectionner l’image,
appuyez sur la touche DISP..
4:3 N
3.2 Utilisez le pavé directionnel
pour sélectionner la dernière
Cimage, puis appuyez sur
/D pour confirmer.
Les images sélectionnées sont
marquées d’une icône .
4:3 N
Répétez les étapes 3.1-3.2 pour sélectionner des séries
supplémentaires ou appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour
sélectionner ou désélectionner des photos individuelles,
comme indiqué à l’étape 3.
4Appuyez sur la touche N.
Un message s’affiche pendant que l’appareil photo
protège les fichiers sélectionnés. L’appareil revient
ensuite à la lecture normale.
Protection ou suppression dela protection detousles fichiers
Pour protéger tous les fichiers,
sélectionnez Protéger, puis
appuyez sur Fn2. Sélectionnez
CSélect. tout et appuyez sur
/D. Pour supprimer la
protection de tous les fichiers,
sélectionnez Annuler tout et appuyez sur C/D.
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
Copier sur carte depuis mémoire interne
Pour copier tous les fichiers de la mémoire interne sur
une carte mémoire, insérez la carte mémoire dans le
boîtier de l’appareil photo et sélectionnez Copier sur
carte depuis mémoire interne dans le menu lecture. Un
message s’affiche pendant le déroulement de la copie ;
l’appareil revient ensuite à la lecture lorsque la copie est
terminée.
Remarques
• Si l’espace disponible sur la carte mémoire est insuffisant pour
copier tous les fichiers de la mémoire interne, un message
s’affiche. Pour copier uniquement les fichiers correspondant à
l’espace disponible, sélectionnez Oui et appuyez sur C/
D; pour quitter sans copier aucun fichier, sélectionnez Non.
• Il est impossible de copier les fichiers de la carte mémoire dans
la mémoire interne.
DPOF
Pour commander des tirages professionnels de photos
sur une carte mémoire, utilisez cette option pour créer
un « bon à tirer » numérique listant les photos à tirer et le
nombre de tirages, puis déposez la carte mémoire dans un
centre de service de tirage numérique prenant en charge
la norme DPOF.
Remarque
Si un fichier RAW est sélectionné pour l’impression, seule la copie
JPEG sera imprimée.
Conseil : DPOF
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) est une norme utilisée pour
définir les photos à tirer et le nombre de tirages. Les photos
sélectionnées pour le tirage sont marquées d’un indicateur de
tirage DPOF (page 9).
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
Sélection des photosindividuelles à tirer
Pour ajouter ou supprimer une
photo du bon à tirer, affichez la
photo, sélectionnez DPOF dans
le menu lecture, puis appuyez
sur Fn2 pour afficher les options
illustrées à droite (si l’image
affichée n’est pas la bonne, appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour
afficher les autres photos). Sélectionnez 1 fichier et
appuyez sur C/D.
Sélection detoutesles photos à tirer
Pour sélectionner toutes les
photos à tirer, sélectionnez DPOF,
appuyez sur Fn2, sélectionnez
CSélect. tout, puis appuyez sur
/D. Pour supprimer
toutes les photos du bon à tirer,
sélectionnez Annuler tout et appuyez sur C/D.
Sélection de plusieurs photos à tirer
Pour sélectionner plusieurs photos à tirer :
1
Sélectionnez DPOF.
Appuyez sur C/D
dans une vue multi-images
pour afficher le menu lecture.
Sélectionnez DPOF et
appuyez sur Fn2.
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
2
Sélectionnez les photos et choisissez le nombre de
tirages.
Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner des
photos supplémentaires et sur + ou Fn2 pour choisir
le nombre de copies. Pour supprimer une photo
du bon à tirer, appuyez sur – jusqu’à ce que zéro
s’affiche.
3Appuyez sur C/D.
Un message s’affiche pendant que l’appareil crée le
bon à tirer. L’appareil revient ensuite à la vue multiimages.
Restaurer fichier
Pour restaurer tous les fichiers supprimés, sélectionnez
Restaurer fichier dans le menu lecture, puis appuyez sur
Fn2. Un message de confirmation s’affiche. Sélectionnez
Oui, puis appuyez sur C/D.
Remarque
Un message s’affiche s’il n’y a aucun fichier à restaurer.
Attention
Les fichiers ne peuvent être restaurés après l’exécution d’une des
opérations suivantes.
• Mise hors tension de l’appareil
• Basculement du mode lecture vers le mode prise de vue
• Utilisation de la fonction DPOF, Changer de taille, Copier sur
carte depuis mémoire interne, Correction biais, Compensation
de niveau, Compensation balance blancs ou Découper.
• Suppression de fichiers avec des réglages DPOF
• Initialisation de la mémoire interne ou de la carte mémoire SD
• Réglage ou annulation des fichiers pour la fonction Réglage
fonction indicateur
• Exportation de fichiers MP à l’aide de la fonction Exporter photos
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
Visualisation des photos sur un téléviseur
Pour visualiser les photos sur un téléviseur, raccordez le
boîtier de l’appareil photo à l’aide du câble A/V fourni.
1Mettez l’appareil hors tension.
Assurez-vous que l’appareil est hors tension avant
de brancher ou débrancher le câble A/V.
2
Raccordez le câble A/V au téléviseur.
Insérez la fiche blanche
dans le connecteur d’entrée
audio et la fiche jaune dans
le connecteur d’entrée vidéo.
Assurez-vous que les fiches
sont fermement insérées.
N’utilisez pas la force.
Entrée vidéo (jaune)
Entrée audio (blanc)
3
Raccordez le boîtier de l’appareil photo.
Ouvrez le couvercle du
connecteur et branchez le
câble dans le connecteur du
câble A/V. N’utilisez pas la force.
4
Réglez le téléviseur sur le
canal vidéo.
Sélectionnez l’entrée vidéo. Consultez le manuel du
téléviseur pour en savoir plus.
5Mettez le boîtier de l’appareil photo sous tension.
Appuyez sur la touche 6 pendant environ une
seconde pour mettre l’appareil sous tension en mode
lecture. L’écran d’affichage des photos et le hautparleur du boîtier de l’appareil photo s’éteignent, puis
les photos et les vidéos s’affichent sur le téléviseur.9
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
Attention
N’utilisez pas la force ou ne tirez pas sur le câble A/V lorsque
vous manipulez le boîtier de l’appareil photo avec le câble A/V
branché.
Remarques
• Le boîtier de l’appareil photo peut être raccordé au connecteur
d’entrée vidéo d’un enregistreur vidéo et les photos peuvent
être enregistrées en vidéo ou sur DVD.
• Le boîtier de l’appareil photo doit être raccordé aux téléviseurs
qui prennent en charge le format HDMI à l’aide d’un câble mini
HDMI (vendu séparément). Consultez la documentation fournie
avec le téléviseur pour en savoir plus.
• Si vous branchez ou débranchez le câble mini HDMI, l’écran
passe à la vue d’une seule photo. Lorsque le menu est affiché,
l’écran ne passe pas à la vue d’une seule photo même si vous
branchez ou débranchez le câble mini HDMI.
• Lorsque vous branchez le boîtier de l’appareil photo à
un téléviseur à l’aide d’un câble mini HDMI, les sons de
fonctionnement sont désactivés.
• Le boîtier de l’appareil prend en charge les normes vidéo
suivantes : NTSC (utilisée en Amérique du Nord, aux Caraïbes,
dans une partie de l’Amérique du Sud et dans certains pays
d’Asie du Sud-est) et PAL (utilisée au Royaume-Uni et dans la
plupart des pays d’Europe, en Australie, en Nouvelle-Zélande et
dans une partie de l’Asie et de l’Afrique). La norme SECAM n’est
pas prise en charge. Si possible, l’appareil est réglé sur la norme
utilisée dans votre pays ou votre région au départ de l’usine ;
avant de raccorder l’appareil à un dispositif utilisant une norme
vidéo différente, choisissez le mode vidéo approprié (page 149).20
MP i ression de Photos
Impression de photos
Le boîtier de l’appareil photo peut être raccordé à
une imprimante via le câble USB fourni, et les photos
peuvent être directement imprimées à partir du boîtier
de l’appareil photo sans utiliser d’ordinateur.
Attention
Une vidéo ne peut pas être imprimée. Si un fichier RAW est
sélectionné pour l’impression, seule la copie JPEG sera imprimée.
Remarque
Le boîtier de l’appareil photo est conforme à PictBridge, une
norme largement utilisée pour l’impression directe, et seules des
imprimantes compatibles PictBridge peuvent être utilisées pour
l’impression directe. Consultez la documentation fournie avec
votre imprimante pour savoir si la norme PictBridge est prise en
charge.
Raccordement du boîtier de l’appareil photo
Raccordez l’imprimante à l’alimentation électrique à
l’aide du câble USB fourni.
1Mettez l’appareil hors tension.
Assurez-vous que l’appareil est hors tension avant
de brancher ou débrancher le câble USB.
2
Raccordez le câble USB à l’imprimante.
Raccordez le câble USB à l’imprimante et mettez
l’imprimante sous tension.2
MP i ression de Photos
3
Raccordez le boîtier de l’appareil photo.
Ouvrez le couvercle du
connecteur et branchez le
câble dans le connecteur du
câble USB.
Appuyez sur la manette
ADJ.. L’appareil s’allume et
le message illustré à droite
s’affiche ; appuyez alors une
nouvelle fois sur la manette
ADJ..
Remarque
Si vous n’appuyez pas sur la manette ADJ. pendant l’affichage
du message ci-dessus, celui-ci peut dans certains cas être
remplacé après deux secondes par un message indiquant
que l’appareil est raccordé à un ordinateur. Mettez l’appareil
hors tension et appuyez de nouveau sur la manette ADJ..
Le message est remplacé par l’écran de lecture
PictBridge (si l’écran de lecture PictBridge ne
s’affiche pas, c’est que l’appareil est en train d’établir
la connexion avec l’imprimante).
Attention
N’utilisez pas la force ou ne tirez pas sur le câble USB lorsque vous
manipulez le boîtier de l’appareil photo avec le câble branché.22
MP i ression de Photos
Impression
Les photos peuvent être imprimées une par une, ou
plusieurs photos peuvent être sélectionnées pour
l’impression. Si une carte mémoire est insérée, les
photos seront imprimées à partir de la carte mémoire ;
dans le cas contraire, les photos seront imprimées à
partir de la mémoire interne.
Attention
Ne débranchez pas le câble USB pendant l’impression.
Remarque
Si une erreur s’affiche pendant l’impression, vérifiez l’imprimante
et agissez en conséquence.
Impression des photos une par une
Pour imprimer une photo sélectionnée :
1
Sélectionnez une photo.
Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2
jusqu’à ce que la photo
souhaitée s’affiche sur l’écran
de lecture PictBridge, puis
appuyez sur la manette ADJ..
Le menu illustré à droite
Cs’affiche, sélectionnez 1 fichier et appuyez sur
/D.
Conseil : impression d’unecopie detoutesles photos
Pour imprimer une copie de toutes les photos, appuyez sur
la manette ADJ. pour afficher les options illustrées ci-dessus
et sélectionnez Ts fich..2
MP i ression de Photos
2
Réglez les paramètres d’impression.
Le menu illustré à droite
s’affiche ; sélectionnez une
rubrique et appuyez sur Fn2
pour afficher les options
disponibles ou choisissez
Sélec imprim pour utiliser
les réglages par défaut de l’imprimante actuelle
(les options disponibles varient selon le type
d’imprimante ; il est impossible de sélectionner des
rubriques non prises en charge par l’imprimante
connectée). Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner
une option et appuyez sur C/D pour
confirmer et revenir au menu impression directe.
Paramètre Description
Format papier Choisissez un format de papier.
Type de papier Choisissez un type de papier.
Type d’impr. Choisissez le nombre d’images par page.
Impression date
Ce paramètre permet d’inclure la date et l’heure
d’enregistrement. Consultez la pages 20 et 149 pour
en savoir plus sur la sélection du format d’affichage
de la date et de l’heure. Si la photo a été prise
avec l’option Horodatage (page 84), seule la date
horodatée sera imprimée.
Nom du fichier Ce paramètre permet d’inclure le nom du fichier.
Optimisation
image
Choisissez si l’imprimante doit optimiser ou non les
données de la photo.
Taille impr. Choisissez la taille d’impression.
Qlté impr. Choisissez la qualité d’impression.
Impr. rapport
*
Ce paramètre permet d’imprimer un rapport.
Nombre de copies Choisissez le nombre de copies imprimées.
Économie d’encre
*
Ce paramètre permet d’utiliser moins de toner
pendant l’impression.
1 face/2 faces
*
Ce paramètre permet d’imprimer ou non sur les deux
faces du papier.
* Imprimantes Ricoh uniquement. Consultez http://www.ricoh.com/
pour en savoir plus.2
MP i ression de Photos
Remarque
Pour configurer l’option
sélectionnée comme paramètre
par défaut pour l’imprimante
actuelle lorsque le boîtier de
l’appareil photo est connecté,
appuyez sur la manette ADJ.. Le
menu illustré à droite s’affiche ; sélectionnez Oui et appuyez
sur C/D. Sélectionnez Non pour quitter sans
modifier le paramètre par défaut.
3Démarrez l’impression.
CPour démarrer l’impression, appuyez sur
/D lorsque le menu impression directe
illustré à l’étape 2 s’affiche. Un message s’affiche
pendant l’impression ; pour quitter avant la fin de
l’impression, appuyez sur la touche DISP.. L’écran de
lecture PictBridge s’affiche lorsque l’impression est
terminée.2
MP i ression de Photos
Impression de plusieurs photos
Pour imprimer plusieurs photos :
1Appuyez sur la touche Z.
Les photos s’affichent dans
une vue multi-images.
2
Sélectionnez une photo.
Sélectionnez une photo et
appuyez sur C/D.
3 Choisissez le nombre de copies.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour
choisir le nombre de copies.
Les photos sélectionnées
sont marquées d’une icône
; pour désélectionner une
photo, appuyez sur – jusqu’à
ce que zéro s’affiche.
4
Sélectionnez des photos supplémentaires.
Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner des
photos supplémentaires et sur + ou – pour choisir le
nombre de copies.
5
Réglez les paramètres d’impression.
Appuyez sur C/D pour afficher le menu
impression directe. Réglez les paramètres comme
indiqué à la page 123.
6Démarrez l’impression.
Pour démarrer l’impression, appuyez sur C/
D lorsque le menu impression directe s’affiche.
Un message s’affiche pendant l’impression ; pour
quitter avant la fin de l’impression, appuyez sur la
touche DISP.. L’écran de lecture PictBridge s’affiche
lorsque l’impression est terminée.
4:3 N 2
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Réglages de l’appareil
Vous pouvez accéder aux menus permettant de modifier
les réglages de l’appareil photo à partir des menus prise
de vue et lecture (pages 58 et 101).
1Affichez les menus.
Appuyez sur C/D pour afficher le menu du
mode actuel (page 58) (en mode scène, l’onglet
MODE s’affiche).
2
Sélectionnez un onglet.
Appuyez sur Fn pour
sélectionner l’onglet du menu
actuel et appuyez sur + ou
– pour sélectionner l’onglet
des options personnalisées
(page 127) ou l’onglet de
configuration (page 128).
Appuyez sur Fn2 pour placer
le curseur sur l’onglet
sélectionné.
1
2
1Onglet des options
personnalisées
2Onglet de
configuration
3
Sélectionnez une rubrique de menu.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour
sélectionner une rubrique
du menu et appuyez sur Fn2
pour afficher les options de la
rubrique sélectionnée.
4
Sélectionnez une option.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une option
et appuyez sur C/D pour confirmer et
quitter (la procédure peut être différente pour
certaines rubriques ; consultez la page de la rubrique
concernée).2
réglages de l a’ PPareil
L’onglet des options personnalisées contient les options
suivantes :
Option Défaut Page
Enr. Mes Réglages — 129
Récupération de Mes
Réglages
— 131
Éditer Mes Réglages — 132
Fonct. réglage Mon
réglage
Non 133
Comp. BB de Mes
Réglages
Non 133
Manette ADJ
Réglage
Balanceblancs 134
Manette ADJ
Réglage 2
ISO 134
Manette ADJ
Réglage
Qualité 134
Manette ADJ
Réglage
Réglages image 134
Option Défaut Page
Déclencheur ADJ Non 135
Rég. touche Fn AF/MF 136
Rég. touche Fn2 Flash manuel 136
Réglages bouton
+/–
Comp.expo. 137
Options du sélecteur
de mode lecture
Réglage1 138
Options sélecteur de
mode M
Réglage1 138
Mode M par seule
pression
Prioroverture 1382
réglages de l a’ PPareil
L’onglet de configuration contient les options suivantes :
Option Défaut Page
Format [Carte] — 139
Format [Mémoire
interne]
— 139
Luminosité LCD — 139
Transparence écran
DIRECT
Normale 140
Pas de corr. expo/flash 1/3EV 140
Sensibilité ISO auto-hi AUTO 400 140
Flash auxiliaire AF Oui 140
Mode veille 5?Minuten 141
Extinction auto 5?Minuten 141
Écran de lecture LCD 141
Attén. luminosité
auto LCD
Oui 142
Délai de validation LCD 0,5?secondes 142
Sons touches Tous 142
Réglages volume
(moyenne)
142
Zoom par seule
pression
9,8?× 143
Rotation auto Oui 143
Distance min de prise
de vue
Afficher 144
Option Défaut Page
Réglage niveau Affichage 144
Options affichage du
cadrage
144
Affichage touche Fn Oui 145
Afficher nom de Mon
Réglage
Non 145
Affichage infos prise
de vue
Non 145
CL-BKT Noir et Blanc (TE) Oui 146
Réglage espace
couleurs
sRVB 146
Image zoom
numérique
Normale 147
Mémo position curseur
menu
Non 147
N° séquentiel de la carte Oui 148
Réglage date — 149
Language/L (Variable
*
) 149
Sortie vidéo (Variable
*
) 149
Sortie HMDI AUTO 149
Lancer extraction
réglages
Boîtier 150
* Variableselon lepaysoularégion d’achat.
Attention
• Il est possible que les options affichées au niveau des onglets
des options personnalisées et de configuration varient en
fonction de l’unité appareil photo.
• Il est possible que les options affichées au niveau des onglets
des options personnalisées et de configuration varient selon si
l’unité appareil photo est installée ou non sur le boîtier.29
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Options personnalisées
Enr. Mes Réglages
Les réglages enregistrés via Enr. Mes Réglages peuvent
être rappelés en positionnant le sélecteur de mode sur
MY, MY2 ou MY, vous permettant de créer facilement et
de rappeler jusqu’à six jeux pour les réglages de prise de
vue fréquemment utilisés.
1Ajustez les réglages.
Configurez l’appareil photo avec les réglages
souhaités. Ci-après sont indiqués certains réglages
pouvant être enregistrés dans les réglages MY :
• Réglages de l’appareil : Mode prise de vue (mode
5, P, A, S, M ou 4), position du zoom
(mode 4), ouverture (modes A et M), vitesse
d’obturation (modes S et M), modes mise au point
manuelle, macro, flash, retardateur et affichage.
• Options du menu prise de vue : toutes les options à
l’exception des options Prise de vue à intervalles,
Décalage ouverture auto et Changement de
mode prise de vue. La compensation de la
balance des blancs peut être attribuée si le réglage
Comp. BB de Mes Réglages est activé (page 133).
• Options de configuration : Rég. touche Fn/Rég. touche
Fn2 (si l’option Fonct. réglage Mon réglage est activée ;
voir page 133), Reglages bouton +/-, Sensibilite ISO
auto-hi, Pas de corr. expo/ flash, Distance min de
prise de vue, Reglage niveau, Options affichage du
cadrage, Affichage infos prise de vue, CL-BKT Noir et
Blanc (TE) et Image zoom numerique.
Remarque
Les réglages pouvant être enregistrés dans les réglages MY varient
en fonction de l’unité appareil photo. Consultez la documentation
fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus.0
réglages de l a’ PPareil
2
Sélectionnez Enr. Mes Réglages.
Sélectionnez Enr. Mes
Réglages au niveau
de l’onglet des options
personnalisées, puis appuyez
sur Fn2.
3
Enregistrez les réglages.
Pour attribuer les réglages
aux fonctions MY, MY2 et
MY du sélecteur de mode,
sélectionnez MY1, MY2
Cou MY3 et appuyez sur
/D (pour quitter
sans enregistrer les réglages,
appuyez sur la touche DISP.).
Pour enregistrer les réglages
dans une « boîte » à rappeler
et à assigner ultérieurement
au sélecteur de mode (page
131), sélectionnez Boîte
Mes Réglages et appuyez
sur Fn2. Sélectionnez la boîte
Csouhaitée et appuyez sur
/D.
Les boîtes sans nom seront
nommées avec la date du
jour. Si un nom a déjà été
assigné à la boîte, la boîte
de dialogue illustrée à droite
s’affiche. Sélectionnez Oui
pour utiliser le nom actuel
et Non pour utiliser un nom
basé sur la date du jour.
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Récupération de Mes Réglages
Copiez les réglages d’une « boîte » vers MY, MY2 ou MY.
Sélectionnez Récupération de Mes Réglages dans
l’onglet des options personnalisées, appuyez sur Fn2,
puis procédez comme suit.
1
Sélectionnez une destination.
Sélectionnez la destination
des réglages mémorisés
(MY1, MY2 ou MY3) et
appuyez sur Fn2.
2
Sélectionnez la source.
Sélectionnez les réglages qui
seront attribués à la position
choisie sur le sélecteur de
mode et appuyez sur C/
D.
Pour quitter sans assigner les réglages au sélecteur
de mode, appuyez sur la touche DISP..
Attention
Si Éditer Mes Réglages est utilisé pour modifier les boîtes
actuellement assignées au sélecteur de mode, les modifications
seront prises en compte lorsque le sélecteur de mode sera
positionné sur la position assignée à la boîte concernée. Les
modifications apportées aux réglages directement assignés à
MY, MY2 ou MY ne sont cependant pas prises en compte dans
les boîtes actuellement assignées au sélecteur de mode, et si les
boîtes sont modifiées par la suite, ces modifications ne seront pas
prises en compte dans les réglages assignés à MY, MY2 ou MY.2
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Éditer Mes Réglages
Modifiez et renommez les réglages enregistrés avec Enr.
Mes Réglages.
Sélectionnez Éditer Mes Réglages dans l’onglet des
options personnalisées, appuyez sur Fn2, puis procédez
comme suit.
1
Sélectionnez un réglage.
Pour assigner les réglages
à MY, MY2 ou MY sur
le sélecteur de mode,
sélectionnez MY1, MY2 ou
MY3 et appuyez sur Fn2.
Pour modifier les réglages
d’une « boîte », sélectionnez
Boîte Mes Réglages et
appuyez sur Fn2. Sélectionnez
la boîte souhaitée et appuyez
sur Fn2.
2Modifiez les réglages.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour
sélectionner les rubriques
et appuyez sur Fn2 pour les
modifier (consultez la section
de chaque rubrique dans ce
manuel pour en savoir plus).
Après avoir modifié chaque
rubrique, appuyez sur Fn pour revenir à la liste des
réglages, où vous pouvez modifier d’autres réglages.
3
Enregistrez les modifications et quittez.
Appuyez sur C/D pour enregistrer les
modifications et quitter (pour quitter sans enregistrer
les modifications, appuyez sur la touche DISP.).
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Conseil : nommerMes Réglages
Sélectionnez Nom à l’étape 2 pour
renommer le réglage. Le nom actuel
est sélectionné dans la zone du nom ;
pour modifier le nom actuel, appuyez
sur Fn ou Fn2 pour positionner le
curseur dans la zone du nom et
appuyez sur – pour placer le curseur
dans la zone du clavier (pour supprimer
le nom actuel, appuyez sur – lorsque
le nom est sélectionné). Sélectionnez les caractères à l’aide de +,
–, Fn ou Fn2 et appuyez sur C/D pour saisir le caractère
sélectionné à la position actuelle du curseur (pour supprimer
le caractère avant la position actuelle du curseur, sélectionnez
[Suppr.]). Appuyez sur la touche t pour basculer entre
majuscules et minuscules. Les noms peuvent avoir jusqu’à 32
caractères de long. Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour quitter ou
sur la touche DISP. pour quitter sans renommer les réglages.
Fonct. réglage Mon réglage
Sélectionnez Oui pour enregistrer les réglages attribués
aux touches Fn (page 136) dans les réglages MY
enregistrés sous Enr. Mes Réglages.
Comp. BB de Mes Réglages
Sélectionnez Oui pour enregistrer le réglage de
compensation de la balance des blancs (page 89) dans
les réglages MY enregistrés sous Enr. Mes Réglages.
Zone du nom
Zone du clavier Zone du clavier
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Manette ADJ Réglage
Assignez jusqu’à quatre options fréquemment utilisées
à la manette ADJ. pour un accès rapide en mode 5, P, A,
S ou M. Par défaut, la manette ADJ. peut être utilisée pour
la balance des blancs (page 86), la sensibilité ISO (page
90), la qualité d’image (page 61) et le réglage des images
(page 71). Les fonctions suivantes peuvent également
être attribuées : compensation de la balance des blancs
(page 89), mise au point (page 64), mesure (page 70),
continu (page 73), cadrage (page 75), compensation
du flash (page 78), niveau de flash manuel (page 79) et
correction de l’exposition (page 85).
En mode 4, la manette ADJ. peut être utilisée pour
sélectionner la balance des blancs et la compensation
de l’exposition (la compensation de l’exposition n’est pas
disponible en mode vidéo).
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Utilisation delamanette ADJ.
Pour sélectionner une option actuellement assignée à la
manette ADJ. :
1Affichez les options.
Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. en mode prise de vue
et appuyez sur la manette vers la gauche ou vers
la droite ou appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour afficher les
options attribuées à la manette.
Réglage 1 Réglage 2
Réglage 4 Réglage 3
2
Sélectionnez une option.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une option et
appuyez sur la manette ADJ. ou sur C/D.
Conseil
Maintenez la manette ADJ. enfoncée pour faire défiler rapidement
les options disponibles.
Déclencheur ADJ
Sélectionnez Oui pour utiliser le déclencheur afin de
valider l’option sélectionnée en mode ADJ..
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Rég. touche Fn1/Fn2
Sélectionnez les fonctions
attribuées aux touches Fn et Fn2
avec les options Rég. touche
Fn1/Fn2 de l’onglet des options
personnalisées.
Ci-après sont indiquées certaines des fonctions pouvant
être attribuées aux touches Fn et Fn2.
Option Description
AF/MF
Cette option permet de basculer entre AF multi ou AF spot et
la mise au point manuelle (page 64). *
1, 3
AF/Snap
Cette option permet de basculer entre AF multi ou AF spot et
la mise au point snap (page 64). *
4
Verrouill. AE Cette option permet de verrouiller l’exposition. *
2, 5
JPEG>RAW*
10
Si une option autre que RAW est sélectionnée pour le
paramètre Qualité image/Taille, appuyez sur la touche Fn
pour sélectionner une option RAW avec le même rapport
d’affichage (page 61). *
5, 6
Couleur>N et B
Sélectionnez l’option Noir et Blanc pour le paramètre
Réglages image (page 71). *
7
Couleur>TE
Sélectionnez l’option N et B(TE) pour le paramètre Réglages
image (page 71). *
7
Comp. expo.
Cette option affiche le curseur de la correction d’exposition
(page 85). *
5
Balance blancs
Cette option permet d’afficher les options de la balance des
blancs (page 86).
Correction WB
Cette option affiche les commandes de compensation de la
balance des blancs (page 89). *
9
ISO Cette option permet d’afficher les options de sensibilité ISO (page 90). *
7
Qualité
Cette option affiche les options de qualité et de taille de
l’image (page 61).
Mise au point Cette option affiche les options de mise au point (page 64). *
4
Réglages image Cette option affiche les options de réglage des images (page 71). *
7
Mesure expo. Cette option affiche les options de mesure de l’exposition (page 70). *
7
Mode Continu Cette option affiche les options de prise de vue en continu (page 73). *
8
Cadrage auto Cette option affiche les options de cadrage (page 75). *
8
Cible macro
Cette option permet de positionner la cible de mise au point
en mode macro (page 68). *
3
Correct. flash
Cette option affiche le curseur de compensation du flash
(page 78). *
4, 5
Niveau flash Cette option permet de régler la puissance du flash manuel (page 79). *
8
réglages de l a’ PPareil
*
1
Si la mise au point est verrouillée en mode mise au point automatique
(page 64), la sélection de la mise au point manuelle définit la distance
de mise au point sur la distance à laquelle la mise au point est
verrouillée.
*
2
L’exposition ne peut pas être verrouillée en mode M. Un appui sur la
touche Fn en mode M définit l’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation sur
des valeurs proches de celles nécessaires pour obtenir une exposition
optimale.
*
3
Non disponible lorsque l’option Portrait, Sports, Paysage ou Nuit est
sélectionnée en mode 4.
*
4
Non disponible lorsque Paysage est sélectionné en mode 4.
*
5
Non disponible lorsque Vidéo est sélectionné en mode 4.
*
6
Non disponible lorsque Correction biais est sélectionné en mode 4.
*
7
Non disponible en mode 4 autre que Correction biais.
*
8
Non disponible en mode 4.
*
9
Non disponible en mode 4 autre que Vidéo.
*
10
La taille des images de fichiers RAW varie en fonction des réglages
sélectionnés sous Qualité image/Taille.
Réglages sous Qualité image/Taille Taille des données RAW
L (16:9), M (16:9), 5M, 3M, 1M, VGA RAW (16:9)
L (4:3), M (4:3) RAW (4:3)
L (3:2), M (3:2) RAW (3:2)
L (1:1), M (1:1) RAW (1:1)
Par défaut, l’option AF/MF est attribuée à la touche Fn
et l’option Niveau flash à la touche Fn2 button.
Réglages bouton +/-
Sélectionnez les fonctions à attribuer aux touches + et –.
Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : Non, Correct.
flash (page 78), Niveau de flash manuel (page 79) et
Correction de l’exposition (page 85).
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Options du sélecteur de mode lecture/options sélecteur de mode M
Sélectionnez les fonctions à attribuer à la manette ADJ. et
au sélecteur plus-moins en mode lecture et en mode M.
Options du sélecteur de mode lecture Options sélecteur de mode M
Réglage 1 Réglage 2 Réglage 1 Réglage 2
Manette
ADJ.
Image
suivante/
précédente
Défilement
gauche/droite
Vitesse
d’obturation
Ouverture
Sélecteur
plusmoins
Zoom avant/
arrière
Défilement
haut/bas
Ouverture
Vitesse
d’obturation
Mode M par 1 seule pression
Lorsque la correction d’exposition est assignée aux
touches + et – (page 137) ou lorsque le verrouillage AE
est assigné aux touches Fn et Fn2 (page 136), un appui
sur la touche concernée en mode exposition manuelle
définit l’ouverture et/ou la vitesse d’obturation sur des
valeurs proches de celles nécessaires pour obtenir une
exposition optimale. Sélectionnez un réglage parmi les
options suivantes.
• Prior overture : l’ouverture conserve la valeur
sélectionnée ; la vitesse d’obturation est ajustée pour
obtenir une exposition optimale.
• Prior obturat. : la vitesse d’obturation conserve la
valeur sélectionnée ; l’ouverture est ajustée pour
obtenir une exposition optimale.
• Programme : l’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation sont
ajustées pour obtenir une exposition optimale.
Remarque
En mode exposition manuelle, la correction de l’exposition ne
peut pas être effectuée avec les touches + et – et le verrouillage
AE ne peut pas être obtenu avec les touches Fn.9
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Configuration
Format [Carte]/Format [Mémoire interne]
Sélectionnez Format [Carte] pour formater la carte
mémoire avant la première utilisation, après l’avoir
utilisée dans un autre dispositif, ou si une erreur de
carte s’affiche lorsque la carte est insérée dans le boîtier
de l’appareil photo. Sélectionnez Format [Mémoire
interne] si un message s’affiche vous demandant de
formater la mémoire interne.
Attention
• Le formatage supprime définitivement toutes les données sur la
carte ou dans la mémoire interne. Avant le formatage, copiez sur
un ordinateur toutes les données que vous souhaitez conserver
(page 151).
• Sélectionner Format [Carte] affiche un message d’erreur si
aucune carte mémoire n’est insérée. Mettez l’appareil hors
tension et insérez une carte mémoire.
Conseil : protection contrel’écriture
Pour empêcher le formatage des cartes mémoire, faites glisser
le curseur de protection contre l’écriture sur la position « LOCK »
(page 16). Replacez le curseur sur sa position originale pour
retrouver un fonctionnement normal.
Luminosité LCD
Cette option permet d’afficher
la commande illustrée à droite.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour ajuster la
luminosité de l’écran d’affichage
Cdes photos, puis appuyez sur
/D pour retourner au
menu configuration. Appuyez de
nouveau sur C/D pour quitter le mode prise de
vue ou le mode lecture.0
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Remarque
L’écran luminosité affiche la vue à travers l’objectif (mode prise
de vue) ou la photo la plus récemment affichée (mode lecture ;
si aucune photo n’est disponible en lecture, aucune image n’est
affichée sur l’écran luminosité).
Transparence écran DIRECT
Sélectionnez l’intensité de l’image d’arrière-plan affichée
sur l’écran DIRECT : Sombre, Normal, Clair ou Image
désactiv.
Pas de corr. expo/ flash
Sélectionnez la valeur des pas pour la correction de
l’exposition et la compensation du flash. Sélectionnez
1/2EV ou 1/3EV.
Remarque
En mode priorité à l’obturation, la valeur des pas est réglée
sur 1/3EV, même si l’option 1/2EV est sélectionnée pour le
paramètre Pas de corr. expo/ flash.
Sensibilité ISO auto-hi
Choisissez la sensibilité maximum sélectionnée par
l’appareil photo lorsque Auto-Hi est sélectionné
pour Sensibilité ISO en mode prise de vue (page 90).
Sélectionnez ISO 200 (AUTO 200), 400 (AUTO 400), 800
(AUTO 800), 1600 (AUTO 1600) ou 3200 (AUTO3200).
Remarque
Du bruit (variations de la luminosité et de la couleur) peut
apparaître dans les photos prises avec des sensibilités élevées.
Flash auxiliaire AF
Si l’option Oui est sélectionnée, le flash auxiliaire AF
s’allume pour aider au fonctionnement de la mise au
point, lorsque le sujet est faiblement éclairé.
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Mode veille
Sélectionnez la durée à l’issue de laquelle le mode veille
de l’écran d’affichage des photos est activé. Sélectionnez
Non, 1 minute, 5 minutes ou 30 minutes. Le témoin
de mise au point automatique/flash s’allume en mode
veille. Appuyez sur n’importe quelle touche pour
annuler le mode veille.
Attention
• Le boîtier de l’appareil photo ne passe pas en mode veille
lorsque :
• Le menu prise de vue, options personnalisées ou
configuration est affiché.
• Le boîtier de l’appareil photo est mis sous tension en appuyant
sur la touche 6 et que l’interrupteur MARCHE-ARRÊT est sur
ARRÊT.
• L’objectif de l’unité appareil photo n’est pas replié en mode veille.
Extinction auto
Choisissez le délai avant que l’appareil se mette
automatiquement hors tension pour économiser
l’énergie en cas de non-utilisation. Sélectionnez Non
(l’appareil photo ne s’éteint pas automatiquement), 1
minute, 5 minutes ou 30 minutes.
Remarque
Lorsque les options Mode veille et Extinction auto sont
activées, la fonction Extinction auto est activée une fois la durée
définie pour Mode veille écoulée.
Écran de lecture
Sélectionnez l’écran d’affichage des images : LCD (écran
d’affichage des photos) ou VF (viseur), lorsque le viseur
LCD(VF-2) est installé sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo.
Si le viseur n’est pas installé, les images sont affichées sur
l’écran d’affichage des photos quel que soit le réglage de
l’option Écran de lecture.2
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Attén. luminosité auto LCD
Si l’option Oui est sélectionnée, l’écran d’affichage des
photos s’atténue pour économiser de l’énergie lorsque
l’appareil photo est maintenu immobile pendant environ
cinq secondes en mode prise de vue. Déplacez l’appareil
photo ou appuyez sur n’importe quelle touche pour
rétablir la luminosité de l’écran d’affichage des photos.
Délai de validation LCD
Choisissez la durée d’affichage des photos sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos immédiatement après la prise
de vue. Sélectionnez 0,5, 1, 2 et 3secondes, Garder (les
photos s’affichent jusqu’à ce que le déclencheur soit
enfoncé à mi-course et elles peuvent être visualisées
avec le zoom en lecture ou supprimées ; voir pages 38 et
39) ou Non (les photos ne sont pas affichées sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos après la prise de vue).
Sons touches
Choisissez lorsque l’appareil émet un son.
Option Description
Tous
Des sons sont émis au démarrage, lorsque le déclencheur est
relâché, lorsque l’appareil effectue la mise au point et lorsqu’une
erreur survient. Si Son ou Aff.+son est sélectionné pour Réglage
niveau (page 32), l’appareil émettra également un signal sonore
à intervalles réguliers lorsque l’appareil est de niveau.
Son
niveau
Si l’option Son ou Aff.+Son est sélectionnée pour le paramètre
Réglage niveau, l’appareil émet un signal sonore à intervalles
réguliers lorsqu’il est de niveau.
Sons
déclench.
Des sons sont émis lorsque le déclencheur est relâché ou
lorsqu’une erreur survient. Si Son ou Aff.+son est sélectionné
pour Réglage niveau, l’appareil émettra un signal sonore à
intervalles réguliers lorsque l’appareil est de niveau.
Réglages volume
Sélectionnez le volume pour les sons décrits dans la
section « Son touches ». Choisissez entre (non),
(faible), (moyen) et (fort).
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Zoom par 1 seule pression
Sélectionnez l’agrandissement avec lequel les photos
Csont affichées lors d’un zoom avant en utilisant la touche
/D ou la manette ADJ. (page 38). Sélectionnez
5,7×, 9,8× ou 16×.
Remarques
• Le taux d’agrandissement maximal varie en fonction de la taille
de l’image (page 38).
• Si le taux d’agrandissement maximal d’une taille d’image est
inférieur au réglage spécifié dans Zoom par 1 seule pression,
l’image peut être agrandie au taux maximal de la taille d’image
(page 38).
Rotation auto
Sélectionnez Oui pour afficher automatiquement les
photos avec l’orientation correcte pendant la lecture.
Attention
L’affichage des vidéos, des photos prises avec la fonction
Cont.M + (page 73) et des photos prises alors que l’appareil
photo est à l’envers ou fortement incliné vers l’avant ou vers
l’arrière ne subit aucune rotation. Les photos ne sont pas pivotées
lorsque l’unité appareil photo n’est pas fixée sur le boîtier de
l’appareil photo, pendant les diaporamas, en vue multi-images ou
affichées sur un téléviseur, ni lorsque l’appareil est à l’envers ou si
l’appareil est renversé pendant le zoom en lecture ou lorsqu’une
correction des biais est en cours.
Remarque
Lors du cadrage ou lors de la prise de photos à l’aide de la
fonction Continu, l’appareil photo enregistre uniquement
l’orientation de la première photo de chaque série. Les photos
restantes ne s’affichent pas avec l’orientation correcte si l’appareil
a été renversé pendant la prise de vue.
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Distance min de prise de vue
Sélectionnez Afficher pour afficher la distance minimale
de prise de vue sur l’écran d’affichage des photos.
Réglage niveau
L’appareil photo vous informe que l’image est de niveau
lors de la prise de vue à l’aide de l’indicateur de niveau et
de sons. Choisissez les réglages de l’indicateur de niveau
(page 32).
Options affichage du cadrage
Choisissez le type de la grille de cadrage disponible en
mode prise de vue (page 42).
Paramètre Description
Une grille trois par trois pour des compositions
en « règle de trois ».
Une grille quatre par quatre avec des
diagonales d’un angle à l’autre qui facilitent
le centrage du sujet. Cette grille est utilisée
pour des photos d’architecture ou de produits
à afficher.
Une grille deux par deux, avec le centre du
cadre libre, pour faciliter la visualisation du
sujet. Cette grille est utilisée pour les sujets en
mouvement.
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Affichage touche Fn
Sélectionnez Oui pour afficher les
options actuellement assignées
aux touches Fn lorsque l’appareil
photo est mis sous tension,
lorsque le mode prise de vue est
sélectionné ou lorsqu’un nouveau
mode est sélectionné avec le sélecteur de mode.
Afficher nom de Mon Réglage
Sélectionnez Oui pour afficher
le nom des réglages assignés à
la position actuelle du sélecteur
de mode, lorsque le sélecteur est
positionné sur MY, MY2 ou MY.
Affichage infos prise de vue
Sélectionnez Oui pour afficher les
icônes de prise de vue dans un
cadre entourant la vue à travers
l’objectif (page 8), facilitant le
cadrage des photos sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos. Le cadre
n’est pas affiché en mode vidéo.
4:3 N
4:3 N
2010
4:3 N
réglages de l a’ PPareil
CL-BKT Noir et Blanc (TE)
Choisissez le nombre et le type de copies créées avec
le cadrage couleur (page 77). Sélectionnez Oui pour
enregistrer trois copies de chaque prise de vue (une en
noir et blanc, une deuxième en couleur et une troisième
en monochrome teinté), Non pour enregistrer deux
copies (une en noir et blanc et la seconde en couleur).
Remarque
Quel que soit le réglage choisi, trois copies de chaque photo
sont enregistrées si l’option N et B(TE) est sélectionnée pour le
paramètre Réglages image.
Réglage espace couleurs
Choisissez l’espace colorimétrique utilisé pour
enregistrer les photos. sRVB est largement utilisé pour
reproduire des images numériques, mais offre une
gamme de couleurs plus petite que AdobeRVB.
Attention
L’espace colorimétrique Adobe RVB a été développé par Adobe
Systems Inc. et il est compatible avec l’espace colorimétrique
par défaut utilisé dans Adobe Photoshop et d’autres logiciels
de retouche photo. Cependant, notez que les couleurs seront
correctement reproduites uniquement dans les logiciels prenant
en charge l’espace colorimétrique Adobe RVB. Notez également
qu’un équipement spécialisé est requis pour imprimer la plage
entière des couleurs de la gamme Adobe RVB ; lors d’une
impression avec une imprimante domestique grand public ou
à travers un service de tirages photo numérique, les couleurs
seront généralement moins vives que celles des photos utilisant
l’espace colorimétrique sRVB.
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Image zoom numérique
Indiquez comment les photos prises à l’aide du zoom
numérique sont enregistrées.
• Normale : zoom numérique normal. Une partie de
l’image est rognée et la photo est agrandie au format
sélectionné sous Qualité image/Taille, ce qui entraîne
une baisse de la qualité de l’image.
• Taille auto : une partie de l’image est rognée et l’image
est enregistrée au format rogné. La qualité de l’image
reste la même. La taille de l’image est cependant
réduite. La taille de l’image rognée varie en fonction
du taux de zoom. Consultez la documentation fournie
avec l’unité appareil photo.
Le zoom Taille auto est uniquement disponible lorsque
le rapport 4:3 est sélectionné pour L, sous Qualité
image/Taille (page 61).
La taille d’image actuelle s’affiche
sur l’écran d’affichage des photos
lorsque l’appareil photo effectue
un zoom avant.
4:3 N
Attention
La fonction Taille auto n’a aucun effet lorsque l’option Cont.M +
ou Correction biais est sélectionnée en mode 4 ou lorsque
l’option RAW est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Qualité image/
Taille.
Mémo position curseur menu
Si l’option Oui est sélectionnée, la rubrique la plus
récemment utilisée sera sélectionnée lorsque le menu
s’affiche.
réglages de l a’ PPareil
N° séquentiel de la carte
Choisissez comment l’appareil photo nomme les fichiers
image lors de l’enregistrement des photos sur une carte
mémoire.
• Oui : les noms de fichier sont composés de « R » suivi
d’un nombre à sept chiffres (par exemple « R0010001.
jpg »), par ordre ascendant de 0010001 à 9999999.
Lorsqu’une nouvelle carte mémoire est insérée, la
numérotation des fichiers continue à partir du dernier
nombre utilisé.
• Non : les noms de fichier sont composés de « RIMG »
suivi d’un nombre à quatre chiffres (par exemple
« RIMG0001.jpg »), par ordre ascendant de 0001 à 9999.
Lorsqu’une nouvelle carte mémoire est insérée, la
numérotation des fichiers est réinitialisée (0001).
Remarques
• Cette option s’applique uniquement aux cartes mémoire. Les
noms de photo dans la mémoire interne sont composés de
« RIMG » suivi d’un nombre à quatre chiffres.
• Les photos copiées sur un ordinateur à l’aide de DL-10 (page
151) se voient attribuer un nouveau nom, composé de « RIMG »
suivi d’un nombre à quatre chiffres.
• Les photos prises avec AdobeRVB sélectionné pour Réglage
espace couleurs (page 146) sont indiquées par des noms de
fichier commençant par un soulignement (p.ex. « _R010001.
jpg » ou « _RIMG001.jpg »).
Attention
Lorsque l’option Oui est sélectionnée, aucune autre photo ne
peut être enregistrée sur la carte mémoire si celle-ci contient un
dossier numéroté 999 et un nom de fichier terminant par 9999 ;
lorsque l’option Non est sélectionnée, aucune autre photo ne
peut être enregistrée sur la carte mémoire si celle-ci contient un
fichier numéroté 9999. Pour prendre des photos supplémentaires,
formatez la carte après avoir copié son contenu sur un ordinateur.9
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Réglage date
Configurez l’horloge de l’appareil (page 20).
Remarque
Si vous laissez la batterie dans le boîtier de l’appareil photo
pendant au moins deux heures, la batterie peut être ensuite
retirée pendant environ une semaine sans qu’il soit nécessaire de
reconfigurer l’horloge.
Language/L
Choisissez la langue d’affichage des messages et des
menus de l’appareil photo.
Option Description Option Description
Japonais ??????? Russe
English Anglais Chinois simplifié
Deutsch Allemand Chinois traditionnel
Français Français Coréen
Italiano Italien Thaï
Español Espagnol
Sortie vidéo
Si vous raccordez le boîtier de l’appareil photo à un
téléviseur ou un magnétoscope (page 118), choisissez
une sortie vidéo qui correspond à la norme utilisée par
le dispositif. L’appareil prend en charge les normes NTSC
et PAL ; SECAM n’est pas pris en charge.
Sortie HDMI
Sélectionnez la résolution de sortie des images lors de l’utilisation
d’un câble mini HDMI. Sélectionnez AUTO ou Manuel.
Remarque
Le réglage normal est AUTO. Si la résolution des images affichées
sur le téléviseur est faible avec l’option Auto, sélectionnez
Manuel. Il est possible que la qualité de l’image s’améliore.0
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Lancer extraction réglages
Lors de la mise hors tension de l’appareil photo, les
réglages sont enregistrés dans le boîtier de l’appareil
photo et dans l’unité appareil photo.
Sélectionnez la destination de lecture des réglages :
Boîtier ou Unité app. ph..
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
Copie des photos sur un ordinateur
Cette section décrit comment copier des photos du
boîtier de l’appareil photo sur votre ordinateur. Les
instructions pour Windows sont détaillées ci-dessous ;
pour Macintosh, les instructions commencent à la page
162.
Remarque
Les boîtes de dialogue qui illustrent cette section peuvent
légèrement différer de celles affichées sur votre ordinateur.
Windows
Vous pouvez copier des photos sur votre ordinateur
avec l’une des méthodes suivantes :
• Installez le logiciel DL-10 fourni (page 153) et utilisez-le
pour copier des photos comme indiqué à la page 159.
• Copiez des photos sans l’aide du logiciel DL-10 ou d’un
autre logiciel de copie d’images (page 160).
Remarque
Des instructions détaillées sont disponibles dans le Mode d’emploi
du logiciel sur le CD fourni (page ix).2
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
Configuration requise
Avant d’utiliser le CD fourni, vérifiez que votre ordinateur
est compatible avec les exigences suivantes. Consultez
la documentation fournie avec votre ordinateur pour en
savoir plus.
OS
Windows 2000 Professional SP 4, Windows XP Home
Edition/Professional SP 3, Windows Vista SP 2
CPU
Windows 2000/Windows XP : Pentium® lll 500MHz ou supérieur
Windows Vista : Pentium® lll 1GHz ou supérieur
RAM
Windows 2000/Windows XP : 256Mo ou plus
Windows Vista : 512Mo ou plus
Espace disque
disponible
Un minimum de 160Mo est requis pour l’installation
Vidéo 1024×768 pixels ou plus avec couleurs 16 bits ou plus
Divers
• Lecteur CD-ROM compatible
• Port USB compatible
Attention
• Les systèmes d’exploitation de 64 bits ne sont pas pris en
charge. Les systèmes d’exploitation, qui ont été mis à jour à
partir d’une version précédente, ne sont pas pris en charge
car l’USB pourrait ne pas fonctionner correctement. Le logiciel
fourni peut ne pas fonctionner correctement sur des systèmes
qui ont été mis à jour ou modifiés avec des versions Service
Pack.
• Connectez le boîtier de l’appareil photo directement sur le port
USB intégré. Les ports USB rajoutés via le bus PCI ou d’autres
cartes d’extension ne sont pas pris en charge. Le boîtier de
l’appareil photo peut ne pas fonctionner correctement s’il est
raccordé à un concentrateur USB ou à un clavier.
• Plus de RAM peut être nécessaire pour la gestion des vidéos et
des gros fichiers.
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
CD fourni
À l’insertion du CD fourni dans
un lecteur de CD-ROM, la boîte
de dialogue illustrée à droite
s’affiche.
• Installation du logiciel : installez les
applications suivantes.
DL-10 : cette application permet de
copier des photos sur l’ordinateur
en une seule opération.
Irodio Photo & Video Studio : cette application permet de
visualiser et de retoucher des photos sur l’ordinateur. Pour en
savoir plus, consultez le menu Aide dans Irodio Photo & Video
Studio ou consultez le site web suivant : http://www.pixela.
co.jp/oem/irodio/e/irodio_digitalphoto_videostudio/
Pilote USB : cette application permet de raccorder les anciens
appareils photo Ricoh à des ordinateurs sous Windows
98, Windows 98 SE, Windows Me ou Windows 2000. Cette
application n’est pas nécessaire pour ce produit.
Pilote WIA : cette application permet de raccorder les anciens
appareils photo Ricoh aux ordinateurs sous Windows XP et
Windows Vista. Cette application n’est pas nécessaire pour ce
produit.
• Voir le manuel de l’utilisateur (version logiciel) : visualisez le
Mode d’emploi du logiciel au format PDF (page ix). Acrobat
Reader ou Adobe Reader est requis ; le cas échéant,
installez Adobe Reader comme indiqué à la page 156.
• Voir le contenu du CD-ROM : parcourez le contenu du CD,
qui comprend Adobe Reader (page 156). Pour installer
Irodio Photo & Video Studio sans installer d’autres
applications, ouvrez le dossier « Irodio Photo & Video
Studio » et double-cliquez sur Irodio Photo & Video
Studio.exe.
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
Installation du logiciel
Suivez la procédure de la page suivante pour installer le
logiciel fourni. Les illustrations proviennent de Windows
XP.
Attention
• Si le boîtier de l’appareil photo est raccordé à l’ordinateur,
débranchez-le avant de commencer l’installation.
• Les utilisateurs de l’application « Caplio » doivent savoir que
l’application « DC » fournie avec le boîtier de l’appareil photo
remplace les éléments suivants de la suite logicielle Caplio :
Logiciel Caplio Logiciel DC
RICOH Gate La DL-10
Caplio Viewer DU-10
*
Caplio Server SR-10
*
Caplio Setting ST-10
*
*Non utilisé par ce produit.
Si le logiciel Caplio ci-dessus est actuellement installé, il vous
sera demandé de le désinstaller avant d’installer le logiciel
DC fourni. Suivez les instructions à l’écran. L’installation du
logiciel DC remplace Caplio Viewer, Caplio Server et Caplio
Setting avec les applications listées ci-dessus, qui peuvent être
utilisées de la même façon que les versions Caplio (notez que
ces logiciels ne seront pas installés si vous avez désinstallé le
logiciel Caplio comme indiqué à la page 158 avant d’installer
le logiciel DC). Notez que la désinstallation du logiciel pour les
anciens appareils photo Ricoh peut réinitialiser les préférences
utilisateur de DL-10 ou RICOH Gate La.
• Les droits Administrateur sont requis pour l’installation.
• DL-10 est conçu pour fonctionner dans un environnement
individuel et ne peut pas être exécuté en réseau.
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
1
Insérez le CD fourni.
Mettez l’ordinateur sous
tension et insérez le CD fourni
dans le lecteur CD-ROM.
• Windows Vista : une boîte
de dialogue d’exécution
automatique s’affiche. Cliquez
sur Exécuter Autorun.exe
pour afficher la fenêtre de l’assistant d’installation.
• Autres versions de Windows : la fenêtre de l’assistant
d’installation s’affiche automatiquement.
2 Cliquez sur Installation du logiciel.
• Windows Vista : une boîte de dialogue « Contrôle
de compte d’utilisateur » s’affiche. Cliquez sur
Permettre pour afficher la boîte de dialogue de
sélection de la langue.
• Autres versions de Windows : la boîte de dialogue de
sélection de la langue s’affiche automatiquement.
3
Sélectionnez une langue et cliquez sur OK.
La boîte de dialogue illustrée
à droite s’affiche ensuite.
Cliquez sur Suivant.
4
Sélectionnez une destination.
Le logiciel fourni sera installé
dans le dossier indiqué dans
Dossier Cible. Cliquez sur
Suivant.
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
5 Confirmez la destination et cliquez sur [Suivant].
L’installateur Irodio Photo
& Video Studio démarre
(selon votre ordinateur, la
fenêtre d’accueil illustrée à
droite peut rester affichée
un certain temps avant que
l’installation commence). Suivez les instructions à
l’écran pour installer le logiciel fourni.
6 Cliquez sur Terminer.
La boîte de dialogue illustrée
à droite s’affiche lorsque
l’installation est terminée.
Cliquez sur Terminer.
7
Redémarrez l’ordinateur.
Un message s’affiche vous
demandant de redémarrer votre ordinateur. Sélectionnez
Oui, je souhaite redémarrer mon ordinateur maintenant
et cliquez sur Terminer pour redémarrer l’ordinateur.
8Débloquez DL-10.
Une boîte de dialogue de sécurité Windows s’affiche
après le redémarrage. Cliquez sur Débloquer pour
le logiciel DL-10.
Remarque
Consultez la page 158 pour en savoir plus sur la désinstallation du logiciel.
Installation de l’application Adobe Reader
Adobe Reader est requis pour visualiser le Mode d’emploi du
logiciel. Si Adobe Reader n’est pas déjà installé, il est possible
de le faire à partir du CD fourni comme indiqué ci-dessous.
Attention
• Débranchez le boîtier de l’appareil photo avant de commencer
l’installation.
• Les droits Administrateur sont requis pour l’installation.
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
1
Insérez le CD fourni.
Mettez l’ordinateur sous
tension et insérez le CD
fourni dans le lecteur
CD-ROM.
• Windows Vista : une boîte
de dialogue d’exécution
automatique s’affiche.
Cliquez sur Exécuter Autorun.exe pour afficher la
fenêtre de l’assistant d’installation.
• Autres versions de Windows : la fenêtre de l’assistant
d’installation s’affiche automatiquement.
2 Cliquez sur Voir le contenu du CD-ROM.
Le contenu du CD s’affiche.
3
Installez Adobe Reader.
Double-cliquez sur le dossier « Acrobat Reader »,
puis sur le dossier de la langue de votre choix.
Double-cliquez sur le fichier commençant par
« AdbeRdr910 » et suivez les instructions à l’écran.
Si une boîte de dialogue « Contrôle de compte
d’utilisateur » s’affiche, cliquez sur Continuer.
Remarques
• Consultez le menu Aide dans Adobe Reader pour en savoir plus
sur Adobe Reader.
• L’installation de l’application Adobe Reader 9.1 nécessite MSI
(Microsoft Windows Installer) version 3.1 ou supérieure et
soit Microsoft Internet Explorer version 6.0 ou supérieure, soit
Firefox version 2.0 ou supérieure. Microsoft Internet Explorer et
Microsoft Windows Installer sont disponibles via la mise à jour
de Microsoft.
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
Désinstallation du logiciel
Suivez les étapes ci-dessous pour désinstaller le logiciel
DC ou Irodio Photo & Video Studio.
Attention
• Les droits Administrateur sont requis pour la désinstallation.
• Quittez toutes les applications ouvertes avant de continuer.
1 Ouvrez « Ajout/Suppression de programmes »
dans le Panneau de configuration.
Ouvrez le menu « Démarrer » de Windows et
sélectionnez Panneau de configuration (Windows
XP ou Windows Vista) ou Paramètres > Panneau
de configuration. Double-cliquez sur Ajout/
Suppression de programmes.
2Désinstallez le logiciel.
Sélectionnez le logiciel à désinstaller (DC Software
ou Irodio Photo & Video Studio), puis cliquez
sur Modifier/Supprimer. Une boîte de dialogue
de confirmation s’affiche ; cliquez sur OK. Si un
message s’affiche pour signaler qu’un fichier
partagé a été détecté, sélectionnez Ne plus afficher
ce message et cliquez sur Oui.
Fermez toutes les fenêtres ouvertes lorsque le
processus de désinstallation est terminé. Après
la désinstallation du logiciel Irodio Photo & Video
Studio, redémarrez l’ordinateur.9
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
Copie de photos à l’aide du logiciel DL-10
Après l’installation du logiciel DC, suivez les étapes
ci-dessous pour copier des photos sur votre ordinateur.
1Mettez l’appareil hors tension.
2
Branchez le câble USB fourni.
Raccordez le câble au port
USB de l’ordinateur.
Attention
• Ne forcez pas et ne tirez pas sur
le câble lorsque vous
manipulez le boîtier de
l’appareil photo avec le câble branché.
• Ne déplacez pas le boîtier de l’appareil photo lorsque le
câble est branché.
Raccordez le câble à l’appareil
photo comme illustré. L’appareil
se met sous tension, le logiciel
DL-10 démarre et le transfert
commence automatiquement.
Les photos sont copiées dans
des répertoires du dossier « Digital Camera » dans
« Mes documents » (si vous utilisiez précédemment le
logiciel Caplio, les photos seront plutôt copiées dans
des répertoires du dossier « Caplio »). Les photos sont
classées par date d’enregistrement dans des répertoires
séparés ; assurez-vous que l’horloge de l’appareil est
correctement configurée avant la prise de vue.
3Débranchez le câble lorsque le transfert est
terminé.
Consultez la page 161 pour en savoir plus.0
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
Remarque
Appliquez les procédures suivantes si le transfert ne démarre pas
automatiquement.
Cliquez sur Sauvegarder dans la fenêtre DL-10.
Assurez-vous que l’option Enregistrer automatiquement
lorsqu’il est connecté à un port USB est sélectionnée dans la
boîte de dialogue « Réglages d’option » du logiciel DL-10.
Redémarrez l’ordinateur et répétez la procédure ci-dessus.
Copie de photos sans l’aide du logiciel DL-10
Si DL-10 n’est pas installé, vous pouvez copier des
photos sur l’ordinateur comme indiqué ci-dessous. Les
illustrations de cette section proviennent de Windows
XP.
1Mettez l’appareil hors tension.
2
Branchez le câble USB fourni.
Raccordez le câble au port USB de l’ordinateur, puis
au boîtier de l’appareil photo. L’appareil se met sous
tension automatiquement.
3 Copiez les fichiers de l’appareil sur l’ordinateur.
L’appareil est listé comme
disque amovible dans
« Poste de travail », avec
les photos stockées dans
des dossiers comme
illustré à droite. Si une
carte mémoire est
insérée dans l’appareil,
le disque sera nommé comme illustré à droite et le
contenu de la carte mémoire s’affichera. Si aucune
carte mémoire n’est insérée, le disque sera nommé
« RICOHDCI » et le contenu de la mémoire interne
s’affichera. Copiez les photos dans l’emplacement
souhaité de votre ordinateur.
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
Attention
• Ne mettez pas l’appareil hors tension et ne débranchez pas le
câble USB tant que la copie n’est pas terminée.
• Les fichiers dans le dossier de destination avec le même nom que
les photos copiées seront écrasés. Le cas échéant, renommez les
fichiers avant de commencer la copie.
• N’utilisez pas l’ordinateur pour visualiser ou retoucher les photos
d’une carte mémoire. Les photos qui ont été visualisées ou
retouchées sur l’ordinateur ne peuvent plus être affichées sur
l’appareil. Copiez les photos sur l’ordinateur pour les visualiser et
les retoucher.
Déconnexion du boîtier de l’appareil photo
Avant de déconnecter le
boîtier de l’appareil photo de
l’ordinateur, cliquez sur l’icône « Retirer le périphérique
en toute sécurité » ou « Déconnecter ou éjecter le
matériel » dans la zone de notification (l’illustration cidessus montre l’icône sous Windows XP) et sélectionnez
Retirer Périphérique de stockage de masse USB en
toute sécurité ou Arrêter Périphérique de stockage de
masse USB dans le menu contextuel. Vous pouvez alors
débrancher le câble USB.
Remarques
• Un message d’avertissement peut s’afficher si le câble USB est
débranché sans d’abord retirer l’appareil du système comme
indiqué ci-dessus. Assurez-vous de retirer l’appareil du système
avant de débrancher le câble.
• Vérifiez que le transfert est terminé avant de retirer l’appareil du
système et de débrancher le câble.2
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
Macintosh
Le boîtier de l’appareil photo peut être utilisé avec Mac
OS X versions 10.4 à 10.5.7.
Attention
Le logiciel VM-1 (page 164) et le Mode d’emploi du logiciel
(uniquement sur les ordinateurs équipés de l’application Acrobat)
peuvent être utilisés avec les ordinateurs Macintosh.
Copie des photos sur un ordinateur Macintosh
1Mettez l’appareil hors tension.
2
Branchez le câble USB fourni.
Raccordez le câble au port
USB de l’ordinateur.
Attention
• Ne forcez pas et ne tirez pas sur
le câble lorsque vous
manipulez l’appareil photo
avec le câble branché.
• Ne déplacez pas l’appareil photo lorsque le câble est
branché.
Raccordez le câble au boîtier
de l’appareil photo comme
illustré. L’appareil se met sous
tension automatiquement.
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
3 Copiez les fichiers de l’appareil sur l’ordinateur.
L’appareil s’affiche comme
un volume sur le bureau,
avec les photos stockées
dans des dossiers comme
illustré à droite. Si une
carte mémoire est insérée
dans l’appareil, le disque
sera nommé comme
illustré à droite et le contenu de la carte mémoire
s’affichera. Si aucune carte mémoire n’est insérée, le
disque sera nommé « RICOHDCI » et le contenu de la
mémoire interne s’affichera. Copiez les photos dans
l’emplacement souhaité de votre ordinateur.
Déconnexion du boîtier de l’appareil photo
Avant de débrancher l’appareil de l’ordinateur, faites
glisser le volume de l’appareil sur la poubelle ou
sélectionnez le volume de l’appareil et choisissez Éjecter
dans le menu Fichier. Vous pouvez alors débrancher le
câble USB.
Remarques
• Un message d’avertissement peut s’afficher si le câble USB est
débranché sans d’abord retirer l’appareil du système comme
indiqué ci-dessus. Assurez-vous de retirer l’appareil du système
avant de débrancher le câble.
• Vérifiez que le transfert est terminé avant de retirer l’appareil du
système et de débrancher le câble.
• Le raccordement du boîtier de l’appareil photo à un ordinateur
Macintosh peut engendrer la création de fichiers « FINDER.
DAT » ou « .DS_Store » qui seront considérés comme des fichiers
incorrects par l’appareil. Ces fichiers peuvent être supprimés
sans risque.
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
Utilisation de lecteur de fichiers MP
Lorsque vous prenez des photos à l’aide de la fonction
Cont.M +, les photos sont enregistrées dans un fichier
MP. Grâce au lecteur de fichiers MP VM-1, vous pouvez
lire des fichiers MP sur votre ordinateur Macintosh et
exporter des photos.
Cette section explique comment installer et désinstaller
le logiciel VM-1 qui est inclus sur le CD-ROM fourni. Pour
plus de détails concernant la lecture de fichiers MP sur
votre ordinateur ou l’exportation de photos de fichiers MP
à l’aide du lecteur de fichiers MP, reportez-vous au « Mode
d’emploi du logiciel » disponible sur le CD-ROM fourni.
Configuration requise pourl’utilisation du lecteur de fichiersMP fourni
Les environnements suivants sont nécessaires pour
utiliser le lecteur de fichiers MP fourni.
Vérifiez votre ordinateur ou le manuel de l’utilisateur de
l’ordinateur.
Systèmes d’exploitation pris
en charge
Mac OS X versions 10.4 à 10.5.7
Macintosh Série Macintosh Apple Inc.
Mémoire interne
Mac OS X 10.4 256 Mo ou plus
Mac OS X 10.5 512 Mo ou plus
Mémoire disque dur
disponible
5 Mo ou plus
Lecteur de CD-ROM
Lecteur de CD-ROM compatible avec
l’ordinateur Macintosh susmentionné
Remarque
Le logiciel VM-1 prend en charge les langues suivantes : japonais,
anglais, français et chinois (simplifié).
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
Installation du logiciel VM-1
1
Insérez le CD fourni.
Mettez l’ordinateur Macintosh sous tension et
insérez le CD fourni dans le lecteur de CD-ROM.
2
Sélectionnez le disque d’installation.
Double-cliquez sur l’icône RICOH > le dossier VM-
1 > l’icône VM-1 Installer.pkg. La fenêtre Installer
VM-1 s’affiche, cliquez sur Continuer. Lorsque la
fenêtre de sélection de l’emplacement d’installation
s’affiche, sélectionnez le disque d’installation, puis
cliquez sur Continuer.
3
Installez le logiciel VM-1.
Cliquez sur Installer, saisissez votre nom et votre
mot de passe et cliquez sur OK. Un message vous
informant que l’installation est terminée s’affiche,
cliquez sur Fermer.
Pour sélectionner un autre emplacement
d’installation, cliquez sur Changer l’emplacement
de l’installation....
Pour mettre le logiciel VM-1 à niveau, cliquez sur
Mettre à jour.
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
Désinstallation du logiciel VM-1
Attention
• Si d’autres logiciels sont en cours d’exécution ou si des données
n’ont pas été enregistrées, fermez les logiciels et enregistrez les
données avant de désinstaller VM-1.
• En cas d’erreur pendant la désinstallation, mettez votre système
d’exploitation Mac à jour avec la dernière version disponible.
1 Ouvrez le dossier des utilitaires VM-1.
Ouvrez le dossier Applications > le dossier
Utilitaires > le dossier VM-1 Utility.
2Double-cliquez sur l’icône VM-1 Uninstaller.
La fenêtre de confirmation de la désinstallation
s’affiche. Cliquez sur OK.
3
Saisissez votre nom et votre mot de passe et
cliquez sur OK.
Un message vous informant que la désinstallation
est terminée s’affiche, cliquez sur OK.
reMarqUes techniqUes
Remarques techniques
Résolution des problèmes
Messages d’erreur
Si un message d’erreur s’affiche, procédez comme suit.
Message Solution Page
Insérerunecarte. Aucunecarte mémoireinsérée. Insérezunecarte. 15
Régler ladate.
L’horloge de l’appareil photo n’est pas configurée. Configurez
l’horlogedel’appareil.
20,
149
Nombrede fi chiers
limites
La limitede numérotation des fichiersde l’appareil est atteinte.
Insérezuneautrecarte.
15,
148
Fichier incorrect
L’appareil ne peut pas afficher le fichier. Utilisez un ordinateur
pourvérifier lecontenudu fichieret supprimer le fichier.
—
Mémoireinsuffisant.
Poursuivrelacopie?
L’espacesur lacarte mémoireest insuffisantpour copier tous les
fichiers. Insérezuneautrecarte.
15
Protégé Le fichierestprotégéet nepeutpasêtresupprimé. 112
Carteprotégéeen
écriture.
Lacarteestprotégéecontrel’écriture(verrouillée). Déverrouillez
lacarte.
16
Fichier non sélectionné
pour l’impression.
Le fichier est une vidéo ou un autre fichier qui ne peut pas être
sélectionnépour l’impression.
—
Espace mémoire
insuffisant /
Faiblecapacité
La mémoire est insuffisante pour stocker des fichiers
supplémentaires.Supprimezdes fichiersexistantsouaugmentez
laquantitéde mémoiredisponible.
39,
139
Nombre maximum d’images sélectionnées pour impression.
Réglez le nombredetiragespour lesautres images sur zéro.
125
Formater la mémoire
interne.
La mémoire interne n’est pas formatée correctement. Formatez
la mémoireinterne.
139
Formatez lacarte.
Lacarte n’estpas formatéecorrectement.Formatez lacartedans
leboîtierdel’appareilphoto.
139
Erreur carte
Formatezlacarte.Si lemessagepersiste, lacarteestdéfectueuse;
nel’utilisezplus.
139
Écrituredesdonnées
L’appareil enregistre des données. Patientez jusqu’à la fin de
l’enregistrement.
—
Pasde fichier Aucun fichierdisponiblepour lecture. —
Enregi. impossible
Lamémoireestpleine. Utilisezuneautrecarte,ouretirezlacarte
etutilisez la mémoireinterne.
15
reMarqUes techniqUes
Problèmes relatifs au boîtier de l’appareil photo
Alimentation
Problème Cause Solution Page
L’appareilphoto
nese metpas sous
tension.
La batterie est vide ou n’est pas
insérée.
Vérifiez que la batterie est
correctement insérée. Chargez la
batterie (batterie rechargeable
uniquement).
12,14
Labatterieest incompatible. Utilisez labatteriefournie. 13
La batterie n’est pas orientée
correctement.
Insérez et orientez correctement
labatterie.
14
L’appareilphoto
se met hors
tension pendant
l’utilisation.
L’appareil s’est mis hors tension
automatiquement pour
économiser l’énergie.
Mettez l’appareil sous tension. 18
Labatterieestvide.
Chargez la batterie (batterie
rechargeableuniquement).
12
Labatterieest incompatible. Utilisez labatteriefournie. 13
L’appareilphoto
nese metpas hors
tension.
L’appareil fonctionne mal. Retirezet réinsérez labatterie. 14
L’indicateurde
batteriefaible
s’afficheou
l’appareil se met
hors tension alors
quelabatterieest
encorechargée.
Labatterieest incompatible. Utilisez labatteriefournie. 13
Ilest impossiblede
charger labatterie.
Labatterieaatteint la fin desavie
decharge.
Remplacez-la par une batterie
neuve.
14
Labatterie
sedécharge
rapidement.
La température est très haute ou
trèsbasse.
— —
Un faible éclairage nécessite une
utilisation excessivedu flash.
— —9
reMarqUes techniqUes
Prise devue
Problème Cause Solution Page
Aucunephoto n’est
priselorsquele
déclencheurest
enfoncé.
Labatterieestvide.
Chargez la batterie (batterie
rechargeableuniquement).
12
L’appareil photo est hors tension
oupasen modeprisedevue.
Placez l’interrupteur MARCHE/
ARRÊT sur MARCHE pour mettre
l’appareil photo sous tension ou
appuyezsur6poursélectionner
le modeprisedevue.
18,34
L’appareil photo est en mode
lecture.
Appuyezsur6poursélectionner
le modeprisedevue.
34
Ledéclencheur n’apasétéenfoncé
jusqu’aubout.
Appuyez sur le déclencheur
jusqu’aubout.
22
Lacarte mémoire n’estpas formatée. Formatez lacarte. 139
Lacarte mémoireestpleine.
Insérez une nouvelle carte ou
supprimezdes fichiers.
15,39
La carte mémoire a atteint la fin
desavieutile.
Insérezune nouvellecarte. 15
Le flash est en cours de
chargement.
Patientez jusqu’àcequeletémoin
du flash arrêtedeclignoter.
29
Lacarte mémoireestverrouillée. Déverrouillez lacarte. 16
Les contacts de la carte mémoire
sont sales.
Nettoyez-le avec un chiffon doux
et sec.
—
Impossibled’afficher
lesphotosaprès la
prisedevue.
La durée d’affichage est trop
courte.
Choisissez une durée d’affichage
plus longue.
142
L’écran d’affichage
desphotosest
vide.
L’appareil photo est éteint ou
l’écran d’affichage des photos est
noir.
Mettez l’appareil sous tension
ou réglez la luminosité de l’écran
d’affichagedesphotos.
18,
139
L’écran d’affichage des photos est
éteint.
Appuyez sur la touche VF/LCD pour
activer l’écran d’affichagedesphotos.
42
LeviseurLCD aétéactivé.
Appuyez sur la touche VF/LCD pour
activer l’écran d’affichagedesphotos.
42
Lecâble A/V estbranché. Débranchez lecâble. 118
L’appareilphoto
est incapable
d’effectuer la mise
aupointen mode
miseaupoint
automatique.
L’objectifest sale.
Nettoyez-le avec un chiffon doux
et sec.
—
Lesujet n’estpasaucentreducadre. Utilisez leverrouillagede miseaupoint. 25
Lesujet n’estpasadaptéàla mise
aupointautomatique.
Utilisez le verrouillage de mise au
pointoula miseaupoint manuelle.
25,65
Lesujetest tropproche.
Utilisez le mode macro ou
éloignez-vousdusujet.
270
reMarqUes techniqUes
Problème Cause Solution Page
Lesphotos sont
floues.
J
L’appareil photo bouge pendant la
prisedevue.
Utilisez un trépied. Utilisez la
fonction de correction du bougé de
l’appareil photo. Placez les coudes
contrelecorps.
21,92
L’éclairage est faible et les vitesses
d’obturation sont lentes.
Utilisez le flash. Sélectionnez une
sensibilitéISO plusélevée. Utilisezla
fonction de correction du bougé de
l’appareilphoto.
29,90,
92
Le flash nese
déclenchepasou ne
serechargepas.
Le flash n’estpasouvert.
Appuyez sur la touche OPEN/f
(réglage/ouverture du flash) pour
déployer le flash.
29
Le flash n’estpas complètementouvert. Negênezpas l’ouverturedu flash. —
Le flash nepeutpasêtreutilisédans
les cas suivants :
• Lorsquecadrageexposition,cadrage
balance des blancs ou cadrage
couleurest réglé
• En modecontinu
• En modevidéo
Modifiez les réglagesdel’appareil.
54,73,
75
Le flash estdésactivé.
Déployez le flash. Appuyez sur la
touche OPEN/f (réglage/ouverture
du flash)pourannuler le flash.
29
Labatterieestvide.
Chargez la batterie (batterie
rechargeableuniquement).
12
Le flash n’éclairepas
lesujet.
La distance jusqu’au sujet est
supérieureàlaportéedu flash.
Rapprochez-vousdusujet. —
Lesujetest sombre. Augmentez lapuissancedu flash. 78
Le flash sedéclenchetroplentement. Augmentez lapuissancedu flash. 78
Le flash n’estpas complètementouvert. Negênezpas l’ouverturedu flash. —
Lesphotos sont trop
claires.
Lapuissancedu flash est tropforte.
Réduisez la puissance du flash,
éloignez-vous du sujet ou utilisez
unesourced’éclairagedifférente.
78
Laphotoest surexposée.
Utilisezlacorrection d’exposition ouchoisissez
unevitessed’obturation plus rapide.
50,85
L’écran d’affichage des photos est
tropclair.
Réglez la luminosité de l’écran
d’affichagedesphotos.
139
Lesphotos sont trop
foncées.
Le flash est désactivé ou le sujet est
faiblementéclairé.
Appuyez sur la touche OPEN/f
(réglage/ouverture du flash) pour
déployer le flash.
29
Laphotoest sous-exposée.
Utilisezlacorrection d’exposition ouchoisissez
unevitessed’obturation plus lente.
50,85
L’écran d’affichage des photos est
tropfoncé.
Réglez la luminosité de l’écran
d’affichagedesphotos.
139
reMarqUes techniqUes
Problème Cause Solution Page
Les couleurs nesont
pas naturelles.
L’appareil est incapable de régler
la balance des blancs, par rapport
aux conditions de prise de vue,
en utilisant la balance des blancs
automatique.
Insérez un objetblancdans le cadre
ou choisissez une autre option de
balancedesblancs.
86
Les informations
sur laphoto ne
s’affichentpas.
Les indicateurs sont cachés.
Appuyez sur DISP. pour afficher les
indicateurs.
42
Laluminositéde
l’écran d’affichage
desphotos change
pendant la miseau
point.
L’éclairage ambiant est faible ou
différent de celui qui a été utilisé
pour la miseaupointautomatique.
C’est normal et il ne s’agit pas d’un
dysfonctionnement.
—
Desbandes
verticales
(«traînées»)
apparaissent sur la
photo.
Lesujetest clair.
C’est normal et il ne s’agit pas d’un
dysfonctionnement.
—
L’indicateurde
niveau nes’affiche
pas.
L’optionNon ouSon estsélectionnée
pour leparamètre Réglage niveau.
Sélectionnez Affichage ou Aff. +
son.
32
Les indicateurs sont cachés.
Appuyez sur DISP. pour afficher les
indicateurs.
42
L’appareilphotoestàl’envers. Tenez l’appareilorientécorrectement. 21
Laphoto n’estpas
de niveau,bien
quel’indicateurde
niveauindiquait
quel’appareilphoto
l’était.
L’appareil a bougé pendant la prise
devue.
Ne prenez pas de photos à partir
d’objetsen déplacement.
—
Lesujet n’estpasde niveau. Vérifiez lesujet. —
Lecture/suppression
Problème Cause Solution Page
Impossibledelire
lesphotos.
L’appareil n’estpasen modelecture. Appuyez sur6. 19,34
Lecâble A/V estbranchéde manière
incorrecte.
Rebranchez lecâble A/V. 118
Le mode vidéo n’est pas adapté au
téléviseur.
Choisissezun autre modevidéo. 149
L’écran de lecture s’affiche dans le
viseurLCD.
RéglezÉcran de lecturesurLCD. 1412
reMarqUes techniqUes
Problème Cause Solution Page
Impossiblede
visualiser les
photos sur lacarte
mémoire.
La carte mémoire est vide ou non
insérée.
Insérezunecartequiaétéformatée
dans leboîtierdel’appareilphotoet
qui contientdesphotosenregistrées
avec celui-ci.
15,
139
Lacarte n’apasétéformatéedans le
boîtierdel’appareilphoto.
Les photos ont été créées avec un
autredispositif.
Les contacts de la carte mémoire
sont sales.
Nettoyez-le avec un chiffon doux
et sec.
—
Lacartefonctionne mal.
Insérez une autre carte. Si vous
pouvez visualiser les photos sur la
seconde carte, la première carte
est probablement défectueuse; ne
l’utilisezplus.
—
L’écran d’affichage
desphotos s’est
éteint.
Labatterieestvide.
Chargez la batterie (batterie
rechargeableuniquement).
12
L’appareil s’est mis hors tension
automatiquement pour économiser
l’énergie.
Mettez l’appareil sous tension. 18
Impossiblede
supprimer le fichier.
Le fichierestprotégé. Supprimez laprotection. 112
Lacarte mémoireestverrouillée.
Impossiblede Déverrouillez lacarte mémoire. 16
formater lacarte.
Lacarteestverrouillée.
Divers
Problème Cause Solution Page
Impossibled’insérer
lacarte mémoire.
La carte n’est pas orientée
correctement.
Insérez et orientez correctement
lacarte.
15
Les commandes
del’appareilphoto
restent sanseffet.
Labatterieestvide.
Chargez la batterie (batterie
rechargeableuniquement).
12
L’appareil fonctionne mal.
Mettez l’appareil hors tension,puis
sous tension de nouveau.
18
Retirezet réinsérez labatterie. 14
Ladateest
incorrecte.
L’horloge n’est pas configurée
correctement.
Configurez l’horlogeavec ladateet
l’heurecorrectes.
20,149
Ladateaété
réinitialisée.
La batterie n’a pas été insérée
pendantenviron unesemaine.
Configurez l’horlogeavec ladateet
l’heurecorrectes.
20,149
L’appareilphoto
nese metpas
hors tension
automatiquement.
L’option Non est sélectionnéepour
leparamètreExtinction auto.
Choisissezun autreréglage. 141
L’appareilphoto
n’émetaucun son.
Leson est coupé.
Choisissez une autre option pour
Réglages volume.
32,142
reMarqUes techniqUes
Problème Cause Solution Page
Lesphotos ne
s’affichentpas sur
letéléviseur.
Le mode vidéo n’est pas adapté
autéléviseur.
Choisissezun autre modevidéo. 149
Lecâble A/V n’estpasbranché. Branchez lecâble A/V. 118
Letéléviseur n’estpas réglésur le
canald’entréevidéo.
Configurez le téléviseur sur le
canald’entréevidéo.
—
Problèmes relatifs à l’ordinateur
Pour en savoir plus, consultez le Mode d’emploi du
logiciel, disponible au format PDF sur le CD fourni.
Alertes desécurité(Windows Vista/WindowsXP)
Consultez ce qui suit si Windows XP Service Pack 3
ou Windows Vista Service Pack 2 affiche une alerte
de sécurité lorsque le boîtier de l’appareil photo est
raccordé ou lorsque le logiciel DL-10 démarre. Les
illustrations de cette section proviennent de Windows
XP.
Si une alerte de sécurité s’affiche,
vérifiez que le programme
provient d’une source fiable et
cliquez sur Débloquer.
Attention
Si vous ne pouvez pas identifier le programme et la source,
cliquez sur Maintenir le blocage pour empêcher votre
ordinateur d’être infecté par un virus ou un logiciel malveillant.
reMarqUes techniqUes
Si vous avez cliqué sur Maintenir le blocage pour bloquer une
application Ricoh, vous pouvez la débloquer dans le
pare-feu Windows.
1 Ouvrez le « pare-feu Windows » dans le Panneau
de configuration.
Ouvrez le menu « Démarrer »
et sélectionnez Panneau
de configuration, puis
double-cliquez sur Pare-feu
Windows (si le pare-feu
Windows n’est pas listé, cliquez sur Basculer vers
l’affichage classique dans l’angle supérieur gauche
du panneau de configuration Windows).
2Autorisez l’application Ricoh à accéder à Internet.
Dans la boîte de dialogue
« Pare-feu Windows », cliquez
sur l’onglet Exceptions et
vérifiez si le logiciel DL-10
est listé dans « Programmes
et services ». Si c’est le cas,
cochez la case à côté de
DL-10 et cliquez sur OK. Dans
le cas contraire, cliquez sur
Ajouter un programme…
pour ajouter DL-10 à la liste des exceptions.
Si vous avez cliqué sur Me redemander ultérieurement pour
bloquer DL-10, une alerte de sécurité s’affichera la
prochaine fois que le programme démarrera. Cliquez sur
Débloquer pour supprimer le blocage.
reMarqUes techniqUes
Caractéristiques
Flash
Mode
Auto(le flash sedéclenchelorsquel’éclairageest faibleouquele
sujetestàcontre-jour),yeuxrouges,activé, synchronisation lente,
manuel,désactivé
Portée(flash
intégré)
Consultez ladocumentation fournieavec l’unitéappareilphoto.
Compensation
de flash
±2,0EV parpasde1/2EV ou1/3EV
Niveaude flash
manuel
MAX,1/1.4,1/2,1/2.8,1/4,1/5.6,1/8,1/11,1/16,1/22,1/32,1/64
Écran d’affichagedes
photos
3,0” LCD transparent ;environ 920000pixels
Modeprisedevue
Auto, changementdeprogramme,prioritéàl’ouverture,prioritéà
l’obturation, manuel, scène,« Mes Réglages»
Qualitéd’image Fine, Normal, RAW(DNG)?*
1
Stockage Carte mémoireSD/SDHC; mémoireinterne(environ 86?Mo)
Taille
fichier?*
2
(environ)
5M FINE:environ 2287 Ko/image
3M FINE:environ 1474 Ko/image
1M FINE:environ 812 Ko/image
VGA FINE:environ 197 Ko/image
Format
fichier
Photos JPEG (Exifversion 2.21)?*
3
, RAW(DNG)
Vidéos AVI?*
4
(compatible OpenDML Motion JPEG)
Compression CompatibleJPEG lignedebase(photosetvidéos)
Autresoptionsprise
devue
Prisedevueen continu(continu,Cont.M +) ; retardateur (délaide
déclenchementd’environ 10?sou2?s),ouoption personnalisée;
prisedevueàintervalles (de5?sà1 heure,par incrémentsde5?s)?*
5
;
cadragecouleur ; N et B (TE) ; sélection d’espacecolorimétrique;
réduction bruit ;affichaged’histogramme;grilledecadrage;
indicateurdeprofondeurdechamp; indicateurde niveau;griffe
alimentée
Autresoptions lecture
Rotation d’imageautomatique,vue multi-images ; zoom en lecture
(jusqu’à16?×) ; redimensionnement
Interface
Connecteur Mini-B USB 2.0(hautdébit) ; stockagede masse?*
6
;
sortieaudio1,0?Vp-p(75?O) ;Connecteurducâble mini HDMI (typeC)
Format signalvidéo NTSC,PAL
Sourcealimentation Batterierechargeable DB-90(3,6?V)
Longévitébatterie(basée
sur normeCIPA)?*
7
Consultez ladocumentation fournieavec l’unitéappareilphoto.
reMarqUes techniqUes
Dimensions (L?×?H?×?P) 113,9?mm?×?70,2?mm?×?28,9?mm (protubérancesexclues)
Poids (approximatif)
• Boîtierdel’appareilphoto(batterie, carte mémoire, courroie
d’encolureet capuchon duconnecteurexclus) :160?g
• Batterie, courroied’encolureet capuchon duconnecteur :66?g
Visde fixation dutrépied 1/4-20UNC
Duréestockagedate Environ 1semaine
Température
fonctionnement
0?°Cà40?°C
Humidité
fonctionnement
85%ou moins
Températurestockage –20?°Cà60?°C
*
1
Un fichier JPEG est également enregistré (le fichier JPEG peut être d’une
qualité fine ou normale avec les mêmes dimensions que le fichier RAW
ou un fichier VGA). Les fichiers RAW utilisent le format standard DNG
promu par Adobe Systems, Inc.
*
2
Pour plus de détails concernant les formats RAW, L et M, reportez-vous à
la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo.
*
3
Compatible avec le système Design rule for Camera File system (DCF,
une norme JEITA) et DPOF. La compatibilité avec d’autres appareils n’est
pas garantie.
*
4
Audio : PCM 32 kHz, monophonique de 16 bits
*
5
Flash désactivé.
*
6
Le stockage de masse est pris en charge sous Windows 2000, Windows
XP, Windows Vista et Mac OS X 10.4–10.5.7.
*
7
Mesurée conformément à la norme CIPA. Pour référence uniquement ;
le nombre réel de prises de vue varie énormément selon l’utilisation de
l’appareil.
reMarqUes techniqUes
Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire
Le nombre approximatif d’images ou la longueur
approximative des vidéos qui peuvent être stockées
dans la mémoire interne ou sur une carte mémoire,
selon les différentes configurations, varie en fonction du
type d’unité appareil photo. Consultez la documentation
fournie avec l’unité appareil photo.
Remarques
• La durée maximale d’une vidéo est de 90 minutes (soit une
taille de 4Go).
• Le nombre maximal de prises de vue qu’il est possible de
prendre en une seule rafale est de 999. Si la mémoire peut
encore stocker plus de 999 photos, « 999 » s’affiche sur le
moniteur.
• En fonction du sujet, le nombre de photos qu’il est possible de
prendre peut différer du nombre de prises de vue restantes.
• La capacité varie selon les conditions de prise de vue et la
fabrication de la carte mémoire.
• Utilisez une carte mémoire haut débit pour de longues périodes
de prise de vue.
reMarqUes techniqUes
Éléments vendus séparément
Le boîtier de l’appareil photo GXR peut être utilisé avec
les accessoires optionnels suivants :
Unité appareil photo Batterie rechargeable
DB-90
Chargeur de batterie BJ-9
Déclencheur à câble CA-
Il s’agit d’un déclencheur distant à
câble qui se fixe au connecteur USB
du boîtier de l’appareil photo.
Viseur LCD VF-2
Il s’agit d’un viseur électrique qui
se fixe sur la griffe alimentée du
boîtier de l’appareil photo. Il offre
une couverture de 100 % et peut
être ajusté sur 90° sans parallaxe
linéaire. Il facilite la prise de vue à
faible angle.
Flash externe GF-
Flash externe développé pour les
appareils photo numériques avec
système de flash automatique avec
posemètre.
Courroie d’encolure ST-9
reMarqUes techniqUes
Étui souple SC-S Étui souple SC-L
Remarques
• Avant d’utiliser des accessoires optionnels, lisez le manuel fourni
avec le produit.
• Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les accessoires
optionnels, visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricohpmmc.
com/).0
reMarqUes techniqUes
Appareil photo et accessoires
Étui souple
SC-55S/SC-55L
Courroie d’encolure ST-3
Déclencheur à
câble CA-1
Batterie rechargeable
DB-90 (fournie)
Chargeur de
batterie BJ-9 (fourni)
Raccordé au
connecteur USB
Unité appareil photo
Fixé à l’unité appareil photo
Fixé à la griffe alimentée
Flash GF-1
Viseur LCD
VF-2
reMarqUes techniqUes
Le flash GF-1 (optionnel)
Un flash optionnel GF-1 peut être raccordé sur la griffe
alimentée.
1
Fermez le couvercle du flash (page 2).
2
Installez le flash.
Mettez hors tension
l’appareil et le GF-1, puis
montez le GF-1 sur la
griffe alimentée.
Griffe alimentée
3Mettez le flash et l’appareil photo sous tension.
4Appuyez sur la touche DIRECT.
5
Sélectionnez la rubrique du mode flash optionnel.
Déplacez le curseur à
l’aide de la touche +, –,
Fn, Fn2 ou de la manette
ADJ. (gauche et droite)
pour sélectionner la
rubrique.
6
Sélectionnez un mode flash.
Faites tourner le sélecteur plus-moins pour
sélectionner un mode flash.
Remarques
• La rubrique du mode flash optionnel ne s’affiche pas lorsque le
GF-1 est hors tension.
• Mettez le GF-1 hors tension pour la prise de vue sans flash.
• Si la rubrique du mode flash optionnel n’est pas affichée, mettez
hors tension l’appareil et le GF-1, puis démontez et remontez le
flash.2
reMarqUes techniqUes
Autres flashes
Utilisez uniquement des flashes avec un terminal à un
signal, sous la forme d’un contact en X, avec une tension
positive inférieure à 20V. Utilisez un flash qui couvre
l’angle de vue de l’objectif.
1
Fermez le couvercle du flash (page 2).
2
Installez le flash.
Mettez hors tension l’appareil et le flash optionnel,
puis montez le flash sur la griffe alimentée.
3 Configurez manuellement l’ouverture.
Mettez l’appareil sous tension, sélectionnez le mode A
ou M, puis choisissez une ouverture (pages 18, 48, 50).
4 Choisissez manuellement une sensibilité ISO.
Sélectionnez une option différente de Auto pour la
sensibilité ISO (page 90).
5Mettez le flash sous tension.
Mettez le flash sous tension et configurez-le en mode
automatique. Réglez l’ouverture et la sensibilité ISO
sur les valeurs sélectionnées avec l’appareil. Faites un
essai de prise de vue et ajustez l’ouverture du flash et
la sensibilité ISO le cas échéant.
Mettez hors tension le flash optionnel avant de le
démonter de l’appareil.
Attention
• Si le flash externe est activé, il se déclenchera à chaque prise
de vue quel que soit le mode flash sélectionné sur l’appareil.
Mettez le flash hors tension pour la prise de vue sans flash.
• Les flashes optionnels sont en principe utilisés pour des
portées supérieures à celle du flash intégré. L’utilisation d’un
flash optionnel pour des portées inférieures peut entraîner une
surexposition.
reMarqUes techniqUes
Utilisation du produit à l’étranger
Utilisation du chargeur de batterie BJ-9
Ce produit est conçu pour être utilisé avec des courants
de 100-240V et 50 ou 60Hz. Avant votre déplacement,
achetez un adaptateur de voyage pour la connexion
sur tout type de prises utilisées dans votre destination.
N’utilisez pas ces produits avec des transformateurs
électriques, qui pourraient les endommager.
Garantie
Ce produit a été fabriqué pour être utilisé dans le
pays d’achat et la garantie n’est pas valable dans
d’autres pays. Dans le cas d’une panne ou d’un
dysfonctionnement de l’appareil à l’étranger, le fabricant
décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du
produit localement ou à la prise en charge de toute
dépense associée.
Lecturesur un téléviseur
Le câble A/V fourni peut être utilisé pour raccorder le
produit à un téléviseur ou un moniteur équipé d’un
terminal d’entrée vidéo. Le produit prend en charge
les formats vidéo NTSC et PAL ; avant de raccorder le
produit à un dispositif vidéo, sélectionnez le mode de
sortie vidéo approprié.
Précautions d’emploi
• La garantie n’est pas valable dans d’autres pays. Dans le cas
d’une panne ou d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil à
l’étranger, le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la
réparation du produit localement ou à la prise en charge de
toute dépense associée.
reMarqUes techniqUes
• Ne faites pas tomber le produit et évitez-lui les chocs physiques.
Lors du transport du produit, faites attention de ne pas le cogner
dans d’autres objets. Faites particulièrement attention à protéger
l’écran d’affichage des photos.
• Le flash peut chauffer s’il est déclenché plusieurs fois de suite.
N’utilisez pas le flash plus que nécessaire. N’utilisez pas le flash
au contact de votre corps ou d’autres objets. Le non-respect de
cette consigne peut entraîner des brûlures ou un incendie.
• L’utilisation du flash à proximité des yeux de votre sujet peut
entraîner une déficience visuelle temporaire. La plus grande
prudence est recommandée pour photographier des enfants. Ne
pointez pas le flash vers le conducteur d’un véhicule à moteur.
• La batterie peut chauffer en cas d’utilisation intensive. Patientez
le temps qu’elle refroidisse avant de la retirer du produit.
• Il peut être difficile de lire l’écran d’affichage des photos sous la
lumière directe du soleil.
• Vous pouvez vous apercevoir que la luminosité de l’écran
d’affichage des photos varie ou que le moniteur présente des
pixels éteints ou toujours allumés. C’est normal pour tous les
moniteurs LCD et il ne s’agit pas d’un dysfonctionnement.
• Ne forcez pas sur l’écran d’affichage des photos.
• Des changements brutaux de température peuvent provoquer
de la condensation visible à l’intérieur du produit ou des
dysfonctionnements. Cela peut être évité en plaçant le
produit dans un sac plastique pour ralentir le changement de
température, puis en le retirant une fois que l’air dans le sac a
atteint la même température que l’environnement.
• Pour éviter d’endommager le produit, n’insérez pas d’objet dans
les fentes du microphone et du haut-parleur.
• Protégez les bornes du connecteur de la poussière.
• Conservez le produit sec et évitez de le manipuler avec les mains
mouillées. Le non-respect de cette consigne peut entraîner des
dysfonctionnements de l’appareil ou un choc électrique.
• Faites un essai de prise de vue pour vous assurer que le produit
fonctionne correctement avant de l’utiliser dans des occasions
importantes, comme un voyage ou un mariage. Nous vous
recommandons de conserver ce manuel et des batteries de
rechange à portée de main.
reMarqUes techniqUes
Conseil : pouréviterla condensation
La condensation se produit généralement lorsque vous vous rendez
dans un endroit avec une brusque différence de température, si
l’humidité est élevée, dans une pièce froide après que le chauffage
ait été mis en marche, ou lorsque le produit est exposé à de l’air
froid en provenance d’un climatiseur ou d’un autre dispositif.
Entretien et stockage
Entretien du produit
• Nettoyez l’écran d’affichage des photos en l’essuyant avec un
chiffon doux légèrement imprégné d’un nettoyant pour écran,
sans solvant organique.
• Nettoyez soigneusement le produit après l’avoir utilisé à la
plage ou après avoir manipulé des produits cosmétiques.
N’exposez pas le produit à des substances volatiles comme du
diluant, du benzène ou des pesticides. Le non-respect de cette
consigne peut endommager le produit ou sa finition.
• Dans l’éventualité d’un dysfonctionnement, consultez un centre
de réparation Ricoh.
• Le produit contient des circuits haute tension. Ne le démontez pas.
• L’écran d’affichage des photos peut se rayer facilement ; évitez
de le toucher avec des objets durs.
Stockage
• Ne stockez pas le produit dans un endroit sujet à : chaleur
ou humidité extrême ; grands changements de température
ou d’humidité ; poussière, saleté ou sable ; fortes vibrations ;
contact prolongé avec des produits chimiques, notamment des
boules de naphtaline ou d’autres produits insecticides, ou des
produits en vinyle ou en caoutchouc ; champs magnétiques
puissants (par exemple à proximité d’un moniteur, d’un
transformateur ou d’un aimant).
• Retirez la batterie si le produit ne doit pas être utilisé pendant
une longue période.
Avant le nettoyage
Mettez l’appareil hors tension et retirez la batterie.
reMarqUes techniqUes
Garantie et réparation
1. Ce produit bénéficie d’une garantie limitée. Pendant la période de garantie indiquée sur la carte de
garantie fournie avec le produit, toute pièce défectueuse sera réparée gratuitement. Dans le cas d’un
dysfonctionnement,contactezledistributeurquivousavenduleproduitouvotrecentrederéparation Ricoh
leplusproche. Veuillez noterquevous neserezpasremboursédesfraisdetransportpour livrer leproduitau
centrederéparation Ricoh.
2. Cettegarantie necouvreaucun dommagerésultantde:
1 non-respectdes instructionsdu moded’emploi ;
2 réparation, modification ourévision non réaliséeparun centredeserviceagréé, listédans le moded’emploi ;
3 incendie, sinistre, catastrophe naturelle, foudre, tension anormale,etc. ;
4 stockageinapproprié(indiquédans le« Moded’emploiduboîtierdel’appareilphoto»), fuitedebatterie
etautres fluides, moisissureoutoutautredéfautd’entretien duproduit.
5 immersion dansl’eau(inondation),exposition àl’alcoolouàd’autresboissons, infiltration desableoude
boue, chocphysique, chuteoupression exercéesur leproduitetautres causes non naturelles.
3. Après l’expiration delapériodedegarantie, tous les fraisderéparation serontàvotrecharge,ycomprisceux
d’un centredeserviceagréé.
4.??Tous les fraisderéparation serontàvotrecharge, mêmeàl’intérieurdelapériodedegarantie, si lacartede
garantie n’estpas jointeousi le nomdudistributeurouladated’achat n’estpas indiquéouaétémodifiésur
lacarte.
5.??Les frais de révision et d’inspection complète, sur demande du client, seront à sa charge complète que la
périodedegarantieaitexpiréou non.
6.??Cettegarantie s’appliqueuniquement auproduit etpas aux accessoires, comme l’étui et la courroie, ni à la
batterieetauxautres consommables fournis.
7.??Tout dommage consécutif à une défaillance du produit, comme les frais de prise de vue ou la perte d’un
profitattendu, neserapas rembourséquelapériodedegarantieaitexpiréou non.
8.??Lagarantieestvalableuniquementdans lepaysoùleproduitaétéacheté.
* Lesdispositions ci-dessus seréfèrentauxréparationsgratuiteset nelimitentvosdroits légaux.
* L’objectifdesdispositions ci-dessusestégalementdécrit sur lacartedegarantiefournieavec leproduit.
9. Lespiècesessentiellesàlaréparation duproduit (c’est-à-direlescomposants nécessairesaufonctionnement
et à la qualité du produit) seront disponibles pendant une période de cinq années après l’arrêt de la
production duproduit.
10.Veuillez noter que si le produit est sérieusement endommagé par une inondation, une immersion, une
infiltration de sableoudeboue,des chocs violentsouune chute, ilpeut être impossiblede le réparer et la
restauration deson étatoriginelpeutêtreimpossible.
Remarques
• Avant d’envoyer le produit en réparation, vérifiez la batterie et relisez le mode
d’emploi pour garantir un fonctionnement correct.
• Certaines réparations nécessitent un certain temps d’exécution.
• Lors de l’envoi du produit à un centre de réparation, veuillez inclure une note décrivant
la pièce défectueuse et le problème rencontré, aussi précisément que possible.
• Démontez tous les accessoires non associés au problème avant d’envoyer le
produit au centre de réparation.
• Cette garantie ne s’applique pas aux données stockées dans la mémoire
interne et sur les cartes mémoire.
reMarqUes techniqUes
NOTICES
USA FCC Part 15 Class B
The equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, then user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. (FCC 15.105B)
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. (FCC 15.21)
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used for
connection to a host computer in order to comply with FCC emission limits. (FCC
15.27)
COMPLIANCEINFORMATION STATEMENT
Product Name: CAMERA BODY
Model Number: GXR
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell NJ, 07006 Tel.: 1-800-225-1899
Noteto Usersin Canada
Note: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003
RemarqueConcernant les Utilisateurs au Canada
Avertissement: Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB-
003 du Canada.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS—SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
DANGER—TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW
THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Index
Symboles
Mode 5 (auto)................................. 4, 21
Touche d (supprimer).................... 3, 39
Touche O (DISP.)............................ 3, 42
Touche N (macro)............................ 3, 27
Touche OPEN/f (flash)................... 3, 29
Touche 6 (lecture).........3, 19, 94, 101
t (retardateur).................................. 3, 31
Touche 8/z....................... 3, 26, 36, 38
Touche 9/Z...................... 3, 26, 36, 38
A
Adobe Reader...................................... 156
Affichage infos prise de vue ........... 145
Affichage touche Fn .......................... 145
Afficher nom de Mon Réglage....... 145
Alerte ...................................................... 173
B
Balance blancs........................................86
Batterie......................................................12
C
Câble A/V........................................... ii, 118
Câble USB..................120, 159, 160, 162
Cadrage.....................................................75
Caplio...................................................... 154
Carte mémoire.............................. 15, 139
CD..................................... ix, 153, 155, 157
Changement de mode prise de vue
...................................................................92
Chargeur de batterie.................. 12, 183
Cible de mise au point.........................66
CL-BKT Noir et Blanc (TE)................. 146
Comp. BB de Mes Réglages............. 133
Compensation balance blancs.........89
Compensation de flash .................... 136
Compensation de niveau ................ 106
Configuration....................................... 128
Connecteur du câble A/V ..................... 3
Contraste........................................ 71, 106
Contre-jour..............................................85
Copier sur carte depuis mémoire
interne.................................................. 115
Correction biais............................ 56, 110
Correction du bougé............................92
Correction exposition flash................78
Couleur.................................71, 75, 86, 89
Courroie d’encolure....................... ii, 179
Couvercle du connecteur..................... 3
Couvercle du flash................................... 2
Couvercle du logement de la
batterie/carte............................ 3, 14, 15
D
Décalage ouverture..............................92
Déclencheur....................................... 2, 23
Déclencheur à câble.......................... 178
Déclencheur ADJ................................ 135
Défaut.....................................59, 127, 128
Délai de validation LCD.................... 142
Diaporama ............................................ 111
Dist. mise au pt snap............................68
DL-10..............................................153, 159
DNG............................................................63
DPOF....................................................... 115
E
Écran d’affichage des photos...3, 8, 42
Éditer Mes Réglages.......................... 132
Éléments vendus séparément....... 178
Enr.Mes Réglages................................ 129
Exposition .........................................50, 85
Extinction auto.................................... 141
F
Flash, optionnel................................... 181
Flash auxiliaire AF....................2, 31, 140
Flou.............................................................24
Fonct. réglage Mon réglage ........... 1339
Format [Carte]...................................... 139
Format [Mémoire interne]............... 139
G
Griffe alimentée .................... 2, 181, 182
Grille de cadrage.......................... 42, 144
H
Haut-parleur.............................................. 3
HDMI ..............................................119, 149
Histogramme................................ 44, 108
Horloge ........................................... 20, 149
Horodatage .............................................84
I
Image zoom numérique.................. 147
Impression ............................................ 122
Indicateur de niveau ............................32
Initialiser...................................................91
Instantané par pression ......................69
Interrupteur MARCHE/ARRÊT ...... 2, 18
Irodio Photo & Video Studio........... 153
J
JPEG............................................................63
L
Lancer extraction réglages............. 150
Language/L................................... 149
Lecture, photos......................................34
Lecture, téléviseur.............................. 118
Lecture, vidéos.......................................94
Logiciel................................................... 154
Luminosité............................44, 106, 139
Luminosité LCD................................... 139
M
Macintosh.............................................. 162
Manette ADJ................................ 3, 5, 134
Mémoire, interne......................... 15, 139
Mémo position curseur menu....... 147
Menu lecture........................................ 101
Menu prise de vue ................................58
Messages d’erreur .............................. 167
Mesure.......................................................66
Mesure exposition.................................70
Microphone............................................... 2
Mise au point..........................................64
Mise au point automatique ........22, 64
Mise au point manuelle ......................65
Mode A (priorité à l’ouverture).... 4, 48
Mode continu .........................................73
Mode flash ...............................................28
Mode M (exposition manuelle)... 4, 50
Mode macro............................................27
Mode M par 1 seule pression......... 138
Mode P (changement de
programme)..................................... 4, 46
Mode S (priorité à l’obturation)... 4, 49
Mode 4...................................... 4, 52
Modes MY ........................................... 4, 57
Mode vidéo..............................................54
Monochrome ...................................71, 75
N
N° séquentiel de la carte ................. 148
Netteté ......................................................71
Niveau de batterie.................................10
Niveau de flash.......................................79
Noir et Blanc.....................................71, 75
NTSC...............................................149, 183
O
Options du sélecteur de mode
lecture.................................................. 138
Options personnalisées.................... 127
Options sélecteur de mode M....... 138
Ordinateur............................................. 151
Ouverture...................................46, 48, 50
P
PAL ..................................................149, 183
PictBridge.............................................. 120
Pré AF.........................................................70
Prise de vue à intervalles....................83
Profondeur de champ..........................6490
Protéger................................................. 112
Q
Qualité image/Taille .............................61
R
Rapprochée (prise de vue).................27
RAW............................................................62
Récupération de Mes Réglages..... 131
Réduction bruit......................................80
Réduction bruit ISO..............................80
Réglage espace couleurs................. 146
Réglage niveau.................................... 144
Réglages image......................................71
Réglage synchro du flash ...................79
RICOH Gate La...................................... 154
Rotation auto....................................... 143
S
SD, SDHC...................................................15
Sélecteur de mode..............................2, 4
Sélecteur plus-moins.........................2, 5
Sensibilité ISO.........................................90
Sensibilité ISO auto-hi ...................... 140
Sons touches........................................ 142
Sortie vidéo .......................................... 149
Suppression de photos.......................39
Surbrillance..............................................43
T
Taille video...............................................63
Téléviseur............................................... 118
Témoin de mise au point
automatique/flash
.......................................3, 18, 22, 29, 141
Touche DIRECT .....................................3, 5
Touche Fn1, Fn2..............................3, 136
Touche C/D.......3, 58, 101, 126
V
Verrouillage de la mise au point......25
Vis de fixation du trépied...................... 3
Visualisation de photos.......................34
Vitesse d’obturation.......................46, 49
VM-1...............................................165, 166
Volume............................................ 94, 142
Vue multi-images..................................36
Z
Zoom..........................................................26
Zoom en lecture ....................................38
Zoom numérique ..................................26
Zoom par 1 seule pression.............. 143Numéros de téléphone des centres d’aide en Europe
UK (from within the UK)
(from outsideof the UK)
02073 656 580
+44 2073 656 580
Deutschland (innerhalb Deutschlands)
(außerhalb Deutschlands)
06331 268 438
+49 6331 268 438
France (àpartirdelaFrance)
(en dehorsdelaFrance)
0800 88 18 70
+33 1 60 60 19 94
Italia (dall’Italia)
(dall’estero)
02 696 33 451
+39 02 696 33 451
España (desdeEspaña)
(desdefueradeEspaña)
91 406 9148
+34 91 406 9148
http://www.service.ricohpmmc.com/Del’espritécologique à la préservation et à la gestion del’environnement
Ricoh promeut avec résolution les technologies douces
et le souci volontariste de l’environnement, adoptant
ainsi une attitude civique visant à préserver les
ressources irremplaçables de notre planète.
Pour réduire la charge éco-agressive des appareils photo
numériques, Ricoh travaille aussi sur les “Économies
d’énergie par réduction de la consommation” et la “Réduction des substances chimiques nuisibles à l’environnement dans les produits”.
En cas de problème
Voir d’abord la section “Résolution des problèmes” (page 165) dans ce manuel. Si le problème persiste, contacter la société
Ricoh.
Bureaux Ricoh
RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC)
OberratherStr.6,40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY
(innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331268438
(außerhalb Deutschlands) +496331268438
http://www.ricohpmmc.com/
RICOH FRANCES.A.S. (PMMCFRANCE)
(àpartirdelaFrance) 0800881870
(en dehorsdelaFrance) +33160601994
À propos de Irodio Photo & Video Studio
Amériquedu Nord(USA) (Appelgratuit) +1–800–458–4029
Europe
Royaume-Uni, Allemagne,FranceetEspagne: (Appelgratuit) +800–1532–4865
Autrespays : +44–1489–564–764
Asie +63–2–438–0090
Chine +86–21–5385–3786
Heuresdebureau:9h00-17h00
*L754 3972A*
Ricoh Company, Ltd.
Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo
104-8222, Japan
2009 Décembre
EN
FR F-FR
Imprimé en Chine
Before You Begin
Before using your camera body, take a few moments to familiarize
yourself with the controls and displays (pages 1–10). Refer to this
section as you read through the rest of the manual.
Basic Photography and Playback
Read this section before using the camera for the first time. It covers the
steps involved in readying the camera for use, taking photographs,
and playing them back (pages 11–44).
Reference
Read this section for information on topics not covered in “Basic Photography
and Playback.” It covers advanced shooting and playback options, and
describes how to print photographs, customize camera settings,
and copy pictures to a computer (pages 45–187).
The rechargeable battery needs to be charged before use. The
battery is not charged at the time of purchase.
GXR DIGITAL CAMERA BODY
Camera Body User Guide
The product serial number can be found on the bottom of
the camera body.ii
Package Contents
Confirm that the package contains the items listed
below.
* The actual appearance of included items may differ.
GXR camera body
The serial number
can be found on
the bottom of the
camera body.
USB cable with
mini-B connector
Connect the
camera body to
a computer or
printer.
A/V cable
Connect the
camera body to
a TV.
Connector Cap
The cap
comes
mounted on
the camera
body.
Hot shoe cover
The cover comes
mounted on the
hot shoe of the
camera body.
DB-90 rechargeable
battery
BJ-9 battery charger
• CD: Contains software and a Software User Guide.
• Camera Body User Guide (this manual)
• Neck strap
• Warranty
Tip: Attaching the NeckStrap
Put the ends of the neck strap
through the strap eyelets on each
side of the camera body, and
thread the ends through the clips
as shown.iii
Notices
• Safety precautions: Read all safety precautions thoroughly to ensure
safe use.
• Test shots: Take test shots to ensure that the camera is working
properly before taking photos on important occasions.
• Copyright: Reproduction or alteration of copyrighted documents,
magazines, and other materials, other than for personal, home,
or other similarly limited purposes, without the consent of the
copyright holder, is prohibited.
• Exemption from liability: Ricoh Co., Ltd. assumes no liability for failure to
record or display images as a result of product malfunction.
• Warranty: This product is manufactured to local specifications and the
warranty is valid within the country of purchase. The manufacturer
assumes no responsibility for servicing the product in other countries
or bearing any expense thereby incurred.
• Radio interference: Operating this product in the vicinity of other
electronic equipment may adversely affect both the camera and
the other device. Interference is particularly likely if the camera is
used in close proximity to a radio or television. This can be resolved
by moving the camera as far as possible from the other device,
reorienting the radio or television antenna, or plugging the radio or
television into a different outlet.
© 2009 RICOH CO., LTD. All rights reserved. This publication may not
be reproduced in whole or in part without Ricoh’s express written
permission. Ricoh reserves the right to change the contents of this
document at any time without prior notice.
Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information in
this document. Should you nevertheless notice any errors or omissions,
we would be grateful if you would notify us at the address listed on the
back cover of this booklet.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, and Internet Explorer are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States of America
and other countries. Macintosh and Mac OS are registered trademarks of
Apple Inc. in the United States of America and other countries. Adobe,
the Adobe logo, and Adobe Reader are trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
HDMI, the Logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
All other trade names mentioned in this document are the property of
their respective owners.iv
Safety Precautions
Warning Symbols
Various symbols are used throughout this instruction manual and
on the product to prevent physical harm to you or other people and
damage to property. The symbols and their meanings are explained
below.
Danger
This symbol indicates matters that may lead to
imminent risk of death or serious injury if ignored or
incorrectly handled.
Warning
This symbol indicates matters that may lead to death
or serious injury if ignored or incorrectly handled.
Caution
This symbol indicates matters that may lead to injury
or physical damage if ignored or incorrectly handled.
SampleWarnings
The symbol alerts you to actions that must be performed.
The symbol alerts you to prohibited actions.
The symbol may be combined with other symbols to indicate
that a specific action is prohibited.
Examples
Do not touch Do not disassemble
Observe the following precautions to ensure safe use of this
equipment.
Danger
Do not attempt to disassemble, repair or alter the equipment
yourself. The high-voltage circuitry in the equipment poses
significant electrical hazard.
Do not attempt to disassemble, alter or directly solder the
battery.v
Do not put the battery in a fire, attempt to heat it, use it in a
high temperature environment such as next to a fire or inside a
car, or abandon it. Do not put it into water or the sea or allow it
to get wet.
Do not attempt to pierce, hit, compress, drop, or subject the
battery to any other severe impact or force.
Do not use a battery that is significantly damaged or deformed.
Warning
Turn off the power immediately in the event of abnormalities
such as smoke or unusual odors being emitted. Remove the
battery as soon as possible, being careful to avoid electric
shocks or burns. If you are drawing power from a household
electrical outlet, be sure to unplug the power cord from the
outlet to avoid fire or electrical hazards. Discontinue use of the
equipment immediately if it is malfunctioning. Contact the
nearest service center at your earliest convenience.
Turn off the power immediately if any metallic object, water,
liquid or other foreign object gets into the camera body.
Remove the battery and memory card as soon as possible,
being careful to avoid electric shocks or burns. If you are
drawing power from a household electrical outlet, be sure to
unplug the power cord from the outlet to avoid fire or electrical
hazards. Discontinue use of the equipment immediately if it
is malfunctioning. Contact the nearest service center at your
earliest convenience.vi
Avoid any contact with the liquid crystal inside the picture
display, should the monitor be damaged. Follow the
appropriate emergency measures below.
• SKIN: If any of the liquid crystal gets on your skin, wipe it off
and rinse the affected area thoroughly with water, then wash
well with soap.
• EYES: If it gets in your eyes, wash your eyes with clean water
for at least 15 minutes and seek medical advice immediately.
• INGESTION: If any of the liquid crystal is ingested, rinse the
mouth out thoroughly with water. Have the person drink a
large amount of water and induce vomiting. Seek medical
assistance immediately.
Follow these precautions to prevent the battery from leaking,
overheating, igniting or exploding.
• Do not use a battery other than those specifically
recommended for the equipment.
• Do not carry or store together with metal objects such as
ballpoint pens, necklaces, coins, hairpins, etc.
• Do not put the battery into a microwave or high pressure
container.
• If leakage of battery fluid or a strange odor, color change, etc.
is noticed during use or during charging, remove the battery
from the camera body or battery charger immediately and
keep it away from fire.
Please observe the following in order to prevent fire, electrical
shock or cracking of the battery while charging.
• Use only the indicated power supply voltage. Also avoid the
use of multi-socket adapters and extension cords.
• Do not damage, bundle or alter power cords. Also, do not
place heavy objects on, stretch or bend power cords.
• Do not connect or disconnect the power plug with wet hands.
Always grip the plug section when disconnecting a power
cord.
• Do not cover equipment while charging.vii
Keep the battery and SD memory card used in this equipment
out of the reach of children to prevent accidental ingestion.
Consumption is harmful to human beings. If swallowed, seek
medical assistance immediately.
Keep the equipment out of the reach of children.
Do not touch the internal components of the equipment if they
become exposed as a result of being dropped or damaged. The
high-voltage circuitry in the equipment could lead to an electric
shock. Remove the battery as soon as possible, being careful
to avoid electric shocks or burns. Take the equipment to your
nearest dealer or service center if it is damaged.
Do not use the equipment in wet areas as this could result in fire
or electric shock.
Do not use the equipment near flammable gases, gasoline,
benzene, thinner or similar substances to avoid the risk of
explosion, fire or burns.
Do not use the equipment in locations where usage is restricted
or prohibited as this may lead to disasters or accidents.
Wipe off any dust that accumulates on the electrical plug as this
may lead to fire.
To avoid the risk of fire, electric shock or injury, do not use
the battery charger with commercially available electronic
transformers when traveling abroad.viii
Observe the following precautions to ensure safe use of this unit.
Caution
Contact with fluid leaking from a battery can lead to burns. If
part of your body comes in contact with a damaged battery,
rinse the area with water immediately. (Do not use soap.)
If a battery starts to leak, remove it immediately from the
equipment and wipe the battery chamber thoroughly before
replacing it with a new battery.
Plug the power cords securely into the electrical outlets. Loose
cords pose a fire hazard.
Do not allow the camera body to get wet. In addition, do not
operate it with wet hands. Both pose the risk of electric shock.
Do not fire the flash at drivers of vehicles, as this may cause the
driver to lose control and result in a traffic accident.
Safety
Precautions for
Accessories
When using optional products, carefully read the
instructions provided with the product before
using that product.ix
Product Manuals
The following manuals are provided with the GXR camera body:
Camera Body User Guide (this booklet)
This guide describes how to use your camera and install the
supplied software.
* Read this guide along with the documentation provided
with the camera unit.
Software User Guide (pdf file)
The Software User Guide describes how to copy pictures from
your camera body to a computer for display and editing. It is
available in several languages, each in its own folder in the
“DC Manual” folder on the supplied CD.
For ease of reference, copy the
pdf file from the CD to your
computer hard disk.
“Irodio Photo & Video Studio” image viewing and editing software
is also included with this product. For information on using this
software, see the Help menu in Irodio Photo & Video Studio or
telephone one of the following customer support centers:
• North America (U.?S.?A.): +1–800–458–4029 (toll free)
• U. K., Germany, France, and Spain: +800–1532–4865 (toll free)
• Other European countries: +44–1489–564–764
• China: +86–21–5385–3786
• Other Asian countries: +63–2–438–0090
Business hours: 9:00 AM to 5:00 PMx
Table of Contents
Package Contents...................................................................................................... ii
Notices............................................................................................................................. iii
Safety Precautions....................................................................................................iv
Product Manuals........................................................................................................ix
Before You Begin 1
Read this section before using your camera body for the first time.
Introduction ....................................................................................2
Parts of the Camera Body .....................................................................................2
Basic Photography and Playback 11
Read this section before using your camera for the first time.
First Steps.......................................................................................12
Charging the Battery.............................................................................................12
Inserting the Battery .............................................................................................14
Inserting Memory Cards.....................................................................................15
Attaching the Camera Unit to the Camera Body................................17
Turning the Power On and Off.......................................................................18
Basic Setup..................................................................................................................20
Taking Photographs.....................................................................21
Holding the Camera..............................................................................................21
Taking a Photograph.............................................................................................22
Zoom..............................................................................................................................26
Close-ups (Macro Mode)....................................................................................27
Flash Photography .................................................................................................28
Self-Timer .....................................................................................................................31
Tilt Indicator................................................................................................................32
Viewing and Deleting Photographs..........................................34
Viewing Photographs...........................................................................................34
Deleting Photographs..........................................................................................39
O (DISP.) Button...................................................................................................42xi
Reference 45
Read this section for more information on camera functions.
More on Photography .................................................................46
Mode P: Program Shift.........................................................................................46
Mode A: Aperture Priority..................................................................................48
Mode S: Shutter Priority ......................................................................................49
4Mode M: Manual Exposure ...............................................................................50
Mode: Settings for Various Scenes..............................................52
“MY” Modes: Using Custom Settings...........................................................57
Shooting Menu ........................................................................................................58
Playback Functions ......................................................................94
Viewing Movies........................................................................................................94
Viewing MP Files......................................................................................................95
Playback Menu............................................................................101
Playback Menu ...................................................................................................... 101
Viewing Pictures on TV..................................................................................... 118
Printing Photographs ................................................................120
Connecting the Camera Body ..................................................................... 120
Printing....................................................................................................................... 122
Camera Settings..........................................................................126
Key Custom Options.......................................................................................... 129
Setup............................................................................................................................ 139
Copying Pictures to a Computer..............................................151
Windows.................................................................................................................... 151
Macintosh................................................................................................................. 162
Technical Notes...........................................................................167
Troubleshooting................................................................................................... 167
Specifications.......................................................................................................... 175
Optional Accessories......................................................................................... 178
Using the Product Abroad.............................................................................. 183
Precautions for Use............................................................................................. 183
Care and Storage.................................................................................................. 185
Warranty and Servicing.................................................................................... 186
NOTICES..................................................................................................................... 187
Index .............................................................................................188xii
First-time user? read this.
Before You Begin
Read this section before using your camera
body for the first time.
Introduction .............................................................. 2First-time user? read this.
2
Introduction
This manual describes how to take pictures and play
them back. To ensure that you get the most from this
product, read this manual thoroughly before use and
keep it handy when using the product.
Parts of the Camera Body
For more information, refer to the page number to the
right of each item.
Front
3 4 5 6 7
12 11
13
8 9 10
14
1 2
1 Up-down dial ................................5
2 Modedial lockrelease...................4
3 Modedial ......................................4
4 Shutter-releasebutton..........21,23
5 Power switch.........................18,21
6 AFauxiliarylight.................31,140
7 Hot shoe....................................181
8 Flash cover...................................29
9 Microphone..................................–
10 Strapeyelet...................................ii
11 Alignment markforattaching
cameraunit.................................17
12 Connector....................................17
13 Cameraunit releaselever............17
14 Flash............................................28First-time user? read this.
Back
4
1
2
3
17 16
13
14
15
12
9
22 21 20 19
5
6
23
7 8
10
18
11
1 DIRECTbutton ..............................5
2 OPEN/f(flash)button................29
3 VF/LCD button.............................42
4 Picturedisplay...............................8
5 Autofocus/flash lamp
................................18,22,29,141
6 Connector for USB cable
..........................120,159,160,162
7 Connector for A/V cable.............118
8 Connector for HDMI mini cable...119
9 ADJ. lever..............................5,134
10 6(playback)button
................................19,34,94,101
11 N(macro)button......................27
12 8(telephoto)/z(enlarged
view)button .........................26,36
13 9(wide-angle)/Z(thumbnail
display)button......................26,36
14 Directionalpad............................37
+ (!).....................................137
– (%).....................................137
Fn1(Function1) (#)...............136
Fn2(Function2) ($)...............136
15C/Dbutton
....................................58,101,126
16 O(DISP.)button ....................42
17 t(self-timer)/d(delete)button
..............................................31,39
18 Tripodscrew hole......................176
19 Battery/cardcover.................14,15
20 Releaselever .........................14,15
21 Speaker ........................................–
22 Strapeyelet...................................ii
23 Connector cover.................118,121First-time user? read this.
Mode Dial
Before shooting, press the
mode dial lock release (1)
and rotate the mode dial
to choose a shooting mode
(2).
1
2
5(auto): The camera
sets shutter speed
and aperture for
optimal exposure
(page 21).
M (manual exposure):
You choose shutter
speed and aperture
(page 50).
MY, MY2, MY (“mysettings”): Recall settings
saved using Reg. My Settings (pages 57,
129).
A (aperture priority): You
choose an aperture
and let the camera
adjust the shutter
speed for optimal
exposure (page 48).
4(scene):
Optimize settings for
the current subject
or scene, or shoot
movies (page 52).
S(shutter priority): You
choose a shutter
speed and let the
camera adjust
aperture for optimal
exposure (page 49).
P (programshift):
You choose from
combinations of
shutter speed
and aperture that
produce the same
exposure (page 46).First-time user? read this.
Up-down Dial and ADJ. Lever
When viewing pictures or
navigating the menus, you can
use the up-down dial in place of
+ and –, and the ADJ. lever in place
of Fn and Fn2. The ADJ. lever and
up-down dial can also be used to
select shutter speed and aperture
in P, A, S, and M modes.
Up-down dial
ADJ. lever
You can assign frequently-used shooting menu items
to the ADJ. lever for easy access (page 134). To display a
shooting menu item, center the ADJ. lever and press it in;
you can then use the lever and up-down dial to select an
option.
Note
The M Mode Dial Options and Playback Mode Dial Options
items in the key custom options tab can be used to change the
assigned functions of the up-down dial and ADJ. lever (page 138).
DIRECT Button
Press the DIRECT button in the
shooting mode to display the
current shooting settings.
DIRECTFirst-time user? read this.
DIRECTscreen
For more information, refer to the page number to the
right of each item.
1 2 3 8 4 5
12
13
18
10
9
11 15 14 16 17
6
7
1 Shooting mode..............................4
2 Aperture..........................46,48,50
3 Shutter speed..................46,49,50
4 Flash mode..................................28
5 Flash compensation/manual
flash amount.........................78,79
6 Exposurecompensation ..............85
7 ISO...............................................90
8 Whitebalance.............................86
9 Focus mode.................................64
10 Exposure metering......................70
11 Imagesettings ............................71
12 Picturequality/size/moviesize....61
13 Bracketing...................................75
14 Continuous..................................73
15 Information area...........................7
16 Macro mode................................27
17 AELock......................................136
18 Self-timer....................................31
Changing the Shooting Settings on the DIRECT screen
On the DIRECT screen, move the cursor using +, –, Fn,
Fn2 or the ADJ. lever (left and right) to highlight an item,
and change the setting directly using the up-down dial.
The exposure compensation can be adjusted using +
and – instead of the up-down dial.First-time user? read this.
Displaying the Options for the Shooting Settings
Pressing the ADJ. lever when an item is highlighted on
the DIRECT screen displays the options for the setting
item. Select the desired option using + and –, or the updown dial, and then press the ADJ. lever or the C/
D button to set the option.
Caution
The settings of shooting mode, macro mode, self-timer, and flash
mode for built-in flash cannot be changed by selecting the item
on the DIRECT screen. Change the settings using the mode dial
or the buttons on the camera body.
Notes
• Pressing the DISP. button changes the setting of background
image (page 140).
• Pressing C/D on the DIRECT screen will display the
shooting menu (page 59).
• After setting the exposure compensation, press Fn, Fn2, or the
ADJ. lever (left or right) to move the cursor to other items.
• When in manual exposure mode, the exposure indicator to
achieve optical exposure will be displayed instead of the
exposure compensation slider.
• When in program shift mode, the value of shutter speed and
aperture will be changed at the same time to produce the same
exposure.
• The item name of shooting menu corresponding to the
selected item on the DIRECT screen will be displayed in the
information area.
Displaying the Next or Previous Page
If the items displayed on a screen extends over multiple pages,
you can display the next or previous page by pressing + or –, or
rotating the up-down dial while pressing the DIRECT button.First-time user? read this.
Picture Display
The following indicators may be displayed during
shooting and playback.
Shooting (still photography) Shooting (movie mode)
4:3 N
F 2.5
25cm-
1/50 200
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
15
18
31
19
27 28 29 30
26
32
20
25
24
22
23
21
37 38
F 2.5 1/50 200
34
33
35
36
1 Flash mode............28
2 Flash compensation/
manual flash amount
.........................78,79
3 Scene mode...........52
Continuous.............73
4 Shooting mode........4
5 Numberofexposures
remaining
?*
..........177
6 Destination............15
7 Snapfocusdistance
.........................64,68
8 Picturequality/size
..............................61
9 Focus mode/full
press snap........64,69
10 Whitebalance/
whitebalance
compensation ...86,89
11 Exposure metering
..............................70
12 Imagesettings ......71
13 Bracketing.............75
14 Histogram .............44
15 Distortion correction
..............................81
16 Noisereduction .....80
17 Camerashake
correction..............92
18 Dateimprint..........84
19 Batterylevel..........10
20 Autoexposurelock
............................136
21 Self-timer..............31
22 Macro mode..........27
23 Minimum shooting
distance...............144
24 Digital zoom ratio
..............................26
25 Zoom bar...............26
26 Interval shooting...83
27 Exposureindicator
..............................50
28 Aperture.....46,48,50First-time user? read this.
9
29 Shutter speed
...................46,49,50
30 Exposure
compensation .......85
31 ISO.........................90
32 Tilt indicator..........32
33 Exposure
warning.................86
34 Blur warning....24,93
35 Depth of field........64
36 Focusbar...............64
37 Movielength..63,177
38 Timeavailable
?*
......55
* Approximation only; actual capacity varies with shooting conditions
and make of memory card. Display shows “9999” when memory remains
for over 9,999 images.
Note
The shooting settings can be viewed by pressing the DIRECT
button (page 5).
Playback (photographs) Playback (movies)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14
4:3 N
2010/0101 00:20
F 2.5
ISO 200
1/50
EV+0.7
2010/01/01 00:20
16
15
17 18
1 File number.............–
2 Current frame..........–
3 Total frames ............–
4 Playback mode
indicator..................–
5 Protectedimage..112
6 DPOFprint
indicator..............115
7 Source...................15
8 Picturequality/size
..............................61
9 Dateof recording
.......................20,149
10 Aperture.....46,48,50
11 ISO.........................90
12 Exposure
compensation .......85
13 Shutter speed
...................46,49,50
14 Batterylevel..........10
15 Length/elapsedtime
................................–
16 Progress indicator....–
17 Whitebalance.......86
18 Whitebalance
compensation .........89First-time user? read this.
0
Notes
• The picture display may also display warnings and messages.
• Additional information can be viewed
by pressing the DISP. button (page 42).
4:3 N
2.5 200
The BatteryLevel Indicator
Battery level is shown by the icon at the bottom right
corner of the picture display.
Icon Description
(green)
Battery fully charged.
(green)
Battery partially discharged.
(orange)
Low battery. Charge or replace as soon as possible.
First-time user? read this.
First Steps................................................................ 2
Taking Photographs................................................. 2
Viewing and Deleting Photographs...........................
Basic Photography and
Playback
Read this section before using your camera
for the first time.First-time user? read this.
2
First Steps
Prepare the camera for use.
Charging the Battery
The rechargeable battery (DB-90) supplied with the
camera body is not charged at the time of purchase.
Charge the battery in the supplied BJ-9 battery charger
before use.
1
Place the battery in the charger.
Place the battery label up with the “+” and “–” labels
oriented to match the labels on the charger.
Caution
Be sure the battery is in the correct orientation.
2 Connect the power cord to the charger, and then
plug in.
The charger lamp will light while the battery
charges. An exhausted battery will recharge in
about five hours at 25°C.
Note
If the charger lamp blinks, a battery or charger fault may
have occurred. Unplug the power cord and remove the
battery from the charger.First-time user? read this.
3
Remove the battery.
Charging is complete when the charger lamp turns
off. Unplug the power cord and remove the battery
from the charger.
Cautions
• Rechargeable Li-ion battery: Use only a genuine DB-90 battery. Do
not use a battey not specifically designated by Ricoh for use in
this camera body.
• The battery may be hot immediately after use. Before removing
the battery, turn the power off and wait for the battery to cool
down.
• Remove the battery if the camera will not be used for extended
periods.
Tip: BatteryCapacity
The number of shots that can be taken with a fully-charged
DB-90 battery differs depending on the camera unit. The tests
are conducted according to CIPA standards under the following
conditions: at the temperature of 23 °C (73 °F); with the picture
display on; shoot every 30 seconds with flash fired every other
shot; turn the camera off and on every 10 shots taken. See the
documentation provided with the camera unit for details.First-time user? read this.
Inserting the Battery
Be sure the power is off before inserting or removing the
battery.
1 Open the battery/card cover.
Unlatch (1) and open
(2) the cover.
2
Insert the battery.
Using the battery to keep
the battery latch pressed
downward, slide the
battery in. The latch will
click into place when the
battery is fully inserted.
1
2
3 Close the battery/card cover.
Close (1) and latch (2)
the cover.
Caution
Be sure the cover is latched.
1
2
Removing the Battery
Unlatch and open the battery/card cover, press the latch
downward to release it, and then remove the battery. Be
careful not to drop the battery.
Caution
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove
and store the battery in a cool dry place.First-time user? read this.
Inserting Memory Cards
Pictures can be stored in the camera body’s 86MB
internal memory, or optional SD and SDHC memory
cards. Internal memory is used if no card is inserted; if a
card is inserted, the card will be used instead.
Be sure the power is off before inserting or removing a
memory card.
1 Open the battery/card cover.
Unlatch (1) and open (2)
the cover. 1
2
2
Insert the card.
Holding the memory card
in the orientation as shown,
slide it in until it clicks into
place.
3 Close the battery/card cover.
Close (1) and latch (2) the
cover.
1
2First-time user? read this.
RemovingMemoryCards
Unlatch and open the battery/card cover, and then press
the memory card in to eject it. The card can then be
removed.
Cautions
• Pictures will not be saved to internal memory when a memory
card is inserted, even if the memory card is full.
• Keep the memory card contacts clean.
Tip:Write Protection
Slide the write-protection switch on
memory card to “LOCK” to keep data
from being written to or deleted from
the card and to prevent the card from
being formatted.
Pictures cannot be taken when the memory card is locked; lock
the card only to prevent accidental loss of data and be sure to
unlock the card before shooting.
Notes
• Format memory cards before first use or after they have been
used in a computer or other device (page 139). Be sure to back
up any important data before formatting.
• See page 177 for information on memory card capacity.
• Pictures can be copied to memory cards from internal memory
(page 115).First-time user? read this.
Attaching the Camera Unit to the Camera Body
Be sure the power is off before attaching or removing
the camera unit to/from the camera body.
Remove the connector caps
from the camera body and
camera unit respectively. Align
the left side of the camera unit
with the alignment mark on the
camera body, and then slide the
camera unit to the left until it
clicks.
Alignment mark for
attaching camera unit
Removing the Camera Unit from the Camera Body
Slide the camera unit
release lever to the right,
and remove the camera
unit.
Be careful not to drop the
camera body and camera
unit when removing the
camera unit from the
camera body.First-time user? read this.
Turning the Power On and Off
Shooting Mode
Slide the power switch to ON to
turn the camera on. The camera
will play the start-up sound. The
autofocus/flash lamp blinks for
several seconds while the camera
starts up.
To turn the camera off, slide the
power switch to OFF. The number
of pictures taken so far that day
will be displayed before the
camera turns off (zero is displayed
if the camera clock has not
been set; if you turn the camera off after changing the
clock (page 20), the camera will display the number of
pictures taken after the clock setting was changed).
Caution
Changes to continuous (page 73), interval (page 83), and selftimer (page 31) settings are lost when the camera is turned
off. Turning the camera off restores settings for MY modes to
the values saved with Reg. My Settings. Other settings are
unaffected.First-time user? read this.
9
Playback Mode
When the power is off, pressing
the 6 button for about a second
turns the camera on in playback
mode. Press the 6 button again
to turn the power off.
Tip:SleepMode and Auto Power Off
The camera will turn the display or power off automatically to
save power if no operations are performed for the specified time
in the Sleep Mode (page 141) and Auto Power Off (page 141).First-time user? read this.
20
Basic Setup
A language-selection dialog is displayed the first time
the camera is turned on. Follow the steps below to
choose a language and set the time and date. To exit
before setup is complete, press the DISP. button. The
language, time, and date can be changed at any time in
the setup menu (page 149).
1
Select a language.
Press +, –, Fn, or Fn2 to
highlight a language, and
press C/D.
2
Set the clock.
Press Fn or Fn2 to highlight
the year, month, day, hour,
minute, or date format, and
then press + or – to change.
After checking that the date
is correct, press C/D.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; press C/D
to set the clock.
Notes
• If you leave the battery in the camera body for at least two
hours, the clock and language settings are retained for about a
week after the battery was removed.
• The time and date of recording can be imprinted on
photographs (page 84).First-time user? read this.
2
Taking Photographs
After setting up the camera
as described in “First Steps”
(page 12), you are ready to take
photographs. Slide the power
switch to ON to turn the camera
on, and rotate the mode dial to
5.
Holding the Camera
1Hold the camera in both hands.
Hold the camera in both
hands with your elbows
lightly pressed against your
body.
Caution
Be sure that your fingers, hair or
the neck strap do not obstruct the
lens or flash.
2Get ready to shoot.
Rest the finger on the
shutter-release button.First-time user? read this.
22
Taking a Photograph
1
Focus.
Frame your subject in the center of the picture
display and press the shutter-release button halfway
to set focus and exposure.
4:3 N
If the camera is able to focus, the
focus frames for the objects in
focus are displayed in green
(up to nine frames).
If the camera is unable to focus, the
focus frame blinks red and the
autofocus/flash lamp blinks
green.
Autofocus/flash lamp
Focus frame
2
Take a picture.
Gently press the shutter-release button the rest
of the way down to take the picture. The picture
is displayed immediately after shooting for a few
seconds (page 142), and saved to internal memory
or memory card.First-time user? read this.
2
Tip:Shutter-Release Button
The camera has a two-stage shutter-release button. To focus,
lightly press the shutter-release button until you feel resistance.
This is called “pressing the shutter-release button halfway.” Press
the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to shoot.
Tip:Focus
The autofocus/flash lamp and the focus frame show whether the
subject is in focus.
Focus status Focus frame Autofocus/flash lamp
Before focusing White Off
Subject in focus Green On (green)
Unable to focus Red (blinks) Blinks (green)
The camera may be unable to focus on the following:
• Objects that lack contrast, such as the sky, a wall that is only one
color, or the hood of a car
• Flat objects containing only horizontal lines
• Fast-moving objects
• Objects that are poorly lit
• Objects with bright reflections or backlighting
• Flickering objects, such as fluorescent lights
• Point light sources, such as light bulbs, spotlights, or LEDs
Note that one or more focus frames may be displayed in green
even if the camera is unable to focus on the above subjects;
check focus in the picture display before shooting. If the camera
is unable to focus, lock focus on another object at the same
distance from the camera as your subject, then recompose the
photograph and take the picture (page 25).First-time user? read this.
2
Tip: Avoiding Blurred Pictures
To prevent blurring caused by the camera movement when the
shutter is released (“camera shake”), press the shutter-release
button smoothly and gently. Blurring is particularly likely to occur
if:
• The flash is off and lighting is poor
• Using digital zoom (page 26)
In situations in which photographs are especially prone to
blurring caused by camera shake, a J icon will be displayed
in the picture display. Hold the camera steady and try focusing
again, or attempt one of the followings:
• Turning the flash on ( ) or using auto flash ( ; see page 28)
• Choosing a higher ISO (page 90)
• Using the self-timer (page 31)
• Using the camera shake correction (page 92)
Notes
• If the flash will fire when the picture is taken, a pre-flash will be
emitted to assist focus and exposure.
• In the case of overexposure or underexposure, a icon will
be displayed.
• You can choose how long pictures are displayed in the picture
display after shooting. If desired, photographs can be displayed
until the shutter-release button is pressed halfway (page 142).First-time user? read this.
2
Focus Lock
Use focus lock to compose photographs in which the
subject is not in the center of the frame. Focus lock can
also be used if the camera is unable to focus.
1
Focus.
Position your subject in the center of the picture
display and press the shutter-release button halfway
to focus.
4:3 N
2
Recompose the photograph.
Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway
to lock focus, recompose the photograph.
Final composition
Main subject
3
Take a picture.
Gently press the shutter-release button the rest of
the way down to take the picture.
Caution
If the distance between the camera and subject changes while
focus lock is in effect, focus again at the new distance.First-time user? read this.
2
Zoom
The 8 (telephoto) button can be used to zoom in and
the 9 (wide-angle) button to zoom out.
4:3 N
9 8
4:3 N
Zoom
out
Zoom
in
1
Frame the picture using the 8 and 9 buttons.
2
Focus.
Press the shutter-release
button halfway.
3
Take a picture.
Gently press the shutterrelease button the rest of the
way down.
Notes
• If using the camera unit without optical zoom, digital zoom
works instead of optical zoom.
• If using a camera unit equipped with optical and digital zoom,
to switch from optical zoom to digital zoom, release the 8
button once at the maximum magnification by the optical
zoom, and then press the 8 button again. To switch from
digital zoom to optical zoom, press and hold the 9 button.
• You can check the amount of optical zoom with the zoom bar
in the picture display. When using the digital zoom, the zoom
ratio is displayed in the picture display.
• When RAW is selected for Picture Quality/Size (page 61),
digital zoom cannot be used.First-time user? read this.
2
Close-ups (Macro Mode)
Use macro mode for close-ups of small objects.
1
Press the N button.
A N icon will be briefly
displayed in the center of
the picture display. N will
then appear at the upper
left of the display.
2
Focus.
Frame the subject in the
picture display and press
the shutter-release button
halfway.
3
Take a picture.
4:3 N
Gently press the shutter-release button the rest of
the way down.
To exit macro mode, press the N button again.
Note
Even if Multi AF, Snap, 8 is selected for Focus, Spot AF is used
in macro mode (page 64).First-time user? read this.
2
Flash Photography
The flash only fires when it is raised. Press the OPEN/f
button to raise the flash, and press the button again to
choose from the following flash modes:
Mode Description
Flash Off The flash is off.
Auto The flash fires automatically when required.
Red-Eye
Flash
Reduces “red-eye” in portraits taken with the flash.
Flash On The flash fires with every shot.
Flash
Synchro.
Combines the flash with slow shutter speeds. Use when
taking portraits that include details of the background or
nightscape. Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent
blur.
Manual
Flash
The flash fires with every shot. The amount of flash can
be set in Manual Flash Amount (page 79).
Note
The effective range of the flash differs depending on the camera
unit. See the documentation provided with the camera unit for
details.First-time user? read this.
29
Using the Built-in Flash
1
Raise the flash.
Press the OPEN/f button.
OPEN
2
Select a flash mode.
Press the OPEN/f button to select a flash mode. The
flash mode icon appears at the top left corner of the
display.
Notes
• The selected flash mode remains in effect until a new
mode is chosen.
• The autofocus/flash lamp blinks while the flash charges.
Photographs can be taken when the lamp stops blinking.
3
Focus and shoot.
If the flash will fire when the picture is taken, a preflash will be emitted to assist focus and exposure.First-time user? read this.
0
Notes
• To close the flash when it is not in use, gently press the center of
the flash cover down until it latches.
• The flash turns off automatically in movie, continuous, and
bracketing modes.
• Do not use the built-in flash when an optional flash is attached.
Failure to observe this precaution could cause damage to the
product.
Caution
Do not use the flash unit in close proximity to your subject’s eyes.
Particular care should be observed when photographing infants.
Do not direct the flash at the operator of a motor vehicle.First-time user? read this.
Self-Timer
Choose from ten-second, two-second, and custom
setting timers. Use the two-second timer to prevent blur
caused by camera movement when the shutter-release
button is pressed. With the custom setting, a specified
number of pictures can be taken at a specified interval.
Set the shooting interval and number of pictures with
Custom Self-Timer in the shooting menu (page 82).
1 Choose a self-timer mode.
Press the t button once to
select the ten-second timer,
twice to select the twosecond timer, and three times
to select the custom setting
timer. Pressing the button the
fourth time turns the timer off.
The current selection is displayed in the picture
display.
Note
The selected self-timer mode remains in effect until a new
mode is chosen.
2
Start the timer.
Press the shutter-release button to lock focus and
start the timer. If the ten-second timer or custom
setting timer is selected, the AF auxiliary light will
light.
Note
Press C/D to cancel the custom setting timer during
shooting.
4:3 N First-time user? read this.
2
Tilt Indicator
Use the tilt indicator to level the camera when
photographing buildings or landscapes. It is particularly
useful for compositions in which the horizon is visible.
1Display options.
Press and hold the O (DISP.)
button until level setting
options are displayed.
2
Select an option.
CPress + or – to highlight an option, and press
/D to select the highlighted option.
Option Description
Off Tilt indicator is not displayed.
Display
Tilt indicator is shown in the picture display. The amount
and direction of tilt can be checked in the tilt indicator.
The indicator turns green when the camera is level, orange
when the camera is tilted, and red if the degree of tilt
exceeds the maximum degree that can be displayed with
the indicator. Tilt indicator is not shown if the display is
off, indicators are hidden, or the framing grid is displayed
(page 42).
Disp +
Snd
Same as Display, except that a beep sounds periodically
when the camera is level.
Sound
A beep sounds periodically when the camera is level. The
tilt indicator is not displayed in the picture display.First-time user? read this.
Understanding theTilt Indicator
4:3 N
Green
4:3 N
Orange
Camera level Camera tilted left
4:3 N
Red
4:3 N
Camera tilted too far to the
right Camera tilted 90 ° left
Note
Tilt indicator settings can also be adjusted in the setup menu
(page 144).
Cautions
• The tilt indicator is not displayed when the camera is upside
down, movies are being recorded, or the interval timer is on.
• The beep does not sound if the camera’s volume is set off (page
142).
• The tilt indicator is intended as a guide only and should not
be used as a spirit level or in other applications in which a
high degree of precision is required. Accuracy drops when the
camera is in motion or you are shooting on a vehicle or other
moving platform.
First-time user? read this.
Viewing and Deleting Photographs
Pictures can be viewed in the picture display.
Viewing Photographs
Press the 6 button in shooting
mode to display the last
photograph viewed.
Press the 6 button again to exit
to shooting mode.
Tip: If theCamera Is Off
If the power is off, press the 6 button
for about a second to turn the camera
on in playback mode.
Press Fn2 to view photographs in the recorded order, Fn
to view in reverse order. Press – to skip ten frames ahead,
+ to go back ten frames.
First-time user? read this.
Back one photo
2010
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
200
F 2.5
2010 200
F 2.5 F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
4:3 N
4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
Back ten photos
+
2010
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
200
F 2.5
2010 200
F 2.5 F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
4:3 N
4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
Fn
2010
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
200
F 2.5
2010 200
F 2.5 F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
4:3 N
4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
Fn2
2010
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
200
F 2.5
2010 200
F 2.5 F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
4:3 N
4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
– Ahead one photo
Ahead ten photos
2010
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
200
F 2.5
2010 200
F 2.5 F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
4:3 N
4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
Caution
The camera records JPEG copies of RAW images for display in the
picture display. When a RAW image is selected for playback, the
camera shows the JPEG copy and a RAW indicator is displayed.
If the JPEG copy has been deleted using a computer or other
device, the camera will display a small preview of the RAW
image, but you will not be able to view the image at larger
magnifications. See pages 62, 63 for information on recording
RAW images.
Tip: Viewing Picturesin ShootingMode
Photographs are displayed in the picture display immediately
after shooting. You can choose how long pictures are displayed
using LCD Confirmation Time in the setup tab (page 142).
First-time user? read this.
Tip: Viewing the Picturesin InternalMemory
If a memory card is inserted, the pictures on the memory card
will be displayed; the pictures in internal memory cannot be
viewed even if the memory card is empty. The pictures in internal
memory will only be displayed if no card is inserted in the camera
body.
Tip: Auto Rotate
If On is selected for Auto Rotate in the setup tab (page 143),
pictures will be automatically displayed in the correct orientation
in the picture display.
Viewing Multiple Photographs
Press the z or Z button
to choose the number of
photographs to display from one,
20, and 81, or to choose to sort
photographs by the date that
photographs were taken.
Single frame 20 frames
4:3 N
2010
F 2.5
200
4:3 N
2010 F 2.5
Last File
Sort by date 81 frames
First-time user? read this.
Multi-frame views can be used to select images for
display or deletion.
In multi-frame views, use the directional pad to highlight
photographs.
Tip: Directional Pad
The cursor can be moved in an oblique direction by pressing the
diagonal portions on the directional pad.
Notes
• To display a photograph full frame, press the ADJ. lever in multiframe view.
• To display the photographs on the previous or next page in the
multi-frame view:
• In the 20- and 81-frame view, press +, –, Fn, Fn2, or ADJ. lever
(left or right), or rotating the up-down dial while pressing the
DIRECT button.
• In the sort by date view, pressing + or –, or rotating the updown dial while pressing the DIRECT button displays the next or
previous page. Pressing Fn, Fn2, or ADJ. lever (left or right) while
pressing the DIRECT button displays the photographs taken
next or previous date. If pressing Fn2, or ADJ. lever to the right
with the cursor at the last photograph, the photographs taken
the next date is displayed.
First-time user? read this.
Playback Zoom
Press the z button or rotate the up-down dial to the
right to zoom in on the photograph currently displayed
full frame. To zoom in to the magnification selected with
One Press Zoom Ratio (page 143), press the ADJ. lever.
The following operations can be performed:
Use To
z Zoom in.
Up-down
dial
Rotate right to zoom in, left to zoom out.
C/D
When an image is magnified, press to display the image
in the magnification ratio selected for One Press Zoom
Ratio. If an image is displayed at the magnification
selected for One Press Zoom Ratio, pressing C/D
cancels zoom.
Directional pad Move the areas to be displayed.
ADJ. lever Press left or right to view other images at same zoom ratio.
Z Zoom out.
Notes
• Maximum magnification varies with image size:
Image size Maximum magnification
L, M, 5M, 3M 16×
1M 6.7×
VGA 3.4×
• Playback zoom is not available with movies or pictures taken
using M-Cont Plus.
• If Setting2 is selected for Playback Mode Dial Options in the
key custom options tab (page 138), the ADJ. lever and up-down
dial can be used to view other areas of the image.9
First-time user? read this.
Deleting Photographs
Follow the steps below to delete photographs.
Deleting Individual Photographs
1Display a photograph.
Display a photograph you want to delete in singleframe playback (page 34).
2
Press the d button.
The options will be displayed
(you can change the
photograph by pressing Fn
or Fn2).
3
Select Delete One.
CPress + or – to highlight Delete One, and press
/D.
A message is displayed during deletion. Repeat
steps 2 and 3 to delete additional photographs, or
highlight Cancel and press C/D to exit.
Deleting All Files
To delete all files, press the d
button to display delete options
as described above, and select
Delete All. A confirmation dialog
will be displayed; press Fn or
CFn2 to highlight Yes, and press
/D.0
First-time user? read this.
Deleting Multiple Files
Follow the steps below to delete multiple files.
1
Press the d button.
In multi-frame playback,
proceed to step 2. In singleframe playback, the options
shown at right will be
displayed. Highlight Delete
Multi and press C/D.
2
Select Sel. Indiv. or Sel. Range.
To select images one at a
time, highlight Sel. Indiv.,
press C/D, and
proceed to step 3. To select
images by specifying ranges,
Chighlight Sel. Range, press
/D, and proceed to step 3.1. Press the DISP.
button to exit at any time without deleting files.
3
Select a photograph.
Use the directional pad
(page 37) to highlight
Cphotographs, and press
/D. Selected picture
is marked with a d icon.
To deselect a photograph,
highlight it and press C/D again.
4:3 N 4:3 N
First-time user? read this.
Tip:Selecting Ranges
To switch from Sel. Indiv. to Sel. Range, press the ADJ. lever
and follow the steps below:
3.1 Use the directional pad to
highlight the first image of a
range, and press C/D
to select. The selected image
is marked with a d icon. To
deselect the image, press the
DISP. button.
4:3 N
3.2 Use the directional pad to
highlight the last image, and
press C/D to select.
The selected images are
marked with a d icon.
4:3 N
Repeat steps 3.1–3.2 to select additional ranges, or press the
ADJ. lever to return to step 3 to select or deselect individual
photographs.
4
Press the d button.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed.
5
Select Yes.
Press Fn or Fn2 to highlight
Yes, and press C/D.2
First-time user? read this.
O (DISP.) Button
Press the O (DISP.) button to display the information in
the picture display in shooting and playback modes.
Turning the Picture Display On/Off
Pressing the VF/LCD button while the picture display is on turns
the picture display off. Some camera operations are not available
when the picture display is off. Pressing the VF/LCD button again
turns the picture display on.
When a LCD viewfinder is attached, pressing the VF/LCD button
switches between the LCD viewfinder and the picture display.
Shooting Mode
Press the O (DISP.) button to cycle through the
following displays:
Indicators
displayed
4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N
Indicators+
histogram
No
indicators
4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N
Framing
grid (no
indicators)
Tip:TheFraming Grid
See page 144 on choosing a type of framing grid.
First-time user? read this.
Note
If Display or Disp + Snd is selected for Level Setting (page 32), a
tilt indicator appears when indicators are displayed.
Playback Mode
Press the O (DISP.) button to cycle through the
following displays:
Indicators
displayed
4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
2.5 200
White Saturation
4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
2.5 200
White Saturation
Details+
histogram
No
indicators
4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
2.5 200
White Saturation
4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
2.5 200
White Saturation
Highlights
Tip: Highlights
The flashing portions of the highlights display indicate “washed
out” areas in which details may have been lost to overexposure.
Check images with the highlights display after shooting in direct
sunlight or in other conditions in which parts of the image may
be overexposed. If it seems important details may have been lost,
choose a lower exposure compensation value and shoot again
(page 85). Note that the display is intended only as a guide and
may not be entirely accurate.
First-time user? read this.
Tip: Histogram
The histogram is a graph showing the distribution of pixels
of different brightness in the image. Brightness is plotted on
the horizontal axis, with shadows at the left and highlights
at the right. The vertical axis gives the number of pixels. The
histogram can be used to assess exposure and check for loss of
detail in highlights and shadows without the brightness of your
surroundings affecting your judgement. A histogram in which
pixels are clustered on the right indicates that the image may be
overexposed, while a histogram in which pixels are clustered on
the left indicates that the image may be underexposed.
Overexposed Underexposed
If the image appears to be incorrectly exposed, you may be
able to use exposure compensation to correct exposure in
subsequent photographs of the same subject (page 85; note
that exposure compensation may be insufficient to produce the
correct exposure in some cases). The histogram can also be used
as a guide when adjusting contrast in photographs after shooting
(page 107).
The histogram is intended as a guide only and may not be
completely accurate, particularly in cases in which the flash is
used or ambient lighting is poor.
More on Photography...............................................
Playback Functions................................................... 9
Playback Menu........................................................0
Printing Photographs..............................................20
Camera Settings......................................................2
Copying Pictures to a Computer ...............................
Technical Notes.......................................................
Reference
Read this section for more information on
camera functions.
more on PhotograPhy
More on Photography
This section provides information on P, A, S, M, 4,
and MY modes and on using shooting menu options.
Mode P: Program Shift
When the mode dial is rotated
to P (program shift), you can use
the up-down dial to choose from
several combinations of shutter
speed and aperture, all of which
produced the same exposure.
1 Choose mode P.
Rotate the mode dial to P. The
shooting mode is shown by
an icon in the picture display.
4:3 N
2Measure exposure.
Press the shutter-release
button halfway to measure
exposure. The current shutter
speed and aperture appear in
the display.
2.5 200
3 Choose shutter speed and aperture.
Release the shutter-release
button and rotate the
up-down dial to select a
combination of shutter speed
and aperture.
4:3 N
more on PhotograPhy
Note
Shutter speed and aperture can be adjusted for ten seconds
after releasing the shutter-release button.
4
Take a picture.
Gently press the shutter-release button all the way
down to take the photograph.
Note
The combinations of shutter speed and aperture available at each
exposure value differ depending on the camera unit. See the
documentation provided with the camera unit for details.
more on PhotograPhy
Mode A: Aperture Priority
In mode A (aperture priority),
you choose the aperture and
the camera selects the shutter
speed. Choose large apertures
(low f-numbers) to emphasize the
main subject by blurring background and foreground
details. Choose small apertures (high f-numbers) to
bring both the background and main subject into focus.
1 Choose mode A.
Rotate the mode dial to
A. The current aperture is
displayed in orange.
2 Choose an aperture.
Rotate the up-down dial to
choose an aperture. Your
selection only takes effect when the photograph is
taken; the effect cannot be previewed in the picture
display.
3
Press the shutter-release button halfway.
Press the shutter-release
button halfway to set focus and
exposure. The shutter speed
selected by the camera will be
displayed in the picture display.
4:3 N
4
Take a picture.
Gently press the shutter-release button the rest of
the way down.
Note
If auto aperture shift is on (page 92), the camera will adjust
aperture for optimal exposure.
4:3 N 9
more on PhotograPhy
Mode S: Shutter Priority
In mode S (shutter priority), you
choose the shutter speed and
the camera selects the aperture.
Choose fast shutter speeds to
“freeze” motion, slow shutter
speeds to emphasize motion by blurring moving
objects.
1 Choose mode S.
Rotate the mode dial to S.
The current shutter speed is
displayed in orange.
2 Choose shutter speed.
Rotate the up-down dial to
choose a shutter speed.
3
Press the shutter-release button halfway.
Press the shutter-release
button halfway to set focus
and exposure. The aperture
selected by the camera will
be displayed in the picture
display.
2.5 200
4
Take a picture.
Gently press the shutter-release button the rest of
the way down to shoot.
Note
Maximum aperture (i.e., the lowest possible f-number) may not
be selected at slow shutter speeds, even when the subject is
poorly lit.
4:3 N 0
more on PhotograPhy
Mode M: Manual Exposure
In mode M (manual exposure),
use the up-down dial to choose
aperture and the ADJ. lever to
select a shutter speed.
1 Choose mode M.
Rotate the mode dial to M.
The shooting mode, exposure
indicator, and current
aperture and shutter speed
appear in the display.
4:3 N
2 Choose an aperture and shutter speed.
Rotate the up-down dial
to choose an aperture and
press the ADJ. lever left or
right to select a shutter
speed (if desired, the roles of the two controls
can be reversed; see page 138). The effects can be
previewed in the picture display and are reflected
in the exposure indicator (if the image would be
under- or over-exposed by more than 2EV, the
effects cannot be previewed and the indicator turns
orange).
3
Take a picture.
Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus,
and then gently press the shutter-release button the
rest of the way down to shoot.
–2–2 EVEV +2+2 EVEV
more on PhotograPhy
Notes
• The shutter speeds that can be set depend on the camera unit
and the aperture setting. See the documentation provided with
the camera unit for details.
• If Auto or Auto-Hi is selected for ISO Setting (page 90),
ISO value will be fixed in manual exposure mode. The fixed
value for ISO differs depending on the camera unit. See the
documentation provided with the camera unit for details.
• Choose slower shutter speeds for longer exposure times.
To reduce blur caused by camera shake, hold the camera
steadily in both hands or use a tripod. The picture display
turns off while the shutter is open. At slow shutter speed, the
camera automatically processes photographs to remove noise,
increasing the time needed to record images to about twice the
shutter speed.
• Autoexposure (AE) lock is not available in manual exposure
mode. If AE Lock is selected for Set Fn Button or Set Fn2 Button in
the key custom options tab, pressing the assigned button in
manual exposure mode will set shutter speed or aperture to
a value close to that needed for optimal exposure. Similarly, if
Exposure Comp. is selected for +/– Button Settings (page 137)
in the key custom options tab, pressing the + and – buttons
will not display exposure compensation options in manual
exposure mode, but will instead set shutter speed or aperture to
a value close to that needed for optimal exposure. This is useful
when you want to use optimal exposure as a starting point for
modifying exposure. The One Press M Mode (page 138) option
in the key custom options tab determines whether shutter
speed or aperture is altered to achieve optimal exposure.2
more on PhotograPhy
4 Mode: Settings for Various Scenes
Select 4 mode to shoot
movies or to choose one of the
options that are suitable for
particular scenes. Camera settings
are automatically optimized for
the selected subject type.
The following is some of the options that can be
selected in the 4 mode.
Option Description
Movie Shoot movies with sound (page 54).
Portrait Use when taking portrait pictures.
Sports Use when taking pictures of moving objects.
Landscape
Use when taking scenery pictures with abundant
greenery or blue sky.
Nightscape
Use when shooting night scenes.
In nightscape mode, the flash fires when all of the
following conditions are satisfied:
• The flash is set to Auto.
• The flash is determined to be necessary because it is
dark.
• There is a figure or another object nearby.
Skew Correct
Mode
Reduce the effects of perspective when photographing
rectangular objects, such as message boards or
business cards (page 56).
more on PhotograPhy
To select a scene mode option:
1
Rotate the mode dial to 4.
The option currently selected
for 4 mode appears in
the display.
2
Press C/D.
A menu for scene mode is
displayed.
3
Select an option.
CPress +, –, Fn or Fn2 to highlight an option and press
/D to return to shooting mode with the
selected option shown at the top of the display.
4
Take a picture.
• Movie mode: See page 54.
• Skew correct mode: See page 56.
more on PhotograPhy
Tip: Using theMenus
To access the shooting, key custom
mode, press
options and setup menus in C/D to display the 4
scene mode menu and press Fn to
highlight the mode tab. Press + or – to
highlight the shooting menu tab (page
58), key custom options tab (page
127), or setup tab (page 128), and press
Fn2 to place the cursor in the selected
menu. See page 59 for information on
the shooting menu options available in
each mode.
1
2
3
4
1Mode tab
2Shooting menu tab
3Key custom options
tab
4Setup tab
Recording Movies
Shoot movies with sound. Movies are stored as AVI files.
1
Select 3 in 4 mode.
CPress + or – to highlight 3 (movie), and press
/D.
The mode is shown by an
icon in the picture display.
2
Shoot.
Press the shutter-release button to begin recording;
press again to end. Recording ends automatically
when memory is full.
more on PhotograPhy
Cautions
• A icon blinks, and the recording time and remaining
available time are displayed during recording.
• Sounds made by the camera may be recorded with the movie.
• Movies may be up to 90 minutes in length or 4GB in size.
Depending on the type of memory card used, shooting may
end before this length or size is reached. The maximum total
length of all movie files that can be stored in internal memory
or on a memory card varies with the options selected for Movie
Size (page 61).
Notes
• The flash cannot be used in movie mode.
• The camera focuses when the shutter-release button is pressed
to begin recording.
• The amount of time remaining is calculated based on the
amount of memory available and may not diminish at an even
rate.
• Shooting menu options differ from those available in other
modes (page 60).
• Charge the battery before shooting. For long recordings, choose
memory cards with high write speeds and check the amount of
memory available before shooting.
more on PhotograPhy
4 Mode: Skew Correct
To take pictures in skew correct mode, frame the subject
so that it occupies as much of the frame as possible and
press the shutter-release button to take the photograph.
If the camera detects an object of which perspective
can be corrected, the object is shown surrounded by an
orange frame. The camera can detect up to five objects;
press Fn2 to select a different object, or press + to record
the photograph without correcting perspective. If the
camera is unable to detect a suitable object, an error
message will be displayed and the photograph will be
recorded without modification.
Caution
The camera records two images: the unmodified photograph
and a copy that has been processed to correct perspective. No
photograph will be taken if memory is insufficient to record two
images. The camera may be unable to correct perspective if:
• The subject is out of focus.
• The four edges of the subject are not clearly visible.
• There is little contrast between the subject and the background.
• The background contains many fine details.
Tip:SkewCorrection
The Skew Correction in the playback menu can be used to
correct perspective of saved photographs (page 110).
more on PhotograPhy
“MY” Modes: Using Custom Settings
To take photographs using
settings saved in MY1 option
with Reg. My Settings in the key
custom options tab (page 129),
rotate the mode dial to MY. Select
MY2 to take photographs using the settings saved with
MY2, MY to take photographs using the settings saved
with MY3.
1
Rotate the mode dial to MY, MY2, or MY.
The shooting mode saved
using Reg. My Settings will
be displayed in the picture
display.
4:3 N
Note
Settings can be adjusted in MY modes. The settings saved
with Reg. My Settings are restored when another mode is
selected or the camera is turned off.
Tip:Choosing a ShootingMode
To choose a shooting mode in MY mode without changing
other settings, use the Switch Shooting Mode option in
the shooting menu (page 92). Switch Shooting Mode is
not available for MY modes that a scene mode is assigned
to.
2
Take a picture.
See the section on the selected shooting mode for
more information.
more on PhotograPhy
Shooting Menu
Use the +, –, Fn, Fn2, and C/D buttons to
navigate the menus.
Caution
The shooting menu is not displayed when the camera unit is not
attached to the camera body.
1Display the shooting menu.
In modes other than 4,
pressing C/D in
shooting mode displays the
shooting menu.
Tip:4Mode
CIn 4 mode, pressing
/D displays the mode
menu; press Fn to highlight the
mode tab, press – to display the
shooting menu, and Fn2 to place
the cursor in the menu.
Scroll bar shows
position in menu
2
Select a menu item.
Press + or – to highlight a
menu item and press Fn2
to display options for the
highlighted item.
Note
The items on the next page can
be displayed by pressing – while
pressing the DIRECT button.9
more on PhotograPhy
3
Select an option.
Press + or – to highlight an option. Press C/
D to select and exit to shooting mode, or press Fn
to select and return to the shooting menu.
The items available in the shooting menu differ
depending on the shooting mode.
5, P, A,S,M,MY,MY2 andMYModes
Option Default Page
Picture Quality/Size L4:3 N 61
Focus Multi AF 64
Snap Focus Distance 2.5?m 68
Full Press Snap On 69
Pre-AF Off 70
Exposure Metering Multi 70
Image Settings Standard 71
Continuous Mode Off 73
Auto Bracket Off 75
Flash Exposure
Compensation
0.0 78
Manual Flash Amount 1/2 79
Flash Synchro Settings 1stCurtain 79
Noise Reduction Off 80
Noise Reduction ISO Over ISO 401 80
Distortion Correction Off 81
Option Default Page
Auto Macro Off 81
Custom Self-Timer 2Pics,5Sec. 82
Interval Shooting — 83
Date Imprint Off 84
Exposure
Compensation*
1
0.0 85
White Balance Multi-P AUTO 86
White Balance
Compensation
A:0, G:0 89
ISO Setting Auto 90
Restore Defaults*
2
— 91
Auto Aperture Shift*
3
Off 92
Switch Shooting
Mode*
4
— 92
Camera Shake
Correction *
5
On 920
more on PhotograPhy
4Mode:Movie
Option Default Page
Movie Size VGA640 61
Focus Multi AF 64
Snap Focus Distance 2.5?m 68
Pre-AF Off 70
Option Default Page
White Balance Auto 86
White Balance
Compensation
A:0, G:0 89
4Mode: Portrait/Sports/Nightscape
Option Default Page
Picture Quality/Size L4:3 N 61
Focus Multi AF 64
Snap Focus Distance 2.5?m 68
Full Press Snap On 69
Pre-AF Off 70
Flash Exposure
Compensation
0.0 78
Flash Synchro Settings 1stCurtain 79
Option Default Page
Distortion Correction Off 81
Custom Self-Timer 2Pics,5Sec. 82
Date Imprint Off 84
Exposure Compensation 0.0 85
White Balance Multi-P AUTO 86
Camera Shake
Correction *
5
On 92
4Mode:Landscape
Option Default Page
Picture Quality/Size L4:3 N 61
Distortion Correction Off 81
Custom Self-Timer 2Pics,5Sec. 82
Date Imprint Off 84
Exposure Compensation 0.0 85
Option Default Page
White Balance Multi-P
AUTO
86
Camera Shake
Correction *
5
On 92
more on PhotograPhy
4Mode:SkewCorrect
Option Default Page
Picture Quality/Size 1M 4:3F 61
Focus Multi AF 64
Snap Focus Distance 2.5?m 68
Full Press Snap On 69
Pre-AF Off 70
Exposure Metering Multi 70
Image Settings Standard 71
Flash Exposure
Compensation
0.0 78
Option Default Page
Flash Synchro Settings 1stCurtain 79
Distortion Correction Off 81
Date Imprint Off 84
Exposure Compensation 0.0 85
White Balance Multi-P AUTO 86
ISO Setting Auto 90
Camera Shake
Correction *
5
On 92
*
1
Notavailablein mode M.
*
25modeonly.
*
3
Mode A only.
*
4
Mode MY, MY2 or MY only.
*
5
This function is notavailabledependingon
thetypeof cameraunit.
Picture Quality/Size / Movie Size
Image size determines the number of photographs and
movies that can be stored in internal memory or on a
memory card.
For still images, the aspect ratio and picture quality
can be selected for each option. The picture size differs
depending on the combination of the selected option,
aspect ratio and quality.
For movies, select the desired option.2
more on PhotograPhy
ForStill Images
Option Aspect ratio Compression rate Description
RAW 16:9*
2
, 4:3,
3:2*
2
, 1:1*
3
FINE/NORMAL/
VGA*
1
• Suitable for further image
processing or editing on a
computer.
L 16:9*
2
, 4:3,
3:2*
2
, 1:1*
3
FINE/NORMAL • Suitable for printing at
larger size or cropping the
M image on a computer.
16:9*
2
, 4:3,
3:2*
2
, 1:1*
3
FINE/NORMAL
5M 4:3 FINE • Suitable for printing.
3M 4:3 FINE
1M*
4
4:3 FINE • Suitable for taking large
number of photographs.
VGA*
4
4:3 FINE • Suitable for taking large
number of photographs,
attaching the images to
e-mail or posting images
on the web.
*
1
The setting is applied for the JPEG copy.
*
2
The upper and lower parts on the display are blacked out.
*
3
The left and right sides on the display are blacked out.
*
4
1M and VGA are the options available in the Skew Correct mode.
Notes
• See the documentation provided with the camera unit for
details on the picture size for each option.
• Options for Picture Quality/Size can be displayed by pressing
the ADJ. lever (page 134).
more on PhotograPhy
Tip: Picture Quality
The camera supports the following picture qualities:
• Normal: JPEG compression is used to reduce file size.
• Fine: Compression rate is low to achieve high picture quality. File
size becomes larger comparing to Normal quality.
• RAW: RAW image data are saved in DNG format; JPEG copies
are also created. The camera displays only the JPEG copy;
DNG files can be viewed and edited on a computer using the
supplied Irodio Photo & Video Studio Software (Windows only)
or commercially-available applications that support the DNG
format.
Unlike normal- and fine-quality images, RAW images are not
compressed. This increases file size but avoids the loss of quality
associated with JPEG compression. Note the following when
shooting RAW images:
• Some functions of the shooting menu are not available for
shooting RAW images. See the description of each setting for
details. Image Settings and Date Imprint options apply only
to JPEG copies and have no effect on the DNG files.
• The number of RAW photographs that can be taken in a single
burst in continuous mode differs depending on the camera unit
and the settings of shooting menu.
ForMovies
Option Image size
VGA640 640×480
QVGA320 320×240
Notes
• The options for movies differ depending on the camera unit.
See the documentation provided with the camera unit for
details.
• Movies may be up to 90 minutes in length or 4 GB in size.
more on PhotograPhy
Focus
Choose how the camera focuses. By default, the camera
uses autofocus.
Option Description
Multi AF*
The camera selects the focus area with the closest
subject, preventing out-of-focus shots by keeping
the camera from focusing on the background.
Spot AF* Focus on the subject in the center of the frame.
MF
(manual focus)
Focus manually (page 65).
Snap
Focus is fixed at distance selected with Snap Focus
Distance (page 68) for quick shutter response.
8 (infinity)
Fix the focus distance at infinity when photographing
distant scenes.
* The icon is displayed on the DIRECT screen only.
When MF, Snap, or 8 is selected,
the current selection is shown by
an icon in the picture display.
4:3 N
Tip: Depth ofField
Depth of field is the portion (range of distance) that appears sharp
in an image. Small apertures (high f-numbers) increase depth of
field, bringing more of the scene into focus; large apertures (low
f-numbers) decrease depth of field, emphasizing the main subject
by blurring the foreground and background. At settings of MF,
Snap, and 8, the focus bar shows depth
of field in shooting modes M, A, and P
(in mode P, depth of field is only shown
when the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway and aperture values are
displayed).
Depth of field
(green)
Focus bar
(distances are
approximate)
Depth of field
(green)
Focus bar
(distances are
more on PhotograPhy
Notes
• Fn and Fn2 buttons can be used to switch back and forth
between autofocus and manual or snap focus (page 136).
• To zoom in on the subject in the
center of the picture display and
check focus, press and hold C/
D. Press and hold the button again
to return to the normal shooting
display.
4:3 N
2.5 30
Focus:MF(ManualFocus)
Manual focus can be used to lock focus or to focus when
the camera is unable to focus using autofocus.
1
Select MF (manual focus) in the Focus menu.
The focus mode and focus
bar are displayed in the
picture display.
4:3 N
2.5 30
2 Choose the focus distance.
While pressing the N button, rotate the up-down
dial to focus. When using the camera unit with the
focus ring, adjust the focus using the ring.
3
Take a picture.
See the section on the selected shooting mode for
more information.
Note
In manual focus mode, the camera can focus on the subject at
close range (macro) even if macro mode is not set.
more on PhotograPhy
Choosing theFocus andMetering Target
Target selection can be used to set focus and exposure
for off-center subjects without moving the camera,
making it easier to use a tripod.
1Activate target selection.
Press the ADJ. lever in the
focus modes other than MF,
and then press the lever to
the left or right to highlight
P. Press + or – to highlight
one of the following options
and press C/D to select.
Option Description
AE/AF
Spot metering and spot autofocus; choose the focus and
exposure target.
AF
Spot autofocus; choose the focus target. Exposure is
metered using the option selected for Exposure Metering
(page 70).
AE
Spot metering; choose the metering target. Focus is set
using the option selected for Focus (page 64).
Off Target selection is off.
2
Position the target.
Use the directional pad
(page 37) to position the
cross hairs over your subject,
and press C/D.
To return to the target
selection menu, press the
DISP. button.
more on PhotograPhy
3
Take a picture.
Press the shutter-release button halfway to set focus
and/or exposure for the selected subject and then
gently press the shutter-release button the rest of
the way down to take the picture.
Notes
• Target selection is not available in manual focus mode (page
65).
• The selected target remains in effect until a new target is
selected. Note that target will be reset if you choose a new
option in the target-selection menu or select manual focus.
• When macro mode is on in 4 mode, the focus target
for macro mode can be selected by pressing the ADJ. lever,
selecting U, and using the directional pad to position the
cross-hairs as described on page 68.
• The Fn buttons can be used for focus target selection in macro
mode (page 68). Note that if the Fn buttons have been used to
select the focus target, the ADJ. lever cannot be used for target
selection until the target is reset.
more on PhotograPhy
Macro TargetSelection
If Macro Target is assigned to the Fn
or Fn2 button (page 136), you can select
macro mode by pressing the assigned
button in shooting mode. The crosshairs shown at right will be displayed;
use the directional pad (page 37) to
position the cross-hairs over your
subject, and press C/D (to exit without setting the target,
press the DISP. button). Press the shutter-release button halfway to
focus on the selected target, and then gently press the shutterrelease button the rest of the way down to take the picture.
If the ADJ. lever has been used to select a focus target (page 66),
you cannot select macro target mode by pressing Fn and Fn2
until the target is canceled.
Snap Focus Distance
Select the distance at which the camera focuses when
Snap is selected for Focus (page 64) or Full Press Snap
is on (page 69). Choose from 1m (3.3ft.), 1.5m (4.9ft.),
2m (6.6ft.), 2.5m (8.2ft.), 3m (9.9ft.), 3.5 m (11.5 ft.), 5m
(16.4ft.), and 8 (infinity).
Note
When Snap is selected for Focus or Full Press Snap is on, the
snap focus distance can also be selected by rotating the updown dial while pressing the N button.9
more on PhotograPhy
Full Press Snap
Take photographs without pausing to focus the camera
when Multi AF or Spot AF is selected for Focus (page
64).
Option Description
Off The function is off.
On
If the shutter-release is pressed all the way down in one
motion, the camera will take a picture at the focus distance
selected for Snap Focus Distance. Choose when quick
shutter response is required.
Auto-Hi ISO
Same as On, except that ISO sensitivity is automatically set
to Auto-Hi (page 90).
Note
The snap focus distance can be changed by rotating the updown dial while pressing the N button.
Tip: Autofocus
The camera will focus normally if you press the shutter-release
button halfway.
Cautions
• Full press snap is not available in macro mode or when MF,
Snap, or 8 is selected for Focus (page 64).
• Care is required to avoid blur caused by camera movement.0
more on PhotograPhy
Pre-AF
If On is selected when Multi AF or Spot AF is selected for
Focus (page 64), the camera will continue to focus even
when the shutter-release button is not pressed halfway
(the focus range is narrower than for normal focus). This
may decrease the time needed to focus, potentially
improving shutter response.
Cautions
• Pre-AF is not available when MF, Snap, or 8 is selected for
Focus (page 64).
• Using pre-AF increases the drain on the battery.
Exposure Metering
Choose how the camera measures light for exposure.
Option Description
Multi* The camera measures light in 256 areas of the frame.
Center
The camera measures light in the entire frame but assigns
the greatest weight to the center. Use when the subject
in the center of the frame is brighter or darker than the
background.
Spot
The camera measures light with the subject in the center
of a frame, ensuring the optimal exposure even when it is
markedly brighter or darker than the background.
* The icon is displayed on the DIRECT screen only.
When Center or Spot is selected,
the current selection is shown by
an icon in the picture display.
4:3 N
more on PhotograPhy
Image Settings
Adjust contrast, sharpness, and vividness (color depth)
or take monochrome photographs.
Option Description
Vivid
Take vivid photographs with heightened contrast,
sharpness, and vividness.
Standard* Normal contrast, sharpness, and vividness.
Natural
Creates a softer image with decrease in contrast,
sharpness, and vividness.
Black & White
Take photographs in black and white. Contrast and
sharpness can be adjusted manually.
B&W (TE)
(ToningEffect)
Creates monochrome photographs with a sepia,
red, green, blue, or purple tint. Vividness, contrast,
and sharpness can be adjusted manually.
Setting 1
Setting 2
Make individual adjustments to vividness, contrast,
sharpness, colors and hue to create custom settings
that can be recalled as desired.
* The icon is displayed on the DIRECT screen only.
At settings other than Standard,
the current selection is shown by
an icon in the picture display.
4:3 N
To make individual adjustments to the settings for Black
& White, B&W (TE), Setting1, or Setting2, highlight the
desired option and press Fn2.2
more on PhotograPhy
1Adjust custom color reproduction settings.
• Black & White: Press + and
– to highlight an option and
press Fn1 and Fn2 to change.
• B&W (TE): Adjust vividness,
contrast, and sharpness as
described above. To choose
a tint, highlight Toning
Effect and press Fn2. Press +
and – to highlight an option
and press Fn to select.
• Setting1/Setting2: Adjust
vividness, contrast, and
sharpness as described
above. To adjust individual
colors, highlight Individual
Color Settings and press Fn2.
Press + and – to highlight an option and press Fn
and Fn2 to change. Press C/D to exit when
settings are complete.
To call the registered settings, highlight Recall
Settings and press Fn2. Press + or – button to
highlight an option and press C/D.
2
Return to the Image Settings menu.
Press C/D when settings are complete.
3
Exit to shooting mode.
CPress C/D, or press Fn1 and then press
/D.
more on PhotograPhy
The option currently selected
for Image Settings will be
displayed in the picture
display.
4:3 N
Note
Options for Image Settings can be displayed by pressing the ADJ.
lever (page 134).
Continuous Mode
Shoot photographs in continuous sequence.
• Continuous: The camera shoots
while the shutter-release button
is pressed.
All the photographs taken in this
mode are saved as individual
still images.
• M-Cont Plus (memory-reversal continuousplus): The camera
shoots while the shutter-release button is pressed.
Consecutive still images taken before releasing
the shutter-release button are saved as one MP file
(page 95).
M-Cont Plus can be selected from M-Cont + (HI) and
M-Cont + (LO).
When you remove your finger
from the shutter release button…
…the camera records consecutive still images.
more on PhotograPhy
Note
For M-Cont + (HI) and M-Cont + (LO) options, image sizes and
the number of images saved as one MP file differ depending
on the camera unit. See the documentation provided with the
camera unit for details.
At settings other than Off, the
current selection is shown by an
icon in the picture display.
4:3 N
Caution
Digital zoom is available at settings M-Cont Plus even if Auto
Resize is selected for Digital Zoom Image.
Notes
• At settings other than Off, the flash turns off automatically,
focus and exposure are fixed with the first shot in each series,
and Auto white balance is used in place of Multi-P AUTO (page
86).
• If you release the shutter-release button before reaching
the number of images that are saved as one MP file, the
photographs taken while pressing the button will be saved as
one MP file.
Tip:MP file
MP is a file format for recording a set of still images.
more on PhotograPhy
Auto Bracket
The camera records two or three copies of an image
with variations in exposure, white balance or color.
Option Description
OFF*
Auto bracket function is off.
AE-BKT
The camera records three copies of a photograph in the
specified variation of exposure value.
WB-BKT
The camera records three copies
of each photograph: one with a
“warm,” reddish cast, a second
at the white balance currently
selected in the shooting menu
(page 86), and a third with a “cool,”
blueish cast. Choose when you
find it difficult to select the correct
white balance.
Display after shooting
CL-BKT
Record photographs in both black-and-white and color or in
black-and-white, color, and tinted monochrome (page 77).
* The icon is displayed on the DIRECT screen only.
The current selection is shown by
an icon in the picture display.
4:3 N
more on PhotograPhy
Notes
• Bracketing is not available when an option other than Off is
selected for Continuous Mode. White balance bracketing is not
available when shooting monochrome photographs.
• White balance bracketing and color bracketing are not available
when RAW is selected for Picture Quality/Size (page 61).
• The flash turns off automatically when bracketing is in effect.
• Auto white balance is used in place of Multi-P AUTO when AEBKT is selected.
AE-BKT:Exposure Bracketing
To specify variations for exposure value:
1
Select AE-BKT.
Highlight AE-BKT and then press Fn2.
2
Specify the exposure compensation value.
Move the cursor using Fn
or Fn2, press + or – to specify
the compensation value, and
then press C/D.
3
Return to shooting mode.
CPress C/D, or press Fn and then press
/D.
Notes
• If the same exposure compensation value is set, only one image
will be displayed for the same value.
• The step value of the compensation can be set with Exposure/
Flash Comp. Step in the setup tab (page 140).
more on PhotograPhy
CL-BKT:Color Bracketing
The number and type of photographs recorded when
CL-BKT is selected for Auto Bracket depends on the
option selected for CL-BKT Black & White (TE) in the
setup tab (page 146):
• Off: The camera records two
copies of each photograph, one
in black and white and a second
in color.
• On: The camera records three
copies of each photograph, one
in black and white, a second in
color, and a third using the tint
selected for B&W (TE) in the
Image Settings menu (page 71).
B&W (TE) copy
Tip:Contrast,Sharpness, and Color Depth
The contrast, sharpness, and vividness of the images in the
bracketing sequence are determined by the options selected
in the Image Settings menu (page 71). The black-and-white
copy is recorded at the settings most recently selected for Black
& White, the tinted monochrome copy at the settings most
recently selected for B&W (TE), and the color copy at the setting
currently selected for Image Settings (if Black & White or B&W
(TE) is selected, the color copy will be recorded at a setting of
Standard).
more on PhotograPhy
Flash Exposure Compensation
Adjust flash amount between
–2.0 to +2.0 in steps of 1/2 or
1/3 EV. Selecting Flash Exposure
Compensation in the shooting
menu displays the slider shown at
right; press + or – to choose a flash
exposure compensation value and press C/D.
Flash exposure compensation is
displayed in the picture display
except when the flash is off.
4:3 N
Notes
• See page 28 for information on using the flash.
• The step value of the compensation can be set with Exposure/
Flash Comp. Step in the setup tab (page 140).
Caution
Flash exposure compensation may have no effect outside the
range of the flash. See the documentation provided with the
camera unit for details on the range of flash.9
more on PhotograPhy
Manual Flash Amount
Choose amount of light produced by the flash in manual
flash mode (page 28). Flash amount is expressed as a
fraction of full power (all values are approximate):
FULL 1/1.4 1/2 1/2.8 1/4 1/5.6 1/8 1/11 1/16 1/22 1/32 1/64
Flash level is displayed in the
picture display in manual flash
mode.
4:3 N
Note
Flash exposure compensation is not available in manual flash
mode.
Caution
Do not direct the flash at a person operating a motor vehicle or
use the flash close to the subject’s eyes. Particular care should be
observed when photographing infants.
Flash Synchro Settings
Choose how the flash synchronizes with the shutter.
• 1st Curtain: The flash fires at the beginning of the
exposure. Recommended in most situations.
• 2nd Curtain: The flash fires at the end of the exposure.
This option produces trails of light behind moving light
sources.0
more on PhotograPhy
Noise Reduction
Choose Weak or Strong to reduce noise (random
variations in brightness and color) in photographs taken
at high ISO sensitivities. The minimum ISO sensitivity
at which noise reduction applies can be selected using
Noise Reduction ISO.
is displayed when noise
reduction is on.
4:3 N
Notes
• When RAW is selected for Picture Quality/Size (page 61), noise
reduction applies only to the JPEG copy, not to the DNG file.
• The time needed to record photographs varies with the option
selected for Noise Reduction.
Noise Reduction ISO
Select the minimum ISO sensitivity to apply noise
reduction function to when Weak or Strong is selected
for Noise Reduction. Choose from All (noise reduction
applies at all ISO sensitivities), Over ISO 201, Over ISO
401, Over ISO 801, Over ISO1601, and ISO3200.
more on PhotograPhy
Distortion Correction
Set Distortion Correction to On to shoot by
automatically correcting the distortion of the image.
is displayed when distortion
correction is on.
4:3 N
Cautions
• Even if Distortion Correction is set to On, the correction is not
applied depending on the type of camera unit or when it is
not necessary depending on the zoom position. However, the
distortion correction symbol will appear in playback mode for
the images without the correction applied.
• The distortion correction function is not available for DNG files,
JPEG copies for raw data, MP files, and movies.
• When Distortion Correction is set to On, the angle of view will
change.
• The corrected image will not be displayed in the picture display
even if Distortion Correction is set to On.
Auto Macro
With Auto Macro set to On, the camera automatically
switches to the macro mode when focusing on a subject
close to the lens even if the camera is not in macro
mode.
N is displayed when the camera switches to macro
mode.2
more on PhotograPhy
Custom Self-Timer
To set the number of photographs to take and the
interval of shooting for the custom setting of the selftimer option, select Custom Self-Timer in the shooting
menu and follow the steps below:
1 Choose the number of photographs to take and
the interval of shooting.
Press Fn or Fn2 to highlight the numbers, and press
+ or – to change. Press C/D to return to
shooting mode.
2
Start shooting.
Press the shutter-release button. The specified
number of photographs will be taken automatically
at the selected interval.
Press C/D to cancel the self-timer before
finishing shooting the specified number of
photographs.
more on PhotograPhy
Interval Shooting
To take photographs automatically at intervals of from
five seconds to one hour, select Interval Shooting in the
shooting menu and follow the steps below:
1 Choose an interval.
Press Fn and Fn2 to highlight
hours, minutes, or seconds
and press + and – to change.
Press C/D to return to
shooting mode.
Interval is displayed in the
picture display.
4:3 N
2
Start shooting.
Press the shutter-release button. Photographs will
be taken automatically at the selected interval.
3
End shooting.
Press C/D to end shooting.
Cautions
• The interval timer is not available in 4 mode.
• The interval resets to zero when the camera is turned off.
• If the time needed to record photographs is longer than the
selected interval, the next photograph will not be taken until
recording is complete.
• The external flash unit will not fire in interval shooting mode.
Use the built-in flash instead.
more on PhotograPhy
Notes
• Use a fully-charged battery and be sure that sufficient space
remains in internal memory or on the memory card. Interval
timer photography ends automatically when the internal
memory or memory card becomes full.
• Photographs can be taken at any time by pressing the shutterrelease button.
• If Continuous or M-Cont Plus is selected for Continuous
Mode, continuous shooting turns off automatically.
Date Imprint
The camera imprints the shooting date on a picture.
Select an option from Date (YY/MM/DD) and Date and
Time (YY/MM/DD hh:mm).
DATE is displayed when date
imprint is on.
4:3 N
Notes
• Date imprint is not available when the clock is not set. Set the
clock (pages 20, 149) before using date imprint.
• The date cannot be imprinted on movies.
• When RAW is selected for Picture Quality/Size, the date is
imprinted only on the JPEG copy, not the DNG file.
• The date is permanently imprinted on the image and cannot be
removed.
more on PhotograPhy
Exposure Compensation
Exposure compensation may be required in the
following situations:
• Very bright backlighting: Subjects that are very strongly
backlit may be underexposed. Try increasing exposure
compensation.
• The frame is dominated by very bright objects: The subject
may be underexposed. Try increasing exposure
compensation.
• The frame is mostly dark (for example, a spotlit subject on
a darkened stage): The subject may be overexposed.
Try reducing exposure compensation.
1Display the exposure compensation slider.
Highlight Exposure
Compensation in the
shooting menu, and press Fn2
to display the slider shown at
right.
2Adjust exposure compensation.
Press + or – to adjust an exposure compensation
value. Press the shutter-release button to take a
picture or press C/D to return to shooting
mode.
At settings other than 0.0,
exposure compensation is
displayed in the picture display.
4:3 N
more on PhotograPhy
Caution
Exposure compensation is not available in mode M.
Note
The step value of the compensation can be set with the
Exposure/Flash Comp. Step option in the setup tab (page 140).
White Balance
At the default setting of Multi-P AUTO, the camera
automatically adjusts white balance so that a white
subject will appear white regardless of the color of the
light source. It may however be necessary to match
white balance to the light source under mixed lighting
or when photographing a subject that is a solid color.
Option Description
Auto* The camera adjusts white balance automatically.
Multi-P AUTO
The camera adjusts white balance to account for
differences in lighting in separate areas of the frame (in
continuous mode, this option is equivalent to Auto).
Outdoors Use when shooting in daylight under clear skies.
Cloudy Use when shooting in daylight under cloudy skies.
Incandescent
Lamp
Use with incandescent lighting.
Fluorescent
Lamp
Use with fluorescent lighting.
Manual
Settings
Measure white balance manually (page 88).
Detail Make fine adjustments to white balance (page 88).
* The icon is displayed on the DIRECT screen only.
more on PhotograPhy
At settings other than Auto, the
current selection is shown by an
icon in the picture display.
4:3 N
Cautions
• Auto white balance may not produce the desired results in
scenes without white objects. This can be corrected by adding a
white object to the scene before shooting.
• Options other than Auto may not produce the desired results
when the flash is used. Select Auto when using the flash.
1Display white balance options.
Highlight White Balance in shooting menu, and
press Fn2 to display options.
2
Select an option.
Press + or – to select an option.
Press the shutter-release button to take a picture
or press the ADJ. lever or C/D to return to
shooting mode.
Note
Options for White balance can be displayed by pressing the ADJ.
lever (page 134).
more on PhotograPhy
Manual:MeasuringWhite Balance
To measure a value for white balance:
1
Select Manual Settings.
Highlight Manual Settings
in the white balance menu.
2Measure white balance.
Frame a blank piece of paper
or other white object so that
it fills the frame and press the
DISP. button. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the desired
effect is achieved.
3
Return to shooting mode.
Press C/D to return to shooting mode.
Note
Selecting an option other than Manual Settings resets manual
white balance.
Detail:Making Fine AdjustmentstoWhite Balance
To make fine adjustments to white balance:
1
Select Detail.
Highlight Detail in the
white balance menu and
press the DISP. button.9
more on PhotograPhy
2 Choose a setting.
Press + or – to choose a white
balance. Press C/D
when settings are complete.
3
Return to shooting mode.
Press C/D to return to shooting mode.
Note
Selecting an option other than Detail resets detail white balance.
White Balance Compensation
Compensate for color casts by modifying white
balance on the green-magenta or blue-amber axis. The
modifications apply to the option currently selected
for white balance and to all options selected while the
modifications are in effect.
Selecting White Balance
Compensation in the shooting
menu (page 58) displays the
controls shown at right. Choose
white balance compensation
using the directional pad (page
37). Press the DISP. button to reset
white balance compensation to
a neutral value. Press C/D
to save changes and exit, or press
the DISP. button twice to cancel.
Blue
Green
Magenta
Amber
Amount90
more on PhotograPhy
White balance compensation is
shown in the picture display.
4:3 N
Notes
• White balance compensation can be
assigned to the ADJ. lever (page 134).
CTo reset, highlight Reset and press
/D.
• White balance compensation can also
be assigned to the Fn buttons (page
136).
• When the mode dial is rotated to 4, white balance
compensation is only available in movie mode.
• The White Balance Compensation option in the playback
menu (page 109) does not use the same values as the shooting
menu option.
ISO Setting
Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light. Higher values can
be used for faster shutter speeds when the subject is
poorly lit, preventing blur.
• Auto: The camera automatically adjusts sensitivity
according to brightness, the distance to the subject,
the options selected for macro mode, and picture
quality and size.
• Auto-Hi (high sensitivity auto): The camera
automatically adjusts sensitivity according to shooting
conditions. Comparing to the Auto setting, higher
sensitivities can be selected for the subject poorly lit.
The maximum sensitivity can be selected with ISO
Auto-High Settings in the setup tab (page 140).9
more on PhotograPhy
• ISO (value): The camera shoots with the selected ISO
value. Available ISO values differ depending on the
camera unit. See the documentation provided with the
camera unit for details.
The current sensitivity is shown
in the picture display (if Auto or
Auto-Hi is selected, the sensitivity
selected by the camera is shown
when the shutter-release button
is pressed halfway).
2.5 ISO 200
1
Select an ISO sensitivity option.
Press + or – to select an option.
2
Shoot or return to the shooting mode.
Press the shutter-release button to take a picture, or
press C/D to return to shooting mode.
Notes
• Options for ISO setting can be displayed by pressing the ADJ.
lever (page 134).
• The sensitivity when using the flash and the range of available
sensitivities differ depending on the camera unit. See the
documentation of the camera unit for details.
• “Noise” (random variations in brightness and color) may appear
in photographs taken at high sensitivities.
Restore Defaults
To restore default shooting menu settings (page 59),
rotate the mode dial to 5 and select Restore Defaults
in the shooting menu. A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight Yes and press C/D to restore
default values and exit to shooting mode.92
more on PhotograPhy
Auto Aperture Shift
When On is selected, the camera will automatically
adjust aperture to prevent overexposure in the aperture
priority mode.
Note
Auto aperture shift is available only in the aperture priority mode.
Switch Shooting Mode
When the mode dial is rotated
to a MY mode (page 57), you can
use this option to switch between
5, P, A, S, and M modes without
rotating the mode dial to a
new setting. This option is only
available in MY modes, however, it is not available if a
scene mode is assigned to MY mode.
Camera Shake Correction
Select Camera Shake Correction to On to prevent blur
caused by camera shake.
E is displayed when camera shake correction is on.9
more on PhotograPhy
Cautions
• This function is not available depending on the camera unit.
• The camera shake correction function is not available in movie
mode, continuous mode, or when the shutter speed is set to 1
or more seconds in manual exposure mode. If the function is set
on in continuous mode or when the shutter speed is set to 1 or
more seconds in manual exposure mode, E changes to F,
and in the movie mode, E disappears.
• The camera shake correction function cannot prevent the blur
caused by the movement of the subject (caused by wind, etc.).
• Effects of the camera shake correction function differ
depending on the surroundings.
Note
J appears in the picture display when camera shake is likely
to occur.Playback Functions
9
Playback Functions
This section describes how to view movies and MP files.
Viewing Movies
Follow the steps below to view movies.
1
Press the 6 button.
Press the 6 button to display pictures in the
picture display.
2Display the movie.
Press +, –, Fn, and Fn2 (page
34) to scroll through pictures
until the first frame of the
movie is displayed. Movies are
indicated by a 3 icon.
3
Start playback.
Press the ADJ. lever to start playback. Progress
is shown in the playback display. The following
operations can be performed:
To Press Description
Advance/
rewind
z/Z
Hold the z button to fast forward, and the
Z button to rewind. If movie is paused, press
the z or Z button to advance or rewind
one frame; keep the button pressed for slow
advance or rewind.
Pause/
resume
ADJ.
Press the ADJ. lever to pause; press again to
resume.
Adjust
volume
+/– Press + to increase volume, – to decrease.
2010Playback Functions
9
Viewing MP Files
When you shoot images with M-Cont Plus, the images
are recorded as one MP file. Follow the steps below to
view MP files.
Note
Images shot in normal continuous mode can be played back in
the same way as normal still images.
1
Press the 6 button.
2Display the MP file.
The MP file is displayed with the S symbol.
The display changes as follows.
2010/03/01 14:09 ISO 200
F 3.3
EV +1.0
1/55
Display for step 2
• Press the DISP. button to change between
“Normal” and “No Display”.
• The images cannot be enlarged even if
the z button is pressed. The images are
displayed in thumbnail view.
• The other operations are the same as those
for normal still images.
z
ADJ. lever
Z
2010/03/01 14:09 F 3.3
6/6
1 55
Thumbnail view
• The MP file images are displayed in
thumbnail view.
• Use the directional pad (page 37) to select
a frame.
z • The DISP. button is disabled.
ADJ. lever
Z
100-0001 6 6
2010/01/01 02:33 ISO 200 EV +1.0
F 3.3 1/55
Single frame view
• Single frame selected on the thumbnail
view is displayed.
• Press the z button to enlarge the image.
ADJ. leverPlayback Functions
9
2010/01/01 02:33
Stop
ISO 200 EV +1.0
F 3.3 1/55
100-0001 2 6
Slide Show
• Images are displayed automatically in the
order they were consecutively shot, starting
with the displayed frame.
The operations during slide show are shown below.
Pause/Playback Press the ADJ. lever.
Fast Forward Press and hold z during playback.
Rewind Press and hold Z during playback.
Slow Playback Press and hold z during pause.
Slow Rewind Press and hold Z during pause.
Next Frame Press z during pause.
Previous Frame Press Z during pause.
First Frame Press the ADJ. lever to the left during pause.
Last Frame Press the ADJ. lever to the right during pause.
Cautions
• The DPOF, Trim, Resize, Skew Correction (playback mode),
Level Compensation, and White Balance Compensation
functions are not available for MP files.
• Flag Function Setting and Protect cannot be set for individual
frames in an MP file. If Flag Function Setting or Protect is set
when the thumbnail view or single image view is displayed, the
setting will be applied to the MP file instead of an individual
frame.
• Individual frame of an MP file cannot be deleted.Playback Functions
9
Exporting MP Files
Follow the steps below to extract specific frames from
an MP file and save each frame as an individual still
image.
Notes
• The extracted image is saved in the same size as the original.
• The original files will be retained after extraction.
1
Press the 6 button.
2Display the MP file you want to export.
The MP file is displayed with
the S symbol.
To export multiple frames,
you can also press the z
button to display thumbnail
view, and then go to step 3.
2010/03/01 14:09 ISO 200
F 3.3
EV +1.0
1/55
3
Press C/D.
The playback menu appears.
4
Press + or – to select Export
Still Images, and then press
Fn2.Playback Functions
9
Selecting OneFrame
5
Press + or – to select 1 Frame.
Press Fn or Fn2 to select the
frame.
6
Press C/D.
SpecifyingMultipleFramesSeparately
5
Press C+ or – to select Sel Mult, and then press
/D.
If thumbnail view was
displayed in step 2 on page
97, skip step 5.
6
Press + or – to select
Sel. CIndiv., and then press
/D.
7
Select the frame, and then press C/D.
Press the ADJ. lever to switch to the display for
specifying a range of frames. See step 7 and beyond
on page 99.
8
Repeat step 7 to select all the frames.
CTo deselect a frame, highlight the frame and press
/D.
9
Press the N button.
10
Select Yes, and then press C/D.Playback Functions
99
Specifying a Range ofMultipleFrames
5
Press C+ or – to select Sel Mult, and then press
/D.
If thumbnail view was
displayed in step 2 on page
97, skip step 5.
6
Press + or – to select
Sel. CRange, and then press
/D.
7
Select the starting point for the range of frames
you want to specify, and press C/D.
If you make a mistake when selecting the starting
point for the range of frames, press the DISP. button
to return to the screen for selecting the starting
point.
Press the ADJ. lever to switch to the display for
specifying frames separately. See step 7 and beyond
on page 98.
8
Select the ending point for
the range of frames you
Cwant to specify, and press
/D.
Export Still Images
Start Execute
9
Repeat steps 7 and 8 to specify all ranges.
10
Press the N button.
11
Select Yes, and then press C/D.Playback Functions
00
Selecting AllFrames
5
Press + or – to select
CAll Frames, and press
/D.
6
Select CYes, and then press
/D.0
Playback menu
Playback Menu
This section details the options in the playback menu
and describes how to view pictures on a TV.
Playback Menu
Press the 6 button in shooting mode and follow the
steps below.
1Display the playback menu.
Press C/D.
2
Select a menu item.
Press + or – to scroll through the menu and press Fn2
to display options for the highlighted item.
Note
The items on the next page can be displayed by pressing
– while pressing the DIRECT button.
The playback menu contains the following options:
Option Page
Flag Function Setting 102
Flag Function Display 103
Resize 104
Trim 105
Level Compensation 106
White Balance Compensation 109
Skew Correction 110
Option Page
Slide Show 111
Protect 112
Copy to Card from Internal Memory 115
DPOF 115
Export Still Images 97
Recover File 11702
Playback menu
Note
The menus for camera setup can be accessed from the playback
menu (page 126).
Flag Function Setting
Register the frequently viewed image files to Flag
Function Setting (up to 20 files) to recall the images
easily by selecting Flag Function Display at a later time.
Setting/Canceling OneFile at a Time
CTo set or cancel one file at a time, play the picture back and press
/D. Highlight Flag Function Setting in the playback
menu and press Fn2 button. Highlight Set or Cancel, and then
press C/D.
Notes
• When a file is set, the symbol appears on the screen.
• If 20 files have already been set, no more files can be set. Cancel
some files and set desired files.
Setting/CancelingMultiple files at a Time
Follow the steps below to set or cancel multiple files at
a time.
1Display the thumbnail view.
Press the z button in playback mode.
2
Select a picture.
Highlight a picture and press C/D.
3
Select Flag Function Setting and then press Fn2.
Selected pictures are marked with the icon.0
Playback menu
4
Select additional photographs.
Press Fn or Fn2 to highlight additional photographs
and press C/D. Repeat this procedure to set
or cancel all the desired files. To cancel the selected
photographs, press C/D when the file is
selected.
Cautions
• If the name of the file set to Flag Function Setting is changed
using a computer, Flag Function Setting is canceled for the
file.
• When the contents of the internal memory are copied to an SD
memory card, Flag Function Setting that have been set for the
files in the internal memory is canceled.
• When a file in an SD memory card is set to Flag Function
Setting, [CLIPINFO] folder and CLIP.CLI file are created on the
SD memory card. If these are deleted, Flag Function Setting is
canceled for the corresponding files.
• If the name of a file is changed using a computer, Flag
Function Setting may not be able to be set to the files.
• Only images taken using this camera body can be set to Flag
Function Setting.
Flag Function Display
To display the images set to Flag Function Setting,
select Flag Function Display in the playback menu.
Notes
• The file set to Flag Function Setting with the smallest file
number is displayed.
• Pressing the shutter - release button or the 6 button switches
to shooting mode.0
Playback menu
• If no files are set to Flag Function Setting, a message appears
and the display returns to the playback menu.
• If multiple files are set to Flag Function Setting, pressing the
N button displays the image with the smallest file number.
• When a file set to Flag Function Setting is displayed in the
full frame, pressing the +, –, Fn or Fn2 buttons switches to the
previous or next image.
Resize
To create a small copy of a photograph, select Resize in
the playback menu (page 101) and choose a size. The
photographs taken in L, M, M or M size (page 61) can
be copied in M or VGA size, and the photographs taken
in M can be copied in VGA. Movies and RAW-quality
photographs cannot be resized.
Notes
• The images are copied in the aspect ratio of 4 : 3. If the aspect
ratio of original photograph is 16 : 9, 3 : 2, or 1 : 1, the left and
right, or the upper and lower parts of images are trimmed and
displayed with black border on the screen.
• See page 61 for information on choosing the size of
photographs during shooting.0
Playback menu
Trim
Follow the steps below to trim a still image and then
save it as a separate file.
1Display a photograph.
Display the photograph to be copied in playback
mode.
2
Select Trim.
Press C/D to display the playback menu,
highlight Trim, and press Fn2. To cancel trimming,
press the DISP. button.
3
Trim the photograph.
Set the size of the trimming frame with the z or
Z button, and the position of the trimming frame
with the directional pad (page C 37), and then press
/D.
Cautions
• Only images taken using this camera body can be trimmed.
• Movies and MP files cannot be trimmed.
• For RAW images (page 61), trimming function applies only to
the JPEG copy.
• Images can be trimmed repeatedly, however, the quality of the
image will be degraded each time by recompression.
Notes
• If an image is trimmed, the compression rate changes to Fine.
For images in other sizes, the compression rate will be the same
as the original’s.
• The available settings for the trimming frame size differ
depending on the original image size. Each time you press the
z button, the trimming frame decreases in size by one level, at
the maximum of 13 levels.0
Playback menu
• The trimmed image size differs depending on the image’s
original size and the trimming level (the size of trimming frame).
Level Compensation
Create copies that have been processed to adjust
brightness and contrast. Correct brightness and contrast
automatically or make manual adjustments using a
histogram.
Auto: AutomaticLevelCompensation
1Display a photograph.
Display the photograph to be copied in playback
mode.
2
Select Level Compensation.
Press C/D to display
the playback menu, highlight
Level Compensation, and
press Fn2.
3
Select Auto.
Highlight Auto and press
Fn2. If the camera is able to
create a copy, a preview will
be displayed with the original
image displayed at upper left,
the corrected copy at right. If
the camera cannot create a copy, an error message
will be displayed and the camera will exit to the
playback menu.0
Playback menu
4 Copy the image.
Press C/D. To exit without creating a copy,
press the DISP. button. A message will be displayed
while the camera copies the photograph.
Manual:ManualLevelCompensation
Display the photograph to be copied and select Manual
for Level Compensation in the playback menu to
display a preview as described on the preceding page,
then follow the steps below.
1
Select the black point, white point, or mid-point.
The manual preview contains
a histogram showing
how pixels of different
brightnesses are distributed
in the image, with dark pixels
(shadows) on the left and
bright pixels (highlights) on
the right. Press the ADJ. lever
in to cycle through the black
point, mid-point, and white point and press Fn
or Fn2 to position the selected point for enhanced
brightness and contrast as described on the
following page. For help, press the N button; press
the button again to return to the preview display.
2 Copy the image.
Press C/D. To exit without creating a copy,
press the DISP. button. A message will be displayed
while the camera copies the photograph.
From left to right:
black point, midpoint, white point0
Playback menu
Tip:Choosing the Black Point,White Point, andMid-Point
• Adjusting brightness: To make the
image brighter, move the mid-point
to the left. Moving the mid-point to
the right makes the image darker.
• Correcting exposure: If the image is
overexposed, move the black point
to the right until it lines up with the
darkest pixel in the histogram (see
right). If the image is underexposed,
move the white point to the left until
it lines up with the brightest pixel.
You can then move the mid-point left
or right to adjust brightness.
Correcting overexposure
• Increasing contrast: To increase contrast,
align the black point and white point
with the darkest and brightest pixels
as shown at right. You can then move
the mid-point left or right to adjust
brightness.
Cautions
• Level compensation is available only with still images taken
using this camera body. It is not available with movies or
pictures taken using M-Cont Plus. The desired results may not
be achieved with monochrome images.
• Level compensation can be applied multiple times, however,
the quality of the image will be degraded each time by
recompression.09
Playback menu
White Balance Compensation
Create copies with modified white balance.
1Display a photograph.
Display the photograph to be copied in playback
mode.
2
Select White Balance Compensation.
Press C/D to
display the playback menu,
highlight White Balance
Compensation, and press
Fn2.
3Adjust white balance.
Choose white balance
compensation using the
directional pad (page 37).
Press the DISP. button to reset
white balance compensation
to a neutral value.
4
Press C/D.
Press C/D to copy the image (to exit without
creating a copy, press DISP. twice). A message will be
displayed while the camera copies the photograph.0
Playback menu
Cautions
• White balance compensation is available only with still images
taken using this camera body. It is not available with movies or
pictures taken using M-Cont Plus. The desired results may not
be achieved with monochrome images.
• White balance compensation can be applied multiple times,
however, the quality of the image will be degraded each time
by recompression.
Skew Correction
Create copies that have been processed to reduce the
effects of perspective on rectangular objects, such as
message boards or business cards.
1Display a photograph.
Display the photograph to be copied in playback
mode.
2
Select Skew Correction.
Press C/D to display
the playback menu, highlight
Skew Correction, and press
Fn2. If the camera is able to
detect an object that can be
used to correct perspective,
a message will be displayed with the object shown
by an yellow frame. The camera can detect up to
five objects; to select a different object, press Fn2,
or press + to exit without correcting perspective. If
the camera is unable to detect a suitable subject, an
error message will be displayed.
Playback menu
3
Press C/D.
A message will be displayed while the camera
copies the photograph. Copying takes from about 2
to 46 seconds, depending on image size.
Caution
Skew correction is available only with still images taken using
this camera body. It is not available with movies or pictures taken
using M-Cont Plus. For RAW images (page 61), skew correction
applies only to the JPEG copy.
Notes
• The copy is the same size as the original. More time is needed to
create a copy for larger image sizes:
Size Time (approx.) Size Time (approx.)
L 24sec. 3M 8sec.
M 18sec. 1M 5sec.
5M 12sec. VGA 2sec.
To reduce the time required, create a small copy of the original
using Resize (page 104) and perform skew correction on the
copy.
• The time required for skew correction differs depending on the
camera unit.
• Skew correction can also be performed during shooting (page
56).
Slide Show
Selecting this option starts an automated slide show.
Pictures are displayed at three second intervals in the
recorded order. When a movie is displayed, movie
playback begins automatically.
The slide show repeats until stopped; press any button
to end the slide show.2
Playback menu
Protect
Protect pictures from accidental
deletion. Protected files are
indicated by the icon shown at
right.
4:3 N
Caution
Formatting erases all files, including protected files.
Protecting Individual Pictures
To protect or remove protection
from individual files, play the
picture back, select Protect in
the playback menu, and press Fn2
to display the options shown at
right (if the desired image is not
displayed, press Fn or Fn2 to view
other pictures). Highlight 1 File and press C/D.
Playback menu
Changing the ProtectStatus ofMultipleFiles
Follow the steps below to change the protect status of
multiple selected files.
1
Select Protect in the playback menu, and press
Fn2.
In multi-frame playback,
proceed to step 2. In singleframe playback, the options
shown at right will be
displayed. Highlight Sel Mult
and press C/D.
2
Select Sel. Indiv. or Sel. Range.
Select Protect in the
playback menu, and press Fn2
to display the options shown
at right. To select images
one at a time, highlight Sel.
Indiv., press C/D, and
proceed to step 3. To select images by specifying
ranges highlight Sel. Range, press C/D, and
proceed to step 3.1.
3
Select a photograph.
Use the directional pad
(page 37) to highlight a
Cphotograph, and press
/D. Protected
pictures are marked with a
icon. To remove protection
from a photograph, highlight it and press C/
D again.
4:3 N 4:3 N
Playback menu
Tip:Selecting Ranges
To switch from Sel. Indiv. to Sel. Range, press the ADJ. lever
and follow the steps below:
3.1 Use the directional pad to
highlight the first image of the
range, and press C/D
to select. The selected image
is marked with an icon. To
deselect the image, press the
DISP. button.
4:3 N
3.2 Use the directional pad to
highlight the last image, and
press C/D to select.
The selected images will be
marked with a icon.
4:3 N
Repeat steps 3.1–3.2 to select additional ranges, or press the
ADJ. lever to select or deselect individual photographs as
described in step 3.
4
Press the N button.
A message will be displayed while the camera
protects the selected files. The camera will then
return to normal playback.
Protecting or Removing Protection fromAllFiles
To protect all files, select Protect
and press Fn2. Highlight Select All
and press C/D. To remove
protection from all files, highlight
Cancel All and press C/D.
Playback menu
Copy to Card from Internal Memory
To copy all files from internal memory to a memory card,
insert the memory card in the camera body and select
Copy to Card from Internal Memory in the playback
menu. A message will be displayed while copying is
in progress; the camera will return to playback when
copying is complete.
Notes
• If the space available on the memory card is insufficient to copy
all the files in internal memory, a message will be displayed. To
copy only those files that will fit in the space available, highlight
Yes and press C/D; to exit without copying any files,
select No.
• Files cannot be copied to internal memory from a memory card.
DPOF
To request professional prints of the photographs on
a memory card, first use this option to create a digital
“print order” listing the photographs you wish to print
and the number of prints, and then take the memory card
to a digital print service center that supports the DPOF
standard.
Note
If a RAW file is selected for printing, only the JPEG copy will be
printed.
Tip: DPOF
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) is a standard used to specify
the photographs to be printed and the number of prints.
Photographs selected for printing are marked with a DPOF print
indicator (page 9).
Playback menu
Selecting Individual Photographsfor Printing
To add a photograph to or
remove it from the print order,
play the picture back, select
DPOF in the playback menu, and
press Fn2 to display the options
shown at right (if the desired
image is not displayed, press Fn or Fn2 to view other
pictures). Highlight 1 File and press C/D.
Selecting All Photographsfor Printing
To select all photographs for
printing, select DPOF, press
Fn2, highlight Select All, and
press C/D. To remove
all photographs from the print
order, highlight Cancel All and
press C/D.
SelectingMultiple Photographsfor Printing
To select multiple photographs for printing:
1
Select DPOF.
Press C/D in multiframe playback to display the
playback menu. Highlight
DPOF and press Fn2.
Playback menu
2
Select photographs and choose the number of
prints.
Press Fn or Fn2 to highlight additional photographs
and + or – to choose the number of prints. To
remove a photograph from the print order, press
– until zero is displayed.
3
Press C/D.
A message will be displayed while the camera
creates the print order. The camera will then return
to multi-frame playback.
Recover File
To restore all the deleted files, select Recover File in
playback menu, and then press Fn2. The confirmation
message appears. Select Yes and then press C/D.
Note
If there are no files to be restored, a message appears.
Cautions
The files cannot be restored after performing any of the following
operations.
• Turning the camera off
• Switching from playback mode to shooting mode
• Using DPOF, Resize, Copy to Card from Internal Memory,
Skew Correction, Level Compensation, White Balance
Compensation or Trim function.
• Deleting files with DPOF settings
• Initializing Internal memory or SD memory card
• Setting or canceling files for Flag Function Setting
• Exporting MP files using Export Still Images
Playback menu
Viewing Pictures on TV
To view pictures on a TV, connect the camera body using
the supplied A/V cable.
1
Turn the camera body off.
Be sure the power is off before connecting or
disconnecting the A/V cable.
2 Connect the A/V cable to the TV.
Insert the white plug into the
audio input connector, the
yellow plug into the video
input connector. Be sure the
plugs are securely connected.
Do not use force.
Video input (yellow)
Audio input (white)
3 Connect the camera body.
Open the connector cover and
plug the cable into the A/V
cable connector. Do not use
force.
4
Tune the television to the
video channel.
Select video input. See the television manual for
details.
5
Turn the camera body on.
Press the 6 button for about a second to turn the
camera body on in playback mode. The camera
body’s picture display and speaker will turn off, and
photographs and movies will be played back on the
TV.9
Playback menu
Caution
Do not use force or tug the A/V cable when handling the camera
body with the A/V cable connected.
Notes
• The camera body can be connected to the video input
connector on a video recorder, and pictures can be recorded to
video or DVD.
• The camera body can be connected to TVs that support
HDMI using an HDMI mini cable (sold separately). See the
documentation provided with TVs for details.
• If connecting or disconnecting the HDMI mini cable, the display
switches to single-frame view. When the menu is displayed,
it will not switch to single-frame view even if connecting or
disconnecting the HDMI mini cable.
• When connecting the camera body to a TV using an HDMI mini
cable, the operational sounds turn off.
• The camera body supports the following video standards:
NTSC (used in North America, the Caribbean, parts of Latin
America, and some East Asian countries) and PAL (used in the
United Kingdom and much of Europe, Australia, New Zealand,
and parts of Asia and Africa). SECAM is not supported. Where
possible, it is set to the standard used in your country or
region before shipment; before connecting the camera body
to a device that uses a different video standard, choose the
appropriate video mode (page 149).20
Printing PhotograPhs
Printing Photographs
The camera body can be connected to a printer via
the supplied USB cable, and photographs can be
printed directly from the camera body without using a
computer.
Caution
Movies cannot be printed. If a RAW file is selected for printing,
only the JPEG copy will be printed.
Note
The camera body conforms to PictBridge, a standard widely
used for direct printing, and direct printing is consequently
only available with PictBridge-compliant printers. See the
documentation provided with your printer for information on
whether it supports PictBridge.
Connecting the Camera Body
Connect the power to the printer using the supplied
USB cable.
1
Turn the camera body off.
Be sure that the power is off before connecting or
disconnecting the USB cable.
2 Connect the USB cable to the printer.
Connect the USB cable to the printer and turn the
printer on.2
Printing PhotograPhs
3 Connect the camera body.
Open the connector cover
and plug the cable into the
USB cable connector.
Press the ADJ. lever. The
camera body will turn on and
the message shown at right
will be displayed; press the
ADJ. lever again immediately.
Note
If you do not press the ADJ. lever while the above message
is displayed, it may in some cases be replaced after two
seconds by a message stating that the camera body is
connecting to a computer. Turn the camera body off and
press the ADJ. lever again.
The message will be replaced by the PictBridge
playback display (if the PictBridge playback
display does not appear, the camera body is still
establishing a connection to the printer).
Caution
Do not use force when connecting the USB cable or when
handling the camera body with the cable connected.22
Printing PhotograPhs
Printing
Photographs can be printed one at a time or multiple
photographs can be selected for printing. If a memory
card is inserted, the pictures will be printed from the
memory card; otherwise pictures will be printed from
internal memory.
Caution
Do not disconnect the USB cable while printing is in progress.
Note
If an error is displayed during printing, check the printer and take
the appropriate action.
Printing Photographs One at a Time
To print a selected photograph:
1
Select a Photograph.
Press Fn or Fn2 until the
desired Photograph is shown
in the PictBridge playback
display and press the ADJ.
lever. The menu shown
at right will be displayed;
highlight 1 File and press C/D.
Tip: Printing OneCopy of All Photographs
To print one copy of all Photographs, press the ADJ. lever to
display the options shown above and select All Files.
Cancel
1 File
All Files Execute
Cancel
1 File
All Files Execute2
Printing PhotograPhs
2Adjust printer settings.
The menu shown at right
will be displayed; highlight
an item and press Fn2 to
view the options available,
or choose Printer Select to
use the default setting for
the current printer (the options available vary with
the type of printer; items not supported by the
connected printer cannot be selected). Press + or
– to highlight an option and press C/D to
select and return to the direct print menu.
Item Description
Paper Size Choose the paper size.
Paper Type Choose the paper type.
Layout Choose the number of pictures per page.
Date Print
Include the time and date of recording. See pages
20 and 149 for information on selecting the order
in which the time and date are displayed. If the
picture was taken using Date Imprint (page 84),
only the imprinted date will be printed.
File Name Print Include the file name.
Optimize Image Choose whether the printer optimizes photo data.
Print Size Choose the print size.
Print Quality Choose the print quality.
Report Print
*
Print a report.
Printing Quantity Choose the number of copies.
Toner Saving
*
Use less toner during printing.
1-Side/2-Sides
*
Print on one or both sides of the paper.
* Ricoh printers only. Visit http://www.ricoh.com/ for details.2
Printing PhotograPhs
Note
To select the highlighted option
as the default for the current
printer when the camera body is
connected, press the ADJ. lever.
The menu shown at right will be
Cdisplayed; highlight Set and press
/D. Select Cancel to exit without changing the
default setting.
3
Start printing.
To start printing, press C/D when the direct
print menu shown in step 2 is displayed. A message
is displayed during printing; to exit before printing
is complete, press the DISP. button. The PictBridge
playback display will appear when printing is
complete.2
Printing PhotograPhs
Printing Multiple Photographs
To print multiple photographs:
1
Press the Z button.
Photographs will be
displayed in multi-frame
playback.
2
Select a picture.
CHighlight a picture and press
/D.
3 Choose the number of prints.
Press + or – to choose the
number of prints. Selected
pictures are marked with
a icon; to deselect a
photograph, press – until
zero is display.
4
Select additional Photographs.
Press Fn or Fn2 to highlight additional photographs
and press + or – to choose the number of prints.
5Adjust printer settings.
Press C/D to display the direct print menu.
Adjust settings as described on page 123.
6
Start printing.
To start printing, press C/D when the direct
print menu is displayed. A message is displayed
during printing; to exit before printing is complete,
press the DISP. button. The PictBridge playback
display will appear when printing is complete.
4:3 N 2
camera settings
Camera Settings
The menus for modifying the camera settings can be
accessed from the shooting and playback menus (pages
58 and 101).
1Display the menus.
Press C/D to display the menu for the
current mode on page 58 (in scene mode, a MODE
tab will be displayed).
2
Select a tab.
Press Fn to highlight the tab
for the current menu and
press + or – to highlight the
key custom options tab (page
127) or the setup tab (page
128). Press Fn2 to place the
cursor in the selected tab.
1
2
1Key custom options
tab
2Setup tab
3
Select a menu item.
Press + or – to highlight a
menu item and press Fn2
to display options for the
highlighted item.
4
Select an option.
CPress + or – to highlight an option and press
/D to select and exit (the procedure may
differ for some items; see the page for the item).2
camera settings
The key custom options tab contains the following
options.
Option Default Page
Reg. My Settings — 129
Recall My Settings — 131
Edit My Settings — 132
My Settings for Fn
Settings
Off 133
My Settings WB Comp. Off 133
ADJ Lever Setting White Balance 134
ADJ Lever Setting 2 ISO 134
ADJ Lever Setting Quality 134
ADJ Lever Setting ImageSettings 134
Option Default Page
ADJ Shutter
Confirmation
Off 135
Set Fn Button AF/MF 136
Set Fn2 Button ManualFlash 136
+/– Button Settings ExposureComp. 137
Playback Mode Dial
Options
Setting1 138
M Mode Dial Options Setting1 138
One Press M Mode AprtrPriority 1382
camera settings
The setup tab contains the following options:
Option Default Page
Format [Card] — 139
Format [Internal
Memory]
— 139
LCD Brightness — 139
DIRECT Screen
Transparency
Normal 140
Exposure/Flash Comp.
Step
1/3EV 140
ISO Auto-High Settings AUTO 400 140
AF Auxiliary Light On 140
Sleep Mode 5?minutes 141
Auto Power Off 5?minutes 141
Playback Screen LCD 141
LCD Auto Dim On 142
LCD Confirmation Time 0.5?seconds 142
Operation Sounds All 142
Volume Settings
(medium)
142
One Press Zoom Ratio 9.8?× 143
Auto Rotate On 143
Minimum Shooting
Distance
Show 144
Option Default Page
Level Setting Display 144
Grid Guide Display
Options
144
Fn Button Display On 145
Show My Setting Name Off 145
Shooting Info. Display
Frame
Off 145
CL-BKT Black & White
(TE)
On 146
Color Space Set sRGB 146
Digital Zoom Image Normal 147
Store Menu Cursor
Position
Off 147
Card Sequence No. On 148
Date Settings — 149
Language/L (Varies
*
) 149
Video Out Mode (Varies
*
) 149
HDMI Output AUTO 149
Start Settings Readout Body 150
* Varies with countryor region ofpurchase.
Cautions
• The options displayed in the key custom options tab and
setup tab may differ depending on whether the camera unit is
attached to the camera body.
• The options displayed in the key custom options tab and setup
tab may differ depending on the camera unit.29
camera settings
Key Custom Options
Reg. My Settings
Settings saved using Reg. My Settings can be
recalled by rotating the mode dial to MY, MY2, or MY,
allowing you to easily create and recall up to six sets of
frequently-used shooting settings.
1Adjust settings.
Set the camera to the desired settings. The following is
some of the settings that can be saved in MY settings:
•4Camera settings: Shooting mode (5, P, A, S, M, or
mode), zoom position (in 4 mode),
aperture (in A and M modes), shutter speed (in S
and M modes), manual focus, macro, flash, selftimer and display modes.
• Shooting menu options: All options except Interval
Shooting, Auto Aperture Shift, and Switch
Shooting Mode. White balance compensation can
be assigned if My Settings WB Comp. is on (page
133).
• Setup options: Set Fn Button/Set Fn2 Button (if
My Settings for Fn Settings is on; see page 133),
+/– Button Settings, ISO Auto-High Settings,
Exposure/Flash Comp. Step, Minimum Shooting
Distance, Level Setting, Grid Guide Display
Options, Shooting Info. Display Frame, CL-BKT
Black & White (TE), and Digital Zoom Image.
Note
The settings that can be saved in MY settings differ depending
on the camera unit. See the documentation provided with the
camera unit for details.0
camera settings
2
Select Reg My Settings.
Highlight Reg. My Settings in
the key custom options tab,
and press Fn2.
3
Save settings.
To assign the settings to MY,
MY2, or MY on the mode dial,
highlight MY1, MY2, or MY3,
and press C/D (to exit
without saving settings, press
the DISP. button).
To save the settings to a “box”
to be recalled and assigned
to the mode dial at a later
date (page 131), select My
Settings Box and press Fn2.
Highlight the desired box
and press C/D.
Unnamed boxes will be
named using the current
date. If the box has already
been assigned a name, the
dialog shown at right will be
displayed. Select Yes to use
the current name, No to use
a name based on the current
date.
camera settings
Recall My Settings
Copy settings from a “box” to MY, MY2, or MY.
Select Recall My Settings in the key custom options tab,
press Fn2, and follow the steps below.
1
Select a destination.
Highlight the destination
for the stored settings (MY1,
MY2, or MY3) and press Fn2.
2
Select the source.
Highlight the settings that
will be assigned to the
selected position on the
mode dial and press C/
D.
To exit without assigning settings to the mode dial,
press the DISP. button.
Caution
If Edit My Settings is used to edit boxes that are currently
assigned to the mode dial, the changes will be reflected when
the mode dial is rotated to the position assigned to the box.
Changes to settings assigned directly to MY, MY2, or MY are not
however reflected in the boxes currently assigned to the mode
dial, and if the boxes are subsequently changed, these changes
will not be reflected in the settings assigned to MY, MY2, or MY.2
camera settings
Edit My Settings
Edit and rename settings saved with Reg. My Settings.
Select Edit My Settings in the key custom options tab,
press Fn2, and follow the steps below.
1
Select a setting.
To edit the settings assigned
to MY, MY2, or MY on the
mode dial, highlight MY1,
MY2, or MY3 and press Fn2.
To edit “box” settings, select
My Settings Box and press
Fn2. Highlight the desired box
and press Fn2.
2
Edit settings.
Press + or – to highlight items
and press Fn2 to edit (see the
section for each item in this
manual for more information).
After editing each item, press
Fn to return to the settings
list, where you can edit
additional settings.
3
Save changes and exit.
Press C/D to save changes and exit (to exit
without saving changes, press the DISP. button).
camera settings
Tip: NamingMySettings
Select Name in step 2 to rename
the setting. The current name is
highlighted in the name area; to edit
the current name, press Fn or Fn2
to position the cursor in the name
area and press – to place the cursor
in the keyboard area (to delete the
current name, press – while the name
is highlighted). Highlight characters
using +, –, Fn, or Fn2, and press C/D to enter the
highlighted character at the current cursor position (to delete the
character at the current cursor position, select [Delete]). Press the
tbutton to switch between upper and lower case. Names can
be up to 32 characters long. Press the ADJ. lever to exit, or press
the DISP. button to exit without renaming the settings.
My Settings for Fn Settings
Select On to save the settings assigned to the Fn buttons
(page 136) to MY settings saved in Reg. My Settings.
My Settings WB Comp.
Select On to save the white balance compensation
setting (page 89) to MY settings saved in Reg. My
Settings.
Name area
Keyboard area Keyboard area
camera settings
ADJ Lever Setting
Assign up to four frequently-used options to the ADJ.
lever for quick access in 5, P, A, S, and M modes. At
default, the ADJ. lever can be used for white balance
(page 86), ISO setting (page 90), picture quality
(page 61), and image setting (page 71). The following
functions can also be assigned; white balance
compensation (page 89), focus (page 64), metering
(page 70), continuous (page 73), bracketing (page 75),
flash compensation (page 78), manual flash amount
(page 79), and exposure compensation (page 85).
In 4 mode, the ADJ. lever can be used to select
white balance and exposure compensation (exposure
compensation is not available for Movie mode).
camera settings
Using the ADJ.Lever
To select an option currently assigned to the ADJ. lever:
1Display options.
Press the ADJ. lever in shooting mode, and press the
lever to the left or right, or press Fn or Fn2 to view
the options assigned to the lever.
Setting 1 Setting 2
Setting 4 Setting 3
2
Select an option.
Press + or – to highlight an option, and press the ADJ.
lever or press C/D.
Tip
Press and hold the ADJ. lever to page rapidly through the available
options.
ADJ Shutter Confirmation
Select On to use the shutter-release button to select the
highlighted option in the ADJ. mode.
camera settings
Set Fn1/Fn2 Button
Choose the functions assigned
to the Fn and Fn2 buttons with
Set Fn1/Fn2 Button in the key
custom options tab.
The following is some of the functions that can be
assigned to the Fn and Fn2 buttons.
Option Description
AF/MF
Switch between multi AF or spot AF and manual focus
(page 64).*
1, 3
AF/Snap
Switch between multi AF or spot AF and snap focus (page
64).*
4
AE Lock Lock exposure.*
2, 5
JPEG>RAW*
10
If options other than RAW is selected for Picture Quality/
Size, pressing the Fn button selects a RAW option with the
same aspect ratio (page 61).*
5, 6
Color>B&W Select Black & White for Image Settings (page 71).*
7
Color>TE Select B&W (TE) for Image Settings (page 71).*
7
Exposure Comp. Display the exposure compensation slider (page 85).*
5
White Balance Display white balance options (page 86).
WB Correction
Display white balance compensation controls (page
89).*
9
ISO Display ISO sensitivity options (page 90).*
7
Quality Display picture quality/size options (page 61).
Focus Display focus options (page 64).*
4
Image Settings Display image setting options (page 71).*
7
Expo. Metering Display exposure metering options (page 70).*
7
Cont. Mode Display continuous shooting options (page 73).*
8
Auto Bracket Display bracketing options (page 75).*
8
Macro Target Position the focus target in macro mode (page 68).*
3
Flash Comp. Display the flash compensation slider (page 78).*
4, 5
camera settings
Option Description
Flash Amount Adjust manual flash output (page 79).*
8
*
1
If focus is locked in autofocus mode (page 64), selecting manual focus
sets the focus distance to the distance at which focus is locked.
*
2
Exposure cannot be locked in mode M. Pressing the Fn button in mode
M sets shutter speed and aperture to values close to those needed for
optimal exposure.
*
3
Not available when Portrait, Sports, Landscape or Nightscape is
selected in 4 mode.
*
4
Not available when Landscape is selected in 4 mode.
*
5
Not available when Movie is selected in 4 mode.
*
6
Not available when Skew Correction is selected in 4 mode.
*
7
Not available in 4 mode other than Skew Correction.
*
8
Not available in 4 mode.
*
9
Not available in 4 mode other than Movie.
*
10
The image sizes of the files switched to RAW differ depending on the
settings selected in Picture Quality/Size.
Settings in Picture Quality/Size Sizes in RAW Data
L (16:9), M (16:9), 5M, 3M, 1M, VGA RAW (16:9)
L (4:3), M (4:3) RAW (4:3)
L (3:2), M (3:2) RAW (3:2)
L (1:1), M (1:1) RAW (1:1)
By default, AF/MF is assigned to the Fn button and Flash
Amount to the Fn2 button.
+/– Button Settings
Choose the functions to assign to the + and – buttons.
Choose from Off, Flash Comp. (page 78), Flash Amount
(page 79), and Exposure Compensation (page 85).
camera settings
Playback Mode Dial Options/M Mode Dial Options
Choose the functions to assign to the ADJ. lever and updown dial for playback zoom and in mode M.
Playback Mode Dial Options M Mode Dial Options
Setting1 Setting2 Setting1 Setting2
ADJ.
lever
Next/previous
frame
Scroll left/right Shutter speed Aperture
Updown
dial
Zoom in/out
Scroll up/
down
Aperture Shutter speed
One Press M Mode
When exposure compensation is assigned to the + and
– buttons (page 137) or AE lock is assigned to the Fn
and Fn2 button (page 136), pressing the assigned button
in manual exposure mode sets shutter speed and/or
aperture to values close to those needed for optimal
exposure. Select a setting from the following options.
• Aprtr Priority: Aperture remains at the selected value;
shutter speed is adjusted for optimal exposure.
• Shttr Priority: Shutter speed remains at the selected
value; aperture is adjusted for optimal exposure.
• Program: Both aperture and shutter speed are
adjusted for optimal exposure.
Note
In manual exposure mode, exposure compensation cannot
be performed with the + and – buttons, nor can AE lock be
performed with the Fn buttons.9
camera settings
Setup
Format [Card]/Format [Internal Memory]
Select Format [Card] to format the memory card before
first use, after using it in another device, or if a card error
is displayed when the card is inserted in the camera
body. Select Format [Internal Memory] if a message is
displayed prompting you to format internal memory.
Cautions
• Formatting permanently deletes all data on the card or in
internal memory. Before formatting, copy any data you wish to
keep to a computer (page 151).
• Selecting Format [Card] when no memory card is inserted
displays an error message. Turn the power off and insert a
memory card.
Tip:Write Protection
To prevent memory cards from being formatted, slide the writeprotect switch to the “LOCK” position (page 16). Restore the
switch to its original position to resume normal operation.
LCD Brightness
Selecting this option displays
the control shown at right. Press
+ or – to adjust picture display
brightness, and press C/D
to return to the setup menu.
Press C/D again to exit to
shooting or playback mode.0
camera settings
Note
The brightness display shows the view through the lens
(shooting mode) or the most recently viewed picture (playback
mode; if no picture is available for playback, no image will be
shown in the brightness display).
DIRECT Screen Transparency
Choose the density of the background image displayed
on the DIRECT screen from Dark, Normal, Light, or
Image OFF.
Exposure/Flash Comp. Step
Choose the step value for the exposure compensation
and flash compensation. Choose from the value of
1/2EV or 1/3EV.
Note
In the shutter priority mode, step value is set to 1/3EV even if
1/2EV is selected for Exposure/Flash Comp. Step.
ISO Auto-High Settings
Choose the maximum sensitivity selected by the camera
when Auto-Hi is selected for ISO Setting in the shooting
menu (page 90). Choose from settings of ISO 200 (AUTO
200), 400 (AUTO 400), 800 (AUTO 800), 1600 (AUTO
1600) or 3200 (AUTO3200).
Note
Noise (random variations in brightness and color) may appear in
photographs taken at high sensitivities.
AF Auxiliary Light
If On is selected, the AF auxiliary light will light to assist
the focus operation when the subject is poorly lit.
camera settings
Sleep Mode
Choose the delay before the picture display enters
sleep mode. Choose from Off, 1 minute, 5 minutes or
30 minutes. Autofocus/flash lamp lights in sleep mode.
Press any button to cancel the sleep mode.
Cautions
• The camera body does not enter sleep mode when:
• Shooting, playback, key custom optins or setup menu is
displayed.
• The camera body is turned on by pressing the 6 button with
the power switch at OFF position.
• The lens of camera unit is not retracted in the sleep mode.
Auto Power Off
Choose the delay before the camera turns off
automatically to save power when no operations are
performed. Select from Off (the camera does not turn off
automatically), 1 minute, 5 minutes, and 30 minutes.
Note
When Sleep and Auto Power Off are set, Auto Power Off works
after the specified time for Sleep has elapsed.
Playback Screen
Choose the screen to display playback images from LCD
(picture display) or VF (viewfinder) for when the LCD
viewfinder (VF-2) is attached to the camera body.
When the viewfinder is not attached, the playback
images are displayed in the picture display regardless of
the setting for Playback Screen.2
camera settings
LCD Auto Dim
If On is selected, the picture display dims to save power
when the camera is not moved for approximately five
seconds in shooting mode. Move the camera or press any
button to return to the original picture display brightness.
LCD Confirmation Time
Choose how long photographs are displayed in the
picture display immediately after shooting. Select from
0.5, 1, 2, and 3seconds, Hold (photograph is displayed
until shutter-release button is pressed halfway and can
be viewed with playback zoom or deleted; see pages 38
and 39), and Off (photographs are not displayed in the
picture display after shooting).
Operation Sounds
Choose when the camera plays a sound.
Option Description
All
Sounds are played at startup, when the shutter is released,
when the camera focuses, and when an error occurs. If Sound
or Disp+Snd is selected for Level Setting (page 32), the camera
will also beep at regular intervals when the camera is level.
Level
Sound
If Sound or Disp+Snd is selected for Level Setting, the camera
will beep at regular intervals when the camera is level.
Shutter
Sounds
Sounds are played when the shutter is released or an error
occurs. If Sound or Disp+Snd is selected for Level Setting, the
camera will beep at regular intervals when the camera is level.
Volume Settings
Select the volume for the sounds described in
“Operation Sounds.” Choose from (off),
(low), (medium), and (high).
camera settings
One Press Zoom Ratio
Select the magnification at which pictures are displayed
when zoomed in using the C/D button or ADJ.
lever (page 38). Choose from 5.7×, 9.8×, and 16×.
Notes
• Maximum magnification ratio differs depending on the image
size (page 38).
• If the maximum magnification ratio of an image size is smaller
than the setting specified in One Press Zoom Ratio, the image
can be magnified at the maximum ratio for the image size
(page 38).
Auto Rotate
Select On to automatically display pictures in the correct
orientation during playback.
Caution
Movies, pictures taken using M-Cont Plus (page 73), and pictures
taken with the camera upside down or tilted sharply forward or
back are not rotated for display. Pictures are not rotated when
the camera unit is not attached to the camera body, during
slide shows, in multi-frame playback, or when displayed on a TV,
nor are they rotated when the camera is upside down or if the
camera is rotated during playback zoom or while skew correction
is in progress.
Note
During bracketing or when taking pictures using Continuous,
the camera only records the orientation for the first photograph
in each series. The remaining photographs will not be displayed
in the correct orientation if the camera was rotated during
shooting.
camera settings
Minimum Shooting Distance
Select Show to display the minimum shooting distance
in the picture display.
Level Setting
The camera uses a tilt indicator and sounds to let you
know whether the image is level during shooting.
Choose tilt indicator settings (page 32).
Grid Guide Display Options
Choose the type of framing grid available in shooting
mode (page 42).
Item Description
A three-by-three grid for “rule of thirds”
composition.
A four-by-four grid with diagonal lines running
from corner to corner makes it easy to find the
center of the subject. Use for architectural
photography or photographing products for
display.
A two-by-two grid with the center of the frame
left clear to make it easier to view the subject.
Use if your subject is in motion.
camera settings
Fn Button Display
Select On to display the options
currently assigned to the Fn
buttons when the camera is
turned on, shooting mode is
selected, or a new mode is
selected with the mode dial.
Show My Setting Name
Select On to display the name
of the settings assigned to the
current position on the mode dial
when the dial is rotated to MY,
MY2, or MY.
Shooting Info. Display Frame
Select On to display shooting
icons in a frame surrounding
the view through the lens (page
8), making it easier to frame
photographs in the picture
display. The frame is not displayed
in movie mode.
4:3 N
4:3 N
2010
4:3 N
camera settings
CL-BKT Black & White (TE)
Choose the number and type of copies created with
color bracketing (page 77). Select On to record three
copies of each shot (one in black and white, a second
in color, and a third using a monochrome tint), Off
to record two copies (one in black and white and the
second in color).
Note
Regardless of the selected setting, three copies of each
photograph will be recorded if B&W (TE) is selected for Image
Settings.
Color Space Setting
Choose the color space used to record photographs.
sRGB is widely used to reproduce digital images but
offers a smaller gamut of colors than AdobeRGB.
Caution
The Adobe RGB color space was developed by Adobe Systems,
Inc., and is compatible with the default color space used in
Adobe Photoshop and other image editing software. Note,
however, that colors will only be reproduced correctly in
software that supports the Adobe RGB color space. Also note
that specialized equipment is required to print the full range of
colors in the Adobe RGB gamut; when printed using consumer
household printers or digital photo print services, colors will
generally be less vivid than in photographs that use the sRGB
color space.
camera settings
Digital Zoom Image
Choose how the image taken using the digital zoom will
be saved.
• Normal: Normal digital zoom. It crops a portion of
an image and enlarges the portion back to the size
selected in Picture Quality/Size, resulting in lower
image quality.
• Auto Resize: It crops a portion of an image and save
the image in the cropped size. It keeps from decreasing
the image quality, however, the image size becomes
smaller. The sizes of cropped image differ depending
on the zoom ratio. See the documentation provided
with the camera unit.
Auto Resize zoom is available only when 4:3 for L is
selected for Picture Quality/Size (page 61).
The current picture size is
displayed in the picture display
when the camera is zoomed in.
4:3 N
Caution
Auto Resize has no effect when M-Cont Plus or Skew
Correction is selected in 4 mode, or when RAW is selected
for Picture Quality/Size.
Store Menu Cursor Position
If On is selected, the most-recently accessed item will be
highlighted when menus are displayed.
camera settings
Card Sequence No.
Choose how the camera names image files when saving
photographs to a memory card.
• On: File names consist of “R” followed by a seven-digit
number (e.g., “R0010001.jpg”), assigned in ascending
order from 0010001 to 9999999. When a new memory
card is inserted, file numbering continues from the last
number used.
• Off: File names consist of “RIMG” followed by a fourdigit number (e.g., “RIMG0001.jpg”), assigned in
ascending order from 0001 to 9999. When a new
memory card is inserted, file numbering is reset to
0001.
Notes
• This option applies only to memory cards. The names of
Photographs in internal memory consist of “RIMG” and a fourdigit number.
• Photographs copied to a computer using DL-10 (page 151) are
given new names consisting of “RIMG” and a four-digit number.
• Photographs taken with AdobeRGB selected for Color Space
Setting (page 146) are indicated by file names beginning with
an underscore (e.g., “_R010001.jpg” or “_RIMG001.jpg”).
Caution
When On is selected, no further photographs can be stored if the
memory card contains a folder numbered 999 and a file name
ending in 9999; when Off is selected, no further photographs
can be stored if the memory card contains a file numbered 9999.
To take additional Photographs, format the card after copying its
contents to a computer.9
camera settings
Date Settings
Set the camera clock (page 20).
Note
If you leave the battery in the camera body for at least two hours,
the battery can be removed for about a week without resetting
the clock.
Language/L
Choose the language in which camera messages and
menus are displayed.
Option Description Option Description
Japanese ??????? Russian
English English Simplified Chinese
Deutsch German Traditional Chinese
Français French Korean
Italiano Italian Thai
Español Spanish
Video Out Mode
When connecting the camera body to a TV or VCR
(page 118), choose a video out mode that matches the
standard used in the device. The camera body supports
NTSC and PAL; SECAM is not supported.
HDMI Output
Choose the resolution of image output using an HDMI
mini cable. Choose the setting from AUTO or Manual.
Note
Normally, select AUTO. If the resolution of image displayed on TV
is low with the Auto setting, select Manual. The image may be
improved.0
camera settings
Start Settings Readout
When the camera turns off, the settings are saved both
in camera body and camera unit.
Choose the destination to read out the settings from
Body or Camera Unit.
coPying Pictures to a comPuter
Copying Pictures to a Computer
This section describes how to copy pictures from
the camera body to your computer. Instructions for
Windows may be found below; those for the Macintosh
begin on page 162.
Note
The dialogs shown in this section may differ from those displayed
by your computer.
Windows
You can copy pictures to your computer by either of the
following methods:
• Install the supplied DL-10 software (page 153) and use
it to copy pictures as described on page 159.
• Copy pictures without using DL-10 or other image
copy software. (page 160).
Note
Detailed instructions may be found in the Software User Guide on
the supplied CD (page ix).2
coPying Pictures to a comPuter
System Requirements
Before using the supplied CD, check that your
computer meets the following requirements. See the
documentation provided with your computer for details.
OS
Windows 2000 Professional SP 4, Windows XP Home
Edition/Professional SP 3, Windows Vista SP 2
CPU
Windows 2000/Windows XP: Pentium® lll 500MHz or faster
Windows Vista: Pentium® lll 1GHz or faster
RAM
Windows 2000/Windows XP: 256MB or more
Windows Vista: 512MB or more
Free disk space A minimum of 160MB required for installation
Video 1024×768 pixels or more with 16-bit color or better
Miscellaneous
• Compatible CD-ROM drive
• Compatible USB port
Cautions
• 64-bit operating systems are not supported. Operating
systems that have been upgraded from an earlier version are
not supported, as USB may fail to function as expected. The
supplied software may not function as expected with systems
that have been patched or updated with Service Pack releases.
• Connect the camera body directly to a built-in USB port. USB
ports added via PCI-bus or other extension boards or cards are
not supported. The camera body may not function as expected
when connected via a USB hub or keyboard.
• More RAM may be required when handling movies and other
large files.
coPying Pictures to a comPuter
Supplied CD
Inserting the supplied CD in a
CD-ROM drive displays the dialog
shown at right.
• Installing the software: Install the
following software.
DL-10: Copy pictures to the
computer in a single operation.
Irodio Photo & Video Studio: View, manage, edit pictures on
the computer. For more information, see the Help menu in
Irodio Photo & Video Studio or visit the following website:
http://www.pixela.co.jp/oem/irodio/e/irodio_digitalphoto_
videostudio/
USB driver: Connect earlier Ricoh cameras to computers
running Windows 98, Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, or
Windows 2000. Not required for this product.
WIA driver: Connect earlier Ricoh cameras to computers
running Windows XP or Windows Vista. Not required for this
product.
• Browse User’s Manual (Software Version): View the Software
User Guide in pdf format (page ix). Acrobat Reader or
Adobe Reader is required; if necessary, install Adobe
Reader as described on page 156.
• Browse CD-ROM Content: View the contents of the CD,
which include Adobe Reader (page 156). To install
Irodio Photo & Video Studio without installing other
software, open the “Irodio Photo & Video Studio” folder
and double-click Irodio Photo & Video Studio.exe.
coPying Pictures to a comPuter
Installing the Software
Follow the steps on the next page to install the supplied
software. Illustrations are from Windows XP.
Cautions
• If the camera body is connected to the computer, disconnect
the camera body before beginning installation.
• Users of existing “Caplio” software should note that the “DC”
software supplied with the camera body replaces the following
items in the Caplio software package:
Caplio software DC software
RICOH Gate La DL-10
Caplio Viewer DU-10
*
Caplio Server SR-10
*
Caplio Setting ST-10
*
*Not used by this product.
If the above Caplio software is currently installed, you will be
prompted to uninstall it before installing the supplied DC
software. Follow the on-screen instructions. Installing the DC
software replaces Caplio Viewer, Caplio Server, and Caplio
Setting with the software listed above, which can be used in
the same way as the Caplio versions (note that those software
will not be installed if you uninstalled the Caplio software as
described on page 158 before installing the DC software). Note
that uninstalling the software for earlier Ricoh cameras may
reset user preferences for DL-10 or RICOH Gate La.
• Administrator privileges are required for installation.
• DL-10 is for use in a stand-alone environment and cannot be
run over a network.
coPying Pictures to a comPuter
1
Insert the supplied CD.
Turn the computer on and
insert the supplied CD in a
CD-ROM drive.
• Windows Vista: An Autorun
dialog will be displayed.
Click Run Autorun.exe to
display the installer dialog.
• Other versions of Windows: The installer dialog will be
displayed automatically.
2 Click Installing the software.
• Windows Vista: A “User Account Control” dialog will
be displayed. Click Allow to display a languageselection dialog.
• Other versions of Windows: A language-selection
dialog will be displayed.
3
Select a language and click OK.
The dialog shown at right will
be displayed. Click Next.
4
Select a destination.
The supplied software will be
installed to the folder shown
under Destination Folder.
Click Next.
coPying Pictures to a comPuter
5 Confirm the destination location and then click [Next].
The Irodio Photo & Video
Studio installer will start
(depending on your
computer, the splash screen
at right may be displayed for
some time before installation begins). Follow the onscreen instructions to install the supplied software.
6 Click Finish.
The dialog shown at right will
be displayed when installation
is complete. Click Finish.
7
Restart the computer.
A message will be displayed
prompting you to restart your
computer. Select Yes, I want to restart my computer
now and click Finish to restart the computer.
8Unblock DL-10.
A Windows security dialog will be displayed when
the computer restarts. Click Unblock for DL-10.
Note
See page 158 for information on uninstalling the software.
Installing Adobe Reader
Adobe Reader is required to view the Software User
Guide. If Adobe Reader is not already installed, it can be
installed from the supplied CD as described below.
Cautions
• Disconnect the camera body before beginning installation.
• Administrator privileges are required for installation.
coPying Pictures to a comPuter
1
Insert the supplied CD.
Turn the computer on and
insert the supplied CD in a
CD-ROM drive.
• Windows Vista: An Autorun
dialog will be displayed.
Click Run Autorun.exe to
display the installer dialog.
• Other versions of Windows: The installer dialog will be
displayed automatically.
2 Click Browse CD-ROM Content.
The contents of the CD will be displayed.
3
Install Adobe Reader.
Double-click the “Adobe Reader” folder and then
double-click the folder for the language of your
choice. Double-click the file beginning with
“AdbeRdr910” and follow the on-screen instructions.
If a “User Account Control” dialog is displayed, click
Continue.
Notes
• See the Adobe Reader Help menu for information on Adobe
Reader.
• Installation of Adobe Reader 9.1 requires MSI (Microsoft
Windows Installer) version 3.1 or later and either Microsoft
Internet Explorer 6.0 or later or Firefox 2.0 or later. Microsoft
Internet Explorer and Microsoft Windows Installer are available
via Microsoft Update.
coPying Pictures to a comPuter
Uninstalling the Software
Follow the steps below to uninstall DC software or Irodio
Photo & Video Studio.
Cautions
• Administrator privileges are required for uninstallation.
• Exit any applications that may be running before proceeding.
1 Open the “Add/Remove Programs” Control Panel.
Open the Windows “Start” menu and select Control
Panel (Windows XP or Windows Vista) or Settings >
Control Panel. Double-click Add/Remove
Programs.
2Uninstall the software.
Select the software you wish to uninstall (DC
Software or Irodio Photo & Video Studio) and click
Change/Remove. A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; click OK. If a message appears warning
that a shared file has been detected, select Don’t
display this message again and click Yes.
Close any open windows when the uninstall process
is complete. After uninstalling Irodio Photo & Video
Studio, restart the computer.9
coPying Pictures to a comPuter
Copying Pictures Using DL-10
After installing DC software, follow the steps below to
copy pictures to your computer.
1
Turn the camera body off.
2 Connect the supplied USB cable.
Connect the cable to the
computer USB port.
Cautions
• Do not use force when
connecting the cable or when
handling the camera body with
the cable connected.
• Do not move the camera body with the cable connected.
Connect the cable to the
camera body as shown. The
camera body will turn on, DL-
10 will start, and transfer will
begin automatically. Pictures
are copied to folders in the
“Digital Camera” folder in “My Documents” (if you were
previously using Caplio software, pictures will instead
be copied to folders in the “Caplio” folder). Pictures are
sorted into separate folders by date of recording; make
sure the camera clock is set to the correct date and time
before shooting.
3Disconnect the cable when transfer is complete.
See page 161 for more information.0
coPying Pictures to a comPuter
Note
If transfer does not begin automatically, try the following procedures.
Click Save in the DL-10 window.
Check that Saves automatically when connected to USB is
selected in the DL-10 “Option Settings” dialog.
Restart the computer and repeat the above steps.
Copying Pictures Without Using DL-10
If DL-10 is not installed, you can copy pictures to the
computer as described below. The illustrations in this
section are from Windows XP.
1
Turn the camera body off.
2 Connect the supplied USB cable.
Connect the cable to the computer USB port and
then to the camera body. The camera body will turn
on automatically.
3 Copy files from the camera body to the computer.
The camera body will
be listed as a removable
drive in “My Computer”
with pictures stored
in folders as shown at
right. If a memory card
is inserted in the camera
body, the drive will be
named as shown at right and the contents of the
memory card will be displayed. If no memory card
is inserted, the drive will be named “RICOHDCI” and
the contents of internal memory will be displayed.
Copy pictures to the desired location on your
computer.
coPying Pictures to a comPuter
Cautions
• Do not turn the power off or disconnect the USB cable until
copying is complete.
• Files in the destination folder with the same name as the pictures
being copied will be overwritten. If necessary, rename files before
copying begins.
• Do not use a computer to view or edit pictures on a memory
card. Pictures that have been viewed or modified on a
computer can no longer be displayed on the camera body.
Copy pictures to the computer for viewing and editing.
Disconnecting the Camera Body
Before disconnecting the camera
body from the computer, click the
“Safely Remove Hardware” or “Unplug or Eject Hardware”
icon in the taskbar (the illustration above shows the icon
for Windows XP) and select Safely Remove USB Mass
Storage Device or Stop USB Mass Storage Device from
the menu that appears. You can then disconnect the
USB cable.
Notes
• A warning may be displayed if the USB cable is disconnected
without first removing the camera body from the system as
described above. Be sure to remove the camera body from the
system before disconnecting the cable.
• Confirm that transfer is complete before removing the camera
body from the system and disconnecting the cable.2
coPying Pictures to a comPuter
Macintosh
The camera body can be used with Mac OS X versions
10.4–10.5.7.
Caution
The VM-1 software (page 164) and Software Users Guide (only on
computers with Acrobat installed) can be used with Macintosh
computers.
Copying Pictures to a Macintosh
1
Turn the camera body off.
2 Connect the supplied USB cable.
Connect the cable to the
computer USB port.
Cautions
• Do not use force when
connecting the cable or when
handling the camera body with
the cable connected.
• Do not move the camera body with the cable connected.
Connect the cable to the
camera body as shown. The
camera body will turn on
automatically.
coPying Pictures to a comPuter
3 Copy files from the camera body to the computer.
The camera body will
appear as a volume on
the desktop with pictures
stored in folders as shown
at right. If a memory
card is inserted in the
camera body, the drive
will be named as shown
at right and the contents of the memory card will
be displayed. If no memory card is inserted, the
drive will be named “RICOHDCI” and the contents of
internal memory will be displayed. Copy pictures to
the desired location on your computer.
Disconnecting the Camera Body
Before disconnecting the camera body from the
computer, drag the camera body volume into the Trash
or select the camera body volume and choose Eject
from the File menu. You can then disconnect the USB
cable.
Notes
• A warning may be displayed if the USB cable is disconnected
without first removing the camera body from the system as
described above. Be sure to remove the camera body from the
system before disconnecting the cable.
• Confirm that transfer is complete before removing the camera
body from the system and disconnecting the cable.
• Connecting the camera body to a Macintosh computer may
result in the creation of “FINDER.DAT” or “.DS_Store” files that will
be listed by the camera body as unmatched files. These files can
be deleted without risk.
coPying Pictures to a comPuter
Using the MP File Viewer
When you shoot images with M-Cont Plus, the images
are recorded as one MP file. By using the VM-1 MP file
viewer, you can play back MP files on your Macintosh
computer and export still images.
This section explains how to install and uninstall the
VM-1 software that is included on the supplied CDROM. For details on how to play back MP files on your
computer or export still images from MP files using the
MP file viewer, see the “Software User Guide” available
from the supplied CD-ROM.
SystemRequirementsfor Using theSuppliedMP fileviewer
The following environments are necessary for using the
supplied MP file viewer.
Please check your computer, or the computer’s user
manual.
Operating Systems Supported Mac OS X 10.4 to 10.5.7
Macintosh computer Apple Inc. Macintosh Series
Internal Memory
Mac OS X 10.4 256 MB or more
Mac OS X 10.5 512 MB or more
Hard Disk Available Memory 5 MB or more
CD-ROM Drive
A CD-ROM drive compatible with the
above-mentioned Macintosh computer
Note
VM-1 supports Japanese, English, French and Chinese (Simplified).
coPying Pictures to a comPuter
Installing VM-1
1
Insert the supplied CD.
Turn on the Macintosh computer and insert the
supplied CD in a CD-ROM drive.
2
Select the disk for installation.
Double-click the RICOH icon > VM-1 folder > VM-1
Installer.pkg icon. The Install VM-1 window will be
displayed; click Continue. When the window for
selecting the installation location appears, select
the disk for installation, and then click Continue.
3
Install VM-1.
Click Install and enter your name and password,
and then click OK. A message that the installation is
complete will be displayed; click Close.
To change the installation location, click Change
Install Location....
To upgrade VM-1, click Upgrade.
coPying Pictures to a comPuter
Uninstalling VM-1
Cautions
• If you have any other software applications running or data that
has not been saved, quit the other software applications and
save the data before uninstalling VM-1.
• If an error occurs during the uninstallation process, update your
Mac OS to the latest version.
1 Open the VM-1 utility folder.
Open the Applications folder > Utilities folder >
VM-1 Utility folder.
2Double-click the VM-1 Uninstaller icon.
The uninstall confirmation dialog will be displayed.
Click OK.
3
Enter your name and password, and then click OK.
A message that the uninstallation is complete will
be displayed; click OK.
technical notes
Technical Notes
Troubleshooting
Error Messages
If an error message is displayed, take the steps listed
below.
Message Solution Page
Insert card No memorycardis inserted. Insert card. 15
Setdate. Cameraclockis not set.Set cameraclock.
20,
149
File Number OverLimit Cameraisoutof file numbers. Insertanother card.
15,
148
UnmatchedFile
Camera cannot display file. Use computer to check file contents
anddelete file.
—
Insufficient memory.
Continue?
Space on memory card is insufficient to copy all files. Insert
another card.
15
Protected Fileisprotectedandcannotbedeleted. 112
CardIsWrite-Protected. Cardis writeprotected(locked). Unlockcard. 16
Print settings cannotbe
set for this file.
Fileisa movieorother filethat cannotbeselectedforprinting. —
Insufficient Memory/
Capacityshort
Insufficientmemorytostoreadditional files. Deleteexisting files
or increaseamountof memoryavailable.
39,
139
Maximumnumberof imagesselectedforprinting.Set numberof
prints forother images tozero.
125
Format internal
memory.
Internal memory is not correctly formatted. Format internal
memory.
139
Format card. Cardis not correctlyformatted.Format cardin camerabody. 139
CardError Format card. If messagepersists, cardis faulty;discontinueuse. 139
Writing Data Camerais savingdata.Waituntil saveis complete. —
NoFile No filesavailableforplayback. —
Cannot Record
Memoryis full. Useanother cardor removecardanduseinternal
memory.
15
technical notes
Camera Body-Related Problems
PowerSupply
Problem Cause Solution Page
Thecameradoes
not turn on.
Battery is exhausted or not
inserted.
Check that battery is correctly
inserted. Charge battery
(rechargeablebatteryonly).
12,14
Batteryis incompatible. Usesuppliedbattery. 13
Battery is not in correct
orientation.
Insert battery in correct
orientation.
14
Thecameraturns
off duringuse.
Camera has turned off
automaticallytosavepower.
Turn cameraon. 18
Batteryisexhausted.
Charge battery (rechargeable
batteryonly).
12
Batteryis incompatible. Usesuppliedbattery. 13
Thecameradoes
not turn off.
Camera malfunction. Removeandreinsertbattery. 14
Low battery
indicatordisplayed
or cameraturnsoff
when battery has
chargeremaining.
Batteryis incompatible. Usesuppliedbattery. 13
Batterycannotbe
charged.
Battery has reached end of
charginglife.
Replace with a new battery. 14
Batteryisquickly
exhausted.
Ambient temperatureis very high
orverylow.
— —
Poor lighting requires extensive
useof flash.
— —9
technical notes
Shooting
Problem Cause Solution Page
Nopicturetaken
when shutterreleasebutton is
pressed.
Batteryisexhausted.
Charge battery (rechargeable
batteryonly).
12
Power is off or not in shooting
mode.
Slide the power switch to ON to
turn camera on or press 6 to
select shooting mode.
18,34
Camerais in playback mode.
Press 6 to select shooting
mode.
34
Shutter-release button was not
fullypressed.
Press shutter-release button all
the waydown.
22
Memorycardis not formatted. Format card. 139
Memorycardis full. Insert new cardordelete files. 15,39
Memory card has reached end of
workinglife.
Insert new card. 15
Flash is charging.
Wait until flash lamp stops
blinking.
29
Memorycardis locked. Unlockcard. 16
Memorycardcontactsaredirty. Clean with soft,drycloth. —
Cannotview
Photographsafter
shooting.
Displaytimeis tooshort. Chooselongerdisplaytime. 142
Picturedisplayis
blank.
Power is off or picture display is
dark.
Turn camera on or adjust picture
displaybrightness.
18,
139
Picturedisplayisoff.
Press the VF/LCD button to turn
picturedisplayon.
42
Display has been switched to the
LCD viewfinder.
Press the VF/LCD button toswitch
tothepicturedisplay.
42
A/V cableis connected. Disconnect cable. 118
Cameraunableto
focus in autofocus
mode.
Lens isdirty. Clean with soft,drycloth. –
Subject is notat centerof frame. Usefocus lock. 25
Subject not suitableforautofocus. Usefocus lockor manual focus. 25,65
Subject is tooclose.
Use macro mode or move away
from subject.
270
technical notes
Problem Cause Solution Page
Picturesare
blurred.
J
Camera movedduringshooting.
Use a tripod. Use the camera
shake correction function. Press
elbowsagainstyourbody.
21,92
Lighting is poor and shutter
speedsareslow.
Use the flash. Choose higher ISO
setting. Use the camera shake
correction function.
29,
90,
92
Flash does not fire
or will not charge.
Flash is not raised.
Press OPEN/fbutton (flash open/
setting) toopen the flash.
29
Flash cover is not fullyopen. Do notobstruct flash cover. —
The flash cannot be used in the
followingcases:
• When exposure bracket, white
balance bracket, or color
bracket is set
• In continuous mode
• In movie mode
Changecamerasettings.
54,73
75
Flash isoff.
Open the flash. Press OPEN/f
button (flash open/setting) to
cancel flash off.
29
Batteryisexhausted.
Charge battery (rechargeable
batteryonly).
12
Flash does not
illuminatesubject.
The distance to the subject
exceeds the flash range.
Movecloser tosubject. –
Subject isdark. Increase flash output. 78
Flash output is toolow. Increase flash output. 78
Flash cover is not fullyopen. Do notobstruct flash cover. —
Photographsare
toobright.
Flash output is too high.
Reduce flash output, move away
from subject,orusedifferent light
source.
78
Photograph isoverexposed.
Use exposure compensation or
choosefaster shutter speed.
50,85
Picturedisplayis toobright. Adjustpicturedisplaybrightness. 139
Photographsare
toodark.
Flash is off and subject is poorly
lit.
Press OPEN/fbutton (flash open/
setting) toopen the flash.
29
Photograph isunderexposed.
Use exposure compensation or
chooseslower shutter speed.
50,85
Picturedisplayis toodark. Adjustpicturedisplaybrightness. 139
technical notes
Problem Cause Solution Page
Colorsare
unnatural.
Camera unable to adjust white
balance for shooting conditions
usingauto whitebalance.
Include white object in
Photograph or choose another
whitebalanceoption.
86
Photograph
information not
displayed.
Indicatorsare hidden. Press DISP. todisplayindicators. 42
Picturedisplay
brightnesschanges
duringfocusing.
Ambient lightingispoorordiffers
from thatusedforautofocus.
This is normal and does not
indicatea malfunction.
—
Vertical streaks
(“smear”)appear
in photographs.
Subject isbright.
This is normal and does not
indicatea malfunction.
—
Tilt indicator is not
displayed.
Off or Sound selected for Level
Setting.
Choose Displayor Disp + Snd. 32
Indicatorsare hidden. Press DISP. todisplayindicators. 42
Thecameraisupsidedown.
Hold the camera in the correct
orientation.
21
Photograph is not
level,although tilt
indicator showed
that camera was
level.
Camera was moving when
Photograph was taken.
Do not takepictures from moving
objects.
—
Subject is not level. Checkthesubject. —
Playback/Deletion
Problem Cause Solution Page
Cannotplay
picturesback.
Camerais not in playback mode. Press6. 19,34
A/V cableincorrectlyconnected. Reconnect A/V cable. 118
Video modedoes not match TV. Chooseanothervideo mode. 149
The playback screen displays in
theLCD viewfinder.
Set Playback Screen toLCD. 1412
technical notes
Problem Cause Solution Page
Cannotview
pictureson
memorycard.
Memory card empty or not
inserted. Insert card that has been
formatted in camera body and
contains pictures recorded with
camerabody.
15,
139
Card was not formattedin camera
body.
Pictures were created with other
device.
Memorycardcontactsaredirty. Clean with soft,drycloth. —
Card malfunction.
Insert another card. If you can
view pictureson secondcard, first
card has probably malfunctioned;
discontinueuse.
—
Picturedisplay has
turnedoff.
Batteryisexhausted.
Charge battery (rechargeable
batteryonly).
12
Camera has turned off
automaticallytosavepower.
Turn cameraon. 18
Cannotdelete file.
Fileisprotected. Removeprotection. 112
Memorycardis locked.
Cannot format Unlock memorycard. 16
card.
Cardis locked.
Miscellaneous
Problem Cause Solution Page
Cannot insert
memorycard.
Cardis not in correctorientation. Insert in correctorientation. 15
Cameracontrols
have noeffect.
Batteryisexhausted.
Charge battery (rechargeable
batteryonly).
12
Camera malfunction.
Turn camera off and then on
again.
18
Removeandreinsertbattery. 14
Dateis incorrect. Clockis not set correctly.
Set clock to correct date and
time.
20,149
Date hasbeen
reset.
Battery has notbeen insertedfor
abouta week.
Set clock to correct date and
time.
20,149
Cameradoes
not turn off
automatically.
Off is selected for Auto Power
Off.
Chooseanother setting. 141
Cameradoes not
beep.
Beepis muted.
Choose another option for
Volume Settings.
32,142
technical notes
Problem Cause Solution Page
Picturesare not
displayedon TV.
Video modedoes not match TV. Chooseanothervideo mode. 149
A/V cable not connected. Connect A/V cable. 118
TV is not tuned to VIDEO IN
channel.
TuneTV to VIDEO IN channel. —
Computer-Related Problems
For more information, refer to the Software User Guide,
available in pdf format on the supplied CD.
Security Alerts(Windows Vista/WindowsXP)
Consult the following if Windows XP Service Pack 3 or
Windows Vista Service Pack 2 displays a security alert
when the camera body is connected or DL-10 starts. The
illustrations in this section are from Windows XP.
If a security alert is displayed, confirm
that the program is from a reliable
source and click Unblock.
Caution
If you cannot identify the program and source, click Keep
Blocking to prevent your computer from being affected by virus
or malware.
technical notes
If you clicked Keep Blocking to block a Ricoh application, you can
remove the block in Windows Firewall.
1 Open the “Windows Firewall” Control Panel.
Open the “Start” menu and
select Control Panel, then
double-click Windows
Firewall (if Windows Firewall
is not listed, click Switch to
Classic View at the top left
corner of the Control Panel window).
2Allow the Ricoh application Internet access.
In the “Windows Firewall”
dialog, click the Exceptions
tab and check whether DL-10
is listed under “Programs and
Services.” If it is, place a check
in the check box next to
DL-10 and click OK. If it is not
listed, click Add Program…
to add DL-10 to the list of
exceptions.
If you clicked Ask Me Later to block DL-10, a security alert will
be displayed the next time the program starts. Click
Unblock to remove the block.
technical notes
Specifications
Flash
Mode
Auto(flash fires when lightingispooror subject isbacklit), red-eye,
on, slow sync, manual,off
Range(built-in
flash)
Seethedocumentation provided with thecameraunit.
Flash
compensation
±2.0EV in incrementsof1/2EV or1/3EV
Manual flash
amount
FULL,1/1.4,1/2,1/2.8,1/4,1/5.6,1/8,1/11,1/16,1/22,1/32,1/64
Picturedisplay 3.0? transparentLCD;approx.920,000pixels
Shooting mode
Auto,program shift,aperturepriority, shutterpriority, manual, scene,
“MySettings”
Picturequality Fine, Normal, RAW(DNG)?*
1
Storage SD/SDHC memorycard, internal memory(approx.86?MB)
File
size?*
2
(approx.)
5M FINE:approx.2287KB/frame
3M FINE:approx.1474KB/frame
1M FINE:approx.812KB/frame
VGA FINE:approx.197KB/frame
File
format
Photographs JPEG (Exif Ver.2.21)?*
3
, RAW(DNG)
Movies AVI?*
4
(OpenDML Motion JPEG compliant)
Compression JPEG baselinecompliant (photographsand movies)
Other shootingoptions
Continuous shooting(continuous, M-ContPlus); self-timer (shutter
releasedelayofapprox.10?sor2?s,or custom setting); interval timer
(intervalsof5?s to1 hour in incrementsof5?s)?*
5
; colorbracketing;
B&W(TE); color spaceselection; noisereduction; histogram display;
framinggrid;depth-of-fieldindicator; tilt indicator; hot shoe
Otherplaybackoptions
Autoimagerotation; multi-frameplayback;playbackzoom (upto
16?×); resize
Interface
USB 2.0(High-Speed) Mini-B connector; MassStorage?*
6
;audio
output1.0?Vp-p(75?O), HDMI mini cableconnector (TypeC)
Videosignal format NTSC,PAL
Power source DB-90rechargeablebattery(3.6?V)
Batterylife(basedon
CIPA standard)?*
7
Seethedocumentation provided with thecameraunit.
technical notes
Dimensions (W?×?H?×?D) 113.9?mm?×?70.2?mm?×?28.9?mm (excludingprojections)
Weight (approx.)
• Camerabody(excludingbattery, memorycard, neckstrap,and
connector cap):160?g
• Battery, neckstrap,andconnector cap:66?g
Tripodscrew hole 1/4-20UNC
Datestoragetime Approx.1 week
Operatingtemperature 0?°Cto40?°C
Operating humidity 85%or less
Storagetemperature –20?°Cto60?°C
*
1
A JPEG file is also recorded (the JPEG file may be a fine- or normalquality file with the dimensions as the RAW file or a VGA file). RAW files
use the standard DNG format promoted by Adobe Systems, Inc.
*
2
For details on RAW, L, M sizes, see the documentation provided with the
camera unit.
*
3
Compatible with the Design rule for Camera File system (DCF, a
JEITA standard) and DPOF. Full compatibility with other devices is not
guaranteed.
*
4
Audio: PCM 32 kHz, 16 bit monaural
*
5
Flash off.
*
6
Mass Storage is supported under Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows
Vista, and Mac OS X 10.4–10.5.7.
*
7
Measured according to CIPA standard. For reference only; actual
number of shots varies greatly according to how camera is used.
technical notes
Internal Memory/Memory Card Capacity
The approximate number of frames or length of movies
that can be stored in internal memory or on a memory
card at different settings varies depending on the type
of camera unit. See the documentation provided with
the camera unit.
Notes
• Each movie can be up to 90 minutes long (4GB in size).
• The maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single
burst is 999. If memory remains for more than 999 exposures,
“999” is shown in the display.
• Depending on the subject, the number of pictures that can be
taken may differ from the number of exposures remaining.
• Capacity varies with shooting conditions and the make of
memory card.
• Use a high-speed memory card when shooting for extended
periods.
technical notes
Optional Accessories
The GXR camera body can be used with the following
optional accessories:
Camera unit DB-90 rechargeable
battery
BJ-9 battery charger
CA- cable switch
A wired remote shutter release that
attaches to the USB connector of
the camera body.
VF-2 LCD viewfinder
An electrical viewfinder that
attaches to the hot shoe of the
camera body. This offers viewfinder
coverage of 100% and can be
adjusted up to 90° without any
parallax, and enables easy lowangle shooting.
GF- external flash
An external flash that is developed
for digital camera with TTL autoflash system.
ST- neck strap9
technical notes
SC-S soft case SC-L soft case
Notes
• Before using optional accessories, read the manual provided
with the product.
• For the latest information on optional accessories, visit the Ricoh
website (http://www.ricohpmmc.com/).0
technical notes
Camera System and Accessories
Attach to hot shoe
SC-55S/SC-55L soft
case
ST-3 neck strap
CA-1 cable switch
DB-90 rechargeable
battery (supplied)
BJ-9 battery
charger (supplied)
Attach to USB
connector
Camera unit
GF-1 flash unit
VF-2 LCD
viewfinder
Attach camera unit
technical notes
The GF-1 Flash Unit (Optional)
An optional GF-1 flash unit can be connected to the hot
shoe.
1 Close the flash cover (page 2).
2Attach the flash.
Turn the camera and the
GF-1 off and attach the
GF-1 to the hot shoe.
Hot shoe
3
Turn the flash and camera on.
4
Press the DIRECT button.
5
Select the optional flash mode item.
Move the cursor using
+, –, Fn, Fn2 or the ADJ.
lever (left and right) to
highlight the item.
6
Select a flash mode.
Rotate the up-down dial to select a flash mode.
Note
• The optional flash mode item is not displayed when the GF-1 is
turned off.
• Turn the GF-1 off to shoot without the flash.
• If the optional flash mode item is not displayed, turn the GF-1
and camera off and then remove and reattach flash.2
technical notes
OtherFlash Units
Use only flash units with one signal terminal, which must
be an X-contact with a positive voltage of no more than
20V. Use a flash that covers the angle of view of the lens.
1 Close the flash cover (page 2).
2Attach the flash.
Turn the camera and the optional flash unit off and
attach the flash to the hot shoe.
3
Set aperture manually.
Turn the camera on, select mode A or M, and choose
an aperture (pages 18, 48, 50).
4 Choose a manual ISO sensitivity setting.
Select an option other than Auto for ISO sensitivity
(page 90).
5
Turn the flash on.
Turn the flash on and set it to auto mode. Set
aperture and ISO sensitivity to the values selected
with the camera. Take a test shot and adjust flash
aperture and ISO settings as necessary.
Turn the optional flash unit off before removing it from
the camera.
Cautions
• If the external flash is on, it will fire with every shot regardless to
the flash mode selected with the camera. Turn the flash unit off
to shoot without the flash.
• Optional flash units are in principle for use at ranges that exceed
the range of the built-in flash. Using an optional flash unit at
shorter ranges may result in overexposure.
technical notes
Using the Product Abroad
Using BJ-9 BatteryCharger
This product is for use with currents of 100–240V and
50 or 60Hz. Before travelling, purchase a travel adapter
for connection to the type of outlets used at your
destination. Do not use these products with electrical
transformers, as this could damage the product.
Warranty
This product was manufactured for use in the country
of purchase, and the warranty is not valid in other
countries. Should the product fail or malfunction while
out of the country, the manufacturer assumes no
responsibility for servicing the product locally or bearing
any expenditure incurred thereby.
Television Playback
The supplied A/V cable can be used to connect this
product to televisions and monitors equipped with a
video input terminal. This product supports the NTSC
and PAL video formats; before connecting the product
to a video device, select the appropriate video output
mode.
Precautions for Use
• The warranty is not valid in other countries. Should the product
fail or malfunction while out of the country, the manufacturer
assumes no responsibility for servicing the product locally or
bearing any expenditure incurred thereby.
technical notes
• Do not drop this product or subject it to physical shocks. When
carrying the product, be careful that it does not strike other
objects. Particular care is required to protect the picture display.
• The flash may overheat if fired many times in succession. Do not
use the flash more than necessary. Do not use the flash in close
contact with your body or other objects. Failure to observe
these precautions could result in burns or fire.
• Using the flash unit in close proximity to your subject’s eyes
could cause temporary visual impairment. Particular care should
be observed when photographing infants. Do not direct the
flash at the operator of a motor vehicle.
• Battery may become hot with extended use. Wait for the battery
to cool before removing it from this product.
• The picture display may be difficult to read in direct sunlight.
• You may notice that picture display varies in brightness or
contains pixels that do not light or that are always lit. This is
common to all LCD monitors and does not indicate a malfunction.
• Do not apply force to the picture display.
• Abrupt changes in temperature may cause condensation,
resulting in visible condensation inside this product, or
malfunction. This can be avoided by placing this product in a
plastic bag to slow the temperature change, and removing it
only after the air in the bag has reached the same temperature
as its surroundings.
• To prevent damage to the product, do not insert objects into
the holes in the microphone and speaker coverings.
• Keep the terminals of the connector free of dust.
• Keep this product dry and avoid handling it with wet hands.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in product
malfunction or electric shock.
• Take a test shot to ensure that this product is functioning
properly before using it on important occasions such as travel
or weddings. We recommend that you keep this manual and
spare batteries at hand.
technical notes
Tip: Avoiding Condensation
Condensation is particularly likely to occur if you move to an
area with a sharply different temperature, if humidity is high, in a
cold room after the heater has come on, or where this product is
exposed to cold air from an air conditioner or other device.
Care and Storage
Caring forthis product
• Clean the picture display by wiping it with a soft cloth
dampened with a small amount of any monitor cleaner that
does not contain organic solvents.
• Clean this product thoroughly after using it at the beach or
handling cosmetics. Do not expose this product to volatile
substances such as thinner, benzene, or pesticides. Failure to
observe this precaution could result in damage to this product
or its finish.
• In the unlikely event of malfunction, visit a Ricoh Repair Center.
• This product contains high-voltage circuits. Do not disassemble.
• The picture display is easily scratched; avoid touching it with
hard objects.
Storage
• Do not store this product where it will be exposed to: extreme
heat or humidity; large changes in temperature or humidity;
dust, dirt, or sand; severe vibration; prolonged contact with
chemicals, including mothballs and other insect repellent,
or with vinyl or rubber products; strong magnetic fields (for
example, in the vicinity of a monitor, transformer, or magnet).
• Remove the battery if the product will be left unused for a long
period of time.
BeforeCleaning
Turn the power off and remove the battery.
technical notes
Warranty and Servicing
1. This product is backed by a limited warranty. During the warranty period mentioned in the Warranty
supplied with thisproduct,anydefectiveparts willberepairedfreeofcharge. In theeventofamalfunction,
contact thedealer from which youpurchasedthisproductor your nearest Ricoh RepairCenter.Please note
thatyou will notbereimbursedfor thecostofbringingthisproduct tothe Ricoh RepairCenter.
2. This warrantydoes not coveranydamageresultingfrom:
1 failuretofollow theinstructions in theinstruction manual;
2 repair, modification or overhaul not conductedby an authorizedservice center listedin the instruction
manual;
3 fire, naturaldisaster,actof God, lightning,abnormalvoltage,etc.;
4 improper storage(notedin the“Camera Body User Guide”), leakingofbatteryandother fluids, mold,or
otherwiseinsufficient careof thisproduct.
5 submergence in water (flooding), exposure to alcohol or other beverages, infiltration of sand or mud,
physical shock,droppingof thisproduct,orpressureon thisproduct,andotherunnatural causes.
3. After the warranty period has passed, you will be liable for all repair fees, including those incurred at an
authorizedservicecenter.
4.??You willbeliableforall repair fees,even within the warrantyperiod, if the warrantycardis notattachedor
if thedistributor’s nameor thepurchasedate havebeen changedorare not indicatedon thecard.
5.??Expenses for overhaul and thorough inspection by special request of the customer will be charged to the
customer, whetheror not theyareincurredduringthe warrantyperiod.
6.??This warrantyonlyapplies tothisproductand not totheaccessories, such as thecaseandstrap, nordoes it
applytothebatteryandother consumablesprovided.
7.??Anyconsequentialdamagesarisingfromfailureof thisproduct,such asexpensesincurredin takingpictures
or lossofexpectedprofit, will notbereimbursed whether theyoccurduringthe warrantyperiodor not.
8.??The warrantyisonlyvalidin thecountryin which thisproduct waspurchased.
* Theaboveprovisions refer torepairsofferedfreeof charge,anddo not limityour legal rights.
* Theintention of theaboveprovisions isalsodescribedin the warrantycardprovided with thisproduct.
9. Partsessential totheservicingof thisproduct (that is, components requiredto maintain thefunctionsand
qualityof theproduct) willbeavailableforaperiodof fiveyearsafter thisproduct isdiscontinued.
10.Please note that if this product is seriously damaged by flooding, submergence, infiltration of sand or
mud, violent shocksordropping, it may notbe repairable, andrestoration toitsoriginal condition maybe
impossible.
Notes
• Before sending this product in for repair, check the battery and read the
instruction manual again to ensure proper operation.
• Some repairs require a significant amount of time to complete.
• When sending this product to a service center, please include a note which
describes the defective part and the problem as precisely as possible.
• Remove all accessories not related to the problem before sending this product
to the service center.
• This warranty does not apply to data stored on memory cards or in internal
memory.
technical notes
NOTICES
USA FCC Part 15 Class B
The equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, then user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. (FCC 15.105B)
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. (FCC 15.21)
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used for
connection to a host computer in order to comply with FCC emission limits. (FCC
15.27)
COMPLIANCEINFORMATION STATEMENT
Product Name: CAMERA BODY
Model Number: GXR
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell NJ, 07006 Tel.: 1-800-225-1899
Noteto Usersin Canada
Note: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003
RemarqueConcernant les Utilisateurs au Canada
Avertissement: Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB-
003 du Canada.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS—SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
DANGER—TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW
THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Index
Symbols
5 (auto) mode................................. 4, 21
d (delete) button............................. 3, 39
O (DISP.) button............................. 3, 42
N (macro) button ............................ 3, 27
OPEN/f(flash) button..................... 3, 29
6 (playback) button......3, 19, 94, 101
t (Self-Timer).................................... 3, 31
8/z button........................ 3, 26, 36, 38
9/Z button....................... 3, 26, 36, 38
A
A (aperture priority) mode............ 4, 48
A/V cable ........................................... ii, 118
ADJ. lever...................................... 3, 5, 134
ADJ Shutter Confirmation............... 135
Adobe Reader...................................... 156
AF auxiliary light......................2, 31, 140
Alert......................................................... 173
Aperture......................................46, 48, 50
Aperture Shift.........................................92
Autofocus..........................................22, 64
Autofocus/flash lamp
.......................................3, 18, 22, 29, 141
Auto Power Off.................................... 141
Auto Rotate........................................... 143
B
Backlighting ............................................85
Battery.......................................................12
Battery/card cover..................... 3, 14, 15
Battery charger............................. 12, 183
Battery level.............................................10
Black & White ...................................71, 75
Blur..............................................................24
Bracketing................................................75
Brightness.............................44, 106, 139
C
Cable switch......................................... 178
Camera shake correction....................92
Caplio...................................................... 154
Card Sequence No. ............................ 148
CD..................................... ix, 153, 155, 157
CL-BKT Black & White (TE) ............... 146
Clock................................................. 20, 149
Close-up....................................................27
Color......................................71, 75, 86, 89
Color Space Setting........................... 146
Computer.............................................. 151
Connector cover...................................... 3
Connector for A/V cable........................ 3
Continuous Mode .................................73
Contrast........................................... 71, 106
Copy to Card from Internal Memory
................................................................ 115
D
Date Imprint............................................84
Defaults..................................59, 127, 128
Deleting Photographs.........................39
Depth of Field.........................................64
Digital zoom............................................26
Digital Zoom Image........................... 147
DIRECT button......................................3, 5
DL-10..............................................153, 159
DNG............................................................63
DPOF....................................................... 115
E
Edit My Settings.................................. 132
Error Messages.................................... 167
Exposure............................................50, 85
Exposure Metering................................70
F
Flash, optional ..................................... 181
Flash amount..........................................79
Flash compensation .......................... 136
Flash cover................................................. 29
Flash Exposure Compensation.........78
Flash mode ..............................................28
Flash Synchro Settings........................79
Fn1, Fn2 button...............................3, 136
Fn Button Display............................... 145
Focus..........................................................64
Focus Lock................................................25
Focus target.............................................66
Format [Card]....................................... 139
Format [Internal Memory]............... 139
Full Press Snap........................................69
G
Grid................................................... 42, 144
H
HDMI ..............................................119, 149
Highlights.................................................43
Histogram....................................... 44, 108
Hot shoe .................................. 2, 181, 182
I
Image Settings.......................................71
Interval Shooting...................................83
Irodio Photo & Video Studio........... 153
ISO Auto-High Settings.................... 140
ISO Setting...............................................90
J
JPEG............................................................63
K
Key custom options........................... 127
L
Language/L................................... 149
LCD Brightness.................................... 139
LCD Confirmation Time.................... 142
Level Compensation.......................... 106
Level Setting......................................... 144
M
M (manual exposure) mode ......... 4, 50
Macintosh.............................................. 162
Macro Mode ............................................27
Manual Focus..........................................65
Memory, internal ......................... 15, 139
CMemory card................................. 15, 139
/D button........3, 58, 101, 126
Metering...................................................66
Microphone............................................... 2
M Mode Dial Options........................ 138
Mode dial................................................2, 4
Monochrome ...................................71, 75
Movie mode ............................................54
Movie size.................................................63
Multi-frame playback...........................36
MY modes........................................... 4, 57
My Settings for Fn Settings............. 133
My Settings WB Comp. ..................... 133
N
Neck strap ......................................... ii, 179
Noise Reduction.....................................80
Noise Reduction ISO.............................80
NTSC...............................................149, 183
O
One Press M Mode ............................. 138
One Press Zoom Ratio ...................... 143
Operation Sounds.............................. 142
Optional accessories......................... 178
P
P(program shift) mode................... 4, 46
PAL ..................................................149, 183
PictBridge.............................................. 120
Picture display ...............................3, 8, 42
Picture Quality/Size ..............................61
Playback, movies...................................94
Playback, photographs........................34
Playback, TV.......................................... 118
Playback Menu.................................... 101
Playback Mode Dial Options.......... 138
Playback Zoom.......................................38
Power switch...................................... 2, 1890
Pre-AF ........................................................70
Printing................................................... 122
Protect.................................................... 112
R
RAW............................................................62
Recall My Settings.............................. 131
Reg. My Settings................................. 129
Restore Defaults.....................................91
RICOH Gate La...................................... 154
S
4S(shutter priority) mode ................ 4, 49
mode...................................... 4, 52
SD, SDHC...................................................15
Setup....................................................... 128
Sharpness.................................................71
Shooting Info. Display Frame......... 145
Shooting Menu ......................................58
Show My Setting Name.................... 145
Shutter-release button................... 2, 23
Shutter speed ..................................46, 49
Skew correction ........................... 56, 110
Slide Show............................................. 111
Snap Focus Distance ............................68
Software................................................. 154
Speaker ....................................................... 3
Start Settings Readout ..................... 150
Store Menu Cursor Position............ 147
Switch Shooting Mode........................92
T
Tilt Indicator............................................32
Tripod screw hole.................................... 3
TV ............................................................. 118
U
Up-down dial........................................2, 5
USB cable...................120, 159, 160, 162
V
Video Out Mode.................................. 149
Viewing Photographs..........................34
VM-1...............................................165, 166
Volume............................................ 94, 142
W
White Balance.........................................86
White Balance Compensation ..........89
Z
Zoom..........................................................26Telephone Support Numbers in Europe
UK (from within the UK)
(from outsideof the UK)
02073 656 580
+44 2073 656 580
Deutschland (innerhalb Deutschlands)
(außerhalb Deutschlands)
06331 268 438
+49 6331 268 438
France (àpartirdelaFrance)
(en dehorsdelaFrance)
0800 88 18 70
+33 1 60 60 19 94
Italia (dall’Italia)
(dall’estero)
02 696 33 451
+39 02 696 33 451
España (desdeEspaña)
(desdefueradeEspaña)
91 406 9148
+34 91 406 9148
http://www.service.ricohpmmc.com/Fromenvironmental friendlinessto environmentalconservation and
to environmentalmanagement
Ricoh is aggressively promoting environment-friendly
activities and also environment conservation activities
to solve the great subject of management as one of the
citizens on our precious earth.
To reduce the environmental loads of digital cameras,
Ricoh is also trying to solve the great subjects of "Saving energy by reducing power consumption" and "Reducing
environment-affecting chemical substances contained in products".
IfYou Encounter a Problemwith This Product
See “Troubleshooting” (page 167) in this manual. If the problem persists, contact a Ricoh office.
Ricoh offices
RICOH COMPANY,LTD.
3-2-3,Shin-Yokohama Kouhoku-ku,YokohamaCity, Kanagawa222-8530, Japan
http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc
RICOH AMERICASCORPORATION
5 DedrickPlace,WestCaldwell, New Jersey07006, U.S.A.
1–800–22RICOH
http://www.ricoh-usa.com/
RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V.
(EPMMC)
OberratherStr.6,40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY
(innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331268438
(außerhalb Deutschlands) +496331268438
http://www.ricohpmmc.com/
RICOH UK LTD. (PMMC UK)
(from within the UK) 02073656580
(from outsideof the UK) +442073656580
RICOH FRANCES.A.S. (PMMC
FRANCE)
(àpartirdelaFrance) 0800881870
(en dehorsdelaFrance) +33160601994
RICOH ESPANA,S.A. (PMMCSPAIN)
(desdeEspaña) 914069148
(desdefueradeEspaña) +34914069148
RICOH ITALIA S.p.A. (PMMCITALY)
(dall’Italia) 0269633451
(dall’estero) +390269633451
RICOH ASIA PACIFIC OPERATIONS
LIMITED
21/F, One Kowloon,1WangYuen Street, Kowloon Bay, Hong Kong
Support for Irodio Photo & Video Studio
North America(U.S. A.) +1–800–458–4029(toll free)
Europe
UK, Germany,FranceandSpain: +800–1532–4865(toll free)
Other countries: +44–1489–564–764
Asia +63–2–438–0090
China +86–21–5385–3786
Business hours:9:00 AM to5:00PM
Ricoh Company, Ltd.
Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo
104-8222, Japan
2009 Decenber
EN
EN USA GB GB AE AE
Printed in China
*L754 2971A*
???
??????????????????
????????????????????????????
(P.13-22)?
???
?????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
????????????????????(P.23-54)?
???
????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????
(P.55-214)?
GXR DIGITAL CAMERA BODY
?????(????)
????????????????????????????????????
??????????????????????
????????????????????????
GXR ???
?????????
?????????
????
??????
?????
??(DB-90)
???????????
(BJ-9)
??????
???
?????????
????
??????
? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??????
AV ????
?????????
?????????
USB ????
(miniB ???)
?????????
?????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??
¦ CD-ROM
?????????????(???????)????????????
¦ ????? (????)·???(??)
¦ ????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
?????????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
????????(?? 2 ??)?
?????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
????????????????????
???????????? Web ?????????????
http://www.ricoh.co.jp/dc/regist/
???????????????E ???(?????????????
?????)????????????????
????????????????????????????????????
???????????????
????????????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????????????
??????????????
???????
??????????? ???????????????????????????
????????????????
????????? ???????????????????????????
????????
??????? ????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????
???????????????????????????
???????
??????? ???????????????????????????
???????????????????????
??????? ???????????????????????????
???????????????????????????
?????????????????????????
???????? ???????????????????????????
???????????????????????????
?????????????????????????????
?????????????
• ??????????????????
• ?????????????????????
• ??????????
????????? B ?????????????????
???????????????????????????
???????????????????????????
??????????????
???????????????????????
VCCI-B
??????????????????????????
© 2009 RICOH CO.,LTD.
????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????????????????????
?????????????????????????
Microsoft®?Windows®?Windows Vista®?Internet Explorer® ? ? ? Microsoft Corporation ? ? ? ?
??????????????????
Macintosh®?Mac OS® ????????????????? Apple Inc. ??????
Adobe®?Adobe ???Reader® ??Adobe Systems Incorporated(?????????)?????
?????????????????????
HDMI? ?????? High-Definition Multimedia Interface ??HDMI Licensing LLC ???
??????????
??????????????????????????????1
???????
??????
????????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????????
??
???????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
??
??
???????????????????????????????
??????????????????????
??
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
??????
????
??????????????????????????
??????????????????????
????????????????????
???
??:???? ??:????
??????????????????????????????
??
???????????????????????????????????
????????????
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????????
???????????????
???????????????????????????????????
??????????????????
??????????????????????????2
??
???????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????????
????????????????
??????????(?????????)????????????????
???????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????????
????????????????
???????????????????????????????????
?????????????????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????????
??????
• ???????????????????????? 15 ????????
?????????????
• ??????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????
???????????????????????????????????
???
• ???????????????????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????????
???????????
• ?????????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????????
????????
???????????????????????????????????
????
• ??????????????????????????????????
??????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????????
?????????????????????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????????
????????????????????????
• ??????????????????
????????????????? SD ????????????????
???????????·???????????????????????
?????????????????????????????????3
???????·???????????????????????·???
???????????????????????????????????
????????
???????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????????
??????????????????
????????????????????????????????????
?????????????????
???????????????????????????????????
???????????????
???????????????????????????????????
??????
???????????????????????? AC ?????????
?????????? AC ??????????·??·???????????
???????????????????????????????????
???? AC ???????????????????·??·??????
?????
???????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
??
????????????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????(?????????
??????)
???????????????????????????????????
?????????
?????????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????????
??????????
??(?????????)??????????????????????
?????????????????
???????? ????????????????????????????
?????????????4
????????????
GXR ????????? 2 ?????????????????
??????(????)?(??)
???????????????????????????
???????????????????????????
?????
* ???????????????????????????
??????(???????)?(PDF ????)
???????????????????????????
???
??????(???????)?????? CD-ROM ???
????????????????
??????????(?????
??)?????????????
????????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
????????????????
? PDF ?????????????
???????????
???????????????????????????????????
Irodio Photo & Video Studio ?????????Irodio Photo & Video Studio
??????????Irodio Photo & Video Studio??????????????
Irodio Photo & Video Studio ????????·??????????????
??????????????????
???????? ????????????
??????:0570-02-3500
TEL:06-6633-2990 (PHS ?????????????????)
FAX:06-6633-2992
? 556-0011
???????????? 2-10-70 ??????? 25F
????:???~??? 10:00 ~ 18:00
(???????????????)
??????????Irodio Photo & Video Studio ?????????????
http://www.pixela.co.jp/oem/irodio/j/irodio_digitalphoto_videostudio/5
???
??????? ..................................................................................................1
???????????? .............................................................................4
??? 13
???? ........................................................................................................... 14
???????? ........................................................................................... 14
??????????? .............................................................................. 16
??????????/ ADJ. ??????? ....................................... 17
?????????????? ......................................................................17
ADJ. ??????? .............................................................................................17
DIRECT ??????? ............................................................................... 18
DIRECT ?????????? .......................................................................19
???????????????????? .........................................19
???????????.....................................................................................19
?????????....................................................................................... 20
??? 23
????? ....................................................................................................... 24
?????????????????? ..................................................24
???????????.....................................................................................26
????????????? ...........................................................................27
????????????? ...........................................................................29
?????/???? .........................................................................................29
??????? ........................................................................................................31
???? ........................................................................................................... 32
???????? ...................................................................................................32
???? .......................................................................................................................33
???????????.....................................................................................37
???????(?????) ........................................................................38
????????????? ...........................................................................39
?????????? .........................................................................................41
????????????? ...........................................................................426
???? ........................................................................................................... 44
?????????? .........................................................................................44
?????? .............................................................................................................46
?????????? .........................................................................................48
???? ........................................................................................................... 49
1 ????????? ..........................................................................................49
????????????? ...........................................................................49
??????????????? .................................................................50
DISP. ?????????????? ....................................................... 52
?????? .............................................................................................................52
?????? .............................................................................................................53
??? 55
1 ??????? 56
????????????????????????????
(P:???????????) ............................................................... 56
????????????(A:???????) ................................ 58
??????????????????
(S:??????????????) ................................................... 59
??????????????????????
(M:??????????) .................................................................. 60
??????????????(SCENE:??????) .................. 62
?-?????????.....................................................................................63
??????? ........................................................................................................64
???????????? ................................................................................65
????????????
(MY1 ~ MY3:???????????) .......................................... 66
???????????? .......................................................................... 67
????????????? ...........................................................................67
?????/??????????(??·???/?????) ... 71
?????? .............................................................................................................71
????? ..................................................................................................................73
?????????????(?????)............................................ 74
???????????????(MF) ...................................................76
AE/AF ???????????????????????? ......77
???????????????????????? .....................797
??????????????????
(????????????) .................................................................. 80
????????????????????????????
(????? ????) ............................................................................. 80
???????????????????????????
(??AF) ..................................................................................................... 81
?????????(??) ........................................................................ 82
?????????(????) ................................................................ 83
???????????????????????? .....................84
???????(??) ................................................................................ 86
??/????????/???????????????
(????????) .................................................................................. 88
???????????????
(AE-BKT:?????????) ...............................................................88
????????????????????
(WB-BKT:?????????????) ..........................................89
???????????(CL-BKT:????????)..................90
?????????????(?????????) ........................... 92
??????????????????????
(?????????????) .............................................................. 93
??????????????????
(???????????) ...................................................................... 94
????????(?????????) ................................................ 94
?????????????? ISO ???????
(????????? ISO ??) ............................................................. 95
???????????????(??????????) ............... 95
????????????(??????)............................................ 96
??????????????????????
(???????)....................................................................................... 96
???????????(????????) ....................................... 97
??????????(??????) .................................................... 98
??????(????) ............................................................................ 99
??????????(????????)..........................................100
???????????????(????) ...................................102
???????????????(????) ...................................103
????????????????(??????????) .........104
?????????(ISO ??) ..............................................................1068
????????????????(???????) .....................107
???????????????????(???????) .........108
????????????????????????
(???????).....................................................................................108
??????????????(?????) .....................................109
2 ??????? 110
??????? .............................................................................................110
MP ??????? .....................................................................................111
MP ????????? ...................................................................................113
3 ?????????(????????) 116
???????????? ........................................................................116
????????????? ........................................................................116
???????????????(??????[??]) ...............117
1??????????/???? .........................................................117
?????????????/???? ...............................................118
[??????[??]]??????????
(??????[??]) ..........................................................................119
??????????(???????) ..............................................119
???????????(?????) ..................................................120
?????????????????(?????) .........................121
??????? .....................................................................................................121
??????? .....................................................................................................122
?????????????(??????????) .....................124
???????????????(????) .....................................125
??????????(???????) ..............................................127
?????????????(?????)..........................................127
1 ???????????? .........................................................................127
?????????????????? ...............................................128
??????????????/????...........................................130
???????????????????????
(???????????????) ....................................................130
?????????????(DPOF:?????) ..........................131
?????????? DPOF ??/???? .....................................131
???????? DPOF ??/???? ..............................................132
??????? DPOF ???? ..................................................................1339
?????????????(??????) .....................................134
?????????.....................................................................................135
4 ?????????????? 137
??????????????? ............................................................137
?????????????? ................................................................138
???????? .........................................................................................139
1 ???????????????? .....................................................139
???????????..................................................................................141
?????? ..........................................................................................................143
5 ??????????(??????) 144
?????????? ................................................................................144
????????? ...........................................................................................144
????????????(??????????) .........................147
????????????? ........................................................................147
???????????????? BOX ?????????
(????????????) ................................................................149
?????????????(??????????) .....................150
????????? Fn ?????????????????
(Fn ??? MY ??) ..............................................................................152
?????????????????????????????
????(??????????? MY ??) .................................152
ADJ. ???????????(ADJ. ?????) ..............................153
???????????..................................................................................154
ADJ. ?????????????????????
(ADJ ??????????) ...............................................................154
??????????????????
(Fn1 ?????/ Fn2 ?????) ..................................................155
???????????????????...........................................156
???????????????????????? ..................157
+/-???????????(+-?????) .............................157
ADJ. ???/???????????????????
(????? ??????/ M ??? ??????) ...................158
??????????????????????????
???????????(M ???????????) ................159
???????/????????????
(???[???]/???[??????]) .................................16010
???????????????(??????????) .............161
DIRECT ??????????(DIRECT ?????) ......................161
????????????????????
(??·????????) ....................................................................162
ISO AUTO-HI ???????(ISO AUTO-HI ??) ..........................162
AF ??????????(AF ???) .................................................162
???????????(????) ......................................................163
???????????????(????????) .....................163
?????????????(???????) .................................164
??????????(????????)..........................................164
??????????(??????) ..................................................164
??????????(???) ..............................................................165
??????????(???????) ..............................................165
?????????????????????
(????????????) ................................................................166
??????????????(????????) .........................166
??????????????????(????????) .........167
?????????????(?????)..........................................167
???????????(???????????) .........................168
Fn ???????????(Fn ???????) ..............................168
???????????????????????????
(????????????) ................................................................169
???????????????(??????????) .............169
CL-BKT ?????????????(CL-BKT ?? (TE)) ...............169
????????(?????) ..............................................................170
?????????????(?????????) .........................170
????????????(????????????) .................171
????????????(????? NO.) .....................................172
??·???????(????) ..........................................................173
????????(Language /??) .................................................173
?????????????(?????)..........................................173
HDMI ???????????(HDMI ??) .....................................174
???????????????????????
(?????????) ............................................................................17411
6 ???????????? 175
Windows ??????? .........................................................................175
??? CD-ROM ??????????? ............................................176
CD-ROM ??? ...................................................................................................177
?????????????????????????
???????? ...........................................................................................179
Adobe Reader ????????? .........................................................181
?????????(????????)?? .................................183
DL-10 ???????????????................................................184
DL-10 ????????????? .........................................................185
???????????????? .........................................................187
Macintosh ??????? .......................................................................188
???????????? .............................................................................188
???????????????? .........................................................190
MP ??????????? .........................................................................190
7 ?? 193
??????? .............................................................................................193
??????????????? ..............................................................193
???????? ................................................................................................194
??????/????????? .........................................................200
???? .........................................................................................................202
??????/?????????????? .................................203
???????? .........................................................................................204
???????????..................................................................................206
AC ?????(???)??? ................................................................207
???????(???)??? ............................................................209
?????????? ................................................................................211
??????? .............................................................................................212
???????/???????? ........................................................213
???????????? ........................................................................214
?? .................................................................................................................215
??????????? RING CUBE .....................................................21812???
???????????
??????????
???? ....................................... 14
???????? ....................... 14
???????????........... 16
??????????/
ADJ. ??????? ............. 17
DIRECT ??????? ........... 18
????????? ................... 2014
?????????????????????
????
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
??????
????????
??
3 4 5 6 7
12 11
13
8 9 10
14
1 2
1 ?????????? ........ P.17
2 ?????? ........................... P.16
3 ??????? ...................... P.16
4 ???????? ........P.33?34
5 ?????? ........................... P.29
6 AF ??? ......................P.41?162
7 ?????? ........................ P.209
8 ???????? .................. P.39
9 ??? ..............................................-
10 ?????????? ...???
11 ?????????????
??? .......................................... P.29
12 ?? ............................................... P.29
13 ????????????
?? ............................................... P.29
14 ???????? .................. P.3915
?????????????????????
1 DIRECT ??? ........................ P.18
2 OPEN/f(?????
????/??)??? ... P.39
3 VF/LCD ??? ........................ P.52
4 ?????? ........................... P.20
5 ????????/?????
??? ........P.29?33?40?163
6 USB ??
.............. P.138?184?185?188
7 AV ???? ........................... P.135
8 HDMI ?????? .......... P.136
9 ADJ. ??? ..................P.17?153
10 6(??)???
....................P.30?44?110?116
11 N(???)??? ............. P.38
12 8(??)/ z(????)
??? ................................P.37?46
13 9(??)/ Z(???????)
??? .......................................P.37?46
14 ???? ..................................... P.47
+(!) ................................ P.157
–(%)................................. P.157
Fn1(#) ........................... P.155
Fn2($) ........................... P.155
15 MENU/OK ???
...............................P.67?116?144
16 O( DISP.)??? .............. P.52
17 t(???????)/ d(?
?) .......................................P.41?49
18 ????? ............................. P.202
19 ?????/??????
...............................................P.26?27
20 ????? ......................P.26?27
21 ??(DC ??)????
??? ....................................... P.207
22 ????? ....................................-
23 ?????????? ...???
24 ????? .................P.135?138
??
4
1
2
3
14
15
9
23 22 21 20 19 6
24
7 8
10
18
11
5
17 16
13
1216
?????????????????????
???????????
???????????????
???????????????
???????
???????????????
?????(?)????(?)?
A:???????(P. 5 8)
???????????????????????????????
????????????
M:??????
????(P. 6 0)
? ? ? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
?????????
P:? ? ? ? ? ?
?????(P.56)
? ? ? ? ? ? ?
????????
????????
????
5: ? ? ? ? ?
???(P.33)
? ? ? ? ? ? ??
? ? ? ? ? ? ?
????????
????????
????????
MY1?MY2?MY3:????
???????(P.66)
[??????????]?
?????????????
S:? ? ? ? ? ?
????????
(P. 5 9)
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
?????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
????????
SCENE:??????(P.62)
????????????????
????????????????
1
2217
?????????????????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? / ADJ. ? ? ? ?
???
??????????????
??????????????????+/-??????????
?????????????(F ?)??????????????
???????????????????????????????
????????
ADJ. ???????
ADJ.?????????????????????????ADJ.???
???????????????????????????????
??????????(ADJ. ???GP.153)????Fn1 / Fn2 ?
???????????????????????????????
???
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
???????????[????? ??????]/[M ???
??????]/????????????? ADJ. ????????
?????(GP.158)?
ADJ. ???
??????????18
?????????????????????
DIRECT ???????
? ? ? ? ? ? DIRECT ? ? ? ? ?
???????????????
???????????????
?????????????
DIRECT ??
1 2 3 8 4 5
12
13
18
10
9
11 15 14 16 17
6
7
DIRECT
1 ????? ................................ P.16
2 ??? ..................... P.56?58?60
3 ?????????
.................................... P.56?59?60
4 ???????? .................. P.39
5 ?????????/
?????????????
...............................................P.92?93
6 ???? ..................................... P.99
7 ISO ?? ................................... P.106
8 ???????? ............... P.100
9 ???????? .................. P.74
10 ????? ................................ P.82
11 ???? ..................................... P.83
12 ??·???/?????
......................................................... P.71
13 ??????? ...................... P.88
14 ?? ............................................... P.86
15 ???????? .................. P.19
16 ????? ................................ P.38
17 AE ??? ................................ P.156
18 ??????? ...................... P.4119
?????????????????????
DIRECT ??????????
+ / – / Fn1 / Fn2 ??? ADJ. ???(??)??????????
????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????? + / –
????????????????
????????????????????
+ / – / Fn1 / Fn2 ??? ADJ. ???(??)?????????
???? ADJ. ????????????????????????
??????+/–??????????????????ADJ.???
??? MENU/OK ?????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
???????????????????????????????
???? DIRECT ???????????????????????
?????????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• DISP. ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
(GP.161)?
• DIRECT ???????????? MENU/OK ?????????
????????????????(GP.67)?
• ???????????????????Fn1 / Fn2 ??????
ADJ. ???(??)??????
• ??????????????????????????????
???????(GP.61)?
• ??????????????????????????????
????????
• ??????????????????????????????
????????
???????????
??????????????????DIRECT ?????????
+ / – ????????????????????????????
???????20
?????????????????????
?????????
?????????
4:3 N 44::33 NN
F 2.5 FF 22..55 200 200
25cm- 2255ccmm--
1/50 1/50
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
15
18
31
19
27 28 29 30
2626
3232
2020
25
24
22
23
21
37 38
?????
??????
F 2.5 FF 22..55 1/50 1/50 200 200
34
33
35
36
1 ???????? .................. P.39
2 ?????????/
?????????????
...............................................P.92?93
3 ??????/?? ...P.62?86
4 ???????? .................. P.16
5 ?????? ........................ P.203
6 ??? .......................................... P.27
7 ???????????? .... P.80
8 ??·??? ........................... P.71
9 ????????/????
? ???? .....................P.74?80
10 ???????????/
??????????
.........................................P.100?104
11 ????? ................................ P.82
12 ???? ..................................... P.83
13 ??????? ........................ P.88
14 ???????? .................. P.52
15 ?????????? ........ P.95
16 ????????? ............. P.94
17 ????? ............................. P.109
18 ?????? ........................... P.98
19 ????? ................................ P.22
20 AE ??? ................................ P.155
21 ??????? ...................... P.41
22 ????? ................................ P.38
23 ?????? ........................ P.167
24 ?????????? ........ P.37
25 ????? ................................ P.37
26 ???????? .................. P.9721
?????????????????????
27 ?????????? ........ P.61
28 ??? ..................... P.56?58?60
29 ?????????
.................................... P.56?59?60
30 ???? ..................................... P.99
31 ISO ?? ................................... P.106
32 ????????? ...P.42?167
33 ??????? ...................... P.35
34 ???????? .....P.35?109
35 ????? ................................ P.75
36 ??????? ...................... P.75
37 ???? ........................P.73?203
38 ?????? ........................... P.64
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????????????????????????
• ???????????????????????(??????
??????????)???????????????????
??????
• ??????? 1 ?????????9999?????????
• DIRECT ?????????????????????(GP. 1 8)?
?????????
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14
4:3 N 44::33 NN
2010/0101 00:20 22001100//00110011 0000::2200
F 2.5 FF 22..55
ISO 200 IISSOO 220000
1/50 1/50
EV+0.7 EEVV++00..77
??????
2010/01/01 22001100//0011//0011 00:20 0000::2200
16
15
17 18
?????
1 ?????? ...............................-
2 ??????? ..........................-
3 ?????? ...............................-
4 ?????? ...............................-
5 ????? ............................. P.127
6 DPOF ........................................ P.131
7 ??? .......................................... P.45
8 ??·??? ........................... P.71
9 ?????? ..............P.31?173
10 ??? ..................... P.56?58?60
11 ISO ?? ................................... P.106
12 ???? ..................................... P.99
13 ?????????
.................................... P.56?59?60
14 ????? ................................ P.22
15 ??????????? .......-
16 ??????? ..........................-
17 ???????????
...................................................... P.100
18 ?????????? ..... P.10422
?????????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ?????????????????
?????????????????
??
• DISP. ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ?
?????????(GP.52)?
?????
???????????????????????????????
?????????????????
????? ??
??
???????????????
??
?????????????????????????
????
?????????????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
AC ????????????? ???????????????
??????????????????????????
4:3 N 4:3 N
2.5 200
4:3 N 4:3 N
2.5 200???
???????????
?????????
????? ................................... 24
???? ....................................... 32
???? ....................................... 44
???? ....................................... 49
DISP. ????
?????????? .......... 5224
????????????????????
?????
????????????????????
??????????????????
???????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????
1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ? ? ? ?
?????
• ?????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ?
???????
• ??????????????????(DB-90)???????
???????
• ?????????????????(BJ-9)?????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
??????????????????
2 ???????????????????????????
???????????
• ??????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????
????? ??
?? ???
?? ????
?? ???????????????????????
????????????????????????
???????????????????????
????25
????????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
????? 5 ???????????(25????)?
??????
????????????????????????????????
DB-90?(??)???????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????????(DB-90)?????????
• ??????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
??????
?????? --------------------------------------------------------------
??????(?????)??????????????????
??????????CIPA ?????????????????(?
? 23???????????30 ???????2 ?? 1 ??????
???10 ?????????????/???????)?????
???????????????????????????26
????????????????????
???????????
???????????????????????????????
?????????????????
1 ???????OPEN????
???????????/??
????????
2 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
?????
• ???????????????
??????????????
• ???????????????
????????????
3 ? ? ? ? ? / ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ??OPEN?
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
?????
????????????????????
???????OPEN???????????????/??????
????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
?????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ?????/????????????????????????
?????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
?????????????????????????
1
2
1
2227
????????????????????
?????????????
???????(??)????????????????????
???????????????????????
???????????????? -----------------------------------
????????? SD ??????????? SDHC ??????
???????????????????????????????
???????
??????? ------------------------------------------------------------
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
?????????????????????????(GP.130)?
1 ? ? ? ? ? ??OPEN? ? ? ? ?
??????????/????
??????
2 SD ??????????????
? ??? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
SD ??????????????
• ? ? ? ? ? - ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
?????????????
3 ?????/??????????
? ? ? ? ? ??OPEN? ? ? ? ?
?????????????
1
2
1
2228
????????????????????
??????????????
???????OPEN???????????????/??????
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????
???????(??)????
???????????????????????????????(?
?)???????????????????? 86MB ???
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????P.45 ??
??????
• ????????????????????????????
???????????????????? -------------------------
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??LOCK?
????????????????????????
??????????????????????LOCK?
??????????
?LOCK?????????????????????
????????????????????????
?????????LOCK???????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????????????????????????
?????????(GP.203)?
• ??????????????????????????????
???????(GP.160)?
• ???????????????????????????????
?????????????????????(GP.160)?29
????????????????????
?????????????
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????
?????????????????????????
?????????????????
?????????????????
?????????????????
????????
??????????????
????????????????
????????????????
????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
???????????????????????????????
?????????
?????/????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
ON ???????????
? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ?
?????/?????????????
?????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
?????30
????????????????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
OFF ???????????
OFF ????????????????
???????????????????
??????????????0 ????
???????????????????????????????
????
???????????
• ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??6(? ? ) ? ?
??? 1 ??????????????
????????????????
• 6?????????????????
? ? 6 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????????????????????????
???????????????????
?? ??? ??
?? OFF P.86
???????? 0 ? P.97
??????? ??? ?? P.41
• ???????????(GP.66)??????????????
??????????????????????????????
???????????????????????
????????????????? ---------------------------------
• ??????????????????????????(????)
????????(????????)??????
• ????(GP.163)?????????(GP.163)?????
????????
Today31
????????????????????
???????
?????????????????????????????
1 ?· ?· ?· ?· ?· ? ? ? ? ?
??
• + / - ? ? ? ? ? ? ??Fn1 / Fn2 ?
?????????
• DISP. ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
???
2 ??????????MENU/OK ??????
• ????????????
3 MENU/OK ??????
• ??????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????? 1 ??????????????????
??????
• ???????????????????????????? 2 ?
?????????????
• ?????????????(GP.173)?
• ????????????(GP.98)?32
????????????????????
????
??????????????????????
????????
????????????????????????
1 ????????????????
???????????
2 ??????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
???????????????????????????????
???????????33
????????????????????
????
1 ????????????????? 5 ??
???
2 ??????????????
4:3 N 44::33 NN
• ?????????????????
????
• ??????????????????
??????????????????
??/???????????????
???
• ?? 9 ???????????????
?????????????
3 ????????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
?????????????
????????/
????????
??34
????????????????????
???????????????? -----------------------------------
??????????2 ????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
????????????????
??????????????????????
?????????? ----------------------------------------------------
• ??????????????????????????????
??/????????????????
????????? ??? ????????/
????????
??????? ? ??
???????? ? ???
???????????? ?(??) ???
• ??????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????
• ???????????(????????????????)
• ?????????????
• ???????
• ????????
• ???????????????
• ???????????????
• ????????(?????????????? LED ??)
??????????????????????????????
? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
(????????GP.35)?35
????????????????????
???????? ---------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????????????????????????
?????????(???)?????????????????
????????????????????
• J????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????
• ??????[AUTO]???[????]???(GP.39)
• ISO ??????(GP.106)
• ??????????(GP.41)
• ??????????(GP.109)
• ???????????????????????????????
• ???????????????????
• ???????????????(GP.37)
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????AE ???????????????????
• ?????????????????? ???????????
• ????????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
????????????????????(GP.164)?
???????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
??????????????????(????????)?
1 ????????????????? 5 ??
???36
????????????????????
2 ???????????????????????????
?????
4:3 N 44::33 NN
?????????????????????
3 ????????????????????
???????
????????????
4 ????????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
?????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??
????????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
????????????????37
????????????????????
???????????
8(??)??????????????????????????
??9(??)????????????????????????
?????
4:3 N 44::33 NN 4:3 N 44::33 NN
1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??8 ? ? ? ?
9 ??????
2 ????????????????
????
3 ?????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????????????????????????
????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
??????????????(8)?????????????
?? 8 ??????????????????????????
?????????????????????9 ????????
??????
• ??????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
??????
• [??·???]?[RAW]??????????(GP.71)??
???????????????38
????????????????????
???????(?????)
N(???)?????????????????????????
??????????????????
1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??N ? ? ? ? ?
?
• ??????????? N ?????
????????? N ????????
2 ???????????????
?????
3 ?????????????
• ?????????????????
? N ?????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
?????????[?????](GP. 7 4)?[??? AF]/[???
?]/[8]?????????????[???? AF]?????
????
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 39
????????????????????
?????????????
OPEN/f(?????????/??)?????????????
?????????(??????)???????????????
??????????
????????????OPEN/f ???????????????
?????????????????????[AUTO]???
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
???????????
???? ?????????????
AUTO ?????????????????????
?????????
???? ????????????????????
???? ??????????????
??????? ?????????????????????
?????????????????????
??????????????????
??????? ???????????????????[?
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ] ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
(GP.93)?
1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??OPEN/f ? ?
? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
?????
OPEN OPEN40
????????????????????
2 OPEN/f ??????????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
???
• ??????????????????/???????????
???????????????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ?????????????????????????????
• OPEN/f ??????????????????????????
?????????
• ??????????????????????????????
????????????????????
• ??????????AE ???????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ???????????????(GP.209)??????????
???????????
• ?????????[???????]????????????
????????
• ????????????????(?????)????????
???????????????????????41
????????????????????
??????????
?????????10 ???2 ??????????????????
???????????? 2 ????????????[????]
????????????????????????????[??
??]?????????????????????[???????]
??????????(GP.96)
1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??t( ? ? ? ?
???)??????
• ?????????????????
??
• ??????????????????
?????????????????
?????????
• t ????????[10 ?]B[2 ?]B[????]B[???
??]??????????????
2 ?????????????
• ???????????????????????? AF ????
??????
• [????]???????????????????????? 2
????????????????????????????????
1 ?????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????????????????????????
???????t ????[??? ??]????????
• [2 ?]???? AF ???????????
• [ ? ? ? ? ] ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
MENU/OK ????????????
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 42
????????????????????
?????????????
???????????????????????????????
???????????
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????
1 ?????????DISP. ????
?????
• ? 2 ??????????????
2 +/-???????????
???? ??
OFF ??????????????????
???? ?????????????????
??+? ??????????????????????????
?????????????????
??? ??????????????????????????
????????????????????
3 MENU/OK ??????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????????????????????????
?????(GP.52)?
• ??????????????????????????????
?????????????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
????????
• ???????????????????(GP.167)?????
?????43
????????????????????
• [???????](GP.165)?[ ](??)????
??????[?????]?[??+?]???[???]???
???????????????
????????????
4 3: N 4 3: N 4:3 N
????????????
4:3 N 44::33 NN
???????????
4:3 N 44::33 NN
?????
??
4:3 N 44::33 NN
?????????
????
??
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ????????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????????
• ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
(GP.52)???????????????????[?????]
?[??+?]??????????????????????
• ?????????(??????????????????)?
??????????????????????????????
??????
• ??????????????????????????????
???????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
??????????????44
????????????????????
????
???????????????????????????????
??????????
??????????
?????? 6(??)????????
???????????????????
???????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? 6 ? ? ? ? ? 1 ? ?
???????????????????
????????????????????
+/-/ Fn1 / Fn2 ??????????
????????????????Fn1/ Fn2???????????
????????????????
2010 2010
2010 2010 2010 2010
2010 2010
F 2.5 FF 22..55
200 200
200 200
F 2.5 FF 22..55
2010 2010 200 200
F 2.5 FF 22..55 F 2.5 FF 22..55
200 200
F 2.5 FF 22..55
200 200
4:3 N 44::33 NN
4:3 N 44::33 NN 4:3 N 44::33 NN 4:3 N 44::33 NN
4:3 N 44::33 NN
10 ????
10 ????
1 ???? 1 ????
????????????????????6?????????45
????????????????????
????????????? --------------------------------------------
????????????????????????
• ????????????????
• ??????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
[??·???]? RAW ??????????????(GP.71)?
DNG????????????JPEG???????????????
JPEG ????????????????????????????
DNG ???????????????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
[??·???]? RAW ?????????????????????
??????? JPEG ?????????????????RAW ??
???????????????
??????????????? --------------------------------------
???????????????????????????????
?????????????????????????[??????]
????????????(GP.164)?
??????? ------------------------------------------------------------
????????????????????????????????
?????????????????????????
???????????? ----------------------------------------------
???????????[????????]?[ON]??????
???(GP.166)???????????????????????46
????????????????????
??????
????? 20 ??81 ??????????????????
???????????????????????
4:3 N 44::33 NN
2010 2010
F 2.5 FF 22..55
200 200
4:3 N 44::33 NN
2010 2010 F 2.5 FF 22..55
?????? Z(???????)??
??????20 ???????????
20 ? ? ? ? ? ? Z ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ?
?? 81 ???????????
81 ? ? ? ? ? ? Z ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ?
??????????????
• 7 ?????????????????
??????????????? ? XX ???
???????
4:3 N
2010 2.547
????????????????????
???????? ---------------------------------------------------------
???????????????????????????????
???
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
?????? 1 ?????????ADJ. ?????????
?????????
• 20 ????? 81 ?????:DIRECT ??????????+ /
– / Fn1 / Fn2 ?????? ADJ. ???(??)???????
??????????????
• ????????:DIRECT ??????????+ / – ????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??
DIRECT ??????????Fn1 / Fn2 ????????? ADJ.
??????????????????????????? Fn2 ?
????? ADJ. ??????????????????????48
????????????????????
??????????
z(????)????????????????????????
?????????????????????????ADJ. ????
???[????????????](GP.166)????????
??????????
????????
z ???/ Z ??? ? ? ? 1 ? ? ? ? / ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ?
(GP.47)?????????????????
MENU/OK ??? ?????????????? MENU/OK ??
?????????????????[????
????????]??????????????
[????????????]????????
????????????1 ?????????
?????????? ???????????????????
ADJ. ??? ADJ. ??????????????????/
????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
(GP.71)??????????
[??·???]??? ????(????)
L?M?5M?3M 16 ?
1M 6.7 ?
VGA 3.4 ?
• ????????? ADJ. ????????????????M ?
??????????????????
• ???????????[???????????]?[?? 2]
??????(GP.158)??????? ADJ. ?????????
??????????????????????49
????????????????????
????
???????????????????????????????
????
1 ?????????
1 6(??)??????
2 Fn1 / Fn2 ???????????
???????
3 d(??)??????
4 +/-????[1 ??????]
?????
• Fn1 / Fn2 ????????????
????????
5 MENU/OK ??????
• ?????????????????????????? 4 ???
??????
?????????????
1 6(??)??????? d ??????
2 +/-????[???????]?????
3 MENU/OK ??????
• ???????????????Fn2
? ? ? ?[ ? ? ] ? ? ? ??MENU/
OK ?????????50
????????????????????
???????????????
??????????????????????????? 1 ???
????????????????????????????????
?????????????? d(??)????????????
????????????
??? DISP. ?????????????????
????????? 1 ?????????
1 +/-????[??????]?
??? MENU/OK ??????
• ?????????????????
??????
2 +/-????[1 ?????]?
??? MENU/OK ??????
3 ????????????????
???MENU/OK ??????
• ?????????????????
?????????????????
• ?????????????????
??????
• ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ?
MENU/OK ??????????????
• ADJ. ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
(GP.51)?
4 d ??????
5 Fn1 / Fn2 ????[??]??
???MENU/OK ??????
• ?????????????????
??????????????????
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 51
????????????????????
?????????????
1 +/-????[??????]???? MENU/OK ???
???
• ???????????????????????
2 +/-????[?????]???? MENU/OK ??????
3 ????????????????
???????????MENU/OK
??????
• ?????????????????
?????????????????
• ?????????????????
??????
• ????????????????????DISP. ????????
??????????????
• ADJ. ? ? ? ? ? ? ??1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
(GP.50)?
4 ???????????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? MENU/
OK ??????
• ?????????????????
??????
5 ?? 3 ? 4 ??????????????????????
?????
• ???????????????????ADJ.???????1??
??????????????????????? MENU/OK ??
???????
6 d ??????
7 Fn1 / Fn2 ????[??]?????MENU/OK ??????
• ??????????????????????????????
?????
4:3 N
4:3 N 52
????????????????????
DISP. ??????????????
O(DISP.)??????????????/????????????
???????????????
?????????/?????? -----------------------------------
???????????????? VF/LCD ???????????
???????????????????????????????
?????????????? VF/LCD ??????????????
?????????
?????????????????? VF/LCD ?????????
??????????????????????????
??????
O(DISP.)???? 1 ????????????????????
4:3 N 44::33 NN 4:3 N 44::33 NN
?????
????
????????
?????????
????????? ------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????????????????????????
???????
• ???????????????????[??????????
?]?????(GP.168)?53
????????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• [?????]?[????]???[??+?]????????
??(GP.167)???????????????????????
????????????(GP.52)?
• ??????????????????????????????
????????
• ADJ. ????MENU/OK ????6(??)?????????
• O(DISP.)???????????
• [+-?????]?[OFF]??(GP.157)?+/-????
?????
??????
O(DISP.)???? 1 ????????????????????
????? ?????????????
4:3 N 44::33 NN 4:3 N 44::33 NN
4:3 N 44::33 NN
2010 2010 2010 2010
2010 2010
F 2.5 FF 22..55
200 200
F 2.5 FF 22..55
200 200
2.5 2.5 200 200
???? ???????
??????? ------------------------------------------------------------
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
??????-??????(GP.99)?????????????
??????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
???????????????????54
????????????????????
???????? ---------------------------------------------------------
???????????????????????????????
??????????(??)??????????(???)???
????????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
????????
???????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
????????????????????????(GP. 9 9)??
???????????
???????? ????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ???????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
???????(GP.121)?
• ??????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
???????
• ??????????????????????????????
???????1
2
3
4
5
6
7
???
???????????
????????
1 ??????? ....................... 56
2 ??????? .....................110
3 ?????????
(????????) ............116
4 ??????????
???? .................................137
5 ??????????
(??????).....................144
6 ???????????? ...175
7 ?? ..........................................1931
56
???????
1 ???????
???????????????????
?????????
(P:???????????)
???????? P(???????????)?????????
?????????????????????????????
?????????????????????????????????
1 ???????? P ?????
• ?????????????????
?????
2 ??????????????
• ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
?????????????????
3 ??????????????
4:3 N 44::33 NN
2.5 2.5 200 2001
57
???????
4 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??
???????????????
?????????
• ?????????????????
????10 ????????????
?????????????????
???
5 ????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
???????????????????????????????
?????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1
58
???????
????????????
(A:???????)
???????? A(???????)?????????????
????????????????????????????????
?????????????????
????????????????????????
1 ???????? A ?????
• ?????????????????
?????????????????
??????
2 ????????????????
???????
3 ??????????????
• ?????????????????
????????
4 ????????????????
????
??????? ------------------------------------------------------------
?????????(?????)????????????????
???????????????????????(??????)??
????????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
?????????[???????]?[ON]????(GP.108)?
??????????????????????????????
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1
59
???????
??????????????????
(S:??????????????)
???????? S(??????????????)???????
???????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
1 ???????? S ?????
• ?????????????????
?????????????????
????????????
2 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??
??????????????
3 ??????????????
• ?????????????????
??
4 ????????????????
????
????????????? --------------------------------------------
????????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
???????????????????????????????
???????????????(?? F ?)??????????
???
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN
2.5 22.5 2..55 200 2200 200001
60
???????
???????????????????
???(M:??????????)
???????? M(??????????)??????????
?????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
??? ADJ. ?????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
1 ???????? M ?????
• ?????????????????
??????????????????
?????????????????
???
2 ????????????????
????????????????
??ADJ. ????????????
??????
• ???????????[M ??? ?
? ? ? ? ? ] ?(GP.158) ? ? ? ?
???????? ADJ. ???????
??????????????????????????????
???????????ADJ. ??????????????
• ???????????????????????
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN
4:3 N 44::33 NN
3.6 3.6
4:3 N 44::33 NN
3.6 3.61
61
???????
• ????????+???????????
???-????????????????
??????????
• ???? –2EV ?? +2EV ??????????????????
????????????
• ???? –2EV ?? +2EV ??????????????????
??????????????????????
3 ??????????????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
????????????
• ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ISO ? ? ?[AUTO] ? ? ?[AUTO-HI]
?????????ISO ??????????ISO ???????
??????????????????????????????
??????????????????????
• ???????????[M???????????]???????
??????????????????????????????
?(GP.159)?
• ???????????[+-?????]?[????]???
???????(GP.157)????????????+/-???
?????????????????????????????(?
???????????????)???????????????
???????????????????????????????
• ???????????[Fn1 ?????]???[Fn2 ?????]
? Fn(???????)1 ??? Fn2 ????[AE ???]??
????????????????? AE ?????????Fn1
??? Fn2 ??????????????(??????????
??????)???????????????????????
???????????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
???????? 2 ????????????????
–2EV –2EV +2EV1
62
???????
??????????????
(SCENE:??????)
???????? SCENE ???????????????????
?????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
?????????????????
??
????????????(GP.64)?
??????
?????????????
????
??????????????????
??
????????????????????
??
?????????????
??????????????
????????????????????????
?????????
• ????????[AUTO]???
• ????????????????????
• ??????????????????
????
?????????????????????????
?????????????????????????
???????(GP.65)?
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
????????????????????????P.69 ?????
?????1
63
???????
?-?????????
1 ???????? SCENE????
?
• ?????????????????
?????????????????
????????
2 MENU/OK ??????
• ??????????????????
3 + / - / Fn1 / Fn2 ? ? ? ? ? ?
?????????
4 MENU/OK ??????
• ??????????????????????????
????????????????????? ----------------------
?????????????????
?????????????????
??????????? MENU/OK ?
? ? ? ? ??Fn1 ? ? ? ?[MODE]
???????????????-?
??? 1 ???????????2 ?
??????????????3???
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??
????????? P. 6 7?P.145?P.146
??????????
[MODE]??
??????
??????????
????????
[MODE]??
??????
??????????
????????1
64
???????
???????
??????????????????????1 ?? AVI ????
??????????
1 ???????????????????????????
???????
• ??????? ????????????????????
????
2 ?????????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ???????????????????????
• ????????????????????????(GP.203)?
??????????????????????????????
??????????
• 1????????????????90??????4GB?????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ????????????????
• ??1??????????????????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
???????????????????????
• ????????????????????????(GP.69)?
• ????????????? AC ?????(???)?????
???????
• ?????????????????????? SD ??????
?????????????????????????1
65
???????
????????????
1 ???????????????????????????
????
• ?????????????????????????? 5 ???
??????????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
??
2 ?????? Fn2 ????????
• ????????????????????????
• ??????????????+?????????
3 MENU/OK ??????
• ??????????????????????????????
?????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
[????]??????????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
??????
• ????????????????????????????
• ???????
• ???? 4 ??????????
• ???????????????
• ????????
• ??????????????????????????????
? 2 ?????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
??????????????????????(GP.125)?1
66
???????
????????????
(MY1 ~ MY3:???????????)
???????? MY1 ~ MY3 ?????
???????????????????
??MY1?MY2?MY3 ? ? ? ?? ? ? ?
????????[??????????]
??????(GP.147)?
MY1?MY2?MY3 ??????[????
??????]?[MY1]?[MY2]?[MY3]
?????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
?????????? MY1 ~ MY3 ?????????
?????????????????????? -------------------
?????????[???????](GP.108)????????
??????????????????[??????????]??
????????????[???????]?????????
4:3 N 44::33 NN
[ ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??]??????
????????
4:3 N 44::33 NN
[ ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??]??????
????????1
67
???????(????????)
????????????
?????? MENU/OK ????????????????????
????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
????????????????????????????????
?????????
?????????????
?????????????
1 ? ? ? ? ? ? MENU/OK ? ? ? ?
??
• ????????????????
• ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??Fn1 ? ? ? ?
[MODE] ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ?
- ? ? ? ? 1 ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ?
???????????
2 +/-?????????????
??
• ???????-?????????
? DIRECT ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? - ? ?
??????????????????
3 Fn2 ??????
• ????????????????
4 +/-????????????
????????
????????
???1
68
???????(????????)
5 MENU/OK ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? Fn1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
MENU/OK ??????
• ????????????????????
???????? SCENE ?????
???? ????? ???
??·??? L 4:3 N P.71
????? ??? AF P.74
???????????? 2.5m P.80
????? ???? ON P.80
??AF OFF P.81
?? ??? P.82
???? ?????? P.83
?? OFF P.86
???????? OFF P.88
????????? 0.0 P.92
????????????? 1/2 P.93
??????????? ?? P.94
????????? OFF P.94
????????? ISO ?? ISO401 ?? P.95
?????????? OFF P.95
?????? OFF P.96
??????? 2 ? ,5 ? P.96
???????? ? P.97
?????? OFF P.98
????*
1
0.0 P.99
???????? ??????? AUTO P.100
?????????? A:0,G:0 P.104
ISO ?? AUTO P.106
???????*
2 ? P.107
???????*
3
OFF P.108
??????? *
4 ? P.108
????? *
5
ON P.1091
69
???????(????????)
???????[??]???
???? ????? ???
????? VGA640 P.71
????? ??? AF P.74
???????????? 2.5m P.80
??AF OFF P.81
???????? AUTO P.100
?????????? A:0,G:0 P.104
???????[??????]/[????]/[??]?
??
???? ????? ???
??·??? L 4:3 N P.71
????? ??? AF P.74
???????????? 2.5m P.80
????? ???? ON P.80
?? AF OFF P.81
????????? 0.0 P.92
??????????? ?? P.94
?????????? OFF P.95
??????? 2 ? ,5 ? P.96
?????? OFF P.98
???? 0.0 P.99
???????? ??????? AUTO P.100
????? *
5
ON P.109
*1 ???????? M ????????????
*2 ???????? 5 ????????????
*3 ???????? A ????????????
*4 ???????? MY1 ~ MY3 ????????????
*5 ??????????????????????????????1
70
???????(????????)
???????[??]???
???? ????? ???
??·??? L 4:3 N P.71
?????????? OFF P.95
??????? 2 ? ,5 ? P.96
?????? OFF P.98
???? 0.0 P.99
???????? ??????? AUTO P.100
????? *
5
ON P.109
???????[????]???
???? ????? ???
??·??? 1M 4:3 F P.71
????? ??? AF P.74
???????????? 2.5m P.80
????? ???? ON P.80
??AF OFF P.81
?? ??? P.82
???? ?????? P.83
????????? 0.0 P.92
??????????? ?? P.94
?????????? OFF P.95
?????? OFF P.98
???? 0.0 P.99
???????? ??????? AUTO P.100
ISO ?? AUTO P.106
????? *
5
ON P.109
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
???????????????????????????????
?????(GP.144)?1
71
???????(????????)
?????/??????????
(??·???/?????)
????????(GP.67)?[??·???]????????
??????????????????????[?????]??
??????
??????
???? ?????? ??? ??????
RAW 16:9*
2?4:3?
3:2*
2?1:1*
3
FINE/
NORMAL/
VGA*
1
• ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
????·?????
L 16:9*
2?4:3?
3:2*
2?1:1*
3
FINE/
NORMAL
• ?????????
• ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
M 16:9*
2?4:3? ??????????
3:2*
2?1:1*
3
FINE/
NORMAL
5M 4:3 FINE • ??????
3M 4:3 FINE
1M*
4
4:3 FINE • ?????????
VGA*
4
4:3 FINE • ?????????
• ????????
• Web ????????
*1 ???????????
*2 ?????????????????????????????
*3 ?????????????????????????????
*4 ???????[????]?????????[1M]???[VGA]
????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ? ? ? ? ? ??ADJ. ? ? ? ? ? ?· ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
(P.153)?
• ??????????????????????????????
???????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
?????1
72
???????(????????)
• ??????/?????????????????[??·???]
??????????
• ? ? ? ? ?( ? ? ? ) ? Normal ? ? ?(N)?Fine ? ? ?(F)?
RAW ???? 3 ????????
Normal ??? ??????????????????????
????
Fine ??? Normal ???????????????????
???????????????????
RAW ??? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? RAW ? ? ? ? ? ?
(.DNG ? ? ? ? ) ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ?
JPEG ???????????????
DNG ????????????????????
?????????·???????
Windows ???????? Irodio Photo & Video
Studio ????????Macintosh ??????
?? DNG ??????????????????
???????
RAW ???????? --------------------------------------------------
• JPEG ????????????????????????????
?????????RAW ???????????????????
??????????????????????????
• RAW ?????????????????????????
• RAW ???????????????????????????
???????????????
• [??????]????????DNG ???????????
?????????? JPEG ???????????????
• ???????????[????]????????? JPEG ??
????????????
• RAW ????[??]???????????????????
?????????????????????????????
???
• ??????????????????? JPEG ???????1
73
???????(????????)
?????
???? ?????
VGA640 640 × 480
QVGA320 320 × 240
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????????????????????????
?????????????????????????????
• ????????????(????????????????)
??????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
??????????????
• 1????????????????90??????4GB?????1
74
???????(????????)
?????????????(?????)
????????(GP.67)?[?????]?????????
???????????
???????????????????????????????
(AF)??????????????
??????(?????)????????? 5 ????????
???? ??
??? AF*
9 ??? AF ????????????????????
?????????????????????????
?????
???? AF*
AF ????????????? 1 ??????????
???????
MF(????
??????)
???????????????????
????
?????????????????????????
?????[????????????](GP. 8 0)?
???????
8(???)
?????????????????????????
??????????????
* ????? DIRECT ????????????
[MF][????] ? [8]????????? ?
??????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• [Fn1?????]???[Fn2?????]?[AF/MF]?????
(GP.155)??Fn(???????)1??? Fn2??????????
???????????????????????
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1
75
???????(????????)
• [Fn1 ?????]???[Fn2 ?????]?[AF/ ????]?
????(GP.155)??Fn1 ??? Fn2 ???????????
????????????????
• MENU/OK ????????????
?????????????????
???????????? MENU/OK
?????????????????
??????????
????????????? --------------------------------------------
• [MF]?[????]?[8]??????????????????
????????????????????
4:3 N 44::33 NN
4.2 4.2 3030
?????
???????
????? ????
??????????/
???????
??????????????
?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??
??????????????
??
??????????? ??????????????
( ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
?)?????????????
????????/
??????????????/
??????
??????????????
• ????????????????
4:3 N 44::33 NN
2.5 2.5 3030
4:3 N 44::33 NN
2.5 2.5 30301
76
???????(????????)
??????? ------------------------------------------------------------
???????????????????????????????
????????????(??????)???????????
???????????????(?????)?????????
???????????????(MF)
???????????????????????????????
?????(MF:??????????)?
?????????????????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????????????????????????
????????????????????????
• [Fn1?????]???[Fn2?????]?[AF/MF]?????
(GP.155)??Fn(???????)1??? Fn2??????????
???????????????????????
1 ?????????[?????]
?[MF]?????
• ???[MF]????????
• ??????????????????
?????????????(GP.75)
????????
• ?????????????????
????????????????
2 N ??????????????????????????
???
• ?????????????????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
????????????????N ?????????????
??????????????????
3 ????????????????
4:3 N 44::33 NN
2.5 2.5 3030
4:3 N 44::33 NN
2.5 2.5 30301
77
???????(????????)
AE/AF ??????????????????????
??
???????????????????????????????
??????????? AE ??????????????????
AF ?????????????????????????????
???
1 ADJ. ??????
2 ADJ. ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? P
?????
• ????????????
3 + / - ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??
MENU/OK ??????
• ?????????????????
?? ??
AE/AF AE ????? AE?AF ????? AF ??????????
?????????(???? AE ????? AF ?????
???????????)?
AF AF ????? AF ??????????????????
???????????[??](GP.82)???????
??????
AE AE?????AE????????????????????
????????????[?????](GP.74)???
??????????
OFF AE/AF ?????????????
?????1
78
???????(????????)
4 ???????????????
• ?????????????????
????????????????
• DISP. ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? 2 ? ? ?
??????
5 MENU/OK ??????
6 ??????????????
• [AE/AF]??????????????? AE ????? AF ??
?????????
• [AF]??????????????? AF ???????????
• [AE]??????????????? AE ???????????
?????????
7 ?????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• AF ?????????????????????????????
?????????
• ????????????????? ADJ. ??????? U ??
????????????????????(GP.79)?U ???
???????P.79 ??? 3 ????????????
• Fn(???????)1 ??? Fn2 ??????????????
??????(GP.79)???????????????ADJ. ???
????? AF/AE ??????????????
• [?????]?[MF]?????????(GP.74)??AE/AF
??????????????????
• ???????????????????????????????
?????????????
• [AE]?[AF]?[AE/AF]????????
• [?????]?[MF]?????1
79
???????(????????)
????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
??? AF ??????????????????????????
??????????????
[????????]????????Fn(???????)1 ??
? Fn2 ????[????????]???????????????
1 ???????????[Fn1 ?????]???[Fn2 ?
????]?[????????]?????
• ????? P.155 ??????????
2 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??Fn1 ? ? ?
Fn2 ??????
• ?????????????????
???
3 ???????????????
• ?????????????????
????????????????
4 MENU/OK ??????
• DISP. ????????????????????????????
5 ??????????????
• ???????????????????
6 ?????????????
• N(???)????????????????????????
????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
ADJ. ???? AE/AF ?????????????(GP.77)???
?????????Fn1 ??? Fn2 ???????????????
????????????1
80
???????(????????)
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
(????????????)
????????(GP.67)?[????????????]???
[?????](GP. 7 4)?[????]????????????
??????????????????????
????
1m 1.5m 2m 2.5m 3m 3.5m 5m 8
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
[?????]?[????]??????????[????? ???
?]???????????N ?????????????????
?????????????????????
???????????????????
?????????(????? ????)
????????[?????]?[??? AF]???[????
AF]?????????(GP.74)? ?????????????(?
????)?????????[OFF]??????????????
??[????????????]???????????????
????????
???? ??
OFF ??? AF ??????????
ON ????????????[??????????
??]??????????????????
ON ISO AUTO HI ????????????[??????????
??]?????????????????????
ISO ????[ISO ??]?????????????
????[AUTO-HI](GP.106)??????1
81
???????(????????)
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ?????????[MF]?[????]?[8]?????????
?????????????
• ???????????? ?????????????
• ????? ??????????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• [????? ????]?[ON]???????????????
???????????????????????????
• N ?????????????????????????????
??????????
???????????????????
????????(??AF)
????????(GP.67)?[??AF]?[ON]???????[???
? ? ] ?[ ? ? ? AF] ? ? ?[ ? ? ? ? AF] ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
(GP.74)??????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ?????????[MF]?[????]?[8]??????AF ?
????????
• [??AF]?[ON]?????[OFF]????????????
???????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
??AF ????????????????????????????
??????1
82
???????(????????)
?????????(??)
????????(GP.67)?[??]????????????
??????(??????????)????????
??????????? 3 ????????
???? ??
??? *
??????? 256 ??????????????
???????????
??
???????????????????????
????????????????????????
????
???????????????????????
???????????????????????
???????????????????
* ????? DIRECT ????????????
[??]?[????]??????????
?????????????
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1
83
???????(????????)
?????????(????)
????????(GP.67)?[????]??????????
????????????????????????
?????? 6 ??????????
???? ??
????
?????????????????[??????]
????????????????????????
??
?????? *
1
????????
?????
?????????????????[??????]
????????????????????????
????
??
????????[??????]?[??????]?
???? 9 ??????????
?? (TE*
2
)
???????????????[??]?[??]?[?
?????]?[??????]????????
[??]?[??????]?[??????]?????
9 ??????????
[??]?[???]?[???]?[????]?[???]?
[????]????????
?? 1 /?? 2
[??]?[??????]?[??????]?[????
?]?????????????????????
[??]?[??????]?[??????]?????
9 ??????????
[?????]??[??]?[??]???????
?[????]?[????]?[??????]?[???]?
[????]???????????????????
9 ??????????
[??????]?????????????????
???????
*1 ????? DIRECT ????????????
*2 Toning effect ??1
84
???????(????????)
[??????]????????????
?????????????
????????????????????????
[??]?[?? (TE)]?[?? 1]???[?? 2]?????????
??????????
??????????????????????????
1 ?????????[????]?????Fn2 ??????
2 [??]?[?? ( TE)]?[?? 1]???[?? 2]?????
Fn2 ??????
3 +/-????????????Fn1 / Fn2 ???????
???
?? ?? (TE) ?? 1 /?? 2
• ?? (TE) ?[??]??Fn2 ?????????+/-?????
??????Fn1 ??????????
• ? ? 1 / ? ? 2 ?[ ? ? ? ? ? ] ?
Fn2 ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
?????+/-?????????
??Fn1/Fn2????????????
MENU/OK ??????????
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1
85
???????(????????)
• ? ? 1 / ? ? 2 ?[ ? ? ? ? ? ? ] ?
Fn2 ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
?????????????+/-?
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??MENU/OK ? ?
????????????????
4 MENU/OK ??????
• ?????????????????????
5 MENU/OK ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ?
Fn1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? MENU/OK ?
?????
• ?????????????????
????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
???????ADJ. ?????????????????(GP.153)?
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1
86
???????(????????)
???????(??)
???????????????????????????????
???(GP.67)?[??]???????
????????2????????
??
???????????????????
???????????????????
?????1 ?????????
???????????????????
??????????????(GP.44)?
M ?????
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????????? 1 ????1 ?
? MP ????????????(GP.111)?[M ?????(HI)]
?[M ?????(LO)]????????????
1. ??????????????????……
2. ???????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
[M ?????(HI)]?[M ?????(LO)]???????????
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
?????????????????????1
87
???????(????????)
???????????????????
????
???????????????????
???(GP.67)?[??]?[OFF]?
???? MENU/OK ?????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• M ?????????????????????[???????
??](GP.170)?[???????]????????????
?????????????
• ??/ M ??????????[????????](GP.100)?
[??????? AUTO]?????????[AUTO]??????
• ???????????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ????????????????
• ??????????????????????
• ???????????????????????????????
???????
• M ? ? ? ? ? ??1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??????????????????????????????
????? 1 ?? MP ??????????????
• [????? NO.]?[ON]?????????(GP.172)???
???????????? 4 ???9999?????????????
????????????????????????
MP ???????? ----------------------------------------------------
MP ?????????????? 1 ?????????????
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1
88
???????(????????)
??/????????/???????
????????(????????)
????????(GP.67)?????????????????
?????????????????????? 3 ????????
??????
?????????????????
???? ??
OFF*
???????????????
AE-BKT
???????? 3 ???????
WB-BKT
???????????????????????????
??????????????????? 3 ???????
??????
CL-BKT
??????? 2 ?????????????? (TE) ? 3
???????????????
* ????? DIRECT ????????????
???????????????
(AE-BKT:?????????)
[AE-BKT]??????????????
3?????????????????
??????????????????
????????
1 ?????????[????????]?????Fn2 ?
??
-0.3 0.0 -0.3 0.0 +0.31
89
???????(????????)
2 [AE-BKT]?????Fn2 ???
• ???????????????
3 Fn1 / Fn2 ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? + /
-??????????
4 MENU/OK ??????
• ?????????????????
????
5 MENU/OK ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ?
Fn1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? MENU/OK ?
?????
• ?????????????????
??????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ????????????????1 ????????????
• ????????????????????
• ????????????????
• [????????](GP.100)?[??????? AUTO]??
???????????[AUTO]?????????
????????????????????
(WB-BKT:?????????????)
[WB-BKT]?????????????
??????????????????
??????????????????
??????? 3 ??????????
????
??????????????????
?????????????
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN
???
RED BLUE RED BLUE1
90
???????(????????)
????????????????????
???????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• [??·???]? RAW ???????????????
• ????????????????????
• ????????????????
• [????]?[??]???[?? (TE)]???????????
????????????????????
• ????????????????????????(GP.100)?
???????????(CL-BKT:????????)
[CL-BKT]?????????????? 2 ????????????
?? (TE) ? 3 ???????????????
????????? ( TE) ?????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?[CL-BKT ? ?
(TE)](GP.169) ? ON ? ? ? ?? ? ?
???????[????](GP.83)?
[?? (TE)]???????
???
?? ????
????????????????????
? ? ? ? ? ?[CL-BKT ? ? ( TE)]
(GP.169)? OFF ?????
???
??
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1
91
???????(????????)
??????? (TE) ??????? ----------------------------------
?? (TE) ??????????????
? ? ? ?[ ? ? ? ? ] ?[ ? ? (TE)]
(GP.83)???????
???????????????????
???????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• [??·???]? RAW ???????????????
• ????????????????????
• ????????????????
??????????????????????????
?????? --------------------------------------------------------------
???????????????????????????????
???[????](GP.83)??????????????????
• ?????????????:
[????]?[??]????????????
• ??????????? (TE) ??:
[????]?[?? (TE)]????????????
• ??????????????:
[????]?????????????????????????[?
???]?[??]???[?? (TE)]??????????[??
??]?[??????]????????????
???
?? ????
[?? (TE)]???
???
?? ????
[?? (TE)]???
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1
92
???????(????????)
?????????????
(?????????)
????????(GP.67)?[?????????]??????
????????????????????? –2.0EV ~ +2.0EV ??
??1/2 ??? 1/3EV ??????????
?????????????????[??·????????]?
???????????(GP.162)?
1 ?????????[?????
????]?????Fn2 ???
???
• ???????????????????
2 +/-??????????
3 MENU/OK ??????
• ??????[????]??????
??????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
???????????????????????P.39 ??????
????
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1
93
???????(????????)
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
?????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
????(?????????????)
????????(GP.67)?[?????????????]???
?????????[???????]???????(GP.39)??
??????????????????
???????????????????????
????
FULL 1/1.4 1/2 1/2.8
1/4 1/5.6 1/8 1/11
1/16 1/22 1/32 1/64
????????????????????
??????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ?????????[???????]?????[????????
?????]???????????[?????????]???
??????????
• [?????????????]????????????????
?????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
????????????????(?????)??????????
?????????????????????
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1
94
???????(????????)
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
(???????????)
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?(GP.67) ?[? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ] ? ??
???????????????????????
???? ??
?? ????????????????????????????
???????????
?? ????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????
??????????????????????
????????(?????????)
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?(GP.67) ?[? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ] ? ?[ ? ]
???[?]?????????????????????????
??????
???????????????????
????????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ISO ? ?
??[????????? ISO ??]??
??????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• [??·???]? RAW ???????????????????
??? JPEG ????????????????????????
??????DNG ??????????????????????
??????????
• [?????????]????????????????????
??????
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1
95
???????(????????)
?????????????? ISO ???
????(????????? ISO ??)
????????(GP.67)?[????????? ISO ??]???
[?????????]?[?]???[?]??????????
???????? ISO ??????????
????
??? ISO201
??
ISO401
??
ISO801
??
ISO1601
??
ISO3200
???????????????
(??????????)
????????(GP. 6 7)?[??????????]?[ON]
???????????????????????????????
???????
[??????????]????????
??????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????????????????????????
???????????????[??????????]?[ON]
??????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
?????????
• [??·???]? RAW ????????DNG ?????JPEG ??
??????????????????????????
• M ?????????????????????????????
?????????
• [??????????]?[ON]????????????????
• [????-?????]?[ON]??????????????
????????????????
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1
96
???????(????????)
????????????(??????)
????????(GP.67)?[??????]?[ON]????
???????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????????
???????????????????
???????????????
???????????????????
???(???????)
????????[????]?????????????????
????????
????? 1 ~ 10 ??????? 5 ~ 10 ?????????
1 ?????????[???????]?????Fn2 ??
????
2 Fn1/Fn2???????????
+/-??????????
• +/-??????????????
??????????
3 MENU/OK ??????
4 ????????????????
• ?????????????????????
• ???????????MENU/OK ?????????
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1
97
???????(????????)
???????????(????????)
????????(GP.67)?[????????]???????
?????????????????????
??????5 ?~ 1 ?????? 5 ???????????
1 ?????????[????????]?????Fn2 ?
?????
2 Fn1 / Fn2 ???????????
+/-??????????
• +/-??????????????
????????????
3 MENU/OK ??????
• ???[??????]????????
4 ????????????????
• ??????????????????
5 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??MENU/
OK ??????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ?????????????????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
?????????????????????
• ????????????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
????????????????????
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1
98
???????(????????)
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ????????????? AC ?????(???)?????
???????
• ??????????????????????????????
?????
• ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ?[ ? ? ]?[M ? ? ? ? ?
HI]???[M ????? LO]??????????????[OFF]
?????????
• ??????????????????????????????
????????????????? 0 ????????????
????????????
??????????(??????)
????????(GP.67)?[??????]??[??]??
?[??]????????????????(?/?/?)???
??(?/?/? ?:?)????????
???????????????????
?????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??·??????????????[??????]???????
???????·???????????(GP.31?173)?
• ??????????????
• RAW ???????????DNG ??????????????
??DNG ???????????? JPEG ???????????
??
• ?????????????????
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1
99
???????(????????)
??????(????)
????????(GP.67)?[????]???+/-????
???????????????????????????????
?????????
????+???????????-???????????????
???????????????????????????????
?????????
???????????????????????????????
?????????????
??????? ????????????????????(???
???)??????????+????????
????????
????
????????(??????)???+????
????
????????
????
?????????(??????)???-???
?????
??????????????????????-?
???????
1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?[ ? ? ? ? ]
?????Fn2 ??????
2 +/-??????????
• - 4.0EV ~ +4.0EV ? ? ??1/2 ? ? ?
1/3EV ??????????
• ?????????????????
????????????1
100
???????(????????)
3 MENU/OK ??????
• ?????????????????
??
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
????????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
?????????????????[??·????????]?
???????????(GP.162)?
??????????(????????)
????????(GP. 6 7)?[????????]??? ADJ. ???
???????????????????????????????
???????????????
?????????????????[??????? AUTO]??
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
???????????
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1
101
???????(????????)
???????????? 8 ?????
???? ??
???*
??????????
???????
AUTO
??/???????????????????????
?????????????????????????
??????????????????
??
??(??)????????????
??
???????????????????
???
?????????????????
???
?????????????????
????
?????????(GP.102)?
????
???-??-?????????? 16 ??????
????????(GP.103)?
* ????? DIRECT ????????????
1 ?????????[????????]?????Fn2 ?
?????
2 +/-????[M]?[CT]???????
• ?????????????????????????????1
102
???????(????????)
3 MENU/OK ??????
• ?????????????????
?????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
???????ADJ. ?????????????????????
(GP.153)?
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
• ???????????[AUTO]???????????????
??????????[AUTO]????????????????
• ?????????????[??????? AUTO]??????
???????[AUTO]????????
???????????????(????)
1 ??????????? ADJ. ??????????????
[M]?????
2 ????????????????
???????????
3 DISP. ??????
• ?????????????????
????????
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1
103
???????(????????)
4 MENU/OK ??????
• ?????????????????
?????
• ?????????????????
? 1 ~ 3 ?????????????
????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
????????????????? 1 ?[M]?????????
???????????????(????)
1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ADJ. ?
?????????????[CT]
?????DISP. ??????
• ?????????????????
??????
2 +/-??????????
3 MENU/OK ??????
4 MENU/OK ??????
• ?????????????????
?????
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1
104
???????(????????)
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
????????????????? 1 ?[CT]?????????
????????????????
(??????????)
????????(GP.67)?[??????????]????
??????????????
[????????](GP.100)?????????????????
????(???????????????????????)??
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
??????
1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?[ ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ] ? ? ? ??
Fn2 ??????
• ????????????????????????
2 ???????????????
???????????????
• ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ?
????????????????
• ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ?
????????????????
• ????????????????
??DISP. ?????????
• ????????????????
? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
? DISP. ?????????
• ????????????????
?????????????
???
????
???
????
????
???
????
???
????1
105
???????(????????)
3 MENU/OK ??????
• ??????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ???????????[ADJ. ???
??1/2/3/4(]GP.153)?[WB
? ? ] ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??ADJ.
??????[WB ??]?????
MENU/OK ????????????
?????????????????
? ? ? ? ?[ ? ? ? ? ] ? ? ? ? ?
MENU/OK ????????????
?????????
• [Fn1 ? ? ? ? ? ] ? ? ?[Fn2 ? ? ? ? ? ](GP.155) ?[WB
??]???????????Fn(???????)1 ??? Fn2
????????????????????????????
• ?????????[??]????????????
• ??????[??????????](GP.124)???????
?????
??????????????????
?????????????
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1
106
???????(????????)
?????????(ISO ??)
????????(GP.67)?[ ISO ??]??? ADJ. ?????
ISO ??????????
?????????????????
???? ??
AUTO*
1 ??/???/???/??·?????????
????????????????
AUTO-HI
(????????)
???????????????????????
??[AUTO]??????????????????
[AUTO-HI]? ISO ??????????????
? ? ? ?[ISO AUTO-HI ? ? ] ? ? ? ? ? ?
(GP.162)
ISO(??)*
2 ???? ISO ?????????
*1 ????????????????????? ISO ????????
???????????????????????????????
????????????????
*2 ????? ISO ?????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
ISO ?????? ---------------------------------------------------------
ISO ???????????????????????????ISO
???????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
•[AUTO]???[AUTO-HI]?????????????????
? ISO ???????????????? ISO ?????????
?????(??????????)?
• ISO ????????????????????????1
107
???????(????????)
1 ?????????[ISO ??]?????Fn2 ?????
?
2 +/-???????????
3 MENU/OK ??????
• ??????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
???????ADJ. ???? ISO ???????????(GP.153)?
????????????????
(???????)
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
(GP.67)?[???????]???????
1 ???????? 5 ????? MENU/OK ??????
2 ?????????[?????
??]?????Fn2 ?????
?
• ????????????????
3 [??]????????????
????MENU/OK ??????
• ??????????????????????????????
?????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
??????????????P.68 ??????????1
108
???????(????????)
???????????????????
(???????)
A(????)???(GP.58)?????????????(GP.67)
?[???????]?[ON]?????????????????
?????????????????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
???????? A ?????????????[???????]
?????????
???????????????????
?????(???????)
????????(GP.67)?[????
???]??????????????
(GP.66)?????????????
??????????????????
?????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
???????? MY1 ~ MY3 ?????????????[????
???]????????????[??????????]????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? MY1 ~
MY3 ?????????[???????]?????????1
109
???????(????????)
??????????????
(?????)
????????(GP.67)?[?????]? ON ???????
??????????????
????????????????E???????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ????????????????????????????
• ??????????????????????????? 1 ??
??????????????????????????????
????????????????? ? ????????????
???????????? 1 ???????? ?E?F???
??????
• ??????????????????????????????
3[??]?????E?????????
• ?????(??????????????)?????????
????????????
• ???????????????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
????????????J???????????2
110
???????
2 ???????
???????
??????????????????????
1 6(??)??????
• ??????????????????????????????
???
• ??????????? 1 ?????????????????
2 ??????????
• 3 ????????????????
???????
3 ADJ. ??????
• ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??
?????????????????
??????????
??? ???? z ?????????
???? ???? Z ?????????
????/?? ADJ. ??????
????? ?????? z ?????????
????? ?????? Z ?????????
????????? ?????? z ??????
????????? ?????? Z ??????
??????? ???/??????+/-??????
2010 22010 2001100
2010 22010 20011002
111
???????
MP ???????
M ????????1 ???????????1 ?? MP ?????
????????MP ?????????????????????
???
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
?????????????????????????????
1 6(??)??????
2 ????? MP ????????
?
• S ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
MP ???????
3 ??????????????
z
ADJ.
???
Z
2 0 1 0 / 0 3 / 0 1 1 4 : 0 9 ISO 200
F 3.3
EV +1.0
1 / 5 5
?? 2 ?????
• DISP. ???????????????????
???????????
• z(????)??????????????
?????????????????
• ?????????????????????
???
2 0 1 0 / 0 3 / 0 1 1 4 : 0 9 F 3 . 3
6 / 6
1 5 5
z
ADJ.
???
Z
????
• MP ????????????????
• ?????????????????
• DISP. ?????????
2010/03/01 14:09 ISO 200
F 3.3
EV +1.0
1/55
2010/03/01 14:09 ISO 200
F 3.3
EV +1.02
112
???????
ADJ.
???
100-0001 110000--00000011
2010/01/01 22001100//0011//0011 02:33 0022::3333 ISO 200 IISSOO 220000 EV +1.0 EEVV ++11..00
F 3.3 FF 33..33 1/55 1/55
?????
• ???????????????1 ?????
???
• z ???????????????????
???
????? ???
2010/01/01 22001100//0011//0011 02:33 0022::3333 ISO 200 IISSOO 220000 EV +1.0 EEVV ++11..00
F 3.3 FF 33..33 1/55 1/55
100-0001 110000--00000011
???????
• ?????????????????????
???????????????
• ??????????????????????
????/?? ADJ. ??????
??? ???? z ?????????
???? ???? Z ?????????
????? ?????? z ?????????
????? ?????? Z ?????????
????????? ?????? z ??????
????????? ?????? Z ??????
????????? ?????? ADJ. ?????????
????????? ?????? ADJ. ?????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• MP ???????[DPOF]?[?????]?[???????]?[?
???](?????)?[?????]?[??????????]?
???????????
• MP ??????????[??????[??]]?[?????]
????????????????????? 1 ?????[??
????[??]]?[?????]??????????????
MP ????????????
• MP ??????1??????????????????2
113
???????
MP ?????????
M ?????????? MP ??????????????????
?????????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ?????????????????
• ??????????????????
1 6(??)??????
2 ?????? MP ???????
??
• S?????????????? MP
???????
• ???????????????z ?
?????????????????
3 ???????????
3 MENU/OK ??????
• ????????????????
4 +/-????[???????
?]????Fn2 ??????
2010/03/01 14:09 ISO 200
F 3.3
EV +1.0
1/55
2010/03/01 14:09 ISO 200
F 3.3
EV +1.02
114
???????
1 ?????
5 +/-????[1 ??]???
• Fn1 / Fn2 ????????????
??
6 MENU/OK ??????
??????????????
5 +/-????[????]????
MENU/OK ??????
• P.113 ??? 2 ??????????
?????? 5 ?????????
6 + / - ? ? ? ?[1 ? ? ? ? ? ]
????MENU/OK ??????
7 ???????MENU/OK ??????
• ADJ. ??????????????????????????P.115
??? 7 ????????????
8 ?? 7 ?????????????????
• ???????????????????? MENU/OK ?????
???????????
9 N ??????
10[??]????MENU/OK ??????2
115
???????
??????????????
5 +/-????[????]????
MENU/OK ??????
• P.113 ??? 2 ??????????
?????? 5 ?????????
6 +/-????[?????]?
???MENU/OK ??????
7 ???????????????????MENU/OK ???
???
• ????????????????????DISP. ????????
???????????????
• ADJ. ????????1 ???????????????????
??P.114 ??? 7 ????????????
8 ???????????????
????MENU/OK ??????
• ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??DISP. ?
????????????????
9 ?? 7?8 ???????????
??????
10N ??????
11[??]????MENU/OK ??????
????????
5 +/-????[???]????
MENU/OK ??????
6 [??]????MENU/OK ???
???
?????u?G ?????u?G
?? ??
?????u?G ?????u?G
?? ??3
116
?????????(????????)
3 ?????????(????????)
????????????
?????? MENU/OK ????????????????????
????
?????????????
1 6(??)????????????????
2 MENU/OK ??????
• ????????????????
3 +/-?????????????
??
• ???????-?????????
? DIRECT ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? - ? ?
??????????????????
4 Fn2 ??????
• ????????????????
??????????
???? ???
??????[??] P.117
??????[??] P.119
??????? P.119
????? P.120
????? P.121
?????????? P.124
???? P.125
???? ???
??????? P.127
????? P.127
???????????
????
P.130
DPOF P.131
???????? P.113
?????? P.134
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
????????????????????????????????
????(GP.144)?3
117
?????????(????????)
???????????????
(??????[??])
??????????????[??????[??]]?????
????[??????[??]]????????????????[?
?????[??]]???20 ??????????????????
1??????????/????
1 ????????????????????????MENU/
OK ??????
• ????????????????
2 [??????[??]]?????Fn2 ??????
3 [??]???[??]?????
4 MENU/OK ??????
• ??????????????? ??
?????????
????????????????
????????????3
118
?????????(????????)
?????????????/????
1 ?????? Z ??????
2 ??????????1???????????MENU/OK
??????
• ????????????????
3 [??????[??]]?????Fn2 ??????
• ????? ? ????? ???????????
4 ???????????????
?????MENU/OK ???
5 ? ? 4 ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ?
????????????????
?
• ?????????????????????? MENU/OK ???
???????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• [??????[??]]???????????????????
???????[??????[??]]???????????
• ?????????? SD ???????????????????
??[??????[??]]???????????
• SD ??????????????[??????[??]]???
????SD ?????????[CLIPINFO]??????? CLIP.
CLI ???????????????????????[?????
?[??]]??????????????
• ????????????????????????[??????
[??]]???????????????
• [??????[??]]???????????????????
????????
???????? ???????? ????
?? ??+?
???????? ???????? ???? 4:3 N
?? ??+?
4:3 N 3
119
?????????(????????)
[??????[??]]????????
??(??????[??])
?????????[??????[??]]???????[?????
?[??]]????????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• [??????[??]]???????????????????
??????????????????
• ???????????????? 6 ????????????
???????
• [??????[??]]?????????????????????
?????????????????????
• [??????[??]]?????????????????N ?
??????????????????????????
• ???????????????????+/-/ Fn1 / Fn2 ??
???????/?????????????????
??????????(???????)
????????(GP.116)?[???????]???????
???????????????????????????????
???????
[??·???]??? ????????
L?M?5M?3M 1M?VGA
1M VGA
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ?????????????????
• RAW ??????????????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• 16:9 ??? 3:2 ???????????????????????
4:3 ????????????????
• 1:1 ??????????????????????? 4:3 ????
????????????
• ?????????????????(GP.71)?3
120
?????????(????????)
???????????(?????)
???????????????????????????????
?????
1 ??????????????????????MENU/OK
??????
• ????????????????
2 [?????]?????Fn2 ??
????
• [?????]??????????
• ??????????????????
DISP. ?????????
3 z / Z ???????????????????????
• t ?????????????????????????????
4 ???????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
????
5 MENU/OK ??????
• ?????????????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ????????????????????????????
• ???M ?????????????????????????
• RAW ???(GP.71)???????????????? JPEG ??
??????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
?????????????3
121
?????????(????????)
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????????????? Fine ??????
• ??????????????????????????????
????z ???????????????? 1 ????????
??? 13 ???????????
• ??????????????????????????????
?(??????????)??????????
?????????????????
(?????)
????????(GP.116)?[?????]?????????
?????????????[AUTO]???[MANUAL]????
????????[MANUAL]?????????(GP.54)???
?????????????
???????
1 ????????????????????????MENU/
OK ??????
• ????????????????
2 [?????]?????Fn2 ??
????3
122
?????????(????????)
3 [AUTO] ? ? ? ??Fn2 ? ? ? ?
??
• ?????????????????
????
• ?????????????????
?????????????????
??????????????
• ??????????????????DISP. ?????????
4 MENU/OK ??????
• ??????????????????????????????
???????????
???????
1 ????????????????????????MENU/
OK ??????
• ????????????????
2 [?????]?[MANUAL]?????Fn2 ??????
• ?????????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
??????????????????
• ??????????????????DISP. ?????????
3 ADJ. ?????????????
????????????
• ?????????????????
???????(??)???????
???(???)?????????
????????ADJ. ????????
? ?? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??????
• ????? N ?????????????????????????
?? N ??????????????????
4 Fn1 / Fn2 ???????????????????????
• ???????????????????????????????
???? ????3
123
?????????(????????)
5 MENU/OK ??????
• ??????????????????????????????
???????????
????? -----------------------------------------------------------------
? 1)??????????????????:
• ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
?????????????????
• ???????????????????
???????????
? 2)??????????????????
????????:
• ???????????????????
???????????????????
?????
• ???????????????????
???????????????????
?????
• ???????????????????
??????????????????
? 3)??????????????????
??:
• ???????????????????
???????????????????
???????????????????
???????????????????
???
• ??????????????????????????????
???????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ????????????????????????????
• ???M ?????????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
????????
?????????3
124
?????????(????????)
?????????????
(??????????)
????????(GP.116)?[??????????]????
?????????(????(G)?????(M)????(B)?
????(A))????????????
1 ???????????????????????????
??MENU/OK ??????
• ????????????????
2 [??????????]?????
Fn2 ??????
• ??????????????????
??????????????????
?????????????????
3 ???????????????
???????????????
?
• ?????????????????
???????????????
• ?????????????????
???????????????
• ??????????????????DISP. ?????????
• ??????????????????????????????
??? DISP. ?????????
• ????? N ?????????????????????????
?? N ??????????????????
4 MENU/OK ??????
• ??????????????????????????????
???????????3
125
?????????(????????)
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????????????????????????
???
• ???M ?????????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
?????????????
???????????????
(????)
????????(GP.116)?[????]??????????
???????????????????????????????
??????????
1 ???????????????????????MENU/
OK ??????
• ????????????????
2 [????]?????Fn2 ???
???
• ?????????????????
??????????? 5 ?????
?????????????
• ?????????????????
???????????????
• ????????????????Fn2 ????????????
??????????????
• ??????????????+?????????
3 MENU/OK ??????
• ??????????????????????????????
???????????3
126
?????????(????????)
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ???????????????????????????
• ???M ????????????????????????
• RAW ???(GP.71)???????????????? JPEG ??
?????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ?????????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
?????????????????(GP.119)????????
?????
• ????????????????????????????????
?????????????????????
??? ????
L ? 24 ?
M ? 18 ?
5M ? 12 ?
3M ? 8 ?
1M ? 5 ?
VGA ? 2 ?
• ???????????[????]?????????????
??????????(GP.65)?3
127
?????????(????????)
??????????(???????)
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?( ? ? ? ?
???)?????
?????????[???????]?
Fn2 ?????????????????
?????
???????????????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ??
?????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ???? 3 ?????????
• ???1????????????????????????????
?????????????(?????)
????????(GP.116)?[?????]??????????
???????????(?????)?????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
???????????????????????????????
???
1 ????????????
1 ??????????????????????MENU/OK
??????
• ????????????????
2 [?????]?????Fn2 ??
????3
128
?????????(????????)
3 [1 ????]?????????
? ? ? ? ? ??MENU/OK ? ? ?
???
• Fn1 / Fn2 ????????????
????????
• ?????????????????
????????
• ????????????????? 1
?????????????????
??????????????????
?????????????
??????????????????
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????
?????????
1 ?????????[?????]?????Fn2 ??????
2 [????]?????MENU/OK
??????
• ?????????????????
????????????
3 [1 ?????]?????MENU/
OK ??????
4 ?????????????? MENU/OK ??????
• ??????????????????????????????
????
• ??????????????????????????
• ??????????????????????? MENU/OK ??
?????????
• ADJ. ?????????????????????????(GP.129)?
2010 2010
2.5 2.5
200 200
4:3 N 44::33 NN
2010 2010
2.5 2.5
200 200
4:3 N 44::33 NN 3
129
?????????(????????)
5 N ??????
• ??????????????????????????????
?????
?????????
1 ?????????[?????]?????Fn2 ?????
?
2 [????]?????MENU/OK ??????
• ?????????????????????????????
3 [?????]?????MENU/OK ??????
4 ???????????????
???? MENU/OK ??????
• ?????????????????
?????????????????
• ?????????????DISP. ??
???????????????
• ADJ. ???????????????
??????????(GP.128)?
5 ???????????????
???? MENU/OK ??????
• ?? 4 ? 5 ????????????
???????
• ?????????????????
?????????????????
??
6 N ??????
• ??????????????????????????????
?????
4:3 N
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 3
130
?????????(????????)
??????????????/????
???????????????????????????????
???
1 ?????????[?????]
?????Fn2 ??????
2 [???????]???[???
????]?????
3 MENU/OK ??????
• ?????????????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
?????????????????
????????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
?????
(???????????????)
????????(GP.116)?[???????????????]
??????????????????????????????
???????
1 ?????????????
• ???????????????????P.27 ????????3
131
?????????(????????)
2 ?????????[??????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?] ? ? ? ??
Fn2 ??????
• ??????????????????
?????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
???[??]????????????????[???]??
??? MENU/OK ????????????
• ???????????????????????????
?????????????
( DPOF:?????)
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
???????????(GP.116)?[DPOF]???????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
RAW????????????JPEG???????DPOF???????
DPOF ?? -----------------------------------------------------------------
DPOF(Digital Print Order Format)????????????????
????????????????????????????????
??????????? DPOF????????????????
?????????? DPOF ??/????
1 ????????????????????MENU/OK ??
????
• ????????????????3
132
?????????(????????)
2 [DPOF]?????Fn2 ????
??
3 [1 ? ? ? ? ] ? ? ? ? ??
MENU/OK ??????
• Fn1 / Fn2 ????????????
????
• DPOF ????????? DPOF ??
??????????????DPOF
?????????????????
?????
???????? DPOF ??/????
??????????? DPOF ?????????????????
???
1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?[DPOF] ?
????Fn2 ??????
2 [???????]???[???
????]?????3
133
?????????(????????)
3 MENU/OK ??????
• DPOF ????????? DPOF ????????????????
DPOF ??????????????????????
??????? DPOF ????
??????????????? DPOF ?????????????
???????
1 ??????????????MENU/OK ??????
• ????????????????
2 [DPOF]?????Fn2 ????
??
3 Fn1 / Fn2 ???? DPOF ??????????????+
/-?????????????
• DPOF ????????? DPOF ????????????????
• DPOF ???????????????????
4 MENU/OK ??????
• ??????????????????????????????
?????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ???????? DPOF ???????????????????
?????????????[0]????? MENU/OK ????
?????
• ??????? DPOF ??????????????(GP.132)?3
134
?????????(????????)
?????????????
(??????)
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
?????????????
• ?????
• ??????????????????
• DPOF????????????????????????????
???????????????????
• DPOF ?????????????
• ????????? SD ?????????????
• [??????[??]]???????????
• [????????]? MP ?????????
1 ?????????[?????
?]????Fn2 ???
• ?????????????????
• ?????????????????
??????????????
2 [??]????MENU/OK ??????
• ????????????????????3
135
?????????(????????)
?????????
??? AV ??????????????????????????
????????????????
1 ????????????AV??
???????????
• AV ?????????????????
?(??)?????????????
??(??)???????????
2 ??????????????????????
3 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? AV ? ? ? ?
? AV ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
?
4 ????????????????????(????????
??????)
• ?????????????????????
5 ??????? ON ??????
??????6(??)????
? 1 ?????????????
????????
??????(??)
??????(??)3
136
?????????(????????)
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ????????????????????????????(?
????)?????????????????
• AV ????????????????????
• AV ?????????????????????????????
• AV ??????????AV ?????????????????
????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ???? DVD ?????????????? AV ????????
????????????? DVD ?????????????
• ???? HDMI ??????(???)?????HDMI ????
??????????????????????????????
???????
• HDMI ???????????/?????????1 ?????
???????????????????
• HDMI ???????????????????????????
??????????????
• ?????????????????NTSC ??(???????
???????)?????????????????PAL??(??
???????????????)?????PAL ???????
???????(GP.173)??????????????????
??????4
137
??????????????
4 ??????????????
???????????????
?????????????????????? USB ???????
???????????????????????????????
??????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??(.AVI)??????????
• RAW ??????????????????? JPEG ??????
???????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????????????????? PictBridge(?
??????)?????????
• ??????????????????????? PictBridge ??
??????????????????????????????
?????4
138
??????????????
??????????????
?????????????????? USB ???????????
1 ??????????????????????
2 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
USB ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??????? ADJ. ??????
• ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ?
????????????
• ?????????????????
[????...]??????????
2 ???? ADJ. ?????????
??????????????2 ??
??????[PC ??? ...]???
? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
?????1????????????
• ????????????????
????????
• [???···]???????????
?????????????????
??
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• USB ????????????????????
• USB ?????????????????????????????
• USB ??????????USB ????????????????
?????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
USB ?????????????????????????????
??????????????????4
139
??????????????
????????
PictBridge ???????????????????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??
???????????????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
??????????USB ???????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
????[????????]?????????????????
???????????????????????????
1 ????????????????
1 ????????????????? Fn1 / Fn2 ?????
???????????????
2 ADJ. ?????????????
?????[1 ????]???[?
????]?????
3 MENU/OK ??????
• ?????????????????
?????4
140
??????????????
4 ???????Fn2 ??????
???????
• ?????????????????
?????????????????
?????????????????
??[???????]???????
??????????(???)??
??????
???? ??
????? ?????????????
???? ????????????
????? 1????????????????1????????
??????????????????????????
???? ??(???)?????????????????
????????????????????????
?????????????(GP.98)????????
??????????? OFF ???????????
??????? ??????????????????
???? ?????(???)??????????????
???????????
??????? ?????????????????
???? ???????????
????* ?????????(GP.143)?
???? ???????????
??????* ?????????????????????????
??/??* ???????????????[??]???????
????????????????????????
??????? 1 ???????P. 1 4 1 ??? 3 ???
????????????1 ??????????
* ?????????????????????????????
?????????????????????????????
????(http://www.ricoh.co.jp/office/)????????
5 ?????????MENU/OK ??????
• ????????????????????
• ?? 4 ? 5 ???????????????????????4
141
??????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
? ? 4 ? ? ? ? ADJ. ? ? ? ? ? ? ??
??????????????????
??????????????????
??[??]??????MENU/OK ?
???????????[???]??
???????????????????
??????????????
6 MENU/OK ??????
• ??????????????[??? ...]??????????
• ?????????????DISP. ????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
???????????????
???????????
1 ??????????????? Z(???????)??
????????????
2 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??
MENU/OK ??????
3 ??????????????????
• Fn1 / Fn2 ????????????????+/-??????
?????????
• ???????? ????????
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 4
142
??????????????
4 MENU/OK ??????
• ?????????????????
?????
5 ???????Fn2 ?????????????
• ?????????????P.140 ????????
6 ?????????MENU/OK ??????
• ????????????????????
• ?? 5 ? 6 ???????????????????????
7 MENU/OK ??????
• ????????????????????????????
?????????????
• ??????????????[??? ...]??????????
• ?????????????DISP. ????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
??????????4
143
??????????????
??????
???????????????[????]??????????
[????]??[?????]?[A4]?????PictBridge ???
??????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????(http://
www.ricoh.co.jp/office/)????????
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????????
???????????
1 ?????? 2 ?????? 3 ?????? 4 ??????
1 ?????? 2 ?????? 3 ?????? 4 ??????
???? 1 ???? 1 ???? 1 ~ 10
??????
1 ?????? 2 ?????? ???? 15
144
??????????(??????)
5 ??????????(??????)
??????????
????????(GP.67)?????????(GP.116)??
???????????????????????????????
????
???????????????????????????????
????????
?????????
1 ?????????????? MENU/OK ??????
• ???????????????????????????
• ??????????[MODE]??????????
2 Fn1 ?????????????
????
• ?????????????
3 +/-????????????
• ?????????????????
? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??
??????????????????
4 Fn2 ???????????????
5 +/-???????????????
• ???????-?????????? DIRECT ????????
?-????????????????????
6 Fn2 ??????
• ????????????????
7 +/-????????????
??????????
????????5
145
??????????(??????)
8 MENU/OK ??????????
Fn1 ??????? MENU/OK ?
?????
• ???????????????
• ?????????????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ??
?? MENU/OK ???????????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
???????????????????????????????
?????????????????
??????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
?????????????????????????????
?????????????????????????????
????????????????
???? ????? ???
?????????? - P.147
???????????? - P.149
?????????? - P.150
Fn ??? MY ?? OFF P.152
??????????? MY ?? OFF P.152
ADJ. ????? 1 ???????? P.153
ADJ. ????? 2 ISO P.153
ADJ. ????? 3 ?? P.153
ADJ. ????? 4 ???? P.153
ADJ?????????? OFF P.154
Fn1????? AF/MF P.155
Fn2????? ??????? P.155
+-????? ???? P.157
????? ?????? ?? 1 P.158
M ??? ?????? ?? 1 P.158
M ??????????? ???? P.1595
146
??????????(??????)
??????????????
???? ????? ???
???[???] - P.160
???[??????] - P.160
?????????? - P.161
DIRECT ????? ?? P.161
??·???????? 1/3EV P.162
ISO AUTO-HI ?? AUTO 400 P.162
AF ??? ON P.162
???? 5 ? P.163
???????? 5 ? P.163
??????? LCD P.164
???????? ON P.164
?????? 0.5? P.164
??? ??? P.165
??????? ?[( )] P.165
???????????? 9.8 ? P.166
???????? ON P.166
???????? ?? P.167
????? ???? P.167
??????????? P.168
Fn ??????? ON P.168
???????????? OFF P.169
?????????? OFF P.169
CL-BKT ?? (TE) ON P.169
????? sRGB P.170
????????? ?? P.170
???????????? OFF P.171
????? NO. ON P.172
???? - P.173
Language /??* ??? P.173
?????* NTSC P.173
HDMI ?? AUTO P.174
????????? ??? P.174
* ?????????????????????5
147
??????????(??????)
????????????
(??????????)
??????????(GP.145)?[??????????]???
???????????????????????????????
????????????????????
?????????[???????? BOX]? 6?????????
??????[MY1]?[MY2]?[MY3]?????????(GP.149)?
?????????????
1 ?????????????????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
?????????????????????
?????
• ?????(5/P/A/S/M/SCENE)• A / M ????????
• S / M ???????????? • MF ?????????
• ????????????? • ????????
• ?????? • DISP. ???
• ???????
??????????/???????????(GP.145?146)
• Fn1?????/ Fn2????? * • +-?????
• ISO AUTO-HI ?? • ??·????????
• ???????? • ?????
• ??????????? • ??????????
• CL-BKT ?? (TE) • ?????????
* [Fn1 ?????]???[Fn2 ?????]??[Fn ??? MY
??](GP.152)?[ON]????????????????
??????????
????????(GP.67)
[????????]?[???????]?[???????]???
??????????????[??????????]??[??
????????? MY ??](GP.152)?[ON]???????
????????????????5
148
??????????(??????)
2 ???????????[????
??????]????? Fn2 ?
?????
3 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??MENU/
OK ??????
• [MY1]?[MY2]?[MY3]?????
?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
????????
• ???????? BOX ??????
?[???????? BOX]???
? ? Fn2 ? ? ?? ? ?[1] ~[6]
????????????????
??
• ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??? ? ?
_Set????????????
• ????????????????
? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
???[??]??????????
???????????????[?
??]?????????? _Set??
??????????
• ?????????DISP. ?????
???????
• ???????????????????????????????5
149
??????????(??????)
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? BOX
?????????
(????????????)
??????????(GP.145)?[????????????]
???????????[MY1]~[MY3]????????????
??????????? BOX ?????????????
1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??
Fn2 ??????
2 ???????? BOX ?????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??MENU/OK
??????
• ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
?????????????????
?????????
• ?????????DISP. ??????
??????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
MY1 ~ MY3 ????????? BOX ??????????????
???? BOX ????????(GP.150)? MY1 ~ MY3 ???
????????????5
150
??????????(??????)
?????????????
(??????????)
??????????(GP.145)?[??????????]???
MY1 ~ MY3 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
BOX ????????????????????????
1 ???????????????
???Fn2 ??????
• [MY1]?[MY2]?[MY3]??????
??????????????
• ???????? BOX ??????
???????????????[?
? ? ? ? ? ? ? BOX] ? ? ? ? ?
Fn2 ? ? ?? ? ?[1] ~[6] ? ?
??????
2 ????????????Fn2 ?
?????
• +/-?????????????
• ?????????????????
????????????
• [??????????]???????
??????????????????(GP.151)?
3 Fn1 ???????????
• ??????????????? 2 ? 3 ????????
4 MENU/OK ??????
• ??????????????????????????????
?????5
151
??????????(??????)
???????????????? -----------------------------------
??????????????[??????????]???????
????????????????????
1 ?????????????[?
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ] ? ? ? ??
Fn2 ??????
• [??????????]??????
?????????????????
?????????????
• ?????????????????
?????????????????
????????????????????????????? 3
?????????
2 ?????????????????????????Fn1
/ Fn2 ??????
• ???????????????????????????????
??????????
3 -?????????????????????
4 +/-/ Fn1 / Fn2 ??????
? ? ? ??MENU/OK ? ? ? ? ?
???
• ?????????????????
???????????
• ?????????????????
?????????????????
?????[??]??????
• t ?????????????????????????????
??????
• ??????????? 16 ????? 32 ???????
• ????????????????DISP. ????????????
???????
??????? ???????5
152
??????????(??????)
5 ADJ. ??????
• ??????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
MY1 ~ MY3 ????????? BOX ??????????????
???? BOX ????????? MY1 ~ MY3 ?????????
??????
MY1 ~ MY3 ????????????????????? BOX ??
???????????????????????????? BOX ?
?????????MY1 ~ MY3 ????????????????
????????? Fn ????????
?????????(Fn ??? MY ??)
??????????(GP.145)?[ Fn ??? MY ??]?[ON]
???????????????????????????????
?????(GP.155)?????????????????
???????????????????
??????????????
(??????????? MY ??)
??????????(GP.145)?[??????????? MY
??]?[ON]???????????????????????
??????????(GP.104)??????????5
153
??????????(??????)
ADJ. ???????????
(ADJ. ?????)
??????????(GP.145)?[ADJ. ????? 1]~[ADJ.
????? 4]? ADJ. ?????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
??????
??????????????
???? ???
OFF -
???? P. 9 9
???????? ?????[ADJ. ????? 1]??? P.100
WB ?? P.104
ISO ?????[ADJ. ????? 2]??? P.106
?? ?????[ADJ. ????? 3]??? P. 7 1
????? P. 7 4
???? ?????[ADJ. ????? 4]??? P. 8 3
?? P. 8 2
?? P. 8 6
???????? P. 8 8
???? P. 9 2
??????? P. 3 9
??????
???????????????????????????????
?????
?????? ????
?? ????????
???? ?????????????5
154
??????????(??????)
???????????
1 ?????? ADJ. ??????
• ADJ. ????????????
2 ADJ. ????????????Fn1 / Fn2 ???????
?????????
• ???????[ADJ. ????? 1]~[ADJ. ????? 4]?[?
???????]?[ISO]?[??]?[????]?????????
???
ADJ. ????? 1 ADJ. ????? 2
ADJ. ????? 4 ADJ. ????? 3
3 +/-??????????
4 ADJ. ?????? MENU/OK ???????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
ADJ. ??????????????????????????
ADJ. ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
?????(ADJ ??????????)
??????????(GP.145)?[ ADJ. ??????????]
?[ON]?????????????????????? ADJ. ??
????????????5
155
??????????(??????)
??????????????????
(Fn1 ?????/ Fn2 ?????)
Fn(???????)1 ??? Fn2 ?????????????Fn1
??? Fn2 ???????????????????????????
????????
Fn1 ??? Fn2 ????????????????????????
(GP.145)?[ Fn1 ?????]???[Fn2 ?????]??????
????? Fn1 ????[AF/MF]?Fn2 ???
?[???????]??????????
????Fn1 ??? Fn2 ?????????????????????
???????????????[Fn1 ?????]???[Fn2 ?
????]??????????Fn1 ??? Fn2 ?????????
??????
????
5?
M?
S?
A?
P
??????
???
??
?????
?
??
?
?
?? ??
????
AF/MF ? ? ? P.156
AF/ ???? ? ? ? ? ? ? P.156
AE ??? ? ? ? ? ? ? P.156
JPEG ? RAW ? ? ? ? ? P.156
?????? ? ? P.156
???? TE ? ? P.156
???? ? ? ? ? ? ? P.99
???????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? P.100
WB ?? ? ? P.104
ISO ? ? P.1065
156
??????????(??????)
????
5?
M?
S?
A?
P
??????
???
??
?????
?
??
?
?
?? ??
????
?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? P.71
????? ? ? ? ? ? ? P.74
???? ? ? P.83
?? ? ? P.82
?? ? P.86
???????? ? P.88
???????? ? ? ? P.79
???? ? ? ? ? ? P.92
??????? ? P.39
???????????????????
???? ??
AF/MF*
1
[?????](GP.74)???????????? AF
??????? AF?MF ??????????????
??????? AF ? MF???????? AF ? MF ?
?????????
AF/ ????
[?????](GP.74)???????????? AF
??????? AF??????????????????
???????? AF ????????????? AF ?
??????????????
AE ???*
2
?????(AE ???)??????AE ??????
??????????????AEL???????????
??????????????
JPEG ? RAW*
3 [??·???](GP.71)? RAW ?????????
?????????? RAW ??????????
??????
[????](GP.83)?[??]??????????
???[??]??????????
???? TE
[????](GP.83)?[?? (TE)]????????
?????[?? (TE)]??????????5
157
??????????(??????)
*1 ????????????????????(GP.35)??????
MF??????????????MF???????????????
???????????????????
*2 ???????????? AE ???????????Fn1 ??? Fn2
??????????????(????????????????)
???????????????????????????????
???????????????
*3 RAW ????????????????[??·???]?????
??????????????
[??·???]??? Fn1 ??? Fn2 ???
L(16:9)?M(16:9)?5M?3M?
1M?VGA
RAW(16:9)
L(4:3)?M(4:3) RAW(4:3)
L(3:2)?M(3:2) RAW(3:2)
L(1:1)?M(1:1) RAW(1:1)
????????????????????????
[????]~[???????]????????????????
???????????????????????????????
+/-???????????
(+-?????)
??????????(GP.145)?[+-?????]???????
???+/-???????????????????
???? ??
OFF ?
????????? P.92
??????? P.93
???? P.995
158
??????????(??????)
ADJ. ???/?????????????
??????(????? ??????/
M ??? ??????)
??????????(GP.145)?[????? ??????]?
????????? ADJ. ???????????????????
??????
???? ADJ. ??? ??????????
?? 1 ???????? ???????
?? 2 ???????? ????????
[ M??? ??????]??????????????? ADJ.???
??????????????????????
???? ADJ. ??? ??????????
?? 1 ??????????? ????
?? 2 ???? ???????????5
159
??????????(??????)
???????????????????
??????????????????
(M ???????????)
??????????(GP.145)?[ M ???????????]
???????????????????????????????
????????????????????
M ?????????????????????????????
• [+-?????](GP.157)?+/-????[????]??
?
• [Fn1 ?????]???[Fn2 ?????](GP.155)? Fn(??
?????)1 ??? Fn2 ????[AE ???]???
???? ??
???? +/-?????? Fn1 ??? Fn2 ?????????
?????????????????????????
?????????
??????? +/- ? ? ? ? ? ? Fn1 ? ? ? Fn2 ? ? ? ? ? ? ??
?????????????????????????
??????????
????? +/-?????? Fn1 ? ? ? Fn2 ? ? ? ? ? ? ??
??????????????????????????
????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
[+-?????]?+/-????[????]???????[Fn1
?????]???[Fn2 ?????]? Fn1 ??? Fn2 ????[AE
???]????????????????????? M ?????
???????????????????5
160
??????????(??????)
???????/????????????
(???[???]/???[??????])
???????????
???????????????(GP.146)?[???[???]]
????????????????????????
• ?????????????????
• ?????????????????????????????
• [????????????]???????????????????
??????????
[?????????????????]?????????????
??????????????(GP.146)?[???[??????]]
??????????????????
???????/???????????????????????
????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
?????(GP.175)???????????????????
• ?????????????????[???[???]]????
????????????????????????????????
??????????????????
????????????????????????? -----------
• ????????????????LOCK????????????
???????????????(GP.28)?
• ?LOCK????????????????????????5
161
??????????(??????)
???????????????
(??????????)
????????(GP.146)?[??????????]????
?????????????????
1 +/-????????????
• ?????????????????
?????????????????
?????
2 ??????????????MENU/OK ??????
• ????????????????
3 MENU/OK ??????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
??????[??????????]?????????????
?????????????????[??????????]??
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
DIRECT ??????????
(DIRECT ?????)
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?(GP.146) ?[DIRECT ? ? ? ? ? ] ? ??
DIRECT ????????????????????
????
?? ?? ?? ?? OFF5
162
??????????(??????)
???????????????????
?(??·????????)
????????(GP.146)?[??·????????]???
????????????????????????????
????
1/2EV 1/3EV
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
???????????????????[??·????????]
?[1/2EV]????????[1/3EV]??????????
ISO AUTO-HI ???????
(ISO AUTO-HI ??)
????????(GP.146)?[ ISO AUTO-HI ??]??????
??????[ISO ??]?????[AUTO-HI](????????)
(GP.106)? ISO ?????????????
????
AUTO 200 AUTO 400 AUTO 800 AUTO1600 AUTO3200
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
ISO ????????????????????????
AF ??????????(AF ???)
????????(GP.146)?[ AF ???]?[ON]???????
????????????????????????? AF ????
????AF ????????5
163
??????????(??????)
???????????(????)
????????(GP.146)?[????]??????????
????????????????????????????????
????????/?????????????????????
?????????????????????
????
OFF 1 ? 5 ? 30 ?
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????????????????
• ??????????????????????????/??
?????????????????
• ??????? OFF ??????6(??)????????
??(GP.30)
• ??????????????????????????????
????
???????????????
(????????)
????????(GP.146)?[????????]??????
?????????(????????)??????????
????
OFF 1 ? 5 ? 30 ?
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
??????
• ??????????????????????????????
?????????????????5
164
??????????(??????)
?????????????
(???????)
??????????(GP.146)?[???????]?????
?????????(VF-2)??????????????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ?
?????????????????????[???????]?
????????????????????????????
???? ??
LCD ??????????????????
VF ???????????????????????
????????????????
??????????(????????)
????????(GP.146)?[????????]?[ON]?
??????????????????????????? 5 ???
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
?????
??????????(??????)
????????(GP.146)?[??????]????????
???????????????????????
????
OFF 0.5 ? 1 ? 2 ? 3 ? HOLD
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
[HOLD]???????????????????????????
?????????????????????????(GP.48)?
?????(GP.49)?????5
165
??????????(??????)
??????????(???)
????????(GP.146)?[???]???????????
??????
???????????????? 5 ?????
??? ????????????????
?????? ????????????????????
??????
?????
???????????????????????????
?????????????
??? ??????????????????????????
?????????
???? [?????]?[??+?]???[???]?????
????(GP.42)?????????????????
????????????????????
???? ??
??? ???????????
???? ?????????
?????? ????????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
???????????????????[???]????????
??????????
??????????(???????)
????????(GP.146)?[???????]???????
??????????
????
(??) (???) (???) (???)5
166
??????????(??????)
???????????????????
??(????????????)
????????(GP.146)?[????????????]???
?????? ADJ. ?????????????(GP.48)????
?????? MENU/OK ???????????????(GP.48)
?????????????
????
5.7 ? 9.8 ? 16 ?
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????????????????????????
??????(GP.48)?
• ??????????????????????????????
?????????????????????????????
??????????????
(????????)
????????(GP.146)?[????????]??????
???????????????????????????????
???????????????
[ON]????????????????????????????
??????????5
167
??????????(??????)
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ???????[????????]?[ON]?????????
?????????????
• ?????????????????????
• ??
• M ????????????
• ???????(GP.46)
• ???????????????????????
• ???????????????????????
• ??????????????????
• ????????????????(GP.125)
• ????????????????[????????]?[ON]
??????????????????????????????
???????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
???????????????????1 ???????????
???????????
??????????????????
(????????)
????????(GP.146)?[????????]?[??]?
???????????????????????????????
?????????
?????????????(?????)
????????(GP.146)?[?????]?????????
???????????????????????????????
??????????????????P.42 ??????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ????????????????????????????
• [???????]?[ ](??)??????????[?
????]?[??+?]???[???]??????????
????????5
168
??????????(??????)
???????????
(???????????)
????????(GP.146)?[???????????]???
???????????????????????????????
?? P.52 ??????????
???? ??
??? 3 ??????3 ???????????
??????
??? 4 ??????????????????
??????????????????????
????????
??? 2 ??????????????????
??????????????????????
????????????????????
Fn ???????????
(Fn ???????)
????????(GP.146)?[ Fn ?
? ? ? ? ? ? ] ?[ON] ? ? ? ? ? ??
??????????????????
?? 2 ????????
?????
??????????????????
??????????
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 5
169
??????????(??????)
????????????????????
???????(????????????)
????????(GP.146)?[????
????????]?[ON]???????
? ? ? ? ? ? MY1 ~ MY3 ? ? ? ? ? ?
???????????????????
???????????????????
???????????????
(??????????)
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?(GP.146) ?[? ?
????????]?[ON]???????
??????????????(GP.52)
??????????????????
??????????????????
??????????????????
???????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
?????????????????????????
CL-BKT ?????????????
(CL-BKT ?? (TE))
[ ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ] ?[CL-BKT] ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
(GP.88)?????????? ( TE) ? 3 ????????????
2 ???????????????
????????(GP.146)?[ CL-BKT ?? ( TE)]?????/
???/?? (TE) ? 3 ?????????????/???? 2 ?
??????????????????????
2010 2010
4:3 N 44::33 NN
2010 2010
4:3 N 44::33 NN
4:3 N 5
170
??????????(??????)
???? ??
ON ?????????[????????]?[CL-BKT]???
??????/???/?? ( TE) ? 3 ???????????
OFF ?????????[????????]?[CL-BKT]???
??????/???? 2 ???????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
[CL-BKT ?? (TE)]?[OFF]????????????????[?
???]?[?? (TE)]?????????????/???/?? (TE)
? 3 ???????????
????????(?????)
????????(GP.146)?[?????]?????????
? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? sRGB ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
AdobeRGB ?????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????? AdobeRGB ???????????????????
Photoshop ?????????????????????????
????????????????
• AdobeRGB ?????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
??sRGB ???????????????????AdobeRGB ?
????????????·?????????????????
???????
• AdobeRGB ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??
AdobeRGB ?????????????????????????
??????????????????
?????????????
(?????????)
????????(GP.146)?[?????????]?[???
????]????? 8 / 9 ?????????????????
???????????????????????????????
??????(????)?????????5
171
??????????(??????)
????????????[??·???]?[L]? 4:3 ?????
????(GP.71)??????????
???? ??
?? ?????????????
??????? ????????????????????
?????????8 ????????
??1 ???????????????
??????????????????
?????????
?????????????? -----------------------------------------
• ??????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
?????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• M ?????????????[????]?????[????
???]???????????????????????????
• [??·???]? RAW ????????????????
????????????
(????????????)
????????(GP.146)?[????????????]?[ON]
???????????????????????????????
?????
4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 5
172
??????????(??????)
????????????(????? NO.)
????????????????????????????????
????????????????
????????(GP.146)?[????? NO.]?????????
???????????????????????????????
????????
???? ??
ON(?????) ?????????????R????? 7 ???
???(R0010001.jpg ~ R9999999.jpg)????
????????
???????????????????????
???????????????????????
????
OFF(??????)? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??
RIMG0001.jpg ~ RIMG9999.jpg ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??????
RIMG9999 ???????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????????????[????? NO.]?[OFF]
???????????????????
• [?????]?[AdobeRGB]?????????(GP.170)??
??????????_?(??????)??????
• DL-10 ?????????????(GP.184)?????????
??????????????[????? NO.]?[ON]???
?????????????RIMG****.jpg?(**** ???)???
?????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• [????? NO.]?[OFF]?????RIMG9999 ???????
?????????????????????????????
• [????? NO.]?[ON]???????????? 999 ???
????R9999999???????????????? 999?????
R***9999 ?????????????????????5
173
??????????(??????)
??·???????(????)
????????(GP.146)?[????]?????·????
?????????????? P.31 ??????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????? 1 ??????????????·???
????????????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
2 ??????????????
????????(Language /??)
????????(GP.146)?[ Language /??]??????
???????????????????
????
??? English(??)
?????????????(?????)
????????(GP.146)?[?????]?????? AV ??
???????????????????????????????
?(GP.135)???????????????
???? ??
NTSC ??????????????
PAL ?????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
SECAM ?????????????5
174
??????????(??????)
HDMI ???????????
(HDMI ??)
????????(GP.146)?[HDMI ??]???HDMI ????
??????????????????????????
????
AUTO MANUAL
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
????[AUTO]??????????[AUTO]?????????
???????????????????[MANUAL]??????
??????????????????????
???????????????????
????(?????????)
???????????????????????????????
????????
????????(GP.146)?[?????????]?????
?????????????????????????????
????
??? ???????6
175
????????????
6 ????????????
???????????????? OS ??????????
Windows ???????
Macintosh ???????? P.188 ????????
?????????????????? 2 ???????????
1 DL-10 ????????????????????????
????(GP.184)
• DL-10 ??????????? CD-ROM ????????????
??????????????(GP.179)?
2 DL-10 ????????????????????????
????(GP.185)
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
???????????????????????CD-ROM ????
??????????(???????)?????????????
????(???????)????????????P.178 ????
??????6
176
????????????
??? CD-ROM ???????????
??? CD-ROM ???????????????????
?????????????????????????????
?? OS Windows 2000 Professional Service Pack 4(??
??)
Windows XP Home Edition Service Pack 3(??
??)/Professional Service Pack 3(????)
Windows Vista Service Pack 2(????)
CPU W i n d o w s 2 0 0 0 / W i n d o w s X P:Pe n t i um ® ?
500MHz ??
Windows Vista:Pentium® ? 1GHz ??
???? Windows 2000/Windows XP:256MB ??
Windows Vista:512MB ??
??????????
??????????
160MB ??
?????????? 1024 × 768 ?????
?????????? 65000 ???
CD-ROM ???? ?????????????? CD-ROM ????
USB ??? ?????????????? USB ???
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• 64 ???????????????
• OS ????????????????????? USB ?????
????????????????????????
• OS ????????????????????????????
??????????????????
• ????(PCI ????)????????? USB ???????
???????????
• HUB ????? USB ????????????????????
???????????
• ??????????????????????????????
???????????????6
177
????????????
CD-ROM ???
??? CD-ROM ???????????
??????????????????
?????
??? ?? ???
??????????
???
??????????????????
??????????????????
???????????
P.178
?????(?????
??)???
??????(???????)?(PDF)
????????
P.178
CD-ROM ?????? ??? CD-ROM ???????????
?????
P.178
RICOH ??????? ??????????????????* -
RICOH ???????
???????
??????????????????
????????*
-
?????·?? ??????????????????
??????*
-
* ?????????????????????6
178
????????????
?????????????(GP.179)
?????????????????????
??????? ??
DL-10 ??????????????????
Irodio Photo &
Video Studio
?????????·??·???????
USB ????? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? Windows 98/Windows 98SE/
Windows Me/Windows 2000 ??????????
???????????????
WIA ????? ????????? Windows XP/Windows Vista ?
????????????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
Irodio Photo & Video Studio ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??Irodio Photo &
Video Studio ??????????????
Irodio Photo & Video Studio ??????????????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?(http://www.pixela.co.jp/oem/irodio/j/irodio_
digitalphoto_videostudio/)??????????
?????(???????)???
CD-ROM ????????(???????)?(PDF ????)?
??????
? ? ? ? ? ? Acrobat Reader ? ? ? Adobe Reader ? ? ? ? ??
Acrobat Reader ??? Adobe Reader ?????????????
????Adobe Reader ?????????????(GP.181)?
CD-ROM ??????
CD-ROM ???????????????????
CD-ROM ???[?????????????]?????????
?????????????????Adobe Reader ???????
?????????????P.181 ??????????
?Irodio Photo & Video Studio? ? ? ? ? ? ? Irodio Photo &Video
Studio.exe ????????????Irodio Photo & VideoStudio ?
?????????????6
179
????????????
?????????????????????????
????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ????????? USB ???????????????????
????????
• DC Software ?????????????? Caplio Software ??
??????????????????????
Caplio Software DC Software
RICOH Gate La DL-10
Caplio Viewer DU-10*
Caplio Server SR-10*
Caplio Setting ST-10*
* ????????????
??????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
????????
Caplio Viewer?Caplio Server?Caplio Setting ?????????
??????????????????????????????
???????????
• ??????????????????????????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
DU-10?SR-10?ST-10 ????????????(???????
???GP.183)?
• ????????????????????????RICOH Gate La
??? DL-10 ?[???????]??????????????
?????
• ????????????????????????????????
• DL-10 ???????????????????????????
????????????6
180
????????????
???? Windows XP ?????????????
1 ? ? ? ? ? CD-ROM ? ? ? ? ?
??? CD-ROM ??????
Windows Vista ??? OS ???
• ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??????????????
Windows Vista ???
• ??????????????
• [Autorun.exe ???]????????????????????
????????????????????
2 [?????????????]???????
Windows Vista ??? OS ???
• [???????]??????????
Windows Vista ???
• ????????????????????????
• ???????????????[??]??????????[?
??????]??????????
3 ???????[OK]???????
• [DC Software ?? InstallShield Wizard ?????]??????
????
4 [??]???????
• [??????????]?????
?????
5 ????????????[??]
???????
• [????????????]???
???????6
181
????????????
6 ??????????????[??]???????
• ? ? ? Irodio Photo & Video Studio
?????????????????
?????????????????
?????????????????
?????????????????
?????
• ?????????????????
?????????????????
?????
7 [??]???????
8 ???????????????????[????????
????????????]??????[??]?????
??
• ????????????
• ?????Windows??????????????????????
9 DL-10 ?[?????????]??????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
???????????????????????(???????
?)????(GP.183)?
Adobe Reader ?????????
Adobe Reader ????????(???????)????????
???????????????????????????????
????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ????????? USB ???????????????????
????????
• ????????????????????????????????6
182
????????????
1 ? ? ? ? ? CD-ROM ? ? ? ? ?
??? CD-ROM ??????
Windows Vista ??? OS ???
• ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??????????????
Windows Vista ???
• ??????????????
• [Autorun.exe ???]????????????????????
????????????????????
2 [CD-ROM ??????]???????
• CD-ROM ????????????????
3 [Adobe Reader] ? ? ? ? >[Japanese] ? ? ? ? >
[AdbeRdr910_ja_JP](AdbeRdr910_ja_JP.exe) ? ? ? ?
??????
• Windows Vista ???????????????????????
?????????[??]??????????
4 ????????????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Adobe Reader ??????Adobe Reader ??????????
????
• Adobe Reader 9.1 ??????????????Microsoft Internet
Explorer 6.0?6.0(Service Pack 1)???? 7.0?8.0?Firefox 2.0 ?
?? 3.0 ??????Microsoft Update ?????????
• Adobe Reader 9.1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??MSI(Microsoft
Windows Installer)3.1 ????????Microsoft Update ???
??????6
183
????????????
?????????(????????)??
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????????????????????????
????
• ??????????????????????????????
DC Software
1 ??????[????]???????[??]-[?????
????](Windows XP?Windows Vista ????[??
???????])?????
2 [??????????????]????(Windows XP ???
?[???????????]????)??????????
3 [DC Software]?????[?????]???????
4 ?????????????????[OK]???????
• [?????????]?????????????
5 [??]???????
• ????????????????????????????
Irodio Photo & Video Studio
1 ??????[????]???????[??]-[?????
????](Windows XP?Windows Vista ????[??
???????])?????
2 [??????????????]????(Windows XP ???
?[???????????]????)??????????
3 [Irodio Photo & Video Studio]?????[?????]?
??????
4 ?????????????????[OK]???????
• ????????????????????????????
5 ??????????6
184
????????????
DL-10 ???????????????
???????????????????????????????
???????
1 ??????????????????????
2 ??? USB ??????????
USB ????????
3 USB ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? USB ?
??????
• ???????????????
• DL-10 ???????????????
????????
• DL-10 ?[????????]????
???????[Digital Camera]??????????????
????????????????????[Digital Camera]??
??????????(Caplio Software ????????????
???[Caplio]????????????)??????????
?????????????????????
4 ???????????????????????????
?(GP.187)
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
?????????????????????????????
• DL-10 ???????[??]??????????
• ?????????? 1 ~ 4 ??????????
• DL-10 ?[???????]??????????[USB ????
???????]???????????????????6
185
????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• USB ????????????????????
• USB ?????????????????????????????
• USB ??????????USB ????????????????
?????????
DL-10 ?????????????
?????????????????????????????????
1 ??????????????????????
2 ??? USB ?????????? USB ????????
3 USB ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? USB ?
??????
• ???????????????
• ????????[????????]?
??????????????
4 ??????????????
??????????????
• ???????????????
??????????
• ???????????????
???????????????
???????????????
???????????????
???
• ???????????????
????????????[RICOHDCI]??????
Windows XP ?????
Windows XP ?????6
186
????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ?????????????????? USB ??????????
????????
• ??????????????????????????????
???
• ??????????????????????????????
????·??·??????????????????????
??????????????·??·????????????
?????????????????6
187
????????????
????????????????
???????????????????????????????
???(??? Windows XP ??????? OS ?????????
???????????????)?
1 ???????????????
???????????????
????????
2 [USB ??????????? - ????(E:)* ?????
?????]???????????
* ???????????????????????????
3 USB ?????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ????????? USB ???????????????????
?????????????????????????????
USB ???????????????
• ??????? USB ?????????????????????
?????????????????????????????6
188
????????????
Macintosh ???????
Windows ???????? P.175 ????????
???????? OS ?????????
• Mac OS X 10.4 ~ 10.5.7
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
Macintosh ???VM-1 ?????????????(???????)?
(????? Acrobat ????????????????)????
?????????VM-1 ?????????????????P.191
??????????
????????????
1 ??????????????????????
2 ??? USB ??????????
USB ????????
3 USB ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? USB ?
??????
• ???????????????
• ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
????????????6
189
????????????
4 ??????????????
??????????????
• ???????????????
???????????
• ???????????????
???????????????
???????????????
???????????????
???
• ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ?
[RICOHDCI]??????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• USB ????????????????????
• USB ?????????????????????????????
• USB ??????????USB ????????????????
?????????6
190
????????????
????????????????
1 ????????????????????????????
??????????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
???????
2 USB ?????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• [????]?????[????]????????????????
• ????????? USB ???????????????????
?????????????????????????????
USB ???????????????
• ??????? USB ?????????????????????
?????????????????????????????
• Macintosh ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?FINDER.DAT?
?.DS_Store? ????????????????????????
????[?????????????]????????????
?????????????????????????
MP ???????????
M ????????1 ?????????? 1 ?? MP ??????
???????
MP ???????? VM-1 ?????MP ????? Macintosh ?
???????????????????????????????
???????? CD-ROM ?? VM-1 ?????????????
??????????????????????????MP ???
??????????????? MP ??????????????
MP ????????????????????????CD-ROM ?
?????????????(???????)???????????6
191
????????????
?????
MP ??????????????????????????
????????????????????????????
?? OS Mac OS X 10.4 ~ 10.5.7
Macintosh ?? Apple ?? Macintosh ????
?????? Mac OS X 10.4 256MB ??
Mac OS X 10.5 512MB ??
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
???
5MB ??
CD-ROM ???? ?? Macintosh ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? CD-ROM ? ?
??
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
VM-1 ??????????????????????????????
VM-1 ?????????
1 Macintosh ?????CD-ROM ???????? CD-ROM
??????
2 [RICOH]??????????????
3 [VM-1]??????????????
4 [VM-1 Installer.pkg]??????????????
• [VM-1 ???????]??????????
5 [???]???????
• ??????????????????????
6 ?????????????????[???]???????
7 [??????]???????
• ????????????????[??????????…]??
???????6
192
????????????
• VM-1 ??????????????[???????]?????
????
• ???????????????????????
8 ????????????[OK]???????
• ??????????????????????
9 [???]???????
VM-1 ???(????????)??
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
??????????
• ??????????????????????Mac OS ?????
?????????????????????
1 [????????]???????
2 [???????]???????
3 [VM-1 Utility]???????
4 [VM-1 Uninstaller]??????????????
• ????????????????????
5 [OK]???????
• ???????????????????????
6 ????????????[OK]???????
• ????????????????????????
7 [OK]???????7
193
??
7 ??
???????
???????????????
???????????????????????????????
?????????
???????? ??????? ???
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??
???????????????????????
??????
P. 2 7
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
????
???????????????????????
??
P. 3 1
P. 1 7 3
FILE NUMBER OVER ???????????????????????
????????
P. 2 7
P. 1 7 2
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
???
???????????????????????
???????????????????????
??
-
? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ?
?????
???????????????????????
???????????????????????
??
P. 2 7
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??
???????????????????????
??
P. 1 2 7
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
???
?????LOCK(??????)??????????
???????????
P. 2 8
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
???????
??????????????(????)??? -
??????? ????????????????????????
??????????????
P. 4 9
P. 1 6 0
???????????????????????
???????????? 0 ????????
P. 1 4 1
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
???????
???????????????????? P. 1 6 0
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
????
???????????????????????
??????????
P. 1 6 0
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??
???????????????????????
???????????????????????
?????????????????????
P. 1 6 0
????????? ???????????????????????
??????????????
-
??????????????????????????? -
???????? ??????? 0 ???????????????
???????????????
P. 2 77
194
??
????????
??
?? ?? ?? ???
???????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
????????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??
????????????
?? AC?????????
P. 2 4
P. 2 6
P. 2 0 7
????????????
????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
?????????
P. 2 5
AC ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
????????
????????? P. 2 0 7
????????? ????????? P. 2 6
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??
????????????
????????????
?????
????????? P. 2 9
?????????? ??? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??AC ?
????????
P. 2 4
P. 2 6
P. 2 0 7
????????????
????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
?????????
P. 2 5
?????????
??
???????? ???????????AC
????????????
?????
P. 2 6
P. 2 0 7
?????????
? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ?
?????????
? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ?
????????
????????????
????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
?????????
P. 2 5
?????????
????
????????? ????????????
??
P. 2 5
????????? ????????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??
- -
????????????
????????????
- -7
195
??
??
?? ?? ?? ???
?????????
?????????
??
?????????? ??? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??AC ?
????????
P. 2 4
P. 2 6
P. 2 0 7
????????????
????????????
??
??????? ON ???
????????????
? ?? ? ? ? 6( ? ? )
????????????
????
P. 2 9
P. 4 4
???????????? 6 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
???????
P. 4 4
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
???????
????????????
??
P. 3 4
????????????
??????
?????? P. 1 6 0
????????????
????
????????????
????????????
???
P. 2 7
P. 4 9
??????????? ?????????????P. 2 7
?????????? ????????/???
????????????
??????
P. 4 0
?????????LOCK?
??????
?LOCK( ? ? ? ? ? ? )?
??????
P. 2 8
????????????
??????
????????????
??
-
?????????
???
?????????? ???????????? P. 1 6 4
?????????
???
????????????
???????????
????????????
????????????
??
P. 2 9
P. 1 6 1
????????????
????
VF/LCD ? ? ? ? ? ? ??
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??
P. 5 2
????????????
?????????
VF/LCD ? ? ? ? ? ? ??
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??
P. 5 2
? ? ? ? ? ? ? / AV ? ?
????????????
???
? ? ? ? ? ? ? / AV ? ?
??????
P. 1 3 57
196
??
?? ?? ?? ???
?????????
?????????
??
?????????? ????????????
??????
-
????????????
????
????????????
??
P. 3 5
????????????
????
????????????
????????????
????
P. 3 5
P. 7 6
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??
????????????
?????
P. 3 8
???????
(J? ? ? ? ? ?
???)
????????????
????????????
???
?????????????
????????
???????????
P. 3 2
P. 1 0 9
?????(????)?
????????????
????????????
????????
???????????
ISO ???????
???????????
P. 3 9
P. 1 0 6
P. 1 0 9
?????????
? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ?
?????????
??
????????????
??????
OPEN/f( ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??/??)??????
?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
???????
P. 3 9
????????????
????????
????????????
????????????
????????
P. 3 9
????????????
????????????
??
• ???????????
???????????
??????????
• ?????
• ?????
????????????
????????????
???????
P. 3 9
P. 6 4
P. 8 6
P. 8 8
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??????
????????????
? ? ??OPEN/f( ? ? ?
??????/??)??
????????????
P. 3 9
?????????? ??? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
????????????
??? AC ???????
??
P. 2 4
P. 2 6
P. 2 0 7
?????????
?????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ?
????????????
??????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??
P. 3 9
??????????? ????????????
??
P. 9 2
????????????
???
????????????
??
P. 9 2
????????????
????????
????????????
????????????
????????
P. 3 97
197
??
?? ?? ?? ???
????????? ????????????
???
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??
????????????
???
????????????
????????????
?????
P. 9 2
???????????? ????????????
????????
P. 6 0
P. 9 9
????????????
?????
????????????
????
P. 1 6 1
???????? ????????????
??????
????????????
? ? ??OPEN/f( ? ? ?
??????/??)??
????????????
P. 3 9
?????????? ????????????
????????
P. 6 0
P. 9 9
????????????
?????
????????????
????
P. 1 6 1
?????????
??????
????????????
????????????
????
????????????
????????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
[AUTO]??????
P. 1 0 0
?????????
????????
? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ?
??????
DISP. ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
???????
P. 5 2
AF ????????
?????????
???
????????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??
????????????
????
?????????? -
?????????
????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??
????????????
???????
-
?????????
????????
[ ? ? ? ? ? ] ?[OFF]
???[???]????
????
[?????]?[????]
???[??+?]???
???
P. 4 2
????????????
????????????
??????
DISP. ??????????
????????????
?????????
P. 5 2
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
( ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
?)???????
??????????? ?
?????????
?????????
? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ?
?????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??
????????????
???
????????????
??
?
???????????? ????????? ?7
198
??
??/??
?? ?? ?? ???
? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ?
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??
6(??)??????? P. 4 4
? ? ? ? ? ? ? / AV ? ?
????????????
???
????????? P. 1 3 5
[ ? ? ? ? ? ] ? ? ? ? ?
??????
??????????? P. 1 7 3
????????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??
[???????]?[LCD]
??????
P. 1 6 4
?????????
? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ?
?????????
????????????
????????????
????????????
??????????
????????????
???
P. 2 7
?????????????
????????????
????????????
???????????
P. 2 7
P. 1 6 0
????????????
????????????
????????????
????????
-
????????????
??????
????????????
??
-
????????????
??????
????????????
????????????
????????????
????????????
????????????
????
-
??????? ?????????? ??? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
????????????
??? AC ???????
??
P. 2 4
P. 2 6
P. 2 0 7
????????????
????????????
?????
????????? P. 2 9
?????????
???
????????????
??
??????????? P. 1 2 7
?????????LOCK?
??????
?LOCK( ? ? ? ? ? ? )?
??????
P. 2 8
?????????
???????
?????????LOCK?
??????
?LOCK( ? ? ? ? ? ? )?
??????
P. 2 87
199
??
???
?? ?? ?? ???
?????????
????
???????? ????????? P. 2 7
?????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??
?????????? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
????????????
??? AC ???????
??
P. 2 4
P. 2 6
P. 2 0 7
???????? ????????????
?????????
P. 2 9
???????????AC
????????????
?????
P. 2 6
P. 2 0 7
????????? ?????·??????
??????
?????·??????
??
P. 3 1
P. 1 7 3
?????????
??????
??????????? ????????????
1 ???????????
?????????????
??????
P. 3 1
P. 1 7 3
?????????
?????
?????????[OFF]
???????
????????????
?????
P. 1 6 3
????????? ??????????? [???????]???
??????????
P. 1 6 5
????????? [?????]?????
??????
??????????? P. 1 7 3
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??
????????????
???
P. 1 3 5
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
????????????
??
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
??
-7
200
??
??????/?????????
??????????????????(???????)?(PDF ??
??)????????
Windows XP Service Pack3?Windows Vista Service
Pack2 ?????????????
Windows XP Service Pack3??? Windows Vista Service Pack2???
??????????????????????????????(?
??????USB???)????????????????????
????????????????????
???? Windows XP ?????????????
???????????????
??????????[???????
??]???????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
???????????????????????????????
??????????????[??????]?????????
???????????????????????????????
?????????
[??????]????????????
Windows ??????????????????
1 [????]B[?????????]?????????
2 [Windows ????????]?
?????????
• [Windows ????????]???
???????????[?????
????????]????????
????7
201
??
3 [??]?????????
4 [????????????]??
[DL-10]?????????
5 [OK]??????????
[??????]????????????
??????????????[Windows ????????????]
??????????????????[?????????]??
??????7
202
??
????
????? ? ? ? ? ?
???
???(??????????????)/????/?
???/???????/???????/????
???? ???????????????????????
???? ± 2.0EV 1/2 ??? 1/3EV ????
? ? ? ? ? ?
??
FUL L?1 / 1 . 4?1 / 2?1 / 2 . 8?1 / 4?1 / 5 . 6?1 / 8?1 / 1 1?
1/16?1/22?1/32?1/64
?????? 3.0???????? 92????
????? ????????/???????????/????
???/??????????????/??????
????/??????/???????????
????? F(Fine)?N(Normal)?RAW(DNG ??????)*
1
???? SD ????????SDHC ??????????????
(? 86MB)
?????
?? *
2
5M FINE:? 2287KB /??
3M FINE:? 1474KB /??
1M FINE:? 812KB /??
VGA FINE:? 197KB /??
?????
???
??? JPEG(Exif ver2.21)*
3?RAW(DNG)
?? AVI*
4(Open DML Motion JPEG ????????)
???? JPEG ??????????(??????)
????????? ??/ M ?????????????(????:? 10
?/? 2 ?/??????)???????????(?
???:5 ?~ 1 ???5 ???)*
5??????????
?? ( TE)?????????????????????
??????????????????????????
?????????
????????? ??????????????????(??????
16 ?)????????
?????????? USB2.0(High-Speed USB)Mini-B????????*
6???
??? OUT 1.0Vp-p(75 O)?HDMI ??????(Type C)
??????? NTSC?PAL ???
?? ????????????? DB-90(3.6V)
AC ?????(AC-5 ?????):3.8V
???? CIPA ???? *
7??????????????????
??????
??·?? 113.9mm(?)× 70.2mm(??)× 28.9mm(???)
(??????)
?? ??? 160g(?????/???????/?????
???/????????)
???? 66g(?????/????????/??
????)
??????? 1/4–20UNC
??????? ? 1 ??
?????? 0?~ 40?7
203
??
?????? 85% ??
?????? –20?~ 60?
*1 RAW ?????? Fine / Normal ??? VGA ? JPEG ??????DNG ???
???? RAW????????? 1?????????????????????
???????
*2 RAW?L?M ????????????????????????????????
*3 DCF ? ??DPOF ? ??DCF ? JEITA ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?Design rule for Camera
File system? ?????(????????????????????????)?
*4 ??? PCM 32kHz?16bit ???????
*5 ????? OFF ??
*6 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??Windows 2000?Windows XP?Windows Vista?Mac OS X
10.4 ~ 10.5.7 ?????????
*7 ??????? CIPA ???????????????????????????
??????
??????/??????????????
??????/??????????????/?????????
???????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• 1????????????????90??????4GB?????
• ???????????????999 ??????????? 1000
???????????????????999?????????
• ??????????????????????????????
????????????
• ???????????????????????(??????
??????????)???????????????????
??????
• ??????????????????????????????
???7
204
??
????????
GXR ?????????????????????
??????? AC ?????(AC-5) ????????
?????(DB-90)
?????
??????(BJ-9)
????????
(CA-1)
???????????
(VF-2)
USB ??????????
????????????
????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ?? ? ? ? 100%?
????? 90 ?????
????????????
???????????
???????
(GF-1)
??????(SC-55S)??????(SC-55L)
T TL ??????????
????????????
????????7
205
??
????????
(ST-3)
• ?????????????????????????????????
• ???????????????????????(http://www.ricoh.
co.jp/dc)????????7
206
??
???????????
????????????
??????
(SC-55S / SC-55L)
????????
(ST-3)
????????
(CA-1)
USB ???
????
AC ?????
(AC-5)
?????
??????(BJ-9)
????
????????
?????(DB-90)
????
??????
????
?????????????
???????
(GF-1)
???????????
(VF-2)7
207
??
AC ?????(???)???
???????????????????????????????
??? AC ??????????????????
AC ?????????????????????????????
?????????????
1 ? ? ? ? ? ??OPEN? ? ? ? ?
??????????/????
??????
• ?????????????????
?????
2 AC ???????????
?????
• ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ?
????????
3 ??(DC ??)?????
?????????????
??
4 ?????/??????????
? ? ? ? ? ??OPEN? ? ? ? ?
?????????????
5 ????????????????
1
27
208
??
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ?????/????????????????????????
?????????????????
• ?????? AC ????????????????????
• ?????????????????AC ????????????
???????????????
• ???????? AC ????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
• AC ????????????? ?????????????
????????????????????????????
• AC ???????????AC ????????????????
???????????????
AC ????????????
AC ?????????????????????????????
???????????
1 ???????????????
2 ???????OPEN???????????????/??
????????
3 AC ????????????????
4 ? ? ? ? ? / ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ??OPEN?
?????????????????7
209
??
???????(???)???
??????????????????
??????????????????
?????????
???????????(GF-1)???????
1 ????????????(GP.14)
2 ???????????????????????????
???????????????
3 ????????????????????
4 DIRECT ??????
5 + / – / Fn1 / Fn2 ? ? ? ADJ.
???(??)????????
???????????
6 ???????????????
???
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ??????????????????????????????
??????????
• ??????????????????????????????
?????????????
• ???????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
??????7
210
??
GF-1 ?????????????????
1 ????????????(GP.14)
2 ???????????????????????????
???????????????
3 ?????????????????? A ??? M ????
??????????(GP.58?P. 6 0)
4 ISO ???[AUTO]???????(GP.106)
5 ????????????????????????(???)
????????? ISO ???????????
• ??????????????????????????????
???????????????
?? -------------------------------------------------------------------------
• ?????????????????????????????
• GF-1 ????????????????????????????
???????????
• X ??????????????
• X ??????+?????
• X ?????? 20V ???????
• ??????????????????????????????
?????????
• ????????????????????? X ????????
???????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
• ???????????? ISO ????????????????
??????????????????????????????
????? ISO ????????????
• ??????????????????????????????
???????
• ??????????????????????????????
??????(????)???????????????????
?????????????7
211
??
??????????
AC ?????(??:AC-5)????????????(??:
BJ-9)????
?? 100 ~ 240V?50Hz / 60Hz ?????????????
???????????????????????????????
???????????
???????????????????????????????
???
??????
?????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
????????????
??????????????????
????????????(???????)??????????
? AV ?????????????
??????????? NTSC ? PAL ??????????????
????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????7
212
??
???????
• ????????????????????????
• ???????????????????????????????????
?????????????????
• ???????????????????????????????
• ???????????????????????????????????
??????????????????????
• ???????????????????????????????????
?????????????????????
• ???????????????????????????????????
??????????????????????
• ???????????????????????????????????
???(?????)?
• ???????????????????????????????????
?????????
• ???????????????????????????????????
?????????
• ???????????????????????????????????
???????
• ???????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????????
????????????
• ???????????????????
• ???????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????????
?????????????????????????????????
• ???????????????????????????????????
????
• ????????????????????
• ???????????????????????????????????
?????????????????
• ?????(?????????)???????????????????
???????????????????????????????????
?????????????????
??????????? -------------------------------------------------
• ???????????????????
• ???????
• ????????????????????????????7
213
??
???????/????????
????
• ????????????????????????????????
• ????????????????????????????????
???
• ????????????????????????????????
????????
• ?????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????
• ????????????????????????????????
???????
• ????????????????????????????????
??????(??????????????)??????????
????????????????
??/????????
• ????????????????????????????????
???????????
?????????????????????
?????????????
?????????
???????????????????????????????
????????????(?????????????????)
• ????????????????????????????????
????
?????????
• ???????????????
• ??? AC ???????????????????????7
214
??
????????????
1. ?????????????????????????????????????
?????????????????????????????????????
?????????????????????????????
2. ??????????????????????????????
? ????????????????????????????
? ????????????????????????????????????
?????????????
? ???????????????????????
? ?(?)???????(????????????)???????????
(?)???????????????????
? ??????(????????)????????????????????
?????????
? ???????????
? ?????????????????????????????????????
3. ?????????????????????????????????????
?????????????????????????????????????
???????
4. ?????????????????????????????????????
?????????????????????????
5. ?????????????????????????????????????
????????????(???)?????????????
6. ?????????????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????????
7. ?????????????????????????????????????
?????????????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????????
8. ???????????????????
(This warranty is valid only in Japan.)
?????????????????????????????????????
?????????
9. ????????????????????????????????????
10. ???????????(???????????????????)??5 ??
????????????
11. ?(?)???(?)????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????????????
12. ???????????????????????????
??????????
• ??????????????????????(?????????)?????
?????
• ??????????????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????
??????????
• ???????????????????????????
• ??????????????????????????215
??
??·???
AC ????? ........................................ 207
ADJ. ?????????? ............. 154
ADJ. ??? ................................. 15.17.153
Adobe Reader ........................................ 181
AE/AF ????? ................................... 77
AE ??? ......................................... 155.156
AF/MF ............................................... 155.156
AF/ ???? .................................. 155.156
AF ??? ..................................... 14.41.162
AVI ???? ............................................... 64
AV ???? .............................................. 135
AV ???? ................................................ 15
CL-BKT ?? (TE) .................................... 169
DC Software .................................. 179.183
DISP.(O)??? .......................... 15.52
DL-10 ................................................. 179.184
DPOF ........................................................... 131
Fine ??? ........................................... 71.72
Fn1/Fn2 ??? ............................... 15.155
Fn ??? MY ?? ................................ 152
Fn ??????? ................................ 168
Irodio Photo & Video Studio
.......................................................... 178.183
ISO AUTO-HI ?? ................................. 162
ISO ?? ...................................................... 106
JPEG ? RAW ................................. 155.156
Language /?? .................................. 173
MENU/OK ??? ........... 15.67.116.144
MODE ?? ................................................. 63
M ??? ?????? ...................... 158
M ??????????? ............. 159
M ?????............................................. 86
Normal ??? .................................... 71.72
PictBridge ................................................. 137
RAW ??? .......................................... 71.72
SD ??????? ................................. 27
USB ???? .............. 138.184.185.188
USB ?? ...................................................... 15
USB ????? ...................................... 178
WIA ????? ...................................... 178
?
?????????? .................... 14.17
???? ....................................................... 46
????? ................................................ 170
???????? .................................... 97
???????? .................................. 193
???????? .............................. 16.33
???????? .................................. 163
????????/????????
......................................... 15.29.33.40.163
???????? .................................... 88
?
????? NO. ....................................... 172
????? ............................ 15.26.27.207
??????? ...................................... 209
????(z ???) .............. 15.46.48
??·??? ............................................. 71
?????? ........................................... 164
??????? ...................................... 119
???? ....................................................... 83
?????? ................................ 15.20.52
?????????? ........................ 161
???? TE..................................... 155.156
?????? ................................. 155.156
????????(CL-BKT) ............ 90
?????????? .............. 144.145
????????? ...................... 52.168
?
??????? ...................................... 164
???????? .................................. 116
????? ............................ 15.30.44.116
????? ?????? .................. 158
?? ................................................................. 49
??(d)/???????(t)
??? .......................................... 15.41.49
?????????? ........................ 169
??????? ...................................... 107
???????? .................................... 67
??????? ...................................... 108216
???????(Z)???
......................................................... 15.46.48
????? .................................................. 15
??????(SCENE) ................. 16.62
??????? ...................................... 108
???????(A) ........................ 16.58
??????????????(S)
................................................................ 16.59
???????? .............................. 14.34
???[???] .................................... 160
???[??????] ..................... 160
????? ................................................ 167
????????? ............................... 42
??? ............................................................ 37
?????????? .................... 14.15
???????????? ................ 80
????? .................................................. 15
??????? ...................................... 127
???????? ........................ 144.146
??????? ........................................ 41
??? .......................................................... 165
??????? ...................................... 165
?? ................................................................. 82
?
????????? ............................. 137
???????? .................................. 166
????? .................................................. 15
???? ..................................................... 143
????????? ............................. 170
??? ................................................... 35.109
??(DC ??)??????? ... 15
????? .................................................. 22
?? ........................................................... 62.64
?
?????? .................................... 27.203
???????????????
.................................................................... 130
???? ....................................... 62.65.125
???? ..................................................... 173
???????? ................. ??? .205
????????? ............................... 94
????????? ISO ?? ........... 95
?
??????? ........................................ 53
?????/??????
................................................ 15.26.27.207
??????????? ............ 24.204
????? .................................................. 75
?????? .................................... 54.123
?????? ............................................. 98
????? ................................................ 173
????? .................................................. 74
??????? ........................................ 75
???????? .................................... 35
?????(OPEN/f)???
................................................................ 15.39
???????? .................................... 14
??????????? ..................... 94
????????? ............................... 92
???????? .................................... 14
????????????? ........... 93
?? AF .......................................................... 81
???????????(P) ..... 16.56
????? ................................................ 127
?????? ........................... 14.209.210
???????? .................................. 100
?????????????
(WB-BKT) ......................................... 88.89
?????????? .............. 104.124
??????????? MY ??
.................................................................... 152
?
????? ............................................ 52.53
??? ............................................................ 14
?????????? ........................ 147
?????????? ........................ 150
?????????? ........................ 151
???????????? .............. 169
???????????
(MY1?MY2?MY3) ................... 16.66
???????????? .............. 149
???????? .................................... 79217
?????? ....................................... 15.38
??????????(MF) ........... 76
??????????(M) ........ 16.60
???????????? .............. 171
??????? .................................. 14.16
?
????????????? ..... 24.26
????? ................................................ 121
?? ................................................................. 86
???? ....................................................... 99
?
???????????? .............. 166218
??????????? RING CUBE
RING CUBE ??????????????????????????
?????????????????
8F ??????????????·???????????????
??????
9F ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ?
???????????????????????????????
??????
http://ringcube.jp/
???????? 5-7-2
?????????? 8F/ 9F (?? 9F)
????:11:00 ~ 20:00 (?????)
??????:03-3289-1521????
1. ???????????????????? 1 ????????????????
?????????????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????????????
2. ???????????????????????????
(1) ??????(?????????????)????????
(2) ???????????????????????????????????
??
(3) ???????????????????????
(4) ?(?)???????(????????????)??????????
?(?)???????????????????
(5) ??????(????????)???????????????????
??????????
(6) ??????(??????????)????????
(7) ???????????????????????????????????
??
3. ?????????????????????????????????????
???????(???)??????????????
4. ????????????????(??·??????????????·??
???????????????)?????????????
5. ?????????????????????????????????????
?????????????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????????
6. ?????????????????????????????????????
?????????????????????????
7. ???????????????????
(This warranty is valid only in Japan)
?????????????????????????????????????
?????????
8. ??????????????
???
??????????????????????????????????????
???
??????????????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????????????
??????
??????????????????????????????????????
????????????
??????????????????????????????????????
???
???????????????????????????
?????????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????????????
?????????????????????
*
*
*
*
*
*
*??????????????????????????
???????????????
???????????????
???????????????
???????????????
??????????
??????????????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????
???
1. ?????????????????????????????????????
?????????????????????????????????????
2. ??????????????·??????????????????????
??????????????????
3. ?????????????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????
4. ?????????????????????????????????????
????????????????????
???????????
???????????
???????????
???????????
Li-ion 00 ????????*L754 1971A*
?????????????
¦????
http://www.ricoh.co.jp/dc/
¦Ricoh Photo Style(??&??????)
http://www.ricoh.co.jp/dc/photostyle/
¦????????
http://www.ricoh.co.jp/dc/support/
¦??????(????????????????)
http://www.ricoh.co.jp/dc/support/repair/
???????
???????????????????????????????????????????
?????
¦???????(FAQ)
?????·?????? http://www.ricoh.co.jp/dc/support/faq/
????????? http://www.ricoh.co.jp/dc/support/repair/faqs/
¦????????????
???????? http://www.ricoh.co.jp/dc/support/contact/
?? 0120-000475 FAX 0120-479417
????:9:00 ~ 18:00(?????????)
????????????????????????????????·????
????????????
¦?Irodio Photo & Video Studio?????
???????? ??????:0570-02-3500 ??:06-6633-2990
????: ???~??? 10:00 ~ 18:00
(????????????????????????)
????
¦??????/?????????
(??????????????????????????)
???????????(???????????????)
< ???????? > http://www.ricoh.co.jp/dc/support/repair/mail.html
< ???? > 0120-053956 ???? 9:00 ~ 17:00
(????????????????????????????????)
????????????????????????????????·???
?????????????
¦???????????
(????????????????????????????????)
????????????????
? 104-0061 ???????? 6-14-7 ? 3 ????? 1 ?
???? 9:30 ~ 17:00 ?? 03-3543-4187
????????????????
? 564-0053 ?????????? 34-5 ????? 7 ?
???? 9:30 ~ 17:00 ?? 06-6338-9092
???????
? 104-8222 ???????? 8-13-1 ?????
??:0120-000475(???????)
2009 ? 12 ?
JA Printed in China
GXR ?????
?????
??????????????
??????????????
???(????)
????
??????????,???????????????????
(P.1–10)???????????????????
???????
??????????,???????????????????
???????????????(P.11–44)?
??
?????????“???????”????????????
????????????,?????????????????
??????????????(P.45–187)?
???(????)
???????????????????????????????
?????
???????????????????,????????????????
(???)
??????????????????????????
?????????ii
?????
?????????????
* ??????????????
GXR ?????
????????
????
? mini-B ???
USB ???
????????
????????
A/V ???
????????
?????
???
? ? ? ? ?
? ? ? ? ?
???
???
????????
????????
DB-90 ????? BJ-9 ???
• ??:???????????????(???)?
• ??????????(????)
• ??
• ???
??:????
????????????????
????????,???????
???????
??
??????????????????
(???)??????????????
? PDF ???????????????
?????(???)????????
??iii
??
• ????:??????????????????????
• ????:????????????,??????????????
??????
• ???:??????????????????,?????????
??????????????????,????????????
• ????:??????????????????,????????
?????,?????
• ???:???????????,????????????????
????????????????????
• ????:???????????????,???????????
????????????????????????????????
???????????????:??????????????,?
??????????????,?????????????????
?????
© ???? 2009 ???????????????????????,??
?????????????????????????????????
????,???????
?????????????????????????????????
????,???????????????????,??,???????
Microsoft?Windows?Windows Vista ? Internet Explorer ? Microsoft Corporation
??????????????Macintosh ? Mac OS ? Apple Inc. ????
??????????Adobe?Adobe ??? Adobe Reader ? Adobe Systems
Incorporated ????
HDMI? ??? High-De nition Multimedia Interface ? HDMI Licensing
LLC ?????????
???????????????????????????????????iv
????
????
??????????????????????????
??????????????????????????
???????????????
??
???????????????????
??????????????
??
???????????????????
?????????
??
???????????????????
???????????
????
?????????????
??????????
???????????,???????????
??
???? ????
???????????????????
??
???????????????????????
???????????
???????????????????v
????????????????,??????
???????????????????????
????,??????
????????????????????????
?????????????????
?????????????
??
????????????????,??????
?????????,?????????????
??????????,????????????
??,???????????????????,
??????????????????????
????????????????????????,
???????????????????,???
????????????????????,??
????????????,???????????
????????,??????????????
????????vi
?????????????,??????????
???????,???????????
• ??:?????????,??????????
???,????????
• ??:?????????,??????? 15 ?
??????????
• ??:???????,????????????
???????????????????
?????????????????????????
• ???????????????????????
• ???????????????????????
?????
• ?????????????????
• ????????,??????????????
?????,?????????????????
?????????
???????????????????????
???
• ???????????????????????
???????
• ??????????????????,????
?????????????????
• ???????????????????????
???????
• ???????????vii
?????????? SD ????????????
????????????????????,??
???????
????????????????
??????????????????,?????
??,????????????????????
???,???????????????????,
?????????????????
????????????,??????????
???
???????????????????????
????,????????????
?????????????????,?????
???????
???????????,?????????
??????,???????????,????
????????????????viii
???????????????????
??
???????????????????????
?????????,???????????(??
?????)
????????,???????????,??
?????????????
???????????????????????
??????
???????????,???????????
???????????
????????????????,??????
??????????????
??????
?????
???????,??????????
????????????ixx
??????
?????..................................................................................................................................... ii
??.....................................................................................................................................................iii
????..........................................................................................................................................iv
???? 1
??????????,???????
??.................................................................................................................................2
???????.........................................................................................................................2
??????? 11
??????????,???????
????.....................................................................................................................12
?????..................................................................................................................................12
????........................................................................................................................................14
?????..................................................................................................................................15
??????????????..............................................................................17
???????......................................................................................................................18
????........................................................................................................................................20
????.....................................................................................................................21
?????..................................................................................................................................21
????........................................................................................................................................22
??...................................................................................................................................................26
??(????)....................................................................................................................27
?????..................................................................................................................................28
??...................................................................................................................................................31
?????..................................................................................................................................32
???????.......................................................................................................34
????........................................................................................................................................34
????........................................................................................................................................39
O(DISP.)??....................................................................................................................42xi
?? 45
????????????,???????
?????????.............................................................................................46
?? P:????..................................................................................................................46
?? A:????..................................................................................................................48
?? S:????...................................................................................................................49
?? M:????.................................................................................................................50
4??:????????..............................................................................52
“MY”??:???????.....................................................................................57
????........................................................................................................................................58
????.....................................................................................................................94
????........................................................................................................................................94
?? MP ??..............................................................................................................................95
????.................................................................................................................. 101
????.....................................................................................................................................101
?????????........................................................................................................118
????.................................................................................................................. 120
???????...................................................................................................................120
??................................................................................................................................................122
?????............................................................................................................. 126
?????...............................................................................................................................129
?????...............................................................................................................................139
????????............................................................................................... 151
Windows......................................................................................................................................151
Macintosh....................................................................................................................................162
????.................................................................................................................. 167
????.....................................................................................................................................167
??................................................................................................................................................175
?????...............................................................................................................................178
??????.........................................................................................................................183
??????.........................................................................................................................183
?????...............................................................................................................................185
????.....................................................................................................................................186
??............................................................................................................................ 188xii
????????????
????
??????????,???????
??..................................................................................... 2????????????
??
??????????????????????????
?????,?????????????,??????
???????????????
???????
??????,???????????????
??
3 4 5 6 7
12 11
13
8 9 10
14
1 2
1 ????............................................5
2 ??????????.........4
3 ????............................................4
4 ????..................................21, 23
5 ????..................................18, 21
6 AF ???.............................31, 140
7 ??..................................................181
8 ????......................................... 29
9 ???...............................................-
10 ?????.......................................ii
11 ????????
????......................................... 17
12 ??.................................................... 17
13 ??????????...... 17
14 ???............................................... 28????????????
??
4
1
2
3
17 16
13
14
15
12
9
22 21 20 19
5
6
23
7 8
10
18
11
1 DIRECT ??.....................................5
2 OPEN/f(???)??
................................................................ 29
3 VF/LCD ??................................. 42
4 ?????......................................8
5 ????/??????
......................................18, 22, 29, 141
6 USB ?????
..............................120, 159, 160, 162
7 A/V ?????........................118
8 HDMI ???????.......119
9 ADJ. ?.......................................5, 134
10 6(??)??
......................................19, 34, 94, 100
11 N(??)??......................... 27
12 8(??)/ z(????)
??.............................................26, 36
13 9(??)/ Z(????
??)??............................26, 36
14 ????......................................... 37
+ (!)..............................................137
– (%)..............................................137
Fn1(?? 1)(#)..............136
Fn1(?? 2)($)..............136
15C/D??
...........................................58, 101, 126
16 O(DISP.)??...................... 42
17 t(??)/ d(??)
??.............................................31, 39
18 ??????...........................176
19 ??/????.................14, 15
20 ?????............................14, 15
21 ???...............................................-
22 ?????.......................................ii
23 ???..................................118, 121????????????
????
???,?????????
????(1)??????
??????????(2)?
1
2
5(??):????
??????????
??????(P.21)?
M(????):??
?????????
(P.50)?
MY1?MY2?MY3(“????”):??????
????(P.57?129)??????
A(????):??
??????????
??????????
??(P.48)?
4(??):??
??????????
???,??????
(P.52)?
S(????):??
?????????
?????????
????(P.49)?
P(????):??
?????????
?????????
????(P.46)?????????????
????? ADJ. ?
??????????,????
?????? + ? –,???? ADJ.
??? Fn1 ? Fn2?ADJ. ?????
?????? P?A?S ? M ???
??????????
????
ADJ.?
?????????????? ADJ. ?,???????
?(P.134)???????????,?? ADJ. ?????
????????;??,??????????????
?????
??
????????? M ???????????????????
???????????? ADJ. ????(P.138)?
DIRECT ??
???????? DIRECT ????
????????
DIRECT????????????
DIRECT ??
??????,???????????????
1 2 3 8 4 5
12
13
18
10
9
11 15 14 16 17
6
7
1 ????............................................4
2 ??.....................................46, 48, 50
3 ????..........................46, 49, 50
4 ?????................................... 28
5 ????/
?????............................78, 79
6 ????......................................... 85
7 ISO........................................................ 90
8 ???............................................... 86
9 ????......................................... 64
10 ??.................................................... 70
11 ????......................................... 71
12 ???? · ??.......................... 61
13 ??.................................................... 75
14 ??.................................................... 73
15 ????............................................7
16 ????......................................... 27
17 AE ??...........................................136
18 ??.................................................... 31
?? DIRECT ????????
? DIRECT ???,?? +?–?Fn1?Fn2 ? ADJ. ?(??
???)??????????,???????????
??????????? + ? – ????,???????
???????????????
?????????
? DIRECT ????????????,?? ADJ. ????
??????????? + ? – ????????????,
???? ADJ. ??C/D???????
?
????????????????????????,????
????? DIRECT ?????????????????????
?????????????
??
• ?? DISP. ??,??????????(P.140)?
• ? DIRECT ?????C/D???????(P.59)?
• ???????,?? Fn1?Fn2 ? ADJ. ?(?????)???
?????????
• ?????????,??????????????????
???????????
• ?????????,?????????????,????
???????
• ? DIRECT ????????????????????????
?????
?????????
?????????????????,?????? DIRECT ?
?????? + ? –,???????????????????????????????
?????
????????,????????????
??(????) ??(????)
4:3 N
F 2.5
25cm-
1/50 200
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
15
18
31
19
27 28 29 30
26
32
20
25
24
22
23
21
37 38
F 2.5 1/50 200
34
33
35
36
1 ?????.........28
2 ????/
?????
..............................78, 79
3 ????...............52
??..........................73
4 ????................. 4
5 ?????? *
...................................177
6 ?????.........15
7 ??????
??..................64, 68
8 ???? · ??
......................................61
9 ????/??
????.......64, 69
10 ???/
?????
............................... 86, 89
11 ??..........................70
12 ????...............71
13 ??..........................75
14 ???.....................44
15 ????...............81
16 ????...............80
17 ???????
......................................92
18 ??????
......................................84
19 ????...............10
20 ??????
...................................136
21 ??..........................31
22 ????...............27
23 ??????
...................................144
24 ??????...26
25 ???.....................26
26 ????...............83
27 ????...............50
28 ??..........46, 48, 50????????????
29 ????
......................46, 49, 50
30 ????...............85
31 ISO..............................90
32 ?????.........32
33 ????...............86
34 ????.......24, 93
35 ??..........................64
36 ???.....................64
37 ????....63, 177
38 ???? *
............55
* ?????;??????????????????????????
??????????? 9,999 ??,??? 9999?
??
?? DIRECT ??(P.5)????????
??(??) ??(??)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14
4:3 N
2010/0101 00:20
F 2.5
ISO 200
1/50
EV+0.7
2010/01/01 00:20
16
15
17 18
1 ????..............-
2 ????..............-
3 ???....................-
4 ??????
.....................................-
5 ?????......112
6 DPOF ????
...................................115
7 ??..........................15
8 ???? · ??
......................................61
9 ????....20, 149
10 ??..........46, 48, 50
11 ISO..............................90
12 ????...............85
13 ????
......................46, 49, 50
14 ????...............10
15 ?????/
?????........-
16 ????..............-
17 ???.....................86
18 ?????.........89????????????
0
??
• ????????????????
• ?? DISP. ??(P.42)???????? 4:3 N
2.5 200
??????
?????????????????????
?? ??
(??)
??????
(??)
??????????
(??)
???????????????
????????????
????.........................................................................12
????.........................................................................21
???????...........................................................34
???????
??????????,???????????????????
????
??????????
?????
??????????????(DB-90)?????????
???,?????? BJ-9 ???????????
? 1??????????
???,????????,?“+”?“–”????
????????????
?
?????????????
? 2??????????,??????
???,???????????? 25 °C ?????
????????????? 5 ???
??
?????????,?????????????????
?????,??????????????????????
? 3?????
??????????????????????,?
?????????
?
• ????????:?????? DB-90 ??????????
?????????????
• ???????????????,??????,?????
?????????
• ???????????,??????
??:????
???? DB-90 ?????????????????? CIPA ??
???????????,??????:??? 23 °C;????
???;????????? 30 ???????????????;
??? 10 ?????????????????????????
??????????????
????
????????????????
? 1????/?????
??(1)???(2)???
? 2?????
???????,???
???????????
???????????
???????
1
2
? 3????/?????
??(1)???(2)???
?
????????
1
2
????
???????/????,?????????,???
?????????????
?
???????????,?????????????????
??????????????
?????
????????????? 86MB ??????,???
? SD ? SDHC ??????????????,????
??????;???????,???????????
?????
?????????????????
? 1????/?????
??(1)???(2)???
1
2
? 2??????
???????????,?
?????????????
??????
? 3????/?????
??(1)???(2)???
1
2????????????
?????
???????/????,?????????????
??????????
?
• ???????????,???????,????????
???????
• ?????????????
??:???
????????“LOCK”?????
???,?????????????,
???????????
??????????????;??????????????
????,????????????
??
• ???????????????????,???????
(P.139)?????,?????????????
• ??????????,???? 177 ????
• ??????????????????????(P.115)?????????????
??????????????
??????????????/???????????
???,?????????
??????????????
??????????????
??????????????
?,????????????
????????
????????
????
?????????????
????????????
????,???????
???
????????????
??,?????????
??????????????????????
???????
????
??????? ON ???????
???????????????,
????/??????????
???
???????,???????
? OFF???????,?????
???????????????
(??????????,??? 0;
???????????(P.20),
???????????????
????????)?
?
??????,???(P.73)???(P.83)???(P.31)???
???????????????? MY ???????????
???????????????????????????????
????
?????,??6??? 1 ??
????????????????
????6????????
??:???????????
???????(P.141)???????(P.141)???????
???????,??????????????,??????????????????
0
????
????????,?????????????????
??????????????????????????
??????,??? DISP. ?????????????
???????????(P.149)?
? 1???????
?? +?–?Fn1 ? Fn2 ???
????????C/D?
? 2?????
?? Fn1 ? Fn2 ??????
?????????????
?,???? + ? – ?????
C?????????,??
/D???,????
C??????????;??
/D???????
??
• ???????????????? 2 ??,??????,?
??????????? 1 ???
• ??????????????(P.84)?????????????
????
??“????”(P.12)????
???????,???????
?????????? ON ????
?,?????????5?
?????
? 1????????
??????????,??
???????
?
???????????????
????????
? 2?????
???????????????????????
????
? 1???
?????????????,??????????
????????
4:3 N
????????,?????
????(?? 9 ?)????
???
????????,?????
????????/?????
???????
????/??????
???
? 2?????
???????????????????,????
??????(P.142),?????????????
???????????????
??:????
?????????????????????,???????
??????????????“?????????”????
???????????
??:??
????/???????????????????????
???? ??? ????/??????
??? ?? ??
??????? ?? ??(??)
???? ??(??) ??(??)
???????????????:
• ???????,??????????????????
• ???????????
• ???????
• ???????
• ???????????
• ?????,?????
• ???,????????? LED
???,?????????????????,???????
???????????;?????????????????
???????,????????????????????,
???????????(P.25)?????????????
??:??????
??????????????????????(“????
?”),????????????????????????:
• ??????????
• ??????(P.26)
????????????????????,????????
?J????????????????,?????????
??:
• ?????( )???????( ;???? 28 ???)
• ????? ISO(P.90)
• ????(P.31)
• ?????????(P.92)
??
• ????????????,???????????????
?????
• ??????????????,??? ???
• ????????????????????????????,
?????????????????(P.142)?????????????
???
??????????????????????????
???????????????
? 1???
?????????????,??????????
????
4:3 N
? 2?????
???????????????,???????
????
?????
? 3?????
????????????????
?
????????,?????????????????,??
??????????????????????
??
???? 8(??)??????,?? 9(??)??
?????
4:3 N
9 8
4:3 N
?? ??
? 1??8?9???????
? 2???
?????????
? 3?????
????????????
??
• ?????????????????,??????????
??
• ????????????????????,???????
?????????? 8 ??,?????? 8 ?????,
???????????????????????????,
???9???
• ????????????????????????????
???,???????????????
• ????? · ????? RAW ?(P.61),?????????????????????
??(????)
?????????????????
? 1?? N ???
N ???????????
???????? N ???
?????????
? 2???
?????????????,
???????????
? 3?????
4:3 N
????????????
????????,????? N ???
??
??????,???????????????????,??
?????????(P.64)?????????????
?????
?????????????? OPEN/f ????????,
??????????????????:
?? ??
???? ??????
?? ????????????
????
??
???????????????“??”?
???? ????????????
????
??????????????????????????
?????????????????
????
???????????????????????(P.79)
????
??
?????????????????????????????
???????????????????
???????
? 1??????
?? OPEN/f ???
OPEN
? 2????????
?? OPEN/f ??????????????????
?????????????
??
• ????????????,?????????
• ??????????/???????????????
????????????
? 3??????
????????????,???????????
?????????????????????
0
??
• ???????????????,????????????
???????
• ????????????,?????????
• ??????????,?????????,???????
???
?
?????????????????????????????
???????????????????????????????
??
?? 10 ??2 ????????????? 2 ??????
??????????????????????????
??,???????????????????????
?????????????????(P.82)?
? 1???????
??? t ????? 10 ???
?,?????? 2 ????,
?????????????
?????????????
???
??????????????
??
???????????,?????????
? 2??????
??????????????????????? 10
?????????????,AF ???????
??
??????C/D???????????
4:3 N ????????????
?????
??????????????????????????
??????????????,?????????
? 1?????
??O(DISP.)?????
?????????
? 2???????
?? + ? – ????????,????C/D
??????????
?? ??
? ?????????
??
??????????????????????,????
???????????????,?????????;?
?????,??????;??????????????
??????,????????????????????
????????(P.42),??????????
??+
??
?????,??????????????????????
??
???????????????????????????
???????????????????????
??????????
4:3 N
??
4:3 N
??
????????? ???????
4:3 N
??
4:3 N
???????
???????? 90°
??
???????????????????(P.144)?
?
• ?????????????????????,??????
????
• ???????????????(P.142),????????
• ?????????,??????????????????
????????????????????????????
????????,???????????
????????????
???????
?????????????
????
???????6???????
????????
????6??????????
??:??????????
?????,?? 6 ??? 1 ???????????????
????
?? Fn2 ?????????,?? Fn1 ?????????
?? – ??? 10 ???,?? + ??? 10 ??
????????????
?? 1 ?
2010
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
200
F 2.5
2010 200
F 2.5 F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
4:3 N
4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
?? 10 ?
+
2010
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
200
F 2.5
2010 200
F 2.5 F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
4:3 N
4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
Fn1
2010
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
200
F 2.5
2010 200
F 2.5 F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
4:3 N
4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
Fn2
2010
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
200
F 2.5
2010 200
F 2.5 F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
4:3 N
4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
– ?? 1 ?
?? 10 ?
2010
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
200
F 2.5
2010 200
F 2.5 F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
4:3 N
4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
?
?????? RAW ??? JPEG ??,????????????
??? RAW ???????,????? JPEG ??,??? RAW
??????????????? JPEG ????,??????
RAW ?????????,?????????????????
?? RAW ?????,???? 62 ? 63 ????
??:??????????
???,?????????????????????????
??????????????????(P.142)?
????????????
??:???????????
???????,??????????;???????,??
?????????????????????????????
???,??????????????
??:????
????????????????(P.143),????????
?????????????
??????
?? z ? Z ????? 1 ??20
?? 81 ???????????
?,?????????????
??
?? 20 ?
4:3 N
2010
F 2.5
200
4:3 N
2010 F 2.5
????? 81 ?
????????????
??????????????????????
????????,??????????????
??:????
??????????????,????????????
??
• ??????????,???????????? ADJ. ??
• ???????????????????:
• ? 20 ???? 81 ????,?? DIRECT ??????? +?–?
Fn1?Fn2 ? ADJ. ?(?????),????????
• ????????,?? DIRECT ??????? + ? –,??
??????????????????????? DIRECT ?
?????? Fn1?Fn2 ? ADJ. ??????????????
????????????????,?? Fn2 ??,????
? ADJ. ??????????????
????????????
????
?? z ??????????????????????
???????????????????(P.143)???
???,??? ADJ. ??
????????:
?? ??
z ???
???? ???????,????????
C/D
?????,?????????????????????
C??????????????????????,???
/D?????
???? ?????????
ADJ. ? ?????????????????????
Z ???
??
• ??????????????:
???? ????
L?M?5M?3M 16 ?
1M 6.7 ?
VGA 3.4 ?
• ????????????? M ?????????
• ???????????????????????? 2(P.138),
? ADJ. ???????????????????
????????????
????
????????????
??????
? 1?????
???????(P.34)??????????????
? 2?? d ???
???????(?????
? Fn1 ? Fn2 ?????)?
? 3???????
?? + ? – ????????,????C/D?
?????,??????????????????
2 ? 3 ???????,??????????C/
D???
??????
????????,??????
??? d ???????????
???????????????
????;?? Fn1 ? Fn2 ???
??,????C/D?0
????????????
??????
???????????????
? 1?? d ???
?????????,???
?? 2?????????,?
?????????????
C????????????
/D?
? 2????????????
???????????,?
C????????,???
/D ? ? ? ? 3? ?
????????????,
C?????????,??
/D????? 3.1??
? DISP. ??????????
????
? 3?????
??????(P.37)????
?????C/D???
???? d ????????
???????,?????
???????C/D?
4:3 N 4:3 N
????????????
??:????
??????????????,??? ADJ. ??????
??:
3.1 ?????????????
?????,????C/
D??????????? d
?????????????,
??? DISP. ???
4:3 N
3.2 ??????????????
??,????C/D??
????????? d ?????
4:3 N
???? 3.1–3.2 ??????,??? ADJ. ????? 3,?
?????????????
? 4?? d ???
?????????????
? 5????
?? Fn1 ? Fn2 ?????,
????C/D?
????????????
O(DISP.)??
?????????,??O(DISP.)????????
???????
??/???????
?????????,?? VF/LCD ?????????????
??????,???????????????? VF/LCD ??
?????????
??? LCD ????,?? VF/LCD ???? LCD ???????
???????
????
??O(DISP.)??????????????
???? 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N
?? +
???
???
4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N
????
(???)
??:????
?????????????,???? 144 ????
????????????
??
????????????? + ??(P.32),?????????
?????
????
??O(DISP.)??????????????
???? 4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
2.5 200
4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
2.5 200
???? +
???
???
4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
2.5 200
4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
2.5 200
??
??:??
??????????????????????????“??”
?????????????????????????????
????,???????????????????????,
????????????????(P.85)????,?????
??,?????????
????????????
??:???
?????????????????????????????,
?????,???????????????????????
???????????????,?????????????
???????????????????,?????????
?,???????,????????????
???? ????
???????????,?????????????????
????????(P.85;???,??????,??????
??????????)????????????,?????
????(P.107)?
???????????????,?????????????
??????????????????
?????????.................................................46
????.........................................................................94
????...................................................................... 101
????...................................................................... 120
?????................................................................. 126
????????................................................... 151
????...................................................................... 167
??
????????????,???????
?????????
?????????
??????? P?A?S?M?4? MY ??,???
???????????
?? P:????
????????? P(????)
?,?????????????
???????????????
?????
? 1???? P?
???????? P?????
?????????????
???
4:3 N
? 2?????
?????????????
?????????????
??????
2.5 200
? 3??????????
?????????????
??????????????
4:3 N
?????????
??
???????,?? 10 ??????????????
? 4?????
????????????????
??
??????(EV)????????????????????
???????????????????????
?????????
?? A:????
??? A(????)?,???
???,???????????
????(? f ?)???????
???????????????
????(? f ?)???????
?????????
? 1???? A?
???????? A????
???????
? 2?????
??????????????
?????????????
?;????????????
???
? 3?????????
??????????????
??????????????
?????????
4:3 N
? 4?????
????????????
??
??????????(P.92),????????????????
4:3 N
?????????
?? S:????
??? S(????)?,????
????,??????????
?????“??”??,???
???????????????
??????
? 1???? S?
???????? S?????
????????
? 2???????
?????????????
? 3?????????
?????????????
?????????????
?????????
2.5 200
? 4?????
????????????????
??
?????????,??????,????????????
??(??? f ?)?
4:3 N 0
?????????
?? M:????
??? M(????)?,???
????????,?? ADJ. ??
??????
? 1???? M?
???????? M????
?????????????
????????????
4:3 N
? 2??????????
????????????,
???????? ADJ. ???
??????(????,?
?????????????
??;???? 138 ???)???????????
????????,??????????(????
???(?? –2EV)?????(?? 2EV),???
????????????)?
? 3?????
????????????,???????????
???????
––22 EEVV ++22 EEVV
?????????
??
• ????????????????????????????
???????????
• ?????????,? ISO ??????????????
(P.90),ISO ??????ISO ????????????????
????????????????
• ????????????????????????????
??????,?????????????????????
???,?????????????????,??????
?????????,??????????????????
????? 2 ??
• ????(AE)?????????????????????
???? Fn1 ????? Fn2 ??????? AE ??,????
?????????????,??????????????
???????????,??????????? +/– ???
?(P.137)???????,?????????? + ? – ??
???????????,????????????????
???????????????????????????,
???????????????????? M ??(P.138)?
?????????????????????????
?????????
4??:????????
??4????????,?
???????????????
???????????????
??????
??????4??????
?????
?? ??
?? ??????(P.54)?
?? ??????????
?? ?????????????
?? ??????????????????????
??
??????????
??????,????????????????:
• ?????????
• ????,??????????????
• ???????????
????
??
???????(???????)????????
(P.56)?
?????????
???????????????:
? 1????????4?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
??4
? 2??C/D?
?????????
? 3???????
C?? +?–?Fn1 ? Fn2 ????????,???
/D??????,????????????
????
? 4?????
• ????:???? 54 ????
• ??????:???? 56 ????
?????????
??:????
???4???????????
???????,???C/D?
?????????? Fn1 ?????
?????? + ? – ????????
???(P.58)????????(P.127)
?????(P.128),???? Fn2 ??
?????????????????
???????????,???? 59
????
1
2
3
4
1????
2??????
3???????
4????
????
?????????? AVI ???????
? 1?4?????3?
?? + ? – ????3(??),????C/D?
?????????????
??????
? 2???
??????????,?????????????
??????????
?????????
?
• ?????, ????,???????????????
• ??????????????????
• ?????? 90 ??,???? 4GB???????????,
????????????????????????????
?????????????,???????(P.61)????
???????
??
• ??????????????
• ???????????,??????
• ??????????????,???????????
• ???????????????????(P.60)?
• ???,???????????????,????????
??????,???????????????
?????????
4??:????
??????????????,???????????
??????????,???????????????
???????????????,??????????
???????????????????;??? Fn2 ?
?????,??? + ????????????????
??????????,???????????????
??????????
?
?????????:????????????????????
????????????,????????????????
????????????:
• ??????
• ?????????????
• ?????????????????
• ????????????
??:????
???????????????????????(P.110)?
?????????
“MY”??:???????
???????????????
???? MY1 ?????????
???(P.129),????????
? MY1??? MY2 ???? MY2 ?
????????,?? MY3 ??
?? MY3 ??????????
? 1???????? MY1?MY2 ? MY3?
?????????????
??????????????
4:3 N
??
? MY ??????????????????????,?
???????????????????
??:??????
??? MY ???????????????????,??
???????????????(P.92)?????????
? MY ???,??????????
? 2?????
??????,???????????????
?????????
????
??? +?–?Fn1?Fn2 ?C/D???????
?
?????????????????,????????
? 1???????
?4??????,??
??????C/D ??
??????
??:4??
?4???,??C/D
???????;?? Fn1 ???
?????,??? – ?????
?,???? Fn2 ???????
??
??????????
????????
? 2?????????
?? + ? – ????????
??,???? Fn2 ????
????????
??
??? DIRECT ??????? – ?
??????????
?????????
? 3???????
?? + ? – ????????????C/D?
??????????,??? Fn1 ????????
????
????????????????????????
5?P?A?S?M?MY1?MY2? MY3??
?? ??? ??
???? · ?? L 4:3 N 61
?? ???? 64
???????? 2.5m 68
?????? ? 69
????? ? 70
?? ???? 70
???? ?? 71
?? ? 73
????? ? 75
????? 0.0 78
????? 1/2 79
??????? ??? 79
???? ? 80
???? ISO
ISO 401
??
80
?? ??? ??
???? ? 81
???? ? 81
????? 2 ?,5 ? 82
???? — 83
?????? ? 84
???? *
1
0.0 85
??? ?? AWB 86
????? A: 0,G: 0 89
ISO ??? ?? 90
??????? *
2
— 91
?????? *
3
? 92
?????? *
4
— 92
??????? *
5
? 920
?????????
4??:??
?? ??? ??
???? VGA640 61
?? ???? 64
???????? 2.5m 68
?? ??? ??
????? ? 70
??? ?? 86
????? A: 0, G: 0 89
4??:??/??/??
?? ??? ??
???? · ?? L 4:3 N 61
?? ???? 64
???????? 2.5m 68
?????? ? 69
????? ? 70
????? 0.0 78
??????? ??? 79
?? ??? ??
???? ? 81
????? 2 ?,5 ? 82
?????? ? 84
???? 0.0 85
??? ?? AWB 86
??????? *
5
? 92
4??:??
?? ??? ??
???? · ?? L 4:3 N 61
???? ? 81
????? 2 ?,5 ? 82
?????? ? 84
?? ??? ??
???? 0.0 85
??? ?? AWB 86
??????? *
5
? 92
?????????
4??:????
?? ??? ??
???? · ?? 1M 4:3 F 61
?? ???? 64
???????? 2.5m 68
?????? ? 69
????? ? 70
?? ???? 70
???? ?? 71
????? 0.0 78
?? ??? ??
??????? ??? 79
???? ? 81
?????? ? 84
???? 0.0 85
??? ?? AWB 86
ISO ??? ?? 90
??????? *
5
? 92
*
1
? M ???????
*
2
??5???
*
3
?? A ???
*
4
?? MY1?MY2 ? MY3 ???
*
5
???????????????
????
???? · ??/????
??????????????????????????
????
??????,???????????????????
?????????????????????????
????,?????????
?????????
??????
?? ??? ??? ??
RAW 16:9*
2
, 4:3,
3:2*
2
, 1:1*
3
FINE/NORMAL/
VGA*
1
• ?????????????
?????
L 16:9*
2
, 4:3,
3:2*
2
, 1:1*
3
FINE/NORMAL • ?????????????
?????
M 16:9*
2
, 4:3,
3:2*
2
, 1:1*
3
FINE/NORMAL
5M 4:3 FINE • ?????
3M 4:3 FINE
1M*
4
4:3 FINE • ?????????
VGA*
4
4:3 FINE • ?????????????
?????????????
??????
*
1
??????? JPEG ???
*
2
?????????????
*
3
?????????????
*
4
1M ? VGA ????????????????
??
• ???????????????,????????????
??
• ?? ADJ. ?(P.134)???????? · ?????
?????????
??:????
??????????????:
• NORMAL(??):?? JPEG ?????????
• FINE(??):?????,?????????????
NORMAL ????,???????
• RAW:? DNG ???? RAW ????;???? JPEG ????
????? JPEG ??;??????? Irodio Photo & Video Studio
??(?? Windows)??? DNG ?????????????
????? DNG ???
?????????????,RAW ?????????????
?????,???? JPEG ????????????? RAW ?
??,???????:
• ?? RAW ???,??????????????????,?
?????????????????????????? JPEG
???? DNG ?????
• ??????,???????? RAW ???????????
??????????????
????
?? ????
VGA640 640×480
QVGA320 320×240
??
• ????????????????????????????
?????
• ?????? 90 ?????? 4GB?
?????????
??
????????????????,??????????
?? ??
???? *
?????????????????,??????
????????????
???? * ????????????
???? ??????(P.65)?
??
???????????????(P.68)??????
??????????
??? ??????????????????
* ??????? DIRECT ????
???????????????,
???????????????
?????
4:3 N
??:??
????????????????????(? f ?)????,
?????????;???(? f ?)
?????,????????????
??????????????????
????,???????? M?A ? P
??????(??? P ?,?????
?????????????,????
?)?
??(??)
???(???
???)
?????????
??
• Fn1 ? Fn2 ????????????????????????
?(P.136)?
• ????????????????
??????,???C/D?
?????????????????
4:3 N
2.5 30
??:????
????????????,?????????????
????????
? 1?????????????
?????????????
?????
4:3 N
2.5 30
? 2?????
?? N ????,???????????????
??????????,????????
? 3?????
??????,???????????????
??
???????,?????????,???????????
??????(??)?
?????????
?????????
????????????????,?????????
?????????,?????????
? 1???????
?????????????
?? ADJ. ?,???????
???????? P??? +
? – ???????????,
? ? ? ?C/D ? ? ?
??
?? ??
AE/AF ????????;???????????
AF
????;????????????????(P.70)???
????????
AE
???;????????????????(P.64)????
???????
? ???????
? 2?????
??????(P.37)????
C????????,????
/D?
??????????,??
? DISP. ???
?????????
? 3?????
???????????????????/???,
????????????????????
??
• ???????????(P.65)?????
• ?????????????????????,??????
???????????????????,???????
• ??4??????????,?????? ADJ. ?,??
U,???? 68 ????,????????????????
?????????
• Fn ???????????????????(P.68)????,
???? Fn ????????,???????,ADJ. ???
????????
?????????
??????
????????? Fn1 ? Fn2 ??
(P.136),?????????????
?????????????????
????????????;????
???(P.37)???????????,
????C/D(???????
????,??? DISP. ??)????
????????????,????????????????
????
???? ADJ. ???????(P.66),??????,?????
?? Fn1 ? Fn2 ?????????
????????
??????????(P.64)?????????(P.69)?,
??????????? 1m?1.5m?2m?2.5m?3m?3.5m?
5m ? 8(???)?
??
??????????????????,??????????
????? N ????????????????
?????????
??????
????????????????(P.64),??????
?????????????
?? ??
? ??????
?
????????????,????????????
????????????????????????
????? ISO ? ISO ?????????????(P.90)??,?????
??
????????????? N ???????????????
??:????
??????????,?????????
?
• ????????????????????????(P.64),
??????????
• ?????????????????0
?????????
?????
?????????????????(P.64)????,
???????????,?????????(??,?
??????????)??????????????,
???????????
?
• ?????????????????(P.64),?????????
• ?????????????????
??
???????????
?? ??
???? * ??????? 256 ??????
????
????????????,????????????
?????????????????????????
???
??????????????,??????????
?????????????????
* ??????? DIRECT ????
????????????,??
???????????????
???
4:3 N
?????????
????
?????????????(?????)????????
?? ??
??
????????????????????????
????
?? * ??????????????
?? ????????????????????????
?? ??????????????????????
??(TE)
(????)
????????????????????????
?????????????????
?? 1
?? 2
????????????????????????
???????????????
* ??????? DIRECT ????
?????????,?????
??????????????
4:3 N
???????????(TE)??? 1 ??? 2 ???,
???????????? Fn2?
?????????
? 1????????????
• ??:?? + ? – ?????
?????? Fn1 ? Fn2 ??
???
• ??(TE):???????
??????????????
????????,????
???????? Fn2???
+ ? – ??????????
? Fn1 ?????
• ?? 1 /?? 2:?????
?????????????
???????????,?
?????????????
Fn2??? + ? – ?????
?????? Fn1 ? Fn2 ??
??????????C/D???
?????????,????????????
CFn2??? + ? – ??????????,????
/D?????
? 2?????????
???????C/D?
? 3???????
??C/D,??? Fn1,????C/D?
?????????
?????????????
?????????
4:3 N
??
?? ADJ. ??????????(P.134)?
??
???????
• ??:????????,???
????????
???????????????
??????????
• M ???(????????):????????,??
????????????????,????????
????,???????????? MP ??(P.95)?
M ????? M ???(?)? M ???(?)????
???
????????…
…?????????????
?????????
??
?? M ???(?)? M ???(?)??,????????
?? MP ?????????????????????????
???????????
????????,??????
?????????????
4:3 N
?
? M ??????,??????,?????????????
????
??
• ????????,???????,???????????
?????????????????,??????????
??? AWB(P.86)?
• ??????????? MP ???????????????,
????????????????? MP ???
??:MP ??
MP ???????????????
?????????
?????
?????????????????????? 2 ?? 3
????
?? ??
? *
??????????
AE-BKT
????????????????????????
WB-BKT
??????????????:?
????????,??????
????????????????
(P.86),????????????
??????????????,?
??????
??????
CL-BKT
????????????,???????????????
(P.77)?
* ??????? DIRECT ????
???????????????
????
4:3 N
?????????
??
• ????????????,???????????????
??????????
• ?????? · ??(P.61)???? RAW,?????????
???????????
• ?????????????
• ??? AE-BKT ?,????????????? AWB?
AE-BKT:?????
???????:
? 1?? AE-BKT?
???? AE-BKT,???? Fn2?
? 2????????
?? Fn1 ? Fn2 ????,?
? + ? – ?????,???
?C/D?
? 3???????
??C/D,??? Fn1 ???C/D?
??
• ?????????????,?????????
• ?????????????????? · ??????(P.140)
?????
?????????
CL-BKT:???????
????????? CL-BKT ?,???????????
?????????? CL-BKT ??(TE)?????(P.146):
• ?:?????????????
?,?????,???????
• ?:?????????????
?,?????,?????,?
???????????????
?(TE)(P.71)???????
??(TE)??
??:?????????????
?????????????????????????????
(P.71)??????????????????????????,
?????????(TE)???????????,?????
?????????????????(?????????(TE),
???????????????)?
?????????
?????
? –2.0 ? +2.0 ??? 1/2 ? 1/3 EV ??
????????????????
???????????????
?;?? + ? – ?????????
??,????C/D?
????????,??????
????????????
4:3 N
??
• ??????????,???? 28 ????
• ?????????????????? · ??????(P.140)
?????
?
???????,???????????????????,?
?????????????
?????????
?????
?????????????????????(P.28)??
??????????(????????):
FULL 1/1.4 1/2 1/2.8 1/4 1/5.6 1/8 1/11 1/16 1/22 1/32 1/64
?????????,?????
??????????
4:3 N
??
?????????,?????????
?
????????????????,????????????
??????????????????
???????
??????????????
• ???:????????????????????
• ???:?????????????????????
????????0
?????????
????
?????????? ISO ????????????(?
???????????)????????? ISO ???
????????? ISO ????
????????????
4:3 N
??
• ????? · ????? RAW(P.61)?,???????? JPEG
??,????? DNG ???
• ?????????????????????????
???? ISO
??????????????,???????????
?? ISO ????????(??? ISO ????????
???)?ISO 201 ???ISO 401 ???ISO 801 ???ISO
1601 ??? ISO3200 ??????
?????????
????
??????????,???????????????
???
????????????
4:3 N
?
• ???????????,????????????????
???????????????,????????????
?????,??????????
• ?????????? DNG ???????? JPEG ???MP ?
?????
• ?????????,????????
• ?????????????????,??????????
??
????
?????????,????????????????
????????????,?????????????
??
N ????????????????
?????????
?????
?????????????????????????
?,??????????????,????????:
? 1??????????????
?? Fn1 ? Fn2 ??????,??? + ? – ?????
??C/D????????
? 2?????
????????????????????????
????
???????????,??C/D ????
??
?????????
????
??? 5 ?? 1 ?????????????,?????
???????????????:
? 1???????
?? Fn1 ? Fn2 ???????
?????,???? + ? –
???????C/D ?
???????
???????????? 4:3 N
? 2?????
???????????????????????
? 3?????
??C/D??????
?
•4???????????
• ??????????? 0?
• ???????????????????,????????
??,????????????
• ????????????????????????????
?????????
??
• ?????????,??????????????????
????????????????,??????????
• ?????????????????
• ????????? M ???,??????????
??????
????????????????????(YY/MM/DD)
???????(YY/MM/DD hh:mm)???
??????????,?? DATE?
4:3 N
??
• ????????????????????????????
???(P.20?149)?
• ???????????
• ????? · ????? RAW ?,?????? JPEG ???,?
???? DNG ????
• ???????????????????
?????????
????
??????????????:
• ??????:??????????????????
??????????
• ?????????:???????????????
?????
• ?????????(??,???????????):
????????????????????
? 1??????????
?????????????
?,???? Fn2 ?????
???????
? 2???????
?? + ? – ???????????????????
?,???C/D???????
? 0.0 ??????,??????
?????????
4:3 N
?????????
?
M ???????????
??
?????????????????? · ????????
(P.140)?????
???
??????? AWB ?,??????????,???
???????,??????????????????
??????????,??????????????
?? ??
?? * ???????????
?? AWB
??????????????????????(??
???,????????)?
?? ????????????
?? ??????????????
??? ?????????
??? ?????????
???? ???????(P.88)?
???? ??????????(P.88)?
* ??????? DIRECT ????
?????????
?????????,?????
??????????????
4:3 N
?
• ??????????,?????????????????
???????????????????
• ??????,?????????????????????
?????
? 1????????
?????????????,???? Fn2 ?????
? 2???????
?? + ? – ???????
???????????,??? ADJ. ??C/
D???????
??
????? ADJ. ???????????(P.134)?
?????????
??:?????
???????????:
? 1???????
??????????? ?
????
? 2??????
?????????????
??,?????????
DISP. ??????? 1 ? 2 ?
????????
? 3???????
??C/D????????
??
????????????????????
????:??????????
???????????????:
? 1???????
??????????? ?
?????? DISP. ???
?????????
? 2???????
?? + ? – ????????
???????C/D?
? 3???????
??C/D????????
??
????????????????????????
?????
?????-?????-??????????????
??????????????????????????
???????
?????????????(P.58)
???????????????
???(P.37)?????????
? DISP. ????????????
??????C/D????
????,??? DISP. ?????
??
??
??
??
???
??0
?????????
???????????????? 4:3 N
??
• ????????? ADJ. ?(P.134)?
C??????,??????????
/D?
• ?????????? Fn ??(P.136)?
• ?????????4?,??
?????????????
• ?????????????(P.109)
????????????????????
ISO ???
?????????????????????,????
?,???????????????? ISO ????
• ??:??????????????????????
??????????????????????
• ?????:???????????????????
???,?????????????????????
??????????? ISO ???????????
(P.140)?
?????????
• ISO(?):???????? ISO ????????? ISO
?????????????????????????
?????
??????????????(?
???????????,???
???????????????
????)?
2.5 ISO 200
? 1???? ISO ??????
?? + ? – ???????
? 2??????????
??????????,???C/D ????
???
??
• ????? ADJ. ?????? ISO ?????(P.134)?
• ????????????????????????????
??????????????????
• ????????????????“??”(????????
????)?
???????
????????????(P.59),?????????
5 ????????????????????????
?????;??????,????C/D ???
??????????
?????????
??????
?????????????,????????????
??????
??
???????????????????
??????
?????????“MY”???
(P.57)?,????????5?P?
A?S ? M ??????,????
???????????????
?? MY ?????;??,???
????? MY ???,?????
???????
??????????????????????????
E???????????????
?????????
?
• ????????????????
• ???????????,????????????????
1 ?????,?????????????????????,
???????????????? 1 ?????,?????
???,E????F;??????,E????
• ???????????????????(??????)?
?????
• ????????????????????????
??
???????????,J???????????????
????
???????????? MP ???
????
????????????
? 1??6???
??6??????????????
? 2?????
?? +?–?Fn1 ? Fn2 ??(P.34)
????,?????????
????????? 3 ???
??
? 3?????
?? ADJ. ???????????????????,
????????:
?? ?? ??
??/?? z/Z
?? z ?????,?? Z ???????
??????,?? z ? Z ???????
?????;??????????????
??
??/?? ADJ. ?? ADJ. ????;?????????
???? +/– ?? + ?????,?? – ???????
2010????
?? MP ??
?? M ????????,???????? MP ????
???????? MP ???
??
?????????????????????????????
????
? 1??6???
? 2?? MP ???
??? MP ?????S???
?????????
2010/03/01 14:09 ISO 200
F 3.3
EV +1.0
1/55
?? 2 ???
• ?? DISP. ????“??”?“???”??
???
• ??????,????? z ???????
?????????????
• ??????????????
z
ADJ.?
Z
2010/03/01 14:09 F 3.3
6/6
1 55
??????
• MP ???????????????
• ??????(P.37)???????
• DISP. ???????
z
ADJ.?
Z
100-0001 6 6
2010/01/01 02:33 ISO 200 EV +1.0
F 3.3 1/55
????
• ????????????????
• ?? z ??????
ADJ.?????
2010/01/01 02:33 ISO 200 EV +1.0
F 3.3 1/55
100-0001 2 6
?????
• ????????????????????
????????????
??/?? ?? ADJ. ??
?? ?????? z?
?? ?????? Z?
?? ?????? z?
?? ?????? Z?
????? ?????? z?
????? ?????? Z?
??? ???????? ADJ. ??
???? ???????? ADJ. ??
?
• DPOF???????????????(????)?????
???????????? MP ???
• ???? MP ???????????????????????
??????????????????????????,?
?????? MP ??????????
• MP ????????????????
?? MP ??
???????? MP ????????,???????
?????????
??
• ?????????????????
• ?????,?????????
? 1??6???
? 2?????? MP ???
????S??? MP ???
????????,????
?? z ?????????
?,?????? 3?
2010/03/01 14:09 ISO 200
F 3.3
EV +1.0
1/55
? 3??C/D?
???????
? 4?? + ? – ????????,
???? Fn2?????
?? 1 ???
? 5?? + ? – ?? 1 ??
?? Fn1 ? Fn2 ?????
? 6??C/D?
????????
? 5?? + ? – ??????,????C/D?
???? 97 ????? 2 ??
?????,????? 5?
? 6?? + ? – ??????,?
???C/D?
? 7????,????C/D?
?? ADJ. ?????????????????? 99
????? 7 ????
? 8???? 7 ???????
C??????????,????????,????
/D?
? 9?? N ???
10???,????C/D?????
?????????
? 5?? + ? – ??????,????C/D?
???? 97 ????? 2 ??
?????,????? 5?
? 6?? + ? – ??????,?
???C/D?
7??????????????,????C/D?
?????????????,? DISP. ??????
???????
?? ADJ. ?????????????????? 98
????? 7 ????
? 8?????????????
?,????C/D?
??????
?? ??
? 9???? 7 ? 8 ???????
10?? N ???
11???,????C/D?????
00
??????
? 5?? + ? – ??????,?
???C/D?
? 6???,????C/D?0
????
????
??????????????????????????
???
????
????????6??,?????????
? 1???????
??C/D?
? 2?????????
?? + ? – ?????,?? Fn2 ?????????
?????
??
??? DIRECT ??????? – ???????????
??????????:
?? ??
?????? 102
?????? 103
?????? 104
?? 105
???? 106
????? 109
???? 110
?? ??
????? 111
?? 112
???????????? 115
DPOF 115
?????? 97
???? 1170
????
??
?????????????(P.126)???
??????
???????????????????(?????
20 ???),????????????????????
???
????/??????
?????????????,?????,????C/D?
????????????????,???? Fn2 ??????
??????,????C/D?
??
• ????????,??????????
• ??????? 20 ???,????????????????
????,??????????
????/??????
???????????????????
? 1?????????
??????? z ???
? 2?????
???????????C/D?
? 3????????,???? Fn2?
?????? ?????0
????
? 4???????
?? Fn1 ? Fn2 ????????,????C/
D??????????????????????
??????,?????????C/D?
?
• ????????????????????????,???
????????????
• ??????????? SD ????,???????????
????????????
• ? SD ???????????????????,?????
SD ?????? [CLIPINFO] ???? CLIP.CLI ?????????
??????,????????????????
• ??????????????,?????????????
?????
• ???????????????????????????
??????
????????????????,?????????
???????
??
• ???????????????????????
• ???????6??????????0
????
• ???????????????,???????????,
???????????
• ????????????????,??? N ???????
??????????
• ???????????????????,?? +?–?Fn1 ?
Fn2 ??????????????????
??????
???????????,??????????????
?(P.101)?????????? L?M?5M ? 3M ??(P.61)
????????? 1M ? VGA ?????,??? 1M ?
?????????? VGA ????????? RAW ??
???????????
??
• ?????????? 4 : 3???????????? 16 : 9?3 : 2
? 1 : 1,??????????????????,??????
?????
• ?????????????????,???? 61 ????0
????
??
?????????????,????????????
??
? 1?????
???????????????
? 2?????
??C/D??????,??????,??
?? Fn2???????,??? DISP. ???
? 3?????
?? z ? Z ??????????,???????
(P.37)????????,????C/D?
?
• ??????????????????
• ??????? MP ???
• ?? RAW ??(P.61),???????? JPEG ???
• ????????,??,???????????????
??
• ?????????,?????????? FINE??????
????,??????????
• ????????????????????????????
z ???,?????????????,?????? 13 ??
• ??????????????????????(?????
?)??????0
????
????
?????????????????????????,
?????????????
??:??????
? 1?????
????????????????
? 2???????
? ?C/D ? ? ? ? ?
?,???????????
?? Fn2?
? 3?????
????????? Fn2???
???????,?????
??????,??????
?,???????????
????????,????
?????????,???
????????
? 4?????
??C/D?????????????,???
DISP. ???????????????,?????
???????0
????
??:??????
????????,????????????????,
?????????,?????????
? 1????????????
????????????,
?????????????
????,??????(??)
????????(??)?
?????? ADJ. ??????
??????????,??
Fn1 ? Fn2 ???????,?
?????????????
?????????????,
??? N ??;????????????????
? 2?????
??C/D?????????????,???
DISP. ???????????????,?????
???????
? ? ? ?: ? ??
??????0
????
??:???????????
• ????:???????,????
?????????????????
???
• ?????:???????,???
?????????????????
??(???)????????,?
?????????????????
?????????????????
?????????
??????
• ?????:???????,???
?????????????????
?????????????????
????????
?
• ????????????????????????????
??? M ????????????????????????
• ????????????,??,????????????
???0
????
?????
????????????
? 1?????
????????????????
? 2????????
??C/D??????,
?????????????
? Fn2?
? 3??????
??????(P.37)????
?????? DISP. ?????
???????????
? 4??C/D?
??C/D ?????(??????????
??,???? DISP.)?????????????,
????????????0
????
?
• ????????????????????????????
???? M ????????????????????????
• ??????????,??,???????????????
????
??????(???????)???,???????
???????
? 1?????
????????????????
? 2???????
??C/D??????,
?????????????
Fn2????????????
???????,??????
?????,????????
????????????? 5
???;????????,??? Fn2 ??? + ??
????????????????????????,
??????????????
????
? 3??C/D?
????????????,????????????
???????? 2 ? 46 ?,????????
?
?????????????????????????????
?? M ??????????? RAW ??(P.61),??????
??? JPEG ???
??
• ?????????????????????,??????
?????:
?? ??(???) ?? ??(???)
L 24 ? 3M 8 ?
M 18 ? 1M 5 ?
5M 12 ? VGA 2 ?
????????,?????????(P.104)??????
???????,????????????
• ?????????????????????
• ??????????????(P.56)?
?????
???????????????????????? 3 ?
???????????,??????????
???,??????????;???????????
?????
????
??
???????????????
??????????
4:3 N
?
??????????,?????????
??????
???????????????
????,?????,????
???????,?? Fn2 ??
????????(??????
??,??? Fn1 ? Fn2 ????
C??)????????????
/D?
????
???????????
?????????????????????
? 1??????????,??? Fn2?
?????????,???
?? 2?????????,?
?????????????
??????????C/
D?
? 2????????????
??????????,??
? Fn2 ?????????
?????????????,
C?????????,???
/D ???? 3???
???????????,?
C????????,???
/D???? 3.1?
? 3?????
??????(P.37)????
?????C/D???
????? ???????
??????,??????
???????C/D ?
??
4:3 N 4:3 N
????
??:????
??????????????,??? ADJ. ??????
??:
3.1 ?????????????
?????,????C/
D????????????
????????????,?
?? DISP. ???
4:3 N
3.2 ??????????????
??,????C/D??
????????? ???
??
4:3 N
???? 3.1–3.2 ???????,?? ADJ. ?????? 3
????????????????
? 4?? N ???
?????????????????,??????
??????????????????
?????????????????
????????,?????,?
?? Fn2????????????
??C/D?????????
????,???????????
????C/D?
????
????????????
?????????????????????,????
????????,?????????????????
???????????,???????????;??
???,???????????
??
• ?????????????????????????,??
????????????????????????,???
??????C/D;??????????????,?
?????
• ???????????????????
DPOF
????????????????,?????????
?????“????”,???????????????,
?????????? DPOF ????????????
??
??? RAW ??????,???? JPEG ???
??:DPOF
DPOF(????????)?????????????????
????????????????? DPOF ????(P.9)?
????
??????????
???????????????
??,?????,??????
??? DPOF ??? Fn2,???
????????(??????
??,??? Fn1 ? Fn2 ????
C??)????????????
/D?
??????????
????????????,??
? DPOF ??? Fn2,??????
?????????C/D?
??????????????,
C???????????????
/D?
??????????
???????????????:
? 1?? DPOF?
???????????C/
D ???????????
DPOF ??? Fn2?
????
? 2????????????
?? Fn1 ? Fn2 ?????????,?? + ? – ??
?????????????????????,??
? – ???? 0?
? 3??C/D?
??????????????,?????????
????????????????
????
???????????,????????????
C?,???? Fn2?????????????,????
/D?
??
???????????,?????????
?
?????????,????????
• ?????
• ????????????
• ?? DPOF????????????????????????
??????????????????
• ???? DPOF ?????
• ????????? SD ???
• ??????????????
• ?????????? MP ??
????
?????????
???????????,?????? A/V ??????
?????
? 1????????
????? A/V ?????,?????????
? 2? A/V ??????????
?????????????,
?????????????
?????????????
??
????(??)
????(??)
? 3????????
?????,???????
A/V ???????????
? 4????????????
??????????????
???????
? 5????????
?? 6 ??? 1 ????????????????
???????????????,????????
?????????
????
?
????? A/V ???????????,????,?????
A/V ????
??
• ?????????????????????,??????
????? DVD ??
• ?????????? HDMI ?????(??)?????
HDMI ???????????????????
• ??????? HDMI ?????,?????????????
???,??????? HDMI ?????,?????????
????
• ?? HDMI ??????????????????,?????
?????
• ??????????????:NTSC(????????????
????????????????)? PAL(????????
?????????????????????????)???
? SECAM????,????????????????????;
?????????????????????,??????
????(P.149)?0
????
????
???????????? USB ?????????,??
?????????????????????
?
?????????? RAW ??????,???? JPEG ???
??
???????? PictBridge,????????????????,
?????????? PictBridge ??????????????
??? PictBridge ???,????????????
???????
?????? USB ??????????????
? 1????????
????? USB ?????,?????????
? 2? USB ??????????
?? USB ??????????????
????
? 3????????
?????,???????
USB ??????
?? ADJ. ?????????
?,???????????
??;?????? ADJ. ??
??
?????????????? ADJ. ?,??????,2 ?
???????????????,???????????
???????,????????????? ADJ. ??
???????? PictBridge ????(? PictBridge ?
??????,?????????????????
?)?
?
?? USB ????????????????????,?????
????
??
??????????,???????????????
????,??????????;??????????
?????
?
?????????? USB ????
??
??????????,??????????????
????????
???????????:
? 1?????
?? Fn1 ? Fn2,?????
??? PictBridge ?????
??,???? ADJ. ???
????????????;
C????????,????
/D?
??:??????????
????????????,??? ADJ. ????????
???,?????????
????
? 2????????
?????????????
??;??????????
? Fn2 ???????,??
?????????????
??????(??????
???????;?????
??????????)??? + ? – ???????
?,????C/D ????????????
??
?? ??
???? ???????
???? ???????
???? ??????????
????
???????????????????????
????,???? 20?149 ??????????
?????(P.84)???,?????????
????? ???????
???? ???????????????
?????? ???????
???? ???????
???? *
?????
???? ???????
???? *
????????????
??/?? *
????????????
* ?????????????http://www.ricoh.com/?
????
??
???????????????
?????????????,?
?? ADJ. ???????????
??????;????????
?C/D?????????
??????????
? 3?????
??????,???? 2 ????????????
???C/D?????????????;?
?????????,??? DISP. ????????,
??????? PictBridge ?????
????
??????
???????????:
? 1??Z???
?????????????
? 2?????
???????????C/
D?
? 3???????
?? + ? – ????????
???? ????;???
?????,??? – ???
? 0?
? 4???????
?? Fn1 ? Fn2 ?????????,?? + ? – ??
???????
? 5????????
??C/D ????????????? 123 ?
????????
? 6?????
??????,?????????????C/
D?????????????;????????
??,??? DISP. ????????,??????
? PictBridge ?????
4:3 N
?????
?????
??????????(P.58?101)??????????
?????
? 1?????
??C/D ??????????(P.58)(??
????,???? MODE ??)?
? 2???????
?? Fn1 ?????????
???,?? + ? – ????
?????????(P.127)
?????(P.128)??? Fn2
???????????
1
2
1???????
2????
? 3?????????
?? + ? – ????????
??,???? Fn2 ????
????????
? 4???????
?? + ? – ????????,????C/D
???????(???????????;????
??????)?
?????
??????????????
?? ??? ??
?????? — 129
?????? — 131
?????? — 132
Fn ??????? ? 133
??????? ? 133
ADJ. ??? 1 ??? 134
ADJ. ??? 2 ISO 134
ADJ. ??? 3 ?? 134
?? ??? ??
ADJ. ??? 4 ???? 134
ADJ ?????? ? 135
Fn1 ???? AF/MF 136
Fn2 ???? ???? 136
+/– ???? ???? 137
???????? ?? 1 138
M ?????? ?? 1 138
?? M ?? ???? 138
?????
??????????:
?? ??? ??
??? [ ??? ] — 139
??? [ ????
? ]
— 139
??????? — 139
DIRECT ????? ?? 140
?? · ?????? 1/3EV 140
ISO ?????? AUTO 400 140
AF ??? ? 140
???? 5 ? 141
?????? 5 ? 141
???? ??? 141
??????? ? 142
?????? 0.5 ? 142
??? ?? 142
??????
(?)
142
???? 9.8 ? 143
???? ? 143
?? ??? ??
?????? ?? 144
????? ?? 144
?????? 144
Fn ?????? ? 145
???????? ? 145
??????? ? 145
CL-BKT ??(TE) ? 146
?????? sRGB 146
?????? ?? 147
?????? ? 147
????? ? 148
???? — 149
Language/L (?? *
) 149
???? (?? *
) 149
HDMI ?? AUTO 149
??????? ?? 150
* ???????????
?
• ????????????????????????????
????????????????
• ????????????????????????????
?????
?????
?????
??????
??????? MY1?MY2 ? MY3 ??????????
??????,???????????????????
? 6 ????
? 1?????
????????????????????????
??????:
•4?????:????(5?P?A?S?M ?
??)?????(?4???)???(?
A ? M ???)?????(? S ? M ???)???
??????????????????
• ??????:????????????????
???????????????????????
??(P.133),???????????
• ????:Fn1 ????/ Fn2 ????(? Fn ??
???????????;???? 133 ???)?
+/– ?????ISO ????????? · ?????
???????????????????????
???????CL-BKT ??(TE)????????
??
?????????????????????????????
???????????????0
?????
? 2?????????
?????????????
??????,???? Fn2?
? 3?????
????????? MY1?MY2
? MY3 ? ? ? ?, ? ? ? ?
C? MY1?MY2 ? MY3 ? ? ?
/D(????????
????,??? DISP. ??)?
?????????????
??????????“?”
?(P.131),????????
??? Fn2?????????
??C/D?
?????????????
?????????????,
?????????????
?????????????
?,???????????
??????
?????
??????
?“?”?????? MY1?MY2 ? MY3?
?????????????????,?? Fn2,???
??????
? 1?????????
??????????????
??(MY1?MY2 ? MY3)??
? Fn2?
? 2???????
?????????????
C????????,????
/D?
?????????????????,??? DISP.
???
?
????????????????????????,????
????????????????,????????????
?? MY1?MY2 ? MY3 ???????????????????
????????,???????????,????????
???? MY1?MY2 ? MY3 ????????
?????
??????
????????????????????
?????????????????,?? Fn2,???
??????
? 1???????
??????????? MY1?
MY2 ? MY3 ?????,??
??? MY1?MY2 ? MY3 ??
? Fn2?
????“?”??,???
???????? Fn2????
??????? Fn2?
? 2?????
?? + ? – ??????,??
?? Fn2 ????(?????
?,????????????
????)????????,
?? Fn1 ???????,??
?????????
? 3????????
??C/D ???????(????????
????,??? DISP. ??)?
?????
??:??????
??? 2 ?????(???)???
?????????????????
??;????????,??? Fn1
? Fn2 ?????????,?? – ?
??????????(??????
??,??????????? –)??
? +?–?Fn1 ? Fn2 ???????,
??C/D??????????
????????(????????
??????,??? [ ?? ])???
t ????????????????????? 32 ?????
? ADJ. ???,??? DISP. ??????????????
Fn ???????
????????? Fn ?????(P.136)??????
????? MY ???
???????
?????????????(P.89)?????????
?? MY ???
????
????
?????
ADJ. ???
? 5?P?A?S ? M ???,??? ADJ. ????? 4 ?
????,???????????????,ADJ. ???
????(P.86)?ISO ???(P.90)?????(P.61)??
???(P.71)??????????;?????(P.89)?
??(P.64)???(P.70)???(P.73)???(P.75)???
??(P.78)??????(P.79)?????(P.85)?
?4???,ADJ. ???????????????
?(????????????)?
?????
?? ADJ. ?
??????? ADJ. ?????????:
? 1?????
???????? ADJ. ?,??????????,
??? Fn1 ? Fn2,?????????????
??1 ??2
?? 4 ?? 3
? 2???????
C?? + ? – ??????,???? ADJ. ????
/D?
??
?? ADJ. ?????????????
ADJ ??????
????? ADJ. ???????????????????
?????
Fn1/Fn2 ????
????????????? Fn1/
Fn2 ??????? Fn1 ? Fn2 ??
????
????????? Fn1 ? Fn2 ??????
?? ??
AF/MF ?????????????(P.64)?????*
1, 3
AF/Snap ?????????????(P.64)?????*
4
AE ?? ?????*
2, 5
JPEG>RAW*
10 ??????? · ????? RAW ????,??? Fn ??
????????????? RAW ??(P.61)?*
5. 6
?? > ?? ??????????(P.71)?*
7
?? >TE ??????????(TE)(P.71)?*
7
???? ?????????(P.85)?*
5
??? ???????(P.86)?
WB ?? ?????????(P.89)?*
9
ISO ?? ISO ?????(P.90)?*
7
?? ?????? · ????(P.61)?
?? ??????(P.64)?*
4
???? ????????(P.71)?*
7
?? ??????(P.70)?*
7
?? ??????(P.73)?*
8
????? ??????(P.75)?*
8
???? ????????????(P.68)?*
3
???? ?????????(P.78)?*
4,5
??? ???????(P.79)?*
8
?????
*
1
????????(P.64)?????,??????????????
???????
*
2
??? M ??????????? M ?,?? Fn ??????????
????????????????
*
3
?4?????????????????????
*
4
?4????????????
*
5
?4????????????
*
6
?4??????????????
*
7
??????,?4???????
*
8
?4???????
*
9
????,?4???????
*
10
??? RAW ??????????????? · ???????????
??
???? · ????? RAW ????
L(16:9)?M(16:9)?5M?3M?1M?VGA RAW(16:9)
L(4:3)?M(4:3) RAW(4:3)
L(3:2)?M(3:2) RAW(3:2)
L(1:1)?M(1:1) RAW(1:1)
?????,AF/MF ???? Fn1 ??,???????
Fn2 ???
+/– ????
?????? + ? – ???????????????(P.78)?
???(P.79)?????(P.85)?
?????
????????/ M ??????
????????? M ?,??? ADJ. ????????
??
???????? M ??????
?? 1 ?? 2 ?? 1 ?? 2
ADJ.? ???/??? ??/??? ???? ??
??
??
??/?? ??/??? ?? ????
?? M ??
????????? + ? – ??(P.137),?? AE ????
?? Fn1 ? Fn2 ??(P.136)?,???????????
???????????/??????????????
????????????????
• ????:????????;???????????
??????
• ????:??????????;?????????
??????
• ??:????????????????????
??
????????,???? + ? – ????????,????
? Fn ???? AE ???
?????
?????
????????/??????????
?????????????????????????:
?????,?????????,??????????
??????????????????????????
??,??????????????
?
• ????????????????????????????
???,???????????????????(P.151)?
• ??????????????????,??????????
????????????????
??:???
??????????,?????????“LOCK”??(P.16)?
????????????????
???????
???????????????
???? + ? – ????????
??,??C/D ?????
????????C/D ??
?????????0
?????
??
??????????????(????)????????(?
???;???????????,?????????????
??)?
DIRECT ?????
??? DIRECT ???????????????????
??????
?? · ??????
?????????????????? 1/2EV ? 1/3EV?
??
????????,????? · ????????? 1/2EV,??
?????? 1/3EV?
ISO ??????
????????? ISO ?????????????,
????????????(P.90)?????????:
ISO 200(AUTO 200)?400(AUTO 400)?800(AUTO 800)?
1600(AUTO 1600)? 3200(AUTO3200)?
??
??????????????????(??????????
??)?
AF ???
?????,???????? AF ??????????
?????
?????
????
??????????????????????1 ???
5 ??? 30 ?????????,????/??????
????????????????
?
• ??????,?????????????:
• ????????????????????
• ?????? OFF ??,????6??????????
• ??????,?????????????
??????
???????????????,??????????
????????(?????????)?1 ???5 ??
? 30 ???????
??
???????????????,?????????????,
?????????
????
? LCD ???(VF-2)????????,? LCD(???
??)? VF(???)??????????????
???????,??????????,???????
???????
?????
???????
??????,?????,????? 5 ???????
??????????,???????????????
??????????????????
??????
??????????????????????????
??????:0.5?1?2 ? 3 ????(????????
???????,????????????,?????
?;???? 38 ? 39 ???)???(????????
????????)?
???
????????????
?? ??
??
????????????????????,???????
??????????????????? + ??(P.32),??
?????????????????????
????
???????????????? + ??,????????
???????????????
???
????????????????????????????
??????? + ??,?????????????????
??????
??????
??“???”???????????????
(?)? (?)? (?)? (?)?
?????
????
????C/D??? ADJ. ??????(P.38)??
?????????? 5.7 ??9.8 ?? 16 ??
??
• ?????????(P.38)??????
• ????????????????????,???????
?????????(P.38)?
????
??????????????????????
?
????? M ???(P.73)????????????????
?????????????????????????????
????????,????????????????????
???????,???????????????????:?
????????,???????????,????????
?????
??
??????????????,??????????????
??????????????????,??????????
?????????
?????
??????
????????????????????
?????
??????????????????????????
????????????????(P.32)?
??????
?????????????????(P.42)?
?? ??
3×3 ????????
4×4 ????,???????????????,
?????????????????????
??????
2×2 ????,??????,????????
??????????
?????
Fn ??????
????,????? Fn ????
??????????:????
?,???????,?????
????????????
????????
????,???????? MY1?
MY2 ? MY3 ???,??????
???????????????
???
???????
????,??????????
????????(P.8),????
???????????????
??????????
4:3 N
4:3 N
2010
4:3 N
?????
CL-BKT ??(TE)
???????????(P.77)????????????
??????????? 3 ???(?????,????
?,??????????),?????? 2 ???(?
????,??????)?
??
????????,????????(TE)?,???????
? 3 ????
??????
??????????????sRGB ?????????
?,????? AdobeRGB ???
?
Adobe RGB ????? Adobe Systems Inc. ??,????? Adobe
Photoshop ????????????????????????
?,??????? Adobe RGB ???????????????
??,?? Adobe RGB ???????????????;???
?????????????????,????????? sRGB
??????????
?????
??????
??????????????????
• ??:???????????????,??????
?????? · ????????,?????????
• ????:????????,????????????
??????????,??,???????????
?????????????????????????
?????
???? · ????? L ? 4:3 ?(P.61),???????
???
????????,??????
??????????
4:3 N
?
?4?????? M ?????????,?????? · ?
???? RAW ?,?????????
??????
?????,???????????????????
?????
?????
????????????????????????
• ?:?????“R”??? 0010001 ? 9999999 ????
???? 7 ?????(??:“R0010001.jpg”)????
?????,?????????????????
• ?:?????“RIMG”??? 0001 ? 9999 ?????
??? 4 ?????(??:“RIMG0001.jpg”)?????
????,???????? 0001?
??
• ???????????????????????“RIMG”?
4 ??????
• ?? DL-10(P.151)??????????“RIMG”? 4 ????
????
• ??????(P.146)??? AdobeRGB ?????????
??????????(??,“_R010001.jpg”?“_RIMG001.
jpg”)?
?
?????,???????????? 999 ????????
9999 ???????,???????????;?????,?
??????????? 9999 ???,????????????
??????,???????????????,??????
???
?????
????
???????(P.20)?
??
??????????????? 2 ??,??????????
?????????
Language/L
????????????????
?? ?? ?? ??
?? ??????? ??
English ?? ????
Deutsch ?? ????
Français ?? ??
Italiano ???? ??
Español ????
????
????????????????(P.118)?,????
?????????????????????? NTSC ?
PAL,??? SECAM?
HDMI ??
???? HDMI ?????????????????
AUTO ??????
??
??????? AUTO????? AUTO ???????????
??????,??????????????????0
?????
???????
??????,???????????????
??????????????????????
????????
????????
??????????????????????????
??? Windows ??;?? Macintosh ?????????
162 ????
??
?????????????????????????
Windows
??????????????????:
• ????? DL-10 ??(P.153),???? 159 ?????
??????????
• ??? DL-10 ?????????????(P.160)?
??
??????????????????????(???)?
????????
????
?????????,????????????????
???????????????
????
Windows 2000 Professional SP 4?Windows XP Home Edition/
Professional SP 3?Windows Vista SP 2
CPU
Windows 2000/Windows XP:Pentium® lll 500MHz ???
Windows Vista:Pentium® lll 1GHz ???
??
Windows 2000/Windows XP:256MB ???
Windows Vista:512MB ???
?????? ?????? 160MB
?? 1024×768 ?????,???? 16 ???
??
• ????????
• ??? USB ??
?
• ??? 64 ?????????????????????,??
USB ???????????? Service Pack ?????????
????,??????????????
• ???????????? USB ?????????? PCI ???
????????????? USB ?????? USB ?????
?????,??????????????
• ?????????????????????
????????
????
???????????????
????????????
• ?????:???????
DL-10:?????????????
Irodio Photo & Video Studio:???
???????????????
???,??? Irodio Photo & Video
Studio ?????????????:http://www.pixela.co.jp/
oem/irodio/e/irodio_digitalphoto_videostudio/
USB ????:???????????????? Windows
98?Windows 98 SE?Windows Me ? Windows 2000 ??????
?????
WIA ????:???????????????? Windows
XP ?Windows Vista ???????????
• ?? CD-ROM ???:??????,????? Adobe
Reader(P.156)?????? Irodio Photo & Video Studio ?
???????,???“Irodio Photo & Video Studio”?
????? Irodio Photo & Video Studio.exe?
????????
????
????????????????????? Windows
XP?
?
• ????????????,???????????????
• ??“Caplio”????????,?????????“DC”?
???? Caplio ?????????:
Caplio ?? DC ??
RICOH Gate La DL-10
Caplio Viewer DU-10
*
Caplio Server SR-10
*
Caplio Setting ST-10
*
* ???????
???????? Caplio ??,????? DC ???,????
?????? Caplio ???????????????????
??? DC ??,????????? Caplio Viewer?Caplio Server
? Caplio Setting,????? Caplio ????????(???,
?? DC ???,????? 158 ??????? Caplio ??,?
????????)????,???????????????
???? DL-10 ? RICOH Gate La ??????
• ????????????
• DL-10 ??????,??????????
????????
? 1????????
?????????????
???????
• Windows Vista:?????
?????????????
??? Autorun.exe ????
??????
• ?? Windows ??:???
???????????
? 2????????
• Windows Vista:?????????“??????”
??????????????????
• ?? Windows ??:??????????????
???
? 3????????????
?????????????
??????????
? 4?????????
?????????????
?????????????
???
????????
? 5??????,????????
Irodio Photo & Video Studio ??
??????(??????
?????????????
?,??????????)?
?????????????
?????
? 6?????
?????,????????
??????????????
? 7???????
????????????????????????,
????????????????????????
? 8??? DL-10 ????
????????????? Windows ??????
??????????? DL-10 ????
??
?????????,???? 158 ????
?? Adobe Reader
????????????(???) ??? Adobe
Reader?????????? Adobe Reader,??????
??????????
?
• ??????????????????
• ????????????
????????
? 1????????
?????????????
???????
• Windows Vista:?????
?????????????
??? Autorun.exe ????
??????
• ?? Windows ??:???
???????????
? 2???? CD-ROM ????
????????????
? 3?? Adobe Reader?
??“Adobe Reader”???,??????????
??????????“AdbeRdr910”?????,?
?????????????????“??????”
???,??????
??
• ?? Adobe Reader ???,??? Adobe Reader ?????
• ?? Adobe Reader 9.1 ?? MSI(Microsoft Windows Installer)3.1 ?
?????? Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 ??????? Firefox
2.0 ? ? ? ? ??Microsoft Internet Explorer ? Microsoft Windows
Installer ??? Microsoft Update ????
????????
????
????????? DC ??? Irodio Photo & Video Studio?
?
• ????????????
• ?????,?????????????????
? 1??“??/????”?????
?? Windows ??“??”?????????
(Windows XP ? Windows Vista)???? > ?????
????/?????
? 2?????
?????????(DC ??? Irodio Photo & Video
Studio)?????/??????????????
???;????????????????????
??,???????????????
???????????????? Irodio Photo &
Video Studio ?,????????
????????
?? DL-10 ????
??? DC ???,????????????????
? 1????????
? 2????? USB ????
?????????? USB ?
??
?
• ?? USB ??????????
??????????,???
??
• ???????,??????????
?????????????
???????????,DL-10
????,?????????
??????????“???
?”??“Digital Camera”??
?(??????? Caplio ??,
???????“Caplio”??
??????)?????????????????
?;??????????????????????
? 3???????????
??????,???? 161 ????0
????????
??
???????,????????
?? DL-10 ???????
?? DL-10“????”????? USB ???,???????
?????
??????????????
??? DL-10 ????
???? DL-10,??????????????????
???????Windows XP?
? 1????????
? 2????? USB ????
????????????? USB ??,??????
????????????????????
? 3???????????????
????????????
???????“???
?”?,????????
????????????
????????,???
????????,???
????????????
????,???????
“RICOHDCI”,??????????????????
?????????????????
????????
?
• ???????????????USB????
• ??????????????????????????,??
????????????
• ????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????
??????
??????????
???????????????,
????????“??????”
?“???????”??(?????? Windows XP ?
???),?????????????? USB ?????
????? USB Mass Storage Device??????? USB ?
???
??
• ??? USB ???????????????????????
?,??????????????????????????
???,???????
• ???????????????????,????????
??
????????
Macintosh
????????? Mac OS X ?? 10.4–10.5.7 ????
?
VM-1 ??(P.164)??? Macintosh ??????
?????? Macintosh
? 1????????
? 2????? USB ????
?????????? USB ?
??
?
• ?? USB ??????????
??????????,???
??
• ???????,??????????
??????????????
??????????????
????????
? 3???????????????
????????????
?????,??????
????????????
??????????,?
??????????,?
????????????
??????,?????
? ?“RICOHDCI”, ? ? ?
????????????????????????
????????
??????????
???????????????,??????????
????,?????????????????????
?,?????? USB ????
??
• ??? USB ???????????????????????
?,??????????????????????????
???,???????
• ???????????????????,????????
??
• ????????? Macintosh ???????“FINDER.DAT”?
“.DS_Store”????????????????,???????
????????
?? MP ?????
?? M ????????,????????? MP ???
???? VM-1 MP ?????? Macintosh ????? MP
??,????????
?????????????????? VM-1 ?????
???? MP ??????????? MP ???? MP ??
?????????,??????????“?????
?????(???)”?
???? MP ??????????
???? MP ????????????
???????????????
??????? Mac OS X 10.4 ? 10.5.7
Macintosh ?? Apple Inc. Macintosh ??
?????
Mac OS X 10.4 256 MB ???
Mac OS X 10.5 512 MB ???
???????? 5 MB ???
????? ???? Macintosh ????????
??
VM-1 ????????????????
????????
??VM-1
? 1????????
?? Macintosh ??????????????????
? 2???????
?? RICOH ?? > VM-1 ??? > VM-1 Installer.pkg ?
????????? VM-1 ??;?????????
????????,???????,???????
? 3??VM-1?
????,?????????,?????????
???????????;?????
????????,????????? ....
????VM-1,??????
????????
??VM-1
?
• ?????????????????????,???? VM-1
?????????????????
• ??????????,?? Mac OS ????????
? 1??VM-1 ????????
?? Applications ??? > Utilities ??? > VM-1 Utility
????
? 2??VM-1 Uninstaller ???
???????????,??????
? 3????????,??????
??????????????;?????
????
????
????
????
???????????,????????
?? ?? ??
?????? ?????????????? 15
?????? ??????????????????
20,
149
????????
??????????????????????
??
15,
148
??????
??????????????????????
??????
—
????,???
? ?
??????????????????????? 15
???????? ?????????? 112
????????????????(??)???????? 16
????????
??
???????????????????? —
????
??????????????????????
????
39,
139
?????,????????????????
??????? 0?
125
????????
???
?????????????????????? 139
????????
??????????????????????
???
139
?????????
???????????????,??????
????;?????????
139
????? ?????????????????? —
???? ????????? —
????
??????????????????????
?????
15
????
?????????
??
?? ?? ?? ??
??????
??
???????????
???
???????????
?????(?????
??)?
12,
14
?????? ???????? 13
????????? ??????????? 14
??????
????
???????????
??
?????? 18
????????
?????(?????
??)?
12
?????? ???????? 13
??????
??
?????? ?????????? 14
??????
?,????
??????
??????
??
?????? ???????? 13
???????
???????????
??
????? 14
??????
????
?????????? — —
???,???????
????
— —
????
??
?? ?? ?? ??
??????
??????
??
????????
?????(?????
??)?
12
???????????
??????
??????? ON ???
??,??? 6 ????
???
18, 34
?????????? ??6??????? 34
?????????? ????????? 22
???????? ??????? 139
?????? ???????????? 15, 39
???????????
???
??????? 15
????????
???????????
??
29
??????? ??????? 16
?????????? ????????? —
??????
????
????????? ?????????? 142
??????
??
???????????
???
???????????
?????
18,
139
????????
?? VF/LCD ??????
????
42
?????? LCD ????
?? VF/LCD ??????
?????
42
??? A/V ???? ?????? 118
??????
??????
????
????? ????????? —
?????????? ?????? 25
??????????????????????? 25, 65
??????????
???????????
??
270
????
?? ?? ?? ??
?????
J
??????????
???????????
???????????
?????
21,
92
??????????
???????????
ISO ??????????
??????
29,
90, 92
??????
??????
???????
?? OPEN/f ??(???
??/??)??????
29
?????????? ????????? —
???????????
?:
• ???????????
???????????
????
• ?????
• ?????
????????
54, 73,
75
??????????
???????? OPEN/f
??(?????/??)
??????
29
????????
?????(?????
??)?
12
??????
?????
???????????
????
?????? —
?????? ?????? 78
?????? ?????? 78
?????????? ????????? —
?????
??????
?????,?????
????????
78
???????
???????????
??????
50, 85
???????? ?????????? 139
?????
????????????
??
?? OPEN/f ??(???
??/??)??????
29
???????
???????????
??????
50, 85
???????? ?????????? 139
????
?? ?? ?? ??
??????
???????????
????????????
???????????
??????????
86
???????? ?????? ?? DISP. ????? 42
????,?
??????
?????
???????????
????????
???????????? —
???????
??(“??”)?
?????? ???????????? —
??????
???
???????????
???
??????? + ??? 32
?????? ?? DISP. ????? 42
??????? ???????????? 21
??????
??????
????,?
???????
????????????
???????????
???
—
?????????? ?????? —
??/??
?? ?? ?? ??
???????
??????????? ??6? 19, 34
A/V ????????? ???? A/V ???? 118
????????????????????? 149
? LCD ????????
???
???????? LCD? 141
????
?? ?? ?? ??
??????
??????
???????????
????? ???????????
???????????
???????????
15,
139
???????????
?????
??????????
?????????? ????????? —
??????
???????????
?????????,?
??????????;
???????
—
??????
???
????????
?????(?????
??)?
12
???????????
??
?????? 18
???????
?????? ????? 112
???????
?????? ????????? 16
???
???????
??
?? ?? ?? ??
??????
??
?????????? ????????? 15
??????
??
????????
?????(?????
??)?
12
??????
???????????
??
18
?????????? 14
?????? ???????????
???????????
???????
20, 149
??????
???????????
????
???????????
???????
20, 149
??????
????
??????????? ??????? 141
??????
????
?????????
???????????
???
32, 142
????
?? ?? ?? ??
??????
??????
??????????
??
????????? 149
A/V ??????? ?? A/V ???? 118
???????????
???
???????????
???
—
??????
??????,???????? PDF ?????????
????(???)?
????(Windows Vista/Windows XP)
?????????? DL-10 ?,? Windows XP Service Pack
3 ? Windows Vista Service Pack 2 ???????,????
??????????Windows XP?
???????,???????
????????????
?
??????????????,??????????????
???????????????
????
?????????????????,???Windows ?
????????
? 1??“Windows ???”?????
??“??”???????
??,???? Windows ??
?(???? Windows ???,
?????????????
????????)?
? 2?????????????
??
?“Windows ???”????,
?????????“???
??”????? DL-10???
??,??? DL-10 ?????
??????????,??
????… ??? DL-10 ??
??????
??????????? DL-10,???????????
??????????????????
????
??
???
??
??(???????????,?????)???
??????????????????????
??(?
????)
??????????????
???? ±2.0EV,? 1/2EV ? 1/3EV ???
????
?
FULL?1/1.4?1/2?1/2.8?1/4?1/5.6?1/8?1/11?1/16?
1/22?1/32?1/64
????? 3.0? ???????,? 92 ???
????
????????????????????????“?
???”
???? ??????RAW(DNG)*
1
?? SD/SDHC ???;?????(? 86MB)
??
?? *
2
(???)
5M ??:? 2287KB /?
3M ??:? 1474KB /?
1M ??:? 812KB /?
VGA ??:? 197KB /?
????
?? JPEG(Exif Ver.2.21)*
3
?RAW(DNG)
?? AVI*
4
(?? OpenDML Motion JPEG ????)
?? ?? JPEG ????(?????)
??????
????(???M ???);??(???????
10 ?? 2 ?,??????);??????(???
5 ?? 1 ??,? 5 ??????)*
5
;??????
?;??(TE);??????;????;?????;
????;????;?????;??
??????
??????;?????;????(?? 16 ?);
??????
??
USB 2.0(??)Mini-B ??;????? *
6
;????
1.0Vp-p(75O);HDMI ???????(Type C)
?????? NTSC?PAL
?? DB-90 ?????(3.6V)
????
(?? CIPA ??)*
7 ??????????????
????
??(? × ? × ?)113.9mm×70.2mm×28.9mm(???????)
??(???)
• ?????(????????????????):
160g
• ?????????:66g
?????? 1/4-20UNC
?????? ? 1 ?
???? 0 °C ? 40 °C
???? 85% ???
???? –20 °C ? 60 °C
*
1
???? JPEG ??(JPEG ???????????,??? RAW ???
VGA ????)?RAW ??????? Adobe Systems Inc. ????? DNG
???
*
2
?? RAW?L?M ?????,??????????????
*
3
? DPOF ??????????????(DCF,?? JEITA ??)????
???????????
*
4
Audio:PCM 32 kHz,16 ? monaural ??
*
5
??????????????
*
6
Windows 2000?Windows XP?Windows Vista ? Mac OS X 10.4–10.5.7 ????
????
*
7
?? CIPA ?????????;??????????????????
?????
????
?????/?????
???????,??????????????????
??????????????????????????
?????????
??
• ???????? 90 ??(??? 4GB)?
• ????????????? 999??????????????
?? 999 ?,???????“999”?
• ???????,????????????????????
??????
• ?????????????????
• ????????,?????????
????
?????
???????????????:
????? DB-90 ????? BJ-9 ???
CA-1 ?????
???????? USB ??????
?????
VF-2 LCD ???
????????????????
??????? 100% ??????,
????????????????
? 90°,?????????????
GF-1 ?????
???????????????,
??TTL ???????
ST-3 ??
????
SC-55S ?? SC-55L ??
??
• ????????,??????????????
• ???????????,???????(http://www.ricoh.
com/r_dc/)?0
????
????????
SC-55S/SC-55L ??
ST-3 ??
CA-1 ?????
DB-90 ?????
(??)
BJ-9 ???
(??)
??? USB
??
?????
???????
?????
GF-1 ?????
VF-2 LCD ???
????
GF-1 ?????(??)
??? GF-1 ????????????
? 1??????(P.2)?
? 2??????
?????? GF-1,??
GF-1 ??????
??
? 3??????????
? 4?? DIRECT ???
? 5????????????
??+?–?Fn1?Fn2?ADJ.
?(?????)????
???????
? 6????????
????????????????
??
• ? GF-1 ???,??????????????
• ???????????,??? GF-1?
• ?????????????,??? GF-1 ????,????
?????????
????
???????
??????????????????,???????
???????? 20V ? X ??????????????
????
? 1??????(P.2)?
? 2??????
??????????????,?????????
??
? 3???????
?????,???? A ? M,??????(P.18?
48?50)?
? 4?????? ISO ??????
??????? ISO ?????(P.90)?
? 5??????
???????????????????? ISO ??
????????????????????????
???????? ISO ????
????????????,???????
?
• ?????????,???????????????,??
????????????????????,???????
????
• ????????????????????????????
???????????????????????
????
??????
?? BJ-9 ???
?????? 100–240V ? 50 ? 60Hz ??????,??
??????????????????????????
????????????,???????????
???
??????????,???????????????
??,?????????,?????????????
?,?????????????,?????
?????
????? A/V ???,???????????????
???????????????? NTSC ? PAL ????;
???????????,?????????????
??????
• ???????,?????????????,???
?????????????????????,???
????????
• ?????????????????????????
?????????????????????????
???????
• ?????????????????????????
??????
????
• ?????????????????,?????????,
??????????????,?????????????,
?????
• ?????????????????????,???????
?????????????????
• ??????????????????????
• ?????????????????,???????????
???????????????? LCD ???????????
???
• ??????????
• ?????????????,??????????????
???????,???????????????????,
?????????????????????????
• ????????,???????????????????
???????
• ????????????
• ???????????????????,????????
??????
• ?????????????????,??????????
???????????????????????????
????
??:????
???????????????:?????????????,
???????,????????????,????????
???????????
?????
?????
• ????????,????????????(??????)
??????
• ?????????????????,??????????
????????????,??,???????????,
????????????????
• ??????,????????????
• ???????????????
• ???????????;?????????
??
• ????????????:????;?????????;
??????????;????;???????(????
???????)????????;????????(??,
????????????)?
• ?????????????,??????
???
????????????
????
????
1. ????????????????????????????????,
???????????????????,????????????
???????????????,????????????????
???????
2. ?????,???????,????????:
1 ?????????????????????
2 ???????????????????????????????
???????????
3 ?????????????????????????????
4 ????(“??????????”???)???????????
????,??????????????????????
5 ?(?)???????????????(?)?????????
??????????????????
3. ??????,?????????????,???????????
???
4. ??????,??????????????????????,??
????????????
5. ?????????,??????????????????????
?????
6. ????????,???????????????????????
???
7. ?????????,??????????????(???????
????????????),?????
8. ??????????????
* ????????????,????????????????
* ???????????????????????
9. ???????(?????????????????),?????
?????? 5 ??
10. ?(?)???(?)????????????????,?????
????????????
????
??
• ?????????,??????????????????????
??????
• ??????????????
• ?????????????,??????,???????????
?????
• ?????????????,????????????????
• ???,???????????????????
??
??
5(??)??.....................................4, 21
d(??)??............................................39
O(DISP.)??...................................3, 42
N(??)??......................................3, 27
OPEN/f(???)??...................3, 29
6(??)??..................3, 19, 94, 101
t(??).....................................................3, 31
8/z ??...................................3, 26, 36, 38
9/Z ??..................................3, 26, 36, 38
A
A(????)??.............................4, 48
A/V ???.................................................ii, 118
A/V ?????............................................... 3
ADJ ??????....................................135
ADJ. ?......................................................3, 5, 134
Adobe Reader................................................156
AF ???...........................................2, 31, 140
B
???..................................................................86
?????.......................................................89
???????........................................133
??........................................................................75
??????..............................................129
??.....................................................................112
??................................................................50, 85
??................................................................ii, 179
??????..............................................132
??........................................................................26
????.............................................................38
C
Caplio..................................................................154
CL-BKT ??(TE)......................................146
??................................................71, 75, 86, 89
???...............................................................142
??................................................................66, 70
????.............................................................34
???.......................................................12, 183
???............................................59, 127, 128
????????????............115
???.......................................................15, 139
?????....................................................148
????..........................................................167
D
DIRECT ??................................................... 3, 5
DL-10........................................................153, 159
DNG.........................................................................63
DPOF ...................................................................115
??.....................................................................122
??................................................................71, 75
????..........................................................106
??........................................................................12
??/????..............................3, 14, 15
????.............................................................10
??.....................................................................151
???...............................................................118
????........................................................2, 18
????.............................................................54
????.............................................................63
???.......................................................71, 106
??........................................................................64
????.............................................................66
?????.......................................................36
F
Fn ??????.......................................145
Fn ???????.................................133
Fn1?Fn2 ??........................................3, 136
??........................................................................43
G
????????.....................................139
??????????..........................139
??..........................................ix, 153, 155, 157
??........................................................46, 48, 50
????.............................................................92
H
HDMI.........................................................119, 149
??................................................................71, 75
?????....................................................111
??????..............................................131
??,???..............................................118
??,??.......................................................94
??,??.......................................................34
????..........................................................101
????????...................................138
I
Irodio Photo & Video Studio.................153
ISO ???.........................................................90
ISO ??????.....................................140
J
JPEG........................................................................63
??????..............................................147
??????.................................................84
????.............................................................83
????.............................................................80
???? ISO....................................................80
???.................................................................... 3
??........................................................................27
??........................................................................64
??.....................................................................173
K
????........................................................2, 23
????.....................................................46, 49
????????......................................68
L
Language/L............................................149
?????....................................................178
??........................................................................73
??..................................................44, 106, 139
M
M(????)??............................4, 50
M ??????........................................138
CMacintosh.........................................................162
/D??................3, 58, 101, 126
MY ??..........................................................4, 57
???.................................................................... 2
??........................................................................24
????.......................................................... 2, 4
N
NTSC.........................................................149, 183
?????............................................15, 139
????.............................................................85
P
P(????)??..............................4, 46
PAL.............................................................149, 183
PictBridge .........................................................120
Q
???????........................................150
??????.................................................92
?????.......................................................32
R
RAW.........................................................................62
RICOH Gate La ...............................................154
??.....................................................2, 181, 182
??.....................................................................154
S
4S(????)??..............................4, 49
??..................................................4, 52
SD, SDHC..............................................................15
??????................................................... 3
??????..............................................146
????.............................................................39
????..........................................................136
???,??..............................................181
????............................................................... 2
?????.......................................................28
???????...........................................79
???..................................................................79
?????.......................................................78
????.............................................................580
???????...........................................91
???????........................................145
??.............................................................20, 149
????..........................................................149
????.............................................................65
????.............................................................26
??????..............................................147
?????....................................................144
T
????.............................................................27
????.......................................................... 2, 5
?????............................................ 3, 8, 42
??????..............................................142
????.............................................................71
???? · ??.............................................61
U
USB ???.....................120, 159, 160, 162
V
VM-1..........................................................165, 166
W
??????.................................................69
??.............................................................42, 144
X
???..................................................................71
????????...................................145
???????........................................139
????..................................................56, 110
Y
???.................................................................... 3
?? M ??...................................................138
????..........................................................143
??.............................................................94, 142
???..................................................................25
?????.......................................................70
Z
?????....................................................128
???????...........................................92
???.......................................................44, 108
?????....................................................127
????.....................................................22, 64
????/??????
.................................................3, 18, 22, 29, 141
??????..............................................141
????..........................................................143??????????
(???)
??????????????????????????
???????????
• ??????????,???????????“???
?”?
• ??????????????????????????
? ? ?,? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?“? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
(???)”?
• ????????????????,?????????
?“??????????(???)”?2
?????
?????............................................ 2
?1? ?????????(Windows?)
????.............................................. 4
???DL-10???? .................................. 6
??DL-10???????? ............................ 8
Windows XP Service Pack 3?
Windows Vista Service Pack 2?????? ............ 10
????????????............................. 13
DL-10????? ..................................... 14
??/??DL-10............................................ 14
DL10 ??.................................................. 15
[????]????? ...................................... 17
[??????]????? .................................. 20
?SD??????? .................................. 22
SD???????........................................... 22
??????MP?? .................................. 23
?2? ?????????(Macintosh?)
?????????????........................... 26
????????????............................. 28
?SD??????? .................................. 29
SD???????........................................... 29
??????MP?? .................................. 30
?MP???????? ................................ 32
??
????............................................. 36?1?
?????????
(Windows?)
??????????????????
?? (Windows)?4
????
????????????????
1. ???DL-10????????????
(GP.6)
???????????????????[????]?
????????
2. ??DL-10??????????????????
(GP.8)
? ? ? ? DL-10,? ? ? ? DC Software?? ? ? ? DC
Software ???,???????????“????
??????(???)”
• ?????????????????USB ????????
???????
• ?????? SD ???????????????????
SD?????????????
• ??????USB??????????
• ??????????????????
• ??Windows Vista?“Windows Photo Gallery”?????
? ? ? ? ?,? ? ? ? ? ? SD ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
?,???????????
• ??????????????????????????
??????????????5
• DC Software?????????????Caplio Software?
????????,?????
(*) ?????????
• ?????????,????????????????
??
• ????????? SD ???,????????????
????????SD???,????????????
• ?????????????Windows?
Caplio Software DC Software
RICOH Gate La DL-10
Caplio Viewer DU-10
(*)
Caplio Server SR-10
(*)
Caplio Setting ST-10
(*)6
???DL-10????
1. ??????????
2. ????USB?????????USB????
3. ?USB??????????USB???
??????
???????????,????????????
????????,???????????[????]?
?Windows XP???????7
4. ????????,???????????
???????????????
??????[RICOHDCI]?????????????
• ?????????????????,????????
?????????,????????????????
?????
• ????DC Software,????DL-10 [????]????
[USB???,??????]?????????8
??DL-10????????
DL-10 ? [ ? ? ? ? ] ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? [Digital
Camera] ????????????[Digital Camera] ??
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ???(? ? ? ? ? ? ? Caplio
Software,??????????[Caplio]??????)
????,??????????????
1. ??????????
2. ?USB????????????USB???
3. ?USB??????????USB???
?????,DL-10??,???DL-10???
?????????9
?????????,????????:
• ??DL-10???[??]???
• ?????????????1?3?
• ??DL-10?[????]?????[USB???,?????
?]????????
• ?DL-10?[????]???[??????????]???
?(GP.17),???????????999??????
1000????????,????999???,??????
??????????[OK]???,??DL-10???[??]
???????USB???????????
• ???DL-10??????(?????????????),
??????????USB????
• ?? DL-10 ??????????,???????????
???
• ???????????????????????,??
??????
• ??????????,???????????????
????
• ??DL-10??????????,???[????]??
[ ? ],??????? [RIMG****.jpg](**** ?????
?)????
• ??DL-10???,???P.14?
• ??DL-10 [????]??????,???P.17?
• ?????????????,???P.13?10
Windows XP Service Pack 3?Windows Vista
Service Pack 2??????
??????Windows Vista Service Pack 2 ??????
Windows XP Service Pack 3???????????????
?,????????USB ??????????????
??
??????????????
??????Windows XP????????
????????:
1. ???????????????????,??
??[????]???
????????,??????,???????????
??[????]??????????????11
????[????]??:
????????Windows??????
1. ??[Windows ???]?????
??[??]????? [????],???? [Windows
???](???? Windows ???,????????
???? [???????] ??)?12
2. ???????????????
?[Windows ???]????,?? [??] ????
?[?????] ????? DL-10?????,???
DL-10 ???????? [??]?????,?? [?
???…] ??? DL-10 ????????
????[????]??:
???????,???[Windows ????] ??????
????[????]?13
????????????
?????????????,????????[???
? ? ? ] ? [ ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ] ? ? ? ?(? ? ? ? ? ?
Windows XP ????),?????????? [????
USB ???????] ? [??USB Mass Strage Device],
?????? USB ????
• ???????????????USB ??,????“??
??????”???
• ???????????USB ??????????????
??????USB??????????14
DL-10?????
??
DL-10???DC Software?????
??????????????????,???????
?????
??
???DL-10,???????????
• ??DL-10????[MENU]??,?????????[?
?](???“DL10 ??”)?
• ???????DL-10??,?????????[??]?
????
????DL-10?????,?????????
• ?[ ??] ??,???[ ????] ?[ ??],????
[DC Software],????[DL-10]?
DL-10???????????????????
??/??DL-1015
????DL-10,?????????DL-10???
1 [MENU]??
????????????
2 [??]??
??????????????
??[?????...??[ADJ.]?????????]????
???????????,????[??]???
DL10 ??
[????] ??????????????????
??????[????]???????
?????(GP.17)
[??????] ??DL-10????????(GP.20)
[??] ??DL-10????
[??] ??DL-10?16
3 [????]??
?????[????]???????
4 [???]??
????????Windows?????????????
?????,????????
5 ???
???????USB?????,“???”?????
?,???????“???”,??[??????]?
???????,“???”???,???????
?,????[??????]?17
????DL-10???[MENU]????????????[?
???],??[????]????
???,??????????????????? DL-10 ?
RICOH Gate La ??????
[????]?????
?? ?? ???
1 [USB??
?,??
????]
???????,????????
?USB??????,???????
???????
?????????,??????
????USB??????,????
????????DL-10???[??]
?????
????
2 [???
??]
????????????????
[????]??[Digital Camera]?
????????,??[??]??
?????,????????18
3 [???
??]
???????????
[????]
????????????“2 [?
????]”?????????
[???????]
???????????????
??,????????????
???????
?)2010 ? 1 ? 1 ??????:
[20100101]???
[???????]
???????????????
?????????,?????
??????
?????????“????+
???+3????”?
?)2010?1?1?????:
[20100101_001]????
[20100101_002]???
????
????
????
??
4 [???
????
???]
???????,????????
???????????????[?
????]??[????]?[???
????]??????
???????????,????
???????????
????????,???????
???????
* ???????Caplio Software,
?????DL-10 [????]?[?
?????????]???,??
RICOH Gate La???????SD?
??????????????
????
????
?
?? ?? ???19
5 [???
???]
???????????????,
??????????????[??]
? ?,? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
???
6 [???
????
??]
???????,????????
?????????
????????,????????
????
??
7 [????
IP??]
???????,????????
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??? ? ? ?,? ?
??????????
0.0.0.0
?? ?? ???20
???3??????DL-10????????
????DL-10???[MENU]????????????[?
?????],??[??????]????
[??????]?????21
1 [??????]
?3????????????????
2 [??]
?????[??????]???????22
?SD???????
????PC??????????SD???????????
???SD?????????????????
??????????????????,????????
????????SD?????,????????????
???????????????,??????????
• ?? PC ????????????,??? SD ??????
???????????SD??????PC ??????,
???????????
• ?????????????????SD?????????
???
?????
???????????????????????????
??????,????????SD??????????
SD???????
????23
??????MP??
? ? ? ? M ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?,? ? ? ? ? MP ?
??????Irodio Photo & Video Studio??????MP
???
??????Irodio Photo & Video Studio???,???
???????“??????????(???)”?
1. ?MP?????????????
• ???????????,???P.4?
2. ??Irodio Photo & Video Studio?
3. ??????,?????1??????
• ?????(1)????????
4. ????????MP???
• MP????????????(2)???
• ??MP???????????????(3)??
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(1)24
5. ????????????MP?????????
• ?????????????(4) ???????(5)
????MP?????????
6. ????????MP???
• ?????????????????????
• ?????????????????????,?????
??????MP????????????????????
???,???Irodio Photo & Video Studio? “??”?
• ??Irodio Photo & Video Studio?????,???
Pixela Co., Ltd.????
http://www.pixela.co.jp/oem/irodio/e/
irodio_digitalphoto_videostudio/?2?
?????????
(Macintosh?)
??????????????????
??(Macintosh)?
? Macintosh ?????? VM-1 ????
?“??????????(???)”?26
?????????????
1. ??????????
2. ????USB?????????USB????
3. ?USB??????????USB???
??????
???????????,????????????
????????,??????????????27
4. ????????,???????????
???????????????
??????[RICOHDCI]?????????????
• ?????????????????USB ????????
???????
• ?????? SD ???????????????????
SD?????????????
• ??????USB??????????
• ??????????????????
• ??????????????????????????
??????????????
• ?????????,????????????????
??
• ?????????????????,???????????
??????,?????????????????????
• ??SD????,?????????,???????????28
????????????
1. ?????????????[???]???
????????????????,??????
2. ??USB????
• ?????Mac OS 9[??]???Mac OS X[??]????[??]
?????
• ??? USB ??????????????????????,
???????????????????????????,?
??????
• ?????????????????,??????????
• ??????? Macintosh ???????“FINDER.DAT”?
“.DS_Store”??????????????,???????29
?SD???????
????PC??????????SD???????????
???SD?????????????????
??????????????????,????????
????????SD?????,????????????
???????????????,??????????
• ?? PC ????????????,??? SD ??????
???????????SD??????PC ??????,
???????????
• ?????????????????SD?????????
???
?????
???????????????????????????
??????,????????SD??????????
SD???????
????30
??????MP??
? ? ? ? M ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?,? ? ? ? ? MP ?
?????VM-1??????MP???
??????VM-1???,??????????“???
???????(???)”?
1. ?MP?????Macintosh????
• ???????????,???P.26?
2. ??[????]????
3. ??[VM-1]???
• ??[VM-1]???
4. ?[??]?????[??],???[VM-1]???
??[??],??????MP??,????[?
?]?
• ??MP???????????
• MP ????????????[VM-1] ???????
???????999?31
5. ????????????[<<]?[>>],????
?????
• ??????,???????????MP??,???MP?
????[VM-1]??????,????VM-1???MP???
• ????[VM-1]?????????????????,[<<]
?[>>]?????
• ???????
???
????? ???? ?????32
?MP????????
??????M??????MP?????????,??
???????????????????MP??????
??????,????????????????
• ?????????????????
• ???????,??????????MP????3???
?????????
• ?????,?????????
1. ?MP?????Macintosh????
• ???????????,???P.26?
2. ??[????]????
3. ??[VM-1]???
• ??[VM-1]???
4. ?[??]???[????]?
• ??[????]???
5. ??[??],??????????????,?
???[??]?
6. ??[??]?33
??[????]?
7. ?[??]?????[??],???[VM-1]???
??[??],??????MP??,????[?
?]?
8. ?[??]????[???????],????[?
???]?
• MP???????????????????
??[????]?
7. ?[??]?????[??],???[VM-1]???
??[??],??????MP??,????[?
?]?
8. ??[<<]?[>>],???????????
9. ?[??]????[???????],????[?
???]?
• ????????????34??36
????
????1 ??????
??1
????USB?????????USB??,???????
??????
????????USB???
• ????????????USB???
• ????????,???????????
?????USB???,???USB??????
??2
???????????
??????????,???????????????
???
??3
???????????????
?????????Windows?????,???????
?????????????SD????????????37
????2 ???DL-10?[????]???[?????
?????],????????????
??
??????????????,???????????
??
??[??????????]??????,??????
???????????????
????3 ????????????????????
???????????,?????
??
???DL-10 [????]???[??????????],
??????????????????DL-10 [????]
????[??????????]?
????4 ??????????????[?????]?
??
???????????,????????????[??
????]?????[??????],?????????
???????SD??????????????????
????????,????????????????USB
???????????,???????????????????,?????,??????
?????????????,?
????,?????,????
??,????????????
??,???????????,
????????????
???????????????
?,????????“????”??“??????????????”
??????????
??????
?????????“????”(GP.167)??????????,????
???????
?????????/?????
??????????
??:???????? 1 ????? 21 ?
??: 510030
??: 4007003828 ? 95105931
?? Irodio Photo & Video Studio
??(??) ??:(????)+1–800–458–4029
??
????????????
??:(????)+800–1532–4865
????
??: +44–1489–564–764
?? ??: +63–2–438–0090
?? ??: 021–5385–3786
????: ?? 9:00 – ?? 5:00
??????
??:?????????? 8-13-1 ????
??: 104-8222
????????: Q/TLN DC0003-2009
??:??
2009 ? 11 ???
CK CK
*L754 4973A*
RICOH
BOÎTIER DE L’APPAREIL PHOTO
NUMÉRIQUE GXR
Mode d’emploi du boîtier de
l’appareil phot
http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/support/manual/pdf/gxr/GXR_F.pdf
GXR MOUNT A12
Mode d’emploi
http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/support/manual/pdf/gxr/mount_a12_fr.pdf
GR LENS A12 28mm F2.5
Mode d’emploi
http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/support/manual/pdf/gxr/a12-28_f.pdf
RICOH Gate pour Windows (en français)
http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/support/manual/pdf/rr10/ricohgate-frwin.pdf
RICOH Gate pour Macintosh (en français)
http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/support/manual/pdf/rr10/ricohgate-frmac.pdf
G700 Camera User Guide
http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/support/manual/pdf/g700/g700_en.pdf#page=1
Remote Communication Gate 5 Uesr's Guide
http://support.ricoh.com/bb_v1oi/pub_e/oi/0001038/0001038444/VUZMU/UsersGuide_en.pdf
Avant de commencer
Avant d’utiliser votre boîtier d’appareil photo, prenez le temps
de vous familiariser avec les commandes et les écrans d’affichage
(pages 1–10). Reportez-vous à cette section pour référence pendant votre
lecture du reste du manuel.
Photographie et lecture de base
Lisez d’abord cette section avant d’utiliser l’appareil photo pour la première fois.
Elle détaille les étapes à suivre pour préparer l’appareil, prendre des
photos et les lire (pages 11–44).
Référence
Lisez cette section pour en savoir plus sur les sujets non traités dans la section
« Photographie et lecture de base ». Elle détaille la prise de vue avancée,
les options de lecture, ainsi que la manière d’imprimer des photos,
de configurer les réglages de l’appareil et de copier des photos sur
un ordinateur (pages 45–187).
La batterie rechargeable doit être chargée avant usage. La
batterie n’est pas chargée au moment de l’achat.
BOÎTIER DE L’APPAREIL PHOTO
NUMÉRIQUE GXR
Mode d’emploi du boîtier de
l’appareil photo
Le numéro de série du produit est gravé sous le boîtier de
l’appareil photo.ii
Contenu de l’emballage
Vérifiez dans l’emballage qu’il ne manque aucun des
éléments listés ci-dessous.
* L’aspect des éléments inclus peut être différent.
Boîtier de l’appareil
photo GXR
Le numéro de série
est gravé sous le
boîtier de l’appareil
photo.
Câble USB avec
connecteur mini-B
Il permet de
raccorder le
boîtier de
l’appareil photo à
un téléviseur.
Câble A/V
Il permet de
boîtier de
l’appareil photo à
un téléviseur.
Capuchon du
connecteur
Ce capuchon
est installé
sur le boîtier
de l’appareil
photo.
Protège-griffe
alimentée
Cette protection
est installée sur la
griffe alimentée du
boîtier de l’appareil.
Batterie
rechargeable DB-90
Chargeur de batterie BJ-9
• CD : il contient le logiciel et un Mode d’emploi du
logiciel.
• Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo (le présent manuel)
• Courroie d’encolure
• Garantie
Conseil : fixation dela courroie d’encolure
Passez les extrémités de la courroie
d’encolure dans les oeillets de la
courroie, de chaque côté du boîtier
de l’appareil photo, et insérez
les extrémités dans les attaches,
comme indiqué sur l’illustration.iii
Avis
• Mesures de sécurité : Lisez attentivement toutes les mesures de sécurité
pour garantir une utilisation sans danger.
• Essais de prise de vue : Faites des essais de prise de vue pour vérifier le
fonctionnement correct de l’appareil avant de prendre des photos
d’événements importants.
• Copyright : La reproduction ou la modification de documents, de
magazines et d’autres sources sujettes aux droits d’auteur, autrement
que pour des raisons personnelles, domestiques ou limitées similaires,
est interdite sans le consentement du propriétaire des droits.
• Exonération de responsabilité : Ricoh Co., Ltd. décline toute responsabilité
en cas de défaillance de l’enregistrement ou de l’affichage des photos
résultant d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil.
• Garantie : cet appareil est fabriqué en fonction des caractéristiques
locales et la garantie est valable uniquement dans le pays d’achat.
Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du
produit dans d’autres pays ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense
associée.
• Interférences radio : L’utilisation de cet appareil dans le voisinage d’un
autre équipement électronique peut affecter défavorablement à
la fois l’appareil photo et l’autre dispositif. Des interférences sont
notamment probables si l’appareil est utilisé à proximité d’une
radio ou d’un téléviseur. Ce problème peut être résolu en déplaçant
l’appareil aussi loin que possible de l’autre dispositif, en réorientant
l’antenne de la radio ou du téléviseur, ou encore en branchant la
radio ou le téléviseur sur une prise secteur différente.
© 2009 RICOH CO., LTD. Tous droits réservés. Cette publication ne peut
être reproduite en tout ou en partie sans l’autorisation expresse et
écrite de Ricoh. Ricoh se réserve le droit de modifier le contenu de ce
document à tout moment et sans avis préalable.
Tous les efforts ont été faits pour garantir l’exactitude des informations
contenues dans ce document. Dans le cas où vous rencontreriez néanmoins
une erreur ou une omission, nous vous serions reconnaissants de bien vouloir
nous en avertir à l’adresse indiquée en quatrième de couverture de ce manuel.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista et Internet Explorer sont des marques
déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays.
Macintosh et Mac OS sont des marques déposées d’Apple Inc. aux ÉtatsUnis et dans d’autres pays. Adobe, le logo Adobe et Adobe Reader sont
des marques commerciales d’Adobe Systems Incorporated.
HDMI, le logo et High-Definition Multimedia Interface sont des
marques commerciales ou des marques déposées de HDMI Licensing LLC.
Tous les autres noms de marque mentionnés dans ce document sont la
propriété de leurs propriétaires respectifs.iv
Consignes de sécurité
Symboles d’avertissement
Divers symboles sont utilisés tout au long de ce manuel et sur le produit
lui-même pour prévenir tout risque de blessure ou de dommage aux
biens. Ces symboles et leur signification sont détaillés ci-dessous.
Danger
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent
entraîner rapidement la mort ou des blessures
corporelles sérieuses si les instructions
correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies.
Avertissement
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent
entraîner la mort ou des blessures corporelles
sérieuses si les instructions correspondantes ne
sont pas ou sont mal suivies.
Attention
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent
entraîner des blessures corporelles ou des
dommages aux biens si les instructions
correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies.
Exemples designalisation d’avertissement
Le symbole vous signale des actions qui doivent être
effectuées.
Le symbole vous signale des actions interdites.
Le symbole peut être combiné avec d’autres pour indiquer
qu’une action spécifique est interdite.
Exemples
Ne pas toucher Ne pas démonter
Prenez les précautions indiquées ci-dessous pour utiliser ce matériel
en toute sécurité.
Danger
Ne tentez pas de démonter, de réparer ou de modifier vousmême l’appareil. Les circuits à haute tension de l’appareil vous
font courir un risque de choc électrique.
Ne tentez pas de démonter, de modifier ou de souder vousmême la batterie.v
Ne jetez pas la batterie au feu, ne la chauffez pas, ne la stockez
pas dans des endroits où la température est élevée (par
exemple près d’un feu ou à l’intérieur d’une voiture), et ne la
jetez pas n’importe où. Veillez également à ne pas mouiller la
batterie, à ne pas la jeter dans l’eau ou dans la mer.
N’essayez pas de percer la batterie ou de la compresser. Veillez
à ne pas faire tomber la batterie ni à lui faire subir de choc
important.
N’utilisez pas de batterie visiblement endommagée ou
déformée.
Avertissement
En cas d’anomalies telles que de la fumée ou des odeurs
inhabituelles, mettez l’appareil immédiatement hors tension.
Retirez la batterie dès que possible, en prenant soin d’éviter
tout choc électrique ou brûlure. Si vous alimentez l’appareil
via le secteur, veillez à débrancher le cordon d’alimentation de
la prise secteur pour éviter tout incendie ou choc électrique.
Arrêtez d’utiliser l’appareil dès qu’il présente de tels signes de
dysfonctionnement. Contactez le centre de service après-vente
dès que possible.
Mettez l’appareil immédiatement hors tension s’il entre en
contact avec un objet métallique, de l’eau, du liquide ou si
tout autre objet pénètre à l’intérieur du boîtier de l’appareil.
Retirez la batterie et la carte mémoire dès que possible en
prenant soin d’éviter tout choc électrique ou brûlure. Si vous
alimentez l’appareil via le secteur, veillez à débrancher le cordon
d’alimentation de la prise secteur pour éviter tout incendie ou
choc électrique. Arrêtez d’utiliser l’appareil dès qu’il présente
de tels signes de dysfonctionnement. Contactez le centre de
service après-vente dès que possible.vi
Si l’écran d’affichage des photos est endommagé, évitez tout
contact avec les cristaux liquides qu’il contient. Suivez les
mesures d’urgence suivantes si besoin :
• PEAU : Si des cristaux liquides entrent en contact avec la peau,
essuyez et rincez la zone affectée à grande eau, puis lavez-la
au savon.
• YEUX : Si des cristaux liquides pénètrent dans les yeux, lavezles à l’eau propre pendant au moins 15 minutes et consultez
immédiatement un médecin.
• INGESTION : Si des cristaux liquides sont ingérés, rincez la
bouche à grande eau. Il faut ensuite boire de l’eau en grande
quantité et se faire vomir. Consultez immédiatement un
médecin.
Pour empêcher toute fuite, surchauffe, ignition ou explosion de
la batterie, prenez les précautions suivantes :
• Utilisez uniquement la batterie recommandée pour cet
appareil.
• Ne transportez pas ou ne stockez pas la batterie avec des
objets métalliques, par exemple des stylos à bille métalliques,
des colliers, des pièces de monnaie, des broches, etc.
• Ne placez pas la batterie dans un four à micro-ondes ou un
conteneur à haute pression.
• Si vous constatez une fuite de liquide de batterie ou une
odeur inhabituelle, un changement de couleur, etc. en cours
d’utilisation ou pendant la charge, retirez immédiatement
la batterie du boîtier de l’appareil photo ou du chargeur et
rangez-la dans un endroit à l’abri de toute source de flammes.
Pour empêcher toute ignition, électrocution ou explosion de la
batterie pendant la charge, prenez les précautions suivantes :
• N’alimentez l’appareil qu’à la tension indiquée. Évitez
également d’utiliser des adaptateurs multi-supports et des
cordons prolongateurs.
• Faites attention de ne pas endommager ni d’entortiller les
cordons d’alimentation. Ne placez pas d’objet lourd sur les
cordons d’alimentation, ne le tirez pas et ne le pliez pas de
façon excessive.
• Ne branchez ou ne débranchez pas le cordon d’alimentation
avec les mains mouillées. Pour débrancher un cordon
d’alimentation, attrapez-le toujours par sa fiche.
• Ne couvrez pas l’appareil pendant la charge.vii
Ne laissez pas la batterie et la carte mémoire SD utilisées dans
cet appareil à portée des enfants, afin d’éviter tout risque
d’ingestion accidentelle. L’ingestion des fluides de batterie
est extrêmement dangereuse pour l’être humain. En cas
d’ingestion, recherchez immédiatement une aide médicale.
Conservez l’appareil hors de portée des enfants.
Si le mécanisme interne de l’appareil est exposé suite à un choc
ou autre type de dommage, ne touchez aucun composant
interne. Les circuits à haute tension de l’appareil peuvent causer
des chocs électriques. Retirez la batterie dès que possible, en
prenant soin d’éviter tout choc électrique ou brûlure. Apportez
l’appareil au revendeur ou au service après-vente le plus proche
s’il est endommagé.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans un endroit humide car vous
risqueriez de provoquer un incendie ou de subir une décharge
électrique.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil à proximité de gaz inflammables,
d’essence, de benzène, de solvant ou de substances du même
type pour éviter tout risque d’explosion, d’incendie ou de
brûlure.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans des lieux où son usage est limité
ou interdit afin d’éviter tout risque de catastrophe ou d’accident.
Essuyez la poussière qui s’accumule sur la prise d’alimentation
électrique de l’appareil afin d’éviter tout risque d’incendie.
Pour éviter les risques d’incendie, de choc électrique ou
de blessure, n’utilisez pas le chargeur de batterie avec les
transformateurs électroniques disponibles dans le commerce
lorsque vous voyagez à l’étranger.viii
Prenez les précautions indiquées ci-dessous pour utiliser ce matériel
en toute sécurité.
Attention
Tout contact avec du liquide s’échappant d’une batterie peut
entraîner des brûlures. Si une partie du corps entre en contact
avec une batterie endommagée, lavez immédiatement la zone à
grande eau. (N’utilisez pas de savon.)
Si une batterie commence à fuir, retirez-la immédiatement de
l’appareil et essuyez soigneusement le logement de la batterie
avant d’en installer une autre.
Branchez les cordons d’alimentation fermement dans la prise
secteur. Un cordon mal branché peut causer un incendie.
Ne laissez pas le boîtier de l’appareil photo prendre l’eau ou se
mouiller. Ne l’utilisez pas non plus avec les mains mouillées.
Dans les deux cas, vous risquez de subir une décharge
électrique.
Ne dirigez pas le flash vers le conducteur d’un véhicule, car
cela risquerait de lui faire perdre le contrôle de son véhicule et
pourrait entraîner un accident.
Consignes
de sécurité
relatives aux
accessoires
Avant d’utiliser un produit optionnel, lisez
attentivement les instructions fournies avec ce
produit.ix
Manuels du produit
Les manuels suivants sont livrés avec le boîtier de l’appareil photo
GXR :
Mode d’emploi du boîtier del’appareil photo (le présent livret)
Ce manuel décrit l’utilisation de votre appareil et l’installation
du logiciel fourni.
* Lisez le présent manuel, ainsi que la documentation fournie
avec l’unité appareil photo.
Mode d’emploi du logiciel (fichier PDF)
Le Mode d’emploi du logiciel décrit la procédure pour copier
des photos de votre appareil vers un ordinateur, afin de les
visualiser et de les retoucher. Ce manuel est disponible en
plusieurs langues et chaque version est disponible dans son
propre dossier, lui-même situé dans le dossier « DC Manual »
du CD fourni.
Pour vous y référer plus
facilement, copiez le fichier PDF
du CD sur le disque dur de votre
ordinateur.
Le logiciel de visualisation et de retouche photo « Irodio Photo
& Video Studio » est également fourni avec le produit. Pour en
savoir plus sur l’utilisation de ce logiciel, consultez le menu Aide
dans le logiciel Irodio Photo & Video Studio, ou téléphonez à l’un
des centres d’assistance client suivants :
• Amérique du Nord (U.?S.?A.): +1–800–458–4029 (appel gratuit)
• Royaume- Uni, Allemagne, France et
Espagne :
+800–1532–4865 (appel gratuit)
• Autres pays européens : +44–1489–564–764
• Chine : +86–21–5385–3786
• Autres pays d’Asie : +63–2–438–0090
Heures d’ouverture : de 9h00 à 17h00x
Table des matières
Contenu de l’emballage......................................................................................... ii
Avis..................................................................................................................................... iii
Consignes de sécurité............................................................................................iv
Manuels du produit.................................................................................................ix
Avant de commencer 1
Lisez d’abord cette section avant d’utiliser votre appareil photo pour la première fois.
Introduction ....................................................................................2
Nomenclature de l’appareil photo..................................................................2
Photographie et lecture de base 11
Lisez d’abord cette section avant d’utiliser votre appareil photo pour la première fois.
Premiers pas ..................................................................................12
Chargement de la batterie................................................................................12
Insertion de la batterie.........................................................................................14
Insertion des cartes mémoire .........................................................................15
Installation de l’unité appareil photo sur le boîtier de l’appareil
photo..............................................................................................................................17
Mise sous et hors tension ..................................................................................18
Configuration de base.........................................................................................20
Prise de vue photographique ....................................................21
Tenue de l’appareil photo..................................................................................21
Prise de vue.................................................................................................................22
Zoom..............................................................................................................................26
Prise de vue rapprochée (mode macro)...................................................27
Photographie au flash..........................................................................................28
Retardateur.................................................................................................................31
Indicateur de niveau.............................................................................................32
Visualisation et suppression de photos ...................................34
Visualisation de photos.......................................................................................34
Suppression de photos.......................................................................................39
Touche O (DISP.) .................................................................................................42xi
Référence 45
Lisez cette section pour en savoir plus sur les fonctions de l’appareil photo.
Plus sur la photographie.............................................................46
Mode P : changement de programme .....................................................46
Mode A : priorité à l’ouverture ........................................................................48
Mode S : priorité à l’obturation.......................................................................49
Mode M : exposition manuelle.......................................................................50
Mode 4: Réglages pour diverses scènes....................................52
Modes « MY » : utilisation des réglages personnalisés.....................57
Menu prise de vue..................................................................................................58
Fonctions de lecture ....................................................................94
Visualisation de vidéos.........................................................................................94
Affichage de fichiers MP.....................................................................................95
Menu des réglages de la lecture..............................................101
Menu lecture........................................................................................................... 101
Visualisation des photos sur un téléviseur........................................... 118
Impression de photos................................................................120
Raccordement du boîtier de l’appareil photo ................................... 120
Impression................................................................................................................ 122
Réglages de l’appareil ...............................................................126
Options personnalisées.................................................................................... 129
Configuration ......................................................................................................... 139
Copie des photos sur un ordinateur.......................................151
Windows.................................................................................................................... 151
Macintosh................................................................................................................. 162
Remarques techniques..............................................................167
Résolution des problèmes.............................................................................. 167
Caractéristiques..................................................................................................... 175
Éléments vendus séparément..................................................................... 178
Utilisation du produit à l’étranger.............................................................. 183
Précautions d’emploi ......................................................................................... 183
Entretien et stockage......................................................................................... 185
Garantie et réparation....................................................................................... 186
NOTICES..................................................................................................................... 187
Index .............................................................................................188xii
UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Avant de commencer
Lisez d’abord cette section avant d’utiliser
votre appareil photo pour la première fois.
Introduction .............................................................. 2UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
2
Introduction
Ce manuel décrit comment prendre des photos et les
lire ensuite. Pour vous assurer de tirer le meilleur parti
de ce produit, lisez attentivement ce manuel avant
utilisation et conservez-le à portée de main pendant
l’utilisation de l’appareil.
Nomenclature de l’appareil photo
Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la page dont le
numéro est indiqué à droite de chaque élément.
Vue deface
3 4 5 6 7
12 11
13
8 9 10
14
1 2
1 Sélecteurplus-moins.....................5
2 Touchededéverrouillagedu
sélecteurde mode.........................4
3 Sélecteurde mode........................4
4 Déclencheur ..........................21,23
5 Interrupteur MARCHE/ARRÊT...18,21
6 Lumière AFauxiliaire...........31,140
7 Griffealimentée........................181
8 Couvercledu flash .......................29
9 Microphone..................................–
10 Pointd’attachedeladragonne......ii
11 Repèred’alignementpour fixer
l’unitéappareilphoto..................17
12 Connecteur..................................17
13 Levierdedéverrouillagedel’unité
appareilphoto.............................17
14 Flash............................................28UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Vue de dos
4
1
2
3
17 16
13
14
15
12
9
22 21 20 19
5
6
23
7 8
10
18
11
1 Touche DIRECT..............................5
2 Touche OPEN/f (flash)...............29
3 Touche VF/LCD ............................42
4 Écran d’affichagedesphotos.........8
5 Témoin de miseaupoint
automatique/flash ...18,22,29,141
6 Connecteurducâble USB
..........................120,159,160,162
7 Connecteurducâble A/V ...........118
8 Connecteurducâble mini HDMI...119
9 Manette ADJ. ........................5,134
10 Touche6(lecture)
................................19,34,94,101
11 ToucheN(macro)......................27
12 Touche8(téléobjectif)/
z(vueagrandie).................26,36
13 Touche9(grandangle)/
Z(affichage mosaïque)......26,36
14 Pavédirectionnel.........................37
+ (!).....................................137
– (%).....................................137
Fn1(fonction 1) (#)...............136
Fn2(fonction 2) ($)...............136
15 ToucheC/D
....................................58,101,126
16 ToucheO(DISP.)....................42
17 Touchet(retardateur)/
d(supprimer) .....................31,39
18 Visde fixation dutrépied...........176
19 Couvercledulogementdela
batterie/carte........................14,15
20 Levierdedéverrouillage........14,15
21 Haut-parleur ................................–
22 Pointd’attachedeladragonne......ii
23 Couvercleduconnecteur ...118,121UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Sélecteur de mode
Avant une prise de vue,
appuyez sur la touche de
déverrouillage du sélecteur
de mode (1) et faites
tourner le sélecteur pour
choisir un mode de prise de
vue (2).
1
2
5 (automatique) :
l’appareil définit
l’ouverture et la vitesse
d’obturation pour
obtenir une exposition
optimale (page 21).
M (exposition manuelle) :
vous choisissez
l’ouverture et la vitesse
d’obturation (page 50).
MY, MY2, MY («mes réglages») :
vous sélectionnez l’un des réglages enregistrés
via Enr. Mes réglages (pages 57, 129).
A (priorité à l’ouverture) :
vous choisissez
l’ouverture et vous
laissez l’appareil régler la
vitesse d’obturation pour
obtenir une exposition
optimale (page 48).
4 (scène) :
l’appareil optimise les
réglages pour le sujet,
la scène ou la vidéo
actuelle (page 52).
S(priorité à l’obturation) :
vous choisissez la
vitesse d’obturation et
vous laissez l’appareil
régler l’ouverture pour
obtenir une exposition
optimale (page 49).
P (changement de
programme) :
vous choisissez entre
des combinaisons
d’ouverture et de
vitesse d’obturation qui
produisent la même
exposition (page 46).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Sélecteur plus-moins et manette ADJ.
Lors de la visualisation des photos
ou pendant la navigation dans
les menus, vous pouvez utiliser
le sélecteur plus-moins à la place
des touches + et –, ainsi que
la manette ADJ. à la place des
touches Fn et Fn2. La manette
ADJ. et le sélecteur plus-moins
peuvent également être utilisés
pour sélectionner l’ouverture et
la vitesse d’obturation dans les
modes P, A, S et M.
Sélecteur plus-moins
Manette ADJ.
Vous pouvez assigner à la manette ADJ. des rubriques
fréquemment utilisées du menu prise de vue, pour en
faciliter l’accès (page 134). Pour afficher une rubrique
du menu prise de vue, centrez la manette ADJ. et
enfoncez-la ; vous pouvez alors utiliser la manette et le
sélecteur plus-moins pour sélectionner une option.
Remarque
Les rubriques Options sélecteur de mode M et Options
du sélecteur de mode lecture de l’onglet des options
personnalisées peuvent être utilisées pour modifier les fonctions
assignées au sélecteur plus-moins et à la manette ADJ. (page 138).
Touche DIRECT
Appuyez sur la touche DIRECT en
mode prise de vue pour afficher
les réglages actuels de prise de
vue.
DIRECTUtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Écran DIRECT
Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la page dont le
numéro est indiqué à droite de chaque élément.
1 2 3 8 4 5
12
16
13
18
10
9
11 15 14 17
6
7
1 Modeprisedevue.........................4
2 Ouverture........................46,48,50
3 Vitessed’obturation.........46,49,50
4 Mode flash ..................................28
5 Niveaudecompensation du flash/
niveaude flash manuel .........78,79
6 Correction del’exposition ............85
7 ISO...............................................90
8 Balancedesblancs ......................86
9 Mode miseaupoint.....................64
10 Mesureexposition.......................70
11 Réglages image...........................71
12 Qualitéimage/taille/taillevidéo...61
13 Cadrage.......................................75
14 Continu........................................73
15 Zoned’information........................7
16 Mode macro................................27
17 Verrouill. AE...............................136
18 Retardateur.................................31
Modification des réglages de prise de vue au niveau de l’écran DIRECT
Sur l’écran DIRECT, déplacez le curseur à l’aide de la
touche +, –, Fn ou Fn2 ou de la manette ADJ. (gauche et
droite) pour sélectionner une rubrique, puis modifiez
directement le réglage à l’aide du sélecteur plus-moins.
Il est possible d’ajuster la correction de l’exposition à
l’aide des touches + et – (à la place du sélecteur
plus-moins).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Affichage des options pour les réglages de prise de vue
Si vous appuyez sur la manette ADJ. lorsqu’une rubrique
est sélectionnée au niveau de l’écran DIRECT, les options
de la rubrique de réglage s’affichent. Sélectionnez
l’option souhaitée à l’aide des touches + et – ou du
sélecteur plus-moins, puis appuyez sur la manette ADJ.
ou sur la touche C/D pour définir l’option.
Attention
Il n’est pas possible de modifier les réglages du mode prise de
vue, du mode macro, du mode retardateur et du mode flash du
flash intégré en sélectionnant la rubrique au niveau de l’écran
DIRECT. Modifiez les réglages à l’aide du sélecteur de mode ou
des touches situées sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo.
Remarques
• Appuyez sur la touche DISP. pour modifier le réglage de l’image
d’arrière-plan (page 140).
• Appuyez sur C/D au niveau de l’écran DIRECT pour
afficher le menu prise de vue (page 59).
• Une fois la correction de l’exposition réglée, appuyez sur Fn, Fn2
ou la manette ADJ. (vers la gauche ou la droite) pour placer le
curseur sur d’autres rubriques.
• En mode exposition manuelle, l’indicateur d’exposition
permettant d’obtenir l’exposition optique s’affiche à la place du
curseur de correction d’exposition.
• En mode changement de programme, la vitesse d’obturation
et l’ouverture sont modifiées en même temps de manière à
produire la même exposition.
• Le nom de la rubrique du menu prise de vue correspondant à la
rubrique sélectionnée au niveau de l’écran DIRECT s’affiche dans
la zone d’information.
Affichage de la page suivante ou précédente
Si les rubriques affichées à l’écran s’étendent sur plusieurs
pages, vous pouvez afficher la page suivante ou précédente en
appuyant sur la touche + ou – ou en faisant tourner le sélecteur
plus-moins tout en maintenant la touche DIRECT enfoncée.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Écran d’affichage des photos
Les indicateurs suivants peuvent s’afficher pendant la
prise de vue et la lecture.
Prise de vue (photo) Prise de vue (vidéo)
4:3 N
F 2.5
25cm-
1/50 200
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
15
18
31
19
27 28 29 30
26
32
20
25
24
22
23
21
37 38
F 2.5 1/50 200
34
33
35
36
1 Mode flash ............28
2 Niveaudecompensation
du flash /de flash
manuel..............78,79
3 Modescène...........52
Continu..................73
4 Modeprisedevue
................................4
5 Nombred’expositions
restantes
?*
............177
6 Destination............15
7 Dist. miseaupt snap
.........................64,68
8 Qualitéimage/taille
..............................61
9 Mode miseaupoint/
instantanépar
pression............64,69
10 Balancedesblancs /
compensation dela
balancedesblancs
..........................86,89
11 Mesureexposition...70
12 Réglages image.....71
13 Cadrage.................75
14 Histogramme........44
15 Correction dela
déformation ..........81
16 Réduction debruit...80
17 Correction dubougé...92
18 Horodatage...........84
19 Niveaudebatterie...10
20 Verrouillage
d’exposition
automatique.......136
21 Retardateur...........31
22 Mode macro..........27
23 Distance min deprise
devue.................144
24 Rapportdezoom
numérique............26
25 Barredezoom.......26
26 Prisedevueà
intervalles .............83
27 Indicateurd’exposition
..............................50
28 Ouverture...46,48,50UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
9
29 Vitessed’obturation
...................46,49,50
30 Correction de
l’exposition............85
31 ISO.........................90
32 Indicateurde niveau...32
33 Avertissement
d’exposition...........86
34 Avertissementde flou
.........................24,93
35 Profondeurdechamp
..............................64
36 Barrede miseaupoint
..............................64
37 Longueurdevidéo
.......................63,177
38 Tempsdisponible
?*
..............................55
* Approximation uniquement ; la capacité réelle varie selon les conditions
de prise de vue et la fabrication de la carte mémoire. L’écran affiche
« 9999 » lorsqu’il reste suffisamment de mémoire pour plus de 9 999
photos.
Remarque
Il est possible d’afficher les réglages de prise de vue en appuyant
sur la touche DIRECT (page 5).
Lecture (photos) Lecture (vidéos)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14
4:3 N
2010/0101 00:20
F 2.5
ISO 200
1/50
EV+0.7
2010/01/01 00:20
16
15
17 18
1 Numérode fichier....–
2 Imageactuelle........–
3 Images totales.........–
4 Indicateurde mode
lecture.....................–
5 Imageprotégée...112
6 Indicateurdetirage
DPOF...................115
7 Source...................15
8 Qualitéimage/taille
..............................61
9 Dated’enregistrement
.......................20,149
10 Ouverture...46,48,50
11 ISO.........................90
12 Correction de
l’exposition............85
13 Vitessed’obturation
...................46,49,50
14 Niveaudebatterie...10
15 Longueur/
tempsécoulé............–
16 Indicateurde
progression...............–
17 Balancedesblancs...86
18 Compensation dela
balancedesblancs...89UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
0
Remarques
• L’écran d’affichage des photos peut également afficher des
avertissements et des messages.
• Des informations supplémentaires
peuvent être affichées en appuyant
sur la touche DISP. (page 42).
4:3 N
2.5 200
Indicateur du niveau de batterie
Le niveau de batterie est illustré par l’icône située dans
l’angle inférieur droit de l’écran d’affichage des photos.
Icône Description
(vert)
Batterie pleine.
(vert)
Batterie partiellement déchargée.
(orange)
Batterie pratiquement vide. Rechargez-la ou remplacez-la
dès que possible.
UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Premiers pas............................................................ 2
Prise de vue photographique.................................... 2
Visualisation et suppression de photos......................
Photographie et lecture
de base
Lisez d’abord cette section avant d’utiliser
votre appareil photo pour la première fois.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
2
Premiers pas
Préparez l’appareil photo avant son utilisation.
Chargement de la batterie
La batterie rechargeable (DB-90) fournie avec le boîtier
de l’appareil photo n’est pas chargée au moment de
l’achat. Avant utilisation, chargez la batterie avec le
chargeur de batterie BJ-9 fourni.
1
Insérez la batterie dans le chargeur.
Placez la batterie avec l’étiquette vers le haut,
les repères « + » et « – » faisant face aux repères
équivalents du chargeur.
Attention
Assurez-vous que la batterie est correctement orientée.
2 Connectez le cordon d’alimentation au chargeur,
puis procédez au branchement.
Le témoin du chargeur s’allume pendant la charge
de la batterie. Une batterie vide se rechargera en
cinq heures environ, à 25°C.
Remarque
Si le témoin du chargeur clignote, c’est que la batterie ou le
chargeur est défaillant. Débranchez le cordon d’alimentation
et retirez la batterie du chargeur.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
3
Retirez la batterie.
Le chargement est terminé lorsque le témoin
du chargeur s’éteint. Débranchez le cordon
d’alimentation et retirez la batterie du chargeur.
Attention
• Batterie rechargeable Li-ion : utilisez uniquement une batterie
DB-90 d’origine. N’utilisez pas de batterie non conçue par Ricoh
pour ce boîtier d’appareil photo.
• La batterie peut être chaude immédiatement après usage.
Avant de retirer la batterie, mettez l’appareil hors tension et
patientez le temps qu’elle refroidisse.
• Retirez la batterie si l’appareil ne doit pas être utilisé pendant
une période prolongée.
Conseil :capacité dela batterie
Le nombre de prises de vue possibles avec une batterie DB-90
complètement chargée varie en fonction de l’unité appareil
photo. Les tests sont effectués en conformité avec les normes
CIPA, dans les conditions suivantes : à une température de 23 °C,
écran d’affichage des photos allumé, prise de vue toutes les 30
secondes avec flash déclenché une fois sur deux. L’appareil photo
est mis hors tension, puis sous tension toutes les 10 prises de vue.
Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo
pour en savoir plus.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Insertion de la batterie
Assurez-vous d’abord que l’appareil photo est hors
tension avant d’insérer ou de retirer la batterie.
1 Ouvrez le couvercle du logement de la batterie/
carte.
Déverrouillez (1) et
ouvrez (2) le couvercle.
2
Insérez la batterie.
En utilisant la batterie
pour appuyer sur
le loquet, insérez-la
jusqu’au fond. Le loquet
se verrouillera lorsque
la batterie sera
complètement enfoncée.
1
2
3
Fermez le couvercle du logement de la batterie/
carte.
Fermez (1) et verrouillez
(2) le couvercle.
Attention
Assurez-vous que le
couvercle est verrouillé. 1
2
Retrait dela batterie
Déverrouillez et ouvrez le couvercle du logement de la
batterie/carte, enfoncez le loquet pour le relâcher, puis
retirez la batterie. Veillez à ne pas faire tomber la batterie.
Attention
Si l’appareil ne doit pas être utilisé pendant une période prolongée,
retirez la batterie et stockez-la dans un endroit froid et sec.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Insertion des cartes mémoire
Les photos peuvent être stockées dans la mémoire
interne du boîtier de l’appareil photo (86Mo) ou bien
sur des cartes mémoire SD et SDHC optionnelles.
La mémoire interne est utilisée si aucune carte n’est
insérée ; dans le cas contraire, c’est la carte qui sera
utilisée plutôt que la mémoire interne.
Assurez-vous d’abord que l’appareil photo est hors
tension avant d’insérer ou de retirer une carte mémoire.
1 Ouvrez le couvercle du logement de la batterie/
carte.
Déverrouillez (1) et ouvrez
(2) le couvercle. 1
2
2
Insérez la carte.
En tenant la carte comme
indiqué sur l’illustration,
glissez-la dans la fente
jusqu’à ce qu’elle soit
verrouillée.
3
Fermez le couvercle du logement de la batterie/
carte.
Fermez (1) et verrouillez
(2) le couvercle.
1
2UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Retrait descartesmémoire
Déverrouillez et ouvrez le couvercle du logement de la
batterie/carte, puis appuyez sur la carte mémoire pour
l’éjecter. La carte peut alors être retirée.
Attention
• Les photos ne seront pas enregistrées dans la mémoire interne
lorsqu’une carte mémoire est insérée, même si celle-ci est
pleine.
• Conservez propres les contacts de la carte mémoire.
Conseil : protection contrel’écriture
Basculez le curseur de protection
contre l’écriture situé sur la carte
mémoire en position « LOCK » pour
empêcher l’écrasement ou la
suppression des données de la carte et
le formatage de la carte.
Il est impossible de prendre des photos lorsque la carte est
protégée ; utilisez la protection de la carte uniquement pour
empêcher une perte accidentelle des données et assurez-vous
de libérer la carte avant la prise de vue.
Remarques
• Formatez les cartes mémoire avant leur première utilisation ou
après les avoir utilisées dans un ordinateur ou un autre dispositif
(page 139). Assurez-vous de sauvegarder toutes les données
importantes avant le formatage.
• Consultez la page 177 pour en savoir plus sur la capacité des
cartes mémoire.
• Il est possible de copier les photos de la mémoire interne sur
des cartes mémoire (page 115).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Installation de l’unité appareil photo sur le boîtier de
l’appareil photo
Veillez à ce que l’appareil photo soit hors tension avant
d’installer ou de retirer l’unité appareil photo sur le/du
boîtier de l’appareil photo.
Retirez les capuchons de
connecteur du boîtier et de
l’unité appareil photo. Alignez
le côté gauche de l’unité
appareil photo sur le repère
d’alignement situé sur le boîtier
de l’appareil photo, puis faites
glisser l’unité appareil photo
vers la gauche jusqu’à ce qu’un
déclic soit émis.
Repère d’alignement pour
l’installation de l’unité
appareil photo
Retrait de l’unité appareil photo du boîtier de l’appareil photo
Faites glisser le levier de
déverrouillage de l’unité
appareil photo vers la
droite et retirez l’unité
appareil photo.
Veillez à ne pas faire
tomber le boîtier de
l’appareil photo et l’unité
appareil photo lors du
retrait de l’unité appareil
photo.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Mise sous et hors tension
Mode prise de vue
Placez l’interrupteur MARCHE/
ARRÊT sur MARCHE pour mettre
l’appareil photo sous tension.
L’appareil photo émet le son de
démarrage. Le témoin de mise au
point automatique/flash clignote
plusieurs secondes pendant le
démarrage de l’appareil.
Pour mettre l’appareil photo hors
tension, placez l’interrupteur
MARCHE/ARRÊT sur ARRÊT. Le
nombre de photos prises ce
jour s’affiche avant la mise hors
tension. (L’appareil affiche zéro si
l’horloge n’a pas été configurée. Si vous mettez l’appareil
hors tension après avoir modifié l’horloge (page 20),
l’appareil affiche le nombre de photos prises depuis la
modification du réglage de l’horloge.)
Attention
Les modifications des réglages continu (page 73), intervalle (page
83) et retardateur (page 31) sont perdues lors de la mise hors
tension de l’appareil. La mise hors tension de l’appareil restaure
les réglages des modes MY avec les valeurs enregistrées dans Enr.
Mes Réglages. Les autres réglages ne sont pas affectés.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
9
Mode lecture
Lorsque l’appareil photo est hors
tension, maintenez la touche
6 enfoncée pendant environ
une seconde pour activer le
mode lecture de l’appareil photo.
Appuyez de nouveau sur la
touche 6 pour mettre l’appareil
photo hors tension.
Conseil :mode deveilleetmise horstension automatique
L’appareil photo éteint l’écran ou se met automatiquement
hors tension pour économiser l’argent si aucune opération n’est
effectuée au cours de la durée indiquée sous Mode veille (page
141) et Extinction auto (page 141).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
20
Configuration de base
Une boîte de dialogue de sélection de la langue s’affiche
lors de la première mise sous tension de l’appareil.
Procédez comme suit pour choisir une langue et
configurer la date et l’heure. Pour quitter une fois la
configuration terminée, appuyez sur la touche DISP.. Vous
pouvez à tout moment modifier la langue, l’heure et la
date dans le menu de configuration (page 149).
1
Sélectionnez une langue.
Appuyez sur +, –, Fn ou Fn2
pour sélectionner une langue
et appuyez sur C/D.
2 Configurez l’horloge.
Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour
sélectionner l’année, le mois,
le jour, l’heure, les minutes
ou le format de date, puis
appuyez sur + ou – pour
modifier. Après avoir vérifié
que la date est correcte,
appuyez sur C/D.
Une boîte de dialogue de
confirmation s’affiche ;
appuyez sur C/D pour
valider votre choix.
Remarques
• Si vous laissez la batterie dans le boîtier de l’appareil pendant au
moins deux heures, les réglages de l’horloge et de la langue sont
conservés pendant environ une semaine une fois la batterie retirée.
• La date et l’heure d’enregistrement peuvent être inscrites sur les
photos (page 84).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
2
Prise de vue photographique
Après avoir configuré l’appareil
photo comme indiqué dans
« Premiers pas » (page 12), vous
êtes prêt à prendre des photos.
Placez l’interrupteur MARCHE/
ARRET sur MARCHE pour mettre
l’appareil sous tension et tournez
le sélecteur de mode sur 5.
Tenue de l’appareil photo
1
Tenez l’appareil à deux mains.
Tenez l’appareil à deux mains
avec les coudes légèrement
collés au corps.
Attention
Assurez-vous que l’objectif ou
le flash n’est pas obstrué par vos
doigts, vos cheveux ou la courroie
d’encolure.
2
Préparez-vous à prendre la photo.
Posez le doigt sur le
déclencheur.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
22
Prise de vue
1
Effectuez la mise au point.
Cadrez votre sujet au centre de l’écran d’affichage
des photos et appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à
mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point et définir
l’exposition.
4:3 N
Si l’appareil peut effectuer la mise
au point, les cadres de mise
au point des objets mis au
point s’affichent en vert (neuf
cadres maximum).
Si l’appareil photo est incapable
d’effectuer la mise au point, le
cadre de mise au point au
centre clignote en rouge et
le témoin de mise au point
automatique/flash clignote
en vert.
Témoin de mise au point
automatique/flash
Cadre de mise
au point
2
Prenez une photo.
Appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au
bout pour prendre la photo. L’image s’affiche
pendant quelques secondes juste après la prise de
vue (page 142) et est enregistrée dans la mémoire
interne ou sur la carte mémoire.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
2
Conseil : le déclencheur
L’appareil photo dispose d’un déclencheur à deux étapes.
Pour effectuer la mise au point, appuyez légèrement sur le
déclencheur jusqu’à ce que vous sentiez une résistance. Cette
action est dénommée « appuyer sur le déclencheur jusqu’à micourse ». Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre
la photo.
Conseil :mise au point
Le témoin de mise au point automatique/flash et le cadre de
mise au point indiquent si le sujet est mis au point.
État de la mise au point Cadre de mise au point
Témoin de mise au point
automatique/flash
Avant la mise au point Blanc Éteint
Sujet mis au point Vert Allumé (vert)
Mise au point impossible Rouge (clignotant) Clignotant (vert)
L’appareil peut être dans l’incapacité d’effectuer la mise au point
dans les cas suivants :
• Objets manquant de contraste comme le ciel, un mur d’une
seule couleur ou le capot d’une voiture
• Objets plats contenant uniquement des lignes horizontales
• Objets se déplaçant rapidement
• Objets faiblement éclairés
• Objets avec des reflets brillants ou en contre-jour
• Objets clignotant comme des lampes fluorescentes
• Sources lumineuses pointées comme des ampoules, des
projecteurs ou des LED
Notez qu’un ou plusieurs cadres de mise au point peuvent être
affichés en vert, même si l’appareil est incapable d’effectuer la
mise au point sur les objets ci-dessus ; vérifiez la mise au point sur
l’écran d’affichage des photos avant la prise de vue. Si l’appareil est
incapable d’effectuer la mise au point, verrouillez la mise au point
sur un autre objet situé à la même distance de l’appareil que votre
sujet, puis recomposez l’ensemble et prenez la photo (page 25).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
2
Conseil : pouréviterles photos floues
Pour empêcher les effets de flou provoqués par un déplacement
de l’appareil au moment du déclenchement (« bougé de
l’appareil »), appuyez sur le déclencheur doucement et sans à-
coups. Des effets de flou sont notamment probables si :
• Le flash est désactivé et l’éclairage est faible
• Le zoom numérique est utilisé (page 26)
Dans les cas où des effets de flou seraient particulièrement
susceptibles de se produire à cause d’un bougé de l’appareil,
l’icône J s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. Tenez
fermement l’appareil et effectuez de nouveau la mise au point,
ou essayez l’une des solutions suivantes :
• Activez le flash ( ) ou utilisez le flash automatique ( ; voir
page 28)
• Choisissez une sensibilité ISO supérieure (page 90)
• Utilisez le retardateur (page 31)
• Utilisez la fonction de correction du bougé de l’appareil
(page 92)
Remarques
• Si le flash doit se déclencher lors de la prise de vue, un pré-flash
sera émis pour faciliter la mise au point et le réglage de
l’exposition.
• L’icône s’affiche en cas de surexposition ou de sousexposition.
• Vous pouvez choisir la durée d’affichage des photos sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos après les prises de vue. Si vous le
souhaitez, les photos peuvent rester affichées jusqu’à ce que le
déclencheur soit enfoncé jusqu’à mi-course (page 142).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
2
Verrouillage de la mise au point
Utilisez le verrouillage de la mise au point pour
composer des photos dans lesquelles le sujet n’est
pas au centre du cadre. Le verrouillage de la mise au
point peut être également utilisé si l’appareil photo est
incapable d’effectuer la mise au point.
1
Effectuez la mise au point.
Positionnez votre sujet au centre de l’écran
d’affichage des photos et appuyez sur le déclencheur
jusqu’à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point.
4:3 N
2
Recomposez la photo.
Tout en maintenant le déclencheur enfoncé
jusqu’à mi-course pour verrouiller la mise au point,
recomposez la photo.
Composition finale
Sujet principal
3
Prenez une photo.
Appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au
bout pour prendre la photo.
Attention
Si la distance entre l’appareil et le sujet change alors que le
verrouillage de la mise au point est activé, effectuez de nouveau
la mise au point en fonction de la nouvelle distance.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
2
Zoom
La touche 8 (téléobjectif) permet d’effectuer un zoom
avant et la touche 9 (grand angle), un zoom arrière.
4:3 N
9 8
4:3 N
Zoom
arrière
Zoom
avant
1 Cadrez la photo en utilisant les touches 8 et 9.
2
Effectuez la mise au point.
Appuyez sur le déclencheur
jusqu’à mi-course.
3
Prenez une photo.
Appuyez doucement sur le
déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour
prendre la photo.
Remarques
• Si vous utilisez l’unité appareil photo sans zoom optique, le
zoom numérique fonctionne à la place.
• Lors de l’utilisation d’une unité appareil photo équipée d’un
zoom optique et d’un zoom numérique, pour passer du zoom
optique au zoom numérique, relâchez la touche 8 une fois le
taux maximum d’agrandissement atteint par le zoom optique,
puis appuyez de nouveau sur la touche 8. Pour passer du zoom
numérique au zoom optique, maintenez la touche 9 enfoncée.
• Vous pouvez consulter le taux de zoom optique dans la barre
de zoom de l’écran d’affichage des photos. Lors de l’utilisation
du zoom numérique, le taux de zoom est affiché dans l’écran
d’affichage des photos.
• Le zoom numérique ne peut être utilisé lorsque l’option RAW est
sélectionnée pour le paramètre Qualité image/Taille (page 61).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
2
Prise de vue rapprochée (mode macro)
Utilisez le mode macro pour la prise de vue rapprochée
de petits objets.
1Appuyez sur la touche N.
L’icône N s’affiche
brièvement au centre de
l’écran d’affichage des
photos. N s’affiche ensuite
dans la partie supérieure
gauche de l’écran.
2
Effectuez la mise au point.
Cadrez le sujet sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos et
appuyez sur le déclencheur
jusqu’à mi-course.
3
Prenez une photo.
4:3 N
Appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au
bout pour prendre la photo.
Pour quitter le mode macro, appuyez de nouveau sur
la touche N.
Remarque
L’option AF Spot est utilisée en mode macro même si l’option AF
Multi, Snap ou 8 est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mise au
point (page 64).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
2
Photographie au flash
Le flash se déclenche uniquement s’il est ouvert.
Appuyez sur la touche OPEN/f pour ouvrir le flash et
appuyez de nouveau sur la touche pour choisir l’un des
modes flash suivants :
Mode Description
Flash Non Le flash est éteint.
Auto Le flash se déclenche automatiquement si nécessaire.
Flash
yeux
roug.
Ce mode réduit l’effet « yeux rouges » des portraits pris
au flash.
Flash Oui Le flash se déclenche à chaque prise de vue.
Synchro.
Flash
Ce mode combine le flash avec des vitesses d’obturation
lentes. Utilisez-le pour prendre des portraits incluant des
détails de l’arrière-plan ou de la vue de nuit. L’utilisation
d’un trépied est recommandée pour éviter les effets de
flou.
Flash
manuel
Le flash se déclenche à chaque prise de vue. Le niveau
de flash peut être défini sous Niveau de flash manuel
(page 79).
Remarque
La plage d’efficacité du flash varie en fonction de l’unité appareil
photo. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil
photo pour en savoir plus.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
29
Utilisation du flash intégré
1 Ouvrez le flash.
Appuyez sur la touche OPEN/f.
OPEN
2
Sélectionnez un mode flash.
Appuyez sur la touche OPEN/f pour sélectionner un
mode flash. L’icône du mode flash s’affiche dans le
coin supérieur gauche de l’écran.
Remarques
• Le mode flash sélectionné reste actif jusqu’à ce qu’un
nouveau mode soit choisi.
• Le témoin de mise au point automatique/flash clignote
lorsque le flash se charge. La prise de vue devient possible
dès que le témoin cesse de clignoter.
3
Effectuez la mise au point et prenez la photo.
Si le flash doit se déclencher lors de la prise de vue,
un pré-flash sera émis pour faciliter la mise au point
et le réglage de l’exposition.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
0
Remarques
• Pour refermer le flash lorsqu’il n’est pas utilisé, appuyez
doucement au centre du couvercle du flash jusqu’à ce qu’il soit
verrouillé.
• Le flash s’éteint automatiquement dans les modes vidéo,
continu et cadrage.
• N’utilisez pas le flash intégré lorsqu’un flash optionnel est
branché. Le non-respect de cette consigne peut endommager
l’appareil.
Attention
N’utilisez pas le flash trop près des yeux de votre sujet. La plus
grande prudence est recommandée pour photographier des
enfants. Ne pointez pas le flash vers le conducteur d’un véhicule
à moteur.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Retardateur
Faites votre choix parmi le retardateur de dix secondes,
le retardateur de deux secondes et le retardateur
personnalisé. Utilisez le retardateur de deux secondes
pour éviter le flou occasionné par le bougé de l’appareil
lorsque le déclencheur est enfoncé. Avec le réglage
personnalisé, un nombre donné de photos peuvent être
prises à un intervalle défini. Définissez l’intervalle de prise
de vue et le nombre de photos à l’aide du Retardateur
personnalisé dans le menu prise de vue (page 82).
1 Choisissez un mode retardateur.
Appuyez sur la touche t
une fois pour sélectionner le
retardateur de dix secondes,
deux fois pour sélectionner le
retardateur de deux secondes
et trois fois pour sélectionner
le retardateur personnalisé.
Appuyez une quatrième fois sur la touche pour
désactiver le retardateur.
La sélection actuelle s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage
des photos.
Remarque
Le mode retardateur sélectionné reste actif jusqu’à ce qu’un
nouveau mode soit choisi.
2Démarrez le retardateur.
Appuyez sur le déclencheur pour verrouiller la mise au
point et démarrer le retardateur. Si vous sélectionnez
le retardateur de dix secondes ou le retardateur
personnalisé, le flash auxiliaire AF se déclenche.
Remarque
Appuyez sur C/D pour annuler le retardateur
personnalisé pendant la prise de vue.
4:3 N UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
2
Indicateur de niveau
Utilisez l’indicateur de niveau pour niveler l’appareil
photo pour photographier des bâtiments ou des
paysages. C’est particulièrement utile pour les
compositions dans lesquelles l’horizon est visible.
1Affichez les options.
Appuyez et tenez enfoncée la
touche O (DISP.) jusqu’à ce
que les options de réglage de
niveau s’affichent.
2
Sélectionnez une option.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une option
et appuyez sur C/D pour confirmer l’option
sélectionnée.
Options Description
Non Indicateur de niveau non affiché.
Affichage
L’indicateur de niveau s’affiche au niveau de l’écran
d’affichage des photos. Le niveau et le sens d’inclinaison
peuvent être vérifiés au niveau de l’indicateur de niveau.
L’indicateur s’affiche en vert lorsque l’appareil photo
est de niveau, en orange si l’appareil photo est incliné
et en rouge si le niveau d’inclinaison est supérieur au
niveau maximal pouvant être affiché par l’indicateur.
L’indicateur de niveau ne s’affiche pas si l’écran est éteint,
si les indicateurs sont cachés ou si la grille de cadrage est
affichée (page 42).
Aff. + son
Identique à l’option Affichage, sauf qu’un signal sonore
est régulièrement émis lorsque l’appareil est de niveau.
Son
Un signal sonore est régulièrement émis lorsque l’appareil
est de niveau. L’indicateur de niveau ne s’affiche pas sur
l’écran d’affichage des photos.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Fonctionnement del’indicateur de niveau
4:3 N
Vert
4:3 N
Orange
Niveau de l’appareil L’appareil est incliné vers la
gauche
4:3 N
Rouge
4:3 N
Appareil photo penché trop
loin vers la droite L’appareil est incliné à 90 ° vers
la gauche
Remarque
L’indicateur de niveau peut être également paramétré dans le
menu configuration (pages 144).
Attention
• L’indicateur de niveau ne s’affiche pas si l’appareil est à l’envers,
si une vidéo est en cours d’enregistrement ou si la prise de vue à
intervalles est activée.
• Le signal sonore n’est pas émis si le volume de l’appareil photo
est désactivé (page 142).
• L’indicateur de niveau est destiné uniquement à servir de
guide et il ne doit pas être utilisé comme un niveau à bulle ou
dans d’autres applications ou un degré élevé de précision est
requis. Sa précision chute lorsque l’appareil est en mouvement
ou si vous photographiez un véhicule ou une plate-forme en
déplacement.
UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Visualisation et suppression de photos
Les photos peuvent être visualisées sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos.
Visualisation de photos
Appuyez sur la touche 6 en
mode prise de vue pour afficher
la dernière photo visualisée.
Appuyez de nouveau sur la
touche 6 pour quitter le mode
prise de vue.
Conseil :si l’appareil photo est horstension
Lorsque l’appareil photo est hors tension, maintenez la touche
6 enfoncée pendant environ une seconde pour activer le mode
lecture de l’appareil photo.
Appuyez sur Fn2 pour visualiser les photos dans l’ordre
d’enregistrement et sur Fn pour les visualiser dans
l’ordre inverse. Appuyez sur – pour avancer de dix
images et sur + pour reculer de dix images.
UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Une photo en
arrière
2010
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
200
F 2.5
2010 200
F 2.5 F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
4:3 N
4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
Dix photos en arrière
+
2010
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
200
F 2.5
2010 200
F 2.5 F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
4:3 N
4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
Fn
2010
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
200
F 2.5
2010 200
F 2.5 F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
4:3 N
4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
Fn2
2010
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
200
F 2.5
2010 200
F 2.5 F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
4:3 N
4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
– Une photo en avant
Dix photos en avant
2010
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
200
F 2.5
2010 200
F 2.5 F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
4:3 N
4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
Attention
L’appareil photo enregistre des copies JPEG des images RAW pour
les afficher sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. Lorsqu’une image
RAW est sélectionnée pour lecture, l’appareil affiche la copie JPEG
et un indicateur RAW s’affiche. Si la copie JPEG a été supprimée
via un ordinateur ou un autre dispositif, l’appareil affichera un
petit aperçu de l’image RAW et vous ne serez pas en mesure d’en
visualiser des agrandissements. Consultez les pages 62 et 63 pour
en savoir plus sur l’enregistrement des images RAW.
Conseil :visualisation des photosenmode prise devue
Les photos sont affichées sur l’écran d’affichage des photos
immédiatement après les prises de vue. Vous pouvez choisir la
durée d’affichage des photos avec Délai de validation LCD de
l’onglet de configuration (page 142).
UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Conseil :visualisation des photos delamémoireinterne
Si une carte mémoire est insérée, les photos sur la carte sont
affichées mais les photos de la mémoire interne ne peuvent pas
être visualisées, même si la carte mémoire est vide. Les photos
de la mémoire interne ne s’affichent que si aucune carte n’est
insérée dans le boîtier de l’appareil.
Conseil :rotation automatique
Si l’option Oui est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Rotation
auto de l’onglet de configuration (page 143), les photos sont
automatiquement affichées dans le sens correct sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos.
Visualisation de plusieurs photos
Appuyez sur la touche z ou Z
pour sélectionner le nombre de
photos à afficher (une, 20 ou 81)
ou pour classer les photos en
fonction de la date à laquelle elles
ont été prises.
1 image 20 images
4:3 N
2010
F 2.5
200
4:3 N
2010 F 2.5
Trier par date 81 images
UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Des vues multi-images peuvent être utilisées pour
sélectionner des photos à afficher ou à supprimer.
Dans les vues multi-images, utilisez le pavé directionnel
pour sélectionner des photos.
Conseil : pavé directionnel
Il est possible de déplacer le curseur en oblique en appuyant sur
les sections diagonales du pavé directionnel.
Remarques
• Pour afficher une photo en plein écran, appuyez sur la manette
ADJ. dans une vue multi-images.
• Pour afficher les photos de la page précédente ou suivante dans
une vue multi-images :
• Dans une vue 20 et 81 images, appuyez sur la touche +, –, Fn,
Fn2 ou sur la manette ADJ. (gauche ou droite) ou faites tourner
le sélecteur plus-moins tout en maintenant la touche DIRECT
enfoncée.
• Dans la vue classée par date, si vous appuyez sur la touche
+ ou –, ou si vous faites tourner le sélecteur plus-moins tout
en maintenant la touche DIRECT enfoncée, la page suivante
ou précédente s’affiche. Appuyez sur la touche Fn, Fn2 ou
sur la manette ADJ. (gauche ou droite) tout en maintenant la
touche DIRECT enfoncée pour afficher les photos prises le jour
suivant ou précédent. Si vous appuyez sur la touche Fn2 ou sur
la manette ADJ. vers la droite sur la dernière photo, les photos
prises la date suivante sont affichées.
UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Zoom en lecture
Appuyez sur la touche z ou faites tourner le sélecteur plusmoins vers la droite pour effectuer un zoom avant sur la photo
actuellement affichée en plein écran. Appuyez sur la manette ADJ.
pour effectuer un zoom avant selon le taux d’agrandissement
sélectionné sous Zoom par 1 seule pression (page 143).
Les opérations suivantes peuvent être réalisées :
Commande Action
z Zoom avant.
Sélecteur
plus-moins
Zoom avant en le tournant à droite et zoom en arrière en
le tournant à gauche.
C/D
Lorsqu’une image est agrandie, appuyez pour afficher l’image
au taux d’agrandissement sélectionné pour Zoom par 1 seule
pression. Si une image s’affiche au taux d’agrandissement
sélectionné pour Zoom par 1 seule pression, appuyez sur la
touche C/D pour annuler le zoom.
pavé directionnel Déplacement des zones à afficher.
Manette ADJ.
Affichage d’autres photos au même rapport de zoom en
appuyant dessus vers la droite ou la gauche.
Z Zoom arrière.
Remarques
• L’agrandissement maximum varie selon la taille de l’image :
Taille d’image Agrandissement maximum
L, M, 5M, 3M 16×
1M 6,7×
VGA 3,4×
• Le zoom en lecture n’est pas disponible avec les vidéos ou les
photos enregistrées/prises à l’aide de Cont.M +.
• Si l’option Réglage 2 est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Options
du sélecteur de mode lecture dans l’onglet des options
personnalisées (page 138), la manette ADJ. et le sélecteur plus-moins
peuvent être utilisés pour visualiser d’autres zones de l’image.9
UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Suppression de photos
Procédez comme suit pour supprimer des photos.
Suppression de photos individuelles
1Affichez une photo.
Affichez la photo à supprimer dans une vue une
image (page 34).
2Appuyez sur la touche d.
Les options sont affichées
(vous pouvez modifier la
photo en appuyant sur Fn
ou Fn2).
3
Sélectionnez Effacer un.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner Effacer un,
puis appuyez sur C/D.
Un message s’affiche pendant la suppression.
Répétez les étapes 2 et 3 pour supprimer d’autres
Cphotos ou sélectionnez Annuler et appuyez sur
/D pour quitter.
Suppression de tous les fichiers
Pour supprimer tous les fichiers,
appuyez sur la touche d
pour afficher les options de
suppression, comme indiqué
ci-dessus, et sélectionnez Suppr.
tout. Une boîte de dialogue de
confirmation s’affiche ; appuyez
sur Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner
Oui, puis appuyez sur C/D.0
UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Suppression de plusieurs fichiers
Procédez comme suit pour supprimer plusieurs fichiers.
1Appuyez sur la touche d.
Dans une vue multi-images,
passez à l’étape 2. Dans une
vue une image, les options
illustrées à droite s’affichent.
Sélectionnez Suppr. multi et
appuyez sur C/D.
2
Sélectionnez Sél. indiv. ou Sél. série.
Pour sélectionner les images
une par une, sélectionnez
CSél. indiv., appuyez sur
/D et passez à
l’étape 3. Pour sélectionner
les images en définissant des
séries, sélectionnez Sél. série, appuyez sur C/
D et passez à l’étape 3.1. Appuyez sur la touche
DISP. pour quitter sans supprimer les fichiers.
3
Sélectionnez une photo.
Utilisez le pavé directionnel
(page 37) pour sélectionner
des photos, puis appuyez
sur C/D. L’image
sélectionnée est marquée
d’une icône d. Pour
désélectionner une photo, sélectionnez-la et
appuyez de nouveau sur C/D.
4:3 N 4:3 N
UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Conseil :sélection deséries
Pour basculer entre les paramètres Sél. indiv. et Sél. série,
appuyez sur la manette ADJ. et procédez comme suit :
3.1 Utilisez le pavé directionnel
pour sélectionner la première
image d’une série, puis
appuyez sur C/D
pour confirmer. L’image
sélectionnée est marquée
d’une icône d. Pour
désélectionner l’image,
appuyez sur la touche DISP..
4:3 N
3.2 Utilisez le pavé directionnel
pour sélectionner la dernière
Cimage, puis appuyez sur
/D pour confirmer.
Les images sélectionnées sont
marquées d’une icône d.
4:3 N
Répétez les étapes 3.1-3.2 pour sélectionner des séries
supplémentaires ou appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour
revenir à l’étape 3 et sélectionner ou désélectionner des
photos individuelles.
4Appuyez sur la touche d.
Une boîte de dialogue de
confirmation s’affiche.
5
Sélectionnez Oui.
Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2
pour sélectionner Oui, puis
appuyez sur C/D.2
UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Touche O (DISP.)
Appuyez sur la touche O (DISP.) pour afficher les
informations sur l’écran d’affichage des photos en mode
prise de vue et en mode lecture.
Activation/Désactivation DeL’écran D’affichage Des Photos
Si vous appuyez sur la touche VF/LCD lorsque l’écran d’affichage
des photos est allumé, l’écran s’éteint. Certaines opérations
de l’appareil photo ne sont pas disponibles lorsque l’écran
d’affichage des photos est éteint. Appuyez de nouveau sur la
touche VF/LCD pour allumer l’écran d’affichage des photos.
Si un viseur LCD est installé, appuyez sur la touche VF/LCD pour
commuter entre le viseur LCD et l’écran d’affichage des photos.
Mode prise de vue
Appuyez sur la touche O (DISP.) pour faire défiler les
affichages suivants :
Indicateurs
affichés
4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N
Indicateurs+
histogramme
Pas
d’indicateurs
4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N
Grille de
cadrage (pas
d’indicateurs)
Conseil : la grille decadrage
Reportez-vous à la page 144 pour la sélection d’un type de grille
de cadrage.
UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Remarque
Si l’option Affichage ou Aff. + son est sélectionnée pour le
paramètre Réglage niveau (page 32), un indicateur de niveau
apparaît lorsque les indicateurs sont affichés.
Mode lecture
Appuyez sur la touche O (DISP.) pour faire défiler les
affichages suivants :
Indicateurs
affichés
4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
2.5 200
4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
2.5 200
Détails+
histogramme
Pas
d’indicateurs
4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
2.5 200
4:3 N 4:3 N
4:3 N
2010 2010
2010
F 2.5
200
F 2.5
200
2.5 200
Surbrillance
Conseil :Surbrillance
Les parties clignotantes de l’affichage Surbrillance indiquent
les zones « lessivées », dans lesquelles des détails peuvent avoir
été perdus à cause de la surexposition. Vérifiez les images avec
l’affichage Surbrillance après une prise de vue en plein soleil ou
dans d’autres conditions où des parties de l’image pourraient
avoir été surexposées. S’il s’avère que des détails importants
peuvent avoir été perdus, choisissez une valeur de correction
d’exposition plus faible et prenez une nouvelle photo (page 85).
Notez que l’affichage est destiné uniquement à servir de guide et
qu’il ne peut être totalement fiable.
UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.
Conseil : l’histogramme
L’histogramme est un graphique illustrant la distribution
des pixels selon la luminosité de l’image. La luminosité est
représentée par l’axe horizontal, avec les zones sombres à gauche
et les zones claires à droite. Le nombre de pixels est représenté
par l’axe vertical. L’histogramme peut être utilisé pour évaluer
l’exposition et vérifier la perte des détails dans les zones claires et
sombres, sans que la luminosité de votre environnement n’affecte
votre jugement. Un histogramme dans lequel les pixels sont
regroupés sur la droite indique que l’image peut être surexposée,
tandis qu’un histogramme dans lequel les pixels sont regroupés à
gauche indique que l’image peut être sous-exposée.
Surexposé Sous-exposé
Si l’exposition de l’image s’avère incorrecte, vous pouvez utiliser
la correction d’exposition pour corriger l’exposition des photos
suivantes du même sujet (page 85 ; notez que la correction
d’exposition peut se révéler insuffisante dans certains cas pour
obtenir une exposition correcte). L’histogramme peut être
également utilisé comme un guide pour le réglage du contraste
des photos après les prises de vue (page 107).
L’histogramme est destiné uniquement à servir de guide et peut
ne pas être totalement fiable, notamment dans les cas où le flash
serait utilisé ou l’éclairage ambiant serait faible.PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Plus sur la photographie...........................................
Fonctions de lecture................................................. 9
Menu des réglages de la lecture...............................0
Impression de photos..............................................20
Réglages de l’appareil .............................................2
Copie des photos sur un ordinateur..........................
Remarques techniques............................................
Référence
Lisez cette section pour en savoir plus sur les
fonctions de l’appareil photo.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Plus sur la photographie
Cette section détaille les modes P, A, S, M, 4 et MY,
ainsi que l’utilisation des options du menu prise de vue.
Mode P : changement de programme
Lorsque le sélecteur de mode
est réglé sur P (changement de
programme), vous pouvez utiliser
le sélecteur plus-moins pour choisir
parmi les différentes combinaisons
d’ouverture et de vitesse
d’obturation, produisant toutes la même exposition.
1 Choisissez le mode P.
Placez le sélecteur de mode
sur P. Le mode prise de vue
est indiqué par une icône sur
l’écran d’affichage des photos.
4:3 N
2Mesurez l’exposition.
Appuyez sur le déclencheur
jusqu’à mi-course pour
mesurer l’exposition.
L’ouverture et la vitesse
d’obturation actuelles
s’affichent sur le moniteur. 2.5 200
3 Choisissez l’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation.
Relâchez le déclencheur et
faites tourner le sélecteur
plus-moins pour sélectionner
une combinaison d’ouverture
et de vitesse d’obturation.
4:3 N
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Remarque
L’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation peuvent être
configurées pendant dix secondes après avoir relâché le
déclencheur.
4
Prenez une photo.
Appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au
bout pour prendre la photo.
Remarque
Les combinaisons d’ouverture et de vitesse d’obturation
disponibles pour chaque valeur d’exposition varient en fonction
de l’unité appareil photo. Consultez la documentation fournie
avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Mode A : priorité à l’ouverture
En mode A (priorité à l’ouverture),
vous choisissez l’ouverture et
l’appareil photo sélectionne la
vitesse d’obturation. Choisissez de
grandes ouvertures (petits nombres
f) pour mettre en valeur le sujet principal en rendant flou
l’arrière-plan et les détails de l’avant-plan. Choisissez de
petites ouvertures (grands nombres f) pour effectuer la
mise au point sur l’arrière-plan et le sujet principal.
1 Choisissez le mode A.
Placez le sélecteur de mode
sur A. L’ouverture actuelle
s’affiche en orange.
2 Choisissez une ouverture.
Faites tourner le sélecteur
plus-moins pour sélectionner
une ouverture. Votre sélection prend effet uniquement
lorsque la photo est prise ; il est impossible de
prévisualiser son effet sur l’écran d’affichage des photos.
3Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course.
Appuyez sur le déclencheur
jusqu’à mi-course pour définir la
mise au point et l’exposition. La
vitesse d’obturation sélectionnée
par l’appareil s’affiche sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos.
4:3 N
4
Prenez une photo.
Appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au
bout pour prendre la photo.
Remarque
Si l’option Décalage ouverture auto est activée (page 92), l’appareil
réglera l’ouverture pour obtenir une exposition optimale.
4:3 N 9
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Mode S : priorité à l’obturation
En mode S (priorité à l’obturation),
vous choisissez la vitesse d’obturation
et l’appareil photo sélectionne
l’ouverture. Choisissez des vitesses
d’obturation rapides pour « geler »
le mouvement et des vitesses
d’obturation lentes pour souligner le mouvement en rendant
flous les objets en déplacement.
1 Choisissez le mode S.
Placez le sélecteur de mode
sur S. La vitesse d’obturation
actuelle s’affiche en orange.
2 Choisissez une vitesse
d’obturation.
Faites tourner le sélecteur
plus-moins pour sélectionner une vitesse
d’obturation.
3Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course.
Appuyez sur le déclencheur
jusqu’à mi-course pour
définir la mise au point et
l’exposition. L’ouverture
sélectionnée par l’appareil
s’affiche sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos.
2.5 200
4
Prenez une photo.
Appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au
bout pour prendre la photo.
Remarque
L’ouverture maximum (c.-à-d. le nombre f le plus bas possible)
peut ne pas être sélectionnée à des vitesses d’obturation lentes,
même lorsque le sujet est faiblement éclairé.
4:3 N 0
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Mode M: exposition manuelle
En mode M (exposition manuelle),
vous utilisez le sélecteur plusmoins pour choisir l’ouverture et
la manette ADJ. pour sélectionner
la vitesse d’obturation.
1 Choisissez le mode M.
Placez le sélecteur de mode
sur M. Le mode prise de vue,
l’indicateur d’exposition,
ainsi que l’ouverture et la
vitesse d’obturation actuelles,
s’affichent à l’écran.
4:3 N
2 Choisissez une ouverture et une vitesse d’obturation.
Faites tourner le sélecteur
plus-moins pour choisir une
ouverture, puis appuyez
sur la manette ADJ. vers la
gauche ou vers la droite
pour sélectionner une vitesse d’obturation (le cas
échéant, les rôles des deux commandes peuvent
être inversés, voir page 138). Les effets peuvent être
prévisualisés sur l’écran d’affichage des photos et
sont reflétés par l’indicateur d’exposition (si l’image
doit être sous-exposée ou surexposée de plus de
2EV, il est impossible d’en prévisualiser les effets et
l’indicateur devient orange).
3
Prenez une photo.
Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course pour
effectuer la mise au point, puis appuyez doucement
sur le déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre la
photo.
–2–2 EVEV +2+2 EVEV
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Remarques
• Les vitesses d’obturation disponibles varient en fonction de
l’unité appareil photo et du réglage de l’ouverture. Consultez la
documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus.
• Si l’option Auto ou Auto-Hi est sélectionnée pour le paramètre
Sensibilité ISO (page 90), la sensibilité ISO sera fixée en mode
exposition manuelle. La sensibilité ISO fixée varie en fonction de
l’unité appareil photo. Consultez la documentation fournie avec
l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus.
• Choisissez des vitesses d’obturation lentes pour des durées
d’exposition prolongées. Pour réduire les effets de flou provoqués
par un bougé de l’appareil, tenez-le fermement à deux mains
ou utilisez un trépied. L’écran d’affichage des photos s’éteint
lorsque l’obturateur est ouvert. À de faibles vitesses d’obturation,
l’appareil traite automatiquement les photos pour supprimer le
bruit, en augmentant le délai nécessaire à l’enregistrement des
images à environ deux fois la vitesse d’obturation.
• Le verrouillage de l’exposition automatique (AE) n’est pas
disponible en mode exposition manuelle. Si l’option Verrouill.
AE est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Rég. touche Fn ou Rég.
touche Fn2 dans l’onglet des options personnalisées, un appui
sur la touche affectée en mode exposition manuelle définira
l’ouverture ou la vitesse d’obturation sur une valeur proche
de celle nécessaire pour obtenir une exposition optimale.
De même, si l’option Comp. expo. est sélectionnée pour
le paramètre Réglages bouton +/– (page 137) dans l’onglet
des options personnalisées, un appui sur les touches + et
– n’affichera pas les options de correction d’exposition en
mode exposition manuelle, mais définira plutôt l’ouverture ou
la vitesse d’obturation sur une valeur proche de celle nécessaire
pour obtenir une exposition optimale. C’est particulièrement
utile lorsque vous souhaitez utiliser une exposition optimale
comme point de départ pour modifier l’exposition. L’option
Mode M par 1 seule pression (page 138) dans l’onglet des
options personnalisées détermine si l’ouverture ou la vitesse
d’obturation est modifiée pour obtenir une exposition optimale. 2
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Mode 4: Réglages pour diverses scènes
pour enregistrer des vidéos ou
Sélectionnez le mode 4
choisir une des options adaptées
à des scènes spécifiques. Les
réglages de l’appareil photo
sont automatiquement optimisés pour le type de sujet
sélectionné.
Les options suivantes font partie des options disponibles
en mode 4.
Option Description
Vidéo
Cette option permet d’enregistrer des vidéos avec le
son (page 54).
Portrait À utiliser lors de la prise de portraits.
Sports
À utiliser lors de la prise de vue d’objets en
mouvement.
Paysage
À utiliser lors de la prise de paysages avec beaucoup
de verdure ou un ciel bleu.
Nuit
À utiliser lors de la prise de scènes de nuit.
En mode nuit, le flash se déclenche lorsque toutes les
conditions suivantes sont réunies :
• Le flash est réglé sur Auto.
• Le flash est indispensable parce qu’il fait noir.
• Il y a une personne ou un objet à proximité.
Correction
biais
Cette option réduit les effets de perspective lors de
la prise de vue d’objets rectangulaires, comme des
panneaux d’affichage ou des cartes de visite (page
56).
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Pour sélectionner une option du mode scène :
1
Placez le sélecteur de mode sur 4.
L’option actuellement
4sélectionnée pour le mode
s’affiche sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos.
2Appuyez sur C/D.
Le menu du mode scène
s’affiche.
3
Sélectionnez une option.
Appuyez sur +, –, Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner une
option et appuyez sur C/D pour revenir
au mode prise de vue, avec l’option sélectionnée
affichée en haut de l’écran d’affichage des photos.
4
Prenez une photo.
• Mode vidéo : voir page 54.
• Mode Correction biais : voir page 56.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Conseil : utilisation desmenus
Pour accéder aux menus prise de
vue, options personnalisées et
configuration en mode 4,
appuyez sur la touche C/D
pour afficher le menu du mode scène,
puis appuyez sur Fn pour sélectionner
l’onglet mode. Appuyez sur + ou
– pour sélectionner l’onglet du menu
prise de vue (page 58), l’onglet des
options personnalisées (page 127) ou
l’onglet de configuration (page 128),
puis appuyez sur Fn2 pour placer le
curseur dans le menu sélectionné.
Consultez la page 59 pour en savoir
plus sur les options du menu prise de
vue disponibles dans chaque mode.
1
2
3
4
1Onglet mode
2Onglet du menu
prise de vue
3Onglet des options
personnalisées
4Onglet de
configuration
Enregistrement de vidéos
Enregistrez des vidéos avec le son. Les vidéos sont
stockées sous la forme de fichier AVI.
1
Sélectionnez 3 en mode 4.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner 3 (vidéo),
puis appuyez sur C/D.
Le mode est indiqué par une
icône sur l’écran d’affichage
des photos.
2
Enregistrez la vidéo.
Appuyez sur le déclencheur pour démarrer
l’enregistrement ; appuyez de nouveau
pour l’arrêter. L’enregistrement se termine
automatiquement lorsque la mémoire est pleine.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Attention
• L’icône clignote ; la durée d’enregistrement et la durée
restante disponible s’affichent pendant l’enregistrement.
• Les bruits émis par l’appareil photo peuvent être enregistrés sur
la vidéo.
• Les vidéos peuvent avoir une durée de 90 minutes ou une
taille de 4Go. En fonction du type de carte mémoire utilisée,
l’enregistrement vidéo peut se terminer avant que cette durée
ou cette taille soit atteinte. La durée totale maximale de tous
les fichiers vidéo qui peuvent être stockés dans la mémoire
interne ou sur une carte mémoire varie en fonction des options
sélectionnées pour Taille vidéo (page 61).
Remarques
• Le flash ne peut être utilisé en mode vidéo.
• L’appareil effectue la mise au point lorsque vous appuyez sur le
déclencheur pour démarrer l’enregistrement.
• La durée restante est calculée en fonction de la quantité de
mémoire disponible et ne peut pas diminuer de façon régulière.
• Les options du menu prise de vue sont différentes de celles
disponibles dans les autres modes (page 60).
• Chargez la batterie avant la prise de vue. Pour les
enregistrements de longue durée, choisissez des cartes
mémoire avec une vitesse d’écriture rapide et vérifiez la quantité
de mémoire disponible avant l’enregistrement vidéo.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Mode 4: correction biais
Pour prendre des photos en mode Correction biais,
cadrez le sujet afin qu’il occupe le cadre entier et
appuyez sur le déclencheur pour prendre la photo.
Si l’appareil détecte un objet dont la perspective
peut être corrigée, l’objet est entouré par un cadre
orange. L’appareil peut détecter jusqu’à cinq objets ;
pour sélectionner un objet différent, appuyez sur Fn2,
pour enregistrer la photo sans aucune correction de
perspective, appuyez sur +. Si l’appareil est incapable
de détecter un sujet approprié, un message d’erreur
s’affiche et la photo sera enregistrée sans modification.
Attention
L’appareil enregistre deux images : la photo non modifiée et
une copie qui a été traitée pour corriger la perspective. Aucune
photo ne sera prise si la mémoire est insuffisante pour enregistrer
deux images. L’appareil peut être dans l’incapacité de corriger la
perspective dans les cas suivants :
• Le sujet n’est pas mis au point.
• Les quatre bords du sujet ne sont pas clairement visibles.
• Il existe peu de contraste entre le sujet et l’arrière-plan.
• L’arrière-plan contient de nombreux détails fins.
Conseil :correction biais
L’option Correction biais du menu lecture peut être utilisée pour
corriger la perspective des photos enregistrées (page 110).
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Modes «MY »: utilisation des réglages personnalisés
Pour prendre des photos à l’aide
des réglages enregistrés sous
l’option MY1 avec Enr. Mes
Réglages de l’onglet des options
personnalisées (page 129), placez
le sélecteur de mode sur MY. Sélectionnez MY2 pour
prendre des photos en utilisant les réglages enregistrés
avec MY2 et MY pour prendre des photos en utilisant les
réglages enregistrés avec MY3.
1
Placez le sélecteur de mode sur MY, MY2 ou MY.
Le mode prise de vue
enregistré avec Enr. Mes
Réglages s’affiche sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos.
4:3 N
Remarque
Les réglages peuvent être configurés dans les modes MY. Les
réglages enregistrés avec Enr. Mes Réglages sont restaurés
lorsqu’un autre mode est sélectionné ou si l’appareil photo
est mis hors tension.
Conseil :choisir unmode prise devue
Pour choisir un mode prise de vue en mode MY sans
modifier d’autres réglages, utilisez l’option Changement
de mode prise de vue dans le menu prise de vue (page
92). L’option Changement de mode prise de vue n’est pas
disponible pour les modes MY auquel un mode scène est
attribué.
2
Prenez une photo.
Consultez la section sur le mode prise de vue
sélectionné pour en savoir plus.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Menu prise de vue
Les touches +, –, Fn, Fn2 et C/D vous permettent
de naviguer dans les menus.
Attention
Le menu prise de vue ne s’affiche pas lorsque l’unité appareil
photo n’est pas installée sur le boîtier.
1Affichez le menu prise de vue.
Dans les modes autres que
le mode 4, si vous
appuyez sur C/D en
mode prise de vue, le menu
prise de vue s’affiche.
CEn mode
Conseil4:mode4, un appui sur
/D affiche le menu
mode ; appuyez sur Fn pour
sélectionner l’onglet mode, sur
– pour afficher le menu prise
de vue et sur Fn2 pour placer le
curseur dans le menu.
La barre de défilement
indique la position dans
le menu
2
Sélectionnez une rubrique de menu.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour
sélectionner une rubrique
du menu et appuyez sur Fn2
pour afficher les options de la
rubrique sélectionnée.
Remarque
Les éléments de la page suivante
peuvent être affichés en appuyant
sur – et sur le touche DIRECT
simultanément.9
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
3
Sélectionnez une option.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une option.
Appuyez sur C/D pour sélectionner et
passer au mode prise de vue ou sur Fn pour
sélectionner et revenir au menu prise de vue.
Les rubriques disponibles dans le menu prise de vue
varient avec le mode prise de vue.
Modes5, P, A,S,M,MY,MY2 etMY
Option Défaut Page
Qualité image/Taille L4:3 N 61
Mise au point AF Multi 64
Dist. mise au pt snap 2.5?m 68
Instantané par pression Oui 69
Pré AF Non 70
Mesure exposition Multi 70
Réglages image Standard 71
Mode continu Non 73
Cadrage auto Non 75
Correction exposition flash 0.0 78
Niveau de flash manuel 1/2 79
Réglage synchro du flash 1er rideau 79
Réduction bruit Non 80
Réduction bruit ISO > àISO 401 80
Correction distorsion Non 81
Option Défaut Page
Macro auto Non 81
Retardateur
personnalisé
2img,5s 82
Prise de vue à intervalles — 83
Horodatage Non 84
Correction de l’exposition*
1
0.0 85
Balance blancs Multi-P AUTO 86
Compensation balance
blancs
A :0, G :0 89
Sensibilité ISO Auto 90
Initialiser *
2
— 91
Décalage ouverture auto *
3
Non 92
Changement de mode
prise de vue *
4
— 92
Correction du bougé *
5
Oui 920
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Mode4:vidéo
Option Défaut Page
Taille vidéo VGA640 61
Mise au point AF Multi 64
Dist. mise au pt snap 2.5?m 68
Pré AF Non 70
Option Défaut Page
Balance blancs Auto 86
Compensation balance
blancs
A :0, G :0 89
Mode4: Portrait/Sports/Nuit
Option Défaut Page
Qualité image/Taille L4:3 N 61
Mise au point AF Multi 64
Dist. mise au pt snap 2.5?m 68
Instantané par pression Oui 69
Pré AF Non 70
Correction exposition
flash
0.0 78
Réglage synchro du flash 1er rideau 79
Option Défaut Page
Correction distorsion Non 81
Retardateur personnalisé 2img,5s 82
Horodatage Non 84
Correction de l’exposition 0.0 85
Balance blancs Multi-P AUTO 86
Correction du bougé*
5
Oui 92
Mode4: Paysage
Option Défaut Page
Qualité image/Taille L4:3 N 61
Correction distorsion Non 81
Retardateur
personnalisé
2img,5s 82
Horodatage Non 84
Correction de
l’exposition
0.0 85
Option Défaut Page
Balance blancs Multi-P AUTO 86
Correction du bougé*
5
Oui 92
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Mode4:correction biais
Option Défaut Page
Qualité image/Taille 1M 4:3F 61
Mise au point AF Multi 64
Dist. mise au pt snap 2.5?m 68
Instantané par pression Oui 69
Pré AF Non 70
Mesure exposition Multi 70
Réglages image Standard 71
Correction exposition
flash
0.0 78
Option Défaut Page
Réglage synchro du flash 1er rideau 79
Correction distorsion Non 81
Horodatage Non 84
Correction de l’exposition 0.0 85
Balance blancs Multi-P AUTO 86
Sensibilité ISO Auto 90
Correction du bougé*
5
Oui 92
*
1
Non disponibleen mode M.
*
2
Mode5uniquement.
*
3
Mode A uniquement.
*
4
Mode MY, MY2 ou MY uniquement.
*
5
Ilestpossiblequecettefonction nesoitpas
disponibleselon letyped’unitéappareilphoto.
Qualité image/Taille/Taille vidéo
La taille des images détermine le nombre de photos et
de vidéos qui peuvent être stockées dans la mémoire
interne ou sur une carte mémoire.
Pour les photos, le rapport d’affichage et la qualité de
l’image peuvent être sélectionnés pour chaque option.
La taille de l’image varie en fonction de l’association de
l’option sélectionnée, du rapport d’affichage et de la
qualité.
Pour les vidéos, sélectionnez l’option souhaitée.2
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Pourles photos
Option
Rapport
d’affichage
Taux de compression Description
RAW 16:9*
2
, 4:3,
3:2
*2
, 1:1*
3
FINE/NORMAL/
VGA*
1
• Adapté dans le cadre
du traitement ou de la
retouche de l’image sur un
ordinateur.
L 16:9*
2
, 4:3,
3:2*
2
, 1:1*
3
FINE/NORMAL • Adapté dans le cadre de
l’impression grand format
ou du rognage de l’image
sur un ordinateur.
M 16:9*
2
, 4:3,
3:2*
2
, 1:1*
3
FINE/NORMAL
5M 4:3 FINE • Adapté dans le cadre de
l’impression.
3M 4:3 FINE
1M*
4
4:3 FINE • Adapté dans le cadre de la
prise d’un grand nombre
de photos.
VGA*
4
4:3 FINE • Adapté dans le cadre de la
prise d’un grand nombre
de photos, de l’ajout
d’images à des courriers
électroniques ou de la
publication d’images sur le
Web.
*
1
Le réglage s’applique à la copie JPEG.
*
2
Les parties supérieure et inférieure de l’écran sont noircies.
*
3
Les côtés gauche et droit de l’écran sont noircis.
*
4
1M et VGA sont disponibles en mode Correction biais.
Remarques
• Reportez-vous à la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil
photo pour plus de détails concernant la taille d’image de
chaque option.
• Les options du paramètre Qualité image/Taille peuvent être
affichées en appuyant sur la manette ADJ. (page 134).
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Conseil : qualité d’image
L’appareil photo prend en charge les qualités d’image suivantes :
• Normal : la compression JPEG est utilisée pour réduire la taille du
fichier.
• Fine : faible taux de compression pour obtenir des images de
haute qualité. La taille des fichiers est plus importante que lors
de l’utilisation de la qualité Normal.
• RAW : les données d’image RAW sont enregistrées au format
DNG ; des copies JPEG sont également créées. L’appareil affiche
uniquement la copie JPEG ; les fichiers DNG peuvent être visualisés
et retouchés sur un ordinateur en utilisant le logiciel fourni Irodio
Photo & Video Studio (Windows uniquement) ou une application
de retouche photo existante prenant en charge le format DNG.
Contrairement aux images de qualité normale et fine, les images
RAW ne sont pas compressées. Cela augmente la taille de fichier
mais évite la perte de qualité associée à la compression JPEG.
Notez ce qui suit lors de la prise de vue d’images RAW :
• Certaines fonctions du menu prise de vue ne sont pas
disponibles pour la prise d’images RAW. Reportez-vous à la
description de chaque réglage pour plus de détails. Les options
Réglages image et Horodatage s’appliquent uniquement aux
copies JPEG et n’ont aucun effet sur les fichiers DNG.
• Le nombre de photos RAW qui peuvent être prises en une seule
rafale en mode continu varie en fonction de l’unité appareil
photo et des réglages du menu prise de vue.
Pourlesvidéos
Option Taille d’image
VGA640 640×480
QVGA320 320×240
Remarques
• Les options disponibles pour les vidéos varient en fonction de
l’unité appareil photo. Consultez la documentation fournie avec
l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus.
• Les vidéos peuvent avoir une durée de 90 minutes ou une taille
de 4 Go.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Mise au point
Choisissez la méthode utilisée pour la mise au point. L’appareil
photo utilise par défaut la mise au point automatique.
Option Description
AF Multi*
L’appareil sélectionne la zone de mise au point sur
le sujet le plus proche, ce qui évite des prises de vue
sans mise au point en empêchant une mise au point
sur l’arrière-plan.
AF Spot*
L’appareil effectue la mise au point sur le sujet au
centre du cadre.
MF (miseau
point manuelle)
La mise au point est effectuée manuellement (page
65).
Snap
La mise au point s’effectue à la distance sélectionnée
sous Dist. mise au pt snap (page 68) pour un
déclenchement rapide.
8 (infini)
La distance de mise au point est définie sur l’infini
lors de la prise de vue de scènes à distance.
* L’icône s’affiche uniquement sur l’écran DIRECT.
Lorsque l’option MF, Snap ou 8
est sélectionnée, la sélection est
indiquée par une icône au niveau
de l’écran d’affichage des photos.
4:3 N
Conseil : Profondeur dechamp
Profondeur de champ est la partie de l’image (plage de distance) qui
apparaît nette. Les petites ouvertures (grands nombres f) augmentent
la profondeur de champ, élargissant la scène mise au point ; les
grandes ouvertures (petits nombres f) diminuent la profondeur de
champ, mettant en valeur le sujet principal en rendant flou l’avantplan et l’arrière-plan. Avec les réglages MF, Snap et 8, la barre de
mise au point indique la profondeur de
champ dans les modes prise de vue M, A
et P (en mode P, la profondeur de champ
est uniquement indiquée lorsque le
déclencheur est enfoncé à mi-course et
que les valeurs d’ouverture sont affichées).
Profondeur de
champ (vert)
Barre de mise au
point (les distances
sont approximatives)
Profondeur de
champ (vert)
Barre de mise au
point (les distances
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Remarques
• Fn et Fn2 peuvent être utilisées pour basculer entre la mise au
point automatique, manuelle ou snap (page 136).
• Pour effectuer un zoom avant sur le
sujet au centre de l’écran d’affichage
des photos et vérifier la mise au
point, maintenez C/D
enfoncée. Maintenez de nouveau
la touche enfoncé pour revenir à
l’affichage normal de la prise de vue.
4:3 N
2.5 30
Mise au point :MF(mise au pointmanuelle)
La mise au point manuelle peut être utilisée pour verrouiller la
mise au point ou pour effectuer la mise au point lorsque l’appareil
photo est incapable d’utiliser la mise au point automatique.
1
Sélectionnez MF (mise au point manuelle) dans le
menu Mise au point.
Le mode mise au point et la
barre de mise au point sont
affichés sur l’écran d’affichage
des photos.
4:3 N
2.5 30
2 Choisissez la distance de mise au point.
Tout en maintenant la touche N enfoncée, faites tourner
le sélecteur plus-moins pour effectuer la mise au point.
Lors de l’utilisation de l’unité appareil photo équipée d’une
bague de mise au point, réglez la mise au point à l’aide de
la bague.
3
Prenez une photo.
Consultez la section sur le mode prise de vue
sélectionné pour en savoir plus.
Remarque
En mode mise au point manuelle, l’appareil photo peut effectuer
la mise au point sur le sujet à courte distance (macro) même si le
mode macro n’est pas activé.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Choix delamise au pointetcible demesure
La sélection de cible peut être utilisée pour définir la
mise au point et l’exposition pour les sujets excentrés,
sans déplacer l’appareil photo, et cette fonction facilite
l’utilisation d’un trépied.
1Activez la sélection de cible.
Appuyez sur la manette ADJ.
dans les modes mise au point
autres que MF, puis appuyez
sur la manette vers la gauche
ou la droite pour sélectionner
P. Appuyez sur + ou – pour
sélectionner l’une des options
suivantes et appuyez sur C/D pour confirmer.
Option Description
AE/AF
Mesure Spot et mise au point automatique Spot ; choisissez
la cible de mise au point et d’exposition.
AF
Mise au point automatique Spot ; choisissez la cible de
mise au point. L’exposition est mesurée à l’aide de l’option
sélectionnée pour Mesure exposition (page 70).
AE
Mesure Spot ; choisissez la cible de mesure. La mise au
point est définie par l’option sélectionnée pour Mise au
point (page 64).
Non La sélection de cible est désactivée.
2
Positionnez la cible.
À l’aide du pavé directionnel
(page 37), placez le réticule
Csur le sujet, puis appuyez sur
/D.
Pour retourner au menu de
sélection de cible, appuyez
sur la touche DISP..
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
3
Prenez une photo.
Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course pour
définir la mise au point et/ou l’exposition pour le
sujet sélectionné, puis appuyez doucement sur le
déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre la photo.
Remarques
• La sélection de cible n’est pas disponible en mode mise au
point manuelle (page 65).
• La cible sélectionnée reste active jusqu’à ce qu’une nouvelle
cible soit choisie. Notez que la cible sera réinitialisée si vous
choisissez une nouvelle option dans le menu sélection de cible,
ou si vous sélectionnez la mise au point manuelle.
• Lorsque le mode macro est activé en mode 4, la cible
de mise au point du mode macro peut être sélectionnée en
appuyant sur la manette ADJ., en sélectionnant U et en utilisant
le pavé directionnel pour placer le réticule comme indiqué à la
page 68.
• Les touches Fn peuvent être utilisées pour la sélection de la cible
de mise au point en mode macro (page 68). Notez que, si les
touches Fn ont été utilisées pour sélectionner la cible de mise au
point, la manette ADJ. ne peut pas être utilisée pour la sélection
de cible jusqu’à ce que la cible soit réinitialisée.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Sélection deciblemacro
Si l’option Cible macro est attribuée à
la touche Fn ou Fn2 (page 136), vous
pouvez sélectionner le mode macro
en appuyant sur la touche affectée
en mode prise de vue. Le réticule
illustré à droite s’affiche ; utilisez le
pavé directionnel (page 37) pour
placer le réticule sur le sujet, puis appuyez sur C/D (pour
quitter sans définir la cible, appuyez sur la touche DISP.). Appuyez
sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au
point sur la cible sélectionnée, puis appuyez doucement sur le
déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre la photo.
Si vous avez utilisé la manette ADJ. pour sélectionner une cible
de mise au point (page 66), vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner le
mode cible macro à l’aide des touches Fn et Fn2 avant que la
cible soit annulée.
Dist. mise au pt snap
Sélectionnez la distance à laquelle l’appareil photo
effectue la mise au point lorsque l’option Snap est
sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mise au point (page 64)
ou lorsque l’option Instantané par pression est activée
(page 69). Sélectionnez 1m, 1,5m, 2m, 2,5m, 3m, 3,5 m,
5m ou 8 (infini).
Remarque
Lorsque l’option Snap est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mise
au point ou lorsque l’option Instantané par pression est
activée, la distance de mise au point snap peut être également
sélectionnée en tournant le sélecteur plus-moins tout en
appuyant sur la touche N.9
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Instantané par pression
Prenez des photos sans pause pour la mise au point
lorsque l’option AF Multi ou AF Spot est sélectionnée
pour le paramètre Mise au point (page 64).
Option Description
Non La fonction est désactivée.
Oui
Si le déclencheur est enfoncé jusqu’au bout en une seule
fois, l’appareil prendra la photo à la distance de mise au
point sélectionnée sous Dist. mise au pt snap. Choisissez
cette option lorsqu’un déclenchement rapide est requis.
Hi ISO auto.
Comme pour l’option Oui, sauf que la sensibilité ISO est
automatiquement réglée sur Auto-Hi (page 90).
Remarque
Il est possible de modifier la distance de mise au point snap en
tournant le sélecteur plus-moins tout en appuyant sur la touche
N.
Conseil :mise au point automatique
L’appareil effectue la mise au point normalement si vous appuyez
sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course.
Attention
• L’option Instantané par pression n’est pas disponible en mode
macro ou lorsque l’option MF, Snap ou 8 est sélectionnée pour
le paramètre Mise au point (page 64).
• Faites attention aux effets de flou provoqués par un bougé de
l’appareil.0
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Pré AF
Si l’option Oui est sélectionnée lorsque l’option AF Multi
ou AF Spot est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mise au
point (page 64), l’appareil photo continuera à effectuer
la mise au point, même lorsque le déclencheur n’est
pas enfoncé à mi-course (la plage de mise au point est
plus étroite qu’avec la mise au point normale). Cela
peut diminuer le délai nécessaire à la mise au point,
améliorant potentiellement la réponse du déclencheur.
Attention
• Pré AF n’est pas disponible lorsque l’option MF, Snap ou 8 est
sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mise au point (page 64).
• L’utilisation de l’option Pré AF augmente la décharge de la
batterie.
Mesure exposition
Choisissez la méthode utilisée par l’appareil photo pour
mesurer la lumière pour l’exposition.
Option Description
Multi* L’appareil photo mesure la lumière sur 256 zones du cadre.
Centre
L’appareil mesure la lumière du cadre entier mais attribue
le plus de poids au centre. Utilisez ce réglage lorsque le
sujet au centre du cadre est plus clair ou plus sombre que
l’arrière-plan.
Spot
L’appareil mesure la lumière avec le sujet au centre du
cadre, en garantissant qu’il est exposé de manière optimale,
même s’il est sensiblement plus clair ou plus sombre que
l’arrière-plan.
* L’icône s’affiche uniquement sur l’écran DIRECT.
Lorsque l’option Centre ou Sport
est sélectionnée, la sélection est
indiquée par une icône au niveau
de l’écran d’affichage des photos.
4:3 N
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Réglages image
Ajustez le contraste, la netteté et l’éclat (intensité) ou
prenez des photos monochromes.
Option Description
Vif
Prenez des photos éclatantes avec un contraste,
une netteté et un éclat renforcés.
Standard* Contraste, netteté et éclat normaux.
Naturel
Cette option permet de créer une image plus douce
avec un contraste, une netteté et un éclat réduits.
Noir et Blanc
Cette option permet de prendre des photos en noir
et blanc. Le contraste et la netteté peuvent être
ajustés manuellement.
N et B (TE)
(Effetdetons)
Cette option permet de créer des photos
monochromes avec une teinte sépia, rouge, verte,
bleue ou pourpre. L’éclat, le contraste et la netteté
peuvent être ajustés manuellement.
Réglage 1
Réglage 2
Cette option permet d’effectuer des ajustements manuels
de l’éclat, du contraste, de la netteté, des couleurs et
de la teinte pour créer des réglages personnalisés, qui
peuvent ensuite être rappelés à votre convenance.
* L’icône s’affiche uniquement sur l’écran DIRECT.
Pour les réglages différents de
Standard, la sélection actuelle est
indiquée par une icône sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos.
4:3 N
Pour configurer individuellement les réglages Noir et
Blanc, N et B(TE), Réglage1 ou Réglage2, sélectionnez
l’option souhaitée et appuyez sur Fn2.2
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
1Ajustez les réglages personnalisés de
reproduction des couleurs.
• Noir et Blanc : appuyez sur +
et – pour sélectionner une
option, puis appuyez sur Fn1
et Fn2 pour la modifier.
• N et B(TE) : réglez l’éclat,
le contraste et la netteté
comme indiqué ci-dessus.
Pour choisir une teinte,
sélectionnez Effet de tons
et appuyez sur Fn2. Appuyez
sur + et – pour sélectionner
une option, puis appuyez
sur Fn pour confirmer.
• Réglage 1/Réglage 2 : réglez l’éclat,
le contraste et la netteté comme
indiqué ci-dessus. Pour ajuster
des couleurs individuelles,
sélectionnez Réglages
individuels des couleurs et
appuyez sur Fn2. appuyez sur +
et – pour sélectionner une option, puis appuyez sur Fn
et Fn2 pour la modifier. Appuyez sur C/D pour
quitter lorsque les réglages sont terminés.
Pour activer les réglages enregistrés, sélectionnez
Rappeler réglages et appuyez sur Fn2. Appuyez
sur la touche + ou – pour sélectionner une option,
puis sur C/D.
2
Retournez au menu Réglages image.
Appuyez sur C/D une fois les réglages terminés.
3
Revenez au mode prise de vue.
Appuyez sur C/D ou appuyez sur Fn1, puis
appuyez sur C/D.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
L’option actuellement
sélectionnée pour Réglages
image s’affiche sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos.
4:3 N
Remarque
Les options du paramètre Réglages image peuvent être
affichées en appuyant sur la manette ADJ. (page 134).
Mode continu
Prenez des photos en continu.
• Continu : l’appareil prend des
photos tant que le déclencheur
est enfoncé.
Toutes les photos prises dans ce
mode sont enregistrées en tant
qu’images individuelles.
• Cont.M + (mémoireinversecontinueplus) : l’appareil prend
des photos tant que le déclencheur est enfoncé. Les
photos consécutives prises avant que le déclencheur
soit relâché sont enregistrées dans un fichier MP (page
95).
Cont.M + peut être défini sur une des options
suivantes : Cont.M + (rap) et Cont.M + (len).
Lorsque vous relâchez le
déclencheur…
…l’appareil enregistre des photos consécutives.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Remarque
Pour les options Cont.M + (rap) et Cont.M + (len), la taille des
images et le nombre d’images enregistrées dans un même fichier
MP varient en fonction de l’unité appareil photo. Consultez la
documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir
plus.
Pour les réglages différents de
Non, la sélection actuelle est
indiquée par une icône sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos.
4:3 N
Attention
Le zoom numérique est disponible avec les réglages Cont.M +,
même si l’option Taille auto est sélectionnée pour le paramètre
Image zoom numérique.
Remarques
• Pour les réglages différents de Non, le flash est
automatiquement désactivé, la mise au point et l’exposition
sont définies lors de la première prise de vue de la série et
la balance des blancs Auto est utilisée à la place de l’option
Multi-P AUTO (page 86).
• Si vous relâchez le déclencheur avant que le nombre d’images
à enregistrer dans un fichier MP soit atteint, les photos prises
lorsque la touche était enfoncée sont enregistrées dans un
fichier MP.
Conseil : fichierMP
MP est un format de fichier qui permet d’enregistrer un ensemble
de photos.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Cadrage auto
L’appareil photo enregistre deux ou trois copies d’une
image avec différentes expositions, balances des blancs
ou couleurs.
Option Description
Non*
La fonction de cadrage automatique est désactivée.
AE-BKT
L’appareil photo enregistre trois copies d’une photo dans la
plage de valeurs d’exposition indiquée.
WB-BKT
L’appareil enregistre trois copies
de chaque photo : une avec une
dominante rougeâtre « chaude »,
une deuxième avec la balance des
blancs actuellement sélectionnée
dans le menu prise de vue (page
86) et une troisième avec une
dominante bleuâtre « froide ».
Cette option vous permet de faire
un choix lorsque vous rencontrez
Affichage après la prise
de vue
CL-BKT
Cette option enregistre des photos en noir et blanc et en
couleur, ou bien en noir et blanc, en couleur et en monochrome
teinté (page 77).
* L’icône s’affiche uniquement sur l’écran DIRECT.
La sélection actuelle est indiquée
par une icône sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos.
4:3 N
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Remarques
• Le cadrage n’est pas disponible lorsqu’une option autre que
Non est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mode Continu. Le
cadrage balance des blancs n’est pas disponible lors des prises
de vue monochromes.
• Le cadrage balance des blancs et le cadrage couleur ne sont
pas disponibles lorsque l’option RAW est sélectionnée pour le
paramètre Qualité image/Taille (page 61).
• Le flash est automatiquement désactivé lorsque le cadrage est
activé.
• Le balance des blancs Auto est utilisée à la place de l’option
Multi-P AUTO lorsque l’option AE-BKT est sélectionnée.
AE-BKT:Cadrageexposition
Pour définir des variations de la valeur d’exposition :
1
Sélectionnez AE-BKT.
Sélectionnez AE-BKT et appuyez sur Fn2.
2
Spécifiez la valeur de compensation de
l’exposition.
Déplacez le curseur à l’aide
de Fn ou Fn2, appuyez sur +
ou – pour spécifier la valeur
de compensation, puis
appuyez sur C/D.
3
Revenez au mode prise de vue.
Appuyez sur C/D ou sur Fn, puis sur C/
D.
Remarques
• Si la même valeur de correction d’exposition est définie, seule
une image est affichée pour la valeur.
• La valeur des pas de correction peut être définie sous Pas de
corr. expo/flash dans l’onglet de configuration (page 140).
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
CL-BKT:cadragecouleur
Le nombre et le type de photos enregistrées lorsque
l’option CL-BKT est sélectionnée pour le paramètre
Cadrage auto dépend de l’option choisie pour CL-BKT
Noir et Blanc (TE) dans l’onglet de configuration (page
146) :
• Non : l’appareil photo enregistre
deux copies de chaque photo,
l’une en noir et blanc et la
seconde en couleur.
• Oui : l’appareil enregistre trois
copies de chaque photo, l’une
en noir et blanc, la deuxième en
couleur et la troisième utilisant
une teinte sélectionnée pour N
et B(TE) dans le menu Réglages
image (page 71). Copie N et B(TE)
Conseil :contraste, nettetéet intensité
Le contraste, la netteté et l’éclat des images de la séquence
cadrage sont déterminés par les options sélectionnées dans le
menu Réglages image (page 71). La copie en noir et blanc est
enregistrée avec les réglages les plus récemment utilisés pour
Noir et Blanc, la copie en monochrome teinté avec les réglages
les plus récemment utilisés pour N et B (TE), et la copie couleur
avec le réglage actuellement utilisé pour Réglages image (si
Noir et Blanc ou N et B (TE) est sélectionné, la copie couleur
sera enregistrée avec le réglage Standard).
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Correction exposition flash
Réglez le niveau de flash sur une
valeur comprise entre –2,0 et +2,0,
par pas de 1/2 ou 1/3 EV. La sélection
de Correction exposition flash
dans le menu prise de vue affiche
le curseur illustré à droite ;
appuyez sur + ou – pour choisir une valeur de correction
d’exposition du flash et appuyez sur C/D.
La correction d’exposition
du flash s’affiche sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos, sauf si le
flash est désactivé.
4:3 N
Remarques
• Consultez la page 28 pour en savoir plus sur l’utilisation du flash.
• La valeur des pas de correction peut être définie sous Pas de
corr. expo/flash dans l’onglet de configuration (page 140).
Attention
Il se peut que la correction d’exposition du flash ne fonctionne
pas en dehors de la portée du flash. Consultez la documentation
fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus sur la
portée du flash.9
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Niveau de flash manuel
Choisissez la quantité de lumière produite par le flash
en mode flash manuel (page 28). Le niveau de flash est
exprimé sous la forme d’une fraction de la puissance
totale (toutes les valeurs sont approximatives) :
Max 1/1.4 1/2 1/2.8 1/4 1/5.6 1/8 1/11 1/16 1/22 1/32 1/64
Le niveau de flash s’affiche sur
l’écran d’affichage des photos en
mode flash manuel.
4:3 N
Remarque
La correction d’exposition du flash n’est pas disponible en mode
flash manuel.
Attention
Ne pointez pas le flash vers le conducteur d’un véhicule à moteur
et n’utilisez pas le flash à proximité des yeux du sujet. La plus
grande prudence est recommandée pour photographier des
enfants.
Réglage synchro du flash
Choisissez le type de synchronisation avec l’obturateur.
• 1er rideau : le flash se déclenche au début de
l’exposition. Cette option est recommandée pour la
plupart des situations.
• 2e rideau : le flash se déclenche à la fin de l’exposition.
Cette option produit des traînées de lumière derrière
les sources d’éclairage en mouvement.0
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Réduction bruit
Choisissez Faible ou Forte pour réduire le « bruit »
(variations aléatoires de la luminosité et de la couleur)
dans les photos prises avec des sensibilités ISO élevées.
La sensibilité ISO minimum, à laquelle s’applique la
réduction du bruit, peut être sélectionnée en utilisant
l’option Réduction bruit ISO.
s’affiche lorsque la réduction
du bruit est activée.
4:3 N
Remarques
• Lorsque l’option RAW est sélectionnée pour le paramètre
Qualité image/Taille (page 61), la réduction du bruit s’applique
uniquement à la copie JPEG et pas au fichier DNG.
• La durée nécessaire pour enregistrer les photos varie selon
l’option sélectionnée pour Réduction bruit.
Réduction bruit ISO
Sélectionnez la sensibilité ISO minimum à laquelle
s’applique la réduction du bruit lorsque l’option Faible
ou Forte est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Réduction
bruit. Sélectionnez Tous (la réduction du bruit
s’applique à toutes les sensibilités ISO), > à ISO 201, > à
ISO 401, > à ISO 801, ISO 1601 ou ISO3200.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Correction distorsion
Réglez l’option Correction distorsion sur Oui pour
corriger automatiquement la déformation de l’image
lors de la prise de vue.
s’affiche lorsque la correction
de la déformation est activée.
4:3 N
Attention
• Il est possible que la correction ne soit pas appliquée selon le
type d’unité appareil photo ou si cela n’est pas nécessaire en
raison de la position du zoom, même si l’option Correction
distorsion est réglée sur Oui. Le symbole de correction de
la déformation s’affiche cependant en mode lecture pour les
images auxquelles la correction n’est pas appliquée.
• La fonction de correction de la déformation n’est pas disponible
pour les fichiers DNG, les copies JPEG de données brutes, les
fichiers MP et les vidéos.
• Lorsque l’option Correction distorsion est réglée sur Oui,
l’angle de vue change.
• L’image corrigée ne s’affiche pas sur l’écran d’affichage des
photos, même si l’option Correction distorsion est réglée sur
Oui.
Macro auto
Lorsque l’option Macro auto est réglée sur Oui, l’appareil
photo active automatiquement le mode macro lors de la
mise au point sur un sujet proche de l’objectif si le mode
macro n’est pas activé.
N s’affiche lorsque l’appareil photo passe en mode
macro.2
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Retardateur personnalisé
Pour définir le nombre de photos à prendre et l’intervalle
de prise de vue pour le réglage personnalisé de l’option
retardateur, sélectionnez Retardateur personnalisé
dans le menu prise de vue et procédez comme suit :
1
Sélectionnez le nombre de photos à prendre et
l’intervalle de prise de vue.
Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner les
Cnombres, appuyez sur + ou – pour modifier.
/D pour revenir au mode prise de vue.
2Démarrez la prise de vue.
Appuyez sur le déclencheur. Le nombre de photos
indiqué est automatiquement pris à l’intervalle
sélectionné.
Appuyez sur C/D pour annuler le
retardateur avant que le nombre de photos indiqué
soit pris.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Prise de vue à intervalles
Pour prendre automatiquement des photos à
des intervalles entre cinq secondes et une heure,
sélectionnez Prise de vue à intervalles dans le menu
prise de vue et procédez comme suit :
1 Choisissez un intervalle.
Appuyez sur Fn et Fn2 pour
sélectionner les heures, les
minutes ou les secondes,
puis appuyez sur + et – pour
Cmodifier. Appuyez sur
/D pour revenir au
mode prise de vue.
Intervalle s’affiche sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos.
4:3 N
2Démarrez la prise de vue.
Appuyez sur le déclencheur. Ensuite, l’appareil
prend automatiquement les photos à l’intervalle
sélectionné.
3Arrêtez la prise de vue.
Appuyez sur C/D pour terminer la prise de vue.
Attention
• Le retardateur n’est pas disponible en mode 4.
• L’intervalle est réinitialisé à zéro lorsque l’appareil est mis hors
tension.
• Si le délai nécessaire pour enregistrer les photos est supérieur à
l’intervalle sélectionné, la prochaine photo n’est pas prise tant
que l’enregistrement n’est pas terminé.
• Le flash externe ne se déclenche pas en mode prise de vue à
intervalles. Utilisez le flash intégré.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Remarques
• Utilisez une batterie pleine et assurez-vous qu’il y a
suffisamment d’espace dans la mémoire interne ou sur la carte
mémoire. La prise de vue à intervalles prend automatiquement
fin lorsque la mémoire interne ou la carte mémoire est pleine.
• Les photos peuvent être prises à tout moment en appuyant sur
le déclencheur.
• Si l’option Continu ou Cont.M + est sélectionnée pour le
paramètre Mode Continu, la prise de vue en continu est
automatiquement désactivée.
Horodatage
L’appareil photo incruste la date de la prise de vue sur la
photo. Sélectionnez Date (AA/MM/JJ) ou Date et Heure
(AA/MM/JJ hh:mm).
DATE s’affiche lorsque
l’horodatage est activé.
4:3 N
Remarques
• L’horodatage n’est pas disponible lorsque l’horloge n’est pas
configurée. Configurez l’horloge (page 20, 149) avant d’utiliser
l’horodatage.
• La date ne peut pas être incrustée sur les vidéos.
• Lorsque l’option RAW est sélectionnée pour le paramètre
Qualité image/Taille, la date est incrustée uniquement sur la
copie JPEG et pas dans le fichier DNG.
• La date est incrustée définitivement sur l’image et ne peut plus
être effacée.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Correction de l’exposition
La correction de l’exposition peut être requise dans les
situations suivantes :
• Contre-jour très lumineux : le sujet qui subit un contre-jour
puissant peut être sous-exposé. Essayez d’augmenter
la correction de l’exposition.
• Le cadre est dominé par des objets très lumineux : le sujet peut
être sous-exposé. Essayez d’augmenter la correction de
l’exposition.
• Le cadre est pratiquement sombre (par exemple, un sujet
sous un projecteur dans une scène sombre) : le sujet
peut être surexposé. Essayez de réduire la correction
d’exposition.
1Affichez le curseur de correction d’exposition.
Sélectionnez Correction de
l’exposition dans le menu
prise de vue et appuyez sur
Fn2 pour afficher le curseur
illustré sur la droite.
2
Réglez la correction d’exposition.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour régler la valeur de
correction de l’exposition. Appuyez sur le
déclencheur pour prendre une photo ou appuyez
sur C/D pour revenir au mode prise de vue.
Pour les réglages différents de
0.0, la correction de l’exposition
s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage
des photos.
4:3 N
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Attention
La correction de l’exposition n’est pas disponible en mode M.
Remarque
La valeur des pas de correction peut être définie sous l’option Pas
de corr. expo/flash dans l’onglet de configuration (page 140).
Balance blancs
Avec le réglage Multi-P AUTO par défaut, l’appareil
photo règle automatiquement la balance des blancs afin
qu’un sujet blanc apparaisse blanc, quelle que soit la
couleur de la source lumineuse. Il peut être cependant
nécessaire d’adapter la balance des blancs à la source
lumineuse, dans les cas d’un éclairage mixte ou de la
prise de vue d’un sujet avec une couleur unie.
Option Description
Auto* L’appareil règle automatiquement la balance des blancs.
Multi-P AUTO
L’appareil règle la balance des blancs en tenant
compte des différences d’éclairage dans les différentes
zones du cadre (en mode continu, cette option est
équivalente à l’option Auto).
En extérieur
Utilisez cette option lors des prises de vue en lumière
du jour sous un ciel clair.
Nuageux
Utilisez cette option lors des prises de vue en lumière
du jour sous un ciel nuageux.
Lampe
incandescente
Utilisez cette option avec une lampe incandescente.
Lampe
fluorescente
Utilisez cette option avec une lampe fluorescente.
Réglage
manuel
Cette option permet de mesurer manuellement la
balance des blancs (page 88).
Détail
Cette option permet d’affiner le réglage de la balance
des blancs (page 88).
* L’icône s’affiche uniquement sur l’écran DIRECT.
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Pour les réglages différents de
Auto, la sélection actuelle est
indiquée par une icône sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos.
4:3 N
Attention
• La balance des blancs automatique peut ne pas produire les
résultats souhaités en cas d’absence d’objets blancs dans la
scène. Pour y remédier, il suffit d’ajouter un objet blanc dans la
scène avant la prise de vue.
• Les options différentes de Auto peuvent ne pas produire les
résultats souhaités si le flash est utilisé. Sélectionnez Auto lors
de l’utilisation du flash
1Affichez les options de la balance des blancs.
Sélectionnez Balance blancs dans le menu prise de
vue et appuyez sur Fn2 pour afficher les options.
2
Sélectionnez une option.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une option.
Appuyez sur le déclencheur pour prendre une
photo ou appuyez sur la manette ADJ. ou sur C/
D pour revenir au mode prise de vue.
Remarque
Les options Balance blancs peuvent être affichées en appuyant
sur la manette ADJ. (page 134).
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Manuel :mesure dela balance des blancs
Pour mesurer une valeur de la balance des blancs :
1
Sélectionnez Réglage manuel.
Sélectionnez Réglage
manuel dans le menu
balance des blancs.
2Mesurez la balance des
blancs.
Cadrez une feuille de papier
blanc ou un autre objet blanc, afin de remplir tout
le cadre, et appuyez sur la touche DISP.. Répétez les
étapes 1 et 2 jusqu’à ce que l’effet souhaité soit
obtenu.
3
Revenez au mode prise de vue.
Appuyez sur C/D pour retourner au mode
prise de vue.
Remarque
La sélection d’une option différente de Réglage manuel
réinitialise la balance des blancs manuelle.
Détail :réglage fin dela balance des blancs
Pour affiner le réglage de la balance des blancs :
1
Sélectionnez Détail.
Sélectionnez Détail dans le
menu balance des blancs et
appuyez sur la touche DISP..9
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
2 Choisissez une valeur.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour
choisir une balance des
Cblancs. Appuyez sur
/D lorsque les
réglages sont terminés.
3
Revenez au mode prise de vue.
Appuyez sur C/D pour retourner au mode
prise de vue.
Remarque
La sélection d’une option différente de Détail réinitialise la
balance des blancs détaillée.
Compensation balance blancs
Compensez les dominantes couleurs en modifiant
la balance des blancs sur les axes vert-magenta ou
bleu-ambre. Les modifications s’appliquent à l’option
actuellement sélectionnée pour la balance des blancs
et à toutes les options sélectionnées tant que les
modifications sont en cours.
La sélection de l’option Compensation
balance blancs dans le menu prise de
vue (page 58) affiche les commandes
illustrées à droite. Sélectionnez la
compensation de la balance des blancs
à l’aide du pavé directionnel (page
37). Appuyez sur la touche DISP. pour
rétablir une valeur de compensation
de la balance des blancs neutre.
Appuyez sur C/D pour
enregistrer les modifications et quitter
ou appuyez deux fois sur la touche DISP.
pour annuler.
SFlb
Bleu
Vert
Magenta
Ambre
Quantité90
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
La compensation de la balance
des blancs s’affiche sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos.
4:3 N
Remarques
• La compensation de la balance
des blancs peut être assignée à
la manette ADJ. (page 134). Pour
réinitialiser, sélectionnez Réinitial. et
appuyez sur C/D.
• La compensation de la balance des
blancs peut également être assignée
aux touches Fn (page 136).
• Si le sélecteur de mode est placé sur 4, la compensation de
la balance des blancs est uniquement disponible en mode vidéo.
• L’option Compensation balance blancs du menu lecture (page
109) n’utilise pas les mêmes valeurs que celles du menu prise de
vue.
Sensibilité ISO
Réglez la sensibilité de l’appareil photo par rapport à la
lumière. Des valeurs élevées peuvent être utilisées pour
obtenir des vitesses d’obturation plus rapides, lorsque le
sujet est faiblement éclairé, et éviter ainsi les effets de flou.
• Auto : l’appareil règle automatiquement la sensibilité
en fonction de la luminosité, de la distance du sujet,
des options sélectionnées pour le mode macro, ainsi
que pour la taille et la qualité d’image.
• Auto-Hi (haute sensibilité automatique) : l’appareil
photo ajuste automatiquement la sensibilité
en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. En
comparaison du réglage Auto, il est possible de
sélectionner des sensibilités plus élevées pour les
sujets mal éclairés. La sensibilité maximum peut être
sélectionnée à l’aide de Sensibilité ISO auto-hi dans
l’onglet de configuration (page 140).9
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
• ISO (valeur) : l’appareil photo effectue la prise de vue
à l’aide de la valeur ISO sélectionnée. Les valeurs ISO
disponibles varient en fonction de l’unité appareil
photo. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité
appareil photo pour en savoir plus.
La sensibilité actuelle est indiquée
sur l’écran d’affichage des photos
(si l’option Auto ou Auto-Hi
est sélectionnée, la sensibilité
sélectionnée par l’appareil est
indiquée lorsque le déclencheur
est enfoncé à mi-course).
2.5 ISO 200
1
Sélectionnez une option de sensibilité ISO.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une option.
2
Prenez une photo ou retournez au mode prise de vue.
Appuyez sur le déclencheur pour prendre une
photo ou appuyez sur C/D pour revenir au
mode prise de vue.
Remarques
• Les options du paramètre Sensibilité ISO peuvent être
affichées en appuyant sur la manette ADJ. (page 134).
• La sensibilité lors de l’utilisation du flash et la plage de sensibilités
disponibles varient en fonction de l’unité appareil photo. Consultez
la documentation de l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus.
• Du « bruit » (variations de la luminosité et de la couleur) peut
apparaître dans les photos prises avec des sensibilités élevées.
Initialiser
Pour restaurer les réglages par défaut du menu prise
de vue (page 59), placez le sélecteur de mode sur 5 et
sélectionnez Initialiser dans le menu prise de vue. Une
boîte de dialogue de confirmation s’affiche ; sélectionnez
Oui et appuyez sur C/D pour restaurer les valeurs
par défaut et quitter le mode prise de vue.92
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Décalage ouverture auto
Lorsque l’option Oui est sélectionnée, l’appareil photo
règle automatiquement l’ouverture pour éviter la
surexposition en mode priorité à l’ouverture.
Remarque
Le décalage de l’ouverture automatique est uniquement
disponbible en mode priorité à l’ouverture.
Changement de mode prise de vue
Lorsque le sélecteur de mode est
placé sur un mode MY (page 57),
vous pouvez utiliser cette option
pour basculer entre les modes
5, P, A, S et M sans tourner
le sélecteur de mode sur une
nouvelle valeur. Cette option est uniquement disponible
en mode MY. Elle n’est cependant pas disponible si un
mode scène est attribué au mode MY.
Correction du bougé
Réglez l’option Correction du bougé sur Oui pour éviter
les effets de flou dus à un bougé de l’appareil.
E s’affiche lorsque la correction du bougé est activée.9
PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie
Attention
• Il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible selon
l’unité appareil photo.
• La fonction de correction du bougé n’est pas disponible en
mode vidéo, en mode continu et lorsque la vitesse d’obturation
est réglée sur une seconde ou plus en mode exposition
manuelle. Si la fonction est activée en mode continu ou lorsque
la vitesse d’obturation est réglée sur une seconde ou plus en
mode exposition manuelle, E devient F, et en mode
vidéo, E disparaît.
• La fonction de correction du bougé ne peut empêcher le flou
occasionné par les mouvements du sujet (à cause du vent, etc.).
• Les effets de la fonction de correction du bougé varient en
fonction de l’environnement.
Remarque
J apparaît sur l’écran d’affichage des photos lorsque des
effets de bougé sont susceptibles de se produire.Fonctions de lectUre
9
Fonctions de lecture
Cette section décrit comment visualiser des vidéos et
des fichiers MP.
Visualisation de vidéos
Procédez comme suit pour visualiser des vidéos.
1Appuyez sur la touche 6.
Appuyez sur la touche 6 pour afficher les photos
au niveau de l’écran d’affichage des photos.
2Affichez la vidéo.
Appuyez sur +, –, Fn et Fn2
(page 34) pour faire défiler les
images jusqu’à la première
image de la vidéo à afficher.
Les vidéos sont marquées par
une icône 3.
3Démarrez la lecture.
Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour démarrer la lecture.
La progression est indiquée sur l’écran de lecture.
Les opérations suivantes peuvent être réalisées :
Action Commande Description
Avance/
Rembobinage
z/Z
Maintenez la touche z enfoncée pour l’avance
rapide, maintenez la touche Z enfoncée pour
le rembobinage. Si la vidéo est en pause,
appuyez sur la touche z ou Z pour avancer
ou rembobiner d’une image à la fois ; tenez
la touche enfoncée pour une avance ou un
rembobinage lent.
Pause/
Reprise
ADJ.
Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour mettre en
pause ; appuyez de nouveau pour reprendre
la lecture.
Réglage
du volume
+/–
Appuyez sur + pour augmenter le volume et
sur – pour le diminuer.
2010Fonctions de lectUre
9
Affichage de fichiers MP
Lorsque vous prenez des photos à l’aide de la fonction
Cont.M +, les photos sont enregistrées dans un fichier
MP. Procédez comme suit pour visualiser des fichiers MP.
Remarque
Les photos prises en mode continu normal peuvent être lues de
la meme maniere que les images normales.
1Appuyez sur la touche 6.
2Affichez le fichier MP.
Le fichier MP s’affiche avec le symbole S.
L’affichage change de la manière suivante.
2010/03/01 14:09 ISO 200
F 3.3
EV +1.0
1/55
Affichage de l’étape 2
• Appuyez sur la touche DISP. pour commuter
entre l’affichage normal et l’absence
d’affichage.
• Il est impossible d’agrandir les photos,
même en appuyant sur la touche z.
Les images sont affichées sous forme de
mosaïque.
• Les autres opérations sont identiques à
celles effectuées pour les photos normales.
z
Manette ADJ.
Z
2010/03/01 14:09 F 3.3
6/6
1 55
Vue mosaïque
• Les images des fichiers MP sont affichées
sous forme de mosaïque.
• Utilisez le pavé directionnel (page 37) pour
sélectionner une image.
• La touche DISP. est désactivée.
z
Manette ADJ.
Z
100-0001 6 6
2010/01/01 02:33 ISO 200 EV +1.0
F 3.3 1/55
Vue une image
• Une image sélectionnée dans la vue
mosaïque est affichée.
• Appuyez sur z pour agrandir l’image.
Manette ADJ.Fonctions de lectUre
9
2010/01/01 02:33 ISO 200 EV +1.0
F 3.3 1/55
100-0001 2 6
Diaporama
• Les photos sont automatiquement
affichées dans l’ordre où elles ont été prises,
en commençant par l’image affichée.
Les opérations disponibles pendant le diaporama
sont indiquées ci-dessous.
Pause/lecture Appuyez sur la manette ADJ..
Avance rapide Maintenez la touche z enfoncée pendant la lecture.
Retour Maintenez la touche Z enfoncée pendant la lecture.
Ralenti Maintenez la touche z enfoncée pendant la pause.
Rembobinage lent Maintenez la touche Z enfoncée pendant la pause.
Image suivante Appuyez sur la touche z pendant la pause.
Image précédente Appuyez sur la touche Z pendant la pause.
Première image
Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. vers la gauche
pendant la pause.
Dernière image
Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. vers la droite
pendant la pause.
Attention
• Les fonctions DPOF, Découper, Changer de taille, Correction
biais (mode lecture), Compensation de niveau et Compensation
balance blancs ne sont pas disponibles pour les fichiers MP.
• Les fonctions Réglage fonction indicateur et Protéger ne
peuvent être définies pour les images individuelles d’un fichier MP.
Si la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur ou Protéger est définie
lors de l’affichage de la vue mosaïque ou de la vue une image, le
réglage est appliqué au fichier MP et non à l’image individuelle.
• Les images individuelles des fichiers MP ne peuvent être supprimées.Fonctions de lectUre
9
Exportation de fichiers MP
Procédez comme suit pour extraire des images d’un
fichier MP et les enregistrer individuellement.
Remarques
• Les images extraites sont enregistrées sous la même taille que
l’image d’origine.
• Les fichiers originaux sont conservés après extraction.
1Appuyez sur la touche 6.
2Appuyez sur le fichier MP que vous souhaitez
exporter.
Le fichier MP s’affiche avec le
symbole S.
Pour exporter plusieurs
images, vous pouvez
également appuyer sur la
touche z de manière à
afficher la vue mosaïque, puis
passer à l’étape 3.
2010/03/01 14:09 ISO 200
F 3.3
EV +1.0
1/55
3Appuyez sur C/D.
Le menu des réglages de la lecture apparaît.
4Appuyez sur + ou – pour
sélectionner Exporter
photos, puis appuyez sur
Fn2.Fonctions de lectUre
9
Sélection d’uneimage
5Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner 1 image.
Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour
sélectionner l’image.
6Appuyez sur C/D.
Sélection de plusieursimages distinctes
5Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner Sél. mult,
puis appuyez sur C/D.
Si la vue mosaïque a été
affichée à l’étape 2 de la page
97, passez à l’étape 5.
6Appuyez sur + ou – pour
sélectionner Sél. indiv., puis
appuyez sur C/D.
7
Sélectionnez l’image et appuyez sur C/D.
Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour afficher l’écran
permettant de définir une plage d’images.
Reportez-vous à l’étape 7 et aux étapes suivantes, à
la page 99.
8
Répétez l’étape 7 pour sélectionner toutes les
images.
Pour désélectionner une image, sélectionnez-la et
appuyez sur C/D.
9Appuyez sur la touche N.
10
Sélectionnez Oui et appuyez sur C/D.Fonctions de lectUre
99
Sélection d’une plage de plusieursimages
5Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner Sél. mult,
puis appuyez sur C/D.
Si la vue mosaïque a été
affichée à l’étape 2 de la page
97, passez à l’étape 5.
6Appuyez sur + ou – pour
sélectionner Sél. série, puis
appuyez sur C/D.
7
Sélectionnez le point de départ de la plage
d’images que vous souhaitez définir et appuyez
sur C/D.
En cas d’erreur lors de la sélection du point de
départ de la plage d’images, appuyez sur la touche
DISP. pour retourner à l’écran de sélection du point
de départ.
Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour afficher l’écran
permettant de définir des images distinctes.
Reportez-vous à l’étape 7 et aux étapes suivantes, à
la page 98.
8
Sélectionnez le point final
de la plage d’images que
vous souhaitez définir et
appuyez sur C/D.
Exporter photos
Démarrage Exécuter
9
Répétez les étapes 7 et 8 pour définir l’ensemble
des plages.
10Appuyez sur la touche N.
11
Sélectionnez Oui et appuyez sur C/D.Fonctions de lectUre
00
Sélection detouteslesimages
5Appuyez sur + ou – pour
sélectionner Toutes vues,
puis appuyez sur C/
D.
6
Sélectionnez Oui, puis
appuyez sur C/D.0
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
Menu des réglages de la lecture
Cette section détaille les options du menu lecture et
décrit comment visualiser les photos sur un téléviseur.
Menu lecture
Appuyez sur la touche 6 en mode prise de vue et
procédez comme suit.
1Affichez le menu lecture.
Appuyez sur C/D.
2
Sélectionnez une rubrique de menu.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour faire défiler le menu et
appuyez sur Fn2 pour afficher les options de la
rubrique sélectionnée.
Remarque
Les éléments de la page suivante peuvent être affichés en
appuyant sur – et sur le bouton DIRECT simultanément.
Le menu lecture contient les options suivantes :
Option Page
Réglage fonction indicateur 102
Affichage photos marquées 103
Changer de taille 104
Découper 105
Compensation de niveau 106
Compensation balance blancs 109
Correction biais 110
Option Page
Diaporama 111
Protéger 112
Copier sur carte depuis mémoire
interne
115
DPOF 115
Exporter photos 97
Restaurer fichier 11702
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
Remarque
Les menus de configuration de l’appareil photo sont accessibles à
partir du menu lecture (page 126).
Réglage fonction indicateur
Enregistrez les fichiers d’images fréquemment visualisés
sous Réglage fonction indicateur (20 fichiers maximum)
de manière à pouvoir les rappeler facilement par la suite
à l’aide de la fonction Affichage photos marquées.
Définition/annulation d’un fichier à la fois
Pour définir ou annuler un fichier à la fois, affichez l’image et
appuyez sur C/D. Sélectionnez Réglage fonction
indicateur dans le menu lecture et appuyez sur la touche Fn2.
Sélectionnez Régler ou Annuler et appuyez sur C/D.
Remarques
• Lorsqu’un fichier est sélectionné, le symbole s’affiche à l’écran.
• Il n’est plus possible de définir de fichier lorsque 20 fichiers
sont sélectionnés. Annulez la sélection de certains fichiers et
sélectionnez les fichiers souhaités.
Définition/annulation de plusieurs fichiers à la fois
Procédez comme suit pour définir ou annuler plusieurs
fichiers à la fois.
1Affichez la vue mosaïque.
Appuyez sur z en mode lecture.
2
Sélectionnez une photo.
Sélectionnez une photo et appuyez sur C/D.
3
Sélectionnez Réglage fonction indicateur et
appuyez sur Fn2.
Les photos sélectionnées sont marquées d’une icône .0
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
4
Sélectionnez des photos supplémentaires.
Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner des photos
supplémentaires et appuyez sur C/D.
Répétez cette procédure pour définir ou annuler
l’ensemble des fichiers souhaités. Pour annuler la
sélection des photos, appuyez sur C/D une
fois le fichier sélectionné.
Attention
• Si le nom du fichier indiqué sous Réglage fonction indicateur
est modifié à l’aide d’un ordinateur, la fonction Réglage
fonction indicateur est annulée pour le fichier.
• Lorsque le contenu de la mémoire interne est copié sur une
carte mémoire SD, la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur
définie pour les fichiers de la mémoire interne est annulée.
• Si la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur est activée pour un
fichier de carte mémoire SD, le dossier [CLIPINFO] et le fichier
CLIP.CLI sont créés sur la carte mémoire SD. S’ils sont supprimés,
la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur est annulée pour les
fichiers correspondants.
• Si le nom d’un fichier est modifié à l’aide d’un ordinateur, il
est possible que la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur ne
puisse être activée pour le fichier.
• La fonction Réglage fonction indicateur peut uniquement
être sélectionnée pour les photos prises à l’aide de cet appareil.
Affichage photos marquées
Pour afficher les photos pour lesquelles la fonction
Réglage fonction indicateur est activée, sélectionnez
Affichage photos marquées dans le menu lecture.
Remarques
• Le fichier pour lequel la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur
est activée qui dispose du plus petit numéro de fichier est
affiché.0
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
• Appuyez sur le déclencheur ou sur la touche 6 pour activer le
mode prise de vue.
• Si la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur n’est sélectionnée
pour aucun fichier, un message s’affiche et le menu lecture
réapparaît.
• Si la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur est activée pour
plusieurs fichiers, appuyez sur la touche N pour afficher le
fichier avec le plus petit numéro de fichier.
• Lorsqu’un fichier pour lequel la fonction Réglage fonction
indicateur est activée est affiché en plein écran, appuyez sur
les touches +, –, Fn ou Fn2 pour passer à l’image précédente ou
suivante.
Changer de taille
Pour créer une petite copie d’une photo, sélectionnez
Changer de taille dans le menu lecture (page 101) et
choisissez une taille. Les photos prises au format L, M,
M ou M (page 61) peuvent être copiées au format M
ou VGA et les photos prises au format M peuvent être
copiées au format VGA. Il est impossible de changer la
taille des vidéos et des photos de qualité RAW.
Remarques
• Les images sont copiées selon un rapport d’affichage de 4 : 3.
Si le rapport d’affichage de la photo originale est de 16 : 9, 3 : 2,
ou 1 : 1, les côtés gauche et droit ou les parties supérieure et
inférieure des images sont rognés et affichés avec une bordure
noire à l’écran.
• Consultez la page 61 pour en savoir plus sur le choix de la taille
des photos pendant la prise de vue.0
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
Découper
Procédez comme suit pour découper une photo et
l’enregistrer dans un fichier distinct.
1Affichez une photo.
Affichez la photo à copier en mode lecture et
appuyez sur C/D.
2
Sélectionner Découper.
Appuyez sur C/D pour afficher le menu
lecture, sélectionnez Découper, puis appuyez sur Fn2.
Pour annuler le rognage, appuyez sur la touche DISP..
3Découpez la photo.
Définissez la taille du cadre de découpage avec
la touche z ou Z et la position du cadre de
découpage avec le pavé directionnel (page 37), puis
appuyez sur C/D.
Attention
• Seules les photos prises avec cet appareil peuvent être rognées.
• Les vidéos et les fichiers MP ne peuvent être rognés.
• Pour les images RAW (page 61), la fonction de rognage
s’applique uniquement à la copie JPEG.
• Les photos peuvent être rognées à plusieurs reprises. La qualité
de l’image se dégrade cependant à chaque recompression.
Remarques
• Lors du rognage d’une image, le taux de compression devient
Fin. Pour les images d’autres tailles, le taux de compression est
identique à l’image d’origine.
• Les réglages disponibles pour la taille du cadre de découpage
varient en fonction de la taille de l’image d’origine. À chaque
fois que vous appuyez sur la touche z, la taille du cadre de
découpage diminue d’un niveau (13 niveaux maximum).0
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
• La taille de l’image découpée varie en fonction de la taille
d’origine de l’image et du niveau de rognage (taille du cadre de
découpage).
Compensation de niveau
Cette option crée des copies traitées pour régler la
luminosité et le contraste. Corrigez automatiquement
la luminosité et le contraste ou procédez à des
ajustements manuels à l’aide d’un histogramme.
Auto :correction de niveau automatique
1Affichez une photo.
Affichez la photo à copier en mode lecture.
2
Sélectionnez Compensation de niveau.
Appuyez sur C/D
pour afficher le menu lecture,
sélectionnez Compensation
de niveau et appuyez sur Fn2.
3
Sélectionner Auto.
Sélectionnez Auto et
appuyez sur Fn2. Si l’appareil
photo est capable de créer
une copie, un aperçu s’affiche
avec l’image originale
affichée dans l’angle
supérieur gauche et la copie corrigée à droite. Si
l’appareil n’est pas capable de créer une copie, un
message d’erreur s’affiche et l’appareil quitte le
menu lecture.0
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
4 Copiez l’image.
Appuyez sur C/D. Pour quitter sans créer
de copie, appuyez sur la touche DISP.. Un message
s’affiche pendant que l’appareil copie la photo.
Manuel :correction de niveaumanuelle
Affichez la photo à copier et sélectionnez l’option
Manuel pour le paramètre Compensation de niveau
dans le menu lecture pour afficher un aperçu comme
indiqué à la page précédente, puis procédez comme suit.
1
Sélectionnez le point noir, le point blanc ou le
point médian.
L’aperçu manuel contient
un histogramme montrant
comment les pixels sont
distribués sur l’image en
fonction de la luminosité,
avec les pixels sombres sur
la gauche et les pixels clairs
sur la droite. Appuyez sur la
manette ADJ. pour faire défiler
le point noir, le point médian et le point blanc,
puis appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour placer le point
sélectionné avec une luminosité et un contraste
améliorés, comme décrit à la page suivante. Pour
obtenir de l’aide, appuyez sur la touche N ; appuyez
de nouveau sur cette touche pour revenir à l’aperçu.
2 Copiez l’image.
Appuyez sur C/D. Pour quitter sans créer
de copie, appuyez sur la touche DISP.. Un message
s’affiche pendant que l’appareil copie la photo.
De gauche à
droite : point noir,
point médian,
point blanc
De gauche à
droite : point noir,
point médian,
point blanc0
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
Conseil :choix du point noir, du point blancet du pointmédian
• Réglage de la luminosité : pour éclaircir
l’image, déplacez le point médian
vers la gauche. Pour assombrir
l’image, déplacez le point médian
vers la droite.
• Correction de l’exposition : si l’image
est surexposée, déplacez le point
noir vers la droite jusqu’à ce qu’il soit
aligné avec le pixel le plus sombre
de l’histogramme (voir à droite). Si
l’image est sous-exposée, déplacez
le point blanc vers la gauche jusqu’à
ce qu’il soit aligné avec le pixel le
plus clair. Vous pouvez alors déplacer
le point médian vers la droite ou la
gauche pour ajuster la luminosité.
Correction de la
surexposition
• Augmentation du contraste : pour
augmenter le contraste, alignez le
point noir sur le pixel le plus sombre
et le point blanc sur le pixel le plus
clair, comme illustré à droite. Vous
pouvez alors déplacer le point
médian vers la droite ou la gauche
pour ajuster la luminosité.
Attention
• La compensation de niveau est disponible uniquement pour les
photos prises avec cet appareil. Elle n’est pas disponible avec les
vidéos ou les photos enregistrées/prises à l’aide de Cont.M +.
Le résultat souhaité peut ne pas être obtenu avec des photos
monochromes.
• La compensation de niveau peut être appliquée à plusieurs
reprises. La qualité de l’image se dégrade cependant à chaque
recompression.09
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
Compensation balance blancs
Cette option crée des copies dont la balance des blancs
a été modifiée.
1Affichez une photo.
Affichez la photo à copier en mode lecture.
2
Sélectionnez Compensation balance blancs.
Appuyez sur C/D
pour afficher le menu lecture,
sélectionnez Compensation
balance blancs et appuyez
sur Fn2.
3
Réglez la balance des blancs.
Sélectionnez la
compensation de la balance
des blancs à l’aide du pavé
directionnel (page 37).
Appuyez sur la touche DISP.
pour rétablir une valeur de
compensation de la balance
des blancs neutre.
4Appuyez sur C/D.
Appuyez sur C/D pour copier l’image (pour
quitter sans créer de copie, appuyez deux fois sur
DISP.). Un message s’affiche pendant que l’appareil
copie la photo.0
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
Attention
• La compensation de la balance des blancs est disponible
uniquement pour les photos prises avec cet appareil. Elle n’est
pas disponible avec les vidéos ou les photos enregistrées/prises
à l’aide de Cont.M +. Le résultat souhaité peut ne pas être
obtenu avec des photos monochromes.
• La compensation de la balance des blancs peut être appliquée
à plusieurs reprises. La qualité de l’image se dégrade cependant
à chaque recompression.
Correction biais
Cette option permet de créer des copies traitées
pour réduire les effets de perspective des objets
rectangulaires, comme des tableaux d’affichage ou des
cartes de visite.
1Affichez une photo.
Affichez la photo à copier en mode lecture.
2
Sélectionnez Correction biais.
Appuyez sur C/D
pour afficher le menu lecture,
sélectionnez Correction
biais et appuyez sur Fn2. Si
l’appareil photo est capable
de détecter un objet auquel
la correction de perspective peut être appliquée,
un message s’affiche et l’objet concerné est marqué
d’un cadre jaune. L’appareil peut détecter jusqu’à
cinq objets ; pour sélectionner un objet différent,
appuyez sur Fn2, pour quitter sans aucune correction
de perspective, appuyez sur +. Si l’appareil est
incapable de détecter un objet approprié, un
message d’erreur s’affiche.
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
3Appuyez sur C/D.
Un message s’affiche pendant que l’appareil copie
la photo. La copie prend de 2 à 46 secondes, en
fonction de la taille d’image.
Attention
La correction des biais est disponible uniquement pour les
photos prises avec cet appareil. Elle n’est pas disponible avec les
vidéos ou les photos enregistrées/prises à l’aide de Cont.M +.
Pour les images RAW (page 61), la correction des biais s’applique
uniquement à la copie JPEG.
Remarques
• La copie est de la même taille que l’original. Plus la taille des images
est importante, plus la création de la copie prend du temps :
Taille
Durée
(approximative)
Taille
Durée
(approximative)
L 24s 3M 8s
M 18s 1M 5s
5M 12s VGA 2s
Pour réduire la durée de traitement nécessaire, créez une petite
copie de l’original en utilisant Changer de taille (page 104) et
exécutez la correction des biais sur la copie.
• La durée nécessaire pour la correction des biais varie en
fonction de l’unité appareil photo.
• La correction des biais peut être également appliquée pendant
la prise de vue (page 56).
Diaporama
Cette option permet de démarrer un diaporama
automatique. Les photos s’affichent dans l’ordre
d’enregistrement avec un intervalle de trois secondes.
Lors de la visualisation d’une vidéo, la lecture démarre
automatiquement.
Le diaporama se répète en boucle ; appuyez sur
n’importe quelle touche pour l’arrêter.2
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
Protéger
Cette option protège les
photos contre une suppression
accidentelle. Les fichiers protégés
sont marqués d’une icône
illustrée à droite.
4:3 N
Attention
Le formatage efface tous les fichiers, y compris les fichiers
protégés.
Protection des photosindividuelles
Pour protéger ou supprimer
la protection des fichiers
individuels, affichez la photo,
sélectionnez Protéger dans le
menu lecture, et appuyez sur Fn2
pour afficher les options illustrées
à droite (si l’image affichée n’est
pas la bonne, appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour afficher les
Cautres photos). Sélectionnez 1 fichier et appuyez sur
/D.
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
Modification del’état de protection de plusieurs fichiers
Procédez comme suit pour modifier l’état de protection
de plusieurs fichiers sélectionnés.
1
Sélectionnez Protéger dans le menu lecture, puis
appuyez sur Fn2.
Dans une vue multi-images,
passez à l’étape 2. Dans une
vue une image, les options
illustrées à droite s’affichent.
Sélectionnez Sél mult et
appuyez sur C/D.
2
Sélectionnez Sél. indiv. ou Sél. série.
Sélectionnez Protéger dans
le menu lecture, et appuyez
sur Fn2 pour afficher les
options illustrées à droite.
Pour sélectionner les images
une par une, sélectionnez Sél.
indiv., appuyez sur C/D et passez à l’étape
3. Pour sélectionner les images en définissant des
plages, sélectionnez Sel. série, appuyez sur C/
D et passez à l’étape 3.1.
3
Sélectionnez une photo.
Utilisez le pavé directionnel
(page 37) pour sélectionner
des photos, puis appuyez
sur C/D. Les photos
protégées sont marquées par
une icône . Pour supprimer
la protection d’une photo, sélectionnez-la et
appuyez de nouveau sur C/D.
4:3 N 4:3 N
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
Conseil :sélection deséries
Pour basculer entre les paramètres Sél. indiv. et Sél. série,
appuyez sur la manette ADJ. et procédez comme suit :
3.1 Utilisez le pavé directionnel
pour sélectionner la première
image de la série, puis
appuyez sur C/D pour
confirmer. L’image sélectionnée
est marquée par une icône.
Pour désélectionner l’image,
appuyez sur la touche DISP..
4:3 N
3.2 Utilisez le pavé directionnel
pour sélectionner la dernière
Cimage, puis appuyez sur
/D pour confirmer.
Les images sélectionnées sont
marquées d’une icône .
4:3 N
Répétez les étapes 3.1-3.2 pour sélectionner des séries
supplémentaires ou appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour
sélectionner ou désélectionner des photos individuelles,
comme indiqué à l’étape 3.
4Appuyez sur la touche N.
Un message s’affiche pendant que l’appareil photo
protège les fichiers sélectionnés. L’appareil revient
ensuite à la lecture normale.
Protection ou suppression dela protection detousles fichiers
Pour protéger tous les fichiers,
sélectionnez Protéger, puis
appuyez sur Fn2. Sélectionnez
CSélect. tout et appuyez sur
/D. Pour supprimer la
protection de tous les fichiers,
sélectionnez Annuler tout et appuyez sur C/D.
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
Copier sur carte depuis mémoire interne
Pour copier tous les fichiers de la mémoire interne sur
une carte mémoire, insérez la carte mémoire dans le
boîtier de l’appareil photo et sélectionnez Copier sur
carte depuis mémoire interne dans le menu lecture. Un
message s’affiche pendant le déroulement de la copie ;
l’appareil revient ensuite à la lecture lorsque la copie est
terminée.
Remarques
• Si l’espace disponible sur la carte mémoire est insuffisant pour
copier tous les fichiers de la mémoire interne, un message
s’affiche. Pour copier uniquement les fichiers correspondant à
l’espace disponible, sélectionnez Oui et appuyez sur C/
D; pour quitter sans copier aucun fichier, sélectionnez Non.
• Il est impossible de copier les fichiers de la carte mémoire dans
la mémoire interne.
DPOF
Pour commander des tirages professionnels de photos
sur une carte mémoire, utilisez cette option pour créer
un « bon à tirer » numérique listant les photos à tirer et le
nombre de tirages, puis déposez la carte mémoire dans un
centre de service de tirage numérique prenant en charge
la norme DPOF.
Remarque
Si un fichier RAW est sélectionné pour l’impression, seule la copie
JPEG sera imprimée.
Conseil : DPOF
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) est une norme utilisée pour
définir les photos à tirer et le nombre de tirages. Les photos
sélectionnées pour le tirage sont marquées d’un indicateur de
tirage DPOF (page 9).
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
Sélection des photosindividuelles à tirer
Pour ajouter ou supprimer une
photo du bon à tirer, affichez la
photo, sélectionnez DPOF dans
le menu lecture, puis appuyez
sur Fn2 pour afficher les options
illustrées à droite (si l’image
affichée n’est pas la bonne, appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour
afficher les autres photos). Sélectionnez 1 fichier et
appuyez sur C/D.
Sélection detoutesles photos à tirer
Pour sélectionner toutes les
photos à tirer, sélectionnez DPOF,
appuyez sur Fn2, sélectionnez
CSélect. tout, puis appuyez sur
/D. Pour supprimer
toutes les photos du bon à tirer,
sélectionnez Annuler tout et appuyez sur C/D.
Sélection de plusieurs photos à tirer
Pour sélectionner plusieurs photos à tirer :
1
Sélectionnez DPOF.
Appuyez sur C/D
dans une vue multi-images
pour afficher le menu lecture.
Sélectionnez DPOF et
appuyez sur Fn2.
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
2
Sélectionnez les photos et choisissez le nombre de
tirages.
Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner des
photos supplémentaires et sur + ou Fn2 pour choisir
le nombre de copies. Pour supprimer une photo
du bon à tirer, appuyez sur – jusqu’à ce que zéro
s’affiche.
3Appuyez sur C/D.
Un message s’affiche pendant que l’appareil crée le
bon à tirer. L’appareil revient ensuite à la vue multiimages.
Restaurer fichier
Pour restaurer tous les fichiers supprimés, sélectionnez
Restaurer fichier dans le menu lecture, puis appuyez sur
Fn2. Un message de confirmation s’affiche. Sélectionnez
Oui, puis appuyez sur C/D.
Remarque
Un message s’affiche s’il n’y a aucun fichier à restaurer.
Attention
Les fichiers ne peuvent être restaurés après l’exécution d’une des
opérations suivantes.
• Mise hors tension de l’appareil
• Basculement du mode lecture vers le mode prise de vue
• Utilisation de la fonction DPOF, Changer de taille, Copier sur
carte depuis mémoire interne, Correction biais, Compensation
de niveau, Compensation balance blancs ou Découper.
• Suppression de fichiers avec des réglages DPOF
• Initialisation de la mémoire interne ou de la carte mémoire SD
• Réglage ou annulation des fichiers pour la fonction Réglage
fonction indicateur
• Exportation de fichiers MP à l’aide de la fonction Exporter photos
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
Visualisation des photos sur un téléviseur
Pour visualiser les photos sur un téléviseur, raccordez le
boîtier de l’appareil photo à l’aide du câble A/V fourni.
1Mettez l’appareil hors tension.
Assurez-vous que l’appareil est hors tension avant
de brancher ou débrancher le câble A/V.
2
Raccordez le câble A/V au téléviseur.
Insérez la fiche blanche
dans le connecteur d’entrée
audio et la fiche jaune dans
le connecteur d’entrée vidéo.
Assurez-vous que les fiches
sont fermement insérées.
N’utilisez pas la force.
Entrée vidéo (jaune)
Entrée audio (blanc)
3
Raccordez le boîtier de l’appareil photo.
Ouvrez le couvercle du
connecteur et branchez le
câble dans le connecteur du
câble A/V. N’utilisez pas la force.
4
Réglez le téléviseur sur le
canal vidéo.
Sélectionnez l’entrée vidéo. Consultez le manuel du
téléviseur pour en savoir plus.
5Mettez le boîtier de l’appareil photo sous tension.
Appuyez sur la touche 6 pendant environ une
seconde pour mettre l’appareil sous tension en mode
lecture. L’écran d’affichage des photos et le hautparleur du boîtier de l’appareil photo s’éteignent, puis
les photos et les vidéos s’affichent sur le téléviseur.9
MenU des réglages de la lectUre
Attention
N’utilisez pas la force ou ne tirez pas sur le câble A/V lorsque
vous manipulez le boîtier de l’appareil photo avec le câble A/V
branché.
Remarques
• Le boîtier de l’appareil photo peut être raccordé au connecteur
d’entrée vidéo d’un enregistreur vidéo et les photos peuvent
être enregistrées en vidéo ou sur DVD.
• Le boîtier de l’appareil photo doit être raccordé aux téléviseurs
qui prennent en charge le format HDMI à l’aide d’un câble mini
HDMI (vendu séparément). Consultez la documentation fournie
avec le téléviseur pour en savoir plus.
• Si vous branchez ou débranchez le câble mini HDMI, l’écran
passe à la vue d’une seule photo. Lorsque le menu est affiché,
l’écran ne passe pas à la vue d’une seule photo même si vous
branchez ou débranchez le câble mini HDMI.
• Lorsque vous branchez le boîtier de l’appareil photo à
un téléviseur à l’aide d’un câble mini HDMI, les sons de
fonctionnement sont désactivés.
• Le boîtier de l’appareil prend en charge les normes vidéo
suivantes : NTSC (utilisée en Amérique du Nord, aux Caraïbes,
dans une partie de l’Amérique du Sud et dans certains pays
d’Asie du Sud-est) et PAL (utilisée au Royaume-Uni et dans la
plupart des pays d’Europe, en Australie, en Nouvelle-Zélande et
dans une partie de l’Asie et de l’Afrique). La norme SECAM n’est
pas prise en charge. Si possible, l’appareil est réglé sur la norme
utilisée dans votre pays ou votre région au départ de l’usine ;
avant de raccorder l’appareil à un dispositif utilisant une norme
vidéo différente, choisissez le mode vidéo approprié (page 149).20
MP i ression de Photos
Impression de photos
Le boîtier de l’appareil photo peut être raccordé à
une imprimante via le câble USB fourni, et les photos
peuvent être directement imprimées à partir du boîtier
de l’appareil photo sans utiliser d’ordinateur.
Attention
Une vidéo ne peut pas être imprimée. Si un fichier RAW est
sélectionné pour l’impression, seule la copie JPEG sera imprimée.
Remarque
Le boîtier de l’appareil photo est conforme à PictBridge, une
norme largement utilisée pour l’impression directe, et seules des
imprimantes compatibles PictBridge peuvent être utilisées pour
l’impression directe. Consultez la documentation fournie avec
votre imprimante pour savoir si la norme PictBridge est prise en
charge.
Raccordement du boîtier de l’appareil photo
Raccordez l’imprimante à l’alimentation électrique à
l’aide du câble USB fourni.
1Mettez l’appareil hors tension.
Assurez-vous que l’appareil est hors tension avant
de brancher ou débrancher le câble USB.
2
Raccordez le câble USB à l’imprimante.
Raccordez le câble USB à l’imprimante et mettez
l’imprimante sous tension.2
MP i ression de Photos
3
Raccordez le boîtier de l’appareil photo.
Ouvrez le couvercle du
connecteur et branchez le
câble dans le connecteur du
câble USB.
Appuyez sur la manette
ADJ.. L’appareil s’allume et
le message illustré à droite
s’affiche ; appuyez alors une
nouvelle fois sur la manette
ADJ..
Remarque
Si vous n’appuyez pas sur la manette ADJ. pendant l’affichage
du message ci-dessus, celui-ci peut dans certains cas être
remplacé après deux secondes par un message indiquant
que l’appareil est raccordé à un ordinateur. Mettez l’appareil
hors tension et appuyez de nouveau sur la manette ADJ..
Le message est remplacé par l’écran de lecture
PictBridge (si l’écran de lecture PictBridge ne
s’affiche pas, c’est que l’appareil est en train d’établir
la connexion avec l’imprimante).
Attention
N’utilisez pas la force ou ne tirez pas sur le câble USB lorsque vous
manipulez le boîtier de l’appareil photo avec le câble branché.22
MP i ression de Photos
Impression
Les photos peuvent être imprimées une par une, ou
plusieurs photos peuvent être sélectionnées pour
l’impression. Si une carte mémoire est insérée, les
photos seront imprimées à partir de la carte mémoire ;
dans le cas contraire, les photos seront imprimées à
partir de la mémoire interne.
Attention
Ne débranchez pas le câble USB pendant l’impression.
Remarque
Si une erreur s’affiche pendant l’impression, vérifiez l’imprimante
et agissez en conséquence.
Impression des photos une par une
Pour imprimer une photo sélectionnée :
1
Sélectionnez une photo.
Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2
jusqu’à ce que la photo
souhaitée s’affiche sur l’écran
de lecture PictBridge, puis
appuyez sur la manette ADJ..
Le menu illustré à droite
Cs’affiche, sélectionnez 1 fichier et appuyez sur
/D.
Conseil : impression d’unecopie detoutesles photos
Pour imprimer une copie de toutes les photos, appuyez sur
la manette ADJ. pour afficher les options illustrées ci-dessus
et sélectionnez Ts fich..2
MP i ression de Photos
2
Réglez les paramètres d’impression.
Le menu illustré à droite
s’affiche ; sélectionnez une
rubrique et appuyez sur Fn2
pour afficher les options
disponibles ou choisissez
Sélec imprim pour utiliser
les réglages par défaut de l’imprimante actuelle
(les options disponibles varient selon le type
d’imprimante ; il est impossible de sélectionner des
rubriques non prises en charge par l’imprimante
connectée). Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner
une option et appuyez sur C/D pour
confirmer et revenir au menu impression directe.
Paramètre Description
Format papier Choisissez un format de papier.
Type de papier Choisissez un type de papier.
Type d’impr. Choisissez le nombre d’images par page.
Impression date
Ce paramètre permet d’inclure la date et l’heure
d’enregistrement. Consultez la pages 20 et 149 pour
en savoir plus sur la sélection du format d’affichage
de la date et de l’heure. Si la photo a été prise
avec l’option Horodatage (page 84), seule la date
horodatée sera imprimée.
Nom du fichier Ce paramètre permet d’inclure le nom du fichier.
Optimisation
image
Choisissez si l’imprimante doit optimiser ou non les
données de la photo.
Taille impr. Choisissez la taille d’impression.
Qlté impr. Choisissez la qualité d’impression.
Impr. rapport
*
Ce paramètre permet d’imprimer un rapport.
Nombre de copies Choisissez le nombre de copies imprimées.
Économie d’encre
*
Ce paramètre permet d’utiliser moins de toner
pendant l’impression.
1 face/2 faces
*
Ce paramètre permet d’imprimer ou non sur les deux
faces du papier.
* Imprimantes Ricoh uniquement. Consultez http://www.ricoh.com/
pour en savoir plus.2
MP i ression de Photos
Remarque
Pour configurer l’option
sélectionnée comme paramètre
par défaut pour l’imprimante
actuelle lorsque le boîtier de
l’appareil photo est connecté,
appuyez sur la manette ADJ.. Le
menu illustré à droite s’affiche ; sélectionnez Oui et appuyez
sur C/D. Sélectionnez Non pour quitter sans
modifier le paramètre par défaut.
3Démarrez l’impression.
CPour démarrer l’impression, appuyez sur
/D lorsque le menu impression directe
illustré à l’étape 2 s’affiche. Un message s’affiche
pendant l’impression ; pour quitter avant la fin de
l’impression, appuyez sur la touche DISP.. L’écran de
lecture PictBridge s’affiche lorsque l’impression est
terminée.2
MP i ression de Photos
Impression de plusieurs photos
Pour imprimer plusieurs photos :
1Appuyez sur la touche Z.
Les photos s’affichent dans
une vue multi-images.
2
Sélectionnez une photo.
Sélectionnez une photo et
appuyez sur C/D.
3 Choisissez le nombre de copies.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour
choisir le nombre de copies.
Les photos sélectionnées
sont marquées d’une icône
; pour désélectionner une
photo, appuyez sur – jusqu’à
ce que zéro s’affiche.
4
Sélectionnez des photos supplémentaires.
Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner des
photos supplémentaires et sur + ou – pour choisir le
nombre de copies.
5
Réglez les paramètres d’impression.
Appuyez sur C/D pour afficher le menu
impression directe. Réglez les paramètres comme
indiqué à la page 123.
6Démarrez l’impression.
Pour démarrer l’impression, appuyez sur C/
D lorsque le menu impression directe s’affiche.
Un message s’affiche pendant l’impression ; pour
quitter avant la fin de l’impression, appuyez sur la
touche DISP.. L’écran de lecture PictBridge s’affiche
lorsque l’impression est terminée.
4:3 N 2
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Réglages de l’appareil
Vous pouvez accéder aux menus permettant de modifier
les réglages de l’appareil photo à partir des menus prise
de vue et lecture (pages 58 et 101).
1Affichez les menus.
Appuyez sur C/D pour afficher le menu du
mode actuel (page 58) (en mode scène, l’onglet
MODE s’affiche).
2
Sélectionnez un onglet.
Appuyez sur Fn pour
sélectionner l’onglet du menu
actuel et appuyez sur + ou
– pour sélectionner l’onglet
des options personnalisées
(page 127) ou l’onglet de
configuration (page 128).
Appuyez sur Fn2 pour placer
le curseur sur l’onglet
sélectionné.
1
2
1Onglet des options
personnalisées
2Onglet de
configuration
3
Sélectionnez une rubrique de menu.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour
sélectionner une rubrique
du menu et appuyez sur Fn2
pour afficher les options de la
rubrique sélectionnée.
4
Sélectionnez une option.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une option
et appuyez sur C/D pour confirmer et
quitter (la procédure peut être différente pour
certaines rubriques ; consultez la page de la rubrique
concernée).2
réglages de l a’ PPareil
L’onglet des options personnalisées contient les options
suivantes :
Option Défaut Page
Enr. Mes Réglages — 129
Récupération de Mes
Réglages
— 131
Éditer Mes Réglages — 132
Fonct. réglage Mon
réglage
Non 133
Comp. BB de Mes
Réglages
Non 133
Manette ADJ
Réglage
Balanceblancs 134
Manette ADJ
Réglage 2
ISO 134
Manette ADJ
Réglage
Qualité 134
Manette ADJ
Réglage
Réglages image 134
Option Défaut Page
Déclencheur ADJ Non 135
Rég. touche Fn AF/MF 136
Rég. touche Fn2 Flash manuel 136
Réglages bouton
+/–
Comp.expo. 137
Options du sélecteur
de mode lecture
Réglage1 138
Options sélecteur de
mode M
Réglage1 138
Mode M par seule
pression
Prioroverture 1382
réglages de l a’ PPareil
L’onglet de configuration contient les options suivantes :
Option Défaut Page
Format [Carte] — 139
Format [Mémoire
interne]
— 139
Luminosité LCD — 139
Transparence écran
DIRECT
Normale 140
Pas de corr. expo/flash 1/3EV 140
Sensibilité ISO auto-hi AUTO 400 140
Flash auxiliaire AF Oui 140
Mode veille 5?Minuten 141
Extinction auto 5?Minuten 141
Écran de lecture LCD 141
Attén. luminosité
auto LCD
Oui 142
Délai de validation LCD 0,5?secondes 142
Sons touches Tous 142
Réglages volume
(moyenne)
142
Zoom par seule
pression
9,8?× 143
Rotation auto Oui 143
Distance min de prise
de vue
Afficher 144
Option Défaut Page
Réglage niveau Affichage 144
Options affichage du
cadrage
144
Affichage touche Fn Oui 145
Afficher nom de Mon
Réglage
Non 145
Affichage infos prise
de vue
Non 145
CL-BKT Noir et Blanc (TE) Oui 146
Réglage espace
couleurs
sRVB 146
Image zoom
numérique
Normale 147
Mémo position curseur
menu
Non 147
N° séquentiel de la carte Oui 148
Réglage date — 149
Language/L (Variable
*
) 149
Sortie vidéo (Variable
*
) 149
Sortie HMDI AUTO 149
Lancer extraction
réglages
Boîtier 150
* Variableselon lepaysoularégion d’achat.
Attention
• Il est possible que les options affichées au niveau des onglets
des options personnalisées et de configuration varient en
fonction de l’unité appareil photo.
• Il est possible que les options affichées au niveau des onglets
des options personnalisées et de configuration varient selon si
l’unité appareil photo est installée ou non sur le boîtier.29
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Options personnalisées
Enr. Mes Réglages
Les réglages enregistrés via Enr. Mes Réglages peuvent
être rappelés en positionnant le sélecteur de mode sur
MY, MY2 ou MY, vous permettant de créer facilement et
de rappeler jusqu’à six jeux pour les réglages de prise de
vue fréquemment utilisés.
1Ajustez les réglages.
Configurez l’appareil photo avec les réglages
souhaités. Ci-après sont indiqués certains réglages
pouvant être enregistrés dans les réglages MY :
• Réglages de l’appareil : Mode prise de vue (mode
5, P, A, S, M ou 4), position du zoom
(mode 4), ouverture (modes A et M), vitesse
d’obturation (modes S et M), modes mise au point
manuelle, macro, flash, retardateur et affichage.
• Options du menu prise de vue : toutes les options à
l’exception des options Prise de vue à intervalles,
Décalage ouverture auto et Changement de
mode prise de vue. La compensation de la
balance des blancs peut être attribuée si le réglage
Comp. BB de Mes Réglages est activé (page 133).
• Options de configuration : Rég. touche Fn/Rég. touche
Fn2 (si l’option Fonct. réglage Mon réglage est activée ;
voir page 133), Reglages bouton +/-, Sensibilite ISO
auto-hi, Pas de corr. expo/ flash, Distance min de
prise de vue, Reglage niveau, Options affichage du
cadrage, Affichage infos prise de vue, CL-BKT Noir et
Blanc (TE) et Image zoom numerique.
Remarque
Les réglages pouvant être enregistrés dans les réglages MY varient
en fonction de l’unité appareil photo. Consultez la documentation
fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus.0
réglages de l a’ PPareil
2
Sélectionnez Enr. Mes Réglages.
Sélectionnez Enr. Mes
Réglages au niveau
de l’onglet des options
personnalisées, puis appuyez
sur Fn2.
3
Enregistrez les réglages.
Pour attribuer les réglages
aux fonctions MY, MY2 et
MY du sélecteur de mode,
sélectionnez MY1, MY2
Cou MY3 et appuyez sur
/D (pour quitter
sans enregistrer les réglages,
appuyez sur la touche DISP.).
Pour enregistrer les réglages
dans une « boîte » à rappeler
et à assigner ultérieurement
au sélecteur de mode (page
131), sélectionnez Boîte
Mes Réglages et appuyez
sur Fn2. Sélectionnez la boîte
Csouhaitée et appuyez sur
/D.
Les boîtes sans nom seront
nommées avec la date du
jour. Si un nom a déjà été
assigné à la boîte, la boîte
de dialogue illustrée à droite
s’affiche. Sélectionnez Oui
pour utiliser le nom actuel
et Non pour utiliser un nom
basé sur la date du jour.
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Récupération de Mes Réglages
Copiez les réglages d’une « boîte » vers MY, MY2 ou MY.
Sélectionnez Récupération de Mes Réglages dans
l’onglet des options personnalisées, appuyez sur Fn2,
puis procédez comme suit.
1
Sélectionnez une destination.
Sélectionnez la destination
des réglages mémorisés
(MY1, MY2 ou MY3) et
appuyez sur Fn2.
2
Sélectionnez la source.
Sélectionnez les réglages qui
seront attribués à la position
choisie sur le sélecteur de
mode et appuyez sur C/
D.
Pour quitter sans assigner les réglages au sélecteur
de mode, appuyez sur la touche DISP..
Attention
Si Éditer Mes Réglages est utilisé pour modifier les boîtes
actuellement assignées au sélecteur de mode, les modifications
seront prises en compte lorsque le sélecteur de mode sera
positionné sur la position assignée à la boîte concernée. Les
modifications apportées aux réglages directement assignés à
MY, MY2 ou MY ne sont cependant pas prises en compte dans
les boîtes actuellement assignées au sélecteur de mode, et si les
boîtes sont modifiées par la suite, ces modifications ne seront pas
prises en compte dans les réglages assignés à MY, MY2 ou MY.2
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Éditer Mes Réglages
Modifiez et renommez les réglages enregistrés avec Enr.
Mes Réglages.
Sélectionnez Éditer Mes Réglages dans l’onglet des
options personnalisées, appuyez sur Fn2, puis procédez
comme suit.
1
Sélectionnez un réglage.
Pour assigner les réglages
à MY, MY2 ou MY sur
le sélecteur de mode,
sélectionnez MY1, MY2 ou
MY3 et appuyez sur Fn2.
Pour modifier les réglages
d’une « boîte », sélectionnez
Boîte Mes Réglages et
appuyez sur Fn2. Sélectionnez
la boîte souhaitée et appuyez
sur Fn2.
2Modifiez les réglages.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour
sélectionner les rubriques
et appuyez sur Fn2 pour les
modifier (consultez la section
de chaque rubrique dans ce
manuel pour en savoir plus).
Après avoir modifié chaque
rubrique, appuyez sur Fn pour revenir à la liste des
réglages, où vous pouvez modifier d’autres réglages.
3
Enregistrez les modifications et quittez.
Appuyez sur C/D pour enregistrer les
modifications et quitter (pour quitter sans enregistrer
les modifications, appuyez sur la touche DISP.).
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Conseil : nommerMes Réglages
Sélectionnez Nom à l’étape 2 pour
renommer le réglage. Le nom actuel
est sélectionné dans la zone du nom ;
pour modifier le nom actuel, appuyez
sur Fn ou Fn2 pour positionner le
curseur dans la zone du nom et
appuyez sur – pour placer le curseur
dans la zone du clavier (pour supprimer
le nom actuel, appuyez sur – lorsque
le nom est sélectionné). Sélectionnez les caractères à l’aide de +,
–, Fn ou Fn2 et appuyez sur C/D pour saisir le caractère
sélectionné à la position actuelle du curseur (pour supprimer
le caractère avant la position actuelle du curseur, sélectionnez
[Suppr.]). Appuyez sur la touche t pour basculer entre
majuscules et minuscules. Les noms peuvent avoir jusqu’à 32
caractères de long. Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour quitter ou
sur la touche DISP. pour quitter sans renommer les réglages.
Fonct. réglage Mon réglage
Sélectionnez Oui pour enregistrer les réglages attribués
aux touches Fn (page 136) dans les réglages MY
enregistrés sous Enr. Mes Réglages.
Comp. BB de Mes Réglages
Sélectionnez Oui pour enregistrer le réglage de
compensation de la balance des blancs (page 89) dans
les réglages MY enregistrés sous Enr. Mes Réglages.
Zone du nom
Zone du clavier Zone du clavier
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Manette ADJ Réglage
Assignez jusqu’à quatre options fréquemment utilisées
à la manette ADJ. pour un accès rapide en mode 5, P, A,
S ou M. Par défaut, la manette ADJ. peut être utilisée pour
la balance des blancs (page 86), la sensibilité ISO (page
90), la qualité d’image (page 61) et le réglage des images
(page 71). Les fonctions suivantes peuvent également
être attribuées : compensation de la balance des blancs
(page 89), mise au point (page 64), mesure (page 70),
continu (page 73), cadrage (page 75), compensation
du flash (page 78), niveau de flash manuel (page 79) et
correction de l’exposition (page 85).
En mode 4, la manette ADJ. peut être utilisée pour
sélectionner la balance des blancs et la compensation
de l’exposition (la compensation de l’exposition n’est pas
disponible en mode vidéo).
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Utilisation delamanette ADJ.
Pour sélectionner une option actuellement assignée à la
manette ADJ. :
1Affichez les options.
Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. en mode prise de vue
et appuyez sur la manette vers la gauche ou vers
la droite ou appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour afficher les
options attribuées à la manette.
Réglage 1 Réglage 2
Réglage 4 Réglage 3
2
Sélectionnez une option.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une option et
appuyez sur la manette ADJ. ou sur C/D.
Conseil
Maintenez la manette ADJ. enfoncée pour faire défiler rapidement
les options disponibles.
Déclencheur ADJ
Sélectionnez Oui pour utiliser le déclencheur afin de
valider l’option sélectionnée en mode ADJ..
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Rég. touche Fn1/Fn2
Sélectionnez les fonctions
attribuées aux touches Fn et Fn2
avec les options Rég. touche
Fn1/Fn2 de l’onglet des options
personnalisées.
Ci-après sont indiquées certaines des fonctions pouvant
être attribuées aux touches Fn et Fn2.
Option Description
AF/MF
Cette option permet de basculer entre AF multi ou AF spot et
la mise au point manuelle (page 64). *
1, 3
AF/Snap
Cette option permet de basculer entre AF multi ou AF spot et
la mise au point snap (page 64). *
4
Verrouill. AE Cette option permet de verrouiller l’exposition. *
2, 5
JPEG>RAW*
10
Si une option autre que RAW est sélectionnée pour le
paramètre Qualité image/Taille, appuyez sur la touche Fn
pour sélectionner une option RAW avec le même rapport
d’affichage (page 61). *
5, 6
Couleur>N et B
Sélectionnez l’option Noir et Blanc pour le paramètre
Réglages image (page 71). *
7
Couleur>TE
Sélectionnez l’option N et B(TE) pour le paramètre Réglages
image (page 71). *
7
Comp. expo.
Cette option affiche le curseur de la correction d’exposition
(page 85). *
5
Balance blancs
Cette option permet d’afficher les options de la balance des
blancs (page 86).
Correction WB
Cette option affiche les commandes de compensation de la
balance des blancs (page 89). *
9
ISO Cette option permet d’afficher les options de sensibilité ISO (page 90). *
7
Qualité
Cette option affiche les options de qualité et de taille de
l’image (page 61).
Mise au point Cette option affiche les options de mise au point (page 64). *
4
Réglages image Cette option affiche les options de réglage des images (page 71). *
7
Mesure expo. Cette option affiche les options de mesure de l’exposition (page 70). *
7
Mode Continu Cette option affiche les options de prise de vue en continu (page 73). *
8
Cadrage auto Cette option affiche les options de cadrage (page 75). *
8
Cible macro
Cette option permet de positionner la cible de mise au point
en mode macro (page 68). *
3
Correct. flash
Cette option affiche le curseur de compensation du flash
(page 78). *
4, 5
Niveau flash Cette option permet de régler la puissance du flash manuel (page 79). *
8
réglages de l a’ PPareil
*
1
Si la mise au point est verrouillée en mode mise au point automatique
(page 64), la sélection de la mise au point manuelle définit la distance
de mise au point sur la distance à laquelle la mise au point est
verrouillée.
*
2
L’exposition ne peut pas être verrouillée en mode M. Un appui sur la
touche Fn en mode M définit l’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation sur
des valeurs proches de celles nécessaires pour obtenir une exposition
optimale.
*
3
Non disponible lorsque l’option Portrait, Sports, Paysage ou Nuit est
sélectionnée en mode 4.
*
4
Non disponible lorsque Paysage est sélectionné en mode 4.
*
5
Non disponible lorsque Vidéo est sélectionné en mode 4.
*
6
Non disponible lorsque Correction biais est sélectionné en mode 4.
*
7
Non disponible en mode 4 autre que Correction biais.
*
8
Non disponible en mode 4.
*
9
Non disponible en mode 4 autre que Vidéo.
*
10
La taille des images de fichiers RAW varie en fonction des réglages
sélectionnés sous Qualité image/Taille.
Réglages sous Qualité image/Taille Taille des données RAW
L (16:9), M (16:9), 5M, 3M, 1M, VGA RAW (16:9)
L (4:3), M (4:3) RAW (4:3)
L (3:2), M (3:2) RAW (3:2)
L (1:1), M (1:1) RAW (1:1)
Par défaut, l’option AF/MF est attribuée à la touche Fn
et l’option Niveau flash à la touche Fn2 button.
Réglages bouton +/-
Sélectionnez les fonctions à attribuer aux touches + et –.
Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : Non, Correct.
flash (page 78), Niveau de flash manuel (page 79) et
Correction de l’exposition (page 85).
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Options du sélecteur de mode lecture/options sélecteur de mode M
Sélectionnez les fonctions à attribuer à la manette ADJ. et
au sélecteur plus-moins en mode lecture et en mode M.
Options du sélecteur de mode lecture Options sélecteur de mode M
Réglage 1 Réglage 2 Réglage 1 Réglage 2
Manette
ADJ.
Image
suivante/
précédente
Défilement
gauche/droite
Vitesse
d’obturation
Ouverture
Sélecteur
plusmoins
Zoom avant/
arrière
Défilement
haut/bas
Ouverture
Vitesse
d’obturation
Mode M par 1 seule pression
Lorsque la correction d’exposition est assignée aux
touches + et – (page 137) ou lorsque le verrouillage AE
est assigné aux touches Fn et Fn2 (page 136), un appui
sur la touche concernée en mode exposition manuelle
définit l’ouverture et/ou la vitesse d’obturation sur des
valeurs proches de celles nécessaires pour obtenir une
exposition optimale. Sélectionnez un réglage parmi les
options suivantes.
• Prior overture : l’ouverture conserve la valeur
sélectionnée ; la vitesse d’obturation est ajustée pour
obtenir une exposition optimale.
• Prior obturat. : la vitesse d’obturation conserve la
valeur sélectionnée ; l’ouverture est ajustée pour
obtenir une exposition optimale.
• Programme : l’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation sont
ajustées pour obtenir une exposition optimale.
Remarque
En mode exposition manuelle, la correction de l’exposition ne
peut pas être effectuée avec les touches + et – et le verrouillage
AE ne peut pas être obtenu avec les touches Fn.9
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Configuration
Format [Carte]/Format [Mémoire interne]
Sélectionnez Format [Carte] pour formater la carte
mémoire avant la première utilisation, après l’avoir
utilisée dans un autre dispositif, ou si une erreur de
carte s’affiche lorsque la carte est insérée dans le boîtier
de l’appareil photo. Sélectionnez Format [Mémoire
interne] si un message s’affiche vous demandant de
formater la mémoire interne.
Attention
• Le formatage supprime définitivement toutes les données sur la
carte ou dans la mémoire interne. Avant le formatage, copiez sur
un ordinateur toutes les données que vous souhaitez conserver
(page 151).
• Sélectionner Format [Carte] affiche un message d’erreur si
aucune carte mémoire n’est insérée. Mettez l’appareil hors
tension et insérez une carte mémoire.
Conseil : protection contrel’écriture
Pour empêcher le formatage des cartes mémoire, faites glisser
le curseur de protection contre l’écriture sur la position « LOCK »
(page 16). Replacez le curseur sur sa position originale pour
retrouver un fonctionnement normal.
Luminosité LCD
Cette option permet d’afficher
la commande illustrée à droite.
Appuyez sur + ou – pour ajuster la
luminosité de l’écran d’affichage
Cdes photos, puis appuyez sur
/D pour retourner au
menu configuration. Appuyez de
nouveau sur C/D pour quitter le mode prise de
vue ou le mode lecture.0
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Remarque
L’écran luminosité affiche la vue à travers l’objectif (mode prise
de vue) ou la photo la plus récemment affichée (mode lecture ;
si aucune photo n’est disponible en lecture, aucune image n’est
affichée sur l’écran luminosité).
Transparence écran DIRECT
Sélectionnez l’intensité de l’image d’arrière-plan affichée
sur l’écran DIRECT : Sombre, Normal, Clair ou Image
désactiv.
Pas de corr. expo/ flash
Sélectionnez la valeur des pas pour la correction de
l’exposition et la compensation du flash. Sélectionnez
1/2EV ou 1/3EV.
Remarque
En mode priorité à l’obturation, la valeur des pas est réglée
sur 1/3EV, même si l’option 1/2EV est sélectionnée pour le
paramètre Pas de corr. expo/ flash.
Sensibilité ISO auto-hi
Choisissez la sensibilité maximum sélectionnée par
l’appareil photo lorsque Auto-Hi est sélectionné
pour Sensibilité ISO en mode prise de vue (page 90).
Sélectionnez ISO 200 (AUTO 200), 400 (AUTO 400), 800
(AUTO 800), 1600 (AUTO 1600) ou 3200 (AUTO3200).
Remarque
Du bruit (variations de la luminosité et de la couleur) peut
apparaître dans les photos prises avec des sensibilités élevées.
Flash auxiliaire AF
Si l’option Oui est sélectionnée, le flash auxiliaire AF
s’allume pour aider au fonctionnement de la mise au
point, lorsque le sujet est faiblement éclairé.
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Mode veille
Sélectionnez la durée à l’issue de laquelle le mode veille
de l’écran d’affichage des photos est activé. Sélectionnez
Non, 1 minute, 5 minutes ou 30 minutes. Le témoin
de mise au point automatique/flash s’allume en mode
veille. Appuyez sur n’importe quelle touche pour
annuler le mode veille.
Attention
• Le boîtier de l’appareil photo ne passe pas en mode veille
lorsque :
• Le menu prise de vue, options personnalisées ou
configuration est affiché.
• Le boîtier de l’appareil photo est mis sous tension en appuyant
sur la touche 6 et que l’interrupteur MARCHE-ARRÊT est sur
ARRÊT.
• L’objectif de l’unité appareil photo n’est pas replié en mode veille.
Extinction auto
Choisissez le délai avant que l’appareil se mette
automatiquement hors tension pour économiser
l’énergie en cas de non-utilisation. Sélectionnez Non
(l’appareil photo ne s’éteint pas automatiquement), 1
minute, 5 minutes ou 30 minutes.
Remarque
Lorsque les options Mode veille et Extinction auto sont
activées, la fonction Extinction auto est activée une fois la durée
définie pour Mode veille écoulée.
Écran de lecture
Sélectionnez l’écran d’affichage des images : LCD (écran
d’affichage des photos) ou VF (viseur), lorsque le viseur
LCD(VF-2) est installé sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo.
Si le viseur n’est pas installé, les images sont affichées sur
l’écran d’affichage des photos quel que soit le réglage de
l’option Écran de lecture.2
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Attén. luminosité auto LCD
Si l’option Oui est sélectionnée, l’écran d’affichage des
photos s’atténue pour économiser de l’énergie lorsque
l’appareil photo est maintenu immobile pendant environ
cinq secondes en mode prise de vue. Déplacez l’appareil
photo ou appuyez sur n’importe quelle touche pour
rétablir la luminosité de l’écran d’affichage des photos.
Délai de validation LCD
Choisissez la durée d’affichage des photos sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos immédiatement après la prise
de vue. Sélectionnez 0,5, 1, 2 et 3secondes, Garder (les
photos s’affichent jusqu’à ce que le déclencheur soit
enfoncé à mi-course et elles peuvent être visualisées
avec le zoom en lecture ou supprimées ; voir pages 38 et
39) ou Non (les photos ne sont pas affichées sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos après la prise de vue).
Sons touches
Choisissez lorsque l’appareil émet un son.
Option Description
Tous
Des sons sont émis au démarrage, lorsque le déclencheur est
relâché, lorsque l’appareil effectue la mise au point et lorsqu’une
erreur survient. Si Son ou Aff.+son est sélectionné pour Réglage
niveau (page 32), l’appareil émettra également un signal sonore
à intervalles réguliers lorsque l’appareil est de niveau.
Son
niveau
Si l’option Son ou Aff.+Son est sélectionnée pour le paramètre
Réglage niveau, l’appareil émet un signal sonore à intervalles
réguliers lorsqu’il est de niveau.
Sons
déclench.
Des sons sont émis lorsque le déclencheur est relâché ou
lorsqu’une erreur survient. Si Son ou Aff.+son est sélectionné
pour Réglage niveau, l’appareil émettra un signal sonore à
intervalles réguliers lorsque l’appareil est de niveau.
Réglages volume
Sélectionnez le volume pour les sons décrits dans la
section « Son touches ». Choisissez entre (non),
(faible), (moyen) et (fort).
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Zoom par 1 seule pression
Sélectionnez l’agrandissement avec lequel les photos
Csont affichées lors d’un zoom avant en utilisant la touche
/D ou la manette ADJ. (page 38). Sélectionnez
5,7×, 9,8× ou 16×.
Remarques
• Le taux d’agrandissement maximal varie en fonction de la taille
de l’image (page 38).
• Si le taux d’agrandissement maximal d’une taille d’image est
inférieur au réglage spécifié dans Zoom par 1 seule pression,
l’image peut être agrandie au taux maximal de la taille d’image
(page 38).
Rotation auto
Sélectionnez Oui pour afficher automatiquement les
photos avec l’orientation correcte pendant la lecture.
Attention
L’affichage des vidéos, des photos prises avec la fonction
Cont.M + (page 73) et des photos prises alors que l’appareil
photo est à l’envers ou fortement incliné vers l’avant ou vers
l’arrière ne subit aucune rotation. Les photos ne sont pas pivotées
lorsque l’unité appareil photo n’est pas fixée sur le boîtier de
l’appareil photo, pendant les diaporamas, en vue multi-images ou
affichées sur un téléviseur, ni lorsque l’appareil est à l’envers ou si
l’appareil est renversé pendant le zoom en lecture ou lorsqu’une
correction des biais est en cours.
Remarque
Lors du cadrage ou lors de la prise de photos à l’aide de la
fonction Continu, l’appareil photo enregistre uniquement
l’orientation de la première photo de chaque série. Les photos
restantes ne s’affichent pas avec l’orientation correcte si l’appareil
a été renversé pendant la prise de vue.
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Distance min de prise de vue
Sélectionnez Afficher pour afficher la distance minimale
de prise de vue sur l’écran d’affichage des photos.
Réglage niveau
L’appareil photo vous informe que l’image est de niveau
lors de la prise de vue à l’aide de l’indicateur de niveau et
de sons. Choisissez les réglages de l’indicateur de niveau
(page 32).
Options affichage du cadrage
Choisissez le type de la grille de cadrage disponible en
mode prise de vue (page 42).
Paramètre Description
Une grille trois par trois pour des compositions
en « règle de trois ».
Une grille quatre par quatre avec des
diagonales d’un angle à l’autre qui facilitent
le centrage du sujet. Cette grille est utilisée
pour des photos d’architecture ou de produits
à afficher.
Une grille deux par deux, avec le centre du
cadre libre, pour faciliter la visualisation du
sujet. Cette grille est utilisée pour les sujets en
mouvement.
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Affichage touche Fn
Sélectionnez Oui pour afficher les
options actuellement assignées
aux touches Fn lorsque l’appareil
photo est mis sous tension,
lorsque le mode prise de vue est
sélectionné ou lorsqu’un nouveau
mode est sélectionné avec le sélecteur de mode.
Afficher nom de Mon Réglage
Sélectionnez Oui pour afficher
le nom des réglages assignés à
la position actuelle du sélecteur
de mode, lorsque le sélecteur est
positionné sur MY, MY2 ou MY.
Affichage infos prise de vue
Sélectionnez Oui pour afficher les
icônes de prise de vue dans un
cadre entourant la vue à travers
l’objectif (page 8), facilitant le
cadrage des photos sur l’écran
d’affichage des photos. Le cadre
n’est pas affiché en mode vidéo.
4:3 N
4:3 N
2010
4:3 N
réglages de l a’ PPareil
CL-BKT Noir et Blanc (TE)
Choisissez le nombre et le type de copies créées avec
le cadrage couleur (page 77). Sélectionnez Oui pour
enregistrer trois copies de chaque prise de vue (une en
noir et blanc, une deuxième en couleur et une troisième
en monochrome teinté), Non pour enregistrer deux
copies (une en noir et blanc et la seconde en couleur).
Remarque
Quel que soit le réglage choisi, trois copies de chaque photo
sont enregistrées si l’option N et B(TE) est sélectionnée pour le
paramètre Réglages image.
Réglage espace couleurs
Choisissez l’espace colorimétrique utilisé pour
enregistrer les photos. sRVB est largement utilisé pour
reproduire des images numériques, mais offre une
gamme de couleurs plus petite que AdobeRVB.
Attention
L’espace colorimétrique Adobe RVB a été développé par Adobe
Systems Inc. et il est compatible avec l’espace colorimétrique
par défaut utilisé dans Adobe Photoshop et d’autres logiciels
de retouche photo. Cependant, notez que les couleurs seront
correctement reproduites uniquement dans les logiciels prenant
en charge l’espace colorimétrique Adobe RVB. Notez également
qu’un équipement spécialisé est requis pour imprimer la plage
entière des couleurs de la gamme Adobe RVB ; lors d’une
impression avec une imprimante domestique grand public ou
à travers un service de tirages photo numérique, les couleurs
seront généralement moins vives que celles des photos utilisant
l’espace colorimétrique sRVB.
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Image zoom numérique
Indiquez comment les photos prises à l’aide du zoom
numérique sont enregistrées.
• Normale : zoom numérique normal. Une partie de
l’image est rognée et la photo est agrandie au format
sélectionné sous Qualité image/Taille, ce qui entraîne
une baisse de la qualité de l’image.
• Taille auto : une partie de l’image est rognée et l’image
est enregistrée au format rogné. La qualité de l’image
reste la même. La taille de l’image est cependant
réduite. La taille de l’image rognée varie en fonction
du taux de zoom. Consultez la documentation fournie
avec l’unité appareil photo.
Le zoom Taille auto est uniquement disponible lorsque
le rapport 4:3 est sélectionné pour L, sous Qualité
image/Taille (page 61).
La taille d’image actuelle s’affiche
sur l’écran d’affichage des photos
lorsque l’appareil photo effectue
un zoom avant.
4:3 N
Attention
La fonction Taille auto n’a aucun effet lorsque l’option Cont.M +
ou Correction biais est sélectionnée en mode 4 ou lorsque
l’option RAW est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Qualité image/
Taille.
Mémo position curseur menu
Si l’option Oui est sélectionnée, la rubrique la plus
récemment utilisée sera sélectionnée lorsque le menu
s’affiche.
réglages de l a’ PPareil
N° séquentiel de la carte
Choisissez comment l’appareil photo nomme les fichiers
image lors de l’enregistrement des photos sur une carte
mémoire.
• Oui : les noms de fichier sont composés de « R » suivi
d’un nombre à sept chiffres (par exemple « R0010001.
jpg »), par ordre ascendant de 0010001 à 9999999.
Lorsqu’une nouvelle carte mémoire est insérée, la
numérotation des fichiers continue à partir du dernier
nombre utilisé.
• Non : les noms de fichier sont composés de « RIMG »
suivi d’un nombre à quatre chiffres (par exemple
« RIMG0001.jpg »), par ordre ascendant de 0001 à 9999.
Lorsqu’une nouvelle carte mémoire est insérée, la
numérotation des fichiers est réinitialisée (0001).
Remarques
• Cette option s’applique uniquement aux cartes mémoire. Les
noms de photo dans la mémoire interne sont composés de
« RIMG » suivi d’un nombre à quatre chiffres.
• Les photos copiées sur un ordinateur à l’aide de DL-10 (page
151) se voient attribuer un nouveau nom, composé de « RIMG »
suivi d’un nombre à quatre chiffres.
• Les photos prises avec AdobeRVB sélectionné pour Réglage
espace couleurs (page 146) sont indiquées par des noms de
fichier commençant par un soulignement (p.ex. « _R010001.
jpg » ou « _RIMG001.jpg »).
Attention
Lorsque l’option Oui est sélectionnée, aucune autre photo ne
peut être enregistrée sur la carte mémoire si celle-ci contient un
dossier numéroté 999 et un nom de fichier terminant par 9999 ;
lorsque l’option Non est sélectionnée, aucune autre photo ne
peut être enregistrée sur la carte mémoire si celle-ci contient un
fichier numéroté 9999. Pour prendre des photos supplémentaires,
formatez la carte après avoir copié son contenu sur un ordinateur.9
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Réglage date
Configurez l’horloge de l’appareil (page 20).
Remarque
Si vous laissez la batterie dans le boîtier de l’appareil photo
pendant au moins deux heures, la batterie peut être ensuite
retirée pendant environ une semaine sans qu’il soit nécessaire de
reconfigurer l’horloge.
Language/L
Choisissez la langue d’affichage des messages et des
menus de l’appareil photo.
Option Description Option Description
Japonais ??????? Russe
English Anglais Chinois simplifié
Deutsch Allemand Chinois traditionnel
Français Français Coréen
Italiano Italien Thaï
Español Espagnol
Sortie vidéo
Si vous raccordez le boîtier de l’appareil photo à un
téléviseur ou un magnétoscope (page 118), choisissez
une sortie vidéo qui correspond à la norme utilisée par
le dispositif. L’appareil prend en charge les normes NTSC
et PAL ; SECAM n’est pas pris en charge.
Sortie HDMI
Sélectionnez la résolution de sortie des images lors de l’utilisation
d’un câble mini HDMI. Sélectionnez AUTO ou Manuel.
Remarque
Le réglage normal est AUTO. Si la résolution des images affichées
sur le téléviseur est faible avec l’option Auto, sélectionnez
Manuel. Il est possible que la qualité de l’image s’améliore.0
réglages de l a’ PPareil
Lancer extraction réglages
Lors de la mise hors tension de l’appareil photo, les
réglages sont enregistrés dans le boîtier de l’appareil
photo et dans l’unité appareil photo.
Sélectionnez la destination de lecture des réglages :
Boîtier ou Unité app. ph..
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
Copie des photos sur un ordinateur
Cette section décrit comment copier des photos du
boîtier de l’appareil photo sur votre ordinateur. Les
instructions pour Windows sont détaillées ci-dessous ;
pour Macintosh, les instructions commencent à la page
162.
Remarque
Les boîtes de dialogue qui illustrent cette section peuvent
légèrement différer de celles affichées sur votre ordinateur.
Windows
Vous pouvez copier des photos sur votre ordinateur
avec l’une des méthodes suivantes :
• Installez le logiciel DL-10 fourni (page 153) et utilisez-le
pour copier des photos comme indiqué à la page 159.
• Copiez des photos sans l’aide du logiciel DL-10 ou d’un
autre logiciel de copie d’images (page 160).
Remarque
Des instructions détaillées sont disponibles dans le Mode d’emploi
du logiciel sur le CD fourni (page ix).2
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
Configuration requise
Avant d’utiliser le CD fourni, vérifiez que votre ordinateur
est compatible avec les exigences suivantes. Consultez
la documentation fournie avec votre ordinateur pour en
savoir plus.
OS
Windows 2000 Professional SP 4, Windows XP Home
Edition/Professional SP 3, Windows Vista SP 2
CPU
Windows 2000/Windows XP : Pentium® lll 500MHz ou supérieur
Windows Vista : Pentium® lll 1GHz ou supérieur
RAM
Windows 2000/Windows XP : 256Mo ou plus
Windows Vista : 512Mo ou plus
Espace disque
disponible
Un minimum de 160Mo est requis pour l’installation
Vidéo 1024×768 pixels ou plus avec couleurs 16 bits ou plus
Divers
• Lecteur CD-ROM compatible
• Port USB compatible
Attention
• Les systèmes d’exploitation de 64 bits ne sont pas pris en
charge. Les systèmes d’exploitation, qui ont été mis à jour à
partir d’une version précédente, ne sont pas pris en charge
car l’USB pourrait ne pas fonctionner correctement. Le logiciel
fourni peut ne pas fonctionner correctement sur des systèmes
qui ont été mis à jour ou modifiés avec des versions Service
Pack.
• Connectez le boîtier de l’appareil photo directement sur le port
USB intégré. Les ports USB rajoutés via le bus PCI ou d’autres
cartes d’extension ne sont pas pris en charge. Le boîtier de
l’appareil photo peut ne pas fonctionner correctement s’il est
raccordé à un concentrateur USB ou à un clavier.
• Plus de RAM peut être nécessaire pour la gestion des vidéos et
des gros fichiers.
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
CD fourni
À l’insertion du CD fourni dans
un lecteur de CD-ROM, la boîte
de dialogue illustrée à droite
s’affiche.
• Installation du logiciel : installez les
applications suivantes.
DL-10 : cette application permet de
copier des photos sur l’ordinateur
en une seule opération.
Irodio Photo & Video Studio : cette application permet de
visualiser et de retoucher des photos sur l’ordinateur. Pour en
savoir plus, consultez le menu Aide dans Irodio Photo & Video
Studio ou consultez le site web suivant : http://www.pixela.
co.jp/oem/irodio/e/irodio_digitalphoto_videostudio/
Pilote USB : cette application permet de raccorder les anciens
appareils photo Ricoh à des ordinateurs sous Windows
98, Windows 98 SE, Windows Me ou Windows 2000. Cette
application n’est pas nécessaire pour ce produit.
Pilote WIA : cette application permet de raccorder les anciens
appareils photo Ricoh aux ordinateurs sous Windows XP et
Windows Vista. Cette application n’est pas nécessaire pour ce
produit.
• Voir le manuel de l’utilisateur (version logiciel) : visualisez le
Mode d’emploi du logiciel au format PDF (page ix). Acrobat
Reader ou Adobe Reader est requis ; le cas échéant,
installez Adobe Reader comme indiqué à la page 156.
• Voir le contenu du CD-ROM : parcourez le contenu du CD,
qui comprend Adobe Reader (page 156). Pour installer
Irodio Photo & Video Studio sans installer d’autres
applications, ouvrez le dossier « Irodio Photo & Video
Studio » et double-cliquez sur Irodio Photo & Video
Studio.exe.
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
Installation du logiciel
Suivez la procédure de la page suivante pour installer le
logiciel fourni. Les illustrations proviennent de Windows
XP.
Attention
• Si le boîtier de l’appareil photo est raccordé à l’ordinateur,
débranchez-le avant de commencer l’installation.
• Les utilisateurs de l’application « Caplio » doivent savoir que
l’application « DC » fournie avec le boîtier de l’appareil photo
remplace les éléments suivants de la suite logicielle Caplio :
Logiciel Caplio Logiciel DC
RICOH Gate La DL-10
Caplio Viewer DU-10
*
Caplio Server SR-10
*
Caplio Setting ST-10
*
*Non utilisé par ce produit.
Si le logiciel Caplio ci-dessus est actuellement installé, il vous
sera demandé de le désinstaller avant d’installer le logiciel
DC fourni. Suivez les instructions à l’écran. L’installation du
logiciel DC remplace Caplio Viewer, Caplio Server et Caplio
Setting avec les applications listées ci-dessus, qui peuvent être
utilisées de la même façon que les versions Caplio (notez que
ces logiciels ne seront pas installés si vous avez désinstallé le
logiciel Caplio comme indiqué à la page 158 avant d’installer
le logiciel DC). Notez que la désinstallation du logiciel pour les
anciens appareils photo Ricoh peut réinitialiser les préférences
utilisateur de DL-10 ou RICOH Gate La.
• Les droits Administrateur sont requis pour l’installation.
• DL-10 est conçu pour fonctionner dans un environnement
individuel et ne peut pas être exécuté en réseau.
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
1
Insérez le CD fourni.
Mettez l’ordinateur sous
tension et insérez le CD fourni
dans le lecteur CD-ROM.
• Windows Vista : une boîte
de dialogue d’exécution
automatique s’affiche. Cliquez
sur Exécuter Autorun.exe
pour afficher la fenêtre de l’assistant d’installation.
• Autres versions de Windows : la fenêtre de l’assistant
d’installation s’affiche automatiquement.
2 Cliquez sur Installation du logiciel.
• Windows Vista : une boîte de dialogue « Contrôle
de compte d’utilisateur » s’affiche. Cliquez sur
Permettre pour afficher la boîte de dialogue de
sélection de la langue.
• Autres versions de Windows : la boîte de dialogue de
sélection de la langue s’affiche automatiquement.
3
Sélectionnez une langue et cliquez sur OK.
La boîte de dialogue illustrée
à droite s’affiche ensuite.
Cliquez sur Suivant.
4
Sélectionnez une destination.
Le logiciel fourni sera installé
dans le dossier indiqué dans
Dossier Cible. Cliquez sur
Suivant.
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
5 Confirmez la destination et cliquez sur [Suivant].
L’installateur Irodio Photo
& Video Studio démarre
(selon votre ordinateur, la
fenêtre d’accueil illustrée à
droite peut rester affichée
un certain temps avant que
l’installation commence). Suivez les instructions à
l’écran pour installer le logiciel fourni.
6 Cliquez sur Terminer.
La boîte de dialogue illustrée
à droite s’affiche lorsque
l’installation est terminée.
Cliquez sur Terminer.
7
Redémarrez l’ordinateur.
Un message s’affiche vous
demandant de redémarrer votre ordinateur. Sélectionnez
Oui, je souhaite redémarrer mon ordinateur maintenant
et cliquez sur Terminer pour redémarrer l’ordinateur.
8Débloquez DL-10.
Une boîte de dialogue de sécurité Windows s’affiche
après le redémarrage. Cliquez sur Débloquer pour
le logiciel DL-10.
Remarque
Consultez la page 158 pour en savoir plus sur la désinstallation du logiciel.
Installation de l’application Adobe Reader
Adobe Reader est requis pour visualiser le Mode d’emploi du
logiciel. Si Adobe Reader n’est pas déjà installé, il est possible
de le faire à partir du CD fourni comme indiqué ci-dessous.
Attention
• Débranchez le boîtier de l’appareil photo avant de commencer
l’installation.
• Les droits Administrateur sont requis pour l’installation.
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
1
Insérez le CD fourni.
Mettez l’ordinateur sous
tension et insérez le CD
fourni dans le lecteur
CD-ROM.
• Windows Vista : une boîte
de dialogue d’exécution
automatique s’affiche.
Cliquez sur Exécuter Autorun.exe pour afficher la
fenêtre de l’assistant d’installation.
• Autres versions de Windows : la fenêtre de l’assistant
d’installation s’affiche automatiquement.
2 Cliquez sur Voir le contenu du CD-ROM.
Le contenu du CD s’affiche.
3
Installez Adobe Reader.
Double-cliquez sur le dossier « Acrobat Reader »,
puis sur le dossier de la langue de votre choix.
Double-cliquez sur le fichier commençant par
« AdbeRdr910 » et suivez les instructions à l’écran.
Si une boîte de dialogue « Contrôle de compte
d’utilisateur » s’affiche, cliquez sur Continuer.
Remarques
• Consultez le menu Aide dans Adobe Reader pour en savoir plus
sur Adobe Reader.
• L’installation de l’application Adobe Reader 9.1 nécessite MSI
(Microsoft Windows Installer) version 3.1 ou supérieure et
soit Microsoft Internet Explorer version 6.0 ou supérieure, soit
Firefox version 2.0 ou supérieure. Microsoft Internet Explorer et
Microsoft Windows Installer sont disponibles via la mise à jour
de Microsoft.
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
Désinstallation du logiciel
Suivez les étapes ci-dessous pour désinstaller le logiciel
DC ou Irodio Photo & Video Studio.
Attention
• Les droits Administrateur sont requis pour la désinstallation.
• Quittez toutes les applications ouvertes avant de continuer.
1 Ouvrez « Ajout/Suppression de programmes »
dans le Panneau de configuration.
Ouvrez le menu « Démarrer » de Windows et
sélectionnez Panneau de configuration (Windows
XP ou Windows Vista) ou Paramètres > Panneau
de configuration. Double-cliquez sur Ajout/
Suppression de programmes.
2Désinstallez le logiciel.
Sélectionnez le logiciel à désinstaller (DC Software
ou Irodio Photo & Video Studio), puis cliquez
sur Modifier/Supprimer. Une boîte de dialogue
de confirmation s’affiche ; cliquez sur OK. Si un
message s’affiche pour signaler qu’un fichier
partagé a été détecté, sélectionnez Ne plus afficher
ce message et cliquez sur Oui.
Fermez toutes les fenêtres ouvertes lorsque le
processus de désinstallation est terminé. Après
la désinstallation du logiciel Irodio Photo & Video
Studio, redémarrez l’ordinateur.9
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
Copie de photos à l’aide du logiciel DL-10
Après l’installation du logiciel DC, suivez les étapes
ci-dessous pour copier des photos sur votre ordinateur.
1Mettez l’appareil hors tension.
2
Branchez le câble USB fourni.
Raccordez le câble au port
USB de l’ordinateur.
Attention
• Ne forcez pas et ne tirez pas sur
le câble lorsque vous
manipulez le boîtier de
l’appareil photo avec le câble branché.
• Ne déplacez pas le boîtier de l’appareil photo lorsque le
câble est branché.
Raccordez le câble à l’appareil
photo comme illustré. L’appareil
se met sous tension, le logiciel
DL-10 démarre et le transfert
commence automatiquement.
Les photos sont copiées dans
des répertoires du dossier « Digital Camera » dans
« Mes documents » (si vous utilisiez précédemment le
logiciel Caplio, les photos seront plutôt copiées dans
des répertoires du dossier « Caplio »). Les photos sont
classées par date d’enregistrement dans des répertoires
séparés ; assurez-vous que l’horloge de l’appareil est
correctement configurée avant la prise de vue.
3Débranchez le câble lorsque le transfert est
terminé.
Consultez la page 161 pour en savoir plus.0
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
Remarque
Appliquez les procédures suivantes si le transfert ne démarre pas
automatiquement.
Cliquez sur Sauvegarder dans la fenêtre DL-10.
Assurez-vous que l’option Enregistrer automatiquement
lorsqu’il est connecté à un port USB est sélectionnée dans la
boîte de dialogue « Réglages d’option » du logiciel DL-10.
Redémarrez l’ordinateur et répétez la procédure ci-dessus.
Copie de photos sans l’aide du logiciel DL-10
Si DL-10 n’est pas installé, vous pouvez copier des
photos sur l’ordinateur comme indiqué ci-dessous. Les
illustrations de cette section proviennent de Windows
XP.
1Mettez l’appareil hors tension.
2
Branchez le câble USB fourni.
Raccordez le câble au port USB de l’ordinateur, puis
au boîtier de l’appareil photo. L’appareil se met sous
tension automatiquement.
3 Copiez les fichiers de l’appareil sur l’ordinateur.
L’appareil est listé comme
disque amovible dans
« Poste de travail », avec
les photos stockées dans
des dossiers comme
illustré à droite. Si une
carte mémoire est
insérée dans l’appareil,
le disque sera nommé comme illustré à droite et le
contenu de la carte mémoire s’affichera. Si aucune
carte mémoire n’est insérée, le disque sera nommé
« RICOHDCI » et le contenu de la mémoire interne
s’affichera. Copiez les photos dans l’emplacement
souhaité de votre ordinateur.
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
Attention
• Ne mettez pas l’appareil hors tension et ne débranchez pas le
câble USB tant que la copie n’est pas terminée.
• Les fichiers dans le dossier de destination avec le même nom que
les photos copiées seront écrasés. Le cas échéant, renommez les
fichiers avant de commencer la copie.
• N’utilisez pas l’ordinateur pour visualiser ou retoucher les photos
d’une carte mémoire. Les photos qui ont été visualisées ou
retouchées sur l’ordinateur ne peuvent plus être affichées sur
l’appareil. Copiez les photos sur l’ordinateur pour les visualiser et
les retoucher.
Déconnexion du boîtier de l’appareil photo
Avant de déconnecter le
boîtier de l’appareil photo de
l’ordinateur, cliquez sur l’icône « Retirer le périphérique
en toute sécurité » ou « Déconnecter ou éjecter le
matériel » dans la zone de notification (l’illustration cidessus montre l’icône sous Windows XP) et sélectionnez
Retirer Périphérique de stockage de masse USB en
toute sécurité ou Arrêter Périphérique de stockage de
masse USB dans le menu contextuel. Vous pouvez alors
débrancher le câble USB.
Remarques
• Un message d’avertissement peut s’afficher si le câble USB est
débranché sans d’abord retirer l’appareil du système comme
indiqué ci-dessus. Assurez-vous de retirer l’appareil du système
avant de débrancher le câble.
• Vérifiez que le transfert est terminé avant de retirer l’appareil du
système et de débrancher le câble.2
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
Macintosh
Le boîtier de l’appareil photo peut être utilisé avec Mac
OS X versions 10.4 à 10.5.7.
Attention
Le logiciel VM-1 (page 164) et le Mode d’emploi du logiciel
(uniquement sur les ordinateurs équipés de l’application Acrobat)
peuvent être utilisés avec les ordinateurs Macintosh.
Copie des photos sur un ordinateur Macintosh
1Mettez l’appareil hors tension.
2
Branchez le câble USB fourni.
Raccordez le câble au port
USB de l’ordinateur.
Attention
• Ne forcez pas et ne tirez pas sur
le câble lorsque vous
manipulez l’appareil photo
avec le câble branché.
• Ne déplacez pas l’appareil photo lorsque le câble est
branché.
Raccordez le câble au boîtier
de l’appareil photo comme
illustré. L’appareil se met sous
tension automatiquement.
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
3 Copiez les fichiers de l’appareil sur l’ordinateur.
L’appareil s’affiche comme
un volume sur le bureau,
avec les photos stockées
dans des dossiers comme
illustré à droite. Si une
carte mémoire est insérée
dans l’appareil, le disque
sera nommé comme
illustré à droite et le contenu de la carte mémoire
s’affichera. Si aucune carte mémoire n’est insérée, le
disque sera nommé « RICOHDCI » et le contenu de la
mémoire interne s’affichera. Copiez les photos dans
l’emplacement souhaité de votre ordinateur.
Déconnexion du boîtier de l’appareil photo
Avant de débrancher l’appareil de l’ordinateur, faites
glisser le volume de l’appareil sur la poubelle ou
sélectionnez le volume de l’appareil et choisissez Éjecter
dans le menu Fichier. Vous pouvez alors débrancher le
câble USB.
Remarques
• Un message d’avertissement peut s’afficher si le câble USB est
débranché sans d’abord retirer l’appareil du système comme
indiqué ci-dessus. Assurez-vous de retirer l’appareil du système
avant de débrancher le câble.
• Vérifiez que le transfert est terminé avant de retirer l’appareil du
système et de débrancher le câble.
• Le raccordement du boîtier de l’appareil photo à un ordinateur
Macintosh peut engendrer la création de fichiers « FINDER.
DAT » ou « .DS_Store » qui seront considérés comme des fichiers
incorrects par l’appareil. Ces fichiers peuvent être supprimés
sans risque.
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
Utilisation de lecteur de fichiers MP
Lorsque vous prenez des photos à l’aide de la fonction
Cont.M +, les photos sont enregistrées dans un fichier
MP. Grâce au lecteur de fichiers MP VM-1, vous pouvez
lire des fichiers MP sur votre ordinateur Macintosh et
exporter des photos.
Cette section explique comment installer et désinstaller
le logiciel VM-1 qui est inclus sur le CD-ROM fourni. Pour
plus de détails concernant la lecture de fichiers MP sur
votre ordinateur ou l’exportation de photos de fichiers MP
à l’aide du lecteur de fichiers MP, reportez-vous au « Mode
d’emploi du logiciel » disponible sur le CD-ROM fourni.
Configuration requise pourl’utilisation du lecteur de fichiersMP fourni
Les environnements suivants sont nécessaires pour
utiliser le lecteur de fichiers MP fourni.
Vérifiez votre ordinateur ou le manuel de l’utilisateur de
l’ordinateur.
Systèmes d’exploitation pris
en charge
Mac OS X versions 10.4 à 10.5.7
Macintosh Série Macintosh Apple Inc.
Mémoire interne
Mac OS X 10.4 256 Mo ou plus
Mac OS X 10.5 512 Mo ou plus
Mémoire disque dur
disponible
5 Mo ou plus
Lecteur de CD-ROM
Lecteur de CD-ROM compatible avec
l’ordinateur Macintosh susmentionné
Remarque
Le logiciel VM-1 prend en charge les langues suivantes : japonais,
anglais, français et chinois (simplifié).
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
Installation du logiciel VM-1
1
Insérez le CD fourni.
Mettez l’ordinateur Macintosh sous tension et
insérez le CD fourni dans le lecteur de CD-ROM.
2
Sélectionnez le disque d’installation.
Double-cliquez sur l’icône RICOH > le dossier VM-
1 > l’icône VM-1 Installer.pkg. La fenêtre Installer
VM-1 s’affiche, cliquez sur Continuer. Lorsque la
fenêtre de sélection de l’emplacement d’installation
s’affiche, sélectionnez le disque d’installation, puis
cliquez sur Continuer.
3
Installez le logiciel VM-1.
Cliquez sur Installer, saisissez votre nom et votre
mot de passe et cliquez sur OK. Un message vous
informant que l’installation est terminée s’affiche,
cliquez sur Fermer.
Pour sélectionner un autre emplacement
d’installation, cliquez sur Changer l’emplacement
de l’installation....
Pour mettre le logiciel VM-1 à niveau, cliquez sur
Mettre à jour.
coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr
Désinstallation du logiciel VM-1
Attention
• Si d’autres logiciels sont en cours d’exécution ou si des données
n’ont pas été enregistrées, fermez les logiciels et enregistrez les
données avant de désinstaller VM-1.
• En cas d’erreur pendant la désinstallation, mettez votre système
d’exploitation Mac à jour avec la dernière version disponible.
1 Ouvrez le dossier des utilitaires VM-1.
Ouvrez le dossier Applications > le dossier
Utilitaires > le dossier VM-1 Utility.
2Double-cliquez sur l’icône VM-1 Uninstaller.
La fenêtre de confirmation de la désinstallation
s’affiche. Cliquez sur OK.
3
Saisissez votre nom et votre mot de passe et
cliquez sur OK.
Un message vous informant que la désinstallation
est terminée s’affiche, cliquez sur OK.
reMarqUes techniqUes
Remarques techniques
Résolution des problèmes
Messages d’erreur
Si un message d’erreur s’affiche, procédez comme suit.
Message Solution Page
Insérerunecarte. Aucunecarte mémoireinsérée. Insérezunecarte. 15
Régler ladate.
L’horloge de l’appareil photo n’est pas configurée. Configurez
l’horlogedel’appareil.
20,
149
Nombrede fi chiers
limites
La limitede numérotation des fichiersde l’appareil est atteinte.
Insérezuneautrecarte.
15,
148
Fichier incorrect
L’appareil ne peut pas afficher le fichier. Utilisez un ordinateur
pourvérifier lecontenudu fichieret supprimer le fichier.
—
Mémoireinsuffisant.
Poursuivrelacopie?
L’espacesur lacarte mémoireest insuffisantpour copier tous les
fichiers. Insérezuneautrecarte.
15
Protégé Le fichierestprotégéet nepeutpasêtresupprimé. 112
Carteprotégéeen
écriture.
Lacarteestprotégéecontrel’écriture(verrouillée). Déverrouillez
lacarte.
16
Fichier non sélectionné
pour l’impression.
Le fichier est une vidéo ou un autre fichier qui ne peut pas être
sélectionnépour l’impression.
—
Espace mémoire
insuffisant /
Faiblecapacité
La mémoire est insuffisante pour stocker des fichiers
supplémentaires.Supprimezdes fichiersexistantsouaugmentez
laquantitéde mémoiredisponible.
39,
139
Nombre maximum d’images sélectionnées pour impression.
Réglez le nombredetiragespour lesautres images sur zéro.
125
Formater la mémoire
interne.
La mémoire interne n’est pas formatée correctement. Formatez
la mémoireinterne.
139
Formatez lacarte.
Lacarte n’estpas formatéecorrectement.Formatez lacartedans
leboîtierdel’appareilphoto.
139
Erreur carte
Formatezlacarte.Si lemessagepersiste, lacarteestdéfectueuse;
nel’utilisezplus.
139
Écrituredesdonnées
L’appareil enregistre des données. Patientez jusqu’à la fin de
l’enregistrement.
—
Pasde fichier Aucun fichierdisponiblepour lecture. —
Enregi. impossible
Lamémoireestpleine. Utilisezuneautrecarte,ouretirezlacarte
etutilisez la mémoireinterne.
15
reMarqUes techniqUes
Problèmes relatifs au boîtier de l’appareil photo
Alimentation
Problème Cause Solution Page
L’appareilphoto
nese metpas sous
tension.
La batterie est vide ou n’est pas
insérée.
Vérifiez que la batterie est
correctement insérée. Chargez la
batterie (batterie rechargeable
uniquement).
12,14
Labatterieest incompatible. Utilisez labatteriefournie. 13
La batterie n’est pas orientée
correctement.
Insérez et orientez correctement
labatterie.
14
L’appareilphoto
se met hors
tension pendant
l’utilisation.
L’appareil s’est mis hors tension
automatiquement pour
économiser l’énergie.
Mettez l’appareil sous tension. 18
Labatterieestvide.
Chargez la batterie (batterie
rechargeableuniquement).
12
Labatterieest incompatible. Utilisez labatteriefournie. 13
L’appareilphoto
nese metpas hors
tension.
L’appareil fonctionne mal. Retirezet réinsérez labatterie. 14
L’indicateurde
batteriefaible
s’afficheou
l’appareil se met
hors tension alors
quelabatterieest
encorechargée.
Labatterieest incompatible. Utilisez labatteriefournie. 13
Ilest impossiblede
charger labatterie.
Labatterieaatteint la fin desavie
decharge.
Remplacez-la par une batterie
neuve.
14
Labatterie
sedécharge
rapidement.
La température est très haute ou
trèsbasse.
— —
Un faible éclairage nécessite une
utilisation excessivedu flash.
— —9
reMarqUes techniqUes
Prise devue
Problème Cause Solution Page
Aucunephoto n’est
priselorsquele
déclencheurest
enfoncé.
Labatterieestvide.
Chargez la batterie (batterie
rechargeableuniquement).
12
L’appareil photo est hors tension
oupasen modeprisedevue.
Placez l’interrupteur MARCHE/
ARRÊT sur MARCHE pour mettre
l’appareil photo sous tension ou
appuyezsur6poursélectionner
le modeprisedevue.
18,34
L’appareil photo est en mode
lecture.
Appuyezsur6poursélectionner
le modeprisedevue.
34
Ledéclencheur n’apasétéenfoncé
jusqu’aubout.
Appuyez sur le déclencheur
jusqu’aubout.
22
Lacarte mémoire n’estpas formatée. Formatez lacarte. 139
Lacarte mémoireestpleine.
Insérez une nouvelle carte ou
supprimezdes fichiers.
15,39
La carte mémoire a atteint la fin
desavieutile.
Insérezune nouvellecarte. 15
Le flash est en cours de
chargement.
Patientez jusqu’àcequeletémoin
du flash arrêtedeclignoter.
29
Lacarte mémoireestverrouillée. Déverrouillez lacarte. 16
Les contacts de la carte mémoire
sont sales.
Nettoyez-le avec un chiffon doux
et sec.
—
Impossibled’afficher
lesphotosaprès la
prisedevue.
La durée d’affichage est trop
courte.
Choisissez une durée d’affichage
plus longue.
142
L’écran d’affichage
desphotosest
vide.
L’appareil photo est éteint ou
l’écran d’affichage des photos est
noir.
Mettez l’appareil sous tension
ou réglez la luminosité de l’écran
d’affichagedesphotos.
18,
139
L’écran d’affichage des photos est
éteint.
Appuyez sur la touche VF/LCD pour
activer l’écran d’affichagedesphotos.
42
LeviseurLCD aétéactivé.
Appuyez sur la touche VF/LCD pour
activer l’écran d’affichagedesphotos.
42
Lecâble A/V estbranché. Débranchez lecâble. 118
L’appareilphoto
est incapable
d’effectuer la mise
aupointen mode
miseaupoint
automatique.
L’objectifest sale.
Nettoyez-le avec un chiffon doux
et sec.
—
Lesujet n’estpasaucentreducadre. Utilisez leverrouillagede miseaupoint. 25
Lesujet n’estpasadaptéàla mise
aupointautomatique.
Utilisez le verrouillage de mise au
pointoula miseaupoint manuelle.
25,65
Lesujetest tropproche.
Utilisez le mode macro ou
éloignez-vousdusujet.
270
reMarqUes techniqUes
Problème Cause Solution Page
Lesphotos sont
floues.
J
L’appareil photo bouge pendant la
prisedevue.
Utilisez un trépied. Utilisez la
fonction de correction du bougé de
l’appareil photo. Placez les coudes
contrelecorps.
21,92
L’éclairage est faible et les vitesses
d’obturation sont lentes.
Utilisez le flash. Sélectionnez une
sensibilitéISO plusélevée. Utilisezla
fonction de correction du bougé de
l’appareilphoto.
29,90,
92
Le flash nese
déclenchepasou ne
serechargepas.
Le flash n’estpasouvert.
Appuyez sur la touche OPEN/f
(réglage/ouverture du flash) pour
déployer le flash.
29
Le flash n’estpas complètementouvert. Negênezpas l’ouverturedu flash. —
Le flash nepeutpasêtreutilisédans
les cas suivants :
• Lorsquecadrageexposition,cadrage
balance des blancs ou cadrage
couleurest réglé
• En modecontinu
• En modevidéo
Modifiez les réglagesdel’appareil.
54,73,
75
Le flash estdésactivé.
Déployez le flash. Appuyez sur la
touche OPEN/f (réglage/ouverture
du flash)pourannuler le flash.
29
Labatterieestvide.
Chargez la batterie (batterie
rechargeableuniquement).
12
Le flash n’éclairepas
lesujet.
La distance jusqu’au sujet est
supérieureàlaportéedu flash.
Rapprochez-vousdusujet. —
Lesujetest sombre. Augmentez lapuissancedu flash. 78
Le flash sedéclenchetroplentement. Augmentez lapuissancedu flash. 78
Le flash n’estpas complètementouvert. Negênezpas l’ouverturedu flash. —
Lesphotos sont trop
claires.
Lapuissancedu flash est tropforte.
Réduisez la puissance du flash,
éloignez-vous du sujet ou utilisez
unesourced’éclairagedifférente.
78
Laphotoest surexposée.
Utilisezlacorrection d’exposition ouchoisissez
unevitessed’obturation plus rapide.
50,85
L’écran d’affichage des photos est
tropclair.
Réglez la luminosité de l’écran
d’affichagedesphotos.
139
Lesphotos sont trop
foncées.
Le flash est désactivé ou le sujet est
faiblementéclairé.
Appuyez sur la touche OPEN/f
(réglage/ouverture du flash) pour
déployer le flash.
29
Laphotoest sous-exposée.
Utilisezlacorrection d’exposition ouchoisissez
unevitessed’obturation plus lente.
50,85
L’écran d’affichage des photos est
tropfoncé.
Réglez la luminosité de l’écran
d’affichagedesphotos.
139
reMarqUes techniqUes
Problème Cause Solution Page
Les couleurs nesont
pas naturelles.
L’appareil est incapable de régler
la balance des blancs, par rapport
aux conditions de prise de vue,
en utilisant la balance des blancs
automatique.
Insérez un objetblancdans le cadre
ou choisissez une autre option de
balancedesblancs.
86
Les informations
sur laphoto ne
s’affichentpas.
Les indicateurs sont cachés.
Appuyez sur DISP. pour afficher les
indicateurs.
42
Laluminositéde
l’écran d’affichage
desphotos change
pendant la miseau
point.
L’éclairage ambiant est faible ou
différent de celui qui a été utilisé
pour la miseaupointautomatique.
C’est normal et il ne s’agit pas d’un
dysfonctionnement.
—
Desbandes
verticales
(«traînées»)
apparaissent sur la
photo.
Lesujetest clair.
C’est normal et il ne s’agit pas d’un
dysfonctionnement.
—
L’indicateurde
niveau nes’affiche
pas.
L’optionNon ouSon estsélectionnée
pour leparamètre Réglage niveau.
Sélectionnez Affichage ou Aff. +
son.
32
Les indicateurs sont cachés.
Appuyez sur DISP. pour afficher les
indicateurs.
42
L’appareilphotoestàl’envers. Tenez l’appareilorientécorrectement. 21
Laphoto n’estpas
de niveau,bien
quel’indicateurde
niveauindiquait
quel’appareilphoto
l’était.
L’appareil a bougé pendant la prise
devue.
Ne prenez pas de photos à partir
d’objetsen déplacement.
—
Lesujet n’estpasde niveau. Vérifiez lesujet. —
Lecture/suppression
Problème Cause Solution Page
Impossibledelire
lesphotos.
L’appareil n’estpasen modelecture. Appuyez sur6. 19,34
Lecâble A/V estbranchéde manière
incorrecte.
Rebranchez lecâble A/V. 118
Le mode vidéo n’est pas adapté au
téléviseur.
Choisissezun autre modevidéo. 149
L’écran de lecture s’affiche dans le
viseurLCD.
RéglezÉcran de lecturesurLCD. 1412
reMarqUes techniqUes
Problème Cause Solution Page
Impossiblede
visualiser les
photos sur lacarte
mémoire.
La carte mémoire est vide ou non
insérée.
Insérezunecartequiaétéformatée
dans leboîtierdel’appareilphotoet
qui contientdesphotosenregistrées
avec celui-ci.
15,
139
Lacarte n’apasétéformatéedans le
boîtierdel’appareilphoto.
Les photos ont été créées avec un
autredispositif.
Les contacts de la carte mémoire
sont sales.
Nettoyez-le avec un chiffon doux
et sec.
—
Lacartefonctionne mal.
Insérez une autre carte. Si vous
pouvez visualiser les photos sur la
seconde carte, la première carte
est probablement défectueuse; ne
l’utilisezplus.
—
L’écran d’affichage
desphotos s’est
éteint.
Labatterieestvide.
Chargez la batterie (batterie
rechargeableuniquement).
12
L’appareil s’est mis hors tension
automatiquement pour économiser
l’énergie.
Mettez l’appareil sous tension. 18
Impossiblede
supprimer le fichier.
Le fichierestprotégé. Supprimez laprotection. 112
Lacarte mémoireestverrouillée.
Impossiblede Déverrouillez lacarte mémoire. 16
formater lacarte.
Lacarteestverrouillée.
Divers
Problème Cause Solution Page
Impossibled’insérer
lacarte mémoire.
La carte n’est pas orientée
correctement.
Insérez et orientez correctement
lacarte.
15
Les commandes
del’appareilphoto
restent sanseffet.
Labatterieestvide.
Chargez la batterie (batterie
rechargeableuniquement).
12
L’appareil fonctionne mal.
Mettez l’appareil hors tension,puis
sous tension de nouveau.
18
Retirezet réinsérez labatterie. 14
Ladateest
incorrecte.
L’horloge n’est pas configurée
correctement.
Configurez l’horlogeavec ladateet
l’heurecorrectes.
20,149
Ladateaété
réinitialisée.
La batterie n’a pas été insérée
pendantenviron unesemaine.
Configurez l’horlogeavec ladateet
l’heurecorrectes.
20,149
L’appareilphoto
nese metpas
hors tension
automatiquement.
L’option Non est sélectionnéepour
leparamètreExtinction auto.
Choisissezun autreréglage. 141
L’appareilphoto
n’émetaucun son.
Leson est coupé.
Choisissez une autre option pour
Réglages volume.
32,142
reMarqUes techniqUes
Problème Cause Solution Page
Lesphotos ne
s’affichentpas sur
letéléviseur.
Le mode vidéo n’est pas adapté
autéléviseur.
Choisissezun autre modevidéo. 149
Lecâble A/V n’estpasbranché. Branchez lecâble A/V. 118
Letéléviseur n’estpas réglésur le
canald’entréevidéo.
Configurez le téléviseur sur le
canald’entréevidéo.
—
Problèmes relatifs à l’ordinateur
Pour en savoir plus, consultez le Mode d’emploi du
logiciel, disponible au format PDF sur le CD fourni.
Alertes desécurité(Windows Vista/WindowsXP)
Consultez ce qui suit si Windows XP Service Pack 3
ou Windows Vista Service Pack 2 affiche une alerte
de sécurité lorsque le boîtier de l’appareil photo est
raccordé ou lorsque le logiciel DL-10 démarre. Les
illustrations de cette section proviennent de Windows
XP.
Si une alerte de sécurité s’affiche,
vérifiez que le programme
provient d’une source fiable et
cliquez sur Débloquer.
Attention
Si vous ne pouvez pas identifier le programme et la source,
cliquez sur Maintenir le blocage pour empêcher votre
ordinateur d’être infecté par un virus ou un logiciel malveillant.
reMarqUes techniqUes
Si vous avez cliqué sur Maintenir le blocage pour bloquer une
application Ricoh, vous pouvez la débloquer dans le
pare-feu Windows.
1 Ouvrez le « pare-feu Windows » dans le Panneau
de configuration.
Ouvrez le menu « Démarrer »
et sélectionnez Panneau
de configuration, puis
double-cliquez sur Pare-feu
Windows (si le pare-feu
Windows n’est pas listé, cliquez sur Basculer vers
l’affichage classique dans l’angle supérieur gauche
du panneau de configuration Windows).
2Autorisez l’application Ricoh à accéder à Internet.
Dans la boîte de dialogue
« Pare-feu Windows », cliquez
sur l’onglet Exceptions et
vérifiez si le logiciel DL-10
est listé dans « Programmes
et services ». Si c’est le cas,
cochez la case à côté de
DL-10 et cliquez sur OK. Dans
le cas contraire, cliquez sur
Ajouter un programme…
pour ajouter DL-10 à la liste des exceptions.
Si vous avez cliqué sur Me redemander ultérieurement pour
bloquer DL-10, une alerte de sécurité s’affichera la
prochaine fois que le programme démarrera. Cliquez sur
Débloquer pour supprimer le blocage.
reMarqUes techniqUes
Caractéristiques
Flash
Mode
Auto(le flash sedéclenchelorsquel’éclairageest faibleouquele
sujetestàcontre-jour),yeuxrouges,activé, synchronisation lente,
manuel,désactivé
Portée(flash
intégré)
Consultez ladocumentation fournieavec l’unitéappareilphoto.
Compensation
de flash
±2,0EV parpasde1/2EV ou1/3EV
Niveaude flash
manuel
MAX,1/1.4,1/2,1/2.8,1/4,1/5.6,1/8,1/11,1/16,1/22,1/32,1/64
Écran d’affichagedes
photos
3,0” LCD transparent ;environ 920000pixels
Modeprisedevue
Auto, changementdeprogramme,prioritéàl’ouverture,prioritéà
l’obturation, manuel, scène,« Mes Réglages»
Qualitéd’image Fine, Normal, RAW(DNG)?*
1
Stockage Carte mémoireSD/SDHC; mémoireinterne(environ 86?Mo)
Taille
fichier?*
2
(environ)
5M FINE:environ 2287 Ko/image
3M FINE:environ 1474 Ko/image
1M FINE:environ 812 Ko/image
VGA FINE:environ 197 Ko/image
Format
fichier
Photos JPEG (Exifversion 2.21)?*
3
, RAW(DNG)
Vidéos AVI?*
4
(compatible OpenDML Motion JPEG)
Compression CompatibleJPEG lignedebase(photosetvidéos)
Autresoptionsprise
devue
Prisedevueen continu(continu,Cont.M +) ; retardateur (délaide
déclenchementd’environ 10?sou2?s),ouoption personnalisée;
prisedevueàintervalles (de5?sà1 heure,par incrémentsde5?s)?*
5
;
cadragecouleur ; N et B (TE) ; sélection d’espacecolorimétrique;
réduction bruit ;affichaged’histogramme;grilledecadrage;
indicateurdeprofondeurdechamp; indicateurde niveau;griffe
alimentée
Autresoptions lecture
Rotation d’imageautomatique,vue multi-images ; zoom en lecture
(jusqu’à16?×) ; redimensionnement
Interface
Connecteur Mini-B USB 2.0(hautdébit) ; stockagede masse?*
6
;
sortieaudio1,0?Vp-p(75?O) ;Connecteurducâble mini HDMI (typeC)
Format signalvidéo NTSC,PAL
Sourcealimentation Batterierechargeable DB-90(3,6?V)
Longévitébatterie(basée
sur normeCIPA)?*
7
Consultez ladocumentation fournieavec l’unitéappareilphoto.
reMarqUes techniqUes
Dimensions (L?×?H?×?P) 113,9?mm?×?70,2?mm?×?28,9?mm (protubérancesexclues)
Poids (approximatif)
• Boîtierdel’appareilphoto(batterie, carte mémoire, courroie
d’encolureet capuchon duconnecteurexclus) :160?g
• Batterie, courroied’encolureet capuchon duconnecteur :66?g
Visde fixation dutrépied 1/4-20UNC
Duréestockagedate Environ 1semaine
Température
fonctionnement
0?°Cà40?°C
Humidité
fonctionnement
85%ou moins
Températurestockage –20?°Cà60?°C
*
1
Un fichier JPEG est également enregistré (le fichier JPEG peut être d’une
qualité fine ou normale avec les mêmes dimensions que le fichier RAW
ou un fichier VGA). Les fichiers RAW utilisent le format standard DNG
promu par Adobe Systems, Inc.
*
2
Pour plus de détails concernant les formats RAW, L et M, reportez-vous à
la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo.
*
3
Compatible avec le système Design rule for Camera File system (DCF,
une norme JEITA) et DPOF. La compatibilité avec d’autres appareils n’est
pas garantie.
*
4
Audio : PCM 32 kHz, monophonique de 16 bits
*
5
Flash désactivé.
*
6
Le stockage de masse est pris en charge sous Windows 2000, Windows
XP, Windows Vista et Mac OS X 10.4–10.5.7.
*
7
Mesurée conformément à la norme CIPA. Pour référence uniquement ;
le nombre réel de prises de vue varie énormément selon l’utilisation de
l’appareil.
reMarqUes techniqUes
Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire
Le nombre approximatif d’images ou la longueur
approximative des vidéos qui peuvent être stockées
dans la mémoire interne ou sur une carte mémoire,
selon les différentes configurations, varie en fonction du
type d’unité appareil photo. Consultez la documentation
fournie avec l’unité appareil photo.
Remarques
• La durée maximale d’une vidéo est de 90 minutes (soit une
taille de 4Go).
• Le nombre maximal de prises de vue qu’il est possible de
prendre en une seule rafale est de 999. Si la mémoire peut
encore stocker plus de 999 photos, « 999 » s’affiche sur le
moniteur.
• En fonction du sujet, le nombre de photos qu’il est possible de
prendre peut différer du nombre de prises de vue restantes.
• La capacité varie selon les conditions de prise de vue et la
fabrication de la carte mémoire.
• Utilisez une carte mémoire haut débit pour de longues périodes
de prise de vue.
reMarqUes techniqUes
Éléments vendus séparément
Le boîtier de l’appareil photo GXR peut être utilisé avec
les accessoires optionnels suivants :
Unité appareil photo Batterie rechargeable
DB-90
Chargeur de batterie BJ-9
Déclencheur à câble CA-
Il s’agit d’un déclencheur distant à
câble qui se fixe au connecteur USB
du boîtier de l’appareil photo.
Viseur LCD VF-2
Il s’agit d’un viseur électrique qui
se fixe sur la griffe alimentée du
boîtier de l’appareil photo. Il offre
une couverture de 100 % et peut
être ajusté sur 90° sans parallaxe
linéaire. Il facilite la prise de vue à
faible angle.
Flash externe GF-
Flash externe développé pour les
appareils photo numériques avec
système de flash automatique avec
posemètre.
Courroie d’encolure ST-9
reMarqUes techniqUes
Étui souple SC-S Étui souple SC-L
Remarques
• Avant d’utiliser des accessoires optionnels, lisez le manuel fourni
avec le produit.
• Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les accessoires
optionnels, visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricohpmmc.
com/).0
reMarqUes techniqUes
Appareil photo et accessoires
Étui souple
SC-55S/SC-55L
Courroie d’encolure ST-3
Déclencheur à
câble CA-1
Batterie rechargeable
DB-90 (fournie)
Chargeur de
batterie BJ-9 (fourni)
Raccordé au
connecteur USB
Unité appareil photo
Fixé à l’unité appareil photo
Fixé à la griffe alimentée
Flash GF-1
Viseur LCD
VF-2
reMarqUes techniqUes
Le flash GF-1 (optionnel)
Un flash optionnel GF-1 peut être raccordé sur la griffe
alimentée.
1
Fermez le couvercle du flash (page 2).
2
Installez le flash.
Mettez hors tension
l’appareil et le GF-1, puis
montez le GF-1 sur la
griffe alimentée.
Griffe alimentée
3Mettez le flash et l’appareil photo sous tension.
4Appuyez sur la touche DIRECT.
5
Sélectionnez la rubrique du mode flash optionnel.
Déplacez le curseur à
l’aide de la touche +, –,
Fn, Fn2 ou de la manette
ADJ. (gauche et droite)
pour sélectionner la
rubrique.
6
Sélectionnez un mode flash.
Faites tourner le sélecteur plus-moins pour
sélectionner un mode flash.
Remarques
• La rubrique du mode flash optionnel ne s’affiche pas lorsque le
GF-1 est hors tension.
• Mettez le GF-1 hors tension pour la prise de vue sans flash.
• Si la rubrique du mode flash optionnel n’est pas affichée, mettez
hors tension l’appareil et le GF-1, puis démontez et remontez le
flash.2
reMarqUes techniqUes
Autres flashes
Utilisez uniquement des flashes avec un terminal à un
signal, sous la forme d’un contact en X, avec une tension
positive inférieure à 20V. Utilisez un flash qui couvre
l’angle de vue de l’objectif.
1
Fermez le couvercle du flash (page 2).
2
Installez le flash.
Mettez hors tension l’appareil et le flash optionnel,
puis montez le flash sur la griffe alimentée.
3 Configurez manuellement l’ouverture.
Mettez l’appareil sous tension, sélectionnez le mode A
ou M, puis choisissez une ouverture (pages 18, 48, 50).
4 Choisissez manuellement une sensibilité ISO.
Sélectionnez une option différente de Auto pour la
sensibilité ISO (page 90).
5Mettez le flash sous tension.
Mettez le flash sous tension et configurez-le en mode
automatique. Réglez l’ouverture et la sensibilité ISO
sur les valeurs sélectionnées avec l’appareil. Faites un
essai de prise de vue et ajustez l’ouverture du flash et
la sensibilité ISO le cas échéant.
Mettez hors tension le flash optionnel avant de le
démonter de l’appareil.
Attention
• Si le flash externe est activé, il se déclenchera à chaque prise
de vue quel que soit le mode flash sélectionné sur l’appareil.
Mettez le flash hors tension pour la prise de vue sans flash.
• Les flashes optionnels sont en principe utilisés pour des
portées supérieures à celle du flash intégré. L’utilisation d’un
flash optionnel pour des portées inférieures peut entraîner une
surexposition.
reMarqUes techniqUes
Utilisation du produit à l’étranger
Utilisation du chargeur de batterie BJ-9
Ce produit est conçu pour être utilisé avec des courants
de 100-240V et 50 ou 60Hz. Avant votre déplacement,
achetez un adaptateur de voyage pour la connexion
sur tout type de prises utilisées dans votre destination.
N’utilisez pas ces produits avec des transformateurs
électriques, qui pourraient les endommager.
Garantie
Ce produit a été fabriqué pour être utilisé dans le
pays d’achat et la garantie n’est pas valable dans
d’autres pays. Dans le cas d’une panne ou d’un
dysfonctionnement de l’appareil à l’étranger, le fabricant
décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du
produit localement ou à la prise en charge de toute
dépense associée.
Lecturesur un téléviseur
Le câble A/V fourni peut être utilisé pour raccorder le
produit à un téléviseur ou un moniteur équipé d’un
terminal d’entrée vidéo. Le produit prend en charge
les formats vidéo NTSC et PAL ; avant de raccorder le
produit à un dispositif vidéo, sélectionnez le mode de
sortie vidéo approprié.
Précautions d’emploi
• La garantie n’est pas valable dans d’autres pays. Dans le cas
d’une panne ou d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil à
l’étranger, le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la
réparation du produit localement ou à la prise en charge de
toute dépense associée.
reMarqUes techniqUes
• Ne faites pas tomber le produit et évitez-lui les chocs physiques.
Lors du transport du produit, faites attention de ne pas le cogner
dans d’autres objets. Faites particulièrement attention à protéger
l’écran d’affichage des photos.
• Le flash peut chauffer s’il est déclenché plusieurs fois de suite.
N’utilisez pas le flash plus que nécessaire. N’utilisez pas le flash
au contact de votre corps ou d’autres objets. Le non-respect de
cette consigne peut entraîner des brûlures ou un incendie.
• L’utilisation du flash à proximité des yeux de votre sujet peut
entraîner une déficience visuelle temporaire. La plus grande
prudence est recommandée pour photographier des enfants. Ne
pointez pas le flash vers le conducteur d’un véhicule à moteur.
• La batterie peut chauffer en cas d’utilisation intensive. Patientez
le temps qu’elle refroidisse avant de la retirer du produit.
• Il peut être difficile de lire l’écran d’affichage des photos sous la
lumière directe du soleil.
• Vous pouvez vous apercevoir que la luminosité de l’écran
d’affichage des photos varie ou que le moniteur présente des
pixels éteints ou toujours allumés. C’est normal pour tous les
moniteurs LCD et il ne s’agit pas d’un dysfonctionnement.
• Ne forcez pas sur l’écran d’affichage des photos.
• Des changements brutaux de température peuvent provoquer
de la condensation visible à l’intérieur du produit ou des
dysfonctionnements. Cela peut être évité en plaçant le
produit dans un sac plastique pour ralentir le changement de
température, puis en le retirant une fois que l’air dans le sac a
atteint la même température que l’environnement.
• Pour éviter d’endommager le produit, n’insérez pas d’objet dans
les fentes du microphone et du haut-parleur.
• Protégez les bornes du connecteur de la poussière.
• Conservez le produit sec et évitez de le manipuler avec les mains
mouillées. Le non-respect de cette consigne peut entraîner des
dysfonctionnements de l’appareil ou un choc électrique.
• Faites un essai de prise de vue pour vous assurer que le produit
fonctionne correctement avant de l’utiliser dans des occasions
importantes, comme un voyage ou un mariage. Nous vous
recommandons de conserver ce manuel et des batteries de
rechange à portée de main.
reMarqUes techniqUes
Conseil : pouréviterla condensation
La condensation se produit généralement lorsque vous vous rendez
dans un endroit avec une brusque différence de température, si
l’humidité est élevée, dans une pièce froide après que le chauffage
ait été mis en marche, ou lorsque le produit est exposé à de l’air
froid en provenance d’un climatiseur ou d’un autre dispositif.
Entretien et stockage
Entretien du produit
• Nettoyez l’écran d’affichage des photos en l’essuyant avec un
chiffon doux légèrement imprégné d’un nettoyant pour écran,
sans solvant organique.
• Nettoyez soigneusement le produit après l’avoir utilisé à la
plage ou après avoir manipulé des produits cosmétiques.
N’exposez pas le produit à des substances volatiles comme du
diluant, du benzène ou des pesticides. Le non-respect de cette
consigne peut endommager le produit ou sa finition.
• Dans l’éventualité d’un dysfonctionnement, consultez un centre
de réparation Ricoh.
• Le produit contient des circuits haute tension. Ne le démontez pas.
• L’écran d’affichage des photos peut se rayer facilement ; évitez
de le toucher avec des objets durs.
Stockage
• Ne stockez pas le produit dans un endroit sujet à : chaleur
ou humidité extrême ; grands changements de température
ou d’humidité ; poussière, saleté ou sable ; fortes vibrations ;
contact prolongé avec des produits chimiques, notamment des
boules de naphtaline ou d’autres produits insecticides, ou des
produits en vinyle ou en caoutchouc ; champs magnétiques
puissants (par exemple à proximité d’un moniteur, d’un
transformateur ou d’un aimant).
• Retirez la batterie si le produit ne doit pas être utilisé pendant
une longue période.
Avant le nettoyage
Mettez l’appareil hors tension et retirez la batterie.
reMarqUes techniqUes
Garantie et réparation
1. Ce produit bénéficie d’une garantie limitée. Pendant la période de garantie indiquée sur la carte de
garantie fournie avec le produit, toute pièce défectueuse sera réparée gratuitement. Dans le cas d’un
dysfonctionnement,contactezledistributeurquivousavenduleproduitouvotrecentrederéparation Ricoh
leplusproche. Veuillez noterquevous neserezpasremboursédesfraisdetransportpour livrer leproduitau
centrederéparation Ricoh.
2. Cettegarantie necouvreaucun dommagerésultantde:
1 non-respectdes instructionsdu moded’emploi ;
2 réparation, modification ourévision non réaliséeparun centredeserviceagréé, listédans le moded’emploi ;
3 incendie, sinistre, catastrophe naturelle, foudre, tension anormale,etc. ;
4 stockageinapproprié(indiquédans le« Moded’emploiduboîtierdel’appareilphoto»), fuitedebatterie
etautres fluides, moisissureoutoutautredéfautd’entretien duproduit.
5 immersion dansl’eau(inondation),exposition àl’alcoolouàd’autresboissons, infiltration desableoude
boue, chocphysique, chuteoupression exercéesur leproduitetautres causes non naturelles.
3. Après l’expiration delapériodedegarantie, tous les fraisderéparation serontàvotrecharge,ycomprisceux
d’un centredeserviceagréé.
4.??Tous les fraisderéparation serontàvotrecharge, mêmeàl’intérieurdelapériodedegarantie, si lacartede
garantie n’estpas jointeousi le nomdudistributeurouladated’achat n’estpas indiquéouaétémodifiésur
lacarte.
5.??Les frais de révision et d’inspection complète, sur demande du client, seront à sa charge complète que la
périodedegarantieaitexpiréou non.
6.??Cettegarantie s’appliqueuniquement auproduit etpas aux accessoires, comme l’étui et la courroie, ni à la
batterieetauxautres consommables fournis.
7.??Tout dommage consécutif à une défaillance du produit, comme les frais de prise de vue ou la perte d’un
profitattendu, neserapas rembourséquelapériodedegarantieaitexpiréou non.
8.??Lagarantieestvalableuniquementdans lepaysoùleproduitaétéacheté.
* Lesdispositions ci-dessus seréfèrentauxréparationsgratuiteset nelimitentvosdroits légaux.
* L’objectifdesdispositions ci-dessusestégalementdécrit sur lacartedegarantiefournieavec leproduit.
9. Lespiècesessentiellesàlaréparation duproduit (c’est-à-direlescomposants nécessairesaufonctionnement
et à la qualité du produit) seront disponibles pendant une période de cinq années après l’arrêt de la
production duproduit.
10.Veuillez noter que si le produit est sérieusement endommagé par une inondation, une immersion, une
infiltration de sableoudeboue,des chocs violentsouune chute, ilpeut être impossiblede le réparer et la
restauration deson étatoriginelpeutêtreimpossible.
Remarques
• Avant d’envoyer le produit en réparation, vérifiez la batterie et relisez le mode
d’emploi pour garantir un fonctionnement correct.
• Certaines réparations nécessitent un certain temps d’exécution.
• Lors de l’envoi du produit à un centre de réparation, veuillez inclure une note décrivant
la pièce défectueuse et le problème rencontré, aussi précisément que possible.
• Démontez tous les accessoires non associés au problème avant d’envoyer le
produit au centre de réparation.
• Cette garantie ne s’applique pas aux données stockées dans la mémoire
interne et sur les cartes mémoire.
reMarqUes techniqUes
NOTICES
USA FCC Part 15 Class B
The equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, then user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. (FCC 15.105B)
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. (FCC 15.21)
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used for
connection to a host computer in order to comply with FCC emission limits. (FCC
15.27)
COMPLIANCEINFORMATION STATEMENT
Product Name: CAMERA BODY
Model Number: GXR
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell NJ, 07006 Tel.: 1-800-225-1899
Noteto Usersin Canada
Note: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003
RemarqueConcernant les Utilisateurs au Canada
Avertissement: Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB-
003 du Canada.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS—SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
DANGER—TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW
THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Index
Symboles
Mode 5 (auto)................................. 4, 21
Touche d (supprimer).................... 3, 39
Touche O (DISP.)............................ 3, 42
Touche N (macro)............................ 3, 27
Touche OPEN/f (flash)................... 3, 29
Touche 6 (lecture).........3, 19, 94, 101
t (retardateur).................................. 3, 31
Touche 8/z....................... 3, 26, 36, 38
Touche 9/Z...................... 3, 26, 36, 38
A
Adobe Reader...................................... 156
Affichage infos prise de vue ........... 145
Affichage touche Fn .......................... 145
Afficher nom de Mon Réglage....... 145
Alerte ...................................................... 173
B
Balance blancs........................................86
Batterie......................................................12
C
Câble A/V........................................... ii, 118
Câble USB..................120, 159, 160, 162
Cadrage.....................................................75
Caplio...................................................... 154
Carte mémoire.............................. 15, 139
CD..................................... ix, 153, 155, 157
Changement de mode prise de vue
...................................................................92
Chargeur de batterie.................. 12, 183
Cible de mise au point.........................66
CL-BKT Noir et Blanc (TE)................. 146
Comp. BB de Mes Réglages............. 133
Compensation balance blancs.........89
Compensation de flash .................... 136
Compensation de niveau ................ 106
Configuration....................................... 128
Connecteur du câble A/V ..................... 3
Contraste........................................ 71, 106
Contre-jour..............................................85
Copier sur carte depuis mémoire
interne.................................................. 115
Correction biais............................ 56, 110
Correction du bougé............................92
Correction exposition flash................78
Couleur.................................71, 75, 86, 89
Courroie d’encolure....................... ii, 179
Couvercle du connecteur..................... 3
Couvercle du flash................................... 2
Couvercle du logement de la
batterie/carte............................ 3, 14, 15
D
Décalage ouverture..............................92
Déclencheur....................................... 2, 23
Déclencheur à câble.......................... 178
Déclencheur ADJ................................ 135
Défaut.....................................59, 127, 128
Délai de validation LCD.................... 142
Diaporama ............................................ 111
Dist. mise au pt snap............................68
DL-10..............................................153, 159
DNG............................................................63
DPOF....................................................... 115
E
Écran d’affichage des photos...3, 8, 42
Éditer Mes Réglages.......................... 132
Éléments vendus séparément....... 178
Enr.Mes Réglages................................ 129
Exposition .........................................50, 85
Extinction auto.................................... 141
F
Flash, optionnel................................... 181
Flash auxiliaire AF....................2, 31, 140
Flou.............................................................24
Fonct. réglage Mon réglage ........... 1339
Format [Carte]...................................... 139
Format [Mémoire interne]............... 139
G
Griffe alimentée .................... 2, 181, 182
Grille de cadrage.......................... 42, 144
H
Haut-parleur.............................................. 3
HDMI ..............................................119, 149
Histogramme................................ 44, 108
Horloge ........................................... 20, 149
Horodatage .............................................84
I
Image zoom numérique.................. 147
Impression ............................................ 122
Indicateur de niveau ............................32
Initialiser...................................................91
Instantané par pression ......................69
Interrupteur MARCHE/ARRÊT ...... 2, 18
Irodio Photo & Video Studio........... 153
J
JPEG............................................................63
L
Lancer extraction réglages............. 150
Language/L................................... 149
Lecture, photos......................................34
Lecture, téléviseur.............................. 118
Lecture, vidéos.......................................94
Logiciel................................................... 154
Luminosité............................44, 106, 139
Luminosité LCD................................... 139
M
Macintosh.............................................. 162
Manette ADJ................................ 3, 5, 134
Mémoire, interne......................... 15, 139
Mémo position curseur menu....... 147
Menu lecture........................................ 101
Menu prise de vue ................................58
Messages d’erreur .............................. 167
Mesure.......................................................66
Mesure exposition.................................70
Microphone............................................... 2
Mise au point..........................................64
Mise au point automatique ........22, 64
Mise au point manuelle ......................65
Mode A (priorité à l’ouverture).... 4, 48
Mode continu .........................................73
Mode flash ...............................................28
Mode M (exposition manuelle)... 4, 50
Mode macro............................................27
Mode M par 1 seule pression......... 138
Mode P (changement de
programme)..................................... 4, 46
Mode S (priorité à l’obturation)... 4, 49
Mode 4...................................... 4, 52
Modes MY ........................................... 4, 57
Mode vidéo..............................................54
Monochrome ...................................71, 75
N
N° séquentiel de la carte ................. 148
Netteté ......................................................71
Niveau de batterie.................................10
Niveau de flash.......................................79
Noir et Blanc.....................................71, 75
NTSC...............................................149, 183
O
Options du sélecteur de mode
lecture.................................................. 138
Options personnalisées.................... 127
Options sélecteur de mode M....... 138
Ordinateur............................................. 151
Ouverture...................................46, 48, 50
P
PAL ..................................................149, 183
PictBridge.............................................. 120
Pré AF.........................................................70
Prise de vue à intervalles....................83
Profondeur de champ..........................6490
Protéger................................................. 112
Q
Qualité image/Taille .............................61
R
Rapprochée (prise de vue).................27
RAW............................................................62
Récupération de Mes Réglages..... 131
Réduction bruit......................................80
Réduction bruit ISO..............................80
Réglage espace couleurs................. 146
Réglage niveau.................................... 144
Réglages image......................................71
Réglage synchro du flash ...................79
RICOH Gate La...................................... 154
Rotation auto....................................... 143
S
SD, SDHC...................................................15
Sélecteur de mode..............................2, 4
Sélecteur plus-moins.........................2, 5
Sensibilité ISO.........................................90
Sensibilité ISO auto-hi ...................... 140
Sons touches........................................ 142
Sortie vidéo .......................................... 149
Suppression de photos.......................39
Surbrillance..............................................43
T
Taille video...............................................63
Téléviseur............................................... 118
Témoin de mise au point
automatique/flash
.......................................3, 18, 22, 29, 141
Touche DIRECT .....................................3, 5
Touche Fn1, Fn2..............................3, 136
Touche C/D.......3, 58, 101, 126
V
Verrouillage de la mise au point......25
Vis de fixation du trépied...................... 3
Visualisation de photos.......................34
Vitesse d’obturation.......................46, 49
VM-1...............................................165, 166
Volume............................................ 94, 142
Vue multi-images..................................36
Z
Zoom..........................................................26
Zoom en lecture ....................................38
Zoom numérique ..................................26
Zoom par 1 seule pression.............. 143Numéros de téléphone des centres d’aide en Europe
UK (from within the UK)
(from outsideof the UK)
02073 656 580
+44 2073 656 580
Deutschland (innerhalb Deutschlands)
(außerhalb Deutschlands)
06331 268 438
+49 6331 268 438
France (àpartirdelaFrance)
(en dehorsdelaFrance)
0800 88 18 70
+33 1 60 60 19 94
Italia (dall’Italia)
(dall’estero)
02 696 33 451
+39 02 696 33 451
España (desdeEspaña)
(desdefueradeEspaña)
91 406 9148
+34 91 406 9148
http://www.service.ricohpmmc.com/Del’espritécologique à la préservation et à la gestion del’environnement
Ricoh promeut avec résolution les technologies douces
et le souci volontariste de l’environnement, adoptant
ainsi une attitude civique visant à préserver les
ressources irremplaçables de notre planète.
Pour réduire la charge éco-agressive des appareils photo
numériques, Ricoh travaille aussi sur les “Économies
d’énergie par réduction de la consommation” et la “Réduction des substances chimiques nuisibles à l’environnement dans les produits”.
En cas de problème
Voir d’abord la section “Résolution des problèmes” (page 165) dans ce manuel. Si le problème persiste, contacter la société
Ricoh.
Bureaux Ricoh
RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC)
OberratherStr.6,40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY
(innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331268438
(außerhalb Deutschlands) +496331268438
http://www.ricohpmmc.com/
RICOH FRANCES.A.S. (PMMCFRANCE)
(àpartirdelaFrance) 0800881870
(en dehorsdelaFrance) +33160601994
À propos de Irodio Photo & Video Studio
Amériquedu Nord(USA) (Appelgratuit) +1–800–458–4029
Europe
Royaume-Uni, Allemagne,FranceetEspagne: (Appelgratuit) +800–1532–4865
Autrespays : +44–1489–564–764
Asie +63–2–438–0090
Chine +86–21–5385–3786
Heuresdebureau:9h00-17h00
*L754 3972A*
Ricoh Company, Ltd.
Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo
104-8222, Japan
2009 Décembre
EN
FR F-FR
Imprimé en Chine
GXR MOUNT A12
Mode d’emploi
Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’objectif.
Contenu de l’emballage
Avant d’utiliser votre objectif Ricoh, vérifiez dans l’emballage qu’il ne
manque aucun des éléments listés ci-dessous.
Unité de montage d’objectif
Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’appareil.
Bague de montage
Est fixée à l’unité de montage d’objectif.
Capuchon du connecteur
Est fixé à l’unité appareil photo.
Dispositif de contrôle
d’objectif
Étui souple ? Mode d’emploi
(le présentmanuel)
? Garantie
Introduction
Pour utiliser cette unité de montage d’objectif, vous devez fixer l’objectif à montage M
Leica ou autre à un boîtier d’appareil photo GXR.
Reportez-vous au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo pour plus de détails
concernant l’utilisation des fonctions de prise de vue et de lecture et la modification
des réglages et pour prendre connaissance des consignes d’utilisation importantes. Ce
mode d’emploi décrit les fonctions et les consignes d’utilisation qui ne sont valides que
lorsque cette unité de montage d’objectif est utilisée avec un boîtier d’appareil photo
compatible. Reportez-vous également au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil
photo GXR.
Pour utiliser les fonctions du produit de manière optimale, lisez attentivement le
présent manuel avant utilisation. Veuillez conserver le présent manuel à portée de
main pour pouvoir vous y référer facilement.
Ricoh Co., Ltd.
Mesures de sécurité Lisez attentivement toutes les mesures de sécurité pour garantir
une utilisation sans danger.
Essais de prise de vue Faites des essais de prise de vue pour vérifier le fonctionnement correct
de l’appareil avant de prendre des photos d’événements importants.
Copyright La reproduction ou la modification de documents, de magazines
et d’autres sources sujettes aux droits d’auteur, autrement que
pour des raisons personnelles, domestiques ou limitées similaires,
est interdite sans le consentement du propriétaire des droits.
Exonération de
responsabilité
Ricoh Co., Ltd. décline toute responsabilité en cas de défaillance
de l’enregistrement ou de l’affichage des photos résultant d’un
dysfonctionnement de l’appareil.
Garantie La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans
le pays d’achat. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à
la réparation du produit dans d’autres pays ou à la prise en charge
de toute dépense associée.
Interférences radio L’utilisation de cet appareil dans le voisinage d’un autre
équipement électronique peut affecter défavorablement à
la fois l’appareil photo et l’autre dispositif. Des interférences
sont notamment probables si l’appareil est utilisé à proximité
d’une radio ou d’un téléviseur. Ce problème peut être résolu en
déplaçant l’appareil aussi loin que possible de l’autre dispositif, en
réorientant l’antenne de la radio ou du téléviseur, ou encore en
branchant la radio ou le téléviseur sur une prise secteur différente.
© 2011 RICOH CO., LTD. Tous droits réservés. Cette publication ne peut être reproduite en tout ou en partie sans
l’autorisation expresse et écrite de Ricoh. Ricoh se réserve le droit de modifier le contenu de ce document à tout
moment et sans avis préalable.
Tous les efforts ont été faits pour garantir l’exactitude des informations contenues dans ce document. Dans le cas
où vous rencontreriez néanmoins une erreur ou une omission, nous vous serions reconnaissants de bien vouloir
nous en avertir à l’adresse indiquée en quatrième de couverture de ce manuel.
Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les objectifs, contactez un revendeur d’objectifs.
Mesures de sécurité
Symboles d’avertissement
Divers symboles sont utilisés tout au long de ce manuel et sur le produit
lui-même pour prévenir tout risque de blessure ou de dommage aux biens.
Ces symboles et leur signification sont détaillés ci-dessous.
Danger
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner
rapidement la mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les
instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies.
Avertissement
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner la
mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les instructions
correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies.
Attention
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner des
blessures corporelles ou des dommages aux biens si les
instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies.
Exemples de signalisation d’avertissement
Le symbole vous signale des actions qui doivent être effectuées.
Le symbole vous signale des actions interdites.
Le symbole peut être combiné avec d’autres pour indiquer qu’une action
spécifique est interdite.
Exemples
= Ne pas toucher = Ne pas démonter
Prenez les précautions indiquées ci-dessous pour utiliser ce matériel en
toute sécurité.
Danger
Ne tentez pas de démonter, de réparer ou de modifier vous-même l’appareil. Les
circuits à haute tension de l’appareil vous font courir un risque de choc électrique.
Avertissement
Conservez l’appareil hors de portée des enfants.
Si le mécanisme interne de l’appareil est exposé suite à un choc ou autre type de
dommage, ne touchez aucun composant interne. Les circuits à haute tension de
l’appareil peuvent causer des chocs électriques. Retirez la batterie dès que possible,
en prenant soin d’éviter tout choc électrique ou brûlure. Apportez l’appareil au
revendeur ou au service après-vente le plus proche s’il est endommagé.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans un endroit humide car vous risqueriez de provoquer un
incendie ou de subir une décharge électrique.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil à proximité de gaz inflammables, d’essence, de benzène,
de solvant ou de substances du même type pour éviter tout risque d’explosion,
d’incendie ou de brûlure.
• N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans des lieux où son usage est limité ou interdit afin
d’éviter tout risque de catastrophe ou d’accident.10
Attention
Ne laissez pas l’équipement prendre l’eau ou se mouiller. Ne l’utilisez pas non plus
avec les mains mouillées. Dans les deux cas, vous risquez de subir une décharge
électrique.
Consignes de
sécurité relatives aux
accessoires
Avant d’utiliser un produit optionnel, lisez attentivement les
instructions fournies avec ce produit.11
Contenu de l’emballage ..................................................................................................... 2
Introduction............................................................................................................................ 4
Mesures de sécurité............................................................................................................. 7
Nomenclature .....................................................................................................15
Nomenclature .....................................................................................................16
Mise à jour du micrologiciel............................................................................................16
Fixation de l’objectif...........................................................................................19
Détermination lorsqu’un objectif peut être utilisé avec l’unité de montage
d’objectif ...........................................................................................................................19
Fixation de l’objectif...........................................................................................................22
Retrait de l’objectif .............................................................................................................22
Nettoyage du capteur........................................................................................23
Prise de vue..........................................................................................................24
Mise au point........................................................................................................................24
Table des matières1
P : Mode Changement de programme / A : Mode Priorité ouverture..................................... 24
S : Mode Priorité à la vitesse d’obturation..................................................................25
M : Mode Exposition manuelle ......................................................................................25
Ajout de modes Scène......................................................................................................26
Agrandissement de photos.............................................................................................27
Enregistrement de fonctions sur le sélecteur plus-moins...................................28
Ajout de tailles prises en charge pour le zoom de redimensionnement
automatique....................................................................................................................28
Réglages...............................................................................................................29
Réglage [Qualité image/Taille] (Menu prise de vue)..............................................29
Photos...........................................................................................................................30
Vidéos............................................................................................................................31
[Réduction bruit].................................................................................................................32
[Balance blancs]...................................................................................................................33
[Sensibilité ISO]....................................................................................................................34
[Assist. mise au pt]..............................................................................................................35
[Illum. périphérique]..........................................................................................................351
[Correction distorsion]......................................................................................................36
[Correction du dégradé de couleurs] ..........................................................................36
[Lim vitess obt flash]..........................................................................................................37
Menu onglet des options personnalisées......................................................38
[Enr. Mes Réglages]............................................................................................................38
[Éditer Mes Réglages]........................................................................................................38
[Confirmation du déclencheur].....................................................................................39
Manette ADJ. Réglage.......................................................................................................39
[Contrôle ISO direct de ADJ.]..........................................................................................40
[Rég. touche Fn1]/[Rég. touche Fn2] ...........................................................................40
[Supprimer Mes Réglages] ..............................................................................................40
[Rétablir valeurs par défaut] ...........................................................................................41
[Touche Zoom] ....................................................................................................................41
Menu Config. .......................................................................................................42
[Sensibilité ISO auto-hi]....................................................................................................42
Réglage [Image zoom numérique] (Onglet de configuration) ..........................42
[Lecture zoom cible]..........................................................................................................431
Modification de [Sons touches].....................................................................................43
[Annul. affich. zoom]..........................................................................................................44
[Sélect. aide m. au point] .................................................................................................44
Caractéristiques..................................................................................................45
Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire................................................................50
Annexes................................................................................................................53
Accessoires en option.......................................................................................................53
Précautions d’emploi.........................................................................................................54
Entretien et stockage de l’équipement.......................................................................56
Garantie et réparation.......................................................................................................581
Nomenclature
1 2 3
1 Connecteur
2 Touche de libération de l'objectif
3 Monture latérale du boîtier1
Nomenclature
Mise à jour du micrologiciel
Lorsque vous fixez pour la première fois l’unité de montage d’objectif au
boîtier de l’appareil photo, la fonction de mise à jour de version démarre
automatiquement si le micrologiciel du boîtier de l’appareil photo doit être
mis à jour. Dans ce cas, mettez à jour le micrologiciel du boîtier de l’appareil
comme suit.
Si la version du micrologiciel est déjà à jour, la fonction de mise à jour de
version ne démarre pas et vous pouvez utiliser l’objectif immédiatement.
1 Vérifiez que l’appareil photo est hors tension et fixez l’unité
appareil photo au boîtier de l’appareil.
• Pour en savoir plus sur la fixation de l’unité appareil photo, reportez-vous
au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo.1
2 Mettez le boîtier de l'appareil photo sous tension.
• Un message de confirmation relatif à la mise à jour du micrologiciel
s’affiche.
3 Appuyez sur les touches Fn1/Fn2 pour sélectionner [Oui], puis
appuyez sur la touche MENU/OK.
• La mise à jour du micrologiciel démarre et les messages suivants
s’affichent sur l’écran d’affichage des photos.
[Vérification du fichier de réécriture]
[Programme de réécriture]
L’appareil photo redémarre, la version du micrologiciel s’affiche, puis la
mise à jour est terminée.1
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Il n’est pas nécessaire que l’objectif soit installé lors de la mise à jour du
micrologiciel.
• Pour confirmer la version du micrologiciel, sélectionnez [Version du
micrologiciel] dans le menu de configuration. Vous pouvez également,
avec l’appareil photo hors tension, maintenir la touche 6 (Lecture)
enfoncée pendant plus d’une seconde tout en maintenant la touche
– enfoncée. La version du micrologiciel s’affiche pendant 20 secondes
environ.
• Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les mises à jour du
micrologiciel, visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/).1
Fixation de l’objectif
Détermination lorsqu’un objectif peut être utilisé avec
l’unité de montage d’objectif
Vérifiez pour savoir si votre objectif peut être fixé à l’unité de montage d’objectif.
1 Alignez les orifices du dispositif de contrôle
d’objectif avec les taquets du montage d’objectif,
puis faites-glisser le dispositif de contrôle
d’objectif bien droit sur l’objectif.
• Faites-le glisser de sorte qu’il repose légèrement sur
l’objectif.0
2 Placez l’objectif sur une surface plane, et vérifiez-le latéralement (du
côté du bord).
• Assurez-vous que le dispositif de contrôle d'objectif et la monture
d'objectif sont fixés fermement sans aucun espacement.
L‘objectif ne peut pas être fixé dans les cas suivants :
L’objectif dépasse de la partie supérieure du dispositif de contrôle
d’objectif.
Un espacement existe entre le dispositif de contrôle d’objectif et le
montage d’objectif.
L’objectif peut être utilisé
avec l’unité.
L’objectif ne peut pas être
utilisé avec l’unité.
L’objectif ne peut pas être
utilisé avec l’unité.1
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Forcez l’installation de l’unité de montage d’objectif sur un objectif qui ne
peut pas être utilisé risque d’endommager ou de rayer l’objectif ou l’unité
de montage d’objectif.
• Ne tentez pas de pousser le dispositif de contrôle d’objectif sur le
montage d’objectif avec la force. Manipulez avec précaution afin de ne
pas rayer ou endommager l’objectif lorsque vous le fixez.
• Si vous utilisez un objectif rétractable, vérifiez que l’objectif est bien
rétracté.
• Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les objectifs compatibles
avec l’unité de montage d’objectif, visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.
ricoh.com/r_dc/).
Veuillez noter que certains objectifs peuvent ne pas être compatibles en
fonction de leurs conditions. Veuillez vérifier au préalable si l’objectif peut
être fixé à l’aide du dispositif de contrôle.
Fixation de l’objectif
1 Alignez le repère sur l’objectif avec la marque rouge sur l’unité de
montage d’objectif, puis fixez l’objectif bien droit sur l’unité de
montage d’objectif.
2 Tournez l'objectif vers la droite jusqu'à ce que les encoches de
verrouillage de l’objectif s’alignent avec la rainure de verrouillage de
celui-ci.
Retrait de l’objectif
1 Tournez l’objectif vers la gauche tout en appuyant sur la touche de
retrait d’objectif jusqu’à ce que la marque sur l’objectif soit alignée
avec la marque rouge sur l’unité de montage d’objectif.
2 Tirez l’objectif bien droit pour le retirer.
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Pour plus d’informations sur l’objectif, reportez-vous au mode d’emploi de
l’objectif et aux autres documents connexes.
Nettoyage du capteur
Procédez comme suit pour nettoyer le capteur.
1 Mettez sous tension.
2 Faites-glisser la touche Marche/Arrêt vers OFF tout en appuyant sur
la touche N.
• Mettez hors tension avec l’obturateur ouvert.
3 Nettoyez l’unité à l’aide d’un soufflant disponible dans le commerce.
4 Une fois le nettoyage terminé, mettez sous tension, puis hors tension
de nouveau.
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Ne touchez pas le capteur ou l’obturateur.
• La couleur peut être pâle si le capteur est soumis à une lumière intense
pendant une période prolongée. Ne posez pas l’appareil photo avec
l’obturateur ouvert.
• Lorsque l’option [Sél. init. déclench.] du menu de configuration est définie
sur [OUVRIR], l’obturateur reste ouvert lorsque l’appareil est mis hors tension.
• N’utilisez pas un pulvérisateur avec cet appareil.
• N’insérez pas les bords du soufflant à l’intérieur du montage.
• Les dommages occasionnés pendant le nettoyage ne sont pas pris en
charge par la garantie.
Prise de vue
Mise au point
L’unique mode de mise au point disponible est MF (Manual Focus, mise au
point manuelle). Réglez la mise au point manuellement à l’aide de l’objectif.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
L’utilisation de l’option [Agrand. affich] (GP. 27) ou de l’option [Assist. mise
au pt] (GP. 35) du menu de prise de vue simplifie la vérification de la mise
au point.
P : Mode Changement de programme / A : Mode Priorité ouverture
P : Mode Changement de programme et A : Mode Priorité ouverture
fonctionne comme c: Mode Prise de vue automatique.
S : Mode Priorité à la vitesse d’obturation
Si [Auto] ou [Auto-Hi] est sélectionné pour Sensibilité ISO, l’exposition sera
réglée correctement dans la plage ISO lorsque l’appareil photo est en mode
de priorité à la vitesse d’obturation.
M : Mode Exposition manuelle
Si [Auto] ou [Auto-Hi] est sélectionné pour Sensibilité ISO, la sensibilité ISO
sera fixée à 200 lorsque l’appareil photo est en mode exposition manuelle.
Vous avez le choix entre B (Bulb, ampoule) et T (Time, heure) pour la vitesse
d’obturation.
Avec le réglage B, l'image est exposée lorsque vous appuyez sur le
déclencheur et l’exposition se termine lorsque le déclencheur est relâché.
Avec le réglage T, l’exposition commence lorsque vous appuyez sur
le déclencheur et se termine lorsque vous appuyez à nouveau sur le
déclencheur. Dans ces deux modes, l’appareil photo cesse la prise de vue
au bout de 180 secondes.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Les réglages B et T peuvent être utilisés à l’aide du déclencheur à câble
optionnel (CA-1).
Ajout de modes Scène
[Miniatures], [Contraste élevé N et B], [Flou artistique], [Traitement croisé],
[Toy Camera] et [Déclencheur électronique] ont été ajoutés au mode Scène.
[Déclencheur électronique] vous permet de prendre des photos sans vous
soucier du son ou des vibrations du déclencheur. Vous pouvez sélectionner
une vitesse d’obturation comprise entre 1/8000 sec. et 1 sec.
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Veillez à remédier au bougé de l’appareil lorsque vous utilisez le mode
[Déclencheur électronique] car un bougé de l’appareil est possible en
raison de durées d’exposition différentes entre les parties supérieure et
inférieure de l’écran. Ce mode n’est pas approprié si les sujets sont en
mouvement.
• Vous ne pouvez pas régler la sensibilité ISO sur 200 lorsque vous utilisez
[Déclencheur électronique].
Agrandissement de photos
Appuyez de manière prolongée sur la touche MENU/OK pour agrandir et
afficher le centre de l’écran. Appuyez de nouveau de manière prolongée sur
la touche MENU/OK pour agrandir le centre de l’écran et afficher la partie
agrandie en plein écran. Appuyez de nouveau de manière prolongée sur la
touche MENU/OK pour revenir à l’affichage normal.
Vous pouvez définir l’agrandissement de l’écran en appuyant de
manière prolongée sur la touche t (Retardateur) ou en sélectionnant
[Agrandissement] dans le menu de prise de vue. Sélectionnez [2×], [4×] ou
[8×] à l’aide des touches +/-, puis appuyez sur la touche MENU/OK.
Vous pouvez déplacer la zone d’affichage agrandie à l’aide des touches de
direction (+/-/Fn1/Fn2).
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• L’écran revient à l’affichage normal une fois la compensation d’exposition
exécutée ou à l’aide de la touche Direct en mode Vue agrandie.
• Si l’option Verr. AE est activée avant l’agrandissement de l’image entière,
la fonction AE est exécutée en mode Vue agrandie et les photos sont
prises avec les paramètres AE verrouillés.
• Vous pouvez définir [Agrandir part.] et [Agrandir tout] sur [Rég. touche
Fn1/Rég. touche Fn2] dans le menu des options personnalisées.
Enregistrement de fonctions sur le sélecteur plus-moins
Vous pouvez basculer entre les modes à l’aide du sélecteur plus-moins
lorsque le mode Flash et le retardateur sont activés.
Ajout de tailles prises en charge pour le zoom de
redimensionnement automatique
Le zoom de redimensionnement automatique prend en charge tous les
rapports d’affichage.
Réglages
Réglage [Qualité image/Taille] (Menu prise de vue)
Les options de qualité de l’image, de taille de l’image et de rapport
d’affichage suivantes sont disponibles pour le réglage [Qualité image/
Taille].
La taille du fichier des photos dépend de l’association qualité de l’image/
taille de l’image utilisée. Lors de l’enregistrement de vidéos, vous pouvez
sélectionner la [Taille video].0
Photos
Paramètre Rapport
d’affichage
Compression Taille de l’image
(pixels)
RAW 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4288×2416
4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
3776×2832
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4288×2848
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
2848×2848
L (Large) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 4288×2416
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3776×2832
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 4288×2848
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2848×2848
M (Middle) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 3456×1944
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3072×2304
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 3456×2304
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2304×23041
Paramètre Rapport
d’affichage
Compression Taille de l’image
(pixels)
5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944
3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536
1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960
VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480
*1 Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit du réglage utilisé pour la copie JPEG.
*2 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent en haut
et en bas de l’affichage de la photo.
*3 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent sur le
côté droit et sur le côté gauche de l’affichage de la photo.
Vidéos
Paramètre Taille vidéo
HD1280 1280×720
VGA640 640×480
QVGA320 320×240
[Réduction bruit]
Choisissez une réduction du bruit entre [Non], [Auto], [Faible], [Forte] ou
[MAX]. Le temps nécessaire à l’enregistrement des images varie en fonction
de l’option sélectionnée.
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction lorsque [Portrait], [Sports],
[Miniatures], [Contraste élevé N et B], [Flou artistique], [Traitement croisé],
[Toy Camera] ou [Correction biais] est sélectionné dans les modes Scène.
[Balance blancs]
Vous pouvez sélectionner [Lampe incandescente1] ou [Lampe
incandescente2] dans les réglages [Balance blancs]. Utilisez cette option
avec une lampe incandescente.
Le réglage [Lampe incandescente2], par rapport à [Lampe incandescente1],
donne une teinte légèrement rougeâtre.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Avec [Lampe incandescente2], vous pouvez obtenir les mêmes densités
de couleur qu’avec le réglage [Incandescent] décrit dans le Mode
d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo.
• Si le flash est déclenché avec DISP. dans [Manuel], la balance des blancs
est définie sur les résultats de mesure calculés lors du déclenchement du
flash.
[Sensibilité ISO]
[ISO-LO], [ISO 250], [ISO 320], [ISO 500], [ISO 640], [ISO 1000], [ISO 1250],
[ISO 2000] et [ISO 2500] ont été ajoutés.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• [ISO-LO] équivaut à ISO 100 ([Déclencheur électronique] du mode scène
équivaut à ISO 125). Toutefois, la plage dynamique est réduite et des
niveaux de luminosité supérieurs sont possibles.
• Lorsque l’option [Auto] est sélectionnée et que le flash est utilisé, la
sensibilité utilisée atteindra une sensibilité équivalente à ISO 800.
• Lorsque l’option [Auto] est sélectionnée et que le flash n’est pas utilisé, les
valeurs minimales et maximales respectives pour la sensibilité ISO seront
ISO 200 et ISO 400.
([Déclencheur électronique] en mode scène est ISO 250.)
[Assist. mise au pt]
Les contours et le contraste des images affichées sur l’écran sont intensifiés,
facilitant le réglage de la mise au point.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Vous pouvez sélectionner la méthode d’affichage de l’option Assist. mise au
pt dans [Sélect. aide m. au point] dans le menu de configuration. (GP. 44)
[Illum. périphérique]
Vous pouvez corriger l’intensité de lumière d’arrière-plan dans la plage
comprise entre -3 et +3.
[Correction distorsion]
Vous pouvez corriger la distorsion dans une image en sélectionnant
[Barillet] ou [Coussinet], puis en sélectionnant [Forte], [Moyenne] ou
[Faible].
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Vous ne pouvez pas apporter des corrections à des images affichées sur
l’écran d’affichage des photos ou à des images RAW.
[Correction du dégradé de couleurs]
Vous pouvez corriger les nuances de couleurs aux quatre coins de l’image.
Vous pouvez corriger dans une plage comprise entre -4 et +4 pour R
(rouge) et B (bleu).
[Lim vitess obt flash]
Utilisez cette option pour limiter la vitesse d’obturation à des vitesses
inférieures lorsque le flash est utilisé pour empêcher un bougé de l’appareil
photo. Sélectionnez entre [Auto], [1/2], [1/4], [1/8], [1/15], [1/30], [1/60] ou
[1/125]. La vitesse d’obturation ne sera pas inférieure à la vitesse définie
lorsque le flash est utilisé.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Le réglage de vitesse d’obturation maximale qui fonctionne avec le
flash est de 1/180 sec. Le flash ne peut pas être utilisé avec des vitesses
d’obturation supérieures à ce réglage. La vitesse d’obturation ne sera
pas supérieure à 1/180 sec. lorsque le flash est utilisé. Ceci s’applique
également à un flash externe.
• Ce réglage n’est pas valide lors de l’utilisation du flash avec
synchronisation lente.
Menu onglet des options personnalisées
[Enr. Mes Réglages]
Vous pouvez sélectionner entre l’une des options Mes réglages Boîte [1] à
[6] et Carte [1] à [6] pour l’emplacement d’enregistrement.
[Éditer Mes Réglages]
Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres [Nom objectif], [Long. focale] et
[Ouverture F] des fichiers Exif dans [Saisie info objectif] dans [Éditer Mes
Réglages].
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ces informations n’affectent pas les réglages de prise de vue.
[Confirmation du déclencheur]
Lorsque l’option [ADJ./DIRECT] est définie, appuyez sur le déclencheur
jusqu’à mi-course pour finaliser les réglages en mode ADJ. et sur l’écran
DIRECT. Vous pouvez alors prendre des photos. Lorsque l’option [ADJ.] est
définie, les réglages du mode ADJ. sont finalisés, ce qui vous permet de
prendre des photos. Lorsque l’option [DIRECT] est définie, les réglages de
l’écran DIRECT sont finalisés, ce qui vous permet de prendre des photos.
Une fois la prise de vue terminée, le système revient à l’écran de contrôle.
Manette ADJ. Réglage
Vous pouvez définir la fonction [Format] dans [Manette ADJ. Réglage 1] à
[Manette ADJ. Réglage 4].
Si vous définissez la fonction Format et que vous appuyez sur la touche
Manette ADJ. , s’affiche, vous permettant ainsi de définir le format.0
[Contrôle ISO direct de ADJ.]
Lorsque l’option [Contrôle ISO direct de ADJ.] est réglée sur [Oui], vous
pouvez pousser la manette ADJ. latéralement lorsque la prise de vue est
possible pour modifier la sensibilité ISO. Le réglage par défaut est [Non].
[Rég. touche Fn1]/[Rég. touche Fn2]
Les fonctions [Agrand. affich], [Assist. mise au pt] et [Format] ont été
ajoutées.
[Supprimer Mes Réglages]
Les réglages enregistrés pour [Boîte Mes Réglages] dans [Enr. Mes
Réglages], pour [Carte] et pour [MY1], [MY2] et [MY3] sur le sélecteur de
mode sont ramenés à leur valeur par défaut.1
[Rétablir valeurs par défaut]
Les options personnalisées seront réinitialisées.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Les réglages définis dans [Enr. Mes Réglages] ne seront pas restaurés.
[Touche Zoom]
Vous pouvez sélectionner [Non], [Zoom numérique], [Correction de
l’exposition] ou [Balance blancs] pour les fonctions assignées aux touches
8/9.
Menu Config.
[Sensibilité ISO auto-hi]
Vous pouvez définir les limites supérieures de la sensibilité ISO et de la
vitesse d’obturation afin de modifier la [Sensibilité ISO] lorsqu’elle est
définie sur [Auto-Hi].
Réglage [Image zoom numérique] (Onglet de configuration)
La taille de l’image enregistrée varie en fonction du zoom de
redimensionnement automatique, de la manière suivante.
Rapport de zoom Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Rapport de zoom Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Environ 1,0× L Environ 1,8× 3M
Environ 1,2× M Environ 3,0× 1M
Environ 1,5× 5M Environ 5,9× VGA
[Lecture zoom cible]
Avec l’option Vue agrandie en mode de lecture, vous pouvez effectuer un
zoom avant sur l’image centrée à la position à laquelle l’appareil photo a
été placé par la cible pendant la prise de vue.
Modification de [Sons touches]
[Sons déclench.] est désactivé en mode [Cont.M + (rapide)]. Les sons du
déclencheur ne sont pas désactivés lorsqu’un déclencheur mécanique
ou lorsque l’option [Déclencheur électronique] dans le mode Scène est
utilisé. Les sons de mise au point sont désactivés lorsque l’exposition est
verrouillée lorsque vous appuyez jusqu’à mi-course sur le déclencheur.
[Annul. affich. zoom]
Vous pouvez choisir de conserver ou d’annuler la vue agrandie après la
prise de photos en mode Vue agrandie. Sélectionnez [Non] pour conserver
le mode Vue agrandie et [Oui] pour l’annuler une fois les photos prises.
[Sélect. aide m. au point]
Lorsque l'option [Aide m. au p.] est définie sur [Oui] dans le menu de prise
de vue, vous pouvez sélectionner [MODE 1] ou [MODE 2].
MODE 1 : Les contours des sujets/objets mis au point sont améliorés.
MODE 2 : L'écran d’affichage des photos passe en noir et blanc et la zone de
mise au point brille en blanc.
Caractéristiques
Les caractéristiques correspondent à l’unité appareil photo installée sur un
boîtier GXR.
Pixels réels Environ 12,3 millions
Capteur d’image 23,6 mm×15,7 mm CMOS (nombre total de pixels : environ
12,9 millions)
Zoom 4,0× zoom numérique (photos), zoom numérique
3,6×(vidéos) ; environ 5,9× zoom de redimensionnement
automatique (VGA)
Mode mise au point MF
Vitesse
d’obturation
Photos 1/4000–180s, B (Bulb, ampoule), T (Time, heure) (les limites inférieures
et supérieures varient en fonction du mode prise de vue et flash)
Vitesse d’obturation maximale de synchronisation Flash : 1/180 s
Vidéos 1/2000–1/30s
Contrôle
exposition
Mesure Mesure TTL-CCD en modes multi (256 segments), central
pondéré, et spot avec verrouillage de l’exposition automatique
Mode Priorité à l’ouverture AE, exposition manuelle, fonction de
décalage de la cible
Correction de
l’exposition
Manuelle (+4,0 à -4,0EV par incrément de 1/3EV ou 1/2EV), cadrage
automatique (-2EV à +2EV par incrément de 1/3EV ou 1/2EV)
Portée du lien d’exposition
(mode prise de vue
automatique, mesure
centrale pondérée de la
lumière)
Pour l’utilisation d’un objectif standard (F2,5) : 1,2 EV à 13,2 EV
(portée du lien pour une sensibilité ISO automatique convertie
en fonction de la valeur EV pour ISO100)
Sensibilité ISO
(sensibilité sortie standard)
Auto, Auto-Hi, ISO-LO, ISO 200, ISO 250, ISO 320, ISO 400, ISO
500, ISO 640, ISO 800, ISO 1000, ISO 1250, ISO 1600, ISO 2000,
ISO 2500, ISO 3200
Balance des blancs Auto, Multi-P AUTO, En extérieur, Nuageux, Incandescente1,
Incandescente2, Lampe fluorescente, Réglage manuel, Détail ;
cadrage auto balance des blancs
Flash Réglage de
puissance du
flash
Flash TTL, flash manuel, lumière ambiante auto (fonction
disponible uniquement avec le flash externe GF-1)
Numéro de guide 9,6 (équivalent : ISO 200)
6,8 (équivalent : ISO 100)
Angle d’exposition à partir de 24 mm (équivalent : 35 mm)
Synchronisation Synchronisation premier/deuxième rideau
Autre Compatible avec le flash externe GF-1
Mode prise de vue Auto, changement de programme, priorité à l’ouverture,
priorité à l’obturation, manuel, scène (vidéo, portrait, sports,
paysage, nuit, correction biais, Miniatures, Contraste élevé N et
B, Flou artistique, Traitement croisé, Toy Camera, Déclencheur
électronique), Mes Réglages
Mode
continu
Nombre de
photos prises
à l’aide de
l’option Continu
(Taille d’image :
RAW)
Réduction du bruit désactivée ou activée (faible) : 4 photos,
Réduction du bruit activée (forte) : 3 photos
Réduction du bruit activée MAX : 3 photos
Nombre de
photos prises à
l’aide de l’option
Cont.M + (un
ensemble)
Rap (1280 × 856) : 30 photos (24 images/s)
Len (4288 × 2848) : 15 photos (3 images/s)
Compression*1
FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2
Taille de
l’image
(pixels)
Photos 4288×2416, 3776×2832, 4288×2848, 2848×2848,
3456×1944, 3072×2304, 3456×2304, 2304×2304,
2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480
Vidéos 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240
Taille fichier
(approximative)
RAW 16:9 NORMAL : 17 800Ko/image, FINE : 19 515Ko/image,
VGA : 15 587Ko/image
4:3 NORMAL : 18 387Ko/image, FINE : 20 157Ko/image,
VGA : 16 124Ko/image
3:2 NORMAL : 20 946Ko/image, FINE : 22 967Ko/image,
VGA : 18 337Ko/image
1:1 NORMAL : 13 991Ko/image, FINE : 15 333Ko/image,
VGA : 12 273Ko/image
L 16:9 NORMAL : 2 222Ko/image, FINE : 3 816Ko/image
4:3 NORMAL : 2 315Ko/image, FINE : 3 960Ko/image
3:2 NORMAL : 2 615Ko/image, FINE : 4 493Ko/image
1:1 NORMAL : 1 761Ko/image, FINE : 3 009Ko/image
M 16:9 NORMAL : 1 475Ko/image, FINE : 2 509Ko/image
4:3 NORMAL : 1 574Ko/image, FINE : 2 662Ko/image
3:2 NORMAL : 1 744Ko/image, FINE : 2 968Ko/image
1:1 NORMAL : 1 186Ko/image, FINE : 2 003Ko/image
5M 4:3 FINE : 2 287Ko/image
3M 4:3 FINE : 1 474Ko/image
Taille fichier
(approximative)
1M 4:3 FINE : 812Ko/image
VGA 4:3 FINE : 197Ko/image
Longévité batterie
(basée sur norme CIPA)
DB-90 : environ 330 prises de vue*3
(Basé sur la directive CIPA)
Dimensions (L×H×P) Unité de montage d’objectif uniquement :
79,1mm×60,9mm×40,5mm (Basé sur la directive CIPA)
Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo :
120mm×70,2mm×45,7mm (Basé sur la directive CIPA)
Tirage mécanique : 27,8mm
Poids (approximatif) Unité de montage d’objectif uniquement : 170 g
Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo : 370 g
(y compris la batterie et la carte mémoire SD)
Température fonctionnement 0°C à 40°C
Humidité fonctionnement 90% ou moins
Température stockage –20°C à 60°C0
*1 Les options disponibles varient selon la taille d’image.
*2 Un fichier JPEG est également enregistré (le fichier JPEG peut être d’une qualité FINE
ou NORMAL avec les mêmes dimensions que le fichier RAW ou VGA pour une taille de
640×480 pixels). Les fichiers RAW utilisent le format standard DNG promu par Adobe
Systems, Inc.
*3 Pour référence uniquement ; le nombre réel de prises de vue varie énormément selon
l’utilisation de l’appareil. Nous vous recommandons d’emporter des batteries de rechange
lors d’une utilisation pendant une période prolongée.
Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire
Les valeurs suivantes sont données à titre de référence de la capacité de stockage
de la mémoire interne et de cartes mémoire de différentes tailles, en fonction de la
qualité d’image et de la taille d’image, lors de l’utilisation de la qualité d’image FINE.
Photos
Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go
RAW*
FINE
4288×2416 4 49 100 197 404 810 1625
3776×2832 4 47 97 191 391 784 1573
4288×2848 3 42 85 168 343 688 1380
2848×2848 5 63 128 251 513 1029 20651
Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go
L
FINE
4288×2416 21 235 476 935 1912 3830 7684
3776×2832 20 227 462 907 1854 3715 7453
4288×2848 18 200 407 799 1633 3272 6565
2848×2848 27 299 608 1195 2442 4893 9815
M
FINE
3456×1944 32 357 724 1419 2902 5814 11662
3072×2304 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014
3456×2304 27 302 614 1206 2466 4941 9913
2304×2304 41 447 903 1774 3627 7267 14578
5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238
3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063
1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181
VGA/FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581
* Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit de la compression utilisée pour la copie
JPEG.
Vidéos
Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Mémoire
interne
1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go
1280×720
24 images/seconde
21s 3min
49s
7min
46s
15min
58s
31min
10s
62min
26s
125min
15s
640×480
24 images/seconde
1min 11min
2s
22min
27s
46min
10s
90min
7s
180min
32s
362min
9s
320×240
24 images/seconde
2min
25s
26min
24s
53min
43s
110min
27s
215min
35s
431min
52s
866min
19s
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
La taille d’enregistrement sans interruption maximale pour une vidéo est de
4 Go. La durée maximale d’enregistrement est de 15 minutes environ pour
une taille de 1280 × 720, de 46 minutes environ pour une taille de 640 × 480
et de 90 minutes environ pour une taille de 320 × 240.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Lors de l’enregistrement de vidéos avec la taille de vidéo définie sur 1280 ×
720, l’utilisation de cartes mémoire SD/SDHC de classe 6 est recommandée.
Annexes
Accessoires en option
L’objectif RICOH peut être utilisé avec les éléments suivants (vendus séparément).
Étui de boîtier
+ courroie d’encolure
(SC-75B)
Étui d’unité appareil photo
(SC-75T)
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Avant d’utiliser un accessoire optionnel, consultez la documentation
fournie avec le produit.
• Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les accessoires optionnels,
visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricohpmmc.com/).
Précautions d’emploi
• La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans le pays d’achat.
• Dans le cas d’une panne ou d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil à l’étranger, le
fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit localement
ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée.
• Ne faites pas tomber l’équipement et évitez-lui les chocs physiques.
• Lors du transport de l’équipement, faites attention de ne pas le cogner dans d’autres
objets. Faites particulièrement attention à protéger l’objectif.
• Lors de la fixation d’un filtre ou d’un pare-soleil, veillez à ne pas exercer une pression
excessive.
• Des changements brutaux de température peuvent provoquer de la condensation
visible dans l’objectif ou des dysfonctionnements de l’équipement. Cela peut être
évité en plaçant l’équipement dans un sac plastique pour ralentir le changement
de température, puis en le retirant une fois que l’air dans le sac a atteint la même
température que l’environnement.
• Ne touchez pas le capteur d’image.
• Conservez l’équipement sec et évitez de le manipuler avec les mains mouillées.
Le non-respect de cette consigne peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements de
l’équipement ou un choc électrique.
• Gardez le connecteur propre.
Conseil : pour éviter la condensation---------------------------------------------
La condensation se produit généralement lorsque vous vous rendez dans
un endroit avec une brusque différence de température, si l’humidité
est élevée, dans une pièce froide après que le chauffage ait été mis en
marche, ou lorsque l’appareil est exposé à de l’air froid en provenance d’un
climatiseur ou d’un autre dispositif.
Entretien et stockage de l’équipement
Entretien de l’équipement
• Les photos peuvent être altérées par des empreintes ou d’autres matières
étrangères sur l’objectif. Évitez de toucher l’objectif avec les doigts. Éliminez
la poussière ou les peluches avec un soufflant disponible dans le commerce,
ou nettoyez doucement l’objectif avec un chiffon doux et sec. Faites
particulièrement attention au voletcache objectif.
• Nettoyez soigneusement l’équipement après l’avoir utilisé à la plage ou après
avoir manipulé des produits cosmétiques. N’exposez pas l’équipement à des
substances volatiles comme du diluant, du benzène ou des pesticides. Le nonrespect de cette consigne peut endommager l’équipement ou sa finition.
• Dans l’éventualité d’un dysfonctionnement, consultez un centre de réparation
Ricoh.
• Cet équipement est un dispositif de haute précision. Ne le démontez pas.
Stockage
• Ne stockez pas l’appareil photo dans un endroit sujet à : chaleur ou
humidité extrême ; grands changements de température ou d’humidité ;
poussière, saleté ou sable ; fortes vibrations ; contact prolongé avec des
produits chimiques, notamment des boules de naphtaline ou d’autres
produits insecticides, ou des produits en vinyle ou en caoutchouc ; champs
magnétiques puissants (par exemple à proximité d’un moniteur, d’un
transformateur ou d’un aimant).
• Lorsque vous rangez votre appareil photo, veillez à l’installer dans un étui, etc.,
dans lequel la poussière ou les peluches ne pénètrent pas afin d’empêcher la
saleté ou la poussière de se déposer sur l’appareil photo.
De plus, lorsque vous transportez l’appareil photo, ne le mettez pas
directement dans une poche, etc., afin d’empêcher la saleté ou la poussière de
se déposer sur l’appareil photo.
Garantie et réparation
1. Ce produit bénéficie d’une garantie limitée. Pendant la période de garantie
indiquée sur la carte de garantie fournie avec votre équipement, toute pièce
défectueuse sera réparée gratuitement. Dans le cas d’un dysfonctionnement
de l’équipement, contactez le distributeur qui vous a vendu l’équipement ou
votre centre de réparation Ricoh le plus proche. Veuillez noter que vous ne
serez pas remboursé des frais de transport pour livrer votre équipement au
centre de réparation Ricoh.
2. Cette garantie ne couvre aucun dommage résultant de :
1 non-respect des instructions du mode d’emploi ;
2 réparation, modification ou révision non réalisée par un centre de service
agréé, listé dans le mode d’emploi ;
3 incendie, sinistre, catastrophe naturelle, foudre, tension anormale, etc. ;
4 stockage inapproprié (indiqué dans le « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de
l’appareil photo »), fuite de batterie et autres fluides, moisissure ou tout
autre défaut d’entretien de l’équipement.
5 immersion dans l’eau (inondation), exposition à l’alcool ou à d’autres
boissons, infiltration de sable ou de boue, choc physique, chute ou pression
exercée sur l’équipement et autres causes non naturelles.
3. Après l’expiration de la période de garantie, tous les frais de réparation seront
à votre charge, y compris ceux d’un centre de service agréé.
4. Tous les frais de réparation seront à votre charge, même au cours de la période
de garantie, si la carte de garantie n’est pas jointe ou si le nom du distributeur
ou la date d’achat n’est pas indiqué ou a été modifié sur la carte.
5. Les frais de révision et d’inspection complète, sur demande du client, seront à
sa charge complète que la période de garantie ait expiré ou non.
6. Tout dommage consécutif à une défaillance de l’équipement, comme les frais
de prise de vue ou la perte d’un profit attendu, ne sera pas remboursé que la
période de garantie ait expiré ou non.
7. La garantie est valable uniquement dans le pays où l’équipement a été acheté.
* Les dispositions ci-dessus se réfèrent aux réparations gratuites et ne limitent
vos droits légaux.
* L’objectif des dispositions ci-dessus est également décrit sur la carte de
garantie fournie avec l’équipement.0
8. Les pièces essentielles à la réparation de l’équipement (c’est-à-dire les
composants nécessaires au fonctionnement et à la qualité de l’équipement)
seront disponibles pendant une période de cinq années après l’arrêt de la
production de l’équipement.
9. Veuillez noter que si l’équipement est sérieusement endommagé par une
inondation, une immersion, une infiltration de sable ou de boue, des chocs
violents ou une chute, il peut être impossible de le réparer et la restauration de
son état originel peut être impossible.
Remarques------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Avant d’envoyer l’appareil en réparation, vérifiez le boîtier de l’appareil
photo et relisez le mode d’emploi pour garantir un fonctionnement correct.
• Certaines réparations nécessitent un certain temps d’exécution.
• Lors de l’envoi de l’équipement à un centre de réparation, veuillez inclure
une note décrivant la pièce défectueuse et le problème rencontré, aussi
précisément que possible.
• Démontez tous les accessoires non associés au problème avant d’envoyer
l’appareil au centre de réparation.1
En cas de problème
Bureaux Ricoh
RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V.
(EPMMC)
Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY
(innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438
(außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438
http://www.ricohpmmc.com/
RICOH FRANCE S.A.S. (PMMC FRANCE)
(à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70
(en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94Ricoh Company, Ltd.
Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo
104-8222, Japan
2011 août
FR F-FR
Imprimé en Chine
*L454 3972*
GR LENS A12 28mm F2.5
Mode d’emploi
Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’objectif.
Contenu de l’emballage
Avant d’utiliser votre objectif Ricoh, vérifiez dans l’emballage qu’il ne
manque aucun des éléments listés ci-dessous.
Unité appareil photo
Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’appareil.
Capuchon de l’objectif
Est fixé à l’unité appareil photo.
?Mode d’emploi
(le présentmanuel)
? Garantie
Capuchon du connecteur
Est fixé à l’unité appareil photo.
Étui souple
Introduction
Pour utiliser cet objectif, vous devez l’installer sur un boîtier d’appareil photo
compatible.
Reportez-vous au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo pour plus de détails
concernant l’utilisation des fonctions de prise de vue et de lecture et la modification
des réglages et pour prendre connaissance des consignes d’utilisation importantes.
Ce mode d’emploi décrit les fonctions et les consignes d’utilisation qui ne sont valides
que lorsque cette unité appareil photo est utilisée avec un boîtier d’appareil photo
compatible. Reportez-vous également au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil
photo GXR.
Pour utiliser les fonctions du produit de manière optimale, lisez attentivement le
présent manuel avant utilisation. Veuillez conserver le présent manuel à portée de
main pour pouvoir vous y référer facilement.
Ricoh Co., Ltd.
Mesures de sécurité Lisez attentivement toutes les mesures de sécurité pour garantir
une utilisation sans danger.
Essais de prise de vue Faites des essais de prise de vue pour vérifier le fonctionnement correct
de l’appareil avant de prendre des photos d’événements importants.
Copyright La reproduction ou la modification de documents, de magazines
et d’autres sources sujettes aux droits d’auteur, autrement que
pour des raisons personnelles, domestiques ou limitées similaires,
est interdite sans le consentement du propriétaire des droits.
Exonération de
responsabilité
Ricoh Co., Ltd. décline toute responsabilité en cas de défaillance
de l’enregistrement ou de l’affichage des photos résultant d’un
dysfonctionnement de l’appareil.
Garantie La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans
le pays d’achat. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à
la réparation du produit dans d’autres pays ou à la prise en charge
de toute dépense associée.
Interférences radio L’utilisation de cet appareil dans le voisinage d’un autre
équipement électronique peut affecter défavorablement à
la fois l’appareil photo et l’autre dispositif. Des interférences
sont notamment probables si l’appareil est utilisé à proximité
d’une radio ou d’un téléviseur. Ce problème peut être résolu en
déplaçant l’appareil aussi loin que possible de l’autre dispositif, en
réorientant l’antenne de la radio ou du téléviseur, ou encore en
branchant la radio ou le téléviseur sur une prise secteur différente.
© 2010 RICOH CO., LTD. Tous droits réservés. Cette publication ne peut être reproduite en tout ou en partie sans
l’autorisation expresse et écrite de Ricoh. Ricoh se réserve le droit de modifier le contenu de ce document à tout
moment et sans avis préalable.
Tous les efforts ont été faits pour garantir l’exactitude des informations contenues dans ce document. Dans le cas
où vous rencontreriez néanmoins une erreur ou une omission, nous vous serions reconnaissants de bien vouloir
nous en avertir à l’adresse indiquée en quatrième de couverture de ce manuel.
Mesures de sécurité
Symboles d’avertissement
Divers symboles sont utilisés tout au long de ce manuel et sur le produit
lui-même pour prévenir tout risque de blessure ou de dommage aux biens.
Ces symboles et leur signification sont détaillés ci-dessous.
Danger
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner
rapidement la mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les
instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies.
Avertissement
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner la
mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les instructions
correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies.
Attention
Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner des
blessures corporelles ou des dommages aux biens si les
instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies.
Exemples de signalisation d’avertissement
Le symbole vous signale des actions qui doivent être effectuées.
Le symbole vous signale des actions interdites.
Le symbole peut être combiné avec d’autres pour indiquer qu’une action
spécifique est interdite.
Exemples
= Ne pas toucher = Ne pas démonter
Prenez les précautions indiquées ci-dessous pour utiliser ce matériel en
toute sécurité.
Danger
Ne tentez pas de démonter, de réparer ou de modifier vous-même l’appareil. Les
circuits à haute tension de l’appareil vous font courir un risque de choc électrique.
Avertissement
Conservez l’appareil hors de portée des enfants.
Si le mécanisme interne de l’appareil est exposé suite à un choc ou autre type de
dommage, ne touchez aucun composant interne. Les circuits à haute tension de
l’appareil peuvent causer des chocs électriques. Retirez la batterie dès que possible,
en prenant soin d’éviter tout choc électrique ou brûlure. Apportez l’appareil au
revendeur ou au service après-vente le plus proche s’il est endommagé.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans un endroit humide car vous risqueriez de provoquer un
incendie ou de subir une décharge électrique.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil à proximité de gaz inflammables, d’essence, de benzène,
de solvant ou de substances du même type pour éviter tout risque d’explosion,
d’incendie ou de brûlure.
• N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans des lieux où son usage est limité ou interdit afin
d’éviter tout risque de catastrophe ou d’accident.
Attention
Ne laissez pas l’équipement prendre l’eau ou se mouiller. Ne l’utilisez pas non plus
avec les mains mouillées. Dans les deux cas, vous risquez de subir une décharge
électrique.
Consignes de
sécurité relatives aux
accessoires
Avant d’utiliser un produit optionnel, lisez attentivement les
instructions fournies avec ce produit.10
Contenu de l’emballage ..................................................................................................... 2
Introduction............................................................................................................................ 3
Mesures de sécurité............................................................................................................. 6
Nomenclature de l’objectif...............................................................................13
Mise à jour du produit.......................................................................................14
Mise à jour du micrologiciel de l’appareil photo.....................................................14
Prise de vue..........................................................................................................17
Fonctions de prise de vue macro..................................................................................17
Mode P : Changement de programme.......................................................................18
Mode M : Exposition manuelle ......................................................................................20
Lecture..................................................................................................................21
Affichage des informations sur l’unité appareil photo .........................................21
Table des matières11
Réglages...............................................................................................................22
Réglage [Qualité image/Taille] (Menu prise de vue)..............................................22
Photos...........................................................................................................................23
Vidéos............................................................................................................................24
Réglage [Réduction bruit] (Menu de prise de vue) ................................................25
Réglage [Sensibilité ISO] (Menu prise de vue) .........................................................26
[Agrand. affich] (Menu de prise de vue).....................................................................27
[Enr. Mes Réglages] (Options personnalisées)..........................................................28
[Confirmation du déclencheur] (Menu onglet des options personnalisées)...28
Réglages de la manette ADJ. (Menu onglet des options personnalisées).....29
Réglages des touches Fn1/Fn2 (Menu onglet des options personnalisées)....29
[Supprimer Mes Réglages] (Menu onglet des options personnalisées).........30
[Rétablir valeurs par défaut] (Menu onglet des options personnalisées)......30
Réglage [Image zoom numérique] (Onglet de configuration) ..........................31
[Réglages bague mise au point] (Onglet de configuration)................................321
[Réglage Zone AF Spot] (Menu onglet de configuration)....................................33
Caractéristiques..................................................................................................34
Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire................................................................40
Annexes................................................................................................................43
Accessoires en option.......................................................................................................43
Précautions d’emploi.........................................................................................................44
Entretien et stockage de l’équipement.......................................................................46
Garantie et réparation.......................................................................................................481
Nomenclature de l’objectif
1 2 3
1 Connecteur
2 Bague de mise au point
3 Objectif1
Mise à jour du produit
Mise à jour du micrologiciel de l’appareil photo
Lorsque vous fixez pour la première fois l’unité appareil photo au boîtier de
l’appareil, la fonction de mise à jour de version démarre automatiquement
si le micrologiciel du boîtier de l’appareil doit être mis à jour. Dans ce cas,
mettez à jour le micrologiciel du boîtier de l’appareil comme suit.
Si la version du micrologiciel est déjà à jour, la fonction de mise à jour de
version ne démarre pas et vous pouvez utiliser l’objectif immédiatement.
1 Vérifiez que l’appareil photo est hors tension et fixez l’unité
appareil photo au boîtier de l’appareil.
• Pour en savoir plus sur la fixation de l’unité appareil photo, reportez-vous
au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo.1
2 Mettez l’appareil photo sous tension.
• Un message de confirmation relatif à la mise à jour du micrologiciel
s’affiche.
3 Appuyez sur les touches Fn1/Fn2 pour sélectionner [Oui], puis
appuyez sur la touche MENU/OK.
• La mise à jour du micrologiciel démarre et les messages suivants
s’affichent sur l’écran d’affichage des photos.
[Vérification du fichier de réécriture]
L’appareil photo est automatiquement mis hors tension puis sous
tension. Après le redémarrage de l’appareil photo, l’écran de version du
micrologiciel s’affiche et la mise à jour est terminée.1
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Pour confirmer la version du micrologiciel, sélectionnez [Version du
micrologiciel] dans le menu de configuration. Vous pouvez également,
avec l’appareil photo hors tension, maintenir la touche 6 (Lecture)
enfoncée pendant plus d’une seconde tout en maintenant la touche
– enfoncée. La version du micrologiciel s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des
photos pendant 20 secondes environ.
• Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les mises à jour du
micrologiciel, visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc).
Vous pouvez télécharger les dernières mises à jour du micrologiciel pour
mettre à jour votre équipement.1
Prise de vue
Fonctions de prise de vue macro
Les fonctions Macrophotographie, Cible Macro, Macro Auto et Affichage de
la distance de prise de vue minimale au cours des fonctions de prise de vue
macro ne sont pas disponibles avec l’objectif A12 28 mm F2.5.1
Mode P : Changement de programme
Le schéma à la page suivante fournit une estimation de la plage de
décalage des différentes combinaisons de valeurs d’ouverture et de
vitesses d’obturation. Les valeurs réelles peuvent variées selon la valeur
d’exposition (EV).
Dans ces exemples, le mode Flash est défini sur [Flash Non] et la sensibilité
ISO est définie sur [ISO200].1
Ev5
Ev6
Ev7
Ev4
Ev3
Ev2
Ev1
Ev0
Ev-1
Ev-2
Ev-3
F16
F22
F11
F8.0
F5.6
F4.0
F2.8
F2.0
F1.4
F1.0
2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000
Ev8 Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19 Ev20
F22.0
F2.50
Mode M : Exposition manuelle
Si [Auto] ou [Auto-Hi] est sélectionné pour Sensibilité ISO, la sensibilité ISO
sera fixée à 200 lorsque l’appareil photo est en mode exposition manuelle. 1
Lecture
Affichage des informations sur l’unité appareil photo
L’informations sur [A12 28mm] de l’unité appareil photo est affichent sur
l’écran des informations détaillées.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
L’informations sur [A12 28mm] de l’unité appareil photo est affichent
également dans le fichier Exif.
Réglages
Réglage [Qualité image/Taille] (Menu prise de vue)
Les options de qualité de l’image, de taille de l’image et de rapport
d’affichage suivantes sont disponibles pour le réglage [Qualité image/Taille]
du menu de prise de vue.
La taille du fichier des photos dépend de l’association qualité de l’image/
taille de l’image utilisée. Lors de l’enregistrement de vidéos, vous pouvez
sélectionner la taille de la vidéo.
Photos
Paramètre Rapport
d’affichage
Compression Taille de l’image
(pixels)
RAW 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4288×2416
4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
3776×2832
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
4288×2848
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1
2848×2848
L (Large) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 4288×2416
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3776×2832
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 4288×2848
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2848×2848
M (Middle) 16:9*2
FINE/NORMAL 3456×1944
4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3072×2304
3:2*2
FINE/NORMAL 3456×2304
1:1*3
FINE/NORMAL 2304×2304
Paramètre Rapport
d’affichage
Compression Taille de l’image
(pixels)
5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944
3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536
1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960
VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480
*1 Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit du réglage utilisé pour la copie JPEG.
*2 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent en haut
et en bas de l’affichage de la photo.
*3 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent sur le
côté droit et sur le côté gauche de l’affichage de la photo.
Vidéos
Paramètre Taille vidéo
HD1280 1280×720
VGA640 640×480
QVGA320 320×240
Réglage [Réduction bruit] (Menu de prise de vue)
Réduisez le bruit lorsque vous prenez des photos. Choisissez parmi [Non],
[Auto], [Faible], [Forte] ou [MAX]. Le temps nécessaire à l’enregistrement
des images varie en fonction de l’option sélectionnée. Vous ne pouvez pas
utiliser cette fonction lorsque [Portrait], [Sport] ou [Correction biais] est
sélectionné pour le mode scène.
Réglage [Sensibilité ISO] (Menu prise de vue)
• Lorsque l’option [Auto] est sélectionnée et que le flash est utilisé, la
sensibilité utilisée devient équivalente à la sensibilité ISO800.
• Lorsque [Auto] est sélectionné et que le flash n’est pas utilisé, les valeurs
minimales et maximales respectives pour la sensibilité ISO seront 200 et
400, quelle que soit la taille de pixel (pixels).
[Agrand. affich] (Menu de prise de vue)
Si vous déplacez la cible avec les touches de direction (+/-/Fn1/Fn2) et
appuyez de manière prolongée sur la touche MENU/OK, la position de la
cible sera agrandie, ce qui vous permettra de vérifier la mise au point. En
appuyant de nouveau de manière prolongée sur la touche MENU/OK, vous
pouvez revenir à la vue standard depuis la vue agrandie.
En appuyant de manière prolongée sur la touche t (retardateur) ou en
sélectionnant [Agrandissement] dans le menu des réglages, vous pouvez
régler l’agrandissement de l’affichage. Sélectionnez [2 ×], [4 ×] ou [8 ×] à
l’aide de la touche +/-, puis appuyez sur la touche MENU/OK.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Vous pouvez définir la fonction [Agrand. affich] dans [Réglages touches
Fn1/Fn2] de l’onglet des options personnalisées.
[Enr. Mes Réglages] (Options personnalisées)
Dans [Enr. Mes réglages], vous pouvez également définir les options
[Réglages bague mise au point] et [Réglage Zone AF Spot] dans le menu
Config. Pour les autres options disponibles, reportez-vous au « Mode
d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo ».
[Confirmation du déclencheur] (Menu onglet des options
personnalisées)
Lorsque [Confirmation du déclencheur] est défini sur [ADJ./DIRECT]
dans l’onglet des options personnalisées, une pression à mi-course sur
le déclencheur finalise les réglages en mode ADJ. et sur l’écran DIRECT,
et vous pouvez alors prendre des photos. Lorsque [ADJ.] est défini, les
réglages du mode ADJ. sont finalisés, ce qui vous permet de prendre des
photos. Lorsque [DIRECT] est défini, les réglages de l’écran DIRECT sont
finalisés, ce qui vous permet de prendre des photos. Une fois la prise de vue
terminée, le système revient à l’écran de contrôle.
Réglages de la manette ADJ. (Menu onglet des options
personnalisées)
Vous pouvez définir la fonction [Rapport d’affichage] dans [Réglage 1 de la manette
ADJ.] à [Réglage 4 de la manette ADJ.] dans l’onglet des options personnalisées.
Si vous définissez la fonction Rapport d’affichage et appuyez sur la touche de la
manette ADJ., s’affiche, ce qui vous permet de définir le rapport d’affichage.
Pour les autres options disponibles, reportez-vous au « Mode d’emploi du
boîtier de l’appareil photo ».
Réglages des touches Fn1/Fn2 (Menu onglet des options
personnalisées)
Vous pouvez définir les fonctions [Agrand. affich] et [Rapport d’affichage]
dans [Réglages de la touche Fn1] ou [Réglages de la touche Fn2] dans
l’onglet des options personnalisées.
Si vous définissez la fonction Rapport d’affichage et appuyez sur la touche
Fn1 ou Fn2, vous pourrez définir le rapport d’affichage.
Pour les autres options disponibles, reportez-vous au « Mode d’emploi du
boîtier de l’appareil photo ».0
[Supprimer Mes Réglages] (Menu onglet des options
personnalisées)
En sélectionnant [Supprimer Mes Réglages] dans l’onglet des options
personnalisées, vous pouvez annuler les réglages définis dans [Enr. Mes
Réglages] pour [Boîte Mes Réglages] et pour [MY1], [MY2] et [MY3] sur le
sélecteur de mode.
[Rétablir valeurs par défaut] (Menu onglet des options
personnalisées)
Si [Rétablir valeurs par défaut] est sélectionné dans l’onglet des options
personnalisées, les réglages personnalisés seront restaurés.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Les réglages définis dans [Enr. Mes Réglages] ne seront pas restaurés.1
Réglage [Image zoom numérique] (Onglet de
configuration)
La taille de l’image enregistrée varie en fonction du zoom de
redimensionnement automatique, de la manière suivante.
Rapport de zoom Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Rapport de zoom Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Environ 1,0× L Environ 1,8× 3M
Environ 1,2× M Environ 3,0× 1M
Environ 1,5× 5M Environ 5,9× VGA
[Réglages bague mise au point] (Onglet de configuration)
Sous [Réglages bague mise au point], vous pouvez sélectionner un mode
qui active les fonctions pour la mise au point automatique et la mise au
point manuelle ou un mode qui active uniquement les fonctions pour la
mise au point manuelle.
Lorsque l’option [AF+MF] est sélectionnée, une fois le déclencheur enfoncé
à mi-course pour régler la mise au point, la mise au point peut être réglée
de manière plus précise en tournant la bague de mise au point.
Paramètre
AF+MF MF uniquement
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Si vous appuyez de nouveau sur le déclencheur après le réglage fin, la mise
au point automatique est activée et le réglage est annulé.
[Réglage Zone AF Spot] (Menu onglet de configuration)
Vous pouvez sélectionner [Normal] ou [Repérer] pour la zone AF dans
[Réglage Zone AF Spot] du menu de configuration. Lorsque [AF Spot] est
sélectionné dans [Mise au point] du menu de prise de vue, la mise au point
est définie sur le mode de zone AF sélectionné dans [Réglage Zone AF
Spot].
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Lorsque [Repérer] est sélectionné, la vue de la zone AF est plus petite qu’en
mode [Normal].
Caractéristiques
Les caractéristiques correspondent à l’unité appareil photo installée sur un
boîtier GXR.
Pixels réels Environ 12,3 millions
Capteur d’image 23,6 mm×15,7 mm CMOS (nombre total de pixels : environ
12,9 millions)
Objectif Distance focale 18,3mm (format 35 mm équivalent : 28mm)
Ouverture
(nombre f)
f/2,5– f/22
(filtre à densité neutre utilisé pour les ouvertures f/22 en mode
prise de vue automatique)
Plage mise au
point (de l’objectif)
Environ 20cm–8 (téléobjectif)
Construction 9 éléments en 6 groupes (2 objectifs asphériques avec 2 surfaces)
Diamètre du filtre 40,5 mm
Zoom 4,0× zoom numérique (photos), zoom numérique
3,6×(vidéos) ; environ 5,9× zoom de redimensionnement
automatique (VGA)
Mode mise au point AF multi et AF spot basé sur Contraste AF ; MF ; snap ; 8
(verrouillage de mise au point et assistance AF)
Vitesse
d’obturation
Photos 1/3200–180s (les limites inférieures et supérieures varient en
fonction du mode prise de vue et flash)
Vidéos 1/2000–1/30s
Contrôle
exposition
Mesure Mesure TTL-CCD en modes multi (256 segments), central
pondéré, et spot avec verrouillage de l’exposition automatique
Mode Programme AE, priorité à l’ouverture AE, exposition manuelle,
priorité à l’obturation AE, fonction de décalage de la cible
Correction de
l’exposition
Manuelle (+4,0 à -4,0EV par incrément de 1/3EV ou 1/2EV),
cadrage automatique (-2EV à +2EV par incrément de 1/3EV
ou 1/2EV)
Portée du lien d’exposition
(mode prise de vue
automatique, mesure
centrale pondérée de la
lumière)
2,2 EV–19,3 EV (portée du lien pour une sensibilité ISO
automatique convertie en fonction de la valeur EV pour
ISO100)
• Lors de la prise de vue avec des valeurs proches de 6,0 EV
ou inférieures, pour chaque réduction de la portée du lien
d’exposition de 1,0 EV, l’appareil photo modifie le réglage
de 0,25 EV vers une luminosité plus faible. Le changement
maximum possible est de 1,0 EV.
Sensibilité ISO
(sensibilité sortie standard)
Auto, Auto-Hi, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200
Balance des blancs Auto, Multi-P AUTO, En extérieur, Nuageux, Incandescente1,
Incandescente2, Lampe fluorescente, Réglage manuel, Détail ;
cadrage auto balance des blancs
Flash Portée
(flash intégré)
Environ 20cm–3,0m (ISO auto) (téléobjectif)
Mode prise de vue Auto, changement de programme, priorité à l’ouverture,
priorité à l’obturation, manuel, scène (vidéo, portrait, sports,
paysage, nuit, correction biais), « Mes Réglages »
Mode
continu
Nombre de
photos prises
à l’aide de
l’option Continu
(Taille d’image :
RAW)
Réduction du bruit désactivée ou activée (faible) : 4 photos,
Réduction du bruit activée (forte) : 3 photos
Réduction du bruit activée MAX : 3 photos
Nombre de
photos prises à
l’aide de l’option
Cont.M + (un
ensemble)
Rap (1280 × 856) : 30 photos (24 images/s)
Len (4288 × 2848) : 15 photos (3 images/s)
Compression*1
FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2
Taille de
l’image
(pixels)
Photos 4288×2416, 3776×2832, 4288×2848, 2848×2848,
3456×1944, 3072×2304, 3456×2304, 2304×2304,
2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480
Vidéos 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240
Taille fichier
(approximative)
RAW 16:9 NORMAL : 17 800Ko/image, FINE : 19 515Ko/image,
VGA : 15 587Ko/image
4:3 NORMAL : 18 387Ko/image, FINE : 20 157Ko/image,
VGA : 16 124Ko/image
3:2 NORMAL : 20 946Ko/image, FINE : 22 967Ko/image,
VGA : 18 337Ko/image
1:1 NORMAL : 13 991Ko/image, FINE : 15 333Ko/image,
VGA : 12 273Ko/image
Taille fichier
(approximative)
L 16:9 NORMAL : 2 222Ko/image, FINE : 3 816Ko/image
4:3 NORMAL : 2 315Ko/image, FINE : 3 960Ko/image
3:2 NORMAL : 2 615Ko/image, FINE : 4 493Ko/image
1:1 NORMAL : 1 761Ko/image, FINE : 3 009Ko/image
M 16:9 NORMAL : 1 475Ko/image, FINE : 2 509Ko/image
4:3 NORMAL : 1 574Ko/image, FINE : 2 662Ko/image
3:2 NORMAL : 1 744Ko/image, FINE : 2 968Ko/image
1:1 NORMAL : 1 186Ko/image, FINE : 2 003Ko/image
5M 4:3 FINE : 2 287Ko/image
3M 4:3 FINE : 1 474Ko/image
1M 4:3 FINE : 812Ko/image
VGA 4:3 FINE : 197Ko/image
Longévité batterie
(basée sur norme CIPA)
DB-90 : environ 320 prises de vue*3
Dimensions (L×H×P) Unité appareil photo uniquement :
68,7mm×57,9mm×50,4mm (Basé sur la directive CIPA)
Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo :
113,9mm×70,2mm×55,6mm (Basé sur la directive CIPA)
Poids (approximatif) Unité appareil photo uniquement : 210 g
Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo : 410 g (y
compris la batterie et la carte mémoire SD)
Température fonctionnement 0°C à 40°C
Humidité fonctionnement 90% ou moins
Température stockage –20°C à 60°C
*1 Les options disponibles varient selon la taille d’image.
*2 Un fichier JPEG est également enregistré (le fichier JPEG peut être d’une qualité FINE
ou NORMAL avec les mêmes dimensions que le fichier RAW ou VGA pour une taille de
640×480 pixels). Les fichiers RAW utilisent le format standard DNG promu par Adobe
Systems, Inc.
*3 Pour référence uniquement ; le nombre réel de prises de vue varie énormément selon
l’utilisation de l’appareil. Nous vous recommandons d’emporter des batteries de rechange
lors d’une utilisation pendant une période prolongée.0
Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire
Les valeurs suivantes sont données à titre de référence de la capacité de stockage
de la mémoire interne et de cartes mémoire de différentes tailles, en fonction de la
qualité d’image et de la taille d’image, lors de l’utilisation de la qualité d’image FINE.
Photos
Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go
RAW*
FINE
4288×2416 4 49 100 197 404 810 1625
3776×2832 4 47 97 191 391 784 1573
4288×2848 3 42 85 168 343 688 1380
2848×2848 5 63 128 251 513 1029 2065
L
FINE
4288×2416 21 235 476 935 1912 3830 7684
3776×2832 20 227 462 907 1854 3715 7453
4288×2848 18 200 407 799 1633 3272 6565
2848×2848 27 299 608 1195 2442 4893 98151
Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go
M
FINE
3456×1944 32 357 724 1419 2902 5814 11662
3072×2304 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014
3456×2304 27 302 614 1206 2466 4941 9913
2304×2304 41 447 903 1774 3627 7267 14578
5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238
3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063
1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181
VGA/FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581
* Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit de la compression utilisée pour la copie
JPEG.
Vidéos
Taille de l’image
(pixels)
Mémoire
interne
1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go
1280×720
24 images/seconde
21s 3min
49s
7min
46s
15min
58s
31min
10s
62min
26s
125min
15s
640×480
24 images/seconde
1min 11min
2s
22min
27s
46min
10s
90min
7s
180min
32s
362min
9s
320×240
24 images/seconde
2min
25s
26min
24s
53min
43s
110min
27s
215min
35s
431min
52s
866min
19s
Attention --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
La taille d’enregistrement sans interruption maximale pour une vidéo est de
4 Go. La durée maximale d’enregistrement est de 15 minutes environ pour
une taille de 1280 × 720, de 46 minutes environ pour une taille de 640 × 480
et de 90 minutes environ pour une taille de 320 × 240.
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Lors de l’enregistrement de vidéos avec la taille de vidéo définie sur 1280 ×
720, l’utilisation de cartes mémoire SD/SDHC de classe 6 est recommandée.
Annexes
Accessoires en option
L’objectif RICOH peut être utilisé avec les éléments suivants (vendus séparément).
Paresoleil d´objectif (LH-1)
Remarque -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Avant d’utiliser un accessoire optionnel, consultez la documentation
fournie avec le produit.
• Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les accessoires optionnels,
visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricohpmmc.com/).
Précautions d’emploi
• La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans le pays d’achat.
• Dans le cas d’une panne ou d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil à l’étranger, le
fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit localement
ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée.
• Ne faites pas tomber l’équipement et évitez-lui les chocs physiques.
• Lors du transport de l’équipement, faites attention de ne pas le cogner dans d’autres
objets. Faites particulièrement attention à protéger l’objectif.
• Lors de la fixation d’un filtre ou d’un pare-soleil, veillez à ne pas exercer une pression
excessive.
• Des changements brutaux de température peuvent provoquer de la condensation
visible dans l’objectif ou des dysfonctionnements de l’équipement. Cela peut être
évité en plaçant l’équipement dans un sac plastique pour ralentir le changement
de température, puis en le retirant une fois que l’air dans le sac a atteint la même
température que l’environnement.
• Conservez l’équipement sec et évitez de le manipuler avec les mains mouillées.
Le non-respect de cette consigne peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements de
l’équipement ou un choc électrique.
• Gardez le connecteur propre.
Conseil : pour éviter la condensation---------------------------------------------
La condensation se produit généralement lorsque vous vous rendez dans
un endroit avec une brusque différence de température, si l’humidité
est élevée, dans une pièce froide après que le chauffage ait été mis en
marche, ou lorsque l’appareil est exposé à de l’air froid en provenance d’un
climatiseur ou d’un autre dispositif.
Entretien et stockage de l’équipement
Entretien de l’équipement
• Les photos peuvent être altérées par des empreintes ou d’autres matières
étrangères sur l’objectif. Évitez de toucher l’objectif avec les doigts. Éliminez
la poussière ou les peluches avec un soufflant disponible dans le commerce,
ou nettoyez doucement l’objectif avec un chiffon doux et sec. Faites
particulièrement attention au voletcache objectif.
• Nettoyez soigneusement l’équipement après l’avoir utilisé à la plage ou après
avoir manipulé des produits cosmétiques. N’exposez pas l’équipement à des
substances volatiles comme du diluant, du benzène ou des pesticides. Le nonrespect de cette consigne peut endommager l’équipement ou sa finition.
• Dans l’éventualité d’un dysfonctionnement, consultez un centre de réparation
Ricoh.
• Cet équipement est un dispositif de haute précision. Ne le démontez pas.
Stockage
• Ne stockez pas l’appareil photo dans un endroit sujet à : chaleur ou
humidité extrême ; grands changements de température ou d’humidité ;
poussière, saleté ou sable ; fortes vibrations ; contact prolongé avec des
produits chimiques, notamment des boules de naphtaline ou d’autres
produits insecticides, ou des produits en vinyle ou en caoutchouc ; champs
magnétiques puissants (par exemple à proximité d’un moniteur, d’un
transformateur ou d’un aimant).
• Lorsque vous rangez votre appareil photo, veillez à l’installer dans un étui, etc.,
dans lequel la poussière ou les peluches ne pénètrent pas afin d’empêcher la
saleté ou la poussière de se déposer sur l’appareil photo.
De plus, lorsque vous transportez l’appareil photo, ne le mettez pas
directement dans une poche, etc., afin d’empêcher la saleté ou la poussière de
se déposer sur l’appareil photo.
Garantie et réparation
1. Ce produit bénéficie d’une garantie limitée. Pendant la période de garantie
indiquée sur la carte de garantie fournie avec votre équipement, toute pièce
défectueuse sera réparée gratuitement. Dans le cas d’un dysfonctionnement
de l’équipement, contactez le distributeur qui vous a vendu l’équipement ou
votre centre de réparation Ricoh le plus proche. Veuillez noter que vous ne
serez pas remboursé des frais de transport pour livrer votre équipement au
centre de réparation Ricoh.
2. Cette garantie ne couvre aucun dommage résultant de :
1 non-respect des instructions du mode d’emploi ;
2 réparation, modification ou révision non réalisée par un centre de service
agréé, listé dans le mode d’emploi ;
3 incendie, sinistre, catastrophe naturelle, foudre, tension anormale, etc. ;
4 stockage inapproprié (indiqué dans le « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de
l’appareil photo »), fuite de batterie et autres fluides, moisissure ou tout
autre défaut d’entretien de l’équipement.
5 immersion dans l’eau (inondation), exposition à l’alcool ou à d’autres
boissons, infiltration de sable ou de boue, choc physique, chute ou pression
exercée sur l’équipement et autres causes non naturelles.
3. Après l’expiration de la période de garantie, tous les frais de réparation seront
à votre charge, y compris ceux d’un centre de service agréé.
4. Tous les frais de réparation seront à votre charge, même au cours de la période
de garantie, si la carte de garantie n’est pas jointe ou si le nom du distributeur
ou la date d’achat n’est pas indiqué ou a été modifié sur la carte.
5. Les frais de révision et d’inspection complète, sur demande du client, seront à
sa charge complète que la période de garantie ait expiré ou non.
6. Tout dommage consécutif à une défaillance de l’équipement, comme les frais
de prise de vue ou la perte d’un profit attendu, ne sera pas remboursé que la
période de garantie ait expiré ou non.
7. La garantie est valable uniquement dans le pays où l’équipement a été acheté.
* Les dispositions ci-dessus se réfèrent aux réparations gratuites et ne limitent
vos droits légaux.
* L’objectif des dispositions ci-dessus est également décrit sur la carte de
garantie fournie avec l’équipement.0
8. Les pièces essentielles à la réparation de l’équipement (c’est-à-dire les
composants nécessaires au fonctionnement et à la qualité de l’équipement)
seront disponibles pendant une période de cinq années après l’arrêt de la
production de l’équipement.
9. Veuillez noter que si l’équipement est sérieusement endommagé par une
inondation, une immersion, une infiltration de sable ou de boue, des chocs
violents ou une chute, il peut être impossible de le réparer et la restauration de
son état originel peut être impossible.
Remarques------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Avant d’envoyer l’appareil en réparation, vérifiez le boîtier de l’appareil
photo et relisez le mode d’emploi pour garantir un fonctionnement correct.
• Certaines réparations nécessitent un certain temps d’exécution.
• Lors de l’envoi de l’équipement à un centre de réparation, veuillez inclure
une note décrivant la pièce défectueuse et le problème rencontré, aussi
précisément que possible.
• Démontez tous les accessoires non associés au problème avant d’envoyer
l’appareil au centre de réparation.En cas de problème
Bureaux Ricoh
RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V.
(EPMMC)
Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY
(innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438
(außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438
http://www.ricohpmmc.com/
RICOH FRANCE S.A.S. (PMMC FRANCE)
(à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70
(en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94
Ricoh Company, Ltd.
Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo
104-8222, Japan
2010 octobre
FR F-FR
Imprimé en Chine
*L453 3972*
RICOH Gate
pour Windows
Mode d’emploi
Français
Pour garantir un bon fonctionnement de ce produit,
lisez attentivement ce manuel avant de vous servir de
l’appareil. Conservez ce mode d’emploi en lieu sûr
pour le retrouver en cas de besoin.Introduction
Nous vous remercions d’avoir acheté un produit Ricoh.
Ce mode d’emploi explique comment se servir de ce produit et signale les précautions à prendre.
Pour obtenir les meilleurs résultats, veuillez le lire attentivement avant d’utiliser le produit.
Conservez ce mode d’emploi en lieu sûr pour le retrouver en cas de besoin.
Ricoh Co., Ltd.
• Il est interdit de reproduire tout ou partie de cette publication sans l’autorisation écrite préalable de Ricoh.
© 2001 Ricoh Co. Ltd.
• Ricoh se réserve le droit de modifier le contenu de cette publication sans préavis.
• Un soin considérable a été apporté à la réalisation de ce mode d’emploi. Si, toutefois, vous vous posez
des questions sur certains des points qui y ont sont abordés, ou si vous détectez des erreurs ou des
inexactitudes, veuillez nous contacter à l’adresse figurant au dos du mode d’emploi.
Microsoft, MS et Windows sont des marques déposées par Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et dans
d’autres pays.
QuickTime est une marque déposée par Apple Computer Inc. aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays.
Tous les autres noms de sociétés et de produits mentionnés ici sont la propriété de leurs détenteurs
respectifs.
Important
• Veillez à effectuer une sauvegarde de vos données importantes. En cas de fausse manipulation de votre
part ou d’une panne du produit, vous pourriez en effet perdre des données.
• Ricoh Co. Ltd. n’est pas responsable des dommages causés par la perte des données créées avec ce
produit.
• Ricoh Co. Ltd. n’est pas plus responsable des dommages entraînés par une panne du produit, la perte
de texte ou de données, ni d’autres dommages issus éventuellement de l’utilisation du produit.
Copyright
Toute reproduction ou altération de documents, magazines, morceaux de musique et autres contenus
protégés par copyright, en dehors d’un usage strictement personnel, familial ou cantonné à un objet limité
du même ordre est strictement interdite sauf en cas d’autorisation écrite du détenteur du copyright.1
Possibilités offertes par l’utilisation de ces logiciels
Enregistrer aisément les ?chiers de l’appareil (Caplio RR10)
Vous pouvez actionner la touche START de la RICOH BASE pour transférer automatiquement
des photos sur votre micro-ordinateur.
Télécharger des images, des notes vocales, des séquences vidéo et transférer
des ?chiers vers l’appareil photo
En raccordant l’appareil photo à l’ordinateur, vous pouvez transmettre des images, des notes
vocales et des séquences vidéo vers l’ordinateur et, dans l’autre sens, transférer des images
(?chiers MP3), des notes vocales (?chiers WAV) et des séquences vidéo (?chiers AVI) de
l’ordinateur vers l’appareil.
Choisir le format des images transmises par l’appareil
Vous pouvez spéci?er le format des ?chiers images (EXIF 2.1, JPEG, BMP, TIFF ou PNG) selon
vos besoins avant de les exporter de l’appareil.
Modi?er la taille des images transmises par l’appareil
Vous pouvez modi?er la taille des ?chiers images avant de les exporter de l’appareil.2
Sommaire
Possibilités offertes par l’utilisation de ces logiciels......................................1
Consultation du manuel ................................................................................4
Chapitre 1 Installation des logiciels.................................................. 7
Description des logiciels fournis...................................................................7
Environnement système requis...................................................................10
Installation du logiciel .................................................................................11
Pour installer les logiciels........................................................................................ 11
Désinstallation des logiciels.................................................................................... 15
Chapitre 2 Connexion de l’appareil à un micro-ordinateur........... 19
Branchement du câble USB.......................................................................19
Connexion de la RICOH BASE à un micro-ordinateur ............................................ 19
Connexion de l’appareil à un micro-ordinateur ...................................................... 21
Déconnexion du câble USB .......................................................................22
Chapitre 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate ............................................. 23
Lancement et fermeture de RICOH Gate ...................................................23
Affichage de la fenêtre de RICOH Gate ................................................................. 23
Masquage de la fenêtre de RICOH Gate ............................................................... 23
Pour quitter RICOH Gate ........................................................................................ 24
Lancement de RICOH Gate.................................................................................... 24
Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate.......................................................25
Enregistrement de données de l’appareil photo sur le micro-ordinateur...27
Enregistrement des données à l’aide des boutons Enregistrer .............................. 27
Modification du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer .......................................... 28
Modification du paramétrage de la touche START................................................. 34
Transmission automatique des fichiers à l’aide de la touche START ..................... 36
Envoi de données de l’ordinateur vers l’appareil photo.............................38
Transfert à l’aide du bouton Transférer................................................................... 38
Modification du paramétrage du bouton Transférer ............................................... 41
Impression d’une planche index ................................................................44
Impression d’une planche index............................................................................. 44
Modification des réglages d’impression ................................................................. 45
Envoi d’un message ...................................................................................49
Envoi d’un message avec pièces jointes................................................................ 49
Modification des paramètres d’envoi...................................................................... 51
Paramétrage de la taille maximale des messages en envoi .................................. 54
Lancement d’une application .....................................................................55
Définition de l’application........................................................................................ 553
Lancement de l’application..................................................................................... 57
Autres fonctions ..........................................................................................58
Mise hors tension de l’appareil ............................................................................... 58
Affichage et modification des Informations relatives à l’appareil ........................... 58
Modification de l’aspect de RICOH Gate ............................................................... 59
Affichage du numéro de version de RICOH Gate .................................................. 60
Appendice ................................................................................ 61
Utilisation des séquences vidéo prises avec l’appareil .............................61
Conversion des fichiers à l’aide de MGI VideoWave.............................................. 61
Utilisation du Caplio RR10 comme Webcam..............................................64
Avant d’utiliser la fonction de capture vidéo........................................................... 64
Capture d’images vidéo.......................................................................................... 66
Modification des paramètres de capture................................................................ 67
Dépannage.................................................................................................69
Si l’appareil ne fonctionne pas correctement ......................................................... 69
Suppression des pilotes ......................................................................................... 70
Menus de RICOH Gate...............................................................................74
Menus de RICOH Gate ........................................................................................... 74
Menu de paramétrage de chaque bouton.............................................................. 74
Index ...........................................................................................................75
Index alphabétique ................................................................................................. 75
Pour installer uniquement le logiciel de votre choix......................................................13
Pour transférer automatiquement des images à l’aide de la touche START . ..............21
Transfert d’un ?chier MP3.............................................................................................43
À propos du code ASCII...............................................................................................60
Conseils4
Consultation du manuel
Cette section présente le contenu de chaque manuel et indique quels chapitres lire en priorité
dans ce manuel, ainsi que la signi?cation des symboles spéciaux utilisés.
Rôle des différents manuels fournis
Pour les utilisateurs de
Windows
RICOH Gate pour Windows
(le présent manuel)
Lisez ce manuel en premier
m Ce manuel explique comment installer les logiciels
requis, comment raccorder l’appareil photo au PC,
et comment utiliser RICOH Gate pour transférer
des ?chiers entre l’appareil et l’ordinateur.
Pour les utilisateurs de
Macintosh
RICOH Gate pour Macintosh m Ce manuel explique comment installer les logiciels
requis, comment raccorder l’appareil photo au
Macintosh, et comment utiliser RICOH Gate pour
transférer des ?chiers entre l’appareil et
l’ordinateur.
Fonctionnement de
l’appareil
Mode d’emploi de l’appareil
photographique numérique (le
présent manuel)
m Ce manuel explique comment se servir de
l’appareil, des préparatifs nécessaires aux
instructions de prise de vue et relecture des
?chiers.5
Comment lire le manuel
À lire sans faute
Pour installer les logiciels
nécessaires
m Chapitre 1 Installation des logiciels
Pour pouvoir utiliser la fonctionnalité RICOH
Gate, vous devez installer les logiciels. Ce chapitre
décrit les logiciels qui se trouvent sur le CD-ROM
fourni avec l’appareil.
Pour connecter l’appareil à un
micro-ordinateur m Chapitre 2 Connexion de l’appareil à un microordinateur
Ce chapitre explique comment connecter
l’appareil photographique à un micro-ordinateur.
Pour utiliser le logiciel RICOH
Gate m Chapitre 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate
Vous pouvez transmettre des photos vers le microordinateur ou à l’inverse transférer des images de
l’ordinateur vers l’appareil. Vous pouvez
également obtenir une « planche index » des
photos stockées dans l’appareil.
À lire si nécessaire
Pour mieux connaître les
menus et option, les
caractéristiques techniques,
etc.
m Appendice
Vous y sont proposés les menus de RICOH Gate,
les caractéristiques des ?chiers et des logiciels
utilisés, etc.6
Signi?cation des symboles
La signi?cation des symboles utilisés dans ce manuel est précisée ci-a bprès.
Cette « étiquette » signale des recommandations ou des contraintes d’utilisation qui
requièrent votre attention.
Cette autre étiquette signale une explication complémentaire sur l’opération concernée
ou un point d’information qu’il est bon de connaître.
m Ce symbole de renvoi précède la page relative à la fonction ou à l’opération à laquelle il
est fait référence.
Voir “Environnement système requis” (p.10)
Ce libellé signale des informations complémentaires utiles.
Les illustrations d’écrans proposées dans ce manuel ont été prises sous Windows 98.
Les exemples d’af?chages de RICOH Gate ont été copiés avec un fond d’écran par défaut
(Panneau de con?guration/Af?chage/Arrière-plan).
Dans ce manuel, les termes « appareil photo » ou « appareil » désignent le Caplio RR10.
Important
• Si l’écran de bienvenue ne
s’af?che pas, ouvrez le CDROM via le Bureau, puis
double-cliquez sur
[Setup.exe], dans le dossier
Caplio RR10, pour lancer le
programme d’installation.
Important
Remarque
• Si l’appareil photo n’est pas
correctement raccordé à
l’ordinateur, un message
s’af?che pour vous le
signaler. Véri?ez la
connexion.
Remarque
Conseils7
Chapitre 1
Installation des logiciels
Installation des logiciels
Ce chapitre explique les préparatifs nécessaires à l’utilisation
des logiciels fournis, précise l’environnement système requis,
décrit le processus d’installation de RICOH Gate, etc.
Description des logiciels fournis
L’écran ci-dessous est l’écran de bienvenue af?ché lorsque le
CD-ROM est introduit dans le lecteur
18
Logiciels Caplio RR10
Pour installer les logiciels énumérés ci-dessous, cliquez sur
le bouton [Caplio RR10 Software] de l’écran de bienvenue.
Voir “Installation du logiciel” (p.11).
Logiciel Description
RICOH Gate Ce logiciel vous permet de transmettre les
photos prises avec l’appareil vers le microordinateur ou, à l’inverse, de transférer des
?chiers images de l’ordinateur vers
l’appareil photo. RICOH Gate vous permet
également d’utiliser d’autres applications
susceptibles de dialoguer avec l’appareil.
Voir “Utilisation de RICOH Gate”
(p.23).
Pilote USB Ce logiciel est requis pour utiliser RICOH
Gate, le pilote TWAIN et le pilote Vidéo
lorsque l’appareil est raccordé au microordinateur par une liaison USB.
Pilote TWAIN Ce logiciel permet d’importer des photos
qui se trouvent dans l’appareil directement
depuis une application compatible TWAIN.
Video Driver Ce logiciel est requis pour utiliser l’appareil
photo comme webcam.9
1
Installation des logiciels
Examen du contenu du CD-ROM (View CD-ROM)
Cliquez sur [View CD-ROM], à l’écran de bienvenue, pour
consulter le contenu des dossiers du CD-ROM. Pour
installer un logiciel, cliquez sur le programme d’installation
du dossier du logiciel.
Logiciel Description
Dossier QuickTime
QuickTime 4
(Veillez à installer
ce logiciel)
Ce logiciel est requis pour visionner une
séquence d’images animées enregistrée
avec l’appareil photo.
Dossier MGI
MGI Videowave Ce logiciel de manipulation vidéo permet
le montage simple et la création de
séquences vidéo.
Pour visionner les séquences vidéo
enregistrées avec l’appareil à l’aide du
Lecteur Windows Media (Windows
Media Player), convertissez-les d’abord à
l’aide de ce logiciel.
• Pour plus de précisions, consultez le
?chier LisezMoi ou le manuel
électronique du logiciel.
MGI PhotoSuite Ce logiciel est un programme de retouche
de photo bien pensé qui offre de
nombreuses fonctions de lecture de
?chiers multimédia.
• Pour plus de précisions, consultez le
?chier LisezMoi ou le manuel
électronique du logiciel.
Dossier MusicMatch
MusicMatch
JUKEBOX
Ce logiciel permet de convertir les CD
audio et ?chier WAV en ?chiers MP3
(?chiers sons compressés).
Les ?chiers MP3 sont lisibles par
l’appareil photo.
• MP3 désigne le standard international
de compression de son MPEG-1
AudioLayer3. Les données peuvent être
compressées jusqu’à un dixième
seulement de leur volume d’origine.
• Pour plus de précisions, consultez Help
ou le mode d’emploi au format PDF du
logiciel.
Remarque
Remarque
Remarque10
• Si vous vous posez des questions sur les logiciels présentés cidessus, consultez le ?chier ReadMe et le manuel PDF relatifs au
logiciel concerné avant de contacter le service après vente Ricoh.
Environnement système requis
L’environnement détaillé ci-après est requis pour pouvoir
utiliser RICOH Gate.
• Dans ce manuel, Microsoft
?
Windows
?
98 (version anglaise) est
nommé Windows 98, Microsoft
?
Windows
?
98 Second Edition
(version anglaise) est nommé Windows 98SE, Microsoft
?
Windows
?
Millennium Edition (version anglaise) est nommé
Windows Me, et Microsoft
?
Windows
?
2000 (version anglaise) est
nommé Windows 2000.
RICOH Gate
Système
d’exploitation
Windows 98/98E
Windows Me
Windows 2000
Ordinateur PC sur lequel un des systèmes ci-dessus a été
pré-installé et qui dispose d’un port USB dont le
fonctionnement est garanti par le fabricant de
l’ordinateur
Processeur Pentium ou plus récent
Capacité
mémoire
Windows 98/98SE : 32 Mo (96 Mo ou plus
recommandés)
Windows Me : 64 Mo (96 Mo ou plus
recommandés)
Windows 2000 : 128MB Mo (256 Mo ou plus
recommandés)
Espace disque
requis à
l’installation
Windows 98/98SE : 10 Mo ou plus
Windows Me : 10 Mo ou plus
Windows 2000 : 10 Mo ou plus
Dé?nition
d’af?chage
640 × 480 pixels ou plus (800 × 600 ou plus
recommandée)
Couleurs
af?chables
256 ou plus (65000 ou plus recommandé)
Lecteur de CDROM
Lecteur de CD-ROM utilisable avec le PC
décrit ci-dessus
Port USB Port USB utilisable sur le PC décrit ci-dessus
Audio Carte Sound Blaster compatible avec un des
systèmes énumérés ci-dessus, ou carte son
équivalente, et haut-parleur
Remarque
Remarque
• Les images sont consultables
avec un af?chage 256
couleurs, mais leur
reproduction est bien
meilleure avec un af?chage
65000 couleurs (16 bits par
pixel). Il vous est donc
recommandé d’utiliser
65000 couleurs ou plus si
possible.
Remarque11
1
Installation des logiciels
Installation du logiciel
Cette section explique comment installer les logiciels requis,
notamment RICOH Gate et le pilote USB pour faire
communiquer l’appareil photo et l’ordinateur, et QuickTime.
Pour installer les logiciels Caplio RR10
Quittez toutes les autres applications ouvertes avant de
lancer l’installation des logiciels.
• Si vous raccordez l’appareil photo à l’ordinateur et démarrez
Windows avant d’installer les logiciels spéci?ques, l’écran
Windows [Assistant Ajout de nouveau matériel] est af?ché. Si cela
se produit, cliquez sur [Annuler] et passez à l’installation des
logiciels après la ?n du démarrage de Windows.
• Cette section explique la procédure d’installation standard. Les
utilisateurs familiers des ordinateurs et des appareils photo
numériques peuvent choisir individuellement les logiciels à
installer.
• Sous Windows 2000, les utilisateurs disposant de droits
d’administrateur doivent d’abord ouvrir une session sous leur nom
d’administrateur avant d’installer les logiciels.
• Pour contrôler quels logiciels sont installés lors de cette procédure,
consultez la section, voir “Logiciels Caplio RR10” (p.8).
1 Allumez le PC et démarrez Windows.
2 Introduisez le CD-ROM fourni dans le
lecteur de CD-ROM de l’ordinateur.
L’écran de bienvenue du CD-ROM est af?ché.
Pour installer les logiciels
Remarque
• Si l’écran de bienvenue ne
s’af?che pas, ouvrez le CDROM via le Bureau, puis
double-cliquez sur
[Setup.exe], dans le dossier
Caplio RR10, pour lancer le
programme d’installation.
Remarque12
3 Sélectionnez [Caplio RR10 Software].
Le programme d’installation est lancé et l’écran de
choix de la langue s’af?che quelques instants plus tard.
4 Sélectionnez [OK].
L’écran [InstallShield Wizard] est af?ché.
5 Sélectionnez [Suivant]
L’écran [Choisissez l’emplacement cible] apparaît.
6 Validez ou modi?ez l’emplacement où
les logiciels doivent être installés, puis
sélectionnez [Suivant].
Pour installer les logiciels dans un autre dossier que
celui proposé, sélectionnez [Parcourir...] et allez à
l’emplacement voulu.
L’écran de [Type d’installation] de choix du type
d’installation est af?ché.
• La langue par défaut des
messages dépend de votre
système d’exploitation.
Remarque
• Si vous annulez l’installation
avant qu’elle soit terminée,
redémarrez Windows avant
de tenter à nouveau
l’installation du logiciel.
Important13
1
Installation des logiciels
7 Sélectionnez [Standard], puis [Suivant].
1 [Personnalisée]
Seul le ou les logiciels que vous sélectionnerez explicitement
seront installés.
Voir “Pour installer uniquement le logiciel de votre
choix” (p.13).
2 [Standard]
Le logiciel RICOH Gate et le pilote USB seront
automatiquement installés.
8 Suivez les instructions af?chées à
l’écran pour poursuivre l’installation,
puis sélectionnez [Terminer] au niveau
de l’écran InstallShield Wizard.
L’installation est terminée.
Pour installer uniquement le logiciel de
votre choix
Si vous sélectionnez [Personnalisée] à l’écran [Type
d’installation] mentionné à l’étape 7, l’écran
[Sélectionnez lez composants] est af?ché.
Sélectionnez uniquement le logiciel que vous voulez
installer.
Conseils14
Pour installer QuickTime
QuickTime est nécessaire pour visionner une séquence
d’images animées enregistrée avec l’appareil photo.
1 Allumez le PC et démarrez Windows.
2 Introduisez le CD-ROM fourni dans le
lecteur de CD-ROM de l’ordinateur.
L’écran de bienvenue du CD-ROM est af?ché.
3 Sélectionnez [View CD-ROM].
Le contenu du CD-ROM est af?ché.
4 Double-cliquez sur le dossier
[QuickTime].
5 Double-cliquez sur [QuickTime
Installer].
L’installation de QuickTime débute.
6 Suivez les instructions af?chées à
l’écran.
• Si QuickTime 4.1.2 est déjà
installé sur votre ordinateur,
cette opération n’est pas
nécessaire
Remarque15
1
Installation des logiciels
Vous avez la possibilité de supprimer tous les logiciels
installés. Si vous comptez réinstallez ces logiciels, prenez
soin de suivre la procédure de désinstallation avant de
procéder à cette réinstallation.
• Quittez toutes les applications actives et enregistrez les données qui
doivent l’être avant de désinstaller les logiciels.
• Déconnectez tout autre périphérique USB et les périphériques
« Plug and Play » raccordés à l’ordinateur.
• Si vous branchez ou débranchez le câble USB avant d’installer le
pilote USB (USB Driver), ce dernier ne sera peut-être pas identi?é
correctement. Dans ce cas, vous devrez supprimer le pilote USB de
votre système puis le réinstaller.
Voir “Suppression du pilote USB” (p.70).
Voir “Pour installer les logiciels Caplio RR10” (p.11).
Pour supprimer les logiciels Caplio RR10
Vous pouvez supprimer tous les logiciels Caplio RR10
installés, notamment RICOH Gate, le pilote USB, le pilote
Vidéo, etc.
1 Allumez le PC et démarrez Windows.
2 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] dans la Barre
des tâches de Windows.
3 Pointez sur [Paramètres] puis cliquez
sur [Panneau de con?guration].
Le Panneau de con?guration est af?ché.
Désinstallation des logiciels
Important
Remarque16
4 Double-cliquez sur [Ajout/Suppression
de programmes].
L’écran de Propriétés permettant d’ajouter ou de
supprimer des logiciels est af?ché.
5 Sélectionnez [Caplio RR10 Software]
puis cliquez sur [Ajouter/Supprimer...].
Une demande de con?rmation est af?chée.
6 Cliquez sur [OK].
L’écran [Con?rmez la suppression du ?chier] est
af?ché.17
1
Installation des logiciels
7 Cliquez sur [OK].
La suppression débute. Une fois la suppression
terminée, un message vous le signale.
8 Cliquez sur [Terminer].
• Une boîte de dialogue demandant de con?rmer la suppression
d’un ?chier susceptible d’être utilisé par plusieurs logiciels
s’af?che à l’étape 8 si ce ?chier ne semble pas être utilisé par
un autre programme installé. Le système ne souffrira pas de la
suppression de ce ?chier, mais sauf si vous êtes absolument
certain qu’il n’est utilisé par aucun logiciel, nous vous
recommandons de répondre [Non].
• Pour supprimer tous les ?chiers susceptibles d’être utilisés par
d’autres programmes du système, sélectionnez [Oui].
• Si le message [Uninstallation is ?nished, but some items could
not be deleted] s’af?che dans la boîte de dialogue de
suppression de programme, sélectionnez [Détails] et notez les
?chiers qui n’ont pas pu être supprimés avant d’opérer toute
suppression manuelle de ?chiers liés aux applications Caplio
RR10. Si vous tentez de réinstaller les logiciels alors que
certains ?chiers liés aux applications sont encore présents, il
est possible que la réinstallation échoue.
• Si le message [Fichier verrouillé détecté] s’af?che lors de la
désinstallation, sélectionnez [Redémarrer] et refaites la
désinstallation.
Remarque1819
Chapitre
Connexion de l appareil ’ à un micro-ordinateur
Connexion de l’appareil à un micro-ordinateur 2
Ce chapitre explique comment raccorder l’appareil photo à un
micro-ordinateur de type PC à l’aide du câble USB a?n de
pouvoir transférer des ?chiers entre les deux machines.
Branchement du câble USB
Le câble USB peut être utilisé de deux façons : pour connecter
la RICOH BASE à l’ordinateur, ou pour connecter l’appareil
directement à l’ordinateur.
Vous pouvez raccorder la RICOH BASE au microordinateur à l’aide du câble USB.
1 Allumez l’ordinateur.
Lorsque le bureau de Windows s’af?che, l’icône de
RICOH Gate s’af?che dans la partie système de la
barre des tâches.
Voir “Lancement et fermeture de RICOH Gate” (p.23).
2 Raccordez l’adaptateur secteur à la
RICOH BASE.
3 Raccordez le câble USB au connecteur
DIGITAL (AV/USB) de la RICOH BASE
d’un côté et au port USB de l’ordinateur
de l’autre.
Connexion de la RICOH BASE à un
micro-ordinateur
• Le pilote USB (USB Driver)
doit être correctement
installé. Voir “Pour installer
les logiciels” (p.11).
• Le PC doit être équipé d’un
port USB standard et le
fonctionnement de ce port
doit être garanti par le
fabricant.
Important
220
4 Vérifiez que le bouton rotatif de mode de
l’appareil n’est pas placé en position
(séquence vidéo).
Si c’est le cas, passez dans un autre mode.
5 Placez l’appareil photo sur la RICOH BASE.
Le témoin lumineux de la RICOH BASE s’allume.
6 Appuyez sur la touche START de la
RICOH BASE.
L’appareil est maintenant en mode Connexion à un
ordinateur et la fenêtre RICOH Gate s’af?che à l’écran
de l’ordinateur.
Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.25)
• Si vous appuyez sur la touche START et que l’appareil est en
mode Connexion à un ordinateur, il ne peut pas y avoir charge
de la batterie lorsque l’appareil est placé sur la RICOH BASE;
mettez l’appareil hors tension pour que la charge débute.
• La fenêtre RICOH Gate ne s’af?che pas lorsque le bouton
rotatif de mode est placé sur (séquence vidéo)
• Lorsque le bouton rotatif de mode est placé sur (séquence
vidéo), l’appareil est automatiquement en mode Connexion à
un ordinateur.
Voir “Using the Caplio RR10 as a Web Camera” (p.64).
• Ne placez pas l’appareil
photo sur la RICOH BASE
[Parcourir à la recherche
d’un dossier] si le
convertisseur d’adaptateur
secteur est encore raccordé à
l’appareil.
• Si la fenêtre de RICOH Gate
ne s’af?che pas lorsque vous
appuyez sur la touche
DÉMARRER, cliquez sur
l’icône de la barre des
tâches.
Voir “Af?chage de la fenêtre
de RICOH Gate” (p.23).
Important
Remarque
Remarque21
2
Connexion de l appareil ’ à un micro-ordinateur
Vous pouvez raccorder l’appareil photo à un micro-ordinateur à
l’aide du câble USB.
1 Allumez l’ordinateur.
Lorsque le bureau de Windows s’af?che, l’icône de
RICOH Gate s’af?che dans la partie système de la
barre des tâches.
2 Vérifiez que l’appareil photo est hors tension,
puis raccordez-lui l’adaptateur secteur.
3 Branchez le câble USB au connecteur
USB de l’appareil puis au port DIGITAL
(AV/USB) de l’ordinateur.
4 Vérifiez que le bouton rotatif de mode de
l’appareil n’est pas placé en position
(séquence vidéo).
Si c’est le cas, passez dans un autre mode.
5 Allumez l’appareil photo.
L’appareil photo est connecté au micro-ordinateur.
Voir “Lancement de RICOH Gate” (p.24).
Pour transférer automatiquement des
images à l’aide de la touche START .
En raccordant la RICOH BASE à l’ordinateur, vous
pouvez automatiquement transférer vers
l’ordinateur les photos prises avec l’appareil en
appuyant sur la touche START de la RICOH BASE.
Voir “Transmission automatique des ?chiers à l’aide de
la touche START” (p.36).
Connexion de l’appareil à un microordinateur
Conseils22
Déconnexion du câble USB
Pour débrancher le câble USB, appuyez des deux côtés du
connecteur USB pour le déverrouiller, puis tirez dessus pour le
sortir de sa prise.
1 Mettez l’appareil photo hors tension.
2 Appuyez sur les côtés du connecteur
USB pour le déverrouiller, puis
débranchez-le.
• Le fait de tirer le connecteur
sans appuyer sur ses boutons
latéraux ou de tirer sur le
câble pour le débrancher
peut ne pas suf?re à retirer le
connecteur de sa prise.
Important23
Chapitre
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
Ce chapitre explique comment utiliser le logiciel RICOH Gate.
Ce logiciel vous permet d’enregistrer les photos prises avec
l’appareil sur le micro-ordinateur ou, à l’inverse, de transférer
des ?chiers images de l’ordinateur vers l’appareil photo. Vous
pouvez également imprimer les photos prises avec l’appareil.
Lancement et fermeture de RICOH
Gate
Cette section explique comment démarrer et quitter RICOH
Gate.
Lorsque vous installez RICOH Gate, son icône apparaît dans
la partie système de la barre des tâches pour en faciliter
l’accès. Lorsque vous voulez utiliser le logiciel RICOH Gate,
cliquez sur l’icône pour que sa fenêtre s’ouvre.
1 Cliquez sur dans la Barre des
tâches.
La fenêtre de RICOH Gate s’af?che sur le bureau.
Vous pouvez réduire la fenêtre de RICOH Gate à l’état d’icône.
1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH
Gate.
La fenêtre de RICOH Gate disparaît et son icône reste
visible.
Af?chage de la fenêtre de RICOH Gate
Masquage de la fenêtre de RICOH Gate
• Si vous placez l’appareil
photo sur la BASE RICOH
et si vous appuyez sur la
touche DÉMARRER de la
BASE RICOH, la fenêtre
RICOH Gate s’af?che. Voir
“Connexion de la RICOH
BASE à un microordinateur” (p.19).
Remarque
• Si vous connectez l’appareil
en appuyant sur la touche
START et si vous réduisez la
fenêtre RICOH Gate à l’état
d’icône dans la Barre des
tâches, un nouvel appui sur
la touche DÉMARRER
n’entraîne pas le réaf?chage
de la fenêtre RICOH Gate.
Cliquez sur l’icône qui se
trouve dans la partie système
de la barre des tâches ( )
pour rouvrir cette fenêtre.
Remarque
324
Cette section explique comment quitter le logiciel RICOH Gate.
1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH
Gate.
La fenêtre de RICOH Gate se ferme et son icône
disparaît aussi dans la barre des tâches.
Si vous avez quitté RICOH Gate et que son icône a donc
disparu de la partie système de la barre des tâches, vous
pouvez relancer ce logiciel à partir du menu Démarrer de
Windows en procédant comme suit.
1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] dans la Barre
des tâches de Windows.
2 Pointez sur [Programmes], puis sur
[Caplio RR10 Software] et cliquez enfin
sur [RICOH Gate].
Le logiciel RICOH Gate se lance, sa fenêtre s’af?che
sur le Bureau et son icône apparaît dans la Barre des
tâches.
Fenêtre de RICOH Gate
Icône de RICOH Gate dans la Barre des tâches
Pour quitter RICOH Gate
Lancement de RICOH Gate25
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate
Les boutons de la fenêtre de RICOH Gate ont les fonctions
indiqués ci-après.
1 Bouton MENU
Ce bouton entraîne l’af?chage des menus qui permettent
d’enregistrer automatiquement les photos, de paramétrer le
courrier électronique, d’af?cher les informations d’état de
l’appareil, etc.
Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage de la touche
START” (p.34).
Voir “Modi?cation des paramètres d’envoi” (p.51).
Voir “Af?chage et modi?cation des Informations relatives à l’appareil” (p.58).
2 Boutons Enregistrer 1 et Enregistrer 2
Ces boutons permettent d’enregistrer des photos de l’appareil
sur l’ordinateur auquel il est raccordé. Indiquez les
paramètres d’enregistrement des ?chiers, notamment le
format de ?chier à sélectionner, l’emplacement et l’action à
effectuer après l’enregistrement.
Voir “Enregistrement des données à l’aide des boutons
Enregistrer” (p.27).
3 Bouton Transférer
Ce bouton permet de transférer des ?chiers de l’ordinateur
vers le support de stockage de l’appareil photo.
Voir “Transfert à l’aide du bouton Transférer” (p.38).
4 Bouton Imprimer Index
Ce bouton permet d’imprimer une « planche index » des
photos via l’ordinateur. L’impression s’effectue sur la base du
paramétrage prédé?ni en ce qui concerne le dossier, la mise
en page, le type de données images à imprimer, etc.
Voir “Impression d’une planche index” (p.44).
5 Bouton Envoyer message
Ce bouton sert à lancer le logiciel de messagerie du système
et à envoyer une photo sélectionnée sous forme de pièce
jointe à un message. L’envoi s’effectue sur la base du
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 926
paramétrage de messagerie prédé?ni en ce qui concerne le
logiciel à lancer, le format d’image à utiliser, etc.
Voir “Envoi d’un message avec pièces jointes” (p.49).
6 Boutons Application 1 et Application 2
Ce bouton permet de lancer une application sélectionnée.
Voir “Lancement de l’application” (p.57).
7 Bouton Icône
Ce bouton permet de refermer la fenêtre de RICOH Gate et de
réduire celui-ci à l’état d’icône.
Voir “Masquage de la fenêtre de RICOH Gate” (p.23).
8 Bouton Quitter
Ce bouton sert à quitter RICOH Gate.
Voir “Pour quitter RICOH Gate” (p.24).
9 Bouton Éteindre l’appareil
Ce bouton permet de mettre hors tension l’appareil photo
connecté à l’ordinateur.
Voir “Mise hors tension de l’appareil” (p.58).
• En cliquant sur les boutons Enregistrer 1, Enregistrer 2, Transférer,
Imprimer index, Envoyer message ou, Application 1 ou Application
2 à l’aide du bouton droit de la souris, vous avez accès à leur boîte
de dialogue de paramétrage respective.
Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer”
(p.28).
Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage du bouton Transférer”
(p.41).
Voir “Modi?cation des réglages d’impression” (p.45).
Voir “Modi?cation des paramètres d’envoi” (p.51).
Voir “Dé?nition de l’application” (p.55).
Remarque27
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
Enregistrement de données de
l’appareil photo sur le micro-ordinateur
(Appareil Ordinateur)
Vous pouvez enregistrer des ?chiers photos, de note vocale et
de séquences vidéo enregistrés avec l’appareil photo dans un
dossier donné de l’ordinateur.
Véri?ez que l’appareil photo est correctement raccordé à
l’ordinateur avant de poursuivre.
• Il n’est pas possible de choisir sélectivement les ?chiers à
transmettre parmi ceux stockés dans l’appareil photo.
• Pour éviter tout risque d’écrasement de ?chiers précédemment
transférés, les ?chiers se voient attribuer des noms uniques selon
une série numérique croissante et sont enregistrés dans le dossier
spéci?é. Toutefois, si la partie numérique des noms de ?chiers
dépasse 9999, un message d’erreur est af?ché.
• Dans la mesure du possible, utilisez l’adaptateur secteur plutôt que
d’alimenter l’appareil photo par sa batterie. Si l’alimentation est
coupée en cours de fonctionnement, l’opération doit être répétée
entièrement.
• Ne branchez et ne débranchez l’adaptateur secteur que lorsque
l’appareil est hors tension ou qu’aucun transfert n’est en cours.
L’appareil ou le micro-ordinateur pourrait en souffrir.
• Les ?chiers sont enregistrés par l’appareil dans les formats ci-après.
Images ?xes : Exif2.1 (*.JPG) ; Fichiers non compressés : TIFFRGB (*.TIF) ; Fichiers Texte : TIFF-MMR (*.TIF) ; Fichiers de
séquence vidéo : AVI (*.AVI) ; Fichiers note vocale : WAV
(*.WAV).
Pour transmettre et enregistrer les données de l’appareil photo
sur l’ordinateur, vous pouvez également utiliser les deux
boutons Enregistrer du logiciel RICOH Gate.
Les données sont enregistrées en fonction du paramétrage de
l’un ou l’autre bouton.
Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer”
(p.28).
• Si vous ne changez pas le paramétrage par défaut des boutons
Enregistrer 1 et Enregistrer 2, les ?chiers de l’appareil seront
enregistrés avec les paramètres ci-après.
Enregistrement des données à l’aide
des boutons Enregistrer
Important
Important
Remarque28
Les images ?xes sont enregistrées au même format où elles ont
été prises.
Un dossier est automatiquement créé dans le dossier du logiciel et
un nom correspondant à la date de prise de vue lui est attribué.
Un message s’af?che pour signaler que la transmission des
?chiers est terminée et que l’appareil peut être mis hors tension.
• Vous pouvez modi?er le paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer si
vous le souhaitez.
Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer”
(p.28).
1 Véri?ez que l’appareil photo est
correctement raccordé à l’ordinateur.
Voir “Connexion de la RICOH BASE à un micro-ordinateur” (p.19).
Voir “Connexion de l’appareil à un micro-ordinateur”
(p.21).
2 Cliquez sur ou sur dans la fenêtre
RICOH Gate.
Les données de l’appareil sont enregistrées dans le
dossier spéci?é en fonction du paramétrage du bouton
sur lequel vous avez cliqué, puis le message de
con?rmation de l’enregistrement est af?ché.
3 Sélectionnez [Turn camera off] ou [Do
not turn camera off].
• Si l’option [Check camera is turned off after saving] n’est pas
sélectionnée dans le paramétrage du bouton Enregistrer, le
message de con?rmation ne s’af?che pas et l’appareil photo est
mis automatiquement hors tension dès la ?n de la transmission.
.
Vous avez la possibilité de modi?er les paramètres des
boutons Enregistrer 1 et Enregistrer 2.
Modi?cation du paramétrage des
boutons Enregistrer
• Si l’appareil photo n’est pas
correctement raccordé à
l’ordinateur, un message
s’af?che pour vous le
signaler. Véri?ez la
connexion.
Remarque
Remarque29
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
Vous pouvez préciser le mode d’enregistrement — enregistrer
les ?chiers tels quels ou opérer une conversion de format —, le
taux de compression, la taille des images, etc.
1 Cliquez sur ou dans la fenêtre
RICOH Gate avec le bouton droit de la
souris, puis sélectionnez [Setting…].
Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.25).
La boîte de dialogue [Save Setting] est af?chée.
2 Donnez un nom à votre bouton.
Voir “Dialogue de paramétrage de l’enregistrement”
(p.31).
3 Si vous souhaitez changer le format
d’enregistrement des images fixes,
cliquez sur le bouton du menu
déroulant [Save Format], puis
sélectionnez le format voulu.
SI vous ne souhaitez pas changer ce format
d’enregistrement, passez à l’étape 8.
4 Sélectionnez le taux de compression
(ou le mode dans le cas des fichiers
PNG) voulu.
• Une fois le paramétrage
terminé, lorsque vous ferez
passer le pointeur de la
souris au-dessus du bouton
concerné dans la fenêtre
RICOH Gate, le nom que
vous aurez saisi ici
s’af?chera dans une
infobulle.
• Il est utile d’affecter un nom
au bouton Enregistrer
concerné pour rappeler son
paramétrage et/ou sa
fonction.
Remarque
Nom du
bouton
• Il n’est pas possible de
dé?nir un taux de
compression pour les
?chiers BMP (*.BMP) ou
TIFF (*.TIF).
Remarque30
5 Si vous souhaitez modifier la taille de
l’image, sélectionnez [Change Image Size].
La boîte de dialogue [Change Image Size] est af?chée.
6 Sélectionnez [Fixed Size] ou [Free Size]
et indiquez la définition standard ou non
standard voulue.
Voir “Dialogue de modi?cation de la taille d’image” (p.33).
7 Sélectionnez [OK].
La boîtes de dialogue [Save Setting] s’af?che à
nouveau à l’écran.
8 Si vous voulez modifier le dossier de
destination de l’enregistrement,
sélectionnez [Set Save Destination Folder].
La boîte de dialogue [Parcourir à la recherche d’un
dossier] est af?chée.
9 Sélectionnez le dossier de destination
voulu, puis sélectionnez [OK].
Voir “Dialogue de sélection d’un dossier” (p.34).
• Dans le cadre du
paramétrage par défaut, le
dossier de destination est le
dossier dans lequel les
logiciels Caplio RR10
Software sont installés.
• Si un dossier n’est pas
automatiquement créé, les
données sont enregistrées
dans le dossier spéci?é via
l’option [Destination Folder]
Remarque31
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
La boîtes de dialogue [Save Setting] s’af?che à
nouveau à l’écran.
10 Indiquez si vous voulez que lors de
l’enregistrement, le dossier cible soit
créé automatiquement.
Si c’est le cas, cliquez sur le bouton du menu
déroulant [Category], puis sélectionnez [Shooting
date], [Photographer’s name] ou [Every Download]
pour qu’un dossier soit créé pour chaque date de prise
de vues, pour chaque photographe distinct ou à chaque
transmission.
11 Indiquez si vous voulez qu’un message
vous donne l’occasion de confirmer ou
d’infirmer la mise hors tension de
l’appareil après l’enregistrement.
12 Sélectionnez [OK].
Vos modi?cations sont prises en compte.
Dialogue de paramétrage de l’enregistrement
1 Nom du bouton
Attribuez un nom au bouton. Ce nom s’af?chera lorsque vous
passerez le pointeur de la souris sur le bouton Enregistrer
concerné dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate.
2 Save Format (Format d’enregistrement)
Si vous sélectionnez [No change], les images ?xes sont
enregistrées dans leur format d’origine.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• Il est utile d’affecter un nom
au bouton Enregistrer
concerné pour rappeler son
paramétrage et/ou sa
fonction.
• Il est utile d’affecter un nom
au bouton Enregistrer
concerné pour rappeler son
paramétrage et/ou sa
fonction.
Remarque32
Si vous souhaitez modi?er le format des ?chiers d’images
?xes provenant de l’appareil photo, sélectionnez l’un des
formats suivants: Exif2.1 (*.JPG), JPEG (*.JPG), BMP
(*.BMP), TIFF (*.TIF) ou PNG (*.PNG).
3 Compression Rate & Mode (Taux de
compression et Mode)
Si vous modi?ez le format d’enregistrement, vous pouvez
spéci?er le mode et le taux de compression.
Si vous souhaitez modi?er le taux de compression et le mode,
sélectionnez le taux voulu dans le menu déroulant
[Compression Rate]. Les taux et modes sélectionnables
dépendent du format choisi au niveau de l’option [Save
Format].
4 Change Image Size (Taille d’image)
Si vous modi?ez le format d’enregistrement, vous pouvez
spéci?er la taille d’image souhaitée.
Si vous souhaitez changer les dimensions de l’image, cliquez
sur [Change Image Size] pour af?cher la boîte de dialogue
correspondante, puis sélectionnez la taille voulue.
Voir “Dialogue de modi?cation de la taille d’image”
(p.33).
5 Save Destination Folder (Dossier de
destination)
Par défaut, il s’agit du dossier dans lequel ont été installés les
logiciels Caplio RR10. Si vous voulez modi?er le dossier de
destination de l’enregistrement, sélectionnez [Set Save
Destination Folder], puis sélectionnez le dossier voulu.
Voir “Dialogue de sélection d’un dossier” (p.34).
6 Automatically create new folder (Créer
automatiquement un nouveau dossier)
Si vous activez cette option, le dossier dans lequel doivent
être placés les ?chiers sur l’ordinateur est créé
automatiquement. Comme sous-option, vous pouvez
sélectionner [Shooting date], [Photographer’s name] ou
[Every Download].
• Si vous sélectionnez [Shooting Date], un dossier distinct est
créé pour chaque date de prise de vue consignée dans
l’appareil photo et les données placées dans les dossiers en
fonction de cette date de création.
• Si vous sélectionnez [Photographer’s name], un dossier
distinct est créé pour chaque photographe consigné dans
l’appareil photo et les données placées dans les dossiers en
fonction du photographe ayant créé les ?chiers.
• Si vous sélectionnez [Every Download], un nouveau dossier
est créé à chaque session de transmission des données. Le
nom du dossier sera formé à partir de la date du jour et d’un
numéro séquentiel comme indiqué ci-dessous.
• Il n’est pas possible de
dé?nir un taux de
compression pour les
?chiers BMP (*.BMP) ou
TIFF (*.TIF).
Remarque33
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
7 Do not automatically create new folder (Ne pas
créer automatiquement de nouveaux dossiers)
Si vous activez cette option, il n’y a pas de création
automatique du dossier cible. Les données sont placées dans
le dossier spéci?é par l’option [Save Destination Folder].
8 Check camera is turned off after saving
(Con?rmer l’extinction de l’appareil après
l’enregistrement)
Si vous activez cette option, un message s’af?che après
l’enregistrement pour vous permettre de con?rmer ou
d’in?rmer la mise hors tension de l’appareil après cette
opération. Dans la boîte de dialogue comportant ce message,
le bouton [Turn camera off] vous permet de commander cette
mise hors tension. En revanche, si vous n’activez pas cette
option, l’appareil est mis automatiquement hors tension en ?n
d’enregistrement, sans af?chage d’un message de
con?rmation.
Dialogue de modi?cation de la taille d’image
1 No change in size (Taille d’origine)
Si vous sélectionnez cette option, la taille de l’image n’est pas
modi?ée.
2 Fixed Size (Dimensions standard)
Si vous sélectionnez cette option, vous pouvez choisir deux
tailles standard : 640 × 480 et 320 × 240.
3 Free Size (Dimensions libres)
Si vous sélectionnez cette option, vous pouvez spéci?er les
dimensions voulues en les saisissant de façon libre dans les
zones prévues pour la largeur (Width) et la hauteur (Height).
4 Save H:W ratio (Conserver les proportions)
Si vous sélectionnez l’option [Free Size] puis cette sousoption, vous pouvez faire varier la taille de l’image sans
changer ses proportions, en indiquant soit une valeur de
largeur, soit une valeur de hauteur.
Numéro séquentiel à 3 chiffres
AAAAMMJJ-000
Date du transfert
1
2
3
434
Dialogue de sélection d’un dossier
1 Le lecteur où le dossier est af?ché.
Spéci?ez le dossier voulu en procédant de la même manière
que dans l’Explorateur Windows, puis sélectionnez [OK].
En ajustant le paramétrage de la fonction d’Enregistrement
automatique via la touche START, vous pouvez commander
l’enregistrement des ?chiers de l’appareil sur le microordinateur, au format souhaité et dans le dossier voulu par un
simple appui sur le touche START de la RICOH BASE lorsque
l’appareil est placé sur cette dernière.
1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre
RICOH Gate.
Le menu RICOH Gate est af?ché.
2 Sélectionnez [Options Setting...].
La boîte de dialogue [Options Setting] est af?chée.
3 Sélectionnez [Saved automatically when
START Key is pressed].
Modi?cation du paramétrage de la
touche START
1
• Vous pouvez également
af?cher le menu RICOH
Gate en cliquant sur l’icône
RICOH Gate de la barre des
tâches avec le bouton droit
de la souris.
Remarque35
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
Voir “Dialogue de paramétrage des options” (p.35).
4 Cliquez sur puis sélectionnez [Save
1] ou [Save 2] à la rubrique [Save Format
for Auto Save].
• [Save 1] est le paramétrage d’enregistrement lié au bouton
Enregistrer 1. [Save 2] est le paramétrage d’enregistrement lié
au bouton Enregistrer 2.
• Vous pouvez donc opérer un paramétrage différent pour
chacun des deux boutons Enregistrer.
Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer” (p.28).
5 Sélectionnez [OK].
Le paramétrage de l’Enregistrement automatique est
modi?é.
Dialogue de paramétrage des options
Remarque
1
2
336
1 Saved automatically when START Key is
pressed (Enregistrement automatique à
l’appui sur DÉMARRER)
Si vous sélectionnez cette option, les ?chiers sont
automatiquement enregistrés au format spéci?é.
2 Save Format for Auto Save
Indiquez si la fonction d’Enregistrement automatique doit
utiliser le paramétrage [Save 1] ou [Save 2]. [Save 1] et [Save
2] correspondent aux paramétrage dans RICOH Gate des
deux boutons Enregistrer 1 et Enregistrer 2.
3 Not saved automatically when START Key is
pressed (Pas d’enregistrement automatique à
l’appui sur DÉMARRER)
Si vous sélectionnez cette option, la fonction Enregistrement
automatique ne s’active pas lorsque vous appuyez sur la
touche START de la RICOH BASE.
En plaçant l’appareil photo sur la RICOH BASE, vous pouvez
automatiquement transmettre et enregistrer les ?chiers image,
son ou vidéo de l’appareil dans le dossier spéci?é de
l’ordinateur en appuyant simplement sur la touche START
de la RICOH BASE.
• Sélectionnez l’option [Saved automatically when START key is
pressed] pour que la touche START permette l’enregistrement
automatique des ?chiers de l’appareil. Si cette option n’est pas
sélectionnée, les ?chiers ne pourront pas être enregistrée à l’aide de
la touche START.
Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage de la touche START”
(p.34).
• Le paramétrage du format d’enregistrement, du dossier de
destination, etc. s’effectue au niveau des boutons Enregistrer 1 et
Enregistrer 2.
Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer”
(p.28).
1 Véri?ez que la RICOH BASE est
correctement raccordé à l’ordinateur.
Voir “Branchement du câble USB” (p.19).
Transmission automatique des ?chiers
à l’aide de la touche START
Important
Remarque37
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
2 Vérifiez que l’adaptateur secteur est
correctement raccordé à la RICOH
BASE.
3 Placez l’appareil photo sur la RICOH
BASE.
4 Appuyez sur la touche Démarrer de
la RICOH BASE.
Le message [PC connection] s’af?che sur l’écran LCD
de l’appareil photo.
Les données de l’appareil photo sont transmises et
enregistrées sur l’ordinateur et le message de
con?rmation de cette opération est af?ché.
5 Sélectionnez [Turn camera off] ou [Do
not turn camera off].
• Selon le paramétrage du bouton Enregistrer 1 et Enregistrer 2
affecté à [Auto Save Setting] par touche START, il est possible
que l’appareil se mette hors tension sans demande de
con?rmation.
Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage de la touche START”
(p.34).
Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer” (p.28).
Remarque38
Envoi de données de l’ordinateur
vers l’appareil photo
(PC Appareil)
Vous pouvez transférer des ?chiers enregistrés avec l’appareil
et des musiques (?chiers MP3) de l’ordinateur vers l’appareil
photo.
Véri?ez que l’appareil photo est correctement raccordé à
l’ordinateur avant de poursuivre.
.
On appelle ici « transfert » l’envoi de données de l’ordinateur
vers l’appareil photo.
Vous pouvez transférer des images, des sons, des séquences
vidéo et de la musique de votre ordinateur vers l’appareil photo
via le bouton Transférer du logiciel RICOH Gate.
Le transfert s’effectue en fonction du paramétrage du bouton
Transférer.
Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage du bouton Transférer”
(p.41).
• Seuls les ?chiers EXIF (*.JPG), les ?chiers notes vocales (*.WAV),
les ?chiers vidéo (*.AVI) enregistrés à l’origine sur cet appareil
d’une part, et les ?chiers MP3 (*.MP3) peuvent être transférés.
1 Véri?ez que l’appareil photo est
correctement raccordé à l’ordinateur.
Voir “Connexion de la RICOH BASE à un micro-ordinateur” (p.19).
Voir “Connexion de l’appareil à un micro-ordinateur”
(p.21).
2 Vérifiez le paramétrage du transfert.
Modi?ez ce paramétrage si nécessaire.
Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage du bouton Transférer”
(p.41).
3 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate.
La boîte de dialogue [Upload] apparaît.
4 Sélectionnez le lecteur et le dossier
dans lesquels se trouve le fichier à
transférer.
Transfert à l’aide du bouton
Transférer
• Si vous voulez transférer des
?chiers MP3, ne manquez
pas de lire d’abord la section
“Transfert d’un ?chier MP3”
p.43.
Important
Important
• Si l’appareil photo n’est pas
correctement raccordé à
l’ordinateur, un message
s’af?che pour vous le
signaler. Véri?ez la
connexion.
Remarque39
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
Voir “Dialogue de Transfert” (p.40).
5 Sélectionnez le type de fichier à
transférer dans la zone [File Type].
Lorsque vous sélectionnez un type de ?chier, les
vignettes des ?chiers de ce type présents dans le
dossier sont af?chées.
6 Choisissez la vignette voulue dans la
liste des fichiers, puis cliquez sur [OK].
• S’il s’agit d’un ?chier note vocale, c’est une icône de note
vocale qui est af?chée, et s’il s’agit d’une séquence vidéo,
c’est l’icône de ?lm.
• Si vous sélectionnez un ?chier-liste de morceaux MP3
(*.M3U), la boîte de dialogue [Select Playlist] apparaît. Pour
transférer des ?chiers MP3 et des listes MP3, consultez
l’encadré de la page 40.
Voir “Transfert d’un ?chier MP3” (p.43).
Les données spéci?ées sont transférées de l’ordinateur
à l’appareil photo et le message de con?rmation de
cette opération est af?ché.
• Seuls les ?chiers indiqués
dans la liste des ?chiers
peuvent être transférés.
Remarque
Remarque
• Si l’option [Check camera is
turned off after upload is
executed] n’est pas
sélectionnée dans le
paramétrage du bouton
Transférer, le message de
con?rmation ne s’af?che pas
et l’appareil photo est mis
automatiquement hors
tension dès la ?n du
transfert.
Remarque40
7 Sélectionnez [Turn camera off] ou [Do
not turn camera off].
Dialogue de Transfert
1 Drive (Lecteur)
Sélectionnez le lecteur dans lequel se trouve le ?chier à
transférer.
2 Folder (Dossier)
Sélectionnez le dossier dans lequel se trouve le ?chier à
transférer. Par défaut, il s’agit du dossier spéci?é au niveau de
l’option [Upload Source Folder] dans les paramètres de
transfert.
3 File Type (Type de ?chier)
Lorsque vous sélectionnez un type de ?chier à transférer,
seules les vignettes des ?chiers de ce type présents dans le
dossier sélectionné sont af?chées et seuls les ?chiers
correspondants peuvent être transférés.
4 File List (Liste des ?chiers)
Un af?chage de type vignettes des ?chiers du type spéci?é
présents dans le dossier choisi apparaît. Vous pouvez ainsi
contrôler s’il s’agit bien des ?chiers à transférer.
5 File Name (Nom du ?chier)
Le nom du ?chier ?gure sous la vignette.
4
5
2
1
341
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
Vous avez la possibilité de modi?er le paramétrage du bouton
Transférer.
Vous pouvez spéci?er le type des ?chiers que vous voulez
transférer ainsi que le dossier source contenant ces ?chiers
sur l’ordinateur et enregistrer ces modi?cations.
1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH
Gate avec le bouton droit de la souris,
puis sélectionnez [Setting…].
Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.25).
La boîte de dialogue [Upload Setting] apparaît.
2 Donnez un nom au bouton Transférer.
Voir “Dialogue de Transfert” (p.40).
3 Si vous voulez spécifier un type de
fichiers particulier auquel doit être limité
le transfert, cliquez sur le bouton du
menu déroulant [File Type], puis
sélectionnez le type de fichiers voulu.
4 Si vous voulez spécifier le dossier source,
cliquez sur [Set Upload Source Folder…].
La boîte de dialogue [Parcourir à la recherche d’un
dossier] est af?chée.
5 Sélectionnez le dossier source voulu,
puis sélectionnez [OK].
Modi?cation du paramétrage du
bouton Transférer
Nom du bouton
• Une fois le paramétrage de
transfert terminé, lorsque
vous ferez passer le pointeur
de la souris au-dessus du
bouton Transférer, le
commentaire que vous aurez
saisi ici s’af?chera dans une
infobulle.
Remarque
• Le réglage par défaut de
cette option est [All Files]
(tous les types de ?chiers).
• Dans le cadre du
paramétrage par défaut, le
dossier source est le dossier
dans lequel les logiciels
Caplio RR10 sont installés.
Important42
Voir “Dialogue de sélection d’un dossier” (p.34).
La boîtes de dialogue [Upload Setting] s’af?che à
nouveau à l’écran.
6 Indiquez si vous souhaitez avoir la
possibilité de confirmer ou d’infirmer la
mise hors tension de l’appareil après le
transfert.
7 Sélectionnez [OK].
Vos modi?cations sont prises en compte.
Dialogue de paramétrage de transfert
1 Nom du bouton
Attribuez un nom au bouton Transférer. Ce nom s’af?chera
lorsque vous passerez le pointeur de la souris sur le bouton
Transférer dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate.
2 File Type (Type1 de ?chier)
Si vous sélectionnez [All Files], tous les ?chiers du dossier
source spéci?é pouvant être transférés le sont.
Si vous voulez limiter le transfert aux ?chiers d’un certain type,
sélectionnez l’un des types suivants : ?chiers EXIF (*.JPG),
?chiers notes vocales (*.WAV), ?chiers AVI (*.AVI) et ?chiers
MP3 (*.MP3) ou de listes de morceaux MP3 (*.M3U).
3 Upload Source Folder (Dossier source)
Par défaut, le dossier source est le dossier dans lequel les
logiciels Caplio RR10 sont installés. Si vous voulez modi?er
le dossier source du transfert, sélectionnez [Set Upload
Source Folder], puis sélectionnez le dossier voulu.
1
2
3
4
• Il est utile d’affecter un nom
au bouton Transférer pour
rappeler son paramétrage et/
ou sa fonction.
Remarque43
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
4 Check camera is turned off after upload is
executed (Con?rmer l’extinction de l’appareil
après le transfert)
Si vous activez cette option, un message s’af?che après le
transfert pour vous permettre de con?rmer ou d’in?rmer la
mise hors tension de l’appareil après cette opération. Dans la
boîte de dialogue comportant ce message, le bouton [Turn
camera off] vous permet de commander cette mise hors
tension. En revanche, si vous n’activez pas cette option,
l’appareil est mis automatiquement hors tension en ?n de
transfert, sans af?chage d’un message de con?rmation.
• L’appareil photo peut reproduire les sons des ?chiers MP3 au
format ci-après.
– Débit : 96 kbit/s
– Fréquence d’échantillonnage : 44,1 kHz
Transfert d’un ?chier MP3
Lorsque vous transférez un ?chier MP3 vers l’appareil
photo, un recodage du ?chier est effectué juste avant le
transfert. Seuls les ?chiers MP3 ainsi recodés sont
lisibles par l’appareil photo.
Si vous sélectionnez le type [MP3 Playlist File (*.M3U)]
dans le menu déroulant [File Type], la boîte de
dialogue [Select Playlist] apparaît. Indiquez quel
morceau de la liste vous voulez transférer.
Voir “Transfert à l’aide du bouton Transférer”
(p.38).
Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage du bouton
Transférer” (p.41).
Conseils
Important44
Impression d’une planche index
(Planches index)
Vous pouvez imprimer une « planche index » des photos
enregistrées sur l’ordinateur..
• Cette impression ne peut porter que sur les images aux formats
suivants : BITMAP (*.BMP), EXIF2.1/2.0 (*.JPG), J6I (*.J6I),
JPEG (*.JPG), NC (*.TIF), TIFF-YUV (*.TIF), TIF-MMR (*.TIF),
TIFF-RGB (*.TIF), PCD (*.PCD), PNG (*.PNG), TIFF (*.TIF),
WMF (*.WMF), AVI (*.AVI), WAV (*.WAV) et MOV (*.MOV).
Cette fonction vous permet d’obtenir une planche index des
photos d’un dossier donné, c’est-à-dire d’une impression
sur papier de toutes les photos à un format miniature. Vous
pouvez spéci?er si un titre, la date de prise de vue, les
numéros de pages et la date d’impression, doivent être
imprimés, et indiquer le nombre de photos miniatures qui
doivent ?gurer sur chaque page.
1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate.
La boîte de dialogue [Index Print] apparaît.
2 Vérifiez le paramétrage de l’impression
d’index, puis sélectionnez [Print
(Imprimer)].
Modi?ez ce paramétrage si nécessaire.
Voir “Dialogue de paramétrage de l’impression d’index”
(p.47).
Impression d’une planche index
Important
• Les icônes spéciales
associées aux ?chiers note
vocale et séquence vidéo
sont également imprimées.
Remarque
• Le paramétrage du bouton
Imprimer index est rappelé
dans la boîte de dialogue
[Index Print] illustrée ici. Si
vous modi?ez ici certains
paramètres, vos
modi?cations sont
répercutées sur le bouton
Imprimer index.
Remarque45
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
La boîte de dialogue [Print] apparaît.
3 Vérifiez que le type d’imprimante
sélectionné est bien le type voulu.
Le nom de l’imprimante saisie dans la zone [Dé?nir
par défault] sous [Printer Name] est af?ché. Si vous
utilisez une autre imprimante, sélectionnez-la.
4 Indiquez le nombre d’exemplaires voulu,
puis sélectionnez [OK].
L’impression débute.
La planche est imprimée en fonction des paramètres
d’impression affectés au bouton Imprimer index.
Lorsque vous effectuez un tel paramétrage, vous pouvez le
sauvegarder avec tous ses paramètres - nombre d’images par
page, impression du titre, de la date de prise de vue, du numéro
de page, etc. Cette fonction est utile pour réadopter rapidement
un ancien paramétrage après avoir modi?é des paramètres.
• Vous pouvez modi?er les paramètres d’impression même après le
lancement de l’impression de la planche index.
Voir “Impression d’une planche index” (p.44).
1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH
Gate avec le bouton droit de la souris,
puis sélectionnez [Setting...].
Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.25).
La boîte de dialogue [Index Print Setting] apparaît.
Modi?cation des réglages
d’impression
• En cliquant sur le bouton
[Properties], vous pouvez
paramétrer votre imprimante
de façon ?ne. Effectuez le
paramétrage requis.
• Pour plus de précisions,
consultez les modes
d’emploi de votre ordinateur
et de votre imprimante.
Remarque
Remarque46
2 Donnez un nom au bouton Imprimer
index.
Voir “Dialogue de paramétrage de l’impression d’index”
(p.47).
3 Tapez le titre qui doit apparaître en entête.
Si vous laissez cette zone vide, aucun titre n’est
imprimé.
4 Choisissez le nombre d’images par
page imprimée.
Vous pouvez sélectionner l’un des formats suivants: (5
× 8), (4 × 6), (3 × 4) or (2 × 3).
5 Choisissez entre l’impression de la date
de prise de vue ([Shooting date]), la date
d’impression ([Print date]) ou les
numéros de pages ([Page No.]).
6 Sélectionnez la police et le corps dans
lesquels imprimer le titre, la date de
prise de vue, etc.
• Une fois le paramétrage
terminé, lorsque vous ferez
passer le pointeur de la
souris au-dessus du bouton
Imprimer index, le nom que
vous aurez saisi ici
s’af?chera dans une
infobulle.
Remarque
Nom du bouton
• En cliquant sur le bouton
[Printer Setting...], vous
pouvez paramétrer votre
imprimante de façon ?ne.
Effectuez le paramétrage
requis.
• Pour plus de précisions,
consultez les modes
d’emploi de votre ordinateur
et de votre imprimante.
Remarque47
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
7 Si vous voulez spécifier un autre
dossier d’images à imprimer, cliquez
sur [Set Print Folder].
La boîte de dialogue [Parcourir à la recherche d’un
dossier] est af?chée.
8 Sélectionnez le dossier voulu, puis
sélectionnez [OK].
Voir “Dialogue de sélection d’un dossier” (p.34).
La boîtes de dialogue [Index Print Setting] s’af?che à
nouveau à l’écran.
9 Sélectionnez [OK].
Le paramétrage d’impression d’index est enregistré.
Dialogue de paramétrage de l’impression d’index
1
2
3
5
6
7
448
1 Nom du bouton
Attribuez un nom au bouton. Ce nom s’af?chera lorsque le
pointeur de la souris passera au-dessus du bouton Imprimer
index.
2 Set Printer (Réglages d’imprimante)
En cliquant sur [Printer Setting...], vous pouvez sélectionner
le format du papier, le mode d’alimentation, la direction
d’impression, etc.
3 Print Title (Titre)
Tapez le titre qui doit apparaître en en-tête. Si vous laissez
cette zone vide, aucun titre n’est imprimé.
4 Print Type (Format d’impression)
Choisissez le nombre d’images à placer sur chaque page
imprimée. Les différents choix sont présentés sous forme de
matrice nombre d’images sur une ligen x nombre de colonnes.
5 Print Options (Options d’impression)
Il vous suf?t de sélectionner [Shooting date], [Page No.] ou
[Print date] pour que la date de prise de vues, le numéro de
page et la date d’impression ?gurent en en-tête des pages
imprimées. Si vous ne sélectionnez aucune de ces options,
rien n’est imprimé.
6 Font Setting (Police de caractères)
Sélectionnez la police et le corps (8 pts à 14 pts) dans lesquels
imprimer le titre, la date de prise de vue, les numéros de page
et la date d’impression.
7 Print Folder (Dossier à imprimer)
Sélectionnez le dossier dans lequel se trouve les images que
vous voulez imprimer.
Tapez le chemin d’accès à ce dossier directement dans la zone
de saisie, ou bien cliquez sur [Set Print Folder] et choisissez le
dossier voulu dans la boîte de dialogue Parcourir af?chée.
Par défaut, il s’agit du dossier dans lequel ont été installés les
logiciels Caplio RR10.49
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
Envoi d’un message
Grâce au bouton Envoyer message de RICOH Gate, vous
pouvez lancer votre logiciel de messagerie et envoyer des
photos enregistrées sur l’ordinateur sous forme de pièces
jointes.
• Il est nécessaire de disposer d’un logiciel de messagerie compatible
MAPI pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Parmi les logiciels de
messagerie compatibles MAPI, citons notamment Outlook Express,
Eudora, Eudora Pro, etc.
• Les images aux formats suivants peuvent être jointes à un message :
BITMAP (*.BMP), EXIF2.1/2.0 (*.JPG), JPEG (*.JPG), NC
(*.TIF), TIFF-YUV (*.TIF), TIF-MMR (*.TIF), TIFF-RGB
(*.TIF), PNG (*.PNG), TIFF (*.TIF), AVI (*.AVI) et WAV
(*.WAV)
Sélectionnez les images voulues dans leur dossier avant
de lancer le logiciel de messagerie et de les joindre au
message.
1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH
Gate.
Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.25).
La boîte de dialogue [Send Mail] apparaît.
2 Sélectionnez le lecteur et le dossier
dans lesquels se trouve les fichiers à
envoyer.
Envoi d’un message avec pièces
jointes
Important
• Vous pouvez modi?er le
paramétrage d’envoi par
message, notamment le type
des ?chiers à envoyer ou le
dossier source des images à
envoyer.
Voir “Modi?cation des
paramètres d’envoi” (p.51).
Remarque50
Voir “Dialogue d’envoi de message” (p.51).
3 Sélectionnez le type de fichier à envoyer
dans la zone [File Type].
Lorsque vous sélectionnez un type de ?chier, les
vignettes des ?chiers de ce type présents dans le
dossier sont af?chées.
4 Choisissez la vignette du fichier que
vous voulez envoyer, puis sélectionnez
[OK].
Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs ?chiers en vous
servant des touches Maj et Ctrl.
• S’il s’agit d’un ?chier note vocale, c’est une icône de note
vocale qui est af?chée, et s’il s’agit d’une séquence vidéo,
c’est l’icône de ?lm.
• Si le volume total des ?chiers joints dépasse la taille maximale
par message paramétrée, une demande de con?rmation
d’envoi est af?chée. Si vous désirez bien envoyer ce message
et ces ?chiers, sélectionnez [Yes (Oui)]. Si vous préférez
annuler l’envoi, sélectionnez [No (Non)].
• La taille de message maximale par défaut est de 1024 Ko.
• Dans certains environnements système, la boîte de dialogue
[Select Pro?le] s’af?che. Cliquez sur ¥ pour sélectionner le
logiciel de messagerie que vous utilisez habituellement, puis
cliquez sur [OK].
Voir “Paramétrage de la taille maximale des messages en
envoi” (p.54).
5 La fenêtre de composition de message
de votre logiciel de messagerie s’ouvre
et les fichiers sélectionnés au niveau de
la boîte de dialogue [Send Mail] y sont
déjà placés en pièces jointes.
• Les logiciels qui répondent à la fonction de demande d’envoi
de message (c’est-à-dire les logiciels compatibles MAPI) sont
ceux qui sont disponibles dans la zone [Courrier] de la boîte
de dialogue [Options Internet/Programmes] accessible dans le
[Panneau de con?guration].
Remarque
Remarque51
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
Dialogue d’envoi de message
1 Drive (Lecteur)
Sélectionnez le lecteur dans lequel se trouvent les ?chiers à
envoyer.
2 Folder (Dossier)
Sélectionnez le dossier dans lequel se trouvent les ?chiers à
envoyer. Par défaut, il s’agit du dossier spéci?é au niveau de
l’option [Upload Source Folder] dans les paramètres de
transfert.
3 File Type (Type de ?chier)
Lorsque vous sélectionnez un type de ?chier à envoyer, seuls
les ?chiers de ce type présents dans le dossier sélectionné sont
af?chées.
4 File List (Liste des ?chiers)
Un af?chage de type vignettes des ?chiers du type spéci?é
apparaît. Choisissez la vignette du ?chier que vous voulez
envoyer. Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs ?chiers.
5 File Name (Nom du ?chier)
Le nom du ?chier ?gure sous la vignette.
.
Vous avez la possibilité de modi?er le paramétrage du bouton
Envoyer message.
Dans ce paramétrage, vous pouvez spéci?er le type du ou des
?chiers à envoyer, le dossier source, etc. et vous pouvez
enregistrer le paramétrage pour vous en resservir plus tard.
Vous pouvez aussi modi?er la taille de l’image à envoyer.
1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH
Gate avec le bouton droit de la souris,
puis sélectionnez [Setting…].
Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.25).
Modi?cation des paramètres d’envoi
4
5
2
1
352
La boîte de dialogue [Mail Send Setting] apparaît.
2 Donnez un nom à votre bouton.
Voir “Dialogue de paramétrage d’envoi de message”
(p.53).
3 Si vous souhaitez changer le format
d’enregistrement des images fixes,
cliquez sur le bouton du menu
déroulant [Send Format], puis
sélectionnez le format voulu.
SI vous ne souhaitez pas changer ce format d’envoi,
passez à l’étape 7.
4 Si vous souhaitez modifier la taille de
l’image, sélectionnez [Change Image Size].
La boîte de dialogue [Change Image Size] est af?chée.
5 Sélectionnez [Fixed Size] ou [Free Size]
et indiquez la définition standard ou non
standard voulue.
Voir “Dialogue de modi?cation de la taille d’image” (p.33).
• Une fois le paramétrage
terminé, lorsque vous ferez
passer le pointeur de la
souris au-dessus du bouton
Envoyer message, le nom
que vous aurez saisi ici
s’af?chera dans une
infobulle.
Remarque
Nom du bouton53
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
6 Sélectionnez [OK].
La boîtes de dialogue [Mail Send Setting] s’af?che à
nouveau à l’écran.
7 Si vous voulez modifier le dossier de
destination de l’enregistrement,
sélectionnez [Set Upload Source Folder].
La boîte de dialogue [Parcourir à la recherche d’un
dossier] est af?chée.
8 Sélectionnez le dossier source voulu,
puis sélectionnez [OK].
Voir “Dialogue de sélection d’un dossier” (p.34).
La boîte de dialogue [Mail Send Setting] s’af?che à
nouveau à l’écran.
Dialogue de paramétrage d’envoi de message
1 Nom du bouton
Attribuez un nom au bouton. Ce nom apparaîtra dans une
infobulle lorsque le pointeur de la souris passera au-dessus du
bouton Envoyer message.
2 Change Size of Still Picture (Modi?er la taille
des images ?xes)
Si vous sélectionnez [No change], le taux de compression et le
mode restent ceux affectés aux images lors de la prise de vues.
Si vous souhaitez changer les dimensions des images envoyées,
cliquez sur [Change Image Size] pour af?cher la boîte de
dialogue correspondante, puis sélectionnez la taille voulue.
• Dans le cadre du
paramétrage par défaut, le
dossier source est le dossier
dans lequel les logiciels
Caplio RR10 sont installés.
Remarque
1
2
354
Voir “Dialogue de modi?cation de la taille d’image”
(p.33).
3 Upload Source Folder (Dossier source)
Sélectionnez le dossier à présenter lors de l’ouverture de la
boîte de dialogue d’envoi de message. Tapez le chemin
d’accès à ce dossier directement dans la zone de saisie, ou
bien cliquez sur [Set Upload Source Folder] et choisissez le
dossier voulu dans la boîte de dialogue [Parcourir à la
recherche d’un dossier].
Par défaut, il s’agit du dossier dans lequel ont été installés les
logiciels Caplio RR10.
Vous pouvez faire en sorte qu’un message d’alerte s’af?che
lorsqu’un message sur le point d’être envoyé est plus gros
qu’une taille maximale que vous dé?nissez.
1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre
RICOH Gate.
Le menu RICOH Gate est af?ché.
2 Sélectionnez [Options Setting...].
La boîte de dialogue [Options Setting] est af?chée.
3 Saisissez la taille maximale voulue, en
kilo-octets, puis sélectionnez [OK].
La taille maximale dé?nie est enregistrée.
Paramétrage de la taille maximale
• La taille de message des messages en envoi
maximale par défaut est de
1024 Ko.
Remarque
• Vous pouvez également
af?cher le menu RICOH
Gate en cliquant sur l’icône
RICOH Gate de la barre des
tâches avec le bouton droit
de la souris.
Remarque55
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
Lancement d’une application
En affectant le programme de votre choix au bouton
Application de RICOH Gate, vous pouvez ensuite directement
lancer cette application à l’aide de ce bouton.
Vous pouvez dé?nir l’application à lancer lorsqu’on clique sur
les boutons Application1 et Application 2.
1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH
Gate avec le bouton droit de la souris,
puis sélectionnez [Setting…].
Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.25).
La boîte de dialogue [Application Setting] est af?chée.
2 Donnez un nom à votre bouton.
Voir “Dialogue de paramétrage d’application” (p.56).
3 Cliquez sur [Set Link Destination...].
La boîte de dialogue [Set Link Destination] est
af?chée.
Dé?nition de l’application
• Une fois le paramétrage
terminé, lorsque vous ferez
passer le pointeur de la
souris au-dessus du bouton
concerné, le nom que vous
aurez saisi ici s’af?chera
dans une infobulle.
Remarque
Nom du bouton56
4 Choisissez l’application voulue, puis
sélectionnez [OK].
Voir “Dialogue de sélection de l’application à lancer”
(p.56).
Dialogue de paramétrage d’application
1 Nom du bouton
Attribuez un nom au bouton Application concerné. Ce nom
s’af?chera lorsque vous passerez le pointeur de la souris sur
ce bouton dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate.
2 Link Destination (Application à lancer)
Spéci?ez l’application à lancer lorsque vous cliquez sur le
bouton Application concerné. Tapez le chemin d’accès à cette
application directement dans la zone de saisie, ou bien cliquez
sur [Set Link Destination] et choisissez l’application voulue
dans la boîte de dialogue qui s’af?che alors.
Dialogue de sélection de l’application à lancer
1
2
1
2
357
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
1 Dossier et liste des ?chiers
Naviguez vers le dossier où se trouve l’application à lancer.
2 File name (Nom du ?chier)
Lorsque vous choisissez une application à lancer, son nom
s’af?che dans cette zone.
3 Files of type (Fichier de type)
Les ?chiers exécutables (*.exe) peuvent être sélectionnés.
Seuls ces ?chiers exécutables sont af?chés.
Vous pouvez lancer l’application dé?nie en cliquant sur le
bouton correspondant de RICOH Gate.
1 Cliquez sur ou dans la fenêtre
RICOH Gate.
Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.25).
L’application dé?nie se lance.
Lancement de l’application58
Autres fonctions
Lorsque l’appareil photo est connecté à l’ordinateur, vous
pouvez le mettre hors tension en cliquant sur le bouton
Éteindre l’appareil de RICOH Gate.
1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre
RICOH Gate.
Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.25).
L’appareil passe hors tension. Lorsque l’appareil est
placé sur la RICOH BASE, il passe en mode charge de
batterie.
Lorsque l’appareil photo est connecté à l’ordinateur, vous
pouvez af?cher et ainsi véri?er le nom du photographe dé?ni
dans l’appareil.
1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre
RICOH Gate.
Le menu RICOH Gate est af?ché.
2 Sélectionnez [Camera Property…].
La boîte de dialogue [Camera Property] apparaît.
3 Vérifiez le nom du photographe, puis
sélectionnez [OK].
Vous pouvez saisir jusqu’à 20 caractères.
Le nouveau nom est enregistré dans l’appareil photo.
Mise hors tension de l’appareil
Af?chage et modi?cation des
Informations relatives à l’appareil
• Vous pouvez également
af?cher le menu RICOH
Gate en cliquant sur l’icône
RICOH Gate de la barre des
tâches avec le bouton droit
de la souris.
Remarque
• Vous pouvez saisir jusqu’à
16 caractères ASCII pour
dé?nir le nom du
photographe. Voir “À propos
du code ASCII” (p.60).
Remarque59
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
Vous avez la possibilité de changer l’aspect de RICOH Gate.
Vous pouvez choisir entre deux décors (casual, c’est-à-dire
décontracté, et formal, c’est-à-dire sérieux), en plus du décor
par défaut (basic).
1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre
RICOH Gate.
Le menu RICOH Gate est af?ché.
2 Sélectionnez [Set Background
Illustration…].
La boîte de dialogue [Set Background Illustration] est
af?chée.
3 Choisissez un décor dans la liste
[Background Illustration Pattern] située
du côté gauche, puis sélectionnez [OK].
Une fois le décor sélectionné, un aperçu vous en est
fourni dans la partie droite de la fenêtre.
Le décor de la fenêtre RICOH Gate est modi?é.
Modi?cation de l’aspect de RICOH
Gate
• Vous pouvez également
af?cher le menu RICOH
Gate en cliquant sur l’icône
RICOH Gate de la barre des
tâches avec le bouton droit
de la souris.
Remarque60
Vous pouvez retrouver le numéro de version du logiciel RICOH
Gate que vous utilisez.
1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre
RICOH Gate.
Le menu RICOH Gate est af?ché.
2 Sélectionnez [About the RICOH Gate…].
La boîte de dialogue [RICOH Gate Version
information] est af?chée.
3 Sélectionnez [OK].
Af?chage du numéro de version de
RICOH Gate
À propos du code ASCII
Le code ASCII dé?nit un jeu de caractères
informatiques permettant l’échange de messages et de
données entre différents types d’ordinateurs. Outre les
lettres majuscules et minuscules non accentuées [A-Z]
et [a-z], les chiffres [0-9] et des signes et symboles tels
que (+-*/$%&!], etc., le code ASCII comprend des
codes de contrôles comme Retour chariot et
Tabulation. Comme il s’agit d’un code conçu aux ÉtatsUnis, les caractères accentués et autres caractères
spéciaux n’y ?gurent pas. Néanmoins, son utilisation
quasi universel sur les micro-ordinateurs permet
d’assurer des échanges aisés entre ordinateurs.
• Vous pouvez également
af?cher le menu RICOH
Gate en cliquant sur l’icône
RICOH Gate de la barre des
tâches avec le bouton droit
de la souris.
Remarque
Conseils61
Appendice
Appendice
Cette section explique comment se servir des ?chiers de
séquence vidéo (AVI) ?lmés avec l’appareil photo sous
PowerPoint, et détaille les menus du logiciel RICOH Gate et
les caractéristiques des ?chiers et des logiciels utilisés.
Utilisation des séquences vidéo
prises avec l’appareil
Vous pouvez convertir les ?chiers de séquence vidéo
provenant de l’appareil photo à l’aide d’un logiciel de retouche
vidéo avant des les enregistrer ; vous pourrez ainsi les
visionner grâce au Lecteur Windows Media et les utiliser dans
d’autres applications Windows (PowerPoint, etc.).
Les ?chiers AVI (MotionJPEG) peuvent être convertis en
?chiers MPEG à l’aide du logiciel MGI VideoWave qui se trouve
sur le CD-ROM fourni.
Voir “Examen du contenu du CD-ROM (View CD-ROM)” (p.9).
Vous pouvez transmettre les séquences vidéo ?lmées avec
l’appareil au logiciel MGI VideoWave, puis les enregistrer au
format vidéo MPEG.
Voir “Transmission automatique des ?chiers à l’aide de la touche START” (p.36).
Voir “Enregistrement des données à l’aide des boutons Enregistrer” (p.27).
1 Lancez le logiciel MGI VideoWave puis
importez le ?chier de séquence vidéo
voulu.
Ajoutez la séquence vidéo à la bibliothèque de
séquences puis, par un glisser-déposer, placez-le sur la
zone du scénario.
Conversion des ?chiers à l’aide de
MGI VideoWave62
2 Cliquez sur le bouton (bouton
Produire une vidéo) de la barre d’outils.
3 Sélectionnez [Video in a WindowMPEG1] dans le modèle voulu et
indiquez l’emplacement et le nom du
fichier.
3Faites glisser le fichier et déposez-le
2Le fichier ajouté à la bibliothèque
est affiché dans cette liste.
1Cliquez sur pour afficher
le menu. Sélectionnez [Add
files...] puis indiquez le63
Appendice
La lecture débute et la séquence s’af?che à l’écran..
• La dé?nition des images des séquences vidéo prises avec cette
appareil est de 320 × 240. Même si vous sélectionnez une dé?nition
supérieure, la qualité d’image ne s’en trouvera pas améliorée.
• Pour plus de précisions sur les fonctions et le mode d’emploi du
logiciel MGI VideoWave, consultez le manuel PDF fourni ou
l’Aide en ligne.
1Cliquez sur pour sélectionner une [Video in
a Window - MPEG1] dans les modèles, puis
cliquez sur [Next (Suivant)].
2Indiquez l’emplacement et le nom du
fichier à enregistrer.
3Cliquez sur ce bouton pour lancer la production.
Remarque64
Utilisation du Caplio RR10 comme
Webcam
Vous pouvez vous servir de l’appareil photo comme d’une
webcam, c’est-à-dire une caméra de capture vidéo.
C’est MGI VideoWave, qui se trouve sur le CD-ROM fourni
avec l’appareil, qui sera utilisé pour cela et dont le
fonctionnement est expliqué ci-après.
Pour pouvoir utiliser la fonction de capture vidéo, les
préparatifs suivants doivent être effectués à l’aide du logiciel
MGI VideoWave.
1 Introduisez le CD-ROM fourni avec
l’appareil dans le lecteur de CD-ROM,
puis installez le pilote USB, le pilote
vidéo et MGI VideoWave.
• Si vous avez effectué une installation standard des logiciels
Caplio RR10, le pilote USB est déjà installé.
• Sélectionnez [View CD-ROM] puis installez MGI VideoWave
depuis le dossier MGI.
Voir “Examen du contenu du CD-ROM (View CD-ROM)”
(p.9).
Voir “Pour installer les logiciels” (p.11).
Voir “Pour installer uniquement le logiciel de votre choix”
(p.13).
Avant d’utiliser la fonction de capture
vidéo
Remarque65
Appendice
2 Connectez l’adaptateur secteur à la
RICOH BASE, puis connectez cette
dernière à l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble
USB.
3 Raccordez le berceau à la RICOH BASE.
4 Placez le bouton rotatif de mode de
l’appareil sur (séquence vidéo) puis
posez l’appareil sur la RICOH BASE.
5 Appuyez sur la touche START de la
RICOH BASE.
6 Cadrez votre sujet à l’aide de l’appareil
et affinez la direction et l’angle de prise
de vue.
• Retirez l’appareil de la
RICOH BASE avant de le
mettre hors tension.
Important66
1 Lancez MGI VideoWave.
L’écran de bienvenue de MGI VideoWave est affiché.
2 Cliquez sur le bouton Capturer du
sélecteur de mode situé à gauche de
l’écran virtuel.
L’image visée par l’appareil photo est affichée à
l’écran virtuel.
• Si l’appareil n’a pas été placé en mode webcam, le bouton
Capture est estompé et ne peut être utilisé. Dans ce cas,
véri?ez si les pilotes USB et Vidéo ont bien été installés et si
l’appareil photo est bien raccordé à l’ordinateur.
3 Cliquez sur le bouton voulu sous le
libellé [Start Capture] du panneau
Capture.
[Video + Audio] L’image et le son sont enregistrés
simultanément. Seules les images
(sans son) sont envoyées par
l’appareil (Caplio RR10). Pour
enregistrer du son, vous aurez
besoin d’un microphone que vous
devrez vous procurer par ailleurs.
[Video] Seule l’image est enregistrée.
[Audio] Seul le son est enregistré. Seules les
images (sans son) sont envoyées
par l’appareil (Caplio RR10). Vous
aurez besoin d’un microphone
stéréo, non fourni.
Capture d’images vidéo
Remarque67
Appendice
Le bouton prend le libellé [Cancel] pendant la capture
vidéo. Si vous cliquez sur [Stop], la capture vidéo
s’interrompt et l’image est enregistrée dans la
bibliothèque ou dans le dossier, selon le paramétrage
effectué dans la boîte de dialogue [Capture Setting].
Si l’ordinateur était auparavant connecté à un autre
périphérique de capture vidéo, le paramétrage de capture de
MGI VideoWave doit être modi?é pour prendre en compte
l’appareil photo (Caplio RR10). La boîte de dialogue [Capture
Settings] permet aussi de paramétrer l’enregistrement dans la
bibliothèque et dans le répertoire.
Si le périphérique indiqué dans [Capture Settings] n’est pas le
périphérique réellement connecté, il n’est pas possible de
capturer des images vidéo.
1 Cliquez sur le bouton [Settings…] du
panneau Capture.
La boîte de dialogue [Capture Settings] apparaît.
2 Cliquez sur l’onglet [Source], puis
sélectionnez [Caplio RR10 Video for
Modi?cation des paramètres de
capture68
Windows] dans la liste des
périphériques de capture vidéo.
Lorsque vous cliquez ensuite sur le bouton
[Preferences...], la boîte de dialogue [Capture
Preferences...] est affichée et vous pouvez spécifier si
vous voulez que l’image soit enregistrée dans la
bibliothèque ou dans le répertoire.69
Appendice
Dépannage
Si l’appareil ne fonctionne pas correctement, procédez comme
indiquez ci-après.
Procédez en suivant les instructions ci-dessous dans l’ordre et
véri?ez que les préparatifs requis ont bien été effectués.
Adaptateur secteur
• L’adaptateur est-il correctement raccordé à
l’appareil photo ou à la RICOH BASE?
• Est-il bien branché dans une prise secteur?
Câble de liaison USB
• Le câble USB est-il correctement raccordé à
l’appareil photo ou à la RICOH BASE?
• Est-il bien branché sur le port USB de l’ordinateur?
Appareil photo
• Si vous utilisez la RICOH BASE, l’appareil photo
est-il correctement raccordé?
• Si l’appareil est bien raccordé au PC, est-il bien
sous tension?
• Le bouton rotatif de mode de l’appareil est-il placé
sur une autre position que (séquence vidéo)
Voir “Connexion de l’appareil à un micro-ordinateur” (p.21).
Installation
• L’installation des logiciels Caplio RR10 a-t-elle bien
été effectuée?
Si les résultats des étapes 1 et 2 ci-dessus sont
normaux et si l’appareil ne fonctionne toujours pas
correctement, essayez les solutions suivantes.
Solution 1
1 Supprimez les logiciels Caplio RR10.
Voir “Désinstallation des logiciels” (p.15).
2 Réinstallez les logiciels Caplio RR10.
Si l’appareil ne fonctionne pas
correctement
1. Vérifiez les connexions et branchements
2. Vérification de l’installation
3. Solutions70
Voir “Pour installer les logiciels Caplio RR10” (p.11).
3 Véri?ez maintenant si l’appareil photo
fonctionne normalement.
Solution 2
Si l’appareil ne fonctionne toujours pas correctement
après application de la solution 1, procédez comme
suit.
1 Supprimez les logiciels pilotes.
Voir “Suppression des pilotes” (p.70).
2 Supprimez les logiciels Caplio RR10.
Voir “Désinstallation des logiciels” (p.15).
3 Réinstallez les logiciels Caplio RR10.
Voir “Pour installer les logiciels Caplio RR10” (p.11).
Si le pilote USB (USB Driver) ou le pilote Vidéo (Video Driver)
ne fonctionnent pas normalement, procédez comme indiqué cidessous pour supprimer le pilote en cause.
• Quittez toutes les applications actives et enregistrez les données qui
doivent l’être avant de désinstaller les logiciels.
• Déconnectez tout autre périphérique USB et les périphériques
« Plug and Play » raccordés à l’ordinateur.
Suppression du pilote USB
1 Raccordez l’appareil photo au microordinateur à l’aide du câble USB.
Voir “Connexion de la RICOH BASE à un micro-ordinateur” (p.19).
Voir “Connexion de l’appareil à un micro-ordinateur”
(p.21).
2 Allumez le PC et démarrez Windows.
3 Mettez l’appareil sous tension.
4 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] dans la Barre
des tâches de Windows.
5 Pointez sur [Paramètres] puis cliquez
sur [Panneau de configuration].
Le Panneau de configuration est affiché.
Suppression des pilotes
Important Important71
Appendice
6 Double-cliquez sur l’icône [Système].
La boîte de dialogue [Propriétés Système] apparaît.
• Les éléments d’interface utilisateur fournis dans ces exemple
sont ceux de Windows 98.
• La marche à suivre est la même sous Windows 98SE et sous
Windows Me.
• Sous Windows 2000, sélectionnez l’onglet [Matériel] de la
boîte de dialogue [Propriétés Système], puis cliquez sur le
bouton [Gestionnaire de périphériques].
7 Cliquez sur l’onglet [Gestionnaire de
périphériques].
8 Cliquez sur le signe plus (+) situé à gauche
du libellé [Contrôleurs de bus USB].
9 Sélectionnez [Caplio RR10] puis cliquez
sur [Supprimer].
Remarque
• Si le pilote USB de
l’appareil n’est pas
correctement identi?é et si
ce dernier est considéré
comme un périphérique non
identi?é, un point
d’exclamation [!] apparaît à
la gauche du nom du
périphérique. Supprimez
tous les périphériques non
identi?és [!].
Remarque72
Une demande de confirmation est affichée.
10 Cliquez sur [OK].
Suppression du pilote Vidéo
1 Allumez le PC et démarrez Windows.
2 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] dans la Barre
des tâches de Windows.
3 Pointez sur [Paramètres] puis cliquez
sur [Panneau de configuration].
Le Panneau de configuration est affiché.
4 Double-cliquez sur l’icône [Multimédia].
La boîte de dialogue [Propriétés de Multimédia]
apparaît.
• Les éléments d’interface utilisateur fournis dans ces exemple
sont ceux de Windows 98.
• La marche à suivre est la même sous Windows 98SE et sous
Windows Me (icône) [Sons est multimédia].
Remarque73
Appendice
• Sous Windows2000, double-cliquez sur l’icône [Sons est
multimédia] puis sélectionnez l’onglet [Matériel] de la boîte
de dialogue [Propriétés de Sons et multimédia]. Supprimez les
entrées CPL10JPG [JPEG], CPL10JPG [MPEG] et Caplio
RR10 for Windows.
5 Cliquez sur l’onglet [Périphériques].
6 Cliquez sur le signe plus (+) situé à
gauche du libellé [Codecs de
compression vidéo].
7 Sélectionnez [CPL10JPG [JPEG]] et
[CPL10JPG [MPEG]], puis cliquez sur le
bouton [Propriétés].
L’écran de propriétés du codec sélectionné apparaît.
8 Cliquez sur le bouton [Supprimer].
La boîte de dialogue [Propriétés de Multimédia]
s’affiche à nouveau à l’écran.
9 Cliquez sur le signe plus (+) situé à
gauche du libellé [Périphériques de
capture vidéo].
10 Sélectionnez [Caplio RR10 for
Windows] puis cliquez sur le bouton
[Propriétés].
L’écran de propriétés du périphérique sélectionné
apparaît.
11 Cliquez sur le bouton [Supprimer].74
Menus de RICOH Gate
Options Setting (Paramétrage des options)
Cette option sert à activer ou à désactiver l’Enregistrement automatique
par la touche START de la RICOH BASE, et à ?xer la taille d’une image
envoyée en pièce jointe grâce au bouton Envoi de RICOH Gate.
Set Background Illustration (Décor de la fenêtre RICOH
Gate)
Cette option permet de changer l’image d’arrière-plan de la fenêtre de
RICOH Gate.
Camera Property (Informations sur l’appareil)
Cette option permet d’obtenir des informations sur l’appareil photo
connecté à l’ordinateur.
About the RICOH Gate (À propos de RICOH Gate)
Cette option fournit des explications sur le logiciel RICOH Gate et
indique le numéro de la version utilisée.
Exit RICOH Gate (Quitter RICOH Gate)
Cette option sert à quitter RICOH Gate.
Vous pouvez paramétrer la fonction des boutons Enregistrer 1, Enregistrer 2, Transmettre,
Imprimer, Envoi, Application 1 et Application 2.
Menus de RICOH Gate
Menu de paramétrage de chaque bouton75
Appendice
Index
A
Adaptateur secteur ....................... 19
Affichage de la fenêtre de RICOH
Gate .............................................. 23
Aide des boutons Enregistrer ....... 27
Aide du bouton Transférer ............ 38
Aspect de RICOH Gate ................ 59
B
BASE RICOH................................. 19
Bouton Application........................ 26
Bouton Enregistrer ........................ 25
Bouton Envoyer message ....... 25, 49
Bouton Éteindre l’appareil....... 26, 58
Bouton Icône................................. 26
Bouton Imprimer Index ................. 25
Bouton MENU ............................... 25
Bouton Quitter ............................... 26
Bouton Transférer ................... 25, 38
C
Câble USB
Branchement.............................. 19
Déconnexion .............................. 22
Camera Property........................... 58
Connecteur DIGITAL (AV/USB) .... 19
Connexion
Appareil à un micro-ordinateur..... 21
BASE RICOH à un ordinateur....... 19
D
Définition de l’application.............. 55
Dialogue d’envoi de message ...... 51
Dialogue de modification de la taille
d’image ......................................... 33
Dialogue de paramétrage d’envoi de
message........................................ 53
Dialogue de paramétrage de
l’enregistrement............................. 31
Dialogue de paramétrage de
l’impression d’index ...................... 47
Dialogue de paramétrage de
Transfert ........................................ 40
Dialogue de paramétrage des
options........................................... 35
Dialogue de sélection d’un
dossier........................................... 34
Dialogue de sélection de l’application
à lancer ......................................... 56
Dialogue de Transfert.................... 40
E
Enregistrement automatique ......... 36
Environnement système
RICOH Gate ............................... 10
Envoi d’un message...................... 49
F
Fenêtre de RICOH Gate à l’état
d’icône........................................... 23
Fermeture de RICOH Gate............ 23
Fichier MP3 ................................... 43
I
Icône de RICOH Gate ................... 19
Impression d’une planche
index.............................................. 44
Informations relatives à
l’appareil........................................ 58
Index alphabétique76
Instruction
Personnalisée............................. 13
QuickTime.................................. 14
Standard.................................... 13
L
Lancement de l’application........... 57
Lancement de RICOH Gate.......... 24
Logiciel de messagerie compatible
MAPI.............................................. 49
Logiciels Caplio RR10................... 11
M
MGI VideoWave .............................. 9
MusicMatch JUKEBOX ................... 9
P
Paramétrage de l’impression
d’index .......................................... 45
Paramétrage de la fonction
d’Enregistrement automatique...... 34
Paramétrage de transfert .............. 41
Paramétrage des boutons
Enregistrer..................................... 28
Paramétrage du bouton Envoyer
message ....................................... 51
Pilote TWAIN ................................... 8
Pilote USB ....................................... 8
Planche index ............................... 44
Port USB........................................ 19
Q
QuickTime ....................................... 9
Quitter RICOH Gate ...................... 24
R
RICOH BASE................................. 19
RICOH Gate .................................... 8
T
Taille maximale des messages en
envoi.............................................. 54
Touche Démarrer .......................... 21
Touche START ........................20, 36
Transfert ........................................ 38
Transmission automatique ............ 36
V
Version de RICOH Gate ................ 60Centres techniques Ricoh
Ricoh company., Ltd.
3-2-3, Shin-yokohama
Kohoku-ku, Yokohama-shi 222-8530, Japan
http://www.ricoh.co.jp/r_dc
Ricoh Factory Service Center
3235 Sunrise Blvd.,
Suite2 Rancho Cordova,
CA 95742
http://www.ricohzone.com/
RICOH EUROPE B.V. (PMMC EUROPE)
Oberrather Straße 6,
D-40472 Düsseldolf,
Germany
http://www.ricohpmmc.com
RICOH UK LTD. (PMMC UK)
Ricoh House, 1 Plane Tree Crescent,
Feltham, Middlesex, TW13 7HG,
England
RICOH FRANCE S.A. (PMMC FRANCE)
383, Avenue du Général de Gaulle –
BP 307-931-13 Clamart Cédex,
France
RICOH ESPANA, S.A. (PMMC SPAIN)
Av. Litoral Mar, 12-14,
08005 Barcelona,
Spain
RICOH EUROPE B.V. (PMMC BENELUX)
Koolhovenlaan 35,
1119 NB Schiphol-Rijk,
The Netherlands
Ricoh Photo Products (Asia), Ltd.
Unit D, E & F
24/F., China Overseas Building
139 Hennessy Road, Wan Chai
Hong Kong
Ricoh Australia Pty. Ltd.
8 Rodborough Road
Frenchs Forrest, N.S.W. 2086
Australia
http://www.ricoh.com.au
RICOH Gate
pour Macintosh
Mode d’emploi
Français
Pour garantir un bon fonctionnement de ce produit,
lisez attentivement ce manuel avant de vous servir de
l’appareil. Conservez ce mode d’emploi en lieu sûr
pour le retrouver en cas de besoin.Introduction
Nous vous remercions d’avoir acheté un produit Ricoh.
Ce mode d’emploi explique comment se servir de ce produit et signale les précautions à prendre.
Pour obtenir les meilleurs résultats, veuillez le lire attentivement avant d’utiliser le produit.
Conservez ce mode d’emploi en lieu sûr pour le retrouver en cas de besoin.
Ricoh Co., Ltd.
• Il est interdit de reproduire tout ou partie de cette publication sans l’autorisation écrite préalable de Ricoh.
© 2001 Ricoh Co. Ltd.
• Ricoh se réserve le droit de modifier le contenu de cette publication sans préavis.
• Un soin considérable a été apporté à la réalisation de ce mode d’emploi. Si, toutefois, vous vous posez
des questions sur certains des points qui y ont sont abordés, ou si vous détectez des erreurs ou des
inexactitudes, veuillez nous contacter à l’adresse figurant au dos du mode d’emploi.
Apple, Macintosh, Mac OS et QuickTime sont des marques déposées par Apple Computer Inc. aux ÉtatsUnis et dans d’autres pays.
Tous les autres noms de sociétés et de produits mentionnés ici sont la propriété de leurs détenteurs
respectifs.
Important
• Veillez à effectuer une sauvegarde de vos données importantes. En cas de fausse manipulation de votre
part ou d’une panne du produit, vous pourriez en effet perdre des données.
• Ricoh Co. Ltd. n’est pas responsable des dommages causés par la perte des données créées avec ce
produit.
• Ricoh Co. Ltd. n’est pas plus responsable des dommages entraînés par une panne du produit, la perte
de texte ou de données, ni d’autres dommages issus éventuellement de l’utilisation du produit.
Copyright
Toute reproduction ou altération de documents, magazines, morceaux de musique et autres contenus
protégés par copyright, en dehors d’un usage strictement personnel, familial ou cantonné à un objet limité
du même ordre est strictement interdite sauf en cas d’autorisation écrite du détenteur du copyright.1
Possibilités offertes par l’utilisation de ces logiciels
Enregistrer des photos sur le Macintosh à l’aide d’une seule touche
Vous pouvez actionner la touche « Start » de la RICOH BASE pour transférer des photos sur
votre Macintosh.
Télécharger des images, des notes vocales, des séquences vidéo et transférer
des ?chiers vers l’appareil photo
En raccordant l’appareil photo au Macintosh, vous pouvez transmettre des images, des notes
vocales et des séquences vidéo vers le Macintosh et, dans l’autre sens, transférer (?chier MP3)
des images, des notes vocales (?chiers WAV) et des séquences vidéo du Macintosh (?chier
AVI) vers l’appareil.
Choisir le format des images transmises par l’appareil
Vous pouvez spéci?er le format des ?chiers images (JPEG, PICT, TIFF ou PNG) selon vos
besoins avant de les exporter de l’appareil.
Modi?er la taille des images transmises par l’appareil
Vous pouvez modi?er la taille des ?chiers images avant de les exporter de l’appareil.2
Sommaire
Possibilités offertes par l’utilisation de ces logiciels.....................................1
Consultation du manuel................................................................................4
Chapitre 1 Installation des logiciels.................................................. 7
Description des logiciels ..............................................................................7
Environnement système requis...................................................................10
Installation du logiciel .................................................................................11
Pour installer les logiciels........................................................................................ 11
Désinstallation des logiciels.................................................................................... 15
Chapitre 2 Connexion de l’appareil à un Macintosh...................... 17
Branchement du câble USB.......................................................................17
Connexion de la RICOH BASE à un Macintosh ...................................................... 17
Connexion de l’appareil à un Macintosh ................................................................ 19
Déconnexion du câble USB .......................................................................20
Chapitre 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate ............................................. 21
Lancement et fermeture de RICOH Gate ...................................................21
Démarrage de RICOH Gate.................................................................................... 21
Quitter RICOH Gate ................................................................................................ 21
Fermeture de la fenêtre de RICOH Gate ................................................................ 22
Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate.......................................................23
Fonctions des boutons de RICOH Gate ................................................................. 23
Menu de RICOH Gate............................................................................................. 24
Enregistrement de données de l’appareil photo sur le Macintosh.............25
Enregistrement des données à l’aide des boutons Enregistrer .............................. 25
Modification du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer .......................................... 26
Modification du paramétrage de la touche START................................................. 29
Transmission automatique des
fichiers à l’aide de la touche START ....................................................................... 31
Envoi de fichiers du Macintosh vers l’appareil photo.................................32
Transfert à l’aide du bouton Transférer................................................................... 32
Modification du paramétrage du bouton Transférer ............................................... 34
Impression d’une planche index ................................................................38
Impression d’une planche index............................................................................. 38
Modification des réglages d’impression ................................................................. 39
Lancement d’une application .....................................................................41
Définition de l’application à lancer.......................................................................... 41
Lancement de l’application..................................................................................... 42
Autres fonctions ..........................................................................................433
Mise hors tension de l’appareil ............................................................................... 43
Affichage et modification des Informations relatives à l’appareil ........................... 43
Modification de l’aspect de RICOH Gate ............................................................... 44
Affichage du numéro de version de RICOH Gate .................................................. 44
Appendice............................................................................................ 45
Utilisation du Caplio RR10 comme Web cam.............................................45
Dépannage.................................................................................................48
Menus .........................................................................................................49
Menu File (Fichier) .................................................................................................. 49
Menu de configuration « RICOH Gate Setup » ...................................................... 49
Menu Help (Aide) .................................................................................................... 49
Menu de paramétrage de chaque bouton.............................................................. 49
Index ...........................................................................................................50
Index alphabétique ................................................................................................. 50
Installation de logiciels sélectionnés.............................................................................14
Pour transférer automatiquement des images à l’aide de la touche START . ..............19
Transfert d’un ?chier MP3.............................................................................................37
À propos du code ASCII...............................................................................................44
Conseils4
Consultation du manuel
Cette section présente le contenu de chaque manuel et indique quels chapitres lire en priorité
dans ce manuel, ainsi que la signi?cation des symboles spéciaux utilisés.
Rôle des différents manuels fournis
Pour les utilisateurs de Macintosh
RICOH Gate pour Macintosh
(le présent manuel)
Lisez ce manuel en premier
m Ce manuel explique comment installer les logiciels
requis, comment raccorder l’appareil photo au
Macintosh, et comment utiliser RICOH Gate pour
transférer des ?chiers entre l’appareil et
l’ordinateur.
Pour les utilisateurs de Windows
RICOH Gate pour Windows m Ce manuel explique comment installer les logiciels
requis, comment raccorder l’appareil photo au PC,
et comment utiliser RICOH Gate pour transférer
des ?chiers entre l’appareil et l’ordinateur.
Fonctionnement de
l’appareil
Mode d’emploi de l’appareil
photo Caplio RR10
(Appareil photo numérique)
m Ce manuel explique comment se servir de
l’appareil, des préparatifs nécessaires avant
utilisation aux instructions de prise de vue et de
relecture des ?chiers.5
Comment lire le manuel
À lire sans faute
Pour installer les logiciels
nécessaires
m Chapitre 1 Installation des logiciels
Pour pouvoir utiliser la fonctionnalité RICOH
Gate, vous devez installer les logiciels. Ce chapitre
décrit les logiciels qui se trouvent sur le CD-ROM
fourni avec l’appareil.
Pour connecter l’appareil à un
Macintosh
m Chapitre 2 Connexion de l’appareil à un
Macintosh
Ce chapitre explique comment connecter
l’appareil photographique à un Macintosh.
Pour utiliser le logiciel RICOH
Gate
m Chapitre 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate
Vous pouvez transmettre des photos vers le
Macintosh ou à l’inverse transférer des images du
Macintosh vers l’appareil. Vous pouvez également
obtenir une « planche index » des photos stockées
dans l’appareil.
À lire si nécessaire
Pour mieux connaître les
menus et option, les
caractéristiques techniques,
etc.
m Appendice
Vous pouvez consulter les menus RICOH Gate.6
Signi?cation des symboles
La signi?cation des symboles utilisés dans ce manuel est précisée ci-après.
Cette « étiquette » signale des recommandations ou des contraintes d’utilisation qui
requièrent votre attention.
Cette autre étiquette signale une explication complémentaire sur l’opération concernée
ou un point d’information qu’il est bon de connaître.
m Ce symbole de renvoi précède la page relative à la fonction ou à l’opération à laquelle il est
fait référence.
Ce libellé signale des informations complémentaires utiles.
Les illustrations d’écrans proposées dans ce manuel ont été prises sous MacOS9.
Les exemples d’af?chages de RICOH Gate ont été copiés avec un fond d’écran par défaut
(Panneau de con?guration/Af?chage/Arrière-plan).
Dans ce manuel, les termes « appareil photo » ou « appareil » désignent le Caplio RR10.
Important
• Ne branchez et ne
débranchez l’adaptateur
secteur que lorsque
l’appareil est hors tension ou
qu’aucun transfert n’est en
cours.
Important
Remarque
• Si l’appareil photo n’est pas
correctement raccordé au
Macintosh, un message
s’af?che pour vous le
signaler. Véri?ez la
connexion.
Remarque
Menu:[File]?[Quit]
“Environnement système requis” (p.10)
Texte de référence dans ce manuel
Option à sélectionner lors de
l’utilisation du menu
Conseils7
1
Installation des logiciels
Chapitre
Installation des logiciels
Ce chapitre explique les préparatifs nécessaires à l’utilisation
des logiciels fournis, précise l’environnement système requis,
décrit le processus d’installation de RICOH Gate, etc.
Description des logiciels
L’écran ci-dessous s’af?che lorsque le CD-ROM est introduit
dans le lecteur.
18
Logiciels Caplio RR10
Ouvrez ce CD-ROM qui contient le programme
d’installation [Caplio RR10 Software]. Pour installer les
logiciels énumérés ci-dessous, lancez le programme
d’installation.
Voir "Installation du logiciel" (p.11).
Logiciel Description
RICOH Gate Ce logiciel vous permet de transmettre les
photos prises avec l’appareil vers le
Macintosh ou, à l’inverse, de transférer des
?chiers images du Macintosh vers l’appareil
photo. RICOH Gate vous permet également
d’utiliser d’autres applications susceptibles
de dialoguer avec l’appareil.
Voir "Utilisation de RICOH Gate"
(p.21).
Pilote TWAIN Ce logiciel permet d’importer des photos
qui se trouvent dans l’appareil directement
depuis une application compatible TWAIN.
Pilote USB En installant le pilote USB, vous pouvez
raccorder l’appareil photo à un Macintosh à
l’aide d’une liaison USB et utilisez RICOH
Gate, TWAIN Driver et Video Driver.
Si vous choisissez l’installation standard, le
pilote USB est automatiquement installé. Si
vous choisissez l’installation personnalisée,
le pilote USB est automatiquement installé
si vous choisissez d’installer RICOH Gate,
le pilote TWAIN ou le pilote Vidéo.
Video Driver Ce logiciel est requis pour utiliser l’appareil
comme une web cam (périphérique de saisie
vidéo du Macintosh).9
1
Installation des logiciels
Examen du contenu du CD-ROM (View
CD-ROM)
Cliquez sur ce bouton pour af?cher le contenu des dossiers
de logiciels énumérés ci-dessous. Pour installer le logiciel
de votre choix, cliquez sur Setup.exe.
• Si vous vous posez des questions sur les logiciels présentés cidessus, consultez le ?chier ReadMe et le Help relatifs au logiciel
concerné avant de contacter le service après vente Ricoh.
Logiciel Description
Dossier QuickTime
QuickTime 4 Ce dossier contient QuickTime 4.1.2.
Véri?ez la version de QuickTime dont
vous disposez déjà avant de décider ou
non d’installer ce logiciel.
Dossier MusicMatch
MusicMatch
JUKEBOX
Ce dossier contient le logiciel
[MusicMatch JUKEBOX].
Ce logiciel permet de convertir les CD
audio et ?chiers WAV en ?chiers MP3
(?chiers son compressés). Vous avez en
effet la possibilité de transférer des
?chiers MP3 dans l’appareil photo et de
les écouter sur ce dernier. (Utilisez des
écouteurs stéréo, disponibles dans le
commerce.)
• MP3 désigne le standard international
de compression de son MPEG-1
AudioLayer3. Les données peuvent être
compressées jusqu’à un dixième
seulement de leur volume d’origine.
• Pour plus de précisions, consultez le
Help du logiciel.
Dossier MGI
MGI PhotoSuite Ce dossier contient le logiciel MGI
PhotoSuite. Ce dossier contient le logiciel
MGI PhotoSuite.
Il s’agit d’un logiciel évolué de retouche
photographique qui dispose de
nombreuses options de lecture
multimédia et de manipulation des
images.
Remarque
Remarque10
Environnement système requis
L’environnement détaillé ci-après est requis pour pouvoir
utiliser RICOH Gate.
• QuickTime 4.1.2 ou ultérieur est requis pour ouvrir une photo prise
en mode Texte (TIFF MMR) avec l’appareil photo numérique
Ricoh.
• Si vous manipulez des ?chiers très volumineux, par exemple des
séquences vidéo ou des photos non compressées, allouez
suf?samment de mémoire à l’application RICOH Gate.
Système
d’exploitation
MacOS 8.6 à 9.1
Macintosh Tout Macintosh équipé d’un port USB
Capacité
mémoire
96 Mo ou plus (128 Mo ou plus
recommandés)
Mémoire
requise
16 Mo ou plus de mémoire d’application sans
recours à l’utilitaire de compression de
mémoire
Espace disque
requis à
l’installation
10 Mo ou plus (à l’installation)
100 Mo ou plus (à l’utilisation)
Dé?nition
d’af?chage
640 × 480 pixels ou plus (800 x 600 ou plus
recommandée)
Couleurs
af?chables
256 ou plus (32 000 ou plus recommandé)
Lecteur de CDROM
Lecteur de CD-ROM utilisable avec le
Macintosh décrit ci-dessus
Port USB Port USB utilisable sur le Macintosh décrit cidessus
Important
Remarque11
1
Installation des logiciels
Installation du logiciel
Cette section explique comment installer les logiciels requis,
notamment RICOH Gate et le pilote USB pour faire
communiquer l’appareil photo et le Macintosh, et QuickTime
4.0.
Pour installer les logiciels Caplio RR10
Quittez toutes les autres applications ouvertes avant de
lancer l’installation des logiciels.
• Cette section explique la procédure d’installation standard. Les
utilisateurs familiers des ordinateurs et des appareils photo
numériques peuvent choisir individuellement les logiciels à
installer.
• Pour contrôler quels logiciels sont installés lors de cette procédure,
consultez la section Voir "Logiciels Caplio RR10" (p.8).
1 Allumez le Macintosh.
2 Introduisez le CD-ROM fourni dans le
lecteur de CD-ROM du Macintosh.
L’icône du CD-ROM s’af?che sur le bureau et sa
fenêtre s’ouvre.
3 Double-cliquez sur l’icône du
programme d’installation.
Le programme d’installation démarre et son écran de
bienvenue s’af?che.
Pour installer les logiciels
Remarque12
4 Cliquez sur [Caplio RR10 Software].
5 Sélectionnez [Continuer].
L’écran d’installation est af?ché.
6 Sélectionnez [Installation Standard] puis
cliquez sur [Installation Personnalisée].
1 Installation Standard
Le logiciel RICOH Gate et le pilote USB seront
automatiquement installés.
2 Installation Personnalisée
Seuls le ou les logiciels que vous sélectionnerez explicitement
seront installés. Cochez le ou les logiciels que vous voulez
installer.
1
213
1
Installation des logiciels
• Lorsque vous sélectionnez [Installation Personnalisée],
l’écran de sélection des différents logiciels est af?ché.
Choisissez le logiciel que vous voulez installer puis
sélectionnez [Installer].
Voir "Installation de logiciels sélectionnés" (p.14)
La fenêtre [Choix d’un dossier] apparaît.
7 Sélectionnez le dossier voulu, puis
sélectionnez [Choix].
Si vous voulez créer un nouveau dossier dans lequel
installer les logiciels, sélectionnez [Nouveau].
Un message s’af?che pour vous signaler que le
Macintosh devra être redémarré à la ?n de
l’installation.
8 Sélectionnez [Oui].
L’installation s’effectue et lorsqu’elle est terminée, le
message mentionné ci-dessus est af?ché.
9 Sélectionnez [Redémarrer].
Le Macintosh redémarre.
Si vous ne souhaitez pas redémarrer votre ordinateur
immédiatement, sélectionnez [Quitter]; sinon,
sélectionnez [Continuer].
Remarque
• Le nom par défaut du dossier
d’installation est Caplio
RR10 Software.
Remarque14
Pour installer QuickTime
QuickTime 4.1.2 ou une version plus est nécessaire pour le
mode Text (TIFF-MMR) enregistrée avec l’appareil photo.
1 Allumez le Macintosh.
2 Introduisez le CD-ROM fourni dans le
lecteur de CD-ROM de l’ordinateur.
L’icône du CD-ROM s’af?che sur le bureau et sa
fenêtre s’ouvre.
3 Ouvrez le dossier [QuickTime] du CDROM.
4 Ouvrez le dossier [QuickTime].
5 Dans le dossier [QuickTime Installer],
double-cliquez sur l’icône [QuickTime
Installer].
L’installation de QuickTime débute.
6 Suivez les instructions af?chées à
l’écran.
7 Une fois l’installation terminée,
redémarrez le Macintosh.
Installation de logiciels sélectionnés
Si vous sélectionnez [Installation Personnalisée] à
l’étape 6, l’écran de sélection des différents logiciels
est af?ché. Vous pouvez alors sélectionner le ou les
logiciels que vous voulez installer.
Conseils
• Si QuickTime 4.1.2 ou
ultérieur est déjà installé sur
votre Macintosh, cette
opération n’est pas
nécessaire.
Remarque15
1
Installation des logiciels
• L’installation de QuickTime peut être incorrecte si une
ancienne version de QuickTime est déjà active sur votre
Macintosh. Si c’est le cas, supprimez l’ancienne version de
QuickTime avant de procéder à l’installation.
Pour supprimer les logiciels dont vous n’avez plus besoin
de votre Macintosh, utilisez la fonction de glisser-déposer
pour mettre ces ?chiers dans la Corbeille.
Le nom des ?chiers et le dossier dans lequel ils sont
installés sont les suivants.
RICOH Gate
Pilote TWAIN
Pilote Vidéo
• Le pilote Caplio RR10 USB Driver et Caplio RR10 PPC LIB sout
requis si vous voulez pouvoir utiliser plusieurs logiciels, comme
indiqué ci-dessus. Si , en désinstallant les logiciels dont vous ne
voulez pas ou plus, vous supprimez aussi le pilote USB Driver, les
autres logiciels ne peuvent plus fonctionner.
Désinstallation des logiciels
Nom du ?chier Dossier d’installation
RICOH Gate Caplio RR10 Software
RICOH Gate Alias Dossier Système : Ouverture au
démarrage
Caplio RR10 USB Driver Dossier Système : Extensions
Caplio RR10 PPC LIB Dossier Système : Extensions
Nom du ?chier Dossier d’installation
Caplio RR10 TWAIN Dossier Système : Préférences :
TWAIN
Caplio RR10 USB Driver Dossier Système : Extensions
Caplio RR10 PPC LIB Dossier Système : Extensions
Nom du ?chier Dossier d’installation
Caplio RR10 Vdig Dossier Système : Extensions
Caplio RR10 USB Driver Dossier Système : Extensions
Important
• Le dossier Caplio RR10
Software est créé sur le
disque que vous avez
spéci?é au moment de son
installation.
Remarque
Important1617
Chapitre
Connexion de l appareil ’ à un Macintosh
Connexion de l’appareil à un Macintosh 2
Ce chapitre explique comment raccorder l’appareil photo à un
Macintosh de type Macintosh à l’aide du câble USB a?n de
pouvoir transférer des ?chiers entre les deux machines.
Branchement du câble USB
Le câble USB peut être utilisé de deux façons: pour connecter
la RICOH BASE au Macintosh, ou pour connecter l’appareil
directement au Macintosh.
Vous pouvez raccorder la RICOH BASE au Macintosh à
l’aide du câble USB.
1 Allumez le Macintosh.
Une fois le Bureau af?ché à l’écran, RICOH Gate est
lancé automatiquement et sa fenêtre apparaît.
2 Raccordez l’adaptateur secteur à la
RICOH BASE.
3 Raccordez le câble USB au connecteur
DIGITAL (AV/USB) de la RICOH BASE
Connexion de la RICOH BASE à un
Macintosh
218
d’un côté et au port USB du Macintosh
de l’autre.
4 Vérifiez que le bouton rotatif de mode de
l’appareil n’est pas placé en position
(séquence vidéo).
Si c’est le cas, passez dans un autre mode.
5 Placez l’appareil photo sur la RICOH
BASE.
Le témoin lumineux de la RICOH BASE s’allume.
6 Appuyez sur la touche DÉMARRER/
START de la RICOH BASE.
L’appareil est maintenant en mode Connexion à un
micro-ordinateur.
Voir “Démarrage de RICOH Gate” (p.21).
• Si vous appuyez sur la touche DÉMARRER et que l’appareil
est en mode Connexion à un ordinateur, il ne peut pas y avoir
charge de la batterie lorsque l’appareil est placé sur la RICOH
BASE. Mettez l’appareil hors tension pour que la charge
débute.
• La fenêtre RICOH Gate n’est pas utilisable lorsque le bouton
rotatif de mode est placé sur (séquence vidéo)
• Lorsque le bouton rotatif de mode est placé sur (séquence
vidéo), l’appareil est automatiquement en mode Web cam.
Voir “Utilisation du Caplio RR10 comme Web cam”
(p.45).
• Ne placez pas l’appareil
photo sur la RICOH BASE
si le convertisseur
d’adaptateur secteur est
encore raccordé à l’appareil.
Important
Remarque19
Connexion de l appareil ’ à un Macintosh
2
Vous pouvez raccorder l’appareil photo à un Macintosh à
l’aide du câble USB.
1 Allumez le Macintosh.
Une fois le Bureau af?ché à l’écran, RICOH Gate est
lancé automatiquement et sa fenêtre apparaît.
2 Vérifiez que l’appareil photo est hors
tension, puis raccordez-lui l’adaptateur
secteur.
3 Raccordez le câble USB au connecteur
DIGITAL (AV/USB) de l’appareil photo
d’un côté et au port USB du Macintosh
de l’autre.
4 Vérifiez que le bouton rotatif de mode de
l’appareil n’est pas placé en position
(séquence vidéo).
Si c’est le cas, passez dans un autre mode.
5 Allumez l’appreil photo.
L’appareil est maintenant en mode Connexion à un
micro-ordinateur.
Voir “Démarrage de RICOH Gate” (p.21).
Pour transférer automatiquement des
images à l’aide de la touche START .
En raccordant la RICOH BASE a l’appreil photo et
appuyant sur la touche START vous pouvez
automatiquement transférer vers le Macintosh les
photos prises avec l’appareil.
Voir “Transmission automatique des ?chiers à
l’aide de la touche START” (p.31).
Connexion de l’appareil à un Macintosh
Conseils
• Si l’alimentation est coupée
en cours de fonctionnement,
l’appareil photo ou le
Macintosh peuvent en
souffrir. Il vous est donc
recommandé, dans ce cas,
d’éviter d’alimenter
l’appareil par sa batterie et
d’utiliser l’adaptateur
secteur.
Important20
Déconnexion du câble USB
Pour débrancher le câble USB, appuyez des deux côtés du
connecteur USB pour le déverrouiller, puis tirez dessus pour le
sortir de sa prise.
1 Mettez l’appareil photo hors tension.
2 Appuyez sur les côtés du connecteur
USB pour le déverrouiller, puis
débranchez-le.
• Le fait de tirer le connecteur
sans appuyer sur ses boutons
latéraux ou de tirer sur le
câble pour le débrancher
peut ne pas suf?re à retirer le
connecteur de sa prise.
Important21
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
Chapitre
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
Ce chapitre explique comment utiliser le logiciel RICOH Gate.
Ce logiciel vous permet d’enregistrer les photos prises avec
l’appareil sur le Macintosh ou, à l’inverse, de transférer des
?chiers images du Macintosh vers l’appareil photo. Vous
pouvez également imprimer les photos prises avec l’appareil.
Lancement et fermeture de RICOH
Gate
Cette section explique comment démarrer et quitter RICOH
Gate.
Après installation de RICOH Gate, ce dernier démarre
automatiquement une fois le Bureau du Macintosh af?ché.
Pour relancer RICOH Gate après sa fermeture, procédez
comme suit.
1 Double-cliquez sur l’icône du dossier
dans lequel RICOH Gate est installé.
2 Double-cliquez sur l’icône de RICOH
Gate.
La fenêtre de RICOH Gate est af?chée.
1 Cliquez sur la case de fermeture de la
fenêtre RICOH Gate.
Menu: [File (Fichier)] ? [Quit (Quitter)]
Voir “Menu File (Fichier)” (p.49).
Démarrage de RICOH Gate
Quitter RICOH Gate
• Pour ne plus que RICOH
Gate se lance
automatiquement en ?n de
démarrage du Macintosh,
déplacez le ?chier RICOH
Gate (Alias) qui se trouve
dans le dossier « Ouverture
au démarrage » dans un
autre dossier.
Remarque
322
Le logiciel RICOH Gate est déchargé de la mémoire.
• Normalement, avec les applications Macintosh, un clic sur la
case de fermeture entraîne uniquement la fermeture de la
fenêtre principale de l’application, sans fermeture de
l’application elle-même ; dans le cas de RICOH Gate,
néanmoins, l’action sur la case de fermeture entraîne à la fois
la fermeture de la fenêtre et celle du programme.
Vous pouvez fermer la fenêtre RICOH Gate en ne laissant
que sa barre de titre à l’écran.
1 Cliquez sur la case de masquage de la
fenêtre RICOH Gate.
La fenêtre RICOH Gate disparaît, en ne laissant que sa
barre de titre à l’écran.
2 Pour afficher à nouveau la fenêtre,
cliquez à nouveau sur sa case de
masquage.
Fermeture de la fenêtre de RICOH Gate
Remarque23
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate
La fenêtre RICOH Gate contient les boutons et menus
suivants, qui vous permettent de sélectionner les fonctions
proposées.
1 Boutons Enregistrer 1 et Enregistrer 2
Ces boutons permettent d’enregistrer des photos de l’appareil
sur le Macintosh auquel il est raccordé. L’enregistrement
s’effectue sur la base du paramétrage prédé?ni en ce qui
concerne le format du ?chier, l’emplacement et le traitement
avant enregistrement.
Voir “Enregistrement des données à l’aide des boutons
Enregistrer” (p.25).
2 Bouton Transférer
Ce bouton sert à envoyer à l’appareil photo des images se
trouvant sur le Macintosh et à écrire sur le support de
stockage de l’appareil.
Voir “Transfert à l’aide du bouton Transférer” (p.32).
3 Bouton Imprimer Index
Ce bouton permet d’imprimer une « planche index » des
photos via le Macintosh. L’impression s’effectue sur la base
du paramétrage prédé?ni en ce qui concerne le dossier, la
mise en page, le type de données images à imprimer, etc.
Voir “Impression d’une planche index” (p.38).
4 Bouton Application 1 et Application 2
Ce bouton permet de lancer une application sélectionnée.
Voir “Lancement de l’application” (p.42).
5 Case de fermeture
Cette case permet de quitter RICOH Gate.
Voir “Quitter RICOH Gate” (p.21).
6 Case de masquage
Cette case permet de masquer la fenêtre RICOH Gate tout en
laissant sa barre de titre à l’écran.
Fonctions des boutons de RICOH Gate
6 5 1 3 7 2 424
Voir “Fermeture de la fenêtre de RICOH Gate” (p.22).
7 Bouton Éteindre l’appareil
Ce bouton permet de mettre hors tension l’appareil photo
connecté au Macintoshdu Macintosh.
Voir “Mise hors tension de l’appareil” (p.43).
• En cliquant sur les boutons Enregistrer 1, Enregistrer 2, Transférer,
Imprimer index, Application 1 ou Application 2 tout en appuyant
sur la touche Ctrl, vous avez accès à leur zone de dialogue de
paramétrage respective.
Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer”
(p.26).
Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage du bouton Transférer”
(p.34).
Voir “Modi?cation des réglages d’impression” (p.39).
Voir “Dé?nition de l’application à lancer” (p.41).
Lorsque la fenêtre RICOH Gate est active, les menus RICOH
Gate sont af?chés sur la barre de titre.
1 Menu de con?guration «RICOH Gate Setup»
Ce menu permet d’activer la fonction d’Enregistrement
automatique, d’af?cher des informations sur l’appareil photo,
etc.
Voir “Menu de con?guration « RICOH Gate Setup »”
(p.49).
Menu de RICOH Gate
Remarque
125
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
Enregistrement de données de
l’appareil photo sur le Macintosh
(Appareil Macintosh)
Vous pouvez enregistrer des ?chiers photos, de son et de
séquences vidéo enregistrés avec l’appareil photo dans un
dossier donné du Macintosh.
Véri?ez que l’appareil photo est correctement raccordé au
Macintosh avant de poursuivre.
• Il n’est pas possible de choisir sélectivement les ?chiers à
transmettre parmi ceux stockés dans l’appareil photo.
• Pour éviter tout risque d’écrasement de ?chiers précédemment
transférés, les ?chiers se voient attribuer des noms uniques selon
une série numérique croissante et sont enregistrés dans le dossier
spéci?é. Toutefois, si la partie numérique des noms de ?chiers
dépasse 9999, un message d’erreur est af?ché.
• Si l’alimentation est coupée en cours de fonctionnement, l’appareil
photo ou le Macintosh peuvent en souffrir. Dans la mesure du
possible, utilisez l’adaptateur secteur plutôt que d’alimenter
l’appareil photo par sa batterie.
• Ne branchez et ne débranchez l’adaptateur secteur que lorsque
l’appareil est hors tension ou qu’aucun transfert n’est en cours.
Pour transmettre et enregistrer les données de l’appareil
photo sur le Macintosh, vous pouvez également utiliser les
deux boutons Enregistrer du logiciel RICOH Gate.
Les données sont enregistrées en fonction du paramétrage
de l’un ou l’autre bouton.
Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer” (p.26).
• Si vous vous servez des boutons Enregistrer 1 et Enregistrer 2
sans avoir modi?é le paramétrage par défaut du logiciel
RICOH Gate, les données de l’appareil sont enregistrées selon
les paramètres ci-après.
Les images ?xes sont enregistrées au même format où elles
ont été prises.
(Taille d’image)
Les images sont enregistrées au même format où elles ont
été prises.
Vous pouvez modi?er le paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer
si vous le souhaitez.
Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer” (p.26).
1 Véri?ez que l’appareil photo est
correctement raccordé au Macintosh.
Enregistrement des données à l’aide
des boutons Enregistrer
Important
Remarque26
Voir “Connexion de la RICOH BASE à un Macintosh”
(p.17).
Voir “Connexion de l’appareil à un Macintosh” (p.19).
2 Vérifiez que l’appareil photographique
est sous tension.
Le message [PC CONNECTION] s’af?che sur l’écran
LCD de l’appareil photo.
3 Cliquez sur ou sur dans la fenêtre
RICOH Gate.
Voir “Fonctions des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.23).
Les données de l’appareil sont enregistrées dans le
dossier spéci?é en fonction du paramétrage du bouton
sur lequel vous avez cliqué.
• Si l’option [Turn off camera after saving] est sélectionnée
dans le paramétrage du bouton Enregistrer, la demande de
con?rmation s’af?che et l’appareil photo est mis
automatiquement hors tension dès que vous sélectionnez
[OK].
Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer” (p.26).
.
Vous avez la possibilité de modi?er les paramètres des
boutons Enregistrer 1 et Enregistrer 2.
Vous pouvez préciser le mode d’enregistrement —
enregistrer les ?chiers tels quels ou opérer une conversion
de format —, la taille des images, etc.
1 Cliquez sur ou dans la fenêtre
RICOH Gate tout en maintenant la
touche Ctrl appuyée.
Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.23).
La zone de dialogue [Save 1] ou [Save 2] est af?chée.
2 Si vous souhaitez changer le format
d’enregistrement des images fixes,
sélectionnez le format voulu dans le
menu déroulant [Save Format].
SI vous ne souhaitez pas changer ce format
d’enregistrement, passez à l’étape 4.
Modi?cation du paramétrage des
boutons Enregistrer
• Si l’appareil photo n’est pas
correctement raccordé au
Macintosh, un message
s’af?che pour vous le
signaler. Véri?ez la
connexion.
Remarque
Remarque27
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
Voir “Dialogue de paramétrage de l’enregistrement”
(p.28).
3 Si vous souhaitez modifier la taille de
l’image, sélectionnez [Change Image
Size].
Choisissez la taille voulue, ou bien sélectionnez
[Constant magni?cation] ou [Optional magni?cation].
Si vous sélectionnez [Constant magni?cation] ou
[Optional magni?cation], vous avez la possibilité de
spéci?er la taille.
4 Indiquez si un dossier doit
automatiquement être créé pour
enregistrer les données.
Si vous sélectionnez [Automatically create new
folder], Choisissez l’une des sous-options suivantes:
[Shooting date], [Photographer] ou [Each download]
dans la zone [Category].
5 Indiquez si vous voulez que l’appareil
photo s’éteigne automatiquement à
l’issue du transfert.
6 Sélectionnez [OK].
Vos modi?cations sont prises en compte.28
Dialogue de paramétrage de l’enregistrement
1 Save Format (Format d’enregistrement)
Si vous sélectionnez [No change format], les images ?xes
sont enregistrées dans leur format d’origine.
Si vous souhaitez modi?er le format des ?chiers d’images
?xes provenant de l’appareil photo, sélectionnez l’un des
formats suivants: PICT (*.PCT), JPEG (*.JPG), TIFF (*.TIF)
ou PNG (*.PNG).
• Si vous demandez une conversion de format, un dossier
supplémentaire nommé [Original] est automatiquement créé
pour accueillir les ?chiers d’images ?xes à leur format
d’origine.
2 Change Image Size (Taille d’image)
Si vous modi?ez le format d’enregistrement, vous pouvez
spéci?er la taille d’image souhaitée.
Si vous désirez modi?er la taille de l’image, sélectionnez [640
× 480] ou [320 × 240], ou bien sélectionnez [Constant
magni?cation] ou [Optional magni?cation] puis spéci?ez la
taille voulue.
3 Constant magni?cation
Vous pouvez modi?er la taille en conservant les mêmes
proportions. Vous pouvez également spéci?er une taille allant
de la moitié de la taille originale à sept fois celle-ci.
4 Save the H:W ratio
Si vous sélectionnez cette option après avoir sélectionné
[Optional magni?cation], vous pouvez faire varier la taille de
l’image sans changer ses proportions, en indiquant soit une
valeur de largeur, soit une valeur de hauteur.
5 Optional magni?cation
Vous pouvez indiquer la taille souhaitée à l’af?chage.
6 Save folder (Dossier d’enregistrement)
Vous pouvez modi?er la destination d’enregistrement des
?chiers.
7 Automatically create new folder (Créer
automatiquement les dossiers)
Si vous activez cette option, le dossier dans lequel doivent
être placés les ?chiers sur le Macintosh est créé
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
8
9
Remarque29
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
automatiquement. Comme sous-option, vous pouvez
sélectionner [Shooting date], [Photographer] ou [Each
Download].
• Si vous sélectionnez [Shooting Date], un dossier distinct est
créé pour chaque date de prise de vue consignée dans
l’appareil photo et les données placées dans les dossiers en
fonction de cette date de création.
• Si vous sélectionnez [Photographer], un dossier distinct est
créé pour chaque photographe consigné dans l’appareil
photo et les données placées dans les dossiers en fonction du
photographe ayant créé les ?chiers.
• Si vous sélectionnez [Each Download], un nouveau dossier
est créé à chaque session de transmission des données. Le
nom du dossier sera formé à partir de la date du jour et d’un
numéro séquentiel comme indiqué ci-dessous.
8 Do not automatically create new folder (Ne pas
créer automatiquement les dossiers)
Si vous activez cette option, il n’y a pas création automatique
du dossier cible. Les données sont placées dans le dossier
spéci?é par l’option [Save Destination Folder].
9 Turn off camera after saving
Si vous sélectionnez cette option, l’appareil photo s’éteint
automatiquement en ?n d’enregistrement. Si vous ne
sélectionnez pas cette option, l’appareil photo ne s’éteint pas
automatiquement en ?n d’enregistrement.
En ajustant le paramétrage de la fonction d’Enregistrement
automatique via la touche START, vous pouvez
commander l’enregistrement des ?chiers de l’appareil sur
le micro-ordinateur, au format souhaité et dans le dossier
voulu, par un simple appui sur la touche START de
la RICOH BASE lorsque l’appareil est placé sur cette
dernière.
1 Sélectionnez [Options Setting] dans le
menu [RICOH Gate Setup].
La zone de dialogue [Options Setting] est af?chée.
2 Sélectionnez [Automatically save at
Push START Key].
Si vous préférez désactiver la fonction
d’enregistrement automatique des ?chiers sur le
Modi?cation du paramétrage de la
touche START
Numéro séquentiel à 3 chiffres
AAAAMMJJ-000
Date du transfert30
Macintosh, sélectionnez [Do not save Automatically at
Push START Key].
Voir “Dialogue de paramétrage des options” (p.30).
3 Sélectionnez [Save 1] ou [Save 2] pour
l’option [File format automatic save mode].
• [Save 1] est le paramétrage d’enregistrement lié au bouton
Enregistrer 1. [Save 2] est le paramétrage d’enregistrement lié
au bouton Enregistrer 2.
• Vous pouvez donc opérer un paramétrage différent pour
chacun des deux boutons Enregistrer.
Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer” (p.26).
4 Sélectionnez [OK].
Le paramétrage de l’Enregistrement automatique est
modi?é.
Dialogue de paramétrage des options
1 Automatically save at Push START key
Si vous sélectionnez cette option, les données de l’appareil
photo seront enregistrées automatiquement sur le Macintosh
au format que vous spéci?ez lorsque vous appuierez sur la
touche Démarrer de la RICOH BASE.
Si vous sélectionnez cette option, les données sont
automatiquement enregistrées au format sélectionné.
2 File format automatic save mode
Indiquez si la fonction d’Enregistrement automatique doit
utiliser le paramétrage [Save 1] ou [Save 2]. [Save 1] et [Save
2] correspondent aux paramétrage dans RICOH Gate des
deux boutons Enregistrer 1 et Enregistrer 2.
3 Do not save Automatically at Push START key
Si vous sélectionnez cette option, la fonction Enregistrement
automatique ne s’active pas lorsque vous appuyez sur la
touche START de la RICOH BASE.
Remarque
1
2
331
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
En plaçant l’appareil photo sur la RICOH BASE et appuyant
simplement sur la touche START , vous pouvez
automatiquement transmettre et enregistrer les ?chiers image,
son ou vidéo de l’appareil dans le dossier spéci?é du
Macintosh.
• Sélectionnez l’option [Automatically save at Push START key]
pour que la touche START permette l’enregistrement automatique
des ?chiers de l’appareil. Si cette option n’est pas sélectionnée, les
?chiers ne pourront pas être enregistrée à l’aide de la touche
START.
Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage de la touche START”
(p.29).
• Le paramétrage du format d’enregistrement, du dossier de
destination, etc. s’effectue au niveau des boutons Enregistrer 1 et
Enregistrer 2.
Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer” (p.26).
1 Véri?ez que la RICOH BASE est
correctement raccordé au Macintosh.
Voir “Branchement du câble USB” (p.17).
2 Vérifiez que l’adaptateur secteur est
correctement raccordé à la RICOH BASE.
3 Placez l’appareil photo sur la RICOH BASE.
4 Appuyez sur la touche START de la
RICOH BASE.
Les données de l’appareil photo sont transmises et
enregistrées sur le Macintosh.
• Si l’option [Turn off camera after saving] est sélectionnée
dans le paramétrage du bouton Enregistrer, la demande de
con?rmation s’af?che et l’appareil photo est mis
automatiquement hors tension.
Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage de la touche START”
(p.29).
Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer” (p.26).
Transmission automatique des
?chiers à l’aide de la touche START
Important
Remarque
Remarque32
Envoi de ?chiers du Macintosh
vers l’appareil photo
(Macintosh Appareil)
Vous pouvez transférer des ?chiers enregistrés avec l’appareil
et des musiques (?chiers MP3) du Macintosh vers l’appareil
photo.
Véri?ez que l’appareil photo est correctement raccordé au
Macintosh avant de poursuivre.
.
On appelle ici «transfert» l’envoi de données du Macintosh
vers l’appareil photo.
Vous pouvez transférer des images, des notes vocales, des
séquences vidéo et de la musique de votre Macintosh vers
l’appareil photo via le bouton Transférer du logiciel RICOH
Gate.
Le transfert s’effectue en fonction du paramétrage du
bouton Transférer.
Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage du bouton Transférer”
(p.34).
• Seuls les ?chiers EXIF (*.JPG), les ?chiers note vocale
(*.WAV), les ?chiers vidéo (*.AVI) enregistrés à l’origine sur
cet appareil d’une part, et les ?chiers MP3 (*.MP3) peuvent
être transférés.
• Tous les ?chiers du type spéci?é qui se trouvent dans le
dossier sélectionné sont transférés. Il n’est pas possible de
transférer sélectivement des ?chiers de ce dossier.
1 Véri?ez que l’appareil photo est
correctement raccordé au Macintosh.
Voir “Connexion de la RICOH BASE à un Macintosh”
(p.17).
2 Vérifiez le paramétrage du transfert.
Modi?ez ce paramétrage si nécessaire.
Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage du bouton Transférer”
(p.34).
3 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate.
Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage du bouton Transférer”
(p.34)
La zone de dialogue [Upload] apparaît.
Transfert à l’aide du bouton Transférer
• Si vous voulez transférer des
?chiers MP3, ne manquez
pas de lire d’abord la section
“Transfert d’un ?chier MP3”
(p.37).
Remarque
Important
• Si l’appareil photo n’est pas
correctement raccordé au
Macintosh, un message
s’af?che pour vous le
signaler. Véri?ez la
connexion.
Remarque33
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
4 Si nécessaire, cliquez sur [Select
Folder] pour sélectionner le lecteur et le
dossier dans lesquels se trouve le
fichier à transférer.
Voir “Dialogue de Choix d’un dossier” (p.36).
5 Sélectionnez le type de fichier à
transférer dans la zone [File Type
(Type)].
Voir “Dialogue de paramétrage de transfert” (p.34).
Lorsque vous sélectionnez un type de ?chier à
transférer, seuls les ?chiers de ce type présents dans le
dossier sélectionné sont af?chés dans la liste de
?chiers.
6 Vérifiez que les fichiers de la liste sont
bien ceux que vous voulez transférer,
puis sélectionnez [OK].
• S’il s’agit d’un ?chier note vocale, c’est une icône de note
vocale qui est af?chée, et s’il s’agit d’une séquence vidéo,
c’est une icône de ?lm.
• Si vous sélectionnez un ?chier-liste de morceaux MP3, la
zone de dialogue [Select Playlist] apparaît. Consultez la
référence suivante avant de transférer un ?chier MP3 ou un
?chier-liste MP3.
Voir “Transfert d’un ?chier MP3” (p.37).
Un message de con?rmation du début du transfert est
af?ché.
7 Sélectionnez [OK].
Les données spéci?ées sont transférées du Macintosh
à l’appareil photo.
Remarque
• Si vous sélectionnez l’option
[Turn off camera after
saving] dans le cadre du
paramétrage du bouton
Transférer, une demande de
con?rmation de mise hors
tension sera af?ché en ?n de
transfert. Il vous faudra alors
cliquer sur [OK] pour
valider l’extinction de
l’appareil.
Voir “Modi?cation du
paramétrage du bouton
Transférer” (p.34).
Remarque34
Dialogue de paramétrage de transfert
1 [Select Folder]
Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ouvrir la zone de dialogue [Choix
d’un dossier] et sélectionner le lecteur et le dossier dans
lesquels se trouve le ?chier à transférer.
2 Dossier source du transfert
Le dossier à transférer est af?ché dans cette zone. Par défaut,
il s’agit du dossier spéci?é au niveau de l’option [Upload
Source Folder] dans les paramètres de transfert.
3 Liste des ?chiers
Une liste des ?chiers du type spéci?é présents dans le dossier
sélectionné est af?chée, ce qui vous permet de véri?er qu’il
s’agit bien des ?chiers à transférer.
4 Type de ?chier
Sélectionnez le ?chier à transférer. Lorsque vous sélectionnez
un type de ?chier à transférer, seuls les ?chiers de ce type
présents dans le dossier sélectionné sont af?chés sur la droite.
Vous avez la possibilité de modi?er le paramétrage du
bouton Transférer.
Vous pouvez spéci?er le type des ?chiers que vous voulez
transférer ainsi que le dossier source contenant ces ?chiers
sur le Macintosh et enregistrer ces modi?cations.
1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH
Gate tout en maintenant la touche Ctrl
appuyée.
Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.23).
La boîte de dialogue [Upload] apparaît.
Modi?cation du paramétrage du
bouton Transférer
1
2
3
435
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
2 Si vous voulez limiter le transfert aux
fichiers d’un certain type, sélectionnez
le type voulu dans la zone [File Type].
Voir “Dialogue de paramétrage de transfert” (p.34).
3 Si vous voulez modifier le dossier
source, sélectionnez [Change folder].
La zone de dialogue [Choix d’un dossier] apparaît.
4 Sélectionnez le dossier source voulu,
puis sélectionnez [Choisir].
Voir “Dialogue de Choix d’un dossier” (p.36).
La zone de dialogue [Upload] s’af?che à nouveau à
l’écran.
5 Sélectionnez [OK].
Vos modi?cations sont prises en compte.
Dialogue de paramétrage de transfert
1 File Type (Type de ?chier)
Si vous sélectionnez [All transferable ?les], tous les ?chiers
du dossier source spéci?é sont transférés.
• Le réglage par défaut de
cette option est [All
transferable ?les] (tous les
types de ?chiers).
Remarque
1
236
Si vous voulez limiter le transfert aux ?chiers d’un certain
type, sélectionnez l’un des types suivants :?chiers EXIF
(*.JPG), ?chiers note vocale (*.WAV), ?chiers vidéo (*.AVI),
et ?chiers MP3 (*.MP3) et ?chiers-listes MP3 (*.M3U).
2 Upload Source Folder (Dossier source)
Par défaut, le dossier source est le dossier dans lequel les
logiciels Caplio RR10 sont installés. Si vous voulez modi?er
le dossier source du transfert, sélectionnez [Change folder],
puis sélectionnez le dossier voulu.
Dialogue de Choix d’un dossier
1 Dossier précédent
En cliquant sur ce bouton, vous pouvez sélectionner
directement le lecteur ou dossier précédent par rapport au
dossier actuellement sélectionné.
2 Ouvrir
Permet d’ouvrir le dossier sélectionné.
3 Choisir
Pour dé?nir le dossier source du transfert, choisissez un
dossier dans la liste et cliquez sur ce bouton.
4 Af?cher l’aperçu
Sélectionnez un ?chier lisible sous QuickTime, puis cliquez
sur ce bouton pour visionner la séquence.
1
4
3
237
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
• L’appareil photo peut reproduire les sons des ?chiers MP3 au
format ci-après.
– Débit : 96 kbit/s
– Fréquence d’échantillonnage : 44,1 kHz
Transfert d’un ?chier MP3
Lorsque vous transférez un ?chier MP3 vers l’appareil
photo, un recodage du ?chier est effectué juste avant le
transfert. Seuls les ?chiers MP3 ainsi recodés sont
lisibles par l’appareil photo.
Si vous sélectionnez le type [MP3 Playlist] dans le
menu déroulant [File Type] de la zone de dialogue de
paramétrage du transfert, la zone de dialogue [Select
Playlist] apparaît. Sélectionnez cette liste et validez le
?chier MP3 à transférer.
Voir “Transfert à l’aide du bouton Transférer”
(p.32).
Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage du bouton
Transférer” (p.34).
Conseils
Important38
Impression d’une planche index
(Planches index)
Vous pouvez imprimer une « planche index » des photos
enregistrées sur le Macintosh.
• Cette impression ne peut porter que sur les images aux formats
suivants: BITMAP (*.BMP), EXIF2.1/2.0 (*.JPG), JPEG (*.JPG),
NC (*.TIF), PICT (*.PCT), TIFF-YUV (*.TIF), TIF-MMR (*.TIF),
TIFF-RGB (*.TIF), TIFF (*.TIF), AVI (*.AVI), WAV (*.WAV) et
MOV(*.MOT).
Cette fonction vous permet d’obtenir une planche index des
photos d’un dossier donné, c’est-à-dire d’une impression
sur papier de toutes les photos à un format miniature. Vous
pouvez spéci?er si un titre, la date de prise de vue, les
numéros de pages et la date d’impression, doivent être
imprimés, et indiquer le nombre de photos miniatures qui
doivent ?gurer sur chaque page.
La planche index est imprimée en fonction des paramètres
d’impression affectés au bouton Imprimer index.
1 Véri?ez le paramétrage de l’impression.
Modi?ez des paramètres si nécessaire.
Voir “Modi?cation des réglages d’impression” (p.39).
2 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH
Gate.
Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.23).
La zone de dialogue [Choix d’un dossier] apparaît.
3 Sélectionnez le dossier voulu pour
l’impression de la planche index, puis
sélectionnez [Choisir].
Le message [Processing] est af?ché, puis c’est le tour
de la zone de dialogue [Print (Imprimer)].
Voir “Dialogue de Choix d’un dossier” (p.36).
4 Indiquez le nombre d’exemplaires voulu,
puis sélectionnez [OK].
L’impression débute.
Impression d’une planche index
Important
• Il faut dé?nir le dossier dans
lequel seront placées les
planches index à l’avance,
lors du paramétrage de
l’impression. Une fois
l’opération d’impression de
l’index lancée, il n’est plus
possible de modi?er ces
paramètres.
Remarque
• Utilisez le Sélecteur pour
choisir l’imprimante à
utiliser.
Remarque
• Les options de la zone de
dialogue [Print (Imprimer)]
varient selon l’imprimante
utilisée.
• Pour plus de précisions,
consultez les modes
d’emploi de votre Macintosh
et de votre imprimante.
Remarque39
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
La planche est imprimée en fonction des paramètres
d’impression affectés au bouton Imprimer index.
Lorsque vous effectuez un tel paramétrage, vous pouvez le
sauvegarder avec tous ses paramètres - nombre d’images
par page, impression du titre, de la date de prise de vue, du
numéro de page, etc. Cette fonction est utile pour
réadopter rapidement un ancien paramétrage après avoir
modi?é des paramètres.
1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH
Gate tout en maintenant la touche Ctrl
appuyée.
Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.23).
La zone de dialogue [Print Setting] apparaît.
2 Tapez le titre qui doit apparaître en entête.
Si vous laissez cette zone vide, aucun titre n’est
imprimé.
Voir “Dialogue de paramétrage de l’impression” (p.40).
3 Choisissez le nombre d’images par
page imprimée.
Vous pouvez sélectionner l’un des formats suivants: (5
× 8), (4 × 6), (3 × 4) or (2 × 3).
4 Choisissez entre l’impression de la date
de prise de vue ([Shooting date]), la date
d’impression ([Print date]) ou les
numéros de pages ([Page No.]).
Modi?cation des réglages d’impression
• En cliquant sur le bouton
[Printer Setting], vous
pouvez paramétrer votre
imprimante de façon ?ne.
Effectuez le paramétrage
requis.
• Pour plus de précisions,
consultez les modes
d’emploi de votre ordinateur
et de votre imprimante.
Remarque40
5 Sélectionnez la police et le corps dans
lesquels imprimer le titre, la date de
prise de vue, etc.
6 Sélectionnez [OK].
Le paramétrage d’impression d’index est enregistré.
Dialogue de paramétrage de l’impression
1 Print Title (Titre)
Tapez le titre qui doit apparaître en en-tête. Si vous laissez
cette zone vide, aucun titre n’est imprimé.
2 Print Type (Format d’impression)
Choisissez le nombre d’images à placer sur chaque page
imprimée. Les différents choix sont présentés sous forme de
matrice nombre d’images sur une lige x nombre de colonnes.
3 Print Options (Options d’impression)
Il vous suf?t de sélectionner [Shooting date], [Page No.] ou
[Print date] pour que la date de prise de vues, le numéro de
page et la date d’impression ?gurent en en-tête des pages
imprimées. Si vous ne sélectionnez aucune de ces options,
rien n’est imprimé.
4 Font Setting (Police de caractères)
Sélectionnez la police et le corps (8 pts à 14 pts) dans lesquels
imprimer le titre, la date de prise de vue, les numéros de page
et la date d’impression.
5 Printer Setting (Réglages d’imprimante)
En cliquant sur [Printer Setting], vous pouvez sélectionner le
format du papier, le mode d’alimentation, la direction
d’impression, etc.
1
3
4
2
541
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
Lancement d’une application
En affectant le programme de votre choix au bouton
Application de RICOH Gate, vous pouvez ensuite directement
lancer cette application à l’aide de ce bouton.
Vous pouvez dé?nir l’application à lancer lorsqu’on clique
sur le bouton [Application 1] et [Application 2].
1 Cliquez sur ou dans la fenêtre
RICOH Gate tout en maintenant la
touche Ctrl appuyée.
Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.23).
La zone de dialogue [Application Setup] apparaît.
2 Cliquez sur [Select], à la droite de ou
.
La zone de dialogue [Ouvrir] apparaît.
3 Sélectionnez l’application de votre
choix, puis cliquez sur [Ouvrir].
L’icône de l’application sélectionnée s’af?che à la
droite du bouton spéci?é dans la zone de dialogue
[Application Setup].
Dé?nition de l’application à lancer42
4 Cliquez sur [OK].
Dialogue de con?guration du lancement
d’application
1 Icône d’application
L’icône de l’application affectée au bouton Application est
af?chée.
2 Select (Sélectionner)
Si vous cliquez sur ce bouton, la zone de dialogue [Ouvrir]
apparaît. Sélectionnez l’application voulue.
Vous pouvez lancer l’application dé?nie en cliquant sur le
bouton correspondant de RICOH Gate.
1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH
Gate.
Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.23).
L’application dé?nie se lance.
Lancement de l’application
1
243
3
Utilisation de RICOH Gate
Autres fonctions
Lorsque l’appareil photo est connecté au Macintosh, vous
pouvez le mettre hors tension en cliquant sur le bouton
Éteindre l’appareil de RICOH Gate.
1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre
RICOH Gate.
Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.23).
L’appareil photo s’éteint et passe en charge de batterie.
Lorsque l’appareil photo est connecté au Macintosh, vous
pouvez af?cher et ainsi véri?er le nom du photographe
dé?ni dans l’appareil.
1 Sélectionnez [Camera Property] dans le
menu [RICOH Gate Setup].
La zone de dialogue [Camera Property] apparaît.
2 Vérifiez le nom du photographe, puis
sélectionnez [OK].
Mise hors tension de l’appareil
Af?chage et modi?cation des
Informations relatives à l’appareil
• Vous pouvez saisir jusqu’à
16 caractères ASCII pour
dé?nir le nom du
photographe. Voir “À propos
du code ASCII” (p.44).
Remarque44
Vous avez la possibilité de changer l’aspect de RICOH
Gate. Vous pouvez choisir entre deux décors (casual, c’est-
à-dire décontracté, et formal, c’est-à-dire sérieux), en plus
du décor par défaut.
1 Sélectionnez [Background Illustration]
dans le menu [RICOH Gate Setup], puis
choisissez [Basic], [Formal] ou [Casual].
L’arrière-plan par défaut de la fenêtre RICOH Gate est
le décor [Basic].
Le décor de la fenêtre RICOH Gate est modi?é.
1 Sélectionnez [About RICOH Gate] dans
le menu Pomme.
La zone de dialogue [About RICOH Gate] est af?chée.
2 Sélectionnez [OK].
Modi?cation de l’aspect de RICOH
Gate
Af?chage du numéro de version de
RICOH Gate
À propos du code ASCII
Le code ASCII dé?nit un jeu de caractères
informatiques permettant l’échange de messages et de
données entre différents types d’ordinateurs. Outre les
lettres majuscules et minuscules non accentuées [A-Z]
et [a-z], les chiffres [0-9] et des signes et symboles tels
que (+-*/$%&!], etc., le code ASCII comprend des
codes de contrôles comme Retour chariot et
Tabulation. Comme il s’agit d’un code conçu aux ÉtatsUnis, les caractères accentués et autres caractères
spéciaux n’y ?gurent pas. Néanmoins, son utilisation
quasi universel sur les micro-ordinateurs permet
d’assurer des échanges aisés entre ordinateurs.
Conseils45
Appendice
Appendice
Cette section explique comment se servir de l’appareil photo
comme Web cam (périphérique de capture vidéo) et fournit la
liste des options de menu de RICOH Gate.
Utilisation du Caplio RR10 comme
Web cam
Pour pouvoir vous servir de l’appareil photo comme Web cam
(périphérique de capture vidéo), vous devez disposer d’un
logiciel de capture d’images vidéo, par exemple un logiciel de
montage vidéo ou de visioconférence.
1 Introduisez le CD-ROM fourni avec
l’appareil dans le lecteur de CD-ROM,
puis installez le pilote USB et le pilote
vidéo.
• Si vous avez effectué une installation standard de [Caplio
RR10 Software], le pilote USB est déjà installé.
Voir “Installation du logiciel” (p.11).
Voir “Installation de logiciels sélectionnés” (p.14).
2 Installez le logiciel de capture d’images
vidéo.
Remarque46
3 Connectez l’adaptateur secteur à la
RICOH BASE, puis connectez cette
dernière au Macintosh à l’aide du câble
USB.
4 Raccordez le berceau à la RICOH BASE.
5 Placez le bouton rotatif de mode de
l’appareil sur (séquence vidéo) puis
posez l’appareil sur la RICOH BASE.
6 Appuyez sur la touche START de la
RICOH BASE.
7 Cadrez votre sujet à l’aide de l’appareil
et affinez la direction et l’angle de prise
de vue.
• Retirez l’appareil de la
RICOH BASE avant de le
mettre hors tension.
Important47
Appendice
8 Lancez l’application de capture vidéo.
9 L’image visée par l’appareil est affichée
en direct par le logiciel.
L’image visée par l’appareil est af?chée en direct.
• Pour plus de précisions sur l’utilisation du logiciel, consultez
son mode d’emploi.
• Si aucune image ne s’af?che véri?ez les points suivants.
Est-ce qu’un autre périphérique de capture vidéo est
sélectionné ?
Sélectionnez [Caplio RR10] comme périphérique de
capture.
Est-ce qu’un autre périphérique de capture d’image est
sélectionné ?
Débranchez tout périphérique de capture d’image autre que
l’appareil (Caplio RR10).
Plusieurs logiciels d’exploitation de Web cam sont-ils
actifs sur l’ordinateur ?
Il n’est pas possible d’enregistrer des images dans plusieurs
applications à la fois. Quittez les autres logiciels et ne laissez
ouvert que celui que vous utilisez.
• Si vous n’arrivez pas à connecter l’appareil correctement,
consultez la section “Dépannage” (p.48).
Remarque48
Dépannage
Si l’appareil ne fonctionne pas correctement, procédez comme
indiquez ci-après.
Adaptateur secteur
• L’adaptateur est-il correctement raccordé à
l’appareil photo et à la RICOH BASE ?
• Est-il bien branché dans une prise secteur ?
Câble de liaison USB
• Le câble USB est-il correctement raccordé à
l’appareil photo et à la RICOH BASE ?
• Est-il bien branché sur le port USB du Macintosh ?
Voir “Connexion de la RICOH BASE à un
Macintosh” (p.17).
Appareil photoRICOH BASE
• Si vous utilisez la RICOH BASE, l’appareil photo
est-il correctement raccordé ?
• Si l’appareil est raccordé au Macintosh, est-il bien
sous tension ?
• Le bouton rotatif de mode de l’appareil est-il placé
sur une autre position que (séquence vidéo) ?
Voir “Connexion de l’appareil à un Macintosh”
(p.19).
Installation
• L’installation des logiciels Caplio RR10 a-t-elle bien
été effectuée ?
Si les résultats des étapes 1 et 2 ci-dessus sont
normaux et si l’appareil ne fonctionne toujours pas
correctement, essayez les solutions suivantes.
Solution 1
1 Supprimez les logiciels Caplio RR10.
Voir “Désinstallation des logiciels” (p.15).
2 Redémarrez le Macintosh, puis réinstallez
les logiciels Caplio RR10.
Voir “Pour installer les logiciels Caplio RR10” (p.11).
3 Véri?ez maintenant si l’appareil photo
fonctionne normalement.
1. Vérifiez les connexions et branchements.
2. Vérification de l’installation
3. Solutions49
Appendix
Menus
Quit (Quitter)
Le logiciel RICOH Gate est déchargé de la mémoire.
Button Setup (Paramétrage des boutons)
Vous pouvez paramétrer la fonction des boutons Enregistrer 1,
Enregistrer 2, Transmettre, Application 1 et Application 2.
Options Setting (Paramétrage des options)
Cette option vous permet de paramétrer la fonction Enregistrement
automatique commandée par la touche Démarrer de la RICOH
BASE. Vous pouvez choisir si cette fonction doit être entièrement
automatique, ainsi que le format d’enregistrement des ?chiers.
Background Illustration (Décor d’arrière-plan)
Cette option vous permet de sélectionner l’un des trois décors
proposé pour la fenêtre RICOH Gate : standard, formel ou
décontracté. Le décor sélectionné par défaut est le décor standard.
Camera Property (Informations sur l’appareil)
Cette option permet d’obtenir des informations sur l’appareil photo
connecté au Macintosh.
About Balloon Help (À propos des bulles d’aide)
Cette option explique comment se servir des bulles d’aide.
Show/Hide Balloons (Af?cher/Masquer les bulles d’aide)
Cette option vous permet d’activer ou de désactiver les bulles d’aide.
Si vous cliquez sur l’un des boutons de la fenêtre RICOH Gate tout en maintenant la touche
Ctrl enfoncée, le menu de con?guration dudit bouton apparaît. Vous pouvez paramétrer la
fonction des boutons Enregistrer 1, Enregistrer 2, Transférer, Imprimer, Envoyer, Application 1
et Application 2.
Menu File (Fichier)
Menu de con?guration « RICOH Gate Setup »
Menu Help (Aide)
Menu de paramétrage de chaque bouton50
Index
A
Adaptateur secteur ....................... 17
Aspect de RICOH Gate ................ 44
B
Bouton Application........................ 23
Bouton Éteindre l’appareil....... 24, 43
Bouton Icône................................. 23
Bouton Imprimer Index ................. 23
Bouton Transférer ................... 23, 32
Boutons Enregistrer ................ 23, 25
C
Câble USB
Connexion.................................. 17
Déconnexion .............................. 20
Camera Property........................... 43
Case de fermeture ........................ 23
Case de masquage ...................... 23
Connecteur DIGITAL (AV/USB) .... 17
D
Définition de l’application.............. 41
Démarrage de RICOH Gate.......... 21
Désinstallation............................... 15
Dialogue de Choix d’un dossier.... 36
Dialogue de paramétrage de
l’enregistrement ............................ 28
Dialogue de paramétrage de
l’impression ................................... 40
Dialogue de paramétrage de
l’impression d’index ...................... 40
Dialogue de paramétrage de
Transfert .................................. 34, 35
Dialogue de paramétrage des
options........................................... 30
E
Environnement système requis ..... 10
F
Fenêtre RICOH Gate ..................... 21
Fichier MP3 ................................... 37
I
Impression d’une planche index... 38
Informations relatives à l’appareil . 43
Installer
Installation Personnalisée............. 12
Installation Standard.................... 12
Logiciels Caplio RR10 ................. 11
QuickTime.................................. 14
L
L’aspect de RICOH Gate .............. 44
La fonction d’Enregistrement
automatique .................................. 29
Lancement d’une application........ 41
Lancement de l’application........... 42
M
MGI PhotoSuite ............................... 9
MusicMatch JUKEBOX ................... 9
P
Paramétrage de l’enregistrement.. 26
Paramétrage de transfert .............. 34
Pilote TWAIN ................................... 8
Pilote USB ....................................... 8
Index alphabétique51
Appendix
Planche index ............................... 38
Port USB.................................. 18, 19
Q
QuickTime ....................................... 9
Quitter RICOH Gate ...................... 21
R
Réglages d’impression ................. 39
RICOH BASE................................. 17
RICOH Gate .................................... 8
T
Touche START ..................19, 29, 31
Transfert ........................................ 32
Transmission automatique ............ 31
V
Version de RICOH Gate................ 44
Video Driver .................................... 8Centres techniques Ricoh
Ricoh company., Ltd.
3-2-3, Shin-yokohama
Kohoku-ku, Yokohama-shi 222-8530, Japan
http://www.ricoh.co.jp/r_dc
Ricoh Factory Service Center
3235 Sunrise Blvd.,
Suite2 Rancho Cordova,
CA 95742
http://www.ricohzone.com/
RICOH EUROPE B.V. (PMMC EUROPE)
Oberrather Straße 6,
D-40472 Düsseldolf,
Germany
http://www.ricohpmmc.com
RICOH UK LTD. (PMMC UK)
Ricoh House, 1 Plane Tree Crescent,
Feltham, Middlesex, TW13 7HG,
England
RICOH FRANCE S.A. (PMMC FRANCE)
383, Avenue du Général de Gaulle –
BP 307-931-13 Clamart Cédex,
France
RICOH ESPANA, S.A. (PMMC SPAIN)
Av. Litoral Mar, 12-14,
08005 Barcelona,
Spain
RICOH EUROPE B.V. (PMMC BENELUX)
Koolhovenlaan 35,
1119 NB Schiphol-Rijk,
The Netherlands
Ricoh Photo Products (Asia), Ltd.
Unit D, E & F
24/F., China Overseas Building
139 Hennessy Road, Wan Chai
Hong Kong
Ricoh Australia Pty. Ltd.
8 Rodborough Road
Frenchs Forrest, N.S.W. 2086
Australia
http://www.ricoh.com.au
Camera User Guide
The serial number of this product
is given on the bottom face of the
camera.
Basic Operations
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
This section provides a basic overview of how to turn on the camera, take
pictures and play back pictures.
Advanced Operations
Read this section when you want to learn more about the different camera
functions.
This section provides more detailed information about the functions used to
take pictures and play back pictures, as well as information on how to customize
the camera settings, print pictures, and use the camera with a computer.
The rechargeable battery needs to be charged before use. The battery is not
charged at the time of purchase.Preface
This manual provides information on how to use the shooting and playback
functions of this product, as well as warnings on its use.
To make the best use of this product’s functions, read this manual
thoroughly before use. Please keep this manual handy for ease of reference.
Ricoh Co., Ltd.
Safety Precautions Read all safety precautions thoroughly to ensure safe use.
Test Shooting Please be sure to do some test shooting to make sure it is recording
properly before normal use.
Copyright Reproduction or alteration of copyrighted documents, magazines,
music and other materials, other than for personal, home or similarly
limited purposes, without the consent of the copyright holder is
prohibited.
Exemption from Liability Ricoh Co., Ltd. assumes no liability for failure to record or play back
images caused by malfunction of this product.
Warranty This product is manufactured to local specifications and the warranty
is valid within the country of purchase. Should the product fail
or malfunction while you are abroad, the manufacturer assumes
no responsibility for servicing the product locally or bearing the
expenditure incurred thereof.
Radio Interference Operating this product in the vicinity of other electronic equipment
may adversely affect the performance of both devices. In particular,
operating the camera close to a radio or television may lead to
interference. If interference occurs, follow the procedures below.
• Move the camera as far away as possible from the TV, radio or other
device.
• Reorient the TV or radio antenna.
• Plug the devices into separate electrical outlets.
© 2010 RICOH CO., LTD. All rights reserved. This publication may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without Ricoh’s express written permission. Ricoh reserves the right to change the contents of this
document at any time without prior notice.
Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information in this document. Should you
nevertheless notice any errors or omissions, we would be grateful if you would notify us at the address
listed on the back cover of this booklet.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows 7™, and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States of America and other countries. Macintosh and Mac OS are
registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the United States of America and other countries. Adobe, the Adobe
logo, and Adobe Reader are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other
countries. MediaBrowser is a trademark of Pixela Corporation. SanDisk is a registered trademark of SanDisk
Corporation. SD is a trademark of SD-3C LLC. All other trade names mentioned in this document are the
property of their respective owners.1
Safety Precautions
Warning Symbols
Various symbols are used throughout this instruction manual and on the
product to prevent physical harm to you or other people and damage to
property. The symbols and their meanings are explained below.
Danger
This symbol indicates matters that may lead to imminent risk of death or
serious injury if ignored or incorrectly handled.
Warning
This symbol indicates matters that may lead to death or serious injury if
ignored or incorrectly handled.
Caution
This symbol indicates matters that may lead to injury or physical damage if
ignored or incorrectly handled.
Sample Warnings
The symbol alerts you to actions that must be performed.
The symbol alerts you to prohibited actions.
The symbol may be combined with other symbols to indicate that a specific
action is prohibited.
? Examples
Do not touch Do not disassemble
Observe the following precautions to ensure safe use of this equipment.
Danger
? Do not attempt to disassemble, repair or alter the equipment yourself. The highvoltage circuitry in the equipment poses significant electrical hazard.
? Do not attempt to disassemble, alter or directly solder the battery.
? Do not put the battery in a fire, attempt to heat it, use it in a high temperature
environment such as next to a fire or inside a car, or abandon it. Do not put it into
water or the sea or allow it to get wet.
? Do not attempt to pierce, hit, compress, drop, or subject the battery to any other
severe impact or force.
? Do not use a battery that is significantly damaged or deformed.2
Warning
? Turn off the power immediately in the event of abnormalities such as smoke
or unusual odors being emitted. Remove the battery as soon as possible,
being careful to avoid electric shocks or burns. If you are drawing power from a
household electrical outlet, be sure to unplug the power cord from the outlet to
avoid fire or electrical hazards. Discontinue use of the equipment immediately if it
is malfunctioning. Contact the nearest service center at your earliest convenience.
? Turn off the power immediately if any metallic object, water, liquid or other
foreign object gets into the camera. Remove the battery and memory card
as soon as possible, being careful to avoid electric shocks or burns. If you are
drawing power from a household electrical outlet, be sure to unplug the power
cord from the outlet to avoid fire or electrical hazards. Discontinue use of the
equipment immediately if it is malfunctioning. Contact the nearest service center
at your earliest convenience.
? Avoid any contact with the liquid crystal inside the picture display, should the
monitor be damaged. Follow the appropriate emergency measures below.
• SKIN: If any of the liquid crystal gets on your skin, wipe it off and rinse the
affected area thoroughly with water, then wash well with soap.
• EYES: If it gets in your eyes, wash your eyes with clean water for at least 15
minutes and seek medical advice immediately.
• INGESTION: If any of the liquid crystal is ingested, rinse the mouth out thoroughly
with water. Have the person drink a large amount of water and induce vomiting.
Seek medical assistance immediately.
? Follow these precautions to prevent the battery from leaking, overheating,
igniting or exploding.
• Do not use a battery other than those specifically recommended for the
equipment.
• Do not carry or store together with metal objects such as ballpoint pens,
necklaces, coins, hairpins, etc.
• Do not put the battery into a microwave or high pressure container.
• If leakage of battery fluid or a strange odor, color change, etc. is noticed during
use or during charging, remove the battery from the camera or battery charger
immediately and keep it away from fire.
? Please observe the following in order to prevent fire, electrical shock or cracking
of the battery while charging.
• Use only the indicated power supply voltage. Also avoid the use of multi-socket
adapters and extension cords.
• Do not damage, bundle or alter power cords. Also, do not place heavy objects on,
stretch or bend power cords.
• Do not connect or disconnect the power plug with wet hands. Always grip the
plug section when disconnecting a power cord.
• Do not cover equipment while charging.
? Keep the battery and SD memory card used in this equipment out of the reach
of children to prevent accidental ingestion. Consumption is harmful to human
beings. If swallowed, seek medical assistance immediately.3
? Keep the equipment out of the reach of children.
? Do not touch the internal components of the equipment if they become
exposed as a result of being dropped or damaged. The high-voltage circuitry in
the equipment could lead to an electric shock. Remove the battery as soon as
possible, being careful to avoid electric shocks or burns. Take the equipment to
your nearest dealer or service center if it is damaged.
? When using the camera in places where steam is present, such as a kitchen, do
not allow the internal parts of the camera to get wet. This could result in electrical
shock or fire.
? Do not use the equipment near flammable gases, gasoline, benzene, thinner or
similar substances to avoid the risk of explosion, fire or burns.
? Do not use the equipment in locations where usage is restricted or prohibited as
this may lead to disasters or accidents.
? Wipe off any dust that accumulates on the electrical plug as this may lead to fire.
? Use only the specified AC adapter in household electrical outlets. Other adapters
pose the risk of fire, electric shock or injury.
? To avoid the risk of fire, electric shock or injury, do not use the battery charger or
AC adapter with commercially available electronic transformers when traveling
abroad.
Observe the following precautions to ensure safe use of this unit.
Caution
? Contact with fluid leaking from a battery can lead to burns. If part of your body
comes in contact with a damaged battery, rinse the area with water immediately
(Do not use soap).
If a battery starts to leak, remove it immediately from the equipment and wipe
the battery chamber thoroughly before replacing it with a new battery.
? Plug the power cords securely into the electrical outlets. Loose cords pose a fire
hazard.
? Do not allow the internal parts of the camera to get wet. In addition, when
operating the camera with wet hands, be careful not to get the internal parts
wet. This could result in electrical shock.
? Do not fire the flash at drivers of vehicles, as this may cause the driver to lose
control and result in a traffic accident.
Safety Precautions
for Accessories
When using optional products, carefully read the instructions provided
with the product before using that product.4
Using the Manuals
The following two manuals are included with your G700.
“Camera User Guide” (This booklet)
This guide explains the usage and functions of the camera.
It also explains how to install the provided software on your
computer.
“Software User Guide” (PDF file)
The “Software User Guide” is available in the following folders
on the provided CD-ROM.
This guide explains how to download images from the
camera to your computer.
Each language has its own
“Software User Guide” in the
respective folder.
To copy the User Guide onto your hard disk, copy the PDF file
from the respective folder directly to your hard disk.
“MediaBrowser” image viewing and editing software (for Windows only)
is also included with the camera. For how to use MediaBrowser, see the
displayed “Help”.
For more information on MediaBrowser, contact the Customer Support
Center below.
North America (U.S.) TEL: (Toll Free) +1-800-458-4029
Europe
UK, Germany, France and Spain: TEL: (Toll Free) +800-1532-4865
Other Countries: TEL: +44-1489-564-764
Asia TEL: +63-2-438-0090
China TEL: +86-21-5385-3786
Business hours: 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM5
Contents
Safety Precautions ................................................................................................ 1
Using the Manuals ................................................................................................ 4
Contents ................................................................................................................... 5
Basic Operations 11
Packing List ...........................................................................................................12
Optional Accessories ................................................................................................................. 12
How to Use the Mode Dial ...............................................................................13
Names of Parts .....................................................................................................14
Picture Display .....................................................................................................16
Getting Ready ......................................................................................................19
About the Battery ........................................................................................................................ 19
About the SD Memory Card (available in stores) .................................................... 20
Charging the Rechargeable Battery (DB-65) .............................................................. 22
Loading the Rechargeable Battery and SD Memory Card ................................. 23
Turning the Power On/Off ..................................................................................................... 24
Setting the Language, Date and Time ........................................................................... 25
Basic Shooting .....................................................................................................27
Shooting in Auto Shooting Mode (Focus and Shoot) .......................................... 27
Using the Zoom Function ...................................................................................................... 29
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro Shooting) .......................................................................... 30
Using the Flash .............................................................................................................................. 31
Using the Self-timer ................................................................................................................... 32
Shooting in CALS Mode .......................................................................................................... 33
Shooting with My Settings Mode ..................................................................................... 33
Playing Back Images ..........................................................................................34
Viewing Your Images ................................................................................................................. 34
Thumbnail View ............................................................................................................................ 34
Enlarging Images ......................................................................................................................... 36
Deleting Files ........................................................................................................37
Deleting a File or All Files ........................................................................................................ 37
Deleting Multiple Files.............................................................................................................. 38
Changing the Display with the DISP. Button .............................................40
Maximizing the Picture Display Brightness ................................................................. 42
The Level Indicator (Electronic Level) ............................................................................. 42
About the Histogram Display .............................................................................................. 446
Advanced Operations 45
1 ADJ. Button Functions 46
Selecting Shooting Menu Options Assigned to the ADJ./MEMO Button .... 46
Shifting the AE and AF Targets ............................................................................................ 47
2 Scene Mode 48
Scene Modes ........................................................................................................48
Using Skew Correction Mode .............................................................................................. 50
3 Shooting and Viewing Movies 51
Shooting Movies .................................................................................................51
Playing Back Movies ...........................................................................................52
4 Memos 53
Adding Memos to New Photos .......................................................................................... 53
Viewing Memos ............................................................................................................................ 54
5 Shooting Menu 55
Using the Menu ...................................................................................................55
Shooting Menu Options ...................................................................................56
Density: Adjusting Contrast in Text Mode .................................................................... 56
Size: Choosing the Size of Photographs Taken in Text Mode ................................ 56
Movie Size: Choosing a Frame Size for Movies ........................................................... 56
Picture Quality/Size: Choosing Size and Compression Options for
Photographs .......................................................................................................................... 56
Focus: Choosing How the Camera Focuses.................................................................. 56
Exposure Metering: Choosing How the Camera Sets Exposure ....................... 56
Continuous Mode: Shooting a Series of Photos ...................................................... 57
Image Settings: Adjusting Contrast, Sharpness, Color, and Vividness ............. 57
Auto Bracket: Varying Settings over a Series of Photographs ............................. 57
Time Exposure: Creating Light Trails .............................................................................. 57
Interval Shooting: Interval Timer Photography ........................................................ 58
Camera Shake Correction: Reducing Blur Caused by Camera Shake ............ 58
Date Imprint: Imprinting the Time and Date of Recording on Photographs.... 58
Exposure Compensation: Adjusting Exposure ........................................................ 58
White Balance: Adjusting Colors According to the Light Source ...................... 59
ISO Setting: Controlling the Camera’s Sensitivity to Light ..................................... 59
Edit Detection: Detecting Changes to Photos ........................................................... 59
Restore Defaults: Restoring Default Shooting Menu Settings ........................... 597
Focus ................................................................................................................................................... 60
Manual Focus (MF): Focusing Manually....................................................................... 60
Auto Bracket ................................................................................................................................... 61
Auto Bracket: Varying Exposure over a Series of Photographs ........................... 61
White Balance Bracket (WB-BKT): Creating Photographs with Varying
White Balance ....................................................................................................................... 61
Exposure Compensation ........................................................................................................ 62
White Balance ................................................................................................................................ 63
Manual: Measuring White Balance ................................................................................... 64
ISO Setting: ISO Sensitivity........................................................................................................ 64
6 Playback Menu 65
Using the Menu ...................................................................................................65
Playback Menu Options ....................................................................................66
Resize: Creating Small Copies of Images ....................................................................... 66
Trim: Creating Cropped Copies .......................................................................................... 66
Contrast Correction:
Creating Copies with Modified Brightness and Contrast ................................... 66
Skew Correction: Reducing the Effects of Perspective .......................................... 66
Protect: Protecting Images from Accidental Deletion ............................................. 66
Slide Show: Automatic Playback ...................................................................................... 66
Copy to Card from Internal Memory: Copying Pictures from Internal
Memory to a Memory Card ............................................................................................. 66
DPOF: Selecting Pictures for Printing .............................................................................. 66
Recover File: Restoring Deleted Files .............................................................................. 67
Trim ...................................................................................................................................................... 68
Contrast Correction .................................................................................................................... 70
Skew Correction ........................................................................................................................... 71
Protect ................................................................................................................................................ 72
DPOF ................................................................................................................................................... 73
Viewing Pictures on TV .....................................................................................74
7 Setup Menu 75
Using the Menu ...................................................................................................75
Setup Menu Options..........................................................................................76
Format [Card]: Formatting Memory Cards................................................................... 76
Format [Internal Memory]: Formatting Internal Memory .................................. 76
LCD Brightness: Adjusting the Picture Display Brightness ................................... 76
Reg. My Settings: Saving Camera Settings ................................................................. 76
Stepped Zoom: Adjusting Zoom in Discrete Steps ................................................. 768
ADJ Button Setting 1–4: Choosing Roles for the ADJ. Button ........................... 77
AF Auxiliary Light: Assisting Autofocus ........................................................................ 77
Operation Sounds: Choosing the Sounds Made by the Camera ...................... 77
Volume Settings: Controlling Volume ........................................................................... 77
LCD Confirmation Time: Displaying Photos After Shooting .............................. 77
Auto Power Off: Camera Power Saving ........................................................................ 77
Monitor Auto off Delay: Choosing the Monitor off Delay ................................... 77
LCD Auto Dim: Picture Display Power Saving ............................................................ 77
Digital Zoom Image: Recording Photos Taken with Digital Zoom
at Actual Size ......................................................................................................................... 78
Level Setting: Adjusting Level Indicator Settings ..................................................... 78
Grid Guide Display Options: Choosing a Framing Guide ................................... 78
Shooting Info. Display Frame: Viewing Settings at a Glance ............................ 78
Auto Rotate: Rotating Pictures for Playback .............................................................. 78
Card Sequence No.: File Numbering Options ........................................................... 79
Date Settings: Setting the Camera Clock ..................................................................... 79
Language/N: Choosing a Language ...................................................................... 79
Video Out Mode: Choosing a Video Format ............................................................... 79
CALS Pic Quality: Choosing Picture Quality and Size for CALS Mode ............. 80
Start Date/Time: Displaying the Date at Startup ...................................................... 80
Choose/Change Password: Choosing a Camera Password ............................... 80
Password Protection: Using a Password to Restrict Camera Access ............... 80
Password Validity Period: Choosing the Length of Time the Password
Remains in Effect ................................................................................................................. 80
Power Button Hold Options: Adjusting POWER Button Responsiveness ... 80
Reg. My Settings ........................................................................................................................... 81
Digital Zoom Image ................................................................................................................... 82
Choose/Change Password .................................................................................................... 83
Password Protection .................................................................................................................. 85
Camera: Adding Password Protection to the Camera ............................................. 85
Int. Memory: Adding Password Protection to Internal Memory ........................ 85
SD WORM: Disabling Password Protection for SD WORM Cards ........................ 86
Menus: Adding Password Protection to the Menus ................................................. 86
8 Camera Memo Menu 87
Using the Menu ...................................................................................................87
Camera Memo Menu Options ........................................................................88
Camera Memo Mode: Choosing a Memo Mode .................................................... 88
Memo Skip: Skipping Memo Combinations ............................................................... 88
Mark Memo Added to Photos: Displaying Memos That Have Been Added
to Photos ................................................................................................................................. 889
Remove Memo Marking: Removing Marking from Memos That Have Been
Added to Photos .................................................................................................................. 88
Memo Warning: Displaying an Empty Description Warning .............................. 88
Display Memo at Startup:
Displaying the Camera Memo Dialog at Startup ................................................... 89
Memo Increment: Incrementing Numerical Memo Descriptions .................... 89
Camera Memo Imprint: Imprinting Memos on Photos ....................................... 89
Camera Memo 1 Auto Delete:
Automatically Deleting the First Description .......................................................... 89
Barcode Type: Choosing a Barcode Type ...................................................................... 90
Barcode Mode: Choosing a Destination for Barcode Data ................................... 90
Scan Time: Choosing a Barcode Scan Time ................................................................. 90
9 Direct Printing 91
About the Direct Print Function ....................................................................91
Connecting the Camera to a Printer ............................................................91
Printing Still Images ...........................................................................................92
Printing One or All Still Images ........................................................................................... 92
Printing Several Still Images .................................................................................................. 94
Printing Reports ............................................................................................................................ 95
10 Downloading Images to Your Computer 96
For Windows .........................................................................................................96
System Requirements for Using the Supplied CD-ROM ..................................... 96
CD-ROM Setup .............................................................................................................................. 97
Copying Pictures to Your Computer ............................................................................. 102
For Macintosh .................................................................................................... 104
Copying Pictures to Your Computer ............................................................................. 10410
11 Appendices 106
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................... 106
Error Messages ........................................................................................................................... 106
Camera Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................... 107
Available Settings ............................................................................................ 113
Specifications .................................................................................................... 115
Number of Images That Can Be Stored .................................................... 117
Defaults Settings/Functions Whose Defaults Are Restored
When the Camera Is Turned Off ............................................................. 119
Using a Wide Conversion Lens .................................................................... 121
Optional Filters.................................................................................................. 121
Using the External Flash ................................................................................ 122
Using Your Camera Abroad .......................................................................... 123
Cautions on Use ................................................................................................ 124
Care and Storage .............................................................................................. 126
Warranty and Servicing ................................................................................. 128
Index .................................................................................................................... 130Basic
Operations
If you are using the camera
for the first time, read this
section.
Packing List ..........................................12
How to Use the Mode Dial ...................13
Names of Parts .....................................14
Picture Display .....................................16
Getting Ready ......................................19
Basic Shooting .....................................27
Playing Back Images ............................34
Deleting Files .......................................37
Changing the Display with the DISP.
Button ............................................4012
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
Packing List
Open the package and make sure all the items are included.
* The actual appearance of items included may differ.
• G700
The serial number of the camera
is provided on the bottom face of
the camera.
• Rechargeable Battery
• Battery Charger
• USB Cable (Mini B cable)
• AV Cable
• Neck Strap
• Warranty
• Camera User Guide
• CD-ROM (GP. 9 6 )
Optional Accessories
• Rechargeable Battery (DB-65)
• Battery Charger (BJ-6)
• Soft Case (SC-700)
Used to store your camera.
• Wide Conversion Lens (DW-5)
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Attaching the Neck Strap to the Camera
Thread the small end
of the strap through
the strap eyelet on
the camera and loop
the ends as shown.
• For the latest information on optional accessories, see the Ricoh website (http://
www.ricohpmmc.com/).13
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
How to Use the Mode Dial
Set the mode dial to
the desired mode
before shooting still
images or movies.
Mode Dial Symbols and Descriptions
Symbol Function Description Refer to
V
CALS Mode Quality and size are adjusted to
produce photographs suitable for
public works photography. Picture
quality and size can be selected
from six options using the [CALS
Pic Quality] item in the setup menu
(GP.80).
P.33
5
Auto Shooting Mode Automatically sets the optimal
aperture value and shutter speed
depending on the subject.
P.27
T,
U
My Settings Mode You can shoot using the settings
registered in [Reg. My Settings].
P.33
W Scene Mode Optimize settings for the current
subject or scene or shoot movies.
P.4814
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
Names of Parts
Camera
Front View
2
3
1
4 5 6 7
8
10 9
Item Name Refer to
1 AF Auxiliary Light P.77
2 Shutter Release Button P.27
3 Mode Dial P.13, 27, 33, 48
4 POWER Button P.24
5 Accessory Shoe P.122
6 Speaker P.52
7 Strap Eyelet P.12
8 Flash P.31
9 Microphone P.51
10 Lens —15
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
Rear View
1
2 3
7
6
4
5
8
3
13
9
12
10
11
16
15 14
17
Item Name Refer to
1 Picture Display P.16
2 Auto Focus/Flash Lamp P.28, 31
3 Strap Eyelet P.12
4 z (Telephoto)/8 (Enlarged View) Button P.29, 34, 36
5 Z (Wide-angle)/9 (Thumbnail View) Button P.29, 34, 36
6 6 ( Playback) Button P.34
7 MENU/OK Button P.55, 65, 75, 87
8 DISP. Button P.36, 40
9 "/N ( Macro) Button P.30
10 D ( Delete)/t ( Self-timer) Button P.32, 37
11 #/F ( Flash) Button P.31
12 ADJ./MEMO Button P.46, 53
13 Terminal Cover P.71, 91, 102, 104
14 AV Output Terminal P.74
15 USB Terminal P.91, 102, 104
16 Tripod Screw Hole —
17 Battery/Card Cover P.23, 12116
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
Picture Display
Example of Picture Display when Shooting Pictures
F3.5 FF3.5 3.5
1 Sec 111 Sec SSeecc
??1 ??1 ??1 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F
I n t e r v a l II n t e r v a l Inntteerrvvaall
X4.8 XX4.8 4.8
111///1000 111000 000000 EV EEEV VV +++0.7 ISO 100 000.7..77 ISO 100 IISSOO 110000
1100
1111
1212
1133
1144
1155
1166
1177
1188
1199
2200
2211
2222
2233
2244
2525
2266 2277 2288 2929
3300
3311
3232
3333
Still Image Mode
Item Name Refer to Item Name Refer to
1 Flash Mode P.31 18 Camera Shake Correction P.58
2 Edit Detection P.59 19 Battery Symbol P.18
3 Scene Mode/Multi-shot P.48, 57 20 Time Exposure P.57
4 Shooting Mode Types P.13 21 Self-timer P.32
5 My Settings Mode P.33 22 Macro Shooting P.30
6 Remaining Number of Still
Images
P.117 23 Digital Zoom Magnification/
Auto Resize Zoom
P.30, 82
7 Recording Destination P.21 24 Zoom Bar P.29
8 Image Size P.56 25 Interval Shooting P.58
9 Picture Quality P.56 26 Aperture P.115
10 Focus Mode P.56 27 Shutter Speed P.115
11 White Balance P.63 28 Exposure Compensation P.62
12 Exposure Metering P.56 29 ISO Setting P.64
13 Image Settings P.57 30 Level Indicator P.43
14 Auto Bracket P.57 31 AF Frame P.27
15 Histogram P.44 32 Exposure Warning Indicator P.62
16 Memo indicator P.87 33 Camera Shake Warning Symbol P.29, 58
17 Date Imprint P.5817
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
0 0 : 0 0 0 0 : 00 : 000 0 00 ///0 0 : 0 2 0 0 : 00 : 000 222 640 664040
Sh u t t e r b u t t o n : St a r t SSSh u t t e r b u t t o n : St a r t hhuutttteerr bbuuttttoonn :: SSttaarrtt
3344 3535
3636
Movie Mode
Item Name Refer to Item Name Refer to
34 Recording Time P.117 36 Movie Recording Indicator P.51
35 Remaining Recording Time P.117
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
When the number of remaining shots is 10,000 or more, “9999” is displayed.
Example of Picture Display During Playback
F3.5 FF3.5 3.5
000-0031 00000-0031 0000--00003311 0031 000031 003311///9999 999999 999999 4:3 F 4 : 4:33 F F
2010 222010 001100///01000111///01 0 000111 00:00 00: 00:0000 111///100 111000000
1010 1111 1122 1133 1414
Still Image Mode
*RMOV0001 ***RMOV0001 RRMMOOVV00000011 10 10 1100//20222000 640 664040
: St a r t ::: St a r t SSttaarrtt
0 5 : 1 2 0 5 0055::: 1 21122
2010 222010 001100///01000111///01 00:00 0001 00 11 0000::000000
1155
1166
Movie Mode
Item Name Refer to Item Name Refer to
1 File Number — 9 Picture Quality P.56
2 Number of Playback Files — 10 Date at Shooting P.26
3 Total Number of Files — 11 Memo indicator P.87
4 Mode Types — 12 Aperture P.115
5 Protect P.72 13 Shutter Speed P.115
6 DPOF P.73 14 Battery Symbol P.18
7 Playback Data Source P.21 15 Recording Time or Lapsed
Time
—
8 Image Size P.56 16 Indicator —18
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• The picture display may display messages to inform you of operational
instructions or the camera’s status while in use.
• Additional information can be viewed by pressing the DISP. button (GP.40).
100-0273 100-0273 110000--00227733 10 10 1100//20222000 4:3 F 4 : 4:33 F F
2010 222010 001100///01000111///01 0 000111 00:00 00: 00:0000
F5.5 FF5.5 5.5 11//606600 ISO 100 IIISO 100 SSOO 110000
28 2228 88 mmmmmmmm
Blue BBlue lue
EV EV EEVV +++0.7 000.7..77
F5.5 FF5.5 5.5 11//606600 ISO 100 IIISO 100 SSOO 110000
28 28 2288 mmmmmmmm
Blue BBlue lue
EV EEEV VV +++0.7 000.7..77
1122
1144
1100 1111
1133
1155
Item Name Refer to Item Name Refer to
1 Shooting Mode — 9 Flash Mode P.31
2 Continuous Mode P.57 10 Focal Length of the Zoom P.29
3 Aperture P.115 11 Macro Shooting P.30
4 Shutter Speed P.115 12 Focus Mode P.56
5 ISO Setting P.64 13 Auto Bracket P.57
6 Exposure Compensation P.62 14 Image Settings P.57
7 Exposure Metering P.56 15 Memo indicator P.87
8 White Balance P.63
Battery Level Indication
A battery symbol appears at the lower right of the picture display to
indicate the battery level. Recharge the battery before it is depleted.
Battery Symbol Description
Green
Battery is sufficiently charged.
Battery partially discharged. Recharging is recommended.
Orange
Battery level is low. Recharge the battery.
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Depending on battery make and condition, the level of AAA NiMH batteries may
not be shown correctly.19
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
Getting Ready
Turn the power on and get ready to shoot.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Be sure the camera is off before removing the battery.
• For information on how to turn the camera off, see P.25.
About the Battery
The G700 can be used with the following batteries:
• DB-65 rechargeable Li-ion batteries (supplied)
• AAA Alkaline Batteries (available in stores)
• AAA Nickel-Hydrogen Batteries (available in stores)
Number of shots you can take ----------------------------------------------------
• Approximate number of shots you can take on a single charge
Battery Type Number of Shots (Normal Mode)
Rechargeable Battery (DB-65) approx. 360
AAA Alkaline Batteries (available in stores) approx. 40
* When [LCD Auto Dim] (GP.77) is set to [On].
• Based on CIPA standard (Temperature: 23 degrees Celsius, picture display on, 30
seconds between shots, changing the zoom setting from telephoto to wideangle or wide-angle to telephoto for each shot, 50% flash usage, turning the
power off after each 10 shots).
• The figure for the number of shots that can be taken with AAA alkaline batteries
is based on measurements made with batteries manufactured by Panasonic.
• If [Off] is selected for [LCD Auto Dim], up to 345 shots can be taken with DB-65
batteries and up to 40 shots with AAA alkaline batteries.
• Set the camera to synchro-monitor mode to increase the number of shots you
can take (GP.40).
• The number of shots is for reference only. If the camera is used for long periods
of time for setting and playback, the shooting time (the number of shots)
will decrease. If you intend to use the camera for a long period of time, we
recommend carrying a spare battery.20
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• The battery may become very hot immediately after operation. Turn the camera
off and leave it to cool down sufficiently before removing the battery.
• Please remove the battery if you are not going to use the camera for a long
period of time.
• When using a lithium-ion battery, use only the specified rechargeable lithiumion battery (DB-65). Do not use any other battery.
• DB-60 Li-ion batteries can not be used.
• NiMH batteries are not charged at purchase; charge before use.
• NiMH batteries may suffer a drop in performance immediately after purchase
or following a month or more of disuse and may need to be recharged two or
three times before they will hold a charge.
• The battery life of alkaline batteries varies with make and the time elapsed since
the date of manufacture. Capacity drops at low temperatures.
• Manganese and Ni-Cd batteries can not be used.
About the SD Memory Card (available in stores)
Pictures can be stored in the camera’s 103 MB internal memory or on
optional SD, SDHC, and SD WORM memory cards (hereafter referred to
as “memory cards”).
SD WORM cards ----------------------------------------------------------------------
Data stored on SanDisk® SD™ WORM (Write Once Read Many) cards can not be
deleted or modified. The following are not available with SD WORM cards:
Deleting files P.37 Recover File P.67
Skew Correction P.50, 71 Trim P.68
Movie shooting P.51 Contrast Correction P.70
Memos P.53 Protect P.72
Continuous Mode P.57 DPOF P.73
Resize P.66 Format [Card] P.76
Copy to Card from Internal
Memory
P.66
• SD WORM cards can contain up to 510 folders, each holding a maximum of 510
photographs.
• Files can not be copied from a computer to an SD WORM card when the camera
is connected via USB.21
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
About Formatting -------------------------------------------------------------------
Before using a memory card for the first time or after using a memory card
in other devices, be sure to format it with this camera. Memory cards can be
formatted using the [Format [Card]] item (GP.76) in the setup menu (GP.75).
Where images are recorded -------------------------------------------------------
When no SD memory card is loaded, the camera records images to the internal
memory (t); when an SD memory card is loaded, it records images to the SD
memory card (u).
Where images are played back from --------------------------------------------
When no SD memory card is loaded, the camera plays back from the internal
memory (t). When an SD memory card is loaded, it plays back from the SD
memory card (u).
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• If an SD memory card is loaded, the camera does not record to the internal
memory, even if the card is full.
• Take care not to get the contacts of the card dirty.
Write-protecting your images ----------------------------------------------------
Move the write-protection switch on the SD memory card
to LOCK to prevent your still images from being accidentally
erased or the card from being formatted.
Note that you cannot shoot images on a locked card because
no data can be recorded to the card. Unlock the card
before shooting. Although SD WORM cards do not have a
writeprotection switch, they can not be formatted, and data can not be deleted
from SD WORM cards.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• The [Copy to Card from Internal Memory] item (GP.66) in the playback menu
(GP.65) can be used to copy the pictures in internal memory to a memory
card.
• An SD/SDHC memory card with a Speed Class of 6 or better is recommended
when recording movies with [x 1280] selected for [Movie Size] (GP.56).22
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
Charging the Rechargeable Battery (DB-65)
DB-65 Li-ion batteries must be charged before use.
1
Insert the battery into the battery charger, making sure that
the r and s markings on the battery match those on the
battery charger.
• The battery label should face up.
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Be careful not to reverse the r and s sides.
2 Plug the power cable into an outlet.
• Use the battery charger (BJ-6) to recharge the battery.
• Charging starts. Charging status is indicated by the charger lamp as
shown in the table below. Once charging has finished, unplug the
battery charger from the power outlet.
Charger Lamp Description
Lit Charging
Off Charging complete
Flashing The battery charger terminal may be soiled or the battery
charger/battery may be faulty. Unplug the battery charger
from the power outlet, and remove the battery.
• The approximate time needed to recharge a fully-exhausted battery
is shown below.
Rechargeable Battery Charging Time
DB-65 Approx. 150 min. (25 °C)23
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
Loading the Battery and SD Memory Card
After recharging the rechargeable battery, load the battery and the SD
memory card. Be sure the camera is off before removing the battery or
the SD memory card.
1 Turn the battery/card cover knob
toward the M mark to open the
cover.
2
Insert the rechargeable battery and
SD memory card.
• Make sure the SD memory card is
facing the right way and then push the
card all the way in until it clicks.
• When the rechargeable battery is
loaded in place, it is locked with the
hook shown in the figure.
Logo side
Loading the specified dry cell batteries
(available in stores)
• Insert the batteries in the direction
shown.
3 Close and knob the battery/card
cover.
• Close the battery/card cover and rotate
the knob to the position opposite the
M icon.24
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
Removing the Rechargeable Battery
Turn the battery/card cover knob toward the M mark to open the
cover. Release the hook that locks the rechargeable battery. The
battery is ejected. Pull the battery out of the camera. Be careful not to
drop the battery when removing it from the camera.
Removing the Dry Cell Batteries
Turn the battery/card cover knob toward the M mark to open the cover.
The batteries will be ejected. Pull the batteries out of the camera. Be careful
not to drop the dry cell batteries when removing them from the camera.
Removing the SD Memory Card
Turn the battery/card cover knob toward the M mark to open the
cover. Push in the SD memory card and gently release to eject it. Pull
the card out of the camera.
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• To prevent moisture or dust from entering the camera, close the battery/card
cover securely.
• Before opening or closing the battery/card cover, choose a location free of
water, sand, mud, and other foreign matter and remove any such matter as may
be adhering to the camera.
• Make sure that the rechargeable battery and SD memory card are facing the
right way when inserted into the camera. Inserting the rechargeable battery
or SD memory card in the wrong direction and forcing close the battery/card
cover may damage the camera, rechargeable battery or SD memory card.
Turning the Power On/Off
Press the POWER button to turn the camera
on or off.
When the camera is turned on, a start-up
sound plays and the picture display turns on.
If the POWER button is pressed when the
camera is on, the number of files recorded
on that day is displayed, and then the
camera turns off.25
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• If you adjust the clock before turning the camera off, the camera will display the
number of shots taken since the clock was set.
• A zero is displayed if the clock is not set.
Using the Camera in Playback Mode
Pressing and holding the 6 (Playback)
button turns on the camera in playback
mode, allowing you to start playback at once.
When the camera has been turned on with
the 6 button, pressing the 6 button again
switches playback mode to shooting mode.
About Auto Power Off --------------------------------------------------------------
• If the camera goes unused for a set period of time, it automatically turns itself
off to save power (Auto Power Off).
• The auto power off setting can be changed (GP.77).
About Password Protection (GP.85) -----------------------------------------
If the camera is password protected, you may be prompted for a password when the
camera is turned on. To use the camera, enter the password as described on P.83.
Setting the Language, Date and Time
When the power is turned on for the first time, the language setting
screen appears (for the picture display language). After setting the
language, go on to the date/time setting (for printing the date and
time on your photos).
Setting the Language
1 Press the !" buttons to select a
language.
• When the DISP. button is pressed, the
language setting is canceled and the
date/time setting screen appears.
2 Press the MENU/OK button.
• The display language is set, and the date/time setting screen appears.26
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
Setting the Date and Time
1 Press the !"#$ buttons to set the year, month, date, time
and format.
• Change the setting with !" and move
the item with #$.
• You can cancel the setting by pressing
the DISP. button.
2 Check the information on the screen and then press the
MENU/OK button.
• The confirmation screen appears.
3 Press the MENU/OK button.
• The date and time are set.
• If the battery is low, a warning will be displayed. Use of a fullycharged battery is recommended; to clear the warning from the
display, press MENU/OK.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• The language, date, and time can be changed at any time using the [Language/
N] and [Date Settings] items (GP.79) in the setup menu (GP.75).
• The [Date Imprint] item (GP.58) in the shooting menu (GP.55) can be used
to stamp photographs with the date and time of recording.
• If the battery is removed for more than three days, the date and time settings
will be lost. These settings must be made again.
• To retain the date and time settings, load a battery with adequate remaining
power for more than ten hours.27
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
Basic Shooting
Now you are ready.
Shooting in Auto Shooting Mode (Focus and Shoot)
Turn the mode dial to 5 to shoot with auto
shooting mode.
The shutter release button works in two steps.
When you press the shutter release button halfway
(Half-press), the auto-focus function is triggered to
determine the focal distance. Next, press it all the way down (Fullpress) to shoot.
When your subject is not in the center of your composition, compose
your photo after focusing (Focus Lock).
1 Hold the camera with both hands and
lightly press both elbows against your
body.
2 Put your finger on the shutter release
button.
3 Frame the picture with your subject in the AF frame in the
center of the screen and press the shutter release button
halfway.
9999 99999 999 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F
• The camera focuses on the subject and the exposure and white
balance are fixed.
• The focal distance is measured at a maximum of nine points. Green
frames appear to indicate the positions that are in focus.28
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
4 To take a picture with the subject in the foreground in focus
against a background, half-press the shutter release button to
focus on the subject, and then compose your shot.
Shooting range
Subject to be focused
5 Gently press the shutter release button all the way.
• The still image you have taken appears momentarily on the picture
display and is recorded to the internal memory or the SD memory card.
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
When you are shooting, be careful not to obstruct the lens or flash with your
fingers, hair, or the strap.
About Focusing -----------------------------------------------------------------------
The frame in the center of the picture display and the auto focus/flash lamp
indicate whether the subject is in or out of focus.
Focus Status Frame Color Auto Focus/Flash Lamp
Before focusing White Off
Subject in focus Green On (Green)
Subject not in focus Red (Flashing) Blinks (Green)
It may be impossible to bring the following subjects into focus, or they may not
be in focus even when the frame color is green.
• Objects that lack contrast, such as the sky, a wall that is only one color, or the
hood of a car.
• Flat two-dimensional objects with only horizontal lines and no significant
protrusions.
• Quickly moving objects.
• Things in poorly lit places.
• Areas with strong backlighting, or reflections.
• Things that flicker, such as fluorescent lights.
• Point light sources, such as light bulbs, spotlights, or LEDs.
When you want to shoot subjects like this, first focus on an object the same
distance as your subject and then shoot.29
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
Preventing Camera Shake ---------------------------------------------------------
• Press the shutter release button gently to prevent camera shake.
• If you move the camera when pressing the shutter release button, the still
image might not come out clearly due to camera shake.
Camera shake tends to occur in the following cases:
- When shooting in a dark place without using the flash
- When using the zoom function
- When [Time Exposure] (GP.57) is selected in the shooting menu (GP.55)
• When the J symbol appears on the picture display, this indicates that
camera shake may occur. To prevent camera shake, try any of the following.
- Selecting [On] for [Camera Shake Correction] (GP.58) in the shooting menu
(GP.55)
- Setting the flash to [Auto] or [Flash On] (GP. 3 1 )
- Raising the ISO setting (GP.64)
- Using the self-timer (GP.32)
Using the Zoom Function
Press the z (Telephoto) button to zoom in
so that your subject fills more of the frame.
To zoom out and increase the area visible
in the frame, press the Z (Wide-angle)
button.
9999 99999 999 4:3 F 4 : 4:33 F F 9999 99999 999 4:3 F 4 : 4:33 F F
Wide-angle Telephoto
Zoom bar
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The [Stepped Zoom] option (GP.76) in the setup menu (GP.75) allows
optical zoom to be adjusted in six discrete steps.30
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
Using the Digital Zoom -------------------------------------------------------------
Optical zoom offers magnifications of up to 5.0 ×; if desired, magnification can be
further increased by up to 4.0 × using digital zoom. For digital zooming, release
the z button once when the zoom reaches the limit on the z end on the
zoom bar, and then hold the z button down again. If [l 4 : 3 F] or [l 4 : 3 N] is
selected for [Picture Quality/Size], you can select [Auto Resize] for [ Digital Zoom
Image] (GP.82).
Shooting Close-Ups ( Macro Shooting)
Use macro mode for close-ups. Press the N
(macro button) to enable or disable macro
mode.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• [Focus] (GP.56) is set to [Spot AF].
• Macro mode is not available in manual focus mode (GP.56).
• To take a further close-up picture during macro shooting, use [Zoom Macro]
(GP.48) in scene mode.
• The minimum shooting distance and shooting range when using the zoom are
shown below.
Zoom position Minimum Shooting Distance
(from the front of the lens)
Shooting Range
Wide-angle Approx. 1 cm Approx. 21.8 mm × 16.4 mm
Telephoto
Approx. 15 cm Approx. 42.3 mm × 31.7 mm
(when digital zoom is not used)
Approx. 15 cm Approx. 10.6 mm × 7.9 mm
(when 4.0 × digital zoom is used)31
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
Using the Flash
You can select the flash mode that best suits your shot. At the time of
purchase, the camera is set to [Flash Off].
1 With the camera ready to shoot,
press the F button.
• The list of the flash modes symbol is
displayed on the picture display.
Flash Off The flash will not fire.
Auto The flash fires automatically when the subject
is poorly lit or backlit.
Anti Red-Eye Reduces the red-eye phenomenon, in which
people’s eyes appear red in pictures.
Flash On The flash fires regardless of the lighting
conditions.
FLASH ON (10M) The flash always fires with a range of 10 m.
When zoomed in on your subject, the flash
fires with a range of 6.2 m.
Flash Synchro. The flash fires with the shutter speed slowed.
This is useful when taking portrait pictures in
a nightscape. Camera shake may occur, so the
use of a tripod is recommended.
2 Press the !" buttons to select the flash mode.
• The flash mode symbol is displayed at the upper left of the picture
display.
• The auto focus/flash lamp blinks while the flash charges. Photos can
be taken when the lamp turns off.
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• You cannot shoot when the flash is charging (approx. 8 seconds).
• If the camera is powered by AAA alkaline or NiMH batteries, the picture display
will turn off while the flash charges.
• After the camera is turned on, it may take longer for the camera to become
ready for shooting when using the flash.32
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• The flash mode setting is retained until you press the F button again.
• The auxiliary flash fires to increase the AE accuracy.
• The flash can not be used in some shooting modes or with some shooting
menu options (GP.113).
Using the Self-timer
The camera offers a ten-second timer for self-portraits and a twosecond timer to prevent blur caused by camera movement when the
shutter-release button is pressed.
1 With the camera ready to shoot, press the t (Self-timer)
button.
• The Self-timer symbol appears on the
screen.
• The [10] to the right of the symbol
indicates the number of seconds. In this
case, if you press the shutter release
button, the camera will shoot after 10
seconds.
• Each press of the t button changes the self-timer setting in the
following order: 10 sec, 2 sec, and Self-timer Off.
2 Start the timer.
• Press the shutter-release button to lock focus and start the timer. If
the ten-second timer is selected, the AF auxiliary light will light.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• The camera remains in self-timer mode even after the image is shot. To cancel
the self-timer, press the t button and change the self-timer setting to [SelfTimer Off].
• When the self-timer is set to 2 seconds, the AF auxiliary light does not blink.
• When the self-timer is set, the [Interval Shooting] setting is disabled.
9999 99999 9999 99999 999999 4 : 3 F 4 : 44 : 3 F 4 : 4::33 F 33 F FF33
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
Shooting in CALS Mode
In CALS mode, you can shoot photos in a quality
and size suitable to be submitted as official public
works pictures. Picture quality and size are set
beforehand in [CALS Pic Quality] on the setup menu
(GP.80). At shipment, [CALS Pic Quality] is set to
[a 4 : 3 N] (normal image quality, 1280 × 960 pixels,
with a file size of about 363 KB) to conform to the Japanese standard
for official public works photographs, which requires that images be
1 megapixel with a file size of 500 KB or less.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• When the mode dial is set to a mode other than CALS, [Picture Quality/size]
returns to the setting in the previous mode.
• You can register [CALS Pic Quality] as My Settings (GP.81).
Shooting with My Settings Mode
Rotate the mode dial to T or U to take
photos using settings saved with the [Reg. My
Settings] option in the setup menu (GP.81).
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
You can change the camera settings set in my settings mode. Changing the
mode or turning the camera off returns the settings to the original MY1 and MY2
settings.34
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
Playing Back Images
Viewing Your Images
To select playback mode, press the 6
(Playback) button. When the camera is off,
pressing and holding the 6 (Playback)
button longer than 1 second turns the
camera on in playback mode.
Press the #$ buttons to display the
previous file or the next file. Press the !"
buttons to display the file 10 frames forward or backward.
To switch the camera from playback mode to shooting mode, press
the 6 button again.
Thumbnail View
20 Frames
Press the 9 (Thumbnail view) button to
view pictures 20 at a time.
Press the DISP. button to change between
the thumbnail list and page list. In the page
list, press the !"#$ buttons to select
the page.
To display the highlighted photo full frame,
press the ADJ./MEMO or 8 (Enlarged view)
button.
F3.5 FF3.5 3.5
100-0009 11100-0009 0000--00000099 L a s t F i l e L a s t F i l e LLaasstt FFiillee
2010 222010 001100///01000111///01 0 000111 00:00 00: 00:0000 11//303300
4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F35
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
81 Frames
To display pictures 81 at a time, press 9 in
the 20-frame view.
Press the DISP. button to change between
the thumbnail list and page list. In the page
list, press the !"#$ buttons to select
the page.
To display the highlighted photo full frame,
press the ADJ./MEMO button or press 8
twice.
Thumbnail list
Page list
Date of Recording
To switch to a calendar display, press 9 in
the 81-frame view.
Press the DISP. button to change between
the thumbnail list and date list. In the date
list, press the #$ buttons to select the
date, or press the !" buttons to select
the page.
To display the highlighted photo full frame,
press the ADJ./MEMO button or press 8
three times.
Thumbnail list
Date list36
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
Enlarging Images
To zoom in on a photo that is currently displayed full frame, press the 8
( Enlarged view) button. Maximum magnification varies with image size.
Image Size Enlarged View (maximum magnification)
z 4 : 3 F 3.4 ×
a 4 : 3 F/a 4 : 3 N/b 4 : 3 F 6.7 ×
Image sizes other than those above 16 ×
Operations that can be performed in enlarged view
8/9 Zoom in or out. Press !, ", #, or $ to view other areas of the image.
MENU/OK If the current magnification less than 8 ×, zoom in to 8 × or to maximum
magnification, whichever is less. If the current magnification is 8 × or
more, zoom in to 16 ×. If the picture is currently displayed at maximum
magnification, pressing MENU/OK cancels zoom.
Pressing the DISP. button at this point changes the display as follows.
101-0084 11101-0084 0011--00008844 L a s t F i l e LLL a s t F i l e aasstt FFiillee
Pressing the !"#$
buttons at this point moves
the area displayed.
Pressing the !"#$
buttons at this point moves
the area displayed.
101-0084 11101-0084 0011--00008844 L a s t F i l e LLL a s t F i l e aasstt FFiillee
Pressing the !"#$ buttons at this point
displays the previous or next image enlarged.
DISP. button
Pressing and
holding the
DISP. button
Pressing and
holding the
DISP. button
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Movies cannot be enlarged.
• Cropped copies (GP.68) can not be zoomed in to the magnifications stated
above.37
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
Deleting Files
You can delete files from the SD memory card or internal memory.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• You can use the [Recover File] function to restore needed files that you
accidentally deleted(GP.67). Note, however, that files can not be recovered
if, for example, the camera has been turned off or shooting mode has been
selected since the files were deleted.
• Files can not be deleted from SD WORM memory cards.
Deleting a File or All Files
1 Press the 6 (Playback) button.
• The last file recorded is displayed.
2 Press the !"#$ buttons to display the file you want to
delete.
• To select multiple pictures, use the 9 (Thumbnail view) button to
select a multi-frame view before proceeding to Step 3.
3 Press the D (Delete) button.
4 Press the !" buttons to select
[Delete One] or [Delete All].
• You can change the image for deletion
with the #$buttons.
5 Press the MENU/OK button.
• If [Delete All] is selected, press the #$ buttons to select [Yes] and
then press the MENU/OK button.38
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
Deleting Multiple Files
You can select multiple files for simultaneous deletion either
individually or by selecting one or more ranges consisting of two
images and all photographs between them. To delete multiple files,
press the D (Delete) button in playback mode and follow the steps
below (to exit at any time without deleting images, press DISP.).
Specifying Multiple Files Separately
1 Press the !" buttons to select [Delete Multi] and then
press the MENU/OK button.
• Omit this step if the camera is already in multi-frame view.
2 Press the !" buttons to select [Sel. Indiv.] and then press
the MENU/OK button.
3 Press the !"#$ buttons to select
the file you want to delete and
press the MENU/OK button.
• The trash symbol is displayed in the
upper left corner of the file.
• Press the ADJ./MEMO button to switch
to the display for specifying a range of
files. See Step 3 and beyond on P.39.
4 Repeat Step 3 to select all the files you want to delete.
• If you selected a file by mistake, you can deselect it by selecting the
file and pressing the MENU/OK button.
• Press DISP. to cancel and return to Step 2.
5 Press the D (Delete) button.
6 Press the #$ buttons to select [Yes] and then press the
MENU/OK button.
S e l / C a n c e l SSS e l / C a n c e l eell//CCaanncceell
D e l e t e D e l e t e DDeelleettee L a s t F i l e LLL a s t F i l e aasstt FFiillee
D e l e t e DDD e l e t e eelleettee
4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F
S e l / C a n c e l SSS e l / C a n c e l eell//CCaanncceell
D e l e t e D e l e t e DDeelleettee L a s t F i l e LLL a s t F i l e aasstt FFiillee
D e l e t e DDD e l e t e eelleettee
4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F39
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
Specifying a Range of Multiple Files
1 Press the !" buttons to select [Delete Multi] and then
press the MENU/OK button.
• Omit this step if the camera is already in multi-frame view.
2 Press the !" buttons to select [Sel. Range] and then press
the MENU/OK button.
3 Press the !"#$ buttons to select
the starting point of the range of
files you want to delete and press
the MENU/OK button.
• If you make a mistake when selecting
the starting point for the range of files,
press the DISP. button to return to the
screen for selecting the starting point.
• Press the ADJ./MEMO button to switch to the display for specifying
files separately. See Step 3 and beyond on P.38.
4 Press the !"#$ buttons to select
the ending point of the range of
files you want to delete and press
the MENU/OK button.
• The trash symbol is displayed in the
upper left corner of the specified files.
• Press DISP. to cancel and return to
Step 2.
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to specify all the ranges of files you
want to delete.
6 Press the D (Delete) button.
7 Press the #$ buttons to select [Yes] and then press the
MENU/OK button.
D e l e t e DDD e l e t e eelleettee 6 7666 777//8 9888 999 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F
E n d C a n c e l EE n dnd C a n c e l CCaanncceell
D e l e t e DDD e l e t e eelleettee 6 7666 777//8 9888 999 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F
E n d C a n c e l EE n dnd C a n c e l CCaanncceell
7 0777 000//8 9888 999 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F
Start Delete SSStart ttaarrtt Delete DDeelleettee
De l e t e De l e t e DDeelleettee 7 0777 000//8 9888 999 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F
Start Delete SSStart ttaarrtt Delete DDeelleettee
De l e t e De l e t e DDeelleettee40
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
Changing the Display with
the DISP. Button
Pressing the DISP. button allows you to change the screen display
mode and toggle the information displayed on the picture display.
During Shooting Mode
9999 99999 999 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F 9999 99999 999 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F
Normal Symbol Display Histogram Display Grid Guide Display
Picture Display Off
(Synchro-Monitor Mode)
No Display
Grid Guide Display -------------------------------------------------------------------
• This displays auxiliary lines on the picture display to help you compose your
picture. These lines are not recorded with images.
• Use [Grid Guide Display Options] on the setup menu to select the grid
(GP.78).
Synchro-Monitor Mode -------------------------------------------------------------
This turns the picture display off except when the camera is operated. This is
effective for saving power consumption. The picture display turns on when the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway; once a picture has been taken and the
results displayed, the picture display will turn off (this differs from the [LCD Auto
Dim] and [Monitor Auto off Delay] options in the setup menu).41
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• When [Shooting Info. Display Frame] is set to [On] in the setup menu, the
shooting information display frame can be displayed for normal symbol display
and histogram display (GP.78).
• Histograms are not displayed in movie mode. A blinking [O] icon, the
recording time, and the time available are displayed during recording even
when indicators are hidden or the grid guide is displayed.
• When [Level Setting] is set to [Display] or [Disp + Snd] (GP.42), the level
indicator is displayed during normal symbol display and histogram display
(GP.43).
• When the picture display is off (including when the display has turned off
automatically in synchro-monitor mode), pressing any of the following buttons
turns the picture display on: the MENU/OK, ADJ./MEMO, DISP., 8, 9, 6
(Playback).
During Playback Mode
F3.5 FF3.5 3.5
000-0001 000-0001 000000--00000011 0001 000001 000011///9999 999999 999999
2010 222010 001100///01000111///01 0 000111 00 : 00 00: 00:0000 111///1000 111000 000000
4:3 F 4 : 4:33 F F 100-0001 11100-0001 0000--00000011 0001 000001 000011///9999 999999 999999 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F
2010 222010 001100///01000111///01 0 000111 00:00 00: 00:0000
F3.5 FF3.5 3.5 111///1000 111000 000000 ISO 100 IIISO 100 SSOO 110000
28 28 2288 mmmmmmmm
EV EEEV VV –––0.3 000.3..33
Comp a n y A
Fo u n d a t i o n wo r k
Ex t e r i o r
Be v e r l y Be e c h
Gamma Comp a n y
Cl i e n t
Co n s t . t y p e
L o c a t i o n
Su p e r v i s o r
Aff i l i a t e s
Company A
Foundation work
Exterior
Beverly Beech
Gamma Company
Client
Const.type
Location
Supervisor
Affiliates
Comp a n y A
Fo u n d a t i o n wo r k
Ex t e r i o r
Be v e r l y Be e c h
Gamma Comp a n y
Cl i e n t
Co n s t . t y p e
L o c a t i o n
Su p e r v i s o r
Aff i l i a t e s
Normal Symbol
Display
Memo Display
Histogram and Detailed
Information Display
No Display
No memo present
Memo present42
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
Maximizing the Picture Display Brightness
Hold the DISP. button down in shooting mode to maximize the display
brightness in shooting mode. When the brightness is at the maximum
setting, holding the DISP. button down returns the brightness to the
level set in [LCD Brightness] (GP.76).
The Level Indicator (Electronic Level)
If the level indicator is enabled using the
[Level Setting] option in the setup menu,
the camera will display an indicator and
sound a beep to help you keep the camera
level. The level indicator is displayed during
normal symbol display and histogram
display.
This is useful for keeping the image level when taking pictures of
scenery or buildings. This is also very useful for taking pictures with the
horizon visible.
Available Settings Description
Off The level indicator will not display. The level sound will not emit.
Display The level indicator will display. The level sound will not emit.
Disp + Snd The level indicator appears on the screen and a level sound is
emitted when the image is level.
Sound The level indicator will not display. A level sound is emitted
when the image is level.
1 Highlight [ Level Setting] in the
setup menu (GP.75) and press $.
2 Press the !" buttons to select the setting and then press
the MENU/OK button.
9999 99999 9999 99999 999999 4 : 3 F 4 : 44 : 3 F 4 : 4::33 F 33 F FF43
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
Level indicator display
When level:
The level indicator becomes green,
indicating that the scale is in the middle.
Green
When tilted to the right or left:
The mark on the level indicator becomes
orange, indicating the opposite side of the
direction in which the camera is tilted.
Orange
When the camera is tilted too far to the
right or left:
Half of the level indicator on the opposite
side of the direction in which the camera
is tilted becomes red. The mark on the
level indicator is not displayed.
Red
When the camera is tilted too far forward
or backward, or it cannot be determined
whether the camera is level:
The top and bottom of the level indicator
become red. The mark on the level
indicator is not displayed.
Red
When the camera is held vertically:
When shooting with the camera positioned vertically, the level function
can be used to determine whether the image is vertically level (the level
indicator appears in a different place).
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Tilt is not shown in synchro-monitor mode or if indicators are hidden or
the framing grid is displayed (GP.40). When [Level Setting] is set to
[Display+Sound], only the level sound is emitted.
• The level function is not available if the camera is held upside down, when
recording movies, and during interval shooting.
• The level function becomes less accurate when the camera is moving or when
shooting in an environment subject to moving, such as on a amusement ride.
• No level sound is emitted when [Level Setting] is set to [Disp + Snd] or [Sound]
and [Volume Settings] is set to [???] (Mute) (GP.77).
• Use this function as a reference to see if images are level when shooting
images. The accuracy of the level when using the camera as a level cannot be
guaranteed.44
If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section.
About the Histogram Display
When Histogram is on, a histogram appears
in the lower right corner on the picture
display. A histogram is a graph indicating
the number of pixels on the vertical axis
and the brightness on the horizontal axis
(from left to right, shadows (dark areas),
midtones, and highlights (bright areas)).
By using the histogram, you can determine the brightness of an image
without being affected by the brightness around the picture display.
This also helps you correct for areas that are overly bright or dark.
If the histogram has only peaks on the
right side, this picture is overexposed
with too many pixels only for highlight
sections.
If the histogram has only peaks on the left
side without anything else, this picture
is underexposed with too many pixels
only for shadow sections. Refer to this
histogram when correcting the exposure.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• The histogram displayed on the picture display is for reference only.
• After taking a picture, you can correct its brightness and contrast by making
adjustments to the histogram (GP.70).
• Depending on the shooting conditions (use of the flash, dark surrounding light,
etc.), the exposure level indicated in the histogram may not correspond to the
brightness of the shot image.
• Exposure compensation has its limitation. It does not necessarily achieve the
best possible result.
• A histogram with peaks in the center may not necessarily provide the best result
to suit your particular requirements. For example, an adjustment is required if
you want to underexpose or overexpose the image.
• For information on how to correct the exposure compensation, see P.62.
9999 99999 9999 99999 999999 4 : 3 F 4 : 44 : 3 F 4 : 4::33 F 33 F FF1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Advanced
Operations
Read this section when
you want to learn more
about the different camera
functions.
1 ADJ. Button Functions ...................46
2 Taking Pictures in Scene Mode ......48
3 Shooting and Viewing Movies .......51
4 Memos ............................................53
5 Shooting Menu ...............................55
6 Playback Menu ...............................65
7 Setup Menu ....................................75
8 Camera Memo Menu ......................87
9 Direct Printing ................................91
10 Downloading Images to Your
Computer .......................................96
11 Appendices ...................................10646
1
ADJ. Button Functions
1 ADJ. Button Functions
The ADJ./MEMO button has the following functions.
1 Assigning four functions from the shooting menu (ADJ. mode)
2 Shifting the AE and AF targets
3 Memos (GP.53)
Selecting Shooting Menu Options Assigned
to the ADJ./MEMO Button
You can assign four functions from the shooting menu to the ADJ./
MEMO button (ADJ. mode). The fifth function is fixed to AE/AF target
shift (GP.47) and cannot be changed.
ADJ. mode gives you quick access to settings by pressing a few
buttons rather than via the menus. It is recommended for options you
find yourself using frequently.
1 Set the functions you want to assign to the ADJ./MEMO
button with [ ADJ Button Setting 1/2/3/4] on the setup
menu.
• At the time of purchase, four of the functions are assigned. You can
change the assigned functions.
2 Press the ADJ./MEMO button in
shooting mode.
• The ADJ. mode screen appears.
AE/AF
AF
AE
Off
AE/AF
AAFF
AE
Off
Move Slctn Move Slctn Finish Finish
3 Press the #$buttons to select the desired item.
4 Press the !" buttons to select the setting and then press
the MENU/OK button to confirm the setting.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• For functions that can be assigned to the ADJ./MEMO button, see P.114.
• When using a camera memo, the ADJ. mode is disabled.47
1
ADJ. Button Functions
Shifting the AE and AF Targets
You can shift the target for automatic exposure (AE) and/or auto focus
(AF).
Available Setting Description
AE/AF AE and AF are set to Spot AE and Spot AF respectively and the
target can be moved for both simultaneously (The targets for
Spot AE and Spot AF occupy the same position).
AF The AF is set to Spot AF and the target can be moved. The
exposure metering is set to the mode selected in [Exposure
Metering] (GP.56) in the shooting menu.
AE The AE is set to Spot AE and the target can be moved. The focus
is set to the mode selected in [Focus] (GP.56) in the shooting
menu.
1 Select 5/V mode and press ADJ./MEMO.
2 Press the #$ buttons to select P.
3 Press the !" buttons to select the
setting and then press the MENU/
OK or ADJ./MEMO button.
• The target shift screen appears.
AE/AF
AF
AE
Off
AE/AF
AAFF
AE
Off
Move Slctn Move Slctn Finish Finish
4 Press the !"#$ buttons to
position the target over the subject
that will be used to set focus or
exposure.
• Pressing the DISP. button returns the
display to the screen in Step 2.
Select Select Ok Ok
5 Press MENU/OK or ADJ./MEMO.
6 Press the shutter release button halfway and then gently
press it the rest of the way down.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• In scene mode, the target icon (P) changes to U. The focus target for macro
mode can be selected as described above.
• This function is not available when [MF] is selected for [Focus] (GP.56).48
2
Taking Pictures in Scene Mode
2 Taking Pictures in Scene Mode
Scene Mode Options
You can use scene mode to select from among
five still image modes and movie, and shoot with
settings automatically optimized for shooting
conditions.
High Sens
Use when taking pictures in dimly lit places. The picture display also
becomes brighter.
Firefighting
Use to capture images under difficult conditions such as the scene
of a fire. The focal length is fixed to 2.5 m, allowing you to take clear
pictures in a situation where the auto focus would normally produce
blurred images due to flames, smoke and water vapor. Increasing the
ISO sensitivity extends the range of the flash, and prevents camera
shake by controlling the shutter speed even when the flash is not
used. The sharpness level is also increased in this mode and the
picture display becomes brighter and is suited for firefighting.
Skew Correct
Mode
Reduce the effects
of perspective when
photographing
rectangular objects, such
as message boards or
business cards.
For detailed operations, see P.50. Image size can be set to [a 4 : 3 F],
[a 4 : 3 N], or [z 4 : 3 F] using the [Picture Quality/Size] option
(GP.56) in the shooting menu (GP.55).
Text Mode
Use when capturing text images, for example notes written on a
whiteboard at a meeting. Images are captured in black and white.
Image size can be set to [l 4 : 3] or [c 4 : 3] using the [Size] option
(GP.56) in the shooting menu (GP.55).
Zoom Macro
The camera automatically zooms to the optimal zoom position to
shoot at a higher magnification than in normal macro shooting.
Optical zoom can not be used. Macro mode is selected automatically.
Movie
Allows you to shoot movies with sound. For detailed operations, see
P.51.49
2
Taking Pictures in Scene Mode
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
When using [Zoom Macro], you can shoot close-ups within the following
distances:
Minimum Shooting Distance
(from the front of the lens)
Shooting Range
Approx. 1 cm Approx. 14.8 mm × 11.1 mm
(when digital zoom is not used)
Approx. 3.7 mm × 2.8 mm
(when 4.0 × digital zoom is used)
Selecting a Scene Mode
1 Turn the mode dial to W.
• The camera is ready to shoot and the
selected scene mode is displayed at the
top of the picture display.
9999 99999 999 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F
2 Press the MENU/OK button to
change the scene mode.
• The scene mode selection screen
appears.
3 Select a scene mode.
4 Press the MENU/OK button.
• The scene mode type is displayed at
the top of the picture display.
5 Press the shutter release button to
shoot the picture.
Changing the shooting menu or setup menu setting in scene mode ----
Press the MENU/OK button in shooting mode and then press the # button to
select [MODE] tab. You can then press " once to display the shooting menu,
twice to display the setup menu.50
2
Taking Pictures in Scene Mode
Using Skew Correction Mode
1 Select [Skew Correct Mode] in the scene mode menu and
press the MENU/OK button.
2 Press the shutter release button to shoot the picture.
• The display indicates that the image is being processed, and then
the area recognized as the correction range is displayed with an
orange frame. Up to five areas can be recognized.
• If the target area cannot be detected, an error message appears. The
original image remains unchanged.
• To select another correction area, move the orange frame to the
target area by pressing the $ button.
• To cancel skew correction, press the ! button. Even if you cancel
skew correction, the original image remains unchanged.
3 Press the MENU/OK button.
• The display indicates that the image is being corrected, and then the
corrected image is recorded. The original image remains unchanged.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
You can also correct the skew of a previously shot still image (GP.71).
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
When [Skew Correct Mode] is selected, note the following:
• To shoot the subject as large as possible, position it so that the entire portion
of the subject is visible on the picture display.
• The camera may fail to recognize the subject in the following cases:
- When the image is out of focus
- When four edges of the subject are not clearly visible
- When it is hard to distinguish between the subject and background
- When the background is complicated
• Two images, one before correction and the other after correction, are
recorded. If the number of remaining shots is less than two, you cannot shoot
the subject.
• The correction area may not be detected properly if the [Date Imprint]
function is activated.51
3
Shooting and Viewing Movies
3 Shooting and Viewing Movies
Shooting Movies
Select [Movie] in the scene mode menu to record movies with sound.
Frame size can be selected as described on P.56. Each movie you shoot
is recorded as an AVI file.
Press the shutter release button to start
recording. The [O] icon will blink. To
zoom in or out using digital zoom, press
z or Z (GP.29). The recording time
and time available are displayed during
recording. Press the shutter release button
again to end recording.
0 0 : 0 0 0 0 : 00 : 000 0 00 ///0 0 : 0 2 0 0 : 00 : 000 222 640 664040
Sh u t t e r b u t t o n : St o p SSSh u t t e r b u t t o n : St o p hhuutttteerr bbuuttttoonn :: SSttoopp
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• While shooting movies, operation sounds may be recorded.
• Movies may be up to 4 GB in size. The maximum length is 12 minutes for
movies recorded at a [Movie Size] of [x 1280] and 29 minutes for movies
recorded at [z 640] or [y 320]. Depending on the type of memory card used,
shooting may end before this length is reached. The maximum total length of
all movie files that can be stored depends on the capacity of the memory card
(GP.117).
• Flicker may be visible in movies recorded under fluorescent lights.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• The remaining recording time may not change uniformly because it is
recalculated from the remaining memory capacity during movie recording.
• Depending on the remaining battery level, the battery may become depleted
during movie shooting. Use of a battery with adequate remaining power is
recommended.
• An SD/SDHC memory card with a Speed Class of 6 or better is recommended
when recording movies with [x 1280] selected for [Movie Size] (GP.56).52
3
Shooting and Viewing Movies
Playing Back Movies
To play back movies, follow the steps below.
1 Select the movie you want to play
back in playback mode.
2 Press the ADJ./MEMO button.
• Playback begins. The elapsed playback
indicator or the elapsed time is
displayed on the screen.
*RMOV0001 ***RMOV0001 RRMMOOVV00000011 0001 000001 000011///9999 999999 999999 640 664040
: St a r t ::: St a r t SSttaarrtt
1 0 : 0 5 1 0 1100::: 0 50055
2010 222010 001100///01000111///01 00:00 0001 00 11 0000::000000
Fast Forward Press the z button during playback.
Rewind Press the Z button during playback.
Pause/Playback Press the ADJ./MEMO button.
Slow Playback Press and hold the z button during pause.
Slow Rewind Press and hold the Z button during pause.
Next Frame Press the z button during pause.
Previous Frame Press the Z button during pause.
Volume Adjustment Press the !" buttons during playback.53
4
Memos
4 Memos
For information on creating, transferring, and configuring memo lists,
see the supplied “Software User Guide”.
Image files created with the camera contain fields that can be used
to store information about the image. The camera memo function
employs these fields for memos that can be used to identify and
classify photos. Read this section for basic information on using
memos.
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Memos can not be added to movies.
• SD WORM memory cards do not support memos.
Adding Memos to New Photos
This section describes how to create memos from an existing memo
list that has been transferred to the camera.
1 Select 5/V mode and press
ADJ./MEMO.
• The camera memo dialog will be
displayed.
2 Create a memo.
• If [Mode1] is selected for [Camera
Memo Mode] (GP.88) in the camera
memo menu, press ! or " to highlight
an item, and then press $ and press
! or " to choose a description.
If [Mode2] is selected, press # or
$ to choose from pre-existing
combinations.
FileName/SAMPLE FileName/SAMPLE
Camera Memo Camera Memo 1/2 1/2
FILE LIST FILE LIST MMemo On emo On
Company A
Foundation work
Exterior
Beverly Beech
Gamma Company
C o m p a n y A
F o u n d a t i o n w o r k
E x t e r i o r
B e v e r l y B e e c h
G a m m a C o m p a n y
Client
Const.type
Location
Supervisor
Affiliates
Cl i e n t
Co n s t . t y p e
L o c a t i o n
Su p e r v i s o r
Aff i l i a t e s
C o m p a n y A Company A
Items Descriptions
FileName/SAMPLE FileName/SAMPLE
Camera Memo Camera Memo 1/2 1/2
FILE LIST FILE LIST MMemo On emo On
Company A
Foundation work
Exterior
Beverly Beech
Gamma Company
C o m p a n y A
F o u n d a t i o n w o r k
E x t e r i o r
B e v e r l y B e e c h
G a m m a C o m p a n y
Client
Const.type
Location
Supervisor
Affiliates
Cl i e n t
Co n s t . t y p e
L o c a t i o n
Su p e r v i s o r
Aff i l i a t e s
C o m p a n y A Company A
Items Descriptions54
4
Memos
3 Press MENU/OK.
• Press MENU/OK to accept the current memo.
4 Take photographs.
• The memo will be added to all new photos.
Viewing Memos
The process for viewing memos varies with the option selected for
[Camera Memo Mode] (GP.88) in the camera memo menu.
Mode1
1 Display the desired photo in
playback mode.
• Photographs to which memos have
been added are indicated by a “MEMO”
icon.
F3.5 FF3.5 3.5
000-0001 000-0001 000000--00000011 0001 000001 000011///9999 999999 999999
2010 222010 001100///01000111///01 0 000111 00:00 00: 00:0000 111///1000 111000 000000
4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F
2 Press ADJ./MEMO.
• The memo will be displayed as
shown at right. Press ! or " to view
additional data. If desired, the memo
can be edited as described on P.29 of
the “Software User Guide”.
FileName/SAMPLE FileName/SAMPLE
Camera Memo Camera Memo 1/2 1/2
Memo On Memo On
Company A
Foundation work
Exterior
Beverly Beech
Gamma Company
C o m p a n y A
F o u n d a t i o n w o r k
E x t e r i o r
B e v e r l y B e e c h
G a m m a C o m p a n y
Client
Const.type
Location
Supervisor
Affiliates
Client
Const.type
Location
Supervisor
Affiliates
C o m p a n y A Company A
3 Press MENU/OK.
• Press MENU/OK to return to normal playback.
Mode2
Memos can be displayed only by pressing DISP. during playback
(GP.41); memos can not be edited.55
5
Shooting Menu
5 Shooting Menu
The shooting menu is used to adjust camera settings when taking
pictures. To display the shooting menu, press the MENU/OK button
when the camera is in shooting mode.
Using the Menu
1 Press the MENU/OK button in
shooting mode.
• The shooting menu is displayed.
• In scene mode, press # to highlight
the [MODE] tab, press " once to
highlight the shooting menu tab,
and press $ to place the cursor in
the shooting menu.
Indicates the range of displayed
screens.
2 Press the !" buttons to select the
desired menu item.
• If the DISP. button is pressed at this
point, the cursor moves to the shooting
menu tab.
• Press the " button at the bottom item
to display the next screen.
3 Press the $ button.
• The menu item settings are displayed.
4 Press the !" buttons to select the
setting.
5 Press the MENU/OK button.
• The setting is confirmed, the shooting menu disappears and the
camera is ready to shoot.
• To select the highlighted option and return to the menu shown in
Step 2, press the # button.56
5
Shooting Menu
Shooting Menu Options
Density
Adjust contrast when using the [Text Mode] option in scene mode.
Size GP.117
Choose the size of pictures taken using the [Text Mode] option in scene mode.
Movie Size GP.117
Choose the movie frame size.
Picture Quality/Size GP.117
Adjust picture quality and size when taking pictures.
Focus GP.60
Choose a focusing mode.
— Multi AF
Measures the distances from nine AF areas and focuses to the nearest AF
area. Choose to prevent out-of-focus photos.
— Spot AF
Selects one AF area at the center of the picture display to allow the camera
to focus on this area automatically.
MF
Enables you to adjust the focus manually (GP.60).
Snap
Fixes the shooting distance to a short distance (approx. 2.5 m (8.2 ft.)).
8 (Infinity)
Fixes the shooting distance to infinity. It is useful for shooting distant scenes.
Exposure Metering
You can change the metering method (the range to use for metering) used to
determine the exposure value.
— Multi
The entire shooting range is divided into 256 partitions, and each is metered
to determine the overall exposure value.
Center
The entire image is metered, with emphasis on the center, to determine
the exposure value. Use this when the brightness of the center and
surroundings are different.
Spot
Only the center of the image is metered to determine the exposure value.
Use this setting when you want to use the brightness at the center. This is
useful if there is a marked difference in contrast or backlighting.57
5
Shooting Menu
Continuous Mode
The camera records photographs one after the other
while the shutter-release button is pressed. Select
[Off] to take one photo each time the shutter-release
button is pressed.
Caution ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Focus and exposure value are locked.
• The number of images that can be shot in continuous mode depends on the
image size setting.
• When [Card Sequence No.] is set to [On] (GP.79) and the last four digits of
the file number exceed “9999” during continuous shooting, a separate folder
is created in the SD memory card and successive pictures taken in continuous
mode are stored in this folder.
• The maximum number of consecutive shots that can be taken using
continuous mode is 999.
Image Settings
Adjust contrast, sharpness, and vividness.
Vivid
Take strong, vivid photos with heightened contrast, sharpness, and
vividness.
— Standard
Creates an image with normal picture quality.
Black & White
Creates a black and white picture.
Auto Bracket GP.61
Vary exposure or white balance over a series of pictures.
Time Exposure
Use time exposures to capture fireworks as they rise into the air and explode,
to create trails of light behind cars and other moving objects, or to shoot night
scenery. Choose the exposure time from [Off], [1 second], [2 seconds], [4 seconds],
and [8 seconds].
Note ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• The shutter speed may slow down and images may be blurred. Hold the
camera steady by using a tripod when shooting.
• The picture display turns off while shooting.58
5
Shooting Menu
Interval Shooting
Take photos automatically at intervals ranging
from five seconds to three hours in five-second
increments.
Hours Minutes Seconds
Caution ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• The interval shooting setting is cleared when the camera is turned off.
• The time until the next picture can be taken according to the shooting menu
setting may be longer than the time set for interval shooting. If this is the case,
the shooting interval becomes longer than the set time.
Note ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Depending on the remaining battery level, the battery may become depleted
during interval shooting. Use of a battery with adequate remaining power is
recommended.
• If you press the shutter release button during interval shooting, the camera
shoots as usual.
• A high speed memory card or a SD memory card with sufficient memory is
recommended.
Camera Shake Correction
Select [On] to reduce the effects of camera shake.
Caution ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• The camera shake correction function cannot prevent movement of the
shooting subject (caused by wind, etc.).
• Results vary with shooting conditions.
Note ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The J symbol appears when camera shake is likely to occur (GP.16).
Date Imprint
You can insert the date (YY/MM/DD) or the date and time (YY/MM/DD hh:mm) at
the lower right of a still image. Select [Off] to turn date imprint off.
Note ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Make the date and time settings in advance (GP.26).
• [Date Imprint] cannot be used with movies.
• The date imprinted in an image cannot be deleted.
Exposure Compensation GP.62
Choose exposure compensation.59
5
Shooting Menu
White Balance GP.63
Adjust the white balance.
ISO Setting GP.64
Adjust ISO sensitivity.
Edit Detection
If pictures taken with [On] selected for this option are transferred to a computer,
changes made after the images were recorded can be detected using image
authentication software, including the supplied EC1 application.
Caution ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Recording times increase when [On] is selected.
• Changes made using the [Resize], [Contrast Correction], and [Skew Correction]
options in the playback menu will be detected by image authentication
software.
Restore Defaults
Select [Yes] and press the MENU/OK button to restore shooting menu settings to
their default values.
Shooting menu options ------------------------------------------------------------
The options displayed in the shooting menu vary with the selected shooting
mode. In scene mode, the options displayed vary with the selected scene. See
P.113 for more information.60
5
Shooting Menu
Focus
Manual Focus (MF)
Manual focus (MF) can be used to focus
at a selected distance when the camera is
unable to focus using autofocus. A focus
bar is displayed in the picture display.
9999 99999 999 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F
Ho l d : HHHo l d : oolldd ::
1 Press and hold the MENU/OK button as required.
• Pressing and holding the MENU/OK button increases the
magnification only at the center of the screen.
• Pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again returns from
enlarged view to normal view.
2 Adjust the zoom position with the zZ buttons as required.
3 Press the !" buttons to adjust the focus.
• Pressing the ! button adjusts the focus to farther objects and
pressing the " button adjusts the focus to closer objects.
4 Press the shutter release button to shoot the picture.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
You can also use manual focus to focus on objects within the macro shooting
range.61
5
Shooting Menu
Auto Bracket
Choose the type of bracketing performed.
Auto Bracket
If [On] is selected, the camera will take
three photos each time the shutter-release
button is pressed: one underexposed
by 0.5 EV, a second at current exposure
settings, and a third overexposed by 0.5 EV.
An icon is displayed when [On] is selected.
R e c o r d i n g RRR e c o r d i n g eeccoorrddiinngg
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The exposure compensation can be changed using the shooting menu
(GP.62).
White Balance Bracket (WB-BKT)
The white balance bracket function
automatically records three images—a
reddish image, a bluish image, and an
image of the current white balance.
An icon is displayed when [WB-BKT] is
selected.
R e d RR e ded
R e c o r d i n g RRR e c o r d i n g eeccoorrddiinngg
B l u e BB l u e lue
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• The white balance can be changed using the shooting menu (GP.63).
• Although white balance bracketing can be selected when [Black & White] is
chosen for [Image Settings], bracketing will not be performed.62
5
Shooting Menu
Exposure Compensation
Use exposure compensation to vary exposure from the value selected
by the camera. Choose from values between –2 and +2; negative
values produce darker pictures, positive values brighter pictures.
Exposure compensation may be required in the following situations:
For backlighting
When the background is particularly bright, the subject will appear
dark (underexposed). In this case, set the exposure level higher (+).
When your subject is whitish
The entire picture will turn out dark (underexposed). Set the exposure
level higher (+).
When your subject is darkish
The entire picture will turn out bright (overexposed). Set the exposure
level lower (–). The same happens when you take a photo of a subject
in a spotlight.
Press the !" buttons to choose a
exposure value and press the MENU/OK
button. The selected value is displayed in
the picture display.
9999 99999 999 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F
EV EEEV VV –––0.3 000.3..33
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
If the subject is very bright or very dark, [Q] will be displayed and exposure
compensation will not be available.63
5
Shooting Menu
White Balance
Adjust the white balance so that a white subject will appear white. At
purchase, the white balance mode is set to [Auto]. Change the setting
in situations where the white balance is difficult to adjust effectively,
such as when shooting an object of a single color or when shooting
under multiple light sources.
AUTO Auto
Adjusts the white balance automatically.
Outdoors
Select this when shooting outdoors (sunny) and white balance fails to adjust
properly.
Cloudy
Select this when shooting in cloudy weather or shade and the white balance
fails to adjust properly.
Incandescent 1
Select this when shooting under incandescent light and white balance fails to
adjust properly.
Incandescent 2
Select this when shooting under incandescent light (more reddish, compared
with [Incandescent 1]).
Fluorescent
Select this when shooting under fluorescent light and white balance fails to
adjust properly.
Manual
Adjust the white balance manually (GP.64).
Ring Light
Adjust white balance manually as described on P.64. The selected value is
not reset when defaults are restored using [Restore Defaults].
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• The white balance may not be adjusted correctly for a subject that is mostly
dark. In this case, add something white to the subject.
• When shooting with the flash, the white balance may not be adjusted correctly
if [Auto] is not selected. In this case, switch to [Auto] to shoot with the flash.64
5
Shooting Menu
Manual
1 Measure white balance.
• After selecting [Manual] in the white balance menu and placing a
blank piece of paper or other white object under the lighting you
wish to measure, aim the camera at the object and press the DISP.
button to measure white balance.
2 Press the MENU/OK button.
• The symbol appears on the screen.
• The effect of the selected white balance setting can be previewed in
the picture display. Repeat the above steps until the desired effect is
achieved.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
To cancel [Manual], select a setting other than [Manual].
ISO Setting
ISO sensitivity indicates how sensitive film is to light. A greater value
means higher sensitivity. High sensitivity is suitable for shooting
an object in a dark place or a fast-moving object while minimizing
blurring. When ISO setting is set to [Auto], the camera automatically
changes the sensitivity according to the distance, brightness, zoom,
macro settings, and picture quality/size. Choose settings other than
[Auto] to fix ISO sensitivity at the selected value.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• When the flash is used, the maximum value that will be selected for auto
ISO sensitivity is ISO 400. If the flash is off and image size is set to [l 4 : 3 F]
or [l 4 : 3 N], auto ISO sensitivity will be set to values between ISO 64 and
ISO 400.
• When the flash is set to [FLASH ON (10M)], the maximum value that will be
selected for auto ISO sensitivity is ISO 1600.
• Images shot with a higher sensitivity may appear grainy.
• When [Auto] is selected for ISO sensitivity, the ISO value displayed when the
shutter release button is pressed halfway may in some instances (for example,
when the flash is used) differ from the value selected when the shutter is
released.65
6
Playback Menu
6 Playback Menu
The options in the playback menu can be used to perform a variety of
operations on existing pictures. To display the playback menu, select
playback mode and press the MENU/OK button.
Using the Menu
1 Press the 6 (Playback) button to select the playback mode.
2 Press the !"#$ buttons to display the desired file.
• For [Slide Show] (GP.66), [Copy to Card from Internal Memory]
(GP.66), or [Recover File] (GP.67), skip this step.
3 Press the MENU/OK button.
• The playback menu appears.
4 Press the !" buttons to select the
desired item.
• If the DISP. button is pressed at this
point, the cursor moves to the playback
menu tab.
5 Press the $ button.
• The screen for the selected menu item appears.66
6
Playback Menu
Playback Menu Options
Resize
You can reduce the image size of a shot still image to create a new file with a
different image size.
Original Resized
l 4 : 3 F/l 4 : 3 N/j 3 : 2 F/e 4 : 3 F/c 4 : 3 F/
b 4 : 3 F
a 4 : 3 F/z 4 : 3 F
a 4 : 3 F/a 4 : 3 N z 4 : 3 F
Caution ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Movies cannot be resized.
Trim GP.68
This function allows you to trim a still image you have shot and then save it as a
separate file.
Contrast Correction GP.70
Create copies of photographs with modified brightness and contrast.
Skew Correction GP.71
Create copies that have been processed to reduce the effects of perspective on
rectangular objects.
Protect GP.72
Protect images from accidental deletion.
Slide Show
You can display the recorded still images and movie files sequentially on the screen.
Note ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Each still image is displayed for three seconds.
• Movies are played back in their entirety.
Copy to Card from Internal Memory
Copy all data from internal memory to a memory card in a single operation.
Note ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• If there is not enough space available on the destination memory card, a
warning will be displayed. Select [Yes] to copy only those files for which there is
sufficient space.
• It is not possible to copy the contents of an SD memory card to the internal
memory.
DPOF GP.73
Select pictures for printing.67
6
Playback Menu
Recover File
Restore deleted files.
Caution ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Deleted files cannot be restored after performing any of the following operations.
• Turning the camera off
• Switching from playback mode to shooting mode
• Using DPOF, Resize, Copy to Card from Internal Memory, Skew Correction,
Contrast Correction or Trim
• Files with DPOF settings are deleted
• Internal memory or SD memory card is initialized
• Altering memos in playback mode68
6
Playback Menu
Trim
Create a cropped copy of the current photograph.
Press 8 or 9 to adjust the crop size and
press !, ", #, or $ to position the crop.
Press the MENU/OK button to save the
cropped image to a separate file.
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• You can only trim still images shot using this camera.
• While you can trim an image repeatedly, the image is recompressed each time
and there will be some decline in image quality.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• To cancel, press the DISP. button.
• To view help, press the D button while the crop display is shown in the picture
display. Press the D button again to exit help.
• If an image is trimmed, the compression ratio changes to Fine.
• The available settings for the trimming frame size differ depending on the
original image size.69
6
Playback Menu
• The size of the image after cropping depends on the size of the original and the
size of the crop (the crop displayed when you select [Trim] is the second largest;
to select the largest crop, press 9).
Original image size Trimming level Trimmed image size
l 4 : 3 F/l 4 : 3 N
(4000 × 3000)
1, 2 4000 × 3000
3 2592 × 1944
4, 5 2048 × 1536
6 1600 × 1200
7 to 10 1280 × 960
11 to 14 640 × 480
j 3 : 2 F
(3984 × 2656)
1 2592 × 1944
2, 3 2048 × 1536
4 1600 × 1200
5 to 7 1280 × 960
8 to 11 640 × 480
e 4 : 3 F
(2592 × 1944)
1 2592 × 1944
2 2048 × 1536
3 1600 × 1200
4 to 7 1280 × 960
8 to 12 640 × 480
c 4 : 3 F
(2048 × 1536)
1 2048 × 1536
2 1600 × 1200
3 to 6 1280 × 960
7 to 10 640 × 480
b 4 : 3 F
(1600 × 1200)
1 1600 × 1200
2 to 4 1280 × 960
5 to 9 640 × 480
a 4 : 3 F/a 4 : 3 N
(1280 × 960)
1 to 3 1280 × 960
4 to 8 640 × 480
z 4 : 3 F
(640 × 480)
1 to 4 640 × 48070
6
Playback Menu
Contrast Correction
Create copies that have been processed to adjust brightness and
contrast.
Highlight [Contrast Correction] in the
playback menu and press $ to display a
level slider and histogram.
Press ! to make the photo brighter, or
" to make it darker. Five settings are
available.
Press the MENU/OK button. The display indicates that the image is
being corrected, and then the corrected image is recorded.
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• If the camera can not create a corrected copy, an error message will be
displayed and the camera will exit to the playback menu.
• To cancel contrast correction, press the DISP. button.
• You can correct the contrast for still images shot with this camera. You cannot
correct the contrast for movies.
• The desired results may not be achieved with photographs taken with [Text
Mode] selected in scene mode or with [Black & White] selected for [Image
Settings].
• While you can use contrast correction repeatedly, the image is recompressed
each time and there will be some decline in image quality.71
6
Playback Menu
Skew Correction
Create copies that have been processed to reduce the effects of
perspective on rectangular objects, such as message boards or
business cards.
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
You can use skew correction for still images shot with this camera. You cannot use
skew correction for movies.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• If the camera is able to detect an object that can be used to correct perspective,
a message will be displayed with the object shown by an orange frame. The
camera can detect up to five objects.
• If the target area cannot be detected, an error message appears. The original
image remains unchanged.
• To select another correction area, move the orange frame to the target area by
pressing the $ button.
• To cancel skew correction, press the ! button. Even if you cancel skew
correction, the original image remains unchanged.
• The image size does not change for skew corrected images.
• If the image size is large, skew correction will take time. Resize the image
(GP.66) before performing skew correction to speed up the process.
• The following table shows the approximate time required for skew correction.
Image Size Correction time Image Size Correction time
l 4 : 3 F Approx. 29 seconds b 4 : 3 F Approx. 6 seconds
l 4 : 3 N Approx. 28 seconds a 4 : 3 F Approx. 4 seconds
j 3 : 2 F Approx. 24 seconds a 4 : 3 N Approx. 4 seconds
e 4 : 3 F Approx. 13 seconds z 4 : 3 F Approx. 2 seconds
c 4 : 3 F Approx. 8 seconds
• When scene mode is set to [Skew Correct Mode], you can shoot an image and
then immediately correct any skew in the image (GP.50).72
6
Playback Menu
Protect
[Protect] allows you to protect files from
being accidentally deleted.
If [1 File] is selected, you can protect or
unprotect the file selected by pressing the
#$ buttons.
If [Select All] or [Cancel All] is selected, you
can protect or unprotect all files.
Selecting Multiple Files
Select [Sel Mult] to change the protect status of multiple individual
files or of all files in a selected range.
To select multiple individual frames:
1 Select [Sel. Indiv.] and press the MENU/OK button.
2 Select a frame and press the MENU/OK button.
• Press the ADJ./MEMO button to switch to the display for specifying a
range of files.
• If you selected a file by mistake, you can deselect it by selecting the
file and pressing the MENU/OK button.
• Select all files you want to protect.
3 Press the D button.
To select two frames and all frames between them:
1 Select [Sel. Range] and press the MENU/OK button.
2 Select the first frame and press the MENU/OK button.
• Press the ADJ./MEMO button to switch to the display for specifying
files separately.
• If you make a mistake when selecting the starting point for the range
of files, press the DISP. button to return to the screen for selecting
the starting point.73
6
Playback Menu
3 Select the last frame and press the
MENU/OK button.
• Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to select multiple
ranges.
4 Press the D button.
Protect Protect PPrrootteecctt 107 111070077///111 111111111 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F
Start Execute SSStart ttaarrtt Execute EExxeeccuuttee
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[Sel. Indiv.] and [Sel. Range] can be selected directly if [Protect] is chosen in
thumbnail view.
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note that formatting deletes all files, including protected files.
DPOF
To request professional prints of the
photographs on a memory card, first use
this option to create a digital “print order”
listing the photos you wish to print and
the number of prints, and then take the
memory card to a digital print service
center that supports the DPOF standard.
To add a photo to or remove it from the print order, select [1 File] and
press the #$ buttons to display the desired file.
Select [Select All] to add all photos to the print order, or [Cancel All] to
remove all files from the print order.
Selecting Multiple Files
To change the print status of multiple individual files, select [DPOF] in
thumbnail view.
Select photos and press the !" buttons to choose the number of
prints; press the ! button to increase the number of copies, or press
the " button to decrease the number of copies.
Press the MENU/OK button to exit when settings are complete.74
6
Playback Menu
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
To remove the DPOF settings for multiple still images, follow the same steps
described above to set the number of copies to print to [0] for each image, and
then press the MENU/OK button.
Viewing Pictures on TV
To view pictures on a TV, connect the camera using the supplied AV
cable.
1 Securely connect the AV cable to the
Video In terminal on the television.
• Connect the white plug of the AV cable
to the audio input terminal (white) of the
TV unit and the yellow plug to the video
input terminal (yellow).
2 Turn the camera off and securely
connect the cable to the camera AV
output terminal.
3 Set the television to Video mode (Set the input to Video).
• For details, see the documentation that came with the television.
4 Press the POWER button, or press and hold the 6
(Playback) button to turn the camera on.
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• When the AV cable is connected to the camera, the picture display and the
speaker output turn off.
• Do not force the AV cable into the terminal.
• Do not apply excessive force with the AV cable connected.
• When using the AV cable, do not move the camera with the AV cable.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• You can connect the AV cable to the Video In terminal on your video recorder
and record what you have shot to a video recorder.
• The camera supports the following video standards: NTSC and PAL. Where
possible, the camera is set to the standard used in your country or region before
shipment; before connecting the camera to a device that uses a different video
standard, choose the appropriate video mode (GP.79).
Video Input Terminal (yellow)
Audio Input Terminal (white) Audio Input Terminal (white)75
7
Setup Menu
7 Setup Menu
You can change the camera settings by displaying the setup menu
from the shooting menu (GP.55) or playback menu (GP.65).
Using the Menu
1 Press the MENU/OK button.
• The shooting menu (or the playback menu) appears.
2 Press # to highlight the tab for the current menu.
3 Press ! or " to highlight the
setup menu tab.
• In scene mode, the setup menu
tab is third from the top; in other
modes, it is second from the top.
• In scene mode, press the " button
twice.
Indicates the range of displayed
screens.
4 Press $ to place the cursor in the setup menu.
5 Press the !" buttons to select the
desired item.
• If the DISP. button is pressed at this
point, the display returns to the screen
shown in Step 3.
• Press the " button at the bottom item
to display the next screen.
6 Press the $ button.
• The menu item settings are displayed.
7 Press the !" buttons to select the
setting.76
7
Setup Menu
8 Press MENU/OK, or press # and then MENU/OK.
• The setup menu disappears and the camera is ready for shooting or
playback.
• The setup menu may appear depending on the setting. In this case,
press the MENU/OK button to return to the shooting or playback
screen.
• Pressing the # button in Step 8 confirms the setting and the display
returns to the screen shown in Step 5.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
For some functions, the setting selection method may differ from what is
explained here. For detailed operation, see the explanation of each function.
Setup Menu Options
Format [Card]
Select [Yes] and press the D button to format the memory card.
Caution ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Do not turn the camera off during formatting. Failure to observe this precaution
could result in the system files used by the camera being deleted.
Format [Internal Memory]
Select [Yes] and press the D button to format internal memory. If you have images
in the internal memory that you do not want to delete, copy the images to the SD
memory card before formatting the internal memory (GP.66).
Caution ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Do not turn the camera off during formatting. Failure to observe this precaution
could result in the system files used by the camera being deleted.
LCD Brightness
Press the !" buttons to adjust the brightness of the picture display.
Reg. My Settings GP.81
Save current camera settings.
Stepped Zoom
Select [On] to allow zoom to be adjusted in discrete steps that on a 35-mm
camera would be equivalent to focal lengths of 28 mm, 35 mm, 50 mm, 85 mm,
105 mm and 140 mm. In macro mode, the stepped zoom focal lengths are roughly
equivalent to 33, 35, 50, 85, 105 and 140 mm on a 35-mm camera.77
7
Setup Menu
ADJ Button Setting 1–4 GP.46
Choose the role performed by the ADJ./MEMO button.
AF Auxiliary Light
If [On] is selected, the AF auxiliary light will light to assist autofocus.
Operation Sounds
Choose the sounds made by the camera.
Available Settings Description
All All sounds on.
Level Sound Only the level sound is emitted.
Shutter Sounds Only the shutter sound and level sound are emitted.
Note ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
If you try to perform an operation that cannot be performed, the beep sound is
emitted regardless of the [Operation Sounds] setting.
Volume Settings
The operation sound volume can be changed.
Note ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
When [Volume Settings] is set to [???] (Mute), the level sound is not emitted
even when [Level Setting] is set to [Disp + Snd] or [Sound].
LCD Confirmation Time
Choose how long photos are displayed after shooting. Photos will not be displayed
if [Off] is selected.
Auto Power Off
Choose how long the camera remains on when no operations are performed.
The camera will not turn off automatically if [Off] is selected, during interval timer
photography (GP.58), or when the camera is connected to a computer or printer.
Monitor Auto off Delay
Choose the delay before the picture display turns off automatically to save power
when no operations are performed. Once the display has turned off, any operation
will reactivate the display. This option takes effect only when [Off] is selected for
[Auto Power Off].
LCD Auto Dim
If [On] is selected, the picture display will automatically dim to save power if no
operations are performed for about five seconds. This feature is not available in
synchro-monitor mode (GP.40).78
7
Setup Menu
Digital Zoom Image GP.82
Choose [Auto Resize] to record pictures taken with digital zoom at actual size,
[Normal] to enlarge image data from the center of the frame.
Level Setting GP.42
Adjust level indicator and level sound settings.
Grid Guide Display Options GP.40
Choose the type of framing grid available in shooting mode.
Available Settings Description
A three-by-three grid for “rule of thirds” composition.
A four-by-four grid with diagonal lines running from corner
to corner makes it easy to find the center of the subject. Use
for architectural photography or photographing products for
display.
A two-by-two grid with the center of the frame left clear to
make it easier to view the subject. Use if your subject is in
motion.
Shooting Info. Display Frame
Select [On] to display shooting icons in a frame
surrounding the view through the lens (GP.40).
Shooting information display frame cannot be used
in movie mode.
4:3 F 4 : 4:33 F F
EV EEEV VV +++0.7 ISO 100 000.7..77 ISO 100 IISSOO 110000
Auto Rotate
Select [On] to automatically display pictures in the correct orientation during
playback.79
7
Setup Menu
Card Sequence No.
When you switch SD memory cards, you can set your camera to continue
consecutive numbering from the previously loaded card.
Available Settings Description
On (Continue
numbering)
Files names consist of “R” followed by a seven-digit number (e.g.,
“R0010001.jpg”), assigned in ascending order from 0010001 to
9999999. When a new memory card is inserted, file numbering
continues from the last number used.
Off (Do not
continue
numbering)
File numbering is assigned, from RIMG0001.jpg to RIMG9999.
jpg, for each SD memory card. When the file name reaches
RIMG9999, no more data can be recorded to that card.
Note ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• This option applies only to memory cards. The names of photos in internal
memory consist of “RIMG” and a four-digit number.
• When images are transferred to a computer using DL-10 (GP.102), the file
being transferred is renamed and saved.
Caution ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
When the file name reaches RIMG9999 or R9999999, no more files can be saved.
In this case, move image data from the SD memory card to the memory of the
computer or a storage medium, and then format the SD memory card.
Date Settings GP.25
Set the camera clock.
Note ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• If the battery is removed for more than three days, the date and time settings
will be lost. These settings must be made again.
• To retain the date and time settings, load a battery with adequate remaining
power for more than ten hours.
Language/N(
*
) GP.25
You can change the language displayed on the screen.
Video Out Mode
(
*
)
You can view your still images and movies on a television screen by connecting
your camera to a television with the AV cable that came with your camera. Select
from NTSC (used in North America, the Caribbean, parts of Latin America, and some
East Asian countries) and PAL (used in the United Kingdom and much of Europe,
Australia, New Zealand, and parts of Asia and Africa). SECAM is not supported.
(
*
)
The default setting varies depending on where you purchased the camera.80
7
Setup Menu
CALS Pic Quality
Choose picture quality and size options for CALS mode (GP.33).
Start Date/Time
Select [On] to display the current time and date when you turn the camera on and
select shooting mode.
Choose/Change Password GP.83
Choose a password or change the current password. Passwords restrict access to
some camera functions.
Password Protection GP.85
Restrict access to some or all camera functions. Select [Off] to allow unrestricted
access.
Password Validity Period
Choose how long the camera can be used without re-entering the password. This
option takes effect only when [Camera] or [Int. Memory] is selected for [Password
Protection]. If [Off] is selected, the camera can only be accessed by re-entering the
password.
Power Button Hold Options
If [On] selected, the POWER button must be pressed for at least two seconds to turn
the camera on and for at least five seconds to turn the camera off.81
7
Setup Menu
Reg. My Settings
Save current camera settings in [MY1] or [MY2]. Settings saved in [MY1]
are recalled when the mode dial is rotated to T , those saved in
[MY2] when the mode dial is rotated to U.
1 Set the camera to the desired settings.
2 Select [Reg. My Settings] in the setup menu (GP.75) and
press the $ button.
• A confirmation message appears.
3 Select [MY1] or [MY2] and press the MENU/OK button.
• The current camera settings are registered and the display returns to
the setup menu.
• If you do not want to register them, press the DISP. button.
Settings Saved in [Reg. My Settings]
Shooting mode (V/5/T/
U/W)
WB-BKT
Focal distance used in Manual Time Exposure
Zoom position Camera Shake Correction
Macro Date Imprint
Flash Mode Exposure Compensation
Scene mode White Balance
Self-Timer ISO Setting
DISP. mode Edit Detection
Density Stepped Zoom
Picture Quality/Size Digital Zoom Image
Focus Level Setting
Exposure Metering Grid Guide Display Options
Continuous Mode Shooting Info. Display Frame
Image Settings CALS Pic Quality
Auto Bracket82
7
Setup Menu
Digital Zoom Image
If [Normal] (the default option) is selected for [Digital Zoom Image] ,
digital zoom will enlarge image data from the center of the frame to
create a picture at the current image size, creating a slightly grainy
image. To record pictures taken with digital zoom at actual size, select
[Auto Resize]. The size at which the image will be recorded varies with
the zoom ratio.
Auto resize takes effect if you keep the z
button pressed when the zoom bar is full.
The size will then change each time the
z button is pressed; the current size is
displayed above the zoom bar.
9999 99999 999 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F
55MM
The auto resize zoom is enabled when l 4 : 3 F or l 4 : 3 N is selected
for [Picture Quality/Size] (GP.56), and the digital zoom is enabled in
other cases.
Zoom Magnification and Recorded Image Size
Picture Quality/Size Zoom Magnification Focal Length
(
*
)
l 4 : 3 F/l 4 : 3 N 1.0 × 140 mm
e 4 : 3 F 1.5 × 210 mm
c 4 : 3 F 2.0 × 270 mm
a 4 : 3 F 3.1 × 430 mm
z 4 : 3 F 6.3 × 870 mm
(
*
)
Equivalent to that on a 35 mm camera
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Regardless of the option selected, normal digital zoom is used when [Skew
Correct Mode] is selected in scene mode.
• Fine picture quality is used for all photographs recorded using [Auto Resize],
regardless of the option currently selected for [Picture Quality/Size].83
7
Setup Menu
Choose/Change Password
Choose the password that must be entered
to access password-protected settings
(GP.85). The password can be a barcode
or a phrase entered via an on-screen
keyboard.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The current password is required to change an existing password.
Barcode
Frame the barcode in the picture display and
press MENU/OK. If the camera can read the
code, it will set the password to the barcode
and return to the previous menu. Press DISP.
to exit without entering a new password.
Read Barcode Read Barcode
Cancel Cancel Execute Execute
Aim the reader at the barcode
and press OK.
A i m t h e r e a d e r a t t h e b a r c o d e
a n d p r e s s O K .
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The camera can read linear and matrix barcodes.
Linear Matrix (QR) Matrix (PDF417)
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
You will be prompted to enter a password
whenever you attempt to access functions
protected using [Password Protection]. Frame
the password barcode in the picture display and
press MENU/OK. If the barcode is incorrect, a
message will be displayed; select [Yes] to return
to the password entry dialog.
Read Barcode Read Barcode
Cancel Cancel Execute Execute
Aim the reader at the password
barcode and press OK.
A i m t h e r e a d e r a t t h e p a s s w o r d
b a r c o d e a n d p r e s s O K .84
7
Setup Menu
Keyboard
1 Enter a password of up to 16
characters.
• Highlight characters using !, ", #,
or $ and press MENU/OK to enter the
highlighted character at the current
cursor position (to delete the character
at the current cursor position, select
[Delete]). Press ADJ./MEMO when
entry is complete (to exit without
changing the password, press DISP.).
2 Re-enter the password.
• A confirmation dialog will be displayed; re-enter the password as
described above to save the password and return to the setup menu.
If the passwords do not match, a message will be displayed and the
camera will return to the password entry dialog.
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
You will be prompted to enter a password
whenever you attempt to access functions
protected using [Password Protection]. Enter
the password as described in Step 1, above. If
the password is incorrect, a message will be
displayed; select [Yes] to return to the password
entry dialog.
Keyboard area
Password area Password area85
7
Setup Menu
Password Protection
Choose the camera functions protected with the password selected
using [Choose/Change Password] (GP.83). Five options are available.
Off
Choose this option to allow unrestricted access to all camera functions.
No password is required.
Camera
You will be prompted to enter a password when the camera is turned
on. The camera can not be used until you enter the password; if an
incorrect password is entered, the camera will turn off automatically.
Int. Memory
If a memory card is inserted, this option is the same as [Camera]. If no
memory card is inserted, you will be prompted to enter a password
before viewing the images in internal memory (no pictures will be
displayed until the correct password is entered) and when connecting
the camera to a computer or printer (if an incorrect password is
entered, the camera will turn off).
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
You will also be prompted to enter a password if you select [Format [Internal
Memory]] after entering an incorrect password. Entering the correct password
will allow you to format internal memory; entering an incorrect password will
cause the camera to exit without formatting internal memory.86
7
Setup Menu
SD WORM
No password is required when SD WORM cards (GP.20) are used. If
no memory card is inserted or another type of card is used, you will be
prompted to enter a password when the camera is turned on. Entering
an incorrect password will cause the camera to turn off.
Menus
A password is required to display the camera menus. The menus and
ADJ. mode can not be used until the correct password is entered.
Lost Passwords -----------------------------------------------------------------------
Do not forget your password. If you forget your password, contact one of the
Ricoh offices listed on the back cover of this manual.87
8
Camera Memo Menu
8 Camera Memo Menu
Using the Menu
1 Press the MENU/OK button.
• The shooting menu (or the playback menu) appears.
2 Press # to highlight the tab for the current menu.
3 Press ! or " to highlight the
camera memo menu tab.
• In scene mode, the camera memo
menu tab is fourth from the top;
in other modes, it is third from the
top.
• In scene mode, press " three times.
Indicates the range of displayed
screens.
4 Press $ to place the cursor in the camera memo menu.
5 Press the !" buttons to select the
desired item.
• If the DISP. button is pressed at this
point, the display returns to the screen
shown in Step 3.
• Press the " button at the bottom item
to display the next screen.
6 Press the $ button.
• The menu item settings are displayed.
7 Press the !" buttons to select the
setting.
8 Press MENU/OK, or press # and
then MENU/OK.
• The camera memo menu will close and
the camera will return to shooting or
playback.
• Pressing the # button in Step 8 confirms the setting and the display
returns to the screen shown in Step 5.88
8
Camera Memo Menu
Camera Memo Menu Options
Camera Memo Mode “Software User Guide” GP.28
Choose from the following options:
Available Settings Description
Mode1 Choose a separate description for each item.
Mode2 Choose from pre-selected combinations. Descriptions can not
be selected for individual items.
Memo Skip “Software User Guide” GP.28
When choosing memos with [Mode2] selected for [Camera Memo Mode], you can
press and hold # or $ to skip memos with identical descriptions for a selected
item. Choose from items 1 to 5.
Note ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
This option only takes effect when [Mode2] is selected for [Camera Memo Mode].
Mark Memo Added to Photos
When [On] is selected, [Memo Marking] will appear
in the camera memo dialog for memos that have
been added to photographs. Marking can be
removed by pressing D in the camera memo dialog
or by selecting [Remove Memo Marking].
FileName/SAMPLE FileName/SAMPLE
Camera Memo Camera Memo [[MMemo Marking emo Marking] 1/45 1/45
FILE LIST FILE LIST
Company A
Foundation work
Exterior
Beverly Beech
Gamma Company
C o m p a n y A
F o u n d a t i o n w o r k
E x t e r i o r
B e v e r l y B e e c h
G a m m a C o m p a n y
Client
Const.type
Location
Supervisor
Affiliates
Client
Const.type
Location
Supervisor
Affiliates
Memo On Memo On
Note ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
This option only takes effect when [Mode2] is selected for [Camera Memo Mode].
Remove Memo Marking
Remove [Memo Marking] marking from the camera memo dialog for memos that
have been added to photos taken with [On] selected for [Mark Memo Added to
Photos].
Memo Warning
If [On] is selected, a warning will be displayed and the shutter release will be
disabled if you attempt to take a photograph with the description for one or more
memo items set to [No Setting]. The shutter release can be enabled by choosing a
description for the affected items.
Note ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
This option has no effect when [Mode2] is selected for [Camera Memo Mode] or
[On] is selected for [Camera Memo 1 Auto Delete].89
8
Camera Memo Menu
Display Memo at Startup
Select [On] to display the camera memo dialog when the camera is turned on.
Note ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
This option is only available if a memo list has been transferred to the camera.
Memo Increment “Software User Guide” GP.32
If [On] is selected, numbers that appear at the end of memo descriptions can be
increased or decreased by pressing ! or ".
Note ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
This option only takes effect when [Mode1] is selected for [Camera Memo Mode].
Camera Memo Imprint
Select [On] to stamp the first three memo items on photographs.
Note ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Only the first ten letters of the item name and first 32 letters of the description
will appear on photographs. Only the first 31 letters (including the item name
and the colon that appears between the item name and the description) will
appear on photographs taken with [z 4 : 3 F] selected for [Picture Quality/
Size].
• This option has no effect when [Mode3] is selected for [Barcode Mode].
Camera Memo 1 Auto Delete
If [On] is selected, the description for the first memo item will automatically be set
to [No Setting] when the camera is turned on, a photograph is taken, or a memo
list is transferred to the camera. A warning will be displayed and the shutter release
will be disabled if you attempt to take a photograph with the description for the
first item still set to [No Setting]. The shutter release can be enabled by choosing a
description for the first item.
Note ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
This option has no effect when [Mode2] is selected for [Camera Memo Mode].90
8
Camera Memo Menu
Barcode Type
Choose from the following options:
Available Settings Description
Auto The camera automatically detects the barcode type.
Linear Use for linear barcodes. The following types are supported:
EAN-13/8 (JAN-13/8), UPC-A/E, UPC/EAN (with add-ons),
Interleaved 2 of 5, CODEBAR (NW-7), CODE 39, CODE 93,
CODE 128 TYPE C, GS1-128 (EAN-128), and RSS (GS1
DataBar).
QR Code, Micro QR
Code, DataMatrix,
PDF417, Micro PDF417,
MaxiCode, EAN/UCC
When scanning matrix barcodes, choose the option that
corresponds to the type of barcode that will be scanned.
Note ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• The camera can read linear barcodes of up to 32 digits and matrix barcodes of
up to 2400 digits.
• Voice memos are not available with matrix barcodes.
Barcode Mode “Software User Guide” GP.36
Choose where barcode data are stored.
Available Settings Description
Mode1 The barcode is stored in the memo list as a temporary
description for the first item. This description is overwritten each
time a barcode is read.
Mode2 The first barcode read is stored in the memo list as a temporary
description for the first item, the second barcode as a
temporary description for the second item, the third barcode
as a temporary description for the third item, and the fourth
barcode as a temporary description for the fourth item. These
descriptions are overwritten in turn as new barcodes are read.
Mode3 This option only takes effect in shooting mode. Up to fifty
barcodes can be stored in the memo list as temporary
descriptions for the first item. These data can be viewed in the
camera memo dialog before shooting but can not be changed
and are deleted after a photograph is taken.
Scan Time
Choose the maximum time the camera will wait for a barcode to be scanned.
Scanning will be interrupted if a barcode is not read in the specified time.91
9
Direct Printing
9 Direct Printing
About the Direct Print Function
The Direct Print standard enables direct printing from a camera to a
printer by connecting them via a USB cable. Photos can be printed
quickly and easily from your digital camera without using a computer.
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
You cannot print AVI files (movies) with this function.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• This camera uses PictBridge, an industry standard for Direct Printing.
• Your printer must be compatible with PictBridge to use the Direct Print
function. For support information, see the documentation that came with the
printer.
Connecting the Camera to a Printer
Connect your camera to a printer using the USB cable provided.
1 Make sure that the camera power is off.
2 Open the terminal cover.
• Slide the knob in the direction
shown and open the terminal
cover.
3 Connect your camera to a printer
using the USB cable provided.
• Turn on the printer if it is not already on.
• Your camera turns on automatically.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
To disconnect the camera from the printer, check that the camera is turned off
after printing is finished, and disconnect the USB cable.92
9
Direct Printing
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Do not force the USB cable into the terminal.
• Do not apply excessive force with the USB cable connected.
• When using the USB cable, do not move the camera with the USB cable.
• To prevent moisture or dust from entering the camera, close the terminal cover
securely after disconnecting the USB cable.
Printing Still Images
You can print still images from the camera with a PictBridgecompatible printer. If a memory card is inserted, the pictures will be
printed from the memory card; otherwise pictures will be printed from
internal memory.
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Do not disconnect the USB cable during printing.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• If a [Printer error.] message appears during image transfer, check the printer
status and take the appropriate action.
• If a computer connection message appears even though the camera is
connected to the printer, reconnect the camera and press the ADJ./MEMO
button within two seconds.
Before printing, connect the camera to the
printer. The message [Connecting...] shown
at right will be displayed if the printer is
ready; press the ADJ./MEMO button to view
the Direct Print playback display.
Printing One or All Still Images
1 Select an image for printing and press the ADJ./MEMO
button.
2 Select [1 File] or [All Files] and press the ADJ./MEMO button.
• The Direct Print menu appears.93
9
Direct Printing
3 Select an item and press the $ button to view the options
available.
• When [Connecting…] is displayed,
the connection to the printer is not
yet established. When a connection is
established, [Connecting…] disappears
and [Direct Print] appears. Proceed
with this step after the connection is
established.
• The following items can be selected. Each item is available only
when supported by the printer connected to the camera.
Item Name Description
Printing Quantity Sets the print quantity.
Paper Size Sets the paper size.
Paper Type Sets the paper type.
Layout Sets the number of images printed on a sheet of paper.
The number of images that can be laid out on a sheet of
paper varies depending on the connected printer.
Report Print
(
*
)
Prints on forms.
Memo Print
(
*
)
Choose whether reports will include camera memo
descriptions (GP.95). Depending on the layout selected
with [Report Print], the camera memo may not be printed.
In this case, delete some of the information in the camera
memo.
Print Size Sets the print image size.
Date Print Selects whether to print the date (shooting date). The
date format can be set using the date/time option in the
setup menu. If the picture was taken using [Date Imprint]
(GP.58), only the imprinted date will be printed.
File Name Print Selects whether to print the file name.
Optimize Image Selects whether to optimize the image data (still image)
prior to printing on the printer.
Print Quality Sets the print quality.
Toner Saving
(
*
)
Selects whether to conserve toner by using less ink during
printing.
1-Side/2-Sides
(
*
)
Selects whether to print on both sides of the paper.
During duplex printing, one copy is printed for each still
image. Only one copy is printed even if you selected more
than one copy to print in Step 3 on P.94.
(
*
)
Compatible Ricoh printers only.94
9
Direct Printing
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• To specify the settings as the default settings
next time the camera is connected to the
printer, press the ADJ./MEMO button when the
screen in Step 3 is displayed. Select [Yes] in the
display at right and press the MENU/OK button.
• To use the settings last set the next time the
camera is connected to the printer, select [No].
4 Select an option and press the MENU/OK button.
• The display returns to the Direct Print menu.
• Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to change other settings as required.
5 Press the MENU/OK button.
• The selected still images are sent to the printer and the [Sending…]
screen appears.
• Pressing the DISP. button cancels the operation.
• When the images have been sent to the printer, the display returns
to the Direct Print playback mode screen and printing starts.
Printing Several Still Images
1 Press the 9 (Thumbnail view) button.
• Photos will be displayed in multi-frame playback.
2 Select an image and press the MENU/OK button.
3 Press the !" buttons to set the
number of copies to print.
• Press the ! button to increase the
number of copies, or press the "
button to decrease the number of
copies.
• Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to select
additional images.
4 Press the MENU/OK button.
• The Direct Print menu appears.
5 Select an item and press the $ button to view the options
available.
• See Steps 3 and following on P.93.
Pr n t Fi l PPPr n t Fi l rrnntt FFiill 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F
Forward Forward
P r n t F i l PPP r n t F i l rrnntt FFiill L a s t F i l e LLL a s t F i l e aasstt FFiillee 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F
Forward Forward
L a s t F i l e LLL a s t F i l e aasstt FFiillee95
9
Direct Printing
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Only images with a printer symbol (p) are printed. If you cancel printing and
then try to print again, make sure that the printer symbol is on the images you
want to print.
• The same still image can also be printed several times on a single sheet.
• The available items vary depending on the functions of the printer.
• To print images using the printer’s default settings, select [Printer Select] on the
detailed options screen.
Printing Reports
Select [ Report Print] on the Direct Print menu.
You can only select [Report Print] when the camera is connected to a
Ricoh printer that supports PictBridge after setting [Paper Size] to [A4]
on the menu.
The layout that can be selected depends on the connected printer. For
more details, see the documentation that came with the printer.
Available Layouts
1 Frame W/Rule 2 Frames W/Rule 3 Frames W/Rule 4 Frames W/Rule
1 Frame W/O Rule 2 Frames W/O Rule 3 Frames W/O Rule 4 Frames W/O Rule
Const. Photo 1 W/Remark Section Additional Report
1-10
Examples of Printed Reports
1 Frame W/Rule 2 Frames W/O Rule Const. Photo 1
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Memos will only be included in the report if [5] is selected for [Number of Items]
in the List Editor (G“Software User Guide” P.24).96
10
Downloading Images to Your Computer
10 Downloading Images to Your Computer
The screen images shown here may differ from the images displayed
on your computer depending on your computer OS.
For Windows
You can copy pictures to your computer with or without DL-10
software, which can be installed from the supplied CD.
System Requirements for Using the Supplied CD-ROM
The following environments are necessary for using the supplied CDROM. Please check your computer, or the computer's user manual.
Operating Systems
Supported
Windows 2000 Professional Service Pack 4
Windows XP Home Edition Service Pack 3/Professional Service Pack 3
Windows Vista Service Pack 2
Windows 7 (32- and 64-bit)
CPU Pentium® IV: 1.6 GHz or faster
Pentium® M: 1.4 GHz or faster
Core™ 2 Duo: 1.5 GHz or faster
Memory Windows 2000/Windows XP: 512 MB or more
Windows Vista/Windows 7: 1 GB or more
Hard drive space
required for installation
300 MB or more
Display Resolution 1024 × 768 pixels or greater
Display Colors 65,000 colors or greater
CD-ROM Drive A CD-ROM drive compatible with the above-mentioned computer
USB Port A USB port compatible with the above-mentioned computer97
10
Downloading Images to Your Computer
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• The CD-ROM supports Japanese, English, French and German. Operations are
not guaranteed on operating systems with other languages.
• 64-bit Windows Vista is not supported.
• If your computer has an upgraded OS, the USB function may not work normally,
so it cannot be supported.
• The provided software may not operate properly if changes are made to the
operating system, such as with patches and service package releases.
• The camera does not support connection to a USB port added by using an
extension function (PCI bus or other).
• If used in conjunction with a hub or other USB devices, the software may not
work properly.
• When dealing with movies and other large files, a larger memory environment
is recommended.
• MediaBrowser is not supported under Windows 2000.
CD-ROM Setup
Once you insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive, the
installer screen appears automatically.
Windows 2000/Windows XP
• The installer screen appears automatically.
Windows Vista/Windows 7
• If an Autorun dialog is displayed, select [Run Autorun.exe]. The installer
will start automatically.
Use this button to install
software required for batch
downloading and editing of
images.
Click this to display the list of
files contained on the CD-ROM.
Install EC1 image
authentication software.98
10
Downloading Images to Your Computer
Installing Software
Click [Installing the software] to install the following software.
Software Description
DL-10 Downloads images collectively to your computer.
List Editor Create memo lists.
ME1 View and manage photographs to which memos have
been appended, edit memos, and print memos with
photographs.
MediaBrowser Display, manage, and edit existing images. Not supported
under Windows 2000.
USB Driver Used to connect an earlier model Ricoh camera to
a computer running Windows 98/Windows 98 SE/
Windows Me/Windows 2000. Not used with this camera.
WIA Driver Used to connect an earlier model Ricoh camera to
a computer running Windows XP/Windows Vista/
Windows 7. Not used with this camera.
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Do not install the software when the camera is connected to your computer
with a USB cable.
• The names for DC Software items differ from the names for Caplio Software
items provided with previous models as shown below.
Caplio Software DC Software
RICOH Gate La DL-10
Caplio Viewer DU-10
Caplio Server SR-10 (not used with this camera)
Caplio Setting ST-10 (not used with this camera)
If Caplio Software from a CD-ROM supplied with a previous model is already
installed on your computer, a message asking you to uninstall the Caplio
Software before installing DC Software will appear when you try to install the
new software.
• Administrator privileges are required for installation.
• DL-10 is not network-compatible. Use as a stand-alone application.99
10
Downloading Images to Your Computer
1 Click [Installing the software].
Windows 2000/Windows XP
• After a while, the [Choose Setup Language] screen appears.
Windows Vista/Windows 7
• If a [User Account Control] dialog is displayed, select [Yes]
(Windows 7) or [Allow] (Windows Vista). After a short pause, the
[Choose Setup Language] dialog will be displayed.
2 Select a language and follow the on-screen instructions to
complete installation.
• The MediaBrowser installer will start. To install MediaBrowser, accept
the license agreement and follow the on-screen instructions.
3 When a message appears asking you to restart your
computer, select [Yes, I want to restart my computer now.]
and then click [Finish].
• Your computer will restart automatically.
• After your computer restarts, a Windows security warning message
appears.
4 Click [Unblock] for DL-10.
Installing EC1
EC1 can be used to determine whether photographs shot with [On]
selected for [Edit Detection] (GP.59) in the shooting menu have
been altered since they were taken. See the “Software Users Guide” for
details.
1 Click [Installing EC1].
• Depending on your user environment, an installation message for
“Visual C++ Runtime Library (×86)” or “.NET Framework 2.0” may
be displayed. If this message appears, follow the instructions on
the message to install the software. If a message instructing you to
restart your computer appears after installation, please restart your
computer.
2 Follow the on-screen instructions and install EC1.100
10
Downloading Images to Your Computer
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
If EC1 is already installed on your computer, you cannot reinstall it. If you try to
reinstall it, a message asking if you want to change or delete EC1 is displayed. To
exit without changing or deleting EC1, click [Cancel].
Installing Other Software
Click [Browse CD-ROM Content] to install the following software:
Software Description
Adobe Reader Required to view manuals in pdf format.
EX1 Rename files according to memo descriptions or export
memos as CSV, XML, or text. EX1 comes in server and
client versions.
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Do not install the software when the camera is connected to your computer
with a USB cable.
• Administrator privileges are required for installation.
• To install MediaBrowser without installing other applications, double-click the
setup.exe icon in the “MediaBrowser” folder.
Installing Adobe Reader
Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader need not be installed if already
installed on your computer.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• For details about Adobe Reader, see Help for Adobe Reader.
• Installation of Adobe Reader 9.3 requires either Microsoft Internet Explorer
6.0 or later or Firefox 2.0 or later. Microsoft Internet Explorer is available via
Microsoft Update.
• Installation of Adobe Reader 9.3 requires MSI (Microsoft Windows Installer)
version 3.1 or later. Microsoft Windows Installer is available via Microsoft Update.101
10
Downloading Images to Your Computer
1 Click [Browse CD-ROM Content].
• The files on the CD-ROM are listed.
2 Open the folder for your language in the [Adobe Reader]
folder and double-click the Adobe Reader installer.
• A screen appears to confirm user account management for
Windows 7 and Windows Vista. Select [Continue].
3
Install Adobe Reader by following the messages displayed.
Installing EX1
For information on using EX1, see the “Software Users Guide”.
1 Click [Browse CD-ROM Content].
• The files on the CD will be displayed.
2 Start the installer.
• Double-click [EX1] and then double click either [EX1_for_Server]
(or [EX1_for_Server.exe]) or [EX1_for_Client] (or [EX1_for_Client.
exe]). Under Windows 7 and Windows Vista, a [User Account Control]
dialog will be displayed; click [Continue].
3
Install EX1.
• Follow the on-screen instructions.
Uninstalling the Software ---------------------------------------------------------
• The software can be uninstalled using the [Programs and Features] control panel
(Windows 7 and Windows Vista) or [Add/Remove Programs] control panel (other
versions of Windows).
• Administrator privileges are required.
• Quit any other programs that may be running before uninstalling the software.102
10
Downloading Images to Your Computer
Copying Pictures to Your Computer
Follow the steps below to copy pictures to your computer.
1 Connect the camera to the computer
using the supplied USB cable.
• Turn the camera off before connecting
the USB cable.
• The camera turns on automatically when
a connection is established.
2 Copy photos to the computer.
If DL-10 is installed:
• DL-10 starts and image transfer begins automatically.
• Pictures are copied to the [Digital Camera] folder in [My Documents],
where they are sorted into separate folders by date of recording. See
the “Software User Guide” on the supplied CD for more information.
If DL-10 is not installed:
• Copy files from the camera to the
desired location.
• When an SD memory card is
loaded, its files are displayed.
Otherwise, files in the internal
memory are displayed.
Example of the display
in Windows XP103
10
Downloading Images to Your Computer
3 Disconnect the USB cable when transfer is complete.
• Click the [Safely Remove Hardware] or
[Unplug or Eject Hardware] icon in the
taskbar (the illustration above shows the icon for Windows XP) and
select [Safely Remove USB Mass Storage Device] or [Stop USB Mass
Storage Device] from the menu that appears. You can then
disconnect the USB cable.
• If the remove hardware icon is not displayed
in Windows 7, click the button in the
taskbar.
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Do not turn off the camera or disconnect the USB cable during image transfer.
• Do not use force when connecting the cable or when handling the camera with
the cable connected. Do not attempt to transport the camera while the USB
cable is connected.
• To prevent moisture or dust from entering the camera, close the terminal cover
securely after disconnecting the USB cable.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The camera is provided with MediaBrowser software that allows you to display
and edit images from your computer. For how to use MediaBrowser, see the
displayed “Help”.
For the latest information about MediaBrowser, access the Web page of Pixela Co.,
Ltd. (http://www.pixela.co.jp/oem/mediabrowser/e/).104
10
Downloading Images to Your Computer
For Macintosh
This camera supports the following Macintosh operating systems.
• Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2
• Mac OS X 10.1.2 to 10.6.3
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Although the software included in the CD-ROM cannot be used with Macintosh,
it is possible to display the “Software User Guide” (note that Acrobat Reader is
required to view the “Software User Guide” under Mac OS 9).
Copying Pictures to Your Computer
Follow the steps below to copy pictures to your computer.
1 Connect the camera to the computer
using the supplied USB cable.
• Turn the camera off before connecting
the USB cable.
• The camera turns on automatically when
a connection is established.
2 Copy photos to the computer.
• Copy files from the camera to the
desired location.
• When an SD memory card is
loaded, its files are displayed.
Otherwise, files in the internal
memory are displayed.
3 Disconnect the USB cable when transfer is complete.
• Drag the camera volume into the Trash and then disconnect the USB
cable.105
10
Downloading Images to Your Computer
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Do not turn off the camera or disconnect the USB cable during image transfer.
• Do not use force when connecting the cable or when handling the camera with
the cable connected. Do not attempt to transport the camera while the USB
cable is connected.
• You can also click [Eject] on the [Special] menu in Mac OS 9 or the [File] menu
in Mac OS X to cancel the connection.
• If the USB cable is disconnected without disabling the connection, the Unsafe
Removal of Device screen may be displayed. Be sure to stop the connection
before removing the USB cable.
• When you connect your camera to a Macintosh computer, a file called
“FINDER.DAT” or “.DS_Store” may be created in your SD memory card, which will
appear as [Unmatched File] on your camera. You can delete this file from the SD
memory card if you wish.
• To prevent moisture or dust from entering the camera, close the terminal cover
securely after disconnecting the USB cable.106
Appendices
11
11 Appendices
Troubleshooting
Error Messages
If an error message is displayed on the screen, check the information
on the reference page and take the corresponding action.
Error Message Cause and Solution Refer to
Insert card. No card is loaded. Insert a card. P.23
Set date. The date is not set. Set the date. P.79
The file number limit has been
exceeded.
The file number limit has been exceeded. Use another card. P.79
Unmatched File This file cannot be displayed on the camera. Check the file
contents on your computer, and then delete the file.
—
Insufficient memory. Continue? All the files cannot be copied because there is insufficient
memory on the card. Use another card.
P.20
Protected The file selected for deletion is protected. P.72
Card Is Write-Protected. The card is locked (write-protected). Unlock the card. P.21
This option is not available with
SD WORM cards.
Selected option is not available with SD WORM cards. Use
a different type of card.
P.20
Print settings cannot be applied
to this file.
This file (movie or other file) cannot be selected for
printing.
—
Insufficient Memory/
Capacity Short
Files cannot be stored. Make sure there is sufficient
memory or delete unwanted files.
P.37,
P.76
The image print number limit has been exceeded. Select an
image and set the number to 0.
P.94
Format internal memory. The internal memory requires formatting. P.76
Format card. The card is not formatted. Format the card with this
camera.
P.76
Card Error Reformat the card. If the error message still appears after
that, the card may be faulty. Do not use the card.
P.76
Writing Data Writing file to memory. Wait until writing finishes. —
No File There are no files that can be played back. —
Out of memory. cannot record. The number of remaining shots is 0. Switch to another card
or the internal memory.
P.20
No files to restore. There are no files to restore. P.67
Can not —. * Selected option can not be applied to image more than
once, or image was created with different make of camera.
If image was created with different make of camera,
process image using original make of camera.
—
* “—“ indicates the name of the process that can not be applied.107
11
Appendices
Camera Troubleshooting
Power Supply
Problem Cause Solution Refer to
The camera does not
turn on.
The battery is exhausted or not
inserted.
Check that battery is correctly
inserted. Charge battery
(rechargeable battery only),
insert fresh battery.
P.22,
P. 2 3
An unacceptable battery is used. Use supplied battery or
compatible AAA batteries.
P. 1 9
The camera is automatically
turned off by auto power off.
Turn the camera back on. P.25
The battery is loaded in wrong
direction.
Load correctly. P.23
Because the camera overheated,
the power was automatically
turned off.
Wait until the temperature of
the camera returns to normal. Do
not attempt to cool the camera
suddenly.
—
The camera turns off
during use.
The camera was left unattended
and unused, so auto power off
turned it off.
Turn the camera back on. P.25
Battery is exhausted. Check that battery is correctly
inserted. Charge battery
(rechargeable battery only),
insert fresh battery.
P.22,
P. 2 3
An unacceptable battery is used. Use supplied battery or
compatible AAA batteries.
P. 1 9
The camera does not
turn off.
Camera malfunction Remove the battery and load
it again.
P. 2 3
The battery has been
fully charged, but:
• The battery symbol is
displayed, indicating
a low battery level.
• The camera turns off.
A unacceptable battery is used. Use supplied battery or
compatible AAA batteries.
P. 1 9
Cannot charge the
battery.
Battery has reached the end of its
useful life.
Replace with a new rechargeable
battery.
P. 2 3
Battery runs out
quickly.
It is being used at extreme high or
low temperatures.
— —
Many shots are being taken in
dark places or other location
requiring extensive use of flash.
— —108
Appendices
11
Shooting
Problem Cause Solution Refer to
The camera does not
shoot even if you press
the shutter release
button.
Battery is exhausted. Check that battery is correctly
inserted. Charge battery
(rechargeable battery only),
insert fresh battery.
P.22,
P. 2 3
The camera is not on. Press the POWER button to turn
the camera on.
P. 2 5
The camera is in playback mode. Press the 6 (Playback) button
to select the shooting mode.
P. 2 5
The shutter release button is not
pressed all the way.
Press the shutter release button
all the way.
P. 2 8
The SD memory card is not formatted. Format the card. P.76
The SD memory card is full. Load a new card, or delete
unwanted files.
P. 3 7
P. 2 3
The SD memory card has reached
the end of its useful life.
Load a new SD memory card. P.23
The flash is charging. Wait until the auto focus/flash
lamp stops blinking.
P. 3 1
The SD memory card is locked. Unlock the card. P.21
The contact surface of the SD
memory card is dirty.
Wipe with a soft, dry cloth. —
Unable to view the shot
image.
The image confirmation time is
too short.
Lengthen the image
confirmation time.
P. 7 7
Images do not appear
on the picture display.
The camera is not on, or the
picture display is dark.
Turn the camera on, or adjust the
brightness of the picture display.
P.25,
P. 7 6
The VIDEO/AV cable is connected. Disconnect the VIDEO/AV cable. —
The screen display is in synchromonitor mode.
Press the DISP. button to change
the display.
P. 4 0
Although the camera
is set to auto focus, it is
unable to focus.
The lens is dirty. Wipe clean with a soft, dry cloth. —
The subject is not in the center of
the shooting range.
Shoot with focus lock. P.27
It is a hard-to-focus subject. Shoot with focus lock or manual
focus.
P.27,
P. 6 0
Although the camera is
not in focus, the green
frame appears in the
center of the picture
display.
The camera incorrectly focused
because the distance to the
subject is too close.
Shoot with macro mode, or move
away from the subject.
P. 3 0109
11
Appendices
Problem Cause Solution Refer to
The picture is blurred
(The J symbol
appears).
You moved the camera when
pressing the shutter release
button.
Hold camera in both hands with
your elbows pressed lightly
against your torso.
Use a tripod.
Use the camera shake correction
function.
P. 2 7
P. 5 8
When shooting in a dark place
(such as indoors), the shutter
speed slows down and pictures
become easily blurred.
Use the flash.
Raise the ISO setting.
Use the camera shake correction
function.
P. 3 1
P. 6 4
P. 5 8
The flash does not fire.
Or, the flash cannot
charge.
The flash cannot be used in the
following cases:
• In bracket shooting
• In continuous mode
• In movie mode
In some scene modes, the flash is
disabled by default.
To shoot with the flash, change
the settings or mode.
P.31,
P. 1 1 3
The flash is set to flash off. Cancel Flash Off. P.31
Battery is exhausted. Check that battery is correctly
inserted. Charge battery
(rechargeable battery only),
insert fresh battery.
P.22,
P. 2 3
Even though the flash
fired, the picture
is dark.
The distance to the subject
exceeds the flash range.
Get closer to your subject and
shoot. Change the flash mode or
the ISO setting.
P.64,
P. 1 1 5
The subject is dark. Correct the exposure (Exposure
compensation also changes the
light intensity of the flash).
P. 6 2
Cannot use the ADJ.
button function.
The camera memo list is saved on
the SD memory card.
Delete files with the “.mta”
extension in the camera
[TEMPLATE] folder.
—
The image is too bright. The light intensity of the flash is
not appropriate.
Position yourself slightly further
from your subject or turn the
flash off and use other lighting.
P. 3 1
Subject is overexposed (The
[Q] symbol appears).
Correct the exposure.
Cancel exposure time.
P. 6 2
P. 5 7
The brightness of the picture
display is not appropriate.
Adjust the brightness of the
picture display.
P. 7 6
The image is too dark. The shot was taken in a dark place
while set to flash off.
Cancel Flash Off. P.31
The subject is underexposed (The
[Q] symbol appears).
Correct the exposure.
Set the long exposure time.
P. 6 2
P. 5 7
The brightness of the picture
display is not appropriate.
Adjust the brightness of the
picture display.
P. 7 6110
Appendices
11
Problem Cause Solution Refer to
The image lacks natural
color.
The picture was shot in conditions
that made it difficult for auto
white balance to adjust the white
balance.
Add a white object to the
composition, or use a white
balance setting other than auto.
P. 6 3
The date or recording
information does not
appear on the screen.
The screen display function is set
to no display.
Press the DISP. button to change
the display.
P. 4 0
The brightness of the
picture display changes
during AF.
Ambient lighting is poor or differs
from that used for autofocus..
This is normal. —
Vertical streaks
(“smear”) appear in
photos.
Subject is bright. This is normal and does not
indicate a malfunction.
—
The level indicator is
not displayed.
[Level Setting] is set to [Off] or
[Sound].
Set [Level Setting] to [Display] or
[Disp + Snd].
P. 4 2
The display is set to a setting other
than normal symbol display or
histogram.
Press the DISP. button to change
the display to normal symbol
display or histogram.
P. 4 0
The camera is upside down (The
shutter release button is on the
bottom).
Hold the camera correctly. —
The image is tilted even
though it was shot with
the level indicator in
the middle or while
the level sound was
sounding.
You shot the image while moving,
such as on a amusement ride.
Shoot in an environment that is
not moving.
—
The subject is not level. Check the subject. —111
11
Appendices
Playback/Deleting
Problem Cause Solution Refer to
Cannot play back, or the
playback screen does
not appear.
The camera is not in playback
mode.
Press the 6 (Playback) button. P. 3 4
The VIDEO/AV cable is not
connected properly.
Connect properly. P.74
The [Video Out Mode] setting is
incorrect.
Set it to the correct format. P.79
The contents of the SD
memory card cannot
be played back, or the
playback screen does
not appear.
No SD memory card is loaded, or
an SD memory card with no stored
images is loaded.
Load a card with stored images. —
You played back an SD memory
card that was not formatted with
this device.
Load a card that was formatted
and recorded with this device.
P.76,
P. 2 3
You played back an SD memory
card that was not recorded
normally.
Load a normally recorded card. —
The contact surface of the SD
memory card is dirty.
Wipe with a soft, dry cloth. —
There is something wrong with
the SD memory card.
Play back images from another
card and if there is nothing
wrong with the card, the camera
is okay. There may be something
wrong with the card, so do
not use it.
—
The picture display
turned off.
Battery is exhausted. Check that battery is correctly
inserted. Charge battery
(rechargeable battery only),
insert fresh battery.
P.22,
P. 2 3
The camera was left unattended
and unused, so auto power off
turned it off.
Turn the camera back on. P.25
A file cannot be
deleted.
The file is protected. Unprotect the file. P.72
The SD memory card is locked. Unlock the card. P.21
Cannot format the SD
memory card.
The SD memory card is locked. Unlock the card. P.21112
Appendices
11
Other Problems
Problem Cause Solution Refer to
Cannot load the SD
memory card.
The card is facing the wrong way. Load correctly. P.23
The camera does not
operate even when the
buttons are pressed.
Battery is exhausted. Check that battery is correctly
inserted. Charge battery
(rechargeable battery only),
insert fresh battery.
P.22,
P. 2 3
Camera malfunction Press the POWER button to turn
the camera off, and then press
the POWER button to turn the
camera on again.
P. 2 5
Remove the battery and load
it again.
P. 2 5
The date is incorrect. The correct date/time are not set. Set the correct date/time. P.79
The set date
disappeared.
The battery was removed. If the battery is removed for
more than three days, the date
setting will be lost. Make the
settings again.
P. 7 9
Auto power off does
not work.
Auto power off is set to [Off]. Set the time for auto power off. P.77
The operation sound
cannot be heard.
The operation sound volume is
turned off.
Use [Volume Settings] to set
the volume to a setting other
than mute.
P. 7 7
Images do not appear
on the TV.
The [Video Out Mode] setting is
incorrect.
Set it to the correct format. P.79
The AV cable is not connected. Connect the AV cable properly. P.74
The TV is not correctly set to
VIDEO IN.
Check that the TV is correctly set
to VIDEO IN.
—113
11
Appendices
Available Settings
The following table lists the settings available in each shooting mode.
5 V W
N (Macro) *
1 ? ? ? ? ? ? — ?
F (Flash) ? ? ? ? ? ? ? —
t (Self-timer) *
2 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? —
Digital Zoom *
3
? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
Shooting Menu
Density — — — — — ? — —
Size — — — — — ? — —
Movie Size — — — — — — — ?
Picture Quality/Size ? —*
4
? ? ?*
5 — ? —
Focus Multi AF *
6
? ? ? ? ? — — ?
Spot AF ? ? ? ? ? — — ?
AF — — — — — — ? —
MF ? ? — — ? — ? ?
Snap ? ? ? ? ? — — ?
8 ? ? ? ? ? — — ?
Exposure Metering ? ? — — ? — ? —
Continuous Mode *
7
*
8
? ? — — — — ? —
Image Settings ? ? — — ? — ? —
Auto Bracket *
8
*
9
? ? — — — — ? —
Time Exposure *
10
? ? — — — — ? —
Interval Shooting *
11
? ? — — — — — —
Camera Shake Correction *
12
? ? ? ? ? ? ? —
Date Imprint ? ? ? ? ? ? ? —
*1 [Focus] is set to [Spot AF]. Disabled when [MF] is selected for [Focus].
*2 Disabled during interval timer and continuous shooting.
*3 Not available if image is zoomed in during manual focus.
*4 Picture quality and size for CALS mode is selected using the [CALS Pic Quality] option in the
setup menu.
*5 [a 4 : 3 F], [a 4 : 3 N], and [z 4 : 3 F] only.
*6 Functions as [Spot AF] when digital zoom is in effect.
*7 Disabled during interval timer shooting.
*8 Flash turns off.
*9 Disabled during continuous shooting.
*10 Disabled during auto bracketing and continuous shooting.
*11 Disabled when self-timer is used.
*12 Not available if [Flash On], [FLASH ON (10M)], or [Flash Synchro.] is selected as flash mode for
long time-exposures or continuous shooting or if ten-second self-timer is used.114
Appendices
11
5 V W
Shooting Menu
Exposure Compensation ? ? ? ? ? — ? —
White Balance *
13
? ? ? ? ? — ? ?
ISO Setting ? ? — — ? — ? —
Edit Detection *
14
? ? ? ? ? ? ? —
Restore Defaults ? — — — — — — —
Setup Menu
ADJ Button
Setting 1–4
*
15
Off ? ? — — — — — —
Exposure Comp. ? ? ? ? ? — ? —
White Balance ? ? ? ? ? — ? ?
ISO ? ? — — — — — —
Quality ? — — — — — — —
Focus ? ? — — — — — —
Image ? ? — — — — — —
Expo. Metering ? ? — — — — — —
Cont. Mode ? ? — — — — — —
Auto Bracket ? ? — — — — — —
Density — — — — — ? — —
Shooting Info. Display Frame ? ? ? ? ? ? ? —
Other than those above ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
*13 Not available if [Black & White] is selected for [Image Settings].
*14 Disabled during auto bracketing and continuous shooting.
*15 The function displayed when the ADJ. button is pressed in scene mode is always the same and
is not affected by the roles assigned to the button.115
11
Appendices
Specifications
No. of effective pixels (camera) Approx. 12.10 million effective pixels
Image Sensor 1/2.3? CCD (Approx. 12.40 total million pixels)
Lens Focal Length 5.0 mm to 25 mm (equivalent to 28 mm to 140 mm on a 35-mm camera)
F-aperture F3.5 to F5.5
Shooting Distance Normal shooting: Approx. 30 cm to 8 (Wide-angle) or 50 cm to 8
(Telephoto) (from the front of the lens)
Macro shooting: Approx. 1 cm to 8 (Wide-angle), 15 cm to 8 (Telephoto)
or 1 cm to 8 (Zoom macro mode) (from the front of the lens)
Lens Construction 11 elements in 9 groups plus 1 prism
Zoom Magnification Optical zoom at 5.0 ×, Digital zoom at 4.0 ×, Auto resize zoom at approx.
6.3 × (VGA image)
Focus Modes Multi AF (CCD method)/Spot AF (CCD method)/MF/Snap/8 (with AF
Auxiliary Light)
Blur Reduction Digital image stabilizer
Shutter
Speed
Still Image 8, 4, 2, 1 to 1/1500 seconds (The upper and lower limits differ for each
shooting mode and flash mode.)
Movie 1/30 to 1/10000 seconds
Exposure
Control
Exposure
Metering Mode
Multi Light Metering (256 segments)/Center-weighted Light Metering/
Spot Metering (TTL-CCD Metering)
Exposure Mode Program AE
Exposure
Compensation
Manual exposure compensation (+2.0 to –2.0 EV in 1/3 EV Steps), Auto
bracket function (–0.5 EV, ±0, +0.5 EV)
Exposure Range
(auto mode,
center-weighted
metering)
Wide angle: 1.7–15.4 EV
Telephoto: 3.0–15.6 EV
(Exposure range for auto ISO calculated using values for ISO 100.)
Note: At 6.0 EV or lower, each drop of 1.0 EV is associated with a 0.25 EV
drop in brightness. Brightness drops by no more than 1.0 EV.
ISO Sensitivity (Standard
Output Sensitivity)
Auto/ISO 64/ISO 100/ISO 200/ISO 400/ISO 800/ISO 1600/ISO 3200
White Balance Mode Auto/Outdoors/Cloudy/Incandescent 1/Incandescent 2/Fluorescent/Manual/
Ring Light, White balance bracket function
Flash Flash Mode Auto flash (fires automatically in low-light conditions and when the subject
is backlit)/Anti Red-eye/Flash On/FLASH ON (10M)/Flash Synchro./Flash Off
Built-in flash
Range
Approx. 20 cm to 10.0 m (Wide-angle), approx. 40 cm to 6.2 m (Telephoto)
(ISO AUTO/ISO 1600, from the front of the lens)
Charging Time Approx. 8 seconds
Picture Display 3.0? Transmissive LCD, approx. 920,000 dots
Shooting Mode Auto shooting mode/Scene mode (High Sens/Firefighting/Skew Correct
Mode/Text Mode/Zoom Macro/Movie)/My settings mode/CALS mode
Picture Quality Mode *
1
F (Fine), N (Normal)116
Appendices
11
Number of
Recorded
Pixels
Still Image 4000 × 3000, 3984 × 2656, 2592 × 1944, 2048 × 1536, 1600 × 1200,
1280 × 960, 640 × 480
Movie 1280 × 720, 640 × 480, 320 × 240
Text 4000 × 3000, 2048 × 1536
Recording Media SD memory card, SDHC memory card (up to 32 GB), SD WORM card, Internal
Memory (approx. 103 MB)
Recording
Data
Capacity
4000 × 3000 N: approx. 2713 KB/Screen, F: approx. 4735 KB/Screen
3984 × 2656 F: approx. 4177 KB/Screen
2592 × 1944 F: approx. 2281 KB/Screen
2048 × 1536 F: approx. 1431 KB/Screen
1600 × 1200 F: approx. 880 KB/Screen
1280 × 960 N: approx. 363 KB/Screen, F: approx. 708 KB/Screen
640 × 480 F: approx. 190 KB/Screen
Recording
File Format
Still Image JPEG (Exif Ver. 2.21)*
2
Movie AVI (Open DML Motion JPEG Format Compliant)
Compression
Format
JPEG Baseline Format Compliant (Still image, movie)
Other Major Shooting Functions Continuous mode, Self-timer (operation time: approx. 10 seconds, approx.
2 seconds), Interval shooting (shooting interval: 5 seconds to 3 hours, in
increments of 5 seconds)*
3
, AE/AF target shift, Histogram display, Grid
guide display, Electronic level
Other Major Playback Functions Thumbnail view, Enlarged view (maximum 16×), Resize, Contrast
Correction, Skew Correction, Trim, Slide show, DPOF
Interface USB2.0 (High-Speed USB) Mini-B, Mass storage-compatible *
4
, AV output
1.0 Vp-p (75 O)
Video Signal Format NTSC, PAL
Power Supply Rechargeable Battery (DB-65): 3.6 V
Battery life (based on CIPA
standard) *
5
DB-65: approx. 360 shots
AAA alkaline: 40 shots *
6
(When [LCD Auto Dim] is set to [On] *
7
)
Dimensions (W × H × D) 118.8 mm × 71.0 mm × 41.0 mm (excluding projections; measured
according to CIPA guidelines)
Weight Approx. 310 g (including memory card and supplied battery)
Approx. 280 g (camera only)
Tripod Hole Shape 1/4-20UNC
Date Maintain Time Approx. 3 days
Operating Temperature –10 °C to 40 °C
Operating Humidity 90% or less
Storage Temperature –20 °C to 60 °C
Water resistance/
Dust resistance
JIS/IEC waterproof grade 8, JIS/IEC dustproof grade 6 (IP68)117
11
Appendices
*1 The picture quality mode that can be set varies depending on the image size.
*2 Compatible with DCF and DPOF. DCF is the abbreviation for “Design rule for Camera File system,”
a JEITA standard (Full compatibility with other devices is not guaranteed).
*3 When the flash is set to [Flash Off].
*4 Mass storage mode is supported by Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7,
Mac OS 9.0–9.2.2, and Mac OS X 10.1.2–10.6.3.
*5 The number of remaining shots is based on the CIPA standard and may vary depending on
usage conditions. This is for reference only.
*6 When using the AAA Alkaline batteries manufactured by Panasonic.
*7 If [Off] is selected for [LCD Auto Dim], up to 345 shots can be taken with DB-65 batteries and up
to 40 shots with AAA alkaline batteries.
Number of Images That Can Be Stored
The following table shows the approximate number of images that can
be recorded in the internal memory and onto an SD memory card at
various image size and picture quality settings.
Mode Image Size
Internal
Memory
1 GB 2 GB 4 GB 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB
V5
([Movie] and W
[Text mode]
excluded)
l 4 : 3 F 22 202 412 810 1648 3316 6653
l 4 : 3 N 38 351 714 1403 2856 5746 11527
j 3 : 2 F 25 229 465 914 1860 3743 7510
e 4 : 3 F 45 416 842 1653 3364 6769 13580
c 4 : 3 F 72 657 1336 2623 5339 10743 21551
b 4 : 3 F 116 1060 2119 4162 8469 17041 34184
a 4 : 3 F 141 1286 2561 5029 10234 20591 41306
a 4 : 3 N 265 2418 4728 9284 18894 38015 76258
W z 4 : 3 F 509 4650 8781 17242 35089 70600 141622
(Text
Mode)
l 4 : 3 38 351 714 1403 2856 5746 11527
W c 4 : 3 72 657 1336 2623 5339 10743 21551
(Movie) x 1280
20 s
3 min.
3 s
6 min.
13 s
12 min.
14 s
24 min.
54 s
50 min.
6 s
100 min.
31 s
y 640
58 s
8 min.
54 s
18 min.
7 s
35 min.
35 s
72 min.
24 s
145 min.
42 s
292 min.
16 s
z 320 2 min.
22 s
21 min.
34 s
43 min.
53 s
86 min.
10 s
175 min.
22 s
352 min.
50 s
707 min.
47 s
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• The figures for storage capacity assume that no camera memo lists, voice
memos, or other camera system files are stored in the internal memory or on an
SD memory card.118
Appendices
11
• Fewer images can be recorded on SD WORM cards. The figures for SD WORM
cards are given below.
Mode Image Size 128 MB 1 GB
V5
([Movie] and W
[Text mode]
excluded)
l 4 : 3 F 25 198
l 4 : 3 N 43 338
j 3 : 2 F 29 229
e 4 : 3 F 51 399
c 4 : 3 F 79 614
b 4 : 3 F 124 956
a 4 : 3 F 147 1137
a 4 : 3 N 252 1944
z 4 : 3 F 412 3172
• The maximum recording time is the estimated total recording time. Movies may
be up to 4 GB in size. The maximum length is 12 minutes for movies recorded at
a [Movie Size] of [x 1280] and 29 minutes for movies recorded at [z 640] or
[y 320].
• An SD/SDHC memory card with a Speed Class of 6 or better is recommended
when recording movies with [x 1280] selected for [Movie Size] (GP.56).
• The number of remaining shots displayed on the picture display may differ from
the actual number of shots, depending on the subject.
• Movie recording time and the maximum number of still pictures may vary
depending on the capacity of the recording destination (internal memory or SD
memory card), shooting conditions, and the type and manufacturer of the SD
memory card.
• Choose image size according to how the picture will be used:
Image Size Description
l 4 : 3 F/l 4 : 3 N/
j 3 : 2 F
• For creating large prints.
• For downloading to a computer for trimming and
other processes.
e 4 : 3 F/c 4 : 3 F • For creating prints.
b 4 : 3 F/a 4 : 3 F/
a 4 : 3 N
• For shooting a large number of pictures.
z 4 : 3 F
• For shooting a large number of pictures.
• For attaching to e-mail.
• For posting on a website.119
11
Appendices
Defaults Settings/Functions Whose
Defaults Are Restored When the Camera Is
Turned Off
Turning the camera off may reset some function settings to their
defaults. The table below indicates whether or not the function is reset
to its default when the camera is turned off.
{: setting is saved ×: setting is reset
Function Default Settings
Shooting Density { Normal
Size (Text Mode) { l 4 : 3
Movie Size { x 1280
Picture Quality/Size { l 4 : 3 N
Picture Quality/Size (Skew Correction) { a 4 : 3 F
Focus { Multi AF
Focus (Firefighting) { Snap
Exposure Metering { Multi
Continuous Mode × Off
Image Settings { Standard
Auto Bracket { Off
Time Exposure { Off
Interval Shooting × 0 Sec.
Camera Shake Correction { Off
Date Imprint { Off
Exposure Compensation { 0.0
White Balance { Auto
ISO Setting { Auto
Edit Detection { Off
Macro { Macro Off
Flash { Flash Off
Self-Timer × Off
Playback Volume Adjustment { —
Setup LCD Brightness { —
Reg. My Settings { —
Stepped Zoom { Off
ADJ Button Setting 1 { Exposure Comp.
ADJ Button Setting 2 { White Balance
ADJ Button Setting 3 { ISO
ADJ Button Setting 4 { Quality120
Appendices
11
{: setting is saved ×: setting is reset
Function Default Settings
Setup AF Auxiliary Light { On
Operation Sounds { All
Volume Settings { ??? (Medium)
LCD Confirmation Time { 0.5 seconds
Auto Power Off { 5 minutes
Monitor Auto off Delay { Off
LCD Auto Dim { On
Digital Zoom Image { Normal
Level Setting { Display
Grid Guide Display Options {
Shooting Info. Display Frame { Off
Auto Rotate { On
Card Sequence No. { Off
Date Settings { —
Language/N { (
*
1)
Video Out Mode { (
*
1)
CALS Pic Quality { a 4 : 3 N
Start Date/Time { On
Choose/Change Password { —
Password Protection { Off
Password Validity Period { Off
Power Button Hold Options { Off
Camera Memo Camera Memo Mode { Mode1
Memo Skip { Item 2
Mark Memo Added to Photos { Off
Memo Warning { Off
Display Memo at Startup { Off
Memo Increment { Off
Camera Memo Imprint { Off
Camera Memo 1 Auto Delete { Off
Barcode Type { Auto
Barcode Mode { Mode1
Scan Time { 3 seconds
(
*
1)
The default setting varies depending on where you purchased the camera.121
11
Appendices
Using a Wide Conversion Lens
A wide conversion lens (DW-5) enables
shooting at a lens magnification of
0.8 times (equivalent to a 35 mm
camera’s 22 mm zoom in wide-angle).
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• When the wide conversion lens is attached, set the zoom position to the wideangle end.
• When the wide conversion lens is attached, even if you use the internal or
external flash, the area around the subject is not illuminated sufficiently so the
picture will be partly underexposed.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
For cleaning and storage, see the documentation that came with your wide
conversion lens.
Optional Filters
Commercially-available filters with a
diameter of 37 mm can be mounted on
the lens to protect it from damage and
condensation.122
Appendices
11
Using the External Flash
You can attach an external flash and
other accessories (available in stores) to
the accessory shoe.
You can only use an external flash
equipped with both of the following functions.
• Slave flash function (flash is triggered in response to the firing of
another flash)
• Pre-flash support function (flash is synchronized with the second
flash instead of the pre-flash)
Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• The accessory shoe conforms to JIS B7101.
• You cannot use an external flash with no spring or lock mechanism.
• You cannot use an external flash for which synchronization with the pre-flash
cannot be cancelled.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The accessory shoe does not support a synchronizer contact.123
11
Appendices
Using Your Camera Abroad
Battery Charger (Model BJ-6)
The battery charger can be used in regions with a current of 100–240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz.
If you are going to travel to a country that uses a different shaped wall outlet/plug,
please consult your travel agent on a plug adapter suitable for wall outlets in your
country of destination.
Do not use electrical transformers. It may damage the camera.
Warranty
This product was manufactured for use in the country in which it was purchased.
The warranty is only valid in the country in which the camera was purchased.
Should the product fail or malfunction while you are abroad, the manufacturer
assumes no responsibility for servicing the product locally or bearing the
expenditure incurred therefore.
Playback on Television in Other Regions
Playback is possible on televisions (or monitors) equipped with a video input
terminal. Please use the AV cable provided.
This camera is compatible with both NTSC and PAL television formats. Set the video
format on the camera to match that of the television you are using.
When you go abroad, set your camera to the local video format.124
Appendices
11
Cautions on Use
Waterproofing
• This camera conforms to the specifications for JIS/IEC waterproof grade 8
and JIS/IEC dustproof grade 6 (IP68).
• After shooting in the rain or cleaning in water, water may seep through the
eyepiece of the lens segment and the tripod screw holes on the underside.
This is not a problem because these sections are of double structure.
• The internal mechanisms of the camera are neither waterproof nor dustproof.
• Should water enter the inside of the camera, remove the batteries
immediately and contact the Ricoh Repair Center.
Cautions on Use
• When opening and closing the battery/card cover or terminal cover, take
care to prevent any water, sand, mud, dust, or other foreign matter that may
have adhered to the camera from entering the interior of device. If possible,
avoid opening or closing the camera at the beach, near the sea, or in sandy
soil to prevent seawater or sand from getting inside.
• Open and close the battery/card cover or terminal cover with your bare
hands. Do not wear gloves, as any sand, dust, or other foreign matter that
may have adhered to the gloves may get inside the camera. Remove any
water, sand, mud, dust, or other foreign matter that may have adhered to
the camera and open and close the covers in a place where it will not be
exposed to dirt.
• Water droplets may get inside when the cover is opened. Wipe dry before
using.
• Because of its waterproof structure, the mode dial may be hard to turn
when it has not been operated for a long time. If this occurs, operate the dial
several times to restore it to the initial state.
• On a sandy beach or in a dusty place such as a construction site, pay
sufficient attention to prevent sand or dust from adhering to the camera.
• Do not leave the camera in places where there are extremes of temperature
or humidity, such as in a closed car, at the seashore, or in a bathroom.
• Do not force the battery/card cover or terminal cover.
• Do not lift the camera by the battery/card cover or terminal cover.
• If any foreign object (metal, water, liquid) gets inside the camera, stop
using the camera immediately. Turn the power off, remove the battery and
memory card, and consult your nearest dealer or Ricoh Repair Center.
• In cold climates, if the camera has water droplets adhering to its surface, they
may freeze. Using the camera with ice on it may cause it to fail. Do not leave
the camera with water adhering to it.
• This product was manufactured for use in the country in which it was purchased.
The warranty is only valid in the country in which the camera was purchased.125
11
Appendices
• Should the product fail or malfunction while you are abroad, the
manufacturer assumes no responsibility for servicing the product locally or
bearing the expenditure incurred therefore.
• Be sure not to drop or apply any sudden force to the camera.
• While you are carrying the camera, be careful not to hit it against other
objects. Take special care to not hit the lens and picture display.
• Firing the flash consecutively may heat the firing unit. Do not fire it
consecutively more than necessary.
• Do not touch the flash and keep foreign objects away from the firing unit.
Doing so can cause burns and fires.
• Do not fire the flash near eyes. It could cause visual impairment (particularly
for infants).
• Do not fire the flash near the driver of a vehicle to avoid causing accidents.
• The battery may become hot after extended use. Touching the battery
immediately after use could result in burns to your fingers.
• If the picture display or panel is exposed to sunlight, they may become
washed out and images may become hard to view.
• The picture display and panel may contain some pixels that do not remain
lit up continually in part or at all. Also, the brightness may become uneven
because of the characteristics of LCDs. These are not failures.
• Do not forcefully press the surface of the picture display.
• In an environment where the temperature changes suddenly, condensation
may occur in the camera, resulting in troubles such as fogging of the glass
surface or malfunctions of the camera. If this occurs, place the camera in a
bag to slow the temperature change as much as possible. Take it out of the
bag after the temperature difference from the atmosphere has decreased
to a fairly small amount. If condensation occurs, remove the battery and
memory card, and wait until the moisture has dried before using the camera.
• To avoid damaging the connectors, do not put any objects into the camera’s
microphone or speaker holes.
• Before taking any important pictures (such as at weddings, on trips abroad,
etc.), test the camera to check operation and ensure proper functioning. We
recommend that you keep this manual and spare battery on hand.
Conditions in which condensation may easily occur: -----------------------
• When the camera is moved to an environment where the temperature differs greatly.
• In humid places.
• In a room immediately after being heated, or when the camera is exposed
directly to cooled air from an air-conditioner or another similar appliance.126
Appendices
11
Care and Storage
Care
• Please note that if fingerprints, dirt, etc. get onto the lens, picture quality will suffer.
• Any dust or dirt on the lens should be gently removed either with a blower
(available from third-party suppliers) or a soft cloth, paying particular attention to
the area around the lens barrel. Do not touch the lens directly with your fingers.
• If the camera is dirty or after use at the beach, take the following steps: Make sure
the battery/card cover and terminal cover are securely closed. Fill a wash-basin or
bowl with tap water and use the water to remove any dirt, sand or salt from the
camera, and then wipe the camera dry with a soft, dry cloth.
• If the rubber packing is dirty, wipe it clean with a soft, dry cloth. If the rubber packing
has anything sticking to it or it is cracked or damaged, its waterproofing function may
be compromised, resulting in leakage. If dirt cannot be removed or the packing is
damaged, request your nearest dealer or Ricoh Repair Center to replace the packing.
• In the unlikely event that your camera fails to work properly, please consult your
Ricoh Repair Center.
• There are high voltage circuits in this camera. As this is dangerous, do not
dismantle this camera under any circumstances.
• Do not get volatile substances, such as thinner, benzene, or pesticides on your
camera. This may cause a change in quality, paint to peel, etc.
• As the surface of the picture display is easily scratched, do not rub hard objects against it.
• Clean the surface of the picture display by wiping gently with a soft cloth
containing a small amount of display cleaner (that does not contain organic
solvents) sold in stores.
Use and Storage
• Please avoid using or storing your camera in the following kinds of places, as this
may damage the camera.
- In high heat and humidity, or where there is severe change in temperature or
humidity.
- Places with a lot of dust, dirt or sand.
- Places with severe vibration.
- Places where it is in direct contact with vinyl or rubber products or chemicals,
including mothballs or other insect repellent, for long periods of time.
- Places with strong magnetic fields (near a monitor, transformer, magnet, etc.).
• To keep the camera free from dust and other foreign matter, store it in a lint-free
case. Do not place it directly in a pocket or other location where it will be exposed
to dirt or lint.
• Remove the battery if you are not going to use the camera for a long period of
time.127
11
Appendices
Replacing the rubber packing
To maintain the waterproof ability, replace the rubber packing every two years,
regardless of whether it has gotten dirty. If you use the camera frequently in a wet,
sandy, or dusty environment, we recommend replacing the packing every year. The
replacement will be performed by the Ricoh Repair Center on a chargeable basis.
Precautions regarding care of your camera
1. Be sure to turn the power off.
2. Remove the batteries before caring for your camera.128
Appendices
11
Warranty and Servicing
1. This product is backed by a limited warranty. During the warranty period mentioned
in the Warranty supplied with your camera, any defective parts will be repaired free
of charge. In the event of a camera malfunction, contact the dealer from which you
purchased the camera or your nearest Ricoh Repair Center. Please note that you will be
not be reimbursed for the cost of bringing the camera to the Ricoh Repair Center.
2. This warranty does not cover any damage resulting from:
1 failure to follow the instructions in the instruction manual;
2 repair, modification or overhaul not conducted by an authorized service center listed
in the instruction manual;
3 fire, natural disaster, act of God, lightning, abnormal voltage, etc.;
4 improper storage (noted in the “Camera User Guide”), leaking of battery and other
fluids, mold, or otherwise insufficient care of the camera.
5 dropping the camera or exposing it to water, mud, sand, etc. with the battery/card
cover or terminal cover open.
3. After the warranty period has passed, you will be liable for all repair fees, including those
incurred at an authorized service center.
4. You will be liable for all repair fees, even within the warranty period, if the warranty card is
not attached or if the distributor's name or the purchase date have been changed or are
not indicated on the card.
5. Expenses for overhaul and thorough inspection by special request of the customer will be
charged to the customer, whether or not they are incurred during the warranty period.
6. This warranty only applies to the camera and not to the accessories, such as the case and
strap, nor does it apply to the battery and other consumables provided.
7. Any consequential damages arising from failure of the camera, such as expenses incurred
in taking pictures or loss of expected profit, will not be reimbursed whether they occur
during the warranty period or not.
8. The warranty is only valid in the country in which the camera was purchased.
* The above provisions refer to repairs offered free of charge, and do not limit your legal
rights.
* The intention of the above provisions is also described in the warranty card provided
with this camera.
9. Parts essential to the servicing of the camera (that is, components required to maintain
the functions and quality of the camera) will be available for a period of five years after
the camera is discontinued.
10. Please note that if the camera is seriously damaged by flooding, submergence, infiltration
of sand or mud, violent shocks or dropping, it may not be repairable, and restoration to
its original condition may be impossible.
Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
• Before sending the camera in for repair, check the battery and read the
instruction manual again to ensure proper operation.
• Some repairs require a significant amount of time to be completed.
• When sending the camera to a service center, please include a note which
describes the defective part and the problem as precisely as possible.
• Remove all accessories not related to the problem before sending the camera
to the service center.
• This warranty does not apply to data stored on an SD memory card or in
internal memory.129
11
Appendices
INFORMATION TO THE USER
USA FCC Part 15 Class B
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in
a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. (FCC 15.105B)
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. (FCC 15.21)
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used for connections to
host computer in order to comply with FCC emission limits. (FCC 15.27)
An AC adapter with a ferrite core must be used for RF interference suppression.
COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT
Product Name: DIGITAL CAMERA
Model Number: G700
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell NJ, 07006 Tel.: 1-800-225-1899
Note to Users in Canada
Note: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003
Remarque Concernant les Utilisateurs au Canada
Avertissement : Cet appareil numerique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB-003
du Canada
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
DANGER-TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS.130
Index
A
Accessory Shoe ....................................... 14, 122
ADJ./MEMO Button .................................15, 46
ADJ Button Setting ..................................46, 77
Adobe Reader .................................................. 100
AE/AF Target Shift .............................................47
AF Auxiliary Light ......................................14, 77
Auto Bracket ................................................57, 61
Auto Focus/Flash Lamp ................ 15, 28, 31
Auto Power Off...........................................25, 77
Auto Rotate ..........................................................78
Auto Shooting Mode .............................13, 27
AV Cable .........................................................12, 74
AV Output Terminal .................................15, 74
B
Barcode Mode ....................................................90
Barcode Type .......................................................90
Battery .............................................................22, 23
Battery/Card Cover ..................................15, 23
Battery Charger ..........................................12, 22
C
CALS Mode ...................................................13, 33
CALS Pic Quality ................................................80
Camera Memo ....................................................53
Camera Memo 1 Auto Delete ...................89
Camera Memo Imprint .................................89
Camera Memo Menu .....................................87
Camera Memo Mode .....................................88
Camera Shake .....................................................29
Camera Shake Correction............................58
Card Sequence No. ..........................................79
CD-ROM..........................................................12, 96
Choose/Change Password .................80, 83
Continuous Mode ............................................57
Contrast Correction .................................66, 70
Copy to Card from Internal Memory ....66
D
Date Imprint ........................................................58
Date Settings ...............................................25, 79
Delete.......................................................................37
Delete Button ..............................................15, 37
Density ....................................................................56
Digital Zoom ................................................30, 82
Digital Zoom Image ........................ 30, 78, 82
Direct Print ............................................................91
DISP. Button ..................................................15, 40
Display Memo at Startup .............................89
DL-10 ................................................................96, 98
DPOF ................................................................66, 73
E
EC1 .............................................................................99
Edit Detection .....................................................59
Enlarged view .....................................................36
Error Messages ................................................ 106
EX1 .......................................................................... 100
Exposure Compensation .....................58, 62
Exposure Metering ..........................................56
External Flash ................................................... 122
F
Firefighting ...........................................................48
Flash .......................................................... 14, 15, 31
Focus ................................................................56, 60
Format [Card] ......................................................76
Format [Internal Memory] ...........................76
G
Grid Guide Display ...........................................40
Grid Guide Display Options........................78
H
High Sens...............................................................48
Histogram Display ............................................44
I
Image Settings ...................................................57
Internal Memory ............................................ 117
Interval Shooting ..............................................58
ISO Setting ....................................................59, 64
L
Language/N ........................................25, 79
LCD Auto Dim .....................................................77
LCD Brightness ...................................................76
LCD Confirmation Time ................................77
Lens ...........................................................................14
Level Indicator ....................................................42
Level Setting ................................................42, 78
List Editor ...............................................................98
M
Macro ...............................................................15, 30
Manual Focus (MF)...........................................60
Mark Memo Added to Photos ..................88
ME1 ............................................................................98
MediaBrowser .....................................................98131
Memo Increment..............................................89
Memo Skip ............................................................88
Memo Warning ..................................................88
MENU/OK Button.............. 15, 55, 65, 75, 87
Microphone .........................................................14
Mode Dial ......................................................13, 14
Monitor Auto off Delay .................................77
Movie ...............................................................48, 51
Movie Size .............................................................56
My Settings Mode (MY) ........................13, 33
N
Neck strap .............................................................12
O
Operation Sounds ............................................77
Optional Filter .................................................. 121
P
Password Protection ....................... 25, 80, 85
Password Validity Period ...............................80
PictBridge ..............................................................91
Picture Display ............................................15, 16
Picture Quality/Size .........................................56
Playback Button ......................... 15, 25, 34, 65
Playback Menu ...................................................65
Playback Mode ...................................................25
POWER Button ....................................................14
Power Button Hold Options.......................80
Protect .............................................................66, 72
R
Rechargeable Battery .....................................22
Recover File ..........................................................67
Reg. My Settings ........................................76, 81
Remove Memo Marking ..............................88
Report Print ..........................................................95
Resize .......................................................................66
Restore Defaults ................................................59
S
Scan Time ..............................................................90
Scene Mode (SCENE) ..............................13, 48
SDHC card .............................................................20
SD Memory Card ............................ 20, 23, 117
SD WORM card ...................................................20
Self-timer .......................................................15, 32
Setup Menu .........................................................75
Shooting Info. Display Frame ....................78
Shooting Menu ..................................................55
Shutter Release Button .........................14, 27
Size .............................................................................56
Skew Correction ........................................66, 71
Skew Correct Mode .................................48, 50
Slide Show ............................................................66
Speaker ...................................................................14
Start Date/Time .................................................80
Stepped Zoom ...................................................76
Strap Eyelet ...........................................................14
Synchro-Monitor Mode ................................40
T
Terminal Cover ...................................................15
Text Mode .............................................................48
Thumbnail View .................................................34
Time Exposure ....................................................57
Trim ...................................................................66, 68
Tripod Screw Hole ............................................15
TV playback ..........................................................74
U
USB Cable .................................12, 91, 102, 104
USB Terminal ........................................................15
V
Video Out Mode ................................................79
Volume Settings ................................................77
W
White Balance .............................................59, 63
White Balance Bracket (WB-BKT) ............61
Wide Conversion Lens ........................ 12, 121
Z
Zoom ........................................................................29
Zoom Macro ........................................................48Telephone Support Numbers in Europe
UK (from within the UK) 0203 239 6327
(from outside the UK) +44 203 239 6327
Deutschland (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438
(außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438
France (à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70
(en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94
Italia (dall'Italia) 02 4004 7319
(dall'estero) +39 02 4004 7319
España (desde España) 900984912
(desde fuera de España) +49 6331 268 440
http://www.service.ricohpmmc.com/*L757 2971A*
From environmental friendliness to environmental conservation and
to environmental management
Ricoh is aggressively promoting environmentfriendly activities and also environment
conservation activities to solve the great subject
of management as one of the citizens on our
precious earth.
To reduce the environmental loads of digital cameras, Ricoh is also trying to solve the great subjects
of “Saving energy by reducing power consumption” and “Reducing environment-affecting chemical
substances contained in products”.
If a problem arises
First of all, see “Troubleshooting” (GP.106) in this manual. If the issues still persist, please contact a
Ricoh office.
Ricoh Offices
RICOH COMPANY, LTD. 3-2-3, Shin-Yokohama Kouhoku-ku, Yokohama City, Kanagawa 222-8530, JAPAN
http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/
RICOH AMERICAS
CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006, U.S.A.
1-800-22RICOH
http://www.ricoh-usa.com/
RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V.
(EPMMC)
Oberrather Straße 6, D-40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY
(innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438
(außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438
http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/
RICOH ASIA PACIFIC
OPERATIONS LIMITED
21/F, One Kowloon, 1 Wang Yuen Street, Kowloon Bay, Hong Kong
About MediaBrowser
North America (U.S.) (Toll Free) +1-800-458-4029
Europe UK, Germany, France and Spain: (Toll Free) +800-1532-4865
Other Countries: +44-1489-564-764
Asia +63-2-438-0090
China +86-21-5385-3786
Business hours: 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM
Ricoh Company, Ltd.
Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo
104-8222, Japan
2010 September
EN USA GB GB AE AE
Printed in Vietnam
Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future reference.
1 Pre-operation Confirmation
2 Login and Logout
3 Displaying Device Information
4 Downloading and Installing Packages
5 Appendix
User's GuideHow to Read This Manual
Symbols
The following set of symbols is used in this manual.
Indicates a situation that may result in property damage or malfunction if instructions are not followed. Be
sure to read the instructions.
Indicates information or preparations required prior to operating.
Indicates a function's limitations.
Indicates supplementary relevant information.
Indicates where you can find further relevant information.
[ ]
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the computer screen.
Terminology
The following is an explanation of the terminology used in this manual:
Term Explanation
Device A "device" is a printer or multifunction machine connected to the network or
a printer connected to a computer via USB. Though the term generally includes
routers, hubs, and other network devices, "device" in this manual is limited to
printers and multifunction machines.
Domain name Name of the domain with which computers with Remote Communication Gate
S installed are affiliated. Entry is required if the Domain name entry field
appears on the login screen. Ask the administrator for detailed information.
1Term Explanation
Download In general, download is a process of receiving and saving a copy of programs
or files in a computer via a network. In Remote Communication Gate S, it refers
to the process of a user computer receiving and saving packages stored on
the Remote Communication Gate S server.
Filter On the device list screens, you can use filters to display only the printers or
logs that meet specified conditions. Thus, you can sort the devices to be
displayed by using the filtering functions. The filters created by the
administrator and users and the filters created by a user can be edited by that
user.
Group The administrator creates groups in order to classify devices. Groups are
displayed on the [Directory] tab and clicking them displays the device used
in the group.
Login Connection to Remote Communication Gate S on the network, noticing a state
in which operations are enabled.
Logout Disconnection from Remote Communication Gate S.
Menu bar Grouping of operations that can be executed on displayed screens. Items are
selected on the drop-down menu.
Package (Installation
Package)
A package is an ".exe" file that contains all of the necessary files and settings
to install a device driver. Packages are used to distribute device drivers by the
administrator via Remote Communication Gate S. You can download it from
the Remote Communication Gate S and all content registered in a package
is installed by running the ".exe" file.
Screens
The explanations in this manual use screen images from Windows Vista and Internet Explorer 7.0. If you
use another version of Windows, screen images may differ. However, you can perform the same steps.
2Guides for This Solution
The following guides are available for Remote Communication Gate S:
Remote Communication Gate S User's Guide (this manual, HTML/PDF)
This guide is intended for the end user. It explains how to display devices, search for devices, and
install packages by logging in Remote Communication Gate S.
Remote Communication Gate S Installation Guide (HTML/PDF)
This guide is intended for the administrator and explains the installation, uninstallation, and initial setup
procedures for Remote Communication Gate S.
Remote Communication Gate S Administrator Operations Guide (HTML/PDF)
This guide is intended for the administrator. It explains how to utilize Remote Communication Gate
S to configure and manage settings and operations: for example, registration and monitoring of
devices, the creation of installation packages, or retrieval of device logs.
• Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader is required to view the PDF documentation.
• You can view the HTML documentation using a Web browser. We recommend Microsoft Internet
Explorer 4.01 SP2 or a later version.
• A simplified version of the HTML documentation is available for earlier or non-recommended
browsers.
• If JavaScript is disabled or unavailable in your browser, you will not be able to search or use certain
buttons in the HTML documentation.
• If you are using an earlier or non-recommended browser and the simplified version of the
documentation does not appear automatically, replace \int\index_book.htm with \unv
\index_book.htm in your browser's address bar.
3Important
• TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW:
• THE SUPPLIER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE RESULT OF OPERATION OF THIS SOFTWARE
OR THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT.
• THE SUPPLIER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES OR LOSS OF ANY
DOCUMENT OR DATA PRODUCED BY USING THIS SOFTWARE.
• THE SUPPLIER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL
OR INDIRECT DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, AND THE
LIKE) CAUSED BY FAILURE OF THIS SOFTWARE OR LOSS OF DOCUMENTS OR DATA, NOR
FOR ANY OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, IF THE
SUPPLIER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
• Some illustrations or explanations in this guide may differ from your product due to improvement or
change in the product.
• The contents of this document are subject to change without notice.
• No part of this document may be duplicated, replicated, reproduced in any form, modified or quoted
without prior consent of the supplier.
• It is possible that any document or data stored in the computer will be damaged or lost by user error
during operation or software error. Be sure to back up all important data beforehand. Important
documents and data should always be copied or backed up. Documents and data can be lost because
of malfunction or human error. Furthermore, the customer is responsible for protection measures
against computer viruses, worms, and other harmful software.
• Do not remove or insert any disk while operating this software.
4Trademarks
Adobe
®
, Adobe Acrobat
®
, Acrobat Reader
®
and Flash
®
are either registered trademarks or trademarks
of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Microsoft
®
, Windows
®
, Windows Server
®
, Windows Vista
®
, and Internet Explorer
®
are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Pentium®
is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/)
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• The product names of Windows 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
2000 Professional
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
2000 Server
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
2000 Advanced Server
• The product names of Windows XP are as follows:
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
XP Home Edition
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
XP Professional
• The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
Microsoft
®
Windows Vista
®
Ultimate
Microsoft
®
Windows Vista
®
Enterprise
Microsoft
®
Windows Vista
®
Business
Microsoft
®
Windows Vista
®
Home Premium
Microsoft
®
Windows Vista
®
Home Basic
• The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
7 Home Premium
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
7 Professional
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
7 Ultimate
• The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft
®
Windows Server
®
2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft
®
Windows Server
®
2003 Enterprise Edition
• The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft
®
Windows Server
®
2003 R2 Standard Edition
5Microsoft
®
Windows Server
®
2003 R2 Enterprise Edition
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows:
Microsoft
®
Windows Server
®
2008 Standard
Microsoft
®
Windows Server
®
2008 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft
®
Windows Server
®
2008 R2 Standard
Microsoft
®
Windows Server
®
2008 R2 Enterprise
6TABLE OF CONTENTS
How to Read This Manual.................................................................................................................................1
Symbols...........................................................................................................................................................1
Terminology....................................................................................................................................................1
Screens............................................................................................................................................................2
Guides for This Solution.....................................................................................................................................3
Important.............................................................................................................................................................4
Trademarks..........................................................................................................................................................5
1. Pre-operation Confirmation
What You Can Do with Remote Communication Gate S................................................................................9
System Requirements.......................................................................................................................................10
Activating Browser JavaScript....................................................................................................................11
2. Login and Logout
Login..................................................................................................................................................................13
Logout................................................................................................................................................................15
3. Displaying Device Information
Layout of the Device List Screen......................................................................................................................17
Device List Menu Functions.........................................................................................................................18
Features of Status Icon on the Device List..................................................................................................20
Layout of Site Map......................................................................................................................................23
Changing the Login Password....................................................................................................................24
Displaying the Device List................................................................................................................................25
Displaying the Device List by Specifying Search Conditions...................................................................25
Displaying the Device List by Using Filters.................................................................................................28
Sorting the Display Order of the Device List..............................................................................................33
Displaying Maps..............................................................................................................................................35
Displaying the Map from the Device List....................................................................................................35
Displaying the Simplified Map from the Printer Properties.......................................................................38
Displaying Device Information........................................................................................................................41
Displaying Device Information from Menu Bar.........................................................................................41
Displaying Device Information from the Properties Icon...........................................................................41
Content of the Device Information Screen.................................................................................................42
4. Downloading and Installing Packages
What Are Packages?.......................................................................................................................................49
7Downloading Packages..................................................................................................................................50
Downloading Packages from the Package List.........................................................................................50
Downloading Packages from the Map......................................................................................................52
Downloading Packages with a URL Sent by E-mail..................................................................................52
Opening Packages and Installing Drivers......................................................................................................54
5. Appendix
About Help.......................................................................................................................................................55
If Your Computer is Running Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later/Vista/7..........................................56
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................................57
INDEX.............................................................................................................................................................59
81. Pre-operation Confirmation
This chapter explains Remote Communication Gate S and system requirements for user's computers to
operate Remote Communication Gate S.
What You Can Do with Remote Communication
Gate S
Remote Communication Gate S is a Web-based application that provides device management solutions.
Logging in from a computer to the Remote Communication Gate S server using a Web browser allows you
to perform the following:
• Display the device list using search conditions
• Display the device map with device status and its location
• Display the detailed information for devices
• Download and Install drivers using a package created by the administrator
• For details about displaying the device list and searching for devices, see p.25 "Displaying the
Device List".
• For details about displaying the Map, see p.35 "Displaying Maps".
• For details about displaying detailed device information, see p.41 "Displaying Device
Information".
• For details about downloading and installing drivers using packages, see p.50 "Downloading
Packages" and p.54 "Opening Packages and Installing Drivers".
9
1System Requirements
To operate Remote Communication Gate S, the system must meet the following requirements.
Item Requirements
Hardware • CPU: Pentium compatible 500 MHz or higher
• Memory: 128 MB or higher
• Minimum available hard disk space: same as recommended
minimum for operating system
Operating System • Windows 2000 Professional/Server/Advanced Server (i386):
Service Pack 4 or later
• Windows XP Home Edition/Professional: Service Pack 2 or later
• Windows Vista Ultimate/Enterprise/Business/Home Premium/
Home Basic
• Windows 7 Home Premium/Professional/Ultimate
• Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition/Enterprise Edition:
Service Pack 2 or later
• Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition/Enterprise Edition:
Service Pack 2 or later
• Windows Server 2008 Standard/Enterprise
• Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard/Enterprise
Supported Language English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch
• Remote Communication Gate S supports only these six
languages. If the display language is not one of these languages,
Remote Communication Gate S is displayed in English. The
priority of the display language can be changed in the Language
preference settings in Internet Explorer.
1. Pre-operation Confirmation
10
1Item Requirements
Web Browser • Internet Explorer 6.0 Service Pack 1 or later
• Internet Explorer 7.0
• Internet Explorer 8.0
• JavaScript must be activated.
• Adobe Flash Player 9.0 or later must be installed.
• For details about the method for activating JavaScript, see
p.11 "Activating Browser JavaScript".
Network TCP/IP must be installed and properly configured.
Screen Resolution 1024 x 768 or higher
Activating Browser JavaScript
To access and view Remote Communication Gate S, it is necessary to activate JavaScript on the Web
browser.
1. Select [Internet Options...] on the Internet Explorer [Tools] menu.
2. Click the [Security] tab.
3. Click [Custom Level...].
4. Under [Scripting] select [Enable] in [Active scripting].
5. Click [OK] to close the [Security Settings] dialog box.
6. Click [OK] to close the [Internet Options] dialog box.
System Requirements
11
11. Pre-operation Confirmation
12
12. Login and Logout
This chapter explains the procedures for logging in and out of the Remote Communication Gate S server.
Login
To log in to the Remote Communication Gate S server, the following information is required and must be
obtained from the administrator in advance:
• URL of the Remote Communication Gate S server
• User name
• Password
• Domain name (If required)
• If you are using Windows Server 2003 or 2008, settings must be made in advance. Contact
the administrator.
• When using Remote Communication Gate S, do not use your browser's [Back] button or other
browser functions. Use only the navigation controls on the content pages.
• If you want to switch users, click the [Logout] button, and then log in again as a different user.
Do not use your browser's [Back] button to redisplay the login screen.
1. Start Internet Explorer.
2. Enter the following URL in the address bar, and then press the [Enter] key on the keyboard.
Condition URL
Without SSL encryption http://{host name}:{port number}/mgmt
or
http://{IP address}:{port number}/mgmt
With SSL encryption https://{host name}:{port number}/mgmt
or
https://{IP address}:{port number}/mgmt
• {host name}: name of the Remote Communication Gate S server
• {IP address}: IP address of the Remote Communication Gate S server
• {port number}: port number specified when Remote Communication Gate S was installed
13
23. If the [Trial Version] screen appears, click [OK].
• The [Trial Version] screen will only appear if Remote Communication Gate S has not been
activated. For details, contact the administrator.
4. Enter your user name in the [User name:] box on the login screen.
5. Enter your password in the [Password:] box.
• For details about changing your password, see p.24 "Changing the Login Password".
6. Enter domain name if the [Domain name:] box is displayed.
7. Click [Login].
• The login screen reappears if no operation is performed for more than 30 minutes after logging
in to the Remote Communication Gate S server. Log in again if necessary.
2. Login and Logout
14
2Logout
Use the following procedure for logging out from Remote Communication Gate S.
1. Click [Logout] on the screen.
• Do not use the [Close] button to shut down the system.
Logout
15
22. Login and Logout
16
23. Displaying Device Information
This chapter explains the device list screen which is displayed on the top page when you log in Remote
Communication Gate S.
Layout of the Device List Screen
The screen layout of the device list is as follows:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
BXM001S
1. Search button
Searches for a specific device using search conditions. When searching for a device, click this button,
and then enter the conditions for your search.
• For details about searching for devices using Search button, see p.25 "Displaying the Device
List by Specifying Search Conditions".
2. Group display
Displays the group name of the displayed device list.
3. [Directory] tab
Displays registered filters and groups.
4. Filter
Refines the device list using search conditions. When a filter is selected, the corresponding devices
are displayed in the device list display area.
Filters can be added by the administrator, and you can also create your own filters. Filters that you
create are available only to you.
17
3• For details about searching for devices using filters, see p.28 "Displaying the Device List by
Using Filters".
5. Group list
Displays the group list if the device is managed as a group.
6. Menu bar
Displays the menu that is available on the device list screen.
7. [Quick Links] area
Displays screen links that are used frequently or related to the present screen. For details about the
selected links, contact the administrator.
8. Site Map button
Displays all operation links that are available in Remote Communication Gate S.
• For details about Site Map, see p.23 "Layout of Site Map".
9. Help button
Displays the Help screen.
• For details about Help, see p.55 "About Help".
10. [Logout] button
Logs out from the Remote Communication Gate S server.
• For details about logout, see p.15 "Logout".
11. Login user name
Displays the login user name.
12. Refresh button
Refreshes the device list screen and displays the latest device information.
13. Device list display area
Displays the list of devices.
Device List Menu Functions
Various functions available in the [Directory] tab are also accessible from the menu bar. The device list
menu provides the following functions:
3. Displaying Device Information
18
3[Edit] menu
Item Allows you to
Select All Select all found devices in the list.
Clear All Deselect all devices selected in the list.
[Printer] menu
Item Allows you to
Refresh Selected Device Connect to the selected devices and collect details about their current
device status. The device list screen is not updated when you select this
item.
To display the device list screen with the most recent device status
information, select [Refresh Selected Device] on the menu, and then click
the Refresh button in the right-upper area on the screen.
Printer Properties... Display details of a selected device.
• For details about the [Printer Properties...] menu, see p.41
"Displaying Device Information".
[Filter] menu
Item Allows you to
Printers with Errors Display a list of devices with errors on the [Printers with Errors] screen.
• For details about searching devices with errors, see p.28
"Displaying a list of devices with errors".
No Response Devices Display a list of devices that have not responded to polling for a specified
number of days.
No Filters Display a list of all found devices.
Filter Settings... Register and edit filters that you created.
[View] menu
Item Allows you to
Display Directory Display the [Directory] tab.
Layout of the Device List Screen
19
3Item Allows you to
Hide Directory Hide the [Directory] tab.
List Display a list of devices.
Map Display a floor map of grouped devices with device icons.
• For details about the Map function, see p.35 "Displaying
Maps".
Search Devices... Display the [Search] screen.
• For details about searching for devices, see p.25 "Displaying
the Device List by Specifying Search Conditions".
[Sort by] menu
Item Allows you to
Selected Printers Sort the list of found devices alphabetically according to selected
printers.
Device Display Name Sort the list of found devices alphabetically according to model names.
IP Address Sort the list of found devices according to their IP addresses.
System Sort the list of found devices according to common system icons.
Printer Sort the list of found devices according to printer status icons.
MAC Address Sort the list of found devices according to their MAC addresses.
Registered Group Sort the list of found devices according to the groups that the devices
are registered to.
Features of Status Icon on the Device List
Status icons appear on the device list screen and inform the visual notice with icons.
3. Displaying Device Information
20
31 2
BXM002S
1. System status icon
• There are several types of system status icon. For the details about each icon, see p.21 "System
status icons".
2. Printer status icon
• There are several types of printer status icon. For details about the each icon, see p.22 "Printer
status icons".
The following table explains the various icons displayed in the device list:
System status icons
Status icon Explanation
There was no response from the printer.
A service call is required.
The printer has run out of paper, toner, or other supplies.
An access violation has occurred.
An excessive number of attempts have been made to access this device.
Layout of the Device List Screen
21
3Printer status icons
Status icon Explanation
There was no response from the printer.
The printer has run out of toner/ink.
A paper jam has occurred.
The printer has run out of paper.
A cover is open.
The printer has run out of staples.
The punch waste receptacle is full.
The waste toner receptacle is full.
A paper jam has occurred inside the Auto Document Feeder (ADF).
A communication error has occurred.
The paper output tray is full.
An output tray is full.
An unavailable function was attempted.
An unknown error has occurred.
The printer is currently offline.
The printer is warming up.
The printer's toner/ink is about to run out.
The printer's paper is about to run out.
Warning concerning a failed operation or unsupported function.
3. Displaying Device Information
22
3Status icon Explanation
The printer is in Power Save Mode.
The printer is busy processing and not ready to perform a new operation.
The printer is busy printing a job.
The printer is ready to perform a new print job.
Layout of Site Map
The screen layout of the Site Map is as follows:
1
2
3
4
5
BXM005S
1. All Printers
Displays a list of devices connected to Remote Communication Gate S.
• For details about device list, see p.17 "Layout of the Device List Screen".
2. Printers with Errors
Displays a list of devices with system errors.
• For details about Printer with Errors, see p.28 "Displaying a list of devices with errors".
3. [Back] button
Returns to the previous page.
4. User Account Settings
Displays [User Information] screen, and you can change the password for login.
• For details about User Account Settings, see p.24 "Changing the Login Password".
Layout of the Device List Screen
23
35. Filter Settings
Displays the [Filter Settings] screen, and you can edit or delete registered filters.
• For details about Filter Settings, see p.31 "Editing filters", and p.33 "Deleting filters".
Changing the Login Password
The following procedure allows you to change your login password. Change your password for security
reason.
1. On the device list screen, click the Site Map button in the upper-right area.
2. Click [User Account Settings].
3. Enter the new password.
4. Click [OK].
3. Displaying Device Information
24
3Displaying the Device List
Displaying the device list allows you to check the status and details of the devices connected to the Remote
Communication Gate S server.
Network-connected devices are displayed in lists, which are sorted according by one of the two methods
below:
• Specified search conditions
• Use of filters
Displaying the Device List by Specifying Search Conditions
Use the following procedure to display a list of devices according to advanced search conditions.
1. On the device list screen, click the Search button.
Displaying the Device List
25
32. Select items as search conditions from the [Search item:] list.
Search condition Explanation
Device Display Name Displays devices according to their names on the MFP
screen.
Printer model Displays devices according to their printer models.
IP address Displays devices according to their IP addresses.
System error Displays devices according to common system errors such
as no response and failure due to excessive access
attempts.
Printer status Displays devices according to their print status.
MAC address Displays devices according to the physical (MAC)
address that all network-capable devices feature.
Device name Displays devices according to their device names.
Host name Displays devices according to their host names.
Comment Displays devices according to a comment filter.
PPM Displays devices according to their print capacity
(measured in pages per minute).
B&W/Color Displays devices according to their Black and White/
Color printing capability.
Scanner status Displays devices according to their scanner status.
Fax status Displays devices according to their fax status.
Copier status Displays devices according to their copier status.
3. Displaying Device Information
26
3Search condition Explanation
NIB model Displays fail-over devices according to their NIB models.
NIB version Displays fail-over systems according to their NIB versions.
NetWare print server Displays devices according to their NetWare print server.
Serial Number Displays devices according to their serial numbers.
Asset number Displays devices in numerical order according to their
number of asset utilities.
User Properties 1
User Properties 2
User Properties 3
User Properties 4
User Properties 5
Displays devices according to their user properties
(specified by the administrator).
3. Select an option configuration item from the [Option:] list.
Condition Option
When specifying a character string for the parameter: • include
• Exact match
When specifying a numeric value for the parameter: • same
• above
• below
When specifying a numeric value (a range can be specified) for
the parameter:
• range
• same
• above
• below
When selecting the parameter from choices: • same
Displaying the Device List
27
34. Enter the set value in the [Parameter:] box. For example, if [IP address] is specified in [Search
item:], enter the IP address.
• If you click [Clear Conditions], the search conditions return to their defaults.
5. Click [Search...].
The [Search Results] screen appears as a list.
Displaying the Device List by Using Filters
Use the following procedure to display the device list as corresponding to the filter conditions that are
specified by the administrator and users.
The filters that created by the administrator are displayed in the upper area of [Filter] menu. You cannot
edit filters that were created by the administrator.
Filters that you create for personal use from search conditions appear under the filters created by the
administrator. You can edit and delete the filters that you create.
Displaying a list of devices with errors
Use the following procedure to display a list of devices with errors.
3. Displaying Device Information
28
31. On the device list screen, click [View by Filter] on the [Directory] tab.
2. Click [Printers with Errors].
• The filter can also be selected from [Filter] on the menu.
Displaying a list of devices not responding
Use the following procedure to display a list of devices that have not responded to polling for a specified
number of days.
1. On the device list screen, click [View by Filter] on the [Directory] tab.
Displaying the Device List
29
32. Click [No Response Devices].
The result appears as a list that you can sort by item.
Displaying a list of devices using other filters
Use the following procedure to display a list of devices according to search conditions that specified by
the administrator and users.
1. On the device list screen, click [View by Filter] on the [Directory] tab.
2. Click the filter you want to use.
The search result appears as a list.
• The filter can also be selected from [Filter] on the menu.
Registering search conditions as a filter
Use the following procedure to register search conditions as a filter for your personal use.
1. On the device list screen, click the search button.
2. Select items as search conditions from the [Search item:] list.
3. Select an option configuration item from the [Option:] list.
4. Enter a value in the [Parameter:] box. For example, you selected [IP address] in [Search
item:], enter the IP address you want to search for.
5. Click [Search...], and then click [Save as Filter].
3. Displaying Device Information
30
36. On the [Filter Settings: Save as Filter] screen, enter [Filter name:] and [Comment:].
7. In [Display location:], select where to have the filter displayed.
8. Click [OK].
9. On the [Saved as Filter] screen, click [OK].
• You can register up to 20 filters.
• The registered filters are displayed on the [Filter] menu, under the filters created by the administrator.
Filter Settings menu functions
The menu on the [Filter Settings] screen provides the following functions:
[Edit] menu
Item Allows you to
Edit Edit the filter conditions.
Delete Delete the registered filters.
Editing filters
Use the following procedure to edit a filter that you created.
Displaying the Device List
31
31. On the device list screen, click the Site Map button in the upper-right area.
2. Click [Filter Settings].
3. Select the filter you want to edit.
4. Click [Edit] on the [Filter] menu.
5. Change the [Filter name:] and [Comment:] as necessary.
6. In [Display location:], select where to have the filter displayed.
7. Click [OK].
8. On the [Filter Settings] screen, click [Back].
9. On the Site Map, click [Back].
The device list screen appears.
• You can also access the filter editing function by clicking [Filter Settings] on the Site Map.
3. Displaying Device Information
32
3Deleting filters
Use the following procedure to delete filters that you created.
1. On the device list screen, click the Site Map button in the upper-right area.
2. Click [Filter Settings].
3. Click [Delete] on the [Filter] menu.
4. When a message confirming the deletion appears, click [OK].
Sorting the Display Order of the Device List
Use the following procedure to sort the display order of the device list.
Displaying the Device List
33
31. Click [Sort by] on the menu on the device list screen.
2. Click the item to be designated as the sort key.
Devices will be sorted on the basis of the selected item.
• To sort the list in ascending order, click the row name of the item in the displayed list. Clicking
again sorts the list in descending order.
3. Displaying Device Information
34
3Displaying Maps
The Map function displays a floor map of grouped devices using device icons that provide visual details
about a device and its location. Each group has one map registered by the administrator. If no map is
registered for a group, the Map for that group appears blank.
The Map function allows you to perform the following:
• Display devices' visual location and their status
• Display the device information
• Download packages
There are two ways to display the Map as below.
• Display the Map from the device list
• Display the simplified Map from the printer properties
Displaying the Map from the Device List
Use the following procedure to display grouped devices in the Map.
1. On the device list screen, click [View by Group] on the [Directory] tab.
2. Click a group in the group tree.
A list of grouped devices appears.
Displaying Maps
35
33. Click the [Map] on the [View] menu.
4. Click a device icon on the Map to display the properties screen.
Layout of the Map
The screen layout of the Map is as follows:
3. Displaying Device Information
36
31
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
BXM003S
1. View List button
Displays in list form the devices that appear on the Map.
2. [Directory] tab
Displays registered filters and groups.
3. Menu bar: [View]
Displays the menu that is available on the Map.
4. Map display area
Displays the Map with device icons.
5. Refresh button
Refreshes the Map screen and displays the latest device status.
6. [Map Opacity:] slider
Adjusts the transparency of the background of the Map.
7. [Map size:] buttons
Increases or decreases the size of the Map.
8. Device icon (Red)
Indicates printers with common system errors.
9. Device icon (Gray)
Indicates local (non-networked) printers.
10. Device icon (Blue)
Indicates networked printers that are registered to the Remote Communication Gate S. If you move
your mouse pointer over a device's icon, the model ID and IP address/host name of that device will
appear.
Displaying Maps
37
3Map menu functions
The menu on the [Printers: Map] screen provides you the following function:
[View] menu
Item Allows you to
Display Directory Display the [Directory] tab.
Hide Directory Hide the [Directory] tab.
List Display a list of devices that appear on the Map.
Map Display a floor map of grouped devices with device icons.
Resizing the Map display
Use the following procedure to resize the Map.
1. On the Map, click the [Map size:] buttons.
• Magnification range: ±200%
Adjusting the transparency of the background
Use the following procedure to adjust the transparency of the background of the Map.
1. On the Map, slide the [Map Opacity:] slider.
Displaying the Simplified Map from the Printer Properties
Use the following procedure to display the Map from the [Printer Properties: User Properties] screen.
The displayed Map is a simplified figure and shown items are different from that of displayed from the
device list. The icon of the device that you selected will be blinking.
1. On the device list screen, select a check box of the device list.
2. Click [Printer Properties...] on the [Printer] menu.
3. Click the [User Properties] tab.
3. Displaying Device Information
38
34. Click the [View Map] button on the [Printer Properties: User Properties] screen.
Layout of the simplified Map
The screen layout of the simplified Map is as follows:
1
2
3
4
6
5
7
9
10
11
BXM004S
1. [Web Image Monitor] button
Displays the device status using Web Image Monitor.
2. Device name/Group name
Displays the device name and group that the device belongs to.
3. Map display area
Displays the simplified Map with device icons.
Displaying Maps
39
34. Help button
Displays the Help screen about the Map.
5. Refresh button
Refreshes the Map screen and displays the latest device status.
6. [Map Opacity:] slider
Adjusts the transparency of the background of the Map.
7. [Map size]:buttons
Increases or decreases the size of the Map.
8. Device icon (Blinking)
Indicates the selected device.
9. Device icon (Red)
Indicates printers in common system errors.
10. Device icon (Gray)
Indicates local (non-networked) printers.
11. Device icon (Blue)
Indicates networked printers that are registered to the Remote Communication Gate S server. If you
move your mouse pointer over a device's icon, the model ID and IP address/host name of that device
will appear.
3. Displaying Device Information
40
3Displaying Device Information
Displaying Device Information from Menu Bar
Use the following procedure to display the properties screen, which features device information.
1. On the device list screen, select a check box of the device list.
2. Click [Printer Properties...] on the [Printer] menu.
Displaying Device Information from the Properties Icon
Use the following procedure as an alternate way to display device information.
Displaying Device Information
41
31. On the device list screen, click the properties icon.
Content of the Device Information Screen
The properties screen displays detailed information about a selected device features the following tabs:
• Printer Status
• Counter
• User Properties
• Download
The following items appear at the top of the properties screen.
Item Explanation
Device Display Name Displays the name of a device as displayed in Remote
Communication Gate S. Device details are displayed by
clicking the [Web Image Monitor] link.
Printer model: Displays the model name of the device.
Device Address Displays the IP address or host name of the device.
3. Displaying Device Information
42
3Item Explanation
Latest Device Information Update Time: Displays the time and date when detailed device information
was most recently updated.
Printer Status tab
This screen displays the status of the selected device.
1. Click the [Printer Status] tab.
• Displays may differ depending on device models.
Item Explanation
System
Printer
Copier
Scanner
Displays the selected device's status with status icons.
• For details about status icons, see p.20 "Features of
Status Icon on the Device List".
Displays the status of the input tray.
Displays the remaining toner.
Displaying Device Information
43
3Item Explanation
Displays the output tray attached to the device.
Displays the capacity and free space of the document
server.
Counter tab
This screen displays device counter data collected from devices connected to Remote Communication Gate
S. The device counter data can help you know how the device is being used.
1. Click the [Counter] tab.
• Displays may differ depending on device models. The counter data will be retrieved from devices
that maintain usage counters.
Item Explanation
Displays copy, printer and fax counter totals.
• Total counter
3. Displaying Device Information
44
3Item Explanation
Displays copy function counter.
• Copier B&W Counter
• Copier Full Color Counter
• Copier Single Color Counter
• Copier Two-color Counter
Displays printer function counter.
• Printer B&W Counter
• Printer Full Color Counter
• Printer Single Color Counter
• Printer Two-color Counter
• Total Level Color Counter
Displays fax function counter.
• Fax B&W Counter
• Fax Single Color Counter
Displays large size print function counter.
• A3/DLT
Displays A2 size print function counter.
• A2
Displays two-sided print function counter.
• 2 Sided
Display toner coverage function counter.
• Coverage: Color (%)
• Coverage: B&W (%)
• Coverage: Color Print Page
• Coverage: B&W Print Page
Displays send/TX total counter and fax transmission
counter totals.
• Send/TX Total B&W Counter
• Send/TX Total Color Counter
Displaying Device Information
45
3Item Explanation
Displays fax transmission function total.
• Fax Transmission Counter
Displays scanner send function counter.
• Scanner Send B&W Counter
• Scanner Send Color Counter
Displays the internal counter totals.
• Color Copies
• B&W Copies
• Color Prints
• B&W Prints
• Economy Color Counter
• B&W Total
• Color Total
User Properties tab
This displays groups with which devices are associated.
1. Click the [User Properties] tab.
3. Displaying Device Information
46
3Item Explanation
Displays the groups with which devices are associated.
Displays comments regarding on user properties.
View Map button If a map has been created for the group, this button
displays the map in simplified view.
• For details about the using View Map button, see p.38 "Displaying the Simplified Map from the
Printer Properties".
Download tab
This displays a list of packages created by the administrator for the devices.
1. Click the [Download] tab.
• For details about the packages, see p.50 "Downloading Packages".
Displaying Device Information
47
33. Displaying Device Information
48
34. Downloading and Installing
Packages
This chapter explains downloading and installing packages distributed by the administrator.
What Are Packages?
Remote Communication Gate S discovers devices on networks and distributes to all users a configuration
setting program wizard called "Packages". The packages wizard starts automatically and users can install
the necessary drivers for devices from Remote Communication Gate S server without any additional setup.
The following explains how to acquire a package and then install drivers using the package.
49
4Downloading Packages
The packages are stored in the Remote Communication Gate S server.
The packages are retrieved using any of the following three procedures:
• Log in to the Remote Communication Gate S server and download from the package list.
• Log in to the Remote Communication Gate S server and download from the Map.
• Access the URL sent by the administrator in an e-mail message and download from the package list.
Downloading Packages from the Package List
Use the following procedure to download packages from the package list.
1. On the device list screen, select a check box of devices.
2. Click [Printer Properties...] on the [Printer] menu.
• For details about displaying the device information screen, see p.41 "Displaying Device
Information".
4. Downloading and Installing Packages
50
43. Click the [Download] tab on the properties screen.
4. For detailed information about the package, click the properties icon.
5. Click [Download] next to the package you want to download.
6. Click [Save].
7. Specify where you want to save the package, and then click [Save].
The download begins.
8. Click [Close] to close [Download Completed] dialog box.
• For details about opening the package, see p.54 "Opening Packages and Installing Drivers".
Downloading Packages
51
4Downloading Packages from the Map
Use the following procedure to download packages from the Map.
1. Display the Map.
• For details about how to display the Map, see p.35 "Displaying Maps".
2. Click a device icon of device whose package you want to download.
3. On the properties screen, click the [Download] tab.
4. For detailed information about the package, click the properties icon.
5. Click [Download] next to the package you want to download.
6. Click [Save].
7. Specify where you want to save the package, and then click [Save].
The download begins.
8. Click [Close] to close [Download Completed] dialog box.
Downloading Packages with a URL Sent by E-mail
Use the following procedure to download packages with a URL sent by e-mail.
1. Click the URL written in the text of the e-mail sent by the administrator.
A download confirmation screen appears.
• For details about entering a URL manually, see p.53 "If Internet Explorer does not start
automatically".
2. Click [Login].
4. Downloading and Installing Packages
52
43. Click [Save].
4. Specify where you want to save the package, and then click [Save].
The download begins.
5. Click [Close] to close [Download Completed] dialog box.
If Internet Explorer does not start automatically
Use the following procedure to start Internet Explorer when the URL notified by e-mail does not start
automatically.
1. Start Internet Explorer manually.
2. Copy and paste the URL from the e-mail into the Internet Explorer address bar.
3. Press the [Enter] key.
Internet Explorer starts and the login screen appears.
Downloading Packages
53
4Opening Packages and Installing Drivers
Use the following procedure to open packages and install them to your computers.
• Before opening a package, log on to Windows as an Administrators group member and close any
applications that are running.
1. Open the folder where the package is saved.
2. Double-click the downloaded package (.exe file).
3. When the [Security Warning] screen appears, click [Yes].
4. On the [User Account Control] screen, click [Allow].
5. Read the terms of the license agreement. If you agree with them, click [I accept the
agreement], and then click [Next].
Installation of the drivers starts.
6. If [Confirm restart.] appears, click [Yes. Restart right now.], and then click [Finish].
Windows restarts.
• During installation, the [Software Installation] dialog box may appear. In this case, click [Continue
Anyway] to continue the installation.
4. Downloading and Installing Packages
54
45. Appendix
About Help
To understand operating procedures, see Help.
There is a Help button located on the login screen, the device list screen, and other screens. Clicking the
Help button displays Help.
Login screen
BXM006S
Device list screen
BXM007S
55
5Other screen
BXM008S
If Your Computer is Running Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later/Vista/7
• Under Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later/Vista/7, Help may not be displayed correctly because
active content may be restricted from being shown depending on the Internet Explorer settings. Use
the following procedure to deactivate active content controls.
1. Click [To help protect your security, Internet Explorer has restricted this file from showing
active content that could access your computer. Click here for options...].
A menu is displayed.
2. On the menu bar, select [Allow blocked content...].
3. Click [Yes] on the [Security Warning] dialog box.
5. Appendix
56
5Troubleshooting
This describes the solutions for problems that maybe arise during operating Remote Communication Gate
S. See the table below and perform the suggested solution in order to address the problem.
Problem Cause and solutions
In the login screen, you cannot
login to the Remote
Communication Gate S.
The password might not be correct. Ask the administrator to confirm the
password.
The Remote Communication
Gate S login screen does not
appear.
The Remote Communication Gate S server's URL specified in the
browser is incorrect. Ask the administrator how to access to the Remote
Communication Gate S Server.
The login screen reappears
after a certain amount of time
has passed.
The Login screen reappears if no operation is performed for more than
30 minutes after logging in to the Remote Communication Gate S
server. Log in again if necessary.
The device list or other lists do
not appear when connecting
via SSL.
You might have enabled the saving of encrypted pages. To turn off this
function:
1. On the Internet Explorer menu bar, click [Tools] > [Internet
Options...], and then select the [Advanced] tab.
2. Clear the [Do not save encrypted pages to disk] check box.
3. Click [OK].
Troubleshooting
57
55. Appendix
58
5INDEX
A
Activating browser JavaScript..............................11
All Printers..............................................................23
B
Button
Help............................................................................18, 40
Logout.........................................................................15, 18
Map Opacity.............................................................37, 40
Map size....................................................................37, 40
Refresh................................................................18, 37, 40
Save as Filter......................................................................30
Search.................................................................................17
Site Map.............................................................................18
View List..............................................................................37
View Map...........................................................................47
C
Counter tab............................................................44
D
Device icon
Blinking...............................................................................40
Blue.............................................................................37, 40
Gray............................................................................37, 40
Red..............................................................................37, 40
Device information................................................41
Content...............................................................................42
Display from menu bar......................................................41
Display from properties icon.............................................41
Device list.........................................................17, 25
All Printers...........................................................................23
Device list display area.....................................................18
Download packages.........................................................50
Edit menu............................................................................19
Filter menu..........................................................................19
Group display....................................................................17
Group list............................................................................18
Login user name.................................................................18
No response devices.........................................................29
Printer menu........................................................................19
Printers with errors..............................................................28
Quick Links area................................................................18
Search conditions..............................................................25
Sort by menu......................................................................20
Sort the list..........................................................................33
Status icon..........................................................................20
Use other filters...................................................................30
View menu..........................................................................19
Device list display area.........................................18
Directory tab....................................................17, 37
Domain name........................................................13
Download packages.............................................50
Download tab........................................................47
E
Edit menu
Device list............................................................................19
Filter Settings......................................................................31
F
Filter........................................................................17
Delete filters........................................................................33
Edit filters.............................................................................31
Filter Settings......................................................................31
Printers with Errors..............................................................23
Save as filter.......................................................................30
Filter menu..............................................................19
Filter Settings..........................................................24
G
Group display........................................................17
Group list................................................................18
H
Help........................................................................55
Help button......................................................18, 40
How to read this manual.........................................1
I
Icon
Device icon (Blinking)........................................................40
Device icon (Blue)......................................................37, 40
Device icon (Gray)....................................................37, 40
Device icon (Red)......................................................37, 40
Printer status........................................................................22
System status......................................................................21
J
JavaScript...............................................................11
L
Language...............................................................10
Layout
59Device list............................................................................17
Map....................................................................................36
Simplified Map..................................................................39
Site Map.............................................................................23
Login.......................................................................13
Login URL
With SSL encryption..........................................................13
Without SSL encryption.....................................................13
Login user name.....................................................18
Logout.....................................................................15
Logout button...................................................15, 18
M
Map........................................................................35
Adjust the transparency of the Map.................................38
Display from device list......................................................35
Download packages.........................................................52
List menu.............................................................................38
Map display area..............................................................37
Map Opacity slider...........................................................38
Map size buttons...............................................................38
Refresh button.....................................................................37
Resize the Map..................................................................38
View List button...................................................................37
Map display area.................................................37
Map Opacity slider........................................37, 40
Map size buttons.............................................37, 40
Menu
Device list............................................................................18
Filter Settings......................................................................31
Map....................................................................................38
P
Packages................................................................49
Download from e-mail notification...................................52
Download from the Map..................................................52
Download from the package list..............................47, 50
Install drivers......................................................................54
Open packages.................................................................54
Password................................................................24
Printer menu...........................................................19
Printer properties...................................................41
Counter tab........................................................................44
Download tab....................................................................47
Printer Status tab................................................................43
User Properties tab............................................................46
Printer status icon...................................................22
Printer status tab.....................................................43
Printers with Errors.................................................23
Q
Quick Links area....................................................18
R
Refresh button
Device list............................................................................18
Map....................................................................................37
Simplified Map..................................................................40
S
Save as Filter button..............................................30
Screens.....................................................................2
Search
Device.................................................................................25
Option list...........................................................................27
Save as filter.......................................................................30
Search button.............................................................17, 25
Search item list...................................................................26
Simplified Map......................................................38
Display from printer properties.........................................38
Map Opacity slider...........................................................40
Map size buttons...............................................................40
Refresh button.....................................................................40
Site Map.................................................................23
All Printers...........................................................................23
Filter Settings......................................................................24
Printers with Errors..............................................................23
Site Map button.................................................................18
User Account Settings........................................................23
Sort by menu..........................................................20
Status icon..............................................................20
Symbols....................................................................1
System requirements..............................................10
System status icon..................................................21
T
Terminology.............................................................1
Trial Version...........................................................14
Troubleshooting.....................................................57
U
User Account Settings.....................................23, 24
User Properties tab................................................46
60V
View List button......................................................37
View Map button...................................................47
View menu
Device list............................................................................19
Map....................................................................................38
61MEMO
62MEMO
63MEMO
64 EN GB
EN US M371-8610A© 2008-2010User's Guide
M371-8610A
EN GB
EN US
